Manual T300 PDF

SIMOVERT Master Drives Betriebsanleitung
Operating Instructions
Technologiebaugruppe T300
Technology Board T300
Ausgabe / Edition: 12.99 Bestell-Nr. / Order-No.: 6SE7087-6CX84-0AH1

Von dieser Betriebsanleitung sind folgende fremdsprachige Ausgaben lieferbar:
These Operating Instructions are available in the following languages:
Sprache Französisch
Language French
Bestell-Nr.
6SE7087-7CX84-0AH1
Order-No.
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage,

Verwertung und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet,
soweit nicht ausdrücklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen
verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten,
insbesondere für den Fall der Patenterteilung oder GM-
Eintragung.
Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf Übereinstimmung mit

der beschriebenen Hard- und Software überprüft. Dennoch
können Abweichungen nicht ausgeschlossen werden, so daß wir
für die vollständige Übereinstimmung keine Garantie
übernehmen. Die Angaben in dieser Druckschrift werden jedoch
regelmäßig überprüft und notwendige Korrekturen sind in den SIMOVERT ist ein Warenzeichen von Siemens
nachfolgenden Auflagen enthalten. Für Verbesserungsvorschläge
sind wir dankbar
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,
are reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that

they coincide with the described hardware and software.
However, differences cannot be completely excluded, so that we
do not accept any guarantee for complete conformance.
However, the information in this document is regularly checked SIMOVERT Registered Trade Mark
and necessary corrections will included in subsequent editions.
We are grateful for any recommendations for improvement.
 Siemens AG 1994 All rights reserved

Inhaltsverzeichnis / Contents
Inhalt / Contents
0 Definitionen ......................................................................................................... 0-1
1 Produktbeschreibung ......................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Anwendung................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Funktionsbeschreibung ................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 Voraussetzungen Hardware/Software.......................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1 MASTER DRIVES Grundgeräte .......................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.2 Verwendbare Kommunikationsbaugruppen ........................................................................ 1-4
1.3.3 Parametrierung der T300 .................................................................................................... 1-4
2 Montieren, Anschließen...................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Stecken des Speichermoduls....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Montage der Baugruppe............................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Anschlüsse ................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 Anschlüsse von T300 und Klemmodul SE300 .................................................................... 2-5
2.3.2 Klemmodul SE300............................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.3 Anschluß von Impulsgebern (Digitaltacho) an SE300 ......................................................... 2-8
2.3.3.1 Anschlußmöglichkeiten .................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.3.2 Hinweise zur Impulsgeberleitung ................................................................................... 2-10
2.3.3.3 Anschluß eines TTL-Gebers über DTI-Baugruppe ........................................................ 2-11
2.3.3.4 Grobsignalverarbeitung.................................................................................................. 2-12
2.3.4 Anschließen der Analogeingänge...................................................................................... 2-13
2.3.5 Anschließen der Binäreingänge......................................................................................... 2-14
2.3.6 Anschließen der Binärausgänge ....................................................................................... 2-15
2.3.7 Anschluß der seriellen Schnittstellen................................................................................. 2-16
2.3.7.1 Serielle Schnittstelle 1, Stecker X132 ............................................................................ 2-16
2.3.7.2 Peer to Peer-Verbindung (Stecker X134) ...................................................................... 2-17
3 Technische Daten ............................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Hardware-Konfiguration................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Überwachungszähler (Watchdogs) .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Allgemeine technische Daten ....................................................................................................... 3-2
3.4 Ein-/ Ausgänge ............................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.5 Serielle Schnittstellen ................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.6 Busabschlußschalter S1............................................................................................................... 3-6
3.7 Taster S3 / Start des SIMADYN-Diagnosemonitors..................................................................... 3-6
3.8 Diagnose-Leuchtdioden................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.9 Steckerbelegungen....................................................................................................................... 3-8
4 Projektierungen................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Standardprojektierungen .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Anwenderspezifische Projektierung ............................................................................................. 4-2
Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board I

Betriebsanleitung / Operating instructions
5 Projektierung der T300 für SIMOVERT 6SE70 und DC_MASTER 6RA70....... 5-1
5.1 Masterprogramm...........................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Baugruppenträger SR6 ........................................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 Baugruppenmaske T300......................................................................................................5-2
5.1.3 T300-Synchronisierung auf Geräteabtastzeit von Master Drives.........................................5-2
5.1.4 Speichermodul MS300.........................................................................................................5-2
5.1.5 Geräteanmeldung mit Baustein DPZ ...................................................................................5-3
5.1.5.1 Bausteinbeschreibung ......................................................................................................5-3
5.1.5.2 CU als Quelle für Grundtakt .............................................................................................5-3
5.1.6 Anmeldung einer Kommunikationsbaugruppe mit CSZ.......................................................5-3
5.1.7 Projektierungshinweise zur Kommunikation mit CBx...........................................................5-3
5.1.8 Beispiel Masterprogramm (als Auszug) ...............................................................................5-4
5.2 Bausteine in Funktionspaketen zur Initialisierung .........................................................................5-5
5.2.1 Zentralbausteine @GRZ im Kommunikations-FP Senden ..................................................5-5
5.2.2 Dual-Port-RAM Verwaltung mit DCCZ im Normal-FP..........................................................5-6
5.3 Störungs- und Warnungsbaustein TFAW .....................................................................................5-7
5.4 Parameterbearbeitung ..................................................................................................................5-8
5.4.1 Parameter definieren mit Signalbezeichner .........................................................................5-8
5.4.2 Parameter lesen und ändern mit PRP .................................................................................5-9
5.4.3 Parameternamen definieren mit TXT.................................................................................5-10
5.4.4 Projektierungsbeispiel Parameter ......................................................................................5-10
5.5 Geräteparameter über Komm.-Baugruppe mit PTR...................................................................5-11
5.6 Peer-to-Peer Kopplung ...............................................................................................................5-11
5.6.1 Projektierung eines Peer-to-Peer Telegramms mit @PTP01, CTPP, CRPP ....................5-12
5.6.2 Peer-to-Peer Kopplung in Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2 mit @PTP.................................5-16
5.6.2.1 Projektierung eines Peer-to-Peer Telegramms in Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2..........5-16
5.6.2.2 Arbeitsweise und Zeitverhalten in Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2 ..................................5-17
5.6.2.3 Projektierungsbeispiel Peer-to-Peer in Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2...........................5-18
5.7 EEPROM löschen .......................................................................................................................5-19
5.7.1 Löschen des EEPROMs bei EEPROM-Überlauf ...............................................................5-19
5.7.2 Löschen des EEPROMs bei EEPROM-Überlauf mit dem Hex-Monitor ............................5-20
5.7.3 Löschen des EEPROMs zur Herstellung der Werkseinstellung: .......................................5-20
6 Literatur ................................................................................................................ 6-1
7 Bestellnummern .................................................................................................. 7-1
II Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board

Englischer Teil / English part

8 Definitions ........................................................................................................... 8-1
9 Product description ............................................................................................ 9-1

9.1 Application .................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Function description ..................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3 Hardware/Software requirement................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.1 MASTERDRIVES basic units .............................................................................................. 9-3
9.3.2 Communication boards........................................................................................................ 9-4
9.3.3 T300 parameter settings...................................................................................................... 9-4
10 Installation, connecting-up .............................................................................. 10-1

10.1 Inserting the memory module ............................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Installing the board ............................................................................................................ 10-2
10.3 Connections....................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.1 T300 and SE300 terminal module connections................................................................. 10-5
10.3.2 SE300 terminal module ..................................................................................................... 10-7
10.3.3 Connecting-up pulse encoders (digital tachometers) at SE300 ........................................ 10-8
10.3.3.1 Connection possibilities .............................................................................................. 10-8
10.3.3.2 Information regarding the pulse encoder cable........................................................ 10-10
10.3.3.3 Connecting a TTL encoder to the T300 via a DTI converter module ....................... 10-11
10.3.3.4 Rough signal processing .......................................................................................... 10-12
10.3.4 Connecting-up the analog inputs ..................................................................................... 10-13
10.3.5 Connecting-up the binary inputs ...................................................................................... 10-14
10.3.6 Connecting-up the binary outputs.................................................................................... 10-15
10.3.7 Connecting-up the serial interfaces ................................................................................. 10-16
10.3.7.1 Serial connections, X132.......................................................................................... 10-16
10.3.7.2 Peer-to-peer connection, X134 ................................................................................ 10-17
11 Technical data ................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1 Hardware configuration ..................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Watchdogs ........................................................................................................................ 11-1
11.3 General technical data....................................................................................................... 11-2
11.4 Inputs/outputs .................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.5 Serial interfaces ................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.6 Bus terminating switch S1 ................................................................................................. 11-6
11.7 Pushbutton S3 ................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.8 Diagnostic LEDs ................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.9 Connector assignments..................................................................................................... 11-8
12 Application software......................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 Standard software packages ............................................................................................. 12-1
12.2 User-specific software configuring .................................................................................... 12-2
Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board III

13 Configuring the T300 for SIMOVERT 6SE70 and DC_MASTER 6RA70 ......... 13-1
13.1 Master program..................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1 SR6 subrack.......................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.2 Board mask T300...............................................................................................................13-1
13.1.3 T300 synchronization to the base drive cycle time.............................................................13-2
13.1.4 MS300 memory module .....................................................................................................13-2
13.1.5 Converter log-on using the DPZ initialization block............................................................13-2
13.1.5.1 Block description.........................................................................................................13-2
13.1.5.2 CU as source for the basic clock cycle .......................................................................13-3
13.1.6 Logging-on a communications board with CSZ .................................................................13-3
13.1.7 Example of a master program (as excerpt) .......................................................................13-4
13.2 Function blocks in function packages for initialization .......................................................13-5
13.2.1 Central block @GRZ in the transmit communications FP .................................................13-5
13.2.2 Dual port RAM administration using DCCZ in the standard FP .........................................13-6
13.3 Error- and alarm function block TFAW ..............................................................................13-7
13.4 Parameter processing........................................................................................................13-8
13.4.1 Defining parameters using signal designators ...................................................................13-8
13.4.2 Reading and changing parameters using PRP ..................................................................13-9
13.4.3 Parameter names defined using TXT ..............................................................................13-10
13.4.4 Configuring example, parameters....................................................................................13-10
13.5 Base drive parameters via the comm. board with PTR....................................................13-11
13.6 Peer-to-peer coupling.......................................................................................................13-11
13.6.1 Configuring a peer-to-peer telegram with @PTP01, CTPP, CRPP .................................13-12
13.6.2 Peer-to-Peer Communication in Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2 with @PTP ...................13-16
13.6.2.1 Configuring a Peer-to-Peer Telegram in Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2 ...............13-16
13.6.2.2 Principle of Operation and Time Response in Version V4.2 , V4.2.1 and V4.2.2.....13-17
13.6.2.3 Peer-to-Peer Configuring example for Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2......................13-18
13.7 Erasing the EEPROM ......................................................................................................13-19
13.7.1 Erasing the EEPROMs if an overflow has been occurred ...............................................13-19
13.7.1.1 Erasing the EEPROM in case of memory overflow by means of the Hex-Monitor ...13-20
13.7.2 Erasing the EEPROM for restoring the factory settings: ..................................................13-20
14 Literature ............................................................................................................ 14-1
15 Order numbers................................................................................................... 15-1
IV Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board

8 Definitions
8 Definitions
• QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of these Operating Instructions and product labels, a „Qualified person“ is someone
who is familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up and operation of the equipment and the hazards
involved. He or she must have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in
accordance with established safety procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
3. Trained in rendering first aid.
• DANGER
For the purpose of these Operating Instructions and product labels, „Danger“ indicates death, severe
personal injury and/or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
• WARNING
For the purpose of these Operating Instructions and product labels, „Warning“ indicates death, severe
personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
• CAUTION
For the purpose of these Operating Instructions and product labels, „Caution“ indicates that minor
personal injury or material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
• NOTE
For the purpose of these Operating Instructions, „Note“ indicates information about the product or the
respective part of these Operating Instructions which is essential to highlight.
NOTE
The information in these Operating Instructions does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment,
nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or
maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for
the purchaser’s purposes, please contact your local Siemens office.
Further, the contents of these Operating Instructions shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing
agreement, committment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The
warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements
contained herein do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.
Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board 8-1

8 Definitions
CAUTION
Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The drive converter contains components/devices which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. These
components/devices can be easily destroyed if incorrectly handled. If it is absolutely necessary to work
on/handle electronic boards, please observe the following:
♦ Generally, electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.
♦ The human body must be electrically discharged before touching an electronics board
♦ Boards must not come into contact with highly-insulating materials − e.g. plastic foils, insulated desktops,
articles of clothing manufactured from man-made fibers.
♦ Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
♦ When soldering, the soldering iron tip must be grounded.
♦ Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging (e.g. metalized
plastic boxes, metal containers)
♦ If the packing material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped with a conductive packing material,
e.g. conductive foam rubber or household aluminum foil.
The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown in the following diagram:
a = Conductive floor surface d = ESD overall
b = ESD table e = ESD chain
c = ESD shoes f = Cabinet ground connection
d
d d
b b
e e
f f f f f
a c c c
a a
Seated Standing Standing / sitting
WARNING
Electrical equipment has components which are at dangerous voltage levels.
If these instructions are not strictly adhered to, this can result in severe bodily injury and
material damage.
Only appropriately qualified personnel may work on this equipment or in its vicinity.
This personnel must be completely knowledgeable about all the warnings and service
measures according to these Operating Instructions
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling,
installation, operation and maintenance.
8-2 Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board

9 Product description
9.1 Application
The T300 technology board is used in SIMOVERT Master Drives and is used to implement supplementary
technological functions.
Applications are, for example, higher-level closed-loop controls for:
♦ tension
♦ position
♦ winders, coilers
♦ (angular) closed-loop synchronous control
♦ positioning
♦ drive-related open-loop control functions
Refere also to Sec. 4
9.2 Function description

The T300 board can be freely-configured using the STRUC configuring language. However, for standard
applications, complete, standard software packages are available on pre-programmed memory modules
(MS300).
The board consists of a 16-bit microprocessor and powerful periphery. The computation performance
obtained permits sampling times down to 1 ms. By using a specially developed real time operating
system, response times, required for sophisticated open- and closed-loop control tasks, can be achieved.
Data transfer between the basic electronics and a possibly available communications board is realized
through an almost delay-free parallel interface (dual port RAM).
The monitor program (HEX monitor, diagnostics monitor), can be used, e.g. via a terminal with RS232
connection (V.24) for fault diagnostics (hardware- or software errors/faults). In addition, up to 3 cyclically
flashing LEDs indicate that the board is functioning perfectly.
The T300 has several binary and analog inputs and outputs, 2 speed sensing inputs, as well as 2 serial
interfaces, which can be used e.g. for a fast digital setpoint cascade (peer-to-peer) and to connect a
parameterizing- and service program (SIMOVIS).
Data save via NVRAM (Non-Volatile-RAM):
A maximum of twelve 16-bit values can be stored simultaneously in a non-volatile manner by means of a
NVRAM device (Non-Volatile RAM). The STRUC standard configured package can acess the NVRAM
and use it for storing N2 variables, e.g. setpoint and actual values, and recall them after power shutdown
or power loss.

6S E 70 S peed, S peed, 2 serial

16 binary 7 analog position position
inputs inputs interfaces
sensing sensing R S 232/R S 485
6S E 71 1 2
P osition difference
6R A 70
X 107 X 137
DPRAM
CU T300
CB1, H 1: T E C H o.K .
B a s ic CBP,
e le c tr. SCB1
b o a rd
or H 2: C O M o.K .
SCB2 NVRAM
non-volatile
operating
H 3: B A S E o.K . data µP
storage
Interface
board
optional
X 305
X 135
DPRAM
15V , 100m A P rogram 2 K byte

8 binary 4 analog 128 K byte
for pulse m em ory EEPRO M
outputs outputs encoder RAM 256 K byte
S lot 1 S lot 3 S lot 2
Fig. 1.2 Hardware and function block diagram of the T300
File: HARD_E.DRW

9.3 Hardware/Software requirement
9.3.1 MASTERDRIVES basic units

MASTERDRIVES basic units (new Series, introduced from 1998)
The T300 has been approved for operation in the following MASTER DRIVES basic units:
SIMOVERT VC with electronic board CUVC: Software release ≥ 3.11

SIMOVERT MC with electronic board CUMC: Software release ≥ 1.2.
The T300 can only be used with Compact-, Chassis- and Cubicle-type units. The use with "Compact Plus"
type units is not possible.
MASTERDRIVES basic units (older series, introduced from 1995)

SIMOVERT VC with electronic board CU2: Software release ≥ 1.2

SIMOVERT SC with electronic board CU3: Software release ≥ 1.1
CAUTION
When a T300 board is installed in a SIMOVERT SC unit, the pulse frequency of the converter must
not be increased above the factory setting value of P761 = 5 kHz to avoid overloading the converter
processor.
SIMOREG basic units

The T300 has been approved for operation in the following SIMOREG basic units:
SIMOREG DC_MASTER 6RA70: Software release ≥ 1.7

9.3.2 Communication boards
The T300 can be combined with the following communications boards
PROFIBUS-DP interface CBP , Software release ≥ 1.0 or CBP2, Software release ≥ 2.1
Only one fieldbus communication board can be used. It must be mounted in mounting location 3
(middle location). Communication boards which are designed as Mini-Slot-Boards (e.g. CBP, CBP2)
must additionally be mounted in Slot "G" of an ADB Adaption Bord before inserted in mounting
location 3.
The T300 can not communicate with a communication board mounted on the CU (slot A or C).
PROFIBUS interface module CB1, software release ≥ 1.3

SCB2 Board software release ≥ 1.3
The SCB2 has an opto-isolated serial interface which is capable of operating with either a
USS protocol or a peer-to-peer protocol.
SCB1 board
The SCB1 is equipped with a fibre-optic interface for peer-to-peer communication or terminal
extension modules SCI1 and/or SCI2.
SLB SIMOLINK interface board for CUVC or CUMC.

If a Peer-to-Peer communication in not possible ( for example for „Compact Plus“ type units) the
SLB board can be installed instead of the T300 Peer-to-Peer interface.
CAN-BUS interface CBC , Software release ≥ 2.0

(middle location). Communication boards which are designed as Mini-Slot-Boards (e.g. CBC) must
additionally be mounted in Slot "G" of an ADB Adaption Bord before inserted in mounting location 3.
The T300 can not communicate with a communication board mounted on the CU ( in slot A or C ).
CAUTION
- An optinal SLB SIMOLINK Interface Board must be mounted in a slot on the CUVC or CUMC base
electronics board, most preferably in Slot A.
-The combination T300 and SLB SIMOLINK Interface mounted in location 3 is not possible!
- The SLB borad communicates directly with the base unit. Signal interconnections to the T300 board
must be softwired via Binectors-/ Connectors.
- A T300 board with Hardware release ≥ B, or newer, is needed for use with an SLB SIMOLINK
interface board. The correct hardware release code can be detected on the component side of the T300 in
the neighbourhood of the lower backplane connector.
9.3.3 T300 parameter settings

The following devices can be used to set the parameters of the T300 board:
Standard parameterizing unit (PMU) for basic converters

A PC or programmer with the SIMOVIS service program
Optional OP1S plaintext operator device, Software release ≥ 2.3
Optional OP1 plaintext operator device version 1.1 or higher
Note: MASTERDRIVES basic drive parameter and T300 Parameter can be read and write thrue all the
serial Interfaces ( with the exception of Peer-to-Peer interface and SIMOLINK interface board).

10 Installation, connecting-up
10.1 Inserting the memory module

The memory module must be placed on the board before it is inserted into the electronics box.
T300
LEDs
B o o t ju m p e r X1 3 0
A ckn o w le d g e ke y S 3
X137
X1 3 1
S1
X 1 3 2 (R S 2 3 2 )
X 1 3 3 (R S 4 8 5 )
X 1 3 4 (R S 4 8 5 ) X135
M S 3 00
X 136
Fig 10.1 Inserting a memory module

File: MS3X0_E.DRW
DANGER
It must be ensured that the memory module is inserted correctly into
the T300 connector, as otherwise the memory module could be
damaged.

10.2 Installing the board

Slots in the electronics box Boards
Left Slot 1 (CU) CU
Center Slot 3 (options) CB1 / CBx with ADB / SCB1 / SCB2 / (TSY, not for T300)
Right Slots 2 (options) CB1 / CBx with ADB / SCB1 / SCB2 / TSY / T300
NOTE
Only one of each option board type may inserted in the electronics box.
TB (technology boards, e.g. T300) must always be inserted at slot 2.

When a TB board is used, a TSY board may not be inserted.
If only one option board is used it must always be inserted at slot 2.
Option board Order Nos. and their descriptions are found in the Instruction Manual of the Master Drive
converter.
Examples of possible arrangements: Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 2

CU --- SCB
CU --- CBx
CU --- T300
CU SCB T300
CU CBx T300
CU TSY SCB

Please adhere to the following rules for mounting the T300 and other supplementary boards into the
electronics box.
Please note: Only the following combinations and mounting positions are allowed.
Mounting Positions
1 3 2
A F E lec tronics
B ox
D a ta F low
C G D on't us e s lot F
- CUVC - C B x m ounte d - T300

- CUMC on A D B A dap-
- C U 2, C U 3 tion B oard
- 6R A 70 - CB1
- SCB1
- SCB2
− The T300 must be mounted in mounting location 2 (rightmost mounting location)
− Only one fieldbus communication board can be used. It must be mounted in mounting location 3
(middle location). Communication boards which are designed as Mini-Slot-Boards (e.g. CBP, CBC)
must additionally be mounted in Slot "G" of an ADB Adaption Bord before inserted in mounting location
3. The T300 can not communicate with a communication board mounted on the CU ( in slot A or C ).
− The Communication Board communicates directly with the T300 board.
− An optinal SLB SIMOLINK Interface Board must be mounted in a slot on the CUVC or CUMC base
electronics board, most preferably in Slot A..
The combination T300 and SLB SIMOLINK Interface mounted in location 3 is not possible!
CAUTION
A T300 board with Hardware release ≥ B, or newer, is needed for use with an SLB SIMOLINK
interface board. The correct hardware release code can be detected on the component side of the
T300 in the neighbourhood of the lower backplane connector.

Before installing option boards in the electronics

box, the LBA (local Bus Adapter) has to be
inserted.
Install the LBA bus expansion:
♦ Remove the CU (lefthand slot in the electronics
box) using the handles after first removing the
connecting cable to the PMU and both retaining
screws
♦ Insert the LBA bus expansion in the electronics
box (position, refer to the diagram) so that it
snaps into place
♦ Re-insert the CU into the lefthand slot, screw
the retaining screws on the handles tight, and
insert the connecting cable to the PMU
Insert the option board in the righthand or center Fig. 10.2.a Installing the local bus adapter
slot of the electronics box and screw into place.
Only one of each option board type may be
inserted in the electronics box. If only one option
board is inserted, then it must always be at slot 2 (right).
Installing a new board
♦ Undo the two fixing screws on the

handles above and below the
board.
Slot 1 (CU)
♦ Pull the board out of the Slot 3 (Option)
electronics box using the handles
Slot 2 (Option)
♦ Insert the new board. The board
must be pressed tightly onto the
plug connector.
♦ Screw the board tight at the fixing

points in the front section of the
board using the two screws
attached.
Fig. 10.2.b: Elektronics box, with CU (Slot 1)

and Options (Slot 2 (left) and 3 (right))

10.3 Connections
10.3.1 T300 and SE300 terminal module connections
SE300
501
T300
A nalog I/O S C 60
pulse en coder X 456
LE D s
X5
B oot jum per X 130

A cknow ledg e button S 3
X 131 X 137
549
601
B inary I/O s
X 451
S C 58 S1
L B A
S erial interface 1
X6
X 132 (R S 232)
640 X 133 (R S 485)

S erial interface 2 X 134 (R S 485) X 135
M em o ry
S e rvice sub-
X 136 m odu e
P aram eteriza tio n by the

service prog ram T300
P eer-to-peer connection
LE D s
X 131
S1
X 132
X 133
X 134
Fig. 10.3.a: T300 connections

File: T3AUFB_E.DRW

+ 24 V +24V
F in e
p u lse
+15V
2 pulse encoder inputs
Z e ro +15V
Rough Z e ro H T L level, m ax.
p u lse p u lse 9 0 ° 0° p u lse 9 0 ° 0°
400kH z input frequenc
X5. 538 537 535 533 531 540 539 548 547 545 543 541 549
input current: 8m A per channel
+ 15V / 100m A X13 3

Pulse encoder sensing 1 Pulse encoder sensing 2
6
X5 7
501
+ A R S 4 8 5 , 2 w ire
±10V 502 8 Serial interface 1
- D
T /R x+ start-u p pro gram
503 9
+ A
±1 0V 504 - D T/R x-
E ither R S 232 or
10
505 R S 485 interfac e
+ X1 32
±10V A can be used
506 - R xD 1
D TTL
7 an alo g in puts 5 07 T xD 2
d iffe re n tia l inp u ts ±10V
+ A R S 2 32
508 - 3
1 1 b its + s ig n D
±1 0 V / 1 0 k O h m 4
511
±10V
+ A 5
512 - D X 134
R S 485, 4-wire
513 M icroprocessor
+ Tx+ 1 3
±10V A CPU:
514 - D 80C186 Tx- 14
515 Serial interface 2
20MHz
+ A R x+ 11 (peer-to-peer)
±10V 516 - D R x- 12
X6
15
+24V 610
+ 1 1 b its + s ign X5
601
D 509
602 A
510
603
8 binary inputs 604 519
24VDC
D
(in p u t re sista n ce 605 A
520
4 K O h m typ .)
606 4 an alo g o utpu ts
D 521 ±1 0 V / 1 0 m A
607
A
608 522
D 523
+24V 630
A
524
+
611 X6
S lo t fo r th e 639 +24V
612
m e m o ry 631
613 m o d u le , e .g .
M S300 632
8 binary inputs 614
24VDC 633
(in p u t re sista n ce : 615
634
8 binary outputs
4 K O h m typ .) 24V D C / m ax. 100m A .
616
635
40 m A base load for the
617 636 external P 24 supply,
618 637 w hich can also com e from
638 the basic drive converter
640
M ASTER DRIVE S
1 /2 L B A 1 /2 L B A
C om m unications basic drive conv.
board, e.g. D u al- D u al- CU1, CU2, CU3
C B 1, C B P on AD B , Po rt- P o rt- CUM C, CUVC
SC B 1 or SC B 2 R AM R AM (CUx board)
X135 X137
C onnecting diagram , T300,S E 3 00 Term inal series X 5, X 6: C onnect at term inal block S E 300
Term inal series X 132, X 133, X 134: C onnect at T300
File: T300_E.DRW
Note: For the first SE58 which were supplied (Order No.: 6DD3460-0AB0, Item No.. 465460.9001.00)
terminals 630...640 are designated as 620...630!

10.3.2 SE300 terminal module

The SE300 terminal module is used to connect the plant-side input-, output- and pulse encoder signals.
The terminal module is snapped onto a 35mm (DIN EN 50 022-35) mounting rail. The terminal module
has LEDs which permits fast diagnostics of the binary input-, output- and pulse encoder signals.
The connection to the T300 is realized through the two, shielded ribbon cables SC58 (40-core, for analog
and pulse encoder signals) and SC60 (34-core, for binary signals).
The serial interfaces are connected directly at the T300.
S E 300
T e rm in a ls
46m m
P C b o a rd
M o u n tin g ra il
224 m m
X 451 X 456
73m m
P C b o a rd S E 3 0 0 M o u n tin g ra il
35m m
Te rm in a ls T e rm in a ls
18m m
T e rm in a ls Te rm in a ls
Fig. 10.3.2: SE300 dimensions

File: SE300M_E.DRW

10.3.3 Connecting-up pulse encoders (digital tachometers) at SE300
10.3.3.1 Connection possibilities

The T300 provides a 15 V voltage via the SE300 for one pulse encoder, so that either pulse encoder 1 or
pulse encoder 2 can be supplied without having to use an external power supply.
24 V pulse encoders can also be used, whereby it should be observed, that the pulse encoder could be
overloaded if long cable are used in conjunction with high frequencies (e.g. 150m, 40kHz), which could
result in speed actual value sensing errors.
The speed actual value can also be lost, if the cable capacitance prevents the input voltage decreasing to
less than 5 V for a pulse encoder LOW signal.
Only unipolar encoder signals can be evaluated.
The encoder reference potentials must be connected with the speed input reference points of the SE300:
Terminal 531, 533, 535 or 539 for encoder 1
Terminal 541, 543, 545 or 549 for encoder 2
When using an external power unit, its ground must also be connected to SE300 (e.g. terminal 539).
An external power supply unit can also supply both pulse encoders, whereby in this case, terminals 539
and 549 must be connected to the power supply ground.
The zero pulses are only required for certain applications (e.g. synchronizing drives).
Using a rough signal, a window can be defined, in which a zero pulse can be identified and evaluated.
Such a rough signal can be generated, for example, from a contact switch or proximity switch. The zero
pulse is evaluated when the rough signal = 1.
SE300
X5
53 1 533 53 5 53 9 54 1 54 3 54 5 54 9
532 534 536 540 542 5 44 546

Z e ro p u lse 1
Z e ro pu lse 2
T ra ck B 1
T ra ck B 2
T ra ck A 2
T ra ck A 1
P 15
M
P 1 5 , from th e e xte rn al
P uls e enc od e r 1 P ulse en cod er 2 p ow er s up p ly s e ctio n
Fig. 10.3.3.1.a: Connecting pulse encoders with zero pulse

File: SEIMP_E.DRW

Using a single-track pulse encoder:
- the pulse encoder pulse track is connected at track A1 or A2 (terminals 531 or 541)
- the track inputs B1 or B2 of the pulse encoder sensing (terminals 533 or 543) are connected to
ground.
As the SIMOVERT VC includes closed-loop speed control, then typically, an encoder („encoder input 1“) is
directly connected to control board CU2 (terminals X103.35 to X103.40) or CUVC (terminals X103.35 to
X103.40) . The pulses, fed to CU2, are supplied to the T300 via the LBA.
This does not load the pulse encoder connected at the CU.
For servo converters SIMOVERT SC (CU3 control board) or MASTERDRIVE Motion Control (CUMC
control board), the resolver signals are transformed into pulse encoder signals (tracks A1, B1, N) and
are also fed to T300 via the LBA.
For SIMOREG DC_MASTER (6RA70) typically, an encoder is directly connected to control board
(terminals X173.26 to X173.33).
The pulses, fed to CU, are supplied to the T300 via the LBA.
This does not load the pulse encoder connected at the CU.
In this case, these pulses are not just available on the control board for speed sensing, but also on the
T300 via the LBA.
C hangeover can
CU3, CUMC be configured
R es o lve r sign a ls
R e s olve r tran s fo rm e r T300
CU2, CUVC
LBA
A1
6RA70
B1 from
e n co d er in p ut1 Speed
N1 se n sin g 1
A1
SE300
B1 fro m
en co d er in pu t 1
N1
A2 S p ee d
fro m
B2 s e ns in g 2
N2 en co d er in pu t 2
SC58
Fig. 2.3.3.1.b: Connecting the pulse encoder

File: IMPULS_E.DRW

10.3.3.2 Information regarding the pulse encoder cable
Capacitance per unit length of the pulse encoder cable:
Core - shield: approx. 265 pF/m

Core - core: approx. 120 pF/m
1. For long cables, it must be ensured, that there is still enough voltage at the pulse encoder to ensure
correct operation.
2. Max. pulse encoder output frequency:
Max. Pulse Encoder Frequency as a Function of the Cable Length with the HTL Encoder Inputs of
MASTERDRIVES and T300.
Below you can find a pulse frequency vs. cable length characteristic curve. The following assumptions
have been made for this curve:
1. Encoder types: Heidenhain 1XP8001-1 and Hübner ROD9 / HOG9
2. Stabilized +15 VDC encoder power supply . Both, the CU board and the T300 board provide output
terminals each supplying one encoder with the appropriate power-supply voltage. (i.e. two encoders
can be supplied in total).
3. With pulse frequencies above 50 kHz or cable lengths above 50 m, two parallel-connected conductors
have to be used for the 15VDC and GND encoder supply leads in order to make the voltage drops as
low as posible.
Four parallel-connected conductors have to be used with cable lengths above 100m. As an alternative,
you can use 15VDC and GND conductors with a minimum cross-section of 1 mm2 each.
4. Appropriate encoder cables:

- Siemens 6SX7002... according to Motor-Catalog DA65.3
- other shielded twisted -pair cables with the following features:
- min. cross-section of the conductors: 0,25 mm2
- max. capacitance per unit length: 120 pF/m
5 For cable lengths above 150m, the use of an encoder with additional complementary HTL signals is
highly recommended (differential pulse signals A/A_inverted, B/B_inverted, N/N_inverted).
A Siemens DTI "Digital-Tacho Interface" module has to be employed in this case, refer to MASTER-
DRIVES-Catalog DA65.10.
The 1XP8001-1 encoder type is equipped with the complementary outputs as a standard. The ROD9 /
HOG9 types can be ordered, as a special version, from Hübner with complementary outputs. Use the
Hübner-Order No suffix " ...I" for ordering.

4 00 kH z = m ax. In pu t Fre que ncy

400kHz o f the M A S TE R D R IV E S an d T30 0 In pu t C ircu itry
O the r E nco ders

(with high er ou tp ut fre qu ency; please con sult
the en code r m anu fa ctu rer for the p erm issible
cab le len gth)
H ü bn e r P O G 9 / H O G 9
250kHz (m ax. O utp ut Fre qu e ncy= 2 50 kH z)
200kHz
H e id en ha in 1X P 8 0 01 -1 H TL-L ev el, S in gle -E n de d

160kHz (m ax O utp ut Fre qu e ncy (Tra cks A , B , N )
= 16 0 kH z)
H TL -Le v el, D iffere ntial S igna ls
100 kHz (Tracks A , A _in v erted , B , B _ inv erte d
N , N _inv e rted)
80 kHz with a n exte rna l D TI e v alua tion
60 kHz m od ule
40 kH z
C able Length
20m 50m 10 0m P ulse E ncoder
200m 300m 400m
Fig. 10.3.3.2: Permissible pulse encoder output frequency

File: IMPFRE_E.DRW
10.3.3.3 Connecting a TTL encoder to the T300 via a DTI converter module
A downstream-connected DTI module can be employed for converting the pulse levels from HTL (15 to
24V) to TTL. In this case, the T300 cannot evaluate encoder frequencies above 25 kHz without additional
measures.
This restriction is due to the passive pull-up output of the DTI (output transistor switches to GND, no push-
pull stage) and the RC-type T300 input filter circuit resulting in slow rising edges and fast falling edges.
Higher pulse frequencies can be achieved by removing the filter elements on the T300 board according to
the following table. These filters are no longer needed in connection with the DTI. Each filter consits of an
R (resistor) and a C (capacitor) which are series-connected. An R or a C component must be removed
for each encoder track.
Encoder 1: Track A C43 or R195

Track B C44 or R197
Index Pulse C45 or R198
Encoder 2: Track A C46 or R205

Track B C47 or R207
Index Pulse C48 or R208

10.3.3.4 Rough signal processing

The T300 allows the zero pulse only to be evaluated if the „rough signal“ is present. If such a AND logic
operation is to be made (in the sense of a filter function), then the speed sensing (function function block
NAV015) must be appropriately parameterized.
SE300
531 533 535 537 539 541 543 545 547 549
X5 532 534 536 538 540 542 544 546 548
R o ug h C o ntact-/p ro xim ity

R ou g h sw itc h e tc .
P 24 s ig na l 1 s ig na l 2
Fig. 10.3.3.4.a: Rough signal speed sensing 1 and 2

File: DREHZG_E.DRW
T1 T2
T rack A
T rack B
Z ero pulse
T3
R oug h sig nal
Zero pulse evaluation
T 1, T 2 and T 3, > 1µ sec
Fig. 10.3.3.4.b: Zero pulse evaluation with rough signal

File: IMP_E.DRW

10.3.4 Connecting-up the analog inputs
SE300 T 300
In put 1 ~ 1 0 k O hm X 4 51 X 131
10V
501 503
+
502 504
-
In put 2 1 kO hm A nalog input 1
10 µ F +
50 7 5 0 9 5 1 1
-
510
Analog output 1
X5
O utput 1
520
S C 58
Fig. 10.3.4: Connecting the analog inputs and analog outputs

File: ANALIN_E.DRW
♦ The analog inputs are differential inputs, in order to suppress common-mode noise and
disturbances. The „reference potential“ (e.g. terminal 502 for input 1) must therefore also be
connected!
Further, it should be noted that the inputs are non-floating via the A/D converter!
♦ For unipolar signals, the inverting inputs must be connected at the analog signal reference points.
♦ Noisy signals must be smoothed using a low-pass filter, which is externally mounted. The
recommended circuit, illustrated in fig. above refers to analog input sampling times of ≥ 8ms.

10.3.5 Connecting-up the binary inputs

Binary signals have a 24 V DC signal level referred to M24 (SE300 terminals 610, 630 or 640).
Low signal level (logical zero) is identified for

- an open-circuit input
- signals below +6V.
A high signal level is defined for voltages between 13 V and 33 V.
The input current at 24 V is typically approx. 5 mA and the delay time, approx. 1 ms.
S E 300 T 300
24V D C
pow er supply
M 24 M 24 lev el
trans form er
Fig. 10.3.5.a: Circuit diagram of a binary input

File: BINEIN_E.DRW
B inary inp ut B ina ry o utpu t

P24
P 24
outpu t
or
S IM A T IC - M
binary o u tpu t
M
S IM A T IC
b ina ry in put
601 603 631 639

S E 300
602 610 632 640
X 456
X 456
S C 60
T 300 X 136
Fig. 10.3.5.b: Connecting-up the binary inputs and outputs

File: BINARI_E.DRW

10.3.6 Connecting-up the binary outputs

The binary outputs are also 24V DC signals, which are referred to M24 (terminal 610, 630 or 640 of the
SE300). They are supplied from the P24 terminals (609, 619 or 639).
Each of the 8 outputs (terminals 631 to 638) can drive 0.2 mA to 100 mA, which is sufficient to control
small signaling lamps or interface relays. A free-wheeling diode is provided on the T300, however, for
inductive loads, it is recommended that a free-wheeling diode is directly connected at the load.
The outputs have electronic short-circuit protection to ground and P24.
The total of all outputs may not exceed 400 mA; the operating voltage range is +20 V to +30 V.
The switching delay is approx. 300 µs.
T 3 00 S E 3 00
P 24 P 24
2 4V D C
p ow e r su p ply
D river
Lo ad
M 24 M 24
Fig. 10.3.6: Circuit diagram of a binary output

File: BINAUS_E.DRW
P24 power supply voltage:
Binary inputs:
♦ The power supply voltage can either be taken from the drive converter (connector X101,
terminals 13 and 23) or from an external power supply source.
Binary outputs:
♦ The power supply voltage can be taken from the converter or an external power supply.
It should be noted, that a maximum of 150 mA can only be taken from the converter P24 supply
(also refer to Section 10.4)

10.3.7 Connecting-up the serial interfaces
10.3.7.1 Serial connections, X132
T300
PG7X0 program m ing unit PC-AT T300
(serial interface) (serial interface)
X 1 32 X 132
R xD 1 R xD
T xD 2 1 T xD 3
2 TxD 2 T xD
R xD 3 R xD 2
3 5 3
7
4 4
5 5
2 5-pin su b D 9-pin su b D
p lu g c onn ec to r plug co nn ector
GND GND
Fig. 10.3.7.1: T300 serial connections

File: X132_E.DRW

10.3.7.2 Peer-to-peer connection, X134

The peer-to-peer connection is used to cascade the setpoint between the drives .
♦ A transmitter only supplies one receiver:
⇒ For the receiver, the terminating resistors must be switched-in.
♦ A transmitter can supply up to 31 receivers:
⇒ All receivers must be connected as for a serial bus due the cable characteristic
impedance. This means, that an incoming and an outgoing bus cable connector must
be connected at each receiver.
The terminating resistors must be effective for the last receiver in the chain. It is not
permissible to connect-up the receivers in a star configuration!
Refer to Section 10.6 for further details regarding the terminating resistors.
Every cable section must be shielded!
X X X
-X 13 4 -X 134 -X 134 -X 13 4
M aste r drive
R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M Rx+ R x- T x+ T x- M R x+ R x- Tx+ Tx- M R x+ R x- Tx+ Tx- M point-to-p o in t
11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15
-X 134
R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M
X
11 12 13 14 15 -X 134 -X 134 -X 13 4
Rx+ R x- T x+ T x- M R x+ R x- Tx+ Tx- M R x+ R x- Tx+ Tx- M cascade

11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15
Fig.10.3.7.2: Peer-to-peer connection

File: PEER_E.DRW
x: For this T300, the bus terminating resistors must be switched-in,

i.e. at bus terminating switch S1, coding switches S1.3 and S1.4 must be set to ON!


11 Technical data
11 Technical data
11.1 Hardware configuration

• 233mm x 100mm PC board format
• CPU 80C186, 20 MHz
• RAM 128Kbyte
• NVRAM 256*4 bit
• Possibility of connecting to the base drive electronics board (e.g. CU2) via a 1Kx16 bit dual port
RAM
• Possibility of connecting to a communications board for data transfer (e.g. CB1)
• 7 differential analog inputs
• 4 analog outputs
• 16 binary inputs
• 8 binary outputs
• 2 pulse encoder inputs
• 2 serial interfaces: a) serial interface 1: Connector X132 with RS232 (e.g. PC connection)
or
connector X133 with a 2-wire RS485
• b) serial interface 2: Connector X134 with RS485, 2- or 4-wire
• Pushbutton, freely configurable or to start the diagnostics monitor
• 3 diagnostic LEDs
• Boot bridge for future expansions
11.2 Watchdogs
Several watchdogs are provided to monitor the functioning of the board (both the hardware and software);
the following is checked.
• Ready signal delay for hardware accesses

• Double address coding errors
• Cyclic board operation
• Interrupt-control of the serial interface, timers and inputs
If a watchdog identifies an error/fault condition, the processor generates a „non-maskable interrupt“ (NMI),
and attempts to create a normal operating status. If the processor itself is faulted, the board switches itself
into an inactive condition, i.e. the analog and binary outputs are set to 0 V.

11 Technical data
11.3 General technical data

Dimensioning the creepage distances and clearances Pollution level 2 according to DIN VDE 0110
Degree of protection IP00
Ambient temperature 0 to +50°C for self-cooling
Storage temperature – 40 to + 70°C
Humidity class F acc. to DIN 40040 (IEC 721 Part 3-3 Class 3K3),
moisture condensation not permissible
Mechanical strength According to DIN IEC 68-2-6 / 06.90
Dimensions 233.4 * 100mm
Weight Approx. 1.5kg including 2 x round cables, SE300 and
memory module
Current drain P5: 1000mA typical
P15: 130 mA typical + encoder load
N15: 93 mA typical
Current drain for a 24 V external supply 1A
(Part of T300) Referred to a minimum voltage of 20 V (incl. encoder
power supply, terminals, SE300 LEDs
11.4 Inputs/outputs
All analog and binary inputs and outputs are non-floating! If the permissible signal level is exceeded, in
addition to the input- or output stages, the complete board could be damaged!
Analog inputs
Number 7, multiplexed
Minimum input voltage –10V
Maximum input voltage +10V
Input resistance 10kΩ
Resolution 12 bits (corresponding to 4.88 mV)
Accuracy, absolute +/– 3 LSB
Linearity error < 1 LSB
Low pass filter 1.5kHz (-3dB transition frequency)
Analog outputs
Number 4, multiplexed
Minimum output voltage – 10V
Maximum output voltage + 10 V
Output current, max. 10mA, short-circuit proof to ground
Internal resistance 56Ω
Resolution 12 bits (corresponding to 4.88 mV)
Accuracy, absolute +/– 3 LSB
Linearity error < 1 LSB
Voltage rise time 3 V/µs
(slew rate) of the outputs
11 Technical data
Binary inputs
Number 16, interrupt-capable

Input voltage +24V nominal value
Input voltage for 0 signal –1V to +6V or open binary inputs
Input voltage for 1 signal +13V to +33V
Input current for a 1 signal 8mA typical
Input smoothing < 700µs
Binary outputs
Number 8,
Power supply voltage Must be fed-in externally
Nominal value 24V DC
Ripple 3.6V peak-to-peak (smoothing not required)
Permissible range + 15 to + 40V, including ripple
Short-time loading + 40V < 0.5s
Basic loading (all outputs open) < 40mA
Output current for a 1 signal
Nominal value 100mA (92mA at SE300 terminal)
Permissible range 0.2mA to 100mA
Only loaded by the LED 8mA
Short-circuit protection Continually short-circuit proof with respect to ground and P24
Total loading Summed current of all outputs < 400mA
Signal level for 0 signal Max. 2 V for load < 5kΩ
For a 1 signal External supply voltage –2.5V
Switching delay Max. 300µsec.
Pulse encoder connection (speed actual value sensing):
Number of pulse encoders which may be connected 2

Max. pulse frequency 400kHz
Min. duration for the signals A, B, N: > 1µsec
Nominal displacement between tracks A and B > 1µsec at every speed
Pulse level 0 – 30V
Signal level with input hysteresis:
1 signal > 8V
0 signal (optimized for pulse encoders with 15 V power supply voltage) < 5V
Input currents 8mA typical
Rough signal Values as for binary inputs
Voltage at the external terminals (SE300) for the pulse encoder supply:
Output voltage Nominal value: 15V, typically 14V

Output current, max. 0.1A, electronically limited to 0.15A under short-circuit conditions

11 Technical data
11.5 Serial interfaces

The T300 has 2 serial interfaces:
1. Serial interface 1 terminals X132 or X133 on T300
Serial interface 1 is a 2-wire cable according to RS485 (X133) and RS232 (X132).
In the STRUC master program, this interface corresponds to connector X01.
NOTE
Serial interface 1 can either be used as RS485 or as RS232; this means, it is not permissible to
simultaneously use the physical interfaces at terminal series X132 and X133!
2. Serial interface 2, terminals X134 on T300
Serial interface 2 is a 2- or 4-wire cable according to RS485 (X134). Changeover to 2- or 4-wire cable is
realized automatically corresponding to the protocol set at the interface.
In the STRUC master program, this interface corresponds to connector X02.

11 Technical data
The subsequent two diagrams show a schematic of serial interfaces 1 and 2, in conjunction with the bus
terminating switch S1.
X 1 32
TTL T xD 2
470p
S S T 1_ T xD
R xD
1
RS232 470p
S S T 1 _ R xD 10k
3
M 56u
N12 4
10n 5
56u
M
10
P5 P5
10n 6
TTL / R S 485 100K S1.1 390 7
8
470p
150
9
470p
D IR
100K S1.2 390 PE
(D ire ctio n ch a n g eo v e r) X 133
M M
Fig. 11.5.a: Connecting serial interface 1 (RS485/RS232)

File: SST1_E.DRW
P5
390
TTL / RS485
13
470p
S ST2_TxD
150
14
470p
D IR 390 P5
P5 56u
M
M M 15
390
TTL / RS485 100K S1.3 10n
0
S S T 2 _ R xD 11
470p
150
12
470p
D IR 100K S1.4 390 PE
(D ire ctio n ch a n g e o v er)
M X134
M
Fig. 11.5.b: Connecting serial interface 2 (RS485)

File: SST2_E.DRW

11 Technical data
11.6 Bus terminating switch S1

The bus terminations are switched-in when switch S1 is in the ON position (coding switches 1-4).
The bus terminating resistance is approx. 120 Ohm.
ON
B us term ination sw itched-in
B us term ination sw itched-out
1 2 3 4
X 133 X 134
Fig. 11.6: Bus terminating switch S1

File: BUSABS_E.DRW
NOTE
Coding switches 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 must always be in the same setting so that the bus terminations are either
switched-in or -out.
11.7 Pushbutton S3
A) Using the pushbutton, the SIMADYN D diagnostics monitor (9.6 kbaud, no parity bit) can be started
when the voltage runs-up. It is only effective at interface 1 (connector X132/X133), which is then no longer
available for other applications once the monitor has started!
Generally, the user does not use this monitor.
a) If a fatal T300 error/fault is identified during operation, which prevents the T300 operating
correctly, then the diagnostics monitor can be started by actuating the pushbutton.
b) Independent of a possibly occuring error/fault, the monitor can be started at voltage run-up. The
pushbutton must be depressed until the system goes into a READY status (°008 or °009)!
B) The pushbutton can also be implemented (configured) with a switch function within the software. The
diagnostic monitor can still be started (as described under A).

11 Technical data
11.8 Diagnostic LEDs

Flashing of the LED indicates that the unit is in a perfect operating status. The associated LED is either lit
or dark if a fault condition is present.
H1 Red LED Dependent on the particular configuring:

The flashing frequency is the sampling time of the function package
@SIMD (TY-connector of T300 Board mask)
In case of error it is 4 times lower!
H2 Green LED Data transfer to the communications board O.K.;
The flashing frequency is the sampling time of the DCCZ function
function block
H3 Yellow LED Data transfer to the basic drive converter O.K.;
The flashing frequency is the sampling time of the DCCZ function
function block

11 Technical data
11.9 Connector assignments

Analog inputs/outputs and pulse encoder
Connection SE300 Function T300 AD Explanation

X131 connector
example X5
(FB)
501 Input 1 + 1 X5 A
10V 10k
502 Input 1 - 2
503 Input 2 + 3 X5 B
504 Input 2 - 4 Analog inputs 1 - 4
1k
505 Input 3 + 5 X5 C
10µF
506 Input 3 - 6
507 Input 4 + 7 X5 D
508 Input 4 - 8
509 Analog output 1 9 X5 H Analog output 1
510 Ground analog (=520) 10
511 Input 5+ 11 X5 E
512 Input 5- 12
513 Input 6+ 13 X5 F Analog inputs 5 - 7
514 Input 6- 14
515 Input 7+ 15 X5 G
516 Input 7- 16
519 Analog output 2 17 X5 J
521 Analog output 3 19 X5 K Analog outputs 2-4
523 Analog output 4 20 X5 L
531 Track 1A+ 21
532 Ground track 1A 22
533 Track 1B+ 23
534 Ground track 1B 24
535 Zero pulse 1+ 25 X5 M Speed sensing 1
536 Ground zero pulse 1 26
537 Rough pulse 1 27
538, Ground, encoder supply 1, 28, 29
539 Ground rough pulse 1
540 15V encoder supply 30,39
541 Track 2A+ 31
542 Ground track 2A 32
543 Track 2B+ 33
544 Ground track 2B 34
545 Zero pulse 2+ 35 X5 N Speed sensing 2
546 Ground zero pulse 2 36
547 Rough pulse 2 37
548, Ground, encoder supply. 2, 38, 40
549 Ground rough pulse 2

11 Technical data
Binary inputs/outputs
Connection SE300 Function T300 AD con- Explanation

example X6 X136 nector (FB)
601 Input 1 1
602 Input 2 2
603 Input 3 3
604 Input 4 4 X6 A Binary inputs 1 - 8
605 Input 5 5
M P24
606 Input 6 6
607 Input 7 7
608 Input 8 8
609 P external 9 External supply for
610 M external 10 inputs and outputs
611 Input 9 11
612 Input 10 12
613 Input 11 13
614 Input 12 14 X6 B Binary inputs 9 - 16
615 Input 13 15
616 Input 14 16
M P24 617 Input 15 17
618 Input 16 18
631 Output 1 21
632 Output 2 22
633 Output 3 23
634 Output 4 24 X6 C Binary outputs 1 - 8
635 Output 5 25 (NO contacts)
636 Output 6 26
637 Output 7 27
638 Output 8 28
Note: For the first SE58 (Order No.: 6DD3460-0AB0, Item No. 465460.9001.00) which were supplied,
terminals 630...640 are designated as 620...630!
„Associated“ ground- and P24 terminals:

On the T300 the following terminals are connected directly:
X131 10=18 (Ground Analog outputs)

28=29=38=40 (Ground Speed sensing)
X136 10=20=30 (Ground external for binary inputs/outputs)
X136 9=19=29 (P24 external for binary inputs/outputs)
These 3 different grounds are connected via reactors with the T300 grounding.
However, it is recommended that the „associated“ grounds are used in order to prevent possible overload
conditions and to achieve a structure which is, as far as possible, in line with the EMC regulations.
The T300 ground is connected to PE through 0 Ohm resistors.

11 Technical data
Serial interfaces
Connector X132 (serial interface 1)
Terminal RS232
No.
1 RxD
2 TxD
3 Ground
4 Ground
5 Ground
Terminal RS485
No. 2-wire operation
6 + RxD / +TxD
7 - RxD / - TxD
8 + RxD / +TxD
9 - RxD / - TxD
10 Ground
Terminal RS485 for RS485 for

No. 2-wire operation 4-wire operation
11 +RxD / +TxD +RxD
12 - RxD / -TxD - RxD
13 No function (+TxD) +TxD
14 No function (-TxD) -TxD
15 Ground Ground

12 Application software
The T300 control software can either be generated, user-specific using STRUC (refer to the next section),
or pre-configured standard software packages may purchased from Siemens.
12.1 Standard software packages

Four different standard software packages are available in the form of pre-programmed memory modules:
♦ MS320 Axial winder
♦ MS340 Angular synchronous control
♦ MS360 Multi-motor drive
♦ MS 380 Positioning
S ta n d a rd so ftw a re p a ckag e s
F actory sta n d ard softw a re p ac kag es
(p re -pro gra m m ed m e m o ry m od ules)
M S 380 P ositioning
M S 36 0 M ulti-m otor d riv e
M S 340 A ngular-synchronous control
M S 320 A x ial w inder
m em ory subm od ul m anual
+
Fig. 12.1: Standard software packages
File: STANDPR_E.DRW
RELEASE Standard software packages

The T300 standard software packages MS320, MS340, MS360, MS380 are released for operation in
the MASTER DRIVES basic units (CU2, CU3, CUVC, CUMC).
The T300 standard software packages MS320, MS340, MS360, MS380 are not released for operation
in the SIMOREG DC_MASTER 6RA70.
In this case the T300 control software can be generated, user-specific using STRUC.

12.2 User-specific software configuring

If other solutions are required in addition to the standard software packages, then the user can simply
generate his own open- and closed-loop control solutions.
To start off with, the required closed-loop control structure is configured using STRUC, and from this, a
binary code program generated which is then executed on the T300.
The MS300 memory module, which is inserted on the T300 board, is used as memory medium both for
the user program (binary code) of the board as well as for the system software (operating system, function
function block code etc).
A parallel programmer (PP1X) and UP3 adapter are used to program the memory module, whereby the
parallel programmer is connected at the parallel interface of a PG/PC.
As the memory module can be erased using an UV lamp, a new application software package can be
programmed on the module after the previous contents have been erased.
C u sto m e r co n fig u rin g
... w ith S T R U C 'L iste ' ... with S T R U C 'G ra fik '
S T R U C L P T with S T R U C G P T w ith
start-up p ro gram sta rt-u p p ro gra m
P a ralle l
in te rfac e
IB M com p a tib le P C /P G S N I-P C

w ith M S W in d ow s 3 .1 p re -con fig u re d
w ith D O S ,S C O -U N IX a nd S T R U C G P T
P a ra llel P rog ra m m e r
PP1X
UP3
M S 300
Fig. 12.2: Customer configuring
File: STRUC1_E.DRW

13 Configuring the T300 for SIMOVERT 6SE70 and DC_MASTER 6RA70
13 Configuring the T300 for SIMOVERT 6SE70

and DC_MASTER 6RA70
The following instructions assume that you have prior knowledge of SIMADYN D configuring!.
When using the T300 in the drive converter, the function blocks, described in this section, must be
configured. The configuring rules and regulations and possibilities of SIMADYN D are valid. Only the
T300-specific configuring measures are presented in this Section.
The function blocks, presented here, are available from software version 4.2.0 (March 95).
The function blocks required for the „fast“ peer-to-peer protocol, are available from STRUC-software
release 4.2.3!
Information regarding the notation:

For the examples shown in STRUC L, the (function block) names to be assigned by the configuring
engineer are shown in italics, if they are also required elsewhere in the software.
Important (function block) types are printed in bold.
13.1 Master program

13.1.1 SR6 subrack
An SR6 subrack must be selected (a dedicated type was not created for the converter electronics box).
T300 is configured at the 1st slot of the SR6 subrack mask (connector S01). If a communications board is
used, then a slot must be specified before the basic drive converter control board (CU1, CU2, CU3).
Configuring example:
30 EBOX : SR6 "Subrack with 6 slots, L bus"

31 L01 6S = '. . . . . . '"Descr.-"
32 S01 8N = D01_P1,SW23V0 "Slot.1:T300 board- + mem.module name
33 S02 8N = 0
34 S03 8N = CS "User name of the comm. board."
35 S04 8N = GG "User name of the CU control board."
36 S05 8N = 0
37 S06 8N = 0
13.1.2 Board mask T300
Contrary to other SIMADYN D board masks, the following points must be observed:
As the binary- and analog signals as well as the pulse tachometer must always be fed, for the T300, via
the SE300 terminal module, no information is required for the appropriate connectors in the processor
mask (X5A to X6B ).

13.1.3 T300 synchronization to the base drive cycle time

The T300 synchronization to the base drive cycle time is only approved for the MASTER DRIVES basic.
A T300 synchronization to the base drive Simoreg DC_MASTER 6RA70 is not applicable.
The MASTERDRIVES base drive control board generates at the start of its 4 times basic cycle time, i.e.
4*P308 (CU2), 4*P357 (CUVC) a pulse via the backplane bus LBA to T300.
The T300 can synchronize its basic cycle time to this base drive cycle time.
If the clock cycle, generated by the base drive control board is to be used on the T300, an appropriate
(equivalent time) constant, with the value TG = 4 * P308 or 4*P357 must be specified in the T300 board
mask at the connector for the basic cycle time T0.
T0 TG = xxx[ms]
Further, the basic clock cycle source must be configured. The backplane bus LBA, which transfers the
base drive cycle time from CUx to T300, establishes a so-called „L bus“ for the STRUC configuring
language.
Thus, the following must be specified when synchronizing to the base drive:
T0 TG = xxx[ms] ,SRC=TL
In order to optimally harmonize data processing on the control board and T300, it is recommended that an
additional start delay is specified for the T300 cycle time. This can either be realized at the connector,
base cycle time T0 using an additional attribute
T0 TG = xxx[ms] ,SRC=TL ,TDL=yyy[ms]
or using the DTS function block. The function block has the advantage, that the delay can be changed
without making any master program changes and can therefore be made online (in this case, it is only
necessary to reset the T300.)
13.1.4 MS300 memory module

MS300 memory modules are configured for the T300.
13.1.5 Converter log-on using the DPZ initialization block
13.1.5.1 Block description

The initialization block (IB) DPZ („Device Processor module Z“) signals to the T300 that there is a control
board CU at its dual port RAM.
The block name (in the example „GG“), which is assigned by the configuring engineer, is specified at the
CTS- and DTS connectors of other function blocks (refer below).
87 GG : DPZ "IB for the control board (basic drive conv.)"

88 T0 TG = 4.8[MS],SEND=TL "Cycle time, CU provides the basic clock"

13.1.5.2 CU as source for the basic clock cycle

The DPZ initialization function block has a connector T0, where a transmitter for the basic clock (T0) of
the T300 can be specified (as was shown in the previous section, the T300 can be configured so that it
receives the basic clock from the LBA backplane bus („L bus“ in STRUC).
In the drive converter, this basic clock is generated by the CU control boards, via the backplane bus LBA
and sent to T300, so that the following connector attribute must be specified (refer to the example below)
,SEND=TL
To calculate the cycle time dependent time constants, an (equivalent time) constant = 4 * P308 (drive
converter cycle time) must also be specified at the T0 connector. This constant corresponds to the clock
supplied from the CU.
13.1.6 Logging-on a communications board with CSZ

The initialization function block (IB) CSZ („Communication Submodule Z“) signals to the T300 that there is
a communications board connected at its X135 connector (e.g. CB1, SCB1, SCB2).
In order to permit configuring standards, this function block can also be configured, even if there is no
communications board.
The function block name, to be assigned by the configuring engineer (under „CS“ in the example below),
is specified at the CTS- and DTS connectors of other function blocks (refer below).
85 CS : CSZ "IB for the interface board"

13.1.7 Example of a master program (as excerpt)

.........
30 EBOX : SR6 "Subrack 6 slots, L bus"
31 L01 6S = '. . . . . . '"Description"
32 S01 8N = D01_P1,SW23V0 "Slot 1:T300 board- + mem. module name
33 S02 8N = 0
34 S03 8N = CS "User name of the comm. board"
35 S04 8N = GG "User name of the CU control board"
36 S05 8N = 0
37 S06 8N = 0
........
40 D01_P1 : T300 "Processor board type T300"
41 PIJ 1N = 0 "Interrupt processing FP"
42 SFJ 1N = 0 "System error FP"
43 PRX 1N = @RXD "Special communications FP - transmit"
44 PJ1 1N = CONF "1. permanent processing-FP"
45 PJ2 1N = SYNCON "2. permanent processing-FP"
46 PJ3 1N = CONTRL "3. permanent processing-FP"
47 PJ4 1N = PARA "4. permanent processing-FP"
.........
52 PTX 1N = @TXD "Special communications FP - transmit"
53 T0 TG = 4[MS] "Basic cycle time"
54 T1 TS = 1 "1.sample. time *T0, gen. LB- and CB conn."
55 T2 TS = 4 "2.sample time. '' "
56 T3 TS = 0 "3.sample time. '' "
57 T4 TS = 32 "4.sample time. '' "
58 T5 TS = 64 "5.sample time. '' "
59 TY TX = T5 "System FP sample. time"
60 CCT 8R = 0 "Transmit telegram names Tx"
61 CCR 8R = 0 "Receive telegram names Tx, e.g. PKW.T4"
62 COP 8R = 0 "Op. control telegram names Tx"
63 X01 1N = 0 "1. serial interface"
64 X02 1N = PEER "2. serial interface"
65 X5A 1K < "Analog input 1"
66 X5B 1K < "Analog input 2"
67 X5C 1K < "Analog input 3"
68 X5D 1K < "Analog input 4"
69 X5E 1K < "Analog input 5"
70 X5F 1K < "Analog input 6"
71 X5G 1K < "Analog input 7"
72 X5M 4K < "Speed sensing 1"
73 X5N 4K < "Speed sensing 2"
74 X6A 8K < "Binary inputs 1, interrupt-capable"
75 X6B 8K < "Binary inputs 2, interrupt-capable"
76 X5H 1K > "Analog output 1"
77 X5J 1K > "Analog output 2"
78 X5K 1K > "Analog output 3"
79 X5L 1K > "Analog output 4"
80 X6C 8K > "Binary outputs"
.........
82 SW23V0 : MS300 "Memory submod.:512K,2K EEPROM,0WS"
.........
85 CS : CSZ "IB for interface board"
.........
87 GG : DPZ "IB for control board (basic drive conv.)"
88 T0 TG = 4.8[MS],SEND=TL "Cycle time, CU provided basic clock"
.........

13.2 Function blocks in function packages for initialization

The function blocks described in this section
@GRZ
DCCZ
must be configured so that the T300 can run in the drive converter.
The function blocks presented in the subsequent sections

TFAW
PRP
TXT
PTR
@PTP
@PTP01
are only configured, if the specified functions are actually required.
13.2.1 Central block @GRZ in the transmit communications FP

The „GRZ“ (drive response Z)“ function block initializes (connects) the T300 to one board, connected via a
dual port RAM. A @GRZ must be configured, both for the CU as well as for a communications board!
To be configured in the transmit communications FP!
Input Type Explanation, @GRZ Output Type Explanation, @GRZ

conn. conn.
CTS CR- Depending on the CPT conn., either QTS B1 Transfer status to the basic drive
the board name of the drive converter or communications board
converter (refer to IB DPZ in the :
MP) or the board name of the 0: Data transmission faulted
comm. board (refer to IB CSZ in the 1: O.K.
MP) must be specified. YTS O2 Error code (refer to the Manual /1/
CPT B1- =0: Basic drive converter and Sect. 6)
=1: Comm. board
should be initialized
52 CU_DPR : @GRZ
53 CTS CR - GG
54 CPT B1 - 0 "=0: comm. with the drive conv. (GG)"
55 QTS B1 >
56 YTS O2 >
57 +
58 CS_DPR : @GRZ
59 CTS CR - CS
60 CPT B1 - 1 "=1: comm. with the comm. board"
61 QTS B1 >
62 YTS O2 >

13.2.2 Dual port RAM administration using DCCZ in the standard FP

The „Device Configuration Control Z“ function block initializes and administers the communication
channels (process data, parameters) to the base drive (CU), and a possibly available communications
board. It processes the heartbeat counter monitoring, and controls monitoring LEDs H2 and H3 on the
T300.
It may only be configured in the standard FP and in cycle times 100ms <= Ta <= 256ms
If this is not the case, initialization is not correctly executed.
Information regarding the address connectors AR, AT:

A specification must be made at the AR/AT connectors of the telegram blocks or the direct
transmitter/receiver, for the coupling to the basic drive converter (CU) or communications board (SCB1/2,
CB1), e.g.
AR NS - ‘0’
AT NS - ‘0’
Input Type Explanation, DCCZ Output Type Explanation, DCCZ

conn. conn.
DTS CR- The FB name of the IB DPZ in the QTS B1 Data transmission status to the
MP is specified (board name of the basic drive converter or
basic drive converter) communications board :
CTS The FB name of the IB CSZ in the 0: Data transmission faulted
MP is specified (board name of the 1: O.K.
communications board): A 0 must
be entered if a communications
boad is not used.
279 KOPINI : DCCZ

280 DTS CR - GG
281 CTS CR - CS
282 QTS B1 >

13.3 Error- and alarm function block TFAW

The „Technology Faults and Warnings“ function block transfers the binary signals (V2 type) available at its
input connectors, to the base drive as converter faults (the drive is then shutdown) or alarms.
A set bit generates a fault or alarm.
When the fault/alarm cause has disappeared, the software must reset the appropriate bit. Faults are only
acknowledged on the base drive control board.
The signals present at the TFAW are not influenced by an acknowledgement. The binary values of all
connectors are transferred to the base drive at every cycle time.
Can be configured in the standard FP; multiple configuring not possible!
Input Type Explanation, TFAW Output Type Explanation, TFAW

conn. conn.
DTS CR- Board name of the base drive (DPZ QTF B1 Data transmission status, fault
in the MP) channel
F01 V2 Faults F116 - F131 0: Faulted
(e.g. bit 0 generates F116) 1: Operational
F02 Faults F132 - F147 YTF O2 Error code, fault channel
A01 Alarms A097 - A113 0: Error-free
A02 Alarms A114 - A129 QTA B1 Data transmission status, alarm
channel
YTA O2 Error code, alarm channel
QTS B1 Data transmission status (central
administration)
YTS O2 Error code (central administration)
Error codes, refer to the Manual /1/ Sect. 6!

13.4 Parameter processing

Restrictions:
1.) Parameters defined on the T300 can be read and changed for
- SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES FC/VC (CU1,CU2) only from software release V1.2
(supplied since 7.95).
- SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES SC (CU3) with software release V1.1

(supplied since 9.95).
- SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES VC (CUVC) only from software release V3.11

(supplied since 97).
- SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES MC (CUMC) only from software release V1.2

(supplied since 97).
- SIMOREG DC_MASTER 6RA70 only from software release V1.7
The software release can be read using drive converter parameter r720.1 (CU1, CU2, CU3), r69.1 and
r828.1 (CUVC, CUMC), r60 (6RA70).
2.) Parameters, which represent a time, can presently only be configured with in „ms“ units!
3.) Time-reciprocal connector types, which refer to another cycle time than their own (e.g. R2:T2“ of a
function function block in cycle time T1), presently cannot be defined as parameter.
Remedy: Configure a DUMY function block in the associated reference cycle time
(in the example, T2) and
feed the signal via a $ connection into the required cycle time (in the example T1).
13.4.1 Defining parameters using signal designators

A connector can also be read and changed as parameter. In this case, a signal designator as connector
attribute must be configured in the following form at the input- or output connectors involved:
,’TP_xxx’ with 0<= xxx <= 999 as parameter number
Technology board parameters are displayed as follows, depending on where they are defined on the base
drive operating control panels (PMU, OP1):
at the output connector: „dxxx“ (display, cannot be changed),
at the input connector: „Hxxx“
A parameter at an input connector can only be practically (effectively) changed, if this connector is not
connected-up, i.e., if a constant is configured at the input connector.
A connected input connector can be changed via the parameter, however the value is effective for the
maximum of one cycle time (depending on the execution sequence of the function blocks).
It is not permissible to assign parameter numbers twice!
It is recommended that a parameter is configured with the number „TP_000“ in order to be able to easily
use the OP1.

13.4.2 Reading and changing parameters using PRP

The connectors, defined on the T300 as parameters, can be read and changed using the „Parameter
Reply“ function block. This is simultaneously possible from several sources, for example, from the base
drive:
PMU operator control panel or via the
serial interfaces SST1 (e.g. OP1), SST2 or from
communication boards (CB1, SCB2).
The PRP function block can be configured once in a standard FP and only in a samping time ≥ 100 ms!
The parameter read and change tasks from all of the interfaces are responded to in this cycle time.
Connector types correspond generally directly to the parameter types. Several type conversions are
realized on the T300 due to the resolution and the value range required:
Connector type Parameter type

N2, E2 I4
D2, T2, R2 I4 (O4 is not defined in the base drive (CU))
Input Type Explanation, PRP Output Type Explanation, PRP

conn. conn.
DTS CR- Board name of the base drive NPF O2 Number of configured parameters
(refer to DPZ in the MP) NTF Number of available parameter
CTS Board name of the comm. board names
(refer to CSZ in the MP) NPD Number of parameter numbers
NP O2 Number of the existing parameters which have been assigned twice
(<1000); Conn, reserves the NTD Number of parameter names which
appropriate space in the have been assigned twice
administration tables. More NPE Number of the parameters which
parameters than are actually have not found space in the
available can be specified. administration list as the NP conn. is
LID Selecting 2 different parameter too small
names at the string connectors of NTE Number of unavailable
the TXT-FBs configured tests; parameter names, because not
is also used to select the language: configured with TXT function block
YTB Error code, basic converter channel
0: Selecting texts from the QTB B1 Operating status, basic converter
connectors designated with the channel:
‘TPTxxx’ attribute 0:Faulted
(xxx: Parameter number); 1:Ready
YTC O2 Error code, comm. board channel
<>0: Selecting the connectors with QTC B1 Operating status,
the Tptxxx attribute comm. board channel
YTK O2 Error code, operator panel channel
MEN Defined access rights of all QTK B1 Operating status, operating panel
parameters: channel
0: Parameters can be read and YTS O2 Error code (central administration)
changed, QTS B1 Operating status (central
1: Can only be be read administration)
Error code, refer to the Manual (Section 6 /1/)

13.4.3 Parameter names defined using TXT

Using the TXT text function block, parameters, defined using the signal designator, can be assigned up to
2 parameter names.
The assignment of the parameter names specified here to the parameter numbers is realized via the
attributes attached to the parameter names in the following form:
T1 NS - ‘Drehzahlistwert’ ,’TPT001’
or
T2 NS - ‘speed actual val’ ,’TPt001’
The two different parameter names, assigned to a parameter number are selected via the LID connector
of the PRP function block (refer there).
Input Type Explanation, TXT Output Type Explanation, TXT

conn. conn.
T1 NS- Parameter name 1 None!
T2 Parameter name 2
... ...
T16 Parameter name 16
13.4.4 Configuring example, parameters

22 PARAMS : PRP "Parameter function block"
23 DTS CR - GG
24 CTS CR - CS
25 NP O2 - 200 "No. of parameters"
26 LID O2 - 0
27 MEN B1 < 0 "Inhibit par. changes"
28 NPF O2 > "Number of found par."
29 NTF O2 > "Number of texts found"
30 NPD O2 >
31 NTD O2 >
32 NPE O2 > "Number n. of par. entered"
33 NTE O2 > "Number n. of texts entered"
34 YTB O2 >
35 QTB B1 >
36 YTC O2 >
37 QTC B1 >
38 YTK O2 >
39 QTK B1 >
40 YTS O2 >
41 QTS B1 >
.................
55 P001 : DUMY
56 X N2 < 1.1,SCAL=163.84 "Software release"
57 Y N2 > ,SCAL=163.84,FORM=1 ,'TP_001'
.................
64 TEX000 : TXT
65 T1 NS - 'Synch. contr. SW21','TPT001'
66 T2 NS - 'Language D/E=1/2' ,'TPT002'
67 T3 NS - 'Spec handle. V2/B1','TPT003'
68 T4 NS - ''
69 T5 NS - 'Encoder par. SLAVE','TPT018'
70 T6 NS - 'Encoder par. MASTE','TPT019'
71 T7 NS - ''
72 T8 NS - ''
73 T9 NS - 'Enc. pulse No. SLAVE','TPT010'
74 T10 NS - 'Enc. pulse No. MASTE','TPT011'
.................
80 T16 NS - 'Pos. act. val. MASTER' ,'TPT017'

13.5 Base drive parameters via the comm. board with PTR
If parameters of a base drive (CUx) are to be read or changed via a communications board, the
„Parameter Transport“ PTR function block must be configured. It transfers the parameter orders and
parameter replies via the T300, located between the communications board and the base drive.
The PTR function block is configurable once in a standard FP.
Input Type Explanation, PTR Output Type Explanation, PTR

conn. conn.
DTS CR- Board name of the basic converter YTS O2 Error code
(refer to IB DPZ in the MP) QTS B1 Operating status:
CTS Board name of the comm. board 0: Faulted
(refer to IB CSZ in the MP) 1: Ready
Error code, refer to the Manual /1/ section 6!
269 TRANS : PTR "Param.transport CU <-> CBx"
270 DTS CR - GG
271 CTS CR - CS
272 QTS B1 >
273 YTS O2 >
13.6 Peer-to-peer coupling

A fast serial coupling to partners, for example, T300 and SCB2 boards for SIMOVERT Master Drives as
well as to SIMOVERT P 6SE12 and SIMOREG K 6RA24 drives can be established using the „Peer-to-
peer“ coupling.
For baud rates up to 115.2 kbaud, a maximum of 5 data words can be transferred in full duplex.
Only 1 telegram can be defined in the transmit direction and receive direction, i.e., only one transmit- and
receive function block may be configured.
The net data length of the transmit- and receive function blocks can be different. However, a receiver only
accepts data from a received telegram, if the configured length corresponds with the received telegram
length (LTW- or LT connector).
Different versions are available depending on the particular STRUC version:
STRUC V4.2.3: Configuring with function blocks @PTP01, CTPP, CRPP

(max. baud rate: 115.2kbaud; requires little computation time)
for V4.2.1 to be asked (special libaries KFSLIB, FBSLT1 required)!
STRUC V4.2, V4.2.1 and V4.2.2: Configuring with function block @PTP
(max. baud rate: 38.4kbaud)

13.6.1 Configuring a peer-to-peer telegram with @PTP01, CTPP, CRPP

A peer-to-peer protocol is avaialble with STRUC release V4.2.3, which
- has a high baud rate,

- has minimum telegram delay times and
- only loads the T300 with low computation time.
Initialization:
The @PTP01 function block must be configured in the special FP transmit.
The cycle time can be freely selected, as it only takes over the initialization of the serial interface..
As a result of the 4-wire RS485 interface, the peer-to-peer protocol can only run at connector X134, i.e.
serial interface 2 (connector X02 of the board mask).This „connector“ X02 must be configured, together
with the T300 board names at the CTS connectors of @PTP01, CTPP and CRPP.
Input- Type Explanation @PTP01 Outp.- Type Explanation @PTP01

conn. conn.
CTS CR- T300 board name (refer to MP) and, QTS B1 Operating status:
separated by a point, connector 0: Faulted
„.X02“ 1: O.K.
BDR O2 Baud rate YTS O2 Error/status display:
(coding as for the SCB board):
0: 150 bit/s 7B90H/31632dec:
1: 300 bit/s Init still running (wait for KSIPP0)
2: 600 bit/s 7B91H/31633dec:
3: 1200 bit/s Init error: KML is full
4: 2400 bit/s 7B92H/31634dec:
5: 4800 bit/s Connector is not X02
6: 9600 bit/s 7B93H/31635dec:
7: 19200 bit/s Excessive baud rate ID (>12)
8: 38400 bit/s 7B94H/31636dec:
9: 57600 bit/s Baud rate ID 11 (93750Bd) not
10: 76800 bit/s permitted
11: not permitted (=93750 of the 7B95H/31637dec:
SCB) other KSIPP0- errors (e.g. DUST
12: 115200 bit/s init)

Transmit:
Up to 5 data words can be sent using function block CTPP. It has to be configured in a standard FP.
A send telegram operation is started immediately within the function block processing. The telegram of the
previous cycle time must have been completely transmitted. Thus, it is recommended to adapt the baud
rate as well as the telegram length (both together specify the telegram transmission time) to the cycle time
(refer below, telegram transmission time table).
Computation time required for a 5-word telegram (including the time to transmit all characters): 230µsec
(this includes a processing time of 28µsec /data word.)
Input Type Explanation CTPP Outp. Type Explanation CTPP

conn. conn.
CTS CR- T300 board name (refer to MP) and, QTS B1 Operating status:
separated by a point, connector 0: Faulted
„.X02“ 1: O.K.
LEM O2- Error message limit: If the telegram YTS O2 Error/status display:
cannot be sent within the specified
number of cycle times (e.g.: Due to 7D04H/32004dec:
a low baud rate with respect to the Telegram length configured too long
cycle time), this is signaled in QTS 7D08H/32008dec:
(=0) and YTS Transmitter inhibited (EN conn.)
LTW O2- The net data word quantity to be 7D09 H/32009dec:
transmitted (1 word = 2 bytes); Transmitter still full
maximum number:0 to 5 (from 1.96 7D10H/32016dec:
A change is only effective after the Init still running (wait for KSIPP0)
system has been powered-down 7D11H/32017dec:
and powered-up again! KM name double (configuring)
EN B1 1 enables transmit, 7D12H/32018dec:
0 inhibits transmit Init error: Refer to KML
X1 N2 1st data word 7D13H/32019dec:
X2 N2 2nd data word Init ready, wait for 1st telelgram, as
X3 N2 3rd data word long as LEM>0
X4 N2 4th data word 7D14H/32020dec:
LTW=0
X5 N2 5th data word

Receive:
Telegrams with up to 5 data words can be received with the CRPP function block. It has to be configured
in a standard FP.
The telegram is received in the background, asynchronously to the cycle time of the receive function
block. The cycle time of the receive function block is therefore the maximum delay time between the
telegram being received and the received data being processed.
Computation time required for a 5-word telegram (including all characters being received): 267 µsec
(this includes a processing time of 34 µsec/data word).
Input Type Explanation CRPP Outpu Type Explanation CRPP

conn. tconn.
CTS CR- T300 board name (refer to MP) and, Y1 N2 1st data word
separated by a point, connector Y2 N2 2nd data word
„.X02“ Y3 N2 3rd data word
LEM O2- Error message limit: If a correct Y4 N2 4th data word
telegram has not been received Y5 N2 5th data word
within the specified number of cycle QTS B1 Operating status:
times (e.g.: incorrect length), this is 0: Faulted
signaled in QTS (=0) 1: O.K.
LTW O2- The net data word quantity to be YTS O2 Error/status display:
transmitted (1 word = 2 bytes);
maximum number: 5 7D00H/32000dec:
A change is only effective after the no telegram received after LEM
system has been powered-down expired
and powered-up again! 7D01H/32001dec:
BCC error, as generally the
telegram length of the transmitter is
greater than that of the receiver
7D02H/32002dec:
Telegram length of the receiver is
greater than that of the transmitter
7D03H/32003dec:
Baud rate possibly incorrect
7D04H/32004dec:
Excessive telegram length
configured.
7D10H/32016dec:
Init still running (wait for KSIPP0)
7D11H/32017dec:
KM name double (configuring)
7D12H/32018dec:
Init error: refer to KML
7D13H/32019dec:
Init ready, wait for first telegram, as
long as LEM>0

Telegram transmission times

(examples)
Baud rate Number of net data Telegram
words (LTW conn.) transmission
time
(in ms)
General formula:
for LTW <=3: 9600 1 5.7

t = 1/Baud rate *11 *(2*LTW +3) 2 8
5 16
for LTW >=4: 19200 1 2.8
t = 1/Baud rate *11 *(2*LTW +4) 2 4
5 8
38400 1 1.43
2 2
5 4
115200 1 0.47
2 0.67
5 1.34

13.6.2 Peer-to-Peer Communication in Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2 with @PTP

In STRUC-Version V4.2, V4.2.1 and V4.2.2, the Peer-to-Peer communication has to be realized by
means of the @PTP function block. The data interchange can be configured according to the normal
SIMADYN D mechanism, i.e. using the Telegram Function Blocks @CTD/@CRD oder direct
Transmit/Receive blocks.
In V4.2.3, this configuring method for the Peer-configuring (FB @PTP) is no longer supported!
13.6.2.1 Configuring a Peer-to-Peer Telegram in Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2

Due to the 4-wire RS485-interface, the Peer-to-Peer-Protocol is only available on the T300 Connector
X134, i.e. on Com Port 2 (Connector X02 of the Hardware-Module Mask). This „Connector“ X02 and the
T300 Board Name have to be hooked up to the CTS-Connectors of @PTP, @CTT/@CRT or the direct
Transmit/Receive Blocks respectively.
Only one telegram in transmit direction and one telegram in receive direction can be defined. This is the
reason why only one Send and one Receive Block can be configured at maximum. At the Address
Connectors AT/AR, differring (Telegram-) Names have to be noted as arbitrary strings.
Up to 5 Net-Data Words can be transferred. The net-data length of Transmit and Receive Blocks can
differ. But a reciever only accepts data from a received telegram if the configured receive-telegram length
(LT-Connector, e.g. of the @CRT Block) equals the length of the actually received telegram..
The @PTP block must be configured within the „Send“ Communications FB and in sampling times
between 32 ms and 255 ms. The configured sampling time does not influence the transfer speed.

Input- Type Explanation @PTP Outp.- Type Explanation @PTP

Conn. Conn.
CTS CR- T300-Board Name (refer to. MP) ECL O2 Error Class; Evaluation in
and – separated by a dot - „.X02“ combination with the ECO-
connector Connector;
BDR O2 Baud Rate with the follwing code: ECL>0: Hardware/Software Error
0: 300 Bit/s ECO Error Code:
1: 600 Bit/s ECO=ECL=0: no error;
2: 1200 Bit/s ECO>0 and ECL=0: Configuring
3: 2400 Bit/s Error
4: 4800 Bit/s CDM B1 State of the Communication:
5: 9600 Bit/s 0: Initialization is running
6: 19200 Bit/s 1: Telegram Interchange is running
7: 38400 Bit/s QTS Operating Status:
(differs from @PTP01!) 0: Error pending
TBM Telegram Timeout Time 1: no Error
(„Tlg.-Breakdown-Monitoring“);
In case of expiration, the transceiver
will be disabled. This makes a
monitoring and a „Breakdown
Control“ of a closed multi-drop
Peer-Ring possible.
Setting range: 0 to 32000ms
The timeout monitoring is started
with power-on!
TWU Alarm Cycle Time
(„Time Wake Up“)
Setting rage: 1 to 32000ms
Error Codes: Refer to Manual (Chapter 6 /1/) !
13.6.2.2 Principle of Operation and Time Response in Version V4.2 , V4.2.1

and V4.2.2
After the „Alarm Time“ specified at Connector TWU has been expired, the function block processes an
evetually received telegram and makes the telegram’s net data available for the Receive Function
Block(s) in the „Normal“ FPs. If the Send Funktion Blocks have provided net data in the meantime, this
data will be „packed“ now into a Peer-to-Peer telegram and transmitted.
This Alarm Cycle runs asynchronously to the sample times!
Set the alarm time as short as possible for minimizing the dead times caused by the alarm processing.
This maximizes the time which can be used for the effective data transfer. The minimum allowable value
of the alarm time is 2 ms due to the processing time of approx. 1 ms for the transmit and the receive
routine. So enough processing time will be available for the normal tasks.
Only transmit data actually generated by the Transmit Function Blocks is transmitted. If long alarm and
sampling times and high baud rates (i.e. short telegram transfer times) are configured, telegramm pause
intervals can occur on the transfer line.

13.6.2.3 Peer-to-Peer Configuring example for Version V4.2 / V4.2.1 / V4.2.2

1. In the „Send“ Communication FP:
39 PEER : @PTP
40 CTS CR - D01_P1.X02
41 BDR O2 - 7 "38400 Baud"
42 TBM O2 - 50 "Report a Telegr Loss after 50ms"
43 TWU O2 - 5 "Telegram Processing every 5ms"
44 ECL O2 >
45 ECO O2 >
46 CDM B1 >
47 QTS B1 >
2. In a „normal“ FP:
184 PEERRX : CRD401 "4 Words Receive Data"

185 CTS CR - D01_P1.X02
186 AR NS - 'ADRPEER'
187 MOD B1 - 1
188 LEM O2 - 3
189 Y1 N2 > @TYP=V2, $STWT3P ,INIT=0H6 "1st word received"
190 Y2 N2 > $LSWT3P "2nd word received "
191 Y3 N2 > "3rd word received, not used in this case"
192 Y4 N2 > @TYP=V2, $ZW1T3P "4th word received "
193 QTS B1 >
194 YTS O2 >
.................
133 PEERTX : CTD501 "501: Telegr.Length can be changed after RESET"
134 CTS CR - D01_P1.X02
135 AT NS - 'A_PEER'
136 MOD B1 - 1
137 LEM O2 - 3
138 LT O2 - 4 "Telegr. Length = 4 Words
139 EN B1 < 1 "Transmitter Enable
140 X11 N2 < $TB_CW "Control Word for Master generated by TB"
141 X12 N2 < 50%
142 X13 N2 < BAUST1.Y1
143 X14 N2 < BAUST2.Y
.................
179 X58 N2 < 0%
180 QTS B1 >
181 YTS O2 >

13.7 Erasing the EEPROM

The T300 parameters („H-Parameters“) are reset to their factory values by erasing the nonvolatile
EEPROM parameter memory chip loctated on the MS300 board..
Also in non-standard situations, it can become necessary to erase the EEPROM, e.g. if
- all modifications made should be made „undone“,

(This can also be performed with an EPE funktion block if such a block has been configured
and the board is still functionable)
- if the T300 doesn’t longer start-up correctly after unauthorized modifications of connectors or
parameters had been made.
- if an EEPROM overflow has been occurred.
The T300 stores all technology parameters (H- or 1xxx-parameters) received from a PC download file into
the T300 EEPROM regardless of whether the parameter value is differring from the factory setting or not.
This is due to the SIMADYN D operating system. According to our experience, approx. 250 to 290
parameters can be stored in the EEPROM until an overflow occurs. An EEPROM overflow is signalled by
the SIMOVIS message "Write Error" or, during download, by the message "Not Written".
Please Note: In the EEPROM, binary quantities occupy 6 Bytes, word quantities 7 Bytes and double-word
quantities 9 Bytes. The hardware EEPROM chip mounted on the MS300 memory module has a
parameter capacity of 2000 Bytes.
- If your T300 configured software package has more than 250 to 280 H-Parameters, it is an imperative
procedure to generate a „File of Changed Parameters“ (containing only those parameters which are
differring from the factory settings) which can be used for an error-free parameter download without
EEPROM overflow.
13.7.1 Erasing the EEPROMs if an overflow has been occurred

- SIMOVIS signals a "KON: Writing Error" message if an EEPROM overflow occurs when editing the
SIMOVIS parameter.
- SIMOVIS signals a „Not Written xxx“ message if an EEPROM overflow occurs during a download
procedure.
- The EEPROM can only be erased when the storage mode „Storing in EEPROM“ is changed to „Storing
in RAM“ by clicking on the small RAM symbol.
- Afterwords use the respective H-Parameter for erasing the EEPROM. The number of this „Erase
EEPROM“ parameter depends on the T300 software Configured Package. Refer to the appropriate
manual of your Standard Configured Package (e.g. MS320...380) or the SIMADYN D Function-Block
Catalog to get information on the correct parameter settings for the EEPROM erasing procedure.
Subsequently please switch the electronics power supply off and on again.

13.7.1.1 Erasing the EEPROM in case of memory overflow by means of the

Hex-Monitor
The EEPROM also can be erased by means of the SIMADYN D Hex-Monitor .
In this case two EEPROM Bytes have to be modified via the Hex-Monitor according to the following
procedure:
1. Connect a COM port of your PC to terminal X132 of the T300. Configure your COM port to 9,6kBd and
No Parity Bit by one of the following two alternatives:
a) Use the SIMADYN D SERVICE-Programm: Select the „Hex/Debug-Monitor“ option in the

„Activities“ menue.
b) Launch a terminal emulation program on your PC, e.g. the „Terminal“ programm with DEC VT100
emulation if you are using WINDOWS.
2. Start the Hex-Monitor:

Push the small pushbutton on the T300 board during Power-On and keep it pressed until operating
state °003 is displayed. A Hex-Monitor start-up message should now be displayed on the screen.
3. Use the „S“ command ( „Subsitute“) to change the following memory locations in the EEPROM
memory:
7C00:0=AA
7C00:2=0 (End Specifier)
Type in the following Hex-Monitor command sequence (strictly adhere to the noted command syntax;
<CR> designates the Enter key. XX designates any two arbitrary hexadecimal digits):
S7C00:0 <CR>
Now you will be prompted on the screen. Subsequently type in the following commands:
7C00:0 XX AA, input AA, proceed

7C00:1 XX , go to the next location
7C00:2 XX 0, input 0 and proceed
7C00:3 XX . termination
4. Switch the the electronics power supply OFF and ON again.
13.7.2 Erasing the EEPROM for restoring the factory settings:

- Erase the EEPROM according to chapter 13.7.1. Switching over the storage mode from EEPROM to
RAM is not necessary.
After the EEPROM is erased and power has beeen switched on again, it is highly recommended to
reset those parameters back to „0“ which have been used to accomplish the erasing procedure.

14 Literature
14 Literature
/1/ SIMADYN D „General diagnostics“
Item No.: 465 983.9010.00

14 Literature

15 Order numbers
15 Order numbers
Type: Order No. (MLFB) Designation

T300- 6SE7090-0XX87-4AH0 Hardware package (complete, without software (MSxxx)!)
HW
package
T300 6SE7090-0XX84-0AH2 T300 processor board
SE300 6SE7090-0XX84-3EH0 Terminal function block for T300

SC58 6DD 3461-0AB0 Round cable to transfer analog- and pulse encoder signals
between SE300 and T300, shielded, 40 core
SC60 6DD 3461-0AE0 Round cable to transfer binary signals between SE300 and
T300, shielded, 34-core
MS300 6SE7098-0XX84-0AH0 MS300 memory module, empty

MS320 6SE7098-2XX84-0AH0 MS300 memory module with standard software package
„Axial winder“ AW
MS340 6SE7098-4XX84-0AH0 MS300 memory module with standard software package
„Angular synch.“ WGL
MS360 6SE7098-6XX84-0AH0 S300 memory module with standard software package „Multi-
motor drive“ MMA
MS380 6SE7098-8XX84-0AH0 S300 memory module with standard software package
„Positioning“ POS
Doc. T300 6SE7087-6CX84-0AH1 Description of the T300 board and general software
(dt.,engl.)
Doc. T300 6SE7087-7CX84-0AH1 Description of the T300 board and general software (fr.)
Dok. AW 6SE7080-0CX84-2AH1 Description, standard app. software. axial winder (dt.)

Dok. WGL 6SE7080-0CX84-4AH1 Description, standard app. software. ang. synch. (dt.)
Dok. MMA 6SE7080-0CX84-6AH1 Description, standard app. software.multi-motor drive (dt.)
Dok. POS 6SE7080-0CX84-8AH1 Description, standard app. software. positioning (dt.)
Doc. AW 6SE7087-6CX84-2AH1 Description, standard app. software. axial winder (engl.)

Doc. WGL 6SE7087-6CX84-4AH1 Description, standard app. software. ang. synch. (engl.)
Doc. MMA 6SE7087-6CX84-6AH1 Description, standard app. software.multi-motor drive (engl.)
Doc. POS 6SE7087-6CX84-8AH1 Description, standard app. software. positioning (engl.)
Doc. WGL 6SE7087-7CX84-4AH1 Description, standard app. software. ang. synch. (fr.)

15 Order numbers
1
MD320 6SW1798-2XX84-0AH0 MS320 standard app. software axial winder on a 3 /2 inch
floppy disk
(without documentation)
MD340 6SW1798-4XX84-0AH0 MS340 standard app. software angular synchronous

1
control on a 3 /2 inch floppy disk
1
MD360 6SW1798-6XX84-0AH0 MS360 standard app. software multi-motor drive on a 3 /2
inch floppy disk
1
MD380 6SW1798-8XX84-0AH0 MS380 standard app. software positioning on a 3 /2 inch
floppy disk

Bisher sind folgende Ausgaben erschienen: Ausgabe Sachnummer/
Materialnummer
02.96 Sach.Nr. 477 407.4000.76
12.99 A5E00857366
Ausgabe 12.99 besteht aus folgenden Kapiteln:

Kapitel Änderungen Seiten Ausgabe
zahl datum
0 Definitionen überarbeitete Ausgabe 2 12.99
1 Produktbeschreibung überarbeitete Ausgabe 4 12.99
2 Montieren, Anschließen überarbeitete Ausgabe 18 12.99
3 Technische Daten überarbeitete Ausgabe 10 12.99
4 Projektierung überarbeitete Ausgabe 2 12.99
5 Projektierung der T300 für SIMOVERT 6SE70 und DC_MASTER 6RA70 überarbeitete Ausgabe 20 12.99
6 Literatur überarbeitete Ausgabe 2 12.99
7 Bestellnummern überarbeitete Ausgabe 2 12.99
The following editions have been published so far: Edition Internal Item Number
02.96 Item Nr. 477 407.4000.76
12.99 A5E00857366
Version 12.99 consists of the following chapters:

Chapter Changes Pages Version
date
8 Definitions reviewed edition 2 12.99
9 Product description reviewed edition 4 12.99
10 Installation, connecting-up reviewed edition 18 12.99
11 Technical data reviewed edition 10 12.99
12 Application software reviewed edition 2 12.99
13 Configuring the T300 for SIMOVERT 6SE70 and DC_MASTER 6RA70 reviewed edition 20 12.99
14 Literature reviewed edition 2 12.99
15 Order numbers reviewed edition 2 12.99
Herausgegeben
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Geschäftsgebiet Drehzahlveränderbare Antriebe
Postfach 3269, D-91050 Erlangen
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Änderungen vorbehalten Bestell-Nr.: 6SE7087-6CX84-0AH1
Standard Software Package
Axial Winder MS320 for T300 technology board
for SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES 6SE70/71
Software release 1.5
Operation instructions
Edition 04.99 Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX84-2AH1
This Instruction manual is available in the following langages:
Sprache German
Language
Bestell-Nr.
6SE7080-0CX84-2AH1
Order-No.
English
Contents
0 Warning information and product limitation.........................................................0-1
1 Overview ..................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 General overview............................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Validity ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2.1 Hardware/Software requirement ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.2 T300 technology board................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.2.3 Standard software package on floppy disk ................................................................................. 1-9
1.2.4 Interface board ............................................................................................................................ 1-9
1.3 Overview of the closed-loop winder control................................................................... 1-10
1.3.1 Winder control features (excerpt) ............................................................................................. 1-10
2 Interfaces .................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Interface between the technology board - and basic converter ....................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Setpoints, technology board > converter..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Actual values, drive converter > technology board ..................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Interface, automation ⇔ technology board ..................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1 Setpoints, automation ⇒ technology board ................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.2 Actual values, technology board ⇒ automation .......................................................................... 2-5
2.2.3 Setpoints/actual values via the serial interface ........................................................................... 2-6
3 Terminal assignment ..............................................................................................3-1

3.1 Connector X6, binary inputs and outputs ........................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Binary inputs................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2 Binary outputs ............................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Connector X5, analog inputs and outputs ....................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 Analog inputs............................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.2 Analog outputs ............................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3 Pulse encoders ............................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 Information regarding pulse encoder types................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.2 Pulse encoder inputs................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Connecting example ....................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.1 Diagram and the required control signals ................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.2 Control sequences ...................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.5 Serial interface X01 ...................................................................................................... 3-12
3.6 Serial interface X02 ...................................................................................................... 3-13
Siemens AG Axial winder I

Manual
Contents
4 Function description .............................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Closed-loop control (block diagram 4)......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Setpoints (block diagrams 11-13)................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.3 Control signals (block diagrams 16/18) ....................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Selecting the speed actual value (block diagram 13)...................................................... 4-3
4.3 Selecting the speed setpoint input (block diagram 5)...................................................... 4-3
4.4 Stretch compensation for the speed setpoint (block diagr.5) .......................................... 4-3
4.5 Maneuvering speed setpoint (block diagr.5) ................................................................... 4-4
4.6 Winder overspeed protection (block diagr.5) .................................................................. 4-4
4.7 "Winding from above / below" operating modes ............................................................. 4-4
4.8 Speed setpoint for winder operation (block diagr.5)........................................................ 4-5
4.8.1 System operation......................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.9 RPM / line speed setpoints in local operation (block diagr.5) .......................................... 4-5
4.9.1 Local operating modes (block diagr. 16/17) ................................................................................ 4-5
4.10 Speed control ............................................................................................................... 4-6
4.10.1 Influence, speed controller (block diagr. 6)................................................................................ 4-6
4.10.2 Kp adaption................................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.11 Generating the torque setpoint (block diagr. 6)............................................................. 4-7
4.11.1 Compensation factors (block diagr.9)........................................................................................ 4-7
4.12 Setpoint for closed-loop tension/position control (block diagr.7/8) ................................ 4-7
4.12.1 Winding hardness control (block diagr.7) .................................................................................. 4-7
4.12.2 Standstill tension (block diagr.7)................................................................................................ 4-8
4.13 Closed-loop tension / dancer roll control (block diagrs.7,9)........................................... 4-9
4.13.1 Kp adaption.............................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.14 Derivative action, tension/position act. value (block diagr.7) ....................................... 4-10
4.15 Web break detection (block diagr.7) ........................................................................... 4-11
4.16 Freely-connectable limit value monitor (block diagr.10) .............................................. 4-11
4.17 Analog outputs (block diagr.10) .................................................................................. 4-12
4.18 Diameter computer (block diagr.9).............................................................................. 4-13
4.19 Gearbox stage changeover ........................................................................................ 4-14
4.20 Speed actual value calibration .................................................................................... 4-15
4.21 Power-up control (block diagr.19 ) .............................................................................. 4-15
4.22 Motorized potentiometer functions (block diagr.19) .................................................... 4-18
4.23 Monitoring functions and messages (block diagr.20) .................................................. 4-19
4.23.1 Overspeed ............................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.23.2 Overcurrent.............................................................................................................................. 4-19
4.23.3 Stall protection ......................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.24 Splice control (block diagr.21)..................................................................................... 4-20
4.25 Length measurement and length hold (block diagr.13) ............................................... 4-22
II Siemens AG Axial winder

Manual
Contents
5 Configuring instructions ........................................................................................5-1

5.1 Formulas for a winder drive ............................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Calculating the parameters for inertia compensation ...................................................... 5-5
5.2.1 Determining parameter H228 for the fixed moment of inertia..................................................... 5-5
5.2.2 Determining parameter H227 for the variable moment of inertia................................................ 5-7
5.3 Selecting the winder ratio (winder range)........................................................................ 5-9
5.4 Power and torque ........................................................................................................... 5-9
5.5 Selecting the motor....................................................................................................... 5-10
5.6 Dimensioning the gearbox ............................................................................................ 5-10
5.7 Selecting the converter ................................................................................................. 5-10
5.8 Selecting the closed-loop control concept..................................................................... 5-10
5.8.1 Indirect closed-loop tension control........................................................................................... 5-10
5.8.2 Direct closed-loop tension control using dancer rolls................................................................ 5-11
5.8.3 Direct closed-loop tension control with tension measuring transducer ..................................... 5-11
5.8.4 Closed-loop constant speed control.......................................................................................... 5-11
5.8.5 Selecting a suitable closed-loop control concept ...................................................................... 5-12
5.9 Defining the polarity ...................................................................................................... 5-12
5.10 Configuring example: Winder with indirect closed-loop tension control....................... 5-15
5.11 Configuring example: Unwind stand indirect closed-loop tension control .................... 5-18
5.12 Configuring example: Winder with dancer roll, closed-loop speed correction control .. 5-21
5.13 Configuring example: Unwind stand with dancer roll, closed-loop speed correct. cntrl 5-24
5.14 Configuring example: Winder with tension transducer ................................................ 5-27
5.15 Configuring example: Unwind stand with tension transducer ...................................... 5-30
5.16 Configuring example: Winder with closed-loop constant speed control...................... 5-33
6 Parameters...............................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Parameter handling ........................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Parameter lists................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1 SIMADYN D connector types ...................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Parameter types.......................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.3 Parameter lists ............................................................................................................................ 6-4
7 Basic drive converter parameters .........................................................................7-1

7.1 Parameterizing SIMOVERT VC and MC using the CUVC and CUMC modules.............. 7-1
7.2 Parameterizing SIMOVERT VC and SC with the CU2 and CU3 modules ....................... 7-4
7.3 Free function blocks CUVC, CUMC ................................................................................ 7-6
Siemens AG Axial winder III

Manual
Contents
8 Commissioning the winder.................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Commissioning information ............................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Equipment required ..................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Commissioning using the basic converter operator control panel ............................................... 8-1
8.1.3 Commissioning with SIMOVIS for Windows................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.3.1 Creating the data base for a technology type......................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3.2 T300 parameterization ........................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.3.3 Important notes ...................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.4 Establish factory setting............................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2 Commissioning the winder functions............................................................................... 8-6
8.2.1 Checking the speed actual value adjustment .............................................................................. 8-6
8.2.2 Friction torque compensation (block diagram 8) ......................................................................... 8-7
8.2.2.1 Friction characteristic ............................................................................................................. 8-8
8.2.3 Inertia compensation (block diagram 8) ...................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.3.1 Constant moment of inertia, H228 ....................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.3.2 Variable moment of inertia, H227 ........................................................................................ 8-11
8.2.4 Setting the speed control Kp adaption....................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.4.1 Setting for CUVC and CUMC............................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.4.2 Setting for CU2 and CU3 ..................................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.5 Setting closed-loop tension,dancer roll posit. cntrl. (block diagrs.7,8)....................................... 8-13
8.2.6 Tension controller setting, Kp adaption ..................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.7 Setting the saturation setpoint H145.......................................................................................... 8-15
8.2.8 Setting the braking characteristic H256-259.............................................................................. 8-15
8.2.9 Replacing peer to peer by SIMOLINK ....................................................................................... 8-16
9 Diagnostic LED, Alarms, Faults............................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Diagnostic LED on T300................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 T300 Faults and alarms .................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3 Operation without communications board (CB1/CBP, SCB1/SCB2) ............................... 9-3
9.4 Operation without Peer-to-Peer ...................................................................................... 9-3
9.5 Alarms and Faults of the winder ..................................................................................... 9-3
9.6 Masking of alarms and faults .......................................................................................... 9-3
9.7 Frequently occurring faults/errors and the associated counter-measures:...................... 9-4
10 SIMADYN D functions......................................................................................... 10-1

10.1 STRUC G graphic diagram display ............................................................................. 10-1
10.1.1 Sheet structure ........................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1.2 Structure and display of a function block ................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.3 Connector supply for the function blocks................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.4 Information in the function package......................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Monitor - operator control ........................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1 Start-up using a start-up program............................................................................................ 10-4
11 Others .................................................................................................................. 11-1

11.1 Terminology/abbreviations.......................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Literature .................................................................................................................... 11-2
12 Changes............................................................................................................... 12-1
13 Short parameter list............................................................................................ 13-1
14 Appendix: Block diagrams and STRUC G diagrams ....................................... 14-1
IV Siemens AG Axial winder

Manual
0 Warning information
0 Warning information and product limitation

WARNING
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in severe personal injury
or property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around this equipment after
becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings, safety notices and
maintenance procedures contained herin.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper
transportation, storage, installation and assembly, and on careful operation
and maintenance.
Pay particular attention to the warnings in the SIMOVERT Instruction Manuals.
Definitions
A "qualified person" as used in this Manual and in the warnings on the products themselves is one who is
familiar with the installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of the equipment and the hazards
involved. In addition, he/she has the following qualifications:
1. Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, ground and tag circuits and equipment in
accordance with established safety practices.
2. Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety
practices.
3. Is trained in rendering first aid.
• DANGER
"Danger" as used in this Manual and in the warnings on the products themselves means that death,
grievous injury or extensive damage to property will occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.
• WARNING
"Warning" as used in this Manual and in the warnings on the products themselves means that death,
grievous injury or extensive damage to property may occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.
• CAUTION
"Caution" as used in this Manual and in the warnings on the products themselves means that minor
personal injury or damage to property may occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.
Siemens AG Axial winder 0-1

Manual
• NOTE
"Note" as used in this Manual highlights an important item of information about the product or a section of
the instructions which requires careful attention.
CAUTION
The boards contain components which can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge. Before touching an electronic board, the human body must be
electrically discharged. This can be simply done by touching a conductive,
grounded object immediately beforehand (e.g. a bare metal cabinet
component, protective conductor contact).
WARNING
or property damage.
maintenance procedures contained herein.
and maintenance.
The warning information supplied with the SIMOVERT Instruction Manuals
must be observed.
NOTE
This Instruction Manual does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, not to provide
for every possibly contingency to be met in connection with the installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise, which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchasers purposes, please contact your local Siemens office..
The contents of this Manual shall neither become part of nor modify an prior or existing agreement,
commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The
warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any
statements contained here do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.
0-2 Siemens AG Axial winder

Manual
1 Overview
1 Overview
1.1 General overview
The digital SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES 6SE70/71 can be expanded by a T300 technology board and
various interface boards. Standard software packages are available for these boards for frequently
occuring applications, e.g. angular synchronism, multi-motor drive or axial winder control. These software
packages are supplied as EPROM modules. If the technological functions of the standard software
packages have to be expanded to fulfill specific customer requirements, then software packages can be
obtained on floppy disk, and modified using SIMADYN D tools from (STRUC release 4.2).
The standard software packages can run with and without interface boards (e.g. CBP/CB1, SB2).
For operation without interface board, warning A103 is output; it can be suppressed per parameter, refer
to Section 9.2.
Note: For Help and commissioning see also

1. Design see Sec. 5.10 to 5.16
2. Block diagrams Üp, refer to the Appendix
3. Winder software package is controlled via CBP/ CB1, SCB1/ SCB2 and terminals,
refer to the Block diagram, Sheets 16 to 18
1.2 Validity
This User Manual is valid for the MS320 "Axial winder" software package, release 1.50. Differences to
previous releases are listed in Section 12 "Changes".
With the exception of the expanded functionality, described in the ”Changes” section, this software
release is compatible to the previous releases. This is the reason that this Manual can be used for the
start-up of previous versions.
The MS320 standard software package can only run on the T300 technology board.
The functions described here regarding SIMADYN D and the T300 technology board refer exclusively to
the standard MS320 axial winder software package, and do not represent a general statement regarding
SIMADYN D or the technology board. For example, "fastest cycle time 8 ms", only means that a faster
cycle time is not used in the MS320 standard software package.
This standard software package is enabled for the following SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES (6SE70,
6SE71) drive converters described in the next section.

Manual
1 Overview
1.2.1 Hardware/Software requirement
MASTERDRIVES basic units




CAUTION: When a t300 board is installed in a SIMOVERT SC unit, the pulse frequency of
the converter must not be increased above the factory setting value of P761 =
5kHz to avoid overloading the convertre processor.

Manual
1 Overview
Communication boards
The standard software packages can run with and without communication board (CB1/CBP or SCB1/2).
In this case the parameter H011 and H012 ( Alarm-/ Fault mask ) has to be set.
PROFIBUS-DP interface CBP , Software release ≥ 1.0

(middle location). Communication boards which are designed as Mini-Slot-Boards (e.g. CBP,
CBC) must additionally be mounted in Slot "G" of an ADB Adaption Bord before inserted in
mounting location 3. The T300 can not communicate with a communication board mounted on
he CU ( in slot A or C ).

SCB1 board

CAUTION: - An optinal SLB SIMOLINK Interface Board must be mounted in a slot on the CUVC or
CUMC base electronics board, most preferably in Slot A.
The combination T300 and SLB SIMOLINK Interface mounted in location 3 is not
possible!
The SLB borad communicates directly with the base unit. Signal interconnections to the
T300 board must be softwired via Binectors-/ Connectors.
- Example for Binectors-/ Connectors softwiring, refere to Section 8.2.9.
- A T300 board with Hardware release ≥ B, or newer, is needed for use with an SLB
SIMOLINK interface board. The correct hardware release code can be detected on the
component side of the T300 in the neighbourhood of the lower backplane connector.
Note: MASTERDRIVES basic drive parameter and T300 Parameter can be read and write
thrue all the serial Interfaces ( with the exception of Peer-to-Peer interface and
SIMOLINK interface board).

Manual
1 Overview
Allowed mounting combinations / Mounting positions
electronics box.
Mounting Positions
1 3 2
A F Electronics
Box
Data Flow
C G Don't use slot F
- CUVC - CBx mounted - T300

- CUMC on ADB Adap-
tion Board
- CB1
- SCB1
- SCB2

location 3. The T300 can not communicate with a communication board mounted on the CU ( in slot A
or C ).
CAUTION: A T300 board with Hardware release ≥ B, or newer, is needed for use with an SLB SIMOLINK
interface board. The correct hardware release code can be detected on the component side of
the T300 in the neighbourhood of the lower backplane connector.

Manual
1 Overview
T300 parameter settings


A PC or programmer with the SIMOVIS service program (refer also to section 8.1.3)
Optional OP1S plaintext operator device

Manual
1 Overview
1.2.2 T300 technology board

The T300 technology board is a processor board which can be freely configured using STRUC. It is
compatible to SIMADYN D and is especially designed for applications with 6SE70/71 SIMOVERT drive
converters. The function of the boards is defined using the function block-oriented STRUC L / STRUC G
programming language. The application software is programmed in a program memory submodule, which
is inserted on the processor board. An EEPROM is provided on the program memory submodule to store
parameter changes. Communications with the basic converter is realized via a parallel interface which is
implemented as DUAL PORT RAM (DPR).
Processor / clock frequency 80C186 / 20 MHz

RAM memory 128 KByte
Comm. with the converter Parallel bus, dual port RAM 2 kbyte
Program memory submodule MS300 with 512 kbyte EPROM and 2 kbyte EEPROM
Binary inputs 16 non-floating 24 V
Binary outputs 8 non-floating 24 V
Analog inputs 7 11 bits + sign ± 10 V (differential inputs)
Analog outputs 4 11 bit + sign ± 10 V, 10 mA
Serial interfaces 2 1 * RS232 and RS485 (2 wire)

1 * RS485 (2- or 4 wire)
Pulse encoder inputs 2 2 * track A,B, zero, fmax = 400 kHz
Table 1.2.1: Overview of the T300 technology board. For details refer to the Instruction Manual and T300 connecting-up diagram,
refer to Fig. 1.2.2.
The following components are required to operate the winder module:
Product description Comment Order No.

T300 technology board 6SE7090-0XX87-4AH0
including SC58 and SC60 connecting
cables, SE300 terminal block and
German/English Instruction Manual of the
modules
Local bus adapter LBA Is used to install T300 6SE7090-0XX84-4AH0
for MASTER DRIVES electronics box and possibly a
communications board
Adaption board ADB Is used to install a 6SE7090-0XX84-0KA0

for the mounting of the CBP board communications board
MS320 axial winder software package 6SE7098-2XX84-0AH0

on a memory module without Manual
Manual, MS320 axial winder english 6SE7087-6CX84-0AH1
or or
Handbuch Achswickler MS320 german 6SE7080-0CX84-2AH1

Manual
1 Overview
The individual components are also available as spare parts:

T300 Instruction Manual, German/English 6SE7087-6CX84-0AH0
SC58 connecting cables 6DD3461-0AB0
SC60 connecting cables 6DD3461-0AE0
SE300 terminal block 6SE7090-0XX84-3EH0
Further the following are available, if the standard software package is to be modified:
- STRUC L PT to implement dedicated functions in a list form. This can run on a PC under WINDOWS.
- STRUC G PT to implement dedicated functions in a graphics form. This can run on a PC under
SCO-UNIX.
- Prommer for memory modules with connection via a PC parallel interface.
- STRUC service program for the symbolic monitor.
- STRUC axial winder software package on floppy disk.
Also refer to section 1.2.3 and Catalog DA65.10 for precise data.

Manual
1 Overview
+24V +24V
Fine
pulse
+15V
+15V HTL-level, max.
Rough Zero Zero
pulse pulse 90° 0° pulse 90° 0° 400 kHz input frequency
X 5 . 538 537 535 533 531 540 539 548 547 545 543 541 549 input current: 8mA per chanel
+15V
X133
6
X5 7
501
+ A RS485, 2-wire
±10V 502 - D
T/Rx+
e.g. start-up program
503 with PC / PG
+ 9
±10V A
504 - T/Rx-
D 10 Either RS232 or
505 RS485 interface
+ X132
±10V A can be used
506 - RxD 1
D TTL
7 analog inputs 507 TxD 2
differential inputs + A RS232
±10V 508 3
11 bits + sign - D
±10V / 10kΩ 4
511
±10V
+ A 5
512 - D X134
RS485, 4-wire
513 Microprocessor
+ A Tx+ 13
±10V 514 - CPU:
D Tx- 14
80C186
+ 20MHz Rx+ 11
±10V A (Peer-to-Peer)
516 - D Rx- 12
X6
15
+24V 610
11 bit + sign X5
+
601
D 509
602 A
510
603
24VDC D
(input current: 605 A
520
8 mA typ)
606 4 analog outputs
D 521 11 Bit + sign
607 ±10V / 10mA
A
608 522
D 523
+24V 630
A
524
+
611 X6
Slot for the 639 +24V
612
memory 631
613 module, e.g.
632
8 binary inputs 614
MS300
24VDC 633
(input current : 615 8 binary outputs
8mA typ) 634 24VDC / max. 100mA.
616 40mA base load for the
635
617 external P24-supply,
636
which can also come from
618 637 the basic drive converter
638
640
1/2 LBA MASTER DRIVES

Communication- 1/2 LBA
basic drive conv.
board, e.g. Dual- Dual- CUVC, CUMC,
CBP with ADP, Port- Port- VC oder SC
CB1, SCB1 RAM RAM
oder SCB2
X135 X137
terminal series X5, X6:connect at terminal bloc SE300.

terminal series X132, X133, X134: connect at T300.
Figure 1.2.2: Connecting-up

Manual
1 Overview
1.2.3 Standard software package on floppy disk

The source codes of the MS320 standard software package are available as STRUC files on floppy disk
(designation, MD320). When required, the angular synchronous control function can be adapted to
specific requirements using conventional SIMADYN D resources.
Components to adapt the standard software package with STRUC:
Designation Explanation MLFB / Order No.

1
MD320 MS320 angular synchronous control on a 3 /2 inch floppy 6SW1798-2XX84-0AH0
disk
MS300 EPROM for T300 -empty- 6SE7098-0XX84-0AH0
PP1X Parallel Programmer (PC-) external 6DD1672-0AD0
UP3 Programming adapter for MS47/MS300 6DD3462-0AB0
STRUC A STRUC version 4.2.4 or higher is Refer to Catalog DA99
required
If required, start-up program Refer to Catalog DA99
(SIMOVIS, IBS/SERVICE-program)
Table 1.2.3: Components to adapt the standard software package using STRUC
1.2.4 Interface board

For all applications, which require a coupling between the SIMOVERT 6SE70/71 drive converter units
(with or without technology board) to a higher-level automation system, then various interface boards are
used, depending on the bus protocol used. Thus, it is possible to read and change setpoints and actual
values, technological- and basic drive converter parameters from the automation system.
PROFIBUS DP is the preferred communications type. Interface modules CBP with ADP or CB1 are
required.

Manual
1 Overview
1.3 Overview of the closed-loop winder control

The standard "axial winder" software package, allows, using the appropriate converters and technology
boards, winders and unwinders to be engineered for the widest range of applications, for example, plastic
foil machines, all types of printing machines, coating systems, paper finishing systems, coilers for wire
drawing machines, textile machines, and sheet steel coilers.
1.3.1 Winder control features (excerpt)

− Suitable for both winders and unwinders with and without flying roll change for flying splice
mechanical design.
− Flexible as it is possible, within the axial winder software package, to freely connect analog and binary
inputs, analog outputs and sections of the dual port RAM to the interface board and the basic
drive converter.
− Direct closed-loop tension control (using a web tension transducer or position sensing with a
dancer roll) or indirect closed-loop tension control via the torque actual value.
− Either a triggerable speed controller (tension controller acts on the motor torque) or a speed
correction technique (tension controller acts directly on the speed setpoint) can be selected.
− Diameter calculation with a control function for "set diameter" and "hold diameter", the diameter
actual value is stored in a NOVRAM in a non-volatile fashion when the power fails;
the diameter calculation is realized integrating, thus guaranteeing an extremely precise and stable
diameter actual value and a good overall control characteristics. The maximum rate of change of the
diameter actual value depends on the diameter.
− The tension controller- and speed controller gain are adapted as a function of the diameter.
− The winding hardness control can be parameterized via a polygon characteristic with 5 points, as a
function of the diameter.
The characteristic gradient is fixed or can be entered via a reference value. The thus obtained tension
setpoint can also control a dancer roll control via an analog output.
− Speed-dependent friction compensation using a polygon characteristic with 5 points which can be
parameterized.
− Acceleration pre-control as a function of the diameter as well as web width, gearbox stage and
material thickness. The thickness can be automatically "learnt".
− Tension pre-control as a function of the diameter and tension setpoint.
− A pulse encoder can be connected to measure the web speed.
− Constant line speed control possible (e. g. master drive of a winder).
− Winder-related open-loop control with alarm- and fault evaluation.
− Web break signal, if parameterized, which inhibits the tension controller and diameter calculation.
− Inching and crawl.
− Automatic standstill tension signal input.
− Two motorized potentiometers which can be flexibly used. One of these potentiometers can store the
output value in a non-volatile fashion at power failure.
− Shutdown without overshoot for a fast stop along a braking characteristic.
− Tachometer to sense the diameter actual value.

Manual
2 Interfaces
2 Interfaces
2.1 Interface between the technology board - and basic converter
Data transfer between the T300 technology board and the basic converter is realized through a parallel
interface (DUAL PORT RAM). The process data - i.e. the setpoints and actual values - are cyclically
written into and read-out of the technology board and basic converter in the fastest cycle time.
Data is transferred in 16-bit words (2 bytes).
For the standard function package, the basic converter has to have a specific parameterization, also refer
to Section 7 and the 6SE70/71 Instruction Manual.
2.1.1 Setpoints, technology board > converter

The technology board transfers a total of 16 words to the basic drive converter. The setpoints required by
the converter are selected by parameterization. The transferred control word is formed from the control
word from the automation (higher-level open-loop control, data transfer via bus and interface board) and
from the T300 terminals and fixed values.
Transferred value Word No. Explanation

Control word 1 1 Hex
Speed setpoint 2 100% = rated speed
Unused 3 Fixed, 0%
Unused 4 Fixed, 0 hex
Supplementary torque setpoint 5 100% = rated torque
Positive torque limit 6 100% = rated torque
Negative torque limit 7 100% = rated torque
Kp adaption factor 8 1 = 400 hex
Status word 1 MS320 9 For expansion
Status word 2 MS320 10 For expansion
Select value 1 MS320 11 For expansion
Table 2.1.1.a: Values transferred between the T300 → 6SE70/71

Manual
2 Interfaces
Control Significance for the basic converter Source or fixed value

word
bit
0 ON (main contactor) 1 = ON PLC or T300 terminal
1 /OFF2 (voltage-free) 0 = OFF2 1) PLC or T300 terminal
2 /OFF3 (fast stop) 0 = OFF3 1) PLC or T300 terminal
3 Enable operation 1 = enable PLC or T300 terminal
4 /Inhibit ramp-function generator 0 = inhibit Fixed 1
5 Ramp-function generator STOP 1 = STOP Fixed 0
6 Ramp-function gen. setpoint enable 1 = enable Fixed 1
7 Acknowledge fault 1 = acknowledge PLC
8 Inching 1 ON 1 = ON Fixed 0
9 Inching 2 ON 1 = ON Fixed 0
10 Control from PLC 1 = yes Fixed 1
11 Clockwise phase sequence Fixed 0
12 Counter-clockwise phase sequence Fixed 0
13 Raise motorized potentiometer Fixed 0
14 Lower motorized potentiometer Fixed 0
15 Fault external 1 Fixed 0
Table 2.1.1.b: Control word, T300 → 6SE70/71
1) /OFF2 and /OFF3 are always effective from each source in the basic drive converter
2.1.2 Actual values, drive converter > technology board

The technology board receives a total of 16 words from the basic drive converter. The sequence and
contents are defined using P694(CU2,CU3), P734(CUVC,CUMC). The transferred status word 1 is
logically combined with the T300 status messages and transferred to the automation. Various status bits
are evaluated in the software.
Transferred value Word No. Explanation

Status word 1 1 Hex
Speed actual value 2 100% = rated speed
Any 3 Unused
Status word 2 4 Hex, unused
Torque setpoint 5 100% = rated torque
Torque actual value 6 100% = rated torque
Select value 1 from the CU 7 100% = 4000H
Select value 2 from the CU 8 100% = 4000H
Control word 1 from the CU 9 For expansion
Control word 2 from the CU 10 For expansion
Setpoint 1 from the CU 11 For expansion
Table 2.1.2.a : Actual values transferred between the 6SE70/71 and T300

Manual
2 Interfaces
Status word 1 bit Significance Acts on

0 Ready-to power-up 1=ready Power-up control
1 Ready 1=ready Power-up control
2 Operation enabled 1=enabled Contr. enable signals
3 Fault 1=fault Power-up control
4 OFF2 is active 1=inactive Power-up control
5 OFF3 is active 1=inactive Power-up control
6 Power-on inhibit 1=inhibit -
7 Alarm 1=alarm -
8 Setp./act. val. diff. within tol. bandw. 1=yes -
9 Control requested 1=yes Contr. enable signals
10 f/n limit reached 1=yes -
11 Fault, undervoltage 1=yes -
12 Main cont. energized 1=yes -
13 Ramp-function generator active 1=yes -
14 Clockwise rotating field 1=yes -
15 Kinetic buffering active 1=yes -
Table 2.1.2.b: Status word1, 6SE70/71 → T300
2.2 Interface, automation ⇔ technology board

Note:
The software package can be operated with and without interface board. If the interface
board is not used, parameters H011 and H012 (alarm/fault suppression) must be
appropriately set (also refer to Section 9.3).
For 6SE70/71, different interface boards can be used as coupling to the higher-level automation unit,
depending on the particular protocol.
Data transfer between the interface boards and the technology board is realized via the dual port RAM.
Process data (setpoints and actual values) are written into and read out of the T300 in the fastest cycle
time (8 ms). Parameter handling runs in 16 x the sampling time (i.e. 128ms).
2.2.1 Setpoints, automation ⇒ technology board

The standard MS320 software package expects a maximum of 8 words of process data (6 setpoints and
2 control words) from a higher-level automation system. The transferred setpoints can be freely-
connected within the software package so that they are not assigned a fixed significance (refer to the
overview diagram, Figs 11-13). The number of process data transferred depends on the particular
application; the telegram net contents can be freely selected as the setpoints can be freely connected.
The telegram structure for SINEC L2-DP (6 process data with parameter handling) and USS (8 process
data with parameter handling) are shown in Table 2.2.1.a.

Manual
2 Interfaces
Data word No. in the receive telegram Significance

PROFIBUS DP USS - protocol
PPO 1,2,5 PPO 3,4 PKW=4 PKW=0
1 - 1 - Parameter ID
2 - 2 - Index
3 - 3 - Parameter value, high word
4 - 4 - Parameter value, low word
5 1 5 1 Control word 1 from CB
6 2 6 2 Setpoint 1 from CB
8 4 8 4 Control word 2 from CB
11 - 11 7 Setpoint 5 from CB
12 - 12 8 Setpoint 6 from CB
For setpoints, which are to be transferred to the T300, the following is always valid: 4000h=100%
Table 2.2.1.a: Telegram structure, automation → technology board
Control word Significance Effect / explanation

1 bit
0 ON 1 = ON Converter on, sys. operational
1 /OFF2 (voltage-free) 0 = OFF Transfer to the converter
2 /OFF3 (fast stop) 0 = OFF Transfer to the converter
3 System start Contr. enable, sys. operational
Speed contr. enable, basic conv. 1 = start
4 Inhibit ramp-function generator 1 = inhibit RFG output=0
5 Hold ramp-function generator 0 = hold Hold RFG
6 Enable setpoint 1 = free Inject setpoint
7 Acknowledge fault 1 = acknowledge Transfer to the converter
8 Inching 1 1 = ON Inching, local forwards
9 Inching 2 1 = ON Inching, local reverse
10 Control from the PLC 1 = yes*) CB accepts setpoints
11 Tension controller on 1 = ON Switch-in cl.-loop tens. control
12 Tension controller, inhibit 1 = inhibited Tension controller output = 0
13 Standstill tension on 1 = ON Switch-in standstill tension
14 Set diameter 1 = set Accept setting diameter
15 Hold diameter 1 = hold Inhibit diameter computer
*) is not evaluated by T300
Table 2.2.1.b: Control word 1, automation → technology board

Manual
2 Interfaces
Control word Significance Effect / description

2 bit
0 Switch-in suppl. setpoint 1 = yes Add supplementary setpoint
1 Local positioning 1= pos. Operation with positioning setp.
2 Motor. potentiometer 2, raise 1 = raise Output, motor pot. 2, raise
3 Motor. potentiometer 2, lower 1 = lower Output, motor pot. 2, lower
4 Local operator control 1 = local Local / system changeover
5 Local, stop 1 = stop Stop for local operation
6 Local, run 1 = run Operation with local setpoint
7 Local, crawl 1 = crawl Operation with crawl setpoint
8 Maneuver 1 = yes Enter maneuvering setpoint
9 Hold Vset setting 1 = stop Freeze setpoint
10 Motor. potentiometer 1, raise 1 = raise Output, motor pot. 1, raise
11 Motor. potentiometer 1, lower 1 = lower Output, motor pot. 1, lower
12 Reset length computer 1 = reset Web length computer = 0
13 Winding from below 1 = from below Invert speed setpoint
14 Tachometer (web) 1=applied Enable diameter computer
15 - -
Table 2.2.1.c: Control word 2, automation → technology board
2.2.2 Actual values, technology board ⇒ automation

The standard MS320 software package supplies 8 words of process data (6 select values and 2 control
words), to the higher-level automation system. The transferred actual value can be selected (refer to the
block diagram, Sheet 15). The following telegram structure is obtained, analog to 2.2.1:
Data word No. in the transmit telegram Significance

PROFIBUS DP USS - protocol
PPO 1,2,5 PPO 3,4 PKW=4 PKW=0
1 - 1 - Parameter ID
2 - 2 - Index
5 1 5 1 Status word 1, MS320
6 2 6 2 Select value 1, MS320
8 4 8 4 Status word 2, MS320
11 - 11 7 Select value 5, MS320
12 - 12 8 Select value 6, MS320
For the actual values, supplied from the T300 (select values), the following is always valid: 4000h=100%
Table 2.2.2.a: Telegram structure, technology board → automation

Manual
2 Interfaces
Status word 1 Significance Source

bit
0 Ready to power-up 1=ready 6SE70/71
1 Ready 1=ready 6SE70/71
2 Operation enabled 1=enabled 6SE70/71
3 Fault 1=fault 6SE70/71 or T300
4 OFF2 0=active 6SE70/71 or T300
6 Power-up inhibit 1=inhibit 6SE70/71
7 Alarm 1=warning 6SE70/71 or T300
8 Set./act. val. diff. within the tolerance bandwidth 1=yes 6SE70/71
9 Control requested 1=yes 6SE70/71
10 f/n limit reached 1=yes 6SE70/71
11 Fault, undervoltage 1=yes 6SE70/71
12 Main contactor energized 1=yes T300
13 Tension controller at its limit 1=yes T300
14 Clockwise phase sequence 1=yes 6SE70/71
15 Kinetic buffering active 1=yes 6SE70/71
Table 2.2.2.b: Status word 1, MS320 → automation
Stauts word 2 Significance Source

bit
0 Controller enable, system operation 1=enabled T300
1 Local stop 1=stop T300
3 Operating mode, local run 1=active T300
4 Operating mode, local crawl 1=active T300
5 Operating mode, local, inching forwards 1=active T300
6 Operating mode, local, inching reverse 1=active T300
7 Operating mode, local positioning 1=active T300
8 Speed setpoint zero 1=setpoint0 T300
9 Web break 1=yes T300
10 Closed-loop tension control on 1=on T300
11 Mode, system operation 1=active T300
12 Standstill 1=yes T300
13 Output, limit value monitor 1 1) T300
14 1) T300
Output, limit value monitor 2
15 T300
Local/system operation 1=local
1) Status of the outputs of the limit value monitor depending on the parameterization
[Block diagram, Sheet 10]
Table 2.2.2.c: Status word 2, MS320 → automation
2.2.3 Setpoints/actual values via the serial interface

The software assigns serial interface X02 (connector X134) to the peer-to-peer protocol. It is used for fast
transfer of setpoints/actual values between the converters without using an interface board; refer to T300
Instruction Manual for the wiring (also refer to section 3 and the overview diagram, Sheet 14).
Up to five words can be transferred via the peer-to-peer protocol; any word can be defined as control word
1. The baud rate (up to 38400) and the number of transmit/receive words can be parameterized as well as
the setpoint/actual value connections.
The transferred control word 1 can be freely connected; refer to Table 2.2.1.b for the significance of the
individual bits.

Manual
3 Terminal assignment
Control signals and setpoints can be read-in and actual values and status signals output via binary and
analog signals. With the standard MS320 axial winder software package, 16 binary inputs and 8 binary
outputs as well as 7 analog inputs and 4 analog outputs are used.
Connector X131 (analog inputs / outputs, pulse encoder connections) and X136 (binary inputs / outputs)
of the T300 board, are connected to the SE300 terminal block through shielded ribbon cables.
For the 40-pin connector X131, an SC58 cable must be used and for the 34-pin connector X136, an SC60
cable. The terminal assignment, described in this document, is only valid when using the SE300 interface
module. The terminals, assigned to connector X5, are designated with 5xx, and those with connector X6,
with 6xx.
Caution:
Shielded SC58 and SC60 ribbon cables must be used.
The described terminal assignment is only valid when using the SE300 interface board.
3.1 Connector X6, binary inputs and outputs

The binary inputs and outputs of the T300 board require or supply 24 V signals. The 24 V power supply
voltage for the binary output must be provided externally (i.e. via the interface board), and the binary
inputs require no external power supply voltage.
3.1.1 Binary inputs

0 V = low = logical 0 24 V = high = logical 1
Not connected = low = logical 0 Switching thresholds <6V =low, >13V =high
Low-pass filter with smoothing time of approx. 700 µs Input current for a high signal, approx. 8 mA
at 24 V
Terminal strip X6: Permanently wired control signals from the terminal
Terminals 601 to 610 (STRUC configuring: partial connector X6A)
Only effective, if the appropriate parameters H021 to H028
are set to 0 (presetting).
Terminal Assignment Explanation

601 System start 1 = Controller enabled for system operation
602 Tension controller on 1 = On, tension control enabled
603 Tension controller inhibit 1 = Inhibit, tension controller output = 0
604 Set diameter 1 = Set, accept setting diameter
605 Inject supplementary setpoint 1 = Yes, addition of the speed supplementary setpoint
606 Local positioning 1 = Yes, local operation with positioning setpoint
607 Local operator control 1 = Local, local/system operation changeover
608 Local stop 1 = Stop for local operation
609 P 24 external *) Terminals 609, 619 and 639 are connected via T300
610 M 24 external Terminals 610, 630 and 640 are connected via T300
Table 3.1.1.a: Terminal strip X6, assignment of terminals 601 to 610

*) only connect if binary outputs are used

Manual
Terminal strip X6: Freely-connectable control signals from the terminal

Terminals 611 to 630 (STRUC configuring: Partial connector X6B)

611 Select input
612 Select input
613 Select input The binary select inputs must be assigned to the
614 Select input control signals of the winder software by parameterizing,
615 Select input refer to block diagram, sheets 16, 17
616 Select input
617 Select input
618 Select input
619 P 24 external *) Terminals 609, 619 and 639 are connected via T300
Table 3.1.1.b: Terminal strip X6: Assignment of terminals 611 to 630

*) only connect if binary outputs are used
3.1.2 Binary outputs

When the drive is first powered-up, all outputs are first inhibited (high ohmic state). The output registers
are preset with 0 in the initialization phase, and they are then enabled. When the drive is shutdown, or a
processor crashes (e.g. due to a hardware fault), all outputs are inhibited.
0 V = low = logical 0 24 V = high = logical 1

max. output current 100 mA, short-circuit proof
Terminal strip X6: Binary outputs and status messages

Terminals 631 to 640 (STRUC configuring: Partial connector X6C)
631 Web break Web break identified
632 Standstill Speed actual value < H157
633 Tension control on Tension / position controller on, speed contr. enable
634 Basic drive converter on Operating signal from the basic converter
635 Alarm, T300 At least one PT alarm present
636 Speed setpoint = 0 Speed controller setpoint < 0.1%
637 Limit value monitor 1 Output can be parameterized, H114
638 Limit value monitor 2 Output can be parameterized, H114
639 P 24 external Terminals 609, 619 and 639 are connected via T300
Table 3.1.2: Terminal strip X6, assignment of terminals 631 to 640

Manual
Manual
Siemens AG
Note - It is possible, but not necessary, to connect

control and setpoint signals to the base drive.
Examples for signals to the base drive:
CUVC or CUMC:
OFF3 (Fast stop) on X101.6: P559=16
Fault acknowledge on X101.7: P565=18
CU2 or CU3:
OFF3 (Fast stop) on X101.16: P559=1001
Axial winder
Note:
Fault acknowledge on X101.17: P565=1002 The pin assignment of connector X131 and X136 of
T300 is not identical with the terminal assignment of
T3 0 0 terminals 5.. and 6-- on the SE300 interface module.
X131 X136
The analog inputs and outputs and pulse encoder inputs The binary inputs and outputs are read-in and -out via
are read-in and out via the connection X131-SC58-SE300 the connection X136-SC60-SE300
SC58 SC60
Base unit
CUVC,CUMC
or
SE300 CU2, CU3
Inputs Outputs CUVC,CUMC: X101

1 6 7
CU2,CU3: X101
X 6. 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 14 16 17
E xt. p o w er su p p ly
M 24
P 24
< 1> <1> P24 can be taken from the base unit
when the current is less than 150 mA
Fig. 3.1: Connecting-up the binary inputs to T300
3-3
3.2 Connector X5, analog inputs and outputs

The analog inputs and outputs have a 12-bit resolution over the input or output voltage range of -10 V to
+10 V (4.88 mV resolution). In this case, 5 V corresponds to an internal value of 100 %.
3.2.1 Analog inputs

Differential inputs (connect all reference potentials !),
Low-pass filter with 0.66 ms time constant Input resistance = 10 kΩ
Terminal strip X5: Analog inputs 1 to 7

(STRUC configuring: Partial connector X5A to X5G)
Terminal / Assign. Samp. time in ms Partial Adaption via parameter

reference connect Gain Offset
ion
501 / 502 Select input 8 X5A H054 H055
503 / 504 Select input 8 X5B H056 H057
505 / 506 Select input 8 X5C H058 H059
507 / 508 Select input 8 X5D H060 H061
511 / 512 Select input 8 X5E H062 H063
513 / 514 Select input 32 X5F H064 H065
515 / 516 Select input 32 X5G H066 H067
Table 3.2.1: Terminal assignment, analog inputs

Connecting-up, refer to the overview diagram, sheets 11-13
It is conceivable, that the internal analog signal smoothing must be increased (e.g. for tension actual
value). This can be achieved by switching-in an external RC element in series, refer to Fig. 3.2.
Configured on a terminal block, e.g. EMG 50-89 from Phönix
3.2.2 Analog outputs

When the drive is powered-up, all outputs are first inhibited (zero volt). The output registers are pre-set
with 0 in the initialization phase and are then enabled. When the drive is shutdown or a processor crashes
(e.g. due to a hardware fault), all outputs are inhibited.
max. output current = 10 mA

Manual
Terminal strip X5: Analog outputs 1 to 4

(STRUC configuring: Partial connector X5H to X5L)
Terminal / Assignment Partial Selected via Adaption with

reference Resolution, presetting connector Offset Gain
509 / 510 Speed actual value X5H Fixed H097 H098
10 V = 100 % rated speed
519 / 520 Actual diameter X5J Fixed H099 H100
10 V = 100 % Dmax
521 / 522 Selected value 1 X5K H127 H101 H102
10 V = 100 %
523 / 524 Selected value 2 X5L H128 H103 H104
10 V = 100 %
Table 3.2.2: Terminal assignment, analog outputs
Assignment of the select signals, refer to the overview diagram, Sheet 10
3.3 Pulse encoders

Generally, only the tachometer (web speed tachometer) is connected to the T300. On the other hand, the
pulse encoder to measure the motor speed is connected to the basic drive converter and terminals 531 to
534 thus remain unassiged.
3.3.1 Information regarding pulse encoder types

Pulse encoders, with two tracks, displaced through 90 degrees, must be used.
Encoders with supply voltages from 15 V - 24 V can be connected. Generally, only 1 pulse encoder can
be supplied with the power supply (15 V, max. 100 mA) provided from the T300 board. The second pulse
encoder must be supplied from an external voltage source or from the basic converter.
− The pulse encoder cable should be very carefully shielded. The cable shield should be connected at
both ends, if possible through cable clamps, through the lowest impedance and over the largest
possible surface area, to ground potential.
3.3.2 Pulse encoder inputs

T300 has 2 pulse encoder inputs; they have identical circuit configurations. The switching thresholds are
optimized for pulse encoders with a 15 V supply voltage. Pulse encoders with a 24 V supply voltage can
be connected; under certain circumstances a somewhat lower maximum pulse encoder frequency may be
expected.
Technical data:
- input current, typically 8 mA
- input signal level, 0 - 30 V
- digital filter, max. frequency 500 kHz
- average switching threshold, approx. 7 V
- maximum frequency (per track) 400 kHz.

Manual
Terminal strip X5:Pulse encoder - axial tachometer inputs

(STRUC - configuring: Partial connector X5M)
The pulse encoder for the axial tachometer is connected at the basic drive converter; the pulse tracks are
transferred to the T300 via the backplane bus. The pulse encoder signals need not be connected twice.
H217 is used for parameterization.

531 Track A
532 Ground Ground
533 Track B
534 Ground Ground
535 Zero pulse *) Unused
536 Ground Ground
537 Rough pulse *) Unused
538 Ground
539 Ground
540 P 15 output Max.100 mA
Table 3.3.2.a: Pulse encoder inputs, axial tachometer
*) not used for axial winders
Terminal strip X5:Pulse encoder inputs, web tachometer

(STRUC configuring: Partial connector X5N)

541 Track A
542 Ground Ground
543 Track B
544 Ground Ground
545 Zero pulse *) Unused
546 Ground Ground
547 Rough pulse *) Unused
548 Ground
549 Ground
540 P 15 output Max.100 mA
Table 3.3.2.b: Pulse encoder inputs, web tachometer
*) not used for axial winders

Manual
Manual
Siemens AG
N ote:
T he pin assig nm ent of con necto rs X131 an d X136 o f
T300 T 300 is not id entical w ith the term inal assign m ent of
term in als 5.. and 6 at interface m odu le SE300.
X131 X136
Axial winder
SC58 SC60
T he analog inp uts and outp uts and pu lse enco der inp uts are The b in ary in pu ts an d ou tpu ts are read-in or read-o ut via
read -in or -out via the con nection X 131 - SC 58 - SE300 connection X136 - SC60 - SE300,
SE300
Analog inputs Analog outputs Pulse encoder, axial tach. Pulse encoder, web tach.
X5 501/2 503/4 505/6 507/8 511/12 513/14 515/16 509 510 519 520 521 522 523 524 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549
R1
Connection pulsencoder,
axial tach.
S p ee d (special case see Fig 3.3)
R2 UT E a ct. va lu e
UT 1)
B B
Ground, e.g.
term. 539
d ia m e ter
a ct. valu e
A n alog ta ch. M eas. in strum en t or p lo tte r
Pulse encoder
Connecting-up example:
1k Ω Term. 503/504 = Analog. tach. with ext. circuitry
Actual value from Term. 511/512 = Tension act. value with ext. smoothing for
the tension very noisy actual value signals.
10 F M P
transducer
Pulse encoder supply voltage
G round, e.g.
term. 539 1) internal supply can be used if l < 0,1A
Fig . 3.2: C on necting analog in pu ts and outp uts and pu lse en coder inpu ts, for the w eb tacho m eters at T300
3-7
3.4 Connecting example

The example is valid for winders and unwinders as well as all of the tension-controlled operating modes
(H203 = 0 to 3 and 5). In the example, only winders are discussed.
3.4.1 Diagram and the required control signals

Fig. 3.3 shows as an example, the connections and parameterization for a simple winder for entering the
control signals via binary inputs, setpoints and actual values via analog inputs:
Control signals, local operation:

- Inching forwards
- Inching reverse
- Local operator control
- OFF3
Control signals, system operation:

- Set diameter
- Wind from below
- OFF3 (fast stop)
- System start
- Tension controller on
- OFF1/ON
Setpoint/actual values:
- Speed setpoint
- Tension setpoint
- Tension actual value
Output signals:
- Standstill signal
- Web break signal
- Diameter actual value
Notes: In system operation, the "local operation" command must be inactive.
All analog and binary inputs and outputs can be connected without any additional circuitry,
directly to the appropriate S5 board.
All analog inputs and the speed sensing inputs are designed as differential inputs and a
reference potential (ground) must always be connected.
OFF3 (fast stop) can also be connected at the basic converter.

Manual
3.4.2 Control sequences
Information regarding the control signals:

- For unwinders with closed-loop tension control via the torque limits, H041 should be set to 12 via
the torque limits (H203 = 0 to 2).
- In addition to the switching sequences indicated, others are also conceivable.
- The signals listed in Fig. 3.4 Control sequences, are illustrated in the Block diagram on Sheet 17.
Important note:
OFF3 (fast stop) is only effective, if OFF2 = 1, refer to H047.
Explanations regarding the numbers in circles in Fig. 3.4:

c The winder is closed-loop speed controlled. In this case, it is assumed that the diameter setpoint
is set according to the mechanical diameter of the roll, refer to d310, Sheet 9 Block diagram!
The up and down ramps for the speed setpoint can be set at the ramp-function generator for the
speed setpoint, Sheet 5 Block diagram.
The speed-controlled operation is required, among other things, for the flying roll change.
d The winder mode (closed-loop tension controlled mode) is switched-in at this instant.
If closed-loop speed controlled operation is not required, the tension controller can be enabled
together with the system start signal.
e The tension controller is inhibited and the winder drive decelerates along the selected down ramp
(ramp-function generator for the speed setpoint, Sheet 5 Block diagram).
f The winder drive can be powered-down.
If the winder is decelerated to zero speed to change a roll, the tension controller and the winder drive
can be simultaneously switched-off after the winder has come to a standstill.
Comment regarding local operator control:

− Local operator control, such as inching forwards etc. can also be achieved by the closed-loop speed
controlled operation and the appropriate setpoint inputs.
− Refer to the Block diagram, Sheet 18
− Inching forwards (or inching backwards):
OFF1/ON = 0!
OFF3 (= OFF2) = 1
Afterwards, local operator control = 1,
Afterwards, select inching forwards or inching backwards.
Return to system operation (winder operation): Beforehand OFF1/ON, local control = 0!

Manual
3-10
P 24
M 24
Ext. power supply
24V relay or S5
binary inputs
P10/M can be taken from the basic

converter for low loads, refer to the
P10 Instruction Manual
R≈10kΩ X5 X6. 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640
501
502 tension setpoint H081=0
M
505
519
Actual value tension transducer 506 tension act. value H085=2
Diameter act. value
503 T300 with SE300
Ri>
~ 5k Ω
520
Setpoint 0 ... 10V 504 speed setpoint H069=1
510=M
531...534 pulse encoder, axial tachometer
SIMOVERT 6SE70/1 CUVC, CUMC: X101.1 7

U2, V2, W2 CU2, CU3: X101.13 16
<1> CUVC,CUMC: P565 = 18

Siemens AG
CU2,CU3: P565 = 1001
Winder
Axial winder
Manual
Fig. 3.3: Connecting-up example at T300/SE300

Manual
Siemens AG
t
Axial winder
1 2 3 4 t
Fig 3.4: Control sequence for the signals Fig. 3.3

Note:
- OFF2 in fig. 3.2 is set to 1. By using PROFIBUS-DP, the control from OFF2 is recommended
3-11
- In the figure the control bits by using PROFIBUS-DP are indicated.

3.5 Serial interface X01

Serial interface 1 (STRUC board connector X01) is configured as RS232 (V24) - X132 or RS485 - X133
start-up interface to connect TELEMASTER.
Note:
Serial interface can either be used as RS485 or as RS232; this means, it is not permissible to
simultaneously use the physical interfaces at terminal series X132 and X133!
The Baudrate is set to 9600 Baud.
RS232
Pin number Pin number Connector X132 (RS232)

(referred to connector (referred to the labels on
X132): the T300 connector):
1 1 Receive data RxD
2 2 Transmit data TxD
3 3 Ground GND
4 4 Ground GND
5 5 Ground GND
Table 3.5.a: Connector X132
RS485

(referred to connector (referred to the labels on
X132): the T300 connector):
1 6 Receive / Transmit
+RxD / +TxD
-RxD / -TxD
+RxD / +TxD
-RxD / -TxD
5 10 Ground
GND
Table 3.5.a: Connector X133

Manual
3.6 Serial interface X02

Serial interface X02 is assigned the peer-to-peer protocol per software; it is available at X134 as RS485 (4
wire).
Further information to connect-up the interfaces can be taken from the T300 Instruction Manual,
or Fig. 1.2.2 and Block diagram Sheet 14.
Please refere also to Note 3, section 8.1.3.3
Peer-to-Peer serial interface X134
Pin number Pin number Connector X134 4-wire RS485

(referred to connector (referred to the labels
X134): on the T300 connector):
1 11 Receive data +RxD
2 12 Receive data -RxD
3 13 Transmit data +TxD
4 14 Transmit data -TxD
5 15 Ground GND
Table 3.6: Connector X134
Possible types of peer-to-peer connection

The peer-to-peer connection is flexible.
- The signals can flow through the drives in a series connection; with this connection type, each drive
processes the data as required before passing them on to one other drive (classic setpoint cascade).
- In a parallel connection, a total of 31 drives can be connected in parallel to the transmit cable of one
drive. All these drives receive their (identical) data sets simultaneously. The signal delay time (see
table 3.6.b above) occurs only once with the parallel connection.
- Any desired mixed combinations of series and parallel connections can be implemented.

Manual
X X X
-X134 -X134 -X134 -X134
Master drive
Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M
11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15
-X134
Point-
Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M
to-point
X
11 12 13 14 15 -X134 -X134 -X134
Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M
11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15
cascade
x: For this T300, the bus terminating resistors must be switched-in, i.e. at bus terminating switch
S1, coding switches S1.3 and S1.4 must be set to ON!
Signal delay time ( Example) :

Baud rate Telegramm lenght in Word Net transmission
time im ms
9600 1 5,7
2 8
5 16
19200 1 2,8
2 4
5 8
38400 1 1,43
2 2
5 4
115200 1 0,47
2 0,67
5 1,34
Table 3.6.b: Signal delay time Peer-to-Peer

Manual
4 Function description
4.1 Overview
The standard axial winder software package was developed with the aim of being able to cover many of
the known winder applications with one single software package. Using the freely-configurable T300
technology board and its STRUC block language, universal function units were created, which can be
easily adapted to the particular system configuration by parameterizing. Flexible connection of control
signals and setpoints allows control from a higher-level system as well as operator control via the
technology board terminals. "Mixed operation" is also possible. The parallel interface to the basic
converter is guaranteed by fast data transfer via a dual port RAM.
4.1.1 Closed-loop control (block diagram 4)
Bias
0%
Bias ref. value
Tension control on &
Current limiting control
Web speed setpoint + Speed setpoint

Triggerable Web speed
ramp-function Kp adaption
generator Speed act. value Diameter
factor
dv
0% dt + Supplementary
Tension controller output 0%
torque setpoint
Tension control on & Compensation functions,
Speed correction control acceleration and friction 100%
+ Torque limits
Tension controller output
Tension control on
Current limiting control &
Sheet 4 of the overview diagram provides an overview of the complete closed-loop control structure.
The tension control influences the speed controller in two different ways. For the closed-loop current
limiting control, the higher-level tension controller acts on the speed controller limits, thus maintaining the
required web tension. To relieve the tension controller, compensating torques for friction and inertia
compensation are generated, which are added with the correct polarity before limiting. With this control
technique, the speed controller is kept at its limit by switching-in a saturation setpoint and when a web
break occurs, the winder accelerates up to the sum of the speed setpoint and saturation setpoint.
When selecting speed correction control, a cascade structure is obtained, and the tension controller
influences the speed controller setpoint. The compensation torques are added as supplementary setpoint
after the speed controller.
For constant speed control (V constant), the tension controller is disabled (output limit=0%) and the
winder operates with the specified web speed setpoint.

Manual
4.1.2 Setpoints (block diagrams 11-13)

The setpoints to be processed are selected via a multiplexer which can be parameterized. Every setpoint
can be freely selected from a max. of 32 sources. The following input signals are available:
7 analog inputs of the T300 board
6 setpoints from the interface board
6 setpoints from the CU board
5 setpoints from the serial interface via peer-to-peer protocol
2 select values from the CU board
2 motorized potentiometers
one fixed setpoint as parameter
The standard multiplexer setting switches the fixed setpoint through which is assigned 0%.
4.1.3 Control signals (block diagrams 16/18)

The source of the control commands required for the particular application is freely selectable. The
individual commands can be input from the interface board, the basic drive converter via USS, the T300
serial interface, or via binary inputs. The individual bits of the control words are permanently assigned to
control commands (refer to Section 2.2), as well as terminals 601 to 608. For these 8 fixed control signals,
it is possible to toggle between terminal control and input via a control word (from the CB, CU or peer-to-
peer).
The freely-selectable control commands are outputs of multiplexers which can be parameterized. Binary
inputs X6, terminals 611 to 618, the appropriate bit of the possible control words and fixed values 0 and 1
are available as sources. Control bits, which are not included in the control words, can be addressed as
dedicated parameters.
As standard, the fixed control signals are connected to the T300 terminals; and the freely-connectable
control signals are disabled via the appropriate multiplexer setting.
For diagnostics, all of the possible winder control commands are combined in 3 visualization parameters
(d332, d333 and d334). These parameters indicate the status of the control signals directly before internal
processing.

Manual
4.2 Selecting the speed actual value (block diagram 13)

The basic drive is always operated in the closed-loop speed controlled mode. The axial winder requires
the speed actual value to calculate the diameter. There are two ways to transfer the speed actual value to
the T300; either via the dual port RAM (DPR), which is preferred or via the pulse encoder tracks of the
backplane bus.
Preferred solution via DPR, H92=7:
The speed actual value adjustment is made on the basic drive; no settings are required on the T300. It is
unimportant which type of actual value encoder (resolver, pulse encoder etc.) is used. Also refer to
Section 7, Comments.
H92=8, pulse encoder signals via the backplane bus are used:
From the basic drive instruction manual, it can be determined how many pulses per revolution the
encoder outputs. Parameters H212, H214 and H217 should then be set corresponding to the parameter
list (example: Pulse encoder at the basic drive with 1024 pulses/ revolution, speed at v-max and core
diameter: 2347RPM: H212=1024, H214=2347, H217=0024)
H92=8, pulse encoder signals via SE300, terminals X5.531, 533 are used:
Analog as above, H217=0002.
Note: Changes made at H212, H214 and H217 only become effective after the electronics voltage
is powered down and up again.
The actual speed value can be monitored at display parameter d307 as a percentage of the maximum
motor speed.
The analog value of the speed actual value is available at terminal strip X5, terminals 519 and 520.
4.3 Selecting the speed setpoint input (block diagram 5)

The main setpoint for the winder drive web speed is selected using parameter H069 (block diagram 11).
The web speed setpoint is normalized using parameter H139 so that the required speed ratio is obtained
for the winder. The effective web speed setpoint after normalization and taking into account a gearbox
stage changeover is available as monitoring parameter d301.
4.4 Stretch compensation for the speed setpoint (block diagr.5)

The main web speed setpoint can be influenced in the sense of a "stretch compensation", if the material
thickness is reduced before winding, e.g. due to expansion or stretching. In this case, a compensation
setpoint should be selected using parameter H071. A fixed value is selected via H071 with H071 = 31;
pre-setting 0%. The web speed compensation can be normalized using parameter H137.
The web speed compensation should only be set, if a deviation has been identified between the web
speed setpoint and web speed actual value. This difference influences, among other things, the accuracy
of the diameter calculation and the speed of the winder shaft for a flying roll change (flying splice).

Manual
4.5 Maneuvering speed setpoint (block diagr.5)

A "positioning" function is provided for positioning the material roll. When the function is activated using
the "manouver" command, parameter H140 is multiplied by the speed setpoint, thus providing a setpoint,
which is a % of the web speed setpoint. H140 can be set to values between zero and ± 200 %.
4.6 Winder overspeed protection (block diagr.5)

In order to prevent a full roll reaching an inadmissible speed when the web breaks, the web speed
setpoint is divided by the diameter calculated during winding. The speed controller is thus supplied with
the correct speed setpoint which means that the circumferential velocity of the roll coincides with the web
speed. In order to develop a motor torque for operation with the closed-loop current limiting control,
parameter H145, as saturation setpoint, is added to the actual setpoint. Thus, it is ensured, that the drive
remains torque controlled (closed-loop control), when the web is intact (speed controller is at its limit with
the correct polarity). When the material web breaks, the motor only accelerates by the supplementary
value of the basic speed setpoint. For most applications, H145 can be set between 5% and 10%.
4.7 "Winding from above / below" operating modes

In order to change the motor direction of rotation, when changing between the "wind from above" and
"wind from below" modes, the "wind from below" command (block diagr.6, 9) can be activated. This
reverses the polarity of the speed setpoint signal when 4-quadrant drives are used (refer to the sketch).
+ -
+ +
Winding from above Winding from below
Note: The "winding from below" command should only be activated, if both types are required in an
application. Otherwise, "winding from above" should always be selected, independent of the
web routing.

Manual
4.8 Speed setpoint for winder operation (block diagr.5)

4.8.1 System operation
This operating mode is always required for winding and is activated using the command "off 1/on" =1 with
the "local operator control" control signal 0. The basic converter is powered-up (main contactor in). The
software and basic converter wait for a controller enabled issued through "system start". The winder
accelerates up to the parameterized setpoint after an enable signal has been issued.
For system operation, a central ramp-function generator for the speed setpoint is effective.
The ramp-up/ramp-down times and rounding-off for acceleration/deceleration are set using parameters
H133, H134, H135 and H136. The upper and lower limits can be specified using parameters H131 and
H132. The value from H130 can be switched-in as new setpoint using the "accept setpoint B" command.
The "accept setpoint A" command injects a new setpoint, which can be selected using H96 (block
diagram13). The ramp-function generator is held using the "ramp-function generator stop" or set speed
setpoint to stop" commands.
The speed setpoint, is directly transferred to the control bypassing the ramp-function generator for
H154 = 1; an adjustable smoothing is also possible in this case using H155. This operating mode is
conceivable, if the available setpoint is already available as ramp-function generator output (winder as
slave drive, setpoint from the central machine control or from another drive).
Note: The ramp-function generator can also be used as a smoothing element, e.g. for setpoint
input using a web tachometer. The ramp-up and ramp-down times should be set somewhat
lower than the web speed changes which occur.
Using the "inject supplementary setpoint" command, a setpoint source, which can be selected with H073,
can be directly added in front of the speed controller (block diagr.5).
4.9 RPM / line speed setpoints in local operation (block diagr.5)

The standard axial winder software package has, in local operation, its own setpoint system with separate
ramp-function generator (can be disabled). Dependent on the selected local mode, the setpoint is
switched-through and the ramp-function generator is only effective after an operating mode change (block
diagr.18). Ramp-up and ramp-down times are both set using H161. The active setpoint can be monitored
using d344. H146 = 0/1 can be used to toggle between RPM / speed controlled local operation.
4.9.1 Local operating modes (block diagr. 16/17)

The following operating modes are available:
Local run Setpoint selection using H075 from 32 sources (block diagram11)
Local crawl Crawl setpoint = H142
Local positioning Setpoint selection via H091 from 32 sources (block diagr.12),
X2/X3 characteristic, adaption using H163
Local inching forw. Inching setpoint = H143
Local inching rev. Inching setpoint = H144
Local operation must be selected using the "local operator control" signal. There is a dedicated control
signal for each local operating mode and the commands are "latching", i.e. they are internally stored. The
commands are mutually interlocked, so that only one is effective. To exit the run, crawl and positioning
modes, the "local stop" command is required, or the "local operator control" must be withdrawn.
When a local operating mode is selected, the basic converter is switched-on (main contactor), and the
controller is automatically enabled after operating readiness has been signaled.

Manual
For inching, controller enable in the basic converter is extended by a time which can be parameterized
with H014. Before this time expires, the inching setpoints can be changed as required by activating the
inching commands; it is also possible to change into another local operating mode during this time.
It is possible to switch-in the local setpoints in system operation using H166 = 1. Only the appropriate
setpoint is switched-through with the local control signals, and added to the speed setpoint.
4.10 Speed control

The speed sensing and closed-loop control are implemented in the basic drive converter. The axial winder
standard software package specifies the speed setpoint, influences the torque limits and transmits a
supplementary torque setpoint for the necessary compensation factors.
4.10.1 Influence, speed controller (block diagr. 6)

For closed-loop tension controlled operation, either the speed controller limits are influenced (closed-loop
current limiting control) or the speed setpoint (closed-loop speed correction control). It is possible to adapt
the gain to the variable moment of inertia. The controller setting is determined during start-up using the
automatic optimization runs.
4.10.2 Kp adaption
The controller gain adaption to the variable moment of inertia is realized on the T300 using a straight line
which can be parameterized. The input quantity is the calculated variable moment of inertia; the output
operate to the controller proportional gain in the converter. The initial- and final points of the adaption have
to be set and the associated multiplication factors. The characteristic is linearly interpolated between
these points.
For the correct setting, the Kp values are required for a full and empty roll, which is determined during
start-up (refer to Section 8.2.4).
When determining the controller gain with full roll (as full as possible), the associated variable moment of
inertia can be read-off as monitoring parameter d308, or calculated using the known diameter. For
gearbox stage 1, constant material thickness and width, the following is valid:
Jv [%] ≈ D4 [%] - Dcore4 [%]. The factor to be entered as H153 must be referred to 100% Jv,
ie. H153 = ((determined Kp/Kp-empty) * 100%/determined Jv [%]).
For the basic winder setting, with H151 = H153 = 1 , adaption is not effective, and the actual adaption
factor is displayed with d345.
Note: Kp adaption is recommended for winding ratios >3.
CUVC,CUMC: For the adaption settings refer to section 8.2.4.1

Manual
4.11 Generating the torque setpoint (block diagr. 6)

The speed setpoint is output from the T300 as pre-control torque for closed-loop speed correction control
and coupled-in as supplementary torque setpoint. For closed-loop current controls, it acts, in addition to
the tension controller output, on the speed controller limits.
Converter parameterization required for this procedure is specified in Section 9 (block diagr.3).
4.11.1 Compensation factors (block diagr.9)

To compensate friction losses and the accelerating/braking torques, the appropriate compensation factors
are calculated and added, with the correct polarity to the torque setpoint. Winding direction, web routing,
closed-loop control type, material density and width and the gearbox stage are automatically taken into
account.
The friction losses are compensated using a polygon characteristic which can be parameterized with 5
characteristic points; this is set during start-up, refer to Section 9, using parameters H230 to H235 in 20%
steps. The characteristic output can be monitored using d314.
The variable moment of inertia is calculated to compensate the accelerating torque. This includes
diameter, material density (H224), -width (selected using H079), and a possible gearbox stage
changeover (H138). The feed-forward control torque for inertia compensation is obtained from the fixed
moment of inertia after the actual diameter has been included and the internal or external (H226)
acceleration signal; it is available as d316.
The precise compensation setting is especially important for indirect tension control, so that the armature
current represents, as accurately as possible, the material tension, refer to Section 8.
The compensation factors for friction and acceleration are also effective in the closed-loop speed
controlled mode (e.g. for acceleration and braking during a roll change).
4.12 Setpoint for closed-loop tension/position control (block

diagr.7/8)
The setpoint source is selected using H081; for closed-loop position control with dancer roll, a fixed
position setpoint can be entered using H081 = 31 via H080.
The main setpoint is fed through a ramp-function generator with ramp-up and ramp-down times which can
be parameterized, H175 and H176. H206 can be used to select as to whether a winding hardness
characteristic is subsequently applied. The supplementary tension setpoint is added after the
characteristic; the source is selected via H083. The resulting total setpoint can again be smoothed using
H192 and is available as monitoring parameter at d304.
4.12.1 Winding hardness control (block diagr.7)

The winding hardness control reduces the tension with increasing diameter and is generally only used for
winders to wind-up the inner layers more firmly.
For dancer roll controls, the position setpoint can be entered as supplement tension setpoint.The
characteristic output, available as d328, can be output at one of the analog outputs as setpoint for the
dancer roll support (H177 = 1).
The winding hardness characteristic is a polygon characteristic with 5 characteristic points which can be
parameterized. The actual diameter and the main tension setpoint after the ramp-function generator are
the input signals. The source for the maximum tension reduction, referred to the setpoint, can be freely
selected using H087. The tension setpoint starts to decease, when the diameter reaches the value set at
H183. It follows the parameterized curve, which is set using the parameters shown in the block

Manual
diagr.(block diagr.6). The diameter values D - D4 for parameters H183 to H187 must be set in an
increasing sequence. The tension reduction factors for diameters D1, D2 and D3 are input via H180,
H181 and H182 as % of the maximum tension reduction.
Example1: Tension setpoint at D1 = main setpoint - (max. tension reduction * main setpoint * H180)
Example 2: H086, as fixed value for the maximum tension reduction, is parameterized using H087=31
and H086=60%; the main tension setpoint is 50%, and the winding hardness control has the
following characteristic:
a) If the diameter is less than or equal to the initial diameter, set in H183, then the winding
hardness characteristic output is 50%.
b) If the diameter is greater than or equal to the final diameter H187, then the winding
hardness characteristic output is 20%.
c) If the diameter lies between the initial diameter H183 and the final diameter H187, the
output value follows the programmed winding hardness characteristic and has values
between 50% and 20%.
If a decreasing winding hardness is not required - e.g. for unwind stands, then parameter H206 should be
set to 1.
4.12.2 Standstill tension (block diagr.7)

When the winder is at standstill, it can be changed-over from operating tension to standstill tension using
the "standstill tension on" control signal. The prerequisite in this case is that the standstill limit H157 (block
diagr.6) is fallen below, and a delay time has expired, H159 (block diagr.6).
The following can be selected for the standstill setpoint:
H188 = 1 & H191 = 0 The standstill setpoint is a fixed value which is set using H189
H188 = 0 & H191 = 0 The standstill setpoint is a % of the operating tension setpoint and is set using
H189.
H188 = 1 & H191 = 1 The standstill setpoint is the operating tension setpoint or the fixed
standstill tension setpoint set at H189 - depending on which of the
two values is lower.
H188 = 0 & H191 = 1 Inadmissible operating status

Manual
4.13 Closed-loop tension / dancer roll control (block diagrs.7,9)

Five different control characteristics are implemented to control the material tension; selection is realized
using H203 and the following possibilities exist:
H203 = 0 : Indirect closed-loop tension control with direct open-loop armature current control via the
current limiting signal. This is the preferred solution for indirect tension controls.
H203 = 1 : Direct tension control using a tension transducer, whereby the tension controller controls
the armature current via the current limiting signals.
This is the preferred solution if a tension transducer is used.
H203 = 2 : Direct tension control using a dancer roll potentiometer as tension actual value
transmitter, whereby the closed-loop dancer roll/position controller controls the armature
current via the current limiting signal.
This control technique is seldomly used; it may be practical for materials which are less
flexible, e.g. cable, textiles, paper etc.
H203 = 3 : Direct tension control using a tension transmitter or a dancer roll potentiometer as tension
actual value transmitter, whereby the tension controller acts on the speed controller via a
speed correction setpoint.
This control technique should be used, if there is a dancer roll. If there is a tension
transducer, this control technique is occassionally used for elastic, extremely stretchable
materials, e.g. thin plastic foils.
H203 = 0 : Presently not used, is free for expansion.
H203 = 5 : As for H203=3, however, the tension control output can be multiplied by the web speed
signal. The "lower limit value" for the multiplication factor of the web speed on the tension
controller output can be defined using parameter H201.
Normalization can be realized using parameter H202.
The tension controller is a proportional-integral controller, whose integral action time can be set using
parameter H199. The controller is a pure proportional controller for H196=0. The tension controller
operates as closed-loop dancer roll/position controller if there is a dancer roll.
For applications with tension transducer or dancer roll in "speed correction" operation (H203 = 3, 5), the
tension controller is usually operated as proportional controller.
The tension controller output signal is limited depending on the setting of parameter H194 and H195:
H194 = 0 : The output signal is limited to the postive value, which is set at H195. Negative values are
limited to 0. This setting is only practical for single-quadrant drives, for H203=0, 1 and 2.
H194 = 1 : The output signal is limited to values between ±H195.
H194 = 2 : The upper limit corresponds to the absolute speed actual value or a minimum value which
can be selected with H193. The negative limit value is zero.
H194 = 3 : The upper limit corresponds to the absolute speed actual value or a minimum value which
can be selected with H193 and the lower limit, the inverted signal.

Manual
4.13.1 Kp adaption
Analog to the speed controller, the controller proportional gain is adapted to the variable moment of
inertia, so that the effect of diameter, material width and density and a possible gearbox can be
automatically taken into account.
Setting parameters:
Kp min H197 Controller gain for an empty roll
Kp max H198 Controller gain at 100% Jv 1)
Jv start H207 Start adaption point, e.g. at 0%
Jv end H208 Final adaption point, e.g. at 100%
1) When determining the controller gain with full roll (as full as possible), the associated variable moment
of inertia can be read-off as monitoring parameter H308, or calculated using the known diameter. For
gearbox stage 1, material density and width constant, the following is valid:
Jv [%] ≈ D4 [%] - Dcore4 [%]. The factor to be entered as Kp max must be referred to 100% Jv,
ie. Kp max = calculated Kp * 100% / calculated Jv [%].
For the basic winder setting, with Kp min = Kp max , adaption is not effective, and the actual Kp value is
displayed with d346.
Note: It is recommended that the Kp adaption is used for winding ratios >3.
4.14 Derivative action, tension/position act. value (block diagr.7)

The differential component of the tension/position actual value generation is used to compensate the
phase rotation, which is caused by an integral loop element (dancer roll). The differential component must
be disabled (H174=1) if the tension is measured using a transducer, as the loop has PT1 characteristics.
For dancer roll controls (H174=0) with or without a low derivative action, the position actual value could
oscillate. These can be effectively suppressed by increasing H173.
The duration of an actual value oscillation period without derivative action is a good approximate value for
the time constant of the derivative action (differential time constant H173). This value should not be
exceeded. Excessive time constants could result in instability!

Manual
4.15 Web break detection (block diagr.7)

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled so that this function responds:
- Tension control switched-in

For the closed-loop current limiting control (H203=0,1,2) the difference from the torque actual value
minus the tension controller output, referred to the tension controller output, must be less than the
value in H275.
- The limit, set using H204, for the torque/tension actual value must be fallen below, but the setpoint
must be above this limit. For indirect tension control (H203=0), this limit value refers to the torque
actual value; for all other control techniques, it is referred to the tension actual value.
- The delay time, set using H205 must have expired; it is essentially used to suppress erroneous
signals if the actual values are not smooth.
The web break signal is available at terminal strip X6, terminal 631. This can be used to energize a 24 V
relay or contactor.
The internal response of the winder software to a web break signal can be defined using H178. The web
break signal is stored with H178=1 and the diameter computer is inhibited (prevents calculation of
incorrect values) and the tension control disabled (the winder continues to run with the specified web
speed). This stored signal must be acknowledged by withdrawing the "tension controller on" control
command.
The web break is only signaled with H266=0.
Note: If only low tensions are used (e.g. for thin foils), then web break detection using the torque-
or tension actual value signal is problematical and it is recommended that an external web
break sensing system is used, e.g. using optical sensors or dancer roll limit switches.
Caution: The web break detection is not effective with the closed-loop constant speed control.
4.16 Freely-connectable limit value monitor (block diagr.10)

Two freely connectable limit value montors are available - they have identical functions and the only
difference is the parameter numbers for setting.
One of the monitoring parameters d301 to d331 can be selected as input signal. Absolute value
generation, inversion and smoothing can be parameterized for the input signal
One of the monitoring parameters d301 to d331 or a fixed value available as parameter can be selected
as comparison signal; inversion or absolute value generation are possible as adaption.
Interval limit, hysteresis and output signal to be displayed can be selected for the actual limit value
monitors. The limit value monitor outputs are available at terminal strip X6, terminal 637 for limit value
monitor 1 and terminal 638 for limit value monitor 2.

Manual
4.17 Analog outputs (block diagr.10)

A total of four analog outputs are available at strip X5. Two are permanently assigned, and the others are
used as select outputs for monitoring parameters d301 to d330.
The speed actual value is output at terminals 509/510. An offset is subtracted using H097; multiplication
adaption using H098.
The actual diameter is output at terminals 519/520. An offset is subtracted using H099, multiplication
adaption using H100.
Select output 1 is available at terminals 521/522. Using H105, it is possible to toggle between monitoring
parameters d301 to d330 and two select signals from the basic converter as output value. An offset is
subtracted using H101 and adaption can be realized using H102.
Select output 2 is available at terminals 523/524. Using H106, it is possible to toggle between monitoring
parameters d301 to d330 and two select signals from the basic converter as output value. An offset is
subtracted using H103 and adaption using H104.
All analog outputs are normalized as standard, so that an internal value of 100% is represented for 10 V,
-100% then correspond to -10 V.

Manual
4.18 Diameter computer (block diagr.9)

The diameter is calculated from the speed setpoint and the actual motor speed. An integrating calculation
technique is applied to generate the smoothest possible output signal.
The diameter computer works in %, between core diameter and maximum diameter (=100%). The core
diameter has to be set using H222 (as a % of maximum diameter).
Caution: A condition for a proper diameter calculation is a correct speed actual value calibration !
Refere to section 4.20 and 8.2.1.
When an external web speed actual value is used for the calculation, this is selected with H094 (block
diagram13) and H211 must be set to 1. Gearbox stage changeover is automatically taken into account.
When using a digital web tachometer, parameters H213 pulse number, H215 rated speed and H218
encoder type for the pulse sensing on the T300 must be set. Refer to Fig. 3.2 for the connections.
If an analog web tachometer is used, an analog input is used to sense the tachometer voltage. The
connection is only possible with external series resistors, refer to Fig. 3.2.
Dimensioning the external resistors:

Voltage VTE should be approx. 9V at rated line speed, so that the two resistors R1 and R2 should be
dimensioned as a function of the tachometer voltage. R2 should not exceed 5 kOhms.
Example: Tachometer voltage = 104 V at the rated line speed
VT/VTE = R1/R2 = approx. 11.5
with R2 = 3.3 kOhms, 39 kOhms is obtained as the next standard value for R1
R2 has an approx. load of 0.25 W and a 1 W rating resistor should be used.
To increase the control stability:

− A calculation interval time (time for one revolution at Dmin and Vmax) can be entered using H216.
(fastest allowed diameter changing)
Example: Core diameter Dcore = 140 mm,

Max. web speed Vmax = 200 m/min = 3333 mm/s
Time for one revolution: t = Dcore * π / Vmax = 132 ms
Caution:
If this time lower than 120ms ( i.e. for extremly small diameters), the diametre computer, due to his
integrating calculation technique, may not work properly.
In this case, an external diameter sensor is recommanded.
− The diameter change per time can be limited using H238. H238 should be selected, so that the
maximum change is still possible (occurs at Vmax and Vmin).
The selected change speed is automatically adapted to the actual diameter.
Example: Core diameter Dcore = 140 mm,

Max. diameter Dmax = 1000 mm
Max. web speed Vmax = 200 m/min = 3333 mm/s
Material thickness d=1 mm, i.e. 2 mm diameter increase/revolution
Time for one revolution: t = Dcore * π / Vmax = 132 ms

Manual
Thus, a maximum diameter change of 15.15 mm/s is obtained. This value is converted, and
the total change (Dmax - Dcore ) is entered at H238.
H238 = 860 mm / 15.15 mm/s = 56.76 s, with a safety reserve of 10%, 55 s is entered.
− An additional interlock can be enabled using H236. For H236=1, the diameter for the winder can only
increase, and for the unwinder, only decrease. The interlock is cancelled by setting the diameter with
"set diameter.
It is possible to decouple the winder diameter computer, and to inject an externally calculated actual
diameter. In this case, the "set diameter" control signal must be permanently available, and the external
value injected as diameter setting value, selected via H089.
Example a: Diameter actual value from the analog input, terminals 515/516 ⇒ H089 = 6
Set diameter from binary input, terminal 604 ⇒ H024 = 0
24 V must be connected at terminal 4
Example b: Diameter actual value from the interface board, setpoint 3 ⇒ H089 = 9
Set diameter from the interface board, control word 1, bit 14 ⇒ H024 = 1
Control word 1.14 from CB=1
The diamater computer can also be enabled without an active tension controller using a
binary signal which can be selected with H013 (web tachometer function). The web speed
actual value, which is involved for the calculation, can be selected with H093.
4.19 Gearbox stage changeover

The software package allows changeover between two gearbox stages. This is generally used to operate
with a higher tension but with the same motor output with the possible disadvantage of a lower web
speed, e.g. for thick materials. The changeover signal is selected using H042, the ratio from the standard
gearbox stage to gearbox stage 2 must be entered with H138.
Operation with gearbox stage 2, at the same motor speed, always results in a lower axial winder speed.
The influence of gearbox stage 2 on the speed setpoint, moment of inertia, diameter computer and
acceleration compensation is automatically taken into account by the winder software package.
Calculation formula for H138:
Standard gearbox ratio

H138 = * 100 %
Gearbox ratio 2
Example:
Winder motor speed / winder axis speed = 5 / 1 for standard gearbox stage
Winder motor speed / winder axis speed = 7 / 1 for gearbox stage 2
H138 = 5 / 7 * 100 % = 71,4 %

Manual
4.20 Speed actual value calibration

The speed actual value calibration for the winder must always be executed for the standard gearbox ratio:
When entering a speed setpoint (preferably 100%) without web speed compensation and without
saturation setpoint (tension control disabled!), the actual value measured at the winder shaft must
correspond to the entered setpoint. The actual diameter in the control (d310) must be identical with the
mechanically measured diameter of the winder shaft. For practical reasons, the core diameter is
calibrated using an empty winder mandrel.
For calibration, the following actual value data must be provided:
• Enter the core diameter H222
• Select the core diameter as diameter setting value, H89=28

• Actuate the "set diameter" command (minimum pulse duration, 100 ms)
Refere to Section 8.2.1

Note: Observe Section 4.2
4.21 Power-up control (block diagr.19 )

For the winder there are two operating modes: System operation and local operation. It is not possible to
toggle between these modes without shutting the system down. Toggling between these modes is
realized using the "local operator control" command, either via terminal 607, or via control word 2.14 from
CB or CU, the source is selected using H027. The operating modes are mutually interlocked, i.e. if the
"local operator control" signal level changes during operation, the system is always shutdown.
System operation:
The operating mode is switched-in using the control signal OFF1/ON = 1. The switch-on command is
transferred to the basic converter, the main contactor is switched-in and the DC link is charged. After
operational readiness is signaled back by the basic converter, the winder waits for the controller enable
using the "system start", and after enabling accelerates to the entered setpoint; refer to Section 4.8.
The control signal "OFF1/ON" must be set to 0 to shut the system down. When the winder comes to a
stanstill, the basic converter is shutdown, and if the winder is still running, the speed setpoint is is set to 0.
The system is shutdown once the standstill limit has been fallen below.
In system operation, the winder can only operate in the closed-loop tension control mode.
Using H166 = 1, it is possible to add local setpoints in system operation to the speed setpoint, with tension
control switched-in. For a speed setpoint = 0%, the appropriate inching setpoint can be switched-in via the
triggerable ramp-function generator using the "inching forwards" command. It is possible to add each
individual local setpoint with the appropriate command; the same interlocking functions are valid as for the
local operating modes. A change, from e.g. tension-controlled inching to winder operation can be easily
realized via the "enable setpoint" control input of the central ramp-function generator.
Local operation:
The "local operator control" control signal must be 1 to select a local operating mode. The operating
modes, run, crawl and positioning are activated with a positive edge of the appropriate control signal, and
are internally stored. For inching, the operating mode remains active, as long as the appropriate control
command is available. The modes are mutually interlocked, i.e. only one can be active at any time.

Manual
The associated setpoint is transferred to the control via the triggerable ramp-function generator when the
system is powered-up/down, and the ramp-function generator is set to the actual value at each mode
change. This is realized both at power-up and power-down. For the basic converter, a power-up
command is generated to close the main contactor. Controller enable is automatically issued after
operating readiness has been signaled back, which also causes the ramp-function generator to be set.
When inching, the winder runs with the appropriate setpoint only while the inch command is active, and
after that the drive remains powered-up for a time which can be selected using H014. The drive
automatically shuts down after this delay time has expired.
It is possible to cancel or shutdown all local operating modes using the "local stop" command or by
withdrawing "local operator control". The winder decelerates to 0% web speed, and when the standstill
limit has been fallen below, shuts down.
The local setpoints refer, as standard, to the web speed; closed-loop speed controlled operation can be
selected with H146=1.
Local run
The source for the control command is selected with H052.
The source for the setpoint is selected with H075, presetting H074 = 0%
Local crawl
The source for the control command is selected with H039.
The crawl setpoint is entered using H142, pre-setting, 10%.
Local inching, forwards/backwards

The source of the inching forwards/backwards command is selected using H038 and H040.
The setpoints are selected with parameters H143 and H144, and are, as standard +5% and -5%.
In the inching modes, the drive only operates with the selected setpoint as long as the control
command is present.
It is possible to change from inching into any other local operating mode without shutting down the
drive.
Local positioning
The positioning command source is selected using H026.
The positioning setpoint source is selected using H091. This mode is used to manouver the drive
(e.g. coupling-in using the manouvering potentiometer). The setpoint is internally used as X2 or X3
characteristic, and can be triggered using H163.
For all local operating modes, the setpoint is transferred through the internal triggerable ramp-function
generator. The ramp-up and ramp-down times are entered with H161 and they are referred to a 100%
setpoint.
Figure 4.21 shows as an example, the control signals using PROFIBUS-DP.
In addition to the switching sequences indicated, others are also conceivable (binary inputs, Peer-to-
Peer).
Mixed combinations are also conceivable.

Manual
OFF3
CW1.2
H048
t
OFF2
CW1.1
H047
t
OFF1/ON
CW1.0
H045
t
System Start
CW1.3
H021
t
enable setpoint
CW1.6
H050
t
set diameter
CW1.14
H024
t
tension controler on
CW1.11
H022
t
winder speed
d301
local operator control

CW2.4
H027
t
local inching forwards

CW1.8
H038
t
winder
standstill
SW2.12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 t
Figure 4.21: example, control signals using PROFIBUS-DP

Manual
Explanations regarding the numbers in circles in Fig. 4.21:

c The winder is closed-loop speed controlled. In this case, it is assumed that the diameter setpoint
is set according to the mechanical diameter of the roll, refer to d310, Sheet 9 Block diagram!
The up and down ramps for the speed setpoint can be set at the ramp-function generator for the
speed setpoint, Sheet 5 Block diagram.
The speed-controlled operation is required, among other things, for the flying roll change.
d The winder mode (closed-loop tension controlled mode) is switched-in at this instant.
If closed-loop speed controlled operation is not required, the tension controller can be enabled
together with the system start signal.
e The tension controller is inhibited and the winder drive decelerates along the selected down ramp
(ramp-function generator for the speed setpoint, Sheet 5 Block diagram).
f The winder drive can be powered-down.
If the winder is decelerated to zero speed to change a roll, the tension controller and the winder drive
can be simultaneously switched-off after the winder has come to a standstill.
Comment regarding local operator control:

− Local operator control, such as inching forwards etc. can also be achieved by the closed-loop speed
controlled operation and the appropriate setpoint inputs.
− Refer to the Block diagram, Sheet 18
➄Inching forwards (or inching backwards):

OFF1/ON = 0!
OFF3 (= OFF2) = 1
Afterwards, local operator control = 1,
➅ Afterwards, select inching forwards or inching backwards.
➆➇ After inching forwards or inching backwards, and after the inching time H014, the drive is
switched-off.
− Return to system operation (winder operation): Beforehand OFF1/ON, local control = 0!
4.22 Motorized potentiometer functions (block diagr.19)

The standard winder software has two separate motorized potentiometer functions, and the outputs are
connected, so that they can be coupled-in everywhere as setpoint.
Motorized potentiometer 1 can also be parameterized as ramp-function generator to create defined ramps
during commissioning, e.g. for inertia compensation. The ramp-function generator mode is switched-in
using H267=1 and the setpoint parameterized with H268 and the ramp-up and ramp-down times
parameterized with H269. The ramp-function generator runs up to the entered setpoint with the command
"raise motorized potentiometer 1", and towards 0% with "lower motorized potentiometer 1".
With the motorized potentiometer function, the appropriate output can be changed either up or down
using the control inputs. If the commands are briefly activated (<300 ms), the output is changed bitwise. If
the commands are activated for a longer period of time, the parameterized ramp-up/ramp-down times are
applied, for motorized potentiometer 1 using H265 and for motorized potentiometer 2, with H263. If the
control commands are available for longer than 4 s, then the ramp-up/ramp-down ramps are changed-
over to H266 (Mop 1) and H264 (Mop 2). The motorized potentiometer outputs are available as
monitoring parameters d305 and d306.

Manual
4.23 Monitoring functions and messages (block diagr.20)

4.23.1 Overspeed
Overspeed detection prevents undesirable drive operating statuses. If an overspeed condition is detected,
i.e. the determined speed actual value is greater than the positive limit value or less than the negative limit
value, then the drive system is shutdown with a fault message -fault number 116 and 117-.
H Nr Significance Explanation / condition for signal

H001 Positive overspeed as a % of the rated speed exceeded
H002 Negative overspeed as a % of the rated speed fallen below
Table 4.23.1: Parameters for detecting overspeed
Note:
An overspeed condition is only detected if the speed actual value sensing is functioning
correctly.
4.23.2 Overcurrent
When an overcurrent condition is identified, i.e., the current actual value determined by the basic
converter is greater than the positive limit value or lower than the negative limit value, then, if required, the
drive is shutdown with a fault message -fault number 118 or 119-.
H Nr Significance Explanation / condition for the message

H003 Positive overcurrent as a % of the rated motor current exceeded
H004 Negative overcurrent as a % of the rated motor current fallen below
Table 4.23.2: Parameters to detect an overcurrent condition
4.23.3 Stall protection

This function has the task of detecting if the drive has stalled, and if required, shuts down the drive with a
fault message. The stall signal is derived from the actual values of speed, current (torque) and speed
controller error:
- Absolute speed actual value is less than the value of the speed actual value threshold &
- Absolute current act. value is greater than the value of the current actual value threshold &
- Absolute control error is greater than the control error threshold
If these three conditions are present over a response time which can be parameterized, the stall
protection signal is generated, and the drive is shutdown - fault number 120-.
HNr Significance Explanation / condition for the message

H007 Speed actual value threshold as a % of the rated speed fallen below
H008 Current actual value threshold as a % of the rated motor current exceeded
H009 Control error threshold as a % of the rated speed exceeded
H010 Response time in ms exceeded
Table 4.23.3: Parameters to detect a stall condition

Manual
4.24 Splice control (block diagr.21)

Note:
− Generally, the external machine control is used to fully control the roll change including all of
the signals required to control this software package.
− The splicing functions are only provided for the requirements described here. The
requirements regarding the actual functions to be implemented must be precisely discussed
with the manufacturer of the splicing mechanical system.
The splice logic controls the drive functions for a flying roll change. The closed-loop tension control, fast
stop, reverse winding after a splice and synchronization are implemented on the T300. The sequence
control for the automatic splice functions (mechanical rotation, power-up commands for synchronizing and
splicing, controlling the glue roll and knife) must be realized in a PLC control.
The splice control is activated via H148 (reverse winding time) as soon as a value not equal to zero is
entered there. Further, H022 must be set to 6 or 7, dependent on whether the command to enable the
tension controller is received from a terminal or via a control bit from the CB. The setpoint for the reverse
winding function is entered at H149 (the value must be negative!).
To sense a new diameter, a diameter must first be set (e. g. average value from the highest- and smallest
possible diameter for a splice). The new reel is then powered-up with a local operating mode and runs at
a low speed. The tachometer is then applied and signaled via a binary signal. The diameter computer is
enabled and calculates the actual diameter of the new roll. The drive is then shutdown again.
Loading
position 2
Swivelling
mechanism
1 Glue roll
Splice knife
Tension measurement
Tachometer
The swivelling mechanism is rotated into the changeover position for splicing. The drive with the new roll
is powered-up again. If it is running in system operation, it synchronizes to the web speed. The "tension
control on" signal is issued; however the drive still stays in the closed-loop speed control mode until the
"knife in the cutting system" signal becomes active. It then switches over to closed-loop tension control.
The partner drive which was previously in the closed-loop tension control mode goes into a fast stop
mode. Depending on the parameterization of H148/149 it rotates backwards for some time before it shuts
down.

Manual
Changeover
position 1
Swivelling
mechanism
2 Glue roll
Splice knife
Tension measurement
Tachometer
It is necessary to establish a connection from the "tension control on" output to the "partner drive is in the
tension controlled mode" input of the partner so that the drives can be mutually interlocked. The terminals
are permanently assigned (refer to block diagr.21).

Manual
4.25 Length measurement and length hold (block diagr.13)

The length measurement function requires a digital pulse encoder at the web tachometer input (refer to
Fig. 3.2). This can either be an actual web tachometer or the pulse tachometer signals of the master
machine drive. After H217 (encoder type) and H213 (pulse number) and H215 (rated speed) have been
input, a length (travel) actual value is available. However, this must be adapted to the actual
normalization.
In this case, the rated length Ln (length, where 100% travel is measured) of the configuration according to
the following equation:
Π ⋅ Dw 32,767 ⋅ 65,536 Dw
Ln = . = 1685,58. Dw.....roll diameter in [mm]
i 4⋅ r i.r i.........gearbox factor nmot/nroll
r........pulse encoder pulse number
The normalization length 75 [km] is now divided by the rated length. If the result is approximately in the
range up to 190%, then this value is entered into parameter H239. If the ratio is above this, then H239 is
left at 100% and the inverse value is generated: Ln/75 [km]. This then lies below 50% and is entered in
H240.
75[km]
H239= ⋅ 100%, H240 = 100% if H239 < 190%;
Ln
Ln
otherwise: H240= ⋅ 100% H239 = 100%,
75[km]
The actual length is a percentage of the normalization length of 75 [km] and can be monitored at
parameter d309.
For the stopping distance, the braking travel must be calculated. This is the material length, which still
runs through the machine for a standard stop, until the complete machine comes to a standstill. It is
determined from the machine ramp-function generator data. The maximum line speed (H244), and the
deceleration time from the maximum line speed Tr (H241) and the rounding-off time at deceleration Tvr
(H242) must be entered. The calculation assumes operation at constant line speed and a linear
deceleration ramp for a standard stop. The braking travel can then be precisely calculated.
0
t
a(t)
Tvr Tvr
Tr
The braking distance can be monitored at d350. It is added to the length actual value and compared with
a length setpoint, selected using H262. If this setpoint is exceeded, the "length stop" signal becomes
active, which is connected to the limit value monitor multiplexers. It can directly initiate a standard stop via
a binary output, or can be signaled to the automation via the status word. The "length stop" signal is
canceled if the machine operates at less than 4% of rated speed or the drive is powered-down.

Manual
Note:
- The braking distance is continuously calculated and displayed. However, it is only precise if the drive
is operated with v=const. The value is too small during the acceleration phase and too high during
deceleration. The error is a function of the ratio Tvr/Tr.
− The length actual value can be a maximum of 149.99 [km] (199.99% at d309),
in this case the resolution is 0.0061% of 75 [km] or approx. 4.5 [m]. The same scaling is also valid for
the braking distance.
− Using parameter H280, the resolution of the length measurement can be increased to the detriment of
the total length. For H280 >0, the following is valid for the complete length and resolution:
Total length (H280 >0) = 75/(2 to the power of H280)
Resolution: Total length /(H280 >0) x 0.0061%/100%
Example:
A total length of 10 km is required. Which resolution is obtained from this?

H280 = 3, this results in a total length of 75/(2 to the power of 3) = 9.375km
The resolution (H280 >0) is then 9.375km x 0.0061%/100%= 0.571m
After the complete length of 10km has passed, 10km/9.375 x100% = 106.67% can be seen at
visualization parameter d309.
Comment: The value at d309 can be used up to a maximum of 199.99%. In this particular example
this would correspond to a maximum measurable length of 18.7km.

Manual

Manual
5 Configuring instructions
5.1 Formulas for a winder drive
Dcore
D V
J2
J1
b
Mb
Z
n1 n2
M
Gearbox (i = n1 / n2)
(1) Winding ratio:
Dmax [mm]
q =
Dcore [mm]
(2) Speed [RPM]:
1000 * V [m/min]
n =
D * Π [mm]
(3) Winding torque referred to the motor shaft [Nm]:
Z * D [N mm]
MW =
2000 * i 1
(4) Winding power [kW]:
Z * V [Nm/min]
Pw =
60 * 103 1
(5) Gearbox ratio, maximum motor speed/maximum core speed
n1 Π * Dcore * nmax [mm/min]

i= =
n2 1000 * vmax [m/min]

Manual
(6) Moment of inertia, full cylinder [kg m2]:
m Π [mm kg mm4]
J = * D2 = * b * ρ * D 4
8 * 106 32 * 1012 [dm3]
(7) Moment of inertia, hollow cylinder [kg m2]:
m Π
J = 4
6 * (D - D
4
) = * b * ρ * (D4 - D4 )
8 * 10 core 32 * 1012 core
(8) Moment of inertia reduction through a gearbox
J2
J1 = 2
I
(9) Fixed moment of inertia [kg m2]

caused by the fixed winder components (motor, gearbox and winder core) referred to the motor
shaft
JCore
JF = JMotor + Jgearb. +
i2
(10) Variable moment of inertia [kg m2]
Π* b * ρ [mm kg mm4]
JV = * (D4 - D4 )
32 * 1012 * i2 core [dm3]
(11) Accelerating torque referred to the motor shaft [Nm] for the accelerating time tb
100 * i ∆V
Mb = * (Jf + JV)
3 * D tb
(12) Acceleration power [kW]
i * V 10 * i2 * V ∆V
Pb = * Mb = 2 * (Jf + JV)
30 * D 9 * D tb

Manual
(13) Rated motor torque [Nm]
9549 * PN
MN =
nN
(14) Winding capacity for flat material [m]:
Π
l= * ( D2 - D2 )
4000 * d Max core
(15) Winding capacity for round material [m]:
Π*b
l= * ( D2 - D2 )
2000 * 3 * D2R Max core
(16) Relative capacity depending on the winding ratio:
q 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
l 1
 = 1-  75 % 88.9% 93.8% 96% 97.2% 98% 98.4% 98.8% 99%
lmax q2
(17) Winding time [s]:
l
t = 60 *
V

Manual
Abbreviations and dimensions
b = Material width [mm]

bmax = Maximum material width of the roll [mm],
d = Material thickness [mm]
D = Actual diameter [mm]
Dcore = Core - or sleeve diameter [mm]
Dmax = Maximum diameter [mm]
DR = Material diameter for round materials [mm]
i = Gearbox ratio (refer to (5))
J = Moment of inertia [kgm2]
JF = Fixed moment of inertia caused by the fixed winder components (motor, gearbox + core)
referred to the motor shaft [kgm2]
l = Material length [m]
lmax = Maximum material length (for 0 mm core diameter) [m]
Jgearb. = Gearbox moment of inertia referred to the motor shaft [kgm2]
Jcore = Moment of inertia of the winder core [kgm2]
Jmotor = Motor moment of inertia [kgm2]
JV = Variable moment of inertia caused by the wound material, referred to the motor shaft [kgm2]
(refer to (10))
m = Mass [kg]
Mw = Winding torque referred to the motor shaft [Nm]
Mb = Accelerating torque referred to the motor shaft [Nm]
MbF% = Percentage accelerating torque due to the permanent moment of inertia JF at the minimum
diameter [% of MN] (refer to formula (1.2))
MbV% = Percentage accelerating torque due to the variable moment of inertia JV at maximum
diameter and maximum width [% of MN] (refer to formula (1.5))
MN = Rated motor torque [Nm] (refer to (13))
n = Speed [RPM]
nmax = Max. motor speed [RPM] (No-load speed at maximum field weakening)
nN = Rated motor speed at rated voltage and rated field current [RPM]
Pb = Accelerating power [kW]
PM = Required motor output [kW]
PN = Rated motor output [kW]
Pw = Winding power [kW]
q = Winding ratio (refer to (1) )
r = Specific weight (density [kg/dm3]
t = Winding time [s]
tb = Accelerating time [s]
th = Accelerating time for the web speed from 0 to Vmax [s]
V = Web speed [m/min]
Vmax = Maximum web speed [m/min]
Z = Tension [N]
∆V = Speed difference [m/min]

Manual
5.2 Calculating the parameters for inertia compensation

The standard axial winder software package calculates the required accelerating torque for accelerating
and braking
π ∆n
(1.1) Mb = * J *
30 tb
and controls it via the armature current (block diagrams), so that the tension torque remains as constant
at possible.
Acceleration dv/dt can be calculated from the winder software, or entered externally. Moment of inertia J
is not constant due to the increasing material being wound-up, and it consists of two components:
a) Fixed moment of inertia JF (parameter H228), caused by the fixed winder components.
b) Variable moment of inertia JV (adapted using parameter H227) caused by the wound material.
This section includes instructions how parameter H228 can be calculated for fixed moment of inertias,
and H227 for the variable moment of inertia, from the system data. The equations are numerical
equations. The abbreviations and dimensions are listed in Section 5.1.
5.2.1 Determining parameter H228 for the fixed moment of inertia

The fixed moment of inertia consists of the sum of the following moments of inertia:
− Motor moment of inertia

− Gearbox moment of inertia referred to the motor shaft
− Moment of inertia of the winder core, referred to the motor shaft
− Remaining moments of inertia as a result of couplings, tachometer etc.
Motor Gearbox Winder core
coupling coupling
The following formula is valid for the fixed moment of inertia (refer to (9)):
Jcore
JF = Jmotor + Jgearbox +
i2
The moments of inertia of the motor and gearbox can be taken generally from the rating plates or data
sheets. The winder core moment of inertia must be calculated. If cardboard cores are used, their moment
of inertia can be neglected.
The higher the gearbox ratio, the smaller is the effect of the winder core and the variable moment of
inertia on the total moment of inertia.
The "remaining moments of inertia" are generally small with respect to the other moments of inertia and
can be neglected.
Determining H228
It is recommended that the value of H228 is determined in two steps:

Manual
1) Calculating the % accelerating torque MbF% using the fixed moment of inertia JF and the
accelerating time tb :
Prerequisite : D = Dcore and tb = th
JF * n N * i ∆V
MbF% = *
2.865 * Dcore * PN tb
Formula characters and dimensions:

Refer to Section 5.1
(1.2)
This equation is obtained by dividing the formulas (11) and (13), which calculates the accelerating torque
referred to the rated torque as a %.
2) Determining the setting value for parameter H228
MbF% * th
H228= * 100%
H264

(1.3)
The value of H264 should be the same as the shortest ramp, e.g. inertia compensation may be required
for a fast stop. The equation is always valid for internal dv/dt calculation (H226=0) and H225=100 %.
Example for the fixed moment of inertia
Drive system data

- Fixed moment of inertia: JF = 38.77 kg m2
- Rated motor speed: nN = 400 RPM
- Gearbox ratio, nmot/nwinder shaft i = 5.8
- Core diameter Dcore = 508 mm
- Rated motor output PN = 186 kW
- Max. web speed: Vmax = 339 m/min
- Ramp-up time 0 to Vmax: th = 20 sec
- Ramp-down time for fast stop H220 = 5 sec

Manual
The following is obtained from equation (1.2):
38.77 * 400 * 5.8 339

MbF% = * = 5.63%
2.865 * 508 * 186 20

(1.4)
H228 = 5 .63% * 4 = 22.52%

(1.5)
With H228 = 22.52 % and acceleration via a 20 sec. ramp at the minimum diameter, the inertia
compensation generates a torque of 5.63%.
5.2.2 Determining parameter H227 for the variable moment of inertia

The maximum variable moment of inertia is obtained from the maximum diameter and maximum width
from equation (10) as follows:
π * bmax * ρ
J Vmax = (Dmax 4 - Dmin 4 )
(1.6) 32 * 10 12 * i 2
It is recommended that the correct value of H227 is determined in two steps:
1) Calculating the % accelerating torque MbV% for a full roll using the maximum variable moment of
inertia JVmax:
Required : D = Dmax , tb = th and JF = 0
bmax * ρ * (D 4max - D 4core) * nN ∆V

MbV% = *
12
29.18 * 10 * i * Dmax * PN tb

(1.7)
This equation is obtained if equation (1.4) is inserted in equation (11), and the result is divided by equation
13, then the accelerating torque is calculated referred to the rated torque as a %.

Manual
2) Determining the setting value for parameter H227:
MbV% * th
H227 = * 100%
H264
Formula characters and dimensions

(1.8)
This equation is valid for internal dv/dt calculation (H226=0) and H225=100 %.
Example for the variable moment of inertia
Drive system data:
- Specific weight (density) of the material r = 7.85 (steel)

- Rated motor speed nN = 400 RPM
- Gearbox ratio nmot/nwinder shaft i = 5.8
- Max. diameter Dmax = 1500 mm
- Core diameter Dcore = 508 mm
- Rated motor output: PN = 187 kW
- Max. material width bmax = 420 mm
- Max. web speed Vmax = 340 m/min
- Ramp-up time from 0 to Vmax th = 20 sec
- Ramp-down time for fast stop H220 = 5 sec
420 * 7.85 * (15004 - 5081) * 400 340

MbV% = * = 2.36%
29.18 1012 * 5.8 * 1500 * 187 20

(1.9)
The following is obtained from equation:
H227 = 2 .36% * 4 = 9.44%

(1.10)
With H227 = 9.44 % and acceleration via a 20 sec. ramp, at maximum speed and maximum web width
the inertia compensation generates a torque of 2.36 %.

Manual
5.3 Selecting the winder ratio (winder range)

Winder operation is handled in the following.
Unwinding is essentially the same. Winding ratio is the following quotient:

Max. roll diameter (Dmax )
Winder core diameter (Dcore )
The useful wound quantity as a % is, according to the formula (14) :
)⋅ π
2 2
(D max -D core
4
For a 6:1 winding ratio, the useful wound length is ~
~ 97 %.
5.4 Power and torque

The power required for winding is constant over the complete range, if the selected speed of the selected
winding tension is kept constant (also refer to formula (4)).
(3.1) Winding power Pw :
Zs ⋅ b ⋅ d ⋅ V
PW = kW
60 ⋅ 103
b = Operating width in mm
d = Operating thickness in mm
V = Web speed in m/min
Zs = Specific web tension in [N/(mm2 material cross-section surface)]
The required torque increases linearly with the roll diameter.

Manual
5.5 Selecting the motor

The standard axial winder software package is suitable for both synchronous- as well as for induction
motors without any differences in the control behavior. The induction motor frequently permits a more
favorable motor dimensioning in comparison to a synchronous motor as it can also be used in the field-
weakening range.
We recommend that Rotec induction motors are used instead of standard motors (e. g. Rentec motors)
for the following reasons:
− The actual value encoder is already integrated in the motor

− Good field-weakening properties allows the motor to be optimally dimensioned
− Forced ventilation is integrated in the motor as standard. This offers adequate cooling at low speeds
and also a high torque. For operation at field-weakening speeds, there is no increased noise from the
fan in comparison to non-ventilated motors.
− Compact and lightweight motors
Refer to the PATH dimensioning program and McWin (this can be obtained from A&D DS A) as well as
the Engineering Manual for Motors for engineering information on synchronous- and induction motors.
5.6 Dimensioning the gearbox

The gearbox is dimensioned together with the machine manufacturer (OEM).
5.7 Selecting the converter

The drive converter is dimensioned using PATH and the Engineering Manual for Drive Converters.
5.8 Selecting the closed-loop control concept

The axial winder technology module allows the following closed-loop control concepts to be implemented:
- Indirect closed-loop tension control (without tension tranducer)

- Direct closed-loop tension control with dancer role or tension transducer
- Closed-loop constant speed control (if there is no nip position)
These closed-loop control concepts are briefly discussed in the following. The following Sections 5.10 to
5.16 include individual configuring examples: Parameter H203 is used to toggle between the various
closed-loop control concepts.
5.8.1 Indirect closed-loop tension control

This technique does not require a tension tranducer (H203=0). The closed-loop tension controller is not
used, but the tension setpoint is multiplied by the diameter, and the result is directly pre-controlled as
torque setpoint, so that the armature current linearly increases with increasing diameter and the tension is
kept constant (refer to the configuring examples, Sections 5.10 and 5.11).
In this case, it is important to precisely compensate the friction- and accelerating torques, so that the pre-
controlled torque setpoint tracks with good approximation, the required material tension.
For this control type, it must be observed that the mechanical losses must be kept as low as possible, i.e.
no worm gears, no open intermediate ratios, for herringbone teeth, the direction of rotation should be the
same as that specified, the loss difference between gearboxes in the warm and cold states should be as
low as possible.

Manual
5.8.2 Direct closed-loop tension control using dancer rolls

The web is fed over a dancer roll. The dancer roll tries to deflect the material with a defined force. The
dancer role position is detected using a potentiometer, e.g. a magnetoresistive potentiometer which
represents the material tension.
The material tension is a function of the dancer roll weight, the return force of the suspension elements
and the distance between possible deflecting rolls.
The higher-level controller to the speed controller (designated as "closed-loop tension controller" in this
manual) is used as dancer-position controller, and controls the dancer roll position to the position setpoint
(e.g. dancer roll center position). The position controller then normally outputs a speed correction setpoint
to the speed controller (H203 = 3 or 5).
The position setpoint is generally not fed-in from the outside, but parameterized as fixed value, H081 =
31; the position setpoint is entered via H080.
For dancer rolls with pneumatic or hydraulically adjustable support, a decreasing winding hardness can be
implemented using the winding hardness characteristic of the PT board. In this case, the output signal
d328 of the characteristic block is output at an analog output, and is used as setpoint for the dancer
support system (refer to the configuring examples, Sections 5.12 and 5.13).
The dancer roll concept as actual value transducer has the advantage that it simultaneously acts as
material storage medium (when the stroke is selected high enough). Thus, it already is a "tension
controller". Dancer roll controls are complex but they offer the best control performance.
The web storage function has a damping effect for

- concentric paper rolls
- layer jumps, e.g. when winding cables
- at roll changes
5.8.3 Direct closed-loop tension control with tension measuring transducer

The material tension is directly measured using a tension transducer (e.g. tension transducer from FAG
Kugelfischer or Philips). The output signal is proportional to the tension, and is fed to the tension controller
as actual value signal.
The tension controller generally specifies the armature current setpoint by appropriately controlling the
current limit (closed-loop current limiting control, H203 = 1, refer to configuring examples Sections 5.14
and 5.15).
The tension setpoint can either be internally or externally entered.
5.8.4 Closed-loop constant speed control

The control techniques, discussed up until now, with either indirect or direct tension control assume, that
the web speed outside the winder is kept constant by a nip position, e.g. by two rolls which are pressed
together through which the material is fed, and which are driven at a speed corresponding to the web
speed.
If there is no nip position, then closed-loop tension control cannot be implemented, and the winder is then
generally only controlled to have a constant circumferential speed.
For this closed-loop control concept, the web speed must be sensed using a web tachometer so that the
diameter can be calculated.
The closed-loop constant speed control is described in more detail in Section 5.16, using a configuring
example.

Manual
5.8.5 Selecting a suitable closed-loop control concept

The most important criteria for selecting a suitable closed-loop control concept are summarized in the
following table
Closed-loop control Indirect tension control Direct tension control Direct tension control Closed-loop constant
concept with dancer roll with tension tranducer speed control
Notes regarding actual No actual value tension Intervenes in the web Sensitive to overload, -
tension sensing sensing required run, has material generally doesnt effect
storage capability the web run
Winding ratio Up to approx. 10:1: From experience up to Up to approx. 15:1

excellent compensation From experience, up to approx. 15:1, precise
Dmax/Dcore
of dv/dt and friction approx. 15:1. dv/dt compensation
required required
Tension range Up to approx. 6:1 for Can only be changed for Up to approx. 20:1 with -
Zmax/Zmin good compensation of selectable dancer roll precise dv/dt
friction and dv/dt support compensation
Winding ratio x Generally up to 40:1 Very dependent on the Up to 100:1, essentially -

dancer roll support dependent on the
tension range
design, up to approx. tension actual value
Dmax Zmax
40:1 signal
 x 
Dcore Zmin
Friction / tension force From experience, over - - -

which cannot be the complete range
compensated <1
Web speed Up to 600 m/min for up to 2000 m/min Up to 2000 m/min for -
excellent compensation precise dv/dt
compensation
Closed-loop control Sheet steel, textiles, Rubber, cable, wire, Paper, thin foils Sorting winder
concept preferably used paper textiles, foils, paper
for
Nip position required yes yes yes -
Web tachometer - - - yes

required
5.9 Defining the polarity

These definitions are independent of the particular mode for winders or unwinders.
Note: The specified polarities refer both to the T300 board and the basic converter.
The values for the line speed setpoint, tension setpoint and tension actual value must be positive. The
remaining signs and polarities are then obtained according to Tables 5.9.a and 5.9.b (a negative value
can be entered for the line speed setpoint for reverse operation, if forwards and reverse are required).

Manual
Caution, the following is always valid:
The speed setpoint is positive; monitoring parameter d340.
For indirect closed-loop tension control and closed-loop tension control with tension measuring
transducer, the tension setpoint is always positive, monitoring parameter d304.
For closed-loop pos. control (e.g. dancer roll) the position setp. is 0% or positive, monitoring
parameter d304.
The following winding types are possible for axial winder operation:
Winding type A Windig type B Winding type C Winding type D

Winder, winding Winder, winding Unwinder, winding Unwinder, winding
from above from below from above from below
v v v
v M M M
M
n n n n
Control signal level: Control signal level: Control signal level: Control signal level:
Winder=1 Winder=1 Winder=0 Winder=0
winding from below=0 winding from below=1 wining from below =0 winding from below =1
Table 5.9.a Defining the winding types and the appropriate control signals for winders (selected
using H043) and winding from below (selected using H035).
Winder Speed Bias ref. Torque setpoint Direct closed-loop Indirect Tension control with
type actual value value/ d329 tension control with tension dancer roll
d307, actual value CUVC,CUMC:r269 tension trans-ducer control,
H145 / tension Position setpoint/
CUVC,CUMC:r219 CU2: r246
d341 1) Tension setpoint/ setpoint actual value
CU2: r214 5)
actual value d304 d304 / d317
CU3:r219 d304 / d317
A positive positive positive positive positive positive ≥ 0% 6)
B negative positive negative positive positive positive ≥ 0% 6)
C negative negative negative 2)3) positive positive positive ≥ 0% 6)
D positive negative positive 2)4) positive positive positive ≥ 0% 6)
Table 5.9.b Defining the polarity
Notes:
1) Only set the bias reference value for the closed-loop current limiting control (H203 =0,1,2),
otherwise enter 0%.
2) The unwinder can also go from braking to motoring, e.g. for low diameters or low tensions
3) For inching (without material), positive polarity
4) When inching (without material), negative polarity
5) Positive = torque direction 1, negative = torque direction 2

Manual
6) The tension actual value is dependent on the dancer roll position

Winder: Dancer roll at the top : Winder too fast, tension actual value > tension
setpoint
Dancer roll at the bottom : Winder too slow, tension actual value < tension
setpoint
Dancer roll in the center : Winder running with the web speed, tension
setpoint = tension actual value
Unwinder: Dancer roll at the top : Winder too slow, tension actual value > tension
setpoint
Dancer roll at the bottom : Winder too fast, tension actual value < tension
setpoint
Dancer roll in the center : Winder running with the web speed, tension
setpoint = tension actual value

Manual
5.10 Configuring example:

Winder with indirect closed-loop tension control
Fig. 5.10. shows, as an example, how a winder can be configured with indirect closed-loop tension
control.
<1> Tension setpoint and web speed - setpoint ("machine speed") are output as analog signals
from the automation or as parameter.
<2> A pulse encoder as axial tachometer is used for sensing the actual speed.
<3> The diameter computer continually calculates the diameter according to the following formula
Web speed
Diameter ≈
Speed
<4> A speed setpoint is fed to the speed controller <5>; the speed setpoint corresponds to the
actual web speed plus the saturation setpoint H145 <6> (set H145 to approx. 5 % ... 10 %).
The saturation setpoint, means that the speed controller goes into saturation when the material
web is present <7>, i.e. it goes to its positive output limit. When attempting to increase the axial
speed by the saturation setpoint, the speed controller output reaches the current limits B+ <8>,
as a result of the selected tension setpoint.
<8> The tension setpoint specifies the current controller current setpoint by appropriately
controlling current limit B+.
<9> The main function of the indirect closed-loop tension control is that the tension setpoint,
multiplied by the normalized diameter D is input as armature current (max. diameter and max.
tension setpoint" results in the max. armature current.
<10> Precise compensation of the friction- and accelerating torques <11> are required, so that the
entered armature current, results in the closest possible required web tension. The friction
torque is always added, and the inertia compensation, acts, in a braking, fashion when
decelerating, and accelerating when the winder is accelerating.
<12> For web breaks, the speed controller is activated and prevents the winder drive from
accelerating by controlling the circumferential velocity to the web speed + saturation setpoint
(overspeed protection). Web break, refer to Section 4.15.

Manual
Web threading:
When threading the web in system operation, there is an automatic transition from closed-loop speed to
closed-loop tension control. In this case, the tension setpoint should be injected when accelerating, and
the tension controller enabled, whereby the torque limit is set corresponding to the required tension <9>.
When the tension is built-up, the current limit automatically takes over drive control.
Torque/speed characteristic
Dmax Dcore
M + +
Winder
direction
Acceleration (tension already

established)
Web
break
H145 n
Note: The tension-setpoint becomes effective when the tension controller is enabled.

Manual
Nip position
<7> M
n
+ +
Zset <1> Vset <1> (MI)
M
Axial tach.
<2>
Vset
[7] [5]
nact H092=8
D nact Width Diameter
computer [9] <3>
Compensation
factors [9] Vset
D=
n
+
H200=100% <11>
H141=0% +
[8] H145 ≈ 5 % [5]
H203=0
<12> Bias ref. value
[8]
D
T300
[5]
D
[8]
Variable moment Vset
+ of inertia nset =
<10> D
+
Speed setpoint
P443=3002
Torque act. value <4>

Monitoring functs. CUVC,CUMC: P734.06=24,184
CU2,CU3: P694.06=264 -
Kp- adaption
n-contr.
CU2: P226 =3008
100% CUVC,CUMC: P232 =3008
<5>
[6] B+
Positive torque limit: P493=3006
-1 <8> Negative torque limit: P499=3007

3008
-100% B-
Winder from the top or
unwind stand from below
6SE70
Current controller
Fig. 5.10: Example of a winder with indirect closed-loop tension control

[3] = Page 3 in the block diagram
<2> = Note in the text

Manual

Unwind stand indirect closed-loop tension control
In Fig. 5.11, an example is illustrated as to how an unwind stand with indirect closed-loop tension control
can be configured.
<1> Tension setpoint and web speed - setpoint ("machine speed") are output as analog signals
from the automation or as parameter.
<2> A pulse encoder as axial tachometer is used for sensing the actual speed
Web speed
Diameter ≈
Speed
<4> During unwinding, the speed controller is over-controlled (it goes into saturation), as a low
negative bias reference value is injected into it (H145=0...- 5 %), and the web speed setpoint is
switched-out (H041=8 and H140=0%). Thus, when a material web is available, the speed
controller is at its negative output limit. When an attempt is made to "retrieve" the unwound
material, the speed controller reaches the specified torque limit B- as a result of the selected
tension setpoint.
<8> The tension setpoint specifies the torque setpoint by appropriately controlling current limit B-
(braking in the counter-clockwise direction).
<9> The main function of the indirect closed-loop tension control is that the tension setpoint,
multiplied by diameter D, is entered as torque (max. diameter and max. tension setpoint results
in maximum torque).
<10> Precise compensation of the friction- and accelerating torques are required so that the entered
armature current results in the closest possible required web tension.
<12> If the unwind stand was to continue to rotate or even accelerate when the web breaks this
would be a potential hazard due to uncontrolled material rejection (centrifugal force).
This is prevented by activating the speed controller as the specified limit current is now sufficient
to approach the saturation setpoint, set using H145. The drive continues to rotate slowly in the
wind direction and winds up possible residual material still left in the machine, refer to Section
4.15.
<13> The web speed setpoint input can be used when threading the web material. In this case, a
positive web speed setpoint is entered, and enabled using H041=9. In this case, the negative
bias reference value H145 must be taken into account.
The speed setpoint is disabled with H041 = 8 once the web has been threaded. After the tension
control has been switched-in, the material tension can be established. The speed setpoint can
also be switched-in and output via terminal; selection using H041.

Manual
Note:
Motor operation can also be required for an unwind stand, if the accelerating torque when braking is
greater than the tension torque.
Torque/speed characteristic:
Dmax
Dcore
MII
Unwind
n
Web
break
H145

Manual
Nip position
+
n M
-
Zset <1> Vset <1> (MII)
M
Axial tach.
<2>
Vset
[7] [5]
nact
T300
100%
H140=0% H092=8
Diameter
computer [9] <3>
Maneuvering [16]
Vset
D=
+ n
H200=100%
H141=0% D nact Width +
H145 ≈ -3% [5]
H203=0
<12> Bias ref. value
[7] Compensation [9]
factors
D
[5]
D
[8]
Variable moment Vset
+ of inertia nset =
D
+ <10>
Speed setpoint
P443=3002
Torque act. value <4>

Monitoring functs. CUVC,CUMC: P734.06=24,184
CU2,CU3: P694.06=264 -
Kp- adaption
n-controller
CUVC,CUMC: P232=3008
100% CU2: P226=3008
[6] B+ Positive torque limit: P493=3006
-1 <8> Negative torque limit: P499=3007

-100% B-
6SE70
Current controller
Fig. 5.11: Example of an unwinder with indirect closed-loop tension control


Manual

Winder with dancer roll, closed-loop speed correction control
Fig. 5.12. show, as an example, how a winder with dancer roll can be configured.
<1> The web speed setpoint, is input in this case as analog signal at terminals 503, 504.
<2> An analog tachometer is used for speed actual value sensing. This is connected-up at the basic
converter. The actual value is transferred via the dual port RAM to the T300.
Web speed
Diameter ≈
Speed
<4> The analog actual dancer roll position is connected at terminals 501, 502. The D component is
used to damp the dancer roll and prevents oscillation between the dancer roll and winder.
<6> The dancer roll position reference value is permanently entered with H083=11 via parameter
H082; generally, the voltage is set for a dancer roll center position. The tension setpoint channel
is isolated using H244=1 so that the winding hardness control can be used for the dancer roll
control.
<7> The "tension controller" operates as closed-loop dancer roll position controller, and
generally generates a supplementary speed setpoint, which is injected into the speed controller
with positive polarity, so that the dancer position actual values tracks the entered position
setpoint.
<8> The speed setpoint is obtained from the total speed setpoint divided by the diameter.
<9> Generally, the closed-loop position controller output has a relatively small influence, of approx.
2...10% on the speed controller. The tension controller output can be limited using H195; the
influence on the speed setpoint can be normalized with H141.
<10> The compensating torques for friction and acceleration are added as supplementary torque
setpoints after the speed controller. Generally, friction compensation is not requried for the
closed-loop dancer roll position control and generally, inertia compensation can also be omitted.
<9> When the material web breaks, the dancer roll falls to the lower endstop, and the position
controller reaches its output limit, as it can no longer maintain the reference position. Thus, the
speed is increased by the value set using H195 - refer to Section 4.15.
<13> Normally, there is no external tension setpoint, for a winder with dancer roll.
For a dancer roll with adjustable support force, as illustrated in Fig. 5.12, a tension setpoint can
be injected into the technology board in order to use its winding hardness control. The winding
hardness characteristic output, can then, for example, be output at terminals 521/522, and be
used as setpoint for the pneumatically adjustable dancer roll support.
<1> When threading the material web, the normal web speed setpoint input can be used (in this
case, terminals 503, 504). After threading, the parameterized tension is established after the
tension control has been switched-in.

Manual
Dmax Dcore
Winding
Web
break
n
H195
Speed/torque characteristic for a web break condition

Manual
Nip position
n M
+
Vset Dancer
+ +
<1> + (MI)
P
-
<4>
M
- P <13>
U
<1> Zset <13> T
<4>
Vset 0 - 10 V <2>
Position act. value
Term. 501,502 Term. 503,504 Term. 505,506 Term. 521,522
H085 =0 H081 = 2 [10] H105 = 27
H069 = 1
D
Position. ref. value
H082
H083=11 H172
H173 D
T300
[8]
D-comp. [7] Winding hardness characteristic [7]
<6> - H174 =0 H244 = 1
+
- nact H092=7
Diameter
Position contr. [8] computer [9] <3>
("tension controler“)
<7>
Vset
D=
Limiting n
<9> [8]
H194 =1 D
H195 ≈10%
Vset
+ nset =
H203=3 + D
Speed actual value
H141=100% <8> Speed setpoint
[5] P443=3002 CU2,CU3:
P694.002=219
CUVC,CUMC:
+ P734.002=148,91
Variable moment
of inertia [9]
-
Kp- adaption
D nact Width
n-contr.
<5>
Compensation [9] CU2: P226=3008
factors Torque setpoint
CUVC,CUMC: P734.005=165
CU2,CU3: P694.005=246
Suppl. torque setpoint
P506=3005
+
+ <10>
Monitoring fcts. [20]
Torque actual value

CUVC,CUMC: P734.006=24,184
CU2,CU3: P694.005=264
6SE70/71 Current contr.
Fig. 5.12: Winder with dancer roll, closed-loop speed correction control

Manual

Unwind stand with dancer roll, closed-loop speed correct. cntrl
Fig. 5.13 illustrates, as an example, how a winder with dancer roll can be configured.
<1> The web speed setpoint, is input in this case as analog signal at terminals 503, 504.
<2> An analog tachometer is used for speed actual value sensing. This is connected-up at the
basic converter. The actual value is transferred to the T300 via the dual port RAM.
Web speed
Diameter ≈
Speed
<4> The analog dancer roll position actual value is connected at terminals 501,502. The D
component is used to damp the dancer roll and prevents oscillation between the dancer roll and
winder.
<6> The dancer roll position setpoint is permanently entered via parameter H082 using H083=11;
generally the voltage is set for a dancer roll center position. The tension setpoint channel is
isolated with H244=1 and the winding hardness characteristic can then be used to control the
dancer roll
<7> The tension controller operates as closed-loop dancer roll position controller, and generally
generates a supplementary speed setpoint, which is injected into the speed controller with
negative polarity, so that the dancer position actual values track the entered position setpoint.
<8> The speed setpoint is obtained from the total speed setpoint divided by the diameter.
<9> Generally, the closed-loop position controller output has a relatively small influence of approx.
2...10% on the speed controller. The speed controller output can be limited using H195; the
influence on the speed setpoint can be normalized with H141.
<10> The compensating torques for friction and acceleration are added as supplementary torque
setpoints after the speed controller Generally, friction compensation is not required for the
closed-loop dancer roll position control, and generally inertia compensation can also be omitted.
<11> When the material web breaks, the dancer roll falls to the lower endstop, and the position
controller reaches its output limit, as it can no longer maintain the setpoint position. Thus, the
speed is increased by the value set using H195. The drive can be shutdown, by appropriately
parameterizing the web break detection and evaluating the web break signal; refer to Section
4.15.
<13> Normally, there is no external tension setpoint, for a winder with dancer roll.
For a dancer roll with adjustable support force, as illustrated in Fig. 5.13, the technology board
can be provided with a tension setpoint in order to use its winding hardness control. The winding
hardness characteristic output, can then, be output at terminals 521,522, and be used as
setpoint for the pneumatically adjustable dancer roll support.
<1> When threading the material web, the normal web speed setpoint input can be used (in this
case, terminals 503,504). After threading, the parameterized tension is established after the
tension control has been switched-in.

Manual
Dmax Dcore
Unwinding
Web
break
n
H195
Speed/torque characteristic for a web break

Manual
Nip position
+
n M
-
+ (MII)
Vset Dancer
<1> +
P
-
<4>
M
- P <13>
U
<1> Zset <13> T
<4>
Vset 0 - 10 V <2>
Position actual value
Term. 501,502 Term . 503,504 Term. 505,506 Term. 521,522
H081 = 2 [10] H105 = 27
H085 =0 H069 = 1
D
Position ref. value
H082
H083=11 H172
H173 D
T300
[8]
D-comp. [7]
<6> Winding hardness characteristic [7]
- H174 =0 H244 = 1
+
- nact H092=7
Diameter
Pos. controller [8] computer [8] <3>
("tension contoller“)
<7>
Vset
D=
Limiting n
<9> [8]
H194 =1 D
H195 ≈10%
Vset
+ nset =
H203=3 - D
<8> Speed act. value

H141=100% [5] Speed setpoint
CU2,CU3:
P443=3002
P694.002=219
CUVC,CUMC:
+ P734.002=148,91
Variable moment
of inertia [9]
-
Kp- adaption
D nact Width
n-contr.
<5>
Compensation [9] CU2: P226=3008
CUVC,CUMC: P734.005=165
CU2,CU3: P694.005=246
Suppl. torque setpoint
P506=3005
+
+ <10>
Torque act. value

CUVC,CUMC: P734.006=24,184
CU2,CU3: P694.006=264
Fig. 5.13: Unwind stand with dancer roll, closed-loop speed correction control

Manual
5.14 Configuring example: Winder with tension transducer

Fig. 5.14. show examples for winders with tension transducer and closed-loop current limiting control.
<1> Tension setpoint and web speed setpoint ("machine speed") are output as analog signals at
terminals 501, 502 and 505, 506.
<2> A pulse encoder as axial tachometer is used for sensing the actual speed
Web speed
Diameter ≈
Speed
<4> The speed setpoint is fed to the speed controller, where the speed setpoint corresponds to the
actual web speed plus the bias reference value H145 (set H145 to approx. 5%...10%).
The bias reference value, means that the speed controller goes into saturation when the
material web is present, i.e. it goes to its positive output limit. When an attempt is made to
increase the axial speed by the bias setpoint, the speed controller output reaches the specified
current limit as a result of the selected tension setpoint.
<5> The tension actual value is sensed as analog signal at terminals 503, 504. It may be
necessary to provide external smoothing here; refer to Fig. 3.2.
<9> The tension setpoint is controlled via the winding hardness characteristic. This allows a
decreasing tension to be set for increasing diameter.
The characteristic output is the setpoint input for the tension controller and tension feed-forward
control. H200 permits an adjustment to be made between tension- and torque setpoint for the
feed-forward control.
<11> The tension controller compares (it could be smoothed through a filter) the tension actual
value with the tension setpoint, and outputs an appropriate correction signal.
<14> The tension controller output signal and the parameterized feed-forward control are added, and
are used to limit the speed controller output after being multiplied by the actual diameter
(max. diameter and max. tension setpoint result in max. torque).
<15> The tension controller output is limited via H195 (typical value: 10%).
<16> The compensation torque consists of loss- and accelerating torques, and must be additionally
overcome, and is therefore added to the tension torque.
<6> When the web breaks, the speed controller becomes active, and prevents the winder drive from
accelerating, by controlling the circumferential speed to the web speed + bias reference value
(overspeed protection).
The drive can also be shutdown by appropriately parameterizing the web break sensing and
evaluation of the web break signal; refer to Section 4.15.

Manual
Web threading
When threading the web, it is possible to automatically changeover from closed-loop speed to closed-loop
tension control. In this case, when accelerating, the threading setpoint should be connected to the normal
speed setpoint input. The current limit should be enabled when the tension setpoint is connected-in.
When establishing the tension, the drive is automatically controlled via the current limit.
Dmax Dcore
M
Winding
direction
Acceleration (tension already

established)
Web
break
H145 n
Speed//torque characteristic for a web break

Manual
Nip position
<7>
Tension n M
transducer
Vset + +
<1> (MI)
M
Zset <1> Axial tach.
Tension setpoint Tension act. value Vset
Term. 501,502 Term. 503,504 Term. 505,506 <2>
H085 = 1 Zact<5>
H081 =0 H069 = 2
Filter
[7] [8]
D
H172=32ms Diameter computer
nact T300
<9> [9] <3 >
H092=8
+ -
Vset
D=
Tension contr. n
[8]
H200
<9> [8] <11>
+ [5] <4> <6>
+
Limiting <15> H145 ≈ 10%
H194 =1 [8]
H195 ≈10% Bias ref. value
+ [5]
+
D
[9] Vset
nset =
Variable moment D
of inertia Monitoring fcts. Speed act. value
D [20] CU2,CU3:
[8] Speed setpoint
Torque act. value P443=3002 P694.002=219
D nact Width
CUVC,CUMC: P734.006=24,184 CUVC,CUMC:
H203 CU2,CU3: P694.006=264 + P734.002=148,91
=1 Compensation
+ factors -
+ [9] Kp- adaption
<16> Speed
controller
100% CUVC,CUMC: P232=3008
CU2,CU3: P226=3008
[6]
Positive torque limit P493=3006
-1 Negative torque limit P499=3007

-100%

6SE70/71
Current contr.
Fig. 5.14.: Winder with tension transducer, closed-loop current limiting control

Manual
5.15 Configuring example: Unwind stand with tension transducer

Fig. 5.15 illustrates an example of an unwind stand with tension transducer and closed-loop current
limiting control.
<1> Tension setpoint and web speed setpoint ("machine speed") are output as analog singals at
terminals 501,502 and 505,506.
<2> A pulse encoder as axial tachometer is used to sense the actual speed
<3> The diameter computer continually calculates the diameter according to the followig formula
Web speed
Diameter ≈
Speed
<4> During unwinding, a low negative setpoint (H145=0...- 5 %) is injected into the speed
controller. The speed setpoint is disabled with H140=0% and H041=8 (maneuvering).
The speed controller always operates at its negative limit if there is a material web; the negative
limit is entered from the tension controller.
<5> The tension actual value is sensed as analog signal at terminals 503,504. It may be
necessary to provide external smoothing here; refer to Fig. 3.2.
<9> The tension setpoint is applied to the tension controller setpoint input, and simultaneously
controls the torque setpoint. H200 permits adjustment between the tension- and torque setpoint
for the feed-forward control. Generally, a decreasing winding hardness is not required for
unwind stands; the characteristic can be disabled with H206=1.
<11> The tension controller compares (it could be smoothed through a filter), the tension actual
value, with the tension setpoint, and outputs an appropriate correction signal.
<14> The tension controller output signal and the parameterized feed-forward control value are
added, and are used, after multiplication by the actual diameter (max. diameter and max.
tension setpoint result in max. torque). to limit the speed controller output.
<15> The tension controller output is limited via H195 (typical value: 10%)
<16> The compensation torque consists of loss- and accelerating torques, and must be subtracted
from the tension torque; it supports braking when unwinding.
<6> When the web breaks, the speed controller becomes active and moves away from the negative
torque limit. The winder is braked, and rotates with a speed, parameterized at H145, in the
direction opposing the winding direction.
By appropriately parameterizing the web break detection and evaluating the web break detection
signal, the drive can be shutdown and the diameter computer inhibited, refer to Section 4.14.
<17> When threading the web, if required, the normal web speed setpoint input can be used. In this
case, a positive web speed setpoint should be entered and enabled with H041=9; the bias
setpoint H145 must then be taken into account. Once the web has been thread, the speed
setpoint is disabled with H041=8, and after the tension control has been switched-in, the
material tension can be established. The speed setpoint can be inhibited and enabled with the
"maneuver" control input, also via a binary input; refer to block diagram 16.

Manual
Dmax
Dcore
MII
Unwind
n
Web
H145 break
Speed/torque characteristic when the web breaks

Manual
Nip position
+
Tension n M
transducer
-
Vset
(MII)
<1>
M
Zset <1> Axial tach.
Tension setpoint Tension act. value Vset
Term. 501,502 Term. 503,504 Term. 505,506 <2>
Zact<5> H069 = 2
H081 =0 H085 = 1
Filter
[8]
nact
T300
H172=32ms Diameter computer .
[9] <3 > H092=8
Vset
D=
+ - n
Tension controller <4> 100%
[8] H140
H200
<9> [8] <11> Maneuver [16]
+ [5] <4> <6>
+
Limiting <15> H145 ≈ -5%
H194 =1 [8]
H195 ≈10% Bias ref. value
+ [5]
+
D
[9] Vset
nset =
Variable moment D
of inertia Monitoring fcts.
D [20] Speed act. value
Speed setpoint CU2,CU3:
[9] Torque act. value P443=3002 P694.002=219
D nact Width
CUVC,CUMC: P734.006=24,184 CUVC,CUMC:
H203 CU2,CU3: P694.006=264 + P734.002=148,91
=1 Compensation
+ factors -
-
<16> [9] Kp- adaption
Speed
controller
100% CUVC,CUMC: P232=3008
CU2,CU3: P226=3008
[6]
Positive torque limit P493=3006
-1
-100% Negative torque limit P499=3007

unwindstand from below
6SE70/71
Current contr.
Fig. 5.15 : Unwind stand with tension transducer, closed-loop current limiting control

Manual

Winder with closed-loop constant speed control
If there is a nip position between an unwind stand and a winder, thus maintaining the web speed constant
(e.g. for a "doctor winder"), then the winder should be operated with just pure closed-loop speed control.
For winders with closed-loop speed control, a web tachometer, or an external diameter sensor, is always
required for the diameter calculation.
Fig. 5.16. shows an example of a winder with closed-loop constant speed control and web tachometer.
<1> The tension controller is disabled and its output is shutdown using H195=0%. Closed-loop
speed correction control is cancelled using H203; the correction setpoint is now 0%
<2> Instead of the speed setpoint, the actual web speed from the web tachometer is used for the
diameter computer. The tension control must be switched-in to enable the diameter computer.
<3> The diameter is calculated from the measured web speed actual value and the speed actual
value of the axial tachometer. The quotient of the speed setpoint and the actual diameter results
in the winder speed setpoint.
<5> The compensation factors for friction and acceleration are switched-in as supplementary torque
setpoint after the speed controller.
<6> A pulse encoder should always be used as web tachometer.
<7> The web tachometer signal always goes to zero when the web breaks. The diameter attempts to
go towards Dmin according to the ramp-up/ramp-down time parameterized using H238 and
appropriately the winder speed tries to increase.
For H236=1, the winder diameter can only increase i.e., when the material web breaks, the
winder would continue to run with the same speed.

Manual
n M
+ +
Web tach. (MI)
<6>
Line speed setpoint
M
Vset Vact
Axial tach.
Term. 503,504 Term. 541-544
H069 = 1 H094=28
Tension setpoint =0
H211=1 T300
H081=30
Diameter computer nact H092=8
<3>
Tension
controler [8] [9]
Vact
D=
Limiting n
H195 =0%
D
<1> <3>
Vset
H203=3 + nset =
+ D
Speed act. value
H141=100% Speed setpoint CU2,CU3:
P443=3002
P694.002=219
CUVC,CUMC:
+ P734.002=148,91
Variable moment
of inertia [9]
-
Kp- adaption
D nact Width
n-contr.
CU2: P226=3008
Compensation [9]
CU2,CU3: P694.005=246
Supplementary torque
setpoint P506=3005
+ CUVC,CUMC: P734.005=165
+ <5>
Torque act. value

CUVC,CUMC: P734.006=24,184
CU2,CU3: P694.006=264
Fig. 5.16: Winder with closed-loop constant speed control


Manual
6 Parameters
6 Parameters
6.1 Parameter handling
All parameters, which are implemented on the technology board, are called technology parameters.
These parameters are always designated with TP_xxx in the STRUC software (xxx stands for the
parameter number). Variable quantities are displayed as Hxxx, and display quantities as dxxx at the
converter operator control panel and for SIMOVIS. The technological parameters can be read and
changed from several locations:
- operator control panel (PMU)

- SST1 serial interface (RS232) or SST2 (RS485) from the basic drive converter
- interface board (if available)
- SIMADYN D monitor, can be addressed with the start-up-, SIMOVIS- or SIMOVIS basic service
program via the serial interface X132 of the technology board (DUST1M)
The axial winder is parameterized, as standard via SIMOVIS and the basic drive converter interface or
via the operator control panel (PMU or OP1).
When the operator control panel is used, the technological parameter is first selected using the
raise/lower keys. The T300 parameters are located after the basic drive parameters, i.a after P999.
With OP1 T300 parameters can be selected by numeric keys, starting with a "1" (selecting the parameter
range 1000 to 1999). A thus selected technological parameter can then be changed using the raise/lower
keys and stored; parameters are changed in the same way as changing the basic drive converter
parameters (refer to the basic drive converter manual).
Start-up via SIMOVIS is extremely user-friendly; the parameter values are numerically entered; several
parameters can be displayed. SIMADYN D knowledge is not required.
To change technology parameters using the SIMADYN D monitor (basic STRUC knowledge required),
the path name of the appropriate connector must be entered.
Please refer to Section 10.2 for further information regarding the start-up programs.
Note:
- The technological parameters (exept INIT-parameter) can be read and changed in all states of basic
drive converter.
- init-parameter: Comment, if the parameter value is only evaluated once when the converter is run-up,
i.e. at power-up (initialization). The converter must be powered-down and -up again so that this
parameter change becomes effective.

Manual
6 Parameters
6.2 Parameter lists

6.2.1 SIMADYN D connector types
Parameters can only be changed within a certain value range. The value range is dependent on the
parameter data type, and is, for several parameters, restricted to a narrow range (MIN-/MAX limits). The
value range, which is defined by the data type, is valid if no information is provided in the parameter lists
in the value range column:
Type Designation Explanation Value range Resolution
B1 Binary signal Logical 0 or 1
V2 Binary vector Status word 10...00 to 11...11 bin.8 1
8000 to 7FFF hex
N2 Normal signal Percent. value -200 % to 199.99 % 0.006103 %
I2 Integer Integer number -32768 to 32767 1
O2 Ordinal number Natural No. 0 to 32767 1
E2 Extended signal Decimal value -256.0 to 255.99 0.0078125
R2 Time information Reciprocal 1 TA to 16384 TA dep. on the value
T2 Time information Proportional 0 TA to 32767 TA 1 TA
D2 Time information Proportional 0 TA to 1.99 TA 0.006103 TA
Table 6.2.1 .a: Value range and resolution for the data types in the standard software package
(SIMADYN D data types) TA = Sampling time,
For the time-dependent data types R2, T2 and D2, in the sampling times used, the following value ranges
are obtained:
TA = T1 = 8 ms (closed-loop control) TA = T3 = 32 ms (open-loop control)
R2: 8 ms to 131072ms (= 2.2 min) 32 ms to 524288 ms (= 8.7 min)
T2: 0 ms to 262136 ms (= 4.4 min) 32 ms to 1048544 ms (=17.5 min)
D2: 0 ms to 16 ms 0 ms to 64 ms
Bit Hexa- Decimal Percentage Extended Time reciprocal Time propor-

decimal value value signal signal tional signal
value (I2.O2) (N2) (E2) (R2 8 ms) (T2 8 ms)
0 1 1 0.0061 % 0.0078125 131072.0 ms 8.0 ms
1 2 2 0.0122 % 0.015625 65536.0 ms 16.0 ms
2 4 4 0.0244 % 0.03125 32768.0 ms 32.0 ms
3 8 8 0.0488 % 0.0625 16384.0 ms 64.0 ms
4 10 16 0.0976 % 0.125 8192,0 ms 128.0 ms
5 20 32 0.1953 % 0.25 4096.0 ms 256.0 ms
6 40 64 0.3906 % 0.5 2048.0 ms 512.0 ms
7 80 128 0.7812 % 1.0 1024.0 ms 1024.0 ms
8 100 256 1.5625 % 2.0 512.0 ms 2048.0 ms
9 200 512 3.125 % 4.0 256.0 ms 4096.0 ms
10 400 1024 6.25 % 8.0 128.0 ms 8192.0 ms
11 800 2048 12.5 % 16.0 64.0 ms 16384.0 ms
12 1000 4096 25.0 % 32.0 32.0 ms 32768.0 ms
13 2000 8192 50.0 % 64.0 16.0 ms 65636.0 ms
14 4000 16384 100.0 % 128.0 8.0 ms 131072.0 ms
15 8000 -32768 -200.0 % -256.0 - -
Table 6.2.1.b: Conversion table for data types

Manual
6 Parameters
6.2.2 Parameter types

Generally, parameters are normalized via the interfaces as they are displayed on the converter operator
control panel (PMU).
However, the decimal point is eliminated.
The smallest possible increment can be read from the step column. It should be noted that the value can
be entered via the interface for certain parameter types with a smaller step than can be implemented by
T300. In this case, the value is rounded-off.
The value ranges and steps which can be realized by the technology board can, if you in doubt, be taken
from the Tables in Section .
The parameters can either be 1-bit-, 16-bit- or 32-bit quantities. There are various parameter types
depending on the specification.
An overview of the available parameter types is provided in the subsequent table:
Parameter type Significance

Boolean Binary value
O2 Unsigned 16-bit value
I2 Signed 16-bit value
V2 16-bit word (binary vector)
Example:
140% is to be entered for parameter H004. The parameter type is I4.
Required value Value range/step Value for H004 to be

for H004 for H004 entered via the interface
140% -200.000% ... 199.993% / 0.006% 140000 as decimal
number
The step information indicates that the parameter has 3 decimal places, i. e. 3 zeros must be attached to
the number 140.

Manual
6 Parameters
6.2.3 Parameter lists

All of the parameters used for the MS320 axial winder standard software package are listed on the
following pages. The listing is realized in the general form:
HxxxParameter code Steps Value Factory
xxxxd range setting
xxxxh
Explanation and if relevant, parameter information
Block diagram n FP-FPNAME.FBNAME.K

( init )
SIMADYN D:XX PKW type:XX
Table 6.2.3.a: Listing type for input parameters
dxxx Parameter code Steps A

xxxxd
xxxxh
Explanation and if relevant, parameter information
Block diagram FP-FPNAME.FBNAME.K

SIMADYN D:xx PKW type:XX
Table 6.2.3.b: Listing type for display parameters
Hxxx / dxxx Parameter number xxx

xxxxd Parameter number via interface as decimal number
xxxxh Parameter number via interface as hexadecimal number
Step Step and units of the parameter
Value range Lowest up to the highest parameter value which can be set.
Factory setting Parameter factory setting
A Display parameter code
Block diagram n Reference to the block diagram, page n
(not every parameter exists in the block diagram)
FP-FBNAME.FBNAME.K Parameter path name

(only important for operator control from the SIMADYN D monitor)
SIMADYN D:XX SIMADYN D connector format
PKW-TYP:XX Parameter type when accessed via interface
Note:
- The technological parameters (exept INIT-parameter) can be read and changed in all states of basic
drive converter.
- init-parameter:Comment, if the parameter value is only evaluated once when the converter is run-up, i.
e. at power-up (initialization). The converter must be powered-down and -up again so that this
parameter change becomes effective.

Manual
6 Parameters
H001 Overspeed limit, positive 0,006% -200,000%... 120,000%

1001d / 03E9h 199,993%
Upper speed actual value limit as a % of the rated speed
Fault signal and -trip at nact > H001
Prerequisite: Fault is not suppressed
Block diagr.20 FP-CONTZ.SU010.LU SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H002 Overspeed limit, negative 0,006% -200,000%... -120,000%
1002d / 03EAh 199,993%
Lower speed actual value limit as a % of the rated speed ... 1999
Fault signal and -trip at nact < H002
Block diagr.20 FP-CONTZ.SU010.LL SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H003 Overcurrent limit, positive 0,006% 0%... 120,000%
1003d / 03EBh 199,993%
Upper current actual value limit as a % of the rated current
Fault signal and -trip at I-act > H003
Block diagr.20 FP-CONTZ.SU040.LU SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H004 Overcurrent limit, negative 0,006% -200,000%... -120,000%
1004d / 03ECh 0%
Lower current actual value limit as a % of the rated current
Fault signal and -trip at I-act < H004
Block diagr.20 FP-CONTZ.SU040.LL SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H005 Initialization time for couplings 128,0ms 0ms... 20000ms

2097152ms
1005d / 03EDh
Time delay, after the T300 has been powered-up (voltage on or reset)
before the coupling monitoring functions to CU, CB and the PTP interface
are activated.
Block diagr.16 FP-CONTZ.SU130.T SIMADYN D:T2 PKW:O4
H006 Telegram failure, PTP coupling 1 0... 32767 10
1006d / 03EEh
Number of sampling cycles (8ms) which may expire before a new
telegram is received. The setting is dependent on the selected baud rate,
the telegram length and the intervals between 2 consecutive telegrams.
A failure is signaled as alarm, can be suppressed using H011.
A fault is only displayed, if a valid telegram was first received, i. e. the
coupling was in operation for the first time. The fault signal can be
suppressed using H012.
0 = monitoring disabled init
Block diagr.14 FP-IQ1Z.RPTP.LEM SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
Anti-stall signal:
H007 Anti-stall protection threshold nact 0,006% 0%... 2%
1007d / 03EFh 199,993%

Absolute speed actual value which must be exceeded for the "anti-stall
protection" fault signal.
Condition 1 for the anti-stall protection signal: |n-act| > H007
Block diagr.20 FP-CONTZ.SU080.L SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H008 Anti-stall protection threshold Iact 0,006% 0%... 10%
1008d / 03F0h 199,993%

Absolute current actual value which must be exceeded for the fault signal
"anti-stall protection".
Condition 2 for the anti-stall protection signal: |Iact| > H008

Manual
6 Parameters
H009 Anti-stall protection threshold, control error 0,006% 0%... 50%

1009d / 03F1h 199,993%
Absolute value of the control error YE of the speed controller, which must
be exceeded for the fault signal "anti-stall protection".
Condition 3 for the anti-stall protection signal: |YE| > H009
H010 Anti-stall protection, response time 16,0ms 0...524272ms 500ms
1010d / 03F2h
Time, where conditions 1-3 must be simultaneously available for the fault
signal "anti-stall protection" = condition 4 for
the anti-stall protection signal.
Block diagr.20 FP-CONTZ.SU120.T SIMADYN D:T2 PKW:O4
H011 Alarm mask 0001 Hex 0 ....FF FF

1011d / 03F3h
Bitwise coding of the errors/faults which should lead to an alarm (a set bit
results in an alarm): also refer to sections 9.2 to 9.5
Bit Alarm Significance

0 A097 Overspeed, positive
1 A098 Overspeed, negative
2 A099 Overcurrent, positive
3 A100 Overcurrent, negative
4 A101 Anti-stall protection
5 A102 Reception faulted from CU
6 A103 Reception faulted from CB
7 A104 Reception faulted from PTP
Block diagr.20 FP-CONTZ.SE030.IS2 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2
H012 Fault mask 0001 Hex 0 ....FF FF
1012d / 03F4h
Bitwise coding of the faults/errors which should lead to a fault message (a
set bit results in the appropriate fault/error): also refer to sections 9.2 to
9.5
Bit Fault Significance
0 F116 Overspeed, positive
1 F117 Overspeed, negative
2 F118 Overcurrent, positive
3 F119 Overcurrent, negative
4 F120 Anti-stall protection
5 F121 Reception faulted from CU
6 F122 Reception faulted from CB
7 F123 Reception faulted from PTP
Block diagr.20 FP-CONTZ.SE040.IS2 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2
H013 Source, tachometer on 1 0-11 9
1013d / 03F5h
Selects the source for the calculate diameter command using the
tachometer
0 = Binary input X6, terminal 611
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
10 = Control word 2.13 from CB
11 = Control word 2.13 from CU
Block diagr.17 FP-IQ1Z.B207A.XCS SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2

Manual
6 Parameters
H014 Long inching time 32,0ms 0...524288ms 10000ms

1014d / 03F6h
Delay, before the basic drive converter is shutdown after an inching
command has become inactive
Block diagr.18 FP-CONTZ.C2736.X SIMADYN D:T2 PKW:O4
H015 Source, transmit word 1 PTP 1 0 ... 99 15
1015d / 03F7h
Selects the first word in the transmitted PTP telegram
0 = Effective web speed setpoint d301
1 = Actual dv/dt d302
2 = Speed setpoint d303
3 = Variable moment of inertia d308
4 = Actual diameter d310
5 = Pre-control torque d312
6 = Analog input 5, X5 terminals 511/512 d324
7 = Torque setpoint, smoothed d331
8 = Select value 1 from CU
9 = Select value 2 from CU
10 = Receive word 1, PTP
15 = Control word 1 d332
16 = Positive torque limit d342
17 = Negative torque limit d343
18 = 10%
Block diagr.14 FP-IQ2Z.TPTP1.NC SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
1016d / 03F8h
Selects the second word in the transmitted PTP telegram
Refer to H015 for settings
1017d / 03F9h
Selects the third word in the transmitted PTP telegram
1018d / 03FAh
Selects the fourth word in the transmitted PTP telegram
1019d / 03FBh
Selects the fifth word in the transmitted PTP telegram
H020 Source, control word PTP 1 0 ... 7 5
1020d / 03FCh
Selects a receive word as control word PTP. If a control word is not sent,
then the factory setting of 5 must be kept.
0 = Receive word 1 PTP
5 = 0H6
6 = 0
7 = 0
Block diagr.14 FP-IQ1Z.STWPTP.XCS SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2

Manual
6 Parameters
H021 Source, system start 1 0 ... 5 0

1021d / 03FDh
Selects the source for the system start command
0= Binary input X6, terminal 601
1= Control word 1.3 from the CB
2= Control word 1.3 from the CU
3= Control word 1.3 from the PTP
4= Fixed value 1
5= Fixed value 0
Block diagr.17 FP-IQ1Z.B10.XCS SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H022 Source, tension controller on 1 0 ... 7 0
1022d / 03Feh
Selects the source for the tension controller on command
4= Fixed value 1
5= Fixed value 0
6 = Splicing logic and binary input X6, terminal 602
7 = Splicing logic and control word 1.11 from the CB
H023 Source, inhibit tension controller 1 0 ... 5 0
1023d / 03FFh
Selects the source for the inhibit tension controller command
4= Fixed value 1
5= Fixed value 0
H024 Source, set diameter 1 0 ... 5 0
1024d / 0400h
Selects the source for the set diameter command
4= Fixed value 1
5= Fixed value 0
H025 Source, supplementary setpoint injection 1 0 ... 5 0
1025d / 0401h
Selects the source for the supplementary setpoint injection command
3= Fixed value 0
4= Fixed value 1
5= Fixed value 0
H026 Source, local positioning 1 0 ... 5 0
1026d / 0402h
Selects the source for the local positioning command
3= Fixed value 0
4= Fixed value 1
5= Fixed value 0

Manual
6 Parameters
H027 Source, local operator control 1 0 ... 5 0

1027d / 0403h
Selects the source for the local operator control command
3= Fixed value 0
4= Fixed value 1
5= Fixed value 0
H028 Source, local stop 1 0 ... 5 0
1028d / 0404h
Selects the source for the local stop command
3= Binary input X6, terminal 608, inverted
4= Fixed value 1
5= Fixed value 0
H029 Source, raise motorized potentiometer 2 1 0-12 9
1029d / 0405h
Selects the source for the raise motorized potentiometer 2 command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
10 = Control word 2.2 from the CB
11 = Control word 2.2 from the CU
12 = Fixed value 0
H030 Source, raise motorized potentiometer 1 1 0-12 9
1030d / 0406h
Selects the source for the raise motorized potentiometer 1 command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Fixed value 0

Manual
6 Parameters
H031 Source, lower motorized potentiometer 2 1 0-12 9

1031d / 0407h
Selects the source for the lower motorized potentiometer 2 command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Fixed value 0
H032 Source, lower motorized potentiometer 1 1 0-12 9
1032d / 0408h
Selects the source for the lower motorized potentiometer1 command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Fixed value 0
H033 Source, hold diameter 1 0-12 9
1033d / 0409h
Selects the source for the hold diameter command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Control word 1.15 from the PTP

Manual
6 Parameters
H034 Source, stop speed setpoint setting 1 0-12 9

1034d / 040Ah
Selects the source for the stop speed setpoint setting command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Fixed value 0
H035 Source, winding from below 1 0-12 9
1035d / 040Bh
Selects the source for the winding from below command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Fixed value 0
H036 Source, accept setpoint A 1 0-10 9
1036d / 040Ch
Selects the source for the accept setpoint A command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
10 = H251

Manual
6 Parameters
H037 Source, accept setpoint B 1 0-10 9

1037d / 040Dh
Selects the source for the accept setpoint B command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
10 = H252
H038 Source, local inching forwards 1 0-12 9
1038d / 040Eh
Selects the source for the local inching forwards command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
H039 Source, local crawl 1 0-12 9
1039d / 040Fh
Selects the source for the local crawl command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Fixed value 0

Manual
6 Parameters
H040 Source, local inching reverse 1 0-12 9

1040d / 0410h
Selects the source for the local inching reverse command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
H041 Source, manouvering 1 0-12 9
1041d / 0411h
Selects the source for the manouver command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Tension control on
H042 Source, gearbox stage 2 1 0-10 9
1042d / 0412h
Selects the source for changing over to gearbox stage 2
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
10 = H253
Block diagr.16 FP-IQ1Z.B160.XCS SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:1

Manual
6 Parameters
H043 Source, winder 1 0-10 9

1043d / 0413h
Selects the source for the winder command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
10 = H254
H044 Source, bias setpoint polarity 1 0-10 9
1044d / 0414h
Selects the source to change over the polarity of the bias setpoint
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
10 = H255
H045 Source, off1/on 1 0-12 9
1045d / 0415h
Selects the source for the switch-on command for system operation
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0

Manual
6 Parameters
H046 Source, inhibit ramp-function generator 1 0-12 9

1046d / 0416h
Selects the source for the inhibit ramp-function generator command
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
H047 Source, off2 1 0-10 8
1047d / 0417h
Selects the source for the off2 command; this command is always
effective from every source, it is low active
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
H048 Source, off3 1 0-10 8
1048d / 0418h
Selects the source for the off3 command (fast stop). This command is
always effective from every source, it is low active
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
Block diagr.17 FP-IQ1Z.B200.XCS SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:1

Manual
6 Parameters
H049 Source, ramp-function generator stop 1 0-12 9

1049d / 0419h
Selects the source for the ramp-function generator stop
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
H050 Source, enable setpoint 1 0-12 9
1050d / 041Ah
Selects the source to enable the web speed setpoint
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
H051 Source, standstill tension on 1 0-12 9
1051d / 041Bh
Selects the source to inject the standstill tension
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0

Manual
6 Parameters
H052 Source, local run 1 0-12 9

1052d / 041Ch
Selects the source for power-up with the local setpoint
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Fixed value 0
H053 Source, reset length computer 1 0-12 9
1053d / 041Dh
Selects the source to reset the web length computer
8 = Fixed value 1
9 = Fixed value 0
12 = Fixed value 0

Manual
6 Parameters
Parameterization of the analog inputs:

Input range: +/-10V, 5V = 100%
H054 Adaption, analog input 1 0,006% -200,000%... 50%

1054d / 041Eh 199,993%
Adaption factor for analog input 1, X5 terminals 501/502
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ1Z.AI15.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H055 Offset, analog input 1 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1055d / 041Fh 199,993%
Offset for analog input 1, X5 terminals 501/502,
the offset is added after adaption
1056d / 0420h 199,993%
1057d / 0421h 199,993%
1058d / 0422h 199,993%
1059d / 0423h 199,993%
1060d / 0424h 199,993%
1061d / 0425h 199,993%
1062d / 0426h 199,993%
1063d / 0427h 199,993%
1064d / 0428h 199,993%

Manual
6 Parameters

1065d0 / 429h 199,993%
1066d / 042Ah 199,993%
1067d / 042Bh 199,993%

Manual
6 Parameters
Selecting the sources for setpoints/actual values:
H068 Line speed setpoint 0,006% -200,000%... 0%

1068d / 042Ch 199,993%
Enters a fixed value as technological parameter
Block diagr.11 FP-IQ1Z.AI200.X11 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H069 Source, web speed setpoint 1 0 ... 31 31
1069d / 042Dh
Selects the source for the web speed setpoint
0 = Analog input 1, X5 terminals 501/502
7 = Setpoint 1 from the CB
13 = Setpoint 1 from the CU
19 = Receive word 1 from the PTP
24 = Select value 1 from the CU
26 = Motorized potentiometer 1
27 = Motorized potentiometer 2
28 = Digital web tachometer
29 = 0%
30 = 0%
31 = H068
Block diagr.11 FP-IQ1Z.AI200.XCS SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H070 Web speed compensation 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1070d / 042Eh 199,993%
H071 Source, web speed compensation 1 0 ... 31 31
1071d / 042Fh
Selects the source for the compensation setpoint,
settings 0 - 27, refer to H069
28-30 = 0%
31 = H070
H072 Supplementary web speed setpoint 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1072d / 0430h 199,993%

Manual
6 Parameters
H073 Source, supplementary web speed setpoint 1 0 ... 31 31

1073d / 0431h
Selects the source for the supplementary web speed setpoint,
28-30 = 0%
31 = H072
H074 Setpoint, local operation 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1074d / 0432h 199,993%
H075 Source, setpoint local operation 1 0 ... 31 31
1075d / 0433h
Selects the source for the setpoint in local operation,
28-30 = 0%
31 = H074
H076 External dv/dt 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1076d / 0434h 199,993%
H077 Source, external dv/dt 1 0 ... 31 31
1077d / 0435h
Selects the source for the external acceleration value,
28-30 = 0%
31 = H076
H078 Web width 0,006% -200,000%... 100,000%
1078d / 0436h 199,993%
H079 Source, web width 1 0 ... 31 31
1079d / 0437h
Selects the source for the web width,
28-30 = 0%
31 = H078
H080 Tension setpoint 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1080d / 0438h 199,993%
H081 Source, tension setpoint 1 0 ... 31 31
1081d / 0439h
Selects the source for the tension/position setpoint,
28-30 = 0%
31 = H080
H082 Supplementary tension setpoint 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1082d / 043Ah 199,993%

Manual
6 Parameters
H083 Source, supplementary tension setpoint 1 0 ... 31 31

1083d / 043Bh
Selects the source for the supplementary tension/position setpoint,
28-30 = 0%
31 = H082
H084 Tension actual value 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1084d / 043Ch 199,993%
H085 Source, tension actual value 1 0 ... 31 31
1085d / 043Dh
Selects the source for the tension/position actual value,
28-30 = 0%
31 = H084
H086 Max. tension reduction 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1086d / 043Eh 199,993%
H087 Source, max. tension reduction 1 0 ... 31 31
1087d / 043Fh
Selects the source for the supplementary tension/position setpoint.
Settings 0 - 27, refer to H069
28-30 = 0%
31 = H086
H088 Diameter setting value 0,006% -200,000%... 10%
1088d / 0440h 199,993%
H089 Source, diameter setting value 1 0 ... 31 31
1089d / 0441h
Selects the source for the diameter setting value.
28 = Core diameter
29 = 0%
30 = 0%
31 = H088
H090 Positioning reference value 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1090d / 0442h 199,993%
H091 Source, positioning reference value 1 0 ... 31 31
1091d / 0443h
Selects the source for the setpoint for the local positioning operating
mode.
28-30 = 0%
31 = H090

Manual
6 Parameters
H092 Source, speed actual value 1 0 ... 9 8

1092d / 0444h
Selects the source for the speed actual value
7 = Speed actual value CU
8 = Speed actual value from the T300 digital tachometer
9 = 0%
H093 Source, web speed actual value, tachometer 1 0 ... 31 26
1093d / 0445h
Selects the source for a tachometer web speed actual value; it
becomes active with the bit selected by H013 and becomes effective
for the diameter calculation instead of the value selected by H094.
26 = Digital web tachometer at T300
27-31= 0%
H094 Source, external web speed actual value 1 0 ... 31 29
1094d / 0446h
Selects the source for a web speed actual value; it must activated with
H211=1.
28 = Digital web tachometer at T300
29 = Setpoint after the ramp-function generator
30 = 0%
31 = 0%
H095 Setpoint A 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1095d / 0447h 199,993%
H096 Source, setpoint A 1 0 ... 31 31
1096d / 0448h
Selects the source for setpoint A.
28-30 = 0%
31 = H095
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.AI340.XCS SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2.

Manual
6 Parameters
Parameterization of the analog outputs:

Output range, +/-10V, 5V = 100%
H097 Analog output 1, speed actual value offset 0,006% -200,000%... 0%

1097d / 0449h 199,993%
Offset analog output 1, X5 terminal 609/610 = speed actual value
The parameter value is subtracted.
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ1Z.AQ50.OFF SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H098 Analog output 1, speed actual value gain 0,007 0...±255,9 2
1098d / 044Ah
Gain after subtracting the offset
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ1Z.AQ50.K SIMADYN D:E2 PKW:I4
H099 Analog output 2, diameter actual value offset 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1099d / 044Bh 199,993%
Offset analog output 2, X5 terminal 619/620 = diameter actual value
The parameter value is subtracted.
H100 Analog output 2, diameter actual value gain 0,007 0. ..±255,9 2
1100d / 044Ch
H101 Analog output 3, offset 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1101d / 044Dh 199,993%
Offset analog output 3, X5 terminal 621/622 = select value, can be
parameterized via H127. The parameter value is subtracted.
H102 Analog output 3, gain 0,007 0. ..±255,9 2
1102d / 044Eh
Block gr.10 FP-IQ1Z.AQ110.K SIMADYN D:E2 PKW:I4
H103 Analog output 4, offset 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1103d / 044Fh 199,993%
Offset analog output 4, X5 terminal 623/624 = select value, can be
parameterized via H128. The parameter value is subtracted.
H104 Analog output 4, gain 0,007 0. ..±255,9 2
1104d / 0450h

Manual
6 Parameters
H105 Source, select value, analog output 3 1 0 ... 99 0

1105d / 0451h
Selects the monitoring parameters, which are to be output at X5,
terminal 21/22
3 = Sum, tension/position reference value d304
4 = Output, motorized potentiometer 1 d305
6 = Speed actual value d307
8 = Actual web length d309
10 = Tension actual value, smoothed d311
12 = Output, closed-loop tension control d313
13 = Pre-control torque, friction compensation d314
14 = Free for expansion d315
15 = Pre-control torque, inertia compensation d316
16 = Sum, tension actual value d317
17 = Tension actual value, D component d318
18 = Tension controller output d319
26 = External web speed actual value d327
27 = Tension setp. after the winding hardness char. d328
28 = Torque actual value d330
32 = Factor, automatic thickness correction d339
33 = Calculated layer thickness d349
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.AQ10.NC SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H106 Source, select value, analog output 4 1 0 ... 99 0
1106d / 0452h
Selects the monitoring parameter which is to be output at X5, terminal
23/24
0 - 31 Settings, refer to H105
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.AQ20.NC SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2

Manual
6 Parameters
Limit value monitor 1:

Binary output X6, terminal 637
H107 Source, input value 1 0 ... 31 0

1107d / 0453h
Selects the input signal for limit value monitor 1
15 = Pre-control torque, inertia compensation. d316
27 = Tension setp. after the winding hardness char. d328
28 = Torque setpoint d329
31 = 100%
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G10.XCS SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H108 Source, comparison value 1 0 ... 31 0
1108d / 0454h
Selects the comparison value for limit value monitor 1.
31 = H260
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G70.XCS SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2.
H109 Adaption, input value 1 0 ... 2 0
1109d / 0455h
Adapts the input signal for limit value monitor 1
0 = No adaption
1 = Absolute value generation
2 = Polarity reversal
H110 Smoothing, input value 16..262144ms 500ms
1110d / 0456h
Smooths the input signal for limit value monitor 1
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G60.T SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4

Manual
6 Parameters
H111 Adaption, comparison value 1 0 ... 2 0

1111d / 0457h
Adapts the comparison value for limit value monitor 1
0 = No adaption
H112 Interval limit 0,006% 0 ... 100% 0%
1112d / 0458h
Enters the interval limits for limit value monitor 1
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G110.L SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H113 Hysteresis 0,006% 0...100% 0%
1113d / 0459h
Enters the hysteresis for limit value monitor 1
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G110.HY SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H114 Selection, output signal 1 0 ... 4 0
1114d / 045Ah
Adapts the output signal for limit value monitor 1
0 = Input value > comparison value
1 = Input value < comparison value
2 = Input value = comparison value
3 = Input value 0 comparison value
4 = Length reference value reached

Manual
6 Parameters
Limit value monitor 2:

Binary output X6, terminal 638
H115 Source, input value 1 0 ... 31 0

1115d / 045Bh
Selects the input signal for limit value monitor 2.
H116 Source, comparison value 1 0 ... 31 0
1116d / 045Ch
Selects the comparison value for limit value monitor 2.
31 = H261
H117 Adaption, input value 1 0 ... 2 0
1117d / 045Dh
Adapts the input signal for limit value monitor 2
0 = No adaption
H118 Smoothing, input value 16..262144ms 500ms
1118d / 045Eh
Smooths the input signal for limit value monitor 2
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G260.T SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H119 Adaption, comparison value 1 0 ... 2 0
1119d / 045Fh
Adapts the comparison value for limit value monitor 2
0 = No adaption
H120 Interval limit 0,006% 0...100% 0%
1120d / 0460h
Enters the interval limits for limit value monitor 2
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G310.L SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H121 Hysteresis 0,006% 0...100% 0%
1121d / 0461h
Enters the hysteresis for limit value monitor 2
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G310.HY SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H122 Selection, output signal 1 0 ... 4 0
1122d / 0462h
Adapts the output signal for limit value monitor 2
0 = Input value > comparison value
1 = Input value < comparison value
2 = Input value = comparison value
3 = Input value 0 comparison value
4 = Length reference value reached

Manual
6 Parameters
Select values to the interface board and to the CU:
H123 Source, select value 1 SW320 1 0 ... 99 0

1123d / 0463h
Selects the first value which is to be sent to the higher-level
automation system and to the CU.
15 = Pre-control torque, inertia compensation d316
27 = Tension setp. After the winding hardness char. d328
32 = Factor, automatic thickness correction d339
33 = Calculated layer thickness d349
Block diagr.15 FP-IQ2Z.AUT10.NC SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
1124d / 0464h
Selects the second value which is to be sent to the higher-level
1125d / 0465h
Selects the third value which is to be sent to the higher-level
1126d / 0466h
Selects the fourth value which is to be sent to the higher-level

Manual
6 Parameters

1127d / 0467h
Selects the fifth value which is to be sent to the higher-level
1128d / 0468h
Selects the sixth value which is to be sent to the higher-level
H129 Source, alternative on command 1 0 ... 8 8
1129d / 0469h
Selects the command to power-up the drive converter. Generally, this
is if a mode is selected. However, one of the binary select inputs can
be used.
8 = Local- or system operating mode active
Block diagr.18 FP-IQ1Z.SELON.X SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H130 Setpoint B 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1130d / 046Ah 199,993%
Fixed setpoint as line speed setpoint; it is injected in front of the ramp-
function generator with the accept setpoint B control signal
Block diagr. 5 FP-SREFZ.S25.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4

Manual
6 Parameters
Parameterization of the central ramp-function generator for the speed setpoint:
H131 Upper limit 0,006% -200,000%... 110%

1131d / 046Bh 199,993%
Limit, maximum value
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S50.LU SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H132 Lower limit 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1132d / 046Ch 199,993%
Limit, minimum value
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S50.LL SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H133 Ramp-up time 8..131072ms 30000ms
1133d / 046Dh
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S50.TU SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H134 Ramp-down time 8..131072ms 30000ms
1134d / 046Eh
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S50.TD SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H135 Rounding-off when accelerating 8..131072ms 3000ms
1135d / 046Fh
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S50.TRU SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H136 Rounding-off when decelerating 8..131072ms 3000ms
1136d / 0470h
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S50.TRD SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H137 Norm. web speed compensation 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1137d / 0471h 199,993%
Normalization factor for the influence of the compensation signal
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S120.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H138 Ratio, gearbox stage 2 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1138d / 0472h 199,993%
Gearbox stage ratio as a %
e. g. gearbox stage 1 = 5:1
gearbox stage 2 = 7:1
H138 = stage1 / stage2 = 5 / 7 = 71.428%
H139 Normalization, web speed 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1139d / 0473h 199,993%
Normalization factor for the web speed setpoint
H140 Maneuvering setpoint 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1140d / 0474h 199,993%
Multiplication factor for the web speed setpoint; it is activated with the
manouver command. This is used to switch-out the web setpoint for
unwind stands or when the web breaks
H141 Influence, closed-loop tension control 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1141d / 0475h 199,993%
Normalization factor to influence the web speed setpoint as a result of
the closed-loop tension control for closed-loop speed correction control
H142 Setpoint, local crawl 0,006% -200,000%... 10%
199,993%
1142d / 0476h
Setpoint for the local crawl operating mode
H143 Setpoint, local inching forwards 0,006% 0. ..±100 5
1143d / 0477h
Setpoint for the local inching forwards operating mode

Manual
6 Parameters
H144 Setpoint, local inching reverse 0,006% 0..±100 -5

1144d / 0478h
Setpoint for the local inching reverse operating mode
H145 Bias setpoint 0,006% -200,000%... 10%
1145d / 0479h 199,993%
Supplementary speed setpoint for the line speed setpoint for current
limiting control to bias the speed controller
H146 Closed-loop speed control for local operation 1 0/1 0
1146d / 047Ah
0 = Closed-loop control, local mode
1 = Closed-loop speed control, local mode
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.NC112.I2 SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean

Manual
6 Parameters
Closed-loop speed control settings:
H147 Torque limit compare P492 and P498 0,006% -200,000%... 20%
1147d / 047Bh 199,993%
(Parameterlist: refer to Section 7, Table 7)
Enters the limits for the speed controller in local operation and for
closed-loop speed correction control
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.C56.X SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H148 Time for reverse winding after the splice 32,0ms 0...524288ms 10000ms
1148d / 047Ch
Time that the drive should wind backwards to accept the web after the
splice.
Block diagr.21 FP-CONTZ.SL70.T SIMADYN D:T2 PKW:O4
H149 Speed setpoint, reverse winding after a splice 0,006% -20....0 0
1149d / 047Dh
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.RW100.X SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H150 Start of adaption 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1150d / 047Eh 199,993%
The speed controller gain is adapted to the variable moment of inertia
of the winding core; the start of Kp adaption is defined with H150.
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.NC035.A1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H151 Kp adaption factor, min. 0,006% 0 ... 19,99 1
1151d / 047Fh
Multiplier for Kp at the start of adaption; generally 1 for Jv=0%.
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.NC035.B1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H152 End of adaption 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1152d / 0480h 199,993%
End of Kp adaption for the speed controller
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.NC035.A2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H153 Kp adaption factor, max. 0,006% 0 ... 19,99 1
1153d / 0481h
Multiplier for Kp at the end of adaption, i. e. at the maximum moment
of inertia. The setting must be determined during start-up by optimizing
the speed controller with an empty and then with the highest possible
diameter roll.
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.NC035.B1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H154 Slave drive 1 0/1 0
1154d / 0482h
Disables the central ramp-function generator for the line speed
setpoint if the winder operates as slave drive and the setpoint is
already available at the ramp-function generator output.
0 = Ramp-function generator effective
1 = Ramp-function generator not effective
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S47.I SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H155 Smoothing, web speed setpoint 0,008..131ms 8ms
1155d / 0483h
Setpoint smoothing if the ramp-function generator is bypassed with
H154=1
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S10.TSIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H157 Limit value for standstill identification 0,006% -200,000%... 1%
1157d / 0484h 199,993%
Threshold for the standstill identification; 25% is permanently used as
threshold for the hysteresis. Depending on H146, the speed- or line
speed actual value is used for the signal.
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.S810.X SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4

Manual
6 Parameters
H159 Delay, standstill identification 32,0ms 0...100000ms 0ms

1159d / 0485h
Delay time for the standstill signal
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.S840.T SIMADYN D:T2 PKW:O4
H160 Delete EEPROM 1 0/1 0
1160d / 0486h
A positive edge at H160 deletes the EEPROM and thus establishes the
initialize status for all parameters. The key parameter H250 must be
set to 165.
Block diagr.4 FP-PARAMZ.URLAD.ERA SIMADYN D:B1
PKW:Boolean
H161 Ramp-up/ramp-down time, triggerable ramp- 32..524288ms 20000ms
function generator
1161d / 0487h
Ramp times for the local ramp-function generator; it is set to the
particular actual value at each operating mode change and when the
controller is enabled.
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S457.X SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H162 Smoothing, speed controller output 32..524288ms 500ms
1162d / 0488h
Smoothing for monitoring parameter d331, torque setpoint from the CU
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.NT130.T SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H163 Selection, positioning reference value 1 0/1 0
1163d / 0489h
Toggles between the x2 or x3 characteristic for the positioning
reference value.
0 = x2 characteristic
1 = x3 characteristic
Block diagr.12 FP-SREFZ.S328.I SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H164 Smoothing, bias setpoint 8...131072ms 8ms
1164d / 048Ah
Smoothing time for the bias setpoint
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S395.T SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H165 Smoothing, speed actual value 8...131072ms 20ms
1165d / 048Bh
Speed actual value smoothing time for the diameter computer,
compensation torques and monitoring functions
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.AI325.T SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H166 Enabling addition, local setpoints 1 0/1 0
1166d / 048Ch
H166 =1 allows a local setpoint to be added in system operation.
0 = Addition inhibited
1 = Addition enabled
Block diagr.5 FP-CONTZ.C22.I3 SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H167 Limiting, thickness correction 0,006% 0 ... 70% 0%
1167d / 048Dh
Value by which the thickness correction factor can deviate from one.
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.DC1000.X1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H168 Integrating time, thickness correction 20000... 200000ms
...524288ms
1168d / 048Eh
Time in which the correction factor for the material thickness changes
by 100%, if the tension controller output and the acceleration actual
value are both 100%. This should be at least 10 x greater than the
tension controller integral action time.
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.DC70.TI SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4

Manual
6 Parameters
Tension control settings:
H172 Smoothing, tension actual value 8...131072ms 150ms

1172d / 0494h
Time constant for the actual value smoothing
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T641.T SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H173 Scaling D component 0...131072ms 100ms
1173d / 0495h
D component setting. An actual value change (100% /H173) generates
100% at the differential element output.
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T644.X2 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H174 Inhibit D component 1 0/1 1
1174d / 0496h
The D component is only added for the tension actual value if the
dancer roll position control is used; otherwise the D component
remains inhibited.
0 = D component enabled
1 = D component inhibited
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T643.I SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H175 Ramp-up time, tension setpoint 32..524288ms 10000ms
1175d / 0497h
Ramp-up time for the main tension/position reference value
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T1350.TU SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H176 Ramp-down time, tension setpoint 32..524288ms 10000ms
1176d / 0498h
Ramp-down time for the main tension/position setpoint
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T1350.TD SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H177 Inhibit tension setpoint 1 0/1 0
1177d / 0499h
When using the winding hardness characteristic for dancer roll
support, the tension setpoint must be isolated. The position reference
value is then entered via the supplementary tension setpoint.
0 = Normal operation
1 = Tension setpoint inhibited
H178 Response at web break 1 0/1 0
1178d / 049Ah
0 = None, only the signal is displayed
1 = Tension control off and the diameter computer is inhibited
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T2110.I2 SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H179 Enable tension offset compensation 1 0/1 0
1179d / 049Bh
The control signal, hold diameter, can be used when the tension
control is disabled to automatically adjust an offset of the tension
actual value sensing.
0 = Adjustment inhibited
1 = Adjustment enabled
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T603.I4 SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H180 Tension reduction 1 0,006% 0...100% 100%
1180d / 049Ch
Tension reduction 1 at diameter D1 as a % of the maximum tension
reduction
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T1435.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4

Manual
6 Parameters

1181d / 049Dh
reduction
1182d / 049Eh
reduction
H183 Diameter at the start of tension reduction 0,006% 0...100% 100%
1183d / 049Fh
Diameter at the start of tension reduction
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T1470.A1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H184 Diameter D1 0,006% 0...100% 100%
1184d / 04A0h
Diameter D1 for tension reduction 1
H185 Diameter D2 0,006% 0...100% 100%
1185d / 04A1h
H186 Diameter D3 0,006% 0...100% 100%
1186d / 04A2h
H187 Diameter D4, end of tension reduction 0,006% 0...100% 100%
1187d / 04A3h
Diameter D4 for the end of tension reduction
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T1468.X SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H188 Source, standstill tension 1 0/1 0
1188d / 04A4h
The standstill tension is either entered as parameter value or is
parameterized as part of the tension setpoint.
0 = Standstill tension is obtained from H189 * tension setpoint
1 = Standstill tension is permanently specified with H189
H189 Standstill tension 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1189d / 04A5h 199,993%
Enters a fixed value or a multiplying factor for the tension setpoint
H190 Tension pre-control, dancer roll 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1190d / 04A6h 199,993%
Factor for the tension pre-control for a dancer roll control (H203=2).
0%...199.99%: The main tension setpoint before an inhibit is
multiplied by this factor and is added, as
supplementary torque, to the controller output.
-0.0061%...-200%: Analog input 7 (pressure actual value of the
dancer roll) is multiplied by the absolute value of
the factor and is added, as supplementary torque,
to the controller output.

Manual
6 Parameters
H191 Minimum selection 1 0/1 0

1191d / 04A7h
A minimum selection between the operating tension and the standstill
tension is activated using H191=1; the lower of the values is used as
standard setpoint
0 = No minimum evaluation
1 = Minimum evaluation activated
H192 Smoothing, tension setpoint 32..524288ms 300ms
1192d / 04A8h
Smoothing time constant for the total setpoint after the tension setpoint
is added
Block diagr.8 FP-TENSZ.T1525.T SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H193 Min. value speed-dep. Tension controller limits 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1193d / 04A9h 199,993%
Lower limit for a speed-dependent tension controller output limit
H194 Selection, tension controller limits 1 0 ... 3 1
1194d / 04Aah
Sets the mode for the tension controller output limit
0 = The tension controller output is limited to + H195
1 = The tension controller output is limited to ± H195
2 = Limited to + H195 * absolute speed actual value
3 = Limited to ± H195 * absolute speed actual value
Block diagr.8 FP-TENSZ.T1715.X2 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H195 Adaption, tension controller limits 0,006 % 0 ...199,993% 100%
1195d / 04Abh
The maximum tension controller influence is defined using H195; it
acts as a multiplier for the limits, selected with H194.
H196 Inhibit I component, tension controller 1 0/1 0
1196d / 04Ach
For a closed-loop dancer roll position control, the tension controller
must be operated as pure P controller; H196 is used to make the
selection.
0 = PI controller
1 = P controller
Caution: When changing-over this parameter, the tension controller
must be inhibited!
Block diagr.8 FP-TENSZ.T1790.HI SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H197 Minimum Kp, tension controller 0,007 0 ... 128 0,3
1197d / 04Adh
Gain at the start of adaption to the variable moment of inertia,
generally for Jv=0%
Block diagr.8 FP-TENSZ.T1770.B1 SIMADYN D:E2 PKW:I4
H198 Maximum Kp, tension controller 0,007 0 ... 128 0,3
1198d / 04Aeh
Gain at the end of adaption, normally at Jv=100%
Block diagr.8 FP-TENSZ.T1770.B2 SIMADYN D:E2 PKW:I4
H199 Integral action time, tension controller 8..131072ms 1000ms
1199d / 04Afh
Block diagr.8 FP-TENSZ.T1790.TN SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H200 Adaption, setpoint pre-control 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1200d / 04B0h 199,993%
Multiplication factor for the tension pre-control with the tension setpoint

Manual
6 Parameters
H201 Lower limit, web speed 0,006% -200,000%... 100%

1201d / 04B1h 199,993%
Lower limit for the multiplier effect of the web speed for closed-loop
control type H203=5
H202 Influence, web speed 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
199,993%
1202d / 04B2h
Factor for the multiplier effect of the web speed for closed-loop control
type H203=5
H203 Selecting the tension control technique 1 0 ... 4 0
1203d / 04B3h
Selecting the control technique
0 = Indirect closed-loop tension control via current limits
1 = Direct closed-loop tension control with tension transducer
via current limits
2 = Direct closed-loop tension control with dancer roll via
current limits
3 = Direct closed-loop tension control with dancer roll/tension
transducer via closed-loop speed correction control
4 = Reserved for expansion
5 = As for 3, tension controller output multiplied by Vset
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T1945.X SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H204 Lower limit, web break detection 0,006% -200,000%... 5%
1204d / 04B4h 199,993%
Limit for the web break detection. For indirect closed-loop tension
control, the torque actual value is compared with this limit and for
direct closed-loop tension control, the tension actual value; the web
break signal is activated when this is fallen below.
H205 Delay, web break signal 16,0ms 16..262144ms 2000ms
1205d / 04B5h
Delay time before activating the web break signal which is used to
mainly suppress erroneous signals.
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T2100.T SIMADYN D:T2 PKW:O4
H206 Selection, winding hardness characteristic 1 0/1 0
1206d / 04B6h
0 = Winding hardness characteristic active
1 = Winding hardness characteristic disabled
H207 Start of tension controller adaption 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1207d / 04B7h 199,993%
Start of Kp adaption for the tension controller
H208 End of tension controller adaption 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1208d / 04B8h 199,993%
End of Kp adaption for the tension controller
H209 Droop, tension controller 0,006% -200,000%... 0%
1209d / 04B9h 199,993%
Multiplier to parameterize a droop factor with the I component of the
tension controller output

Manual
6 Parameters
Diameter computer, compensation factors:
H210 Calibration, web speed 0,006% -200,000%... 100%

1210d / 04Bah 199,993%
Normalization factor to finely adjust the web speed actual value.
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.D910.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H211 Selection, web tachometer 1 0/1 0
1211d / 04BBh
When sensing the web speed using a web tachometer, the actual
value must be parameterized as source for the diameter computer.
0 = No web tachometer
1 = Web tachometer present
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.D1105.I SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H212 Pulse number, axial tachometer 1 0 ... 32767 1024
1212d / 04BCh
This specifies the number of pulses per revolution when using the
digital speed sensing on the T300. init
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.D900.PR1 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H213 Pulse number, web tachometer 1 0 ... 32767 600 U/min
1213d / 04BDh
This specifies the number of pulses per revolution when using a web
tachometer init
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.D900.PR1 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H214 Rated speed, winder drive 1 0... 32767 1500 U/min
U/min
1214d / 04Beh
Maximum speed 100% at minimum diameter and at maximum web
speed init
Note: Has to be configured negative for MASTER DRIVES SC, if
encoder tracks A and B are retrieved for bachplane LBA (because of
interchanging of tracks A and B).
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.D900.RS1 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW:I2

H215 Rated speed, measuring roll web tachometer 1 0 ... 32767 1000
U/min U/min
1215d / 04BFh
Maximum speed of the measuring roll 100% at maximum web speed
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.D900.RS2 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW:I2 init
H216 Calculation interval, diameter computer 32ms... 320ms
...524288ms
1216d / 04C0h
Time for one winder revolution at the minimum diameter and maximum
web speed.
Formula: H216 [ms] = Dcore [mm] * 60 * π / Vmax [m/min]
Caution:
If this time lower than 120ms ( i.e. for extremly small
diameters), the diametre computer, due to his integrating
calculation technique, may not work properly.
In this case, an external diameter sensor is recommanded.
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.D1140.X SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4

Manual
6 Parameters
H217 Selection, encoder type sensing 1 0001 Hex 0 ... FFFF 64

1217d / 04C1h
Parameterizes the hardware for speed sensing 1 on the T300
---x: Last digit = Digital filter suppression frequency
0 = 2.0 ms 8 500 kHz
1 = 0.0 ms 8 No filter
2 = 0.5 ms 8 2 MHz
3 = 2.0 ms 8 500 kHz
4 = 8.0 ms 8 125 kHz
5 = 16.0 ms 8 62.5 kHz
The filter inhibits all frequencies which exceed the suppression
frequency
—x-: Last but one digit = Encoder type, pulse sources
0 = Pulse encoder with 2 tracks displaced through 90
degrees possibly a zero pulse, signals from X5 at SE300
1 = Separate tracks for up and down pulses (forwards and
backwards) signals from X5 at SE300
2 = Signals for tracks A+B from the CU board
4 = Zero pulse from the CU board
6 = Tracks A, B and zero pulse from the CU board
xx--: Settings to evaluate the zero pulse and rough pulse;
always 0 for SW320
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.D900.IT1 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2 init
H218 Selection, encoder type sensing 2 0001 Hex 0 ... FFFF 4

1218d / 04C2h
Parameterizes the hardware for speed sensing 2 on the T300
---x: Last digit = Digital filter suppression frequency
0 = 2.0 ms 8 500 kHz
1 = 0.0 ms 8 No filter
2 = 0.5 ms 8 2 MHz
3 = 2.0 ms 8 500 kHz
4 = 8.0 ms 8 125 kHz
5 = 16.0 ms 8 62.5 kHz
The filter inhibits all frequencies which exceed the suppression
frequency
xxx-: Selects the encoder type, settings to evaluate the zero pulse
and rough pulse; always 0 for SW320
init
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.D900.IT2 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2
H220 Scaling, dv/dt 32..524288ms 1000ms
1220d / 04C3h
Normalization factor for the dv/dt signal.
The ramp time should be set at H264 which should generate 100% at
the output of the dv/dt calculation. As a result of the internal arithmetic
accuracy of 16 bit, long ramp-up times may not be able to be precisely
set. This inaccuracy can be compensated by fine adjustment using
H225.
For inertia compensation, a dv/dt signal, normalized to 10% is
generally sufficient; in this case, parameters H227 and H228 must be
increased by a factor of 10. The tenth section of the ramp time can
then be entered at H264 which significantly improves the resolution.
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P145.X SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H221 Minimum speed, diameter computer 0,006% -200,000%... 1%
1221d / 04C5h 199,993%
The diameter calculation is inhibited when the limit value is fallen
below
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.D1030.M SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H222 Core diameter 0,006% 0 ...199,993% 20%
1222d / 04C6h
Winding core diameter as a % of the maximum diameter
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P100.X SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4

Manual
6 Parameters
H223 Smoothing, setpoint for dv/dt calculation 8...131072ms 32ms

1223d / 04C7h
Smoothing for monitoring parameter d331
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P142.T SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H224 Material thickness 0,006% 0 ...199,993% 100,%
1224d / 04C8h
Thickness of the wound material as a % of the maximum thickness
H225 Fine adjustment dv/dt 0,006% 0 ...199,993% 100%
1225d / 04C9h
Normalization factor for the dv/dt signal. Long ramp-up times may not
be able to be precisely adjusted due to the internal 16-bit processing.
These inaccuracies can be compensated by fine adjustment.
E. g. ramp-up ramp 50s, possible setting at H220 = 52.42s
with H225=50s <100% B H220 =104.84%
The dv/dt output is 100% for a 50s ramp
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P500.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H226 Source, dv/dt 1 0/1 0
1226d / 04Cah
0 = The internally calculated value is used
1 =An external value is used
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P160.I SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H227 Variable moment of inertia 0,006% 0 ...199,993% 0%
1227d / 04CBh
Compensation factor to compensate the variable moment of inertia
during acceleration
H228 Constant moment of inertia 0,006% 0 ...199,993% 0%
1228d / 04CCh
Specifies the calculated moment of inertia for the motor, gearbox and
winder core
H230 Friction torque at 0% speed 0,006% 0 ...199,993% 0%
1230d / 04Ceh
Absolute torque setpoint (d331) at 0% speed
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P910.B1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
1231d / 04CFh
1232d / 04D0h
1233d / 04D1h
1234d / 04D2h
1235d / 04D3h

Manual
6 Parameters
H236 Diameter change, monotone 1 0/1 0

1236d / 04D4h
Only monotone diameter changes are permitted for H236=1. The
diameter can only increase for winders; and only decrease for unwind
stands.
0 = Standard operation
1 =Only monotone changes permitted
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.D1704.I SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
-100,000% 0%
H237 Pre-control with n2 0,006%
1237d / 04D5h ....100,000%
Compensation with the square of the speed actual value is sometimes
set for thick materials if the diameter quickly changes at high motor
speeds.
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P940.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H238 Minimum change time, diameter 128... 50000ms
...2097152ms
1238d / 04D6h
Time for winding/unwinding at maximum material increase/decrease,
i. e. at Dmin and Vmax
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.D1650.X SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H239 Adaption divisor, length computer 0,006% 0 ...199,993% 100%
1239d / 04D7h
Normalization, web length computer
Block diagr.13 FP-DIAMZ.W500.X SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H240 Adaption factor, length computer 0,006% 0 ...199,993% 100%
1240d / 04D8h
Normalization, web length computer
H241 Ramp-down time for the braking travel calc. 0,03s 0...599,96s 60s
1241d / 04D9h
Block diagr.13 FP-DIAMZ.W30.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H242 Ramp-down rounding-off time for the braking 0,03s 0...599,96s 6s
travel calc.
1242d / 04Dah
H243 Smoothing, web width 32..524288ms 1000ms
1243d / 04DBh
Smoothing time constant for web width changes
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P150.T SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H244 Rated web speed for the braking travel calc. 0,006% 0...14999 1000
1244d / 04DCh

Manual
6 Parameters
H245 Baud rate, PTP protocol 1 0 ... 12 6

1245d / 04DDh
Sets the baud rate for the peer to peer protocol. init
0 = 150 baud
1 = 300 baud
2 = 600 baud
3 = 1200 baud
4 = 2400 baud
5 = 4800 baud
6 = 9600 baud
7 = 19200 baud
8 = 38400 baud
9 = 57600 baud
10 = 76800 baud
11 = Not permitted
12 = 115200 baud
Please refere also to note 3, Section 8.1.3.3
Block diagr.14 [email protected] SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H247 Number of receive words, PTP protocol 1 0 ... 5 5
1247d / 04DFh
Telegram length for the receiver. init
Block diagr.14 FP-IQ1Z.RPTP.LTW SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H248 Number of transmit words, PTP protocol 1 0 ... 5 5
1248d / 04E0h
Telegram length for the sender. init
Block diagr.14 FP-IQ2Z.TPTP.LTW SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2
H249 Enable, send PTP protocol 1 0/1 0
1249d / 04E1h
0 = Inhibited
1 =Enabled
Block diagr.14 FP-IQ2Z.TPTP.EN SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H250 EEPROM key 1 0 ... 32767 0
1250d / 04E2h
To establish the initialization status of all parameters with a rising edge
at H160, the key parameter H250 must be set to 165.
Block diagr.4 FP-PARAMZ.URLAD.KEY SIMADYN D:I2 PKW:I2
H251 Transfer setpoint A 1 0/1 0
1251d / 04E3h
Enters the control signal as parameter
Block diagr.16 FP-IQ1Z.B90.I10 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW:I2
H252 Transfer setpoint B 1 0/1 0
1252d / 04E4h
Block diagr.16 FP-IQ1Z.B100.I10 SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H253 Gearbox stage 2 1 0/1 0
1253d / 04E5h
H254 Winder 1 0/1 0
1254d / 04E6h
H255 Polarity, bias reference value 1 0/1 0
1255d / 04E7h

Manual
6 Parameters
H256 Braking characteristic, speed point 1 0,006% 0...199,993% 0.1%

1256d / 04E8h
Speed, below which the reduced braking torque becomes active.
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.BD10.A1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H257 Reduced braking torque 0,006% 0...199,993% 0%
1257d / 04E9h
Braking torque at fast stop and low speed.
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.BD10.B1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H258 Braking characteristic, speed point 2 0,006% 0...199,993% 2%
1258d / 04Eah
Speed, above which the max. braking torque is effective
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.BD10.A2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H259 Maximum braking torque 0,006% 0...199,993% 199%
1259d / 04Ebh
Braking torque at fast stop and high speed.
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.BD10.B2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H260 Comparison value, limit value monitor 1 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1260d / 04Ech 199,993%
Enters the comparison value as parameter
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G70.X31 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H261 Comparison value, limit value monitor 2 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1261d / 04Edh 199,993%
Enters the comparison value as parameter
Block diagr.10 FP-IQ2Z.G270.X31 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H262 Source, length reference value 1 0 ... 31 31
1262d / 04Eeh
Selects the source for the length reference value with 100% =
75000[m]
28-30 = 0%
31 = 199%
H263 Motorized potentiometer 2, fast rate of change 32..524288ms 25000ms
1263d / 04Efh
Ramp-up and ramp-down times are parameterized together; the fast
rate of change is initiated, if the raise or lower control commands are
present for longer than 4s.
Block diagr.19 FP-IQ2Z.M590.X2 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW:O4
H264 Motorized potentiometer 2, normal rate of change 32..524288ms 100000ms
1264d / 04F0h
Ramp-up and ramp-down times are parameterized together
H265 Motorized potentiometer 1, fast rate of change 8..131072ms 25000ms
1265d / 04F1h
Ramp-up and ramp-down times are parameterized together; the fast
rate of change is initiated, if the raise or lower control commands are
present for longer than 4s.
H266 Motorized potentiometer 1, normal rate of change 8..131072ms 100000ms
1266d / 04F2h

Manual
6 Parameters
H267 Select operating mode, motorized potentiometer 1 1 0/1 0

1267d / 04F3h
Motorized potentiometer 1 can be parameterized as simple ramp-
function generator
0 = Motorized potentiometer
1 = Ramp-function generator
Block diagr.19 FP-IQ2Z.M100.I SIMADYN D:B1 PKW:Boolean
H268 Setpoint ramp-function generator operation 0,006% -200,000%... 100%
1268d / 04F4h 199,993%
Setpoint for H267=1
Block diagr.19 FP-IQ2Z.M120.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H269 Ramp time, ramp-function generator operation 8..131072ms 10000ms
1269d / 04F5h
H270 Smoothing, analog input X5C 8..131072ms 8ms
1270d / 04F6h
Smoothing time constant, analog input 3
H271 Smoothing, analog input X5D 8..131072ms 8ms
1271d / 04F7h
Smoothing time constant, analog input 4
H272 Dead zone for dv/dt calculation 0.006% -200,000%... 1%
199,993%
1272d / 04F8h
Dead zone to calculate the dv/dt value. All accelerating signals lower
than this limit are suppressed. The slowest operational speed ramp
generates, for H220, a specific value as accelerating signal. The limit
value should lie below this. Example:
H220=100[s], slowest ramp = 500[s]
⇒ H272=0.2 * (100[s]/500[s]) * 100% = 4%
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P147Z.TH SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H273 Torque reference value scaling for the T300 0.006% -200,000%... 100%
199,993%
1273d / 04F9h
- CUVC, CUMC: H273 = 100%: The values of the torque setpoint at
r269 (CUVC, CUMC) and d329/d331 (T300) are the same.
- CU2: H273=25%: The values of the torque setpoint at r246 (CU2)
and d329/d331 (T300) are the same.
- CU3: A torque setpoint is not output.
Block diagr.3 FP-IQ1Z.BO22.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H274 Torque actual value scaling for the T300 0.006% -200,000%... 100%
199,993%
1273d / 04Fah
- CUVC: H274 = 100%: The values of the torque actual value at r007
(CUVC) and d329/d331 (T300) are the same.
- CUMC: H274 = 100%: The values of the torque actual value at K184
are connected to a visualization parameter (CUMC) and d329/d331
(T300) are the same.
- CU2, CU3: H274=25%: The values of the torque actual value at r007
(CU2, CU3) and d329/d331 (T300) are the same.
Block diagr.3 FP-IQ1Z.BO24.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H275 Response threshold web breakage detector - 0.006% -200,000%... 50%
199,993%
indirect tension control
1273d / 04FBh
Block diagr.7 FP-TENSZ.T2060.M SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H280 Number shifts for web length calculation 0 0...16384 1
1280d / 0500h
Skaleing for web length calculation
Block diagr 13 FP-DIAMZ.W90.XD SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:I4

Manual
6 Parameters
Monitoring parameters:
d300 Software version, axial winder 0,1 A

1300d / 0514h
Block diagr.4 FP-PARAMZ.VER.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d301 Effective web speed setpoint 0,006% A
1301d / 0515h
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S160.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d302 Actual dv/dt 0,006% A
1302d / 0516h
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P500.Y2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d303 Speed setpoint 0,006% A
1303d / 0517h
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.NC122.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d304 Sum, tension/position reference value 0,006% A
1304d / 0518h
Block diagr.8 FP-TENSZ.T1525.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d305 Output, motorized potentiometer 1 0,006% A
1305d / 0519h
Block diagr.19 FP-IQ2Z.M450.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d306 Output, motorized potentiometer 2 0,006% A
1306d / 051Ah
Block diagr.19 FP-IQ2Z.M650.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d307 Speed actual value 0,006% A
1307d / 051Bh
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.AI325.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d308 Variable moment of inertia 0,006% A
1308d / 051Ch
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.P350.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d309 Actual web length 4.0m A
1309d / 051Dh
Block diagr.13 FP-DIAMZ.W410.Y 100%=75000[m] SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d310 Actual diameter 0,006% A
1310d / 051Eh
Block diagr.9 FP-DIAMZ.D1710.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d311 Tension actual value, smoothed 0,006% A
1311d / 051Fh
d312 Pre-control torque 0,006% A
1312d / 0520h
d313 Output, tension control 0,006% A
1313d / 0521h
d314 Pre-control torque, friction compensation 0,006% A
1314d / 0522h
d315 Free for expansion 0,006% A
1315d / 0523h
Block diagr.- FP-IQ2Z.D15.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d316 Pre-control torque, inertia compensation 0,006% A
1316d / 0524h

Manual
6 Parameters
d317 Sum, tension actual value 0,006% A

1317d / 0525h
d318 Tension actual value, D component 0,006% A
1318d / 0526h
d319 Tension controller output 0,006% A
1319d / 0527h
d320 Analog input 1, X5 terminals 501/502 0,006% A
1320d / 0528h
1321d / 0529h
1322d / 052Ah
1323d / 052Bh
1324d / 052Ch
1325d / 052Dh
1326d / 052Eh
d327 External web speed actual value 0,006% A
1327d / 052Fh
d328 Tension setpoint 0,006% A
1328d / 0530h
d329 Torque setpoint 0,006% A
1329d / 0531h
Block diagr.6 FP-IQ1Z.RCUX.Y15 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d330 Torque actual value 0,006% A
1330d / 0532h
Block diagr.20 FP-IQ1Z.RCUX.Y16 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d331 Torque setpoint smoothed 0,006% A
1331d / 0533h
Block diagr.6 FP-SREFZ.NT130.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4

Manual
6 Parameters
d332-d334 indicate the internal, active control commands :
d332 Control word 1 0001 Hex A

1332d / 0534h
Bit 0: ON 1 = active
Bit 1: /OFF2 (voltage-free) 0 = active
Bit 2: /OFF3 (fast stop) 0 = active
Bit 3: System start 1 = active
Bit 4: Inhibit ramp-function generator 1 = active
Bit 5: Hold ramp-function generator 1 = active
Bit 6: Enable setpoint 1 = active
Bit 7: Acknowledge fault 1 = active
Bit 8: Inching 1 1 = active
Bit 9: Inching 2 1 = active
Bit 10: Control from CS 1 = active
Bit 11: Tension controller on 1 = active
Bit 12: Inhibit tension controller 1 = active
Bit 13: Standstill tension on 1 = active
Bit 14: Set diameter 1 = active
Bit 15: Hold diameter 1 = active
Block diagr.- FP-IQ1Z.B210.QS SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2
1333d / 0535h
Bit 0: Switch-in supplementary setpoint 1 = active
Bit 1: Local positioning 1= active
Bit 2: Motorized potentiometer 2, raise 1 = active
Bit 3: Motorized potentiometer 2, lower 1 = active
Bit 4: Local operator control 1 = active
Bit 5: Local stop 1 = active
Bit 6: Local run 1 = active
Bit 7: Local crawl 1 = active
Bit 8: Manouver 1 = active
Bit 9: Stop Vset setting 1 = active
Bit 10: Motorized potentiometer 1, raise 1 = active
Bit 11: Motorized potentiometer 1, lower 1 = active
Bit 12: Reset length computer 1 = active
Bit 13: Tachometer 1 = active
Bit 14, 15 = 0 unused
1334d / 0536h
Bit 0: Winding from below 1 = active
Bit 1: Polarity, bias reference value 1= active
Bit 2: Winder 1 = active
Bit 3: Gearbox stage 2 1 = active
Bit 4: Transfer setpoint A 1 = active
Bit 5: Transfer setpoint B 1 = active
Bit 6 - 15 = 0 unused

Manual
6 Parameters
d335 Status word 1 0001 Hex A

1335d / 0537h
Bit 0: Ready to power-up 1 = active
Bit 1: Ready 1 = active
Bit 2: Operation enabled 1= active
Bit 3: Fault 1 = active
Bit 4: OFF2 0 = active
Bit 5: OFF3 0 = active
Bit 6: Switch-on inhibit 1 = active
Bit 7: Alarm 1 = active
Bit 8: Setpoint/actual value difference
within tolerance 1 = active
Bit 9: Control requested 1 = active
Bit 10: f/n limit reached 1 = active
Bit 11: Converter-specific 1 = active
Bit 12: Speed controller at its limit 1 = active
Bit 13: Tension controller at its limit 1 = active
Block diagr.- FP-CONTZ.SE120.QS SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2
d336 Status word 2 0001 Hex A
1336d / 0538h
Bit 0: Controller enable, system oper. 1 = active
Bit 1: Local stop 1 = active
Bit 2: OFF3 0= active
Bit 3: Operating mode, local run 1 = active
Bit 4: Operating mode, local crawl 1 = active
Bit 5: Oper. mode, local inching forw. 1 = active
Bit 6: Oper. mode, local inching reverse 1 = active
Bit 7: Operating mode, local positioning 1 = active
Bit 8: Speed setpoint is zero 1 = active
Bit 9: Web break 1 = active
Bit 10: Tension control on 1 = active
Bit 11: Operating mode, system oper. 1 = active
Bit 12: Standstill 1 = active
Bit 13: Output, limit value monitor 1 1 = active
Bit 14: Output, limit value monitor 2 1 = active
Bit 15: Local operation/system operation = 1/0
Block diagr.- FP-CONTZ.C245.QS SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2
d337 Alarms from T300 0001 Hex A
1337d
0539h
Bit 0: Overspeed, positive 1 = active ⇒ A097
Bit 1: Overspeed, negative 1 = active ⇒ A098
Bit 2: Overcurrent, positive 1= active ⇒ A099
Bit 3: Overcurrent, negative 1 = active ⇒ A100
Bit 4: Drive stalled 1 = active ⇒ A101
Bit 5: Receive, CU faulted 1 = active ⇒ A102
Bit 6: Receive, CB faulted 1 = active ⇒ A103
Bit 7: Receive, PTP faulted 1 = active ⇒ A104
Bit 8 - 15 = 0
Block diagr.20 FP-CONTZ.SU150.QS SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2

Manual
6 Parameters
d338 Faults from T300 0001 Hex A

1338d / 053Ah
Bit 0: Overspeed, positive 1 = active ⇒ F116
Bit 1: Overspeed, negative 1 = active ⇒ F117
Bit 2: Overcurrent, positive 1 = active ⇒ F118
Bit 3: Overcurrent, negative 1 = active ⇒ F119
Bit 4: Drive stalled 1 = active ⇒ F120
Bit 5: Receive, CU faulted 1 = active ⇒ F121
Bit 6: Receive, CB faulted 1 = active ⇒ F122
Bit 7: Receive, PTP faulted 1 = active ⇒ F123
Bit 8 - 15 = 0
Block diagr.16 FP-CONTZ.SU170.QS SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2
d339 Correction factor, material thickness 0,006% A
1339d / 053Bh
d340 Compensated web speed 0,006% A
1340d / 053Ch
Block diagr.5 FP-SREFZ.S170.Y2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d341 Actual bias reference value 0,006% A
1341d / 053Dh
d342 Positive torque limit 0,006% A
1342d / 053Eh
d343 Negative torque limit 0,006% A
1343d / 053Fh
d344 Web speed setpoint 0,006% A
1344d / 0540h
d345 Actual Kp adaption factor, speed controller 0,006% A
1345d / 0541h
d346 Actual Kp, tension controller 0,007 A
1346d / 0542h
Block diagr.8 FP-TENSZ.T1770.Y SIMADYN D:E2 PKW:I4
d347 Control word, PTP 0,006% A
1347d / 0543h
Block diagr.14 FP-IQ1Z.STWPTP.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d348 Status word 2 from the CU 0001 Hex A
1348d / 0544h
Block diagr.- FP-IQ1Z.RCUX.Y14 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW:V2
d349 Web speed actual value, web tachometer 0,006% A
1349d / 0545h
Block diagr.13 FP-IQ1Z.B207A.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
d350 Braking travel 0,006% A
1350d / 0546hh
Block dagr.13 FP-DIAMZ.W94.Y 100%=75[km] SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4

Manual
6 Parameters
d361 Module type, standard software package 1 A

1361d / 0551h
The value is 320 for module type MS320.
Block diagr.4 FP-PARAMZ.MODTYP.Y SIMADYN D:N2 PKW:I4
H998 Drive number 1 0..32767 0

1998d / 07Ceh
Number of the drive for reference
Block diagr.4 FP-PARAMZ.DRNR.X SIMADYN D:O2 PKW:O2

Manual
6 Parameters

Manual
7 Basic drive converter parameters

The closed-loop speed and torque control is implemented on the basic drive converter (control mode-
speed control, CUVC: P100=4; CU2: P136=4). The sum of the speed setpoints is switched-in directly in
front of the speed controller; the ramp-function generator on the technology board is used and the torques
input as supplementary torques or as limits.
Advantages: System configuration optimized for speed, lowest possible dead times;
the speed controller optimization function of the basic drive converter can be used;
the drive can be initially commissioned without the technology board.
The parameterization for SIMOVERT VC and MC drive converters with the CUVC and CUMC modules is
described in Section 7.1. In Section 7.2, this is then followed by the parameterization of the SIMOVERT
VC and SC drive converters with the predecessor modules CU2 and CU3.
There are no control-related differences between the current and the predecessor modules, which are of
significance for this standard software package.
All of the optimization runs required should be made before the T300 is commissioned.
It is absolutely necessary to enter the following parameters, if a functioning winder is required.
Parameterlist for the SIMOVERT VC, SC and MC base converter using the MS380 axial winder
software
Remarks:
Attention:
It is absolutely necessary to set base converter parameters according
to the following list. Otherwise the correct functioning of the winder
cannot be guaranteed!
− These parameters are best entered after the basic drive has been commissioned. The rated drive
converter speed for winding operation should, in this case be already set, also refer to the following
parameter list (CUVC, CUMC: P100=4; CU2, CU3: P163=4).
− This list assumes, that, in addition to the parameters, which are required for closed-loop speed control
operation, that there is also a factory setting. We recommend that the complete speed range of the
winder drive (e. g. via the operator panel at the drive converter (PMU)) is run-through, and only then
that the parameters, relating to winder operation, are set.
− Indexed parameters: Always enter index 1 (or the same index).
7.1 Parameterizing SIMOVERT VC and MC using the CUVC and

CUMC modules
− A differentiation should be made between the SIMOVERT VC and MC devices:

If no column is appropriately marked: The parameters for VC and MC are the same
Column VC Only for SIMOVERT VC
Column MC Only for SIMOVERT MC

Manual
Basic drive parameters which should be set

Parameter VC MC Significance Comment Setting
P100 X Control type 4
P554 Source, ON/OFF1 STW1.0 3100
command
P555 Source OFF2 command STW1.1 3101
P558 Source OFF3 command STW1.2 3102
P561 Source inverter enable STW1.3 3103
P566 Source, acknowledge STW1.7 3107 2)
error
P352 X Rated system frequency 1)
P353 X Rated system speed 1)
P232 KP adaption factor 3008
P443 Source, speed setpoint 3002
P452 Maximum frequency/ 1.1 x rated system
speed RDF frequency/ speed = 110%
P453 Maximum frequency/ -1.1 x rated system
speed LDF frequency/ speed = 110%
P456 X Suppression bandwidth 0
P462 Acceleration time 0
P464 Deceleration time 0
P466 X OFF3 deceleration time Required time
P469 Initial rounding-off 0
P470 X Final rounding-off 0
P354 Rated torque Rated motor torque (Nm)
P492 X Positive torque limit P492 = H147
P493 X Source, positive torque 3006
limit
P498 X Negative torque limit P498 = -(H147)
P499 X Source, negative torque 3007
limit
P506 X Supplementary torque 3005
setpoint
P263 X Positive torque limit P263 = H147
P265 X Source, positive torque 3006
limit

Manual
P264 X Negative torque limit P264 = -(H147)

P266 X Source, negative torque 3007
limit
P262 X Supplementary torque 3005
setpoint
P233 X X N. controller, adaptation 1 0% 4)
P234 X X N. controller, adaptation 2 200% 4)
P235 X X N. controller KP1 0 4)
P236 X X N. controller KP2 H152 4)
P734.01 Status word 1 32
P734.02 X Speed actual value 148
P734.02 X Speed actual value 91
P734.05 X Torque setpoint, 165
basic drive to T300
P734.06 X Torque actual value, 24 for CUVC
basic drive to T300 184 for CUMC 3)
Table 7.1: Basic drive converter parameters which should be set.
Comments:
1) Example for P352,VC:
Rated winder speed (axis speed at 100% speed setpoint and minimum diameter) :
2759 rev/min (corresponds to 100 % at r447 or r229)
Motor data: 4-pole motor: 50 Hz corresponds to 1500 RPM, without slip
Parameters to be set: P352 = 2759 RPM x 50 Hz / 1500 RPM = 91,97 Hz
Example for P353,MC:
Rated winder speed: 1778 RPM (corresponds to 100% at r461 or r229)
Parameters to be set: P353 = 1778 RPM
2) The binary command acknowledge via terminal (not for PROFIBUS DP) must be connected at the
basic drive, refer to e. g. Fig. 3.1.
3) For MASTERDRIVES MC, instead of the torque actual value, the actual value of the torque-generating
current ISQ( act ) = K184 should be used.
4) Parameters P233 to P236 should be set corresponding to the data in Section 8.2.4.1.
The following parameters are permanently set on the T300:
H150=0%; H152=199,99%; H151=0 and H153=19,99. This setting means that the variable moment of
inertia, calculated on Sheet 9 of the Block diagram, is directly transferred to the basic drive.

Manual
7.2 Parameterizing SIMOVERT VC and SC with the CU2 and CU3

modules
- There are the following differences between the VC and SC type converters (notice the special
handling of H203, winder mode):
No column marked by an "X": Identical Parameter values fpr VC and SC regardless of the H203
setting.
VC column marked: Parameter value applies only for VC and SC regardless of the H203
setting
SC (N) column marked: Parameter value applies for SIMOVERT SC in "speed-trim" mode only (via
basic unit technology controller), H203>3. This is the preferable mode for
SC.
SC (I) column marked: for SIMOVERT SC in "current limiting" winder mode (H203 < 2).
Base Converter Parameters which must be adjusted

(N) = "Speed-Trim" control mode, (I) = "Current-Limiting" control mode
Para- VC SC SC Meaning Remarks Set Value
meter (N) (I)
P90 Register T300 with MS320 2 3)
P91 Register CB1 only, when CB1 present:
P91=1
when no CB1:P91=0 3)
P163 Open-loop/closed-loop contrl.sel. 4 5)
P554 Source, OFF1 CW1.0 3001
P561 Source, inverter enable CW1.3 3001
P566 Source, acknowledge via CB1 CW1.7 3001 2)
P420 X VC: rated frequency 1)
X X SC: rated speed
P226 X Source, controller adaption VC 3008
P546 X Source, conroller adaption SC 3008
P443 X X Source, main setpoint 3002
P443 X Source, main setpoint 0
P452 Maximum frequency FDW 1,1*P420
P453 Maximum frequency REV -(1,1*P420)
P456 X Skip frequency skip 0
P462 Acceleration time 0
P464 Deceleration time 0
P466 X Deceleration time OFF3 required time
P469 X Initial rounding-off 0
P470 X Final rounding-off 0
P485 System rated torque 100,00%
P492 Fixed upper torque limit P492=H147
P493 Source, upper torque limit 3006
P498 Fixed lower torque limit P498=-(H147)
P499 Source, lower torque limit 3007
P506 Source, supplem.torque setpoint 3005
P517 Deviation frequency H203>3: 0,1*fmax/0,1*nmax
H203<2:
(1,5*H145)*(fmax)/(nmax)
P308 X X Sampling time 1.2 4)
P486 X Source, torque setpoint 1020

Manual
P526 X Source, setpoint tech. controller 3002

P530 X Actual value tech. controller 219
P531 X Source, act. value tech.controller 1100
P541 X Tech. contrl. output limitation 1 P541=H147
P542 X Tech. contrl. output limitation 2 P542=-(H147)
P584 X Source, enable tech. controller CW2.24 1
P587 X Source master/slave 1
P694.002 Actual speed VC:214
SC:219
P694.003 not used 0
P694.005 Torque setpoint from base unit to VC:246
T300 SC:0, not present
P694.006 Torque act. value from base unit 007
to T300
Table 7.2: Basic drive converter parameters which should be set
Remarks:
1) Example for determining the correct value of P420, VC:
Rated winder speed (Rotational speed at 100% linespeed reference and minimum diameter):
2759 rpm (corresponding to 100% at r447 or r223)
Motor data: 4-pole motor; 50 Hz line frequency. This results to a "synchronous speed"
of 1500 rpm, slip not taken into account.
Set value of P420: P420 = 2759 rpm * 50Hz / 1500 rpm = 91,97 Hz
Example for P420, SC:
Rated winder speed: 1778 rpm rotational speed (corresponds 100% at r447 or r223)
Set value for P420: P420 = 1778 rpm
2) Hook up the binary "Fault Acknowledge" command to a base converter terminal (not for PROFIBUS-
DP), e.g. refer to Fig. 3.1.
Don't use a T300 terminal for this purpose!
3) Setting only with P52=4, hardware configuration possible, see inverter instruction manual
4) Setting only with P52=5, drive set-up possible, see inverter instruction manual
5) When entered P587=1, the setting of P136 changes to 5 (applicable only to SC with speed correction)
Information regarding SIMVERT SC:

- The "Speed-Trim" winder control mode is generally recommended for the SIMOVERT SC converter
(H203 > 3), even if a load cell is employed in your application.
- kp with H203 >3
- kp is set, as usual, via the T300 board (see section 8.2.4 and the block diagram, page 6).
- the effective kp for the speed controller of the basic unit (technology controller) can be checked via
the observation parameter r547.
- Note:
r547=P537 (shown value of d345) / 10
Example P537=30; read value of d345=1. => r547=3 => effective kp=3.
- recommended starting value for the technology controller:
P537=30: integral time constant: P538=0,5

Manual
7.3 Free function blocks CUVC, CUMC

Free blocks can be used in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES CUVC and CUMC, to realise additional
function ( logic functions with logic blocks, calculation with numeric function blocs... ).
To enable function blocks to carry out processing, a time slot (sampling time) must be assigned to each
function block. Depending on the number and frequency of the blocks to be processed, the
microprocessor system of the units has a varying degree of utilization.
The visualization parameter r829 has to be selected after enabling function blocks for displaying the free
calculating time. The reserve of the microprocessor system in the basic unit should not be lower
than 5 - 10%.
If this is not the case, please make shure all the enabled function blocs are really necessary, or if
some function blocs may be assigned to different time slots.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8 Commissioning the winder

Information is provided in this section which permits fast start-up of the axial winder.
WARNING
Only commence with the start-up work if there are adequate, effective
measures for safe electrical and mechanical operation of the equipment and
drives.
Ensure that all of the safety and EMERGENCY OFF signals are connected
and are functioning absolutely perfectly so that the drive can be disabled and
shutdown at any time.
− Note:
In this Section, it is assumed, that Section 7 was conscientiously followed.
Only then is it possible to commission the winder.
8.1 Commissioning information

All of the settings to parameterize the standard software package are realized using technological
parameters "Hxxx".
The standard software package monitors communications to Basic drive converter (CU), to the
communications interface (CB) and to its own serial peer to peer interface.
Faults/errors are always signaled as alarm; they can be suppressed using H011.
Fault messages/signals are only generated if the appropriate coupling had already signaled at
some stage error-free operation; suppression is possible using H012.
Alarm A103 is always generated if the interface board is not inserted.
8.1.1 Equipment required

The standard axial winder software package can be parameterized in three ways:
− Using the PMU drive operator control panel,
− using a PG/ a PC with SIMOVIS, via the basic drive interface (this is the preferred procedure) and
− via PROFIBUS DP.
An oscilloscope should be available to evaluate the control performance and if required to check the
pulse encoder signals. A handheld tachometer must also be available to calibrate the web speed.
Additional equipment (e. g. battery box) might be required depending on the system-specific
requirements.
8.1.2 Commissioning using the basic converter operator control panel

It is possible to commission the equipment by just using the basic converter operator control panel. It can
take a long time to change parameters over a wide value range, as the parameter values can only be
changed using the raise/lower keys. However, it is only possible to perfectly keep track of the modified
parameters in a handwritten form. In order to eliminate any errors, we recommend that with SIMOVIS, you
generate a file of the modified parameters is generated.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.1.3 Commissioning with SIMOVIS for Windows
Up to Simovis V5.1, the T300 parameterization can be done with SIMOVIS, like the base units
thrue the PMU connection. Please refere to section 8.1.3.3.
8.1.3.1 Creating the data base for a technology type.

In order to parameterize every drive and technology type, SIMOVIS requires exact information about the
number and characteristics of the available parameters, e.g. parameter numbers, value limits, etc.. This
information is stored in data base files.
If a T300 with „unknown“ data base is connected (data base not available in SIMOVIS), the necessary
technology data base may be created online.
In both cases it is assumed that the communication to the drives is intact.
Preconditions:
- For the learn process the technology type’s parameter set should be reset to the factory settings
(refer to parameter H250).
If during the learn process the technology type’s parameter set was not reset to the factory settings, the
functions refer to the status of the technology type when the data base was created and not to the factory
settings.
Note: It is recommened, but not essential, that step as described above is carried out. During the learn
procedure SIMOVIS also generates a file (by upreading), which is interpreted during offline mode to be
the factory setting of a technology type. This file is used for example:
- when opening an offline file as the basis for the factory setting,
- when printing a parameter set, where only the changes compared with the factory setting are to
be printed.
- The dialogue to create the data base of a technology type will only be displayed if the base unit, to which
SIMOVIS is connected, has a slot for technology boards (MASTERDRIVES Compact units).
- If the technology board has to be registered to the base unit by parameterization (MASTERDRIVES with
CU2 or CU3: parameters P90 or P91) the „learning“ process will only start if the technology board is
registered.

Manual
8 Commissioning
Proceed as follows:
1. For MASTERDRIVES with CU2 or CU3 the technology board has to be registered
2. Reset the technology board to the factory setting.
In the nenu BUS CONFIGURATION:
3. Dependant on the Baud rate, increase the "number of request repeats" under the "extended"
tab( refer to section 8.1.3.3.).
4. Select the drive by clicking on the lefthand mouse key, and establish the connection (clicking
toolbar „connect. On/Off). The communication to the drives is intact if this toolbar changes to
green colour.
5. Disconnect other drives (if available) to reduce the time required for the „learning process“.
6. Disconnect all other communication systems (Profibus, Peer-to-Peer) for example by pulling off
the connecting plug.
7. In the function bar, click on the button „Create data base“ or

7. Select the menu Edit > Create („learn“) data base.
8. In the „Create data base“ dialogue (in the „technology type“ folder), the bus address, type and SW
version of the connected base unit can be checked. In the dropdown list box „Name technology
type“, select (or enter) the name of the technology type to be learned (default name: TECHN000).
If a name is selected, which already exists, the data base will be overwritten by the new one.
The technology type T300 to be learned does not make use of parameters 3000 ...3999,
deactivate the checkbox „L/c parameters“. The „learning“ time will then be significantly reduced.
9. Click on the Start button to start creating the technology type data base
-The following „learn“ process will take several minutes. Progress can be monitored in the displayed
dialogue. Upon successful completion, the new technology type is available for all drives (which have a
slot for technology boards) in the Add drive or Change drive dialogue. The drive should now be
disconnected, and the new technology type selected in the „Change drive“ dialogue.
Note: Should errors be detected at the end of the learn procedure, then further information can be
displayed by clicking on the „details“ button. The cause of the errors (e.g. restricted parameter access)
should be corrected and the learning process repeated.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.1.3.2 T300 parameterization

After a technology data base has been created, the T300 can be parametrized with SIMOVIS.
(Please refer to the SIMOVIS help system if you require further information).
- Parameter list complete

opens a parameter table (same structure as standard parameter table) with all of the parameters of
the drive type, which is assigned to the actual drive window. (H and d parameter are displayed after
the base unit parameter P and r )
Double click somewhere in the appropriate line of the table to change the parameter value.
- Free parameterization:
opens a parameter table, where parameters can be individually listed by entering parameter
numbers (e.g. H010 or d303, resp. 1010 or 1303).
- Download: The parameter set (Upread files, offline generated files) can be directly saved in the
RAM or EEPROM memory of the drive.
When downloading, the actual parameter values in the drive are overwritten by the parameter
values in the parameter set.
8.1.3.3 Important notes
Note 1: Dependant on the Baud rate, increase the "number of request repeats" under the "extended"
tab.
Empirical values:
38400 Baud: Number of request repeats = 200
Refer to: online help (BUSKON): Help topics > Editing projects
> Configuring the interface.
Note 2: Disconnect other drives (if available) to reduce the time required for the „learning
process“.
Disconnect all other communication systems (Profibus, Peer-to-Peer) for example by pulling
off the connecting plug.
Note 3: If more serial interfaces are used addition to SIMOVIS (e.g. Profibus and T300 Peer-to-Peer
interface), the Peer-to-Peer baud rate should be set to values ≤ 19200 Bauds (H245 ≤ 7).
A simultaneous data transmission with several interfaces (and high baudrates) can, under
these circumstances, cause a T300 overload.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.1.4 Establish factory setting

This is usally not necessary because the memory modules (MS320) are shipped with factory setting.
Factory setting can be established if there is something which is not clear about the parameter settings.
Factory setting is established by the following (the SIMOVIS kind of storage (RAM or EEPROM) is without
significance):
H250=165
H160 change from 0 to 1
switch off the drive
Note:
Factory settings of the parameters are valid only after having switched off and on the drvie.
It is recommended to reset H160 afterwards.
Procedure when the EEPROM is full (parameter changes no longer possible):
Establish the factory setting with SIMOVIS:

− click on the RAM symbol in the main menu, to change the SIMOVIS data save type to save the
parameters in the RAM
− establish the "factory setting" as described above.
− click on the EEPROM symbol in the main menu so that the parameters are saved in the EEPROM
(non volatile data save).
Establish the factory setting with PROFIBUS-DP:
− Essentially the same as already described.
Establish the factory setting with the PMU:
− This is not possible if the parameter memory is full.
Comments:
− If the EEPROM is full, the "KON: Error when writing" message appears in SIMOVIS in the parameter
lists, and when downloading in the DOWNLOAD window, the „Not written:xxx“ message.
The EEPROM (parameter memory) cannot become full if the standard axial winder software package was
not changed!

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2 Commissioning the winder functions

8.2.1 Checking the speed actual value adjustment
Principle of the speed actual value adjustment: The maximum speed is available at the maximum web
speed and minimum diameter (also refer to Section 4.20).
n = nmax, if web speed = 100% and

diameter = Dcore = H222
Procedure:
- The nominal speed has to be set in the base drive converter.

This value can be calculated:
1000 * VMax [m/min] * Gear ratio

n [1/min] =
DCore [mm] * Π
This calculated value has to be set in the base drive converter as rated speed, resp. after
conversion as rated frequency.
This setting has to be checked !
Caution:
A condition for a proper diameter calculation is a correct speed actual value calibration !
- Insert a mandrel (empty core).
- The winder is operated without material web.
- Enter the actual diameter as setting value and select using H089, activate the setting command
(H024=4), check using d310. Generally, the core diameter H222 is used here as reference (empty
core), and in this case, H089 should be set to 28.
- Speed-controlled winder operation:
- If possible use the central machine ramp function generator ( Run mode, Tension controller
OFF)
- e.g. by selecting local operation and local inching forwards. The required inching setpoint is
entered using H143. H146 = 0 selects the speed controled, local operation.
- Ramp-up the web speed setpoints to a defined value, e.g. 100% (check at d344).
- Check the circumferential speed at the winder using a handheld tachometer.
- If required, correct the speed calibration (refer to Section 4.20)
Caution: After every significant change in the speed actual value calibration, the speed controller
must be re-optimized using an empty roll.
- Check the torque direction. When the winder rotates in the web direction and "winding from above",
the speed actual value and torque setpoint must be positive, refer to Section 5.9.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2.2 Friction torque compensation (block diagram 8)

Notes:
• The friction component is generally dependent on the winder shaft speed. For most winder
designs, the effect of the wound material weight only has a small influence.
• The friction compensation can only compensate friction values, which are dependent on the
speed, but otherwise cannot be changed. Frequently, for especially high gearbox ratios, the
friction torque is very dependent on the gearbox temperature. This may mean that the friction
compensation can only be set with difficulty or not at all.
• For some gearbox designs, high winder mandrel speeds cause the gearbox temperature to rise.
This temperature rise results in a significantly changed friction torque. It is recommended that
the measuring time to plot the friction characteristic is kept as short as possible; high winder
shaft speeds also only occur briefly.
• Under certain circumstances, it will be necessary to post-optimize the friction characteristic after
first start-up. (from experience the winder has run-in after 2-30 operating hours).
• Friction compensation should be set, especially for indirect closed-loop tension control
configurations, or this is not necessary if the measured motor torques lie |3% over the complete
speed range.
• When using a tension transducer or dancer roll, it is often not necessary to parameterize the
friction characteristic. However, it significantly simplifies the setting of the inertia compensation
and the tension precontrol.
The winder is operated without material web when plotting the friction characteristic.
Caution: If the friction compensation is set too high, the winder can just start to run, and during unwinding
with indirect closed-loop tension control, can lead to slack in the material web.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2.2.1 Friction characteristic

− Insert a mandrel (empty core).
− The winder is operated without material web.
− Enter the actual diameter as setting value and select using H089, activate the setting command
(H024=4), check using d310. Generally, the core diameter H222 is used here as reference (empty
core), and in this case, H089 should be set to 28.
− The feed-forward control for inertia compensation is disabled with H227=0% and H228=0% (pre-
settings).
− Operate the winder in the closed-loop speed controlled mode:
1) - If possible use the central machine ramp function generator ( Run mode, Tension controller
OFF)
- Check the entered setpoint at d307, speed actual value.
- In the base drive converter observe the integral component of the speed controler output. Set
the values H230 to H235 to reach speed controller integral component < 2%.
2) - e.g. select local operation and local inching forwards. The required inching setpoint is entered
using H143. H146 = 0 selects local closed-loop speed controlled operation.
- Check the entered setpoint at d307, speed actual value.
- Read-off the torque setpoint at d331, and enter the value read into H230 to H235.. The torque
setpoint display is smoothed using H265; basic setting 0.5 s.
− The measured result should only be evaluated after 10-20 seconds (Acceleration/ deceleration
completed)
Speed d307 Setting:

0% Select H230, so that the winder just starts to run, or comes to a
standstill by itself at low speeds
20 % Enter the value read at d331 into H231, resp. set H231 to reach
speed controller integral component < 2%.
- after the points for the friction characteristic have been entered, the calibration at various speeds
should be checked. After acceleration, the torque setpoint, monitored at d331, or the integral
component of the speed controler output should be ≤2%.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2.3 Inertia compensation (block diagram 8)

Note: Inertia compensation should be used for winders with indirect closed-loop tension control and
for direct closed-loop tension control with tension transducer, as long as the accelerating
torque cannot be neglected.
For closed-loop dancer controls, inertia compensation is generally not required.
General procedure for inertia compensation:
− the winder is operated without "material web".
− gearbox stage 1 is always selected.
− enter the actual diameter as setting value and select using H089, activate the setting command
(H024=4) and check using d310.
− operate the winder in the closed-loop speed controlled mode
1) - if possible use the central machine ramp function generator ( Run mode, Tension controller
OFF)
- then select H220 also corresponding to the winder accelerating time
- during acceleration, observe d302, if necessary adjust H272 and H223.
- during acceleration, a stable positive value should be displayed on d302.
- during deceleration, a stable negative value should be displayed on d302.
− In case of external dv/dt, select the source using H077 and H226. The setting of H220 is not
required in this case.
2) - e.g. by selecting local operation and local inching forwards. The required inching setpoint is
entered using H143. Using H146=0, local closed-loop speed controlled operation is selected.
- enter a ramp-up time at H161, which roughly corresponds to the winder accelerating time.
- then select H220 also corresponding to the winder accelerating time
- a ramp-up function is started by activating the inching command, and the torque setpoint is
monitored during acceleration using d331. The torque setpoint average is generated in the interval
between 10 and 90% of the entered setpoint.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2.3.1 Constant moment of inertia, H228

It is recommended that the fixed moment of inertia according to Section 5.2.1 is calculated.
H228 is determined by accelerating along a defined ramp:
- disable the influence of the variable moment of inertia using H227=0%.
- insert a mandrel, set the core diameter (H024=4) and check at d310.
- 1) operate the winder in the closed-loop speed controlled mode, if possible use the central machine
ramp function generator ( Run mode, Tension controller OFF).
During acceleration, observe the integral component of the speed controler output.
Set H228 to reach speed controller integral component < 2%.
- repeat the measurement, the value displayed at d331 must now be very low (< 2%).
- 2) enter a setpoint with H143 and activate the command "local inching forwards"
- read-out d331 in the range from 10-90% of the setpoint.
- enter the monitored average value at H228; if H161 and H220 are parameterized differently, the
ratio of H161 to H264 must be taken into account, refer to Section 5.2.1.
This method is to use only if the case 1) is not possible. With method 2) H228 can be set, but a
checking of the setting is not possible, the dv/dt signal is not generated in local mode.
Note: Different values at d331 at ramp-up and ramp-down indicate a friction component which is
not precisely compensated.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2.3.2 Variable moment of inertia, H227

Also here, it is recommended that parameter H227 is first calculated, corresponding to Section 5.2.2. For
gearboxes with high ratios, frequently, the variable moment of inertia component can be neglected.
Determine H227 by accelerating along a defined ramp:
- insert, if possible, a full roll, set the diameter to the actual value, and check at d310. Enter the web
width (H079, if possible 100%), and the material web density (H224, if possible 100%).
- 1) operate the winder in the closed-loop speed controlled mode, if possible use the central machine
ramp function generator ( Run mode, Tension controller OFF).
During acceleration, observe the integral component of the speed controler output.
Set H227 to reach speed controller integral component < 2%.
- repeat the measurement, the value displayed at d331 must now be very low (< 2%).
- 2) enter a setpoint using H143 and activate the command "local inching forwards".
- read-off d331 in the range from 10-90% of the setpoint.
- enter the monitored average value at H227; if H161 and H220 are parameterized differently, the
ratio between H161 and H220 must be taken into account.
This method is to use only if the case 1) is not possible. With method 2) H228 can be set, but a
checking of the setting is not possible, the dv/dt signal is not generated in local mode.
A changeover to gearbox stage 2 is taken into account when calculating the variable moment of inertia.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2.4 Setting the speed control Kp adaption

The speed controller proportional gain should generally be adapted to the variable moment of inertia;
For a Dmax/Dmin ratio > 3 to 4, it is absolutely necessary to commission the kp adaption for a good
winding characteristics and fast start-up.
Information on the procedure:

Using the ”Set diameter” and the ”Diameter setting value” commands, refer to Sheet 9 of the Block
diagram, enter the diameter, which corresponds, as percentage, to the diameter of the full coil or roll at
the machine, and which is to be optimized using the speed controller. Generally, this is the mandrel
diameter and the maximum diameter (the largest possible diameter).
Always check the diameter which you have entered, at d310 and keep your eye on it!
The adaption is realized using a polygon characteristic with 2 points, which can be parameterized. The
variable moment of inertia is the characteristic input parameter, and the start- and endpoints of the
adaption must be entered with the appropriate gain factors Kpmin and Kpmax.
8.2.4.1 Setting for CUVC and CUMC

H150=0%; H152=199,99%; H151=0 and H153=19,99. This setting means that the variable moment of
inertia, calculated on Sheet 9 of the Block diagram, is directly transferred to the basic drive. There, the
effective kp for the speed controller is determined from a polygon characteristic.
Procedure, refer to Block diagram CUVCand CUMC (Kompendium), Sheet 360:
− P233=0%; P234=100%
− With an empty (smallest) mandrel, the speed controller kp is optimized using parameter P235 as
usual.
− At the largest possible roll diameter, web width and specific weight, re-optimize the speed controller
using P236.
The effective kp can be read at parameters r237, basic drive.
8.2.4.2 Setting for CU2 and CU3

Also refer to the Block diagram, Sheet 6.
− Enter H151=1; H150=0; H152=100%
− With an empty (smallest) mandrel, the speed controller kp is optimized as usual using parameter P225
(CU2) and P537 (technology controller CU3).
− At the largest possible roll diameter, web width and specific weight, re-optimize the speed controller
using H153.
The effective kp can be read at parameter r228, CU2 or r547, CU3.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2.5 Setting closed-loop tension,dancer roll posit. cntrl. (block diagrs.7,8)

For tension measurement via tension transducer:
- check the control sense corresponding to the recommended configurations. If the polarity is
incorrect, either changeover the signals at the analog input, or change the polarity using a multiplier
function.
- a possible tension transducer offset can be compensated with H179=1. By activating the "hold
diameter" control signal, with the closed-loop tension control switched-out, the instantaneous
tension actual value is stored, and is then subsequently subtracted as offset.
- the maximum input voltage at the analog input for the tension actual value may not exceed 9 V.
The input must be calibrated using the appropriate multiplier, so that the maximum value
corresponds to 100%, monitoring parameter d311.
- select the tension setpoint with H081, calibrate to 100% at the maximum tension setpoint.
A supplementary tension setpoint can be selected using H083 and it is added after the ramp-
function generator for the main setpoint. Monitoring parameter for the total setpoint d304.
- parameterize the ramp-function generator for the tension setpoint with H175 and H176.
e.g.: tension actual value at X5, terminals 501,502, maximum value -9 V

Calibration: -9V corresp. to 100% ⇒ H054 = 5V / -9V = -55.5%
For the closed-loop dancer roll position control:
- enter a fixed position setpoint at H080 with H081=31; the setpoint corresponds to the dancer roll
position actual value when it is the center position. When using the winding hardness characteristic
as output signal for a dancer roll control, the main setpoint is isolated with H244=1 and the position
setpoint entered via the supplementary setpoint with H082 and H083
- the analog input voltage range of the dancer roll position is normalized to 100% at the maximum
voltage.
e.g.: 10 V voltage range, dancer roll center position voltage 5 V, actual value X5,
terminals 503,504 =0V for the dancer roll at the bottom and 10 V for the dancer roll at the top.
A winder is running too fast, if the actual value is >5 V, and is too slow for actual values <5 V;
this is vice versa for unwind stands.
The position setpoint H080 is set to 50%, the analog input normalization with H056, also to
50%.
- the winding hardness characteristic should be disabled with H206=1.
- A tension precontrol function can be implemented for closed-loop dancer roll controls via the torque
limits (H203=2). The main tension setpoint is multiplied by the diameter and H190 and added to the
controller output. Alternatively, precontrol can also be implemented if the web tension is neither
entered nor known. However, a pressure actual value is required from the dancer roll which is input
via anlaog input 5. In this case adaption factor H190 must be negative.
- the D component for the position actual value should be enabled with H174=0; it is always required
for the closed-loop dancer roll position control, to prevent the dancer roll from oscillating. When
optimizing the D component, starting from the pre-setting, H173 is preferably changed, and when
the correct setting is achieved, the dancer roll must remain steady, excluding of course mechanical
effects.
Checking the control sense:

Manual
8 Commissioning
- operate the system at a low web speed.
- set the correct diameter and enable the closed-loop tension control.
- check the control sense according to the following table
Tension transducer Dancer roll Winder Unwind stand

Actual val. > setpoint - v↓ v↑
Actual val. < setpoint - v↑ v↓
- top 1) v↓ v↑
- bottom 1) v↑ v↓
Dancer roll top position Winder

Dancer roll
Center position
Dancer roll bottom position P

M
P
U
T
1) Dancer roll positions for the closed-loop dancer position control
8.2.6 Tension controller setting, Kp adaption

It is necessary to adapt the variable moment of inertia for closed-loop current limiting control with direct
tension measurement; operating modes, H203=1,2.
For indirect closed-loop tension controls (H203=0), neither adaption is required nor setting of the tension
controller.
For closed-loop speed correction control (H203=3,5) adaption may not be set; in this case, for
H207=100%, the Kp value of H197 is valid for the complete range.
The characteristic should be parameterized analog to that described in Section 8.2.4.
The tension controller is optimized using the standard technique, e.g. by injecting a low supplementary
tension setpoint, and monitoring the speed actual value. A damped stabilization sequence must always be
manifested. When other quantities are input as step function, e.g., speed setpoint, the results must be the
same.
Optimization should be realized for several different diameters.

Experience values for the controller setting:
Kp for the closed-loop speed correction control: 0.1 - 0.3
Kp for the closed-loop current limiting control and Dmin: 0.1 - 0.3
TN for the closed-loop current limiting control 0.5 - 1 s
Note: For closed-loop speed correction control, under standard operating conditions, the tension
controller output is approximately 0%, and for closed-loop current limiting control, depending
on the friction equalization, the output fluctuates between the torque setpoint and 0%.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2.7 Setting the saturation setpoint H145

- for closed-loop speed correction control, H145=0%
- current limiting control, winder (H203 ≤ 2), also refer to Section 5.9:
For winder stands, it is favorable if the bias H145 = +3 ... +10%. The value should be selected, so
that the speed controller is always at is limit under normal operating conditions. The speed
controller only leaves its limit if the material web breaks so that the winder is prevented from
accelerating up to excessive speeds.
- current limiting control, unwinder (H203 ≤ 2), also refer to Section 5.9:
For unwind stands, it is favorable if the bias H145 = -3 ... -10%. The value should be selected, so
that the speed controller is always at is limit under normal operating conditions. By web break,the
drive will slowly rotates backwards.
8.2.8 Setting the braking characteristic H256-259

The braking characteristic is used to shutdown the drive without overshoot at fast stop (OFF3). In this
case, the braking current is limited to a maximum value (H259). If the drive speed falls below a specific
speed (H258), the braking torque is reduced, until it has reached a lower value (H257) at an additional
speed (H256).
This allows a high braking torque to be generated but still allows a clean shutdown in the vicinity of zero
speed.
Variable moments of inertia, associated with winder drives, are handled by setting the fast stop-
deceleration time (P466 in the basic drive converter) so that the drive still does not approach the torque
limit at approximately 50% diameter and the drive is cleanly shutdown via the closed-loop speed control.
At higher diameters and moments of inertia, the braking characteristic becomes effective and the braking
time is appropriately increased.
If the function is not required, 199% can be entered in H257 and H259.

Manual
8 Commissioning
8.2.9 Replacing peer to peer by SIMOLINK

In a multi-motor drive group with Compact Plus units, peer to peer communications is not possible,
whereby it is possible to replace the peer to peer functionality using SIMOLINK on the CUVC and CUMC
modules.
Using the transfer of the speed- and ratio setpoint via SIMOLINK and the operating setpoint and output of
the technology controller, we will briefly see how the basic drive and T300 are to be parameterized. The
SIMOLINK interface is inserted in slot A (upper slot). The example is the same for CUVC and CUMC. It is
assumed, that SIMOLINK was already commissioned in accordance with the basic drive Instruction
Manual (Compendium).
Setpoints sent from SIMOLINK to the T300 via the basic drive:
• Receive SIMOLINK at the basic drive:
The speed setpoint is available at connector K7001
The dv/dt signal is available at connector K7002.
• Transfer to T300, refer to function diagram, Sheet 3:
P734.11=7001: The speed setpoint is available at select value 1 from CU.
P734.12=7002: The dv/dt signal is available at select value 2 from CU.
• Connect the setpoints on the T300, refer to function diagram, Sheet 11:
H069 = 13, source web speed setpoint
H077 = 14, source external dv/dt
(Actual) values from the T300 to SIMOLINK via the basic drive:
• Select the values on the T300, refer to function diagram, Sheet 15:
As source select value 1, the tension actual value is available: H123 = 10
As source select value 2, the actual diameter value is available: H124 = 9
• Receiving the values on the basic drive:
The tension actual value is available at K3011.
The actual diameter value is available at K3012.
• Connect on SIMOLINK, words 1 and 2:
P751.01=3011
P751.02=3012.

Manual
9 Diagnostic LED, Alarms, Faults

9.1 Diagnostic LED on T300
3 diagnostic LED are provided on T300:
Red LED
Flashes if the software of the T300 is being executed.
This LED always has to flash, even for CU2,CU3 if T300 is not yet "addressed" in the basic drive.
No flashing, fault cause: Remedy

Defective T300 (or LED) Replace T300
T300 incorrectly or not completely inserted Insert T300 in the correct (right side!) slot and
screw into place
Defective LBA Replace LBA
Memory module incorrectly inserted or missing Correctly insert the memory module
Defective, non-programmed memory module or replace memory module
incorrect module, refer to the information below
Yellow LED
Flashes if T300 is communicating with the basic drive converter (CU). If red LED is flashing, but not
yellow, then one of the following faults/errors may be present:

Defective T300 (Dual-Port-RAM) Replace T300
CUVC, CUMC: the basic drive did not recognize T300 incorrectly or not completely inserted
the T300 CUVC, CUMC: Replace T300 or CUVC, CUMC
CU2, CU3: the basic drive did not recognize the CU2, CU3: Log-on T300, refer to Section 7 or
T300 replace T300 or CU2, CU3
Incorrect slot for T300 and communication board Insert T300 in the slot 2, (right side slot)
Green LED
Flashes if T300 is communicating with the communications board (e.g. CBP/CB1, SCB1/SCB2).
(CU2,CU3: LED flashes even if the Com. Board is not logged-on (P91))
If red LED is flashing (maybe also yellow), but green not, then one of the following faults/errors may be
present:

Defective T300 (Dual-Port-RAM) Replace T300
Communications board incorrectly or not Check slots
completely inserted Insert communication board in the slot 3, (middle
slot)
Communications board failed Replace communications board
Note: The identification for the MS320 memory module is:

- the order number on printed-circuit board (see sec. 1.2.1 )
- the label with „MS320 Vx.y“ on one of the components.

Manual
9.2 T300 Faults and alarms

Refere also to Section 4.23
Display parameter d337 : Alarms from T300

Alarm mask H011 : Bitwise coding of the alarms
Bit 0: Overspeed, positive 1 = active ⇒ A097 (settings using H001)

Bit 1: Overspeed, negative 1 = active ⇒ A098 (settings using H002)
Bit 2: Overcurrent, positive 1= active ⇒ A099 (settings using H003)
Bit 3: Overcurrent, negative 1 = active ⇒ A100 (settings using H004)
Bit 4: Drive stalled 1 = active ⇒ A101 (settings using H007, H008, H009, H010)
Bit 5: Receive, CU faulted 1 = active ⇒ A102
Bit 6: Receive, CB faulted 1 = active ⇒ A103
Bit 7: Receive, PTP faulted 1 = active ⇒ A104
Bit 8 - 15 = 0
Display parameter d338 : Faults from T300

Alarm mask H012 : Bitwise coding of the faults
Bit 0: Overspeed, positive 1 = active ⇒ F116 (settings using H001)

Bit 1: Overspeed, negative 1 = active ⇒ F117 (settings using H002)
Bit 2: Overcurrent, positive 1 = active ⇒ F118 (settings using H003)
Bit 3: Overcurrent, negative 1 = active ⇒ F119 (settings using H004)
Bit 4: Drive stalled 1 = active ⇒ F120 (settings using H007, H008, H009, H010)
Bit 5: Receive, CU faulted 1 = active ⇒ F121
Bit 6: Receive, CB faulted 1 = active ⇒ F122
Bit 7: Receive, PTP faulted 1 = active ⇒ F123
Bit 8 - 15 = 0

Manual
9.3 Operation without communications board (CB1/CBP,

SCB1/SCB2)
This factory setting assumes a communication board at slot 3 (slot in the middle).
If there is no communications board, H011 and H012 had to be adjusted accordingly, otherwise
alarm A103 and
fault F122 ocurr
Masking of this alarmand fault by parameterizing (all others are still active):
H011=AF
H012=AF
Note: This masking is not allowed while using a communications board!
9.4 Operation without Peer-to-Peer

This factory setting assumes a peer-to-peer coupling.
If there is no peer-to-peer using, H006=0 has to be adjusted. Otherwise
alarm A104 and
fault F123
ocurr if bit 7 at H011 and H012 is set.
Masking of this alarmand fault by parameterizing (all others are still active):
H011=AF
H012=AF
Note: Masking by setting bit7 at H012 or setting H006=0 is not allowed while using peer-to-peer!
9.5 Alarms and Faults of the winder

The generated alarms (A097 - A104) and faults (F116 - F123) are described at parameters H011 and
H012.
9.6 Masking of alarms and faults

Alarms and faults are coded with bits at H011 and H012.
They are enabled by setting (=1) the appropriate bits and they are masked by resetting them.
Example:
Operation without communications board and without peer-to-peer:
Reset bit6 and bit7 at H011, H012:

bit: 76543210
value: 00111111
This results in the following parameter values:
H011=H012= 3F

Manual
9.7 Frequently occurring faults/errors and the associated counter-

measures:
The errors/faults described are initially valid for winders and unwinders and all of the associated operating
modes.
The "winder" term in this Section stands for winders and unwinders without going into any more detail.
Fault F122 occurs:
1) Fault: Incorrect parameterization.

Counter-measure: Refer to Section 9.2.
2) Fault: In word 1 of the PROFIBUS (main control word) all bits = 0.

Counter-measure: Set a bit (preferably bit 10) to 1.
The calculated diameter and the diameter measured at the machine, do not correspond:
Note: Deviations with an order magnitude ≤ ±2% do not have a negative impact on the closed-loop control
function.
1) Fault: Incorrect adjustment

Counter-measure: Check the diameter- and speed adjustment, refer to Section 4.20, speed
actual value calibration.
2) Fault: The web speed is not impressed at the clamping location, refer to e. g. Fig. 5.10.
The result is that the web speed actual value and setpoint do not correspond.
This can occur, depending on the operating status of the winder, and also as a
function of the diameter.
Counter-measure: Check the function of the clamping location. This can be realized
e. g. using mechanical measures or by modifying the tension levels before and
after the clamping position: The tensions before and after the clamping location
frequently have the same order of magnitude.
3) Fault: The clamping location receives a different speed setpoint than the winder.
Counter-measure: Enter the correct setpoint.
The winding tension is too low, the web becomes slack.
1) Fault: A tension setpoint is entered, which is either too low or is not present at all.
Counter-measure: Increase the tension.
2) Fault: Inertia compensation is either not set or incorrectly set.

Note: This fault generally only occurs with indirect tension control or tension control
with tension measuring transducer.
Counter-measure: Refer to Section 8.2.3
3) Fault: Diameter calculation is incorrect.

Counter-measure: Refer above, "the calculated diameter and that measured at the machine do not
correspond".
4) Fault: For H203 = 0, 1 or 2, the bias is incorrectly set with H145.

Counter-measure: Select H145 with the correct polarity, if required, increase the absolute value of
the over-control value, refer to Section 5.9.
5) Fault: The dancer roll contact pressure is too low:

Counter-measure: Increase the contact pressure (pneumatic system).

Manual
Note:
If the tension is too low but the tension setpoint is adequate, then frequently, the following can be
observed as a function of H203:
H203 = 0, 1 or 2:
The absolute value of d313 (Block diagram Sheet 8, column 8) is not equal to the speed controller
output value (torque setpoint) after run-up has been completed, without taking into account friction
compensation; refer to the relevant equipment Instruction Manual
H203 ≥ 3:
d319 (Block diagram Sheet 8, column 8) is at the tension controller limit, refer to H195,
if H194 is 0 or 1.
6) Fault: The diameter actual value "drifts away" for extremely fast speed changes
(e. g. winder is linked to the overall process):
Counter-measure: Set the change time of the diameter computer (H239, Sheet 8) as high as
the application permits it.
Parameter changes have no effect:
Fault: Example: H212, H214, H217 are changed, no effect can be seen.
Counter-measure: For parameters, which are designated with "init" in the parameter list, the
drive converter must be switched into the no-voltage condition before the parameter
change becomes effective.
Comment: We would also like to refer, in this circumstance, to the Block diagrams. In this case,
it exclusively involves parameters H212 to H215, H217, H218 as well as H006, H245,
H247 and H248.
Peer to peer does not transfer any values:
1) Fault: The baud rate or the number of words to be transferred do not coincide between
the coupling partners.
Counter-measure: Set the baud rate for the sender and receiver to the same value as well as the
same number of send- and receive words.
2) Fault: For the peer to peer nodes, the interconnection of the setpoint/actual values is
erroneous.
Remedy: Correct the interconnection.
There is no data transfer established between the basic drive and the T300:
1) Fault: The parameterization is either incorrect or not complete.

Counter-measure: Check that the parameterization instructions in Section 7 were accurately
followed , and if required, correct appropriately.
2) Fault: The drive is switched to BICO data set 2 or reserve (P590).

Counter-measure: Establish BICO data set 1 or the basic setting, refer to
visualization parameter r012.

Manual
Control characteristics are not satisfactory:
1) Fault: Basic drive has not been correctly optimized.

Counter-measure: Commission the basic drive according to the Instruction Manual, and, if necessary,
execute an optimization run for the closed-loop torque control.
Comment: No reasonable winding operation is possible without a perfectly optimized closed-
loop torque control.
2) Fault: The drive behavior appears to be dependent on the diameter:

Counter-measure: For diameter ratios ≥ 3 to 4 commission the kp adaptation according to Section
4.13.1 Kp adaptation and 8.2.4 and 8.2.6.
Information on the closed-loop control type:
H203 = 0, 1 or 2: Commission the Kp adaptation for the closed-loop speed- and
tension controller.
H203 ≥ 3: Only commission the Kp adaptation for the speed controller.
3) Fault: General controller optimization is not O.K. for H203 ≥ 3, speed correction control:
Counter-measure: Starting from the pre-setting, first optimize the speed controller as usual;
rise times of between 40 and 200ms can be expected.
Then optimize the tension controller accordingly (generally as P controller, refer to
H196). The rise times, referred to the speed controller, are four times longer.
4) Fault: General controller optimization is not O.K. for H203 ≤ 2, closed-loop tension control
via the torque limits:
Counter-measure: The tension controller must first be switched as a PI controller, H196 = 0.
Start to optimize with the pre-set values.
5) Fault: The dancer roll oscillates with the closed-loop dancer position control:
The dancer roll oscillates significantly around the dancer roll zero point, and
operation is not possible.
Counter-measure: Commission the D component, H173 = 0, start to optimize with the pre-setting
of H172.
In extremely seldom cases, it may be necessary to increase the damping of the
dancer roll pneumatic system.
Commissioning with SIMOVIS does not work
Comment: It is assumed, that the H- and the d parameters are displayed on the PMU
and that the SIMOVIS operate perfectly with the basic drive.
1) Fault: The parameters of the T300 are not displayed, or the technological part
of SIMOVIS cannot be called-up.
Counter-measure: Execute the teach function according to the SIMOVIS Instruction Manual.
2) Fault: T300 parameters are displayed, but they cannot be changed or if they can only be
changed to 0.
Remedy: Check the parameterization of SIMOVIS and the basic drive, especially the PKW length.
This must be 127. Comment: All of the SIMOVIS functions are checked-out in the
factory setting of SIMOVIS and the basic drive.

Manual
10 SIMADYN D functions
10.1 STRUC G graphic diagram display
10.1.1 Sheet structure
7) Sheet columns 1...8
5) Source information 5) Destination information

(border panel) (border panel)
7) Sheet sub-divisions A...F

(not used)
4) Function blocks
connections and
sheet comments 6) Fields with comments
and connector attributes
of the function blocks
3) Copyright 2) STRUC documentation

lines
1) Text field
Fig. 10.1.1: Sheet structure for STRUC G
Explanation to Fig. 11.1.1:

1) Text field
The text field is laid out according to DIN 6771, Part 5.
2) STRUC documentation line
Information regarding the version, compiler times, libraries and STRUC configuring levels.
3) Field for copyright and addition documentation information.
4) Field for function blocks, connections and sheet comments
The individual function blocks with their connections, constants and signal designators as well as
the sheet comments are located here.
5) Source- and target information
Function package connections ($ quantities), are specified here with their source- and target
function packages and the associated system IDs. Hardware- and communication connections are
also entered here.
6) Field for comments and connector attributes of the function blocks
The comments in the border strip signals, the function block comments (header line in STRUC L),
the connector attributes (MIN, MAX, SCAL, ...) and the connector comments are entered in this
four-section field.
7) Sheet columns
The display division in the X-axis is subdivided into sections 1 to 8. The displayed, but unused Y
axis runs from left to right, from A to F. The information is referred to the sheet columns.

Manual
10.1.2 Structure and display of a function block

There is a graphic function symbol for every function block which can be used to document the function
block and the user-specific features. In addition to the input- and output signal connections, there are also
signal values specified and some of the connector attributes, which are significant for the sequence and
embedding the function block in the function package. The information is described in the Section,
connector supply.
Function block name Mark ("B" if the block is Execution sequence

inhibited for service)
Star, if a block comment Sampling time

is available
Function block-
*
H S W STRUC L line number
type (possible block of the listing
library code .A,.B,.C)
X1 N2 N2 Y
Reference point o
X2 B1 Z
Circle symbol
for type change-
* I B1
Connector designator
over
Connector type
Star, if additional
connector information Graphics
is available
Fig. 10.1.2: Function block layout
10.1.3 Connector supply for the function blocks

The connectors are used to supply the function blocks with input information and output the results to
other function blocks or peripheral boards.
The connectors are coded in the function blocks via the connector type and the connector designation.
The connectors are supplied with signal connections, signal values (constants), signal designators,
attributes (MIN, MAX, SCAL, Pn ≡ PAR = n, Mn ≡ MES=n, DATX, INIT, LOG0, LOG1) and comments.
As not all of this information can be located in the graphics section, some information is located in the
comments fields below the graphic field. A star at the connector indicates that this information is available.
10.1.4 Information in the function package

1 Local sheet connections, as line, or letter (A..Z) within a sheet.
2 Internal function package connections to/from another sheet with source/target block,
connector, sheet, column. If there is no space at the connector for a target- or source information,
or if several target infos are available, then the border strip is used.
3 External function package connections, with connection name, bus access, processor, function
package, system ID, sheet, column.

Manual
Fig. 10.1.4.a: Signal connection types
Function package connections ($ quantities) provide signal transfer paths between technological function
units in which the individual function packages are realized.
Connection name Additional local Bus accesss type

processor access
$REGOUT PN T1C
1FP-STEUER =.W1/2.1 System ID, abbreviated/sheet and column No.
2FP-OUTPUT
Lefthand =DB34.W30/2.1 System ID, complete/sheet and column No.
boundary
Processor Function package No. or

number master program name
Fig.: 10.1.4.b: Function package connection structure

Manual
10.2 Monitor - operator control
The technology board is generally parameterized using the basic service program, included in the scope
of supply (operator control - and installation instructions are included with the program). This program can
run on any standard PC 1) or PG 1). and allows access to all technology parameters. The connection is
established through the PC serial interface (V24, 0-modem-cable) or PG with the X01 serial interface on
the PT board.
The basic service program uses the "symbolic SIMADYN D monitor" configured on the PT board. This
controls the accesses to the technology parameters and all inputs and outputs of the function blocks, and
provides the values to the serial interface or retrieves values from the serial interface. In addition to the
program supplied with it, the monitor can be controlled with the following programs:
Program PC / PG type
Start-up program PG730, PG750
(CPM emulation) DOS-PC
SIMOVIS-SIMADYN service PG750, DOS-PC 1)
Telemaster service (Basic version) PG750, DOS-PC
1) MS-DOS ≥ 5.0, processor ≥ 80386, free memory under DOS: > 580 kbyte, VGA color monitor
Note:
Generally, the monitor is only ready, if the basic converter is in the operator control status. The monitor
and the above specified programs are disabled in the initialized and start-up statuses.
10.2.1 Start-up using a start-up program
The technology parameters can be changed and displayed with any program, which can address the
SIMADYN D monitor. A technology parameter is accessed through a specific pathname. The technology
parameter pathnames are specified in the parameter list. The pathname consists of the processor
number (always 1 for a standard software package), the function package name, the function block name
and the connector designator:
1FP-FPNAME.FBNAME.connector designator
Examples:
a) Change parameter TP_331, display speed controller output, smoothed:

- Read-out the path name from the parameter list: = FP-IQ2.D31.Y
- Path name: 1 FP - IQ2.D31.Y
b) Change parameter TP_153, speed controller integral action time:

- Read-out the pathname from the parameter list: = FP-SREF.NC120.X2
- Path name: 1 FP - SREF.NC120.X2
The detailed handling is described in the Instruction Manual or the User Manual of the appropriate
program.

Manual
11 Others
11 Others
11.1 Terminology/abbreviations
Üp n Block diagram, Page n
AG Automation unit
DUST Data transfer control
FB Function block
FP Function package (function blocks configured to provide a complete function)
GG Basic converter
MP Master program (defines the hardware and software configuration)
n Speed
n_act Speed actual value
n_set Speed setpoint
PG Programming unit (e.g. PG685, PG730, PG750)
PKW Parameter ID/value
PNU Parameter number
PT Technology board
T Torque
TA Sampling time
dxxx Technology parameter number xxx, cannot be changed
Hxxx Technology parameter number xxx, can be changed

Manual
11 Others
11.2 Literature
/1/ Documentation SIMADYN D STRUC G/L/PT

6DD1981-1AA2 German
6DD1981-1AB2 English
/2/ Recommendations for EMC-proof cabinet design with SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-8CE0
( See also Kompendium CUVC, CUMC )
/1/ = usefull, e.g. when modifying the standard software package

/2/ = general information
Ordering locations:
/1/ /2/
SIEMENS AG SIEMENS AG
PSWER A&D DS A P1
Postfach 3269 Postfach 3269
91050 Erlangen 91050 ERLANGEN

Manual
12 Changes
12 Changes
Version 1.0: 30.09.94 first edition
The functions of the standard software package correspond to those of the standard
software package SW30, version 1.0 for 6RA24/6SE12:
The following changes/functional expansions were made:
- Conversion to STRUC V4.2
- Board T300 is used
- Peer-to-peer protocol with extended setpoint input
Further
- New braking characteristic for fast stop
- New tension pre-control for closed-loop dancer role control
- New automatic density correction
- Extended output multiplexer for analog select outputs and automation actual values
- Improved length measurement and length stop functions
- New sheet thickness calculation
- New tachometer function (tachometer applied to the material web)
Version 1.1: 31.07.95

The following changes/expanded functionality were made:
- Peer-to-peer was improved with extended setpoint for load distribution
- Analog inputs 3 and 4 are smoothed (PT1)
- Overview diagram of the control- and status words
- Alternative power-up command via binary input input, selectable for instantaneous
inching (no delay)
- Parameter list has been supplemented
- Dead-zone block for inertia compensation
Version 1.2: 30.09.95

Improving of splice, rewinding
Version 1.30: 06.03.96

- H280 new
- Transmitting of selectable values for Peer-to-Peer (H015-H019)
- d362 deleted
- Improvement or parameter handling with STRUC 4.2.3,
especially for using of SIMOVIS
Version 1.40: 25.02.97

- H205 setting changed to 2000 ms
- H273, H274, H275 new
- Web breakage detector: function for indirect tension control changed, see block
diagram page 7.
- Conversion to STRUC 4.2.4.
Version 1.50: 22.03.99

- Improving of reset signal lengh counter
- Neu STRUC V4.2.4 Library FBSLT1 with version 990204V420

Manual
12 Changes

Manual
13 Short parameter list

Explanation:
dxxx Display parameters Type dim. A

Hxxx Changeable parameters Type dim. Value
H001 Overspeed - positive limit N2 % 120

H002 Overspeed - negative limit N2 % -120
H003 Overcurrent - positive limit N2 % 120
H004 Overcurrent - negative limit N2 % -120
H005 Delay time, communications PT-AG INIT T2 s 20
H006 Delay time, communications PT-AG ZYKLI T2 ms 100
H007 Anti-stall protection, threshold nact N2 % 2
H008 Anti-stall protection, threshold Iact N2 % 10
H009 Anti-stall protection, threshold control difference N2 % 50

H010 Anti-stall protection, response time T2 ms 500
H011 Alarm mask O2 255
H012 Fault mask O2 255
H013 Polarity, local stop command B1 0
H014 Long inching time T2 s 10
H015 Source transmit word 1 Peer O2 15
H020 Quelle Steuerwort PTP O2 5
H021 Source, system start B1 0
H022 Source, tension controller on B1 0
H023 Source, inhibit tension controller B1 0
H024 Source, set diameter B1 0
H025 Source, inject supplementary setpoint B1 0
H026 Source, local positioning B1 0
H027 Source, local operator control B1 0
H028 Source, local stop B1 0
H029 Source, raise motorized potentiometer 2 O2 9
H030 Source, raise motorized potentiometer 1 O2 9
H031 Source, lower motorized potentiometer 2 O2 9
H032 Source, lower motorized potentiometer 1 O2 9

Manual
H033 Source, hold diameter O2 9

H034 Source, speed setpoint, set stop O2 9
H035 Source, winding from below O2 9
H036 Source, accept setpoint A O2 9
H037 Source, accept setpoint B O2 9
H038 Source, local inching forwards O2 9
H039 Source, local crawl O2 9
H040 Source, local inching reverse O2 9
H041 Source, maneuver O2 9
H042 Source, gearbox stage 2 O2 9
H043 Source, winder O2 9
H044 Source, saturation setpoint polarity O2 9
H045 Source, off1/on O2 9
H046 Source, inhibit ramp-function generator O2 9
H047 Source, off2 O2 8
H048 Source, off3 O2 8
H049 Source, ramp-function generator stop O2 9
H050 Source, enable setpoint O2 9
H051 Source, standstill tension on O2 9
H052 Source, local run O2 9
H053 Source, reset length computer O2 9
H054 Adaption, analog input 1 N2 % 50
H055 Offset, analog input 1 N2 % 0
H057 Offset analog input 2 N2 % 0
H068 Speed setpoint N2 % 0
H069 Source, speed setpoint O2 11
H070 Web speed compensation N2 % 0
H071 Source, web speed compensation O2 11
H072 Supplementary speed setpoint N2 % 0

Manual
H073 Source, Supplementary speed setpoint O2 11

H074 Setpoint, local operation N2 % 0
H075 Source, setpoint local operation O2 11
H076 External dv/dt N2 % 0
H077 Source, external dv/dt O2 11
H078 Web width N2 % 100
H079 Source, web width O2 11
H080 Tension setpoint N2 % 0
H081 Source, tension setpoint O2 11
H082 Supplementary tension setpoint N2 % 0
H083 Source, supplementary tension setpoint O2 11
H084 Tension actual value N2 % 0
H085 Source, tension actual value O2 11
H086 Max. tension reduction N2 % 0
H087 Source, max. tension reduction O2 11
H088 Diameter setting value N2 % 10
H089 Source, diameter setting value O2 11
H090 Setpoint positioning N2 % 0
H091 Source, setpoint positioning O2 11
H092 Source, speed actual value O2 7
H094 Source, external web speed actual value O2 12
H095 Setpoint A N2 % 0
H096 Source, setpoint A O2 11
H097 Analog output 1, speed actual value offset N2 % 0
H098 Analog output 1, speed actual value gain E2 2
H099 Analog output 2, diameter actual value offset N2 % 0
H100 Analog output 2, diameter actual value gain E2 2
H101 Analog output 3, offset N2 % 0
H102 Analog output 3, gain E2 2
H103 Analog output 4, offset N2 % 0
H104 Analog output 4, gain E2 2
H105 Source select value analog output 3 O2 0
H106 Source select value analog output 4 O2 0
H107 Source, input value O2 0
H108 Source, comparison value O2 0
H109 Adaption, input value O2 0
H110 Smoothing, input value R2 s 0.5
H111 Adaption, comparison value O2 0
H112 Interval limit N2 % 0
H113 Hysteresis N2 % 0

Manual
H114 Select, output signal O2 0

H115 Source, input value O2 0
H116 Source, comparison value O2 0
H117 Adaption, input value O2 0
H118 Smoothing, input value R2 s 0.5
H119 Adaption, comparison value O2 0
H120 Interval limit N2 % 0
H121 Hysteresis N2 % 0
H122 Select, output signal O2 0
H123 Source, actual value 1 at CB O2 0
H127 Source, select value, analog output 3 O2 0
H128 Source, select value, analog output 4 O2 0
H129 Source, alternative on command O2 8
H130 Setpoint B N2 % 0
H131 Upper limit N2 % 110
H132 Lower limit N2 % 0
H133 Ramp-up time R2 s 30
H134 Ramp-down time R2 s 30
H135 Rounding-off at run-up R2 s 3
H136 Rounding-off at run-down R2 s 3
H137 Norm. web speed compensation N2 % 100
H138 Ratio, gearbox stage 2 N2 % 100
H139 Normalization, web speed N2 % 100
H140 Maneuvering setpoint N2 % 100
H141 Influence, closed-loop tension control N2 % 100
H142 Setpoint, local crawl N2 % 10
H143 Setpoint, local inching forwards N2 % 5
H144 Setpoint, local inching reverse N2 % -5
H145 Saturation setpoint N2 % 10
H146 Closed-loop speed control, local operation B1 0
H147 Torque limit, closed-loop speed control N2 % 20
H148 Time for reverse winding after splice T2 ms 10000
H149 Speed setpoint, reverse winding after splice N2 % 0
H150 Start of adaption N2 % 0
H151 Kp adaption factor, min. N2 1
H152 End of adaption N2 % 100
H153 Kp adaption factor, max. N2 1

Manual
H154 Slave drive B1 0

H155 Smoothing web speed setpoint R2 ms 8
H157 Limit value for standstill identification N2 % 1%
H159 Delay standstill identification R2 ms 0
H160 Delete EEROM B1 0
H161 Ramp-up/-down time, ramp-function generator R2 s 20
H162 Smoothing, speed actual value for the control R2 ms 8
H163 Selection positioning reference value B1 0
H164 Smoothing, saturation setpoint R2 ms 8
H165 Smoothing, speed actual value R2 ms 20
H166 Enable, addition of local setpoints B1 0
H167 Smoothing, speed actual value to the basic conv. R2 ms 8
H168 Integrating time thickness correction R2 ms 200000
H172 Smoothing, tension actual value R2 ms 150
H173 Scaling, D component R2 s 0.1
H174 Inhibit, D component B1 1
H175 Ramp-up time, tension setpoint R2 s 10
H176 Ramp-down tiem, tension setpoint R2 s 10
H177 Inhibit tension setpoint B1 0
H178 Response at web break B1 0
H179 Enable, tension offset compensation B1 0
H180 Tension reduction 1 N2 % 100
H183 Diameter, start of tension reduction N2 % 100
H184 Diameter D1 N2 % 100
H187 Diameter D4, end of tension reduction N2 % 100
H188 Source, standstill tension B1 0
H189 Standstill tension N2 % 100
H191 Min. selection B1 0
H192 Smoothing, tension setpoint R2 s 0.3
H193 Min. value, speed-dep. tension controller limits N2 % 100
H194 Select, tension controller limits O2 1
H195 Adapt tension controller limits N2 % 20
H196 Inhibit, tension controller I components B1 0
H197 Min. tension controller Kp E2 0,3
H198 Max. tension controller Kp E2 0,3
H199 Integr. action time, closed-loop tension controller R2 s 1

Manual
H200 Adaption, setpoint pre-control N2 % 0

H201 Lower limit, web speed N2 % 100
H202 Influence, web speed N2 % 100
H203 Select closed-loop tension control technique O2 0
H204 Lower limit, web break sensing N2 % 5
H205 Delay, web break signal R2 s 1
H206 Select, winding hardness characteristic B1 0
H207 Start, tension controller adaption N2 % 0
H208 End of tension controller adaption N2 % 100
H209 Droop, tension controller N2 % 0
H210 Calibration, web speed N2 % 100
H211 Select, web tachometer B1 0
H212 Pulse number, axial tachometer O2 600
H213 Pulse number, web tachometer O2 600
H214 Rated speed, winder drive I2 RPM 1500
H215 Rated speed, measuring roll, web tachometer I2 RPM 1000
H216 Calculation interval, diameter computer R2 ms 320
H217 Selection encoder type sensing 1 V2 Hex 64
H218 Selection encoder type sensing 2 V2 Hex 4
H220 Scaling dv/dt R2 ms 1000
H221 Min. speed, diameter computer N2 % 1
H222 Core diameter N2 % 20
H224 Material density N2 % 100
H225 Fine adjustment, dv/dt N2 % 100
H226 Source, dv/dt B1 0
H227 Variable moment of inertia N2 % 0
H228 Constant moment of inertia N2 % 0
H230 Frictional torque at 0% speed N2 % 0
H236 Diameter change, monotone B1 0
H237 Feed-forward control with n2 N2 % 0
H238 Min. change time, diameter R2 s 50

H239 Pulse number, web tachometer N2 600
H240 Gearbox ratio, web tachometer N2 1
H241 Diameter, measuring roll web tachometer N2 mm 1527.9
H242 ramp-down rounding time for brake travel calc N2 s 6

Manual
H243 Smoothing, web width R2 s 1

H244 Tension setpoint disconnected B1 0
H245 Baud rate Peer (PTP)-protocol O2 6
H247 Number receive words PTP-protocol O2 5
H248 Number transmit words PTP-protocol O2 5
H249 Enable send PTP-protocol B1 0
H250 EEPROM key I2 0
H251 Sollwert A übernehmen B1 0
H251 Transfer setpoint A B1 0
H252 Transfer setpoint B B1 0
H253 Gearbox stage 2 B1 0
H254 Winder B1 0
H255 Saturation setpoint polarity B1 0
H256 Braking characteristic, speed setpoint 1 N2 % 0.1
H257 Reduced braking torque N2 % 0
H258 Braking characteristic, speed setpoint 2 N2 % 2
H259 Maximum braking torque N2 % 199
H260 Comparison value, limit value monitor 1 N2 % 100
H261 Comparison value, limit value montitor 2 N2 % 100
H262 Source length reference value O2 31
H263 Motorized potentiometer 2, fast change R2 ms 25000
H264 Motorized potentiometer 2, slow change R2 ms 100000
H265 Motorized potentiometer 1, fast change R2 ms 25000
H266 Motorized potentiometer 2, slow change R2 ms 100000
H267 Select, operating mode motorized potentiometer 1 B1 0
H268 Setpoint, ramp-function generator operation N2 % 100
H269 Ramp time, ramp-function generation operation R2 s 10
H270 Smoothing analog input X5C R2 ms 8
H271 Smoothing analog input X5D R2 ms 8
H272 Deadzone for dv/dt calc. N2 % 1
H273 Normalization, torque setpoint on T300 N2 % 100
H274 Normalization, torque actual value on T300 N2 % 100
H275 Response threshold, web break monitoring, indirect N2 % 50
closed-loop tension control
H280 Number shifts for web length calc. O2 0

Manual
Monitoring parameters:
d300 Software version, axial winder N2 A

d301 Effective web speed setpoint N2 % A
d302 Actual dv/dt N2 % A
d303 Speed setpoint N2 % A
d304 Sum, tension/position setpoint N2 % A
d305 Output, motorized potentiometer 1 N2 % A
d306 Output, motorized potentiometer 2 N2 % A
d307 Speed actual value N2 % A
d308 Variable moment of inertia N2 % A
d309 Actual web length N2 km A
d310 Actual diameter N2 % A
d311 Tension actual value, smoothed N2 % A
d312 Feed-forward control torque N2 % A
d313 Output, closed-loop tension control N2 % A
d314 Feed-forward control torque, frict. compensation N2 % A
d315 Free for expansion N2 % A
d316 Feed-forward control torque, inertia comp. N2 % A
d317 Sum, tension actual value N2 % A
d318 Tension actual value, D component N2 % A
d319 Tension controller output N2 % A
d320 Analog input 1, X5 terminals 501/502 N2 % A
d327 External web speed actual value N2 % A
d328 Tension setpoint N2 % A
d329 Torque setpoint N2 % A
d330 Torque actual value N2 % A
d331 Torque setpoint, smoothed N2 % A
d332 Active control word 1 V2 A
d335 Status word 1 V2 A
d336 Status word 2 V2 A
d337 Alarm word PT V2 A

Manual
d338 Fault word PT V2 A

d340 Compensated web speed N2 % A
d341 Actual saturation setpoint N2 % A
d342 Positive torque limit N2 % A
d343 Negative torque limit N2 % A
d344 Speed setpoint N2 % A
d345 Actual Kp, speed controller PT E2 A
d346 Actual Kp, tension controller E2 A
d347 Control word PTP N2 A
d348 Status word 2 from CU V2 A
d349 Web speed actual value, web tach. N2 % A
d350 Braking distance N2 % A
d361 Module type, standard software package N2 A
H998 Drive number O2 0

Manual

Manual
14 Appendix
14 Appendix:
Block diagrams and STRUC G diagrams
Block diagrams
STRUC G function diagrams
Problem, fault profile and

improvement

Manual
14 Appendix

Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Contents, "Standard axial winder software package" block diagrams for 6SE70/71
A A
Fig. Contents Fig. Contents
1,2 Signal flow overview (terminals, DPRAMS, serial 13 Select inputs, setpoints/actual values, digital tachometers,
3 interfaces, data transfer T300 <--> 6SE70/71) length computer, binary outputs
4 Overview, closed-loop speed- and tension/ 14 Select send words, peer-to-peer protocol,
position control structures select control word
B 15 Select outputs to CB and CU B
5 Speed setpoint conditioning
6 Torque limiting 16 Freely-connectable binary inputs, terminals 611 - 618
Supplementary torque setpoint 17 Permanently-assigned binary inputs, terminals 601 - 608,
Standstill identification freely-connectable binary inputs, terminals 611 - 618
7 Tension reference value/tension actual value conditioning 18 Power-up control
Winding hardness control
C
Web break sensing 19 Motorized potentiometers 1 and 2 C
8 Tension controller 20 Monitoring, drive, fault- and alarm messages
9 Diameter computer 21 Open-loop splice control

Pre-control functions 22 Control- and status words
10 Analog inputs/outputs
23 Explanation of abbreviations and symbols
D Limit value monitor D
11 Select inputs, setpoints/actual values
12 Select inputs, setpoints/actual values
E E
F F
Standard axial winder software package MS320 SIEMENS AG

Contents Sheet A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Send data Receive data

A A
Interface board CB
DUAL-PORT-RAM
B B
TCS Parameters RCS
Send data to the Receive data from
interface board the interface board
Terminal strip X5 on SE300:

C C
SIMADYN D monitor
7 analog inputs X131 X132 IBS (start-up),
(access to all quantities)
4 analog outputs
Technology board T300
16 binary inputs
D D
Peer-to-peer protocol
X136 X134 for fast setpoint input
8 binary outputs
DUAL-PORT-RAM
RD Parameters TD
E Receive data Send data E
from the basic to the basic drive
drive converter converter
Operator control panel

Basic drive converter 6SE70/71 PMU, OP1
F F

Overview Sheet 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Peer-to-peer protocol SIMADYN D monitor
X134 X131
A Interface Board A
Word No.
receive
SINEC L2
and USS Significance
T_DEV: Send data, drive converter
1 Parameter ID TPTP: Send data, peer-to-peer
2 Index No. Significance
No. Significance
3 Parameter value, Hi word
B 1 Send word 1 PTP [14]
0 B
4 Parameter value, Lo word ..
2 Send word 2 PTP [14] Refer to Sheet 3
5 Control word 1 from CB ..
3 Send word 3 PTP [14]
Bits 1.0 to 1.15 [16,17] 15
6 Setpoint 1 from CB [11-13] 4 Send word 4 PTP [14]
7 5 Send word 5 PTP [14]
Setpoint 2 from CB [11-13]
8 Control word 2 from CB
Basic Drive Converter

Bits 1.0 to 1.15 [16,17]
9 Setpoint 3 from CB [11-13]
Internal Functions
10 Setpoint 4 from CB [11-13]
C C
11 Setpoint 5 from CB [11-13] R_AUT: Receive data, CB
12
Receive data Setpoint 6 from CB [11-13]
If a CB is not inserted: Setpoints=0
and control word=0H0006
Parameters
S
S Parameters
Dual Port RAM

T
D
1
Dual Port RAM TP_xxx: Parameter block
D
For technological
Word No. RPTP: Receive data, peer-to-peer parameters
Send data send dxxx and Hxxx
SINEC L2 Significance No. Significance
and USS
Parameter ID 1 Receive word 1 PTP [11-14]
1
2 Index 2 Receive word 2 PTP [11-14]
Parameter value, Hi word 3 Receive word 3 PTP [11-14]
3
Parameter value, Lo word 4 Receive word 4 PTP [11-14] R_DEV: Receive data, drive converter
4
5 Receive word 5 PTP [11-14] No. Significance
E 5 Status word 1 SW320 E
Bits 1.0 to 1.15 0
6 Select value 1 SW320 [15] .. Refer to Sheet 3
7 Select value 2 SW320 [15] ..
8 Status word 2 SW320 15
Bits 2.0 to 2.15
9 Select value 3 SW320 [15]
T_AUT: Send data, CB
F F

Overview, interface signals Sheet 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Example for CUVC)

Source selection,
control word 1:
A P554.x = 3100 Closed-loop controled operation (P100=4) A
Send data
T300 to CU P555.x = 3101 6SE70/71 CUVC/CUMC speed sensing (P130/P151) and Receive data,
P558.x = 3102 closed-loop-speed control on 6SE70/71 T300 from CU
P561.x = 3103 (Example for CUVC)
r550/967
P566.x = 3107 P734.001 = 32
Status word 1 *)
Open-loop control/monitoring
Control word 1 *)
r447 r218
P443 = 3002 Speed actual value P734.002 = 148
B Speed setpoint [6.8] Speed actual value CU [13.2] B
-
100% **) P734.003 = 0
0%, not used Speed controller Not used
H273
r496 P734.004 = 33
Field-oriented
0H0, not used r502 control y Status word 2*)
P506 = 3005 + P734.005 = 165
Supplementary torque setp [6.8] x x/y Torque setpoint [6.1]
P493 = 3006 P734.006 = 24
Positive torque limit [6.8] x x/y Torque actual value [20.1, 7.4]
C P499 = 3007 C
y P734.007 = ???
Negative torque limit [6.8] Select value 1 from CU [11-15]
Kp
P232 = 3008 H274 P734.008 = ???
Kp adaption factor [6.8] Select value 2 from CU [11-15]
r237 100% **)
*) P734.009 = ???
Status word 1 SW320 KP adaption Control word 1 from CU [11-13]
*) P734.010 = ???
Status word 2 SW320 Control word 2 from CU [11-13]
D P734.011 = ??? D
Select value 1 SW320 [15.3] Setpoint 1 from CU [11-13]
P734.012 = ???
P734.013 = ???
P734.014 = ???
P734.015 = ???
E Select value 5 SW320 [15.7] Setpoint 5 from CU 11-13] E
P734.016 = ???
F *) Control- and status words, refer to Sheet 22 F

**) on T300

Data transfer, T300 6SE70/71 Sheet 3a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Source selection,
control word 1:
A Closed-loop speed controlled A
Send data P554.x = 3001
T300 to CU P555.x = 3001 6SE70/71 CU2/CU3 operation P163=4
speed sensing and P208/209 Receive data,
T300 from CU
P558.x = 3001 closed-loop speed control on 6SE70/71
P561.x = 3001 r550/967
P566.x = 3007 P694.001 = 968
Status word 1 *)
Open-loop control/monitoring
Control word 1 *) r214
r447
P443 = 3002 Speed actual value P694.002 = 214
B Speed setpoint [6.8] Speed actual value CU [13.2] B
-
25% **) P694.003 = 0
0%, not used Speed controller Not used
H273
r496 P694.004 = 553
Field-oriented
0H0, not used r502 control y Status word 2*)
P506 = 3005 + P694.005 = 246
Supplementary torque setp [6.8] x x/y Torque setpoint [6.1]
P493 = 3006 P694.006 = 007
Positive torque limit [6.8] x x/y Torque actual value [20.1, 7.4]
C C
P499 = 3007 y P694.007 = ???
Negative torque limit [6.8] Select value 1 from CU [11-15]
Kp
P226 = 3008 H274 P694.008 = ???
Kp adaption factor [6.8] Select value 2 from CU [11-15]
r228 25% **)
*) P694.009 = ???
Status word 1 SW320 KP adaption Control word 1 from CU [11-13]
*) P694.010 = ???
Status word 2 SW320 Control word 2 from CU [11-13]
D P694.011 = ??? D
P694.012 = ???
P694.013 = ???
P694.014 = ???
E P694.015 = ??? E
Select value 5 SW320 [15.7] Setpoint 5 from CU 11-13]
P694.016 = ???
F F
*) Control- and status words, refer to Sheet 22
**) on T300

Data transfer, T300 6SE70/71 Sheet 3b
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Closed-loop tension/position control Compensated web speed
Z controller
A Tension/position ref. value A
5
+ _ Tension controller output
Actual diameter
TN 0,1
Winding hardness characteristic
Supplemantary setpoint
Kp adaption KP
Diameter
SV
Tension/position actual value S 2
+ Diameter
B 3,4
B
0%
Rising edge,
tension control on Selection, tension control mode
Closed-loop position control
Closed-loop speed control Module type, standard software package d361
C Software version, standard software package d300 d362 C

Bias
0% Erase EEPROM H250 key 165
0%
Bias ref. value H160 initialize 0 1
Supplementary setpoint
Drive number H998

&
Injection Tension control on
Mode Current limiting control
D D
Web speed setpoint + Speed setpoint
Local
Inching
Crawl Triggerable
Positioning ramp-function
generator Web speed Diameter
Kp adaption factor
Speed actual value
dv
0%
E dt
+
Supplementary torque setpoint E
Tension controller output 0%
&
Tension control on Compensation
functions, accele
Speed correction control ration and friction
100%
Tension controller output
+ Torque limits
Tension control on
F Current limiting control & F

Overview, closed-loop speed - and tension/position control structures Sheet 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0% Ramp-function generator for the web speed setpoint
100% normalization,
Se tpoint A [13.5] web speed
H130 Effective web speed setpoint
Transfer setpoint A X Y H139
Setpoint B 0%
[16.4] Setting value 0% SV d301
A Transfer setpoint B Upper limit 110% H131 LU A
[16.6] H154 Web speed
Lower limit 0% H132 LL 0 setpoint [13.1, 13.6]
Enable setpoint [17.4]
& Ramp-up time 30000 ms H133 TU Slave drive =1
100%
Active gearbox
System operation [18.4]
Ramp-down time 30000 ms H134 TD H138 ratio [9.1]
RFG stop [17.4] Initial rounding-off 3000 ms H135 TRU Ratio,

Stop web speed setpoint, 1 Final rounding-off 3000 ms H136 TRD
gearbox stage 2 100%
setting [16.4] gearbox stage 2 [16.8]
CF
Inhibit ramp-function generator [17.2]
EN
B H155 d340 B
Smoothing,
8 ms Compensated web
speed [8.1]
Web speed setpoint
[11.3] Compensated web
speed without
Web speed compensation gearbox [9.1]
[11.3]
H137 MUX
100% 0 MUX
100% Setpoint, local stop 0%
1
[11.5] Setpoint, local operation 0%
C 100% 2 C
Setpoint, local crawl H142 10% 3
Maneuvering setpoint H140
Setpoint, local inching forwards H143 5% 4
100% H166 0
Maneuvering [16.8] Setpoint, local inching reverse H144 -5% 5
H141 Positioning setpoint [12.8] H166 = 1 allows a local setpoint to be added
Tension control
output V-Corr [8.8]
-1 100% influence, tension control
0%
6
7
in system operation. In this case, when a local
operating mode is selected, only the appro
priate local setpoint is switched-through. It is
added to the web speed setpoint; the triggera
Winder [16.8] ble ramp-function generator is effective.
0%
100% X Y
D Supplementary web D
speed setpoint [11.5] 110% LU
X Setpoint selection according
Inject., supplementary -110% to the operating modes [18.4]
Web speed actual LL
setpoint [17.8] value [6.5] LU
Actual Speed actual TI
diameter [9.8] value, smoothed SV LL
Core diameter [13.4]
100%
[9.1] S
d344 Web speed
setpoint
Local control
[17.8] H146
& Nset
[6.1]
E Closed-loop speed con E
trol for local operation 0
H145 0%
10%
Bias ref. value d341
-1 -100% X Y Actual bias
reference value
110% LU
Tension control on [8.2] -110% LL
Current limiting control
& Ramp-up / ramp- H161 TI
down time, 20000 ms
H203 = 0,1,2 SV Triggerable ramp-function generator, only
Mode change effective once when the operating mode is
or S changed or when the speed controller is enabled
F speed controller enable F
Polarity, bias ref. value
[16.8] Smoothing,
bias reference H164
value 8 ms

Speed setpoint conditioning Sheet 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Nset [5.8]
d303
0% H149
Speed setpoint
-1 Setpoint, reverse winding [3.2, 20.1]
A Reverse winding after splice [21.8] A
Pre-control Supplementary
torque [9.8] torque setpoint [3.2]
0%
Torque limit 20 % H147

d342
B Tension control Positive torque B

output [8.8] limit [3.2]
-1 -1
Local op. control [17.8] & d343
Closed-loop current limiting Changeover,
control H203 = 0,1,2 pre-control
torque [9.7] -1 Negative torque
limit [3.2]
Winder [16.8]
Winding from =1 No OFF3 [17.4]
below [16.4] Winding-up and winding

C from the top or unwinding C
and winding from below
Mb
Braking
Max. braking torque characteristic
199% H259
Speed actual value [13.4]
0% H257
Reduced braking torque n
D D
d329
0.1% H256 H258 2% Torque setpoint
Smoothing, 500 ms
Start of adaption End of adaption
H162
0% when SIMOVERT SC 0 d331
Torque setpoint [3.8]
Torque setpoint,
smoothed
No OFF3 [17.4]
KP KP adaption
KP adaption factor, max 1
H153 d345
E Kp adaption
E
Variable moment of inertia [9.8] factor [3.2]
H151
X=M L/4
KP adaption factor, min 1 JV Web speed actual Standstill identification
value [5.4] X
0% H150 H152 100% X

Start of adaption H157 1% L
End of adaption
Limit for standstill -L 0 L
identification 0% M
X=M T 0 Standstill
F 25% Hysteresis
HY H159 0 ms [7.5, 13.8, 18.6] F
Delay, standstill
identification

Torque limiting, supplementary torque setpoint, standstill identification Sheet 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ramp-function generator, tension setpoint Tension setpoint
after the ramp-
function genera
tor [8.1]
Tension setpoint
[12.3] X Y
A A
Setting value SV YA d328
Upper limit 110 LU Tension
&
Standstill H206 0
[6.8] Lower limit 0 LL setpoint
With/without
Standstill tension Ramp-up time, 10000 ms H175
100% on [17.4] TU winding hardness
100%, H189 Ramp-down time, 10000 ms H176 TD characteristic
Standstill tension S
0 H188
0 Tension control
Source, standstill tension MIN H191
B Min. selection
on [8.2] B
Tension reduction 2
Tension reduction 1 H181 100% Tension reduction 3
100% H180 H182 100%
Max. tension
reduction
[12.5] Web break identification
Max. tension reduction
C C
Tension setpoint Tension >1 Web break
[13.7]
Actual diameter
[9.8] 2400 ms
Dir. tension H205
control H203>0 X
Winding hardness characteristic H204 5% M X<=M
& T 0
0,5% HY
& S
Web break 1
[8.1, 9.1,
R 13.6]
D Diameter
D
D D1 D2 D3 D4 H178 0
Speed Inhibit tension
Start of tension reduction correction 0=web break, controller and
Torque actual X2 diameter com
Diameter D H183 100% value [3.8] X1-X2 control only as signal
X1 X1 H203 > 2 puter if web
Diameter D1 H184 100% X2 break 1 = 1
<1>
Diameter D2
Diameter D3
H185 100% Tension control
output [8.8]
X1
X2
X1
> > X1 > X21 Tension
controller
H186 100% X2
on [17.8]
End of tension reduction, diameter D 4 H187 100%
H275
E Tension actual (50%) E
value [12.5] Tension actual value conditioning
d311
SAVE H172
Tension actual value, smoothed
Time constant,
150 ms d317
Sum, tension actual values [8.1]
H179 0 0%
Enable, tension off d318

set compensation H173
F
Hold diameter
[16.4]
& Scaling, D component, 100 ms H174 1
Tension actual value, D component
F
Tension Inhibit D component
controller on
<1> If a web breakage should occur:
[17.8] Tension controller output -> Torque actual value

Tension setpoint / tension actual value conditioning winding hardness control, web break identification Sheet 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setting the control mode via H203:
Tension setpoint after
the ramp-function H203 = 0: Indirect closed-loop tension control via current limits
generator [7.8] H203 = 1: Direct closed-loop tension control with tension transducer via current limits
0% H203 = 2: Direct closed-loop tension control with dancer roll via current limits
A H203 = 3: Direct closed-loop tension control with dancer roll/tension transducer via speed correction A
H203 = 5: As for setting 3, however tension controller output multiplied by V*
H177 0 H203 = 4: Reserved for expansion
Inhibit tension setpoint
d304
Supplementary tension H192
setpoint [12.3] 0% Sum, tension/
Time constant, position ref. value
300 ms 0%
H200
Tension controller Setpoint pre-control, Control mode
tension controller H203 = 0,1
B d319 B
Kp.Tn
+
H209 - X Y
0%
[9.4]
Droop, 0% YE Tension controller output
Sum, tension LU
YI
actual values [7.8] LL Control mode H203 = 0
Integral action H199 TN Indirect closed-loop
Web break1 [7.8] time, tension KP tension control
&
Speed controller
controller
C
enable [18.8]
Tension
& 1000 ms
EN QU
>1 Tension controller at limit, C
controller QL
status word 1 to CB/Cu 1.13
on [17.8] P/PI controller=1/0 H196 0 HI
Inhibit tension S
controller [17.8]
Tension control on
[5.1, 6.1, 7.5, 9.1, 13.6 18.6]
Compensated web
speed [5.8] MAX
Actual diameter H201
[9.8] MUX
Lower limit, web H202
D speed 100 % 0 D
Actual Kp, Influence, web
tension speed 00 % 1
d313
KP controller
KP adaption 2 Output tension
d346
KPmax 0,3 H198 3 control
[9.8] pre-control [6.1] [7.4]
4 torque
Variable moment of inertia [8.5]
Tension setpoint 5
KPmin 0,3 H197 Analog input 5,
JV connector X5E
[10.3] If neg.
Control mode 0 H203 Output tension
E H190 0% control V_Corr E
0% H207 H208 100%
Pre-control tension for [5.1]
Start of adaption End of adaption dancer roll op. 0% Lower limit, tension controller
Pre-control torque is
switched to 0% for speed
100% 0 MUX Upper limit, tension controller 0% 0 correction control (H203 =
MUX 3, 4, 5)
Speed actual value,
100% 1 -100% 1
smoothed [13.4] MAX 2 0% 2
3 3
H193 0%
Min. value, tension H194
F F
controller limits Selection, tension
controller limits 1 -1
Adaption 100% H195

Closed-loop tension controller Sheet 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Compensated web
speed without gearbox
[5.8] SAVE d310
Ext. web speed D
H210 V Actual diameter
actual value [13.2]
H211 0 Adaption 100% Diameter computer [5.1, 7.1, 8.1, 10.5]
Dcore < Dact < Dmax =100%
Effective
A Web tach. = 1 n (integrating computation change time A
Web speed from technique, results in a smooth
tach. [13.3] output signal ) D/Dmin
Diameter setting
value [12.7] Dset
Set diameter D set
[17.8]
web speed
Hold diameter D= H238 50000 ms
[16.4] speed actual value Change time, diameter
at Vmax and Dmin
B
Web break 1 [7.8]
Tension con
>1 D hold
B
trol on [8.2]
Tachometer
>1 2%
X X<M
M H216 H236 0
[17.6] 0,5% Computation interval for
HY Diameter may only increase for winders
average value generation, Diameter may only decrease for unwind stands
Speed actual value 320 ms ( time for 1 revolu
smoothed [13.4] X tion at Vmax and Dmin )
Min. speed, H221 1% M
diameter computer HY X<M
Active gearbox 0,5%
ratio [5.8]
4
C
H222 20 % Core diameter X width * thickness
C
4
J V = const * * (D 4 - D 4 core)
X
Core diameter [5.1 ,10.7]
in % of Dmax
gearbox ratio 2
Web width
[11.7]
H243
d308
X
Smoothing, 1000 ms
2
Automatic thickness correction Variable moment of inertia
Scaling, 1000 ms (only if H203 =1,2) [6.1, 7.1]
H220 H272 1%
D Material thickness 100% H224 D
(100 % at the output
for 1 s ramp) Limit, correction value 0% H167 1 H227
Compensated web dV Integrating time 200000 ms H168
d339 Calibration 0 %
speed [5.8] dt Tension controller output [8.8] Actual
correction factor H228
Dead zone Constant moment of
Smoothing, 32 ms H223 inertia 0 %
H225 Actual dv/dt
External dv/dt
[11.7] d302
H226 0 Fine calibration, dv/dt 100%
E E
dv/dt, external = 1 d316
X
2 Pre-control torque,
inertia compensation
H237
Pre-control
with n2 0%
|Friction torque| at |speed| 0% H230 0%

|Friction torque| at |speed| 20%
|Friction torque| at |speed| 40%
H231 0%
|MR|
d314
Pre-control torque,
-1 d312
H232 0%
friction compensation Pre-control torque
|Friction torque| at |speed| 60% H233 0% [6.1, 8.7]
F Changeover, pre-
F
|Friction torque| at |speed| 80% H234 0% |n| control torque [6.2]
|Friction torque| at |speed| 100% H235 0% Wind-up [16.8]
Friction characteristic Winding from below [16.4]

Diameter computer, pre-controls Sheet 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
a) Analog inputs at SE300 50% H054 H055 0% b) Analog outputs H105 0
[11-13] X5, terminal 501 + d320
at SE300 d301 0 MUX
Analog input X5A TA=8ms d302
X5, terminal 502 1
- d303 2 0% H101 H102 2
d304 3
A 50% H056 H057 0% . A
.
. . X5, terminal 521
+ d321
X5, terminal 503 d328 27 X5, terminal 522
Analog input X5B TA=8ms d330 28
X5, terminal 504 - 29
d331
[3.8] select value 1 from CU 30
50% H058 H059 0% H270 8 ms [3.8] select value 2 from CU 31
+ d322 . .
X5, terminal 505 . .
Analog input X5C TA=8ms
X5, terminal 506 -
H106 0 Analog ground
B 50% H060 H061 0%
B
H271 8 ms
+ d323
d301
d302 0 MUX
X5, terminal 507 d303 1
Analog input X5D TA=8ms 2 0% H103 H104 2
X5, terminal 508 d304
- . 3
.
50% H062 H063 0% . . X5, terminal 523
d328 27 X5, terminal 524
+ d324 d330 28
X5, terminal 511 d331
Analog input X5E TA=8ms 29
X5, terminal 512 [3.8] select value 1 from CU 30
- [8.4] [3.8] select value 2 from CU 31
C 50% H064 H065 0% . . 0% H099 H100 2 C
. .
+ d325
X5, terminal 513 X5, terminal 519
Analog input X5F TA=32ms
X5, terminal 514 Actual
- X5, terminal 520
diameter [9.8]
50% H066 H067 0% 0% H097 H098 2
+ d326
X5, terminal 515 X5, terminal 509
Analog input X5G TA=32ms
X5, terminal 516 [13.4] Speed actual
- value, smoothed X5, terminal 510
D H107 0 H115 0 D
c) Limit value monitor 1 d) Limit value monitor 2
d301 0 MUX d301 0 MUX
d302 1 H109 0 d302 1 H117 0
d303 2 500 ms d303 2 500 ms
d304 3 Tension threshold [21.1] d304 3
. MUX H110 . MUX H118
. 0 0-signal at .. 0 0-signal at
. . .
. . .
. 0 . 0
. 1 . 1
H H114 H121 H122
d328 27 d328 27 H
d329
d330
28
29 -1 2 H113
MUX
d329
d330
28
29 -1 2 MUX
E d331 30 X 0 d331 30 X X>M 0 E
100% 31 X>M 100% 31
Interval limit L 0% H112 Interval limit L 0% H120 X<M 1
L X<M 1 L
M L M L
H108 0 H116 0 X=M 2
Hysteresis H 0% H113 X=M 2 Hysteresis H 0% H121
H H
d301 0 MUX L 3 d301 0 MUX L 3
d302 1 H112 d302 1 H120
d303 2 4 d303 2 4
d304 3 H111 0 M d304 3
H119 0 M
. . . .. .
. MUX .
. . 0 x Length hold . . 0 MUX x Length hold
. -L M L . -L M L
. [13.8] . [13.8]
d328 27 1 Limit value d328 27 1
F d329 28 monitor 1 d329 28 Limit value F
-1
monitor 2 [13.7]
-1
d330 29 d330 29
30 2 [13.7],[22.6] d331 30 2
d331
H260 31 H261 31

Analog inputs / outputs, limit value monitors Sheet 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H069 31 H073 31 H077 31
[10.3] analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX
[10.3] analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1
A [10.3] analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5C - - 2 A
[10.3] analog input X5D - - 3 Analog input X5D - - 3 Analog input X5D - - 3
[10.3] analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5E - - 4
[10.3] analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5F - - 5
[10.3] analog input X5G - - 6 Analog input X5G - - 6 Analog input X5G - - 6
[2.3] setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7
[3.8] setpoint 1 from CU - - 13 Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13 Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13
B [3.8] setpoint 3 from CU - - 15
Line speed
Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15
Supplementary line
Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 B
[3.8] setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 External dv/dt [8.1]
[3.8] setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 setpoint [5.1] Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 speed setpoint [5.1] Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17
[2.5] receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19
[3.8] select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24
[19.7] motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26 Motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26 Motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26
[19.7] motorized potentiometer 2 - - 27 Motorized potentiometer 2 - - 27 Motorized potentiometer 2 - - 27
[13.7] digital web tach. - - 28 0% - - 28 0% - - 28
0% - - 29 0% - - 29 0% - - 29
C 0% - - 30 0% - - 30 0% - - 30 C
H068 0% - - 31 H072 0% - - 31 H076 0% - - 31
H071 31 H075 31 H079 31
D Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX D
Analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1
Analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5C - - 2
Analog input X5D - - 3 Analog input X5D - - 3 Analog input X5D - - 3
Analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5E - - 4
Analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5F - - 5
Analog input X5G - - 6 Analog input X5G - - 6 Analog input X5G - - 6
Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7
Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13 Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13 Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13
E Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 E
Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Line speed Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Setpoint, local Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Web width [9.1]
Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 compensation [5.1] Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 operation [5.6] Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17
Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19
Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24
Select value 2 from CU - - 25 Select value 2 from CU - - 25 Select value 2 from Cu - - 25
Motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26 Motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26 Motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26
0% - - 28 0% - - 28 0% - - 28
0% -- 29 0% - - 29 0% -- 29
0% -- 30 0% - - 30 0% -- 30
F H070 0% - - 31 H074 0% - - 31 H078 100% - - 31 F

Select inputs, setpoints / actual values Sheet 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H081 31 H085 31 H089 31 H262 31
[10.3] analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX
[10.3] analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1
A [10.3] analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5C - - 2 A
[10.3] analog input X5D - - 3 Analog input X5D - - 3 Analog input X5D - - 3 Analog input X5D - - 3
[10.3] analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5E - - 4
[10.3] analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5F - - 5
[10.3] analog input X5G - - 6 Analog input X5G - - 6 Analog input X5G - - 6 Analog input X5G - - 6
[2.3] setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7
[3.8] setpoint 1 from CU - - 13 Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13 Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13 Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13
B [3.8] setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Length B
[3.8] setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Tension setpoint Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Tension actual value Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Diameter setting value [9.4] Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 setpoint
[3.8] setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 [7.1] Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 [7.1] Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 [13.6]
[2.5] receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19
[3.8] select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24
[3.8] select value 2 from CU - - 25 Select value 2 from CU - - 25 Select value 2 from CU - - 25 Select value 2 from CU - - 25
[19.7] motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26 Motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26 Motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26 Motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26
[19.7] motorized potentiometer 2 - - 27 Motorized potentiometer 2 - - 27 Motorized potentiometer 2 - - 27 Motorized potentiometer 2 - - 27
0% -- 28 0% -- 28 [8.4 ] core diameter - - 28 0% - - 28
0% -- 29 0% -- 29 0% - - 29 0% - - 29
C 0% - - 30 0% - - 30 0% - - 30 0% - - 30 C
H080 0% - - 31 H084 0% - - 31 H088 10% - - 31 199% - - 31
H083 31 H087 31 H091 31
D Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX D
Analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1
Analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5C - - 2
Analog input X5D - - 3 Analog input X5D - - 3 Analog input X5D - - 3
Analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5E - - 4
Analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5F - - 5
Analog input X5G - - 6 Analog input X5G - - 6 Analog input X5G - - 6
Setpoint 3 from CB - - 9 Setpoint 3 from CB- - 9 Setpoint 3 from CB - - 9
X
Setpoint 5 from CB - - 11 Setpoint 5 from CB - - 11 Setpoint 5 from CB - - 11 2
E Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 E
X
Supplementary tension Max. tension 3
Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 H163 0
Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 setpoint [8.1] Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 reduction [7.1] Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17
Setpoint 6 from CU - - 18 Setpoint 6 from CU - - 18 Setpoint 6 from CU - - 18 Selection,
Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 positioning reference
Receive word 2 from PtP - - 20 Receive word 2 from PtP - - 20 Receive word 2 from PtP - - 20 value
Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Reference value, positioning [5.6]
Select value 2 from CU - - 25 Select value 2 from CU - - 25 Select value 2 from CU - - 25
0% - - 28 0% - - 28 0% - - 28
0% - - 29 0% - - 29 0% - - 29
0% - - 30 0% - - 30 0% - - 30
F H082 0% - - 31 H086 0% - - 31 H090 0% - - 31 F

Select inputs, setpoints / actual values Sheet 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H218 0H4 encoder type
H092 8
H213 600 pulse No.
Analog input X5A 0 MUX
Analog input X5B 1 X 5 ,te rm .5 4 1
Analog input X5C Track A
A Pulse No. 2 X 5 ,te rm .5 4 2 A
Analog input X5D 3 Line speed from the
H212 1024 Analog input X5E 4 X 5 ,te r m .5 4 3 digital web tachometer
Track B
Analog input X5F 5 X 5 ,te r m .5 4 4 [11.2, 13.2]
X 5 ,te rm .5 3 1 Analog input X5G 6
X 5 ,te rm .5 3 2 Track A [3.8] speed actual value CU 7 d307 H215 1000
8 H165 Speed actual value,
X 5 ,te rm .5 3 3 0% Rated speed H280 number of shifts
Track B Speed actual value T300 9 Smoothing, speed smoothed
X 5 ,te rm .5 3 4 0% 10 actual value 20 ms [6.3, 5.4, 8.1, 9.1, 10.5,
0% 11 20.1 ]
0% 12 Reset length computer [17.6]
H214 1500 rated speed d309
0% 13 Length shifter
H217 0H64 encoder type 0% 14 computer Actual web length
Tension control on [17.8]
B
>1 B
0% 15
Web break [7.8]
Speed controller Stop
enable [18.8] X
100% H240 Adapt. divisor
X>M
100% H239 Adapt.factor M
Length ref. value [12.8]
H 0 94 29
Note: S Length hold
[10.3] analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Parameters H212 to H215 and [10.4, 10.8]
C
[10.3] analog input X5B - - 1
[10.3] analog input X5C - - 2 H217,H218 are valid only after Line speed setpoint < 4% >1 R
C
[10.3] analog input X5D - - 3
[10.3] analog input X5E - - 4 switching the drive off and on! Line speed setpoint [5.8]
[10.3] analog input X5F - - 5 d327
[10.3] analog input X5G - - 6 d350
External line speed 60[s] H241 Ramp-down time Braking distance
[2.3] setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Rounding-off computer Actual braking travel
[2.3] setpoint 2 from CB - - 8 actual value [9.1] 6[s] H242 time
[2.3] setpoint 3 from CB - - 9 Ramp-down
[2.3] setpoint 4 from CB - - 10 1000[m/min] H241 Max. line speed
[2.3] setpoint 5 from CB - - 11
[2.3] setpoint 6 from CB - - 12 Web length computer, length hold
[3.8] setpoint 1 from CU - - 13 H093 26 H096 31
[3.8] setpoint 2 from CU - - 14
[3.8] setpoint 3 from CU - - 15
D [3.8] setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX Analog input X5A - - 0 MUX D
[3.8] setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 Analog input X5B - - 1 Analog input X5B - - 1
[3.8] setpoint 6 from CU - - 18 Analog input X5C - - 2
[2.5] receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Analog input X5C - - 2 Analog input X5D - - 3 [7.8] web break X6, terminal 631
Analog input X5D - - 3
[2.5] receive word 2 from PtP - - 20 Analog input X5E - - 4 Status word 2 to CB, CU 2.9
[2.5] receive word 3 from PtP - - 21 Analog input X5E - - 4 Analog input X5F - - 5
Analog input X5F - - 5 Analog input X5G - - 6
[2.5] receive word 4 from PtP - - 22 Analog input X5G - - 6 [6.8] standstill X6, terminal 632
[2.5] receive word 5 from PtP - - 23 Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Setpoint 1 from CB - - 7 Status word 2 to CB, CU 2.12
[3.8] select value 1 from CU - - 24 Setpoint 2 from CB - - 8 Setpoint 2 from CB - - 8
[3.8] select value 2 from CU - - 25 Setpoint 3 from CB - - 9 Setpoint 3 from CB - - 9
[1 9.7] motorized potentiom et. 1 -- 26 Setpoint 4 from CB - - 10 [12.8] tension control on X6, terminal 633
Setpoint 4 from CB - - 10 Line speed actual Status word 2 to CB, CU 2.10
[19.7] motorized potentiomet. 2 -- 27 Setpoint 5 from CB - - 11 Setpoint 5 from CB - - 11
[13.7] digital web tachometer - - 28 Setpoint 6 from CB - - 12
value, tachometer Setpoint 6 from CB - - 12
[5.8] speed setpoint - 29 [9.2] Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13 Basic drive converter on X6, terminal 634
Setpoint 1 from CU - - 13
E 0% -- 30 Setpoint 2 from CU - - 14 Setpoint 2 from CU - - 14 Status word 1 to CB, CU 1.2 E
0% -- 31 Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Setpoint 3 from CU - - 15 Setpoint A
Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Setpoint 4 from CU - - 16 Alarm T300 X6, terminal 635
d349 Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 [5.1]
Setpoint 5 from CU - - 17 Status word 1 to CB, CU 1.7
Setpoint 6 from CU - - 18 Setpoint 6 from CU - - 18
Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Receive word 1 from PtP - - 19 Speed setpoint = 0 X6, terminal 636
Receive word 2 from PtP - - 20 Receive word 2 from PtP - - 20
Receive word 3 from PtP - - 21 Status word 2 to CB, CU 2.8
Receive word 4 from PtP - - 22 [10.4] limit value monitor 1 X6, terminal 637
Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Select value 1 from CU - - 24 Status word 2 to CB, CU 2.13
Select value 2 from CU - - 25 Select value 2 from CU - - 25
Motorized potentiometer 1 - - 26 [10.8] limit value monitor 2 X6, terminal 638
Digital web tachometer - - 26.
0% - Motorized potentiometer 2 - - 27 Status word 2 to CB, CU 2.14
. . 0% -- 28
0% -- 29
0% - - 31 0% - - 30 P24 external X6, terminal 639
F H095 0% - - 31 F
M24 external X6, terminal 640
Binary outputs at SE300

Select inputs, setpoints / actual values, digital tachometers, length computer, binary outputs Sheet 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H015 15 H016 15 H017 15
A A
[5.8] effective web speed setpoint d301 - - 0 MUX d301 - - 0 MUX d301 - - 0 MUX
[9.8] actual dv/dt d302 - - 1 d302 - - 1 d302 - - 1
[6.9] speed setpoint d303 - - 2 d303 - - 2 d303 - - 2
[9.8] variable moment of inertia d308 - - 3 d308 - - 3 d308 - - 3
[9.8] actual diameter d310 - - 4 d310 - - 4 d310 - - 4
[9.8] pre-control torque d312 - - 5 d312 - - 5 d312 - - 5
[10.4] analog input 5, term.511/512 d324 - - 6 d324 - - 6 d324 - - 6
[6.8] torque setpoint, smoothed d331 - - 7 Transmit word 1 PTP d331 - - 7 Transmit word 2 PTP d331 - - 7 Transmit word 3 PTP
[3.8] select value 1 from CU - - 8 [2.5] Select value 1 from CU - - 8 [2.5] Select value 1 from CU - - 8 [2.5]
[2.5] receive word 1 PTP - - 10 Receive word 1 PTP - - 10 Receive word 1 PTP - - 10
B [2.5] receive word 3 PTP - - 12 Receive word 3 PTP - - 12 Receive word 3 PTP - - 12 B
Control word 1 d332 - - 15 d332 - - 15 d332 - - 15
Positive torque limit d342 - - 16 d342 - - 16 d342 - - 16
Negative torque limit d343 - - 17 d343 - - 17 d343 - - 17
10% - - 18 10% - - 18 10% - - 18
C H018 15 H019 15 C
d301 - - 0 MUX d301 - - 0 MUX

d302 - - 1 d302 - - 1
d303 - - 2 d303 - - 2
d308 - - 3 d308 - - 3 Selection, control word from peer-to-peer
d310 - - 4 d310 - - 4
d312 - - 5 d312 - - 5
H020 5
d324 - - 6 d324 - - 6 Receive word 1 PTP - - 0 MUX
d331 - - 7 d331 - - 7 Receive word 2 PTP - - 1
Select value 1 from CU - - 8 Transmit word 4 PTP Select value 1 from CU - - 8 Transmit word 5 PTP Receive word 3 PTP - - 2
Select value 2 from CU - - 9 [2.5] Select value 2 from CU - - 9 [2.5] Receive word 4 PTP - - 3
Receive word 1 PTP - - 10 Receive word 1 PTP - - 10 Receive word 5 PTP - - 4 d347
D Receive word 2 PTP - - 11 Receive word 2 PTP - - 11 0H6 - - 5 Control word from PTP
D
Receive word 3 PTP - - 12 Receive word 3 PTP - - 12 0 -- 6
Receive word 4 PTP - - 13 Receive word 4 PTP - - 13 0 -- 7 bit 1.0 to 1.15 [16,17]
Receive word 5 PTP - - 14 Receive word 5 PTP - - 14
d332 - - 15 d332 - - 15
d342 - - 16 d342 - - 16
d343 - - 17 d343 - - 17
10% - - 18 10% - - 18
Settings for the peer-to-peer protocol:
E H245 6 Baud rate, 2=600, 3=1200, 4=2400, 5=4800, 6=9600, 7=19200 E

H247 5 Number of receive words
Word 1 Transmitter Word 1 H248 5 Number of transmit words

Receiver
13 11
Word 2 Tx+ Rx+ Word 2 H249 0 Enable transmitter 0 = off
Word 3 Word 3 H006 10 Receive monitoring in nxTa 0 = off
14 12
Word 4 Tx- Rx- Word 4
Word 5 Word 5
Note: Parameters H006,H245,H247,H248 get valid only
after switching the drive off and on!
F Please refere also to note 3, Section 8.1.3.3 F

Selection, transmit words peer-to-peer protocol, select control word Sheet 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H123 0 H125 0 H127 0
[5.8] effective web speed setpoint d301- - 0 MUX d301- - 0 MUX d301- - 0 MUX
[9.8] actual dv/dt d302- - 1 d302- - 1 d302- - 1
[6.9] speed setpoint d303- - 2 d303- - 2 d303- - 2
A [8.8] sum, tension/position setpoint d304- - 3 d304- - 3 d304- - 3 A
[19.7] output, mot. pot. 1 d305- - 4 d305- - 4 d305- - 4
[19.7] output, mot. pot. 2 d306- - 5 d306- - 5 d306- - 5
[13.4] speed actual value d307- - 6 d307- - 6 d307- - 6
[9.8] variable moment of inertia d308- - 7 d308- - 7 d308- - 7
[13.8] actual web length d309- - 8 d309- - 8 d309- - 8
[9.8] actual diameter d310- - 9 d310- - 9 d310- - 9
[7.8] tension actual value, smoothed d311- - 10 d311- - 10 d311- - 10
[9.8] pre-control torque d312- - 11 d312- - 11 d312- - 11
[8.8] output, tension control d313- - 12 d313- - 12 d313- - 12
[9.4] pre-control torque, friction compensation d314- - 13 d314- - 13 d314- - 13
Free for expansion d315- - 14 d315- - 14 d315- - 14
[9.8] pre-control torque, inertia compensation d316- - 15 d316- - 15 d316- - 15
B [7.8] sum, tension actual values d317- - 16 d317- - 16 Select value 3 MS320 d317- - 16 Select value 5 MS320 B
Select value 1 MS320
[7.8] tension actual value, D component d318- - 17 d318- - 17 [2.3, 3.2] d318- - 17 [2.3, 3.2]
[8.8] tension controller output d319- - 18 [2.3, 3.2] d319- - 18 d319- - 18
[10.4] analog input 1, term. 501/502 d320- - 19 d320- - 19 d320- - 19
[13.3] external web speed actual value d327- - 26 d327- - 26 d327- - 26
[7.8] tension setp. after the winding hard. char. d328- - 27 d328- - 27 d328- - 27
[20.3] torque actual value d330- - 28 d330- - 28 d330- - 28
[6.8] torque setpoint, smoothed d331- - 29 d331- - 29 d331- - 29
C [3.8] select value 1 from CU- - 30 Select value 1 from CU- - 30 Select value 1 from CU- - 30 C
[3.8] select value 2 from CU- - 31 Select value 2 from CU- - 31 Select value 2 from CU- - 31
. . .
. . .
. . .
H124 0 H126 0 H128 0
d301- - 0 MUX d301- - 0 MUX d301- - 0 MUX

D d302- - 1 d302- - 1 d302- - 1 D
d303- - 2 d303- - 2 d303- - 2
d304- - 3 d304- - 3 d304- - 3
d305- - 4 d305- - 4 d305- - 4
d306- - 5 d306- - 5 d306- - 5
d307- - 6 d307- - 6 d307- - 6
d308- - 7 d308- - 7 d308- - 7
d309- - 8 d309- - 8 d309- - 8
d310- - 9 d310- - 9 d310- - 9
d311- - 10 d311- - 10 d311- - 10
d312- - 11 d312- - 11 d312- - 11
d313- - 12 d313- - 12 d313- - 12
d314- - 13 d314- - 13 d314- - 13
d315- - 14 d315- - 14 d315- - 14
E d316- - 15 d316- - 15 d316- - 15 E
d317- - 16 Select value 2 MS320 d317- - 16 Select value 4 MS320 d317- - 16 Select value 6 MS320
d318- - 17 [2.3, 3.2] d318- - 17 [2.3, 3.2] d318- - 17 [2.3, 3.2]
d319- - 18 d319- - 18 d319- - 18
d320- - 19 d320- - 19 d320- - 19
d321- - 20 d321- - 20 d321- - 20
d322- - 21 d322- - 21 d322- - 21
d323- - 22 d323- - 22 d323- - 22
d324- - 23 d324- - 23 d324- - 23
d325- - 24 d325- - 24 d325- - 24
d326- - 25 d326- - 25 d326- - 25
d327- - 26 d327- - 26 d327- - 26
d328- - 27 d328- - 27 d328- - 27
d330- - 28 d330- - 28 d330- - 28
d331- - 29 d331- - 29 d331- - 29
Select value 1 from CU- - 30 Select value 1 from CU- - 30 Select value 1 from CU- - 30
Select value 2 from CU- - 31 Select value 2 from CU- - 31 Select value 2 from CU- - 31
F . . . F
. .
. . .

Select inputs at CB and CU Sheet 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H029 9 H033 9 H037 9 H041 9

Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX
Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 612 - - 1
A Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 A
Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Mot. pot. 2, Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Hold diameter Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Accept setpoint B Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Maneuvering
1 -- 8 raise [19.2] 1 -- 8 1 -- 8 [5.1] 1 -- 8 [5.1]
0 -- 9 0 -- 9 [7.1, 9.1] 0 -- 9 0 -- 9
[2.3] control word 2.2 from CB - - 10 [2.3] control word 1.15 from CB - - 10 H252 0 - - 10 [2.3] control word 2.8 from CB - - 10
[3.8] control word 2.2 from CU -- 11 [3.8] control word 1.15 from CU - - 11 0 - - 11 [3.8] control word 2.8 from CU - - 11
0 - - 12 [14.8] control word 1.15 from PTP - - 12 0 - - 12 [17.8] tension contr. on -- 12
0 -- 13 0 -- 13 0 -- 13 0 -- 13
0 -- 14 0 -- 14 0 -- 14 0 -- 14
0 - - 15 0 - - 15 0 - - 15 0 - - 15
B B
H030 9 H034 9 H038 9 H042 9

Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Mot. pot. 1, Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Stop line speed setpoint Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Gearbox stage 2
1 -- 8 1 -- 8 1 -- 8 Local inching, 1 -- 8
raise [19.2] setting [5.1] forwards [18.1] [5.7]
0 -- 9 0 -- 9 0 -- 9 0 -- 9
[2.3] control word 2.10 from CB-- 10 [2.3] control word 2.9 from CB - - 10 [2.3] control word 1.8 from CB - - 10 H253 0 - - 10
C [3.8] control word 2.10 from CU-- 11 [3.8] control word 2.9 from CU- - 11 [3.8] control word 1.8 from CU- - 11 0 - - 11 C
0 -- 12 0 -- 12 [14.8] contr. word 1.8 from PTP- - 12 0 -- 12
0 -- 13 0 -- 13 0 -- 13 0 -- 13
0 - - 14 0 - - 14 0 - - 14 0 - - 14
0 - - 15 0 - - 15 0 - - 15 0 - - 15
H031 9 H035 9 H039 9 H043 9

D Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 D
Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Mot. pot. 2, Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Winding from Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Local crawl Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Winder
1 -- 8 lower [19.2] 1 -- 8 below [6.1, 9.4] 1 -- 8 [18.1] 1 -- 8 [5.1, 6.1, 9.4]
0 -- 9 0 -- 9 0 -- 9 0 -- 9
[2.3] control word 2.3 from CB -- 10 [2.3] control word 2.13 from CB- - 10 [2.3] control word 2.7 from CB - - 10 H254 0 - - 10
[3.8] control word 2.3 from CU-- 11 [3.8] control word 2.13 from CU- - 11 [3.8] control word 2.7 from CU - - 11 0 - - 11
0 - - 12 0 - - 12 0 - - 12 0 - - 12
0 -- 13 0 -- 13 0 -- 13 0 -- 13
0 -- 14 0 -- 14 0 -- 14 0 -- 14
0 - - 15 0 - - 15 0 - - 15 0 - - 15
E E
H032 9 H036 9 H040 9 H044 9
Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Mot. pot. 1, Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Accept setpoint A Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Polarity, bias ref.
1 -- 8 1 -- 8 1 -- 8 Local inching, 1 -- 8
lower [19.2] [5.1] reverse [18.1] value [5.1]
0 -- 9 0 -- 9 0 -- 9 0 -- 9
[2.3] control word 2.11 from CB-- 10 H251 0 - - 10 [2.3] control word 1.9 from CB - - 10 H255 0 - - 10
[3.8] control word 2.11 from CU-- 11 [2.3] control word 2.16 from CB - 11 [3.8] control word 1.9 from CU - - 11 0 -- 11
0 -- 12 0 -- 12 [14.8] contr. word 1.9 from PTP- - 12 0 -- 12
0 -- 13 0 -- 13 0 -- 13 0 -- 13
F 0 - - 14 0 -- 14 0 - - 14 0 - - 14 F
0 - - 15 0 - - 15 0 - - 15 0 - - 15

Freely - connectable binary inputs, terminals 611 - 618 Sheet 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MUX H021 0
H045 9 H049 9 H052 9 Binary input term. 601 - - 0
Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX [2.3] control word 1.3 from CB - - 1
Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 612 - - 1 [3.8] control word 1.3 from CU - - 2
Binary input term. 613 - - 2 Binary input term. 613 - - 2 Binary input term. 613 - - 2 [14.8] control word 1.3 from PTP - - 3
Binary input term. 614 - - 3 Binary input term. 614 - - 3 Binary input term. 614 - - 3 1 -- 4 System start
Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 0 -- 5 [18.6]
A Binary input term. 616 - - 5 Binary input term. 616 - - 5 Binary input term. 616 - - 5 0 -- 6 A
Binary input term. 617 - - 6 Binary input term. 617 - - 6 Binary input term. 617 - - 6 0 -- 7
Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Off1/on = 0/1 Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Hold ramp-function Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Local run
1 -- 8 [18.1] 1 -- 8 generator [5.1] 1 -- 8 [18.1] H022 0
0 -- 9 0 -- 9 0 -- 9 Binary input term. 602 - - 0 MUX
[2.3] control word 1.0 from CB -- 10 [2.3] control word 1.5 from CB - - 10 [2.3] control word 2.6 from CB -- 10 [2.3] control word 1.11 from CB - - 1
[3.8] control word 1.0 from CU -- 11 [3.8] control word 1.5 from CU - - 11 [3.8] control word 2.6 from CU - - 11 [3.8] control word 1.11 from CU - - 2
[14.8] contr. word 1.0 from PTP-- 12 [14.8] contr. word 1.5 from PTP - - 12 0 - - 12 [14.8] control word 1.11 from PTP - - 3
0 - - 13 0 - - 13 0 - - 13 Tension controller
0 -- 14
0 - - 15
0 -- 14
0 - - 15
0 -- 14
0 - - 15 Binary input term. 602
&
1 -- 4
0 -- 5
6
on
[7.1, 7.4, 8.1, 13.6,*
7 16.7, 21.1]
[2.8] control word 1.11 from CB
B & B
[21.8] splice enable
H050 9 H053 9
Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX
H046 9 Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX
H023 0
Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 603 - - 0 MUX
Binary input term. 613 - - 2 Binary input term. 613 - - 2 Binary input term. 613 - - 2 [2.3] control word 1.12 from CB - - 1
Binary input term. 614 - - 3 Binary input term. 614 - - 3 [3.8] control word 1.12 from CU - - 2
Binary input term. 614 - - 3 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4
Binary input term. 615 - - 4 [14.8] control word 1.12 from PTP - - 3 Inhibit tension
Binary input term. 616 - - 5
1 -- 4
0 -- 5
controller
[8.1]
*
Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Enable setpoint Binary input term. 618 - - 7 Reset length 0 -- 6
Inhibit ramp- 1 -- 8 1 -- 8 0 -- 7
1 -- 8 function generator [5.1] [5.1] computer [13.7]
0 -- 9 0 -- 9 0 -- 9
[2.3] control word 1.4 from CB - 10 [2.3] control word 1.6 from CB - - 10 [2.3] control word 2.12 from CB - - 10
C H024 0 C
[3.8] control word 1.4 from CU - 11 [3.8] control word 1.6 from CU - - 11 [3.8] control word 2.12 from CU - - 11 Binary input term. 604 - - 0 MUX
[14.8] contr. word 1.4 from PTP -- 12 [14.8] contr. word 1.6 from PTP - - 12 0 - - 12 [2.3] control word 1.14 from CB - - 1
0 -- 13 0 -- 13 0 -- 13 [3.8] control word 1.14 from CU - - 2
0 -- 14 0 -- 14 [14.8] control word 1.14 from PTP - - 3
0 - - 14 0 - - 15 0 - - 15 Set diameter
0 - - 15 1 -- 4 [9.1]
0 -- 5
0 -- 6
0 -- 7
H047 8 H051 9 H013 9
Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX H025 0
Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 612 - - 1 Binary input term. 605 - - 0 MUX
Binary input term. 613 - - 2 Binary input term. 613 - - 2 Binary input term. 613 - - 2 [2.3] control word 2.0 from CB - - 1
Binary input term. 614 - - 3 Binary input term. 614 - - 3 Binary input term. 614 - - 3 [3.8] control word 2.0 from CU - - 2
0 -- 3 Inject supplementary
D Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4 Binary input term. 615 - - 4
1 -- 4 setpoint D
0 -- 5
0 -- 6
[5.1] *
1 -- 8 1 -- 8 Standstill tension 1 -- 8 Tachometer 0 -- 7
0 -- 9 0 -- 9 on [7.5, 18.6] 0 -- 9 [9.1]
[3.8] control word 1.1 from CU -- 10 [2.3] control word 1.13 from CB - - 10 [2.3] control word 2.14 from CB - - 10 H026 0
0 - - 11 [3.8] control word 1.13 from CU - - 11 [3.8] control word 2.14 from CU - - 11 Binary input term. 606 - - 0 MUX
0 - - 12 [14.8] contr. word 1.13 from PTP - - 12 0 -- 12 [2.3] control word 2.1 from CB - - 1
0 - - 13 0 - - 13 0 -- 13 [3.8] control word 2.1 from CU - - 2
0 -- 14 0 -- 14 0 - - 14 0 -- 3 Local positioning [18.1]
1 -- 4 or knife in the cutting
0 -- 15 0 -- 15 0 - - 15 position [21.1]
0 -- 5
0 -- 6
0 -- 7
E E
H048 8 H027 0
Binary input term. 611 - - 0 MUX Binary input term. 607 - - 0 MUX
Binary input term. 612 - - 1 [14.8] control word 2.4 from CB - - 1
[14.8] control word 2.4 from CU - - 2
[2.3] control word 1.1 from CB & No off 2
[18.1, 18.6]
0 -- 3
Local operator control
[ 5.1, 6.1, 18.1, 18.6]
Binary input term. 615 - - 4 [14.8] control word 1.1 from PTP control word 1.1 1 -- 4 or partner drive is in
Binary input term. 616 - - 5 0 -- 5 the tension control
Binary input term. 617 - - 6 0 -- 6 mode [21.1]
Binary input term. 618 - - 7 0 -- 7
1 -- 8
[2.3] control word 1.2 from CB No off 3
0 -- 9
[3.8] control word 1.2 from CU -- 10 [14.8] control word 1.2 from PTP
& [18.1, 18.6] Binary input term. 608 - 0 MUX
H028 0
0 -- 11 control word 1.2 [2.3] control word 2.5 from CB - - 1
0 -- 12 [21.8] no fast stop after splice [3.8] control word 2.5 from CU - - 2
0 -- 13
F 0 - - 14 -1 -3
1 -- 4 Local stop F
0 - - 15 0 -- 5 [18.1]
(N ot e: Control word 1.1 and 1.2 fr om CB are
fixed at 1,
if a C B board is not inserted. )
*
* These control inputs are computed in the fastest sampling time TA=8ms,
all of the other control inputs in TA=32ms
0 -- 6
0 -- 7

Permanently assigned binary inputs, terminals 601 - 608, freely - assignable binary inputs, terminals 611 - 618 Sheet 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Drive converter ready Operating modes Caution: Before a new operating mode can be
X
selected, the previous must be terminated.
Fault, basic converter [5.7]
A Fault, PT
>11 Binary input term. 611 - - 0
MUX H129 8 A
No off 2 [17.4] Binary input term. 613 - - 2
Alternative Binary input term. 614 - - 3
No off 3 [17.4] on command Binary input term. 615 - - 4
Local stop [17.8]
Local operator control [17.8]
& Binary input term. 617 - - 6
-- 8
S Main contactor ON
control word 1.0
Local crawl [16.6] R
B Checkback signal B
controller enable
basic drive
Local crawl
>1 S converter
R & &
3 Standstill [6.8]
Local run [17.6]
Local run
>1
S
C
R
2
Checkback
signal
& S C
R
basic drive
Local positioning [17.8] converter ready
Local
Interlock with other local >1 S
positioning
operating modes R >1
6 Standstill tension & S
>1 Speed controller
D [17.4] enable D
Local inching forwards [16.6]
Local inching Tension control on
R Fault, basic
drive converter & [8.1, 13.6, 21.4]
control word 1.3
S forwards
S [8.2]
>1 R R Fault,
4 0 T basic drive
converter
Inching time
>1 No off 2
[17.4]
>1
Local inching backwards [16.6] 10000 ms
0 T
No off 3
E H014 [17.4] E
>1 S
Local inching
S
R reverse R
5
Off1/on [17.2]
System operation [5.1]

>1
S
R
0
System start [17.8]
>1
F F
Operating mode 1 if LOCAL operator control and no other operating mode is selected

Power-up control Sheet 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0% Setpoint
Mot. pot. 1 Setpoint for
A op. mode RFG operation 100% H268 A
1 = RFG
0
& &
H267
0 T Save pulse SAVE

1 Upper limit = 120%
Lower limit = -120%
d305
Setting value Motorized
+ 1bit / 0.0061% potentiometer 1
Ramp-up/ramp-down time as RFG [11-13]
B - 1bit / -0.0061% 10000 ms H269
Ramp-up time B
100000 ms Ramp-down TA =
standard rate H265 time 8 ms
4s 25000 ms
Motor potentiometer control:
H266
T 0
fast rate 1. Mot. pot., raise / lower <300ms:
Motorized potentiometer output is incremented or
decremented by 0.0061% (1bit).
300ms & Raise
2. Mot. pot., raise / lower between 300ms and
[16.2] mot. pot. 1, raise
[16.2] mot. pot. 1, lower
>1 T 0 4s:
Motorized potentiometer output ramps-up or
C C
& Lower -down at H265 or H263.
3. Mot. pot., raise / lower > 4s:
Set ramp-function generator Motorized potentiometer output runs-up or
-down at H266 or H264.
Mot. pot. 1 as ramp-function generator:
For H267=1, the motorized potentiometer 1 acts
like a ramp-function generator.
The ramp-up / ramp-down time is set at H269.
D The setpoint is entered at H268. D
0 T Save pulse SAVE

1 Upper limit = 120%
Lower limit = -120%
d306
Setting value Motorized
+1 bit / 0.0061% potentiometer 2
-1 bit / -0.0061% [11-13]
Ramp-up time
100000 ms TA =
E standard rate H263 Ramp-down time 32 ms E
25000 ms H264
T 0 fast rate
4s
300ms & Raise
[16.2] mot. pot. 2, raise

[16.2] mot. pot. 2, lower
>1 T 0
& Lower
Set ramp-function generator

F F

Motorized potentiometers 1 and 2 Sheet 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speed actual X Overspeed, positive

A value, smoothed Bit 0 A
QM
[13.4] H001 120% LU Overspeed, negative Bit 1
QL Alarm from T300
H002 -120% Overcurrent, positive
LL Bit 2
d337
Overcurrent, negative Bit 3
d330 #
&
Torque actual value [6.4]
Drive stalled Bit 4 CU alarms
Torque actual value [3.8] H011 A097 to A104
X Receive CU, faulted Bit 5
QM
B H003 120% LU
FF hex alarm mask B
Receive CB, faulted Bit 6
QL
H004 -120% LL Receive PTP, faulted Bit 7
Receive CU, faulted

&
Receive CB, faulted Bit 0
& & Bit 1

Fault from T300
C After the first valid telegram = 1 C
Receive PTP, faulted Bit 2
d338
& & Bit 3
#
0 T
After the first valid telegram = 1
Bit 4
H012
& CU faults
F116 to F123
0 Bit 5 FF hex fault mask
Bit 6
H005
Delay when enabling the Bit 7
D coupling monitoring functions D
X
0% M QU
Faults and alarms from the T300:
H007 2% L QL
The faults and alarms signaled from the T300 are coded bitwise, a 0 in the ap
1% HY propriate mask bit position inhibits the particular signal/message.
For example, with H012 = 0F7 hex (bit 3=0), the positive overcurrent is suppres
X sed as fault.
Communications monitoring to CU, CB and the PTP interface is only activated
E
0% M
QM
>1 T 0 after a time has expired, which can be selected using H005.
Communication errors to CB and the PTP interface are only signaled, if at least E
H008 10% H009
L one valid telegram had already been received from the particular interface.
500 ms
2% HY delay time, Assignment, messages/operator panel display:
stall protection
Overspeed, positive A097 F116
Speed setpoint [6.8] Overspeed, negative A098 F117
X Overcurrent, positive A099 F118
0% Overcurrent, negative A100 F119
M
QM Signal is = 1 if:
Drive stalled A101 F120
H010 50% L n < H007 and i > H008 Receive from CU faulted A102 F121
and Dn > H010 Receive from CB faulted A103 F122
0% HY Receive from PTP faulted A104 F123
F F

Drive monitoring, fault - and alarm messages Sheet 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Loading
A A
position 2 Changeover 1
Swivelling position
mechanism Swivelling
mechanism
B 1 Glue roll 2 Glue roll B
Splice knife Splice knife
Tension measurement Tension measurement
Tachometer Tachometer
C C
0 T
Tension threshold [10.4]
5 sec Splice enable [17.7]
>1 &
D & S D
R
Partner drive is in the 0 T

closed-loop tension
control mode, 64 ms
binary input, terminal 607
Speed controller
enable [18.8]
1
E E
H 149 = 0
[6.4]
Knife in the cutting position Reverse winding [6.4]

Reverse winding time H148
binary input, terminal 606 3s after splice
10000 ms
Tension controller on T 0
& 1 1 No fast stop
[17.8] 1 sec after splice
20 s
[17.4]
F F

Splice control Sheet 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main contactor on -1
No off 2 -2
No off 3 -3
A Controller enable -4 A
<1> see page 3 1 Inhibit ramp-function generator -5
1 Start ramp-function generator -6
1 RFG, setpoint enable -7
<2> OR operation performed with basic unit signal output
Control Word 1.7 from CBP/CB1
0
Acknowledge fault -8 Control word 1
Inching 1 -9
0 Inching 2 - 10 to the CU board
1 Control from PLC - 11
*) no evaluation in the basic unit possible at present 0 - 12
0
0
- 13 <1>
- 14
0 - 15
B External fault 1 - 16 B
Ready to power-up
Ready
Operation enabled
Fault
No off3
1- -1
C 2- -2 C
3- -3
4- -4
5- No off2 -5
6- -6
7- Power-up inhibit -7 Status word 1
Status word 1 from the 8- Alarm -8
from MS320
9- Setp./act. value diff. within the tolerance bandwidth -9
CU board 10 - Control requested - 10
is send to basic unit,
11 - f/n limit reached - 11
<1> 12 - Fault, undervoltage - 12 word 9 *)
13 - Main contactor energized - 13
14 - Ramp-function generator active - 14 and CBP/CB1, word 1
15 - Clockwise rotating field - 15
D 16 - Kinetic buffering active - 16 D
(only CUVC,CU2) <1>
<2> [20.8] fault, technology
<2> [20.8] alarm, technology
Technology controller at its limit
E 1- System start -1 E
2- Local stop -2
3- No off 3 -3
4- Local run -4
5- Local crawl -5 Status word 2
6- Local inching forwards -6
7- Local inching reverse -7 d336
from MS320
Status word 2 from the 8- Local positioning -8 is send to basic unit,
CU board 9-
10 - (not used)
Speed setpoint is zero
Web break
-9
- 10 word 10 *)
11 - Tension control is on - 11
<1> 12 - System operation - 12 and CBP/CB1, word 4
13 - Speed actual value is zero - 13
14 - Limit value monitor 1 - 14 <1>
15 - Limit value monitor 2 - 15
16 - Local operator control selected - 16
F F

Explanation of the control- and status words between T300 and CU Sheet 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Explanations of the abbreviations and symbols in the block diagram

A A
CF = "Output = Set input" command X Y LU Y
EN = Controller enable = Ramp-function X = Limiter
generator LL (LL<=Y<=LU)
HY = Hysteresis
KP = Proportional gain
B LL = Lower limit value X1 Y B
X2 = Divider
(Y=X1/X2)
= Changeover switch
LU = Upper limit value (quiescent position
M = Threshold I (I=O) as shown)
MUX = Multiplexer, changeover switch
PTP = Peer-to-peer protocol
=1 T 0 = Switch-on delay,
QL = "At the lower limit" signal = Exclusive or can be retriggered
C QU = "At the upper limit" signal C
S = "Setting" command
SV = Setting value
X1 Y 0 T
Ta = Sampling time X2 = Subtractor
(Y=X1-X2)
= Switch-out delay,
TD = Ramp-down time can be retriggered
TI = Integrating time constant
D TN = Integral action time D
TRU = Ramp-up/rounding-off time X1 Y Maximum value 0 Conversion,
X2
MAX
= generator 1
... = binary quantities into
TRD = Ramp-down/rounding-off time (Y=max. of #
X1 and X2)
7/15 a byte/word quantity
TU = Ramp-up time
X = Main input quantity, actual value
Y = Main output quantity, manipulated variable
E YA = Acceleration dv/dt = Absolute
generator
value Y Block to save X at E
X SAVE
= power failure
YE = Control error
YI = I component
HI = Hold Integrator
-1 = Polarity reversal = PT1 element
F = Monoflop F
T

Explanation of the abbreviations and symbols Sheet 23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Die STRUC G Pläne sind aus der Betriebsanleitung „Achswickler MS320“
zu entnehmen.
Bestell-Nr: 6SE7080-0CX84-2AH1
STRUC G function diagrams - refere to the manual „Axial Winder MS320“.

Order-No: 6SE7087-6CX84-2AH1
To From received
SIEMENS AG
A&D MC
Frauenauracherstr. 80
91056 Erlangen
Contact person
Code word:
"Standard software packages"
Kcopy to
ZN/LG ...................................
Mrs / Mr. Telephone
Your reference and your letter from Our reference City and date
Problem-/Fault profile: Standard axial winder software package
Standard axial winder software package:

Software-Version:
Configuring (Software?)
Technological modul:
Type:
Release:
Interface module:
Type:
Release:
Software version:
Protocol used:
Basic drive:
Type:
Release:
Software version:
Problem-/fault profile:
(use the reverse side or a separate sheet)
The problem/fault occured under following conditions:
Urgently required for a precise fault/error diagnostics:

- completed parameter list of the technological module according to Appendix I attached
- completed parameter list of the basic drive, attached
Continuation problem/fault profile:
02.97 477 407.4082.76
08.98 477 407.4182.76
04.99 477 407.4182.76

Chapter Changes Pages Version date
0 Warning information and product limitation Page: 2 2 04.99
1 Overview reviewed edition 10 04.99
2 Interfaces Page: 2, 3 6 04.99
3 Terminal assignment Page: 1, 8, 9, 12, 13, 14 14 04.99
4 Function description reviewed edition 24 04.99
5 Configuring instructions Page: 14, 33 34 04.99
6 Parameters Page: 1, 4, 5, 7, 25, 26, 52 04.99
29, 39, 42, 43, 44, 45, 47,
48, 49
7 Basic drive converter parameters Page: 6 6 04.99
8 Commissioning the winder reviewed edition 16 04.99
9 Diagnostic LED, Alarms, Faults reviewed edition 6 04.99
10 SIMADYN D functions 4 05.98
11 Others 2 05.98
12 Changes Page: 1 2 04.99
13 Short parameter list Page: 8 10 04.99
14 Appendix: Block diagrams and STUC G diagrams 2 05.98
Block diagrams Sheet: 3a, 3b, 5, 7, 8, 14 26 04.99
STUC G diagrams FP_DIAM: page 9 124 04.99
FP_PARAM: page 1
Problem, fault profile Page: 1, 2 2 04.99
Group: Automation and Drives (A&D)

Division: Variable-Speed Drive Systems
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Subject to change Order Number: 6SE7087-6CX84-2AH1
Angular Synchronous Control MS 340
for Technology board T300
in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES 6SE70/71
ϕ1 = ϕ2 * ü
ϕ1 ϕ2
Operating instructions
Edition 03.99 Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX84-4AH1
This Instruction manual is available in the following langages:
Sprache German French
Language
Bestell-Nr.
6SE7080-0CX84-4AH1 6SE7087-7CX84-4AH1
Order-No.
English
Contents
0 Warning information and product limitation.........................................................0-1
1 Overview ..................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 General overview .............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Validity .............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.1 Hardware/Software requirement ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 T300 technology module .................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.4 Overview of the angular synchronous control................................................................................... 1-9
1.4.1 Angular synchronous control features......................................................................................... 1-9
1.4.2 Standard software package on floppy disk ................................................................................. 1-9
1.5 Information regarding the use of the angular synchronous control ................................................ 1-10
1.5.1 Applications ............................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.5.2 Applications which may not be practical.................................................................................... 1-10
1.5.3 Applications which do not permit angular synchronism ............................................................ 1-10
1.6 Explanation of the most important terminology used...................................................................... 1-11
1.6.1 Speed synchronism................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.6.2 Angular synchronism................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.6.3 Differences between speed- and angular synchronism ............................................................ 1-12
1.6.4 Offset and synchronization........................................................................................................ 1-13
1.7 Basic structure of angular synchronous control.............................................................................. 1-14
1.7.1 Several slave drives .................................................................................................................. 1-15
2 Interfaces .................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Interface, technology board ⇔ basic drive converter ....................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Setpoints from the T300 to the basic drive converter ................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1.1 SIMOVERT VC and MC with the CUVC and CUMC modules ........................................... 2-2
2.1.1.2 SIMOVERT VC and SC with the CU2 and CU3 modules .................................................. 2-3
2.1.2 Actual values from the basic drive converter to the T300 ........................................................... 2-4
2.1.2.1 SIMOVERT VC and MC with the CUVC and CUMC modules ........................................... 2-4
2.1.2.2 SIMOVERT VC and SC with the CU2 and CU3 modules .................................................. 2-5
2.2 Communication boards, CB1/CBP, SCB1/SCB2 ............................................................................. 2-6
2.2.1 Send data (actual values, technological functions ⇒ automation) in a 16ms sampling time...... 2-6
2.2.1.1 Telegram structure ............................................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.1.2 Select status word T300..................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.1.2.1 Select status word T300 with H217=0: ........................................................................ 2-8
2.2.1.2.2 Selecting the status word T300 with H217=1: ............................................................. 2-8
2.2.2 Receive data (setpoint, automation ⇒ technological function) in a 4ms sampling time ............. 2-9
2.2.2.1 Telegram structure ............................................................................................................. 2-9
2.3 T300 Monitor interface (SS1, term. X132, X133) ........................................................................... 2-11
2.4 T300 Peer-to-peer interface (SS2, term. X134).............................................................................. 2-12
2.4.1 Peer-to-peer interface, connector X134.................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.2 Peer send data (actual values) in the 4ms sampling time: ....................................................... 2-14
2.4.2.1 Select status word T300................................................................................................... 2-14
2.4.2.1.1 Select status word T300 with H216=0: ...................................................................... 2-14
2.4.2.1.2 Selecting the status word T300 with H216=1: ........................................................... 2-15
2.4.3 Peer receive data (setpoints) in the 4ms sampling time: .......................................................... 2-15
Siemens AG Angular synchronous control I

Manual
Contents
3 Basic converter setting .......................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Logging-on the boards ...................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 CU2,CU3 ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 CUVC,CUMC............................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Operating mode ................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1 CU2,CU3 ..................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 CUVC,CUMC............................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Motor data and speed controller........................................................................................................ 3-4
3.4 Setpoint channel................................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.5 Open-loop control.............................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.6 Actual value transfer from the CU to T300........................................................................................ 3-7
3.6.1 CU2,CU3 ..................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.6.2 CUVC,CUMC............................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.7 Data transfer CU ⇔ peer-to-peer (T300) .......................................................................................... 3-8
3.8 Data transfer CU ⇔ communications board (CB,SCB) .................................................................... 3-9
3.9 Other information .............................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.10 Free function blocks CUVC, CUMC .............................................................................................. 3-10
4 Terminal assignment.............................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Connector X6, Binary inputs.............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Signal level and SE300 terminal assignment .............................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Byte-serial data input ................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.3 Thumbwheel switch ..................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Connector X6, Binary outputs ........................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1 Level and Assignments................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.2 Thumbwheel switch ..................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3 Connector X5, Analog inputs and outputs......................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 Analog inputs ............................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.2 Analog outputs............................................................................................................................. 4-6
4.4 Pulse encoders.................................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.4.1 Information regarding the pulse encoder types ........................................................................... 4-7
4.4.2 15 V power supply units for pulse encoders ................................................................................ 4-7
4.4.3 Encoder pulse numbers............................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.4 Pulse encoder inputs of the T300.............................................................................................. 4-10
4.4.5 Fine signal evaluation using the rough signal............................................................................ 4-11
4.4.6 Pulse tachometer connection at CU .......................................................................................... 4-13
4.4.6.1 Pulse tachometer connection at CU2,CU3 ....................................................................... 4-13
4.4.6.2 Pulse tachometer connection at CUVC,CUMC ................................................................ 4-13
4.5 Service interface, connectors X132 and X133 ................................................................................ 4-14
4.6 Peer-to-peer interface, connector X134 .......................................................................................... 4-14
II Siemens AG Angular synchronous control

Manual
Contents
5 Function description...............................................................................................5-1
5.1 Actual value sensing......................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Speed actual value sensing ........................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.2 Position actual value sensing ...................................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.3 Position difference sensing ......................................................................................................... 5-5
5.1.4 Offset sensing & synchronization................................................................................................ 5-6
5.2 Byte serial setpoint input................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.3 Thumbwheel switch - setpoint input................................................................................................ 5-13
5.4 Setpoint inputs via the USS interface ............................................................................................. 5-14
5.4.1 CU2,CU3................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.4.2 CUVC,CUMC ............................................................................................................................ 5-14
5.5 Closed-loop speed control .............................................................................................................. 5-15
5.5.1 Ratio (absolute value) ............................................................................................................... 5-15
5.5.2 Percentage change in the ratio ................................................................................................. 5-16
5.5.3 Master speed setpoint and speed setpoint ............................................................................... 5-17
5.5.4 Inertia compensation................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.5.5 Inching....................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.5.6 Speed controller, Kp adaption ................................................................................................... 5-19
5.5.6.1 CU2,CU3 .......................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.5.6.2 CUVC,CUMC.................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.6 Angular control................................................................................................................................ 5-20
5.6.1 Enable signals ........................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.6.2 Offset and direction of rotation-dependent synchronization reference value ............................ 5-21
5.6.3 Smoothing, position difference actual value.............................................................................. 5-23
5.6.4 Limit value monitor, position difference actual value................................................................. 5-23
5.6.5 Angular controller ...................................................................................................................... 5-24
5.7 Synchronization .............................................................................................................................. 5-25
5.7.1 Fail-save synchronization by means of enable threshold.......................................................... 5-28
5.7.2 Increasing the noise immunity of the synchronizing pulse ........................................................ 5-31
5.7.3 Synchronism reached ............................................................................................................... 5-32
5.8 Open-loop control ........................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.9 Faults, alarms, status displays........................................................................................................ 5-33
5.9.1 General information regarding faults and alarms...................................................................... 5-33
5.9.2 Communications monitoring (F120, F122)................................................................................ 5-34
5.9.3 Binary status displays................................................................................................................ 5-34
5.10 Diagnostics LED, alarms, faults.................................................................................................... 5-35
5.10.1 Diagnostics LED on the T300 ................................................................................................. 5-35
6 Parameters...............................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Parameter handling .......................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Data types and data formats............................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Parameter list.................................................................................................................................... 6-4
7 Start-up ....................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Start-up speed control ...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Start-up, closed-loop angular control................................................................................................ 7-8
7.2.1 Instructions to optimize the angular controller........................................................................... 7-10
7.3 Start-up - synchronization ............................................................................................................... 7-12
7.4 Parameterization with Simovis for Windows................................................................................... 7-15
7.4.1 Creating the data base for a technology type............................................................................ 7-15
7.4.2 T300 parameterization .............................................................................................................. 7-17
7.4.3 Important notes ......................................................................................................................... 7-17
Siemens AG Angular synchronous control III

Manual
Contents
8 STRUC G graphic diagram display ....................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Sheet structure .................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Structure and display of a function block .......................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Connector supply for the function blocks .......................................................................................... 8-2
8.4 Information in the function package .................................................................................................. 8-3
9 Others ...................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Terminology/abbreviations ................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 Literature ........................................................................................................................................... 9-1
10 Changes............................................................................................................... 10-1
11 Appendix: Block diagrams, Short parameter list, STRUC G Diagrams ......... 11-1
IV Siemens AG Angular synchronous control

Manual

WARNING
or property damage.
and maintenance.
Definitions
practices.
• DANGER
• WARNING
• CAUTION
Siemens AG Angular synchronous control 0-1

Manual
• NOTE
CAUTION
WARNING
or property damage.
and maintenance.
must be observed.
NOTE
statements contained here do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty..
0-2 Siemens AG Angular synchronous control

Manual
1 Overview
1 Overview
1.1 General overview

The 6SE70/71 SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES converters can be expanded with a T300 technology board
and a CB1/CBP interface board (PROFIBUS) or SCB1/SCB2 (USS-, peer-to-peer protocol). There are
standard software packages for the T300 for frequently occuring applications, for example, in this case,
the angular synchronous control software package. These software packages are supplied as
programmed EPROM submodules (MS300). If the technological functions of the standard software
packages have to be expanded to fulfill specific customer requirements, then software packages can be
obtained on floppy disk and modified using SIMADYN D tools (STRUC Version 4.2 or higher).
The standard software packages can run with and without CB1/CBP or SCB1/2 interface boards.
1.2 Validity
This User Manual is valid for the standard ”Angular synchronous control” MS340 software package,
Release 1.70. Differences to the previous versions are listed in Section 10 ”Changes”.
With the exception of the expanded functionality, described in the ”Changes” section, this software
release is compatible to the previous releases. This is the reason that this Manual can be used for the
start-up of previous versions.
The functions explained here for SIMADYN#D and the T300 technology board only refer to the standard
MS340 ”Angular synchronous control” software package and they do not represent a general
statement for SIMADYN#D or the technology module. For instance, ”fastest cycle time 4 ms” only means
that no faster cycle time may be used in the MS340 standard software package.

Manual
1 Overview




CAUTION: When a t300 board is installed in a SIMOVERT SC unit, the pulse frequency
of the converter must not be increased above the factory setting value of P761
= 5kHz to avoid overloading the convertre processor.

Manual
1 Overview
The standard software packages can run with and without communication board (CB1/CBP or SCB1/2).
In this case the parameter H212 and H213 ( Alarm-/ Fault mask ) has to be set (refer to section 2)


SCB1 board

possible!
- Only 2 Setpoint interconnections from base unit (respectively SIMOLINK) to the T300
connectors can be softwired via connectors (with the 2 free select values = word 9 and
word 10 from Dual-Port-Ram DPR), refEre to section 2.
More than 2 setpoint from base unit (respectively SIMOLINK) can not be softwired to
the T300!
- The Control words can not be softwired via connectors from base unit (respectively
SIMOLINK) to the T300.
- For the actual values interconnections ( actuals values from T300 to the base unit,
respectively SIMOLINK ) only the fixed defined signals can be used
(refere to section 2). No more values can be selected!
An accurate examination is necessary bevor installing a SIMOLINK Interface board

with the „Angular synchronous control“ module, to make sure that SIMOLINK is a
reasonable and praticable solution.

Manual
1 Overview
electronics box.
Mounting Positions
1 3 2
A F Electronics
Box
Data Flow

- CUMC on ADB Adap-
tion Board
- CB1
- SCB1
- SCB2

location 3. The T300 can not communicate with a communication board mounted on the CU ( in slot A
or C ).

Manual
1 Overview


A PC or programmer with the SIMOVIS service program (refer also to section 7.4)

Manual
1 Overview
1.3 T300 technology module

The T300 technology module is a processor module, which can be freely configured using STRUC. It is
compatible to SIMADYN D, and it has been especially designed for use with SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES drive converters. The function of the modules is defined using the function block-
oriented STRUC L / STRUC G configuring language. The configured software which is generated is
programmed in a program memory sub-module, which is inserted on the processor module. An EEPROM
is provided on the program memory sub-module to save parameter changes (EEPROM = electrically
write- and deletable memory). Communications with the basic drive is realized through a parallel interface,
which is implemented as DUAL PORT RAM (DPR).

RAM memory 128 Kbytes
Communications with unit Parallel bus, 2 kbyte dual port RAM
Program memory sub-module MS300 with 512 kbyte EPROM and 2 kbyte EEPROM
Analog outputs 4 11 bits + sign ± 10 V, 10 mA
Serial interfaces 2 1* RS232 and RS485 (2 wire)
1* RS485 (2- or 4 wire)
Pulse encoder inputs 2 2* track A,B, zero, fmax = 400 kHz
Table 1.3.1: Overview of the T300 technology module. For details refer to the Instruction Manual and connecting diagram T300,
The following components are required to operate the angular synchronous operation module:

T300 technology module 6SE7090-0XX87-4AH0
including SC58 and SC60 connecting cables, SE300
terminal block and Instruction Manual for the module
in German/English
Local bus adapter LBA is required to install a T300 6SE7090-0XX84-4AH0
for the MASTERDRIVES electronics box and possibly a Com board
ADB carrier module is required to install a Com 6SE7090-0XX84-0KA0
to accept the CBP board
MS340 angular synchronous operation 6SE7098-4XX84-0AH0
on the memory module, without manual
MS340 angular synchronous operation manual German 6SE7080-0CX84-4AH1
or or or
Manual, Angular Synchronous Control MS340 English 6SE7087-6CX84-4AH1
or or or
Manuel Marche Synchrone Angulaire MS340 French 6SE7087-7CX84-4AH1

Manual
1 Overview

Further, if the standard software package is to be modified, the following is also available:
− STRUC L PT to implement your own functions, in list form. This can run on a PC under WINDOWS.
− STRUC G PT to implement your own functions in a graphic form. This can run on a PC under SCO-
UNIX.
− Prommer for memory modules with connection via a parallel PC interface.
− STRUC Service Program for the symbolic monitor.
− STRUC configuring software for the angular synchronous control on floppy disk.
Refer to Section 1.4.2 and Catalog DA65.10 for more precise information.

Manual
1 Overview
+24V +24V
Fine
pulse
+15V
Rough Zero Zero
+15V
X133
6
X5 7
501
+ A RS485, 2-wire
±10V 502 - D
T/Rx+
503 with PC / PG
+ 9
±10V A
504 - T/Rx-
505 RS485 interface
+ X132
±10V A can be used
506 - RxD 1
D TTL
±10V 508 3
11 bits + sign - D
±10V / 10kΩ 4
511
±10V
+ A 5
512 - D X134
RS485, 4-wire
513 Microprocessor
+ A Tx+ 13
±10V 514 - CPU:
D Tx- 14
80C186
+ 20MHz Rx+ 11
516 - D Rx- 12
X6
15
+24V 610
11 bit + sign X5
+
601
D 509
602 A
510
603
24VDC D
( input current: 605 A
520
8 mA typ )
D 521 11 Bit + sign
607 ±10V / 10mA
A
608 522
D 523
+24V 630
A
524
+
611 X6
612
memory 631
613 module, e.g.
632
8 binary inputs 614
MS300
24VDC 633
( input current : 615 8 binary outputs
634 24VDC / max. 100mA.
8mA typ)
635
636
638
640

board, e.g. Dual- basic drive conv.
Dual-
CBP with ADP, Port- Port- CUVC, CUMC,
CB1, SCB1 RAM RAM CU2 or CU3
or SCB2
X135 X137

Fig. 1.3.2

Manual
1 Overview
1.4 Overview of the angular synchronous control

The standard ”angular synchronous control” software package, permits, in conjunction with the
appropriate converters and technology boards, angular synchronism between two or several drives (when
using several T300). If required, synchronizing marks, received from the pulse encoder-zero pulse or from
BEROs (proximity switch) can be evaluated to establish synchronous (angular) operation. It can be
commissioned without any SIMADYN D-specific resources using the PMU and OP1 converter operator
control panels or SIMOVIS and TELEMASTER (connected at connector X132 of the T300).
1.4.1 Angular synchronous control features

- Angular synchronism for ratios, which can be set in wide limits
- Synchronizing both drives with one another
- Offset input, which can be selected dependent on the direction of rotation
- Reverse rotation inhibit, selectable
- Overspeed- and anti-stall protection
- Inching
- Speed controller adaption at low speeds possible
- Angular controller adaption as a function of the ratio possible

Notes:
Version 1.5: The Peer-to-Peer blocs are now in the Standard library FBSLIB.
For the Version V1.50 STRUC -Version ≥ V4.2.3 is required!
Caution: The Peer-to-peer software is not available in STRUC V4.2.2.
This standard „angular synchronous control“ software package cannot be adapt with
STRUC V4.2.2.
Version 1.7: (STRUC V4.2.4) In this Version Problems by synchonizing with linear axis with only one
synchronizing signal where solved, ( refere to section 10 ). Onwards Version 1.7, the library FBSLT1 with
version 990204V420, or newer is required.

1
disk
required

Manual
1 Overview
1.5 Information regarding the use of the angular synchronous control
1.5.1 Applications
Angular synchronous control must always be used if it is necessary to establish angular synchronism
between mechanical units, for example shafts or gearboxes.
Some examples:
a) Used instead of a mechanical shaft:

- Crane traversing gear
- Elevating tables
- Charging and discharging equipment, for example for furnaces or similar
- Lathes
- Printing machines where there are less stringent requirements on the printed image, for example for
tubes and comparable round materials
b) Used instead of gearboxes, especially changeover gearboxes:

- Packing machines
- Book spine gluing machines
- Various machines in the textile industry
- Lathes
- Transfer positions between two machine parts
1.5.2 Applications which may not be practical

These also include applications, which can be solved using closed-loop speed control. Closed-loop speed
control is preferable over angular synchronous control as a result of the simpler controller optimization, if
the actual task permits this. Generally, angular synchronous control does not result in an improvement in
the control dynamic performance.
Examples:
- Stretching units, for example, for fibers

- Roller table operations, which are sub-divided into several drive groups
- Rolling mill drives which are connected with slip through the material itself
1.5.3 Applications which do not permit angular synchronism

These include, among others, almost all situations which require load equalization or closed-loop tension
control.
Examples are:
- Two or several motors operate on a shaft or are otherwise rigidly coupled

- Conveyor belt drives
- Chain conveyors
- Drives, which are coupled rigidly through the material web
- Closed-loop tension controls (tension transducer), or closed-loop position controls (dancer roll).

Manual
1 Overview
1.6 Explanation of the most important terminology used

The following model illustrates angular synchronous control:
S_M S_S
N
F
The two disks ”disk, master drive” (S_M) and ”disk, slave drive” (S_S) rotate in the same direction, with
the same speed. Disk S_M has a fixed speed. Disk S_S is operated, either with speed- or angular
synchronous control which is referred to disk S_S.
If the line on disk S_M is pointing vertically upwards (i.e. to ”12 a’clock”), stroboscope S is triggered via
cam N and sensor F. Thus, although the disks are moving, the observer sees a stationary image of the
lines on disks S_M and S_S. Only the disks are illustrated in the following. The position of the marks on
the disks with respect to one another is now observed.
Note:
These observations, for reasons of transparency and simplicity, are assuming a 1:1 speed ratio between
the disks. These observations are also vaid for other ratios with the exception at synchronization and
offset measurement.
1.6.1 Speed synchronism

The drives above receive the same setpoint which can have a ratio setting for the individual drives. All
drives operate speed controlled.
1.6.2 Angular synchronism

In addition to speed synchronism, the pulses of the master drive and the slave drive, are fed to a closed-
loop position control; higher-level control to the speed controller. A ratio can also be set. There is another
way of looking at this: The system controls the difference of the pulses received from the master and
slave drives, taking into account a possible speed/position ratio between the drives.

Manual
1 Overview
1.6.3 Differences between speed- and angular synchronism

In undisturbed steady-state operation, no differences can be identified, contrary to operation with
disturbances. The following table clearly shows the differences.
Status S_M Speed synchronism S_S Angular synchronism S_S
Undisturbed,
steady-state
operation
The same
disturbance
is fed to disk
S_S
Disturbance
corrected
Result:
After the disturbance has been corrected, disk S_S, for angular synchronous control, goes back to the
original position, contrary to that which would occur for closed-loop speed control. The synchronous
angular controller is operational until the number of pulses received from the master and slave drives is
the same. (In this case, it is assumed, that for angular synchronism, the maximum possible pulse
difference has not been exceeded!).

Manual
1 Overview
1.6.4 Offset and synchronization

The number of impulses, which are received between the two master- and slave drive synchronizing
marks, is known as offset. It is assumed, that the number of synchronizing pulses between the master-
and slave drive is the same at the machine component which is to be synchronized.
Displacement
S_M S_S
2
1 Position of the zero mark, master drive

2 Position of the zero mark, slave drive
Synchronization means that the master- and slave drive take-up a specific position to one another as a
function of their synchronizing signals (from pulse encoders, contacts, BEROs etc.). This position is either
permanently entered internally, or using an external setpoint.
Action, status Master S_M Slave S_S
Offset V1 is measured, and is V1

synchronized with an offset input of
zero.
Synchronization completed
V2
Offset V2 entered
The offset is entered as pulse number (quadrupled pulses) (refer to Section 5.1.4).
Synchronization and offset input can also be realized simultaneously. This is always the case for
permanently entered offset values. In this case, the final value is directly approached.
Offset and synchronization are explained using a rotary movement. These considerations are
also essentially valid for linear motion

Manual
1 Overview
1.7 Basic structure of angular synchronous control
S S
n*L
Master
ref.value
SE300/ SE300/
T300 T 300
1)
SR/UR CU CU
SR/UR SR/UR
nM nS
M M M
nΦM
Master drive Amplifier if Slave drive 1 Additional slave drives

required
1) May not be required for open-loop or closed-loop frequency controlled AC drives
SR/UR: AC/DC converter S: Commands and signals, setpoints and

actual values
nM: Speed actual value, master nS: Speed actual value, slave
n*L: Master speed setpoint nΦM: Speed and position information, master
Master- and slave drive(s) have a common reference value, which may be weighted in the slave drive by
a ratio. The common reference value is used as feed-forward control of the slave drive, and results in the
required speed. The higher-level angular offset controller guarantees angular synchronism, and corrects,
essentially steady-state error, in the lower-level speed control loop (also refer to the block diagrams in the
Apendix).

Manual
1 Overview
Synchronization does not change anything on the basic closed-loop control structure, as, for
synchronization, a correction signal for the position difference actual value is generated from the position
of the synchronizing marks.
Note:
Synchronization is only necessary if the actual machine requires it. Synchronization, and the availability
of the synchronizing marks (zero pulses), are not a prerequisite for the angular synchronism control.
1.7.1 Several slave drives

If angular synchronism has to be established for several drives, then the highest-rating drive or the drive
with the longest stabilizing time should be selected as the master drive if no process-related restrictions
apply. However, if this drive is not steady, then a smoother-running drive can be selected, thus deviating
somewhat from this recommendation.
Notes:
The master drive pulse encoder should be connected in parallel to the appropriate slave drive inputs.
The master drive pulse encoder may not be overloaded!
In addition to the input resistance of the T300 technology board, each 6.3 kΩ, it may be necessary to
take into account the significant capacitive load of the pulse encoder cables.

Manual
1 Overview

Manual
2 Interfaces
2 Interfaces
Hardware and software (standard software package) support an extremely flexible, i. e. plant-specific
interface processing which can be adapted to the task requirements. The basic drive converter
(CU board) and the T300 are parameterized to define which interfaces are used and how they are used.
In order to obtain a functioning (synchronous) drive, the basic drive converter must be parameterized as
explained in Section . When supplied, the standard software package has the pre-set standard interface
assignment where all of the necessary open-loop control and setpoint/actual value signals from the
SE300 terminals, can run.
2.1 Interface, technology board ⇔ basic drive converter

Data transfer between the T300 technology module and the basic drive is realized through a parallel
interface (DUAL-PORT-RAM) using the backplane bus board LBA. . The process data, i. e. the setpoints
and actual values are written and read cyclically from the technology module and the basic drive. The data
transfer, involving the parameters, is realized in a slow cycle time.
The data to be transferred have 16-bit words (2 byte).
The basic drive has to be parameterized in a certain way for the standard software package; refer to
Section 3 and the Instruction Manual for 6SE70/71.
The parameterization for the SIMOVERT VC and MC drive converters with CUVC and CUMC modules is
described in the following Sections, as well as the parameterization of the SIMOVERT VC and SC drive
converters with the predecessor modules, CU2 and CU3.

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.1.1 Setpoints from the T300 to the basic drive converter

The technology board transfers the following data (as 16-bit values) to the basic drive converter as basic
drive converter setpoints:
2.1.1.1 SIMOVERT VC and MC with the CUVC and CUMC modules
Value transferred DPR Equipment Used on the basic drive converter Value range
from the T300 location setting (if so set) and reference
Control word 1 1 3100 Bit: Use

to
0: ON (main contactor); 1 = ON
3115 1: /OFF2 (voltage-free); 0 = OFF
2: /OFF3 (fast stop); 0 = OFF
3: from CB/SCB Control word 1 bit 3
directly transferred 1:1 to the basic unit
6: Setpoint enable; 1 = enable
7: Acknowledge fault; 1 = ackn.ledge
8: Inching1
9: Inching 2
10: PZD control request ( = fixed 1)
15: Fault, external 1
Speed setpoint 2 P443=3002 100% =rated speed (H012) -200%...
(including +199.99%
transformation and
inching 1/2)
Reserved for 32 bit 3 3003
Control word 2 4 3400 9: Speed controller enable
to
3415
Supplementary 5 P438=3005 100% =rated speed (H012) Pre-setting
speed setpoint(2) (H112)
from the angular -10%...+10%
controller
Kp adaption for the 6 P232=3006
speed controller
Reserve 7 3007
Pre-control value for 8 P506=3008 P506 for CUVC
the speed controller P262=3008 P262 for CUMC
Table 2.1.1.a: Setpoints to the basic drive converter CUVC, CUMC

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.1.1.2 SIMOVERT VC and SC with the CU2 and CU3 modules
Value transferred DPR Equipment Used on the basic drive converter Value range
from the T300 location setting (if so set) and reference
Control word 1 1 3001 Bit: Use
0: ON (main contactor); 1 = ON
1: /OFF2 (voltage-free); 0 = OFF
2: /OFF3 (fast stop); 0 = OFF
6: Setpoint enable; 1 = enable
7: Acknowledge fault; 1 = ackn.ledge
8: Inching1
9: Inching 2
10: PZD control request ( = fixed 1)
15: Fault, external 1
Speed setpoint 2 P443=3002 100% =rated speed (H012) -200%...
(including +199.99%
transformation and
inching 1/2)
Reserved for 32 bit 3 3003
Control word 2 4 3004 9: Speed controller enable
Supplementary 5 P438=3005 100% =rated speed (H012) Pre-setting
speed setpoint(2) (H112)
from the angular -10%...+10%
controller
Kp adaption for the 6 P226=3006
speed controller
Reserve 7 3007
Pre-control value for 8 P506=3008
the speed controller
Table 2.1.1.b: Setpoints to the basic drive converter CU2, CU3
The T300 control word bits for the basic drive converter consist of fixed values and the control word bit
sources, selected on the T300 (terminals, interface boards). The T300 supplies the basic drive converter
with the following control word bits, however they are only effective in the equipment when the basic drive
converter is appropriately parameterized:
Note:
Only the bits either used or supplied from the standard software package are listed here.

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.1.2 Actual values from the basic drive converter to the T300
Drive converter actual values can be transferred with the drive converter parameter P694 (CU2,CU3), and
P734 (CUVC,CUMC) to T300. It must be appropriately set (refer to Section 3). The standard software
package requires status word 1 (ZUW1) and if required status word 2 (ZUW2) and control word 1 from
the drive converter.
Additional actual values, for monitoring, for output via analog outputs (SE300) or via serial interfaces
(CB1/CBP, SCB1/2 and T300 peer) can be sent to the T300. However, they are not required for the
angular synchronous control function (can be selected as required).
2.1.2.1 SIMOVERT VC and MC with the CUVC and CUMC modules

Values transferred from Dual port RAM Is required for the appropriate T300 setting
the drive converter to the location and
T300 converter setting
Status word 1 1 - from the ”RUN” bit2:
P734.1=32 Setpoint enable control,
ON command and
reset/enable position sensing;
- slave fault can be sent to the master,
- stall signal,
- ”comparison frequency reached” signal,
- supplementary setpoint 2 disabled (=angular
controller output) for OFF and RFG=inactive;
(RFG=ramp function generator)
Can be selected as required 2 Select value 1, 2, 3 or 4 (display parameter d154)
Can be selected as required 3 Select value 1, 2, 3 or 4 (display parameter d156)
Status word 2 4 Bit0: ”Excitation ended” for setpoint enable-control
P734.4=33 (display parameter d155)
Control word 1 5 Bit0: ”ON/OFF”
P734.5=30 Supplementary setpoint2 (angular controller output)
can be set to 0 if there is an OFF command and if the
ramp-function generator is no longer active (the drive is
at reference frequency 0).
This zero setting must be enabled using H257=0.
Thus, this can be used to prevent the drive continuing
to run if there is an OFF command and if there is a
supplementary setpoint2 signal which is greater than
the OFF-shutdown frequency (P800).
Can be selected as required 6 Select value 1 or 3
Can be selected as required 7 Select value 1, 2, 3 or 4
Can be selected as required 8 Select value 2 or 4
Can be selected as required 9 Speed setpoint selection from the basic unit USS
interface
P734.9=20xy (SST1)
or (xy = selected word from the appropriate USS
P734.9=60xy (SST2) telegram).
( refer to Sect. 5.4 )
Can be selected as required 10 Speed setpoint selection from the basic unit USS
interface
P734.10=20xy (SST1)
or (xy = selected word from the appropriate USS
P734.10=60xy (SST2) telegram).
( refer to Sect. 5.4 )
Table 2.1.2a: CUVC,CUMC Basic drive converter-actual values to T300

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.1.2.2 SIMOVERT VC and SC with the CU2 and CU3 modules
Values transferred from Dual port Is required for the appropriate T300 setting
the drive converter to the RAM location
T300 and
converter
setting
Status word 1 1 - from the ”RUN” bit2:
P694.1=968 Setpoint enable control,
ON command and
reset/enable position sensing;
- slave fault can be sent to the master,
- stall signal,
- ”comparison frequency reached” signal,
- supplementary setpoint 2 disabled (=angular controller
output) for OFF and RFG=inactive; (RFG=ramp function
generator)
Can be selected as 2 Select value 1, 2, 3 or 4 (display parameter d154)
required
Can be selected as 3 Select value 1, 2, 3 or 4 (display parameter d156)
required
Status word 2 4 Bit0: ”Excitation ended” for setpoint enable-control
P694.4=553 (display parameter d155)
Control word 1 5 Bit0: ”ON/OFF”
P694.5=550 Supplementary setpoint2 (angular controller output) can be
set to 0 if there is an OFF command and if the ramp-
function generator is no longer active (the drive is at
reference frequency 0).
This zero setting must be enabled using H257=0.
Thus, this can be used to prevent the drive continuing to
run if there is an OFF command and if there is a
supplementary setpoint2 signal which is greater than the
OFF-shutdown frequency (P514).
Can be selected as 6 Select value 1 or 3
required
Can be selected as 7 Select value 1, 2, 3 or 4
required
Can be selected as 8 Select value 1 or 4
required
Can be selected as 9 Speed setpoint selection from the basic unit USS interface
required P694.9=529 ( refer to Sect. 5.4 )
Can be selected as 10 Speed setpoint selection from the basic unit USS interface
required P694.10=534 ( refer to Sect. 5.4 )
Table 2.1.2b: CU2,CU3 Basic drive converter-actual values to T300

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.2 Communication boards, CB1/CBP, SCB1/SCB2

Note:
The configured software can be operated with and without the interface module.
Parameters H212 and H213 should be appropriately set if the interface module is not
used (suppressing alarm/fault messages).
- See also Notes 3, section 7.4.3
Fixed and freely selectable setpoints/actual values can be transferred via the following communication
boards
CB1/CBP (PROFIBUS),
SCB1 (peer-to-peer with fiber-optic cable),
SCB2 (peer-to-peer with 2-wire RS485)
The associated parameters to select the values must be appropriately set in the standard software
package. The communication boards are parameterized on the basic drive converter (protocol, baudrate,
bus adress.
The standard software package defines which net data are to be transferred on the T300. It occupies 6
telegram words which can, to some extent, be set:
The receive status is displayed with the parameter d228. in case of communication fault (d228=0), d229
display the error code.
2.2.1 Send data (actual values, technological functions ⇒ automation) in a 16ms

sampling time
2.2.1.1 Telegram structure

The standard MS340 software package supplies 6 words of process data to be higher-level automation
system. The select values which are transferred can be selected.
The following telegram structure is obtained:
Data word No. in the send telegram Significance

PROFIBUS DP USS protocol
PPO 1, 2, 5 PPO 3, 4 PKW=4 PKW=0
1 - 1 - Parameter identification
2 - 2 - Index
5 1 5 1 Status word, MS340
6 2 6 2 Select value 1 MS340
10 6 10 6 Speed actual value, slave
11 - 11 7 Not used (=0)
12 - 12 8 Not used (=0)
The actual values supplied from the T300 (select values) are always valid: 4000h = 100%
Table 2.2.1.a: Telegram structure, technological module → automation

Manual
2 Interfaces
The telegram length can be set using H226; reset is then required! ( initialization value )
Telegram word Send data

Status word Selectable:
H217=0:
Selected from the T300 fault/alarm word (H219) and
the drive converter status word (H218)
H217=1:
The control word generated for the master drive (e. g. as a result of setpoint
enable, acknowledge, external fault)
Select value 1 Select value 1 acc. to H176; so that the drive converter parameter values can also be
transferred (display parameter d178)
transferred e.g Statusword 2 Base unit can be transferred:
H170=15; H226=H227⇒ 5; P694.4=553 (CU2,CU3)
P734.4=33 (CUVC,CUMC)
transferred
Speed actual Speed actual value, slave
value
Table 2.2.1.b: Send data

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.2.1.2 Select status word T300
2.2.1.2.1 Select status word T300 with H217=0:
A bit set in mask H219, transfers the appropriate bit of the T300 fault/alarm word to the interface.
A bit set in mask H218, transfers the appropriate bit of status word 1 from the basic drive to the interface.
The resulting status word (d261) is formed from the T300 fault/alarm word, masked using H219 and
(logical OR) the basic drive status word 1, which can be masked with H218.
It should be observed, that only different bits can be enabled with masks H218 and H219.
Assignment of the T300 fault/alarm word, basic drive status word 1:

Status word 1 from the T300 status word (fault/alarm)
basic drive bit / significance
bit / significance
0: Ready to switch-on F116, A097: Overspeed, positive (H190)
1: Ready F117, A098: Overspeed, negative (H191)
2: Run F118, A099: External fault from sources 1 to 3
3: Fault F119, A100: Angular controller at its limit (H112)
4: OFF2 F120, A101: Telegram error T300-Peer
5: OFF3 F121, A102: Communications fault, T300 drive
6: Switch-on inhibit F122, A103: Communications fault T300-CB/SCB
7: Alarm F123, A104: Anti-stall protection (acc. to basic drive-ZUW1, bit8)
8: Setpoint/actual value difference deviation F124, A105: n act > H180
9: Control requested F125, A106: n act within H182 ± H183
10: f/n limit reached F126, A107: n act < H181
11: Fault, undervoltage F127, A108: Comparison frequency not reached, (ZUW1, bit10)
12: Main contactor controlled F128, A109: Control difference, angular controller > H200
13: Ramp-function generator active F129, A110: n act sensing erroneous
14: Clockwise rotating field F130, A111: Control difference, angular controller < H200
15: Kinetic buffering active F131, A112: Angular difference outside H201<DY<H202
Table 2.2.1.c: Status word T300 with H217=0
2.2.1.2.2 Selecting the status word T300 with H217=1:

The control words generated on the T300 from all of the selected sources (d260) is also transferred to the
interface.
Assignment, T300 control word:

T300 control word
Bit / significance
0: On (=1)
1: Off2 (=0)
2: Off3 (=0)
3: from CB/SCB Control word 1 bit 3 directly transferred 1:1 to the basic unit
6: Setpoint enable (=1)
7: Acknowledgment (=1)
8: Inching1 (=1)
9: Inching2 (=1)
10...14: not used
15: Fault, ext. (=0 !)
Table 2.2.1.d: Status word T300 with H217=1

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.2.2 Receive data (setpoint, automation ⇒ technological function) in a 4ms

sampling time
2.2.2.1 Telegram structure
All of the data, received from a communications module, are processed on the T300, and, if required, in
some cases transferred to the basic drive. The setpoints, which are actually required by the standard
software package from the communications module, must be set.
Data word No. in the receive telegram Significance

PROFIBUS DP USS protocol
PPO 1, 2, 5 PPO 3, 4 PKW=4 PKW=0
1 - 1 - Parameter identification
2 - 2 - Index
5 1 5 1 Control word 1 from the CB
6 2 6 2 Setpoint from the CB
7 3 7 3 Status word 2 from the CB
8 4 8 4 Status word 1 from the CB
9 5 9 5 Offset setpoint from the CB
10 6 10 6 Setpoint, ratio from CB
11 - 11 7 Setpoint, inertia compensation from CB
12 - 12 8 Not used (=0)
For setpoints, which are transferred on the T300, the following is always valid: 4000h=100%
Table 2.2.2.a: Telegram structure, automation → technological module
The telegram length can be set using H227; reset is then required! ( initialization value )
Telegramm word Receive data, can be used as:

1 Control word (e. g. On) (see d235)
2 Master setpoint (see H70)
3 Status word 2 (due to excitation sequence) (see d236)
4 Status word 1 (due to fault signal, setpoint enable) (see d237)
5 Offset reference value (see H50)
6 Reference value, ratio (see H40)
7 Reference value, inertia compensation (see H80)
Table 2.2.2.b: Receive data

Manual
2 Interfaces
Assignment, control word 1 from CB (display parameter d235)
Control word 1 Significance Select Effect / explanation

bit parameter
0 ON H240 Equipment on
1 /OFF2 (voltage-off) H241,H242 Transfer to the basic unit
2 /OFF3 (fast stop) H243,H244 Transfer to the basic unit
3 free control bit - Transferred 1:1 to the basic unit
6 Enable setpoint H245,H246 Input setpoint
7 Acknowledge fault H247,H248 Transfer to the unit
8 Inching 1 H249 Local inching, forwards
9 Inching 2 H250 Local inching, backwards
10 Control from AG *) - CB accepts setpoints
11 Synchronizing command H251 Angular synchronization enabled
12 Not used -
13 Angular controller enable H252 Angular controller enabled
14 Not used -
15 Not used -
*) is not evaluated by the T300
Table 2.2.2.c: Control word 1 automation → technological module
Assignment, status word 2 from CB (display parameter d236)
Status word 2 Significance Select Effect / explanation

bit parameter
0 Restart on the fly active (AND H245, H246 enable setpoint after restart on the fly
„Run“ Status word 1 bit 2)
1...15 not used
Table 2.2.2.d: Status word 2 automation → technological module
Assignment, status word 1 from CB (display parameter d237)

bit parameter
0 not used -
1 Ready to start H240 Equipment on
2 Run H240, Equipment on
OR / AND
Run AND Restart on the fly H245, H246 Enable setpoint
completed (Status word 2 bit 0)
3 External fault H254,H255,H256 Generate external fault
4 OFF2 H241, H242 OFF2
5 OFF3 H243, H244 OFF3
6 Switch on inhibit H240 Switch on inhibit
7...15 not used -
Table 2.2.2.e: Status word 1 automation → technological module

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.3 T300 Monitor interface (SS1, term. X132, X133)

An operator control program, based on the SIMADYN D monitor (IBS/SERVICE-program
(TELEMASTER)) can be connected at interface 1, i. e. connector X132 (RS232) or connector X133
(RS485). This allows all of the connectors to be viewed and changed. Further, connection changes are
possible.
Selected connectors, which are defined as parameters, can be viewed and changed via the basic drive
converter using the parameter mechanism.
Note:
The serial interface SS1 can either be used as RS485 or as RS232; this means, it is not
permissible to simultaneously use the physical interfaces at terminal X132 and X133!
The baud rate is 9600 baud.
RS232
Pin number according to the print on the Pin number, referrred to Function
supplied and coded T300 connector connector X132
1 1 RxD
2 2 TxD
3 3 Ground
4 4 Ground
5 5 Ground
Table 2.3.a: X132
RS485
Pin number according to the print on the Pin number, referred to Function
supplied and coded T300 connector connector X133
6 1 +RxD/+TxD
7 2 -RxD/-TxD
8 3 +RxD/+TxD
9 4 -RxD/-TxD
10 5 Ground
Table 2.3.b: X133

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.4 T300 Peer-to-peer interface (SS2, term. X134)

The serial interface X02 (connector X134) is assigned the peer-to-peer protocol with the appropriate
configuring. It is used for fast transfer of setpoints/actual values between
- additional T300
- other converters with SCB 2
- SIMOVERT 6SE12/13
- SIMOREG 6RA24
- SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RA70
without using an interface module. This interface is a 4-wire cable according to RS485.
The peer interface is pre-set as follows:

Baud rate (H220): 38400 baud
Monitoring time (H209): 80ms
Telegram length, max. 5 words
(sender H222 =receiver H223) 4 words
The receive status is displayed with the parameter d224. in case of communication fault (d224=0), d225
display the error code.
Please refere also to section 7.4.3, note 3
2.4.1 Peer-to-peer interface, connector X134
Pin number according to the print- Pin number Function

out on the coded T300 connector referred to connector for RS485
provided X134 4-wire operation
11 1 +RxD
12 2 -RxD
13 3 +TxD
14 4 -TxD
15 5 Ground
Table 2.4.1: X134
- The signals can flow through the drive in a series connection. With this connection type, each drive
processes the data as required before passing them on to one other drive (classic setpoint cascade).
- In a parallel connection, a total of 31 drives can be connected in parallel to the transmit cable of one
drive. All these drives receive their (identical) data set simultaneously.
The signal delay time (see table 2.4.2) occurs only once with the parallel connection.
- Any desired mixed combinations of series and parallel connections can be implemented.

Manual
2 Interfaces
X X X
-X134 -X134 -X134 -X134
Master drive
Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Point
11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15
to
-X134 Point
Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M

X
11 12 13 14 15 -X134 -X134 -X134
Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M Rx+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M
11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15
Cascade
x: For this T300 boards, the Bus terminating resistors must be switched-in, i.e. at bus terminating switch
S1, coding switches S1.3 and S1.4 must be set to ON.
Transmission times ( example ):

Baudrate Telegram length in word Telegram-transmission
time in ms
9600 1 5.7
2 8
5 16
19200 1 2.8
2 4
5 8
38400 1 1.43
2 2
5 4
115200 1 0.47
2 0.67
5 1.34
Tabelle 2.4.2: Transmission times Peer-to-Peer

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.4.2 Peer send data (actual values) in the 4ms sampling time:
Telegram word Send data
Status word Selectable:
H216=0: Selected from the T300 fault/alarm word (H219) and
the drive converter status word (H218)
H216=1: The control word generated for the master drive
(e. g. as a result of setpoint enable, acknowledge, external fault)
transferred
transferred
Table 2.4.2.a: Peer send data
2.4.2.1 Select status word T300
2.4.2.1.1 Select status word T300 with H216=0:
A bit, set in mask H219 transfers the appropriate bit of the T300 fault/alarm word to the interface.
A bit set in mask H218 transfers the appropriate bit of status word 1 from the basic drive to the interface.
The resulting status word (d261) is then formed from the T300 fault/alarm word, which can be masked
using H219 and (logical OR) the basic drive status word 1, which can be masked using H218.
It should be observed that only different bits can be enabled using the masks H218 and H219.
Assignment T300 fault/alarm word, basic drive converter, status word 1:
Status word 1 from the T300 status word (fault/alarm)

basic drive bit / significance
bit / significance
0: Ready to switch-on F116, A097: Overspeed, positive (H190)
1: Ready F117, A098: Overspeed, negative (H191)
2: Run F118, A099: External fault from sources 1 to 3
3: Fault F119, A100: Angular controller at its limit (H112)
4: OFF2 F120, A101: Telegram error T300-Peer
5: OFF3 F121, A102: Communications fault, T300 drive
6: Switch-on inhibit F122, A103: Communications fault T300-CB/SCB
7: Alarm F123, A104: Anti-stall protection (acc. to basic drive-ZUW1, bit8)
8: Setpoint/actual value difference deviation F124, A105: n act > H180
9: Control requested F125, A106: n act within H182 ± H183
10: f/n limit reached F126, A107: n act < H181
11: Fault, undervoltage F127, A108: Comparison frequency not reached(ZUW1, bit10)
12: Main contactor controlled F128, A109: Control difference, angular controller > H200
13: Ramp-function generator active F129, A110: n act sensing erroneous
14: Clockwise rotating field F130, A111: Control difference, angular controller < H200
15: Kinetic buffering active F131, A112: Angular difference outside H201<DY<H202
Table 2.4.2.b: Status word T300 with H216=0

Manual
2 Interfaces
2.4.2.1.2 Selecting the status word T300 with H216=1:
The control words, generated on the T300 from all of the set sources (d260) is transferred to the
interface.
Assignment T300 control word:
T300 control word

bit / significance
0: On (=1)
1: Off2 (=0)
2: Off3 (=0)
6: Setpoint enable (=1)
7: Acknowledgment (=1)
8: Inching1 (=1)
9: Inching2 (=1)
10...14: not used
15: Fault, ext. (=0 !)
Table 2.4.2.c: Status word T300 with H216=1
2.4.3 Peer receive data (setpoints) in the 4ms sampling time:

The received setpoints which are actually used by the standard software package must be set.
Telegram word Used as:

1 Control word (e. g. On) (see d230)
2 Master setpoint (see H70)
3 Status word 2 (due to excitation sequence) (see d231)
4 Status word 1 (due to fault signal) (see d232)
5 not used
Table 2.4.3.a: Peer receive date

Manual
2 Interfaces
Assignment, control word 1 from Peer-to-Peer
Control Significance Select Effect / explanation

word 1 parameter
bit
0 ON H240 Unit on
1 /OFF2 (voltage off) H241,H242 Transfer to the unit
2 /OFF3 (fast stop) H243,H244 Transfer to the unit
3 Not used -
4 Not used -
5 Not used -
6 Enable setpoint H245,H246 Input setpoint
7 Acknowledge fault H247,H248 Transfer to the unit
8 Inching 1 H249 Local inching, forwards
9 Inching 2 H250 Local inching, backwards
10 -
11 Synchronizing command H251 Angular synchronization enabled
12 Not used -
13 Angular controller enable H252 Angular controller enabled
14 Not used -
15 Not used -
Table 2.4.3.b: Control word 1 peer-to-peer
Assignment, status word 2 from Peer-to-Peer (display parameter d231)

bit parameter
0 Restart on the fly active (AND H245, H246 enable setpoint after restart on the fly
„Run“ Status word 1 bit 2)
1...15 not used
Table 2.4.3.c: Status word 2 Peer-to-Peer → technological module
Assignment, status word 1 from Peer-to-Peer (display parameter d232)

bit parameter
0 not used -
1 Ready to start H240 Equipment on
2 Run H240, Equipment on
OR / AND
Run AND Restart on the fly H245, H246 Enable setpoint
completed (Status word 2 bit 0)
3 External fault H254,H255,H256 Generate external fault
4 OFF2 H241, H242 OFF2
5 OFF3 H243, H244 OFF3
6 Switch on inhibit H240 Switch on inhibit
7...15 not used -
Table 2.4.3.d: Status word 1 Peer-to-Peer → technological module

Manual
3 Basic converter setting

The parameters must be set in the basic drive converter in the sequence specified here so that the
standard ”angular synchronous control” software package can be used (refer to the parameter list of the
drive converter).
The starting point is an ”initialized” drive converter which was initialized fault and error-free and is in the
”READY” status °009.
Generally, it is recommended that the factory setting is established.
P52= 1 (CU2,CU3)
P60= 2; P970=0 (CUVC,CUMC)
Note:
The parameterization for the SIMOVERT VC and MC drive converters with the CUVC and CUMC
modules are described in the following Sections, as well as the parameterization of the SIMOVERT VC
and SC drive converters with the predecessor modules CU2 and CU3.
3.1 Logging-on the boards
3.1.1 CU2,CU3
Parameter Value Explanation

number
P051 3 Set the access stage to the required level
P052 4 Change-over into the “hardware setting” status
P090 2 Log-on T300 at slot 2 (to the far right in the electronics box)
P091 0: No communications board available
1: CB1 (for PROFIBUS DP) available
3: SCB1 or SCB2 (peer-to-peer) available
P682 Refer to the SCB protocol; can only be set if SCB1/2 is inserted
parameter list
P052 0 End “hardware setting”
Table 3.1.1: Logging-on CU2,CU3
If logged-on boards are not available, incorrectly inserted or are faulty, the appropriate fault message is
output (F070 for SCB1/2 or F080 for T300 or CB1).

Manual
3.1.2 CUVC,CUMC
The inserted modules ( T300 and communication modules CPB, SCB1/2 ) are automatically identified by
the basic drive. It is not necessary to log-on using a parameter.
Additional settings are required depending on the particular module ( CBP bus address, SCB protocol...).
Also refer to the basic drive description - Section „Module configuration“
If the modules are incorrectly inserted or are faulty, an appropriate fault message is output (F070 for
SCB1/2 or F80 for T300 or CBP ).
3.2 Operating mode
Only the settings which are absolutely necessary to run the angular synchronous control are described
here. All of the other parameters can essentially have the ”factory setting”. In order to achieve optimum
drive open- and closed-loop control, it will be necessary to change several parameters according to the
usual setting instructions (refer to the User Manual SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES).
3.2.1 CU2,CU3
Value Explanation
Parameter
number
P051 3 Set the access stage to the required level
P052 5 Change-over into the “drive configuration” status
P163 4 Closed-loop speed control
P208 1 The speed actual value is received from the pulse encoder;
Tracks A and B, must be connected at the CU

(the SE300 terminals 531-533 are not assigned!):
SIMOVERT VC: Connector X103 pin 35 =ground

pin 36 =track A
pin 37 =track B
pin 40 =+15V
SIMOVERT SC: Pulses are generated from the encoder/resolver signals.
Encoder connection via the special 26-pin sub-D
connector X104
The encoder signals, available at the CU are transferred to the T300 speed
sensing via the LBA backplane bus.
The zero pulse can either be connected to the CU:

SIMOVERT VC: Connector X103 pin38;
(corresponds to pre-assignment H018)
or to SE300, terminal 535.
P209 ... Pulse encoder pulse number
P052 0 End the “drive configuration”
Table 3.2.a: Operating mode CU2,CU3

Manual
3.2.2 CUVC,CUMC
Value Explanation
Parameter
number
P060 5 Change-over into the “drive configuration” status
P100 4 Closed-loop speed control (only for CUVC )
P130 11 The speed actual value is received from the pulse encoder;
Tracks A and B, must be connected at the CUVC

(the SE300 terminals 531-533 are not assigned!):
CUVC: Connector X103 pin 23 =ground

pin 24 =track A
pin 25 =track B
pin 28 =+15V
CUMC: With SBP pulse encoder
With SBR2 resolver (SBR2 required)
With SBM encoder
The encoder connection and the selection and parameterization
of the encoder should be taken from the basic drive manual.
The encoder signals, available at the CU are transferred to the T300 speed
sensing via the LBA backplane bus.
The zero pulse can either be connected to the CU:

CUVC: Connector X103pin26;
(corresponds to pre-assignment H018)
or to SE300, terminal 535.
P151 ... Pulse encoder pulse number
P060 1 End the “drive configuration”
Table 3.2.b: Operating mode CUVC,CUMC

Manual
3.3 Motor data and speed controller
The motor data and a standard speed controller setting can be set with the following basic drive converter
functions, both easily and drive-specific. If required, the determined parameter values can then be
optimized.
CU2,CU3:
P052 =5 ”Drive setting” functions are made selectable
=8 Complete motor identification and speed controller setting executed
Note: This program requires that the drive is powered-up twice!
Alarms A078, A080 refer to the power-up instants
CUVC,CUMC:
P060 =5 ”Drive setting” functions are made selectable
P115 =3 Complete motor identification and speed controller setting executed
Note: This program requires that the drive is powered-up twice!
Alarms A078, A080 refer to the power-up instants
If errors/faults occur: Refer to the basic drive converter User Manual!
3.4 Setpoint channel

Additional setpoint channel settings can be realized in the “ready” status (°009) and, if required a lower
access stage (CU2,CU3,CUVC,CUMC):

number
P443 3002 Source, speed setpoint (“master setpoint”):
Word 2 of the dual port RAM interface to the T300;
the actual master setpoint source on the T300 is set there (H070).
When relevant, it is also influenced by the ratio and inching setpoints.
P438 3005 Source, supplementary setpoint2: Word 5 of the T300 interface;
angular controller output (if enabled)
P462 0 Ramp-up time
Should be the max. actual ramp-up time of the master drive in order to achieve
good control performance (speed and stability).
As the angular controller output signal first becomes effective after the basic drive
converter ramp-function generator, it should be observed, for high offset, that the
angular controller is not enabled or the angular controller output remains limited.
P464 0 Ramp-down time
It should be the max. actual ramp-down time of the master drive in order to
achieve good control characteristics (speed and stability).
Caution: The converter must have the appropriate braking capability (braking
resistor, regenerative feedback unit).
Table 3.4.a: Setpoint channel

Manual
The T300 provides 3 additional quantities for additional drive settings and controller optimization features.
They may only be used on the CU, i. e. set, if the associated functions are required.
Parameter number Value Explanation

P226 (CU2,CU3) 3006 Source, Kp adaptation for the speed controller;
P232 (CUVC,CUMC) wort 6 of the dual port RAM interface to the T300;
P506 (CU2,CU3,CUVC) 3008 Source, supplementary torque for inertia compensation
P262 (CUMC) word 8 of the dual port RAM interface to the T300;
Table 3.4.b: KP-Adaption
Note: KP adaption CUVC,CUMC
The following parameters should be permanently set on the T300:
H144=0%; H143=199,9%; H142=0 and H141=255,9.
The KP adaption is then set in the basic drive (P233,P234,P235,P236)
Procedure, refer to CUVC and CUMC block diagrams (Compendium), Sheet 360:
The effective KP can be read at parameter r237 of the basic drive.

Manual
3.5 Open-loop control
Several basic drive converter functions can also be controlled via the T300. If specific control word bits are
taken from the T300, for the associated CU parameters P554 to P585, the source ”T300 dual port RAM”
should be specified.
Additionally, the standard angular synchronous control software package provides several sources on the
T300 for a control bit, which can be selected with the associated T300 parameters (H240 to H256).
Value Value Explanation Source selection on T300 using

Parameter CU2,CU3 CUVC,CUMC T300 parameters:
number
P554 3001 3100 On command (main contactor) H240
P555-557 3001 3101 Off2 H241, H242
P558-560 3001 3101 Off3 H243, H244
P564 3001 3106 Setpoint enable H245, H246
P565-567 3001 3107 Fault acknowledgement H247, H248
P568 3001 3108 Inching 1; refer below H249
P569 3001 3109 Inching 2; refer below H250
P575 3001 3115 Fault 1 external; H254, H255, H256
refer to the explanation to
H254
P585 3004 3409 Speed controller enable H253
Table 3.5: Open-loop control
Information regarding inching 1/2:
a) Inching commands via the T300 act in the form of a master setpoint change (according to H130, H131)
when the drive is running, if P568 and P569 are not set to 3001 (or 3108 and 3109). Thus, the ”slack
take-up/slack-off” functions are possible in operation.
b) If the inching control bits in the basic drive converter are used (P568,P569=3001, or P568 =3108;
P569=3109), a different function is implemented: A drive which is powered-down starts to rotate with the
line speed set in P448/P449 (jog function).

Manual
3.6 Actual value transfer from the CU to T300
The angular synchronous function package only requires the two basic drive converter status words 1
and 2 (r552, r553 for CU2,CU3; K32, K33 for CUVC,CUMC) and the drive converter control word (r550 for
CU2,CU3; K30 for CUVC,CUMC) for open-loop control and monitoring.
For:
- T300/SE300 analog outputs
- T300 peer-to-peer,
- CB1/CBP or SCB1/2
If other basic drive converter parameter values (e. g. measured values) are output, either as analog
signals or via interfaces, then they can be attached to the unassigned locations up to index 8.
These received words, which can be a max. of 5, are then subsequently selected with H176, H177, H170,
H171(select values 1, 2, 3 and 4) on the T300.
3.6.1 CU2,CU3
Index Value Explanation

Parameter (corresp. to (parameter
number the word No.)
No.)
P694 1 968 (=552) Status word 1 (used for setpoint enable, fault)
2 0 Presently unassigned;(used for select value 1, 2, 3 or 4)
3 0 Presently unassigned; (used for select value 1, 2, 3 or 4)
4 553 Status word 2
5 550 Control word1 (to disable the supplementary SW2 for OFF1)
6 0 Presently unassigned; (used for select value 1 or 3)
9 529 With P526.1=20xy or 60xy selected word from the USS-
telegramm (refer to section 5.4)
10 534 With P526.1=20xy or 60xy selected word from the USS-
telegramm (refer to section 5.4)
Table 3.6.a: Actual value transfer CU2,CU3

Manual
3.6.2 CUVC,CUMC
Index Value Explanation

Parameter (corresp. to (parameter
number the word No.)
No.)
P734 1 32 Status word 1 (used for setpoint enable, fault)
4 33 Status word 2
5 30 Control word1 (to disable the supplementary SW2 for OFF1)
9 2001... 2016 With P526.1=20xy or 60xy selected word from the USS-
(SST1) or telegramm (refer to section 5.4)
6001... 6016
(SST2)
10 2001... 2016 With P526.1=20xy or 60xy selected word from the USS-
(SST1) or telegramm (refer to section 5.4)
6001... 6016
(SST2)
Table 3.6.b: Actual value transfer CUVC,CUMC
3.7 Data transfer CU ⇔ peer-to-peer (T300)

Receive data:
The 4 received words are used on the T300 and cannot (directly) be sent to the basic drive converter.
Send data:
The words 2 to 5 can be filled via the selection value parameters H176,177,170,171 from the free dual-
port RAM locations (refer to Section 2.4).
Select values 1 to 4 (selected with H176,177,170,171) can be sent from the dual port RAM words
(corresponding to P694 index (CU2,CU3); P734 index (CUVC,CUMC)) 2, 3, 6, 7 or 8 in telegram words 2
to 5.
The standard software package permanently assigns a status/control word which can be generated, to
the 1st telegram word (refer to H216, Section 2.4).

Manual
3.8 Data transfer CU ⇔ communications board (CB,SCB)
The CU parameter values to be sent must first be transferred to free locations in the T300 dual port RAM
using P964-index (CU2,CU3); P734-index (CUVC,CUMC) 2,3,6,7 and 8).
The standard software package assigns the 1st telegram word permanently with a status/control word
which can be configured (refer to H217, Section 2.2).
Words 2 to 5 can be filled via the select value parameters H176,177,170,171 from the above mentioned
free dual port RAM locations (refer to Section 2.2).
All of the data received from a communications board is processed on the T300. It is not directly
transferred to the CU, but only dependent on the T300 parameterization.
Information regarding the use of the SCB1/2:

If an SCB1 or 2 is available as communications board, it must be set (initialized) via the basic drive
converter parameters (refer to the drive converter parameter list and description of the boards):
- protocol
- baud rate
- telegram length (process data length);
length set at the T300 send block (H226; FP-CONF.TAUT.LT”)
must be the same (or larger)!
The SCB telegram is monitored on the T300 (H210, H211). The monitoring, which can be set using the
drive converter parameter P695 (CU2,CU3); P722 (CUVC,CUMC) for this configuration, only acts on the
CU ⇔ T300 coupling!
3.9 Other information
Information regarding setpoint enable, synchronous start

It is recommended, to control the drive at power-up, that the setpoint enable is used, i. e. the setpoint is
switched-in to the ramp-function generator input. The speed controller should be principally enabled
(P585=1).
Master- and slave drive starting can be simply synchronized using the setpoint enable signal generated on
the T300. In this case, the signal must be coupled-in via a suitable interface (peer-to-peer or binary signal)
from the slave T300 to the master.
Both drives can be synchronously started even at different power-up instants (ON command) or as
result of different excitation times (due to different motor outputs), as follows:
Bit0 of status word2 (“restart-on-the-fly active”) of both drives is fed to T300.

From the master: Via a suitable interface (peer-to-peer or binary signal)
From the slave: In the 4th word of the actual value output to T300: P694.4=553 (CU2,CU3),
P734.4=33 (CUVC,CUMC)
The T300 generates, in conjunction with an ON command, the setpoint enable, only if both motors are
energized (bit0=0).
Information regarding the master setpoint

If ramp-up and ramp-down times are not set (=0), for an external master setpoint input, it must be ensured
that the master setpoint does not manifest excessive steps (especially in the regenerative direction).

Manual

Free blocks can be used in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES CUVC and CUMC, to realise additional
function ( logic functions with logic blocks, calculation with numeric function blocs... ).
than 5 - 10%.

Manual
Setpoints and control signals can be read-in and actual values and status signals output via binary and
analog signals. The following connectors,
X131 (analog inputs/outputs, pulse encoder connections) and
X136 (binary inputs/outputs)
of the T300 board are connected to the SE300 interface module via a shielded, multi-conductor cable
(signal ribbon cable, 40- or 34-core).
An SC58 cable should be used for the 40-pin connector X131, and an SC60 cable for the 34-pin
connector X136.
The terminal assignments described in this document, are only valid when an SE300 interface module is
used. The terminals, belonging to connector X5 are designated with 5xx, and those belonging to
connector X6, with 6xx.
Caution:
Only the screened SC58 and SC60 ribbon cables may be used.
The described terminal assignment is only valid when the SE300 interface module is used.
4.1 Connector X6, Binary inputs

It should be observed that several terminals are assigned twice and three times. They control the actually
selected function.
4.1.1 Signal level and SE300 terminal assignment

The binary inputs and outputs of the T300 board require or supply 24 V signals. In this case, the 24 V
supply voltage for the binary outputs must be fed in from outside (i. e. via the interface board).
An external power supply is not required when the binary inputs are used.
Input smoothing ≈ 700µs Input current for a high signal, approx. 8 mA at 24V
logical ”0” logical ”1”

(associated function is actived/enabled)
input voltage: -1V to +6V 13V to 33V
or terminal ”open” nominal voltage: 24V

Manual
Terminal strip X6: Permanently wired control signals from the terminal
Terminals 601 to 608 (STRUC configured software: Partial connector X6A)

Terminals 611 to 618 (STRUC configured software: Partial connector X6B)
Terminal Assignment: Assignment

for byte-serial input inhibited for byte-serial input enabled
(selection parameter) (selection parameter)
601 Angular controller enable (H252) Angular controller enable (H252)
602 On (main contactor) (H240) On (main contactor) (H240)
Additional ON delay (H021) Additional ON delay (H021)
and OFF delay (H022) and OFF delay (H022)
603 Speed controller enable Reset position Speed controller Reset position
(H253) difference enable (H253) difference
604 No off 3 (fast stop) (H243; H244) No off 3 (fast stop) (H243; H244)
605 Synchronizing (H251) Synchronizing (H251)
606 Inching 1 (H249) Setpoint selection, together with term. 607:
00: Value invalid
01: Master speed setpoint
10: offset reference value
11: Ratio
607 Inching 2 (H250) Setpoint selection together with term. 606
608 No off 2 (voltage disconnect) Reset Select high byte: 1=high byte
(H241; H242) position/offset
609 P24 external P24 external
610 Ground, external Ground, external
611 Thumbwheel switch input 2**0 Fault Bit0 of the setpoint
acknowledge
(H247; H248)
612 Thumbwheel switch input 2**1 Fault ext. Bit1 of the setpoint
(H254)
(H255)
(H256)
615 Thumbwheel switch, Bit4 of the setpoint
data transfer
616 Setpoint enable (H245; Bit5 of the setpoint
H246)
617 Changeover, ratio Bit6 of the setpoint
(H40; H41; H42)
618 Changeover, offset reference Bit7 of the setpoint
value (H60; H61)
Table 4.1.1: Terminal assignment, binary inputs 601-618

Manual
4.1.2 Byte-serial data input

Data transfer mechanism: (Function description - refer to Section 5.2)
16 ms (H033) 16 ms (H033)
Terminals
611-618 HIGH-BYTE LOW-BYTE
0 0
Terminal HIGH-BYTE-ENABLE
608
High byte Low byte & word

is transferred are transferred
4.1.3 Thumbwheel switch

For detailed information about the terminal utilisation refer Sec.4.2.2
(Function description - refer to Section 5.3)

Manual
4.2 Connector X6, Binary outputs
4.2.1 Level and Assignments
All of the outputs are initially inhibited (high-ohmic condition), when the drive converter is powered-up. The
output registers are pre-assigned with 0 in the initialization phase, and are then subsequently enabled. All
outputs are inhibited when the drive converter is powered-down, or a processor crashes (e.g. due to a
hardware fault).
logical ”0”: output switch open

logical ”1”: output switch closed
i.e. the terminal voltage is: power supply voltage (24V DC) -2.5V
max. output current 100 mA, short-circuit proof
Terminal strip X6:Binary outputs and status messages
Terminals 631 to 640 (STRUC configured software: Partial connector X6C)
Term. Assignment Explanation

Thumbwheel switch:
631 Thumbwheel switch output 10**0

Status messages: Relevant parameters
635 Synchronism reached H203

636 Angular controller at its limit H112 (upper and lower limit);
corresponds to F119, A100
637 Excitation in master and slave logical AND of the binary values selected with H245
expired and H246 and of the ON command
Could be used e.g. for setpoint enable so that both

drives start in synchronism;
638 Angular difference > limit value H201 H202; corresponds to F131, A112
639 P24, external Terminals 609, 619 and 639 are connected via T300
640 M24, external Terminals 610, 630 and 640 are connected via T300
Table 4.2.1: Terminal assignment, 631-640

Manual
4.2.2 Thumbwheel switch

Connecting a BCD thumbwheel switch.
In this example a separate switch is used ( Fig 4.2.2 on the left side ) to provide the sign.
The same connecting is valid for the binary coding (16**0,...)
sign C 10**3 C 10**2 C 10**1 C 10**0
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Data transfer Terminal input

615 Terminal
P24
611 631
612 632
SE300
613 633
614 634
Fig.4.2.2: Connecting a BCD thumbwheel switch

Manual
4.3 Connector X5, Analog inputs and outputs

The analog inputs have a 12-bit resolution over the input and output voltage range of -10 V to +10 V
(resolution = 4.88 mV). In this case, 5 V corresponds to an internal value of 100 %.
4.3.1 Analog inputs

Differential inputs (connect all reference potentials !),
Low-pass filter with 0.66 ms time constant Input resistor = 10 kΩ
Terminal strip X5: Analog inputs 1 to 7

(STRUC configured software: Partial connectors X5A to X5G)
Terminal / Assignment, Partial Effective for source Adapted using

reference representation connect selection parameter
or
501 / 502 Master speed setpoint X5A H070 = 1 H071
5 V = 100 % speed
503 / 504 offset ref. value X5B H050 = 1 H052
5 V = 16 384 pulse offset
505 / 506 Inertia compensation X5C H080 = 1 H081
5 V = 100 % torque
507 / 508 Gearshift ratio X5D H048 = 4 H040, H043, H047
5 V = 100 % i.e. 1:1
Table 4.3.1: Terminal assignment, analog inputs
4.3.2 Analog outputs

The output registers are set to 0 in the initialization phase, and then released. All outputs are inhibited
when the converter is powered-down, or a processor crashes (e.g. due to a hardware fault).
Terminal strip X5: Analog outputs 1 to 4

(STRUC configured software: Partial connectors X5H to X5L)
Max. output current = 10 mA Representation: 5V = 100 % (e. g. 100% speed)
Terminal Assignment Partial connector, Effective for Adapted with

sampling time source selection offset gain
509 / 510 Selectable (=select value 1); X5H H176 H160 H161
can be monitored with d178; 4ms
pre-assignment:
Angular controller, control error
(offset is taken into account) =7
519 / 520 Selectable (=select value 2); X5J H177 H162 H163
can be monitored with d179; 4ms
pre-assignment:
Speed actual value, slave =1
521 / 522 Selectable (=select value 3); X5K H170 H172 H173
Pre-assignment: 4ms
Angular controller output =6
523 / 524 Selectable (=select value 4); X5L H171 H174 H175
Pre-assignment: 4ms
Position difference-actual value =9
Table 4.3.2: Terminal assignment, analog outputs

Manual
4.4 Pulse encoders
4.4.1 Information regarding the pulse encoder types

Unipolar pulse encoders must be used with two tracks displaced through 90 degrees. The zero
pulse must be connected-up if the synchronizing function is used.
The T300 board provides 15 V, max. 100 mA as encoder power supply. Generally, this can only be used
to supply one pulse encoder. The second pulse encoder must, if required, be supplied from an external
voltage source or from the basic converter.
Technical data:
− Input current 8mA typical
− Pulse level 0-30V
− Digital filter, max. frequency 500 kHz
− max. pulse frequency ( per track ) 400 kHz
Recommended pulse encoder types:

Encoders with a 15 - 24 V supply voltage:
Low cost SIEMENS pulse encoder 1XP8001-1 (for 1LA5 motors, size 100K to 200L)
We have had good experience with HOG9D... and POG9D... encoders from Messrs. Hübner, Berlin
Shielding:
The pulse encoder cable and if required the synchronizing pulse cables must be carefully shielded. The
cable screen should be connected to ground potential through the lowest possible impedence using cable
clamps at both ends. This is especially important if these signals are received from proximity- or contact
switching switches.
4.4.2 15 V power supply units for pulse encoders

a) Type CM62-PS-220 AC/ 15 DC/ 1
220 V AC to 15V DC, load capability 1A
Manufacturer, Phoenix
b) Type FMP 15S 500 ”with snap mounting”

110/220 V AC to 15V DC, load capabilities 0.5 A
Manufacturer, Block

Manual
4.4.3 Encoder pulse numbers

The following must be taken into account when selecting the encoder pulse number:
1.) Max. pulse frequency per track = 400 kHz
2.) The pulse number ratio (refer to Section: 5.13) should be approximately 1:1, where the best dynamic
performance is achieved. A pulse number ratio of approximately 1:4 to 4:1 can generally designated as
approximately 1:1.
3.) The master- and slave drive encoder pulse numbers should be identical; criteria 1) and 2) however
have priority.
4.) The achievable accuracy and the value range, with which a selected ratio can be maintained, is
defined by the pulse number ratio. For unfavorable combination of master and slave encoder pulse
number, this can result in restrictions regarding the accuracy and value range (refer to Table 4.4.3).

Manual
PZ Master 500 600 1000 1200 1500 1800 2000 2400 2500 4000 5000
PZ Slave
500 X 5.46 X 6.82 5.46 4.55 X 3.41 X X X
600 X X X X X X X X X 2.45 X
1000 X X X X X X X 6.82 X X X
1200 X X X X X X X X X X
1500 X X X X X 5.46 X 10.24 X 6.14 X
1800 X X X X X X X 11.79 7.37 5.89
2000 X 5.46 X 5.46 5.46 1.82 X 5.46 X X X
2400 X X 5.46 X X X X X
2500 X 5.46 X 5.46 5.46 X X X 10.24 X
4000 X X 5.46 X 5.46 X X
5000 X 5.46 X 5.46 5.46 X 5.46 X X X
512 13.9 8.38 6.99 5.59 4.66 4.19 3.49 3.35 2.09 1.67
1024 13.98 11.18 9.32 8.38 6.99 6.71 4.19 3.30
2048 13.98 13.42 8.38 6.71
4096 13.42
PZ Master 512 1024 2048 4096

Explanation:
PZ Slave
500 16.0 8.0 4.0 2.0
600 9.6 4.8 2.4 X = Full value range and resolution
1000 16.0 8.0 4.0
1200 9.6 4.8 = Resolution restricted
1500 12.0 6.0
1800 14.4 7.2 5.46 = Value range restricted to 5.46
2000 16.0 8.0
2400 9.6 4.66 = Value range and resolution restricted
2500 10.0
4000 16.0
5000 PZ = Pulse number, master pulse encoder
512 X X X X Master
1024 X X X X PZ = Pulse number, slave pulse encoder
2046 X X X X Slave
4098 X X X X
Table 4.4.3: Possible combinations for different encoder pulse numbers

Manual
4.4.4 Pulse encoder inputs of the T300

The pulse encoder inputs 1 and 2 of the T300 boards have similar circuitry. The switching thresholds, for
encoders without push-pull signal are optimized for pulse encoders with 15 V supply voltage. Pulse
encoders with a 24 V supply voltage can be connected; it may be necessary to expect a somewhat lower
maximum pulse frequency.
Terminal strip X5: Pulse encoder, slave drive

(STRUC configured software: Partial connector X5M)
The pulse encoder for the slave drive is connected to the basic drive, the pulse tracks are transferred to
the T300 via the backplane bus. The pulse encoder signals do not have to be connected twice,
parameterization using H18.

531 Track A This is not used in the pre-assignment (H018), as the pulse
533 Track B encoder inputs of the CU are used for the slave (refer to 4.4.6)
532 Ground Track A Ground
534 Ground Track B Ground
535 Synchronizing pulse SYN This is not used in the pre-assignment (H018), as the
(e. g. zero pulse) appropriate CU input is used for the slave.
If required, it can be sourced from this terminal.
536 Ground SYN Ground
537 Rough pulse Connect to ground, if not available
538 GND external / ground Ground, encoder power supply and ref. rough pulse
539 GND external / ground ”
540 P 15 - output 15 V encoder power supply
Imax= 100 mA (max. 150 mA under short-cct conditions)
Table 4.4.4.a: Pulse encoder inputs, slave
Note for MASTER DRIVES SC (CU3):

Because of an interchanging of tracks A and B while transferring via the local bus adapter LBA to the
T300, it might be better to fed the pulse encoder signals form CU3 connector X102, terminals 37 (track
B), 38 (track A) and 39 (zero pulse) to the SE300 terminals 531, 533, 535. With this synchronizing might
be adjusted easilier (refer Sec. 5.1.4).

Manual
Terminal strip X5: Pulse encoder inputs of the master drive

(STRUC configured software: Partial connector X5N)

541 Track A
542 Reference, track A Ground
543 Track B
544 Reference, track B Ground
545 Synchronizing signal SYN External synchronizing signal or zero pulse
546 Reference SYN Ground
547 Rough pulse Connect to ground, if not available
Table 4.4.4.b: Pulse encoder inputs, master
4.4.5 Fine signal evaluation using the rough signal

The speed actual value sensing permits the synchronizing signal to be filtered (zero pulse corresponds to
a fine signal) using a rough signal. If rough pulse evaluation is set at the IT1/IT2-connectors of the speed
sensing block (H018,H019), a HW logic which is fed by fine and rough signal generates an ”evaluation
signal” which is used for synchronizing and for calculating the offset (displacement).
Rough pulse
Fine pulse a b
(synchronizing/
zero pulse)
Evaluation pulse for clockw ise ref. for counter-clockw íse

for counter-clockw íse if H018/H019=0xxx if H018/H019=1xxx
Fig. 4.4.5.a: Typical position of the rough-, fine- and evaluation pulses
− a and b should be as short as possible (generally involves the mechanical design), so that
noise/disturbances can be minimized. Further, the fine pulse should not extend beyond the rough
pulse.
− a and b must be selected long enough so that possible contact bounce (BEROS, switches, etc.) has
reliably decayed. (make an oscilloscope trace!)

Manual
Rough pulse type Explanation (refer to Fig. 4.4.5.b as well as Section 6.3 for H018, H019)
0 No rough pulse; only fine pulse (synchronizing pulse) is evaluated
H018/H019=x0xx
1 An evaluation signal is generated, as soon as the rough- and fine pulses have a
high signal level, independent of the sequence in which they occur.
H018/H019=x1xx Note function of T300, MLFB 6SE7090-0XX84-0AH2:
The evaluation signal is withdrawn, if both the rough- and the fine pulse have
low signal levels!
2 An evaluation signal is generated if the rough pulse occurs before the fine
pulse. It is not possible that they occur simultaneously!
H018/H019=x2xx Note function of T300, MLFB 6SE7090-0XX84-0AH2:
The evaluation signal is always withdrawn with the falling edge of the rough
pulse, even if the fine pulse becomes inactive before the rough pulse!
Table 4.4.5.: Possible ways of setting the rough pulse evaluation
Depending on the position of the rough- and fine pulses and setting of the ”rough pulse type” at
H018/H019, evaluation signals are generated, which have different lengths. These differences should be
taken into account, if ”direction of rotation-dependent evaluation” is set (H018/H019=1xxx), and the
drive is rotating counter-clockwise, as, in this case, the falling edge of the evaluation signal is decisive
for synchronizing!
This falling edge corresponds to edge a of figure while rotating counter-clockwise. For more information
refer Section 5.1.4!
Rough pulse, type 1 Rough pulse, type 2
Rough pulse
Fine pulse
Evaluation
Fig. 4.4.5.b: Generating the evaluation signal for T300, MLFB 6SE7090-0XX84-0AH2
Restriction:
When reversing, within a rough pulse, and after the fine signal has been travelled-over (i. e. in the range
b), the fine signal is no longer identified when it is travelled-over in the reverse direction!

Manual
4.4.6 Pulse tachometer connection at CU

The slave drive pulse encoder must be connected to the CU terminals, as the basic drive converter speed
controller (CU) is used in the slave drive.
4.4.6.1 Pulse tachometer connection at CU2,CU3
CU2 connector X103 (bottom Function

right) Pin number Pin number
(referred to all connectors): (referred to connector X103):
35 (corresponding to connector, pin 1) 1 Ground
36 2 Track A
37 3 Track B
38 4 Zero pulse
40 6 + 15V
Table 4.4.6.a: Pulse tachometer connection at CU2
CU3: The encoder signals are generated from the encoder/resolver signals.
The encoder connection thrue special 26 pol. Sub-D connector X104.
The encoder connection should be taken from the basic drive manual.
4.4.6.2 Pulse tachometer connection at CUVC,CUMC
CUVC connector X103 (bottom Pin number Function

right) Pin number (referred to connector X103):
(referred to all connectors):
23 (corresponding to connector, pin 1) 1 Ground
24 2 Track A
25 3 Track B
26 4 Zero pulse
28 6 + 15V
Table 4.4.6.b: Pulse tachometer connection at CUVC
CUMC: With SBP pulse encoder

With SBR2 resolver (SBR2 required)
With SBM encoder
The encoder connection should be taken from the basic drive manual.

Manual
4.5 Service interface, connectors X132 and X133

Serial interface 1 (STRUC board connector X01) is configured as RS232 (V24) - X132 or RS485 - X133
start-up interface to connect TELEMASTER.
For more detailed service (for hardware/software problems, the so-called diagnostics/hexadecimal
monitor can be started by depressing the button for approx. 5 seconds at power on.
Pin number Pin number Connector Pin number Pin number Connector X133
(referred to (referred to the X132 (RS232) (referred to (referred to the (RS485)
connector labels on the connector labels on the
X132): T300 connector): X132): T300 connector):
1 1 Receive data 1 6 Receive / Transmit
RxD +RxD / +TxD
2 2 Transmit data 2 7 Receive / Transmit
TxD -RxD / -TxD
3 3 Ground 3 8 Receive / Transmit
GND +RxD / +TxD
4 4 Ground 4 9 Receive / Transmit
GND -RxD / -TxD
5 5 Ground 5 10 Ground
GND GND
Table 4.5: Connector X132,X133
4.6 Peer-to-peer interface, connector X134

Serial interface 2 (STRUC module connector X02) is assigned the peer to peer protocol; it is available as
RS485 at X134.
Pin number Pin number Connector X134 4-wire RS485

(referred to (referred to the
connector labels on the
X134): T300
connector):
1 11 Receive data +RxD
2 12 Receive data -RxD
3 13 Transmit data +TxD
4 14 Transmit data -TxD
5 15 Ground GND
Table 4.6: Connector X134

Manual
For the standard angular synchronous control software package the closed-loop speed control is
implemented in the drive converter itself, and the closed-loop angular control, on the technology
board.
The standard software package can be run with or without interface boards (CB1/CBP, SCB1/2).
The control and setpoint input can be realized via the automation system (interface boards) or via analog
and binary terminals. The sources for individual control word bits and for setpoints can be selected using
parameters.
The standard software package functions are combined in several function packages (FP) as follows:
Function(s) Implemented in the function

package
Setpoints are received from the interface board or T300 peer-to-peer CONF
and
actual values are sent to the interface board and T300 peer-to-peer
Coupling monitoring
Closed-loop control SYNCON
- reading-in setpoints
- actual value sensing
- angular controller
- offset calculation
- synchronization
Open-loop control and monitoring CONTRL
- coupling to the basic drive converter
- analog and binary outputs
- control word processing
- monitoring functions (control-related)
- fault handling
Technological parameter handling PARAM
Definition of the texts to the technological parameters,
other parameters
Central functions for the SIMADYN D monitor interface @TXD
and T300 peer-to-peer
The distribution of functions in the function packages is only of interest if block connectors can be read
and changed using the SIMADYN D monitor (IBS/SERVICE-program).

Manual
5.1 Actual value sensing

Speed, position and position difference actual values are sensed by counting the pulses of the two pulse
encoders connected to the master and slave. The encoder pulses are separated, per hardware, into up-
and down pulses in order to be able to identify the pulse direction; the pulses are quadrupled. The ”unit
pulse” always refers to - with the exception of the encoder pulse number per revolution - the quadrupled
pulse; i.e. for an encoder with 1000 pulses per revolution, 4000 pulses are counted in one revolution. The
pulses are counted using several hardware counters. Time is measured to determine the actual speed.
5.1.1 Speed actual value sensing

The mode of operation of the speed actual value sensing corresponds to a continuous average value
generation of the speed actual value over one sampling interval (4 ms). The measuring time end is
directly before the end of the sampling interval, so that a minimum dead time is achieved. The speed
actual value resolution for the MS340 angular synchronous control is, as a result of the measuring
technique:
Rated speed / 16384 (rated speed corresponding to H012/H013).
At low speeds (i.e. no encoder pulses received within a 4 ms sampling time), the measuring time is
automatically increased up to 4 sampling times (16 ms). A speed actual value of 0 is output, if no encoder
pulses are received within this time interval.
The speed actual value sensing is adjusted (calibrated) using parameters H010 to H013.
Pulses (*4) per meas. interval 100%
Speed act. value in % *
Measuring interval Enc. pulse No. (*4) * rated speed
Normalization factor
The speed/position sensing can be parameterized using parameters H018 and H019:
- filter time constant of the digital filter for track signals (A, B, syn) for encoder type 0:
encoder pulses shorter than the specified filter time, are suppressed
- pulse encoder type
pulse encoders with 2 tracks shifted through 90° and if required, zero pulse and synchronizing signal
or Sony pulse encoder (separate tracks for the forward and reverse track); also refer to Section 4.4 !
- rough pulse type:
3 rough pulse types are possible (refer to the hardware description)
- direction-dependent synchronizing edge selection:
no: Always synchronize to the positive synchronizing edge;
i.e. different mechanical edges
yes: for a positive direction of rotation (clockwise), synchronize to the positive synchronizing edge,
and for a negative direction of rotation, synchronize to the negative synchronizing edge;
but this is the same mechanical edge in both directions!
Setting can only be selected for sensing 1 and 2 together

Manual
The following parameters should be set:
H No. Significance Explanation

H010 Encoder pulse No., SLAVE No. of pulses (single) per revolution
H011 Encoder pulse No., MASTER No. of pulses (single) per revolution
H012 Rated speed, SLAVE Speed actual value, which is referred to 100%; i.e. the actual
speed which is actually achieved for 100% setpoint
H013 Rated speed, MASTER Speed actual value, which is referred to 100%
H018 Encoder type, SLAVE Operating mode of the speed sensing (pulse source etc.)
H019 Encoder type, MASTER Operating mode of the speed sensing (pulse source etc.)
Table 5.1.1.: Speed actual value sensing parameters
Note:
Parameters H010 to H013, H018 and H019 are initialization parameters; i.e., after these parameters are
changed, the converter must be powered down and up again so that the changes are transferred.
SIMOVERT SC:
Because of an interchanging of tracks A,B while transfering them from CU3 via LBA to T300 the slave
drive
a) either has to be configured with negative rated speed (H012)
(observe the selection of the active syncronizing edge; refer Sec. 5.1.4!)
b) or tracks A,B have to be rertrieved from CU3 connector X102 and fed to SE300 (ref Sec.4.4.4)!
Master rated speed (H013) and rated system frequency (or -speed):
P420: CU2,CU3
P352,P353: CUVC,CUMC
If the master setpoint for the slave is retrieved from the encoder pulses of the master (H070=3), the
master rated speed (H013) and the rated system frequency (or -speed for SC,MC) P420; P352,P353
must be parameterized so that they are correct and harmonized with one another!
Example for SIMOVERT VC (2-pole induction motor):

For a master actual frequency of 25Hz, which corresponds to half the rated frequency/speed, the
(master)setpoint of the slave should also be 25Hz (also half the rated slave frequency);
H013 = 1500RPM (corresponding to 50Hz);
thus, the following is true: d015=50%;
This 50% (for ratio Ü=1.0) is transferred as setpoint to the basic board via the dual port RAM;
a setpoint of 25Hz is obtained with the rated slave-system frequency P420=50Hz; P352=50Hz.
Rated speeds of the master and slave are also required for the actual speed display (d014, d015) in
addition to master setpoint generation. Thus, an incorrect setting is only effective here.
The sign (polarity) of the rated speed must be correctly parameterized, so that the position and position
difference calculations are correct!

Manual
5.1.2 Position actual value sensing

The position actual values from the master and slave are required to determine the offset. For the position
actual value sensing, the encoder pulse edges are counted and output at output YP1 (pulse number,
slave) or YP2 (pulse No. master) of the SACT function block. The position actual values are sensed using
31
a 32-bit counter. Thus, a maximum pulse number ±2** = ± 2 147 483 648 quadrupled pulses are
possible. For parameter display and enabling the synchronizing signals (also refer to Section 5.1.4), the
32-bit values are converted into 16-bit values. This conversion is set as standard, so that the least-
significant 16 bits are selected (H104, H106 = 16); i.e., +/- 32768 pulses can be represented.
The actual position actual value is set to 0 (refer to Section 5.1.4), after the enable threshold (H105,H107)
has expired, using a synchronizing pulse (e. g. zero pulse) at the appropriate input for
slave: CU : X103/terminal 38 (CU2); X103/terminal 26 (CUVC) (or to SE300/terminal 535) or

master: SE300/terminal 545
d No. Significance Explanation

d016 Pos. actual value, SLAVE Display parameter, No. of pulses (*4) (16-bit value)
d017 Pos. actual value, MASTER Display parameter, No. of pulses (*4) (16-bit value)
Table 5.1.2.: Parameters for position actual value sensing
Note:
In order that the position actual values do not overflow, a synchronizing pulse must be generated, at the
31
latest after 2** quadrupled pulses, so that the position is reset. If this is not the case, a subsequent
synchronizing operation could be erroneous.

Manual
5.1.3 Position difference sensing

For the position difference sensing, the difference between the master- and slave drive pulses, weighted
with the pulse number ratio, are summed. The position difference actual value is defined as:
Position diffference = Number of slave pulses (*4), which the slave leads with respect to the
master
NM
Position difference [pulses] = Σ (slave pulses *4 - ---- * master pulses*4) - correction value
DN
Thus, the pulse number ratio üp is the quotient of NM and DN; i.e., the pulse number ratio between the
slave and master drive. It is automatically calculated from the speed ratio and the encoder pulse numbers
from the master- and slave drives. It can be displayed using parameters d045 (NM) and d046 (DN). The
pulse number ratio üp, set by the ratio of NM to DN, is maintained, independent of rounding-off errors (e.g.,
for NM=2000 and DN=6000, the pulse number ratio = 1:3 = 0.33333333....).
For synchronizing, a value (generally +/- H093), calculated from the offset determination, is added to the
position difference, so that the angular controller is forced to correct the entered position difference. The
correction value is zero without synchronization or when in the synchronized status.
A 32-bit counter is used to sense the position difference. The maximum position difference which can be
31
sensed +/- 2 pulses (quadrupled). For parameter display and the angular controller, the 32-bit value is
converted into a 16-bit value; i.e. +/- 32768 pulses difference can be represented. For a higher difference,
the 16-bit value is limited.
d No. Significance Explanation

d094 Pos. difference actual value Display parameter, No. of pulses (*4) (16-bit value)
Table 5.1.3: Parameters for position difference actual value sensing
For the position difference actual value sensing, it is important that the counters from the master- and
slave sensing are simultaneously stored. However, there is still, especially for a pulse number ratio ≠ 1, an
uncertainty zone of several pulses:
5 pulse edges
Slave pulses
1 pulse edge
Master pulses
Counters stored Counters stored
Ratio = 1
5 edges - 1edge = 4 pulse edges
Actual position difference: 4.5 pulses - 0.75 pulses = 3.75 pulses
Ratio = 6
Calculated position difference 5 edges - 6 * 1 edge = -1pulse edge
A difference of up 6 pulses is possible
Actual position difference: 4.5 pulses - 6 * 0.75 pulse = 0 pulse
Fig. 5.1.3: Explanation of the uncertainty zone when calculating the position difference
The highest accuracy is achieved for a pulse number ratio of 1:1 (also refer to Section 4.4.3).
Note: For unfavorable combination encoder pulse number (H10,H11) and ratio, this can result in
restrictions regarding the accuracy of the pulse number ratio.
With H277=1 pulse number ratio can be adjusted by H275 and H276. (only up to version 1.5)

Manual
5.1.4 Offset sensing & synchronization

The position difference actual value is only determined using the pulse difference, which has occurred
since reset of the position difference (the source is selected using H052). This is not a criterium to
ascertain the relative position of the drives to one another!
An offset calculation is always executed, if the relative position between two drives must be sensed
and controlled, regarding their synchronizing pulses (e. g. zero pulses). The source for reset/enable is
selected using H090.
Synchronizing involves determining and correcting the offset. The synchronizing pulses are made to
coincide (a possible selected offset reference value is taken into account).
Synchronizing may be required repeatedly , for instance, if the (pulse number-) ratio cannot be precisely
entered (e. g. π), or if it has to be assumed, that encoder pulses are lost.
Synchronizing sequence:
If a synchronizing command is present (the source is selected using H251, e. g. terminal 605), and after
at least one synchronizing pulse has occurred, for an offset actual value, which is <>0 or <> a selected
offset reference value, then a ”correction value”, corresponding to H093, is added to the position
difference actual value (SACT.YDP). Thus, the angular controller receives a control error, generated by
the offset calculation, which it has to correct.
In order that this correction isn‘t too significant and so that overshoots are prevented, extremely low
values should be set for this correction pulse number H093 (typically =1). In order to still correct an
existing offset, which is greater than the value set in H093 (standard case), the correction pulse number is
subtracted from the position difference actual value in each sampling time (4ms) until synchronism has
been achieved.
If the angular controller is inactive, and starting from a position difference =0, the position difference
actual value would have the same value as the offset actual value after n sampling cycles (n =
offset/H093).
Once synchronizing has been started (”edge” of the synchronizing command) it is executed until
synchronism is reached (the correction value becomes 0); it can not be interrupted.
The offset is determined using the position actual values from the master and slave, whereby the
position actual values are set to 0 by the synchronizing pulses.
If no ”direction of rotation-dependent evaluation” is set (H018,H019 =0xxx), then synchronizing is

realized always at the rising edge of the synchronizing signal (or evaluation signal).
This is for example edge a of the cam in fig. 5.1.4 for a clockwise direction of rotation and
edge b for a counter-clockwise direction of rotation.
For ”direction of rotation-dependent evaluation” (H018,H019 =1xxx), synchronizing is realized in

both directions of rotation at the same mechanical position (always edge a of the cam). It is always the
rising edge of the synchronizing or evaluation signal for a clockwise direction of rotation and a falling edge
for a counter-clockwise direction.

Manual
Proximity
switch
L
S S=Switching cam, length L with edges a and b

b a
cw: clockwise
cw c-cw
c-cw: counter-clockwise
Fig. 5.1.4.: Offset determination and synchronizing for both directions of
Note for MASTER DRIVES SC:

If the slave encoder pulses are retrieved from the LBA, tracks A and B are interchanged.
Although having clockwise rotation a counter-clockwise rotation direction is detected. That’s why in both
directions and with having ”direction of rotation-dependent evaluation” synchronizing takes place at at
edge b (fig. 5.1.4)!
A negative rated speed value has no affect on the selection of the synchronizing edge!
If this displacement error can not be tolerated, ”no direction of rotation-dependent evaluation”
in combination with direction of rotation-dependent offset reference value (ref. Sec. 5.6.2) has to be
adjusted!
Offset actual value:

The offset actual value can be determined for the first time, when both synchronizing pulses occur (the
synchronizing marks are ”travelled over”). It can be determined in 2 ways:
H91 = 0 = ”continuous” offset calculation:
As soon as the offset actual value has been determined once, i. e., both synchronizing marks have been
travelled over once, an offset actual value is calculated each time one synchronizing mark is travelled
over (this can be monitored using d094, d095). The number of synchronizing pulses travelled over is
”counted”, and is weighted with the synchronizing pulse number, i. e. the pulse number per revolution
of the part to be synchronized (set H100 ... H103!). Thus, the actual offset can be determined, even if the
associated synchronizing pulse of the other drive is still missing. If required, several revolutions of the
machine component to be synchronized, are included in the offset actual value.
When synchronizing, several synchronizing pulses which have been travelled over (”revolutions”) are
equalized.
This mode should normally be selected (pre-assignment).
Note:
For rotary axis in the continuous offset calculation mode, erroneous offset calculation may occure if the
axis is reversing. In this case the synchronizing pulses should be enabled only after certain position
values master to slave. This means the „synchronizing enable threshold slave“ (H105) and the
„synchronizing enable threshold master“ (H107) should be set on values corresponding to ¼ revolution.

Manual
H91 = 1 = offset determination within one synchronizing pulse period ( ”retrigger”):
When synchronizing, correction is only realized within 1 synchronizing pulse which has been
travelled over (”1 revolution”).
The ”retrigger” mode should be used,

1.) if it is sufficient, practical or even necessary for technological reasons, to only synchronize within 1
„revolution“, or
2.) if the synchronizing pulse number can only be determined with insufficient accuracy.
(in this case, both synchronizing pulses are required in order to determine the precise offset.)
3.) if positive and negative ratios and negative offset reference values might occur
(up to SW version 1.40, later on the synchronizing pulse number H100/H101 has to be set with positive
values)
4.) if the synchronizing pulse are not cyclically, in general the case for linear axis.
To determine a new offset, both synchronizing marks must again be travelled over. The number of
synchronizing marks travelled over is not ”counted”; the synchronizing pulse number should be set to 0. If
an offset of several revolutions is to be obtained, then this is lost the next time the offset is determined.
In this mode, there is a danger, that the closed-loop angular control circuit could become unstable if the
loop speed is set too fast and for low-frequency synchronizing pulses, because, it could occur, that when
the two synchronizing pulses occur one after another, alternating positive and negative offset actual
values could be determined, which the angular controller would attempt to correct (for example, from an
offset of -370°, +10° would be obtained).
The offset actual value vact is calculated according to the following formula:
vact [pulses] = φslave|t=Ts - üp φmaster|t=Ts + ΣSslave * PRslave - üp ΣSmaster * PRmaster

* *
üp = NM/DN = Pulse number ratio (slave-/master)

φslave/master = Position actual value, slave and master
ΣSslave/master = No. of crossed-over synchronizing marks, slave and master
PRslave/master = Synchronizing pulse No. = pulse number (*4) between two synchronizing marks,
i.e per revolution of the machine components to be synchronized.
t=Ts = Sampling time instant, after a synchronizing signal has been received
ΣSslave/master is reset in the retrigger mode after each sensing
Information regarding synchronizing: Synchronizing could be erronous if these conditions are

not maintained.
31
The time between two synchronizing operations may not exceed 2** quadrupled pulses
The time between two synchronizing operations must be > 16 ms.
The synchronizing signal must be inactive for T > 8 ms (i.e. low signal).

Manual
Examples:
a) Situation: Master- and slave drives, each with a pulse encoder mounted on the motor shaft,
generate two pulse trains, shifted through 90° and a 0 pulse.
Task: The drives are to be synchronized, so that the zero pulses (synchronizing pulses) always
occur simultaneously. This would look like the following when displayed on a suitable
plotter or oscilloscope:
Track A
Track B
Slave pulses
Synchronis.
signal, slave
Pos. act. value

slave
Track A
Track B
Master pulses
Synchronizing
signal, slave
Position act.
value, slave
Determining the Start of the correction Correction sequence completed

offset sequence = synchronizing i.e. synchronization achieved
Synchronizing 1
e.g. terminal 605
0
Fig. 5.1.4.a: Offset sensing and synchronization

Manual
b) Situation: Master- and slave drives, each with a pulse encoder mounted on the motor shaft,
with two pulse trains, shifted through 90° and zero pulse
Task: The drives are to be synchronized, so that the synchronizing pulses - in this case
cams - are always received simultaneously.
Master Slave
M IG IG S
Pulse encoder
n1 Gearbox with (almost) n3

any n1:n2 or n3:n4
n2 n4
Machine components
which must run in
synchronism
A B
Cam position
The following should be set:

- Setpoints:
Relative speed ü = speed ratio = (n3:n4) / (n1:n2)
Master speed = speed setpoint n1 of the master
- Parameters:
Synchronizing pulse No., master H100/H101 = encoder pulse No. (*4) master * (n1:n2)
Synchronizing pulse No., slave H102/H103 = encoder pulse No. (*4) slave * (n3:n4)
In this example, the closed-loop synchronous control must be parameterized so that components A and B
run in angular synchronism. It is not necessary to establish synchronism between the pulse encoders
(motor) of the master- and slave drives. Synchronism is realized by sensing the cam position.
The speed ratio between components A and B may only be 1.1 (refer to example C).
c) Example as under b), however component A should rotate 3 x as fast as component B.
The following should be set:

- Setpoints:
Relative speed ü = Speed ratio = (n3:n4) / ((n1:n2)*3)
Master speed = Seed setpoint n1 of the master
- Parameters:
Synchronizing pulse No., master H100/H101 = encoder pulse number (*4) master * (n1:n2)
Synchronizing pulse No., slave H102/H103 = encoder pulse No. (*4) slave * (n3:n4) / 3

Manual
d) Synchronism and synchronization using a gantry crane as an example
1 1
2 2
3 4 4 3
5
Master drive Slave drive
1 Rough positioning signal, located on the crane track 6
2 Fine positioning signal mark
3 Rough position sensing signal, located on the traversing gear

is fed to the synchronous control
4 Fine position sensing signal, located on the traversing gear
is fed to the synchronous control
5 Crane gantry with master- and slave drives
6 Crane track
Purpose of the synchronization
Gantries are positioned transverse to the track. Synchronization is realized using permanent marks -
rough- and fine positioning signals for both the master- and slave drives. A precise mechanical
adjustment is not required due to the adjustment possibilities provided by the synchronous control. The
pulse encoders are preferably mounted on the motor shafts.
The evaluation of the rough- and synchronizing pulse (fine signal) is described in Section 4.4.5.

Manual
5.2 Byte serial setpoint input

Bytewise setpoint input is the preferred technique for setpoint input via digital outputs of a master system,
e.g. SIMATIC S5. The technique has the following advantages:
-The two setpoint bytes are output continuously. The software required in the master system is
significantly simpler to generate as for hexadecimal or BCD setpoint input, as no request signals must
be interrogated by the PT.
- Fast setpoint input with a minimum setpoint cycle time of approx. 40 ms is possible.
-Several PT boards can be controlled with a master system digital output board.
8 bits (i.e. 1 byte) of a 16-bit setpoint can be read-in in parallel via the binary inputs X6, terminals 611-618.
The byte is identified as either low- or high byte as a result of the binary input signal level, terminal 608
(high byte enable). High- and low- bytes must be steady for the ”transfer time” which can be
parameterized using parameter H033 (i.e. transfer time/4 ms consecutively), so that the value is
transferred. The value read-in is assigned a specific setpoint via terminals 606 and 607.
No Significance Explanation
H030 Enable byte-serial setpoint input 1 = enable 01 = inhibit
H033 Transfer time for one byte min. 8 ms max. 256 ms
Table 5.2.a: Parameter for byte-serial input
Terminal Selected setpoint Explanation

606 607
0 0 None
0 1 Speed master setpoint min. -200 % max. 199.99 %
1 0 Displacement setpoint min. -32768 max. 32767 pulses
1 1 Relative speed (ratio) min. -16.384 max. 16.3835
Table 5.2.b: Explanation of the setpoint selection using binary inputs
Notes:
Byte-serial input and numerical thumbwheel input cannot be simultaneously used.
Inching is not effective for byte-serial input (H030=1).

Manual
5.3 Thumbwheel switch - setpoint input

The thumbwheel switch setpoint is generated from a 4-digit thumbwheel switch, controlled via binary
inputs and outputs, BCD or binary coded, and is transferred as ratio or as offset setpoint, when the
transfer key is depressed.
The thumbwheel switch value which is read-in (without taking into account the positions after the decimal
point), is referred to the value defined using parameter H031- normalization factor; i.e., using the
normalization factor, it is defined which thumbwheel switch number should correspond to an offset
setpoint of 16384 (100%), quadrupled pulses or a ratio of 8.1920 (100%):
Thumbwheel switch value * 16384

Switch output Ydec =
Normalization factor H031
Refer to Figure 2 in the Appendix for the block diagram;

connecting-up diagram, refer to Section 4.2.2.
Each setpoint change is automatically stored, so that when the voltage is powered-up again, the last
selected setpoint is available and is active.
H030 Enable thumbwheel switch input 2 = enable ≠ 2 = inhibit
H031 Normalization factor 16384 for offset setpoint *)
8192 for ratio
H032 Thumbwheel switch coding 0 = binary 1 = BCD
Table 5.3.: Parameters for the thumbwheel switch setpoint input
*) When entering the offset setpoint, if a different value is to be set than the pulse number at the
thumbwheel switch, then the value, which corresponds to 16384 quadrupled pulses should be entered
as normalization factor.
Example:
Offset setpoint should be able to be set in degrees; 360 ° = 1 revolution of the machine part
Slave pulse encoder - (following) drive with 1000 pulses per revolution,
4-digit thumbwheel switch, 1 position after the decimal point Þ numerical value for 360.0 ° = 3600
Gearbox with 1:2 ⇒ 2*1000 pulses per machine revolution
Pulse quadrupling ⇒ 2*1000*4 = 8000 pulses per machine revolution
Normalization factor = 16384 pulses *3600/8000 pulses = 7372.8 = 7373
Notes:
Byte-serial input and thumbwheel switch input cannot be simultaneously used.
The resolution is reduced to 0.001 when the thumbwheel switch is used to set the ratio (for the setting
value).

Manual
5.4 Setpoint inputs via the USS interface

Up to two 16-bit values, which are received via an USS interface of the basic drive converter (CU), can be
fed to the T300 by using the basic drive converter technology controller (which is then no longer
available for other applications).
They can then be used as setpoints on the T300 (refer to the following Section)
- master speed
- ratio (absolute value)
- percentage change in the absolute ratio
- inertia compensation
- offset
5.4.1 CU2,CU3
The basic drive converter technology controller should then, for example, be set as follows:
1. Using the setpoint channel:

P526.01 = 20xy or 60xy xy: Word in the USS telegram
P694.09 = 529 the 9th word in the dual port RAM is assigned
2. Using the actual value channel:

P531.01 = 20xy or 60xy xy: Word in the USS telegram
P694.10 = 534 the 10th word in the dual port RAM is assigned
5.4.2 CUVC,CUMC
The receive connectors of the USS interface can be directly transferred to the dual port RAM.
P734.09 = 20xy or 60xy xy: Selected word from the appropriate USS telegram
(SST1, SST2) with which the 9th word is assigned in the dual port RAM.
P734.10 = 20xy or 60xy xy: Selected word from the appropriate USS telegram
(SST1, SST2) with which the 10th word is assigned in the dual port RAM.

Manual
5.5 Closed-loop speed control
5.5.1 Ratio (absolute value)

The ratio ü between master and slave drive is defined as follows:
Speed, SLAVE
Ratio ü: =
Speed, MASTER
Ratio ü is the ratio between the slave drive speed referred to the master drive speed.
Example: Master drive speed: nM = 1710 RPM

Ratio: ü = 0.7
-> Slave drive speed: nS = nM * ü = 1710 RPM * 0.7 = 1197 RPM
-3
The ratio can be set in steps of 0.5 * 10 , this means:
Resolution of the ratio = 0.0005

Ratio range = -16.3840 to 16.3835
Internal ratio notation = 1.0 = 2000 dec = 7D0 hex
Internal rated value (=16834 dec = 4000 hex) = 8.1920
Notes:
A so-called ”pulse number ratio” is calculated from ratio ü and the encoder pulse number. For uneven
encoder pulse numbers, under certain circumstances, the pulse number ratio regarding the value range
and/or resolution may not be able to be maintained (refer to Table 4.4.3).
It should be noted, that the representable value range (a 2-byte quantity), for the technology board, is
limited to +/- 1.99 * nominal value. This means, for example, that the maximum representable speed is
1.99 x rated speed as configured with H012,H013 and P420 (CU2,CU3) P352,P353 (CUVC,CUMC)
Up to SW version V1.40 a negative ratio ü in combination with a negative offset setpoint value and
H091=0 is allowed only if the synchronising pulse number MASTER (H100,H101) is configured negative
(example refer Sec. 5.7)! From Version 1.5 the problem is solved.
The ratio can be entered from following sources (selected using H040):
H040 Ratio of Explanation
0 Serial interface Setpoint No. 6
1 Binary input, byte-serial Inputs term. 601-605, 608
Selection for term.606=term.607=1
2 Binary input with thumbwheel switch Inputs term. 611-615
Outputs term. 631 -634
normalization factor: H031=8192
3 Parameter H041 or Paramerter H042 for term.617=0 or for term.617=1
4 Parameter H043 Pre-assignment
5 Fixed value 1.0
6 Word 9 of the basic drive converter E. g. value from the USS interface of the CU
(P694.9: CU2,CU3; P734.9: CUVC,CUMC)
7 Word10 of the basic drive converter E. g. value from the USS interface of the CU
(P694.10: CU2,CU3; P734.10: CUVC,CUMC)
Table 5.5.1: Possibilities of selecting the ratio

Manual
The ratio can also be entered via analog input 4 (terminal 507, 508 (ground)). In this case, H048 must
be set to 4 (refer to Section 1.5.2) and the required setting range, specified using H043, e. g.:
H043 Ratio from the analog input

(examples) for a voltage from 0V to 10V:
0.1 0 ... 0.4
1.0 0 ... 4.0
2.0 0 ... 8.0
Making a change from an initial value:

Further, a fixed ratio value can be set using H047, to which the product of the sources, set with H040 and
H048, is added.
Thus, the ratio, starting from a base value (H047) can be changed, e. g. using analog input (H048=4).
(Refer to Section 5.5.2 when selecting the analog input.)
5.5.2 Percentage change in the ratio

A ratio entered as absolute value can be changed in a range from 0 to +/-200% and in 0.0061% steps, in
order to for example, easily set stretch- and shrink ratios.
The (absolute) ratio, set using H043, is multiplied with a (0...+/-200%) value, which is supplied from a
source, set using H048. When this factor reaches 100%, the selected ratio is not changed.
H048 Percentage change of the ratio from: Explanation

0 Serial interface Setpoint No. 4
1 Binary input, byte-serial data entry Inputs terminals 601-605, 608
Selected for terminal 606= terminal 607 =1
2 Binary input with thumbwheel switch Inputs terminals 611-615

Outputs terminals 631-634
Setting the normalization: H031
3 Parameter H041 If terminal 617=0,
or parameter H042 If terminal 617=1
Caution: In this case, the entered decimal
number corresponds to a percentage value
(100% instead of 1.0)
4 Parameter H049 Pre-assignment =100% (no change)
5 Analog input 4 (terminals 507/508) 5V corresponds to 100%,

i. e. no change;
10V correspond to 200%,
i. e. the selected ratio is doubled
(P694.9: CU2,CU3; P734.9: CUVC,CUMC)
(P694.10: CU2,CU3; P734.10: CUVC,CUMC)
Table 5.5.2: Possibilities of selecting a percentage change in the ratio

Manual
5.5.3 Master speed setpoint and speed setpoint

The master speed setpoint is the setpoint at which the master drive should run. The ”speed setpoint” for
the slave drive is calculated from the master speed setpoint after smoothing (H072) and after multiplying
it with the ratio. This is then fed to the speed controller. The closed-loop angular control on the T300, as
higher-level controller to the speed controller, must then only correct the signal.
The following sources are possible for the master speed setpoint (selected with H070):
H070 Master speed setpoint from Explanation

0 Communications board, word2 CB1/CBP (PROFIBUS) or SCB1/2
1 Analog input 1 Terminal 501 / 502
adapted with H071
2 Binary input, byte-serial Terminal 611 - 618
selected for term.606=0, term.607=1
3 Speed actual value, MASTER drive Pre-assignment
Master pulse encoder at SE300 terminals 541-
547.
It should be noted, that H013 and P420
(CU2,CU3); P352,P353 (CUVC,CUMC) have
to be configured correctly!
4 Peer-to-peer protocol on T300, word2 Pre-set: 38400 baud, 4 words
5 Parameter H073 Pre-assignment =0%
6 9th word of basic drive e.g. USS interface of the basic drive (CU)
(P694.9: CU2,CU3; P734.9: CUVC,CUMC)
(P694.10: CU2,CU3; P734.10: CUVC,CUMC)
Table 5.5.3: Possibilities of selecting the master speed setpoint
The setpoint smoothing (in ms) is set using parameter H072, which is especially recommended for the
setting H070=3.
The actual setpoint smoothed can be displayed with d074 ( value without ratio ), or with d136 ( value after
the multiplkation with the ratio).
Notes:
If the angular controller (or synchronizing) are used, the slave master setpoint may only be changed with
respect to the master, using ratio ü!
This is because the speed, and therefore the angular differences can only be taken into account by the
angular controller for appropriately set ratios which are known to the position sensing.
An absolute angular difference, occurring at a specific ratio, no longer appears in the position difference
value, so that the angular controller must not attempt to correct it.
H075 - Delay, master setpoint : If both a master setpoint as well as an off3 command from a SIMOVERT
MASTER DRIVES drive converter is generated and sent, together in a telegram to the slave via a serial
interface (e. g. T300 peer), then the master setpoint is immediately 0 if an off3 command is present.
As the master setpoint is coupled to the basic drive converter faster than the off3 command, the basic
drive converter immediately identifies that the setpoint has been changed to 0, which could lead to a DC
link overvoltage fault!
In order to prevent this, the master setpoint must be coupled to the basic drive converter in the same time
sector as the off3 command (T2=16ms).

Manual
5.5.4 Inertia compensation

Using the ”inertia compensation” function for fast master speed setpoint changes, the resulting control
deviation of the angular synchronism is reduced. The inertia compensation acts as feed-forward signal for
the speed controller. When required this should be set in the basic drive converter as supplementary
torque setpoint: P506=3008
T300 offers the following sources for inertia compensation (selected using H080), which is then
transferred to the basic drive converter:
H080 Inertia compensation from Explanation

0 Communications board, word7 CB1 (PROFIBUS) or SCB1/2
1 Analog input 3 Terminal 505 / 506
Adapted using H081
2 Differentiation, speed setpoint Pre-assignment
Time constant with H082
Adapted using H083
3 0 No inertia compensation
(P694.9: CU2,CU3; P734.9: CUVC,CUMC)
(P694.10: CU2,CU3; P734.9: CUVC,CUMC)
Table 5.5.4: Possibilities of selecting the inertia compensation-setpoint
The parameters to be set to differentiate the speed setpoint have the following significance:
n-set
X Y0
Y
Y1
H082 T1 H083
7.99 ms TD T1 t X TD
Y0 = *
H083 H082
Fig. 5.5.4: Differentiation step
Setting:
Generally, T1 lies in the range between 100 and 500 ms. The magnitude of the output quantity of the
differential element is set using H083. The values for parameter H083 are generally between 1% to 10%.
5.5.5 Inching
An inching setpoint (1 or 2 ) is added to the master setpoint on the T300, if the inching 1 or inching 2
command is entered. Thus, the slave speed can be changed with respect to the master speed very simply
and briefly. Thus, slack take-up or slack-off with respect to the master can be easily implemented.
However, inching is not practical for operation in the angular control mode, as the angular controller
opposes the inching setpoint.
Inching setpoints 1 and 2 are set using parameters H130 and H131.
The source is selected using H249 (for inching1) and H250 (for inching2).

Manual
5.5.6 Speed controller, Kp adaption
5.5.6.1 CU2,CU3
The basic drive converter speed controller is a PI controller. For very low speeds (n* < approx. 2% to
5%), it is recommended, to provide a speed-setpoint dependent adaption of the P gain, which can be
implemented on the T300 with an adjustable polygon characteristic.
CU2:If adaption is required, P226 must be set to 3006 in the basic drive converter.
CU3: Adaptation not possible.
The resulting Kp is the product of P225 and this value retrieved from T300.
The characteristic is linearly interpolated between the transition points (e. g. [1] and [2]):
KP
H141 = KP (Connector B2 from PLI2)
H142 H142 = KP_0 (Connector B1 from PLI2)
[1]
H143 = n_KP (Connector A2 from PLI2)
d153 H144 = n_KP_0 (Connector A1 from PLI2)
if adaption is not required:

H141
H143 = H144 = 0;
[2] H141 is effective
n*
-H143 -H144 H144 H143
Fig. 5.5.6: P gain adaption
No. Significance Explanation

H141 KP: P gain at high speeds n > n_KP If adaption is required,
parameters H142 to H144 must
be set
H142 KP_0: P gain at low speeds
H143 Speed n_KP, from P gain = KP
H144 Speed, n_KP_0, up to P gain = KP_0
d153 actual gain KP display parameter
Table 5.5.6: Parameters for speed controller setting
The adaption values should be determined using the usual techniques or empirically:
a) Starting from the standard setting (no adaption), the lowest speed should be determined, where the
already optimized drive still has the required control quality.
b) Then, for n_KP_0, the value n_KP_0 is approx. set to = n_KP/2.
c) Approach the speed, as entered under b), and then optimize with KP_0 closed-loop control.
d) The KP_0 and n_KP_0 values may still have to be varied.

Manual
5.5.6.2 CUVC,CUMC
The following parameters must be permanently set on the T300:
H144=0%; H143=199,9%; H142=0 and H141=255,9.
The KP adaptation is then set in the basic drive (P233,P234,P235,P236)
For the procedure, refer to the CUVC and CUMC block diagrams (Compendium), Sheet 360:
The values for the adaptation should be determined using the usual techniques or experimentally:
a) Starting from the standard setting (no adaptation), the lowest speed should be determined
where the required control quality is still evident for an already optimized drive
b) Then, for n_KP_0, approximately the value n_KP_0 = n_KP/2 should be determined
c) Approach the speed, entered under b), and then optimize the control with KP_0.
d) The values for KP_0 and n_KP_0 must, under certain circumstances, still be varied.
The effective KP can be read at parameter r237, basic drive.
5.6 Angular control

Angular synchronous control is when a speed control is cascaded with a higher-level angular controller.
The angular controller corrects the angular difference, which is obtained due to the different loading and
control of speed fluctuations between the master- and slave drives, to zero or an offset reference value.
The angular controller generates a supplementary speed setpoint at its output. The block circuit diagram
of the angular control is illustrated in Fig. 4 of the Appendix.
5.6.1 Enable signals

1.) The angular controller is enabled via the source, which can be set using H252 (e. g. terminal 601).
2.) Parameter H052 is used to select when the position difference actual value sensing is reset and
enabled. If the actual value sensing is not enabled, the position difference actual value is set to the
setpoint (0 or the set offset reference value).
3.) For the setting H257 = 0, the angular controller output is no longer sent as supplementary setpoint
value2 to the basic drive converter, if an OFF signal is present in the drive converter and the ramp-
function generator is inactive (drive has ramped-down to frequency 0).
Thus, this prevents the drive rotating in spite of an off command and master setpoint =0 if the angular
controller output is greater than the ”off-shutdown frequency” from the basic converter.
The supplementary setpoint is not disconnected for setting H257 = 1.

Manual
5.6.2 Offset and direction of rotation-dependent synchronization reference value

An offset of the relative angular position between the master- and slave drive can be set using the offset
reference value. If synchronization is not realized, the offset reference value is referred to the angular
position of the drives at the instant that the position difference actual value was last set (angular controller
enabled). If synchronizing is realized, the offset reference value is referred to the synchronized angular
position.
The offset reference value is defined as the number of encoder pulses (*4) from the slave, by which the
slave drive should lead the master drive. The offset reference value should be a maximum of +/- 32768
encoder pulses (*4). The limits can be adjusted with H054, H055.
Examples: Encoder pulse number, slave = 1000 (encoder on the drive)

1) The slave drive should lead the master by 0.5 revolutions
⇒ Offset reference value = 0.5 * (1000 * 4) = 2000 pulses
2) Maximum offset reference value = 32768 / (1000 * 4) = 8.192 revolutions
The offset reference value is fed to the angular controller via a ramp-function generator. The ramp-up
time is the time, in which the reference value changes by 16384 pulses (*4). The ramp-up time should be
selected to be as high as possible (recommended: 5-10 seconds; generally not less than 1 second).
Notes:
In the mode, offset sensing = retrigger (H91=1), the maximum offset reference value may only be half
of a revolution of the component to be synchronized!
Up to SW version V1.3 In the mode offset sensing = continuous (H91=0) a negative ratio in
combination with a negative offset setpoint value is not allowed
H091=0 is allowed only if the synchronising pulse number MASTER (H100,H101) is configured as a
negative value (example refer Sec. 5.7)!
From SW version V1.5 this problem is sloved
Note(from V1.6): If the value range of the offset setpoint (*/- 32768) is not sufficient (exceptional cases),
then this can be increased using H270 (H270 as exponent to the power of two). In this case, it must be
expected that the accuracy (resolution) is reduced

Manual
The following sources are possible for the offset reference value ds*:
H050 Displacement reference value from Explanation

0 Communications board, word5 Reference value No. 3
1 Analog input 2 Terminal 503 / 504 and H051
2 Binary input, byte-serial Terminals 601 - 608
Selection for 606=1, 607=0
3 Binary input with thumbwheel switch Inputs Terminals 611-615
Outputs Termnals 621-624
Normalization factor: H031 = 16384
(P694.09: CU2,CU3)
(P734.09: CUVC,CUMC)
5 Parameter H066 Pre-assignment
6 Parameter H060 for term. 618 = 0 Not possible, (not permissible to select) for
Parameter H061 for term. 618 = 1 byte-serial input !
(P694.10: CU2,CU3)
(P734.10: CUVC,CUMC)
Table 5.6.2.a: Possibilities of selecting the offset reference value
P-No. Significance Explanation

H051 Adaption, analog input ds* [pulses] = H051 * 16 384 pulses * U [V] / 5 V
H053 Ramp-up time, offset reference
value
H054 Reference value limiting, positive
H055 Reference value limiting, negative
d056 Actual offset reference value Display parameters
H060 Displacement reference value for Not for byte-serial input
terminal 618 = 0
H061 Displacement reference value for Not for byte-serial input
terminal 618 = 1
H062 - H065 Direction of rotation- dependent offset reference value, refer below
H066 Fixed reference value
Table 5.6.2.b: Parameters for the offset reference value

Manual
For reversing and wide synchronizing marks, synchronization is possible at different directions of rotation
to different ”edges” of the synchronizing signal.
Depending on the direction of rotation, a positive synchronizing edge appears at edge A as well as at B.
However, the aim is that synchronization is always referred to one edge.
Proximity
switch
S S = Switching cam, length L with edges a and b

b a
For clockwise rotation, the system synchronizes to
edge a, and for counter-clockwise rotation, to edge b.
cw c-cw L should be specified as pulse number (*4)
cw: clockwise
cw: counter clockwise
The speed actual value sensing of the T300 board can be parameterized, so that the synchronizing edge
can always be selected, dependent on the direction of rotation. For example, for a positive direction of
rotation, the positive edge is evaluated, and for a negative direction of rotation, the negative synchronizing
edge. The ”direction of rotation-dependent synchronization” selection can only be made together for the
master- and slave drives. The setting is realized using parameter H018 and H019 (initialization
parameters, explanation of the parameter setting, refer to Section 5.1.4).
For the case, that ”direction of rotation-dependent synchronization” cannot be used, the length L of the
switching cam must be stored in the software. This is realized using a direction of rotation-dependent
offset reference value input, using parameters H062 to H065:
TP-No Master speed Slave speed Value to be set Offset (positive values)
H062 + + 0 Slave lagging
H063 - + Lslave Slave lagging
H064 + - -üP*Lmaster Slave leading
H065 - - Lslave - üP*Lmaster Slave leading
Table 5.6.2.d: Direction of rotation - dependent offset reference value
(üp=pulse number ratio NM/DN refer to Sections 5.1.3 and 5.5.1)
5.6.3 Smoothing, position difference actual value

The position difference actual value (the 32 bit value converted to 16 bit), is smoothed using a PT1
element. The smoothing time is set using parameter H117.
5.6.4 Limit value monitor, position difference actual value

A limit value monitor for the smoothed position difference actual value can be set using parameters H201
and H202. When the limits are exceeded, this is signaled at binary output, terminal 638 and in status
word, bit 11 (limiting effective = logical 1).

Manual
5.6.5 Angular controller

The angular controller has PI characteristics. However, generally it is only parameterized as P controller.
If the ratio is to be changed in operation, by factors approximately >1.5 or < 0.75, P gain adaption should
be used. This is implemented using a ratio-dependent setting of the P gain. There is a linear interpolation
between the characteristic points [1] and [2]:
KP
H113 = KP (connector B2 from PLI2)
H113 [2] H114 = KP_0 (connector B1 from PLI2)
H115 = ü_KP (connector A2 from PLI2)
H116 = ü_KP_0 (connector A1 from PLI2)
If adaption is not required:

H114
H115 = H116 = 0;
H113 is effective
[1]
ü
-H115 -H116 H116 H115
Fig. 5.6.5: P gain adaption
H110 Angular controller as P controller (0 / 1 = no / yes) (0 / 1 = PI / P controller)
H111 Integral action time TN
H112 Positive and negative output limiting (as a % of the rated
speed)
H113 P gain KP If adaption is required,
or, if adaption is set parameters H114 to H116
P gain for high ratio ü > ü_KP should be set
H114 P gain KP_0 for low ratio
H115 Ratio ü_KP, from P gain = KP
H116 Ratio ü_KP_0, from P gain= KP_0
Table 5.5.5.b: Parameters for angular controller setting
The adaption values should be determined using the standard techniques or experimentally:
a) Starting from the standard setting (no adaption), the highest ratio should be selected, this should then
be entered for ü_Kp. and the control optimized using this value (Kp).
b) Then select the lowest ratio, enter this for ü_KP_0, and optimize the control for this value (KP_0).
Example: Ratio range: 0.2 to 4.0

H116 = ü_KP_0 = 0.2
H114 = KP_0 =3
H115 = ü_KP = 4.0
H113 = KP =5

Manual
5.7 Synchronization
Synchronizing has the task to sense and to control the relative position - the offset - between the
drives. The position of the drives is sensed using a synchronizing pulse (zero pulse, proximity switch
(BERO), contact,..).
The synchronizing corrects angular/position errors, which are not visible in the position difference
(SACT.YDP), e. g. after the drives have been rotated when the drive converter is in a powered-down
status.
A permanently available synchronizing command maintains synchronism when erroneous pulses occur or
when the pulses fail completely.
Synchronizing, i. e. the correction of a possibly determined offset, is realized by activating a synchronizing

command, whose source can be set using H251 (e. g. terminal 603).
For applications, which require no synchronizing, the synchronizing command must be inhibited.
Parameters H052 and H090 are used to select, when the position actual value sensing and offset
calculation are to be reset and enabled.
The synchronizing command can be parameterized for either signal level- or edge control, using H092.
For signal level control, the offset is corrected for as long as the signal is active (logical 1); for edge
control, correction is only once after a positive (0→1) edge. Offset correction is not suddenly realized, but
is corrected by a pulse number, selected using parameter H093, in each sampling interval.
An offset correction of n 4 x pulses takes: 4ms(sampling time) *n / H093
No: Significance Explanation

H251 Source, ”angular synchronization”
H091 Mode, offset actual value sensing 0 = cont. (refer to Section 5.1.4)
1 = retrigger
H092 Mode, synchronization request 0 = level controlled
1 = edge controlled
H093 Correction pulse number Select lowest possible value (H093=1);
Could be greater for faster

syncronization for low-frequent sync-
signals
or if H091=1
d094 offset actual value (16 bit) Display parameter
d095 offset act. value - pos. diff. act. val. (16 bit) Display parameter
d096 offset actual value sensing, error ID: Display parameter
Bit 0 = overflow ΣSslave ΣS = sum of the synchronizing signals
Bit 1 = overflow ΣSmaster
Bit 2 = overflow ΣSslave * (H103,H102)
Bit 3 = overflow ΣSmaster * (H101,H100)
Bit 8 = overflow offset- - pos. diff. act. val.
Table 5.7.b: Parameter for offset sensing / synchronization
The number of pulse edges between 2 synchronizing marks must be entered to perfectly determine the
offset actual value. This information is required to calculate the offset. A small deviation between the
entered and actual pulse number does not negatively influence the calculation.

Manual
Master drive, pulses, pulse

d
Track A
Track B
Pulse
edges
Synchronizing
signal, master
Synchronizing pulse number, master H100, H101 (in this case: 52)
Slave drive, pulses, pulse

d Track A
Track B
Pulse
edges
Synchronizing
signal, slave
Synchronizing pulse number, slave H102, H103 (in this case: 104)
Fig. 5.7.a: Explanation of the synchronizing pulse number
This synchronizing pulse number is a 32-bit parameter, which is entered as low- and high word. If the
pulse number (*4) is less than 32 767, only the low word must be entered (high word = 0). Proceed as
follows, if it is greater than 32 767:
Divide the pulse number (*4) by 65 536 high word = integer number result (without rounding-off),
determine the rest: Rest = pulse number (*4) - high word *65 536
- Rest is less than 32 768: Low word = rest
- Rest is greater than 32 767: Low word = rest - 65 536 (is negative !)
H100 Synchronzing pulse No., master low word Pulse edges (pulse * 4) of the master drive which
are received between 2 synchronizing marks
H101 Synchron. pulse No., master high word
H102 Synchronizing pulse No., slave low word Pulse edges (pulse * 4) of the slave drive, which
are received between 2 synchronizing marks
H103 Synchronizing pulse No., slave high word
d108 Synchronizing pulse No. master, 32bit for verify of H100-H103 input
d109 Synchronizing pulse No. slave, 32bit

Table 5.7.b: Parameters, synchronizing pulse number

Manual
Examples:
- Encoder pulse No., MASTER: 2000
- Encoder pulse No., SLAVE: 4000
Both encoders are mounted on the motors
a) Gearbox ratio: MASTER - motor : MASTER - drive axis = 1:1

Gearbox ratio: SLAVE - motor : SLAVE - drive axis = 1:1
Synchronizing pulse No. MASTER: 2 000*4 = 8 000 = H100 = (H101 = 0)
Synchronizing pulse No. SLAVE: 4 000*4 = 16 000 = H102 = (H103 = 0)
b) Gearbox ratio: MASTER - motor : MASTER - drive axis = 12.5:1

Gearbox ratio: SLAVE - motor : SLAVE - drive axis = 5:1
Synchronizing pulse No. MASTER: 2000*4*12.5 = 100 000

100 000 / 65 536 = 1.525.. = 1 = H101
100 000 - 1*65 536 = 34 464
34 464 is > 32 767:34 464 - 65 536 = -31 072 = H100
Synchronizing pulse No. SLAVE: 4000*4*5 = 80 000

80 000 / 65 536 = 1.22..= 1 = H103
80 000 - 1*65 536 = 14 464
14 464 is < 32 768:14 464 = H102
Adjusting a negative synchronizing pulse No MASTER (for SW-version V1.40, ”B”):
H100/H101 has to be configured as a negative number, if a negative offset setpoint value has to be
adjusted while having a negative ratio and H091=0.
A positive synchronizing pulse No is parameterized as a negative No as follows (check with d108):

H100 neg = - H100 pos
H101 neg = H101 pos -1
Examples (ref. above).:

synchronizing pulse No = - 40 000: H100 = 25536; H101 = -1
synchronizing pulse No = - 80 000: H100 = -14464; H101 = -2

Manual
5.7.1 Fail-save synchronization by means of enable threshold

The synchronization control is used to suppress bounce effects. In this case, disturbances/noise can only
be suppressed to a certain degree.
A synchronization signal, caused by contact bounce or by noise can result in the following:
- inaccuracy (angular position)
- inversion of the control sense of the synchronization, as the rigid sequence of synchronizing pulses is
interrupted (e.g.: master-, slave-, master drive). For a rotary motion, it means that the slave drive
rotates, e.g. one revolution forwards or backwards.
- the slave drive operates without any control
Thus, the synchronizing signal cables should be carefully routed and screened
(refer to Section 4.4).
The following diagrams describe the effects when bounce is present, and the counter-measures. Only
one drive is illustrated.
Signals at the T300 terminals
Switching
threshold
Internal evaluation
Fig. 5.7.c: Signal characteristic with steep pulse edges for example typical for zero pulses from pulse encoders
Synchronizing signal at the T300 terminal [1] At the first rising edge, the control system
recognizes a synchronizing pulse. The effectiveness
that the switching threshold has been exceeded
Switching again after Te (0 < Te < approx. 4 ms) is suppressed
threshold per hardware (after the first synchronizing signal,
software
h must issue an enable signal).
Te
> 4 ms
[1] [2] [2] A new synchronizing pulse is simulated without
any special measures. The software can again
Internal evaluation identify a synchronizing pulse after approx. 4 ms.
Fig. 5.7.d: Signal characteristics with an undefined voltage characteristic; typical for a proximity switch; Faults/noise
occurring within 4ms (=sampling time) are automatically suppressed due to the processing in the sampling time!

Manual
Faults/noise and disturbances which occur (e.g. contact bounce) between 2 leading edges of the
synchronizing pulses can be suppressed by entering an enable threshold when a specific position
actual value is reached. The synchronizing pulses are only registered again after this enable time td,
which can be separately set for the master- (H106, H107) and slave drive (H104, H105), has expired.
Signal at the SE300 terminal [5] tSYN
Switch.
threshold
[3] [3]
[4]
TS, ΣS
Enable signal
[2]
[1] td,d [1]
Internal
evaluation
[1] Synchronization is enabled in this section (position actual value > limit value);
the minimum duration may not fall below 12 ms, tmin = 12 ms
[2] Synchronizing pulse sensing is inhibited for time td
(as the position actual value < limit value)
[3] Bounce is suppressed at this position
[4] TS = Time between two synchronizing operations (ΣS = number of pulses)
[5] Normally, bounce times are between 1 - 10 ms
Fig. 5.7.e: Effect of the enable control (only one drive shown)
Calculation of limit value of enable time d (H105, H107):

1.) For non-critical situations, the enable threshold can be set to approx. 95% of the synchronizing pulse
number.
2.) If the synchronizing pulses are extremely noisy, or if there is a danger, that the above mentioned 12ms
minimum enable duration cannot be maintained at high speeds and the highest possible enable threshold,
then the enable threshold can be precisely calculated using the following formula:
12 ms + (0.05 to 0.1) * TS ΣS = No. of pulse edges between 2

d = ΣS * ( 1 - ) synchronizing pulses (Fig. 5.7.a)
TS TS = Time between two synchronizing pulses
at maximum speed
d not negative ! tmin= 12 ms (configuring constant 3*4 ms)
d not < width of the synchronizing signal tSYN Safety factor 0.05 .. 0.1
Limit value defines how many pulses must be counted (*4) after a successful synchronization (i.e. how
high the position actual value must be) before the next synchronizing operation is enabled.
Limit value d - the enable threshold for the synchronizing signal - should be calculated for the master-
and slave drives.
Information regarding synchronizing: Synchronizing could be erronous if these conditions are

not maintained.
31
The time between two synchronizing operations may not exceed 2** quadrupled pulses
The time between two synchronizing operations must be > 16 ms.
The synchronizing signal must be inactive for T > 8 ms (i.e. low signal).

Manual
The position actual values are available as 32-bit values; they are converted into 16-bit values. If an
enable threshold (refer below) ≥32768 pulses must be set, the position actual value conversion must be
adapted with parameters H104 and H106. The precise conversion formula is:
Pos. act. val. [32 bit]
Pos. act. val. [16 bit] =  with adaption = H104 for slave drive and
(16-adaption)
2** H106 for master drive
d Y
< 32768 ? H105 = d
H104 = 16
N
d Y H105 = d/2
< 65536 ? H104 = 15
N
d< Y H105 = d/2**2

32768*2**2 H104 = 16-2
?
N
d< Y H105 = d/2**3

32768*2**3 H104 = 16-3
?
N
Continue Round-off the positions after the decimal points of d/n

appropriately
Fig. 5.7.f: Determining the enable threshold d for the slave drive
(proceed in an analog fashion for the master: H104 → H106, H105 → H107)
X
H104 Adaption, position actual value slave Value is an exponent to the power of 2 (2** )
H105 Enable threshold of the synchronizing signal,
slave
X
H106 Adaption, position actual value, master Value is an exponent to the power of 2 (2** )
H107 Enable threshold of the synchronizing signal,
master
Table 5.7.g: Parameters for synchronization
If parameters H104 or H106 must be changed, it should be taken into account, that the 16-bit position
(16 -adaption)
actual values must be modified by a factor 2** . This involves the following values: Analog actual
value, enable threshold and display parameters d016 and d017.
Note:
The enable threshold must either
- be greater than the synchronizing signal width or
- be parameterized to 0.
If enabling is realized while the synchronizing signal is active, the position actual value is reset; this can
result in erroneous synchronization.

Manual
Example to enable timd td:
Given: - the number of pulse encoder pulses between two synchronizing marks
master drive = 21307 Slave drive = 6843
- time between 2 synchronizing marks at max. speed = 117 ms

(always the same for master and slave)
- safety time = 0.1 * TS
Calculation, master drive: Slave drive:

ΣS = 4 *pulse number
4 * 21307 = 85228 4 * 6843 = 27372
d = 85228 * (1 - 12 ms + 11.7 ms) d = 27372 * (1 - 12 ms + 11.7 ms)

117 ms 117 ms
d = 67964 d = 21827
H107 = 67964 / 4 = 16990 H105 = 21827
H106 = 14 H104 = 16
5.7.2 Increasing the noise immunity of the synchronizing pulse

The synchronizing control, described in Section 5.7.1, is used to suppress contact bounce;
disturbance/noise on the synchronizing pulse line cannot be suppressed with these measures. An RC-
lowpass filter, with a smoothing time of 2 to 5 ms has proven itself to be effective in increasing the noise
immunity.
Information regarding the RC element:

- the synchronizing signal must be sufficiently long with respect to the smoothing time.
- with different master- and slave drive speeds, low offset errors occur when the speeds vary.
- using an oscilloscope (smoothing time as described above), noise can be reliably identified after the
RC element, as the synchronizing signal itself has a limiting frequency > 100 kHz, and noise in the
10 µs range is difficult to identify.
- the RC element can, for example, be mounted in a Phönix enclosure
(Order No.: Enclosure EMG.50-89, cover: EMG50-H15).
- the capacitor used must have good HF characteristics.
Recommended type: MKL, B32110, Siemens.

Manual
Dimensioning the RC element:

- Given: VB, proximity switch output voltage, etc.
- Defined: VE, PT input voltage
- R = ( VB - 1) * 6.3 kΩ (1) C = T * ( R + 6.3 kΩ) (2)
VE R * 6.3 kΩ
When T is entered in ms and R is in kΩ (2), the result is in µF.
Twisted and PT
Terminal block
screened cable R
From the proximity

switch (BERO), UB UE 6.3 kΩ
contact etc. C
Example:
- Given: UB = 23 V, T = 2 ms
- R = ( 23 V - 1) * 6.3 kΩ = 3.36 kΩ ≈ 3.3 kΩ
15 V
- C = 2 ms * ( 3.3 kΩ+ 6,3 kΩ) = 0.9 µF ≈1 µF
3.3 kΩ* 6.3 kΩ
5.7.3 Synchronism reached

The threshold for the synchronism reached signal (binary output, terminal 635) can be set using
parameter H203.
Synchronism is achieved, if an offset actual value is determined, which is zero (or the direction of rotation-
dependent offset reference value). Dynamic fluctuations of the angular difference, which are represented
in the offset actual value, are taken into account in so much that the offset actual value is corrected by the
angular difference actual value - conditioned offset actual value.
Thus, synchronism reached means: conditioned offset actual value = 0 ± H203
H100-H103 must be adjusted!
5.8 Open-loop control

The open-loop control of the angular synchronous software package and the basic drive converter can be
set via T300 parameters (H216 - d261).
Control word bits, received from the T300, are used in the angular synchronous software package
according to the actual parameterization. The control word bits used by the basic drive converter are
transferred to the basic drive converter.
They must be appropriately set in the basic drive converter if they are actually used there (P554 to P590).
All binary control signals (controller enable signals, synchronizing command) can be simultaneously
entered, independently of one another. Possibly required interlocking functions are made in the software
(e. g. synchronization is only practical when the angular controller is enabled).

Manual
5.9 Faults, alarms, status displays
5.9.1 General information regarding faults and alarms

The standard software package permits an extremely flexible display and transfer of the internal statuses
in the form of
- drive converter faults, F116 to F131,
- drive converter alarms, A097 to A112
- status bits, which are transferred via serial interfaces,
- status bits, which are signaled via SE300 terminals.
The type of output of the individual statuses is set via parameter (H212, H213, H218, H219), as well as
the limit values, where a signal is to be initiated.
The basic drive converter is fault-tripped, if a bit is set in parameter d214, and with an appropriate enable
with the H212 mask parameter (behaviour as for OFF2, i. e. the power is disconnected, the drive coasts
down). The fault is stored on the basic drive converter.
As soon as the cause has been removed, i. e. the bit involved is 0, the fault can be acknowledged on the
basic drive converter. Acknowledgement is not possible as long as a ”1” is transferred to the basic drive
converter via the dual port RAM!
Alarms, are only displayed as numbers on the operator control panels. They do not influence the drive.
They cannot be acknowledged, but instead they are automatically deleted once the cause has been
removed and the appropriate bit becomes 0.
Bit Hex Fault Alarm Significance

value number number
0 1 F116 A097 Overspeed, positive (H190)
1 2 F117 A098 Overspeed, negative (H191)
2 4 F118 A099 External fault from sources 1 to 3 (according to H254 to H256)
3 8 F119 A100 Angular controller at its limit (H112)
4 10 F120 A101 Telegram error, T300-peer (monitoring times: H208, H209)
5 20 F121 A102 Communications error, T300<->drive converter (no adjustable monitoring)
6 40 F122 A103 Communications error, T300<->CB1/CBP/SCB1,2
(monitoring times: H210, H211)
7 80 F123 A104 Anti-stall protection:
Corresponds to the basic drive converter status bit 8 of status word 1
”setpoint/actual value deviation”;
8 100 F124 A105 Slave speed actual value > H180
9 200 F125 A106 Slave speed actual value is within H182 ± H183
10 400 F126 A107 Slave speed actual value < H181
11 800 F127 A108 ”Comparison frequency not reached”
Corresponds to the basic drive converter status bit 10 of status word 1
12 1000 F128 A109 Control error, angular controller > H200
13 2000 F129 A110 ”Speed actual value sensing erroneous”
the correct pulse encoder connection should be checked and for cable
interruption;
master- or slave actual value deviate from the master setpoint by more
than 10%.
The monitoring only functions if the master setpoint is not taken from the
master speed actual value and the ratio ist 1.
14 4000 F130 A111 Control error, angular controller < H200
15 8000 F131 A112 Angular difference outside H201<DY<H202 (measured in pulses *4)

Manual
5.9.2 Communications monitoring (F120, F122)
The communication blocks, which receive the telegrams from a communications board or the T300-peer-
to-peer, check, in each sampling cycle, whether a valid (and error-free) telegram has been received,
which is then signaled. These signals are counted using an integrator.
The integrator is reset if an error-free telegram has been received.
If the integrator limit value (corresponds to the selected monitoring time) is reached due to sufficiently long
telegram failures, a status message is output, which, according to the fault mask (H212) can result in a
fault trip.
In order to simplify the first start-up steps, and to eliminate irrelevant fault trips, the communications error
(H212) is suppressed when the angular synchronous standard software package is supplied.
If a communications board or the T300-peer is used, the associated status bits to initiate a fault,
must be re-enabled!
Initialization monitoring time:

After power-up, a time, which can be set with H208 (T300-peer) or H210 (communications board) is
inserted, before the telegram is checked to ensure that it has been correctly received.
Cyclic monitoring time

As soon as the initialization delay time after power-up has expired, or valid telegrams have already been
received, the cyclic monitoring time for the telegram error identification becomes effective. This is
parameterized using parameter H209, H211. For this monitoring time, for CB1 (PROFIBUS), it may be
necessary to take into account the number of nodes, as the reception of telegrams is a function of the
node number and transmit cycle.
5.9.3 Binary status displays

Important status information is displayed via the following SE300 binary outputs:
Terminal Significance Relevant parameters

635 Synchronism reached H203
636 Angular controller at its limit H112
corresponds to F119 and A100
637 Excitation in the master and slave expired; H245, H246
If the associated status bits are present and their
selection/processing correspondingly set, the setpoint can be
enabled, and both drives can accelerate in synchronism.
638 Angular difference greater than the limit value, H201, H202
corresponds to F131 or A112
Table 5.9.3: Status messages at the binary outputs

Manual
5.10 Diagnostics LED, alarms, faults
5.10.1 Diagnostics LED on the T300

The T300 has 3 LEDs:
Red LED
This flashes if the T300 software is being executed.
This LED must always flash, even if T300 for CU2, CU3 is still not logged-in in the unit.
No flashing, error cause Remedy

T300 (or LED) defective Replace T300
T300 not completely inserted, or Always insert T300 into slot 2,
inserted at the center slot if there is no i. e. the far right-hand slot
communications module.
LBA defective Replace LBA
MS340 memory module Correctly insert the MS340 memory module
not inserted / not correctly inserted
MS340 memory module not programmed or Replace the MS340 memory module
defective, or incorrect module, refer to the note
below.
Yellow LED
This LED flashes if the T300 is communicating with the basic drive (CU). Cause of the error, if only the
red LED is flashing, but not the yellow LED:
No flashing, error cause: Remedy

T300 (if relevant, the dual port RAM) defective Replace the T300
CUVC, CUMC: The basic drive does not recognize CUVC, CUMC: Replace T300 or CUVC, CUMC
the T300 CU2, CU3: Log-on the T300, refer to Section 3.1 or
CU2, CU3: The basic drive does not recognize the replace T300 or CU2, CU3
T300
Slots from T300 and the communications board are Always insert the T300 into slot 2,
interchanged i. e. the far right-hand slot
Green LED
This LED flashes if the T300 is communicating with the communications module (CBP/CB1, SCB1/SCB2)
(CU2, CU3: Do not have to be logged-on in the basic drive (P91)!).
Does not flash, if a communications module is not available for axial winder operation.
Cause of the error, only if the red (and if relevant the yellow) LED flashes, but not the green LED:
No flashing, cause of the error: Remedy

T300 defective Replace the T300
Communications module has not been inserted or Insert the communications module,
not at the correct slot or ensure that it is correctly inserted, i. e. in the
center!
Communications module has failed Replace the communications module
Note:
The MS340 memory module is identified by its Order No. on the PC board, refer to Section 1.3 and on the
"MS340 Vx.y" label on one of the components.

Manual

Manual
6 Parameters
6 Parameters
6.1 Parameter handling
All of the parameters, which are implemented on the technology board, are called technological
parameters. T300 parameters were located behind/above the basic drive parameters.
They can be reached by up- and down-key or by typing a leading ”1” as a fourth digit for direct addressing
with an OP1.
The technology parameters are shown in the following form on the operator control panels, dependent on
their ability to be changed
dyyy monitoring parameters, i. e. they cannot be changed; they are output connectors
Hxxx setting parameters which can be changed;
these are input connectors with constants
The technological parameters can be read-out of and changed from several locations (simultaneously):
- PMU
- OP1 (the configured parameter names are displayed)
- CB1/CBP (PROFIBUS)
- SCB2 with USS protocol
- serial interfaces 1 and 2 of the CU
The parameter name, displayed on the OP1, is a maximum of 16 characters long, and can be toggled
between German and English using the H000 initialization parameter (after a change, reset is required!).
For several parameter types, rounding-off errors must be expected due to internal conversions /
calculations, from, or in the SIMADYN D connector notation with under certain circumstances, some
restrictions in the display.
Further, more decimal places can sometimes be provided than can actually be set.
Note: Technology parameters are not ”achnowledgement” parameters! When parameters are set using
the rise/lower arrow keys on the operator control panels, every parameter value with a line above it is
effective (temporarily)! This must be especially observed when setting multiplexers and masks (V2
type).
If technology parameters are addressed via a serial interface, the upper most bit of the parameter number
field must be set, so that a parameter number range from 1000 to 1999 is obtained.
With OP1, changes of V2-type paramerters (hex values) are possible with pord. state ”G”, SW release 1.1
Note: Bevor using SIMOVIS see Section 7.4

Manual
6 Parameters
Connectors can be read and changed using the SIMADYN D monitor and the PC-based programs,
SIMOVIS or IBS/SERVICE program (start-up/service program) via the T300 connector X132 (RS232) or
X133 (RS485). All of these parameters can also be addressed via connectors using this program.
In order to change technology parameters, the following path name
1.function package name.block name.connector name
of the appropriate connector must be entered using the SIMADYN D monitor.
Information regarding the parameter listing:

- counting, bits: 0 ...15
- select values which are highlighted, show the pre-setting.

Manual
6 Parameters
6.2 Data types and data formats

Parameters can only be changed within a specific parameter range. The value range depends on the
parameter data type, and, for some parameters, is restricted to a smaller range (MIN/MAX limits). If there
is no information to the contrary in the value range column in the parameter lists, then the value range is
that defined by the data type:

B1 Binary signal Status word Logical 0 or 1
V2 Binary vector Mask, CW, SW 0000 to 7FFF hex 1
N2 Normal signal Percentage -200 % to 199.99 % 0.006103 %
I2 Integer Complete No. -32768 to 32767 1
O2 Ordinal number Natural No. 0 to 32767 1
E2 Extended signal Decimal value -256.0 to 255.99 0.0078125
R2 Time Reciprocal 1* TA to 16384* TA dep. on the value
T2 Time Proportional 0* TA to 32767* TA 1 TA
D2 Time Proportional 0* TA to 1.99* TA 0.00006103 TA
Table 6.2.a: Value range and resolution of the SIMADYN D data types (TA =sampling time)
The following value ranges, in the sampling times used, are obtained for the time-dependent data types
R2, T2 and D2. Only values are accepted, which represent an integer multiple of the associated
sampling time! Values which are entered which do not match are appropriately rounded-up or down.
TA = T1 = 4 ms (closed-loop control) TA = T2 = 16 ms (open-loop control)
R2: 4 ms to 65536 ms (= 1.1 min) 16 ms to 262144 ms (= 4.3 min)

T2: 0 ms to 131068 ms (= 2.2 min) 16 ms to 524272 ms (= 8.8 min)
D2: 0 ms to 8 ms 0 ms to 32 ms
Bit Hexa- Decimal Percentage Extended Time- reciprocal Time-propor-

decimal value (N2) signal sig. tional signal
value (I2,O2) (E2) (R2 4 ms) (T2 4 ms)
0 1 1 0.0061 % 0.0078125 65536.0 ms 4.0 ms
1 2 2 0.0122 % 0.015625 32768.0 ms 8.0 ms
2 4 4 0.0244 % 0.03125 16384.0 ms 16.0 ms
3 8 8 0.0488 % 0.0625 8192.0 ms 32.0 ms
4 10 16 0.0976 % 0.125 4096.0 ms 64.0 ms
5 20 32 0.1953 % 0.25 2048.0 ms 128.0 ms
6 40 64 0.3906 % 0.5 1024.0 ms 256.0 ms
7 80 128 0.7812 % 1.0 512.0 ms 512.0 ms
8 100 256 1.5625 % 2.0 256.0 ms 1024.0 ms
9 200 512 3.125 % 4.0 128.0 ms 2048.0 ms
10 400 1024 6.25 % 8.0 64.0 ms 4096.0 ms
11 800 2048 12.5 % 16.0 32.0 ms 8192.0 ms
12 1000 4096 25.0 % 32.0 16.0 ms 16384.0 ms
13 2000 8192 50.0 % 64.0 8.0 ms 32768.0 ms
14 4000 16384 100.0 % 128.0 4.0 ms 65636.0 ms
15 8000 -32768 -200.0 % -256.0 - -
Table 6.2.b: Conversion table for data types
Connector types generally correspond directly to the parameter types, for example, such as required to
externally access parameters (serial interfaces (SIMOVIS), dual port RAM) and for the operator control
panel displays (PMU, OP1). However, some types are converted on the T300 due to the resolution and
the value range required: Connector type N2, E2, D2, T2, R2 are converted to parameter type I4

Manual
6 Parameters
6.3 Parameter list

All of the parameters used in the standard angular synchronous control software package are listed on
the following pages. The listing appears in the following general form:
Hxxx, dyyy Short parameter designation TypeDim Min....Max Value

Explanation and if required parameter information
......
Initialization value
BB n Section X.Y FP-FPNAME.FBNAME.K
Table 6.3.a: List form for input parameters
Hxxx, dyyy Short parameter designation TypeDim A

Explanation and if required parameter information
......
BB n Section X.Y FP-FPNAME.FBNAME.K
Table 6.3.b: List form for display parameters
Hxxx, dxxx Parameter number xxx

Type Parameter data type
Dim Parameter dimensions, if applicable
Min Smallest selectable parameter value, if this is not identical with the minimum
value specified for the particular data type
Max Highest selectable parameter value, if this is not identical with the maximum
value specified for the particular data type
For symmetrical limits, i.e. minimum value = negated maximum value, the
min/max values can be also specified in the form ±max
Value Parameter factory setting
A Code for display parameters
Initialization value Comments specifying whether the parameter value is only to be
evaluated once when the drive converter runs-up, i.e. when it is
powered-up (initialization). The drive converter must be powered-down
and up again so that such a parameter change becomes effective.
BB n Reference to the block diagram n
(not every parameter has a block diagram)
Section X.Y Reference to Section x.y of the documentation, in which additional
information/explanations regarding the parameter can be found.

Manual
6 Parameters
H000 Parameter name language O2 0..1 0

0 = German
1 = English
BB: 3 Section: 6.1 FP-PARAM.PARAMS.LID
d001 Software release N2 A

Current software release
BB: 3 Section - FP-PARAM.P001.Y
d002 Software type (identification) O2 A

Includes the number of the standard software package = 340
BB: 3 Section - FP-PARAM.P002.Y
H003 write inhibit B1 0..1 0

T300 parameters cannot be changed when value 1 is entered.
Connector values can still be changed via the SIMADYN D monitor (e. g.
using IBS/SERVICE program (start-up/service program))!
This write inhibit can be cancelled by depressing the button on the T300
board. H003 must be again set after this!
0= can be read and changed
1= can only be read
BB: 3 Section - FP-PARAM.H003.I
d004 system error bits V2 A

Diagnostics:
As there is no 7-segment display on the T300, which allows software-
and run time errors to be visualized, then they can be monitored by
using bits set here. This is especially interesting for communication
errors as well as computation time overflows.
Bit Significance
0 Fatal system error
1 =0
2 =0
3 Task administrator, i. e. computation time overflow
4 Monitor error
5 Hardware fault
6 Communications error
Is always present, if a communications board
is not inserted (CB1/CBP, SCB1/2)!
BB - Section - FP-PARAM.H003.Y
d006 System error word 1 V2 A

BB - Section - FP-PARAM.SYSERR.Y1

Manual
6 Parameters
H010 Encoder pulse number, slave (=speed sensing 1) O2 1...32767 1024

Number of pulses (of a track) per incremental encoder revolution at the
slave drive;
This is absolutely necessary that it is correctly set!
Otherwise, the position difference would be incorrectly calculated, so
that neither synchronous operation nor synchronizing is possible!
Observe that the unit must be powered-down/up
after H010/H011 has been set!
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.1 FP-SYNCON.NAVPAR.X1
H011 Encoder pulse number, master (=speed sensing 2) O2 1...32767 1024

Number of pulses (of a track) per incremental encoder revolution at the
master drive
Observe that the unit must be powered-down/up
after H010/H011 has been set!
BB 12 Section: 5.1.1 FP-SYNCON.NAVPAR.X2
H012 Rated speed, slave I2 RPM Abs. val. >1 1500

Slave speed actual value (pulse encoder) in RPM, which is referred to
100% speed actual value. Polarity reversal of the value corresponds to
interchanging the pulse encoder tracks.
Caution for MasterDrives SC:

A negative rated speed must be set due to interchanging tracks A and
B fed from the CU3 via LBA to T300! This has no affect on offset
sensing (synchronizing edge selection)!
BB 12 Section 2.1.1.1; 2.1.1.2; 5.1.1; 5.5.1 FP-SYNCON.NAVPAR.X3
H013 Rated speed, master I2 RPM Abs. val. >1 1500

Master speed actual value (pulse encoder) in RPM, which is referred to
100% speed actual value. Polarity reversal of the value corresponds to
interchanging the pulse encoder tracks.
The correct input is especially important when using the master
transmitter/encoder signal as master setpoint for the slave.
Caution for MasterDrives SC:

Track A is connected to CU connector X102, terminal 38, track B at
terminal 37 (!)!
A negative rated speed is not parameterized!
BB 12 Section 5.1.1; 5.5.1 FP-SYNCON.NAVPAR.X4
d014 Speed actual value, slave N2 % A

Calculated speed actual value of the slave drive as a % of the rated
speed (parameter H012)
BB: 5; 12; 14;15 Section 5.1.1 FP-SYNCON.SACT.Y1
d015 Speed actual value, master N2 % A

Calculated speed actual value of the master drive as a % of the rated
speed (parameter H013)
BB: 12; 15 Section: 5.1.1 FP-SYNCON.SACT.Y2

Manual
6 Parameters
d016 Position pulse number, slave I2 pulses A

Number of quadrupled pulses from the slave drive since the last
synchronizing signal. For a negative rotation, the counter counts down.
The display is limited at+/- 32768 pulses. The value can be adapted
using parameter H104:
No. of pulses*4 / 2**(H104-16) (pre-setting, H104 = 16)
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.2; 5.7.1 FP-SDYNCON.PSL.Y
d017 Position pulse number, master I2 pulses A

Number of quadrupled pulses from the master drive since the last
synchronizing signal. For a negative rotation, the counter counts down.
The display is limited at +/- 32768 pulses. The value can be adapted
using parameter H106:
No. of pulses*4 / 2**(H106-16) (pre-setting H106 = 16)
BB: 12 Section 5.1.2; 5.7.1 FP-SYNCON.PMAS.Y
H018 Operating mode, slave speed sensing 1 V2 2H0000..8000 2H0060

The digital filter, encoder type, rough signal type selection and direction
of rotation dependency of the synchronizing signal (encoder zero pulse)
and the encoder pulse source is set using this parameter:
- - X:last digit = digital filter time constant/limiting frequency

0 = 2.0 us = 500 kHz
1 = 0.0 us = no filter
2 = 0.5 us = 2 MHz
3 = 2.0 us = 500 kHz
4 = 8.0 us = 125 kHz
5 = 16. us = 62.5 kHz
- - X -: next to last digit = encoder type
0 = pulse encoder with 2 tracks displaced through 90°
1 = Sony pulse encoder (separate tracks for up and
down pulses). The digital filter can only be
disabled (value 1) or enabled (value ≠1)
(8 MHz limiting frequency).
2 = zero pulse from the CU via the LBA backplane bus
4 = tracks A+B from the CU via the LBA backplane bus
6 = A+B+zero pulse from the CU via the LBA
backplane bus
- X - -: second highest digit = rough pulse evaluation
0 = no rough pulse; zero pulse is always effective
1 rough pulse, type1: The zero pulse is identified
as soon as both signals are present.
2 rough pulse, type2: The zero pulse is only
identified
if the rough signal is present before the zero
pulse.
X - - -: highest digit = direction of rotation dependent
synchronizing edge selection
0 = no direction of rotation dependency
synchronization always at positive edge
1 = direction of rotation dependency
synchronization in both rotation directions at
same (mechanical) edge
The highest value digit must coincide with the highest value digit of
H019. Values other than those specified may not be entered!
Example of a setting:
- - - 4: Digital filter time constant 125 kHz
- - 0 -: Pulse encoder with 2 tracks displaced through 90°
- 2 - -: Rough pulse, type 2
1 - - -: Direction of rotation-dependent synchronizing edge selection
1 2 0 4: = Parameter value

Manual
6 Parameters
Pre-assignment: Pulses are received from the CU and LBA backplane

bus
BB: 21 Section: 3.2.1; 3.2.2; 4.4.4; 4.4.5; 5.1.1; 5.1.4; 5.6.2
FP-SYNCON.SACT.IT1
H019 Operating mode, master speed sensing 2 V2 2H0000..8000 2H0000

Parameter explanation, refer to H018.
The highest value digit (=direction of rotation dependency) must
coincide with the highest-value digit of H018.
BB: 12 Section 4.4.5; 5.1.1; 5.1.4; 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.SACT.IT2
H021 Delay time, ”enable operation” (on) T2 ms 0...8 min 0 ms

Delay time between ON from terminal 602 = 1 and enable operation at
the converter. This is a integer multiple of 16ms.
BB: 8 Section: 4.1.1 FP-CONTRL.CW015.T
H022 Extension time, ”enable operation” (off) T2 ms 0...8 min 1000 ms

Delay time between the OFF from terminal 602=0 and operation
inhibited at the drive converter. This is an integer multiple of 16ms.
BB: 8 Section: 4.1.1 FP-CONTRLCW018.T
H030 Function, binary inputs O2 0...2 0

Selects the function of the binary inputs:
0 = none
1 = thumbwheel switch
2 = byte-serial data input
BB: 7 Section: 5.2; 5.3 FP-SYNCON.BSREN.X1
H031 Normalization factor, thumbwheel switch O2 0...32767 0

Selects which number is to be represented from the thumbwheel switch
(without taking into account positions after the decimal point) to 100%
(=16384 dec)
BB: 7 Section 5.3; 5.5.1; 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.BNRNF.X
H032 Coding, thumbwheel switch B1 0/1 1

0 = binary coding
1 = BCD coding
BB: 7 Section: 5.3 FP-SYNCON.BNR.BCD
H033 Transfer time, BSR T2 ms 4...256 ms 16 ms

The minimum time for which a byte must be continually available so that
it is transferred for byte-serial data input
BB: 7 Section 4.1.2; 5.3 FP-SYNCON.BSR.TC

Manual
6 Parameters
Ratio
Ü= (select value H040 * select value H048) + H047
H040 Source, ratio O2 0...7 4

Selects the source from which the ratio is entered:
0 = word 6 of a CB1/CBP- or SCB1/2 telegram
3 = can be toggled between H041 (T.617=0) and H042 (T.617=1)
4 = parameter H043
5 = fixed value +1.0
6 = word 9 of the bas. drive convert.
7 = word10 of the bas.drive convert.
BB: 7 Section 2.2.2.1; 4.1.1; 4.3.1; 5.5.1
FP-SYNCON.RREFSE.XCS
H041 Ratio for terminal 617=0 N2 ±16,384 1,0

Ratio for binary input, terminal 617 = 0 and H040=3
BB: 7 Section: 4.1.1 5.5.1 FP-SYNCON.RREFPN.X1
H042 Ratio for terminal 617=1 N2 ±16,384 2,0
Ratio for binary input, terminal 617 = 1 and H040=3
BB: 7 Section: 4.1.1; 5.5.1 FP-SYNCON.RREFPN.X2
H043 Ratio, fixed value N2 ±16,384 1,0
Fixed ratio for H040=4
BB: 7 Section 4.3.1; 5.5.1; 5.5.2 FP-SYNCON.RREFSE.X4
d044 Actual ratio N2 A

Actual ratio
BB: 7 Section: 5.5.1 FP-SYNCON.RREFSE.Y

Manual
6 Parameters
Pulse number ratio:
d045 Pulse number ratio, numerator I2 A

Actual value of the pulse number ratio, numerator
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.3 FP-SYNCON.PNRAT.NM
d046 Pulse number ratio, denominator O2 A
Actual value of the pulse number ratio, denominator
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.3 FP-SYNCON.PNRAT.DN
H047 ratio, supplementary fixed value N2 ±16.384 0.0

Additional summand for the fixed ratio;
Ü = (select value H040 * select value H048) + H047
BB: 7 Section 4.3.1; 5.5.1 FP-SYNCON.UE4PRO.X2
H048 source, percentage ratio change O2 0...7 4
The value supplied from the selected source changes the ratio, selected
using H040, in the range from 0 to +/- 200%.
Normalization: 0... +/-200%
Ü= (select value H040 * select value H048) + H047
0 = word 6 of an CB1/CBP- or SCB1/2 telegram

1 = byte-serial data entry
3 = can be toggled between H041 (Ter.617=0) and H042 (Ter.617=1)
4 = parameter H049
5 = analog input 4; terminal 507/508
7 = word10 of the bas. drive convert.
BB: 7 Section: 4.3.1; 5.5.1; 5.5.2 FP-SYNCON.UE2PRO.XCS
H049 ratio, percentage fixed value N2 ±200% 100%
Adjustable fixed value for 2nd factor to change the ratio
(percentage change);
BB: 7 Section: 5.5.1; 5.5.2 FP-SYNCON.UE2PRO.X4

Manual
6 Parameters
Offset processing:
H091=0 is allowed only if the synchronising pulse number MASTER (H100,H101) is configured as a
negative value. From SW version V1.5, the problem is solved.
H050 Source, offset reference value O2 0...7 5

Selects, from which location the offset setpoint is entered
(in PULSE*4):
1 = analog input 2, terminal 503 / 504
5 = parameter H066
6 = parameters H060 (term.618=0) or H061 (term.618=1)
BB: 7 Section 2.2.2.1; 4.3.1; 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFSE.XCS
H051 Adaption, analog offset reference value N2 % ± 199.9 % 100 %

Adapts the offset reference value, read-in via analog input,
terminal 501 / 502
BB: 7 Section: 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFAA.X2
H052 Source, ”reset position difference” O2 0... 7 6

Selects the signal, which resets the position difference of the speed-
and position actual value sensing (to 0 or to the selected offset
reference value d056).
A position difference (can be monitored using d124) is obtained, if, for
example, the slave drive rotates with respect to the master drive with the
position actual value/position difference sensing enabled.
The angular controller corrects an existing position difference (to 0
or the selected offset reference value).
If the slave drive is powered-up with the angular controller active,
without resetting the position difference, the slave drive rotates with an
initial speed which corresponds to the angular controller limiting until the
position difference becomes 0 (or the offset reference value). In this
case, the selected and typically very low ramp-up time in the slave
should be observed!
0 = angular controller enable (acc. to H252)
1 = speed controller enable (acc. to H253)
2 = 1 (for voltage on)
3 = operational on (acc. to H240)
4 = operational on and angular controller enable
5 = terminal 603
6 = status bit ”run” of the drive converter unit-status word1
7 = status bit ”run” of the basic drive converter-ZUW1 (stat w 1)
BB: 11 Section 4.3.1; 5.1.4; 5.6.1 FP-CONTRL.CW210.XCS
H053 Ramp-up time, offset reference value R2 s 4 ms...64 s 9,36 s

Time, in which the offset reference value changes by 16384 quadrupled
pulses.
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFRTU.X

Manual
6 Parameters
H054 Maximum value, offset reference value I2 pulses ±32767 +16384

Upper limit of the offset reference value (pulses *4)
In the retrigger mode of the offset sensing (i.e.H091=1), the maximum
offset reference value must not exceed ”half the pulse number (*4) per
revolution of the component to be synchronized” !
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFRG.LU
H055 Minimum value, offset reference value I2 pulses ±32767 -16384
Lower limit of the offset reference value (pulses *4) In the retrigger mode
of the offset sensing (i.e.H091=1), the minimum offset reference value
must not fall below ”half the pulse number (*4) per revolution of the
component to be synchronized” !!
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFRG.LL
d056 Actual offset reference value I2 pulses A

Actual offset reference value (pulses *4) (unlimited)
BB: 7; 13 Section 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFSE.Y
H060 Offset reference value for terminal 618=0 I2 pulses ±32767 0

Offset reference value (pulses*4) for binary input terminal 618=0
BB: 7 Section: 4.1.1; 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFPN.X1
H061 Offset reference value for terminal 618=1 I2 pulses ±32767 0
Offset reference value (pulses*4) for binary input terminal 618=1
BB: 7 Section: 4.1.1; 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFPN.X2
H062 Offset ref. Value n_Mas > 0 and n_SLV > 0 I2 pulses ±32767 0
Offset reference value (pulses *4) for positive speeds of both drives
BB: 7 Section: 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFS.X10
H063 Offset ref. Value n_Mas < 0 and n_SLV > 0 I2 pulses ±32767 0
Offset reference value (pulses *4) for negative master speed and
positive slave speed
H064 Offset ref. Value n_Mas > 0 and n_SLV > 0 I2 pulses ±32767 0
Offset reference value (pulses *4) for a positive master speed and
negative slave speed
H065 Offset ref. Value n_Mas < 0 and n_SLV < 0 I2 pulses ±32767 0
Offset reference value (pulses *4) when both drives have negative
speeds
H066 Fixed value, offset reference value I2 pulses ±32767 0

Fixed offset reference value (pulses*4) for H050 = 5
BB: 7 Section: 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.DREFSE.X5

Manual
6 Parameters
Master speed setpoint
H070 Source, master speed setpoint O2 0... 7 3

Selects the source for the master speed setpoint
1 = analog input 1 terminal 501 / 502
3 = speed actual value, master
4 = word 2 of the T300 peer-to-peer telegram
5 = 0% (for testing)
BB: 7 Section: 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 4.3.1; 5.5.3
FP-SYNCON.SREFSE.XCS
H071 Adaption, analog master speed setpoint N2 % ±199,9 % 100 %

Adaption factor for the master speed setpoint read-in via analog input 1,
terminal 501 / 502
BB: 7 Section: 4.3.1 FP-SYNCON.SREFAA.X2
H072 Smoothing, master speed setpoint R2 ms 4 ms...64 s 9,99 ms

Smoothing time (PT1 element) for the master speed setpoint
BB: 7 Section: 5.5.3 FP-SYNCON.SREFSM.T
H073 Fixed value, master speed setpoint N2 % ±199,9 % 100 %

Fixed reference value (for testing)
BB: 7 Section: 5.5.3 FP-SYNCON.SREFSE.X5
d074 Actual master speed setpoint, smoothed N2 A

Actual value of the smoothed master speed setpoint (without ratio)
BB: 7 Section: 5.5.3 FP-SYNCON.SREFSM.Y
H075 Delay, master setpoint B1 0...1 0

If both a master setpoint as well as an off3 command from a SIMOVERT
MASTER DRIVES drive converter is generated and sent, together in a
telegram to the slave via a serial interface (e. g. T300 peer), then the
master setpoint is immediately 0 if an off3 command is present.
As the master setpoint is coupled to the basic drive converter faster than
the off3 command, the basic drive converter immediately identifies that
the setpoint has been changed to 0, which could lead to a DC link
overvoltage fault!
In order to prevent this, the master setpoint must be coupled to the
basic drive converter in the same time sector as the off3 command
(T2=16ms).
0: No delay
1: 16ms delay, so that synchronization is to off3
BB: 14 Section - FP-CONTRL.LSW1.I

Manual
6 Parameters
Inertia compensation
H080 Source, inertia compensation O2 0... 7 2

Selects the source for inertia compensation (feed-forward control value
for the speed controller):
1 = analog input 3 terminal 505 / 506
2 = speed setpoint differentiation
3-5 = 0
BB: 14 Section 2.2.2.1; 4.3.1; 5.5.4
FP-SYNCON.AREFSE.XCS
H081 Adaption, analog inertia compensation N2 % ±199.9 % 100 %

Adaption factor for the inertia compensation value read-in via analog
input X5, terminal 505 / 506
BB: 14 Section: 4.3.1; 5.5.4 FP-SYNCON.AREFAA.X2
H082 Smoothing constant, inertia compensation dn/dt R2 ms 4 ms...64 s 100 ms

Time constant of the differentiation (DT1 element) of the speed setpoint
value to generate the inertia compensation
high time values -> less influence
BB: 14 Section: 5.5.4 FP-SYNCON.AREFSR.T1
H083 Adaption, inertia compensation dn/dt N2 % ±199.9 % 199.99 %
Adaption factor of the differentiation (DT1 element) of the speed setpoint
to generate the inertia compensation value
higher values -> less influence
BB: 14 Section: 5.5.4 FP-SYNCON.AREFSA.X2
d084 Actual value, inertia compensation N2 % A

Actual value of the inertia compensation
BB: 4; 14 Section: 5.5 FP-SYNCON.AREFSE.Y

Manual
6 Parameters
Synchronization:
H090 Source ”reset/enable offset sensing/position act .val” O2 0...7 6

Selects the source, which resets the position actual values and enables
the offset calculation (also refer to H052):
As long as the selected signal source is 0, the position actual values=0
(device SACT.YP1 or .YP2) and the offset actual values (d094, d095)
retain their previous value.
If enabling is realized (=1), the position actual values are updated, and
also the offset actual values (d094, d095) after both synchronizing
pulses have occurred.
0 = angular controller enable (according to H252)

1 = speed controller enable (according to H253)
2 = 1 (for power/voltage on)
3 = operation on (according to H240)
4 = operation on and angular controller enable
5 = terminal 608
6 = status bit, ”operation/run” of the basic drive
converter-status word1
7 = status bit, ”operation/run” of the basic drive converter-ZUW1
BB: 11 Section: 5.1.4 FP-CONTRL.CW200.XCS
H091 Synchronizing, RETRIGGER B1 0/1 0

Selects whether synchronizing (offset sensing and offset equalization) is
to be realized in the RETRIGGER mode or is to be continuous.
0 = continuous
The offset is sensed over several revolutions and equalized

(it is necessary to set parameters H100 to H103!)
1 = retrigger
The offset is only sensed over 1 revolution and equalized
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.4; 5.5.1; 5.6.2; 5.7
FP-SYNCON.DISC.RTM
H092 Synchronizing command edge-controlled B1 0/1 0

Evaluates the ”synchronizing” control bit (i. e. offset compensation):
0 = level-controlled
1 = edge-controlled
BB: 12 Section: 5.7 FP-SYNCON.DISC.ENM
H093 Correction pulse number I2 pulses 1...1000 1

Number of quadrupled pulses, which are fed to the angular controller to
correct the offset, for offset correction per sampling time.
Thus a position difference is generated, which the angular controller
corrects.
A low value (approx. 1) is recommended in order to achieve low-
oscillation synchronization.
To ensure fast synchronization for very low-frequency synchronizing
pulses (e. g. using a high ratio, low speed), this value must be increased
(e. g. to 10).
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.4; 5.7 FP-SYNCON.DISC.CPN

Manual
6 Parameters
d094 offset actual value I4 pulses A

Offset actual value in quadrupled slave pulses since the offset
calculation was enabled (according to H090), and after both
synchronizing pulses occurred.
It is only re-calculated, if
one (H91=0; setting of H100...H103!) synchronizing pulse occurs, or
two (H091=1) synchronizing pulses.
It includes the possibly set offset- (d056) as well as the direction of
rotation-dependent synchronizing offset-reference values (H062 -
H065).
When synchronized, it is 0, or it includes the offset reference value.
This status is signaled, taking into account a tolerance bandwidth at
terminal 635, set with H203.
The actual angular difference between the synchronizing pulses is
displayed using d124.
BB: 12 Section 5.1.3; 5.1.4; 5.7 FP-SYNCON.DISC.DV
d095 offset actual value - position difference actual value I4 pulses A

Offset actual value - position difference actual value in quadrupled
slave pulses. This is 0 in the angular synchronous status
(independent of a possibly existing offset reference value)!
Value during synchronizing: <>0;
it becomes continuously smaller during synchronizing.
Update as described for d094.
The following is essentially valid: d095 = d094 - d124
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.4; 5.7 FP-SYNCON.DISC.DVD
H096 Error identification, offset sensing V2 A

Error identification from the offset sensing; the error identification is
deleted when the position difference is reset; error is coded bitwise.
Bit Hex Significance
0 1 = overflow, number of synchronizng signals 1
1 2 = overflow, number of synchronizing signals 2
2 4 = number of synchr. signals 1 * synchr. pulse No. 1 > 32 bit
3 8 = number of synchr. signals 2 * synchr. pulse No. 2 > 32 bit
8 100 = offset-pos. difference, cannot be represented with 32 bit
BB: 12 Section: 5.7 FP-SYNCON.DISC.FC

Manual
6 Parameters
Synchronizing pulse number:

Number of quadrupled pulses per revolution of the component to be synchronized. Input is absolutely
necessary, if synchronization is parameterized for continuous (H091=0). Input is realized as low- and high
word as the value is a 32-bit value. If the pulse number > 32767, then refer to the example in Section 5.7.
H100 Synchronizing pulse number, master low I2 pulses ±32767 4096

Low word, master; pre-assigned for a 1024 pulse encoder
For SW-version 1.40 a negative synchronizing pulse number has to be
parameterized, if there is a negative ratio in combination with a negative
displacement (offset) and with H091=0! (also valid for H101)
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.4; 5.5.1; 5.6.2; 5.7; 5.7.2; 5.7.3
FP-SYNCON.SPZMAS.LW
H101 Synchronizing pulse number, master high O2pulses 0...32767 0
High word, master
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.4; 5.5.1; 5.6.2; 5.7; 5.7.2; 5.7.3
FP-SYNCON.SPZMAS.HW
H102 Synchronizing pulse number, slave low I2 pulses ±32767 4096
Low word, slave; pre-assigned for a 1024 pulse encoder
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.4; 5.7; 5.7.1; 5.7.3
FP-SYNCON.SPZSLV.LW
H103 Synchronizing pulse number, slave high O2pulses 0...32767 0
High word slave
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.4; 5.7; 5.7.1; 5.7.3
FP-SYNCON.SPZSLV.HW
H104 Adaption, position actual value slave (16 bit) O2 16...32 16

The position actual value is a 32-bit value. It is converted into a 16-bit
value for display and, if required, analog output. Conversion can be
adapted using this parameter:
16-bit value =number of pulses *4 / 2**(16-H104)

BB: 12 Section: 5.1.2; 5.7.1 FP-SYNCON.PSLAD.XD
H105 Enable threshold, slave synchronization O2pulses 0...32767 100

The minimum number of quadrupled pulses, which must be received
after an effective synchronizing signal before a new synchronizing signal
may become effective. This can be used, for example, to suppress
synchronizing switch bounce.
Caution: The pulse number specified here must be greater than the
number of pulses which are received during the active synchronizing
signal time. This threshold value is also effective for the first
synchronization (after the position actual value reset).
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.4; 5.7.1 FP-SYNCON.SENSL.X2
H106 Adaption, position actual value master (16 bit) O2 16...32 16

The position actual value is a 32-bit value. It is converted into a
16-bit value for display, and if required analog output. The conversion
can be adapted using this parameter:
16-bit value =number of pulses *4 /2**(16-H106)
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.2; 5.7.1 FP-SYNCON.PMASAD.XD
H107 synchronizing enable threshold, master O2pulses 0...32767 100

Function as for H105
BB: 12 Section: 5.1.4; 5.7.1 FP-SYNCON.SENMAS.X2

Manual
6 Parameters
d108 synchronizing pulse number, master I4 pulses +/- A

2147483647
Double word (32bit) to check the value entered with H100,H101.
BB: 12 Section: 5.7 FP-SYNCON.SPZMAS.Y
d109 synchronizing pulse number, slave O4pulses 0... A
2147483647
Double word (32bit) to check the value entered with H102,H103.
BB: 12 Section: 5.7 FP-SYNCON.SPZSLV.Y

Manual
6 Parameters
Angular controller:
H110 Angular controller as P controller B1 0/1 1

0 = controller operates as PI controller
1 = controller operates as P controller
Caution: Changeover from 0 to 1 only with the controller inhibited, as

otherwise the I component will not be deleted!
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.5 FP-SYNCON.SYNCON.HI
H111 Integral action time R2 ms 4 ms...64 s 500ms

Integral action time of the angular controller (relevant for H110 = 0)
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.5 FP-SYNCON.SYNCON.TN
H112 Limit value, angular controller N2 % ±199.9 % 10 %

Absolute output quantity of the angular controller
BB: 13 Section 2.2.1.2.1; 4.2.1; 5.6.5; 5.9.1; 5.9.2 FP-
SYNCON.SYNMAX.X

Manual
6 Parameters
Angular controller, Kp adaption for the ratio:

If P-gain adaption is not required, H115 should be set the same as H116 to 0; H113 is then the effective
KP.
H113 P gain, angular controller Ü_KP E2 ±255.9 2.0

P gain without adaption or
P gain for high ratio ü_KP
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.5 FP-SYNCON.SYNCKP.B2
H114 P gain, angular controller Ü_KP_0 E2 ±255.9 2.0
P gain for low ratio ü_KP_0
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.5 FP-SYNCON.SYNCKP.B1
H115 ü_KP N2 ±199.9 % 0.0
Limit value of the ratio up to linear interpolation starting from ü_KP_0.
For ü > ü_KP, KP = ü_KP
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.5 FP-SYNCON.SYNCKP.A2
H116 ü_KP_0 N2 ±199.9 % 0.0
Limit value of the ratio from where linear interpolation is effective up to
ü_KP_0. For ü < ü_KP_0, KP = ü_KP_0
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.5 FP-SYNCON.SYNCKP.A1
H117 Smoothing, position difference actual value R2 4 ms...64 s 4.0 ms

Smoothing time (PT1 element) for the position difference actual value
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.3 FP-SYNCON.PDIFS.T
d120 Output, angular controller N2 % A

Angular controller output = supplementary speed setpoint
BB: 13; 14 Section: 5.6 FP-SYNCON.SYNCON.Y
d121 Angular controller, error signal I2 pulses A

Actual angular deviation (as slave pulse No.). A possible offset ref.
value is taken into account:
Angular controller, controller error = offset reference value - position
difference actual value (the position difference actual value includes the
offset reference value as ”static component”)
BB: 13; 15 Section: 5.6 FP-SYNCON.SYNCON.YE
d122 Angular controller, I component N2 % A

Integral component of the angular controller output
BB: 13 Section: 5.6 FP-SYNCON.SYNCON.YI
d123 Angular controller KP E2 A

Effective P gain of the angular controller
BB: 13 Section: 5.6 FP-SYNCON.SYNCKP.Y
d124 Position difference actual value, smoothed N2 pulses A

Position difference actual value (16 bit), smoothed using H117, since
the reset (according to H052); it is independent of the offset calculation
or synchronizing pulses and therefore is not informative regarding the
relative position (synchronism) (refer to d094)!
A possibly set offset reference value can also be identified here!
BB: 13 Section: 5.6 FP-SYNCON.PDIFS.Y

Manual
6 Parameters
Speed setpoints & limits
H130 Inching setpoint 1 N2 % ±199.9 % 2.5 %

Supplementary speed setpoint which is added to the main setpoint if
control bit inching 1 is effective.
BB: 14 Section: 3.5; 5.5.5 FP-CONTRL.TIP1.X2
H131 Inching setpoint 2 N2 % ±199.9 % -2.5 %

Supplementary speed setpoint which is added to the main setpoint if
control bit inching 2 is effective.
BB: 14 Section: 5.5.5 FP-CONTRL.TIP2.X2
d136 Actual speed setpoint N2 % A

Actual speed setpoint after smoothing and multiplication by the ratio
(without inching setpoint)
Master speed setpoint * ratio
BB: 7;14 Section: 5.5.3 FP-SYNCON.SREFR.Y

Manual
6 Parameters
Speed controller, Kp adaption
CU2,CU3
The P gain can be adapted at the speed setpoint. The adaption is realized on the T300 and is transferred
to the basic drive converter. The basic drive converter speed controller uses this value when setting:
P226=3006.
If adaption is not required: P226=1001 (then P225 is effective) or
H143 = H144 = 0; then H141 is effective.
CUVC,CUMC:
H144=0%; H143=199,9%; H142=0 and H141=255,9.
The KP adaptation is then set in the basic drive (P233,P234,P235,P236)
Procedure, refer to Block diagram CUVC and CUMC (Compendium), Sheet 360:
H141 P gain, speed controller E2 ±255.9 10.0
KP: P gain for high speed setpoint or H143=H144
BB: 14 Section: 3.4; 5.5.6.1; 5.5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.SCONKP.B2
H142 P gain, speed controller E2 ±255.9 10.0
KP_0: P gain for a low speed setpoint
BB: 14 Section: 3.4; 5.5.6.1; 5.5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.SCONKP.B1
H143 n_KP N2 % ±199.9 % 0.0 %

Speed setpoint limit, where linear interpolation is realized from n_KP_0.
For n > n_KP, KP = n_KP
BB: 14 Section: 3.4; 5.5.6.1; 5.5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.SCONKP.A2
H144 n_KP_0 N2 % ±199.9 % 0.0 %
Speed setpoint limit, from where linear interpolation is realized from
n_KP. For n < n_KP_0, KP = n_KP_0
BB: 14 Section: 3.4; 5.5.6.1; 5.5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.SCONKP.A1
d153 Speed controller KP E2 A

Effective speed controller P gain
BB: 4; 14 Section: 5.5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.SCONKP.Y
d154 Word 2 from the basic drive converter N2 % A

The (actual)value sent from the basic drive converter to T300.
The value which is received is parameterized in the basic drive
converter (P694.2:CU2,CU3 ; P734.2:CUVC,CUMC)
Normalization depending on the parameter transferred (refer to the drive
converter parameter list)
BB: 4 Section: 2.1.2.1; 2.1.2.2 FP-CONTRL.RDEV.Y2
d155 Word 4 (status word 2) from the basic drive I2 A

converter
(Actual)value sent from the basic drive converter to the T300.
converter (P694.4:CU2,CU3 ; P734.4:CUVC,CUMC)
d156 Word 3 from the basic drive converter I2 A

(Actual)value sent from the basic drive converter to the T300.
converter (P694.3:CU2,CU3 ; P734.3:CUVC,CUMC )

Manual
6 Parameters
Analog outputs 1 and 2:

The values to be output are selected using H176 and H177 (refer there)
H160 Analog output 1, offset N2 % ±199,9 % 0%

Offset, analog output 1, terminal 509 / 510
BB: 16 Section: 4.3.2 FP-CONTRL.AOUT1.OFF
H161 Analog output 1, gain E2 ±255,9 25,0

Gain, analog output 1, terminal 509 / 510
Pre-assigned so that the angular deviation of approx. +-5% can be
represented.
BB: 16 Section: 4.3.2 FP-CONTRL.AOUT1.K

Offset , analog output 2, terminal 519 / 520

Gain, analog output 2, terminal 519 / 520

Manual
6 Parameters
Analog outputs 3 and 4:
H170 Source, analog output 3 and select value 3 O2 0...15 6

Source for analog output 3 (terminals 521 / 522) and the select value 3
which can be transferred via the communication boards
(CB1 / CBP, SCB1/2):
Sampling time: 4ms

1 = speed actual value, slave
2 = word 6 from the basic drive converter
3 = master speed setpoint, smoothed
4 = master speed actual value
6 = output, angular controller
7 = control error, angular controller
8 = integral component, angular controller
9 = position difference-actual value (including offset reference value!)
10 = position actual value, slave
11 = position actual value, master
12 = inertia compensation
BB: 17 Section 2.2.1.1; 2.4.2; 3.6; 3.7; 3.8; 4.3.2
FP-CONTRL.AOMUX3.XCS

Source for analog output 4 (terminals 523 / 524) and the select value 4
which can be transferred via the communication boards
(CB1 / CBP, SCB1/2):
(as for H170 with the exception of settings 1 and 2):
Sampling time: 4ms
9 = position difference-actual value (incl. offset reference value!)
14 =word 3 from the basic drive converter
BB: 17 Section 2.2.1.1; 2.4.2; 3.6; 3.7; 3.8; 4.3.2

Manual
6 Parameters

Offset, analog output 3, terminals 521 / 522

Gain, analog output 3, terminals 521 / 522

Offset, analog output 4, terminals 523 / 524

Gain, analog output 4, terminals 523 / 524

Manual
6 Parameters
To analog outputs 1 and 2:

Source for analog output 1 and select value 1, which can be transferred
via the communication boards (CB1 / CBP, SCB1/2).
Raw output value (without gain and offset) can be monitored using
d178. Assignment as for H170;
Sampling time: 4ms

2 =word 6 from the basic drive converter
BB: 16 Section: 2.2.1.1; 2.4.2; 3.6; 3.7; 3.8; 4.3.2

Source for analog output 2 and select value 2 which can be transferred
via the communication boards (CB1 / CBP, SCB1/2):
Raw output value (without gain and offset) can be monitored using
d179. Assignment as for H171;
Sampling time: 4ms
BB: 16 Section: 2.2.1.1; 2.4.2; 3.6; 3.7; 3.8; 4.3.2

d178 Raw value, analog output 1 I2 A

Raw output value (without gain and offset) of the multiplexer for analog
output 1.
BB: 5; 6; 16 Section: 2.2.1.1; 2.4.2; 4.3.2 FP-CONTRL.AOMUX1.Y
d179 Raw value, analog output 2 I2 A
Raw output value (without gain and offset) of the multiplexer for analog
output 2.
BB: 5; 6; 16 Section: 2.2.1.1; 2.4.2; 4.3.2 FP-CONTRL.AOMUX2.Y

Manual
6 Parameters
Monitoring functions, which result in fault-, alarm- and status outputs

(bits from 0 to 15)
Speed limit values:
H180 n-act limit, positive N2 % ±199,9 % 110 %

Upper speed actual value limit
d214, bit 8 =1, if n-act > H180
BB: 15 Section: 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 5.9.1
FP-CONTRL.CON020.LU
H181 n-act limit, negative N2 % ±199,9 % -110 %
Lower limit, speed actual value
d214, bit 10 =1, if n-act < H181
BB: 15 Section: 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 5.9.1
FP-CONTRL.CON020.LL
H182 n-act limit, center N2 % ±199,9 % 0%
Center limit, speed actual value
d214, bit 9 =1, if H182-H183 < n-act < H182+H183
BB: 15 Section: 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 5.9.1
FP-CONTRL.CON030.M
H183 n-act limit, center tolerance N2 % ±199,9 % 1%
Tolerance, center limit, speed actual value
d214, bit 9 =1, if H182-H183 < n-act < H182+H183
BB: 15 Section: 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 5.9.1
FP-CONTRL.CON030.L
H190 Overspeed-positive limit N2 % ±199,9 % 120 %

Upper speed actual value limit as a % of the rated speed (H012)
d214, bit 0 =1, if n-act > H190
BB: 15 Section: 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 5.9.1
FP-CONTRL.CON010.LU
H191 Overspeed-negative limit N2 % ±199,9 % -120 %
Lower speed actual value limit as a % of the rated speed (H012)
d214,bit 1 =1, if n-act < H191
BB: 15 Section: 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 5.9.1
FP-CONTRL.CON010.LL

Manual
6 Parameters
Limit values for angle/position:
H200 Signal threshold, error signal angular controller N2 % ±199,9 % 4%

Absolute value of the angular controller control error YE up to when the
following messages are generated in the T300 status word (d214):
d214, bit 12 =1, if |YE| > ± H200

to signal erroneous synchronism
d214, bit 14 =1, if |YE| < ± H200
to signal correct synchronism
BB: 15 Section 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 5.9.1 FP-

CONTRL.CON070.L
H201 Angular limit value, positive (binary output 638) I2 pulses ±32767 10
Upper limit of the angular difference DY (number of pulses * 4), from
which value the ”angular difference outside tolerance” signal = 1,
i. e. DY > H201;
output at terminal 638
BB: 15 Section: 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 4.2.1; 5.6.4; 5.9.1; 5.9.2
FP-CONTRL.CON200.LU
H202 Angular limit value, negative (binary output 638) I2 pulses ±32767 -10
Lower limit of the angular difference DY (number of pulses * 4), from
which value the ”angular difference outside tolerance” signal = 1,
i.e. DY < H202;
output at terminal 638
BB: 15 Section: 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 4.2.1; 5.6.4; 5.9.1; 5.9.2
FP-CONTRL.CON200.LL
H203 Response threshold ”synchronism reached” term 635 I2 pulses ±32767 2

Absolute value of the conditioned offset actual value (pulse difference,
d094), up to which value the binary output, terminal 635 is logically set
to 1 (SE300 LED lit).
A possible offset is taken into account.
BB: 12 Section: 4.2.1; 5.7.3; 5.9.2 FP-SYNCON.DV0030.L

Manual
6 Parameters
H208 Delay time, initialization T300-peer telegrams T2 ms 0 ms...8 min 10000ms

Time which can expire after the drive converter has been powered-up
until a valid telegram is received from the T300 peer interface.
If a telegram has not been received after T>H208 has expired, fault
F120 or alarm A101 is generated if not suppressed with H212, H213.
This is an integer multiple of 16ms.
BB: 6 Section: 5.9.1; 5.9.2 FP-CONF.T3INIT.X
H209 Monitoring time, T300-peer telegrams T2 ms 0 ms...8 min 80ms
Time, in which a valid telegram must again be received from the T300
peer interface. If a telegram has not been received after T>H209 has
expired, fault F120 or alarm A101 is generated if not suppressed with
H212, H213.
This is an integer multiple of 4ms.
BB: 6 Section: 2.4; 5.9.1; 5.9.2 FP-CONF.T3ZYKL.X2
H210 Delay time, initialization CB1/CBP/SCB telegrams T2 ms 0 ms...8 min 20000ms

Time, which can expire after the drive converter has been powered-up
until a valid telegram is received from the communication boards. If a
telegram has not been received after T>H210 has expired, fault F122 or
alarm A103 is generated if not suppressed with H212, H213. This is an
integer multiple of 16 ms
BB: 5 Section: 3.8; 5.9.1; 5.9.2 FP-CONF.TEINIT.X
H211 Monitoring time, CB1/CBP/SCB telegrams T2 ms 0 ms...8 min 80ms
Time, in which a valid telegram must again be received from the
communications board. If a telegram has not been received after
T>H211 has expired, fault F122 or alarm A103 is generated if not
suppressed with d122, H213. This is an integer multiple of 16ms.
BB: 5 Section: 3.8; 5.9.1; 5.9.2 FP-CONF.TEZYKL.X2

Manual
6 Parameters
Masking faults, alarms and status messages:
H212 Fault mask for T300 status word V2 0...2HFFFF 2H00A7

Bitwise enabling of the T300 status bits of the d214, which should result
in a fault. A bit set in this mask results in a drive converter fault
(F116...F131), if the appropriate bit is set in the T300 status word.
Example and pre-assignment:
Status bits 0,1,2,5,7 should result in a fault trip: 00C7 hex
Pre-assignment is selected, so that start-up is as fast as possible.

Thus, the interface monitoring functions (T300 peer and
CB1/CBP/SCB) were suppressed; the monitoring functions must be
re-enabled if these interfaces are to be used!
BB: 15 Section: 2.2; 2.4.2.1.1; 5.9.1; 5.9.1

FP-CONTRL.SW040.IS2
H213 Alarm mask for T300 status word V2 0 ... 2HFFFF 2HB000
Bitwise enabling of the T300 status bits of the d214, which should result
in an alarm. A bit set in this mask results in a drive converter alarm
(A097...A112), if the appropriate bit is set in the T300 status word.
Example and pre-assignment:
Status bits 12,14,15 should result in a fault trip: B000 hex
The pre-assignment is selected, so that only a few alarms occur during
start-up. Generally it is recommended that after start-up, all alarms are
again enabled.
Note:
Alarms are only sent to the basic drive converter and displayed when
the on command is active.
BB: 15 Section: 2.2; 5.9.1 FP-CONTRL.SW030.IS2
d214 T300 status word (fault/alarm) V2 A

(Central) status word to monitor and signal open- and closed-loop
control statuses.
Basic drive converter faults and alarms are generated from this status
word according to the fault- and alarm masks (H212, H213).
Further, these bits can be sent, via an additional select mask (H219) as
status word via interfaces (T300 peer and communication boards).
Note:Alarms are only sent to the basic drive converter and displayed
when the on command is active.
Bit assignment:
Bit hex fault-/alarm Significance
0 1 F116, A097 Overspeed, positive (H190)
1 2 F117, A098 Overspeed, negative (H191)
2 4 F118, A099 External fault from sources 1 to 3
3 8 F119, A100 Angular controller at its limit (H112)
4 10 F120, A101 Telegram error, T300 peer
5 20 F121, A102 Communic err, T300<-> drive converter
6 40 F122, A103 Communications error, T300<->CB/SCB
7 80 F123, A104 Anti-stall protection (according to the
basic drive converter-ZUW1, bit8)
8 100 F124, A105 n-act > H180
9 200 F125, A106 n-act within H182 ± H183
10 400 F126, A107 n-act < H181
11 800 F127, A108 Comparison freq not reached,ZUW1, bit10)
12 1000 F128, A109 Control error, angular controller> H200
13 2000 F129, A110 n-act sensing erroneous(SYNCON.N_SL)
14 4000 F130, A111 Error difference, angular controller< H200
15 8000 F131, A112 Angular difference, outside tolerance
H201<DY<H202
BB: 5; 6; 15 Section 5.9.1 FP-CONTRL.CON150.QS

Manual
6 Parameters
H216 Word1 - source selection for T300 peer B1 0..1 1

The following control/status word bits are transferred in the 1st word of
the peer telegram:
0: Drive converter- and T300 status bits,
selected according to H218, H219
1: Control word generated on T300 (d260)
BB: 6 Section: 2.4.2; 2.4.2.1.2; 3.7; 5.8 FP-CONF.SZWPTP.I
H217 Word1 - source selection for com board B1 0..1 1
The following control/status word bits are transferred in the 1st word of
the communications board telegram:
As for H216
BB: 5 Section 2.2.1.1; 2.2.1.2.1; 2.2.1.2.2 ; 3.8
FP-CONF.SZWAUT.I
H218 Interface mask f. basic drive converter status word O2 0 ... 2HFFFF 2H058C
Bitwise enabling of the drive converter status word 1 for transfer via
serial interfaces (T300 peer and communication boards).
If a bit is set in this mask, the appropriate bit of the status word 1 is
transferred to the interface.
The following bits are enabled in the pre-assignment:
2: Operation
3: Fault
7: Alarm
8: Setpoint/actual value deviation (=drive stalled)
10: Comparison frequency reached
All of the other bits can be taken from the fault/alarm word with mask
H219.
It should be noted, that only different bits may be enabled using the
H218 and H219 masks!
BB: 5; 6 Section 2.2.1.1; 2.4.2; 2.4.2.1.1
FP-CONTRL.SW110.IS2
H219 Interface mask for T300 status word O2 0 ... 2HFFFF 2HFA73
Bitwise enabling of the T300 fault/alarm word for transfer via serial
interfaces (T300 peer and communication boards).
If a bit is set in this mask, the appropriate bit is transferred to the
interface.
It should be noted, that only different bits can be enabled using the
H218 and H219 masks!
All bits, which are masked (inhibited) with H218, are enabled in the pre-
assignment.
BB: 5; 6 Section 2.2.1.1; 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2; 2.4.2.1.1
FP-CONTRL.SW111.IS2

Manual
6 Parameters
Peer-to-peer on T300:
For detailed information refer to the T300 User Instructions.
H220 Baud rate T300 - peer O2 0... 7 7

4: 2400 Bit/s
5: 4800
6: 9600
7: 19200
8: 38400
9: 57600
10: 76800
11:-
12: 115200
Caution: see also section 7.4.3 note 3
Initialization value!
BB: 6 Section: 2.4 [email protected]
H222 Transmit telegram length, T300-peer O2 0 ... 5 5

A telegram is not sent for the setting 0. This can be practical for testing
and at start-up, or to further reduce the computation time.
BB: 6 Section: 2.4 FP-CONF.PTP3TX.LTW
H223 Receive telegram length, T300 - peer O2 1 ... 5 5
BB: 6 Section: 2.4 FP-CONF.PTP3RX.LTW
d224 Receive status, T300-peer B1 A
0: No reception in this 4ms sampling time. (LEM connector =1)
1: Correct reception
BB: 6 Section: 2.4 FP-CONF.PTP3RX.QTS
d225 Receive errror, T300-peer O2 A
Error status, if a correct telegram was not received within a 4ms
sampling time. Complete error codes, refer to /10/.
Important error codes:
0: Error-free initalization and reception
32000: No telegram received within the sampling time
32001: Telegram length, transmitter greater than receiver
32002: Telegram length, receiver greater than sender
32003: Incorrect baud rate
BB: 6 Section: 2.4 FP-CONF.PTP3RX.YTS

Manual
6 Parameters
Data transfer to the CB1/CBP, SCB1/2 communication boards:
H226 Transmit telegram length, ComBoard O2 0..7 4

BB: 5 Section: 2.2.1.1; 3.8 FP-CONF.TAUT.LT
H227 Receive telegram length, ComBoard O2 0..7 4
BB: 5 Section: 2.2.1.1; 2.2.2.1 FP-CONF.RAUT.LT
d228 Receive status, ComBoard B1 A
0: No reception after 4ms*LEM connector
1: Reception o.k.
BB: 5 Section: 2.2 FP-CONF.RAUT.QTS
d229 Receive error, ComBoard O2 A
0: Error-free initialization and reception
<>0: Error code
BB: 5 Section: 2.2 FP-CONF.RAUT.YTS

Manual
6 Parameters
Monitoring important receive telegram words
d230 Word 1, T300 - peer (STW) V2 A

Word 1 of the received T300-peer telegram;
The following bits can be used as control word bits on the T300:
Bit Function
0 On
1 Off2
2 Off3
6 Setpoint enable
7 Acknowledgement
8 Inching1
9 Inching2
BB: 6 Section: 2.4.3 FP-CONF.PTP3RX.Y1
d231 Word 3, T300 - peer (ZUW2) V2 A
Word 3 of the received T300-peer telegram;
Bit Function
0 Excitation expired (=0)
d232 Word 4, T300-peer (ZUW1) V2 A
Word 4 of the received T300 peer telegram;
Bit Function
2 Operation (for setpoint enable)
3 Fault (external)
4 Off2
5 Off3
d235 Word 1, ComBoard telegram (STW) V2 A

Word 1 of the received telegram:
The bits such as d230 can be used as control word bits on T300.
BB: 5 Section: 2.2.2.1 FP-CONF.RAUT.Y13
d236 Word 3, ComBoard telegram (ZUW2) V2 A
Word 3 of the received telegram;
The following bits can be used as control word bits on T300:
Bit Function
0 Excitation expired (=0)
d237 Word 4, ComBoard telegram (ZUW1) V2 A
Word 4 of the received telegram;
The following bits can be used as control word bits on T300:
Bit Function
2 Operation (for setpoint enable)
3 Fault (external)
4 Off2
5 Off3

Manual
6 Parameters
Source selection for control word bits
H240 Source (run) on command O2 0...15 3

The basic drive converter can also be powered-up with the selection
possibilities 0...6. The setpoint is only enabled with this signal
(according to H247, H246) and the display/output of alarms enabled.
Further, the position- and offset sensing can be reset and enabled and
the position difference sensing generated.
Value Source
0 Terminal 602
1 Terminal 602, on edge delayed
2 Terminal 602, on- and off edge delayed
3 Status bit basic drive converter ”run”-status word1
4 T300 peer: Word1, bit0 (STW, ON bit)
5 ComBoard telegram: Word1, bit0 (dito)
6 T300 peer: Word1,bit0 AND word4,bit6 (ZUW1, power-up inhibit),
so that only the slave is powered-up, if there is no off2/3!
7 ComBoard: Word1,bit0 AND word4,bit6 (ZUW1, power-up inhibit)
8 T300 peer: Word4,bit1 OR 2 (ZUW1, run or ready)
9 ComBoard: Word4,bit1 OR 2 (ZUW1, run or ready)
10...11 0
BB: 8 Section: 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1 FP-CONTRL.BEIN_1.XCS
H241 Source1, off2 command O2 0...7 5

This is not used in the angular synchronous control software package,
but is only sent to the basic drive converter where it can be used.
Value Source
0 Terminal 608
1 Word1, bit1 T300 peer
2 Word1, bit1 ComBoard telegram
3 Generated from ZUW1, bit4 ”no off2” of the T300 peer
4 Generated from ZUW1, bit4 ”no off2” of the ComBoard telegram
5 1 (no off2)
6 1 (no off2)
7 1 (no off2)
BB: 8 Section: 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1 FP-CONTRL.AUS2_1.XCS
Function and selection as for H241
BB: 8 Section 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1 FP-CONTRL.AUS2_2.XCS
but is only sent to the basic drive converter where it can be used.
Value Source
0 Terminal 604
3 Generated from ZUW1, bit5 ”no off3” of the T300 peer generated
4 Generated from ZUW1, bit5 ”no off3” of the ComBoard telegram
5 1 (no off3)
6 1 (no off3)
7 1 (no off3)
Function and selection as for H243

Manual
6 Parameters
H245 SourceM for setpoint enable O2 0...7 7

The setpoint is enabled (for the basic drive converter and if required
master drive) if the source, selected using this parameter and the
source, set with H246, is ”1”.
The setpoint enable is a pre-condition to enable the angular controller!
Value Source
0 Terminal 616
3 Generated from ZUW2, bit0 ”RESTART ON THE FLY” of the T300
peer
4 Generated from ZUW2, bit0 ”RESTART ON THE FLY” of the Com
Board telegram
5 Generted from ZUW2, bit0 ”RESTART ON THE FLY” of the basic
drive converter
6 Terminal 602 with on delay (H021)
7 1 (setpoint enable)
BB: 8 Section: 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1; 4.2.1; 5.9.2
FP-CONTRL.SWFR_1.XCS
H246 SourceS for setpoint enable O2 0...7 7
Function and selection as for H245!
BB: 8 Section: 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1; 4.2.1; 5.9.2
FP-CONTRL.SWFR_2.XCS
H247 Source1 for fault acknowledgement O2 0...7 0

but is only sent to the basic drive converter where it can be used to
acknowledge faults;
The signal is edge-triggered and should be at ”0” in the quiescent state.
Value Source
0 Terminal 611
3 0
...
7 0
BB: 9 Section 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1
FP-CONTRL.QUIT_1.XCS
H248 Source2 for fault acknowledgement O2 0...7 7
Function and selection as for H247!
BB: 9 Section 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1 FP-CONTRL.QUIT_2.XCS
H249 Source for inching 1 O2 0...7 0

Value Source
0 Terminal 606
3 0
...
7 0
BB: 10 Section 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1; 5.5.5
FP-CONTRL.TIP1_1.XCS

Manual
6 Parameters
H250 Source for inching 2 O2 0...7 0

Value Source
0 Terminal 607
3 0
...
7 0
BB: 10 Section 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1; 5.5.5
FP-CONTRL.TIP2_1.XCS
H251 Source, ”angular synchronization” O2 0...7 0
Using this command, the master- and slave drive are brought into the
required angular position (i. e. 0 or the selected offset reference value)
regarding the synchronizing marks, if the angular controller is also
enabled (H252).
Value Source
0 Terminal 605
1 Control word (=word1) from the automation (CB, SCB1/2), bit11
2 Control word (=word1) from 300 peer, bit11
3 0 (= inhibited)
...
6 0
7 1 (= enabled)
BB: 11 Section: 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 4.1.1; 5.1.4; 5.7
FP-CONTRL.SYNC_1.XCS
H252 Source, ”angular controller enable” O2 0...7 0

Using this command, the (offset)angle between the master- and slave
drive is corrected.
a) When the synchronizing command (H251) is inhibited, the angle is
maintained, which existed at the instant of the command
”position difference reset” (H052).
b) The angle is controlled to the selected offset reference value when a
synchronizing command is present.
The angular controller is only enabled if the speed controller is enabled

(H253) and the setpoint (reference values) (H245 and H246)!
ValueSource
0 terminal 601
1 control word (=word1) from the automation (CB, SCB1/2), bit13
2 control word (=word1) from 300-peer, bit13
3 0 (= inhibited)
...
6 0
7 1 (= enabled)
BB: 11 Section: 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 4.1.1; 5.6.1
FP-CONTRL.WIRE_1.XCS
H253 Source, ”speed controller enable” O2 0...7 7

The speed controller on the basic drive converter is enabled using this
command, if P585=3004.
This enable signal via the T300 is however generally not required; the
speed controller can always be enabled (P585=1)!
Value Source
0 Terminal 603
1 0 (= inhibited)
...
6 0
7 1 (= enabled)
BB: 10 Section: 4.1.1; 3.5 FP-CONTRL.NREG_1.XCS

Manual
6 Parameters
H254 Source1, for external T300 fault O2 0...7 7

A fault trip (F118) or alarm (A099) can be forced using the signal
sources specified here. Thus, it is easy to shutdown a slave drive, if the
master drive signals a fault via a serial interface (in its status word1).
Note: A fault is initiated for ”1” signal level so that the status bit of the
interfaces can be simply processed.
All of the sources, selected with H254...H256 are OR ’d.
Information regarding the ”external” basic drive converter fault

F035:
This signal can also be processed in the basic drive converter for the
setting P575=3001(CU2,CU3); P575 =3115(CUVC,CUMC)!
In this case, it should be noted, that a fault is initiated for a ”0” signal
level in the basic drive converter. This application can be practical, if, for
example, a closed switch (terminal 612) is to initiate a fault condition. In
this case, F118 must be masked, as it would occur if the switch was
closed.
Value Source
0 Terminal 612 (if not used as thumbwheel switch input!)
3 0 (no fault)
...
7 0 (no fault)
BB: 9 Section 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1; 5.9.2
FP-CONTRL.STEX_1.XCS
H255 Source2 for external fault O2 0...7 7

As for H254, with the exception:
Value Source
3 0 (no fault)
...
7 0 (no fault)
BB: 9 Section 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1; 5.9.2
H256 Source3 for external fault O2 0...7 7
As for H254, with the exception:
Value Source
3 0 (no fault)
...
7 0 (no fault)
BB: 9 Section 2.2.2.1; 2.4.3; 3.5; 4.1.1; 5.9.2

Manual
6 Parameters
H257 Inhibit supplementary setpoint2 for off and RFG B1 0/1 1

inactive
For the 0 setting, the angular controller output is no longer sent as
supplementary setpoint value2 to the basic drive converter, if an OFF
signal is present in the drive converter and the ramp-function generator
is inactive (drive has ramped-down to frequency 0).
Thus, this prevents the drive rotating in spite of an off command and
master setpoint =0 if the angular controller output is greater than the
”off-shutdown frequency” from the basic converter.
The supplementary setpoint is not disconnected for setting 1.
BB: 4 Section: 5.6.1 FP-CONTRL.ZUS2AB.I4
d260 T300 control word V2 A
Monitoring parameter of the control word, generated on the T300 from
all of the selected sources. This is transferred to the basic drive
converter, and can be sent via serial interfaces.
Assignment (active signal level in brackets):
Bit: Significance:
0 On (=1)
1 Off2 (=0)
2 Off3 (=0)
...
6 Setpoint enable (=1)
7 Acknowledgement (=1)
8 Inching1 (=1)
9 Inching2 (=1)
...
15 External fault (=0 !)
BB: 4; 5; 6 Section: 2.2.1.2.2; 2.4.2.1.2
FP-CONTRL.MA_STW.Y
d261 Masked T300 status word + drive converter-ZUW V2 A

Monitoring parameter of the resulting status word, which can be sent via
the serial interfaces.
It is generated from the T300-fault/alarm status word (d214) which can
be masked using H219, and (logical OR), with the basic drive converter
status word, which can be masked using H218.
Bit assignment: Refer to d214 and the basic drive converter status word
(Manual).
BB: 5; 6 Section: 2.2.1.2.1; 2.4.2.1.1; 5.8
FP-CONTRL.SW120.QS
H270 Value range expansion, setpoint offset O2 32767 16

(From V1.6) If the value range of the offset setpoint (*/- 32768) is not
sufficient (exceptional cases) then this can be increased using H270
(H270 as exponent to the power of two). In this case, it must be
assumed that the accuracy (resolution) will be decreased.
BB: 13 Section: 5.6.2 FP-SYNCON.PDIFAD.XD

Manual
6 Parameters
H275 Fine adjust pulse number ratio, numerator I2 32767 1000

For unfavorable combination encoder pulse number (H10,H11) and
ratio , this can result in restrictions regarding the accuracy of the pulse
number ratio.
With H277=1 pulse number ratio can be adjusted by H275 and H276.
(ref. Section 4.4.3; 5.1.3, new in V1.50 (05.96)) !
BB: 12 Section: 5.6.1 FP-SYNCON.FEINNM.X2
H276 Fine adjust pulse number ratio, denominator I2 32767 1000
ref. H275
BB: 12 Section: 5.6.1 FP-SYNCON.FEINDN.X2
H277 Enable fine adjust pulse number ratio B1 0/1 0
ref. H275
BB: 12 Section: 5.6.1 FP-SYNCON.FEINPZ.I1
H970 establish factory setting 02 165 0

If the value is set to 165, the EEPROM (on MS340) is erased after an
erase- or delay time of several seconds. This parameter must then be
set to another value (e. g. 0)!
After a subsequent power-off/on, the parameterization is set to that
when the unit was shipped (”factory setting”).
BB: 3 Section - FP-PARAM.ER10.Q

Manual
7 Start-up
7 Start-up
It is recommended that the sequence specified here is kept during start-up, so that if difficulties are
encountered they can be more easily identified and resolved.
WARNING
Only commence with start-up, if there are adequate and effective measures
to ensure that the system and drive can be safely electrically and
mechanically operated.
Please ensure that all safety- and EMERGENCY OFF signals are connected
and are effective, so that the drive can be shutdown at any time.
Start-up sequence:
- Start-up (commission) the basic drive converter according to the appropriate Instruction Manual
- either without a technology board and if required interface board
- or with an already installed technology board by cancelling the technology- and interface
board using parameters P52, P90, P91, P52 (CU2,CU3).
- document all of the parameters which were changed; e.g. in a list of changeable parameters
- Disconnect the drive converter from the power and wait until the DC link has discharged.
- Install the technology board:

- plug-in the memory submodule (MS340) on the T300
- insert the technology board at slot 2 in the electronics box, at the outer right
- Connect the SE300 terminal module to T300:

- connect the T300 connectors X131 and X135 to SE300 via the SC58 and SC60 cables
- Connect-up the SE300 according to the terminal assignment (Section 4) and check
- Connect the power to the drive converter
- Set/check the basic drive converter parameters (according to Section 3)
- Parameterize the angular synchronous control of the technology board
All of the settings to parameterize the angular synchronous control are made via the technology
parameters (also refer to Section 5 !).
An oscilloscope should be used to evaluate the control quality and if necessary, to check the pulse
encoder signals. Further, it is easy to display an offset by tracing the synchronizing marks (zero pulses) in
2 channels.
A storage oscilloscope and a stroboscope are extremely helpful when setting the offset values.
Additional equipment (e. g. battery box) are required according to the system-specific requirements and
situation.
Information regarding the representation in the following sequence diagrams:
n Additional information under n) following the particular sequence diagram

Manual
7 Start-up
7.1 Start-up speed control

Start
"First start-up":
MLFB, motor data, min/max frequencies, ...
log-on T300 (P52=4,P90=2,P52=0 for CU2,CU3)
Y
Unit signals
a fault
?
N
N Power-down
F080,F070? unit a
Set the actual value sensing:
Encoder pulse number, SLAVE H010
Encoder pulse number, MASTER H011
Rated speed, SLAVE H012 Y
Rated speed, MASTER H013
Pulse encoder operating mode, SLAVE H018 Check the hardware (T300, CB, SCB1/2);
Pulse encoder operating mode, MASTER H019 check that the option boards have been logged-on
Caution for SIMOVERT SC: If encoder tracks A, (P52 for CU2,CU3).
B are fed to T300 via LBA, enter a negative
rated speed at H012 due to the
interchanging
of tracks A,B!
b
Transfer these settings:

Power-down the unit (no-voltage) and power-up again
H213 alarm mask

H212 fault mask
When H212 is changed, possible faults can be initiated.
It is possible to parameterize in the fault status using the key combination "P+raise".
Then, if relevant, acknowledge available faults
With OP1, changes of these paramerters (V2-type) are possible with pord. state "G", SW version 1.1
Parameterizing the basic drive converter<->T300 interface:

P443=3002
P438=3005
P694.1=968; P734.1=32
If required, also P226=3006, P506=3008, P694.4=553, P694.5=550 (CU2,CU3)
or P232=3006, P506=3008, P734.4=33, P734.5=30 (CUVC,CUMC)
If i d l P226 3006 P506 3008 P694 4 553 P694 5 550 (CU2 CU3)
Inhibit the angular controller (terminal, control bit) H252
Source, ratio H040

Select the ratio, e. g.: H043
Select the master setpoint source H070
Master
setpoint,
N analog?
Y
Calibrate the analog input using H071:

Speed setpoint (d136) =! master setpoint [V]/5V * H071*ratio (d044)
Fig. 7.1.a: Speed control start-up (Start-A): Speed actual value sensing, setpoint

Manual
7 Start-up
c
ON
Slowly increase
Enter a master setpoint of approx. 5%: torque limit (P492.ff)
e. g. via serial interface or terminal 501 / 502 (= 0.25V) until the drive
rotates or a
maximum value is
N reached
N Setpoint, on command,
Drive other enable signals
rotates? present?
Y
Y
N N
Speed actual Torque limits (r496)
value present: d014? high enough?
Check
OFF connection of Y
Y tracks A, B and if
required
interchange
e
Speed setpoint N Power-down,
polarity=actual remove cause
value?
A
Y Y
Drive overloaded, rotor
locked, stalled?
N Polarity,
speed actual value=torque setpoint?
N
OFF
Y
f Power-down unit
N
Drive rotates in the
required direction?
A d
OFF
Y
Fig. 7.1.b: Speed control start-up (A-B): Drive rotates, torque

Manual
7 Start-up
Increase speed
setpoint by
5-10% up to
max. speed
Check the pulse encoder setting,
torque limit
Does the speed actual value

d014 correspond to setpoint d136? N
Does the displayed actual value coincide
with the measurement, e. g.
handheld tachometer?
Y
Setpoint limiting?
N
Does the slave drive Optimize the speed
run smoothly? controller using the usual
technique
Y
Y
Good result achievable
Y Is the required ?
torque 1) obtained?
N
OFF
N
Increase the torque limits by 5-10% i

until the required torque 1) is
reached
N Rated- or
maximum speed
reached
?
Y
1) The required torque should be selected

taking into account the connected motor
C and load
Fig. 7.1.c: Speed control start-up (B-C): Speed controller optimization, torque limit

Manual
7 Start-up
Speed control optimized N Optimize

according to the usual controller
optimization technique
?
Inching N Check setpoints,

functions? power-up/down
control
Y Fixed ratio
?
N
Approach the maximum requested operating
speed at each requested ratio.
Y Slave speed actual value =

master speed actual value:
d014 = ü*d015?
Source for
ratio correctly selected using N Check setpoints,
H040? power-up/down
d044 = required value? control
Speed setpoint d136 = N Change ratio or

master setpoint H072 * ratio d044? reduce master setpoint
Does the drive Y Refer to

operate at very low speeds Section
in synchronism
? 5.5.6
For safety, check the pulse

encoder signals k
Speed control start-up

completed
Fig. 7.1.d: Speed control start-up (C-end): Ratio

Manual
7 Start-up
The fault causes specified here can be used to troubleshoot the speed control; other causes are also
possible.
a) Basic drive converter signals fault F080:

T300 correctly inserted, correct slot? T300 defective? MS340 memory module inserted?
CU2,CU3:If parameterized (P91=1), CB1 correctly inserted, correct slot? CB1 defective?
CUVC,CUMC: If used, is the CBP correctly inserted, in the correct slot? CBP defective?
b) Basic drive converter signals fault F070:
CU2,CU3:If parameterized (P91=3), correct SCB1/2 interface board type inserted for the selected
protocol (P682)? correct slot? defective hardware? - if required replace board
CUVC,CUMC: If used, is the correct type of interface module SCB1/2, matching the selected protocol
(P696) inserted? Correct slot? Hardware defective? If required replace the module
c) Drive does not rotate when an ON command is entered and a setpoint is present:
Check that all of the necessary control word enable signals are present (setpoint-, inverter-, ramp-
function generator enable, clockwise/counter-clockwise phase sequence etc.).
Frequency limits OK?
d) The drive does not rotate although all of the enable signals are present:
Can the drive be open-loop V/f characteristic controlled (P163=1) or open- or closed-loop frequency
controlled (P163=3)?
Establish the factory setting (P52=1); execute motor identification run (P52=7 or 8).
e) No speed actual value:

Wiring correct (ground connections)?
For the slave drive: Encoder cables to the CU (for VC: Connector X132) correctly connected?
For the master drive: T300-SE300 connecting cables OK?
Power supply voltage available at the pulse encoder?
Are all signals available with respect to ground and do they have the correct phase sequence
(oscilloscope!)?
Yes: Defective technology board? ® Replace technology board
No: Check the pulse encoder and pulse encoder cable
f) The torque setpoint and speed actual value have different polarities:
Prerequisite: The machine is not driven:
If the converter and pulse encoder are correctly connected, for a positive torque setpoint, the machine
must rotate in a clockwise direction (when viewing the drive side) and have a positive speed actual
value.
Otherwise, tracks A and B of the pulse encoder (SLAVE) must be interchanged, or a negative value
entered at H012 (rated SLAVE speed) (this is transferred by powering-down the unit and powering it
up again!).
Note: Fluctuations can occur in the polarity (sign), for motors which are either running under no-load
conditions or only with a low load
g) Drive does not rotate in the required direction:

Power-down the drive converter, change the phase sequence at the motor/converter, observe point f),
reverse the speed actual value by
interchanging pulse encoder tracks A/B or
reverse the polarity at H012 (SLAVE rated speed)
h) Setpoint limiting is effective:

The product of the master setpoint (d074) and the ratio (d044) may not exceed or fall below the
min/max frequency setpoint limits (P452, P453, P457).

Manual
7 Start-up
i) Erroneous optimization:
Execute the motor identification and speed controller optimization runs (P52=8 or similar).
Is all of the equipment used OK?
Are all of the cables (especially the pulse encoder cable) carefully routed and shielded, especially for
long encoder cables?
Does the subordinate closed-loop torque control operate perfectly (check parameterization, motor
data, etc.)?
Is the load mechanically OK (no play, elasticities, etc.)?
Is the pulse encoder correctly mounted (mechanical mounting design)?
k) Check the pulse encoder signals:

To use the angular synchronous control, the pulse encoder signals must be noise-free. It is strongly
recommended, that the following measurements are made using the oscilloscope (directly at terminals
531 to 546):
1) The phase shift between tracks A and B of an encoder must be at least 1µs at all speeds.
2) Noise spikes (duration > 2.5 ms) must not occur close to the switching threshold of the pulse
encoder input circuit, i. e. not in the range B:
15
Input voltage in V at terminals
10 531/532 to 545/546
B
3) If a sychronizing signal is used, it is recommended that the synchronizing signal is now

oscilloscoped.

Manual
7 Start-up
7.2 Start-up, closed-loop angular control

Before commissioning the angular control it is absolutely necessary that the speed control start-up was
successfully completed. It is not permissible that the drive is overloaded. Synchronization must be
inhibited (according to H251, e. g. terminal 605=0 and control word bit11=0).
Note: The load must be completely coupled to the motor.

Caution: The motor rotates backwards and forwards during optimization.
Start
Set the highest (or fixed) ratio
Set the angular controller limiting H112 to 0%
Set parameter H052 (source, enable position difference) to 0
ON
Enter the highest possible master speed setpoint
Enable angular controller Inhibit angular controller
Does the
position difference d124 N
drift away slowly? a
Y
Pre-control is optimized
Inhibit angular controller
Set the angular controller limiting H112 to the

required value (generally, approx. 5-10 %)
Set the angular controller as P controller:

Set H110 = 1, KP gain H113 = 0.
Position difference smoothing H117 = 4 ms
Fig. 7.2.a: Angular control start-up (Start-A): Basic setting

Manual
7 Start-up
Enable angular controller
Optimize angular controller: (Refer to the

subsequent Section): Kp: H113
if required, PI controller with H110=0; Tn: H111
Position
difference d124 within N
the required tolernce? b
N Are
different ratios used
?
Adaption, P gain to the ratio (refer to Section ):

Enter the highest / lowest ratio in H115/H116
After optimization, enter the associated Kp in H113/H114
Position difference N
d124 within the required
tolerance?
N
All required ratios
adjustable?
N
All required speeds
adjustable?
Y
Set the "source, enable position
difference" H052
to the required value
(refer to Section )
Angular control start-up

completed
Fig. 7.2.b: Angular control start-up (A-End): Ratio

Manual
7 Start-up
The fault causes specified here can be used to troubleshoot the angular control; other causes are also
possible.
a) After the actual value sensing has been enabled (angular controller), the position difference actual
value quickly drifts away from 0:
The pre-control is correctly set, if the position difference actual value only drifts away from zero without
the angular controller intervening. The prerequisites are that
- the master drive runs smoothly (speed controller optimization),
- the master setpoint corresponds to the master drive speed,
- the slave drive runs smoothly (speed controller optimization),
- the product of master setpoint * ratio (H072*d044) is less than 200 %,
- for analog master setpoint input, the adaption is correct (H071)
b) Position difference actual value is too high. Possible causes:

- speed controller goes to its limit?
Yes: Correctly select the torque limits, remove overload condition
- angular controller goes to its limit?
If yes: Ensure that
1.) frequency limiting > [speed setpoint (d136) + angular controller limiting (H112)] !
2.) product of the master setpoint * ratio (H072*d044) < 200% !
c) Check configured ratio and compare it with mechanical ratio.

If possible do this by watching the synchronizing pulses or/and of the material web or technology.
Does it move away from the desired position?
7.2.1 Instructions to optimize the angular controller

Procedure:
1. For low to average requirements regarding the control quality:

Set experience values:
A KP between 2 and 6 provides, for many applications, adequate accuracy and dynamic
performance.
2. For average to high requirements regarding the dynamic performance or

the experience values (refer to 1 above) do not provide satisfactory results:
- enter master setpoint 0

- Increase the P gain in steps of 2 until the slave drive oscillates. The oscillation can be
determined, for example, by monitoring the speed actual value at analog output terminals 509 / 510. If
the slave drive runs very smoothly for a P gain > 2, then it will be necessary to initiate motor oscillation.
This can be realized, for example, by entering inching setpoint 1 (terminal 606, H130, approx. 1%).
- reduce the P gain H113 in steps of 0.5 to 1 until oscillation stops. Then multiply the value (just
reached) by 0.5 to 0.7, and store in H113.
3. For high requirements regarding the control quality:
- for high requirements regarding the control quality, the speed actual value must be precisely traced,
for example, via analog output 1 (terminals 509 / 510) using a fast plotter or a storage oscilloscope. In
this case, the speed actual value is compensated using H160 and the analog output gain adapted
using H161, so that the speed ripple can be easily monitored.

Manual
7 Start-up
- at average slave drive speeds, excite oscillation using inching setpoint 1 (terminal 606, parameter
H130 = approx. 1 %) and monitor the response. Vary the P gain until a favorable result is achieved.
- under certain circumstances, the optimization result can be improved by increasing the position
difference smoothing (H117). However, generally the pre-set value of 4 ms should be used.
4. Angular errors
- The P controller results in an angular error, dependent on the P gain. If this error is noticeable, the
angular controller must be parameterized as PI controller (H110 = 0). The integral action time must be
set using parameter H111. The drive should be optimized and values varied towards lower Tn, starting
with higher values (approx. 5 sec) of Tn.

Manual
7 Start-up
7.3 Start-up - synchronization

Before synchronization can be commissioned the closed-loop speed and angular control must have been
successfully commissioned. Synchronization must be inhibited if it is not required (using H251, e. g.
terminal 605).
Caution:
Synchronization is only possible if the synchronizing signals are OK (e. g. zero pulses). The cable
should be routed to ensure that it is immune to noise and it must be correctly shielded; the synchronizing
signal pulse shape should be checked using an oscilloscope.
Bild
Start
Set parameters H090 - H093

(refer to H100 - H103
Section 5.7): H104 - H106
Set the offset ref. value = 0

(e. g. with H050 = 4)
Inhibit synchronization
(e. g., terminal 605 = 0)
ON, OFF
enable the speed- and Inhibit speed- and
angular controllers angular controllers
Operate the master- und slave

drives with approx. 30 % speed
Number
of synchronizing N
pulses from the master and slave
the same, or so they slowly a
drift apart *)
?
Y
Enable synchronization
(e. g., terminal 605 = 1)
*) Check with an N
oscilloscope Slave drive runs b
smoothly **)
**) Monitor the actual slave speed ?
fluctuations < 2 % of the actual value!
(e. g. analog output, terminal Y
509/510)
Fig. 7.3.a: Synchronization start-up (Start-A)

Manual
7 Start-up
Number
of synchronizing N
pulses from the master and slave the
same and no drift *)
? Wait
or slightly increase H093
(e. g. from 1 to 2).
Y c
N
|d094|
< 20 to 500?
N Are |d095| Y
offset ref. values Offset act. value - pos. difference
required? < 32765 ?
Y
N
Enter offset ref. values Wait
(refer to
5.6.2)
If synchronization hasn`t been
realized after approx. 30 s (|H095|
N > 32765), then an excessive con
Are trol difference has been built-up
e offset ref. values
reached *)
?
Y d
End *) Measure the clearance between the

synchronizing pulses, e. g. using a
stroboscope or an oscilloscope
Fig. 7.3.b: Synchronization start-up (A-End)

Manual
7 Start-up
The fault causes specified here can be used to troubleshoot the synchronization function; other causes
are possible.
a) The number of synchronizing pulses from the master and slave in any time sector are not the same:
- check the ratio (nset slave r451 ≅ ü * nact master d015)
- check the synchronizing signals/signal transmitters
b) The slave drive does not run smoothly after synchronization has been enabled:
- reduce H093 if possible (minimum = 1),
- check the synchronizing signal characteristics
- check the speed- and angular controller optimization; if required, re-optimize.
- check the master drive; if required, re-optimize the master drive
- investigate the mechanical configuration for play, torsion etc.
c) The number of synchronizing pulses from the master and slave for a particular time sector are not the
same after synchronization has been enabled:
- check the synchronizing signals/signal transmitters
- check the parameterization (H050 to H069 and H090 to H109) -especially the synchronizing pulse
numbers
d) Synchronization was not able to be realized (absolute offset actual value - position difference > 32765):
- refer to c)
- if d094 shows an increasing trend, then the correcting influence of the synchronization is probably
too low:
- slightly increase H093 (e. g. from 1 to 2); start again
d) Offset reference values are not reached:

- check the parameterization (H050 to H069 and H090 to H109)
(offset reference value limiting reached?)
- check the mechanical design and if required modify

Manual
7 Start-up
7.4 Parameterization with Simovis for Windows

thrue the PMU connection. Please refere to section 7.4.3.
7.4.1 Creating the data base for a technology type.

Preconditions:
settings.
procedure SIMOVIS also generates a file (by upreading), which is interpreted during offline mode to be
the factory setting of a technology type. This file is used for example:
be printed.
registered.

Manual
7 Start-up
Proceed as follows:
tab( refer to section 7.4.3.).
green colour.

Data bases for further languages: The standard software package „Angular synchronous control“
supports two languages (german and english). A seperate data base for each additional language can be
created. For each language selection (refere to H000) a new data base has to be created, each one must
be assigned to a different technology type name, (e.g. MS340_G and MS340_E).

Manual
7 Start-up
7.4.2 T300 parameterization


7.4.3 Important notes
tab.
Empirical values:
Note 2: Disconnect other drives (if available) to reduce the time required for the „learning
process“.

Manual
7 Start-up

Manual
8 STRUC G graphic diagram display
Several SIMADYN D - specific functions are described in this Section. They are essentially intended to
assist in understanding the STRUC G diagrams in the Appendix.
8.1 Sheet structure

7) Sheet columns 1...8
5) Source information 5) Destination information

(border panel) (border panel)
7) Sheet sub-divisions A..F

(not used)
4) Function blocks
connections and
sheet comments 6) Fields with comments
connector attributes
of the function blocks
3) Copyright 2) STRUC documentation

lines
1) Text field
Fig. 8.1: Sheet structure for STRUC G
Explanation to Fig. 8.4:

1) Text field
The text field is laid out according to DIN 6771, Part 5.
2) STRUC documentation line
Information regarding the version, compiler times, libraries and STRUC configuring levels.
3) Field for copyright and additional documentation information.
4) Field for function blocks, connections and sheet comments
The individual function blocks with their connections, constants and signal designations as well as
the sheet comments are located here.
5) Source- and destination information
Function package connections ($ quantities), are specified here with their source- and destination
function packages and the associated system IDs. Hardware- and communication connections are
also entered here.
6) Field for comments and connector attributes of the function blocks
The comments in the border strip signals, the function block comments (header line in STRUC), the
connector attributes (MIN, MAX, SCAL, ...) and the connector comments are entered in this four-
section field.
7) Sheet columns
The sheet is sub-divided along the x axis into sections 1 to 8. The displayed, but unused y axis runs
from left to right, from A to F. The information is referred to the sheet columns.

Manual
8.2 Structure and display of a function block

There is a graphic function symbol for every function block which can be used to document the function
block and the user-specific features. In addition to the input- and output signal connections, there are also
signal values specified and various connector attributes, which are significant for the sequence and
embedding the function block in the function package. The information is described in the Section,
Connector supply.
Function block Mark ("B" if the block is Execution sequence

name inhibited for service)
Star, if a block comment Sampling time

is available
Function block-
*
H S W STRUC L line number
type of the listing
(possible block library
code A, B, C) X1 N2 N2 Y
Reference point o
X2 B1 Z
Circle for
type changeover
* I B1
Connector designator
Connector type
Star, if original connector

information is available Graphics
Fig. 8.2:Function block layout
8.3 Connector supply for the function blocks

The connectors are used to supply the function blocks with input information and output the results to
other function blocks or peripheral boards.
The connectors are coded in the function blocks via the connector type and the connector
designation.The connectors are supplied with signal connections, signal values (constants), signal
designators, attributes (MIN, MAX, SCAL, Pn ≅ PAR = n, Mn ≅ MES=n, DATX, INIT, LOG0, LOG1) and
comments. As not all of this information can be located in the graphics sections, some information is
located in the comments field below the graphic field. A star at the connector indicates that this
information is available.

Manual
8.4 Information in the function package

1 Local sheet connections, as line, or letter (A..Z) within a sheet
2 Internal function package connections to/from another sheet with source/target block,
connector, sheet, column. If there is no space at the connector for target- or source information, or
if several target infos are available, then the border strip is used.
3 External function package connections, with connection name, bus access, processor, function
package, system id, sheet, column.
Fig. 8.4.1 Signal connection types
Function package connections ($ quantities) provide signal transfer paths between technological function
units in which the individual function packages are realized.
Connection name Additional local Bus access type

processor
access
$REGOUT PN T1C
1FP-STEUER =.W1/2.1 System ID, abbreviated/sheet and column No.
2FP-OUTPUT
Lefthand border =DB34.W30/2.1 System ID, complete/sheet and column No.
Processor Function package - or

No. master program name
Fig. 8.4.2 Function package connection structure

Manual

Manual
9 Others
9 Others
9.1 Terminology/abbreviations
AG Automation unit
DUST Data transfer control
FB Function block
FP Function package (function blocks configured to provide a complete function)
GG Basic converter
MP Master program (defines the hardware and software configuration)
n Speed
n_act Speed actual value
n_set Speed setpoint
PG Programming unit (e.g. PG685, PG730, PG750)
PKW Parameter ID/value
PNU Parameter number
PT Technology board
T Torque
TA Sampling time
TP Technological parameter
TP_xxx Technological parameter, number xxx
9.2 Literature
/1/ User Manual User Manual STRUC G/L/PT
(Useful, e.g. when modifying the standard software package )
6DD1981-1AA2 German
6DD1981-1AB2 English
/2/ Recommendations for EMC-proof cabinet design with SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-8CE0
( Refer also Kompendium CUVC,CUMC)
/3/ User Manual T300 (german/english)

Order No. 6SE7087-6CX84-0AH1
Is contained in T300 HW-package!
4
) = Information regarding the nal scope and connection of an SE51 interface module
Ordering locations:
/1/ /2/ /3/ NO TAG and NO TAG
SIEMENS AG SIEMENS AG SSSIEMENS AG

PSWER A&D DS A P1 AUT 7B92
Postfach 3269 Postfach 3269 Postfach 2355
91050 Erlangen 91050 Erlangen 90713 Fürth

Manual
9 Others

Manual
10 Changes
10 Changes
Version 1.1: 17.03.95 First Software
Version 1.2: 06.04.95

little changes concerning communications
Version 1.30: 14.12.95

- new T300 peer-to-peer software: H220 with different settings!!!!!!!
(higher baud rate, no deadtime, lower computation time);
transmitter and receiver in a 4ms sampling time;
- EEPROM can be erased
- parameter write inhibit can be cancelled using a button;
- system error bits are displayed instead of a 7-segment code;
- offset actual values as I4- instead of I2 parameter
- extremely high synchronous pulse numbers can be checked via I4 parameters
- several parameter names have been optimized
- every setpoint change entered via the thumbwheel switch is stored in the NOVRAM.
At the new power-up, the last selected value is automatically used.
-control word bits 3-5 are transferred from the communications board (CB1) to the
basic drive converter.
Version 1.40: 12.01.96

- setpoint inputs (up to 2x 16-bit values) are now also possible via the USS interface of
the basic drive converter (involves H040, H048, H050, H070, H080)
- the selectability and changeability of the ratio has been expanded;
H047, H048, H049 are new; (partially already in V1.30):
- percentage change of a selected ratio
- addition of a further fixed value
- percentage change can be entered via an analog input
- the angular controller is enabled only when the setpoint is enabled
- the synchronizing command is only enabled when the angular controller is enabled
- EEPROM can be erased using H970
(parameter number corresponding to ”factory setting”, basic drive converter)
- fixed value parameter H073 to enter a speed (master-)setpoint (for testing)
- analog outputs 3 and 4 (terminals 521/522, 523/524; corresponding to H170, H171) in
4 ms instead of 16 ms
- Pre-assignment H245/H246 „Source setpoint enable“ on fixed 1 (enabled)
- Pre-assignment H100,H102=4096
- High word synchronizing pulse number (H101): also negative values can be
parametrized.

Manual
10 Changes
Version 1.50: 31.05.96

-Using STRUC V4.2.3:
- Korrection of Parameter handling ( SIMOVIS)
- Peer-to-Peer-blocs now in FBSLIB
- having negative ratio a negative displacement is allowed
- parameters H275,H276,H277 added
Version 1.60: 24.07.97

- Using STRUC V4.2.4 with the appropriate new features:
- H270 new: The value range of the offset setpoint can be changed.
Version 1.70: 08.02.99

- Optimization initialization PKW-mechanism for Profibus.
- Problems by synchonizing with Linear axis with only one synchronizing signal where
solved. Onwards V1.7, the library FBSLT1 with version 990204V420, or newer is required

Manual
11 Appendix
11 Appendix: Block diagrams, Short parameter list,

STRUC G Diagrams
Block diagrams
Short parameter list
STRUC G function diagrams

Manual
11 Appendix

Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
List of contents "Standard software package Angular Synchronous Control" for 6SE70/71
A A
Page Contents Page Contents
1 List of contents 14 Speed controller
2 Overview T300 Board 15 Fault and Alarm messages

B B
3 Overview closed-loop control 16 Analog outputs 1, 2 and Select values 1, 2
4 Data transfer with the CU (basic drive convertert) 17 Analog outputs 3, 4 and Select values 3, 4
5 Data transfer with the CB / SCB (communication board) 18 Input and output signales
6 Data transfer with the Peer-to-Peer interface C

C
7 Setpoint selection
8 Source selection control word bits for

the basic drive converter (1)
D 9 Source selection control word bits for D

10 Source selection control word bits for

11 Source selection control word bits for the angular control E

E
12 Offset sensing and synchronization
13 Angular controller
F
F
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 List of contents SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Send data Receive data

A A
Interface board CB
DUAL-PORT-RAM
TCS Parameters RCS

Send data to the Receive data from
B interface board the interface board B

SIMADYN D monitor
7 analog inputs X131 X132 IBS (start-up),
SIMOVIS C
C 4 analog outputs (access to all quantities)
16 binary inputs
Peer-to-peer protocol
X136 X134 for fast setpoint input
D 8 binary outputs D
DUAL-PORT-RAM
RD Parameters TD
Receive data Send data
from the basic to the basic drive
drive converter converter
E
E
Basic drive converter 6SE70/71 Operator control panel
PMU, OP1
F
F
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Overview T300 Board SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Inertia compensation: Closed-loop speed control Basic drive converter (CU)

A - Interface
A
(CBP/CB1,SCB1/2)
- Analog input
- USS (Setpoint from CU)
Master speed setpoint:

- CBP/CB1, SCB1/2
- Master speed actual value
- Analog input
- Binary setpoint input
B - Parameter
1
B
- T300 Peer-to-Peer Speed setpoint
- USS (Setpoint from CU)
Current
controller,
Speed controler gating unit
Ratio:
- Interface inverter
- Binary setpoint input Speed actual value Slave
- Parameter
- Analog input
- USS (Setpoint from CU) C
C Language
Parameter name
Conversion into the 0
pulse ratio H000
Ü-PZ
German
Speed actual value English
Pulse encoder Actual value Offset
sensing Master sensing
Offset actual value
D SLAVE Slave
Position actual value Slave and Master
and
synchronizing D
MASTER Offset-position
Status and control signals Software version
Control signals diference actual value
Position difference d001
for synchronizing
Position difference-correction value
Software / Modultyp
d002 =340
E
E Supplementary
Ramp-function speed setpoint
generator Write inhibit
Offset reference value:
- Interface H003
- Analog input
- Binary setpoint input
- Parameter direction of
establish factory
rotation dependent
setting
- Fixed Parameter F
F - USS (Setpoint from CU) P- or PI-controller H970
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Overview closed-loop control SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 Ready to switch on
Bit 1 Ready
Receive data Bit 2 Run RUN CU
RUN_CU
A T300 from CU Bit 3 Fault
[8.1] [11.6][11.6] A
Status_Word1_CU Bit 4 OFF2
Bit 5 OFF3 [11.6] [11.6]
[5.4] [6.4]
Bit 6 Switch on inhibit
Status word 1 CU Bit 7 Alarm
Word 1: Status w ord 1 Bit 8 Setp.act.value deviation Anti-stall protection
Bit 9 PZD-control request BLOC_CU [15.1]
d154 Bit 10 Comparison freq. reached Comparison frequency reached
Bit 11 Fault undervoltage COMP_F_CU [15.1]
W ord 2: Select value Word2_CU
[16.1] [17.1] Bit 12 Main contactor energized
Bit 13 Ramp function active
B d156
Bit 14 CW phase sequence
B
W ord 3: Select value Word3_CU Bit 15 KIP active
[16.1] [17.1]
d155 Setpoint enable
Bit o ( Restart on the fly ) R_SP_CU [8.5]
Word 4: Status word 2
W ord 5: Control w ord 1 Bit 0 (EIN / AUS1) >

=1 N_ADD_R [14.2]
Word5_CU =1 Enable suppl.
H257
[16.1] [17.1] speed setpoint angular controller Send data C
C W ord 6: Select value Word6_CU T300 to CU
[16.1] [17.1]
W ord 7: Select value Word7_CU

[16.1] [17.1] d260
ON_CU [8.4] ON / OFF1 Bit 0 T300 Control word
OFF2 Bit 1 Word 1: Control word 1
OFF2_CU [8.4]
W ord 8: Select value Word8_CU OFF3_CU [8.8] OFF3 Bit 2 Control_Word T300
[16.1] [17.1] F_BIT1_CB [5.5] free control bit 1 CB Bit 3 [5.4] [6.4]
D F_BIT2_CB [5.5] free control bit 2 CB

free control bit 3 CB
Bit 4
Bit 5 Speed_Setpoint_CU
Speed setpoint Word 2: Speed setpoint D
Word 9: Select setpoint Setpoint1_CU F_BIT3_CB [5.5] [14.3]
SP_R_CU [8.8] Setpoint enable Bit 6
[7.4] [7.4] [7.4] Fault acknowledge Bit 7 0%
[7.5] [14.6] ACK_CU [9.8] Word 3: not used
JOG1_CU [10.3] Inching 1 Bit 8
W ord 10: Select setpoint Setpoint2_CU JOG2_CU [10.3] Inching 2 Bit 9
[7.4] [7.4] [7.4] 1 Bit 10
0 Bit 0 Word 4: Control word 2
[7.5] [14.6] 0 Bit 11
0 Bit 1
0 Bit 12
0 Bit 2 Supplementary speed
0 Bit 13
0 Bit 3 setpoint Angular control
Word 5: Supplementary
0 Bit 14
0 Bit 4 N_ADD_CU [14.3] E
E FEXT_CU [9.4] External fault Bit 15
0 Bit 5 speed setpoint 2
0 Bit 6 d153
0 Bit 7 KP-Adaption_CU Word 6: KP-Adaption
0 Bit 8 [14.5]
NREG_R_CU [10.7] Enable speed control Bit 9
0 Bit 10
0 Bit 11 Word 7: not used
0 Bit 12
Communication fault T300-basic unit 0 Bit 13 d084
Word 8: Inertia
COMF_CU [15.1] 0 Bit 14 Inertia_Comp_CU F
F (F121, A102) 0 Bit 15 [14.7] Inertia compensation
compensation
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Data transfer with the CU (basic drive converter) SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 ON / OFF1 ON command ON_CB [8.1]
Bit 1 OFF2
Receive data Bit 2 OFF3 OFF2_1_CB [8.1]
Bit 3 free control bit 1 CB OFF3_1_CB [8.5]
A T300 from CB / SCB Bit 4 free control bit 2 CB F_BIT1_CB [4.3]
A
Bit 5 free control bit 3 CB F_BIT2_CB [4.3] ON command
Bit 6 Setpoint enable F_BIT3_CB [4.3] with inhibit
Bit 7 Fault acknowledge R_SP_1_CB [8.5] ON_INT_CB [8.1]
d235
Control word 1 CB Bit 8 Inching 1 ACK_CB [9.5]
Word 1: Control w ord 1 JOG1_CB [10.1]
Bit 9 Inching 2
Bit 10 Enable angular synchronization JOG2_CB [10.1]
Speed setpoint Bit 11 not used SYN_R_CB [11.1]
W ord 2: Speed setpoint Speed_Setpoint_CB
Bit 12 not used
[7.2]
Bit 13 Enable angular controller
B d236
Bit 0 ( Restart on fly ) Bit 14 not used ANG_R_CB [11.1] B
W ord 3: Status word 2 Bit 15 not used Setpoint
enable
d237 R_SP_2_CB
Word 4: Status word 1 Bit 0 not used [8.5]
Bit 1 Ready to start
Bit 2 Run > Ready READY_CB
Versatzsollwert =1
Word 5: Setpoint 1 Offset_Ref_CB Bit 3 external fault [8.1]
Bit 4 OFF2 FEXT_CB [9.1] [9.1] [9.1]
[7.2]
Bit 5 OFF3 OFF2_2_CB [8.1]
C
C W ord 6: Setpoint 2
Übersetzungsverhältnis
Ratio_CB
Bit 6 Switch on inhibit OFF3_2_CB [8.5]
Bit 7 not used
[7.2]
Beschleunigungs Bit 8 not used
ausgleich Bit 9 not used
W ord 7: Ssetpoint 3 Inertia_Comp_CB Bit 10 not used
[14.2] Bit 11 not used
Bit 12 not used
Bit 13 not used Send data
Bit 14 not used
D H227 Receive telegram length (0...7)

Bit 15 not used T300 to CB / SCB D
=4 T300 Control word
d228 Receive-Status 0: no reception Control_Word_ T300
d260
1: reception o.k. [4.6] Word 1:Status word 1
T 0 Communication fault CB / SCB Status word 1 CU
COMF_CB Status_Word1_CU =0
(F122, A103) d178
[15.1] [4.3] Word 2: Actual value 1
H210 Delay time, initialization H218 H217 Select_Value 1
>
=1
=20000ms [16.6]
=2H058C d261 d179 E
E H211 Monitoring time Select_Value 2 Word 3: Actual value 2
=80ms [16.6]
T300 Fault/
d214
-Alarm word Word 4: Actual value 3
d229 Receive error T300_Fault/Alarm Select_Value 3
0: error-free initialization and reception [15.8] [17.6]
H219
<>0: error code
=2HFA73 Select_Value 4 W ord 5: Actual value 4
H226 Transmit telegram length (0...7) [17.6]
=4
d014 F
F Sact_Slave Word 6: Actual value 5
[12.4] Speed actual
value Slave
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Data transfer with CB / SCB (communication board) SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 ON / OFF1 ON command
Bit 1 OFF2 ON_PtP [8.1]
Receive data Bit 2 OFF3 OFF2_1_PtP [8.1]
Bit 3 not used OFF3_1_PtP [8.5]
A T300 from Peer-to-Peer Bit 4 not used A
Bit 5 not used ON command
Bit 6 Setpoint enable with inhibit
Bit 7 Fault acknowledge R_SP_1_PtP [8.5] ON_INT_PtP
d230 Control word 1 PtP
Word 1:Control w ord 1 Bit 8 Inching 1 ACK_PtP [9.5] [8.1]
Bit 9 Inching 2 JOG1_PtP [10.1]
Bit 10 Enable angular synchronization JOG2_PtP [10.1]
Speed
11 Rx+ setpoint Speed_Setpoint_PtP Bit 11 not used SYN_R_PtP [11.1]
W ord 2:Speed setpoint Bit 12 not used
[7.2]
Rx- Bit 13 Enable angular controller
B d231
Bit 0 ( Restart on fly ) Bit 14 not used ANG_R_PtP [11.1] B
12 Word 3:Status word 2 Bit 15 not used
Setpoint enable
d232 R_SP_2_PtP
Satatu word 1 PtP [8.5]
Word 4:Status word 1 Bit 0 not used
Bit 1 Ready to start
Bit 2 Run > Ready
=1 READY_PtP
Word 5:(not used) Bit 3 external fault
[8.1]
Bit 4 OFF2 FEXT_PtP [9.1] [9.1] [9.1]
Bit 5 OFF3 OFF2_2_PtP [8.1]
C
C Bit 6 Switch on inhibit OFF3_2_PtP [8.5]
Bit 7 not used
Bit 8 not used
H223 Receive telegramm length (0...5) Bit 9 not used
Bit 10 not used
=5
Bit 11 not used
d224 receive status 0: no reception Bit 12 not used
1: reception o.k. Bit 13 not used Send data
Bit 14 not used
T 0 Communication fault Peer-to-Peer
not used
D (F120, A101)
COMF_PtP
[15.1]
Bit 15 T300 to Peer-to-Peer D
H208 Delay time, initialization T300 Control word
=10000ms Control_Word_T300
[4.6] d260
H209 Monitoring timel Word 1:Status word 1
=80ms Status word 1 CU =0
Status_Word1_CU d178
d225 receive error [4.3] H216 Select_Value 1 Word 2: Actual value 1
H218 >
0: error free initialization and reception =1 [16.6] 13
<>0: error code =2H058C d261 d179
Tx+ E
E Select_Value 2 Word 3: Actual value 2
H222 transmit telegramm length (0...5) [16.6]
T300 Fault/
d214 Tx- 14
=5 -Alarm word Word 4: Actual value 3
T300 Fault/Alarm Select_Value 3
H220 Baudrate [15.8] [17.6]
H219
=8 4: 2400 Bit/s 9: 57600
5: 4800 10: 76800 =2HFA73 Select_Value 4 W ord 5: Actual value 4
6: 9600 11: - [17.6]
7: 19200 12: 115200
F
F 8: 38400
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Data transfer with Peer-to-Peer SIEMENS AG 02.99 Blatt 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ratio from CB
Ratio_CB
[5.2] Ratio
A H040 =4
A
Ter. 611-615 [18.1] Thumbwheel switch Ter. 631-634
[18.1] 0
=0 2
Ratio
H031 NF
[12.1] [13.2]
=1 H041 =1.0 3 +
H032 BCD
1
EN
H042 =2.0 4 d044
Ter. 617 [18.1]
=2 H043
=1.0 5 (=1) =0.0
=0 H048 =4 H047
H030 Setpoint1_CU [4.2] 6 USS
B Ter. 606,607 [18.1] Setpoint2_CU [4.2] 7 USS

B
=1 0
EN 1
11
=16ms 2
H033 TC 10
Ter. 608 [18.1] =100%
3
01
HBE H049 4
Ter. 611-618 [18.1]
5
Ter. 507/508 [18.6]
Byte serial Setpoint1_CU [4.2] 6 USS
7 USS
Setpoint2_CU [4.2]
C Resolution C
Speed setpoint from CB Speed setpoint (=2000)
Speed_Setpoint_CB H070 Speed_Setpoint
[5.2] =3 H072
H071 =100% SLAVE [14.1]
=10ms
0
Ter. 501 / 502 [18.6] 1
d136
2
d074
Speed actual value Master 3
Speed setpoint from PtP Sact_MASTER [12.4]
D Speed_Setpoint_PtP
H073 =0%
4
5 Nset_Slave D
[6.2] 6 USS [15.4] [15.4]
Setpoint1_CU [4.2]
Setpoint2_CU [4.2] 7 USS
H050 =5 Offset reference value

Offset reference from CB
Offset_Ref_CB d056
[5.2] 3
H051 Offset_Ref [13.1]
=100%
E 2
E
Ter. 503 / 504 [18.6]
0 Offset reference value
1
=0% H062 =0
H066 5
Setpoint1_CU [4.2] =0 DIR_OFF_REF [12.5]
4 USS
H063
Offset reference value 6
Direction of rotation
=0 dependent offset
H064
H060 =0 reference value
=0
H065
=0
F H061
n_act SLAVE <0 n_act SLAVE >0
F
Ter. X618 [18.1] n_act MASTER n_act MASTER
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Setpoint selection SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Source ON command Source setpoint enable H245 =7
H240 =3
0
[18.1] Ter. 602 [18.1] Ter. 616
0
A R_SP_1_PtP [6.5]
1
A
T 0 1
=0ms R_SP_1_CB [5.5] 2
H021 0 T 2
=1000ms R_SP_2_PtP [6.8] 3
H022 3
RUN_CU [4.6] R_SP_2_CB [5.8] 4
ON_PtP [6.8]
4 SP_R_CU
5
R_SP_CU [4.6] [4.3] [11.1]
5
ON_CB [5.8] 6 Setpoint
6 enable to
ON_INT_PtP [6.8]
B 7 ON_CU
H246 =7
1
7 basic drive
converter
B
ON_INT_CB [5.8] [4.3] [11.4] [11.6] [11.6] [15.1]
8 0
READY_PtP [6.8] ON command to basic drive
9 converter 1
READY_CB [5.8] Ter. 637
2
10
0 [18.4]
3
11
0
12 4
0
5 C
C 0
13
6
14
0
1 7
15
0
H241 =5 H243
Source OFF2 command Source OFF3 command =0
[18.1] Ter. 608 0 [18.1] Ter. 604 0
D D
1 1
OFF2_1_PtP [6.5] OFF3_1_PtP [6.5]
OFF2_1_CB [5.5] 2 OFF3_1_CB [5.5] 2
OFF2_2_PtP [6.5] 3 OFF3_2_PtP [6.5] 3
OFF2_2_CB [5.5]
4 OFF3_2_CB [5.5] 4
OFF3_CU
H242 =5 1 5 H244 =5 1 5
[4.3]
6 6 OFF3
1 1
E
0 0 command E
1 7 1 7 to basic
1 1 drive
2 2 converter
OFF2_CU
3 [4.3] 3
4 OFF2 command to 4
basic drive converter
5 5
1 1
F
1 6
1 6
F
1 7 1 7
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Source selection for control word bits (1) SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Source external fault Source fault acknowledge
H254 =7 H247 =0
A A
[18.1] Ter. 612 0 [18.1] Ter. 611 0
1 1
FEXT_PtP [6.6] ACK_PtP [6.6]
FEXT_CB [5.6] 2 ACK_CB [5.6] 2
3 3
0 0
4 4
0 0
5 5
0 0
B 6 6
B
0 0
0 7 0 7
H255 =7 H248 =7
[18.1] Ter. 613 0 0

C
C FEXT_PtP [6.6]
1 1
2 2
FEXT_CB [5.6]
>1 ACK_CU
=
3 3
0 0
4 >1 FEXT_CU 4
[4.3]
0
5
= [4.3] [15.1]
External fault to basic
0
5
Fault acknowledge
to basic drive
0 0 converter
drive converter
6 6
0 0
D D
0 7 0 7
H256 =7
[18.1] Ter. 614 0
E 1 E
FEXT_PtP [6.6]
FEXT_CB [5.6] 2
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
F 0 7 F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Source Inching 1 and Inching 2 Source speed controller enable
A H249 =0 A
H253 =7
[18.1] Ter. 606 0
[18.1] Ter. 603 0
1 0 1
JOG1_PtP [6.6]
2 0 2
JOG1_CB [5.6]
0 3 3
JOG1_CU [4.3] [14.3] 0 NREG_R_CU
4
0 Inching 1 to basic drive converter 4 [4.4] [11.1] [11.6] [11.6]
B 5
0
Speed controller enable B
0 0 5
to basic drive converter
6
0 0 6
0 7 7
1
H250 =0
C
C [18.1] Ter. 607
0
1
JOG2_PtP [6.6]
2
JOG2_CB [5.6]
0 3
JOG2_CU [4.3] [14.3]
4
0 Inching 2 to basic drive converter
5
0
D 6
D
0
0 7
E E
F F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Source angular controller enable Source Reset / enable offset sensing / position actual value
A H252 =0 H090 A
=6
[18.1] Ter. 601 0 0
1 Speed controller enable 1

ANG_R_CB [5.5] NREG_R_CU [10.4]
2 1 2
ANG_R_PtP [6.5]
0 3 ON_CU [8.4] ON command to basic unit 3
RES_OFFSENS
0
4 4 [12.1]
B 5
ANG_R
[13.5] [18.1] Ter. 608 5 Reset/ enable offset sensing / B
0 position actual value
Angular controller
0 6
enable Run CU 6
RUN_CU
1 7 (pos. edge) [4.5] 7
NREG_R_CU [10.7] Speed controller enable Run CU

RUN_CU [4.5]
Setpoint enable
SP_R_CU [8.8] C
C
ON_CU [8.4]
ON command
Source angular synchronization Source reset position difference
H251 =0 H052 =6
D [18.1] Ter. 605 0
D
0
1 Speed controller enable 1

SYN_R_CB [5.5] NREG_R_CU
SYN_R_PtP [5.5] 2 [10.7] 1 2
3
SYN_R ON command to basic unit 3
0 [12.7] ON_CU [8.4] RES_POSDIFF
0
4 Angular synchronization 4 [12.3]
enable Reset position
5 5
0 [18.1] Ter. 603 difference
E H092 =0 E
0 6 Run CU 6
Level = continuous RUN_CU
1 7 Edge = only once (pos. edge) [4.5] 7
Run CU
RUN_CU [4.5]
F F
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Source selection control bits for angular control SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Reset position/offset
RES_OFFSENS LOW
[11.8] H100
=4096 2
d108
HIGH
A Reset
=100
H101
=0
4
A
Speed / position sensing H104 =16 H105
H102 LOW
SACT:NAV015
d016 =4096 2 d109
4 X2 X1>X2 HIGH
SP1 H103 4
X1 =0
Synchronizing CU2: Ter.38; CUVC:Ter.26 2
Signal SLAVE Reset PR1 PR2
Ter. 537 / 539 [18.6] Offset sensing Offset
DC
Rough pulse Pos_Act_Slave [16.1] [17.1] determined
DISC : DCA
SLAVE SS1 Position actual value Slave SS1 FC
H018 d096
B =2H0060
RESET
Error code
B
CU2: Ter.36; Ter.37
Pulse encoder CUVC: Ter.24; Ter.25 YP1 Position actual value SLAVE XP1
signals SLAVE Statussig.
"Synchr. reached"
Y1 Speed actual value Slave
Sact_Slave SS2 H203 =2
d014 [5.6] [15.1] [15.4] [16.1] [17.1]
T. 635
XP2 DV [18.4]
H106 =16 H107 =100 d094
SP2
C Synchronizing Ter. 545 / 546 [18.6] & d017 Offset actual value C
Signal MASTER 4 X2 X1>X2 NM
Ter. 547 / 548 [18.6] DVD
Rough pulse X1 d095
2
MASTER DN
Offset - position
H019 Pos_Act_Master [16.1] [17.1] difference as
SS2 Position actual value Master XDP 4 * slave pulse number
=2H0000 0
CVP
Pulse encoder Ter. 541 / 542 [18.6] RESET
Ter. 543 / 544 YP2 Position actual value MASTER
signals MASTER
D Speed actual value Master
EN ENM RTM CPN correction value
d045 Y2 Sact_Master D
NM d015 [7.4] [15.4] [16.1] [17.1]
=1000 Pulse H092 =0 H093 =1
H275 ratio DN
levell/ H091 =0 Correction pulse number
edge
d046 Offset sensing
YDP
0=continuous 1=Retrigger
=1000 DOF Position differenceactual value
E H276
Enable angular synchronizing E
=0
SET SYN_FR
H277
Pos_Diff_Act [13.1] DIR_OFF_REF [11.4]
SVD SD
Position difference actual value [7.8]
to the angular controler Direction of rotation
depending offset
Off_Ref_Rg [13.5] Reset position difference reference value
Offset ref. after the RES_POSDIFF [11.8]
ramp function gen.
F
Ratio [7.8]
H010
=1024
H011
=1024
H012
=1500
H013
=1500
F
Encoder pulse Encoder pulse Rated speed Rated speed
number Slave number Master Slave Master
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Offset sensing and synchronization SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Ter. 636 [18.4]

A
KP-Adaption
without Adaption
H113
=2.0
>1 ANG_LIM
Ratio [7.8] = [15.1]
H114 =2.0 Angular controller
d123 at his limits
=0.0
B H116 B
=0.0
H115
Off_Ref_Rg [12.2]
Offset reference value
H111 =500 ms
after the ramp-function
generator H112 =10%
QU QL
H053 =9.36 ms SYNCON
C H054 =+16384
C
Ramp function
Y TU KP TN
LU generator LU
Offset_Ref [7.8] 16384 d120
Offset reference value W1 Y
ANG_Y
- [14.1] [16.1] [17.1]
-1 Supplementary speed
d056 TU t LL
LL setpoint from angular
Enable Hold controller
H055 =-16384 YI
I component
D Pos_Diff_Act [12.5] 0 = PI- controller I- component
d122 D
Position difference actual value T X1 1 = P- controllerr ANG_INT
32 Bit
[16.1] [17.1]
YE EN HI
16 Bit I- component angular
H270
controller
=16 H110
d124 =1
H117 =4 ms
Enable angular controller
ANG_R
E d121
[11.4]
E
Pos_Diff_Act_Sm [16.1] [17.1]
Lagedifferenzistwert
geglättet
Angular controller regulation error ANG_DIFF
[15.1] [16.1] [17.1]
F F
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Angular controller SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Inertia_Comp_CB [5.3]
A Inertia compensation from CB
H081 =100%
A
Inertia compensation
[18.6] Ter. 505 / 506

H080 =2
H082 =100ms
H083 =200%
0
1
Inertia compensation dn/dt 2
B 0 3-5
d084
B
H142 =10
Kp-Adaption
=10
H141
d153
C (without Adaption)
C
H144 =0%
JOG1_CU [10.3]
=0%
H143 KP-Adaption_CU Inertia_Comp_CU [4.7] [16.1] [17.1]
JOG2_CU [10.3] [4.7] Inertia compensation
Inching
P506
0 Basic drive converter (CU) Source P226 (CU2)
P232 (CUVC) =3008
=0.5% 1/0 =3006 Source
H130 P229 (CU2)
Kp P225 (CU2)
=-0.5% 0/1 P240 (CUVC)
D H131 P462 P464 P452 P235 (CUVC) P492 D
KP TN
Synchronisization P443
to OFF3 =3002 Current-/
Speed_Setpoint SLAVE Speed setpoint torque
0 T
[7.8] - control
Speed_Setpoint_CU
Speed setpoint Slave d136 [4.6] [16.1] [17.1]
incl. ratio H075 =0 t
Ramp function Speed controller
E 0 generator P453 P498 E
N_ADD_CU [4.6] P221 (CU2)
Frequency- Torque limits
limits P223 (CUVC)
Supplementary speed
ANG_Y [13.8] P438
setpoint from the =3005
Supplementary speed Pulse number
angular controller P208 (CU2)
setpoint from the CU-pulse encoder P209 (CU2)
d120 P151 (CUVC) P130 (CUVC)
angular controller
d014 Speed actual v alue S lave

N_ADD_R
F [4.7]
T P u lse en co der
F
Enable supplementary speed
setpoint angular controller
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Speed controller SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
d014
Sact_Slave [12.4] X Overspeed positive
A Speed actual value QU
A
Slave =120%
H190 LU
Overspeed negative d214
=-120% QL
H191 LL 0
CU Fault messages
1 H212 F116-F131
FEXT_CU [9.4] External fault
2 =2H00A7
ANG_LIM [13.8] Angular controller at his limits
3
COMF_PtP [6.3] Communication error Peer-to-Peer
B 4 B
COMF_CU [4.3] Communication error T300-Basic unit
5
COMF_CB [5.2] Communication error CB
6
Anti-stall protection
BLOC_CU [4.5] 7
CU Alarms
8 H213 A097-A112
ON_CU [8.3]
9 =2HB000
10 C
C X
QU 11
H180 =110%
LU 12 T300_Fault/Alarm [5.4] [6.4]
QL T300 Fault-/Alram word
=-110%
H181 LL 13
14
X
=0%
D H182 M QM
15 D
=1%
H183 L
0% HY Fault-/Alarm Significance
COMP_F_CU Comparison frequency reached d014
Sact_Slave [12.4] F116, A097 - overspeed positive
[4.5] X QU F117, A098 - overspeed negative
d121 F118, A099 - external fault
Nset_Slave M
ANG_DIFF X [7.8] F119, A100 - angular controller at his limits
[13.8] 10% L QL F120, A101 - communication error T300-Peer
Error difference 0% M F121, A102 - communication error T300-CU E
E angular controller =4%
QM 0% HY F122, A103 - communication error T300-CB/SCB
H200 L F123, A104 - anti-stall protection
0% HY >
=1 F124, A105 - n-act > H180
d015 F125, A106 - n-act within H182 +/- H183
Sact_Master [12.4] F126, A107 - n-act < H181
X QU F127, A108 - comparison frequency not reached
X
QU Nset_Slave M F128, A109 - control error, angular controller >H200
H201
=10 Pulse*4
LU >
=1
[7.8]
10% L QL
F129, A110 - n-act sensing erroneous
F130, A111 - error difference, angular controller<H200
QL F131, A112 - angular difference outside H201<DY<H202 F
F H202
=-10 Pulse*4
LL Kl. 638 [18.4] 0% HY
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Fault-/ Alarm messages SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H176 =7
100% Test 0
Sact_Slave [12.4] Speed actual value slave 1

A A
Word6_CU [4.2] 2
Speed_Setpoint_CU [14.3] Speed setpoint 3
Sact_Master [12.4] Speed actual value Master 4
Word7_CU [4.2] 5 H161 =25.0

d178
ANG_Y [13.8] Angular controller output 6
7
ANG_DIFF [13.8] Angular controller error
B
B
ANG_INT [13.8] Angular controller Integral component 8
9
-
* Ter. 509 / 510
Analog output 1
[18.8]
Pos_Diff_Act_Sm [13.4] Position difference act. value smoothed

H160 =0
Pos_Act_Slave [12.5] Position actual value Slave 10
Pos_Act_Master [12.5] Position actual value Master 11

Select_Value 1 [5.6] [6.6]
Inertia_Comp_CU [14.8] Inertia compensation 12 Select value 1
( to CBP/CB1, SCB1/2-Boards: Word 2 C
C Word2_CU [4.2] 13
T300-Peer: Word 2 )
Word3_CU [4.2] 14
=1
15 H177
Word5_CU [4.2]
0
0% (Test)
1
D
Word8_CU [4.2]
D
3
5 H163 =1.0
d179
6
E
8
9
-
* Ter. 519 / 520 [18.8]
Analog output 2 E
H162 =0
10
11
12 Select value 2
( to CBP/CB1, SCB1/2-Boards: Word 3
13
T300-Peer: Word 3 )
F 14
F
15
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Analog outputs 1,2 and select values 1,2 SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H170 =6
50% Test 0
Sact_Slave [12.4] Speed actual value slave 1

A A
Word6_CU [4.2] 2
Speed_Setpoint_CU [14.3] Speed setpoint 3
Sact_Master [12.4] Speed actual value Master 4
Word7_CU [4.2] 5 H173 =1.0
ANG_Y [13.8] Angular controller output 6
7
ANG_DIFF [13.8] Angular controller error
B
B
ANG_INT [13.8] Angular controller Integral component 8
9
-
* Ter. 521 / 522
Analog output 3
[18.8]
Pos_Diff_Act_Sm [13.4] Position difference act. value smoothed

H172 =0%
Pos_Act_Slave [12.5] Position actual value Slave 10
Pos_Act_Master [12.5] Position actual value Master 11

Inertia_Comp_CU [14.8] Inertia compensation 12 Select value 3
( to CBP/CB1, SCB1/2-Boards: Word 4 C
C Word2_CU [4.2] 13
T300-Peer: Word 4 )
Word3_CU [4.2] 14
=9
15 H171
Word5_CU [4.2]
0
0% (Test)
1
D
Word8_CU [4.2]
D
3
5 H175 =1.0
E
8
9
-
* Ter. 523 / 524 [18.8]
Analog output 4 E
H174 =0%
10
11
12 Select value 4
( to CBP/CB1, SCB1/2-Boards: Word 5
13
T300-Peer: Word 5 )
F 14
F
15
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Analog outputs 3,4 and select values 3,4 SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Binary inputs Binary outputs Analog inputs Analog outputs
Ter.601 Enable angular control [11.1] Thumbwheel switch Ter.631 Ter. 501 + Speed Select_Value 1 [16.7]
+ Ter. 509
A output 10**0 or 16**0 [7.3] Ter. 502 - setpoint [7.1] Select value 1
- Ter. 510
+
A
Ter. 503 - Offset reference + Ter. 519
Ter.602 ON command [8.1] Thumbwheel switch Ter.632 value [7.1] Select_Value 2 [16.8] - Ter. 520
Ter. 504 Select value 2
output 10**1 or 16**1 [7.3]
+ + Ter. 521
Ter. 505 - Inertia Select_Value 3 [17.7]
Ter.603 Enable speed control [10.4] Thumbwheel switch Ter.633 Ter. 506 compensation [14.2] - Ter. 522
Select value 3
Reset position differenz [11.6] output 10**2 or 16**2 [7.3] +
Ter. 507 - Ratio [7.6] + Ter. 523
Select_Value 4 [17.8] - Ter. 524
Ter.604 OFF3 [8.5] Thumbwheel switch Ter.634 Ter. 508 Select value 4
B output 10**3 or 16**3 [7.3] B
Ter.605 Enable angular synchronizing [11.1] Synchronism reached t [12.8] Ter.635
Ter.606 Ter.636 Pulse encoder inputs

Inching 1 [10.1] Angular controller at his
Setpoint selection [7.1] limits [13.8] Slave
+ Pulse encoder SLAVE
Ter.607 Inching 2 [10.1] "Setpoint enable" Ter.637 Ter. 531 - Track A The pulse encoder is connected to the CU.
Setpoint selection [7.1] present [8.8] Ter. 532 The pulse encoder signals are transmetted C
C OFF2 [8.4] + to the T300 via the LBA backplane bus.
Ter.608 Ter.638 Ter. 533 - Track B It is not necessary to connect again the pulse
Reset/enable offset sensing/position act. value [11.8] Angular difference outside Ter. 534
High-Byte selection [7.1] limit H201< DY < H202 [15.4] encoder signals on the T300 terminals. (see H018)
+
Fault acknowledge [9.5] Ter. 535 - Synchronizing pulse SLAVE [12.1]
Ter.611 Setpoint Bit0 [7.1] Ter. 536
Thumbwheel switch input 2**0 [7.1]
+
External fault [9.1] Ter. 537 - Rough pulse SLAVE [12.1]
Ter.612 Setpoint Bit1 [7.1] Ter.609 P24 external Ter. 538
D Thumbwheel switch input 2**1 [7.1] + D

Ter. 539 - P15 Power supply
External fault [9.1] Ter. 540 M15
Ter.613 Setpoint Bit2 [7.1] Ter.610 M24 external
Thumbwheel switch input 2**2 [7.1]
External fault [9.1]
Ter.614 Setpoint Bit3 [7.1] Ter.619 Pulse encoder inputs
P24 external
Thumbwheel switch input 2**3 [7.1] Master
+
Ter.615 Setpoint Bit4 [7.1] Ter.630 M24 external Ter. 541 - Track A
E
Data transfer [7.1] Ter. 542 Impulsgebersignale MASTER [12.1] E
+
Ter.616 Ter.639 Ter. 543 - Track B
Release setpoint [8.5] P24 external Ter. 544
Setpoint Bit5 [7.1]
+
Ter. 545 - Synchronizing pulse MASTER [12.1]
Ter.617 Changeover ratio [7.1] Ter.640 M24 external Ter. 546
Setpoint Bit6 [7.1]
+
Ter. 547 - Rough pulse MASTER [12.1]
Ter.618 Changeover offset reference value [7.5] Ter. 548
F Setpoint Bit7 [7.1] - F

Ter. 549 M15
Angular Synchronous Control MS340 Input and output signals SIEMENS AG 02.99 Page 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Parameter Nummer Parameter Text Deutsch Parameter Text English Werkseinstellung Neuer Wert
Parameter Number H000 = 0 H000 = 1 Value preset Modified value
H000 Sprachauswahl Language select 0
d001 SW-VersionMS340 SW versionMS340
d002 Stnd Softwaretyp stnd softwaretyp
H003 P-Schreib-Sperre Par change lock 0
d004 Systemfehlerbits Systemerror bits
d006 Systmfehl.1.Wort Systemerror.1.word
H010 Geberpulsz SLAVE Tachopulses SLAV 1024
H011 Geberpulsz MASTE Tachopulses MAST 1024
H012 Nenndrehz SLAVE Nom.Speed SLAVE 1500
H013 Nenndrehz MASTER Nom.Speed MASTER 1500
d014 n-ist SLAVE Act. Speed SLAVE
d015 n-ist MASTER Act. Speed MASTE
d016 Lageistw SLAVE Act. Pos. SLAVE
d017 Lageistw MASTER Act. Pos. MASTER
H018 Impulsgeb.typ Sl Tachotype SLAVE 2H0060
H019 Impulsgeb.typ Ma Tachotype MASTE 2H0000
H021 T: EIN->BetrFrei on Wait-Tme enab 0 ms
H022 T: AUS->BetrSper off Wait-Tme dis 1000 ms
H030 Fktn binaere Ein Fktn binary Inp. 0
H031 Zahlensch Normf. Nomfact BCD-Swit 0
H032 Zahlensch BCD-Co BCD-Coding 1
H033 Uebern.zeit BSR Timeconstant BSR 16 ms
H040 Quelle Uebersver Ratio-Source 4
H041 Ueb bei Kl617=0 Ratio @tm.617=0 1.0
H042 Ueb bei Kl617=1 Ratio @tm.617=1 2.0
H043 Uebsetz Festwert Ratio FixValue 1.0
d044 akt Uebsetz-Verh Ratio actual Val
d045 Pulszahluebs NM Ratio Pulses NM
Siemens AG Angular synchronous control 1

Manual
d046 Pulszahluebs DN Ratio Pulses DN
H047 Uebverh ZusatzSW Ratio addit val 0.0
H048 Q.ProportfaktUeb S.proprtfac rat 4
H049 Festwert UebProp Fixval rat prop 100%
H050 Quelle Versatzso Displacem Source 5
H051 Anp. Versatz ana Displ. Adjus ana 100%
H052 Q.LageDiff-Reset Src PosiDiff Res 6
H053 Hochlaufzt Versa Displ. RG-Time 9.36 ms
H054 Versatzsoll max Displ. max Val +16384
H055 Versatzsoll min Displ. min Val -16384
d056 akt Versatzsollw Displ. act Val
H060 Vers-SW Kl618=0 DisplVal t618=0 0
H061 Vers-SW Kl618=1 DisplVal t618=1 0
H062 Versatzs +/+ DisplVal +/+ 0
H063 Versatzs +/- DisplVal +/- 0
H064 Versatzs -/+ DisplVal -/+ 0
H065 Versatzs -/- DisplVal -/- 0
H066 Versatzsw Festw DisplVal Fixedv 0
H070 Quelle Leitssoll Speedref Source 3
H071 Anp. n-soll ana. Adj. s-ref ana. 100%
H072 Glaettung Leits. s-ref Smoothtime 9.99 ms
H073 Festwert Leitsw. Fixval speedref 0%
d074 akt Leit-SW glat act s-ref filtrd
H075 Leit-SW Verzoegg s-ref with delay 0
H080 Quelle Beschlaus Source accelarat 2
H081 Anp. Beschl. ana accel. Adj. ana 100%
H082 Beschlaus TD dn accel. Tconst 100 ms
H083 Beschlaus Anp dn accel. Adj. Diff 199.99%
d084 Beschlaus Istw. accel. act. val.
H090 Q.Lag/Vers-Freig Src pos/dspl-res 6
H091 Versatz Retrigg. Dipl. retrigger 0
2 Siemens AG Angular synchronous control

Manual
H092 Synchr. Flanke Synchr. Edge 0
H093 KorrPulsz Synchr Synchr. Corrpuls 1
d094 Versatzistwert Displ. Act. Val.
d095 Vers. - Lagediff Displ.-Pos.dif.
d096 Versatzerf Fehle Displ.calc. Errc
H100 Synchr.PZ M-low Synchr.PnoM-low 4096
H101 Synchr.PZ M-high Synchr.PnoM-high 0
H102 Synchr.PZ S-low Synchr.PnoS-low 4096
H103 Synchr.PZ S-high Synchr.PnoS-high 0
H104 Anp. L-ist SLAVE Adj. Pos. Slave 16
H105 Synchrfrei SLAVE Synchr EN Slave 100
H106 Anp. L-ist MASTE Adj. Pos. Master 16
H107 Synchrfrei MASTE Synchr EN Master 100
d108 SyncrPulszahl-Ma SyncrPulsnumb-Ma
d109 SyncrPulszahl-Sl SyncrPulsnumb-Sl
H110 Wireg als P-Reg SynCtr as P-Con 1
H111 Wireg TN SynCtr TN 500 ms
H112 Wireg Begrenzung SynCtr Limit 10%
H113 Wireg KP SynCtr KP 2.0
H114 Wireg KP_0 SynCtr KP_0 2.0
H115 Wireg ue_KP SynCtr ue_KP 0.0
H116 Wireg ue_KP_0 SynCtr ue_KP_0 0.0
H117 Lagediff. Glaett Pos.dif Smt-time 4.0 ms
d120 Wireg Ausgang SynCtr Output
d121 Wireg Regeldiff SynCtr Ctr-Dev
d122 Wireg I-Anteil SynCtr I-Part
d123 Wireg KP-ist SynCtr KP-act
d124 Lagediffer.glatt Pos.dif. smt
H130 Tippsollwert 1 Stepvalue 1 0.5%
H131 Tippsollwert 2 Stepvalue 2 -0.5%
d136 n-soll(+Uebstzg) spd-ref (+ratio)

Manual
H141 Nreg KP SCtr KP 10.0
H142 Nreg KP_0 SCtr KP_0 10.0
H143 Nreg n_KP SCtr n_KP 0.0%
H144 Nreg n_KP_0 SCtr n_KP_0 0.0%
d153 Nreg KP ist SCtr KP act
d154 Grndgeraet Wort2 device rx-word2
H160 Offset Anaausg.1 Offset AnaOutp 1 0%
H161 KP Anaausg. 1 KP AnaOutp 1 25.0
H170 Q.Wahlw3 Ana3/SS src val3 Ana3/SI 6
H175 KP Anaausg.4 KP AnaOutp 4 1.0
d178 Rohwert Anaausg1 actval AnaOutp 1
d179 Rohwert Anaausg2 actval AnaOutp 2
H180 Grenzw n-ist pos LimInd s-act pos 110%
H181 Grenzw n-ist neg LimInd s-act neg -110%
H182 Grenzw n-ist Mit LimInd s-act mid 0%
H183 Grenzw n-ist Tol LimInd s-act trs 1%
H190 Ueberdrehz. pos Overspeed pos 120%
H191 Ueberdrehz. neg Overspeed neg -120%
H200 Grenzw Regeldiff LimInd SCtrDevia 4%
H201 Grenzw Wink pos LimInd Ang. pos 10
H202 Grenzw Wink neg LimInd Ang. neg -10

Manual
H203 Grenzw f Syn err LimInd sync o.k 2
H208 PeerUebwch-Start Peer monit-start 10000 ms
H209 PeerUeberwachung Peertlg-time-off 80 ms
H210 CB1/SCB Uebw-Ini CB1/SCB moni-ini 20000 ms
H211 CB1/SCB Uebw-Zyk CB1/SCB moni-cyl 80 ms
H212 Stoermaske d214 ERROR-Mask @d214 2H00A7
H213 Warnmaske d214 Warn-Mask @ d214 2HB000
d214 T300-Statuswort T300 statusword
H216 Qu W1 Tx TB-Peer src w1Tx TB-Peer 1
H217 Qu W1 Tx ComBord src w1Tx ComBord 1
H218 Ausblendm GGZUW1 mask dev-statwrd 2H058C
H219 Ausblendm St/WnW mask TB-statwrd 2HFA73
H220 Baudrate TB-Peer Baudrate TB-Peer 8
H222 TxLgeTlg TB-Peer TxLgeTlg TB-Peer 5
H223 RxLgeTlg TB-Peer RxLgeTlg TB-Peer 5
d224 RxStatus TB-Peer RxStatus TB-Peer
d225 RxFehler TB-Peer RxFehler TB-Peer
H226 TxLgeTlg ComBord TxLgeTlg ComBord 4
H227 RxLgeTlg ComBord RxLgeTlg ComBord 4
d228 RxStatus ComBord RxStatus ComBord
d229 RxFehler ComBord RxFehler ComBord
d230 W1 (STW) TB-Peer W1 (STW) TB-Peer
d231 W3(ZUW2) TB-Peer W3(ZUW2) TB-Peer
d232 W4(ZUW1) TB-Peer W4(ZUW1) TB-Peer
d235 W1 (STW) ComBord W1 (STW) ComBord
d236 W3(ZUW2) ComBord W3(ZUW2) ComBord
d237 W4(ZUW1) ComBord W4(ZUW1) ComBord
H240 Quelle (Betr)Ein source ON 3
H241 Quelle1 Aus2 source1 OFF2 5

Manual
H245 QuelleM SW-Freig sourceM sv-enabl 7
H246 QuelleS SW-Freig sourceS sv-enabl 7
H247 Quelle1 St-Quitg source1 sv-enabl 0
H248 Quelle2 St-Quitg source2 sv-enabl 7
H249 Quelle Tippen 1 source jog 1 0
H250 Quelle Tippen 2 source jog 2 0
H251 Quelle Wi-Syncrn source syncronsm 0
H252 Quelle WiReglFrg source angle-reg 0
H253 Quelle n-ReglFrg source v-reg-ena 7
H254 Quelle1 ext.Strg source1 ext.flt 7
H257 Zus-SW2 Abschalt add-SetP2 disabl 1
d260 T300-Steuerwort T300 controlword
d261 T300-STW+GG-ZUW1 T3-ctl+dev-statw
H270 Wertberversa-SW Scal disp-refval 16
H275 Fein-Pulszahl NM fine ratiopulsNM 1000
H276 Fein-Puslzahl DN fine ratiopulsDN 1000
H277 Auswahl Fein-PZ. selc fine ratiop 0
H970 Werkseinstellung factory setting 0

Manual
Die STRUC G Pläne sind aus der Betriebsanleitung „Winkelgleichlaufregelung MS340“
zu entnehmen.
STRUC G function diagrams - refere to the manual „Angular Synchronous Control MS340“.
05.96 477 407.4084.76
10.98 477 407.4184.76
03.99 477 407.4184.76

0 Warning information and product limitation 2 10.98
2 Interfaces reviewed edition 16 03.99
3 Basic converter setting Page: 7, 8, 10 10 03.99
4 Terminal asignment reviewed edition 14 03.99
5 Function description Page: 5, 7, 8, 15, 17, 20, 36 03.99
21, 23, 28, 29, 31, 32 ,33
6 Parameters reviewed edition 40 03.99
7 Start-up Page: 1, 15 - 18 14 03.99
8 SIMADYN D functions 4 10.98
9 Others 2 10.98
10 Changes Page: 1, 2 2 03.99
11 Appendix: Page: 1 2 03.99
- Block diagrams reviewed edition 18 03.99
- Parameter list new edition 6 03.99
- STUC G diagrams FP-CONF page 2 60 03.99
FP-PARAM page 2

MS360 SECTIONAL DRIVE
for the T300 technology board
in SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES 6SE70/71
Manual
Edition 04.99 Order-No. 6SE7087-6CX84-6AH1
This Instruction Manual is available in the following languages:
Sprache German
Language
Bestell-Nr.
6SE7080-0CX84-6AH1
Order No.
English
Contents
0 Warning information and product limitation ........................................................ 0-1
1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 General information........................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Validity ...........................................................................................................................1-1
1.2.1 Hardware/Software requirement.................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 T300 technology module ................................................................................................1-6
1.3.1 Standard software package on floppy disk.................................................................................. 1-7
1.4 Applications....................................................................................................................1-9
1.5 Functional scope ..........................................................................................................1-11
1.6 Fault messages (F035) ................................................................................................1-12
1.7 Diagnostic LEDs...........................................................................................................1-13
1.8 Sampling times ............................................................................................................1-14
2 T300 technology board .......................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Hardware .......................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Interfaces and input/output terminals .............................................................................2-4
2.2.1 Binary input terminals .................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.2 Binary output terminals ................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.3 Analog input terminals ................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.4 Analog output terminals............................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.5 Pulse encoder terminals .............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.6 Interface to the basic drive converter (CU).................................................................................. 2-9
2.2.7 Peer-to-peer interface (SS2) ..................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.8 Serial service interface (SS1) .................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.9 Interface to the CB communications board ............................................................................... 2-12

3.1 Inputs/outputs (function diagrams, A.)............................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Inputs/outputs from/to CU (function diagrams A1, A2)................................................................ 3-2
3.1.2 Inputs/outputs from/to CB (function diagrams, A3) ..................................................................... 3-3
3.1.3 Inputs/outputs from/to the peer (function diagrams, A3) ............................................................. 3-3
3.1.4 Binary inputs (function diagrams, A4........................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.5 Binary outputs (function diagrams, A4) ....................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.6 Analog inputs (function diagrams, A5)......................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.7 Analog outputs (function diagrams, A5) ...................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.8 Pulse encoder inputs (function diagrams, A6)............................................................................. 3-7
3.1.9 Input from a thumbwheel switch (function diagrams, A7)............................................................ 3-9
3.1.10 Byte-serial input (function diagrams, A7)................................................................................. 3-10
3.1.11 Generating the line speed actual value (function diagrams, A8) ............................................. 3-12
3.1.12 Generation, status word INPUT (function diagrams, A8) ........................................................ 3-12
3.1.13 Gain adaption, speed controller (function diagrams, A8) ........................................................ 3-13
3.1.14 Generating a freely-definable status word (function diagrams, A9) ........................................ 3-14
3.1.15 Limit value monitors (function diagrams, A9) .......................................................................... 3-15
3.1.16 Motorized potentiometer (function diagrams, A10) ................................................................. 3-16
3.1.17 Replacing peer to peer by SIMOLINK ..................................................................................... 3-16
3.2 Open-loop control (function diagrams, B.)....................................................................3-17
3.2.1 Powering-up the drive (function diagrams, B1) ......................................................................... 3-17
3.2.2 Function, starting sequence (function diagrams, B1) ................................................................ 3-17
3.2.3 Enabling local operation (function diagrams, B1) ...................................................................... 3-18
3.2.4 Inching 1 / inching 2 (function diagrams, B1) ............................................................................ 3-19
3.2.5 No regenerative feedback (function diagrams, B1) ................................................................... 3-19
3.2.6 Standard stop/fast stop/electrical off (function diagrams, B2)................................................... 3-19
3.2.7 Braking control (function diagrams, B2) .................................................................................... 3-20
3.2.8 Setpoint/inverter enable (function diagrams, B3) ...................................................................... 3-20
3.2.9 Group control (open-loop) (function diagrams, B2) ................................................................... 3-21
3.2.10 Operating mode selection (function diagrams, B4) ................................................................. 3-21
3.2.11 Generating the fault word (function diagrams, B5 ................................................................... 3-23
3.2.12 Generating the status word (function diagrams, B6) ............................................................... 3-23
3.2.13 Generating the alarm word (function diagrams, B6)................................................................ 3-23
Siemens AG Sectional drive I

Manual
Contents
3.3 Technological control (function diagrams, C.).............................................................. 3-24

3.3.1 Switching the technological control on/off (function diagrams, C1) ........................................... 3-24
3.3.2 Generating the technological setpoint (function diagrams, C1) )............................................... 3-24
3.3.3 Generating the technological actual value (function diagrams, C1) ......................................... 3-24
3.3.4 Technological controller (function diagrams, C2) ...................................................................... 3-24
3.3.5 Generating the status word, technological control (function diagrams, C3) .............................. 3-26
3.4 Generating the line speed setpoint (function diagrams, D.) ......................................... 3-27
3.4.1 Main setpoint selection (function diagrams, D1)........................................................................ 3-27
3.4.2 Central ramp-function generator (function diagrams, D1) ......................................................... 3-27
3.4.3 Speed ratios (function diagrams, D1) ........................................................................................ 3-28
3.4.4 Slack take-up/slack-off (function diagrams, D1)........................................................................ 3-28
3.4.5 Supplementary setpoint selection (function diagrams, D2) ....................................................... 3-28
3.4.6 Local setpoints (function diagrams, B4 and D2)........................................................................ 3-29
3.4.7 Triggerable ramp-function generator (function diagrams, D2) .................................................. 3-29
3.4.8 Droop compensation (function diagrams, D2)........................................................................... 3-29
3.4.9 Setpoint smoothing (function diagrams, D2) ............................................................................. 3-30
3.4.10 Speed setpoint generation (function diagrams, D2) ................................................................ 3-30
3.4.11 Bias (function diagrams, D2) ................................................................................................... 3-30
3.5 Torque setpoint generation (function diagrams, E.) ..................................................... 3-31
3.5.1 Friction characteristic (function diagrams, E1) .......................................................................... 3-31
3.5.2 Inertia compensation (function diagrams, E1) ........................................................................... 3-32
3.5.3 Supplementary torque selection (function diagrams, E1).......................................................... 3-32
3.5.4 Torque generation for slaves (function diagrams, E2) .............................................................. 3-32
3.5.5 Braking characteristic (function diagrams, E2).......................................................................... 3-33
3.5.6 Triggerable torque ramp-function generator (function diagrams, E2) ....................................... 3-34
3.6 Freely available functions (function diagrams, F.)........................................................ 3-35
3.6.1 Fixed setpoints (function diagrams, F1) .................................................................................... 3-35
3.6.2 Monitoring parameters (function diagrams, F1) ........................................................................ 3-35
3.6.3 Freely-available functions in T3 (function diagrams, F2)........................................................... 3-35
3.6.4 Freely-available functions in T4 (function diagrams, F2 - F4) ................................................... 3-36
3.6.5 Status word, freely-available functions (function diagrams, F5) ................................................ 3-36
3.6.6 Free function blocks CUVC, CUMC .......................................................................................... 3-36
3.7 Load distribution .......................................................................................................... 3-37
3.7.1 General information ................................................................................................................... 3-37
3.7.2 Droop and compensation .......................................................................................................... 3-37
3.7.2.1 Droop and compensation with the same electrical torques ................................................. 3-38
3.7.2.2 Droop and compensation with the same output torques...................................................... 3-39
3.7.3 Bias and limiting......................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.7.3.1 Bias and limiting with the same electrical torques................................................................ 3-40
3.7.3.2 Bias and limiting with the same output torques.................................................................... 3-41
3.8 Function diagrams ....................................................................................................... 3-42
4 Parameter list .......................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 General information ....................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 List of display parameters............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.2 List of setting parameters ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Parameter normalization................................................................................................ 4-2
5 Connectors.............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 The connector principle ................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Word quantities............................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.2 Bit quantities ................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.3 Selection table for the masking ................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.4 Sampling times ............................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2 The connector list .......................................................................................................... 5-4
II Siemens AG Sectional drive

Manual
Contents
6 Start-up.................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Installing the boards .......................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Handling boards .......................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Installing and replacing boards.................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Options ........................................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2 Start-up, basic drive converter .......................................................................................6-4
6.2.1 Parameterizing enable................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.1.1 CUVC, CUMC: ....................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.1.2 CU2, CU3:.............................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.2 Factory setting ............................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.2.1 CUVC, CUMC: ....................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.2.2 CU2, CU3:.............................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.3 MLFB input .................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.3.1 CUVC, CUMC: ....................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.3.2 CU2, CU3:.............................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.4 Hardware configuration ............................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.4.1 CUVC,CUMC: ........................................................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.4.2 CU2, CU3:.............................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.4.3 Others .................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.5 Entering the drive data................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.2.6 Automatic parameterization......................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.7 Motor identification at standstill (only CUVC, CU2) ..................................................................... 6-7
6.2.8 No-load measurement, (CUVC,CU2) .......................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.9 Speed controller optimization (only CUVC, CU2) ........................................................................ 6-8
6.2.10 Data transfer, CU-T300 ............................................................................................................. 6-9
6.2.10.1 Parameterization when using the CUVC and CUMC........................................................... 6-9
6.2.10.2 Parameterization when using the CU2 and CU3 ............................................................... 6-13
6.3 Commissioning the technology module ........................................................................6-16
6.3.1 Technological parameters ......................................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.1.1 Setting via the operator control panel and SIMOVIS (normal case by commissioning) ...... 6-16
6.3.1.2 Setting via the symbolic monitor (not for normal applications)............................................. 6-16
6.3.2 Commissioning the open-loop control ....................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.2.1 Powering-up (!) .................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.3.2.2 No standard stop (!) ............................................................................................................. 6-17
6.3.2.3 No fast stop (!) ..................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.3.2.4 No electrical off (!)................................................................................................................ 6-17
6.3.2.5 Inverter enable ..................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.3.2.6 Setpoint enable .................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.3.2.7 No local operation ................................................................................................................ 6-18
6.3.2.8 Inching 1 / inching 2 ............................................................................................................. 6-18
6.3.2.9 Checkback signal, group control.......................................................................................... 6-18
6.3.2.10 Local operating modes....................................................................................................... 6-18
6.3.2.11 External fault ...................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.3.2.12 External alarm.................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.3.3 Commissioning the setpoint conditioning .................................................................................. 6-19
6.3.3.1 Selecting the speed actual value ......................................................................................... 6-19
6.3.3.2 Selecting the line speed setpoint ......................................................................................... 6-19
6.3.3.3 Setting the central ramp-function generator......................................................................... 6-19
6.3.3.4 Ratio..................................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.3.3.5 Slack take-up/slack-off......................................................................................................... 6-19
6.3.3.6 Supplementary setpoint ....................................................................................................... 6-20
6.3.3.7 Local setpoints ..................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.3.3.8 Triggerable ramp-function generator ................................................................................... 6-20
6.3.3.9 Droop ................................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.3.3.10 Diameter/gearbox correction.............................................................................................. 6-20
6.3.3.11 Load distribution................................................................................................................. 6-20
6.3.3.12 Friction ............................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.3.3.13 Inertia compensation.......................................................................................................... 6-21
6.3.3.14 Braking characteristic......................................................................................................... 6-21
Siemens AG Sectional drive III

Manual
Contents
6.3.4 Start-up, technological control ................................................................................................... 6-21

6.3.4.1 Enabling/disabling the technological control ........................................................................ 6-21
6.3.4.2 Technological actual value selection.................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.4.3 Technological setpoint selection .......................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.4.4 Closed-loop control parameters........................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.4.5 Controller limits .................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.4.6 Factory settings.................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.4 Parameterization with Simovis for Windows ................................................................ 6-23
6.4.1 Creating the data base for a technology type. ........................................................................... 6-23
6.4.2 T300 parameterization............................................................................................................... 6-25
6.4.3 Important notes.......................................................................................................................... 6-25
7 SIMADYN D functions............................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 STRUC G graphics ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 Sheet structure ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.2 Block structure............................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 STRUC connectors...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.4 Cross-references ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Symbolic monitor ........................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.2.2 Operator control........................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 SIMADYN D value ranges and normalization................................................................. 7-4
7.3.1 Proportional types ........................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3.2 Time-dependent types ................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.2.1 Time-proportional types ......................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.2.2 Time-reciprocal type............................................................................................................... 7-5
8 Program example.................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 System configuration ..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Parameterization............................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2.1 Signal transfer with the automation system ................................................................................. 8-1
8.2.2 Peer-to-peer coupling to the adjacent drives ............................................................................... 8-2
8.2.3 Receiving, peer-to-peer ............................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.4 Sending, peer-to-peer.................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.5 Signals directly connected to the technology board..................................................................... 8-3
8.3 Function diagram........................................................................................................... 8-4
9 Changes................................................................................................................... 9-1
10 Short parameter list, display parameters ......................................................... 10-1
11 Short parameter list / logbook ........................................................................... 11-1
IV Siemens AG Sectional drive

Manual

WARNING
or property damage.
and maintenance.
Definitions
practices.
• DANGER
• WARNING
• CAUTION
Siemens AG Sectional drive 0-1

Manual
• NOTE
CAUTION
WARNING
or property damage.
and maintenance.
must be observed.
NOTE
statements contained here do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.
0-2 Siemens AG Sectional drive

Manual
1 Overview
1 Overview
1.1 General information
There are various supplementary boards for the digital 6SE70 MASTER DRIVE AC drive converters.
Communications boards (CB1/CBP, SCB1, SCB2) permit the drive to be interfaced to an automation
system or coupled to other drives. The drive functional scope can be expanded using technology boards
(T100 and T300).
The T300 technology board is a freely-configurable processor board with peripheral devices (analog and
binary inputs and outputs, pulse encoder inputs, serial interfaces, dual port RAM to the converter etc.) It is
programmed using a programming language (STRUC L) in either list form, or using a graphics operator
interface (STRUC G).
Pre-configured software modules (programmed EPROM memory modules) are available for frequently
required applications. No additional costs are involved for configuring, testing or documentation. The
modules can be parameterized via the converter operator control panel or using a service program and a
PC. The standard software can be adapted, or expanded for special applications.
The standard software package is available on floppy disks.
1.2 Validity
This User Manual is valid for the standard “sectional drive” MS360 software package, Release 1.40.
Differences to the previous versions are listed in Section 9 ”Changes”.
With the exception of the expanded functionality, described in the ”Changes” section, this software release
is compatible to the previous releases. This is the reason that this Manual can be used for the start-up of
previous versions.
MS360 “sectional drive” software package and they do not represent a general statement for
SIMADYN#D or the technology module. For instance, ”fastest cycle time 5 ms” only means that no faster
cycle time may be used in the MS360 standard software package.

Manual
1 Overview




the converter must not be increased above the factory setting value of
P761 = 5kHz to avoid overloading the convertre processor.

Manual
1 Overview
The standard software packages can run with and without communication board (CB1/CBP or SCB1/2). In
this case the parameter H270 and H248 ( Alarm-/ Fault mask ) has to be set (refer to section 2)


SCB1 board

possible!
- Example for softwiring via Binectors-/ Connectors, refere to section 3.1.17

Manual
1 Overview

electronics box.
Mounting Positions
1 3 2
A F Electronics
Box
Data Flow

- CUMC on ADB Adap-
tion Board
- CB1
- SCB1
- SCB2

(middle location). Communication boards which are designed as Mini-Slot-Boards (e.g. CBP) must
additionally be mounted in Slot "G" of an ADB Adaption Bord before inserted in mounting location 3.
The T300 can not communicate with a communication board mounted on the CU ( in slot A or C ).

Manual
1 Overview



Manual
1 Overview
1.3 T300 technology module
compatible to SIMADYN D, and it has been especially designed for use with SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES drive converters. The function of the modules is defined using the function block-
oriented STRUC L / STRUC G configuring language. The configured software which is generated is
programmed in a program memory sub-module, which is inserted on the processor module. An EEPROM
is provided on the program memory sub-module to save parameter changes (EEPROM = electrically
write- and deletable memory). Communications with the basic drive is realized through a parallel interface,
which is implemented as DUAL PORT RAM (DPR).

1* RS485 (2- or 4 wire)
refer to Fig. 1.3.
The following components are required to operate the angular synchronous operation module:

including SC58 and SC60 connecting cables, SE300
terminal block and Instruction Manual for the module
in German/English
Local bus adapter LBA is required to install a T300 6SE7090-0XX84-4AH0
for the MASTERDRIVES electronics box and possibly a Com board
ADB carrier module is required to install a Com 6SE7090-0XX84-0KA0
to accept the CBP board
MS360 Sectional drive 6SE7098-6XX84-0AH0
on the memory module, without manual
MS360 Mehrmotorenantrieb German 6SE7080-0CX84-6AH1
or or or
Sectional drive MS360 English 6SE7087-6CX84-6AH1

Manual
1 Overview

− STRUC G PT to implement your own functions in a graphic form. This can run on a PC under SCO-
UNIX.
Refer to Section 1.4.2 and Catalog DA65.10 for more precise information.


1
disk
required

Manual
1 Overview
+24V +24V
Fine
pulse
+15V
+15V
Rough Zero Zero HTL-level, max.
X 5 . 538 537 535 533 531 540 5 3 9 5 4 8 547 545 543 541 549 input current: 8mA per chanel
+15V
X133
6
X5 7
501
+ A RS485, 2-wire
±10V 502 - D
T/Rx+
503 9
with PC / PG
+ A
±10V 504 - D T/Rx- Either RS232 or
10
505 RS485 interface
+ X132
±10V A can be used
506 - RxD 1
D TTL
differential inputs ±10V
+ A RS232
11 bits + sign 508 - 3
D
±10V / 10kΩ 4
511
±10V
+ A 5
512 - D X134
RS485, 4-wire
513 Microprocessor
+ A Tx+ 13
±10V 514 - CPU:
D Tx- 14
80C186
+ 20MHz Rx+ 11
516 - D Rx- 12
X6
15
+24V 610
11 bit + sign X5
+
601
D 509
602 A
510
603
8 binary inputs 519
604 D
24VDC
520
8 mA typ )
D 521 11 Bit + sign
607 ±10V / 10mA
A
608 522
D 523
+24V 630
A
524
+
611 X6
612
memory 631
613 module, e.g.
632
8 binary inputs 614 MS300
24VDC 633
616
636
638
640
1/2 LBA 1/2 LBA MASTER DRIVES

Communication-
board, e.g. Dual- Dual-
basic drive conv.
or SCB2
X135 X137

Fig. 1.3 terminal series X132, X133, X134: connect at T300.

Manual
1 Overview
1.4 Applications
This standard software package (module) has been developed for machines which consist of several
drives and drive groups. This is true for all machines with a continuous material web (paper- and pulp
machines, textile fiber lines, foil machines, coating machines etc.). Either an automation system can be
included or just a stand-alone solution.
Existing systems can be retrofitted cost-effectively using the module, as all of the required functionality is
available and it must only be adapted to the particular application. In most of the applications, automation
is not required.
The module also includes all of the partial functions required for a sectional drive. However, the
functionality is not embedded in a rigid structure, and can be adapted by the user for his particular
requirements. This module design offers a high level of flexibility. This is supported by freely-available
blocks which can be used for special functions.

Manual
1 Overview
The following drawing shows a typical configuration:
Lo c a l c o nt ro l
A uto m at io n
sy ste m
PRO FIB US , USS
C o u p ling to t he
a uto m at io n sy ste m
(o pt io n) CB CB CB
D riv e- re late d Pe e r-to - pe e r Pe e r-to - pe e r

o pe n- a nd c lo s e d- T 300 T 300 T 300
lo o p c o nt ro l s et po ints s et po ints
Pow e r s e ct io n
6 S E70
M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
P ro ce ss
lev e l
The converters equipped with technology board, have the required functional scope to create a multi-
motor drive group with setpoint generation and transfer. As the control is integrated in the module,
generally, automation is not required. It can be optionally used for complex control tasks or operator
control and visualization.

Manual
1 Overview
1.5 Functional scope

The individual functions included on the board are as follows:
• Open-loop drive control

Power-on/off, multi-motor group, standard stop, fast stop, electrical off, 7 local modes, 2 x inching,
fault evaluation, brake control (open-loop).
• Technology controller
Power-on/off, actual value generation, automatic/manual offset adjustment, setpoint ramp-function
generator, supplementary setpoint, technology controller (PID), kp adaption, speed influence, pre-
control, torque influence.
• Setpoint conditioning
Machine ramp-function generator, speed ratios, supplementary setpoint, compensation,
diameter/gearbox correction, local setpoints, take-up/slack-off, bias, technology controller
influence, setpoint cascade.
• Torque setpoint generation

Friction characteristic, accelerating torque computation, supplementary torque, technology
controller influence, braking characteristic, load proportion calculation.
• 2 freely-available motorized potentiometers/ramp-function generators
• Free functions
Adders, multipliers, subtractors, dividers, changeover switch functions, limiters, filters, absolute
value generators, square-route extraction functions, minimum evaluators, maximum evaluators,
sinusoidal functions, flashing frequency, EXOR logic gates.
• 2 speed inputs
2x length measurement, 2x diameter correction
• Inputs/outputs
7x analog input, 4x analog output, 16x binary input, 8x binary output, communications to the basic
drive converter (16 words) and to the communications board (10 words) via the backplane bus,
peer-to-peer coupling (5 words) to configure a fast setpoint cascade.

Manual
1 Overview
1.6 Fault messages (F035)

The technology board generates internal fault signals. These fault signals are combined to form a fault
word. The fault word is deposited in connector K141, and can be read-out of parameter d022.
If the multi-motor module identifies a fault condition, a group fault signal is transferred to the basic drive
converter.
This technology board group fault signal generates fault message F035 in the converter ( = external fault
1).
If fault message F035 occurs, then a fault has been generated by the technology board.
The fault cause can be determined using parameter d022.
The individual bit positions have the following significance:
d022 STATUS_FLT_WRD
Fault word, drive

15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Communications error CB

Bit 1: Communications error CU
Bit 2: Error, converter checkback signal
Bit 3: Error from the open-loop group control
Bit 4: Communications error, peer-to-peer
Bit 5: External fault
Bit 6: Overspeed, positive
Bit 7: Overspeed, negative
Bit 8: Anti-stall protection
Bits 9 to 15: Unassigned

Manual
1 Overview
1.7 Diagnostic LEDs

Three diagnostic LEDs are provided on the board:
Red LED
The red LED flashes if the technology board software is being executed. One of the following faults/errors
may be present if the red LED does not flash in spite of the fact that the converter is powered-up:
Fault cause Remedy
Defective technology board/LED Replace the board
Board incorrectly or not completely inserted Insert the board in the correct slot and screw into
place
Defective LBA Replace the LBA
Memory module failed or not programmed, refer to Replace the memory module
the information below.
Yellow LED
The yellow LED flashes if the technology board is communicating with the basic drive converter (CU).
If the red LED is flashing, but the yellow LED not, then one of the following faults/errors may be present:
Fault cause Remedy
Defective technology board (DPR) / LED Replace the board
CUVC, CUMC: The basic drive has not identified CUVC, CUMC: Replace T300 or CUVC, CUMC
the T300.
CU2, CU3: T300 not logged-in in the basic drive, or CU2, CU3: Log-on T300, refer to Section 6, or
not recognized. replace T300 or CU2, CU3
Board incorrectly or not completely inserted Insert the board into the correct slot and screw into
place
Green LED
The green LED flashes if the technology board is communicating with the communications board (CB).
If the red LED flashes, but the green LED not, then one of the following faults/errors may be present:
Fault cause Remedy
Technology module / LED or communications Replace the board
module failed
CUVC, CUMC: The basic drive has not identified CUVC, CUMC: Replace T300 or CBP
the CBP.
CU2, CU3: T300 not logged-in in the basic drive, or CU2, CU3: Log-on T300, log-on CB1 refer to
not recognized. Section 6, or replace T300 or CB1
place
Notes:
The red LED must always flash if the technology board is O.K.
CU2,CU3: The yellow and green LEDs first start to flash, if the hardware setting (P052=4) has been
completed.
Setting up without communications board:
The yellow and red LEDs must flash.
Setting up with communications board:
The yellow, red and green LEDs must flash.
The MS360 memory module is identified by its Order No. on the PC board, refer to Section 1.3 and on the
"MS360 Vx.y" label on one of the components.

Manual
1 Overview
1.8 Sampling times

The modules uses 5 different sampling times, which are coded with T1 to T5. Only this code is used in the
text. The assignment is as follows:
Time level Sampling time

T1 5.0 [ms]
T2 20.0 [ms]
T3 40.0 [ms]
T4 160.0 [ms]
T5 640.0 [ms]
The sampling time specifies, in which time interval the particular function is sampled, i.e. is computed or
calculated. The inputs and outputs of the function are updated at the start and end of the sampling time
(because the sampling times are cyclically repeated, this is one and the same). However, put in a
simplified fashion, the complete sequence from input, computation and output are simultaneously realized
during this short instant and in the meantime nothing else happens. Thus, the term sampling.

Manual
2 T300 technology board

The T300 technology board is a configurable microprocessor board which was developed to implement
drive-related technological open- and closed-loop control tasks. It includes a program and parameter
memory as well as interfaces to the process.
2.1 Hardware
The board is a microprocessor board with an 80C186-CPU, clocked at 20MHz. It also includes a 128kbyte
RAM for the user program, 1k word dual port RAM for CU communications and various interfaces. A
special real-time operating system, in conjunction with the processor performance of the CPU, permits
extremely fast closed-loop control functions with short response times but is simultaneously stable and
reliable.
Handle (Comp. side)

LEDs
Boot jumper X130
Acknowledge button S3
X137
X131
40 pin plug connector

S1
X132 (5 pin Minicombicon) 64 pin plug connector
X133 (5 pin Minicombicon)

Memory
sub module
X135
X136
X131 : Analog inputs and outputs, speed inputs

X132 : RS232 (downloading, diagnostics monitor)
X133 : RS485
X134 : RS485 (peer-to- peer)
X136 : Binary inputs/outputs
X135 : Dual port RAM interface to the COM board (e.g. CB)
X137 : Dual port RAM interface to the BASE board (e.g. CU)
The converter must be equipped with a local bus adapter (LBA) so that the board can be used. This is
snapped-into the electronics box, and provides the mechanical guides for the supplementary boards, and
also the electrical connection to the converter using a bus PC board. The board is supplied and
communications to the converter established in this fashion. Further, the pulses from the pulse encoder
connected at the CU are available there and can be evaluated on the T300.

Manual
In addition to a T300, a communications board, abbreviated CB1/CBP (COM BOARD), can also be
inserted in the 6SE70/71 electronics box. Basic drive converter- and T300 signals can be accessed via
the CB using fast bus communications, e.g. PROFIBUS.
The connection to the peripherals is established using the SE300 terminal module, which is connected to
the T300 via two 2 m shielded round cables which cannot be interchanged. The processor board, cables
and terminal module are supplied as complete package, but are also individually available as spare parts.
LEDs are provided on the terminal module which permit a fast status display of binary inputs and outputs.
Binary signals, analog signals and tachometer pulses are fed-in and out via screw terminals. No other
terminals are required (e.g. terminals on a mounting rail in the cabinet).
T300 has two serial SS1 and SS2 communication interfaces. SS1 is configured for diagnostics and start-
up; SS2 is used for the peer-to-peer coupling. The cables are connected at plug-in terminal blocks.
Three diagnostic LEDs are provided on the T300 itself. When they flash they indicate perfect operation,
and are assigned to the T300 itself (red LED), communications to the CU (yellow LED) and
communications to the CB (green LED). A system fault signal can be reset using an acknowledge button.
Several watchdogs are available to monitor the correct functioning. Monitoring functions for the hardware
(ready signal delay for hardware access, double address coding errors, access to non-existent addresses)
and the software (cyclic operation, interrupt control of the interfaces, timers and inputs) are provided.
An NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt) is generated if a fault/error is identified. The processor attempts to
remove the cause and to return to cyclic operation. If this is not successful, the board is switched into a
completely inactive state. This means that the processor is stopped and the drive is shutdown with a fault
condition.

Manual
+24V +24V
Fine
pulse
+15V
Rough Zero Zero
+15V
X133
6
X5 7
501
+ A RS485, 2-wire
±10V 502 - D
T/Rx+
503 with PC / PG
+ 9
±10V A
504 - T/Rx-
505 RS485 interface
+ X132
±10V A can be used
506 - RxD 1
D TTL
±10V 508 3
11 bits + sign - D
±10V / 10kΩ 4
511
±10V
+ A 5
512 - D X134
RS485, 4-wire
513 Microprocessor
+ A Tx+ 13
±10V 514 - CPU:
D Tx- 14
80C186
+ 20MHz Rx+ 11
516 - D Rx- 12
X6
15
+24V 610
11 bit + sign X5
+
601
D 509
602 A
510
603
24VDC D
(input current: 605 A
520
8 mA typ)
D 521 11 Bit + sign
607 ±10V / 10mA
A
608 522
D 523
+24V 630
A
524
+
611 X6
612
memory 631
613 module, e.g.
632
8 binary inputs 614
MS300
24VDC 633
(input current : 615 8 binary outputs
635
636
638
640

basic drive conv.
board, e.g. Dual- Dual- CUVC, CUMC,
CBP with ADP, Port- Port- CU2 or CU3
CB1, SCB1 RAM RAM
oder SCB2
X135 X137


Manual
2.2 Interfaces and input/output terminals

The following diagram shows a schematic of the internal T300 functions as well as the external
connections:
..... .....
CB1/CBP 6S E 70
Speed Speed
or 16 binary 7 analog 2 serial or
sensing sensing
SCB1 inputs inputs interfaces
or R S2 32/R S4 85 6SE71
1 2
SCB2 Position difference
g reen Basic
CO M OK H2 electronics
board
red
T EC H O K H1 (CU)
yellow
BASE O K H3 T3 0 0 NOVRAM
X 3 05 non-volatile µ P 8 0 C186 X13 7 X107
operating 2 0 MHz
data storage
DPRAM D P R AM
X135
Interface Program 2 kbyte *

EEPROM
board 8 binary 4 analog 15V, 100mA 128 kb yte memory for start-up,
(optional) outputs outputs for pulse - RAM 256kb yte can be
• 16 changed
encoder
..... .....
* Insertable memory module
The assignments for the connector and the technical input and output data are described in the following
sections. However, only the information specified in the current T300 Manual is binding.

Manual
2.2.1 Binary input terminals

Binary signals have a 24 V DC level with reference to M24 (terminals 610, 630 or 640 on SE300).
T300
S E 300
Power
s u p p ly
L ev el c o nv erter
24V DC
M 24 M 24
An input which is not connected has a logical zero signal level. Signals below +6 V are also interpretted as
low. Voltages between 13 V and 33 V represent a high signal level. The input current at 24 V is typically
approx. 5 mA; the delay time, approx. 1 ms.
Binary input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Terminal at SE300 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618
-X6
Pin at T300 -X136 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2.2.2 Binary output terminals

The binary outputs are also 24 V DC signals referred to M24 (terminals 610, 630 or 640 at SE300). They
are supplied from the P24 terminals (609, 619 or 639).
T300 SE300
P24 P24
Power supply
24V DC
Driver
Load
M24 M24
Each of the 8 outputs (terminals 631 to 638) can drive between 0.2 mA and 100 mA, which is sufficient to
control small indicating lamps or coupling relays. A free-wheeling diode is available on the T300, however,
for inductive loads, it is recommended that a free-wheeling diode is directly connected at the load. Further,
the outputs have an electronic short-circuit protection to ground and P24. The total output loading may not
exceed 400 mA; the operating voltage range is between +20V and +30V. The switching delay is approx.
300µs.
Binary output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal at T300 - 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
X136
Pin at SE300 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638
-X6
The outputs are low when the processor is being reset.

Manual
Note:
The binary inputs and outputs are internally connected with electronics ground. There is no electrical
isolation.
The input or output stages or even the complete board could be damaged if the permissible signal level is
exceeded!
2.2.3 Analog input terminals
The analog input stages are differential inputs for common-mode rejection. Thus, the reference level is
not connected with the internal ground and must be individually connected. It should be ensured, that the
voltages at the terminals for signal and reference do not exceed +/-20V!
SE300 T300
Signal
Reference 10k
Difference
generator
The inputs have a filter with a 1.5 kHz transition frequency and a typical 10kΩ input resistance. The
resolution is 12 bits (corresponding to 4.9 mV) over the complete input voltage range of +/- 10 V for a
linearity of ≤1LSB. The absolute accuracy is +/- 3LSB.
7 analog inputs are available.
Analog input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Terminal at SE300 501 503 505 507 511 513 515

-X5 SIGNAL
Terminal at SE300 502 504 506 508 512 514 516
-X5 REF.
Pin at T300 -X131 1 3 5 7 11 13 15
SIGNAL
Pin at T300 -X131 2 4 6 8 12 14 16
REF.
Note:
If the lines/cables are noisy, it is recommended that an RC hardware filter is connected at the analog input
terminals (also refer to the T300 Instruction Manual). The noise is then no longer digitized.
If problems occur with the analog inputs it should be checked as to whether the reference terminal is
connected for each analog input.

Manual
2.2.4 Analog output terminals

The analog outputs are drivers with a +/- 10 mA maximum current and an internal resistance of 56Ω,
which can control display instruments or coupling elements. They have a 12-bit resolution (corresponding
to 4.9 mV) over the complete +/- 10 V range, with a linearity of ≤1LSB and are short-circuit proof to
ground. They have common reference potentials, which are connected with the electronics ground.
T300 SE 300
56 O h m
L o ad
D riv er
M 24 M2 4
The terminal assignment is as follows:

Analog output 1 2 3 4
Pin at T300 -X131 9 17 19 20

SIGNAL
Terminal at SE300 509 519 521 523
-X5 SIGNAL
Terminal at SE300 510 520 522 524
-X5 REF.
The analog outputs are undefined after power-up while the system runs-up. The output voltage levels are
maintained for a reset or if the board develops a fault.
2.2.5 Pulse encoder terminals

The technology board has evaluation electronics for two pulse encoders. Terminals for track A and track B
as well as the zero track (synchronizing pulse) are available for every encoder. These are unipolar inputs,
which are not suitable for push-pull operation.
Tachometer input 1 2
Terminal at SE300 531 541

-X5 TRACK A
-X5 REF.
-X5 TRACK B
-X5 REF.
-X5 SYNC
-X5 REF.
The displacement between track A and B must be 90°, a +/- 20° deviation is tolerated. The maximum
input frequency is 400 kHz. In this case, the pulses or pulse intervals (T1 to T3) must be at least 1 µs long:

Manual
T ra c k A
T ra c k B
S y nc .
t2
t
t1 t3
The nominal tachometer signal level is 15 V. Signal levels are permissible between 0 V and 30 V, whereby
voltages below 5 V are interpretted as low signals, and signals above 8 V, as high signals. The maximum
input current per track is approx. 5 mA. Pulse encoder types with supply voltages from 15 V to 24 V can
be used. A 15 V supply voltage is available at terminals 540 (P15) and 539 (ground) of the SE300. The
maximum current is 100 mA, which is generally sufficient for a pulse encoder. The grounds must be
connected when supplied via an external power supply unit.
T30 0 T 30 0
P 15 P 15
T rac k A T rac k A
T rac k B + T rac k B
S ync S ync
M 15 M 15
In tern al s u pp ly E xternal s u pply
The speed actual value is positive, if the rising edge of track B coincides with a high signal at track A and
negative for a low signal level.
P os itiv e s p ee d : N egativ e s peed:
T ra c k A T ra ck A
T ra c k B T ra ck B
t t

Manual
2.2.6 Interface to the basic drive converter (CU)

Communications to/from the converter are realized via a dual port RAM on the T300. It permits
simultaneous access to data being transferred to/from the T300 and CU.
STW 1 STW 2
T300
Z SW 1 Z SW 2 US S U S S n act M* M a ct
S e le ct
n* ST W T 1ST W T 2 kp adap M add M b+ M b- w o rd s
W ORD 2 1 4 8 5 6 7 9 - 16
W ORD 1 4 13 14 2 5 6 7 - 12 ,15 ,16 DPR
Z SW 1 Z SW 2 ST W 1ST W 2 kp
n* US S US S adap M add M b+ M b- M * M act
P4 4 3 P5 54 P5 76 P6 94 P2 26 P5 06 P4 9 3 P4 99 P6 94 P6 94 P6 94 .0 7 (v a lue s 3 0 0 9
P4 44 ...P5 7 5 ...P5 9 1 .02 P2 2 7 P5 07 P4 94 P5 00 .0 5 .06 ...P6 94 .1 1 to 3 0 14 )
P4 4 3 P5 54 P5 76 P7 34 P2 32 P5 06 P4 9 3 P4 99 P7 34 P7 34 P7 34 .0 7 (v a lue s 3 0 0 9
P4 44 ...P5 7 5 ...P5 9 1 .02 P5 07 P4 94 P5 00 .0 5 .06 ...P734 .1 1 to 3 0 14 )
n a ct
ST W 1 ST W 2
S e le ct
w o rd s
L IM H LG R EG L IM
- + V e cto r
+ C o ntro l
+ -
R a m p-u p/ ra m p-d ow n
t im e = 0 s
M act
CU
16 words are transferred from the T300 to the CU and the same number in the reverse direction. The
connection is physically established throught the plug connectors (-X1137) on the rear side when the T300
is inserted.
As can be seen in the diagram, the technology board expects specific parameterization for the signal
transfer to the basic drive converter. Thus, the basic drive converter signals must be connected-through to
the T300 according to Section 6.2.10.
Note:
STW1, STW2 = Control words 1 and 2 of the basic drive converter
ZSW1, ZSW2 = Status words 1 and 2 of the basic drive converter
As can be seen from the block diagram, the closed-loop speed control remains active in the basic drive
converter, even when the T300 is used. The proportional gain factor can be set via T300.

Manual
2.2.7 Peer-to-peer interface (SS2)

The serial interface (-X134) is a piece of hardware according to the RS-485 standard up to 115200 baud.
It can be operated in either a two- or four-wire mode, which is defined in the particular protocol (for peer-
to-peer communications of the multi--motor module, this is the four wire mode).
Plesae refere also to note 3, Section 6.4.3
P5
390
T T L / RS485
3
47 0p
SST 2_ T xD
150
4
47 0p
D IR 390
P5 P5
M 56u
M M 5
S1.3 390
T T L / RS485 100 K 47 0p
0
SS T 2_ R xD 1
47 0p
150
2
47 0p
D IR
100 K S1.4 39 0 PE
Direction changeover
M M
X 134
Bus terminating resistors can be activated using DIP switch S1, which must be activated at the last
receiver. They are active, if switches S1.3 and S1.4 are set to ON.
The following rules must be observed when configuring a bus system:
Rule 1: Connections must be directly routed from T300 to T300 using shielded cables (1 pair) without
any intermediate terminal locations. The shield must be connected at both ends through a low-
impedance connection at the SIMOVERT housing or cabinet potential (using a cable clamp).
Rule 2: Only one conductor may be connected at the transmit terminals (+Tx/-Tx).
Rule 3: At the receiver terminals (+Rx/-Rx), either one conductor can be connected (in this case, the
terminating resistors must be switched-in), or two conductors (in this case, it is not permissible
that the terminating resistors are active).
The first case, involves a point-to-point connection; a cascade is realized in the latter (point-to-
multi-point).
Rule 4: A cascade (chain) may only include up to 31 receivers.
Connection assignment and a possible configuration is shown in the following diagram. Bus termination is
required at the connectors marked with x.
-X 1 3 4 -X 13 4 X -X 13 4 X -X 1 3 4 X
R x+ Rx- Tx+ Tx- M R x+ R x- Tx+ T x- M R x+ R x- T x+ Tx- M R x+ R x- Tx+ Tx- M Point to point

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
-X 1 3 4
Rx+ R x- Tx+ Tx- M

1 2 3 4 5 -X 13 4 -X 13 4 -X1 3 4 X
R x+ R x- Tx+ T x- M R x+ R x- T x+ Tx- M Rx+ R x- Tx+ Tx- M Chain

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Manual
2.2.8 Serial service interface (SS1)

The serial interface is either RS-232 (-X132) or hardware according to the RS-485 standard (two wire) up
to 38400 baud (-X133). However, it is not possible to use both connectors simultaneously.
X132
TTL TxD 2
470p
SST1_TxD
RxD 1
RS232 470p
SST1_RxD 3
10k
M 56u 470p
N12 4
5
0
56u
M
5
P5 P5
470p 1
TTL / RS485 100K S1.1 390 0
2
3
470p
150
4
470p
DIR
100K S1.2 390 PE
(Direction changeover)
X133
M M
Bus terminating resistors at -X133 can be activated using DIP switch S1, if switch S1.1 and S1.2 are set
too ON. They must also be available at the last receiver.
RS232

(referred to connector X132): (referred to the labels on the
T300 connector):
1 1 Receive data RxD
2 2 Transmit data TxD
3 3 Ground GND
4 4 Ground GND
5 5 Ground GND
Table 2.2.8.a: Connector X132
RS485

(referred to connector X132): (referred to the labels on the
T300 connector):
1 6 Receive / Transmit +RxD / +TxD
2 7 Receive / Transmit -RxD / -TxD
3 8 Receive / Transmit +RxD / +TxD
4 9 Receive / Transmit -RxD / -TxD
5 10 Ground GND
Table 2.2.8.b: Connector X133

Manual
The cable assignment PC - X132
PC (9-pin SU B -D ) T300 (M inicom bicon 5)

R xD 2 2 TxD
TxD 3 1 R xD
M 5 3 M
2.2.9 Interface to the CB communications board

Communications to/from the communications board is realized via a dual port RAM on the COM board. It
permits simultaneous access to the data to be transferred between T300 and the COM-BOARD.
Presently the following can be used as COM-BOARD
• CB1/CBP for PROFIBUS DP (SINEC L2 DP),
• SCB1 Fiber-optic cable for the USS protocol and terminal expansion via SCI1 and SCI2
• SCB2 for the USS protocol via RS485.
10 words are transferred from the T300 to the COM-BOARD and the same number in the reverse
direction. The connection is physically established by the plug connector (-X135) on the rear side when
the COM-BOARD is inserted.

Manual
The function description consists of a text part as well as the graphic documentation in the form of
function diagrams. The function diagrams are neutral block diagrams, and permit configuring and start-up
without any supportive text description. The latter is considered to be detailled information to the
diagrams.
The description is sub-divided into functional sections such as inputs/outputs, open-loop control,
technological closed-loop control, speed setpoint generation, torque setpoint generation and free
functions.
The function diagrams are structured as follows:
Function Contents
diagrams
A Signal input/output, signal conditioning
B Open-loop drive control
C Closed-loop technology controller
D Setpoint conditioning
E Supplementary torque/torque limit generation
F Supplementary functions
Note:
In order to understand the function diagrams, it is necessary to be knowledgable about the connector
principle. This procedure permits unified documentation and the highest degree of flexibility. Its principle of
operation is explained at the beginning of Section 5.

Manual
3.1 Inputs/outputs (function diagrams, A.)

All steps and measures are considered as inputs, which are used as inputs for the multi-motor module.
These are communications from the basic drive converter, another technological module with peer-to-peer
connection or an automation system via COM-BOARD, e.g. SINEC-L2, and beyond this, also the
hardware inputs for binary and analog signals as well as for pulse encoders.
Outputs are essentially functions, which send signals to a particular partner. These also include the above
mentioned communications as well as binary- and analog outputs.
The freely-definable status word, the limit value monitors as well as the motorized potentiometers are
discussed here.
3.1.1 Inputs/outputs from/to CU (function diagrams A1, A2)

Data (16 words) received from the basic drive converter, are deposited in connectors K040 to K055,
where they can be selected through the multiplexers. The appropriate parameters are specified as actual
value source in parameter P694 (CU2,CU3), P734 (CUVC,CUMC) of the basic drive converter. In this
case, the index stands for the position in the telegram or for the connector, in which the value can be
found, according to the following table:
Index P694.xx 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
P734.xx
Telegram position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Connector Kxxx 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055
Vice versa, when selecting the value to be sent to the CU, a connector is selected for every telegram
position and then entered into the appropriate parameter. Further, the most important values for transfer
to CU are located in the display parameters.
Parameters Hxxx 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903
Display in dxxx 092 093 - 094 095 096 097 - - - - - - - - -
Telegram position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Entry 30xx - 02 - - 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Note:
The communications status is represented in the status word INPUT. When using a PC with SERVICE
program, this can be used to check the function of communications to the CU by interrogating the
$F_CUR (receive) and $F_CUT (transmit) signals. These are a logical 1 if communications are
functioning correctly.
CU communications is processed in the shorted sampling time (T1).
The assignment of the control- and status words is shown on Page A2 of the function diagrams. The bits
to control the setpoint channel- and motor data sets and for fixed setpoint selection can be freely-
connected, and are supplied with H234, 236, 238, 240, 242 and 244 (source) and H235, 237, 239, 241,
243 and 245 (mask). Further, the control signal can be selected for fault acknowledgement, using H216
and H217.

Manual
3.1.2 Inputs/outputs from/to CB (function diagrams, A3)

Data (10 words) received via a communications board (CB) is deposited in connectors K020 to K029.
The assignment of the values to the connectors corresponds to their sequence in the telegram:
Telegram position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Connector Kxxx 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029
The transmit quantities are also assigned according to their sequence:
Parameters Hxxx 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913
Note:
Communications status is represented in the status word INPUT. When using a PC with SERVICE
program, the function of the communications to CB can be checked by interrogating the $F_CBR (receive)
and $F_CBT (transmit) signals. These are a logical 1 if communications are functioning correctly.
The CB communications is processed in the shortest sampling time (T1).
Please refere also to note 3, Section 6.4.3
3.1.3 Inputs/outputs from/to the peer (function diagrams, A3)

Data (max. 10 words), received from another multi-motor module or another drive are deposited in
connectors K030 to K039, where they can be selected through multiplexers. The assignment of the values
to the connectors corresponds to their sequence in the telegram:
Connector Kxxx 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039
The transmit quantities (5 words) are also assigned according to their sequence, and displayed in the
display parameters, the remaining words are zero. Further, there are adaption factors for the first 4 words:
Parameters Hxxx 879 881 883 885 887
Adaption factor 880 882 884 886 -

Hxxx
Display dxxx 087 088 089 090 091
Telegram position 1 2 3 4 5
Further, the following parameters can be set for peer-to-peer communications:

H197: Baud rate
H198: Number of receive words
H199: Number of transmit words
Note:
- The communications status is represented in status word INPUT. When a PC with a service program is
used, the peer communications function can be checked by interrogating the $F_PPR (receive) and
$F_PPT (transmit) signals. These are logical 1 if communications are functioning correctly.
The peer communications is executed in the shortest sampling time (T1).

Manual

- When using Compact or Compact Plus units, under certain circumstances, the peer to peer link must be
replaced by SIMOLINK. One of the basic CUVC or CUMC modules is required if SIMOLINK is to be used.
An example of how SIMOLINK can be connected with the multi-motor module via the basic drive, is
shown in Section 3.1.17, replacing peer to peer by SIMOLINK.

Manual
3.1.4 Binary inputs (function diagrams, A4

The statuses of input terminals 1 to 8 or 11 to 18 of T300 (corresponds to terminals 601 to 608 and 611 to
618 of the SE300) are read-in as word-quantity. It is possible to invert the individual binary signals from
the terminals via H102, before these are deposited in K069. Status input signal display is possible via
D010.
Binary input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Terminal at SE300 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618
-X6
0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 2000 4000 8000
Weighting for inv. in
H102
Binary inputs 9 to 16 are additionally directly linked with the byte-serial read-in function. The bit inversion is
ineffective for these.
The circuit configuration and internal structure of the binary inputs is described in Section 2.2.1
3.1.5 Binary outputs (function diagrams, A4)

There are 8 binary outputs which are assigned via parameters H833, 835, 837, 839, 841, 843, 845 and
847 (source) and H834, 836, 838, 840, 842, 844, 846 and 848 (mask). All binary outputs can also be
inverted using the appropriate masking with H849.
Binary output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Weighting for inv. in 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080
H849
Terminal at SE300 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638
-X6
The circuit configuration and the internal structure of the binary outputs is described in Section 2.2.2.
The binary inputs and outputs are processed in T3. The outputs are low when the processor is being
reset.
Note:
The binary inputs and outputs are connected with the internal electronics ground. There is no electrical
isolation! If the permissible signal level is exceeded, in addition to the input- or output stages, the
complete board could be damaged!

Manual
3.1.6 Analog inputs (function diagrams, A5)

There are 7 analog inputs in various sampling times, i.e. with different speeds.
This permits a selection to be made depending on the process requirements. Further, every analog input
can be adapted using a correction factor and offset. The thus obtained signal is fed through a first order
software filter (PT1), whose time constant can be parameterized. The values are fed to display
parameters.
Analog input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Terminal at SE300 501 503 505 507 511 513 515

-X5 signal
Terminal at SE300 502 504 506 508 512 514 516
-X5 REF.
Adaption Hxxx 121 124 127 130 133 136 139
Offset Hxxx 122 125 128 131 134 137 140
Filter time Hxxx 123 126 129 132 135 138 141
Display dxxx 003 004 005 006 007 008 009
Connector Kxxx 060 061 062 063 064 065 066
Sampling time T1 T1 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4
The circuit configuration and the internal structure of the analog inputs is described in Section 2.2.3.
Note:
If there is noise on the cables, it is more favorable to connect an RC hardware filter to the analog input
terminals than provide filtering per software (also refer to the T300 Instruction Manual).
Then, the noise is not even digitized.
Fluctuations, resulting from sampling can be removed using a software filter
3.1.7 Analog outputs (function diagrams, A5)

Using a parameter, it is defined as to whether a signal is output with sign or as absolute value, and with
which smoothing, offset and gain. The assignment is as follows:
Source Hxxx 850 855 860 865
Abs. value Hxxx 851 856 861 866
Filter time Hxxx 852 857 862 867
Offset Hxxx 853 858 863 868
Adaption Hxxx 854 859 864 869
Terminal at SE300 509 519 521 523

-X5 SIGNAL
Terminal at SE300 510 520 522 524
-X5 REF.
Sampling time T1 T1 T3 T3

Manual
The analog outputs are undefined after power-up while the systems run-up. The output voltages are
retained at reset or if the board develops a fault.
Generally, for inputs and outputs, the assignment ±100% corresponds to ±5V and ±200% corresponds to
±10V.
The circuit configuration and the internal structure of the analog outputs is described in Section 2.2.4.
3.1.8 Pulse encoder inputs (function diagrams, A6)

The technology board has evaluation electronics for two incremental pulse encoders. Terminals for track
A and track B as well as the zero track (synchronizing pulse) are available for each encoder.
Pulse encoder input 1 2

-X5 TRACK A
-X5 REF.
-X5 TRACK B
-X5 REF.
-X5 SYNC
-X5 REF.
Both pulse encoder inputs are separately parameterized. The pulse encoder pulse number, encoder
speed at which 100% speed actual value is to be determined (rated speed) as well as the time constant
for actual value smoothing is required.
Tachometer input 1 2
Pulse number per revolution H142 H144
Rated speed H143 H145
Filter time, speed actual value H154 H155
Display, speed actual value d013 d014
Connector K067 K068
Sampling time T3 T3
Both pulse encoder sensing inputs have a length count function. These operate by summing the
quadrupled pulses. This means, that each time the encoder rotates, four times the pulse number (as
count pulses) are entered and the length actual value increased. The counter is a 32-bit counter and can
be held using binary control commands (the length actual value is then no longer changed), or reset (the
length actual value is reset to zero).

Manual
A range selector function allows a 16-bit measuring range to be freely defined in the 32-bit counter value.
The value to be specified is oriented to the highest pulse number to be measured. The length actual value
is 100% if the specified number of pulses have been received:
H160/ Pulse No. for 100% H160/ Pulse No. for 100%
H163 length actual value H163 length actual value
0 1 073 741 824 16 16 384
1 536 870 912 17 8192
2 268 435 456 18 4096
3 13 421 778 19 2048
4 67 108 864 20 1024
5 33 554 432 21 512
6 16 777 216 22 256
7 8 388 608 23 128
8 4 194 304 24 64
9 2 097 152 25 32
10 1 048 576 26 16
11 524 288 27 8
12 262 144 28 4
13 131 072 29 2
14 65 536 30 1
15 32 768
For specific geometric data (roll diameter, gearbox), a certain number of counted pulses corresponds to a
specific length.
The number of pulses which are counted is obtained from:
rated _ length
Pulses = 4 ⋅ pulsenumber ⋅ gearboxratio ⋅
π ⋅ rolldiameter
Example:
10000 m is to be measured. The pulse encoder pulse number is 1024. The gearbox ratio is 1:7.5. The
roll diameter is 400mm.
1st step: Determining the pulse number at the maximum length
rated _ length
Pulses = 4 ⋅ pulsenumber ⋅ gearboxratio ⋅
π ⋅ rolldiameter
10000m
Pulses = 4 ⋅ 1024 ⋅ 7.5 ⋅ = 244461993
π ⋅ 0.4 m
2st step: The normalization for the next highest pulse number is determined from the table
In this case, 100% = 268 435 456 ⇒ H160=2
3rd step: Determining the normalization of the length measurement
rated _ length
Pulses =
π ⋅ rolldiameter
pulses ⋅ π ⋅ rolldiameter
No min allength = = 10980.66 m = 100%
4 ⋅ pulsenumber ⋅ gearboxratio

Manual
Diameter correction allows the length actual value to be adapted using any factor, and therefore a finer
grading. Further, this can also be used to implement a diameter- or gearbox correction, which may be
necessary if the roll diameters change (due to wear) or for changeover gearboxes.
The actual length is compared with a selectable length reference value. The binary statuses, length less
than the limit value and length greater than the limit value can be separately accessed, for both
measurements, in the status word.
Further, the synchronizing signal detected binary signal is also available there. It is set to a high signal
level for one sampling interval, if the pulse input detected the zero mark of the particular pulse encoder.
This signal can be used internally.
Length measurement 1 2
Source RESET command Hxxx 146 151
Mask, RESET command Hxxx 147 152
Source STOP command Hxxx 148 153
Mask STOP command Hxxx 149 154
Length meas. range Hxxx 160 163
Source, diam. correction Hxxx 161 164
Display, length act. value dxxx 016 017
Source, length limit value Hxxx 162 165
Connector Kxxx 074 075
Sampling time T3 T3
3.1.9 Input from a thumbwheel switch (function diagrams, A7)

Using binary inputs and outputs, a circuit can be implemented, which can be used to read-in values from
decade switches. These can be used as main setpoint, ratio, technological setpoint etc. 5 inputs and for
every decade, 1 output, are required.
The module cyclically activates the control lines for the individual decades and reads-in the switch
positions via diodes, in a de-coupled fashion.
Connection example:
S E 300
P 2 4 639
BQ1 631
BQ2 632
BQ3 633
BQ4 634
BQ5 635
1 2 3 4 5 D ecade
24V
+
-
B I1 601 S ignific ance 1
D ata trans fer
B I5 605
M 2 4 640
The control bits for the maximum 5 decades are located in K077, bits 0 to 4. From there, they must be
connected to binary outputs. The same is also true for the weighting factors (bit 0=1, bit 1=2, bit 2=4 and

Manual
bit 3=8), an individual input must be reserved for each of them; these must be assigned using parameters
H111, 113, 115 and 117 for the source (the value in this case must be 069 = status word of the binary
inputs) and using H112, 114, 116 and 118 for the mask (which binary input).
The data are first read-in, if the data transfer signal is available. Also here, it probably involves a signal
from one of the binary inputs, so that 069 must again be entered as source in H119. The appropriate
binary input is selected using the mask in H120.
The following parameterization must be made for the example shown above:
Parameter Description Value
number
H111 Source, bit 0 from the decade switch 69
H112 Mask, bit 0 from the decade switch 0001h
H119 Source bit, data transfer, decade switch 69
H120 Mask bit, data transfer, decade switch 0010h
Using H107, the module must be signaled as to how many decades are to be read-in. The information at
H108 defines that switch position in the BCD format, which is to represent 100%. The following table
makes this clear using examples:
Value in H107 Switch statuses H108 Value range
1 0...9 5 0...180% +/-20%
2 0...99 50 0...198% +/-2%
3 0...999 500 0...199.8% +/-0.2%
4 0...9999 5000 0...199.98% +/-0.02%
5 0...65536 1) 32768 0...199.9939% +/-0.0061%
1) Note: From 32767 the output value is limited to the highest possible value!
The coding can be changed-over to binary using H109 (value 0). The signal which is read-in is then
interpretted as hexadecimal number.
If negative values are also to be entered, the most significant bit of the higest decade represents the sign
bit (high, if negative).
The value which is read-in is indicated in d012 and can be used at any location as connector K071.
Processing is realized in T4. Peripheral access is required for each decade, which means that for n
decades, a new value is available at the earliest after n sampling cycles.
3.1.10 Byte-serial input (function diagrams, A7)

Byte-serial input of process data permits a quasi-parallel coupling to an automation system if a serial
connection via a bus is not justified due to a single value. The word to be transferred is split-up into two
bytes. These are alternately switched to a group of 8 binary inputs. Using a control bit (HBE high byte
enable), the module is signaled, that it involves the most significant byte.

Manual
Connecting example:
SE300
609 P24
HBE 608
B I1
Bit 0 6 11
B I9
Bit 1 6 12
B I10
Bit 2 6 13
B I1 1
Bit 3 6 14
B I12
24V +- Bit 4 6 15
B I13
Bit 5 6 16
B I14
Bit 6 6 17
B I15
Bit 7 6 18
B I16
630 M
In order to limit the amount of parameterization, binary inputs 9 to 16 (terminals 611 to 618 on SE300) are
permanently assigned this function. The controlling bit can be freely assigned to another binary input using
H104 (source) and H105 (mask).
The time for which the byte to be read-in must be available unchanged so that it is accepted as valid, is
defined in parameter H106. The pre-setting is the same as sampling time (T4). Each byte is now read
twice consecutively and when the values coincide, is accepted. (it is immediately read-in for a 0 ms entry,
however, there is no possibility to check the value).
The value which is read-in remains stored, until it is overwritten by a new value. It can be read in display
parameter d011, and can be used as K070.

Manual
3.1.11 Generating the line speed actual value (function diagrams, A8)
A connector is defined as source for the speed actual value using select parameter H156. This can be
one of the pulse encoder actual values of the T300 as well as a signal from an analog input or the actual
value from the drive converter via the dual port RAM. This is multiplied by a diameter/gearbox correction
factor, which can be selected using H157.
Thus, a line speed actual value is obtained, which can be observed at d015 and is available at K076. A
window discriminator monitors the value and supplies the binary information, speed < 0, speed = 0 and
speed > 0. They are available at the INPUT status word at positions bit 2, bit 3 and bit 4.
Line s peed < 0

V
Line s peed = 0
V
Line s peed > 0
H 158 V
H 159
0
Limit (H158) and hysteresis (H159) determine when the drive is shutdown after standard stop or fast stop.
Further, this limit defines the instant when the holding brake closes. If the limit value is too high, the
holding brakes are applied too early and the machine does not stop smoothly.
3.1.12 Generation, status word INPUT (function diagrams, A8)

The INPUT status word includes a wide range of status signals from the input- and output function area.
They are shown in the table; the text describes the active status of the particular binary signal:
Bit Description
0 Synchr. signal identified, pulse encoder 1
1 Synchr. signal identified, pulse encoder 2
2 Speed < 0
3 Speed = 0
4 Speed > 0
5 Length act. val., pulse encod. 1 > lim. val.
6 Length act. val., pulse encod. 1 < lim. val.
7 Length act. val., pulse encod. 2 > lim. val.
8 Length act. val., pulse encod. 2 < lim. val.
9 System error, T300
10 Communications, send to CU o.k.
11 Communications, send to CB o.k.
12 Communications, send to peer o.k.
13 Communications, receive from CU o.k.
14 Communications, receive from CB o.k.
15 Communications, receive from peer o.k.
The word is located in K072 and d018. It is updated in T4.

Manual
The system error bit (bit 9) is retrieved by OR’ing the system error word bits, selected using H103. The
system error word includes the following system errors:
Bit Description Enabled in H103 with
0 Fatal system error 0001
3 Task administration error 0008
4 Monitor error 0010
5 Hardware monitoring responded 0020
6 Communications error 0040
10 User error 0400
If system errors occur, refer to the documentation for the digital SIMADYN D control system.
For hardware faults, all of the plug-in cables to the T300 should be withdrawn. If the fault/error re-occurs
after the drive converter is powered-down and up again, then replace the T300; this is also the case if fatal
system errors occur. Task administration errors (sampling time overruns) should only, if at all, occur
sporadically. They can then be acknowledged using the button at the top of the T300 front panel. Monitor
errors refer to the serial interface to a PC (symbolic monitor), and can be ignored, if not processed using
the SERVICE program. User errors cannot ooccur as these haven’t been programmed.
The pre-setting for the enable in H103 is 0429h, whereby communications- and monitor errors are
suppressed, i.e. they cannot lead to a fault trip.
3.1.13 Gain adaption, speed controller (function diagrams, A8)

A characteristic with two points allows the proportional gain of the speed controller in the basic drive
converter to be adapted as a function of any quantity. This is helpfull if no constant control parameters can
be found due to the complexity of the control loop. Frequently, a function can be found where the gain is
dependent on a control loop quantity and the problem can be reduced to an adaption for a linear control
loop.
The adaption is supplied with a selectable value, which is defined using H870. This is the input quantity for
a characteristic, which, dependent on its absolute value, defines the factor with which the speed controller
proportional gain is multiplied by in the converter.
Both points are defined using H871 and 872 and/or H873 and 874. A linear interpolation is made between
the points, and outside, the respective abscissa values remain constant.
H 874
H 872
-H 873 -H 871 H 871 H 873

0
H871 and 873 must be positive. Values between 0 and +19.999 are permitted as correction factors. The
actual correction factor is represented in d086 and in K162. Processing is realized in T1.
CUVC,CUMC: The following values are set on the T300, if the KP adaption is required;
H871, H872 = 0, H873 = 199,99% and H874 = 19,99%.
The KP adaption is then realized in the basic drive.
- refer also to CUVC,CUMC compendium, funktionblock 360

Manual
3.1.14 Generating a freely-definable status word (function diagrams, A9)

A free 16-bit word can be configured from any status signal. Every bit position can be assigned a
particular binary status signal of the module. This allows the user to configure individual, status words,
which can then be sent to an automation system or partner drive.
It may occur, that several bits (OR’ed) should be used for a control function. If these come from one and
the same source, then this can be simply realized by specifying a mask, in which these bits are set.
However, if bits from various sources are to be used, this can be realized by first gathering the relevant
signals in a free status word and then evaluating them as described.
The source- and mask parameters are assigned to the bit positions as follows:
Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Source Hxxx 801 803 805 807 809 811 813 815 817 819 821 823 825 827 829 831
Mask Hxxx 802 804 806 808 810 812 814 816 818 820 822 824 826 828 830 832
The free status word is located in K161 and d080 and is processed in T3.

Manual
3.1.15 Limit value monitors (function diagrams, A9)

The limit value monitors are used to compare process quantities with one another or with fixed threshold
values. Each of the four limit value monitors has, for this purpose, independent select parameters for the
two input quantities, signal and limit value. Further, one of the quantities can be filtered using a PT1 filter.
The limit value monitors are window comparitors,which require window size and hysteresis information.
The switching characteristic is shown in the following schematic.
G re ate r t ha n
Eq ua l to
Less t ha n
Not eq ua l to
W indow s ize
D iffe re nce
Hy ste re s is
0
The binary information from the limit value monitors, greater than, equal to, less than and not equal to are
combined in the status word limit value monitors (d098 and K160):
Bit Description
0 Signal, greater than lim. val., comparator 1
1 Signal, equal to limit value, comparator 1
2 Signal, less than lim. val., comparator 1
3 Signal, not equal to lim. val., comparator 1
The status word is processed in T3. However, as limit value monitors 3 and 4 are sampled in T5 it should
be noted, that their status signals are updated slower.

Manual
3.1.16 Motorized potentiometer (function diagrams, A10)

Two motorized potentiometers are included in the multi-motor module, which may be used as ramp-
function generator. For the ramp-function generator function, they have a setpoint input and a tracking
control input, which ensures that the ramp-function generator tracks this setpoint with a defined gradient.
For motorized potentiometer operation, there are commands for increase setpoint and decrease setpoint,
to set the motorized potentiometer to a connectable setting value, as well as a fast setting which changes-
over the ramp time for commands which are present for a longer period of time. Further, the motorized
potentiometer/ramp-function generator can be limited and scaled as required. The actual output value is
deposited in the NOVRAM where it is available, even after voltage failure.
3.1.17 Replacing peer to peer by SIMOLINK

In a multi-motor drive group with Compact Plus units, peer to peer communications is not possible,
whereby it is possible to replace the peer to peer functionality using SIMOLINK on the CUVC and CUMC
modules.
Using the transfer of the speed- and ratio setpoint via SIMOLINK and the operating setpoint and output of
the technology controller, we will briefly see how the basic drive and T300 are to be parameterized. The
SIMOLINK interface is inserted in slot A (upper slot). The example is the same for CUVC and CUMC. It is
assumed, that SIMOLINK was already commissioned in accordance with the basic drive Instruction
Manual (Compendium).
Setpoints sent from SIMOLINK to the T300 via the basic drive:
The speed setpoint n-set is available at connector K7001
The ratio setpoint is available at connector K7002.
• Transfer to T300, refer to function diagram, Sheet A1:
P734.7=7001: n-set is available at select value 1 from CU.
P734.8=7002: The ratio setpoint is available at select value 2 from CU.
• Connect the setpoints on the T300, refer to function diagram, Sheet D1:
H500 = 46, select speed- (main) setpoint
H506 = 47, select the ratio setpoint.
• Select the values on the T300, refer to function diagram, Sheet D1, Sheet C2 as well as Sheet A1:
The operating setpoint [D1] is available at send word 9 to CU [A1]: H896 = 107
The technology controller [C2] output is available at send word 10 to the CU [A1]: H897 = 138.
• Receiving the values on the basic drive:
The operating setpoint is available at K3009.
The technology controller output is available at K3010.
• Connect on SIMOLINK, words 1 and 2:
P751.01=3009
P751.02=3010.

Manual
3.2 Open-loop control (function diagrams, B.)

This part of the functional scope includes the binary signal handling. It powers the converter up and -
down, controls brakes and setpoints, monitors the drive, signals faults/errors and processes the
interlocking controls and checkback signals for multi-motor groups.
3.2.1 Powering-up the drive (function diagrams, B1)

The power-up command is selected with H200 (source) and H201 (mask). The drive is immediately
powered-up, if there is no power-down signal (fast stop, electrical off, standard stop or drive fault) and
operation is parameterized without the start sequence (H252=1).
3.2.2 Function, starting sequence (function diagrams, B1)

For large machines, it is not permissible that the drives are immediately powered-up. The responsible
regulatory bodies specify that a warning device is first actuated. The warning device comprises three
phases:
1. An accoustic signal is issued after the on button has been depressed for the signal time.
2. The signal time is followed by the delay time, where personnel, in the vicinity of the machine, have the
opportunity to leave the hazardous area.
3. In the ready time, a drive can be started by again depressing the on button.
The following table indicates the times specified by the Papiermacher-Berufsgenossenschaft (Regulatory
body for safety in paper- and paper finishing plants) (1).
Signal time Delay time Ready time
Paper machines, coating machines 5s 15s 30s
and similar large machines which can
be spread over several levels making it
difficult to have a complete overview
Slitter/winders, cross-cutters, calanders 3s 5s 30s
Information without guarantee
(1) Source: Explanations with diagrams for the accident prevention regulations “Paper manufacturing and finishing
machines" (VBG 7r) from the 1st October, 1985
The “start sequence” function allows an alarm starting device to be implemented together with a central
control (open-loop).
The start sequence is first initiated using parameter H252=0.
If a start command is now output, the control (open-loop) issues a start request. This is bit 0 in the control
status word (K145 and d020). This start request must be transferred to the central control via a binary
output, or the communications. The central control accepts the start request of the individual drives as
group signal. If there is no reason to prevent power-up, the central control outputs the start alarm
(generally a horn or siren). After a delay time, all drives are enabled.
The start enable signal is read-into the drive control via terminal or communications. The start enable
signal source is defined in H230/H231. If a start command is re-output within the ready time, the drive is
actually powered-up.
The start enable signal and start command (power-up pulse) are located in the control status word (bits 1
and 2).

Manual
Example
A start warning device is to be subsequently implemented, whereby the start command is entered via
binary input 1, and the start enable, via binary input 2. The start request is to be implemented via binary
output 1 with the central control.
The drives should be parameterized as follows:

H252=0Enable starting sequence
H200=69 Start command source is K069 (binary inputs)

H201=0001 Start command at binary input 1
H230=69 H069 is the source for the start enable (binary inputs)
H231=0002 Start enable at binary input 2
H833=146 K146 is the source for binary output 1 (control status word)
H834=0001 Bit 0 is output (start request)
Sta rt e na b le
Sta rt e na b le
B I2 B I2 B I2
Sta rt e na b le Sta rt e na b le Sta rt e na b le
C e nt ra l D riv e n-1 D riv e n Driv e n+ 1

co ntro l
B I1 B I1 B I1
Sta rt req uest Sta rt req uest Sta rt req uest
BQ 1 BQ 1 BQ 1
Sta rt a la rm
Sta rt req uest
Sta rt ing a la rm
S ire n
Sta rt ing seq ue nce
Sta rt re q ue st
Sta rt a la rm
Sta rt e na b le
S ig na l t im e De lay t im e Re ady t im e
t
3.2.3 Enabling local operation (function diagrams, B1)

The no local operation signal is selected using H218 (source) and H219 (mask). It allows the local
operating modes to be inhibited, which could come, for example, from a key-actuated switch, or as control
bit from the automation via the bus. Zero is pre-assigned, i.e., the local operating modes are enabled.

Manual
3.2.4 Inching 1 / inching 2 (function diagrams, B1)

Two binary signals are provided for drive inching, each of which has its own setpoint. Inching 1 (H220
source, H221 mask, H538 setpoint) and inching 2 (H222 source, H223 mask, H539 setpoint) power-up
the drive which receives its setpoint as long as the inching command is active. In order to prevent multiple
power-up/down (main contactor wear), the drive is not immediately powered-down when the inching
command becomes inactive, but only after a time, which can be set in H253.
Further, H256 can be used to define, as to whether the drive should brake along the ramp-function
generator ramp for local setpoints, when the inching key is released, or should only coast-down with
controller inhibit.
3.2.5 No regenerative feedback (function diagrams, B1)

The no regenerative feedback parameter H250 is not a general inhibit for regenerative feedback, but only
defines the characteristics at fast stop. If the parameter value is 1, the drive is immediately powered-down
with the fast stop command; otherwise, it brakes down to standstill along the braking characteristic.
Note:
The converter is able to limit the active regenerative feedback power, which ensures that, even without a
braking unit or regenerative inverter, that the maximum DC link voltage is not exceeded when the motor is
regenerating (generator operation). This assumes that the pre-control (feed-forward control) is correctly
set (maximum active regenerative power P233).
If 6SE70 converters are operated as individual drive converters, parameter H250 can be generally set and
remain at 0.
For a common DC link bus it may be desirable that the drives do not brake, thus preventing overvoltage
conditions on the DC link. In this case, parameter H250 is set to 1.
3.2.6 Standard stop/fast stop/electrical off (function diagrams, B2)

The standard stop function (H202 source and H203 mask) brakes the drive down to standstill using the
triggerable ramp-function generator. In addition to the ramp, at low speeds, the brake torque is reduced,
in order to prevent the drive going through zero speed and reversing in the oppositve direction
(overshoot).
Electrical off (H204 source and H206 mask) cause the drive to be immediately powered-down. The drives
then coast down and immediately go into a no-torque condition.
Note:
Electrical off does not mean that the drive is also isolated from the line supply. If this is required, then a
main contactor must be used. Drives, which are connected to a common DC link, are still under voltage
(live) even after electrical off.
For fast stop (H206 source and H207 mask), the setpoint is immediately switched to zero, and the drive is
braked along the torque limit according to the braking characteristic.

Manual
3.2.7 Braking control (function diagrams, B2)
H254 must be set to 1 [B1.6] if the drive has standstill- or holding brakes. Thus, an additional part of the
control becomes active, which coordinates the control of the brakes and the internal control (drive on/off,
setpoint enable etc.).
The time between the open brake command and the brake actually being released so that the drive can
rotate, is defined as the opening time, and must be entered in H271. It comprises the delays of possibly
connected intermediate control elements, control valves, and the brake itself (note, it is generally not
favorable to connect intermediate logic, as only the drive can actually control the brakes. From
experience, any additional logic conditions lead to problems).
The command to open the brake is output after controller enable. The setpoint is enabled after the
opening time has expired.
The time between the close brake command and the instant when the brake actually becomes effective, is
known as the closing time and this time is entered in H272. Generally, it is longer than the opening time.
The command to close the brake is output with zero speed, and after the closing time has expired, the
drive is powered-down.
The following sequence is the standard sequence for starting and stopping.
drive on
controller enable
open brake
setpoint enable Topen

Tclose
zero speed
start stop
The braking control mode is defined in H255. A total of 4 settings are defined:
Mode Close brake at electrical off: Close brake when a fault condition occurs:
1 at zero speed at zero speed
2 immediately at zero speed
3 at zero speed immediately
4 immediately immediately
Thus, the brake can be defined to be either a pure standstill brake or as holding brake with emergency
function.
3.2.8 Setpoint/inverter enable (function diagrams, B3)

The inverter is only enabled, if the drive is powered-up, and in addition, an inverter enable signal is
present (H208 source and H209 mask). This can be permanently set to 1, if it is not required (pre-setting).
The same is true for the setpoint enable control signal (source H214 and mask 215). If this bit is low, then
the setpoint in the converter is set to zero, the triggerable ramp-function generator is set to the actual
value and if required, the central ramp-function generator is set to zero.

Manual
3.2.9 Group control (open-loop) (function diagrams, B2)

If a group is defined (H251 set to 1), then a checkback signal must be defined via H232 (source) and
H233 (mask). This signal only enables the setpoint, if all of the group drives are powered-up, and are
ready to accept torque. An AND logic function is required.
P24
K n- 1
C hec kbac k s ig na l C hec kbac k s ig na l C hec kbac k s ig na l
Kn
D rive n- 1 D riv e n D riv e n+ 1
K n+ 1
Ready s ig na l Ready s ig na l Ready s ig na l
K n- 1 Kn K n+ 1
M24 M24 M24
The checkback signal only becomes high, if all of the drives signal ready. The internal inverter enable
signal can be used (bit 9, control status word K145).
Parameter H256 defines whether the drive should brake when inching. If the inching command becomes
ineffective, the setpoint ramps down to zero along the setpoint ramp-function generator ramp. If H256 is
set to 1, the drive coasts-down, because the speed controller is immediately inhibited with the inching
command. Otherwise, the speed controller remains active down to zero speed.
3.2.10 Operating mode selection (function diagrams, B4)

Seven local operating modes are available for local operation or individual drive operation. The setpoints
are specified at H531 to H539. Three operating mode bits, are used to make the selection, which are
defined using parameters H224/225 (bit 0), H226/227 (bit 1) and H228/229 (bit 2).
MSK
H 224 H225
MSK
H226 H227
MSK
H228 H229
Lo ca l o pe r. m ode s B it 2 B it 1 B it 0 S et po int
- 0 0 0 O pe rat ing setpo int
Lo ca l 1 0 0 1 H5 3 1
Lo ca l 2 0 1 0 H5 32
Lo ca l 3 0 1 1 H5 3 3
Lo ca l 4 1 0 0
Lo ca l 5 1 0 1 H5 3 5
H 534
Lo ca l 6 1 1 0 H5 36
Lo ca l 7 1 1 1 H5 3 7

Manual
Preferably, binary-coded selector switches are provided to select the operating modes. Generally, far
fewer statuses are required. In this case, local 1 (operating mode, bit 0), local 2 (operating mode bit 1) and
local 4 (operating mode bit 2), which can be selected via an individual bit, can serve as preferred local
operating modes.
The operating mode word (K142) is then used to select the appropriate setpoints of the local operating
modes and the inching function.
Operating mode code Setpoint
0 No local setpoint selected (operating setpoint)
1 Local fixed setpoint 1
4 Local setpoint 4
8 Inching setpoint 1
9 Inching setpoint 2

Manual
3.2.11 Generating the fault word (function diagrams, B5

All of the signals are combined in the error word, which can lead to the drives being shutdown with a fault
message. All of the error causes (with the exception of the overspeed fault) are provided with a time delay
and can be suppressed using a mask (H270).
Bit in error word (d022) Designation Time delay Enable signal in H270
0 Fault, CB communications H257 0001h
1 Fault, CU communications H258 0002h
2 Fault, converter checkb. signal H259 0004h
3 Fault, checkb. signal, group H264 0008h
4 Fault, peer communications H263 0010h
5 External fault H262 0020h
6 Overspeed, positive - 0040h
7 Overspeed, negative - 0080h
8 Anti-stall protection H269 0100h
The external fault can be parameterized using H260 (source) and H261 (mask) and is only effective, if the
drive is powered-up.
The overspeed threshold is specified in H265, and acts the same for both directions of rotation.
Anti-stall protection responds, if the speed setpoint lies above limit value H267, the torque actual value is
greater than H268, and the speed actual value H266 has still not been exceeded.
The fault word can be monitored in d022 and can be transferred as K141. Bits 9 to 15 in the word which
are not used are then zero.
3.2.12 Generating the status word (function diagrams, B6)

Important control signals are located in the status word, for example, start request, braking, zero speed,
drive on, local operation, fault and release brake. The control status word lies in d020 and K146.
3.2.13 Generating the alarm word (function diagrams, B6)

Contrary to the fault word, the alarm word contains the instantaneous monitoring signals. They are
available for direct evaluation. With the exception of the overspeed signals, which are not required in the
alarm word, the assignment is the same as the error word. In addition, an external alarm 2, is located in bit
15, which can be selected using H246/247.
Bit in alarm word (d023) Designation Enable signal in H248
0 Fault, CB communications 0001h
1 Fault, CU communications 0002h
2 Fault, converter checkback 0004h
3 Fault, checkback group 0008h
4 Fault, peer communications 0010h
5 External fault 0020h
8 Anti-stall protection 0100h
15 No external alarm 2 8000h
The status of all of the alarms is indicated in display parameter d023. The alarm word is deposited in K145
after filtering with H248. A signal is sent to the converter (bit 13, control word 2) if at least one bit is set in
the alarm word.

Manual
3.3 Technological control (function diagrams, C.)

The technological controller offers all of the functions for the tension- and position controller as well as for
other technological control loops.
3.3.1 Switching the technological control on/off (function diagrams, C1)

The technological control can be switched on/off using a key function or a direct control signal.
Two binary signals are available for switch-on/off (H404/405 and H406/407 for on, H408/409 and
H410/411 for off). These are OR’d and are high-active.
A direct on/off signal can be entered via H453. The high signal switches the technological control on and a
low signal off.
3.3.2 Generating the technological setpoint (function diagrams, C1) )

The technological setpoint source is selected using H400 and adapted using H401. A fixed supplementary
setpoint can be injected using H422, which can be used for example, as a minimum tension signal or
similar. The thus generated setpoint is fed via a ramp-function generator. The ramp-up- (H425) and ramp-
down time (H426) can be parameterized just like the upper- (H423) and lower limit (H424). The final
technological setpoint is deposited in d034 and k130.
3.3.3 Generating the technological actual value (function diagrams, C1)

The actual value is read-in via H402. Adaption is possible using H403. If H431 is set to 1, a fixed value is
added, which allows offset compensation to be realized.
Automatic offset adjustment is activated when H431 is set to zero. This is activated using a control
command, which is selected via H428/429. The smoothed actual value is available at a changeover switch
if the actual value is zero (if there is no material web for tension measurements). If the control signal
becomes active, this value is stored in a memory and subtracted from the actual value, i.e. the offset is
adjusted. The offset can be accessed at K132.
3.3.4 Technological controller (function diagrams, C2)

The technological controller is a PID controller. It has two parameter sets and can be selected using a
control signal (H412/413):
Parameter set 1 Parameter set 2 Display in

Control signal 0 1 K136.1
Actual value smoothing H414 H415 d030
Proportional gain H416 H417 d031
Integral action time H418 H419 d032
Derivative action time H420 H421 d033
The proportional gain is adapted via a characteristic. The characteristic provides a factor (d037) with
which the actual gain is multiplied. Thus, the controller gain is dynamically adapted and can result in
significant improvements for non-linear control loops:
F ac to r
H 445
H 443
A d a p tio n q u an tity
H442 H444

Manual
The adaption quantity (selected using H441) is a suitable process quantity, which is either sourced from
an analog input or from the automation, or is already in the drive. Often, the setpoint-actual value
difference (K133) can be used for this purpose.
The controller operating modes can be selected. The derivative action time (D component) is enabled, if
H432 is set to 1. The controller operates as a pure I controller if H435 is set to 1. The integral- and
differential components are available in K134 and K135 respectively.
The technological controller is provided with switchable limits (H436/437 for the upper limit, H438/439 for
the lower limit), which can be selected with the technological controller on status. The complete controller
is enabled with the on-command, or continuously with H440=1. Thus, the following operating mode is
possible, which often occurs for machines which have closed-loop tension control:
The controller is parameterized with H440=1, which means that it is always active, independent of the
power-on status. The technological controller corrects the drive speed. The controller limits are set, so that
the controller cannot accelerate the drives when it is disabled, which means that the upper limit H436 is
zero. Thus, the drive speed remains constant while the material web is being threaded. However, if the
operator has set this limit too high, the tension would increase significantly. If the negative limit is open
(H438=-100%), the controller can intervene by reducing the tension by reducing the speed (slack-off).
Thus, the operator is supported.
If the control is now switched-in, the limits are completely removed (H437=100% and H439=-100%). The
controller can now operate over the complete range.
The controller output can be observed at display parameter d036. Its output is additionally fed through a
de-coupling filter (PT1), whose time constant can be set using H447.
The technological controller is provided with a characteristic droop which allows a type of P controller to be
made from the integral controller. It then manifests steady-state control deviations like a P controller, but
has dynamic control characteristics similar to a PI controller.
A speed influence for the technological controller is generated via multiplier H450. Depending on the
particular material, various factors may be required. As a general rule of thumb, twice the stretch value
should be entered at full tension. This provides the controller with sufficient reserve for dynamic
operations. The speed correction value is available at d039 or K138 for further use but is already
connected as supplementary setpoint. Thus, H450 must be set to zero if the speed influence is not
required.
If the particular drive group is located in front of the master drive in the machine line-up, the control sense
must be changed. The tension can only be increased by reducing the line speed and vice versa. Thus,
factor H450 is entered with a negative polarity.
Using an additional factor (H448) a pre-control value (d038) is derived from the direct technological
setpoint, and this is used to derive, together with the smoothed controller output, a torque setpoint, via a
second factor (H449). This is also available at a connector (K137) and is already connected to a summing
point in the torque generation function. Thus, H427 must be set to zero, if the torque influence is not
required.
The filter of the controller setpoint with H427 is used to de-couple the pre-control and controller and is
important. It must be the sum of the time constants of the complete technological control loop (closed-loop
speed control + closed-loop torque control + smoothing, technological actual value). It prevents overshoot
for fast setpoint changes. On the other hand, without pre-control (H448=0%), the time constant must be
kept to the lowest possible value.

Manual
3.3.5 Generating the status word, technological control (function diagrams, C3)
The technological status word combines several important status signals from the closed-loop
technological control. It is deposited in K136.
Range violation of the automatic offset adjustment is signaled in the status word. This range is defined by
the width, entered in H446, around zero.
Bit in the status word Designation

0 Closed-loop technological control switched-in
1 Controller parameter set 2 active
2 Setpoint ramp-function generator output equals the input
3 Setpoint at the upper limit
4 Setpoint at the lower limit
5 Controller at the upper limit
6 Controller at the lower limit
7 Offset greater than the positive limit value
8 Offset greater than the negative limit value
Bits 9 to 15 which are not used are permanently assigned zero.

Manual
3.4 Generating the line speed setpoint (function diagrams, D.)

The line speed (web speed) and speed setpoint are generated in this module section.
3.4.1 Main setpoint selection (function diagrams, D1)

The main setpoint is selected using H500. Adaption can be realized using H501 and a shift, using H502. It
is available at d045 and K100 for further processing. It serves, both as input quantity for the machine
ramp-function generator as well as direct setpoint for groups, which receive their setpoint from the
machine master drive.
H513 is used to make the setting. If the parameter value is 1, the setpoint is taken from the machine
ramp-function generator, otherwise, directly from the main setpoint source. The selected setpoint is
available at K106.
3.4.2 Central ramp-function generator (function diagrams, D1)

The central ramp-function generator specifies the speed ramp for the complete machine, and is only
parameterized for the machine master drive The central ramp-function generator is the source for the
setpoint cascade and the machine acceleration. The setpoints are transferred to the individual converters
via the peer-to-peer coupling.
The central ramp-function generator has independent ramp-up- (H515) and ramp-down times (H516), as
well as initial- (H517) and final rounding-off functions (H518). These are defined as follows:
100%
|v |
0%
Th Tr t
dV/dt
0%
Tvh T vr T h ... R am p-up tim e H 51 5 t
T r ... R am p-dow n tim e H 51 6
T vh ... R ound.-off tim e for ram p-up tim e H 51 7 Tvh Tvr
T vr ... R ound.-off tim e for ram p-dn. tim e H 51 8
From experience, 10% of the ramp-up time is entered for the rounding-off time.
The acceleration signal (K105) is normalized via H521. The minimum ramp-up time (or ramp-down time)
of the machine (accelerating-decelerating time) are entered there. Thus, for a 100% acceleration signal,
the ramp-time (accelerating time) is a minimum. The accelerating value is valid for the complete machine.
Inertia compensation is separately executed in each individual drive.
Note:
If each of the individual drives has inertia compensation, the acceleration signal normalization may no
longer be changed. This is also not necessary, as even if the acceleration time is reduced, a correct
acceleration signal is generated as the signal range is only limited at 200%.
Specifically: The acceleration time can be reduced by about half after calibration.
If this is not sufficient, inertia compensation must be re-executed, or the determined values must be
converted for the new normalization.

Manual
The ramp-function generator can be held (acceleration interrupted) via a signal, defined with H212
(source) and H213 (mask). The ramp-function generator ramps to that value which the output had at the
instant that the hold signal was activated. Ramp-up or ramp-down is continued if the hold signal is de-
activated.
The ramp-function generator can be enabled using a binary signal which can be selected with H210/211.
A zero appears at the ramp-function generator output if the bit is inactive.
Further, the machine ramp-function generator has two operating modes. If the drive is powered-down, it
may be necessary to enter a setpoint for all of the other drives of the complete machine (e.g. a paper
machine). H514 should then be set to 0. If the machine ramp-function generator must also generate a
zero with the drive powered-down, as machine operation is no longer possible without this drive, then
H514 is set to 1.
The machine ramp-function generator output is available at K104 or d046.
3.4.3 Speed ratios (function diagrams, D1)

A ratio factor is applied to the speed setpoint here. This is a factor with which the speed setpoint is
multiplied. Thus, web stretching can be compensated, which is relevant for paper, fibers and plastic foils.
The ratio is selected from the connector list via H506, and adapted using H507 (gain) and H508 (offset). It
is located in d047 and K102.
For ratios greater than 200%, the internal arithmetic calculations go to a limit. Thus, for such cases, the
recipricol of the ratio can be entered which is then used for the division operation. H522 is set to 1 to
realize this.
The corrected speed setpoint can be seen in d048.
3.4.4 Slack take-up/slack-off (function diagrams, D1)

When threading the web it is helpful, if a low speed supplementary setpoint is temporarily injected for the
drive. This allows a web sag to be removed (supplementary setpoint positive: Slack take-up) or allows
tension to be decreased (supplementary setpoint negative: Slack-off). The polarities are inverted for drives
located in front of the machine master drive.
There are control signals and setpoints having the same names for this purpose. The appropriate
parameters are as listed below:
Source Mask Setpoint
Slack take-up H524 H525 H526
Slack-off H527 H528 H529
H523 can be used to define whether the setpoints are to be used for slack take-up or slack-off, as a
function of the speed. However, generally it is simpler to use constant supplementary setpoints, as sag
take-up is always executed at the same rate, independent of the actual machine line speed.
H530 then defines whether and how significantly the supplementary setpoints should be smoothed, before
they become effective in the main setpoint channel. This makes the drive response somewhat softer.
The so-called operating setpoint can then be found in d049 and in K107.
3.4.5 Supplementary setpoint selection (function diagrams, D2)

The speed influence of the technological controller as well as a supplementary setpoint are added to the
operating setpoint. The supplementary setpoint can be selected using H503, adapted using H504 and
shifted using H505. It is pre-assigned 0 for the factory setting. It is located in d050 and K101.
The result of the summation of the operating setpoint, technological controller and supplementary setpoint
is available in d051 and K108.

Manual
3.4.6 Local setpoints (function diagrams, B4 and D2)

The local setpoints are selected according to the selection made in the control. Setpoint 4 can also be
variable, if, for example, it is supplied from an analog input. Thus, it can be used to implement a
positioning- or a manouvering function.
All of the local operating modes are fed through their own ramp-function generator, so that setpoint
changes are smoothed. The ramp-up and ramp-down times are defined in H540/541 and are pre-
assigned 10 seconds. The actual effective local setpoint can be taken from d052.
The changeover between a local and the operating setpoint is realized in the drive control. The signals
from the operating mode selector switch (operating mode bits), the no local operation signal to inhibit the
local function function as well as the fast stop and standard stop are taken into account.
Note:
Local operating modes only result in a setpoint changeover, however, they do not power-up the drive. If a
local setpoint is selected while a drive is running, the speed setpoint is ramped to the local setpoint via the
triggerable ramp-function generator. If the operating mode word becomes zero (no local operating mode
selected), the drive ramps-down to the available operating setpoint along the ramp of the triggerable
ramp-function generator.
3.4.7 Triggerable ramp-function generator (function diagrams, D2)

The triggerable ramp-function generator controls the drive smoothly from the actual setpoint to the new
setpoint when an operating mode is changed. However, in standard operation, it is ineffective, and
transfers setpoints directly to the controller. It is defined via the ramp-up time (H542) and ramp-down time
(H543). Its output signal can be monitored at d053.
3.4.8 Droop compensation (function diagrams, D2)

If a droop factor is parameterized for a drive in the basic drive converter (CUVC,CUMC:P246; CU2:P248),
the speed is influenced dependent on the torque:
This is shown in the following diagram.
10 0 %
S pee d
Pure P I co nt ro lle r
D ro o p
(C UV C ,C U M C : P24 6 ;
C U2 : P24 8 )
P I c o nt ro lle r
w it h d ro o p
T o rq ue
The droop compensation allows the droop characteristic, set in the basic drive converter, to be shifted as
far as its operating point is concerned. Thus, the slave drive can also participate in driving the load.
A supplementary speed is added to the speed setpoint from the triggerable ramp-function generator. This
is the product of the master drive torque setpoint and the factor for the droop compensation (H510). The
droop (CUVC,CUMC:P246; CU2:P248) set in the slave drive is entered in H510.

Manual
Thus, the following characteristic is obtained:

S pee d
10 0 %
T o rq ue setpo int f ro m t he
m aste r d riv e AP Pure P I co nt ro lle r
D ro o p
(C UV C ,C U M C : P24 6
C U2 : P24 8 )
C o m pe ns at io n d ro o p
P I c o nt ro lle r w it h
d ro o p
T o rq ue
This means that the drive speed is flexible around its operating point, and therefore does not exert any
disturbing influence on the master drive. The load level for the slave drive is however specified by the
master drive.
The droop on control command for the droop function is selected via H511 (source) and H512 (mask).
Generally, this signal is received from a limit switch or similar, which signals the drive, that the load
distribution conditions are available. If the signal is a 1, the droop function in the converter is enabled, and
the compensation simultaneously activated.
3.4.9 Setpoint smoothing (function diagrams, D2)

The speed setpoint is fed through a filter block (PT1). In a drive group consisting of many drives this is
practical, as following errors can thus be eliminated which could occur while accelerating due to different
speed actual value smoothing functions. If the smoothing of the speed channel is entered as reference
smoothing (H547), then all of the groups run in synchronism and with the same web lengths. The
smoothed setpoint can be monitored at d056.
3.4.10 Speed setpoint generation (function diagrams, D2)

A speed setpoint (K111) is generated from the line speed setpoint by multiplying it by a diameter/gearbox
factor. The factor is the same as was already used when generating the internal speed actual value. It is
defined in H157.
3.4.11 Bias (function diagrams, D2)

A supplementary setpoint, which acts directly and instantaneousy on the speed controller, is required for
the bias and limiting load distribution version. It forces the speed controller to one of the limits, which is
controlled.
The bias setpoint is entered into H546. It is added to the speed setpoint using the load distribution on
signal. The bias setpoint can be monitored at d055 and k110. The result, the speed setpoint at the
controller in the converter, is available at d057 and K112. From here, it is sent to the basic drive converter.

Manual
3.5 Torque setpoint generation (function diagrams, E.)

This part of the standard software package generates the torque setpoints and limits and ensures that
operating mode changeovers are smooth.
3.5.1 Friction characteristic (function diagrams, E1)

The friction compensation controls the speed-dependent torque loss of the drive. The friction
compensation only has a low influence on the drive dynamic performance.
However, it becomes interesting if the torque, which is transferred from the drive to the material or slave
drives, shall be precisely defined.
This is, for example, the case with:
- indirect closed-loop web tension control (i.e. without web tension actual value)
- for drives which are mechanically coupled with one another
In this case, it is possible to increase the steady-state characteristics using friction compensation.
For drives, which have a high level of friction, inertia compensation is only practical, if the friction
characteristic is known.
Note:
The friction characteristic is very dependent on temperature and aging. Thus, the characteristics should
be measured (plotted) under operating conditions.
The friction characteristics are very dependent on the drive version. There are no generally valid equations
for frictional torque. Although it generally consists of fixed components and a speed-proportional
component, it can also have a square-law characteristic (air resistance) or, for example, for oil-filled
bearings, very complex functions.
For this reason, a six-point characteristic is available. The abscissa and ordinate values can be freely
parameterized, whereby practically all occuring situations can be handled.
Parameters H700, 702, 704, 706, 708 and 710 are speed points, H701, 703, 705, 707, 709 and 711 the
associated friction torques. The characteristic is linearly interpolated between the points, and outside the
range, defined by the points, the characteristic is horizontal. Negative values are also permitted in all of
the parameters so that reversing drives can be handled.
Frict io na l to rq ue
H7 1 1
H7 0 9
H7 0 7
H7 0 5
H7 0 3
H7 0 1
Line s pee d
H7 02 H 7 06 H7 10
H7 0 0 H7 04 H7 0 8
The calculated frictional torque is available as connector 154 and can be monitored at d065.
The friction characteristic is determined as follows:
The drive is operated at various speeds in the speed-controlled range (e.g. 0%, 20%, 40%, etc.), and the
steady-state torque determined after stabilization (a curve can then be generated, which can be stored in
the characteristic). The 6 points can be placed so that the pre-control represents the actual characteristic
with sufficient accuracy.

Manual
It is also possible to immediately switch the frictional torque as supplementary torque (H892 to 154), and
to adjust the speed controller output (r245) to zero at the set speed points, by changing the particular
friction value.
For reversing drives, the friction torque must also be determined in the negative direction of rotation, and
also entered as negative value into the characteristic.
From experience, the frictional torques lie below 5% of the rated motor torque.
3.5.2 Inertia compensation (function diagrams, E1)

The pre-control of the accelerating torque relieves the controller for speed changes. Normally the speed
controller must first establish torque for acceleration, due to a setpoint-actual value difference, it is now
calculated and pre-controlled (feed-forward control). In this case, the controller must only inject very low
correcting torques, if the pre-control torque is not exactly correct.
The accelerating torque is generated by multiplying the accelerating setpoint (can be selected using H712)
by the moment of inertia (selected using H717). Adjustment can be realized using H718.
If there is no accelerating setpoint, then it can be calculated by differentiating the speed. In this case,
H714 is set to 1. Thus, the signal, searched for using H712, becomes the speed signal which is then
differentiated. H713 defines at which ramp-up time (= time to change by 100%) of the speed signal, the
acceleration is 100%.
In order that the mathematical relationship between speed and acceleration remains correct, also when
using the speed setpoint smoothing (H547), the accelerating torque can also be smoothed with H730. In
this case, the torque time constant should be as high as the speed time constant.
The accelerating torque is represented at d068 and K150.
3.5.3 Supplementary torque selection (function diagrams, E1)

A supplementary torque can be added to the torque setpoint. Thus, the drive torque can be influenced by
technological pre-controls or interventions of external.
The connector is selected with H715 and H716 determines the factor which is used to weight the
supplementary torque.
The sum of the frictional torque, accelerating torque, technological controller torque and supplementary
torque results in the torque setpoint, which is available at d069 and K151 for further processing. For pure
closed-loop speed controlled drives, it is switched to the controller in the drive converter as additive
supplementary setpoint. This is also the pre-setting for the sender to the CU.
3.5.4 Torque generation for slaves (function diagrams, E2)

The load distribution versions are explained in detail in Section 3.7. The implementation of the torque
limits in the software is now discussed.
For load distribution with bias and limiting, the load component (can be selected with H719) is read-in
from the master. It is then corrected with a torque ratio. The factor (defined by H720) generally comes
from a potentiometer, with which the operator can set the load distribution. It can also be a function of a
process quantity.
The slave component is contained in d070 and K155, and can either be immediately effective as torque
limiting (the same electrical torques), or it can be previously provided with the friction- and accelerating
torque (the same output torques). In this case, H721 must be set to 0 or 1.
If load distribution is inactive, the torque limits are opened. They are in this case defined with H722
(positive limit) or H723 (negative limit). These values are valid for the non-controlled limit when the load
distribution is active.

Manual
The actual limit which is controlled depends on the torque setpoint polarity. Generally, for positive bias, it
is the positive torque limit. If the setpoint goes negative (e.g. if the drive reduces the line speed), the bias
is inverted, and the negative torque limit controlled.
3.5.5 Braking characteristic (function diagrams, E2)

If the fast stop function becomes active, the speed setpoint is switched to zero. Thus, the speed controller
jumps to one of the limits. These are now symmetrically entered, according to the braking characteristic
as a function of the drive speed. The drive brakes until the torques limits are reduced at a low speed.
Thus, the speed rate of change is always lower the closer the speed approaches zero, and the braking
torque has an approximately square-law characteristic.
This allows soft braking characteristics to be achieved and prevents the drive from overshooting at
standstill.
The sequence (standard operation, fast stop with transition to braking torque by the ramp-function
generator, braking, braking torque reduction and shutdown) are illustrated in the following diagram:
O perating torque
0 H 72 5
t
T orque lim its from

H 72 7 the braking char.
T rig g e ra ble
ram p-function generator
N orm al operation Trans ition to the B raking with B rak ing torqu e S hutdow n
brak ing c harac teris tic brak ing torque reduc tion
The maximum braking torque is defined using H727. The braking torque is linearly reduced to the value
entered in H725, starting from a speed, defined by H726 (e.g. 5%) (it is recommended that zero is entered
here). The drive should come to a standstill without overshoot, with the drive factory settings. H724 can be
increased if this is not correct. Further, the width of the window for the zero speed signal (H158) can be
increased so that the drive shuts down faster.
The braking torque can be read at d072, which would be effective for braking the drive at a specific speed.

Manual
3.5.6 Triggerable torque ramp-function generator (function diagrams, E2)

The triggerable ramp-function generator ensures that torque changes are soft. Thus, jolts are eliminated if
there is play in gearboxes and couplings; torsional vibrations are not excited.
It is set to the torque actual value when the load distribution is switched in and out and when switching into
the fast stop status and is then transferred to the new value with a defined gradient. After this, it is no
longer effective as long as the setpoints are transferred unchanged.
There are two different ramps for torque changes. The time, parameterized with H728 is valid for 100%
torque change for load distribution, and the time set in H729, corresponding for fast stop. The drive should
estabalish the braking current without causing gearbox jolts. It may be necessary to increase the time if
there is considerable gearbox play. The effective time can be monitored in d073.
The torque limits, generated by the ramp-function generator, can be retrieved at connectors K152
(positive torque limit) and K153 (negative torque limit). They are directly transferred to the converter per
factory setting.

Manual
3.6 Freely available functions (function diagrams, F.)

The freely-available functions are not technologically pre-assigned. They can be used, when required at
any location. There are wide range of arithmetic and control-related functions available. They are intended
to supplement the existing sub-functions of the multi-motor module.
3.6.1 Fixed setpoints (function diagrams, F1)

In order to assign fixed values to technological setpoints, there are a number of connectors which are
each assigned a parameter. They form a group starting at K000 to K019 and a further group from K200 to
K216. The first three connectors are permanently assigned 0% (or 0000h), 100% (4000h) and FFFFh, and
cannot be parameterized. All others are pre-assigned 0%. The last two fixed setpoints are defined as V2
quantities, i.e. hexadecimal values can be specified there (e.g. as masks for bit inversion, etc.)
3.6.2 Monitoring parameters (function diagrams, F1)

There are 4 free select display parameters in addition to the permanently assigned display parameters.
These are provided with multiplexers which permit the connector to be selected from the connector list
and displayed.
Monitoring parameter Select parameter
d081 H875
d082 H876
d083 H877
d084 H878
3.6.3 Freely-available functions in T3 (function diagrams, F2)

The functions in T3 are:
1 inverter, 1 adder, 1 subtracter, 1 multiplier, 1 divider, 1 limiter, 1 changeover switch, 1 filter and 1
position difference counter.
Adders: The output is limited to +199.9939% and -200.0000%.
Subtractors: The output is limited to +199.9939% and -200.0000%.
Multipliers: The following rule is valid 100%x100%=100%. Examples: 100%x50%=50%, 50%x50%=25%
etc.
Dividers: The following rule is valid 100%:100%=100%. Examples: 80%:50%=160%, 10%:10%=100% etc.
Changeover switch: The output assumes the value of the first input if the control signal is low. Otherwise,
the value of the second input appears at the changeover switch output.
Filters: The filter time is multiple of the sampling time and proportional to the input quantity. For 0.0061%
(1 bit) it is 1xTa, for 0.0122% (2 bits) 2xTa, etc.
Position difference counter: This generates the position difference between the position actual values of
the two pulse evaluations: Difference=length-[length 2x(H686/H687)]. A ratio can be adjusted with H686
(numerator) and H687 (denominator). 100% difference then corresponds to 16384 counted pulses, which,
for pulse quadrupling, is 4096 pulses at the pulse encoder.

Manual
3.6.4 Freely-available functions in T4 (function diagrams, F2 - F4)

The functions in T4 are:
2 inverters, 2 adders, 2 subtractors, 2 multipliers, 2 dividers, 2 limiters, 2 changeover switches, 2 filters, 1
absolute value generator, 1 square root extracter, 1 maximum evaluater, 1 minimum evaluater, 1
sinusoidal function, 4 word - EXOR logic gates, 1 flashing frequency generator, 1 flashing word.
Adders: The output is limited to +199.9939% and -200.0000%.
Subtractors: The output is limited to +199.9939% and -200.0000%.
Multipliers: The following rule is valid 100%x100%=100%. Examples: 100%x50%=50%, 50%x50%=25%
etc.
Dividers: The following rule is valid 100%:100%=100%. Examples: 80%:50%=160%, 10%:10%=100% etc.
Changeover switches: The output assumes the value of the first input if the control signal is low.
Otherwise, the value of the second input appears at the converter output.
Filters: The filter time is multiple of the sampling time and proportional to the input quantity. For 0.0061%
(1 bit) it is 1xTa, for 0.0122% (2 bits) 2xTa, etc.
Absolute value generators: The output value is the absolute input value. For a negative input value, a bit is
set, which is also included in the status word.
Square root extracters: The square-root function generates a 0 at the output for a negative input value.
The bit in the status word is then set.
Maximum evaluaters: The evaluater supplies the highest (i.e. the most positive) of the two input quantities.
Minimum evaluaters: The evaluater provides the lowest (i.e. the most negative) of the two input quantities.
Sinusoidal function: The sinusoidal function covers a range from -100% to 100%. The amplitude is 100%.
100%
-100%
100%
-100%
EXOR logic operation: The input words are bitwise logically combined.
Flashing frequency: The flashing frequency generates a flashing flag in bit 0 and in the opposite cycle, a
flashing flag in bit 1 of the connector. The interval is approximately 1 second.
Flashing word: The flashing word generates flashing bits in the connector at the positions at which the
input word has active bits. The interval can be parameterized.
3.6.5 Status word, freely-available functions (function diagrams, F5)

Several important binary statuses are assigned to a status word (K299).
3.6.6 Free function blocks CUVC, CUMC

Free blocks can be used in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES CUVC and CUMC, to realise additional function
( logic functions with logic blocks, calculation with numeric function blocs... ).
than 5 - 10%.

Manual
3.7 Load distribution

Load distribution is required if drives are mechanically coupled. The function is intended to distribute the
overall mechanical load to the individual drives in defined proportions.
3.7.1 General information

The load distribution function allows two or several drives, coupled either mechanically or through the
material web (e.g. S rolls) to be operated in parallel. In this case, one drive is defined as master, which
has the closed-loop speed control function for the complete drive group. The other drives (slaves) track
the controlling drive (speed), and the load is distributed among them with an adjustable ratio.
In the following text, a two-drive group is assumed (one master and one slave), however, the function is
basically the same as if several slaves were involved.
There are various techniques in order to achieve torque distribution. The simplest way is to transfer the
master torque setpoint to the slave. However, this is only possible if it can be assumed, that the
mechanical coupling between the drives can never be disconnectedd. However, in actual applications this
only occurs seldomly. The mechanical connections are almost always related to pressure (presses,
calanders), or if another connecting element is present (felt, wire, material web, etc), so that it can be
assumed that at some stage this connection will be broken in an uncontrolled fashion.
Thus, a safe drive status must also be provided for this case; the main priority is that the drive musn’t be
allowed to accelerate uncontrolled. This is achieved by maintaining the closed-loop speed control of the
controlled drive. The load component is set by manipulating the speed setpoint (droop and compensation)
or the current limiting (bias and limiting). This technique will now be explained.
3.7.2 Droop and compensation

The basic concept behind this technique is two speed-controlled drives operating in parallel. If controllers,
with integral component, are used in both drives, then the smallest error in the actual value adjustment is
summed and the controllers drift in opposite directions to the particular torque limit. In order to prevent
this, only the master drive has an integral component. The controlled (slave) drive has a P controller.
Instead of this, it is also possible to feed back part of the integral component as supplementary actual
value (droop). With this measure, the load characteristic of the slave drive is shifted from the horizontal.
For droop, the factor in the feedback arm is that speed change, which occurs for a 100% load change:
10 0 %
S pee d
Pure P I co nt ro lle r
D ro o p
(C UV C ,C U M C : P24 6
C U2 : P24 8 )
P I c o nt ro lle r
w it h d ro o p
T o rq ue
If such a drive is operated with a PI controlled drive, then the latter would generate the required torque,
however, the slave nothing, as its setpoint-actual value difference is always zero and also its controller
output (=load component).
Thus, a supplementary speed setpoint is injected into the slave, which corresponds to the product of the
master load component and the droop factor. Thus, an artificial setpoint-actual value difference is
generated (i.e. the load characteristic with droop is shifted upwards), until the slave controller has the
same load component as the master.

Manual
3.7.2.1 Droop and compensation with the same electrical torques

This diagram illustrates what has been described. The lefthand section of the diagram represents the
T300 level, and the righthand section of the diagram, the basic drive converters. The master drive is
shown in the upper section and the slave in the lower section.
T300 6SE70
M*treg
(0%) B+
( 100%)
M*frict. + dM*
+ +
M*accel. n* + + +
+ + - + -
dn*
nact
n* (0%)
CU2: P694.05=245
+ + M* CUVC,CUMC: P734.05=165
dn*treg M act CU2: P694.06=007

CUVC,CUMC: P734.06=900 (1)
B-
(-100%) MASTER
B+
(100%) SLAVE
Droop factor (P248)
dM* Droop factor
(0%) x CUVC,CUMC: P246
CU2: P248
+ - + +
n*
+ + - + -
nact
Droop factor
dn *
x
M*
Load comp.
M act
B-
(-100%)
Load distribution with droop and compensation

Version 1: Same electrical torques
It can be seen how the speed setpoint is output in parallel to both drives. The master torque setpoint is
transferred to the slave via the coupling (analog, or peer-to-peer), where it is multiplied by the droop
factor. Further, a potentiometer is shown, which can adjust the load distribution between the master and
slave. The correction value is added to the speed setpoint. The advantage of this solution is the possibility
to simply check the function. The load distribution functions, if both currents are identical (potentiometer in
the center position). A disadvantage is that the mechanical characteristics of both drives must be the
same. Otherwise, different mechanical torques will be output from the rolls.
(1) For CUMC, instead of the torque actual value, the actual value of the torque-generating current
ISQ (act), K184 should be used.
CUMC: P734.06 = 184

Manual
3.7.2.2 Droop and compensation with the same output torques

For many applicaitons it is necessary to ensure that no differential torques occur between the various rolls,
especially those in contact with the material web. Thus, the drive losses must be individually
compensated. Friction and acceleration are separately pre-controlled in every drive. Thus, only the
controller part may be used from the master drive (correction torque).
T300 6SE70
M*treg
(0%) B+
(100%)
M*frict. + dM*
+ +
M*accel. +
n* + +
+ + - + -
dn*
n*
(0%) nact
+ + CU2: P694.05=237
M* CUVC,CUMC: P734.05=155
dn*treg
CU2: P694.06=007
Mact CUVC,CUMC: P734.06=900 (1)
B-
(-100%) MASTER
M*treg B+
(0%)
(100%) SLAVE
dM* Droop factor
M*frict. + x
Droop factor
CUVC,CUMC: P246
CU2: P248
+ +
n* + - + +
M*accel. +
+ + -
-
nact
dn*
Droop factor x
CU2: P694.05=237
CU2: P694.06=007
Load comp. B-
(-100%)
Load distribution with droop and compensation

Version 2: Same output torques
Thus, instead of the total torque, the basic drive converter controller output is signaled back. The pre-
control torques are each effective, whereby perfect technological load distribution can be implemented for
drives which differ significantly.
The disadvantage of this version, is that there is no simple means to check for possibly unequal torque
actual values. This is often difficult for the operator to understand. Further, the losses of both drives must
be known or measured (friction characteristic). For losses, for example, churning loss, this isn’t always
quite so simple.
CUMC: P734.06 = 184

Manual
3.7.3 Bias and limiting

The technique goes back to the original concept to switch the torque setpoint directly to the slave. If both
drives are mechanically coupled (only then can a load distribution function), then there is only one
common speed and only one controller is required. This torque setpoint is valid for the master and slave.
Thus, it is only necessary to transfer the torque setpoint to the slave. In this case, one of the torque limits
is used, as the slave speed controller can remain active; it is operated at the controlled limit by just using a
bias setpoint.
The bias setpoint is selected so that speed increase is low when the connection is interrupted, on the
other hand, the controller remains reliably at the limit even for dynamic load fluctuations. Generally, just a
few percent of the setpoint are required.
3.7.3.1 Bias and limiting with the same electrical torques

Just like droop and compensation, the master torque setpoint can be used as setpoint for the slave for
bias and limiting. In this case, the same electrical torques are obtained for both.
T300 6SE70
M * tr e g
(0%) B+
(100%)
M * fr ic t. + dM *
+ +
M * a c c e l. n* +
+ +
+ + - + -
dn * nact
n*
(0% ) CU2: P694.05=245
+ + M* CUVC,CUMC: P734.05=165
CU2: P694.06=007
dn*treg M act CUVC,CUMC: P734.06=900 (1)
B-
(-100%) M ASTER
B+
x SLAVE
dM *
(0%)
lo a d c o m p o n e n t
n* + + +
+ + - + -
dn*
nact
5 % (H 5 4 6 )
CU2: P694.05=245
CU2: P694.06=007
M act CUVC,CUMC: P734.06=900 (1)
B-
(-100%)
Load distribution with bias and limiting
Version 1: Same electrical troques
The advantage here is, that in addition to being able to simply check that the torque actual values are the
same, only one controller is active, so that only one controller has to be optimized. Further, the speed
actual value adjustment is completely uncritical as long as the bias error is not reached. This is an
advantage which mustn’t be underestimated for rolls, which are subject to wear (size presses, calanders,
etc.).

Manual
CUMC: P734.06 = 184
3.7.3.2 Bias and limiting with the same output torques

In ths case, the torques acting on the material web should be the same. Analog to droop and
compensation, only the controller output is fedback. This is effective at the slave together with the pre-
controlled torque. The pre-control torques are separately determined and switched-in for the master and
slave.
T300 6SE70
M * tr e g
(0%) B+
(100%)
M * fr ic t. + dM *
+ +
M * a c c e l. n* + + +
+ + - + -
dn *
n* nact
(0 % )
CU2: P694.05=237
+ + M* CUVC,CUMC: P734.05=155
dn * tr e g M act CU2: P694.06=007

CUVC,CUMC: P734.06=900 (1)
B-
(-100%) M ASTER
B+
x + SLAVE
+
dM *
(0%)
Load
com p on e nt n* + + +
+
+ - + -
M * tr e g
(0%) dn * nact
5%(H546)
CU2: P694.05=237
M * fr ic t + M* CUVC,CUMC: P734.05=155
+ + CU2: P694.06=007
M * a c c e l.
B-
(-100%)
Load distribution with bias and limiting

Version 2: Same output troques
This solution offers the correct load equalization from the technological perspective as well as the
advantage, that only one speed controller is active.
CUMC: P734.06 = 184

Manual
3.8 Function diagrams
The function diagrams A-F are now illustrated.

Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
1 Function overview Setpoint conditioning
2 General information D1 Central ramp-function generator/ratio/slack take-up/slack-off
3 Handling connenctors and multiplexers D2 Local modes / triggerable ramp-function generator
4 Function symbols used
Generation, torque setpoints/limits

B Signal input/output/conditioning E1 Friction characteristic / inertia compensation / supplementary torque B
A1 Communications with the basic drive converter (CU) E2 Load distribution / braking characteristic
A2 Status words from basic drive converter/control words to basic drive converter
A3 Communications with the COM-BOARD / peer-to-peer coupling Supplementary functions
A4 Binary inputs/binary outputs
F1 Fixed setpoints / monitoring parameters
A5 Analog inputs/analog outputs
F2 Free functions I
A6 Pulse encoder inputs
C F3 Free functions II C
A7 Setpoint input via decade switch/byte-serial data input
F4 Free functions III
A8 Line speed actual value/status word input/output/Kp adaption, speed controller
F5 Status word, free functions
A9 Freely-definable status word, freely-connectable limit value monitor
status word limit value monitor
A10 Motorized potentiometers 1 and 2
D
Open-loop control D
B1 Drive power-up/drive power-down

B2 Stop/electrical off/fast stop/brake control
B3 Inverter enable/setpoint enable/speed control enable
B4 Operating mode selection
B5 Fault word generation
E
B6 Status word control/alarm word E
Technology controller
C1 Switch-in/out technology controller
Generating the technological setpoint/actual value
C2 Technology controller
C3 Status word, technology control
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package List of contents =

Person Reh / Michaelis +
Sectional drive
Chk. FP_TOC Sheet 0
Status. Change Date Name Std. Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Signal input/output/conditioning Technological functions A
Open-loop control Free functions

CU
S
Sheet A1-A2 R
>
B B
COM Board =1
Sheet B1 - B6 Sheet F1 - F5
Sheet A3 Dec. switch
Sheet A7 Technology controller Setpoint conditioning Torque conditioning

C PEER C
Byte serial M_FRICTION
+ XE
Sheet A3 W Y + +
Sheet A7 -
V set
- -
X
Motor. pot. V-ADD
M_ACC
Binary
D Sheet A10 Sheet C1 - C3 Sheet D1 - D2 Sheet E1 - E2 D
Sheet A4
Analog
U
U
U
U
E Sheet A5 E
Pulse encoder
#
Sheet A6
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Function overview

=
Sectional drive
Chk. OVERVIEW Sheet 1+
Status Change Date Name Std. Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Line types:
A A
Depending on the signal type, various line types
are assigned in the diagrams Example:
Signals, which represent a bit quantity, are

represented as thin line.
Signals, which represent a word quantity, are

represented as thick lines
B B
Signals, which represent a control signal, are

represented as thick line with arrow.
Cross references
Cross references are provided with pages and Example:

C column information Cross reference to C
Page 10, column 8
[10.8]
Cross references to the hardware
D Cross references to the board inputs and Example: D

outputs are made by specifying the terminal on Binary inputs
Terminal PIN T300
SE300 terminal block and the connector and
SE300 -X136
pins on the technology board
601 1
Binary signals
E
The binary signal description is always made Example E
for the 1 state. No fast stop
For signal status = 1,

there is no fast stop
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package General information =

Sectional drive
Chk.. FP_DEF Sheet 2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Many signals are defined to be freely connected-up Example Selecting several bits from a connector
as connectorst (also refer to Section5) Selecting bit No. 3 and
It is also possible to simultaneously select several bit No. 8 in connector K123
bits from a connector.
Example:
Connector Bit No. 3 and Bit 8 of connector 1232 should be
Connector, in which the signal is deposited, is K067 switched-through to the output. MSK
located at the function block. The mask to make the selection is obtained as
follows:
Selecting a connector H152 H153
If the connector is to be connected, then the ,
B connector number is entered into the multiplexor Bit No. 15141312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 H152=123 H152=0108 B
parameter.
Example: 0 1 0 8
Connector K067 should be switched-through to
the multiplexor output. The masking block output is set to 1, if connector,
H146 H146=67 bit 3 or bit 8 is set.
Selecting bits from a connector

A connector always consists of 16 bits. If one or Pre-assigning multiplexors
several bits are to be selected from a connector, a 0 Most most multiplexers are pre-assigned 0
1 K067
C
masking block is used. .
(=fixed setpoint 0%, 0H0000). If the multiplexers C
The following circuit has the function shown . have another factory setting, then the source
adjacently. . connector is specified.
H152
H152 14
15
If several lsimilar multiplexers are used, for
0 example, when generating status words, then they
1
MSK .
are displayed together. MSK
H153
.
.
MSK
D H152 H153 14 H234 H235 D
15
Also refer to Section5.1.2 H236 H237
H238 H239
Selecting a bit from a connector Selecting bit No. 3
If, for the connector, a word quantity is involved, in connector K123 H240 H241
from which a bit should be selected, then, in
addition to the multiplexor on the masking block,
the bit to be selected should also be specified.
Example: MSK
Bit No. 3 of connector 123 is to be switched-
E through to the output. Thus, 123 must be specified E
at the multiplexer. The mask, to select bit 3 is H152 H153
obtained as follows:
H152=123 H152=0008
Bit No. 15141312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 8
F F
Datum 1.8.94 Standard software package Handling connectors and =

Sectional drive multiplexers
Chk. FP_DEF Sheet 3+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Logic symbols Signal input/output Control blocks Arithmetic blocks
AND I1 I2 Q MONOFLOP Pulse encoder evaluation PT1 element Multiplier

A A
I Q
I1 0 0 0 T X1
X1 * X2
Q 0 1 0 I 1 Q 0 0 X Y Y X1 Y Y=
I1 1 0 0 0>1 T # X2
100%
1 1 1 oder
X2
Integrator
OR I1 I2 Q Switch-off delay Conversion Adder
I Q A/D D/A X2
> T
0 0 0
=1
I1 0 X Y
Q 0 1 1 I Q 1 1 U # Y = X1 + X2
I1 1 0 1 1>0 T X1 Y
#
U
B 1 1 1 B
Differentiator
Sign reversal
Flipflop Switch-on delay Binary Binary
Reset dominant S R Q I Q input output X Y
T 0 X (-1) Y Y = -X
S Q 0
0
0
1
Q
0
I Q 0
0>1
0
T
#
R 1 0 1 # PI controller
1 1 0 Polygon characteristic
XE Y Y = f(x)
Flipflop Comparator Communications X Y
C C
Set dominant S R Q Receive Transmit can be defined
X1 QU (1 for X1>X2) with points
S Q 0 0 Q QE (1 for X1=X2) PID controller
0 1 0 X2 QL (1 for X1<X2) Multiplexer
R 1 0 1
1 1 1 XE Y X1
Limit value monitor Y Y(n) = Xn
with hysteresis Conversion Xn
Bits->word Word->bits
EXCLUSIVE OR I1 I2 Q Limiter
n
D
D/# #/D D
=1
I1 0 0 0 Divider
Q 0 1 1 X Y
I1 1 0 1 X1 X1 x 100%
1 1 0 Bit selection Y X1 YY=
X2
X2
A bit is filtered from Ramp-function generator or
NOT X MSK Q word x using the
MSK input, and X2
I Q switched-
1 through to output Q X Y Changeover switch
I Q 0 1
MSK I Y
1 0 X1
Y 0 X1
E X2 1 X2 E
Edge evaluation
I Q I
I Q 0 0
1>0 1 Absolute value generator
X Y Y = |X|
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Function symbols used =

Sectional drive
Chk. FP_DEF Sheet 4-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display in d092 and d094

A 15 13 11 9 A
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
Send to CU 6 4 2 0
Receive from CU
CU -X137 Receive words d092 Send words
[A2.1]
DUAL 1 Status word 1 from CU K040 [A2.8] K143
Control word 1 to CU
1
-X137 CU
PORT
RAM Speed actual value from CU
CU -> TB
2 K041 [A8.1] DUAL
B PORT B
Select word 0 from CU H888 RAM
3 K042 TB -> CU
[A2.1] d093
Status word 2 from CU
4 K043 Speed setpoint to CU
[D2.8] K112 H889 2
Torque setpoint from CU
5 K044 <1>
[B5.1] [E2.7]
Torque actual value from CU H890
6 K045 3
Select word 1 from CU d094
7 K046 Control word 2 to CU
[A2.8] K144 H891 4
Select word 2 from CU
8 K047 d095
C Select word 3 from CU H892 Supplementary torque setpoint to CU C
9 K048 [E1.8] K151 5
10 K049 Positive torque limit to CU
[E2.8] K152 H893 6
11 K050 d097
Select word 6 from CU H894 Negative torque limit to CU
12 K051 [E2.8] K153 7
13 K052 Factor, KP adaption to CU

[A8.3] K162 H895 8
D
14 K053 D
15 K054 H896 9
16 K055
H897 10
Status receive from CU [A8.5] H898 11

[B5.1]
H899 12
Torque direction
0=positive
E 1=negative E
[D2.6] H900 13
H101 [E2.3]
Hysteresis H901 14
CU3
<1> Note:
Not used with SIMOVERT SC H902 15
Note: H903 16
The receive- and send words must be connected to the basic
F drive converter corresponding to Section 6.2.10 [A8.5]
F
Status, send to CU [B5.1]
Date 19.8.96 Communications with the =
+
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package basic drive converter (CU)
Chk FP_A1_6 Sheet A1+
Status Änderung Sectional drive Receive/send telegram Function diagram A1
Date Name Std. Bl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status word 1 from CU Ready to power-up from CU Drive on Not OFF 1

[A1.3] 0 [B1.8] 0
Ready from CU Not OFF 2
1 1 Control word 1
A
Inverter enabled from CU Not OFF 3
K143 [A1.5] A
2 [B3.3] [B5.1] 1 2
Fault from CU Inverter enable D/#
3 [B1.4] [B6.1] [B3.4] 3
D/#
No electrical off (OFF2) from CU Ramp-function generator enable
4 4
No fast stop (OFF3) from CU Ramp-function generator start
5 5
Switch-on inhibit from CU Setpoint enable
6 [B3.8] 6
Alarm from CU Acknowledge fault
B
7 MSK 7
B
Setpoint-actual value deviation from CU Inching 1 on
8 0 8
0 9
PZD control requested from CU H216 H217 Control from PLC
9 1 10
Com. freq. reached fromCU Clockwise phase sequence
10 1 11
Undervoltage from CU Counter-clockwise phase seq.
11 1 12
Main contactor energized from CU Raise motorized potentiometer
12 0 13
Ramp-function generator active from CU Lower motorized potentiometer
13 0 14
C Clockwise phase sequence from CU No fault, external 1 C
14 [B5.8] 15
Kinetic buffering active from CU (only VC)
15
Funktion-/Setpoint channel, data set bit 0
MSK 0
Status word 2 from CU Restart-on-the-fly/magnetization active
[A1.3] 0 [B3.3]
D/# Control word 2
Synchronism reached (only VC)
K144 [A1.5]
1 H234 H235
No overspeed H236 H237 Funktion-/Setpoint channel, data set bit 1

2 1
D D/# External fault 1 H238 H239 Motor data set, bit 0 (only VC) D
3 [B5.6] 2
External fault 2 H240 H241 Motor data set, bit 1 (only VC)
4 3
Alarm, external H242 H243 Fixed setpoint selection, bit 0
5 4
Alarm, I2t converter H244 H245 Fixed setpoint selection bit 1
6 5
Fault, overtemperature, CONV Enable synchronization
7 0 6
Alarm, overtemperature, CONV Enable restart-on-the-flay
8 1 7
Alarm, overtemperature, motor Enable droop
E 9 [D2.5] 8 E
Fault, overtemperature motor Enable speed control
10 [B3.8] 9
No fault external 2
11 1 10
Motor stalled/rotor locked Slave drive
12 0 11
Bypass contactor on from CU Alarm 1, external
13 [B6.8] 12
Fault, synchronization from CU (only VC) No alarm 2 external
14 1 13
F Pre-charging active from CU Bico data set / Reserve setting F
15 0 14
0 15
Date 1.12.94 =
+
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Status words from the basic conv.
Chk.
Sectional drive Control words to the basic conv. FP_A1_6 Function diagram A2 Sheet A2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Receive from CB Send to CB

A Main control word from CB A
1 K020 Select word 1 to CB
Select word 1 from CB 1
2 K021
Control word 2 from CB -X135
-X135
3 K022
H904
4 Select word 2 from CB
K023 CB
CB Select word 3 from CB H905 Select word 2 to CB
5 K024 2
Select word 4 from CB
H906
B 7 K026 B
Select word 6 from CB H907 Selec word 4 to CB

8 K027 4
Select word 7 from CB
H908
Receive from CB 5
10 K029
H909 Select word 6 to CB
Receive from CB ok 6
[A8.5]
[B5.1]
7
C C
8

9

10
Send to CB ok
D Receive from peer-to-peer Send to peer-to-peer [A8.5] D
[B5.1]
-X134 -X134
word 1 from PP
+Rx
1 K030 d087 +Tx
1 3
TB -Rx
2 word 2 from PP
K031 Select word 1 to peer
1 -Tx
TB
2 4
word 3 from PP
3 K032
word 4 from PP H879 H880
4 K033
word 5 from PP d088
5 K034 Select word 2 to peer
H881 H882
E 2 E
6 K035 d089
H883 H884 Select word 3 to peer
7 K036 3
d090
8 K037 Slect word 4 to peer
H885 H886
4
9 K038 d091 Send to peer ok.
No. of receive LT
Note: H887 Select word 5 to peer
H198 10 K039 H197 to H199 are INIT 5 [A8.5]
words
Receive from peer ok [A8.5]
parameters, see 4.1.2 Number of send words H199 LT
F BDR BDR F
[B5.1]
Baud rate H197
Date 19.8.96 =
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Comm. with the COM-BOARD +
Chk.
Sectional drive Peer-to-peer coupling FP_A1_6 Function diagram A3
Sheet A3+
Zustand. Änderung Date Name Std. Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal PIN T300 PIN T300 Terminal

SE300 -X136 -X136 SE300
A Bit inversion A
1 Binary input 1 d010 Bit inversion

601 0
D/#
=1 K069 d085
602 2 Binary input 2
1
Binary inputs
MSK 0 =1 0 Binary output 1 21
621
H102 #/D
3 Binary input 3 D/#
603 2
H833 H834 H849
4 Binary input 4
604 3 Binary output 2 22
B H835 H836 1 622 B
Binary inputs 9...16 1
[A7.2]
5 Binary input 5
605 4
H837 H838 Binary output 3 23
2 2 623
6 Binary input 6
H839 H840 3 624
3
7 Binary input 7
H841 H842 4 625
4
8 Binary input 8
608 7
C 5 5 626 C
609 9 P24 external
24V + 6 6 627
-
610 10 M24 external
7 7 628
11 Binary input 9
611 8 -
+
P24 external 29
627
12 Binary input 10 24V
612 9
D M24 external 30 D
628
Binary input 11
15 13 11 9
13 14 12 10 8
613 10
7 5 3 1
14 Binary input 12 6 4 2 0
614 11
15 Binary input 13
615 12
16 Binary input 14
616 13
E E
17 Binary input 15
617 14
18 Binary input 16
618 15
Note:
19 P24 external All P24 and all M24 are intern-
619
24V + ally connected with one another
- M24 external
630 20
F F
Date 1.12.94 =
+
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Binary inputs
Chk. FP_A1_6 Sheet A4+
Status. Change Date Name Std. Sectional drive Binary outputs Function diagram A4 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SE300 -X131 -X131 SE300
A A
-10V...+10V
1 Input 1 d003 -10V...+10V
501 U
+
K060 Offset
2 Reference # Output 1 9
502 # +
H853 509
H851 H852 U
H122 H850 Gain
H121 H123 H854
GND 510
3 Input 2 d004
503 U
+
B
4 Reference
K061 B
504 # +
H125
H124 H126 Offset
H858
# Output 2 17
519
H856 H857 U
5 Input 3 d005 Gain
505 U H855
+
6 Reference
K062 H859
506 # +
GND 520
H128
H127 H129
C C
7 Input 4 d006
507 U
+
K063 Offset
508 # +
H863 521
H861 H862 U
H131 H860 Gain
H130 H132 H564
GND 522
11 Input 5 d007
511 U
+
D
12 Reference
K064 D
512 # +
H134
H133 H135 Offset
H868
# Output 4 20 523
H866 H867 U
13 Input 6 d008 Gain
513 U H865
+
14 Reference
K065 H869
514 # +
GND 524
H137
E
H136 H138 E
15 Input 7 d009
515 U
+
16 Reference
K066
516 # +
H140
H139 H141
Note: Note:
All analog inputs are already smoothed per hardware with 0.5 ms. The diff. All ground connections
F inputs must be connected acc. to Sect. 3.1.1.6 are internally connected F
Date 1.12.94 =
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Analog inputs +
Chk.
Sectional drive Analog outputs FP_A1_6 Function diagram A5 Sheet A5+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal PIN T300

SE300 -X131 d013
21 Track 1A+ Pulse encoder input 1 Speed actual value 1 Speed actual valuet 1
531 K067
A A
532 22 GND
Pulses per revolution H142
533 23 Track 1B+ H154
# d016
534 24 GND Rated speed H143
Length actual value 1 Length actual value 1
25 SYN 1+
K074
535 [F4.7]
Operating mode H690
26 GND pulse evaluation MODE
536
H160
537 27 Rough pulse 1 Reset length measurement
B Synchronizing signal 1 Gearbox/ B
28 GND ext. identified diameter
538 MSK RESET [A8.5]
100%
correction
539 29 GND ext. Available one sampling
time
540 30 P15 H146 H147
H161
Hold length measurement Length 1 > limit value [A8.5]
Limit value Length 1 < limit value
MSK HOLD [A8.5]
Note:
H142 to H145 and H690 and H691
C are INIT parameters, see 4.1.2 H148 H149 H162 C
d014
541 31 Track 2A+ Pulse encoder input 2 Speed actual value 2 Speed actual value 2 K068
542 32 GND
543 33 Track 2B+ H155
D # d017
D
544 34 GND Nenndrehzahl H145
35 SYN 1+
K075
545 [F4.7]
Betriebsart H691
Impulsauswertung MODE
546 36 GND
H163
Synchronizing signal 2 Gearbox/
100%
correction

time
E 40 P15 E
540 H150 H151
H164
Hold length measurement Length 2 >limit value [A8.5]
Limit value Length 2 <limit value
Note: MSK HOLD [A8.5]
All GNDs are int-

ernally connected H165
H152 H153
Note:
F Only one pulse encoder can be supplied from the technology board. F
A pulse encoder with an external power supply must be used if 2 pulse encoders are connected.
Date 19.8.96 =
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Pulse encoder inputs +
Chk.
Sectional drive Length measurement FP_A1_6 Function diagram A6
Sheet A6+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Read-in decade switch Number of decades H107

d010 Setpoint from the decade switch
A K071 A
Normalization H108
Binary/BCD coding H109
Signed H110
Bit 0 from the decade switch

MSK
B B
H111 H112
Binary decade control

H113 H114 Bit 1 from the decade switch Control, decade 0
0 K077
Control, decade 1
1
H115 H116 Bit 2 from the decade switch
# Control, decade 2
2
H117 H118 Bit 3 from the decade switch COntrol, decade 3
3
C Data transfer from the COntrol, decade 4 C
decade switch 4
H119 H120
Note:
H107 is a INIT-parameter
see 4.1.2
D D
Byte-serial input
Binary inputs 9...16
d013 Setpoint, byte-serial
[A4.3]
K070
Time where the bytes must be
present in the stable status H106
Selection, low/high byte

1 = high byte
MSK
E E
H104 H105
F F
Date 19.8.96 Standard software package Setpoint input via =

+
Person Reh / Michaelis decade switches
Chk. Sectional drive Sheet A7+
Byte-serial input FP_A7_10 Function diagram A7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A [B5.1] A
Internal d015
speed actual value internal actual line speed
[A1.4] K041 [B5.1]
K076 [E1.1]
[E2.1]
[D1.2]
H156
Line speedt > 0
Gearbox/diameter Limit for line speed = 0 signal H158 Line speedt = 0

correction [B1.2],[B2.5],[B6.1],[B3.4]
100% [D2.6]
B Hysteresis H159 Line speed < 0 B
H157 <1> d018

Synchronizing signal 1 identified Status word INPUT
[A6.4] 0 K072
Note: Synchronizing singal 2 identified
D/#
[A6.4] 1
CUVC,CUMC:
Line speed t > 0
The following values are set on the T300, if the KP-Adaption is required: 2
H871=0, H872=0, H873=199,99%, H874=19,99% Line speed t = 0
15 13 11 9
3 14 12 10 8
The KP-Adaption is then realized in the basic unit
Line speed < 0 7 5 3 1
4 6 4 2 0
C C
CU3: [A6.7]
Length act. value pulse encoder 1 l>limit
5
Gain adaption not used with speed
Length act. value pulse encoder l < limit
controller of SIMOVERT SC [A6.7] 6
[A6.7] 7
Length act. value pulse encoder 2l<limit
[A6.7] 8
System error T300
[System error wordt] MSK 9
D
K073 Send to CU ok D
[A1.8] 10
H103 Send to CB ok
[A3.8] 11
Enable Send to peer ok
system error bits [A3.8] 12
Receive from CU ok
[A1.2] 13
Receive from CB ok
[A3.3] 14
Receive from peer ok
[A3.3] 15
E KP adaption, speed control E

d086
X Y K162 [A1.5]
Gain adaption at CU
H871 X1
H870 H872 Y1
<1> Note:
H873 X2 When v = 0 is not reached
the drive is not switched off
F
H874 Y2
F
Date 19.8.96 Standard software package Line speed actual value =

Sectional drive Status word input/output
Chk. Blatt A8+
Status. Change Date Name Std.
KP adaption, speed control FP_A7_10 Function diagram A8 Bl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A MSK Select bit 0

0 d080
Input value 1 X1 X1>X2 0 d098
A
K161 X1=X2 1 K160

D/#
H801 H802 Freely-definable status word H914 H915 Status word,
X1<X2 2 limit value monitor
H803 H804 Select bit 1
1 Input value 2 3
X2
2
Large window H917 L
3 D/#
H916 Hysterisis H918 HY
B H809 H810 Select bit 4 B
4
5
Input value 1 X1 X1>X2 4
6
X1=X2 5
7
H919 H920 X1<X2 6
8
Select bit 9 Input value 2 7
H819 H820 9 X2
H821 H822 Select bit 10 L

10 Large window H922
C C
H823 H824 Select bit 11 H921
11 Hysterisis H923 HY

12
H827 H828 Select bit 13 Input value 1
13 X1 X1>X2 8
14 X1=X2 9
H831 H832 Select bit 15 H924 H925
15 X1<X2 10
D D
Input value 2 11
X2
Large window H927 L
15 13 11 9 H926 Hysterisis H928 HY

14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0 Input value1 X1 X1>X2 12
X1=X2 13
E E
H929 H930 X1<X2 14
Input value 2 15
X2
Large window H932 L
F
Note: F
The switching characteristics is described in Sec. 3.1.1.5
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Freely-definable status word =

Sectional drive Freely-connectable lim. val. monit.
Status Change Date Name Std.
Status word, limit value monitor Function diagram A9 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
Motorized potentiometer 1 Motorized potentiometer 2 A
Setpoint MOP
d025 Setpoint t MOP
d026
X Y K120 X Y K121
Setpoint, MOP 1 Setpoint, MOP 2
H300 H324 H310 H329
Operating mode
MOP
MSK Op. mode MOP 0=MOP
1=RFG
MSK 0=MOP
1=RFG
B B
H308 H309 H318 H319
Setting value, MOP Setting value, t MOP

SET_VAL SET_VAL
H301 H311
C C
MSK Set MOP SET MSK Set MOP SET
H302 H303 H312 H313
D
MSK Raise setpoint + MSK Raise setpoint +
D
H304 H305 H314 H315
MSK Lower setpoint - MSK Lower setpoint -
H306 H307 H316 H317
Ramp, standard setting Ramp, standard setting

E E
H320 RMP_TM H325 RMP_TM
Ramp, fast setting Ramp, fast setting
H321 RMP_TM_FST H326 RMP_TM_FST
Upper limit, MOP Upper limit, MOP
H322 LU H327 LU
Lower limit, MOP Lower limit, MOP
H323 LL H328 LL
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Motorized potentiometers 1 and 2 =

Chk. Sectional drive Sheet A10-
Zustand. Änderung Name Std.
FP_A7_10 Function diagram A10 Sh.
Date
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Start request
[B6.1]
1s
On command
MSK
>
=1 1
T
Drive
[B6.1] powered-up
Start command S [B2.2]
H200 H201 [B3.2]
Drive ready to power-up
R [B5.1]
B [A2.5] B
[B6.1]
1=no start. sequence H252
Start enable
[B6.1] >
=1
MSK
H230 H231
MSK No local operation [B4.3]

C Op. mode, inching C
H218
S [B3.5]
H219 [B4.3] [B4.4]
Inching R
Inching 1 Power-down,
MSK >
=1
ready signal
[B3.5]
9
H220 H221 Time for inching
[B6.1]
D T 0 [B2.8] Drive not ready
D
MSK Inching 2
[B4.3] >
=1
Power-off from the
brake control [B3.5]
H254
H253 Drive faulted
[B5.8] 1 1=with brake control
H222 H223
Drive faulted from CU
[A2.3] 2 Display in d021 and d024
[B2.5]
Electrical off
3
V=0 signal 15 13 11 9
>
[A8.6]
=1 Off after fast stop

14 12 10 8
H250 11 7 5 3 1
E 1=no regenerative 6 4 2 0 E
feedback Internal fast stop
[B2.5]
d024
V=0
Off after stop [B2.1]
10 Shutdown word
[B2.5]
Internal stop
d021
Off for missing on checkback sig. from the converter
[B5.5] 12 K140
Diagnostics word
Off for missing checkback sig. from the group control (memory, reason for shutdown)
[B5.5] 13
F F
Datum 1.8.94 Standard software package Drive power-up, =

Sectional drive power-down
Chk. FP_B1_6 Function diagram B1 Sheet B1+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No standard stop (OFF1)

A
MSK S Internal stop A
[D2.3]
R
H202 H203
>
=1
Braking
[B3.1]
[B6.1]
[D2.2]
[E2.5]
No fast stop (OFF3) Internal fast stop

B
MSK S [B1.3]
B
[E2.6]
R
H206 H207
No electrical off (OFF2) Electrical off

MSK S [B1.4]
C C
R
H204 H205
Drive powered-up Open brake

[B1.8] [B6.1]
Setpoint enable from

Ready for the brake control
D setpoint enable T 0 D
[B3.5] S [B3.5]
R
H271
Off, brake immediately closed
for H255=2, 3, 4
Selection Power-down from the
[B1.6]
Shutdown word and connection
>
=1
T 0
>
brake control
=1
of the shut-down
commands [B1.6]
Operating mode,
E brake control Off, brake closed at V=0 H272
E
H255 fori H255=1
Close brake for
1: V=0
2: El. off, immediately Brake closed at V=0
3: Fault, immediately H255 [B6.1]
4: For fault and elec.
off immediately S
V=0
R
>
[A8.6]
=1
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Stop, electrical off/fast stop =

Sectional drive Brake control
Chk. FP_B1_6 Function diagramB2 Sheet B2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Inverter enable
K002 MSK Internal inverter enable
[B6.1]
[A2.5]
[B5.1]
H208 H209
(0H0001)
B B
Magnetization/
restart on the fly active Ready for
[A2.3] setpoint enable
[B2.3] [B6.1]
Setpoint enable Internal setpoint enable
K002 MSK [B6.1]
Inverter
[D1.1]
enabled 1 [A2.6]
Setpoint enable
[A2.3] from the brake control
H214 H215 [B2.8]
(0H0001)
Checkback signal,
[B5.1]
group control [B1.6] with brake control
MSK
C
>
=1 S
C
H232 H233
R
1=enable H251
group control
Braking Group control active
[B5.1]
[B2.5]
D Speed control D
Inching enable
[B1.3] [A2.6]
Drive powered-up S [D2.3]
[B1.8]
Inching oper. mode
[B1.4] R
V=0 signal
[A8.6]
1=inching H256
>
=1
without braking
E E
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Inverter enable =

Sectional drive Setpoint enable
Chk.
Speed control enable FP_B1_6 Function diagram B3 Sheet B3+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Select, op. mode, bit 0

MSK
Conversion,
H224 H225 bit/word
0 0 Code for operating mode 0..70...7

D/#
Select, op. mode bit 1 0...7
MSK 1
B 2 B
H226 H227
Select, op. mode bit 2

MSK
H228 H229 >

=1
C C
[B1.2]
No local operation
>
=1 Local operating modet
[B6.1]
[D2.2]
D D
Code for operating mode
0 0 ... 9 K142
0, 8, 9 [D2.1]
8
9
Inching 1 Coding, operating mode
[B1.2]
Inching 2
[B1.2] 0: No setpoint selected
1: Fixed setpoint 1
2: Fixed setpoint 2
3: Fixed setpoint 3
4: Local setpoint 4
5: Fixed setpoint 5
Operating mode, inching 6: Fixed setpoint 6
E [B1.4] E
7: Fixed setpoint 7
8: Setpoint, inching 1
Note:
Local setpoint selection is coded in a word
from 0 to 9. The local setpoints are parameterized in
diagram D2.
F F
Datum 1.8.94 Standard software package Local setpoint selection =

Sectional drive
Status. Change Date Name Std. . Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Receive from CB ok
Display in d022
[A3.3] [B6.5] T 0 Communications error, receive with CB 0
Send to CB ok
15 13 11 9
A [A3.8] 14 12 10 8 A
H257 7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Receive from CU ok D/#
[A1.2] [B6.5] T 0 Communications with CU error 1
Error word
[A1.8]
Send to CU ok
d022
H258 K141
Inverter enable from the CU MSK Fault
[A2.3] [B6.5] T 0 Checkback signal error, converter
[B1.4] S [B1.4]
B 2 [B6.1] B
Internal inverter enable R [A2.6]

[B3.4] H270
H259
Fault, external 11
[A2.4]
Drive powered-up
[B1.8]
>
=1
[B6.5] T 0 Checkback signal error, group control
[B1.4]
3
Note:
[B3.3] Group control active The fault is reset, if the fault bit was
transferred to the basic drive converter
H264
[B3.2]
Checkback signal, group control
C C

[A3.3] [B6.5] T 0 Communications error, peer-to-peer
4
1
H263
MSK > 0
=1
[B6.5] T External fault 5
D D
H260 H261
H262
[A8.2]
int.speed actual value Error, positive overspeed
6
Limit H265 Error, negative overspeed
7
Int. line speed actual value

E [A8.5] E
V=0
Limit H266
[B6.5] T 0
8
[D2.6] Line speed setpoint

Line speed setpoint > limit H269
Limit H267
[A1.3] Torque actual value

Torque actual value > limit
F Limit H268 F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Error word generation =

Sectional drive
Status. Change Date Name Std. Sh..
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Start request
[B1.8 0 d020 Alarm, communications with CB
[B5.3] 0 d023
Start enable Alarm word
A [B1.2] 1 Status word control
K146 Alarm, communications with CU D/# K145 A
Start command
[B5.3] 1 MSK Alarm
[B1.6] 2 [A2.6]
Alarm, converter checkback signal
[B5.3] 2
[B2.5]
Brake
3
Display in d020 [B5.3]
Alarm from the group control
3 H248
4 Alarm, peer-to-peer communications
D/# [B5.3] 4
Line speed = 0
[A8.6] 5 15 13 11 9
Drive powered-up
14 12 10 8 [B5.3]
Alarm, external fault
5 Display in d023
[B1.8] 6 7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0 0 6
B 7 15 13 11 9 B
Drive not ready 0 7 14 12 10 8

[B1.7] 8 Alarm, anti-stall protection 7 5 3 1
[B5.5] 8
[B3.4] Inverter enable 6 4 2 0
9
Setpoint enable 0 9
[B3.8] 10
Local operation 0 10
[B4.6] 11
Drive faulted 0 11
[B5.8]
[A2.3]
Fault from CU
>
=1
Drive faulted
12 0 12
C C
Open brake 0 13
[B2.8] 13
0 14
14 No external alarm 2
[B3.5]
ready for setpoint enable MSK 15
15
H246 H247
D D
E
E
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Status word, control =

Sectional drive Alarm word
Chk. FP_B1_6 Function diagram B6 Sheet B6-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Upper limit
A technological setpoint A
H423
Switch-in technology controller Ramp-function generator
at upper limit
[C3.2]
Technology control on Select technological setpoint
MSK >
=1
d034
S
>
[C2.4]
=1
+ Technological setpoint
[C3.2] [C2.1]
R Ramp-up time K130
H405 +
H404 H425
H422 Ramp-function generator
H400 H401 at lower limit
[C3.2]
B H426 B
MSK Ramp-down time
H424
Lower limit
H406 H407 techn. setpoint
Ramp-function generator
in = output
[C3.2]
Switch-out technology controller
C C
MSK >
=1
Select technological actual value
+ Technological actual value [C2.1]

H408 H409
-
H402 H403
MSK
D D
H410 H411
0.5s
Offset,
technological actual value
[C3.1]
H430 K132
Switch-in/-out technology controller
Fixed offset
Compensate offset
MSK H431
MSK
H428 H429
E E
H452 H453
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Switching-in the techn.controller =

Sectional d rive Technological setpoint
Chk. Sheet C1+
Technological actual value FP_C1_3 Function diagram C1
Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
H448
Upper limit Torque pre-control
H436
Op. mode D comp. H434
0=D comp. in the setpoint/act. val. channel H437
1=D comp. only in the act. value channel Droop
d038
H451 MODE Controller at the

D-CONTRL upper limit
I comp. [C3.2]
B Supplementary setpoint K134 B
H433 + - Control deviation
K133
d036
+ Influence of the techn. contr.
[C1.8]
Technological setpoint + + on the torque
[E1.5]
K137
-
K135
H427 Controller at the H447 H449
D comp.
lower limit
d035 [C3.2]
Controller enable
Technological actual value
[C1.8]
C
DISABLE C
K131 EN EN_D TN TV KP I-CONTRL SET d039
d030 [D2.1]
H432 H435
> K138
H414 H440 H438
=1
Tgl 1
1=enable 1=inhibit Influence, techn. controller
H415 Tgl 2 D comp. I comp. H439 on the line speed
H450
Lower limit
d032
H418 TN 1
H419 TN 2
D D
Technological control ON
d033 [C1.4]
H420 TV 1
H421 TV 1 d031
Reset Tech-Controller
H416 KP 1
H417
MSK
KP 2
KP characteristic H454 H455

E Data set selection KP adaption E
MSK [C3.2] d037
H442 X1
H412 H413 H441
H443 Y1
H444 X2
F F
H445 Y2
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Technological controller =

Chk. Sectional drive Sheet C2+
FP_C1_3 Function diagram C2
Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Technology controller on A
[C1.4] 0
Status word, technological control
K136
Parameter set 2 D/#
[C2.2] 1
Ramp-function generator output = input

[C1.8] 2
[C1.8] Setpoint at the upper limit

3
B Setpoint at the lower limit

[C1.8] 4 B
Technology controller at upper limit

[C2.6] 5
Technology controller at lower limit

[C2.6] 6
Offset,
technological act. val.
Offset compensation > pos. limit
[C1.8] 7
H446
Offset compensation < neg. limit
C
8 C
(-1)
D D
E E
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Statusword, technological control =

Chk. Sectional drive Sheet C3-
Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ratio
mult./div Op. setpoint
K106
A A
Central ramp-function generator d048 d049
+
Upper limit H519 [D2.1]
Main setpoint +
K107
d045 d046 H513
+ [E1.4]
K100 K104 H522

+
H502 Ramp-up time
H500 H501 H520 Acceleration
H515 TU
Lower limit
B Ramp-down time K105 B
H516 TD
Rounding-off, ramp-up
H517 TRU H521
Rounding-off, ramp-down Normalization, acceleration

H518 TRD
Ramp-function generator start
K002 MSK STRT
C H212 H213 C
Set RFG
[B3.8] Internal setpoint enable
H514 >
=1 SET
K002 MSK Ramp-function generator enable
D Internal D
line speed actual value
H210 H211 [A8.4] SET_VAL
Ratio setpoint
d047
+ [E1.3]
100%
+ K102
H508 0%
H506 H507
H526
E H529 E
Slack take-up
MSK
H523 H530
H524 H525
Slack-off
MSK
F F
H527 H528
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Central ramp-function generator =
Sectional drive Ratio/slack take-up/slack-off
Chk. FP_D1_2 Function diagram D1 Sheet D1+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 0% Load distribution bias A

d055
d050 H546 K110
+ Bias
K101 (-1)
+
Load distribution
H503 H504
H505
MSK [E2.3]
Torque direction
[A1.4]
H544 H545
B B
Triggerable Correction
+ d051 ramp-function generator Setpoint smoothing diameter/gearbox
+ d053 d056 + d057
Operating setpoint
[D1.8]
+
Influence, technology controller + K108 Speed setpoint K112
on the line speed Ramp-up time
+ + K111 [A1.5]
[C2.8]
H542
H547 [A8.2]
0% Ramp-function generator, Ramp-down time Correction, gearbox,
0 local setpoints diameter
H543
H531 1
Local setpoint Activate ramp-
C Ramp-up time function generator C
H532 2
H540 d052 Line speed setpointt [B5.1]
H533 3
Ramp-down time
4 H541
H535 5 Reset
Note:
H534 Braking Triggerable ramp-function generator:
>
H536 6 [B2.5]
H537 7 [B4.6]
Local op. mode =1 The ramp-function generator is only operational
once
D D
->when the drive is powered-up
H538 8
Local operating mode ->changeover from/to local operation
H539 9 >
=1
->for standard stop
After ramp-up has been completed, the ramp-
Local operating mode function generator switches itself out
[B4.7]
Selection, local setpoint i.e. ramp-function generator output = input
Coding, operating mode word:
Stop (AUS1)
0: No setpoint selected [B2.5]
1: Fixed setpoint 1
2: Fixed setpoint 2
3: Fixed setpoint 3 Enable, speed control
E 4: Local setpoint 4 [B3.8] E
5: Fixed setpoint 5 d054
6: Fixed setpoint 6 Selection, droop compensation 0%
7: Fixed setpoint 7
8: Inching setpoint 1
9: Inching setpoint 2 K109
Enable, droop
Enable, droop
H509 H510
MSK [A2.6]
F H511 H512 F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Local fixed setpoints =

Sectional drive Triggerable ramp-function
Chk.
generator FP_D1_2 Function diagram D2 Sheet D2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Friction characteristic d065

A [E2.2] A
Line speed actual value Friction torque
[A8.4] X Y
K154
H700 X1
H701 Y1
H702 X2
H703 Y2
H704 X3
B B
H705 Y3
H706 X4
H707 Y4
H708 X5
H709 Y5
H710 X6
C C
H711 Y6
Influence, tech.
controller on the torque
[C2.8]
Acceleration
d067
d068 + + d069 Supplementary torque to CU
K156 Accelerating torque
+
K151 [A1.5]
K150
D H714 [E2.2] + D
H712 H713
H730
Ratio
Ratio mul./div
[D1.3] [D1.6]
Moment of inertia
H717 H718
E E
d066
H715 H716
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Friction characteristic =

Chk. Sectional drive Inertia compensation
FP_E1_2 Sheet E1+
Zustand. Änderung Date Name Std.
Supplementary torque Function diagram E1 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Torque setpoint from the master drive

d070 d073
Ramp-up/ramp-down time for load distribution H728
K155 Ramp-up/ramp-down time for fast stop H729

+ d071
H719 Friction torque +
[E1.5]
H721
+
B Torque ratio for the slave B
Accelerating torque
[E1.6]
Triggerable
ramp-function gen.
Positive torque
limit
H720 H722 K152
[A1.5]
>
=1
C Braking characteristic d072
Torque C
actual value
Line speed actual value [A1.4]
[A8.5] X Y
H724 X1 Y
Y2
H723
H725 Negative torque
Y1 limit
Y1
X
K153
H726 X2 X1 X2
D [A1.5] D
H727 Y2
[D2.6]Load distribution
(-1) Set RFG to the torque actual
value and activate once
Torque direction
[A1.4] Braking
[B2.5]
[B2.5]
Fast stop
>
=1
E E
Load distribution
Load distribution
F F
Date 19.8.96 Standard software package Load distribution =

Sectional drive Braking characteristic
Chk. FP_E1_2 Sheet E2-
Function diagram E2 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Hardware code
Fixed setpoint 0 Fixed setpoint 16 Fixed setpoint 31
0%, 0H0000 K000 H179 K016 H194 K211
A HW? d000 A

100% K001 H180 K017 H195 K212
Software code
0HFFFF K002 H181 K018 H196 K213
SW? d001
Fixed setpoint 3 Festsollwert 19

H166 K003 H182 K019 Monitoring parameter 1
B B
Version code,software
Fixed setpoint 4 d081
H167 K004
V?? d003
Fixed setpoint 5 Fixed setpoint 20 H875

Fixed setpoint 6 Fixed setopint 21 d082

H169 K006 H184 K201
C C
Fixed setpoint 7 Fixed s etpoint 22 H876
Fixed setpoint 8 Fixed setpoint 23 d083

H171 K008 H186 K203
Drive Number
Fixed setpoint 9 Fixed setpoint 24 H877
H172 K009 H187 K204
D H998 D
Monitoring parameter 4 (Hex)
Fixed setpoint 10 Fixed setpoint 25
H173 K010 H188 K205 d084
Establish factory setting

Fixed setpoint 11 Fixed setoint 26
15 13 11 9
H174 K011 H189 K206 H878 14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1 H999
Fixed setpoint 12 Fixed setpoint 27 6 4 2 0
H175 K012 H190 K207
E E
H176 K013 H191 K208

H177 K014 H192 K209
Note to setting of filter time constants:
Filter1:
Fixed setpoint xy[%]=(required time constant[ms]x100%)/(16384x40ms)
Fixed setpoint 15 Fixed setpoint 30 Filter 2 and 3:
H178 K015 H193 K210 Fixed setpoint xy[%]=(required time constant[ms]x100%)/(16384x160ms)
F F
Date 19.8.96 Standard software package Fixed setpoints =

Chk. Sectional drive Monitoring parameters Sheet F1+
Status.
FP_F1_5 Function diagram F1
Change Date Name Std. Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Diver 1: Division by 0
Sign reversal 1 Divider 1 [F5.1] Filter 1 Adder 3

A A
+
(-1) K230 K234 K237 K243
+
H600 H607 H616 Sampling time = T3 H622
Adder 1 Time constant

+
K231
B H608 H617 H623 B
+
H601
Limiter 1 Sign reversal 2 Subtractor 2
+
(-1) K240 K244
Limiter 1 at the -
upper limit
[F5.1]
H609 H618 H624
H602
C Subtractor 1 K235 Sign reversal 3 C
+
K232
H610 [F5.1]
(-1) K241
H625
- Limiter 2 at the
lower limit
H603 H619
Subtractor 3
+
K245
H611
Adder 2 -
D D
+
K242 H626
H604
Changeover switch 1
+
Multiplier 1 H620
K236
K233
H612 H627
H605
Multiplier 2
H621
E E
K246
H613
Switch 1 changed over H628
H606
MSK [F5.1]
Note:
The block sampling sequence is realized in the
increasing connector sequence. The sampling H614 H615
F time can be taken from the connector list. F

H629
Date 19.8.96 Standard software package Free functions I =

Chk. Sectional drive Sheet F2
Status
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Multiplier 3 LImiter 2 Changeover switch 2 Filter 3

A A
K247 K255
Limiter 2 at the K252
upper limit
[F5.1]
H630 H636 H642 H652
Sampling time = T4
K250
Time constant
B H631 H637 [F5.1] H643 H653 B

Limiter 2 at the
lower limit Switch 2 changed over
Divider 2, division by 0 Absolute value generator
Divider 2 [F5.1] MSK [F5.1]
K256
K248
H638 H644 H645
Absolute value generator:
H654 Input value, negative
[F5.1]
H632
Limiter 3 Changeover switch 3
C Square root extracter C
Limiter 3 at the K253

upper limit K257
[F5.1]
H633 H639 H646
Square root extracter::
Input value negative
H655 [F5.1]
Divider 3: Division by 0 [F5.1]
Divider 3 K251
Maximum evaluater
K249
D H640 [F5.1] H647 D
Limiter 3 at the
lower limit Switch 3 changed over
MAX K258
H634
MSK [F5.1]
H656
H641 H648 H649
H635
Filter 2
E E
K254 H657
H650
Sampling time = T4
Note:
The block sampling sequence is realized in the Time constant
increasing connector sequence. The sampling
F time can be taken from the connector list. H651 F
Date 19.8.96 Standard software package Free functions II =

Status
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Minimum evaluator EXOR gate 1 EXOR gate 4

A A
MIN K259 =1 K265 =1 K268

Position diff.
Pos. act. value 1
1, if an output bit is set
[A6.4] K271
H658 H675 H681 CTR
Pos. act. value 2
[F5.1] [A6.4]
Ratio
Numerator H686
B Denominator H687 B
H659 H676 H682
Flashing frequency generator MSK

Sinusoidal function EXOR gate 2
0001h
SIN(x) K260 K269 H688 H689
=1 K266 0002h
T T
C H660 H677 1. If an output bit is set C
Y(x) = 100% * sin ( x/100% * 90°) [F5.1]

T
H683
Flashing frequency
H678
D D
EXOR gate 3 Flashing word
=1 K267 K270
H679 H684
T T
E E
H685
H680
Flashing frequency
Note:
The block sampling sequence is realized in the
increasing connector sequence. The sampling
F time can be taken from the connector list. F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Free functions III =

FP_F1_5 Function diagram F4 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A [F2.3] Divider 1 : Division by 0 A

0
Status word, free functions K299
[F2.3] Limiter 1 at the upper limit
1
D/#
Limiter 1 at the lower limit
[F2.3] 2
[F2.4] Switch 1 changed over

3
[F3.1] Divider 2: Division by 0

4
[F3.1] Divider 3: Division by 0

5
B [F3.3] Limiter 2 at the upper limit B

6
[F3.3] 7
[F3.3] Limiter 3 at the upper limit

8
[F3.3] 9

10

11
[F3.8] Input absolue value generator, negative

C
12 C
Input square root extractor, negative
[F3.8] 13
[F4.4] OR logic op. of output XOR 1

14
[F4.4] OR logic op. of output XOR 2

15
D D
E E
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Status word, free functions =

Status
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 Parameter list
4 Parameter list
The technological functions are set using parameters. These can be displaying parameters which are
identified with d..., or parameters which can be changed, designated by H... .
4.1.1 List of display parameters

All of the process quantities, which are suitable to monitor the module behavior, are listed under display
parameters. These are only for monitoring purposes, and cannot be connected-back into the process. The
more detailed list of connectors is provided for tasks such as these.
In the display parameter column, the list includes the parameter abbreviations as well as the decimal- and
hexadecimal value with which they are addressed via the dual port RAM. A 14-digit abbreviated
designation follows in the value/description column, which also shows the plain text display on the OP1
operator control panel. These start, for display parameters, with STATUS_ in order to simply differentiate
them from adjustable parameters. A further parameter designation is provided in the column which can be
used to locate this in the short list and the detailed signal description.
The cross reference_sampling time column lists the STRUC G path of the particular display parameters,
thus allowing it to be found in the STRUC function diagrams. The sampling time and numerical
representation are also specified.
4.1.2 List of setting parameters

The parameter list describes the H parameters as well as their functions. The short designation of the
parameters as well as the decimal- and hexadecimal value, with which this is addressed via the dual port
RAM, is included in the parameter number column. An 11-digit short designation, follows in the
Description column, which is also displayed in the plain text display of the OP1 operator control panel, a
parameter designation which can be used to locate this in the short list, a detailed description as well as
cross-reference in the STRUC G diagrams with information regarding the sampling time and connector
type. Appropriate information (INIT) is entered for the initialization quantities; for these parameters, a
switching off and on is required so that the change becomes effective.
The value range and the step size are specified in the Range_step column. Generally, the steps are
connector-typical, and the range can also be restricted as a result of the technological function. If an
attempt is made to enter higher values, they are rejected. No steps are specified for non-proportional
connector types (R2), as this is dependent on the value (refer below).
The original setting is listed in the factory setting column. This is the pre-setting to which the module is
reset using the delete parameter changes function. This setting is non-specific, i.e., it is not provided for a
specific configuration, and is generally selected, so that the appropriate function of the parameter is
inactive, or its influence is non-critical.
The Section column includes the section number, where the parameter is explained in the text summary.
Further, the cross-reference to the function diagram page is specified in square brackets, where this
parameter is shown.
NOTE
INIT parameters are read in only after the unit is switched off and on. This should be done once after
entering all INIT parameters.
The INIT parameters are identified in the parameterlist, column description, by the adding of (INIT) to
the PKW type.
Example: H107: ... PKW type O2 (INIT).

Manual
4 Parameter list
4.2 Parameter normalization

Generally, parameters are normalized via the interfaces, just like they appear on the converter operator
control panel display (PMU).
In this case, the decimal point is eliminated.
The value range, as well as the position of the decimal point can be determined in the Value range column
of the parameter list.
The smallest possible increment can be taken from the Steps column. In this case, it should be observed,
that the value can be entered via the interface for certain parameter types with a lower step range,
However, the system can only implement the specified step, i.e. it is rounded-off.
Parameters can either have 1-, 16- or 32-bit formats. There are various parameter types depending on
their application.
An overview of the available parameter types in shown in the following table.

O2 Unsigned, 16-bit value
I2 Signed, 16-bit value
I4 Signed, 32-bit value
Example:
21.9% must be entered for parameter H531. The parameter type is I4.
Required value for H531 Parameter value range Value to be entered via the interface
21.9% -200.000 ... 199.993 21900 as decimal number
The value range information indicates that the parameter has three places after the decimal point which
means that 2 zeros must be attached.
Leading zeros need not be specified.

Manual
4 Parameter list
Parameter Description Range, Werksein- Section
number steps stellung [Plan]
d000 STATUS_HW_ID 0...16384 [F1.8]

1
1000d Hardware identifier
03e8
Code for the technology board used
e.g. T300 = 133
INPUT.HW ID.X_T5 SIMADYN:O2 PKW-TYP:I4
d001 STATUS_SW_ID 0...16384 [F1.8]
1
1001d Software identifier
03E9h
Software code
e.g. multi-motor module = 60.00
INPUT.SW ID.X_T5 SIMADYN D:O2, PKW-TYP:I4
d002 STATUS_SW_VER 0.0...1638.4 6.3.4.5
0.1 [F1.8]
1002d Software release
03EAh
INPUT.SWVER.X_T5 SIMADYN D:N2, SCAL=5100.0
PKW-TYP:I4
d003 STATUS_ANA_IN1 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.3]
1003d Signal from analog input 1
03EBh
Analog signal which is read-in after adaption and smoothing.
INPUT.AI40.Y_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d004 STATUS_ANA_IN2 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.3]
03ECh
d005 STATUS_ANA_IN3 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.3]
03EDh
d006 STATUS_ANA_IN4 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.3]
03EEh
INPUT.AI160.Y.X_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d007 STATUS_ANA_IN5 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.3]
03EFh
d008 STATUS_ANA_IN6 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.3]
03F0h
d009 STATUS_ANA_IN7 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.3]
03F1h

Manual
4 Parameter list
d010 STATUS_BIN_INP 0000h...FFFFh 3.1.4

0001h [A4.3]
1010d Status, binary inputs
03F2h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Binary input 1
INPUT.BI40.QS_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d011 STATUS_SER_INP -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.10
0.006% [A7.5]
1011d Setpoint from byte-serial input
03F3h
The value which is read-in is stored until a new value
becomes available
INPUT.SR40.Y_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d012 STATUS_TWS_INP -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.9
0.006% [A7.5]
1012d Setpoint from the decade switch
03F4h
A new setpoint is only read-in, if this was requested with the
data transfer binary command.
INPUT.SR50.Y_T4 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d013 STATUS_DIG_TC1 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.8
0.006% [A6.6]
1013d Speed actual value from pulse encoder 1
03F5h
The calculated speed actual value is 100% if the digital
pulse encoder rotates at the specified speed.
INPUT.TA12.Y_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d014 STATUS_DIG_TC2 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.8
0.006% [A6.6]
1014d Speed actual value from pulse encoder 2
03F6h
The calculated speed actual value is 100% if the digital
pulse encoder rotates at the specified speed.
INPUT.TA14.Y_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d015 STATUS_SPD_ACT -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.11
0.006% [A8.3]
1015d Speed actual value
03F7h
Speed actual value corrected by the diameter/gearbox
factor.
INPUT.TA120.Y2_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d016 STATUS_LEN_TC1 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.8
0.006% [A6.6]
1016d Length actual value from pulse encoder 1
03F8h
Number of counted tachometer pulses which are corrected
by a diameter/gearbox factor and which represent a length.
INPUT.TA24.Y2_T3
SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4

Manual
4 Parameter list
d017 STATUS_LEN_TC2 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.8

0.006% [A6.6]
1017d Length actual value from pulse encoder 2
03F9h
Number of counted tachometer pulses which are corrected
by a diameter/gearbox factor and which represent a length
INPUT.TA44.Y2_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d018 STATUS_INP_FCT 0000h...FFFFh 3.1.12
0001h [A8.8]
1018d Status word, input functions
03FA
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Tachometer 1, synchronizing signal identified
Bit 2: Line speed actual value greater than zero
Bit 3: Line speed actual value equal to zero
Bit 4: Line speed actual value less than zero
Bit 5: Length actual value 1 less than the setpoint
Bit 6: Length actual value 1 greater than the setpoint
Bit 9: System fault, SIMADYN D
Bit 10: Transmit to CU o.k.
Bit 11: Transmit to CB o.k.
Bit 12: Transmit to peer o.k.
Bit 13: Receive from CU o.k.
Bit 15: Receive from peer-to-peer o.k.
INPUT.STAT10.QS_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d019 (unbenutzt)
d020 STATUS_CTL_FCT 0000h...FFFFh 3.2.2
0001h 3.2.12
1020d Status word, open-loop control
03FCh [B6.3]
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Start enable request
Bit 1: Start enable
Bit 2: Power-up command
Bit 3: Fast stop
Bit 4: No fast stop
Bit 5: Speed is zero
Bit 6: Drive is powered-up
Bit 7: Drive is powered-down
Bit 8: Drive ready
Bit 9: Inverter enable
Bit 10: Setpoint enable
Bit 11: Local operation
Bit 12: Fault
Bit 13: Close holding brakes
Bit 14: Open holding brakes
Bit 15: Controller enable for the group control
CONTRL.ST3900.QS_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2

Manual
4 Parameter list
d021 STATUS_DGN_WRD 0000h...FFFFh [B1.6]

0001h
1021d Diagnostic word, drive
03FDh
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Drive fault
Bit 1: Fault from CU
Bit 2: Electrical off
Bits 3 to 7: Unused
Bit 8: Off after inching
Bit 9: Off after stop command
Bit 10: Off after fast stop
Bit 11: No on checkback signal from the basic drive
converter
Bit 12 to bit 15: Unused
CONTRL.C3840.Y_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d022 STATUS_FLT_WRD 0000h...FFFFh 1.6
0001h 3.2.11
1022d Fault word, drive
03FEh [B5.7]
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Communications error, CB
Bit 1: Communications error, CU
Bit 2: Fault, converter checkback signal
Bit 3: Fault from the group control
Bits 9 to 15: 0
CONTRL.F4960.Y_T4 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d023 STATUS_WRN_WRD 0000h...FFFFh 3.2.13
0001h [B6.7]
1023d Alarm word, drive
03FFh
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Alarm from the CB communications
Bit 1: Alarm from the CU communications
Bit 2: Alarm, converter checkback signal
Bit 3: Alarm from the group control
Bit 4: Alarm from the peer-to-peer communications
Bit 5: Alarm, external fault
Bit 6, 7: 0
Bit 8: Alarm, anti-stall protection
Bits 9 to 14: 0
Bit 15: External alarm

Manual
4 Parameter list
d024 STATUS_OFF_WRD 0000h...FFFFh [B1.6]

0001h
1024d Shutdown conditions, drive
0400h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Fault, drive
Bit 1: Fault from the CU
Bit 11: No on checkback signal from the basic drive
converter
CONTRL.BR20.QS_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d025 STATUS_OUT_MP1 -200.000%...199.993% [A10.4]
0.006%
1025d Output, motorized potentiometer 1
0401h
Setpoint from the motorized potentiometer.
MOTPOT.M320.Y2_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d026 STATUS_OUT_MP2 -200.000%...199.993% [A10.8]
0.006%
1026d Output, motorized potentiometer 2
0402h
Setpoint from the motorized potentiometer.
MOTPOT.M520.Y2_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d027 to 029 (unused)
d030 STATUS_FTS_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 3.3.4
6.3.4.4
1030d Selected smoothing, technological actual value
0406h [C2.2]
The smoothing time constant for the technological actual
value filter selected by the parameter changeover.
TREG.P20.Y_T5 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
d031 STATUS_GNS_TEC -256...255.9921875 3.3.4
0.0078125 6.3.4.4
1031d Effective gain, technological controller
0407h [C2.2]
Technology controller gain selected by the parameter
changeover.
TREG.P30.Y_T5 SIMADYN D:E2 PKW-TYP:I4
d032 STATUS_TRS_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 3.3.4
6.3.4.4
1032d Selected integral action time, technological
0408h [C2.2]
controller
Integral action time for the technological controller selected
by the parameter changeover.
d033 STATUS_DTS_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 3.3.4
6.3.4.4
1033d Selected derivative action time, technological
0409h [C2.2]
controller
The derivative action time for the technological controller
selected by the parameter changeover.
d034 STATUS_REF_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 3.3.2
0.006% [C1.7]
1034d Technological setpoint after the ramp-function
040Ah generator
Technological setpoint received from the setpoint ramp-
function generator.
TREG.T450.Y_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:

Manual
4 Parameter list
d035 STATUS_ACT_TEC -200.000%...199.993% [C2.3]

0.006%
1035d Technological actual value after smoothing
040Bh
Offset-compensated and smoothed technological actual
value.
TREG.T310.Y_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d036 STATUS_REG_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 3.3.4
0.006% [C2.6]
1036d Output, technological controller
040Ch
Technological controller output signal (proportional- +
integral component).
d037 STATUS_KPA_TEC -200.000%...199.993% [C2.4]
0.006%
1037d Factor kp adaption
040Dh
Process quantity-dependent value which must be multiplied
by the gain selected by the parameter changeover before it
becomes effective as controller gain.
d038 STATUS_TPC_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 3.3.4
0.006% [C2.7]
1038d Technological pre-control
040Eh
Technological setpoint, multiplied by an adaption factor
which is then added to the controller output. Used as pre-
control torque for closed-loop tension controls.
TREG.T725.Y2_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d039 STATUS_VEL_TEC -200.000%...199.993% [C2.8]
0.006%
1039d Technological line speed influence
040Fh
Influence of the technological controller on the line speed
setpoint for speed correction controls.
TREG.T745.Y2_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d040 to 044 (Unused)
d045 STATUS_REF_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.1
0.006% [D1.2]
1045d Main setpoint
0415h
Selected and adapted value which serves as line speed
setpoint for the drive (machine setpoint or setpoint from the
previous group).
SETPNT.S1020.Y_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d046 STATUS_MAC_RGE -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.2
0.006% 6.3.3.3
1046d Output, machine ramp-function generator
0416h [D1.4]
Line speed setpoint from the machine ramp-function
generator.
d047 STATUS_SRT_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.3
0.006% 6.3.3.4
1047d Ratio setpoint
0417h [D1.2]
Factor, with which the line speed setpoint is multiplied for
the drive (or also divided) in order to compensate for plastic
length changes (stretching or shrinking).
d048 STATUS_RFS_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.3
0.006% 6.3.3.4
1048d Main setpoint with ratio
0418h [D1.6]
Line speed setpoint corrected by a ratio.

Manual
4 Parameter list
d049 STATUS_RFP_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.4

0.006% [D1.8]
1049d Main setpoint with ratio and slack take-up/slack-
0419h off
Line speed setpoint corrected by a ratio with active
supplementary signals to reduce sag (slack take-up) or for
excessive web tension (slack-off).
d050 STATUS_RFA_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.5
0.006% [D2.2]
1050d Supplementary setpoint
041Ah
Additive supplementary signal to the corrected drive line
speed setpoint.
d051 STATUS_RFT_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.5
0.006% [D2.3]
1051d Total setpoint with supplementary signal and
041Bh technological controller
Total line speed setpoint of the drive after the influences of
the supplementary setpoint and technological controller
have been added.
d052 STATUS_LOC_REF -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.6
0.006% [D2.4]
1052d Local setpoint
041Ch
Effective setpoint of the local modes.
d053 STATUS_RFL_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.7
0.006% [D2.5]
1053d Line speed setpoint after the triggerable ramp-
041Dh function generator
Line speed setpoint for the drive, which is generated from
the internal ramp-function generator.
d054 STATUS_CMP_VEL -200.000%...199.993% [D2.5]
0.006%
1054d Compensation setpoint
041Eh
Supplementary line speed setpoint for load equalization with
droop.
d055 SETPNT.S3530.Y_T3 -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.11
STATUS_BIS_VEL 0.006% [D2.7]
1055d
041Fh Bias setpoint
Direct speed setpoint for the bias during load equalization.
SETPNT.S3530.Y_T3 SIMADYN:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d056 STATUS_RFF_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.9
0.006% [D2.6]
1056d Total setpoint with compensation, smoothed
0420h
Line speed setpoint for the drive, which is corrected with the
diameter(/gearbox factor).
d057 STATUS_REF_RPM -200.000%...199.993% 3.4.11
0.006% [D2.7]
1057d Speed setpoint, smoothed with bias
0421h
Speed setpoint, which is sent to the drive.

Manual
4 Parameter list
d065 STATUS_FRC_TRQ -200.000%...199.993% 3.5.1

0.006% 6.3.3.12
1065d Frictional torque
0429h [E1.3]
Speed-dependent frictional torque to compensate for
constant losses.
TORQ.T400.Y_T4 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d066 STATUS_ADD_TRQ -200.000%...199.993% [E1.3]
0.006%
1066d Supplementary torque
042Ah
Additive supplementary torque to the drive torque setpoint.
TORQ.T12.Y2_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d067 STATUS_CLC_ACC -200.000%...199.993% 6.3.3.13
0.006% [E1.5]
1067d Differentiation result
042Bh
Value, which is obtained by differentiating the speed signal
which can then be used as acceleration setpoint.
d068 STATUS_ACC_TRQ -200.000%...199.993% 3.5.2
0.006% [E1.5]
1068d Accelerating torque
042Ch
Product of the acceleration setpoint and moment of inertia.
d069 STATUS_TOT_TRQ -200.000%...199.993% 3.5.3
0.006% [E1.57
1069d Summed torque
042Dh
Torque setpoint from the friction-, acceleration-,
supplementary torque and technological controller influence.
d070 STATUS_SLV_TRQ -200.000%...199.993% 3.5.4
0.006% [E2.2]
1070d Torque setpoint, slave
042Eh
Product of the torque setpoint of the master drive and load
component of the slave.
d071 STATUS_SLT_TRQ -200.000%...199.993% [E2.3]
0.006%
1071d Torque setpoint, slave with friction and
042Fh acceleration
Torque setpoint from the friction-, acceleration- and load
distribution torque for use as torque limit for load distribution
operation.
d072 STATUS_BRK_TRQ -200.000%...199.993% 3.5.5
0.006% 6.3.3.14
1072d Braking characteristic
0430h [E2.3]
Actual braking torque from the characteristic.
d073 STATUS_RMP_TRQ 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 3.5.6
[E2.7]
1073d Effective changeover time for the torque ramp-
0431h function generator
Actual changeover time of the triggerable torque ramp-
function generator when braking and for load distribution.
TORQ.T85.Y_T3 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4

Manual
4 Parameter list
d080 STATUS_SST_WRD 0000h...FFFFh 3.1.14

0001h [A9.3]
1080d Selectable status word
0438h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
The individual status word bits can be assigned by the user
as required.
OUTPUT.ST3180.QS_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d081 STATUS_DSP_PA1 -200.000%...199.993% 3.6.2
0.006% [F1.6]
1081d Monitoring parameter 1
0439h
Parameter to monitor a process quantity, which can be
OUTPUT.S5000.Y_T5 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d082 STATUS_DSP_PA2 -200.000%...199.993% 3.6.2
0.006% [F1.6]
043Ah
d083 STATUS_DSP_PA3 -200.000%...199.993% 3.6.2
0.006% [F1.6]
043Bh
d084 STATUS_DSP_PA4 0000h...FFFFh 3.6.2
0001h [F1.6]
1084d Monitoring parameter 4 (Hex)
043Ch
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
OUTPUT.S5030.Y_T5 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d085 STATUS_BIN_OUT 0000h...FFFFh [A4.6]
0001h
1085d Status, binary outputs
043Dh
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit statuses for output at the binary outputs.
Bit 0: Binary output 1
Bits 8 to 15: 0
OUTPUT.BQ3110.QS_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d086 STATUS_KPA_NRG -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.13
0.006% [A8.3]
1086d Factor, kp adaption speed controller CU
043Eh
Factor to adapt the proportional gain of the speed controller
in the basic drive converter. The effective gain is obtained
by multiplying the value set in the basic drive converter by
an adaption factor.
OUTPUT.KP1010.Y_T1
SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4 (10 = 100%)

Manual
4 Parameter list
d087 STATUS_P2P_WD1 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.3

0.006% [A3.7]
1087d Word 1 to peer-to-peer
043Fh
Value, which is at position 1 of the peer-to-peer telegram is
sent to the following drive.
OUTPUT.PP1010.Y2_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d088 STATUS_P2P_WD2 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.3
0.006% [A3.7]
0440h
Value, at position 2 of the peer-to-peer telegram is sent to
the following drive.
d089 STATUS_P2P_WD3 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.3
0.006% [A3.7]
0441h
d090 STATUS_P2P_WD4 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.3
0.006% [A3.7]
0442h
d091 STATUS_P2P_WD5 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.3
0.006% [A3.7]
0443h
Value at position 5 of the peer-to-peer telegram is sent to
OUTPUT.PP1400.Y_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
d092 STATUS_TCU_WD1 0000h...FFFFh 3.1.1
0001h [A1.7]
1092d Word 1 at CU
0444h
Value at position 1 of the dual port RAM telegram which is
sent to the basic drive converter.
Bits 0 to 6: Drive on
Bit 7: Acknowledge fault
Bits 8 and 9: 0
Bits 10 to 12: 1
Bits 13 and 14: 0
Bit 15: 1
OUTPUT.SD1000.Y_T1 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d093 STATUS_TCU_WD2 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.1
0.006% [A1.7]
1093d Word 2 at CU
0445h
OUTPUT.SD1010.Y_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4

Manual
4 Parameter list
d094 STATUS_TCU_WD4 0000h...FFFFh 3.1.1

0001h [A1.7]
1094d Word 4 at CU
0446h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Setpoint channel data set, bit 0
Bit 2: Motor data set, bit 0
Bit 4: Fixed setpoint selection, bit 0
Bit 6: 0
Bit 7: 1
Bit 8: Droop enabled
Bit 9: Controller enable
Bit 10: 1
Bit 11: 0
Bits 12 and 13: 1
Bits 14 and 15: 0
OUTPUT.SD1030.Y_T1 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d095 STATUS_TCU_WD5 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.1
0.006% [A1.7]
1095d Word 5 at CU
0447h
d096 STATUS_TCU_WD6 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.1
0.006% [A1.7]
1096d Word 6 at CU
0448h
Value, at position 6 of the dual port RAM telegram which is
d097 STATUS_TCU_WD7 -200.000%...199.993% 3.1.1
0.006% [A1.7]
1097d Word 7 at CU
0449h
Value, at position 7 of the dual port RAM telegram which is
d098 STATUS_LVM_WRD 0000h...FFFFh 3.1.15
0001h [A9.8]
1098d Status word, limit value monitor
044Ah
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
The status word includes the status information of all 4 free
limit value monitors.
Bit 0: Limit value monitor 1, higher than limit value
Bit 1: Limit value monitor 1, same as limit value
Bit 2: Limit value monitor 1, lower than limit value
Bit 3: Limit value monitor 1, unequal to limit value
OUTPUT.GW900.QS_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d099 Unused

Manual
4 Parameter list
H101 LIM_POL_TRQ -200.000%...199.993% 2%

0.006%
1101d [A1.3]
Hysteresis, torque polarity change
044Dh
Defines the changeover point for the bias polarity
reversal. Refers to the actual motor torque from CU.
INPUT.PL10.HY_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H102 MSK_INV_BIN 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.4
0001h [A4.3]
1102d Mask, binary input inversion
044Eh
Allows 16 binary inputs to be inverted bitwise.
Bit 0: Inversion, binary input 1
to
INPUT.BI40.IS2_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H103 MSK_ENA_SYS 0000h...FFFFh 0429h 3.1.12
0001h [A8.4]
1103d Mask, system error bit enable
044Fh
Bit 0: Fatal system error
Bit 1,2: (unused)
Bit 3: Task administration error
Bit 4: Monitor error
Bit 5: Hardware fault
Bit 6: Communications error
Bits 7 to 9: (unused)
Bit 10: User error
Bit 11 to 14: (unused)
INPUT.SYF2.IS2_T5 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H104 SRC_HBE_SER 0...511 0 3.1.10
1 [A7.3]
1104d Source bit high byte enable byte serial
0450h
Connector number of the supplying value.
INPUT.SR15.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H105 MSK_HBE_SER 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.10
0001h [A7.3]
1105d Mask bit high byte enable byte serial
0451h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Signals the block
which is being read-in that the most significant byte of the
word is ready for transfer.
INPUT.SR15.MSK_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H106 ACC_TIM_SER 0[ms]...655 360[ms] 40[ms] 3.1.10
40[ms] [A7.4]
1106d Acceptance time, byte serial
0452h
This is the time where a particular byte must remain
unchanged in order to be accepted.
INPUT.SR20.TC_T3 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4
H107 NUM_DEC_TWS 2...5 4 3.1.9
1 [A7.4]
1107d Number of decades, decade switch
0453h
Number decades of the setpoint decade switch.
INPUT.SR50.STZ_T4
SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2 (INIT)
H108 REF_FAC_TWS 0...65536 100 3.1.9
1 [A7.4]
1108d Normalization factor, decade switch
0454h
Number, read-in from the decade switch, which should
correspond to 100% setpoint.
INPUT.SR50.NF_T4 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H109 BCD_TPE_TWS 0...1 1 3.1.9

1 [A7.4]
1109d Coding, BCD decade switch
0455h
Select, binary-coded-decimal.
Setting range of the individual positions:
0...9 : BCD coding: H109=1
0...F : HEX coding: H109=0
INPUT.SR50.BCD_T4
SIMADYN D:B1 PKW-TYP:BOOLEAN
H110 NEG_SGN_TWS 0...1 0 3.1.9
1 [A7.4]
1110d Signed, decade switch
0456h
When entering positive and negative values, the most
significant position only has a -7...+7 range. The sign is
attached instead of the most significant bit of this decade:
N 8 4 2 1
The contact is closed if the value is to be negative.

INPUT.SR50.VZ_T4
H111 SRC_BT0_TWS 0...511 0 3.1.9
1 [A7.3]
1111d Source, bit 0 from the decade switch
0457h
H112 MSK_BT0_TWS 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.9
0001h [A7.3]
1112d Mask, bit 0 from the decade switch
0458h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Input which is used to
read-in 1 of the decades via control lines decoupled
through diodes.
H113 SRC_BT1_TWS 0...511 0 3.1.9
1 [A7.3]
1113d Source, bit 1 from the decade bit
0459h
0001h [A7.3]
045Ah
through diodes.
H115 SRC_BT2_TWS 0...511 0 3.1.9
1 [A7.3]
045Bh
0001h [A7.3]
045Ch
through diodes.

Manual
4 Parameter list
H117 SRC_BT3_TWS 0...511 0 3.1.9

1 [A7.3]
045Dh
0001h [A7.3]
045Eh
through diodes.
H119 SRC_DAK_TWS 0...511 0 3.1.9
1 [A7.3]
1119d Source bit, data transfer from the decade
045Fh switch
H120 MSK_DAK_TWS 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.9
0001h
1120d Mask bit, data transfer from the decade switch
0460h [A7.3]
Mask to select the controlling bit. Input which is used to
enter the value, selected by the decade switch.

H121 MUL_ANA_IN1 -200.000%...199.993% 50% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
1121d Gain, analog input 1
0461h
Value with which the signal, received from the analog
input is multiplied (100% at 5V). The following is valid:
100%x100%=100%
INPUT.AI20.X2_T1
H122 OFF_ANA_IN1 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
1122d Offset, analog input 1
0462h
Value, which is added to the corrected signal.
INPUT.AI30.X2_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H123 FLT_ANA_IN1 5[ms]...81 920[ms] 5[ms] 3.1.6
1123d [A5.3]
Smoothing, analog input 1
0463h
Time constant to smooth the analog signal.
INPUT.AI40.T_T1 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H124 MUL_ANA_IN2 -200.000%...199.993% 50% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
0464h
100%x100%=100%
H125 OFF_ANA_IN2 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
0465h
1126d [A5.3]
0466h

Manual
4 Parameter list
H127 MUL_ANA_IN3 -200.000%...199.993% 50% 3.1.6

0.006% [A5.2]
0467h
100%x100%=100%
H128 OFF_ANA_IN3 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
0468h
1129d [A5.3]
0469h
H130 MUL_ANA_IN4 -200.000%...199.993% 50% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
046Ah
100%x100%=100%
H131 OFF_ANA_IN4 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
046Bh
1132d Smoothing, analog input 4

046Ch [A5.3]
H133 MUL_ANA_IN5 -200.000%...199.993% 50% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
046Dh
100%x100%=100%
H134 OFF_ANA_IN5 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
046Eh
1135d [A5.3]
046Fh
H136 MUL_ANA_IN6 -200.000%...199.993% 50% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
0470h
100%x100%=100%

Manual
4 Parameter list
H137 OFF_ANA_IN6 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.6

0.006% [A5.2]
0471h
H138 FLT_ANA_IN6 160[ms]..2 621 160[ms] 3.1.6
440[ms]
1138d [A5.3]
0472h
H139 MUL_ANA_IN7 -200.000%...199.993% 50% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
0473h
100%x100%=100%
H140 OFF_ANA_IN7 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.6
0.006% [A5.2]
0474h
H141 FLT_ANA_IN7 160[ms]..2 621 160[ms] 3.1.6
440[ms]
1141d [A5.3]
0475h
H142 PPR_DIG_TC1 0...32767 500 3.1.8
1 [A6.3]
1142d Pulse number, pulse encoder 1
0476h
Number of pulses per revolution of the digital pulse
encoder at the tachometer input.
INPUT.TA10.PR1_T1
H143 RPM_DIG_TC1 -32768...32767 500 3.1.8
1 [A6.3]
1143d Rated speed, pulse encoder 1
0477h
Motor shaft speed in [RPM], at which the pulse evaluation
must supply 100% actual value.
INPUT.TA10.RS1_T1
SIMADYN D:I2 PKW-TYP:I2 (INIT)
H144 PPR_DIG_TC2 0...32767 500 3.1.8
1 [A6.3]
1144d Pulse number, pulse encoder 2
0478h
Number of pulses per revolution of the digital pulse
encoder at the tachometer input.
INPUT.TA10.PR2_T1
H145 RPM_DIG_TC2 -32768...32767 500 3.1.8
1 [A6.3]
1145d Rated speed, pulse encoder 2
0479h
Motor shaft speed in [RPM], at which the pulse evaluation
must supply 100% actual value.
INPUT.TA10.RS2_T1
H146 SRC_LEN_RS1 0...511 0 3.1.8
1 [A6.3]
1146d Source bit, reset length counter 1
047Ah
INPUT.TA1.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H147 MSK_LEN_RS1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.8

0001h [A6.3]
1147d Mask bit, reset length counter 1
047Bh
Mask to select the controlling bits. In this case, the length
counter is set to zero.
INPUT.TA1.MSK_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H148 SRC_LEN_RS2 0...511 0 3.1.8
1 [A6.3]
1148d Source bit, reset length counter 2
047Ch
H149 MSK_LEN_RS2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.8
0001h [A6.3]
1149d Mask bit, reset length counter 2
047Dh
Mask to select the controlling bits. In this case, the length
counter is set to zero.
H150 SRC_LEN_ST1 0...511 0 3.1.8
1 [A6.3]
1150d Source bit, hold length counter 1
047Eh
H151 MSK_LEN_ST1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.8
0001h [A6.3]
1151d Mask bit, hold length counter 1
047Fh
Mask to select the controlling bits. It holds the length
counter to the actual counter status.

H152 SRC_LEN_ST2 0...511 0 3.1.8
1 [A6.3]
1152d Source bit, hold length counter 2
0480h
H153 MSK_LEN_ST2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.8
0001h [A6.3]
1153d Mask bit, hold length counter 2
0481h
Mask to select the controlling bits. It holds the length
counter at the actual counter status.
H154 FLT_SPD_AC1 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 40[ms] 3.1.8
1154d [A6.5]
Smoothing, tachometer actual value 1
0482h
Time constant of the 1st order filter with which the
tachometer input speed actual value is filtered.
INPUT.TA12.T_T1 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H155 FLT_SPD_AC2 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 40[ms] 3.1.8
1155d [A6.5]
Smoothing, tachometer actual value 2
0483h
Time constant of the 1st order filter with which the
tachometer input speed actual value is filtered.
INPUT.TA14.T_T1 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H156 SRC_RPM_ACT 0...511 41 3.1.11
1 6.3.3.1
1156d Source, speed actual value for V-act., internal
0484h [A8.1]
H157 SRC_DIA_COR 0...511 1 3.1.11
1 3.4.10
1157d Source, diameter/gearbox correction
0485h 6.3.3.10
INPUT.TA110.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2 [A8.1]

Manual
4 Parameter list
H158 LIM_SPD_ZRO -200.000%...199.993% 0.5% 3.1.11

0.006% 3.5.5
1158d Window width, zero line speed signal
0486h 6.3.3.13
Min. drive speed so that the zero line speed signal
becomes inactive.
[A8.4]
INPUT.TA130.L_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H159 HYS_SPD_ZRO -200.000%...199.993% 0.1% 3.1.11
0.006% [A8.4]
1159d Hysteresis, zero speed signal
0487h
Speed, by which the speed must fall below the threshold
so that the zero speed signal becomes active again and
the drive is switched off after OFF command.
INPUT.TA130.HY_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H160 RNG_LEN_CT1 0...30 0 3.1.8
1 [A6.5]
1160d Range selection, length measurement 1
0488h
For specific geometrical data (roll diameter, gearbox), a
certain number of pulses, which is obtained by internal
quadrupling and counting, correspond to a certain
distance.
The following is valid: d × Π=4 × i × p
d...Roll diameter,
p...Tachometer pulse number,
i...Gearbox factor n /n )
MOT roll
The counted length actual value is 100%, if the specified
number of pulses have been counted (after quadrupling):
0 ... 16384x65536
1 ... 8192x65536
2 ... 4096x65536
3 ... 2048x65536
4 ... 1024x65536
5 ... 512x65536
6 ... 256x65536
7 ... 128x65536
8 ... 64x65536
9 ... 32x65536
10 ... 16x65536
11 ... 8x65536
12 ... 4x65536
13 ... 2x65536
14 ... 65536
15 ... 32768
16 ... 16384
17 ... 8192
18 ... 4096
19 ... 2048
20 ... 1024
21 ... 512
22 ... 256
23 ... 128
24 ... 64
25 ... 32
26 ... 16
27 ... 8
28 ... 4
29 ... 2
30 ... 1
INPUT.TA20.XD_T3
SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H161 SRC_DIA_CR1 0...511 1 3.1.8
1 [A6.5]
1161d Source, correction factor length meas. 1
0489h
Connector number of the supplying value. For measuring
rolls where the diameter changes, a correction factor can
be entered for length measurement.

Manual
4 Parameter list
H162 SRC_LEN_RF1 0...511 0 3.1.8

1 [A6.5]
1162d Source, length setpoint 1
048Ah
Connector number of the supplying value. The setpoint
normalization is defined by that of the actual value (refer
to H160).
H163 RNG_LEN_CT2 0...30 0 3.1.8
1 [A6.5]
1163d Range selection, length measurement 2
048Bh
INPUT.TA40.XD_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H164 SRC_DIA_CR2 0...511 1 3.1.8
1 [A6.5]
1164d Source, correction factor length meas. 2
048Ch
Connector number of the supplying value. For measuring
rolls where the diameter changes, a correction factor can
be entered for length measurement.
H165 SRC_LEN_RF2 0...511 0 3.1.8
1 [A6.5]
1165d Source, length setpoint 2
048Dh
Connector number of the supplying value. The setpoint
normalization is defined by that of the actual value (refer
to H163).
H166 REF_FIX_003 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
1166d Fixed setpoint 3 (connector 003)
048Eh
Fixed setpoint which can be defined by the user.
INPUT.FP5030.X_T5 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H167 REF_FIX_004 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
048Fh
H168 REF_FIX_005 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
0490h
H169 REF_FIX_006 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
0491h
H170 REF_FIX_007 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
0492h
H171 REF_FIX_008 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
0493h
H172 REF_FIX_009 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
0494h

Manual
4 Parameter list
H173 REF_FIX_010 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1

0.006% [F1.1]
0495h
H174 REF_FIX_011 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
0496h
H175 REF_FIX_012 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
0497h
H176 REF_FIX_013 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
0498h
H177 REF_FIX_014 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
0499h
H178 REF_FIX_015 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.1]
049Ah
H179 REF_FIX_016 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
049Bh
H180 REF_FIX_017 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
049Ch
H181 REF_FIX_018 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
049Dh
H182 REF_FIX_019 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
049Eh
H182 REF_FIX_020 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
049Fh
H184 REF_FIX_021 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
04A0h

Manual
4 Parameter list
H185 REF_FIX_022 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1

0.006% [F1.3]
04A1h
H186 REF_FIX_023 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
04A2h
H187 REF_FIX_024 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
04A3h
H188 REF_FIX_025 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
04A4h
H189 REF_FIX_026 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
04A5h
H190 REF_FIX_027 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
04A6h
H191 REF_FIX_028 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
04A7h
H192 REF_FIX_029 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
04A8h
H193 REF_FIX_030 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.3]
04A9h
H194 REF_FIX_031 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.5]
04AAh
H195 REF_FIX_032 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.5]
04ABh
H196 REF_FIX_033 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.6.1
0.006% [F1.5]
04ACh

Manual
4 Parameter list
H197 BD_RATE_P2P 0...7 7 3.1.3

1 [F1.5]
1197d Baud rate for a peer-to-peer coupling
04ADh
The following baud rates can be set:
Value 0: 300 baud
Value 1: 600 baud
Value 2: 1200 baud
Value 3: 2400 baud
Value 4: 4800 baud
Value 5: 9600 baud
Value 6: 19200 baud
Value 7: 38400 baud
@CMT1.PEER.BDR_T4
H198 LEN_RXD_P2P 0...32 5 3.1.3
1 [A3.1]
1198d Number of receive words, peer-to-peer
04AEh
Adapting the telegram length for a peer-to-peer coupling
in the receive direction
INPUT.RXPP.LT_T1
H199 LEN_TXD_P2P 0...32 5 3.1.3
1 [F1.5]
1199d Number of transmit words, peer-to-peer
04AFh
Adapting the telegram length for a peer-to-peer coupling
in the transmit direction
OUTPUT.PP100.LT_T1
H200 SRC_DRV_ONC 0...511 0 3.2.1
1 3.2.2
1200d Source on
04B0h 6.3.2.1
CONTRL.P3000.NC_T3 [B1.1]
H201 MSK_DRV_ONC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.1
0001h 3.2.2
1201d Mask on
04B1h 6.3.2.1
Mask to select the controlling bits. It issues the start
request and powers-up the drive.
[B1.1]
CONTRL.P3000.MSK_T3
SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H202 SRC_DRV_NNS 0...511 0 3.2.6
1 6.3.2.2
1202d Source, no standard stop
04B2h [B2.1]
CONTRL.P3010.NC_T3
H203 MSK_DRV_NNS 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.6
0001h 6.3.2.2
1203d Mask, no standard stop
04B3h [B2.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. A zero signal causes
the drive to decelerate down to standstill along the
internal ramp, followed by electrical shutdown.
CONTRL.P3010.MSK_T3
H204 SRC_DRV_NCS 0...511 0 3.2.6
1 6.3.2.2
1204d Source, no electrical off
04B4h [B2.1]
CONTRL.P3020.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H205 MSK_DRV_NCS 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.6

0001h 6.3.2.4
1205d Mask, no electrical off
04B5h [B2.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. A zero signal inhibits
the controller and instantaneously shuts down the drive
electrically.
CONTRL.P3020.MSK_T3
H206 SRC_DRV_NFS 0...511 0 3.2.6
1 6.3.2.3
1206d Source, no fast stop
04B6h [B2.1]
CONTRL.P3030.NC_T3
H207 MSK_DRV_NFS 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.6
0001h 6.3.2.3
1207d Mask, no fast stop
04B7h [B2.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. A zero signal switches
the speed setpoint to zero and controls the torque limit
down to standstill. The drive is then shutdown.
CONTRL.P3030.MSK_T3
H208 SRC_DRV_IVE 0...511 2 3.2.8
1 6.3.2.5
1208d Source, inverter enable
04B8h [B3.1]
CONTRL.P3040.NC_T3
H209 MSK_DRV_IVE 0000h...FFFFh 0001h 3.2.8
0001h 6.3.2.5
1209d Mask, inverter enable
04B9h [B3.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. This permits the
inverter to be enabled after the drive has been powered-
up.
CONTRL.P3040.MSK_T3
H210 SRC_DRV_RGE 0...511 2 3.4.2
1 [D1.1]
1210d Source, ramp-function generator enable
04BAh
CONTRL.P3050.NC_T3
H211 MSK_DRV_RGE 0000h...FFFFh 0001h 3.4.2
0001h [D1.1]
1211d Mask, ramp-function generator enable
04BBh
Mask to select the controlling bits. It enables the machine
ramp-function generator. The ramp-function generator is
set to zero if the signal is inactive.
CONTRL.P3050.MSK_T3
H212 SRC_DRV_RGS 0...511 2 3.4.2
1 [D1.1]
1212d Source, ramp-function generator start
04BCh
CONTRL.P3060.NC_T3
H213 MSK_DRV_RGS 0000h...FFFFh 0001h 3.4.2
0001h [D1.1]
1213d Mask, ramp-function generator start
04BDh
Mask to select the controlling bits. The machine ramp-
function generator is held (acceleration is interrupted) if
the signal is inactive.
CONTRL.P3060.MSK_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H214 SRC_DRV_SPE 0...511 2 3.2.8

1 6.3.2.6
1214d Source, setpoint enable
04BEh [B3.1]
CONTRL.P3070.NC_T3
H215 MSK_DRV_SPE 0000h...FFFFh 0001h 3.2.8
0001h 6.3.2.6
1215d Mask, setpoint enable
04BFh [B3.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Permits the setpoint to
be enabled after the drive has been powered-up.
CONTRL.P3070.MSK_T3
H216 SRC_DRV_FCK 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A2.5]
1216d Source, fault acknowledgement
04C0h
CONTRL.P3080.NC_T3
H217 MSK_DRV_FCK 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.1
0001h [A2.5]
1217d Mask, fault acknowledgement
04C1h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Resets the converter
frault displays.
CONTRL.P3080.MSK_T3
H218 SRC_DRV_NLC 0...511 0 3.2.3
1 6.3.2.7
1218d Source, no local operation
04C2h [B1.1]
CONTRL.P3090.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H219 MSK_DRV_NLC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.3
0001h 6.3.2.7
1219d Mask, no local operation
04C3h [B1.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. This signal inhibits the
local operating modes.
CONTRL.P3090.MSK_T3
H220 SRC_DRV_JG1 0...511 0 3.2.4
1 6.3.2.8
1220d Source, inching 1
04C4h [B1.1]
CONTRL.P3100.NC_T3
H221 MSK_DRV_JG1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.4
0001h 6.3.2.8
1221d Mask, inching 1
04C5h [B1.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Controls inching
function 1
CONTRL.P3100.MSK_T3
H222 SRC_DRV_JG2 0...511 0 3.2.4
1 6.3.2.8
1222d Source, inching 2
04C6h [B1.1]
CONTRL.P3110.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H223 MSK_DRV_JG2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.4

0001h 6.3.2.8
1223d Mask, inching 2
04C7h [B1.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Controls inching
function 2.
CONTRL.P3110.MSK_T3
H224 SRC_DRV_LB0 0...511 0 3.2.10
1 6.3.2.10
1224d Source, operating mode bit 0
04C8h [B4.1]
CONTRL.P3120.NC_T3
H225 MSK_DRV_LB0 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.10
0001h 6.3.2.10
1225d Mask, operating mode bit 0
04C9h Mask to select the controlling bits. Defines the operating [B4.1]
mode word with which the local setpoints are selected.
CONTRL.P3120.MSK_T3
H226 SRC_DRV_LB1 0...511 0 3.2.10
1 6.3.2.10
04CAh [B4.1]
CONTRL.P3130.NC_T3
0001h 6.3.2.10
04CBh [B4.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Defines the operating
CONTRL.P3130.MSK_T3
H228 SRC_DRV_LB2 0...511 0 3.2.10
1 6.3.2.10
04CCh [B4.1]
CONTRL.P3140.NC_T3
0001h 6.3.2.10
04CDh [B4.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Defines the operating
CONTRL.P3140.MSK_T3
H230 SRC_DRV_STE 0...511 0 3.2.2
1 6.3.2.1
1230d Source, start enable
04CEh [B1.1]
CONTRL.P3150.NC_T3
H231 MSK_DRV_STE 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.2
0001h 6.3.2.1
1231d Mask, start enable
04CFh [B1.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. It allows the drive to be
powered-up, if operation with a start sequence (H252) is
parameterized.
CONTRL.P3150.MSK_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H232 SRC_DRV_ILF 0...511 0 3.2.9

1 6.3.2.9
1232d Source, checkback signal, group control
04D0h [B3.1]
CONTRL.P3160.NC_T3
H233 MSK_DRV_ILF 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 6.3.2.9
0001h [B3.1]
1233d Mask, checkback signal, group control
04D1h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Signals readiness
(“powered-up”) for slave drives of a multi-motor group for
setpoint enable and group monitoring, if group (multi-
motor) operation is selected with H251.
CONTRL.P3160.MSK_T3
H234 SRC_DRV_SB0 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A2.5]
1234d Source, setpoint channel data set, bit 0
04D2h
CONTRL.P5170.NC_T3
H235 MSK_DRV_SB0 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.1
0001h [A2.5]
1235d Mask, setpoint channel data set, bit 0
04D3h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Controls the selection
of specified standard configurations in the converter.
CONTRL.P5170.MSK_T3
H236 SRC_DRV_SB1 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A2.5]
1236d Source, setpoint channel data set, bit 1
04D4h
CONTRL.P5180.NC_T3
H237 SRC_DRV_SB1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.1
0001h [A2.5]
1237d Mask, setpoint channel data set, bit 1
04D5h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Controls the selection
of specified standard configurations in the converter.
CONTRL.P5180.MSK_T3
H238 SRC_DRV_MB0 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A2.5]
1238d Source, motor data set, bit 0
04D6h
CONTRL.P5190.NC_T3
H239 MSK_DRV_MB0 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.1
0001h [A2.5]
1239d Mask, motor data set, bit 0
04D7h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Selects specified
motor data in the converter.
CONTRL.P5190.MSK_T3
H240 SRC_DRV_MB1 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A2.5]
1240d Source, motor data set, bit 1
04D8h
CONTRL.P5200.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H241 MSK_DRV_MB1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.1

0001h [A2.5]
1241d Mask, motor data set, bit 1
04D9h
Mask to select the controlling bits. The specified motor
data in the converter are selected.
CONTRL.P5200.MSK_T3
H242 SRC_DRV_FB0 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A2.5]
1242d Source, fixed setpoint selection, bit 0
04DAh
CONTRL.P5210.NC_T3
H243 MSK_DRV_FB0 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.1
0001h [A2.5]
1243d Mask, fixed setpoint selection, bit 0
04DBh
Mask to select the controlling bits. The specified setpoints
in the converter are selected.
CONTRL.P5210.MSK_T3
H244 SRC_DRV_FB1 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A2.5]
1244d Source, fixed setpoint selection, bit 1
04DCh
CONTRL.P5220.NC_T3
H245 MSK_DRV_FB1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.1
0001h [A2.5]
1245d Mask, fixed setpoint selection, bit 1
04DDh
Mask to select the controlling bits. The specified setpoints
in the converter are selected.
CONTRL.P5220.MSK_T3
H246 SRC_DRV_XW2 0...511 2 3.2.13
1 6.3.2.12
1246d Source, no external alarm 2
04DEh [B6.5]
CONTRL.ST3300.NC_T3
H247 MSK_DRV_XW2 0000h...FFFFh 0001h 3.2.13
0001h 6.3.2.12
1247d Mask, no external alarm 2
04DFh [B6.5]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Activates external
alarm.
CONTRL.ST3300.MSK_T3
H248 MSK_DRV_WWD 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.2.13
0001h [B6.7]
1248d Mask, bit selection alarm word
04E0h
Mask to select the active alarms in the alarm word.
Bit 0: Alarm, communications CB
Bit 1: Alarm, communications CU
Bit 3: Alarm, from the group control
Bit 4: Alarm, peer communications
Bit 5: Alarm, from an external fault
Bits 6 and 7: (unused)
Bit 8: Alarm, from the anti-.stall protection
Bit 9 to 14: (unused)
Bit 15: External alarm 2
CONTRL.ST3350.IS2_T3
H249 (Unused)

Manual
4 Parameter list
H250 PAR_DRV_1QD 0...1 0 3.2.5

1 [B1.3]
1250d No regenerative feedback
04E2h
Defines single-quadrant operation of the drive, i.e. for fast
stop, drive is immediately electrically shutdown without
braking.
CONTRL.P5000.I_T5
H251 PAR_DRV_ILE 0...1 0 3.2.9
1 6.3.2.1
1251d Enable, group control
04E3h 6.3.2.9
Activates the interrogation of checkback signals for the
operation of several drives in a group.
[B3.1]
CONTRL.P5010.I_T5
H252 PAR_DRV_NSS 0...1 1 3.2.1
1 3.2.2
1252d No starting sequence
04E4h [B1.5]
Suppresses interrogation of the power-up enable from a
central control to power-up the drive.
CONTRL.P5020.I_T5
H253 TIM_OFF_JOG 0[ms]...655 360[ms] 30 000[ms] 3.2.4
40[ms] [B1.4]
1253d Time, shutdown after inching
04E5h
Time after the inching command has become inactive
until the drive is electrically shutdown. This prevents the
main contactor from being switched-in/-out a multiple
number of times when inching.
CONTRL.C3210.T_T3
SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4
H254 PAR_MBR_ENA 0...1 0 3.2.7
1 [B1.6]
1254d Enable operation with holding brakes
04E6h
Enables the holding brake control. For operation without
holding brakes (zero), a zero should also be entered for
the braking times (H271 and H272).
CONTRL.P5030.I_T5
H255 PAR_MBR_MOD 1...4 1 3.2.7
1 [B2.1]
1255d Operating mode of the holding brakes
04E7h
Defines the mode of operation of the holding brakes for
drive faults and the electrical off function:
1: For drive faults and electrical off, the drive is
immediately shutdown, however, the holding brakes
only close when the drive has come to a standstill.
immediately shutdown. For a fault, the holding brakes
close immediately, however, for electrical off, they only
close when the drive has come to a standstill.
immediately shutdown. For electrical off, the holding
brakes close immediately, however, for faults, only
when the drive has come to a standstill.
immediately shutdown and the holding brakes
immediately closed.
CONTRL.P5039.X_T5

Manual
4 Parameter list
H256 JOG_BRK_NNE 0...1 0 3.2.4

1 3.2.9
1256d Inching without braking
04E8h 6.3.2.8
If the inching command becomes inactive, the drive
coasts down in a no-torque condition to standstill if the
[B3.5]
parameter value is 1. Otherwise, the controller actively
brakes the drive down to standstill along the internal
ramp.
CONTRL.C3990.I2_T3
H257 FLT_TMO_CCB 0[ms]...2 621 440[ms] 100[ms] 3.2.11
160[ms] [B5.4]
Tolerance time, CB - communications error
1257d Duration of a communications error which was identified
04E9h from/to CB before the drive is shutdown with fault.
CONTRL.F4110.T_T4
H258 FLT_TMO_CCU 0[ms]...2 621 440[ms] 100[ms] 3.2.11
160[ms] [B5.4]
1258d Tolerance time, CU - communications error
04EAh
Duration of a communications error which was identified
from/to CU before the drive is shutdown with fault.
CONTRL.F4160.T_T4
H259 FLT_TMO_IFB 0[ms]...2 621 440[ms] 1000[ms] 3.2.11
160[ms] [B5.4]
1259d Tolerance time, converter checkback signal
04EBh fault
Time, for which the converter ready signal may not be
present after power-up or during operation. The drive is
shutdown with a fault signal if this time is exceeded.
CONTRL.F4210.T_T4
H260 SRC_FLT_EXT 0...511 2 3.2.11
1 6.3.2.11
1260d Source, no external fault
04ECh [B5.2]
CONTRL.F4215.NC_T4
H261 MSK_FLT_EXT 0000h...FFFFh 0001h 3.2.11
0001h 6.3.2.11
1261d Mask, no external fault
04EDh [B5.2]
Mask to select the controlling bits. If the logical status
goes to zero, the drive is shutdown with ‘external fault’
after a time which is defined using H262.
CONTRL.F4215.MSK_T4
H262 FLT_TMO_EXT 0[ms]...2 621 440[ms] 1000[ms] 3.2.11
160[ms] 6.3.2.11
1262d Tolerance time, external faults
04EEh [B5.4]
Time, after a signal has become inactive, until this is
identified as an external fault and the drive is shutdown.
CONTRL.F4217.T_T4
H263 FLT_TMO_CPP 0[ms]...2 621 440[ms] 100[ms] 3.2.11
160[ms] [B5.4]
1263d Tolerance time, peer communications error
04EFh
Duration of an identified peer-communications error until
the drive is shutdown with fault.
CONTRL.F4310.T_T4

Manual
4 Parameter list
H264 FLT_TMO_GRP 0[ms]...2 621 440[ms] 2000[ms] 3.2.11

160[ms] [B5.4]
1264d Tolerance time, motor group fault
04F0h
Time, for which a checkback signal for a drive in a drive
group may not be available after power-up or during
operation. If this time is exceeded, the drive is shutdown
with fault.
CONTRL.F4260.T_T4
H265 FLT_LIM_OVS 0%...199% 120% 3.2.11
0.006% [B5.2]
1265d Threshold, overspeed fault
04F1h
Threshold, where a fault is identified if the absolute speed
actual value exceeds it.
CONTRL.F4220.L_T4
H266 FLT_BLK_LVA 0%...199% 0.5% 3.2.11
0.006% [B5.3]
1266d Threshold, speed actual value for anti-stall
04F2h protection
Threshold, which the drive speed actual value may not
exceed so that the anti-stall protection can respond.
CONTRL.F4225.M_T4
H267 FLT_BLK_LVR 0%...199% 1% 3.2.11
0.006% [B5.3]
1267d Threshold, speed setpoint for anti-stall
04F3h protection
Threshold, which the drive speed setpoint must exceed
so that the anti-stall protection can respond.
CONTRL.F4230.M_T4
H268 FLT_BLK_LMA 0%...199.993% 80% 3.2.11
0.006% [B5.3]
1268d Threshold, torque actual value for anti-stall
04F4h protection
Threshold, which the drive torque actual value must
exceed, so that the anti-stall protection can respond.
CONTRL.F4235.M_T4
H269 FLT_TMO_BLK 0[ms]...2 621 440[ms] 1000[ms] 3.2.11
160[ms] [B5.5]
1269d Tolerance time, anti-stall protection fault
04F5h
Duration, after the stall conditions have been fulfilled up
until the anti-stall protection responds and the drive is
shutdown with fault.
CONTRL.F4245.T_T4
H270 FLT_MSK_ENA 0000h...FFFFh FFFFh 3.2.11
0001h [B5.7]
1270d Mask, fault enable
04F6h
Bitwise enabling of individual monitoring functions. At
zero, these are inhibited, and neither result in a display
nor shutdown.
Bit 0: Enable monitoring, communications with CB
Bit 1: Enable monitoring, communications with CU
Bit 2: Enable monitoring, converter checkback signal
Bit 3: Enable monitoring, motor group
Bit 4: Enable monitoring, peer communications
Bit 5: Enable, external fault
Bit 6: Enable overspeed protection, positive
Bit 7: Enable overspeed protection, negative
Bit 8: Enable, anti-stall protection
CONTRL.F4920.X1_T4

Manual
4 Parameter list
H271 TIM_MBR_OPN 0[ms]...655 360[ms] 0[ms] 3.2.7

40[ms] [B2.7]
1271d Time, open holding brake
04F7h
Duration between controller enable (command, open
holding brake) and setpoint enable (holding brake is open
- released).
CONTRL.BR110.T_T3 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4
H272 TIM_MBR_CLS 0[ms]...655 360[ms] 0[ms] 3.2.7
40[ms] [B2.7]
1272d Time, close holding brake
04F8h
Duration between standstill (command, close holding
brake) and the drive shutting down (holding brake is
closed).
CONTRL.BR120.T_T3 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4
H273-299 (unused)
H300 SRC_INP_MP1 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.1]
1300d Source, motorized potentiometer 1, input
0514h
Connector number of the supplying value. Input value, if
the motorized potentiometer is used as ramp-function
generator with the “track” function.
MOTPOT.M10.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H301 SRC_SVA_MP1 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.1]
1301d Source, motorized potentiometer 1, setting
0515h value
Connector number of the supplying value. Value, to which
the motorized potentiometer is instantaneously set if the
‘set’ command is active.
H302 SRC_SET_MP1 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.1]
1302d Source bit, set MOP, motorized potentiometer
0516h 1
H303 MSK_SET_MP1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.16
0001h [A10.2]
1303d Mask bit, set MOP motorized potentiometer 1
0517h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Instantaneously sets
the motorized potentiometer to the setting value. ‘Setting’
has priority over ‘tracking’, ‘raise’ and ‘lower’.
MOTPOT.M30.MSK_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H304 SRC_INC_MP1 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.1]
1304d Source bit, raise motorized potentiometer 1
0518h
H305 MSK_INC_MP1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.16
0001h [A10.2]
1305d Mask bit, raise motorized potentiometer 1
0519h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Increases the
motorized potentiometer output signal. This has priority
over ‘lower’.
H306 SRC_DEC_MP1 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.1]
1306d Source bit, lower motorized potentiometer 1
051Ah

Manual
4 Parameter list
H307 MSK_DEC_MP1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.16

0001h [A10.2]
1307d Mask bit, lower motorized potentiometer 1
051Bh
Mask to select the controlling bits. Reduces the motorized
potentiometer output signal.
H308 SRC_FOW_MP1 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.1]
1308d Source bit, motorized potentiometer 1,
051Ch tracking
H309 MSK_FOW_MP1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.16
0001h [A10.2]
1309d Mask bit, motorized potentiometer 1, tracking
051Dh
Mask to select the controlling bits. The motorized
potentiometer then tracks the input signal, taking into
account the ramp times. This has priority over ‘raise’ and
‘lower’.
H310 SRC_INP_MP2 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.5]
1310d Source, motorized potentiometer input 2
051Eh
Connector number of the supplying value. Input value, if
the motorized potentiometer is used as ramp-function
generator with the “track” function.
H311 SRC_SVA_MP2 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.5]
1311d Source, motorized potentiometer 2, setting
051Fh value
Connector number of the supplying value. Value, to which
the motorized potentiometer is instantaneously set if the
‘set’ command is active.
H312 SRC_SET_MP2 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.5]
1312d Source bit, set motorized potentiometer 2
0520h
H313 MSK_SET_MP2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.16
0001h [A10.5]
1313d Mask bit, set motorized potentiometer 2
0521h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Instantaneously sets
the motorized potentiometer to the setting value. ‘Setting’
has priority over ‘tracking’, ‘raise’ and ‘lower’.
MOTPOT.M35.MSK_T3
H314 SRC_INC_MP2 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.5]
1314d Source bit, raise motorized potentiometer 2
0522h
MOTPOT.M45.NC_T3
H315 MSK_INC_MP2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.16
0001h [A10.5]
1315d Mask bit, raise motorized potentiometer 2
0523h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Increases the
motorized potentiometer output signal. This has priority
over ‘lower’.
MOTPOT.M45.MSK_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H316 SRC_DEC_MP2 0...511 0 3.1.16

1 [A10.5]
1316d Source bit, lower motorized potentiometer 2
0524h
MOTPOT.M55.NC_T3
H317 MSK_DEC_MP2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.16
0001h [A10.5]
1317d Mask bit, lower motorized potentiometer 2
0525h
potentiometer output signal is decreased.
MOTPOT.M55.MSK_T3
H318 SRC_FOW_MP2 0...511 0 3.1.16
1 [A10.5]
1318d Source bit, motorized potentiometer 2 tracking
0526h
MOTPOT.M65.NC_T3
H319 MSK_FOW_MP2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.16
0001h [A10.5]
1319d Mask bit, motorized potentiometer 2 tracking
0527h
potentiometer tracks the input signal taking into account
the ramp times. This has priority over ‘raise’ and ‘lower’.
MOTPOT.M65.MSK_T3
H320 RPT_SLW_MP1 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 60 000[ms] 3.1.16
1320d [A10.2]
Slow ramp time, motorized potentiometer 1
0528h
Time, which the motorized potentiometer or the ramp-
function generator requires, in order to execute a change
for the range set in H324.
MOTPOT.M230.X1_T3
SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H321 RPT_FST_MP1 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 25 000[ms] 3.1.16
1321d [A10.2]
Fast ramp time, motorized potentimeter 1
0529h
Time, which the motorized potentiometer or ramp-function
generator requires in order to execute a change by the
range set in H324. If one of the commands, ‘raise’ or
‘lower’ is continuously present for longer than 3 seconds,
this time is used instead of H320.
MOTPOT.M230.X2_T3
H322 LIM_UPP_MP1 -200.000%...199.993% 120% 3.1.16
0.006% [A10.2]
1322d Upper limit, motorized potentiometer 1
052Ah
Maximum positive value of the output signal. Corresponds
to 100% of the value set in H324.
MOTPOT.M300.LU_T3
H323 LIM_LOW_MP1 -200.000%...199.993% -120% 3.1.16
0.006% [A10.2]
1323d Lower limit, motorized potentiometer 1
052Bh
Maximum negative value of the output signal. 100%
corresponds to the value set in H324.
MOTPOT.M300.LL_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H324 MUL_IMP_MP1 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.16

0.006% [A10.3]
1324d Influence factor, motorized potentiometer 1
052Ch
Motorized potentiometer setpoint range if the limiting is
100%. The following is valid: 100%x100%=100%
MOTPOT.M320.X2_T3
H325 RPT_SLW_MP2 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 60 000[ms] 3.1.16
1325d [A10.6]
Slow ramp time, motorized potentiometer 2
052Dh
Time, which the motorized potentiometer or the ramp-
function generator requires, in order to execute a change
for the range set in H329.
MOTPOT.M430.X1_T3
H326 RPT_FST_MP2 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 25 000[ms] 3.1.16
1326d [A10.6]
Fast ramp time, motorized potentiometer 2
052Eh
Time, which the motorized potentiometer or ramp-function
generator requires in order to execute a change by the
range set in H329. If one of the commands, ‘raise’ or
‘lower’ is continuously available for longer than 3
seconds, this time is used instead of H325.
MOTPOT.M430.X2_T3
H327 LIM_UPP_MP2 -200.000%...199.993% 120% 3.1.16
0.006% [A10.6]
1327d Upper limit, motorized potentiometer 2
052Fh
Maximum positive value of the output signal. Corresponds
to 100% of the value set in H329.
MOTPOT.M500.LU_T3
H328 LIM_LOW_MP2 -200.000%...199.993% -120% 3.1.16
0.006% [A10.6]
1328d Lower limit, motorized potentiometer 2
0530h
Maximum negative value of the output signal. 100%
corresponds to the value set in H329.
MOTPOT.M500.LL_T3
H329 MUL_IMP_MP2 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.16
0.006% [A10.7]
1329d Influence factor, motorized potentiometer 1
0531h
Motorized potentiometer setpoint range, if the limiting is
100%. The following is valid: 100%x100%=100%
MOTPOT.M520.X2_T3
H330-399 (Unused)
H400 SRC_REF_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.2
1 6.3.4.3
1400d Source, technological setpoint
0578h [C1.4]
Connector number of the supplying value. The signal,
which is fed via the setpoint ramp-function generator and
used as technological setpoint.
TREG.T100.NC_T2
H401 MUL_REF_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.3.2
0.006% 6.3.4.3
1401d Adaption factor, technological setpoint
0579h [C1.5]
Factor to adapt the range of the technological setpoint.
The following is valid: 100%x100%=100%
TREG.T110.X2_T2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H402 SRC_ACT_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.3

1 6.3.4.2
1402d Source, technological actual value
057Ah [C1.4]
Connector number of the supplying value. Signal, which is
smoothed after offset compensation and is used as
technological actual value.
TREG.T120.NC_T2 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H403 MUL_ACT_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.3.3
0.006% 6.3.4.2
1403d Adaption factor, technological actual value
057Bh [C1.5]
Factor to adapt the range of the technological actual
value. The following is valid: 100%x100%=100%
TREG.T130.X2_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H404 SRC_ON1_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.1
1 6.3.4.1
1404d Source bit, enable 1 technological controller
057Ch [C1.1]
H405 MSK_ON1_TEC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.3.1
0001h 6.3.4.1
1405d Mask bit, enable 1 technological controller
057Dh [C1.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Enables the
technological controller.
TREG.T140.MSK_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H406 SRC_ON2_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.1
1 6.3.4.1
1406d Source bit, enable 2 technological controller
057Eh [C1.1]
H407 MSK_ON2_TEC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.3.1
0001h 6.3.4.1
1407d Mask bit, enable 2 technological controller
057Fh [C1.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Enables the
H408 SRC_OF1_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.1
1 6.3.4.1
1408d Source bit, disable 1 technological controller
0580h [C1.1]
H409 MSK_OF1_TEC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.3.1
0001h 6.3.4.1
1409d Mask bit, disable 1 technological controller
0581h [C1.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Disables the
H410 SRC_OF2_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.1
1 6.3.4.1
1410d Source bit, disable 2 technological controller
0582h [C1.1]
H411 MSK_OF2_TEC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.3.1
0001h 6.3.4.1
1411d Mask bit, disable 2 technological controller
0583h [C1.1]

Manual
4 Parameter list
H412 SRC_PSS_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.4

1 6.3.4.4
1412d Source, parameter changeover tech.controller
0584h [C2.1]
Status 0 1
Parameter
Speed act. value smoothing H 4 1 4 H415

Controller gain H416 H417
Integral action time H418 H419
Derivation action time H420 H421
TREG.P10.NC_T5 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H413 MSK_PSS_TEC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.3.4
0001h 6.3.4.4
1413d Mask, parameter changeover tech. controller
0585h [C2.1]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Selects one of the two
parameter sets for the technological controller.
TREG.P10.MSK_T5 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2

H414 FT1_ACT_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 100[ms] 3.3.4
1414d 6.3.4.4
Smoothing P1, technological actual value
0586h [C2.1]
The actual value smoothing which is effective at
parameter set changeover, status 0.
TREG.P20.X1_T5 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H415 FT2_ACT_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 100[ms] 3.3.4
1415d 6.3.4.4
Smoothing P2, technological actual value
0587h [C2.1]
The actual value smoothing which is effective at
H416 KP1_REG_TEC -256...255.9921875 1 3.3.4
0.0078125 6.3.4.4
1416d Gain P1, technological controller
0588h [C2.1]
Proportional gain of the technological controller, effective
at parameter set changeover, status 0.
TREG.P30.X1_T5 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H417 KP2_REG_TEC -256...255.9921875 1 3.3.4
0.0078125 6.3.4.4
1417d Gain P2, technological controller
0589h [C2.1]
Proportional gain of the technological controller, effective
at parameter set changeover, status 1.
TREG.P30.X2_T5 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H418 TN1_REG_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 1 000[ms] 3.3.4
1418d 6.3.4.4
Integral action time P1, technological controller
058Ah [C2.1]
Integral action time of the technological controller at
H419 TN2_REG_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 1 000[ms] 3.3.4
1419d 6.3.4.4
Integral action time P2, technological controller
058Bh [C2.1]
Integral action time of the technological controller at

Manual
4 Parameter list
H420 TV1_REG_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 10[ms] 3.3.4
1420d 6.3.4.4
Derivative action time P1, technological
058Ch controller [C2.1]
Derivative action time of the technological controller
which becomes effective at parameter set changeover,
status 0.
TREG.P50.X1_T5 SIMADYN D:D2 PKW-TYP:O4
H421 TV2_REG_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 10[ms] 3.3.4
1421d 6.3.4.4
Derivative action time P2, technological
058Dh controller [C2.1]
Derivative action time of the technological controller
which becomes effective at parameter set changeover,
status 1.
H422 SRC_OFR_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.2
1 6.3.4.3
1422d Source, supplementary setpoint in front of
058Eh technological RFG [C1.4]
H423 LUP_REF_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.3.2
0.006% [C1.7]
1423d Upper limit, technological setpoint
058Fh
Highest positive value at the setpoint ramp-function
generator output.
TREG.T450.LU_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H424 LLO_REF_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 10% 3.3.2
0.006% [C1.7]
1424d Lower limit, technological setpoint
0590h
Highest negative value at the setpoint ramp-function
generator output.
TREG.T450.LL_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H425 RUP_REF_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 10 000[ms] 3.3.2
1425d [C1.6]
Ramp-up time, technological setpoint
0591h
Time, which the ramp-function generator requires to
increase the technological setpoint by 100%.
TREG.T450.TU_T2 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H426 RDN_REF_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 10 000[ms] 3.3.2
1426d [C1.6]
Ramp-down time, technological setpoint
0592h
Time which the ramp-function generator requires to
decrease the technological setpoint by 100%.
TREG.T450.TD_T2 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H427 FLT_REF_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 100[ms] 3.3.2
1427d [C2.2]
Smoothing, technological setpoint
0593h
Setpoint delay for the controller to dynamically de-couple
from the pre-control. This should correspond to the sum
of all of the time constants of the actual value smoothing
and control loop.
TREG.T451.T_T2 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H428 SRC_OFA_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.3
1 6.3.4.2
1428d Source, offset adjustment, technological actual
0594h value [C1.4]

Manual
4 Parameter list
H429 MSK_OFA_TEC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.3.3

0001h 6.3.4.2
1429d Mask, offset adjustment technological actual
0595h value [C1.5]
Mask to select the controlling bits. If the status is a 1, the
actual value, smoothed with 500 ms, is saved as offset
and is subtracted from the actual value.
H430 FIX_OFF_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 0% 6.3.4.2
0.006% [C1.6]
1430d Fixed offset, technological
0596h
Offset for a manual adjustment. In this case, the actual
value without material is read and entered here.
H431 MAN_OFF_TEC 0...1 0 3.3.3
1 6.3.4.2
1431d Offset adjustment, technological actual value,
0597h manual [C1.7]
If the bit is 1, the fixed value H429 is subtracted from the
actual value, otherwise the saved offset from automatic.
TREG.T298.I_T4
H432 DTM_ACT_TEC 0...1 0 3.3.4
1 [C2.3]
1432d Derivative action active, technological
0598h controller
This specifies whether the technological controller has PI-
or PID characteristics.
TREG.T555.I_T2
H433 ADD_RFD_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 0%
0.006% [C2.3]
1433d Supplementary technological setpoint
0599h
Fixed technological setpoint which is added before the
controller. This allows a setpoint step to be entered for
drive optimization.
TREG.T650.W2_T2
H434 MUL_DRP_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.3.4
0.006% [C2.4]
1434d Technological droop factor
059Ah
Defines a P characteristic in steady-state operation. A
component of the integral component of the PI controller
is fed back as actual value. A soft characteristic is thus
obtained. The factor specifies at which setpoint-actual
value difference the controller integral component
reaches 100% (and thus approximately, also the
controller output).
TREG.T660.X2_T2
H435 I_REG_TEC 0...1 0 3.3.4
1 [C2.4]
1435d Inhibit I component, technological controller
059Bh
The I component of the technological controller becomes
active for value 0, and inhibited for 1.
Note:
If the changeover is realized with the technological
controller enabled, then the last output value is “frozen”.
The I component is only set to 0 when the controller is
inhibited.
TREG.T650.HI_T2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H436 LUP_ROF_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.3.4

0.006% 6.3.4.5
1436d Upper limit technological controller off
059Ch [C2.5]
Effective upper limit for the controller for ‘technological
controller off’.
H437 LUP_RON_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.3.4
0.006% 6.3.4.5
1437d Upper limit, technological controller on
059Dh [C2.5]
Effective upper limit for the controller for ‘technological
controller on’
H438 LLO_ROF_TEC -200.000%...199.993% -100% 3.3.4
0.006% 6.3.4.5
1438d Lower limit, technological controller off
059Eh [C2.5]
Effective lower limit for the controller for ‘technological
controller off’
H439 LLO_RON_TEC -200.000%...199.993% -100% 3.3.4
0.006% 6.3.4.5
1439d Lower limit, technological controller on
059Fh [C2.5]
Effective lower limit for the controller for ‘technological
controller on’
H440 PON_REG_TEC 0...1 0 3.3.4
1 [C2.3]
1440d Technological controller continuously on
05A0h
The controller continuously operates in this setting; for the
“technological controller on/off commands, only the limits
are changed-over.
This is helpful for speed correction controls. When
threading, the controller must not increase tension (upper
limit zero), however, it should prevent possible excessive
tension which could occur due to incorrectly set line
speed setpoints.
TREG.T645.I1_T3
H441 SRC_KPA_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.4
1 [C2.3]
1441d Source, quantity for Kp adaption, technological
05A1h controller
Connector number of the supplying value. The
proportional gain can be changed as a function of a
technological quantity according to a definable function
(adapted).
TREG.R653.NC_T2 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H442 STV_KPA_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.3.4
0.006% [C2.3]
1442d Start of Kp adaption, technological controller
05A2h
Process quantity value for the first point on the adaption
characteristic.
TREG.T653.A1_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H443 STF_KPA_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.3.4
0.006% [C2.3]
1443d Factor, start of Kp adaption, technological
05A3h controller
Factor for the first point on the adaption characteristic.
TREG.T653.B1_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H444 EDV_KPA_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.3.4
0.006% [C2.3]
1444d End of kp adaption, technological controller
05A4h
Process quantity value for the last point on the adaption
characteristic.
TREG.T653.A2_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4

Manual
4 Parameter list
H445 EDF_KPA_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.3.4

0.006% [C2.3]
1445d Factor, end of kp adaption technological
05A5h controller
Factor of the last point on the adaption characteristic.
TREG.T653.B2_T2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H446 LIM_OMN_TEC 0%...199.993% 30% 3.3.5
0.006% [C3.1]
1446d Limit, offset monitoring, technological
05A6h controller
Monitors the stored offset of the automatic offset
compensation. If the limit value is violated (positive or
negative), the appropriate signals are set in the
technological controller status word.
TREG.T970.X_T5 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H447 FLT_REG_TEC 20[ms]...327 680[ms] 20[ms] 3.3.4
1447d [C2.6]
Smoothing, technological controller output
05A7h
Time constant of the 1st order filter, with which the
controller output is smoothed.
TREG.T720.T_T2 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H448 MUL_TPC_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.3.4
0.006% [C2.7]
1448d Factor, technological controller pre-control
05A8h
Influences the technological setpoint at the controller
output. This allows pre-control to be implemented (note:
only if the setpoint ramp-up time is high with respect to
the controller response time.
H449 MUL_TRQ_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.3.4
0.006% [C2.7]
1449d Torque influence, technological controller
05A9h
Specifies which torque setpoint change is associated with
a 100% technological controller output signal.
H450 MUL_VEL_TEC -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.3.4
0.006% [C2.7]
1450d Line speed influence, technological controller
05AAh
Specifies which speed setpoint change is associated with
100% technological controller output signal.
TREG.T745.X2 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H451 MOD_D_TEC 0...1 0% 3.3.4
1 [C2.3]
1451d Operating mode, technological controller D
05ABh component
The differential component is effective for value 0 in the
setpoint- and actual value channel (PID controller), 1, only
in the technological controller actual value channel.
TREG.T520.I_T2
H452 SRC_ONOFF_TEC 0...511 0 3.3.1
1 [C1.1]
1452d Source bit on/off, technological controller
05ACh
H453 MSK_ONOFF_TEC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.3.1
0001h [C1.1]
1453d Mask bit on/off, technological controller
05ADh

Manual
4 Parameter list
H454 SRC_RES_TEC 0...511 146 3.3.1

1 [C1.1]
1454d Source technological controller reset
05AEh
H455 MSK_RES_TEC 0000h...FFFFh 0080h 3.3.1
0001h [C1.1]
1455d Mask technological controller reset
05AFh
Mask to select the controlling bits. Resets the
technological controller e.g for swich-off.
H456-499 (Unused)
H500 SRC_REF_VEL 0...511 0 3.3.17
1 3.4.1
1500d Source, main setpoint
05DCh 6.3.3.2
Connector number of the supplying value. Setpoint
source for the drive.
6.3.3.3
SETPNT.S1000.NC_T1 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
[D1.1]
H501 MUL_REF_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.4.1

0.006% 6.3.3.2
1501d Gain, main setpoint
05DDh [D1.2]
Factor, with which the main speed setpoint is multiplied.
Note:
This value must be 100% for setpoint cascades.
SETPNT.S1010.X2_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H502 OFF_REF_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.4.1
0.006% 6.3.3.2
1502d Offset, main setpoint
05DEh [D1.2]
Fixed supplementary setpoint to the main setpoint. Note,
this value must be 0% for setpoint cascades.
H503 SRC_RFA_VEL 0...511 0 3.4.5
1 6.3.3.6
1503d Source, supplementary setpoint
05DFh [D2.1]
Connector number of the supplying value. Variable
supplementary line speed setpoint to the main setpoint
after the ramp-function generator.
SETPNT.S1050.NC_T1
H504 MUL_RFA_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.4.5
0.006% 6.3.3.6
1504d Gain, supplementary setpoint
05E0h [D2.2]
Factor, with which the supplementary speed setpoint is
multiplied. The following is valid: 100%x100%=100%
SETPNT.S1060.X2_T1
H505 OFF_RFA_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.4.5
0.006% 6.3.3.6
1505d Offset, supplementary setpoint.
05E1h [D2.2]
Fixed supplementary setpoint to the supplementary
setpoint.
SETPNT.S1070.X2_T1
H506 SRC_SRT_VEL 0...511 1 3.1.17
1 3.4.3
1506d Source, ratio setpoint
05E2h 6.3.3.4
Connector number of the supplying value. Factor, with
which the setpoint is multiplied, or divided, in order to
[D1.1]
compensate length changes (stretching).
SETPNT.S3000.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H507 MUL_SRT_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.4.3

0.006% 6.3.3.4
1507d Gain, ratio setpoint
05E3h [D1.2]
Factor, with which the ratio setpoint is multiplied. The
following is valid: 100%x100%=100%
H508 OFF_SRT_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.4.3
0.006% 6.3.3.4
1508d Offset, ratio setpoint
05E4h [D1.2]
Fixed supplementary setpoint to the ratio setpoint.
H509 SRC_CMP_VEL 0...511 0 6.3.3.9
1 [D2.2]
1509d Source, compensation setpoint
05E5h
Connector number of the supplying value. Additive
supplementary speed setpoint, which is switched-in with
the “droop on” command and which ensuress load
equalization.
SETPNT.S3050.NC_T3
H510 MUL_CMP_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.4.8
0.006% 6.3.3.9
1510d Gain, compensation setpoint
05E6h [D2.3]
Factor, with which the compensation setpoint is
multiplied.
SETPNT.S3060.X2_T3
H511 SRC_DRP_ONC 0...511 0 3.4.8
1 6.3.3.9
1511d Source, switch-in droop
05E7h [D2.3]
SETPNT.S3065.NC_T3
H512 MSK_DRP_ONC 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.4.8
0001h 6.3.3.9
1512d Mask, switch-in droop
05E8h [D2.4]
Mask to select the controlling bits. It switches the speed
controller characteristics from PI to PI+ droop and
enables the compensation setpoint.
SETPNT.S3065.MSK_T3
H513 BPS_MAC_RGE 0...1 0 3.4.1
1 6.3.3.3
1513d No bypass, central ramp-function generator
05E9h [D1.4]
The main setpoint is fed through the machine ramp-
function generator. This is only required for single drives
or for the machine master drive. If the bit is 0, the setpoint
with the influence quantities is directly transferred to the
controller.
SETPNT.S1090.I_T1
H514 RST_MAC_RGE 0...1 0 3.4.2
1 6.3.3.3
1514d Set central RFG for drive off
05EAh [D1.1]
If the ramp-function generator is only for a single drive
(individual drive), the setpoint needn’t be present if the
drive is powered-down (off). If the bit is active, the ramp-
function generator is set to the actual value with the drive
powered-down (off).
SETPNT.S3080.I1_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H515 TUP_MAC_RGE 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 60 000[ms] 3.4.2
1515d 6.3.3.3
Ramp-up time, central ramp-function
05EBh generator [D1.3]
increase the machine setpoint by 100%.
SETPNT.S3100.TU_T3
H516 TDN_MAC_RGE 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 60 000[ms] 3.4.2
1516d 6.3.3.3
Ramp-down time, central ramp-function
05ECh generator [D1.3]
reduce the machine setpoint by 100%.
SETPNT.S3100.TD_T3
H517 TRU_MAC_RGE 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 6 000[ms] 3.4.2
1517d 6.3.3.3
Initial rounding-off, central RFG
05EDh [D1.3]
establish and reduce the accelerating torque, if the
absolute speed setpoint is increased.
SETPNT.S3100.TRU_T3
H518 TRD_MAC_RGE 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 6 000[ms] 3.4.2
1518d 6.3.3.3
Final rounding-off, central RFG
05EEh [D1.3]
establish and decrease the accelerating torque, if the
absolute speed setpoint is reduced.
SETPNT.S3100.TRD_T3
H519 LUP_MAC_RGE -200.000%...199.993% 150% 6.3.3.3
0.006% [D1.3]
1519d Upper limit, central RFG
05EFh
Maximum positive value of the ramp-function generator
output. It should be at least 10% greater than the highest
positive setpoint in operation.
SETPNT.S3100.LU_T3
H520 LLO_MAC_RGE -200.000%...199.993% -150% 6.3.3.3
0.006% [D1.3]
1520d Lower limit, central ramp-function generator
05F0h
Maximum negative value of the ramp-function generator
output. It should be at least 10% greater than the highest
negative setpoint in operation.
SETPNT.S3100.LL_T3
H521 TAC_MAC_RGE 40[ms]...655360[ms] 60000[ms] 3.4.2
1521d 6.3.3.3
Normalization time, acceleration
05F1h [D1.4]
The minimum ramp-up or ramp-down time of the central
ramp-function generator should be entered for
normalization. Thus, a 100% acceleration signal is
obtained at the minimum ramp-up time.
Note:
This may no longer be changed after inertia
compensation has been set, even if the ramp-up and
ramp-down times are subsequently changed.
SETPNT.S3110.X2_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H522 SRT_DIV_SEL 0...1 0 3.4.3

1 6.3.3.4
1522d Ratio value as divisor
05F2h [D1.6]
Specifies as to whether the ratio setpoint should be
effective as factor or as divisor (range, -2 ... 1.999939,
step size 0.000061).
SETPNT.S3200.I_T3
H523 STU_PYO_REL 0...1 0 3.4.4
1 6.3.3.5
1523d Relative slack take-up/slack-off
05F3h [D1.7]
Specifies whether the injected setpoints for slack take-up
and slack-off should be proportionally increased with the
speed or not.
SETPNT.S3210.I_T3
H524 SRC_BIT_STU 0...511 0 3.4.4
1 6.3.3.5
1524d Source bit, slack take-up
05F4h [D1.3]
SETPNT.S3215.NC_T3
H525 MSK_BIT_STU 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.4.4
0001h 6.3.3.5
1525d Mask bit, slack take-up
05F5h [D1.4]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Increases the speed in
order to take-up material slack and to reduce a possible
sag.
SETPNT.S3215.MSK_T3
H526 STU_REF_VEL -200.000%...199.993% 2% 3.4.4
0.006% 6.3.3.5
1526d Setpoint, slack take-up
05F6h [D1.4]
Supplementary setpoint to reduce the material quantity in
front of the drive.
SETPNT.S3220.X2_T3
H527 SRC_BIT_PYO 0...511 0 3.4.4
1 6.3.3.5
1527d Source bit, slack-off
05F7h [D1.3]
SETPNT.S3225.NC_T3
H528 MSK_BIT_PYO 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.4.4
0001h 6.3.3.5
1528d Mask bit, slack-off
05F8h [D1.4]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Reduces the speed in
order to output material and decrease excessive web
tension.
SETPNT.S3225.MSK_T3
H529 PYO_REF_VEL -200.000%...199.993% -2% 3.4.4
0.006% 6.3.3.5
1529d Setpoint, slack-off
05F9h [D1.5]
Supplementary setpoint to increase the material quantity
in front of the drive.
SETPNT.S3230.X2_T3
H530 FLT_STU_PYO 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 1 000[ms] 3.4.4
1530d 6.3.3.5
Slack take-up/slack-off smoothing
05FAh [D1.7]
Time constant with which the setpoints for slack take-up
and slack-off are smoothed.
SETPNT.S3250.T_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H531 RF1_LOC_REF -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.2.10

0.006% 6.3.2.10
1531d Local setpoint 1
05FBh 6.3.3.7
Local setpoint, which becomes active for status 0001h of
the operating mode word.
[D2.1]
H532 RF2_LOC_REF -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.2.10
0.006% 6.3.2.10
05FCh 6.3.3.7
[D2.1]
H533 RF3_LOC_REF -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.2.10
0.006% 6.3.2.10
05FDh 6.3.3.7
[D2.1]
H534 SRC_RF4_LOC 0...511 0 3.2.10
1 6.3.2.10
1534d Source, local setpoint 4
05FEh [D2.1]
Connector number of the supplying value. Becomes
active as local setoint with status 0004h of the operting
mode.
SETPNT.S3290.NC_T3
H535 RF5_LOC_REF -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.2.10
0.006% 6.3.2.10
05FFh 6.3.3.7
[D2.1]
H536 RF6_LOC_REF -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.2.10
0.006% 6.3.2.10
0600h 6.3.3.7
[D2.1]
H537 RF7_LOC_REF -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.2.10
0.006% 6.3.2.10
0601h 6.3.3.7
[D2.1]
H538 JG1_LOC_REF -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.2.4
0.006% 6.3.2.8
1538d Inching setpoint 1
0602h 6.3.2.10
6.3.3.7
[D2.1]
H539 JG2_LOC_REF -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.2.4

0.006% 6.3.2.8
1539d Inching setpoint 2
0603h 6.3.2.10
6.3.3.7
[D2.1]

Manual
4 Parameter list
H540 TUP_LOC_RGE 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 10 000[ms] 3.4.6
1540d 6.3.3.7
Ramp-up time, local ramp-function generator
0604h 6.3.3.8
increase the local setpoint by 100% if the local operating
[D2.3]
mode is changed.
SETPNT.S3310.TU_T3 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H541 TDN_LOC_RGE 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 10 000[ms] 3.4.6
1541d 6.3.3.7
Ramp-down time, local ramp-function
0605h generator 6.3.3.8
Time, which the ramp-function generator requires to [D2.3]
decrease the local setpoint by 100% if the local operating
mode is changed.
SETPNT.S3310.TD_T3
H542 TUP_RUI_RGE 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 60 000[ms] 3.4.7
1542d [D2.4]
Ramp-up time, triggerable RFG
0606h
Time which the ramp-function generator requires to
increase the speed setpoint by 100% in the direction of
more positive values, if a local operating mode is
changed, or back to operation, or the drive is powered-up
with a setpoint present or for a standard stop.
SETPNT.S3450.TI_T3 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H543 TDN_RUI_RGE 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 60 000[ms] 3.4.7
[D2.4]
1543d Ramp-down time, triggerable RFG
0607h Time which the ramp-function generator requires to
increase the speed setpoint by 100% in the direction of
negative values if a local operating mode is selected or
back to operation, or the drive is powered-up with a
setpoint present or for a standard stop.
SETPNT.S3460.TI_T3 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H544 SRC_ONC_BIS 0...511 0 6.3.3.11
1 [D2.5]
1544d Source bit, bias on
0608h
SETPNT.S3500.NC_T3
H545 MSK_ONC_BIS 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 6.3.3.11
0001h [D2.5]
1545d Mask bit, bias on
0609h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Activates a fixed, non-
smoothed supplementary setpoint to the speed setpoint.
This is required for load equalization via torque limits in
order to keep the controller at the limits.
SETPNT.S3500.MSK_T3
H546 REF_VEL_BIS -200.000%...199.993% 5% 3.4.11
0.006% 6.3.3.11
1546d Setpoint, bias
060Ah [D2.5]
Additive supplementary setpoint to the speed setpoint.
H547 FLT_REF_VEL 5[ms]...81 920[ms] 5[ms] 3.4.9
1547d 3.5.2
Smoothing, line speed setpoint
060Bh [D2.6]
Time constant, of the line speed setpoint smoothing
before it is converted into a speed and sent to the
converter.
SETPNT.S1505.T_T1 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H548-599 (Unused)

Manual
4 Parameter list
H600 SRC_INP_IV1 0...511 0 3.6.3

1 [F2.1]
1600d Source, input free inverter 1
0640h
AUXIL.R3010.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H601 SRC_IN1_AD1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.1]
1601d Source, summand 1, free adder 1
0641h
H602 SRC_IN2_AD1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.1]
1602d Source, summand 2 free adder 1
0642h
H603 SRC_IN1_SU1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.1]
1603d Source, minuend, free subtractor 1
0643h
H604 SRC_IN2_SU1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.1]
1604d Source, subtrahend free subtractor 1
0644h
H605 SRC_IN1_MU1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.1]
1605d Source, factor 1, free multiplier 1
0645h
H606 SRC_IN2_MU1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.1]
1606d Source, factor 2, free multiplier 1
0646h
H607 SRC_IN1_DV1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.3]
1607d Source, dividend free divider 1
0647h
H608 SRC_IN2_DV1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.3]
1608d Source, divisor, free divider 1
0648h
H609 SRC_INP_LM1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.3]
1609d Source, input free limiter 1
0649h
H610 SRC_LUP_LM1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.3]
1610d Source, upper limit free limiter 1
064Ah
H611 SRC_LLO_LM1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.3]
1611d Source, lower limit free limiter 1
064Bh

Manual
4 Parameter list
H612 SRC_IN1_SW1 0...511 0 3.6.3

1 [F2.3]
1612d Source 1, free changeover switch 1
064Ch
H613 SRC_IN2_SW1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.3]
064Dh
H614 SRC_BIN_SW1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.3]
1614d Source, control bit free changeover switch 1
064Eh
H615 MSK_BIN_SW1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h v
0001h [F2.3]
1615d Mask, control bit free changeover switch 1
064Fh
Mask to select the controlling bits.
AUXIL.R3150.MSK_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H616 SRC_INP_FT1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.5]
1616d Source, input free filter 1
0650h
H617 SRC_TCN_FT1 0...511 0 3.6.3
1 [F2.5]
1617d Source, time constant free filter 1
0651h
Connector number of the supplying value. A value of
0.006% (0001h) corresponds to the sampling time (in this
case 40 [ms]).
H618 SRC_INP_SI2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.5]
0652h
H619 SRC_INP_SI3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.5]
0653h
H620 SRC_IN1_AD2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.5]
0654h
H621 SRC_IN2_AD2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.5]
0655h
H622 SRC_IN1_AD3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.7]
0656h

Manual
4 Parameter list
H623 SRC_IN2_AD3 0...511 0 3.6.4

1 [F2.7]
0657h
H624 SRC_IN1_SU2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.7]
1624d Source, minuend 3 subtractor 2
0658h
H625 SRC_IN2_SU2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.7]
0659h
H626 SRC_IN1_SU3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.7]
1626d Source, minuend free subtractor 3
065Ah
H627 SRC_IN2_SU3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.7]
065Bh
H628 SRC_IN1_MU2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.7]
1628d Source, factor 1 free multiplier 2
065Ch
H629 SRC_IN2_MU2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F2.7]
065Dh
H630 SRC_IN1_MU3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.1]
065Eh
H631 SRC_IN2_MU3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.1]
065Fh
H632 SRC_IN1_DV2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.1]
1632d Source, dividend, free divider 2
0660h
H633 SRC_IN2_DV2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.1]
1633d Source, divisor, free divider 2
0661h
H634 SRC_IN1_DV3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.1]
1634d Source, dividend free divider 3
0662h

Manual
4 Parameter list
H635 SRC_IN2_DV3 0...511 0 3.6.4

1 [F3.1]
1635d Source, divisor free divider 3
0663h
H636 SRC_INP_LM2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.3]
0664h
H637 SRC_LUP_LM2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.3]
0665h
H638 SRC_LLO_LM2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.3]
0666h
H639 SRC_INP_LM3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.3]
0667h
H640 SRC_LUP_LM3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.3]
0668h
H641 SRC_LLO_LM3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.3]
0669h
H642 SRC_IN1_SW2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.5]
066Ah
H643 SRC_IN2_SW2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.5]
066Bh
H644 SRC_BIN_SW2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.5]
066Ch
H645 MSK_BIN_SW2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.6.4
0001h [F3.5]
066Dh
H646 SRC_IN1_SW3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.5]
066Eh

Manual
4 Parameter list
H647 SRC_IN1_SW3 0...511 0 3.6.4

1 [F3.5]
066Fh
H648 SRC_BIN_SW3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.5]
0670h
H649 MSK_BIN_SW3 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.6.4
0001h [F3.5]
0671h
H650 SRC_INP_FT2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.5]
0672h
H651 SRC_TCN_FT2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1
0673h [F3.5]
case, 160 [ms]).
H652 SRC_INP_FT3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.7]
0674h
H653 SRC_TCN_FT3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.7]
0675h
case, 160 [ms]).
H654 SRC_INP_AV1 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.7]
1654d Source, input absolute value generator
0676h
H655 SRC_INP_RD1 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.7]
1655d Source, input square-root extractor
0677h
H656 SRC_IN1_MAX 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.7]
1656d Source, input 1 maximum evaluator
0678h
H657 SRC_IN2_MAX 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F3.7]
1657d Source, input 2 maximum evaluator
0679h

Manual
4 Parameter list
H658 SRC_IN1_MIN 0...511 0 3.6.4

1 [F4.1]
1658d Source, input 1 minimum evaluator
067Ah
H659 SRC_IN2_MIN 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.1]
1659d Source, input 2 minimum evaluator
067Bh
H660 SRC_INP_SIN 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.1]
1660d Source, input sinusoidal function
067Ch
H661-674 (Unused)
H675 SRC_IN1_XR1 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.3]
1675d Source, input 1 word EXOR gate 1
068Bh
H676 SRC_IN2_XR1 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.3]
068Ch
H677 SRC_IN1_XR2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.3]
068Dh
H678 SRC_IN2_XR2 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.3]
068Eh
H679 SRC_IN1_XR3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.3]
068Fh
H680 SRC_IN2_XR3 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.3]
0690h
H681 SRC_IN1_XR4 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.5]
0691h
H682 SRC_IN2_XR4 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.5]
0692h

Manual
4 Parameter list
H683 CLK_IVL_TIM 0[ms]...2 621 440[ms] 1 000[ms] 3.6.4

160[ms] [F4.5]
1683d Pulse duration, flashing frequency
0693h
Duration of the pulse as well as the interval of the flashing
clock.
AUXIL.BL10.T_T4 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4
H684 SRC_CLK_WRD 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.5]
1684d Source, flashing requency word
0694h
Duration of the pulse as well as the interval of the flashing
clock. Those bits which are active in the selected input
word, flash.
AUXIL.BL40.NC_T4 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H685 CLW_IVL_TIM 0[ms]...2 621 440[ms] 1 000[ms] 3.6.4
160[ms] [F4.6]
1685d Pulse duration, flashing requency word
0695h
Duration of the pulses as well as the interval of the
flashing clock, those bits are controlled, which have a
logical one in the selected word.
AUXIL.BL50.T_T4 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4
H686 NOM_KOR_PDF -32768...32767 1 3.6.4
1 [F4.7]
1686d Numerator, position difference correction
0696h
Numerator of the quotient, with which the position actual
value of pulse encoder 2 is multiplied before the
difference to position actual value 1 is generated. This
allows different gearbox factors and diameters to be
compensated.
INPUT.TA10.NM_T1 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW-TYP:I2
H687 DEN_KOR_PDF -32768...32767 1 3.6.4
1 [F4.7]
1687d Denominator, position difference correction
0697h
Denominator of the quotient, with which the position
actual value of pulse encoder 2 is multiplied before the
difference to position actual value 1 is generated. This
allows different gearbox factors and diameters to be
compensated.
INPUT.TA10.DN_T1 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW-TYP:I2
H688 SRC_RES_PDF 0...511 0 3.6.4
1 [F4.7]
1688d Source, reset position difference
0698h
H689 MSK_RES_PDF 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.6.4
0001h [F4.7]
1689d Mask, reset position difference
0699h
Mask to select the controlling bits. Resets the calculated
position difference.
INPUT.TA5.MSK_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H690 DEF_DIG_TC1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h

0001h [A6.3]
1690d Definition, pulse evaluation 1
069Ah
Defines the pulse evaluation mode and the source of the
pulses.
Bits 0 to 3: Digital filter for the tracks and zero pulse

Values 0 and 3: 500kHz
Value 1: No filter
Value 2: 2MHz
Value 4: 126kHz
Value 5: 62.5kHz
Bits 4 to 7: Pulse encoder type

Value 0: Encoder with 2 tracks displaced through 90°
Value 1: Encoder with up and down tracks
Value 2: Zero pulse via the bus from the CU
Value 4: Tracks A+B via the bus from CU
Value 6: Tracks and zero pulse via the bus from CU
Bits 8 to 11: Rough pulse selection

Value 0: No rough pulse evaluation
Value 1: Rough pulse type 1
Bits 12 to 15: Evaluation, zero pulse

Value 0: Not direction of rotation-dependent
Value 1: Direction of rotation-dependent
Other values are not defined.

INPUT.TA10.IT1_T1
SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2 (INIT)
H691 DEF_DIG_TC2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h
0001h [A6.3]
1691d Definition, pulse evaluation 2
069Bh
Defines the pulse evaluation mode.
Bits 0 to 3: Digital filter for the tracks and zero pulse

Values 0 and 3: 500kHz
Value 1: No filter
Value 2: 2MHz
Value 4: 126kHz
Value 5: 62.5kHz
Bits 4 to 7: Pulse encoder type

Value 0: Encoder with 2 tracks displaced through 90°
Value 1: Encoder with tracks for up and down
Bits 8 to 11: Rough pulse selection

Value 0: No rough pulse evaluation
Bits 12 to 15: Evaluation, zero pulse

Value 0: Not direction of rotation-dependent
Value 1: Direction of rotation-dependent
INPUT.TA5.IT2_T1
H692-699 (Unused)
H700 FRC_DGM_VL1 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
1700d Friction characteristic, line speed 1
06A4h [E1.2]
Line speed for point 1 of the characteristic. The
associated torque setpoint is also valid for all line speeds
which are more negative.
TORQ.T400.A1_T4 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4

Manual
4 Parameter list
H701 FRC_DGM_TQ1 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.5.1

0.006% 6.3.3.12
1701d Friction characteristic, torque 1
06A5h [E1.2]
Friction torque for point 1 of the characteristic. Line
speed-dependent supplementary torque to compensate
fraction losses.
TORQ.T400.B1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H702 FRC_DGM_VL2 -200.000%...199.993% 20% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
06A6h [E1.2]
Line speed for point 2 of the characteristic.
H703 FRC_DGM_TQ2 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
06A7h [E1.2]
for friction losses.
TORQ.T400.B2_T4 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H704 FRC_DGM_VL3 -200.000%...199.993% 40% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
06A8h [E1.2]
H705 FRC_DGM_TQ3 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
06A9h [E1.2]
for the friction losses.
H706 FRC_DGM_VL4 -200.000%...199.993% 60% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
06AAh [E1.2]
H707 FRC_DGM_TQ4 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
06ABh [E1.2]
Frictional torque for point 4 of the characteristic. Line
the friction losses.
H708 FRC_DGM_VL5 -200.000%...199.993% 80% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
06ACh [E1.2]
H709 FRC_DGM_TQ5 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
06ADh [E1.2]
H710 FRC_DGM_VL6 -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.5.1
0.006% 6.3.3.12
06AEh [E1.2]
Line speed for point 6 of the characteristic. The
associated torque setpoint is also valid for all line speeds
which are more positive.

Manual
4 Parameter list
H711 FRC_DGM_TQ6 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.5.1

0.006% 6.3.3.12
06AFh [E1.2]
H712 SRC_ACC_REF 0...511 0 3.5.2
1 6.3.3.13
1712d Source, acceleration
06B0h [E1.1]
Connector number of the supplying value. When an
accelerating signal is used from the line speed
differentiation, the connector number of a line speed
signal must be specified here.
TORQ.T20.NC_T1 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H713 TIM_ACC_REF 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 100[ms] 3.5.2
1713d 6.3.3.13
Reference time, acceleration
06B1h [E1.2]
Time for ramp-up or ramp-down (acceleration or
deceleration), where the accelerating signal should be
100%. Only relevant for line speed differentation.
TORQ.T24.X2_T3 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H714 CLC_ACC_REF 0...1 0 3.5.2
1 [E1.3]
1714d Acceleration from differentiation
06B2h
Defines that a line speed signal was selected, and the
acceleration was retrieved by differentiating.
TORQ.T26.I_T1 SIMADYN D:B1 PKW-TYP:BOOLEAN
H715 SRC_TRQ_ADD 0...511 0 3.5.3
1 6.3.3.13
1715d Source, supplementary torque
06B3h [E1.4]
Connector number of the supplying value. This added to
the friction, acceleration and technological controller
torque.
H716 MUL_TRQ_ADD -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.5.3
0.006% [E1.4]
1716d Adaption factor, supplementary torque
06B4h
Value, with which the supplementary torque is multiplied.
TORQ.T12.X2_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H717 SRC_INE_REF 0...511 0 3.5.2
1 6.3.3.13
1717d Source, moment of inertia
06B5h [E1.4]
Connector number of the supplying value. Defines the
magnitude of the accelerating torque when accelerating.
H718 MUL_INE_REF -200.000%...199.993% 100% 3.5.2
0.006% 6.3.3.13
1718d Adaption factor, moment of inertia
06B6h [E1.4]
Accelerating torque can be adjusted. The following is
valid: 100%x100%=100%
H719 SRC_MSR_REF 0...511 0 3.5.4
1 [E2.1]
1719d Source, torque setpoint from the master
06B7h
Connector number of the supplying value. Transfers the
master drive load component and controls the slave
torque setpoint via the torque ratio.

Manual
4 Parameter list
H720 SRC_TRQ_RTO 0...511 0 3.5.4

1 [E2.1]
1720d Source, torque ratio
06B8h
slave load component, referred to the master.
H721 TRQ_REF_FRA 0...1 0 3.5.4
1 [E2.4]
1721d Torque setpoint with friction/acceleration
06B9h
The slave load torque is used as torque setpoint in status
zero, otherwise, the friction- and accelerating torque are
added.
TORQ.T1020.I_T1
H722 TRQ_MAX_POS 0%...199% 100% 3.5.4
0.006% [E2.5]
1722d Maximum torque, positive
06BAh
Value of the positive torque limit for the drive, if this is not
variable (for load distribution or fast stop).
H723 TRQ_MAX_NEG -199%...0% -100% 3.5.4
0.006% [E2.5]
1723d Maximum torque, negative
06BBh
Value of the negative torque limit for the drive, if this is
not variable (for load distribution or fast stop).
H724 BRK_DGM_VL1 0%...199.993% 0% 3.5.5
0.006% 6.3.3.13
1724d Braking characteristic, line speed 1
06BCh [E2.2]
Line speed which ends at the reduction of the braking
torque and which remains constant at the associated
setpoint below this. This value must be less than that in
H75.
H725 BRK_DGM_TQ1 0%...199.993% 0% 3.5.5
0.006% 6.3.3.13
1725d Braking characteristic, torque 1
06BDh [E2.2]
Reduced braking torque, if the line speed is less than or
equal to point H723. The characteristic is linearly
interpolated between both points.
H726 BRK_DGM_VL2 0%...199.993% 5% 3.5.5
0.006% 6.3.3.14
1726d Braking characteristic, speed 2
06BEh [E2.2]
Line speed, where the braking torque is reduced (start)
and above this remains constant at the maximum value.
This value must be greater than that in H723.
H727 BRK_DGM_TQ2 0%...199.993% 100% 3.5.5
0.006% [E2.2]
1727d Braking characteristic, torque 2
06BFh
Maximum braking torque, if the line speed is greater than
or equal to point H725. The characteristic is linearly
interpolated between both points.
H728 LSH_TRQ_RMP 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 3 000[ms] 3.5.6
1728d 6.3.3.11
Change time, load distribution torque RFG
06C0h [E2.6]
Time for the torque setpoint to be changed by 100% by
the triggerable torque ramp-function generator, if fast stop
is not present. This defines the torque reduction when
load distribution is switched-in.

Manual
4 Parameter list
H729 BRK_TRQ_RMP 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 1 000[ms] 3.5.6
1729d 6.3.2.3
Change time, braking torque RFG
06C1h [E2.6]
Time for the torque setpoint to be changed by 100% by
the triggerable torque ramp-function generator, if fast stop
is present. This defines the torque increase when
changing-over to braking torque.
H730 FLT_TRQ_ACC 5[ms]...81 920[ms] 5[ms] 3.5.2
1730d [E1.4]
Smoothing, accelerating torque
06C2h
The accelerating torque smoothing time should be
selected as high as the line speed setpoint smoothing.
TORQ.T29.T_T1 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H731-800 (Unused)
H801 SRC_BT0_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
1801d Source, bit 0 free status word
0709h
OUTPUT.ST3000.NC_T3
H802 MSK_BT0_SSW 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.14
0001h [A9.2]
1802d Mask, bit 0 free status word
070Ah
OUTPUT.ST3000.MSK_T3
H803 SRC_BT1_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
070Bh
OUTPUT.ST3010.NC_T3
0001h [A9.2]
070Ch
H805 SRC_BT2_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
070Dh
OUTPUT.ST3020.NC_T3
0001h [A9.2]
070Eh
H807 SRC_BT3_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
070Fh
OUTPUT.ST3030.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list

0001h [A9.2]
0710h
H809 SRC_BT4_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
0711h
OUTPUT.ST3040.NC_T3
0001h [A9.2]
0712h
H811 SRC_BT5_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
0713h
OUTPUT.ST3050.NC_T3
0001h [A9.2]
0714h
H813 SRC_BT6_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
0715h
OUTPUT.ST3060.NC_T3
0001h [A9.2]
0716h
H815 SRC_BT7_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
0717h
OUTPUT.ST3070.NC_T3
0001h [A9.2]
0718h
H817 SRC_BT8_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
0719h
OUTPUT.ST3080.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list

0001h [A9.2]
071Ah
H819 SRC_BT9_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
071Bh
OUTPUT.ST3090.NC_T3
0001h [A9.2]
071Ch
H821 SRC_BTA_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
071Dh
OUTPUT.ST3100.NC_T3
H822 MSK_BTA_SSW 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.14
0001h [A9.2]
071Eh
H823 SRC_BTB_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
071Fh Connector number of the supplying value.
OUTPUT.ST3110.NC_T3
H824 MSK_BTB_SSW 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.14
0001h [A9.2]
0720h
H825 SRC_BTC_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
0721h
OUTPUT.ST3120.NC_T3
H826 MSK_BTC_SSW 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.14
0001h [A9.2]
0722h
H827 SRC_BTD_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
0723h
OUTPUT.ST3130.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H828 MSK_BTD_SSW 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.14

0001h [A9.2]
0724h
H829 SRC_BTE_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
0725h
OUTPUT.ST3140.NC_T3
H830 MSK_BTE_SSW 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.14
0001h [A9.2]
0726h
H831 SRC_BTF_SSW 0...511 0 3.1.14
1 [A9.1]
0727h
OUTPUT.ST3150.NC_T3
H832 MSK_BTF_SSW 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.14
0001h [A9.2]
0728h
H833 SRC_BT0_BNO 0...511 0 3.1.5
1 3.2.2
1833d Source, bit 0, binary outputs (output 1)
0729h [A4.5]
OUTPUT.BQ3000.NC_T3
H834 MSK_BT0_BNO 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.5
0001h 3.2.2
1834d Mask, bit 0, binary outputs (output 1)
072Ah [A4.5]
Mask to select the controlling bits. Supplies the binary
output.
OUTPUT.BQ3000.MSK_T3
H835 SRC_BT1_BNO 0...511 0 3.1.5
1 [A4.5]
072Bh
OUTPUT.BQ3010.NC_T3
0001h [A4.5]
072Ch
output.
H837 SRC_BT2_BNO 0...511 0 3.1.5
1 [A4.5]
072Dh
OUTPUT.BQ3020.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list

0001h [A4.5]
072Eh
output.
H839 SRC_BT3_BNO 0...511 0 3.1.5
1 [A4.5]
072Fh
OUTPUT.BQ3030.NC_T3
0001h [A4.5]
0730h
output.
H841 SRC_BT4_BNO 0...511 0 3.1.5
1 [A4.5]
0731h
OUTPUT.BQ3040.NC_T3
0001h [A4.5]
0732h
output.
H843 SRC_BT5_BNO 0...511 0 3.1.5
1 [A4.5]
0733h
OUTPUT.BQ3050.NC_T3
0001h [A4.5]
0734h
output.
H845 SRC_BT6_BNO 0...511 0 3.1.5
1 [A4.5]
0735h
OUTPUT.BQ3060.NC_T3
0001h [A4.5]
0736h
output.

Manual
4 Parameter list
H847 SRC_BT7_BNO 0...511 0 3.1.5

1 [A4.5]
0737h
OUTPUT.BQ3070.NC_T3
0001h [A4.5]
0738h
output.
H849 MSK_INV_BNO 0000h...FFFFh 0000h 3.1.5
0001h [A4.6]
1849d Mask, inverting binary outputs
0739h
Allows the 8 binary outputs to be inverted bitwise.

to
OUTPUT.BQ3110.IS2_T3
H850 SRC_ANA_OP1 0...511 41 3.1.7
1 [A5.5]
1850d Source, analog output 1
073Ah
OUTPUT.AQ1000.NC_T1
H851 SLA_ANA_OP1 0...1 0 3.1.7
1 [A5.6]
1851d Select, absolute value analog output 1
073Bh
Selects the absolute value of the supplying value for
output.
OUTPUT.AQ1020.I_T1
H852 FLT_ANA_OP1 5[ms]...81 920[ms] 5[ms] 3.1.7
1852d [A5.6]
Smoothing, analog output 1
073Ch
Defines the time constant of the 1st order filter with which
the signal, to be output, is smoothed.
OUTPUT.AQ1050.T_T1
H853 OFF_ANA_OP1 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.7
0.006% [A5.7]
1853d Offset, analog output 1
073Dh
Is subtracted from the signal to be output.
OUTPUT.AQ1060.OFF_T1
H854 MUL_ANA_OP1 -256...255.9921875 2 3.1.7
0.0078125 [A5.7]
1854d Gain, analog output 1
073Eh
The conditioned signal is multiplied by this factor. The
following is valid: 100%x1=100% and the assignment
100%=5V.
OUTPUT.AQ1060.K_T1
SIMADYN D:E2 PKW-TYP:I4
H855 SRC_ANA_OP2 0...511 0 3.1.7
1 [A5.5]
073Fh
OUTPUT.AQ1100.NC_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H856 SLA_ANA_OP2 0...1 0 3.1.7

1 [A5.6]
1856d Select, absolute value analog output 2
0740h
output.
OUTPUT.AQ1120.I_T1
1857d [A5.6]
0741h
Defines the time constant of the 1st order filter, with which
the signal, to be output, is smooothed.
OUTPUT.AQ1150.T_T1
H858 OFF_ANA_OP2 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.7
0.006% [A5.7]
0742h
H859 MUL_ANA_OP2 -256...255.9921875 2 3.1.7
0.0078125 [A5.7]
0743h
100%=5V.
OUTPUT.AQ1160.K_T1
H860 SRC_ANA_OP3 0...511 0 3.1.7
1 [A5.5]
0744h
OUTPUT.AQ3000.NC_T1
H861 SLA_ANA_OP3 0...1 0 3.1.7
1 [A5.6]
1861d Selection, absolute value analog output 3
0745h
output.
OUTPUT.AQ3020.I_T1
1862d [A5.6]
0746h
the signal to be output is smoothed.
OUTPUT.AQ3050.T_T1
H863 OFF_ANA_OP3 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.7
0.006% [A5.7]
0747h
H864 MUL_ANA_OP3 -256...255.9921875 2 3.1.7
0.0078125 [A5.7]
0748h
100%=5V.
OUTPUT.AQ3060.K_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H865 SRC_ANA_OP4 0...511 0 3.1.7

1 [A5.5]
0749h
OUTPUT.AQ3100.NC_T1
H866 SLA_ANA_OP4 0...1 0 3.1.7
1 [A5.6]
1866d Selection, absolute value analog output 4
074Ah
output.
OUTPUT.AQ3120.I_T1
1867d [A5.6]
074Bh
the signal to be output is smoothed.
OUTPUT.AQ3150.T_T1
H868 OFF_ANA_OP4 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.7
0.006% [A5.7]
074Ch
H869 MUL_ANA_OP4 -256...255.9921875 2 3.1.7
0.0078125 [A5.7]
074Dh
100%=5V.
OUTPUT.AQ3160.K_T1
H870 SRC_KPA_NRG 0...511 0 3.1.13
1 [A8.1]
1870d Source, kp adaption speed controller
074Eh
Connector number of the supplying value. It defines the
process quantity, which specifies the speed controller
adaption.
OUTPUT.KP1000.NC_T1
H871 STV_KPA_NRG 0%...199.993% 0% 3.1.13
0.006% [A8.2]
1871d Start of kp adaption, speed controller
074Fh
Value of the process quantity, from which value the
proportional gain factor changes. This value must be less
than that in H873.
OUTPUT.KP1010.A1_T1
H872 STF_KPA_NRG -20.00...19.99939 1 3.1.13
0.00061 [A8.2]
1872d Factor, start of kp adaption, speed controller
0750h
Value, with which the speed controller proportional gain is
multiplied as long as the process quantity is less than or
equal to point H871. The characteristic is linearly
interpolated between the two points.
OUTPUT.KP1010.B1_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H873 EDV_KPA_NRG 0%...199.993% 100% 3.1.13

0.006% [A8.2]
1873d End of kp adaption, speed controller
0751h
Value of the process quantity from which value the factor
for the proportional gain had reached the changed value.
This value must be greater than that in H871.
OUTPUT.KP1010.A2_T1
H874 EDV_KPA_NRG -20.00...19.99939 1 3.1.13
0.00061 [A8.2]
1874d Factor, end of kp adaption, speed controller
0752h
Value, with which the speed controller proportional gain is
multiplied if the process quantity is greater or equal to
point H873. The characteristic is linearly interpolated
betwen the two points.
OUTPUT.KP1010.B2_T1
H875 SRC_DSP_PA1 0...511 0 3.6.2
1 [F1.7]
1875d Source, monitoring parameter 1
0753h
quantity to be displayed in monitoring parameter d081.
OUTPUT.S5000.NC_T5
H876 SRC_DSP_PA2 0...511 0 3.6.2
1 [F1.7]
0754h
OUTPUT.S5010.NC_T5
H877 SRC_DSP_PA3 0...511 0 3.6.2
1 [F1.7]
0755h
OUTPUT.S5020.NC_T5
H878 SRC_DSP_PA4 0...511 0 3.6.2
1 [F1.7]
1878d Source, monitoring parameter 4 (Hex)
0756h
OUTPUT.S5030.NC_T5
H879 SRC_WD1_P2P 0...511 0 3.1.3
1 [A3.5]
1879d Source, word 1 to peer-to-peer
0757h
OUTPUT.PP1000.NC_T1
H880 MUL_WD1_P2P -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.3
0.006% [A3.6]
1880d Factor for word 1 to peer-to-peer
0758h
Value, with which the signal is multiplied before sending.
OUTPUT.PP1010.X2_T1
H881 SRC_WD2_P2P 0...511 0 3.1.3
1 [A3.5]
0759h
OUTPUT.PP1100.NC_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H882 MUL_WD2_P2P -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.3

0.006% [A3.6]
075Ah
OUTPUT.PP1110.X2_T1
H883 SRC_WD3_P2P 0...511 0 3.1.3
1 [A3.5]
075Bh
OUTPUT.PP1200.NC_T1
H884 MUL_WD3_P2P -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.3
0.006% [A3.6]
075Ch
OUTPUT.PP1210.X2_T1
H885 SRC_WD4_P2P 0...511 0 3.1.3
1 [A3.5]
075Dh
OUTPUT.PP1300.NC_T1
H886 MUL_WD4_P2P -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.3
0.006% [A3.6]
075Eh
OUTPUT.PP1310.X2_T1
H887 SRC_WD5_P2P 0...511 0 3.1.3
1 [A3.5]
075Fh
OUTPUT.PP1400.NC_T1
H888 SRC_WD1_TCU 0...511 143 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
1888d Source, word 1 to CU
0760h
OUTPUT.SD1000.NC_T1
H889 SRC_WD2_TCU 0...511 112 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
0761h
OUTPUT.SD1010.NC_T1
H890 SRC_WD3_TCU 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
0762h
OUTPUT.SD1020.NC_T1
H891 SRC_WD4_TCU 0...511 144 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
0763h
OUTPUT.SD1030.NC_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H892 SRC_WD5_TCU 0...511 151 3.1.1

1 3.5.1
0764h Connector number of the supplying value. 6.3.3.12
OUTPUT.SD1040.NC_T1 6.3.3.13
[A1.5]
H893 SRC_WD6_TCU 0...511 152 3.1.1

1 [A1.5]
0765h
OUTPUT.SD1050.NC_T1
H894 SRC_WD7_TCU 0...511 153 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
0766h
OUTPUT.SD1060.NC_T1
H895 SRC_WD8_TCU 0...511 162 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
0767h
OUTPUT.SD1070.NC_T1
H896 SRC_WD9_TCU 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
0768h
OUTPUT.SD1080.NC_T1
H897 SRC_WDA_TCU 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
0769h
OUTPUT.SD1090.NC_T1
H898 SRC_WDB_TCU 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
076Ah
OUTPUT.SD1100.NC_T1
H899 SRC_WDC_TCU 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
076Bh
OUTPUT.SD1110.NC_T1
H900 SRC_WDD_TCU 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
076Ch
OUTPUT.SD1120.NC_T1
H901 SRC_WDE_TCU 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
076Dh
OUTPUT.SD1130.NC_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H902 SRC_WDF_TCU 0...511 0 3.1.1

1 [A1.5]
076Eh
OUTPUT.SD1140.NC_T1
H903 SRC_WDG_TCU 0...511 0 3.1.1
1 [A1.5]
076Fh
OUTPUT.SD1150.NC_T1
H904 SRC_WD1_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2
1 [A3.5]
1904d Source, word 1 to CB
0770h
OUTPUT.SD2000.NC_T1
H905 SRC_WD2_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2
1 [A3.5]
0771h
OUTPUT.SD2010.NC_T1
H906 SRC_WD3_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2
1 [A3.5]
0772h
OUTPUT.SD2020.NC_T1
H907 SRC_WD4_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2
1 [A3.5]
0773h
OUTPUT.SD2030.NC_T1
H908 SRC_WD5_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2
1 [A3.5]
0774h
OUTPUT.SD2040.NC_T1
H909 SRC_WD6_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2
1 [A3.5]
0775h
OUTPUT.SD2050.NC_T1
H910 SRC_WD7_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2
1 [A3.5]
0776h
OUTPUT.SD2060.NC_T1
H911 SRC_WD8_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2
1 [A3.5]
0777h
OUTPUT.SD2070.NC_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H912 SRC_WD8_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2

1 [A3.5]
0778h
OUTPUT.SD2080.NC_T1
H913 SRC_WDA_TCB 0...511 0 3.1.2
1 [A3.5]
0779h
OUTPUT.SD2090.NC_T1
H914 SRC_IN1_LV1 0...511 0 3.1.15
1 [A9.5]
1914d Source, value 1 limit value monitor 1
077Ah
Connector number of the supplying value. It can be
filtered and compared with a limit value.
OUTPUT.GW100.NC_T3
H915 FLT_IN1_LV1 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 40[ms] 3.1.15
1915d [A9.5]
Smoothing, value 1 limit value monitor 1
077Bh
Time constant with which the signal to be monitored is
smoothed.
OUTPUT.GW110.T_T3
H916 SRC_IN2_LV1 0...511 0 3.1.15
1 [A9.5]
077Ch
Connector number of the supplying value. Comparison
value for the signal to be monitored.
OUTPUT.GW120.NC_T3
H917 LIM_CMP_LV1 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.15
0.006% [A9.6]
1917d Window size, limit value monitor 1
077Dh
Defines the threshold, i.e. the maximum deviation
between the signal (value 1) and limit value (value 2),
which still results in “equal”.
OUTPUT.GW130.L_T3
H918 HYS_CMP_LV1 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.15
0.006% [A9.6]
1918d Hysteresis, limit value monitor 1
077Eh
Defines how far the deviation between the signal (value 1)
and the limit value (value 2) must fall below the threshold
so that “equal” is again identified.
OUTPUT.GW130.HY_T3
H919 SRC_IN1_LV2 0...511 0 3.1.15
1 [A9.5]
077Fh
OUTPUT.GW200.NC_T3
H920 FLT_IN1_LV2 40[ms]...655 360[ms] 40[ms] 3.1.15
1920d [A9.5]
0780h
smoothed.
OUTPUT.GW210.T_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H921 SRC_IN2_LV2 0...511 0 3.1.15

1 [A9.5]
0781h
OUTPUT.GW220.NC_T3
H922 LIM_CMP_LV2 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.15
0.006% [A9.6]
0782h
which still results in “equal”.
OUTPUT.GW230.L_T3
H923 HYS_CMP_LV2 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.15
0.006% [A9.6]
0783h
so that “equal” is again identified.
OUTPUT.GW230.HY_T3
H924 SRC_IN1_LV3 0...511 0 3.1.15
1 [A9.5]
0784h
OUTPUT.GW300.NC_T5
H925 FLT_IN1_LV3 320[ms]..5 242 320[ms] 3.1.15
880[ms]
1925d [A9.5]
0785h
smoothed.
OUTPUT.GW310.T_T5
H926 SRC_IN2_LV3 0...511 0 3.1.15
1
0786h [A9.5]
OUTPUT.GW320.NC_T5
H927 LIM_CMP_LV3 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.15
0.006% [A9.6]
0787h
which still results in ‘equal’.
OUTPUT.GW330.L_T5
H928 HYS_CMP_LV3 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.15
0.006% [A9.6]
0788h
so that ‘equal’ is again identified.
OUTPUT.GW330.HY_T5

Manual
4 Parameter list
H929 SRC_IN1_LV4 0...511 0 3.1.15

1 [A9.5]
0789h
OUTPUT.GW400.NC_T5
H930 FLT_IN1_LV4 320[ms]..5 242 320[ms] 3.1.15
880[ms]
1930d [A9.5]
078Ah
smoothed.
OUTPUT.GW410.T_T5
H931 SRC_IN2_LV4 0...511 0 3.1.15
1 [A9.5]
078Bh
OUTPUT.GW420.NC_T5
H932 LIM_CMP_LV4 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.15
0.006% [A9.6]
078Ch
which results in ‘equal’.
OUTPUT.GW430.L_T5
H933 HYS_CMP_LV4 -200.000%...199.993% 0% 3.1.15
0.006% [A9.6]
078Dh
so that ‘equal’ is again identified.
OUTPUT.GW430.HY_T5
H934-997 (Unused)
H998 Drive Number 0...32767 0
1 [F1.7]
1998d Identification of the drive
07CEh
Delivers a number affter it has been parameterized.
OUTPUT.DRNR.X_T5

Manual
4 Parameter list
H999 DEFAULTING 0...32767 0 6.3.4.6

1 [F1.7]
1999d Establish factor setting
07CFh
Permits the EPROMs to be erased and thus the factory
setting established.
165 has to be entered.
Procedure:
Set H999 = 165. Switch off and on. Only thereafter is the
factory setting present again.
Recommodation: Thereafter set H999 = 0.
Note:
It is seen that when the EEPROM is full (more as approx.
250 different parameters stored) no new parameter can
be written. The factory setting can only be reached by
setting H999 = 165 in the RAM memory.
Erasing either via PROFIBUS or SIMOVIS. Not possible
with the PMU. When using SIMOVIS the yellow R-symbol
in the main menu must be selected. After entering H999 =
165 as above. Further with SIMOVIS by clicking the red
E2 symbol to select EEPROM storing again.
OUTPUT.ER10.X1_T5

Manual
4 Parameter list

Manual
5 Connector
5 Connectors
5.1 The connector principle
In order to achieve the highest possible module flexibility, the control signals are not permanently
connected with one another, but can be configured for the various applications.
Thus, these signals are collected in a connector list, where they can then be “connected-up” in the closed-
loop control.
The connector list includes the following signals:
- Fixed setpoints
- Receive words from the basic drive converter, COM-BOARD, peer-to-peer
- Binary inputs, analog inputs, pulse encoder
- Status words from the control, closed-loop control and setpoint conditioning
- Signals from the closed-loop control, open-loop control and setpoint conditioning
- Signals from the freely-connectable functions
A connector always consists of a 16-bit word. A bit from the 16-bit word must be selected if bit quantities
are used.
5.1.1 Word quantities

A connector is illustrated as follows in the function diagrams:
K066
The output signal of the PT1 element is stored at connector K066
If this connector is to be used, then the connector number must be entered when selecting the signal.
Example:
H4 0 2 H4 02 =66
K066 is entered in H402 as source

One can then think of this connection as follows:
K 066
H 402 H 402 =66

For setpoints and actual values, the normalization is 4000h = 100%, if not otherwise specified.

Manual
5 Connector
5.1.2 Bit quantities

For bit quantities, in addition to specifying the connector, a bit has to be selected. Thus, there is an
additional parameter, the “masked” bit.
Example:
Word quantity
Bit quantity
MS K
H 152 H 15 3
Selection parameter Masking parameter
The MSK block function can be shown as follows:
0 &
>1
1 &
=
.
.
.
H 152 14 &
15 &
0
1
.
H 15 3
.
.
MS K
14
15
This means that every connector bit is AND’ed with the corresponding bit of the masking, and the results
of all of the AND logic operations are OR’d.
Thus, the bit must have a logical 1 in the mask, which is then to be selected as bit quantity. It is the
simplest to represent the word in the binary notation. A one is entered under the bit with a logical 1 which
is to control the binary function, all others have logical 0. If it is now converted into the hexadecimal
notation, then the required mask is obtained.
Example:
Masking bit 7 from the control word:
B it 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Inp ut q ua nt ity
W e ig hting 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
M as k 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Hex 0 0 8 0
Note:
By masking several bits, several bits can be simultaneously switch-through to the output.

Manual
5 Connector
5.1.3 Selection table for the masking

The subsequent table is used to simplify determining masks for switching bits through.
Mask The bit switched through to the output
0000h No bit is switched-through
0001h Bit 0 of the input value
Example 1:
Example 2:
0402h Bits 10 and 1 of the input value

Manual
5 Connector
5.1.4 Sampling times

The sampling time is an important criteria for digital systems. This is specified in the cross
reference_sampling time column. The sampling time is shown after the path code for use with the
symbolic monitor, separated by an underline. T1, T2, T3, T4 and T5 represent the 5 different technological
sampling levels:
Sampling level Sampling time
T1 5.0 [ms]
T2 20.0 [ms]
T3 40.0 [ms]
T4 160.0 [ms]
T5 640.0 [ms]
Sampling time changes should, if possible, be avoided. This means that the sampling time levels are
functionally unified for the standard software package, i.e. open-loop and closed-loop controls etc. are
implemented in the same sampling time, as their input signals. However, as connectors can be used as
source, such sampling time changes can occur and result in significant delays. Especially for the free
blocks, most functions exist in various sampling times, so that the appropriate can be selected.
The connectors are supplied in an increasing sequence from the software. If signal paths go through
several multiplexers, and in this case connectors are not used in an increasing sequence, then dead times
occur, just like for sampling time changes.
The following is generally valid: For the worst case (this must be assumed), for each sampling time
change, a signal delay of at least the duration of the highest sampling time must be taken into account,
which is the same for the jump into the connector list.
5.2 The connector list

Explanations: The source parameter column includes those H parameters which supply the fixed
setpoints. Thus, a fast cross coupling from the multiplexers to the fixed setpoint sources can be
established.

Manual
5 Connector
Connector Value / description Source Cross reference_ Dia-
number parameter sampling time gram
K000 Fixed value 0 (0000h or 0%) - INPUT.FP5000.X_T5 [F1.2]
K001 Fixed value 1 (4000h or 100%) - INPUT.FP5010.X_T5 [F1.2]
K002 Fixed value 2 (FFFFh) - INPUT.FP5020.X_T5 [F1.2]
K003 Selectable fixed value 3 H166 INPUT.FP5030.X_T5 [F1.2]
K020 Word 1 from CB - INPUT.RXCB1.X_T1 [A3.3]
K030 Word 1 from peer-to-peer - INPUT.RXPP1.X_T1 [A3.3]

Manual
5 Connector
K040 Word 1 from CU - INPUT.RXCU11.X_T1 [A1.3]

Bit 0: Ready to power-up
Bit 1: Ready
Bit 2: Run
Bit 3: Fault
Bit 4: No OFF2
Bit 5: No OFF3
Bit 6: Power-up inhibit
Bit 7: Alarm
Bit 8: Setpoint-actual value deviation
Bit 9: PZD control requested
Bit 10: Comparison frequency reached
Bit 11: Undervoltage
Bit 12: Main contactor energized
Bit 13: Ramp-function generator active
Bit 14: Clockwise phase sequence
Bit 15: Kinetic buffering active

Bit 0: Restart-on-the-fly active
Bit 1: Synchronism reached
Bit 2: No overspeed
Bit 3: Fault, external 1
Bit 4: Fault, external 2
Bit 5: Alarm, external
Bit 6: Alarm, i2t
Bit 7: Fault, overtemperature
Bit 8: Alarm, overtemperature
Bit 9: Alarm, overtemperature motor
Bit 10: Fault, overtemperature motor
Bit 11: 0
Bit 12: Motor stalled/rotor locked
Bit 13: Bypass contactor energized
Bit 14: Fault, synchronization
Bit 15: Pre-charging active

Manual
5 Connector
K060 Analog input 1 - INPUT.AI45.X_T1 [A5.3]
K067 Tachometer input 1 - INPUT.TA13.X_T1 [A6.7]
K068 Tachometer input 2 - INPUT.TA15.X_T1 [A6.7]
K069 Status word, binary inputs - INPUT.BI50.X_T3 [A4.3]

to
K070 Setpoint, byte-serial - INPUT.SR45.X_T3 [A7.7]
K071 Setpoint from the decade switch - INPUT.SR80.X_T3 [A7.7]
K072 Status word, INPUT function package - INPUT.STAT20.X_T3 [A8.8]

Bit 0: Tachometer input 1, synchronizing signal identified
Bit 1: Tachometer input 2, synchronizing signal identified
Bit 2: Speed is positive
Bit 3: Speed is zero
Bit 4: Speed is negative
Bit 5: Length 1, less than the setpoint
Bit 6: Length 1, greater than the setpoint
Bit 7: Length 2, less than the setpoint
Bit 8: Length 2, greater than the setpoint
Bit 10: Send to CU o.k.
Bit 11: Send to CB o.k.
Bit 12: Send to peer-to-peer o.k.
Bit 14: Receive from CB o.k.
Bit 15: Receive from peer-to-peer o.k.
K073 System error word, processor - INPUT.SYS30.X_T4 [A8.4]
Bit 1,2: 0
Bit 3: Task administration error
Bit 4: Monitor fault
Bits 7 to 9: 0
Bit 10: User fault
Bit 11-14: 0
Bit 15: Toggle bit
K074 Length actual value from pulse encoder 1 - INPUT.TA26.X_T3 [A6.7]
K075 Length actual value from pulse encoder 2 - INPUT.TA46.X_T3 [A6.7]
K076 Actual drive line speed - INPUT.TA125.X_T3 [A8.3]

Manual
5 Connector
K077 Control bits for the decade switch - INPUT.SR70.X_T4 [A7.7]
Bit 0: Decade 0 (100)

Bit 5 to 15: 0
K078-099 (Unused) -
K100 Main setpoint - SETPNT.S1025.X_T1 [D1.2]
K101 Supplementary setpoint - SETPNT.S1075.X_T1 [D2.3]
K102 Ratio setpoint - SETPNT.S3025.X_T3 [D1.2]
K103 (Unused)
K104 Output, machine ramp-function generator - SETPNT.S3105.X_T3 [D1.4]
K105 Acceleration from the machine RFG - SETPNT.S3115.X_T3 [D1.4]
K106 Setpoint at the cascade - SETPNT.S1095.X_T1 [D1.5]
K107 Setpoint with slack take-up/slack-off - SETPNT.S1225.X_T1 [D1.8]
K108 Setpoint with supplementary setpoint and - SETPNT.S1235.X_T1 [D2.3]

tachnological controller
K109 Compensation setpoint - SETPNT.S3075.X_T3 [D2.5]
K110 Bias setpoint with sign correction - SETPNT.S3535.X_T3 [D2.7]
K111 Line speed setpoint smoothed - SETPNT.S1515.X_T3 [D2.6]
K112 Speed setpoint, smoothed with bias - SETPNT.S1525.X_T3 [D2.7]
K113-119 (Unused)
K120 Output, motorized potentiometer 1 - MOTPOT.M330.X_T3 [A10.4]
K121 Output, motorized potentiometer 2 - MOTPOT.M530.X_T3 [A10.8]
K122-129 (Unused)
K130 Technological setpoint after the RFG - TREG.T460.X_T2 [C1.7]
K131 Technological actual value after offset - TREG.T320.X_T2 [C2.3]

correction and smoothing
K132 Offset, technological actual value - TREG.T299.X_T4 [C1.7]
K133 Technological setpoint-actual value difference - TREG.T651.X_T2 [C2.4]
K134 Integral component, technological controller - TREG.T652.X_T2 [C2.5]
K135 Differential component, technological - TREG.T550.X_T2 [C2.5]

controller
K136 Technological status word - TREG.T1010.X_T3 [C3.5]
Bit 0: Technological controller switched-in
Bit 1: Technological controller parameter set 2 active
Bit 2: Techn. Setpoint ramp-function generator at target
Bit 3: Technological setpoint at the upper limit
Bit 4: Technological setpoint at the lower limit
Bit 5: Technological controller at the upper limit
Bit 6: Technological controller at the lower limit
Bit 7: Offset above the positive limit
Bit 8: Offset below the negative limit
Bits 9 to 15: 0

Manual
5 Connector
K137 Influence, technological controller on the - TREG.T741.X_T2 [C2.8]

torque
K138 Influence, technological controller on the line - TREG.T746.X_T2 [C2.8]
speed
K139 (Unused)
K140 Power-down word - CONTRL.C3845.X_T3 [B1.6]
Bit 1: Off after braking
Bit 2: Fault trip
Bits 5 to 15: 0
K141 Fault word - CONTRL.F4940.X_T4 [B5.7]

Bit 0: Error, communications with CB
Bit 1: Error, communications with CU
Bit 2: Basic drive converter shutdown without request
Bit 3: Fault, power-up routine, group
Bit 4: Error, peer-to-peer communications
Bit 8: Drive stalled (rotor locked)
Bits 9 to 15: 0
K142 Operating mode word - CONTRL.M3205.X_T3 [B4.7]
Value 0: No local fixed setpoint selected
Value 1: Local setpoint 1
Value 8: Inching setpoint 1
Value 9: Inching setpoint 2
Values 10 to 65535: No local fixed setpoint selected
K143 Control word 1 - CONTRL.ST3210.X_T3 [A2.8]
Bit 0: No standard stop (OFF1)
Bit 1: No electrical off (OFF2)
Bit 2: No fast stop (OFF3)
Bit 4: Ramp-function generator enable
Bit 5: Ramp-function generator start
Bit 7: Fault acknowledge
Bit 8: Inching 1 on
Bit 9: Inching 2 on
Bit 10: Control from the PLC
Bit 11: Enable, clockwise phase sequence
Bit 12: Enable, counter-clockwise phase sequence
Bit 13: Motorized potentiometer, raise
Bit 14: Motorized potentiometer, lower
Bit 15: No fault, external 1

Manual
5 Connector
K144 Control word 2 - CONTRL.ST3410.X_T3 [A2.8]

Bit 0: Setpoint channel data set bit 0
Bit 1: Setpoint channel data set bit 1
Bit 2: Motor data set bit 0
Bit 3: Motor data set bit 1
Bit 4: Converter fixed setpoint selection bit 0
Bit 5: Converter fixed setpoint selection bit 1
Bit 6: Synchronizing enable
Bit 7: Restart-on-the-fly enable
Bit 8: Droop enable
Bit 10: No external fault 2
Bit 11: Slave drive
Bit 12: No alarm from the alarm word
Bit 13: No alarm, external 2
Bit 14: Reserve setting
Bit 15: Main contactor checkback signal
K145 Alarm word - CONTRL.ST3360.X_T3 [B6.8]
Bit 0: Alarm, communications CB
Bit 1: Alarm, communications CU
Bit 4: Alarm, peer communications
Bit 5: Alarm, from external fault
Bits 6 and 7: 0
Bits 9 to 14: 0
K146 Status word, control - CONTRL.ST3910.X_T3 [B6.4]
Bit 0: Request start enable
Bit 1: Start enable
Bit 3: Fast stop
Bit 4: No fast stop
Bit 5: Line speed is zero
Bit 6: Drive is powered-up
Bit 8: Drive is ready to be powered-up
Bit 12: Drive fault
Bit 13: Open brake
Bit 14: Close brake
Bit 15: Close brake stored for zero speed
K147-149 (Unused)
K150 Accelerating torque - TORQ.T55.X_T3 [E1.5]
K151 Supplementary torque at CU - TORQ.T65.X_T1 [E1.8]
K152 Torque limit, positive - TORQ.T1240.X_T3 [E2.8]
K153 Torque limit, negative - TORQ.T1250.X_T3 [E2.8]
K154 Friction torque - TORQ.T405.X_T4 [E1.3]
K155 Load component, slave - TORQ.T1002.X_T1 [E2.2]
K156 Acceleration with ratio influence - TORQ.T67.X_T1 [E1.4]
K157-159 (Unused)

Manual
5 Connector
K160 Status word, limit value monitor - OUTPUT.GW910.X_T3 [A9.8]

Bit 0: Limit value monitor 1, greater than comp. value
Bit 1: Limit value monitor 1, same as the comp. value
Bit 2: Limit value monitor 1, less than the comp. value
Bit 3: Limit value monitor 1, not equal to the comp. value
Bit 7: Limit value monitor 2, not equal to the comp. value
Bit 11: Limit value monitor 3, not equal to the comp.
value
Bit 15: Limit value monitor 4, not equal to the comp.
value
K161 Definable status word - OUTPUT.ST3190.X_T3 [A9.4]
K162 Factor kp adaption, basic drive converter - OUTPUT.KP1020.X_T1 [A8.3]

speed controller
100% corresponds to a factor of 10
K163-199 (Unused)
K215 Selectable fixed value 35 (Hex) H198 INPUT.FP5215.X_T5 [F1.6]
K216 Selectable fixed value 36 (Hex) H199 INPUT.FP5216.X_T5 [F1.6]
K217-229 (Unused)
K230 Free inverter 1 - AUXIL.WR3010.X_T3 [F2.2]
K231 Free adder 1 - AUXIL.WR3030.X_T3 [F2.2]
K232 Free subtracter 1 - AUXIL.WR3050.X_T3 [F2.2]

Manual
5 Connector
K233 Free multiplier 1 - AUXIL.WR3070.X_T3 [F2.2]
K234 Free divider 1 - AUXIL.WR3090.X_T3 [F2.4]
K235 Free limiter 1 - AUXIL.WR3120.X_T3 [F2.4]
K236 Free changeover switch 1 - AUXIL.WR3150.X_T3 [F2.4]
K237 Free filter 1 - AUXIL.WR3170.X_T3 [F2.6]
K238/239 (Unused)
K256 Free absolute value generator 1 - AUXIL.WR4180.X_T4 [F3.8]
K257 Free square-root extractor 1 - AUXIL.WR4190.X_T4 [F3.8]
K258 Free maximum evaluator 1 - AUXIL.WR4210.X_T4 [F3.8]
K259 Free minimum evaluator 1 - AUXIL.WR4230.X_T4 [F4.2]
K260 Free sinusoidal function 1 - AUXIL.WR4240.X_T4 [F4.2]
K261-264 (Unused)
K265 Free word EXOR gate 1 - AUXIL.WR4260.X_T4 [F4.4]
K269 Flashing frequency (e.g. clock frequency) - AUXIL.BL30.X_T4 [F4.6]

Bit 0: Flashing frequency
Bit 1: Flashing frequency, inverted
Bits 2 to 15: 0
K270 Flashing frequency, word - AUXIL.BL60.X_T4 [F4.6]

Manual
5 Connector
K271 Position difference - INPUT.TA11.X [F4.7]
K272-298 (Unused)
K299 Status word, free functions - AUXIL.STWD20.X_T3 [F5.4]
Bit 0: Divider 1, division by zero
Bit 1: Limiter 1 at the upper limit
Bit 2: Limiter 1 at the lower limit
Bit 3: Switch 1 changed over
Bit 12: Input absolute value generator negative
Bit 13: Input square-root extractor negative
Bit 14: OR logic operation of the output word EXOR gate
1
Bit 15: OR logic operation of the output word EXOR gate
2
K300-511 (Unused)

Manual
5 Connector

Manual
6 Start-up
6 Start-up
WARNING
6SE70 converters are operated at high voltages.
Hazardous voltages are still present in the drive converter up to 5 minutes
after it has been powered-down as a result of the DC link capacitors. Only
qualified personnel may be involved in start-up work.
When working with the equipment powered-up:
• Never touch any live components or parts.
• Never insert or remove boards or connecting cables.
• Always use equipment which is in a perfect operating condition and is
suitable for the job.
WARNING
The basic drive converter itself must be ready to operate and fully
functional in order to commission the multi-motor module, i.e. the speed
controller must be optimized. The drive can rotate for some of the
optimization work. It must be absolutely ensured that none of the rotating
components and parts can cause personal injury.
The information and specifications in the basic drive converter Instruction Manual are valid. A completely
functioning basic drive converter is required to commission the „multi-motor drive“ module (refer to the
Manual).
NOTE
• The basic drive converter must be configured according to Section 6.2.10.
• All parameters must be entered.
• The technological module setpoint system must be used to enter setpoints (line speed, torque), i.e. it
is not permissible to directly enter setpoints at the T300 bypassing the basic drive converter.
• All of the open-loop control commands (power-up, power-down, etc.) must be used from the
technological module open-loop control, i.e. it is not permissible that open-loop control commands are
directly entered at the T300 bypassing the basic drive converter.
The functioning of the equipment cannot be guaranteed for functions which are parameterized other
than that clearly specified in the following start-up instructions.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.1 Installing the boards

The basic drive converter must be equipped with a T300 technological processor and if required, with a
CB1/CBP interface board. The LBA bus adapter is always required.
6.1.1 Handling boards
WARNING
Only qualified personnel may replace boards.
It is not permissible to insert or withdraw boards when the equipment is powered-
up (under voltage).
If this is not observed, this can result in death, severe bodily injury or significant
material damage.
CAUTION
discharge. Before an electronics board is touched, you must discharge your own
body. This can be done by touching a conductive, grounded object immediately
beforehand (e.g. bare metal cabinet parts). The potential bonding must be
maintained if at all possible.
6.1.2 Installing and replacing boards
♦ Release the mounting bolts for the boards above

and below the handle.
♦ Carefully withdraw the board from the electronics
box using the handle, and ensure that the board
doesn’t catch on anything.
+ .1 B 1
♦ Cautiously insert the new board into the guiderails
in the electronic box until the board is completely + .1 B 3
inserted in the bus connector.
♦ Tighten the retaining screws above and below the
board handle + .1 B 2
Note
All of the changed parameters are stored on the
memory module EEPROM. If the technology board is
replaced, then the memory module with all
parameters can be used; if the memory module is
replaced, all of the changed parameters must be re-
entered.
Fig 6.1 Electronics box equipped with CU and options

(+.1B2 /+.1B3)
6-2 Sectional drive Siemens AG

Manual
6 Start-up
6.1.3 Options
One or two of the option boards, listed in Table 6.1, can be inserted in the electronics box using the LBA
option (Local Bus Adapter).
Designation Description
LBA This is required for the T300-, CB1/CBP-, SCB1- and SCB2 boards; it connects the
option boards with the CU board
T300 Technology board to control technological processes/functions
CB1/CBP Communications board with L2-DP interface, (Profibus)
ADB Adaption Board to accept the CBP
SCB1 Serial communications board with fiber-optic cable for the serial I/O system and peer-
to-peer connection
SCB2 Serial communications board for a peer-to-peer connection and USS protocol via
RS485 in two- or four-wire technology
TSY Digital tachometer (Midi Master) and synchronizing board (Multi Master)
Table 6.1 Option boards and bus adapter
Slot in the electronics box Boards

+1.B1 Standard board CU
+1.B3 CBP / CB1 / SCB1 / SCB
Option boards
+1.B2 CBP / CB1 / SCB1 / SCB / T300
NOTE
T300 must always be inserted in slot 2
If there is only one option board, this must be inserted in slot 2.
It is only permissible to insert one of any one particular type.
Table 6.2 Slots for the option boards in the electronics box

Manual
6 Start-up
6.2 Start-up, basic drive converter

It should be noted that two different configuration settings can be parameterized in the converter basic
unit. The settings are the basic setting and reserve setting, or BICO-Dataset 1 and 2.
Both settings allow a changeover to different configurations. Using this second setting, for example,
emergency operation without automation can be implemented. Changeover into the reserve setting is
realized via bit 30 of the control word (= bit 14 in control word 2). The parameters for the basic setting /
BICO-Dataset 1 have index 001 in the basic drive converter; and index 002 for the reserve setting / BICO
Dataset 2.
The active setting can be read-out of r012.
In the following text, it is assumed that the basic setting is active, i.e. the index is 001. The same is also
valid for the motor data set and setpoint data set.
The multi-motor module only uses the basic setting / BICO Dataset 1.
The basic start-up sequence is shown in the following:
Start-up
6SE70 basic drive converter
P aram eterization
Basic d rive conv. for o p. w . T 300
S tart-up
O pen-loop co ntrol
S tart-up
S etpo int co ndition ing
Start-up
Technological control

Manual
6 Start-up
6.2.1 Parameterizing enable

The following steps briefly describe drive converter start-up with motor and pulse encoder for the multi-
motor module. Detailed start-up instructions are provided in the 6SE70 Manual.
6.2.1.1 CUVC, CUMC:

6.2.1.2 CU2, CU3:

6.2.2 Factory setting
6.2.2.1 CUVC, CUMC:

Before the multi-motor module is commissioned, the factory setting must first be established, as the
subsequent parameterization is based on this particular status. P060 is set to 2 and P970 to 0 and the P
key depressed to establish the factory setting.
6.2.2.2 CU2, CU3:

Before the multi-motor module is commissioned, the factory setting must first be established, as the
subsequent parameterization is based on this particular status. P052 is set to 1 and the P key depressed
to establish the factory setting.
6.2.3 MLFB input

Generally, this step is not required (status as shipped), as the factory setting is not changed. If software
has been replaced, or a new processor board (CU) has been installed in the drive converter, then the
equipment must be newly set.
6.2.3.1 CUVC, CUMC:

To realize this, P060 is set to 8. 000 is displayed. The following parameters must then be entered:
Set P053 to 22 (access authorization) (TechBd:16 + SST1:4 + PMU:2).
Set P070 (MLFB). The values to be set should be taken from the MLFB table of the basic drive converter
manual, Initialization. The values for P072 (rated current) and P073 (rated output) can be found there.
Set P060 from 8 to 0 and depress P. Wait until the display changes over to 009 (ready).
6.2.3.2 CU2, CU3:

To realize this, P052 is set to 2. 000 is displayed. The following parameters must then be entered:
Set P053 to 22 (access authorization) (TechBd:16 + SST1:4 + PMU:2).
Set P070 (MLFB). The values to be set should be taken from the MLFB table in Section 4.3.9.2 of the
basic drive converter manual, Initialization. The values for P072 (rated current) and P073 (rated output)
can be found there.
Set P052 from 2 to 0 and depress P. The display indicates that initialization is running with 001. Wait until
the display changes over to 009 (ready).

Manual
6 Start-up
6.2.4 Hardware configuration
6.2.4.1 CUVC,CUMC:
The system itself identifies if the CBP and SCB modules are inserted. A hardware configuration is not
required.
Depending on the module, additional parameter settings are required. Also refer to the „Module
configuration“ Section in the basic drive manual.
6.2.4.2 CU2, CU3:

To input the hardware configuration, P052 must first be set to 4 ( display 004). Now, only r000, r001,
P051-053, P090 and P091 can be manipulated. The following parameters must be entered:
The technology board (righthand slot in the technology box) is enabled with P090 = 2.
If there is also a communications board (center slot, technology box), then:
P091 = 1 for the PROFIBUS communications board (CB) or
P091 = 3 for the peer-to-peer communications board or USS (SCB) must be entered.
P052 must then again be set to 0 so that the settings become effective. After the P key has been
depressed, the converter checks as to whether the specified configuration is available (display 002). An
appropriate fault message is displayed if this is not the case. If everything is correct, the display changes
to 009.
6.2.4.3 Others
Further, the following LEDs must flash on the TB:
The red LED (H1) indicates that the program is being processed on the TB.
The yellow LED (H3) indicates that communications between the TB and the CU are O.K..
The green LED (H4) indicates that communications between the TB and the CB or SCB are O.K..

Manual
6 Start-up
6.2.5 Entering the drive data

P052 must be set to 5 (CU2,CU3); P060 must be set to 5 (CUVC,CUMC) to enter the drive data (display
005). Then, the following parameters must be entered:
P071 [line supply voltage]
P100 [motor type]
P101 [rated motor voltage],
P102 [rated motor current]
P104 [cosϕ]
P107 [rated motor frequency]
P108 [rated motor speed]
P109 [pole pair number]
Closed-loop speed control (CUVC: P100=4; CU2: P163=4) must be selected.
A pulse encoder (CUVC: P130; CU2: P208) is parameterized as speed actual value source, whose pulse
number is specified in CUVC: P151; CU2: P209.
The rated system frequency and speed is defined using parameter CUVC, CUMC: P352/P353; CU2,CU3:
P420. P352/P353; P420 is the reference quantity for all setpoint inputs, i.e., if 100% speed is entered from
the multi-motor module, then the motor rotates with the frequency entered in P352/P353; P420.
The maximum frequency for clockwise phase sequence P452 and counter-clockwise phase sequence
P453 should be selected to be 5%-10% higher.
It is not permissible that the ramp-function generator is effective, thus, 0 must be entered in P462 (ramp-
up time) and P464 (ramp-down time); the units of these values is seconds (P463 and P465 to 0).
The nominal quantity for the rated system torque is specified at CUVC,CUMC: P354; CU2,CU3: P485.
The specified torque setpoints are multiplied by this factor.
100% (CU2,CU3); Motor nominal torque (CUMC,CUVC) is entered for operation with T300.
Automatic parameterization should now be started. by setting P115=1 (CUVC,CUMC); P052 to 6
(CU2,CU3).
003 is displayed. Wait until the display changes to 009 (ready). The drive converter calculates the most
important closed-loop control settings from the specified converter and motor data.
6.2.6 Automatic parameterization

The following is valid for the automatic parameterization:
CUVC: P60 = 5, after which automatic parameterization is started with P115 = 1. After this, P60 is set to 1.
CU2: P52 = 5, afterwards start automatic parameterization with P52 = 6.
003 is displayed. Wait until the display changes to 009 (ready). The drive converter calculates the most
important control settings from the specified converter and motor data.
6.2.7 Motor identification at standstill (only CUVC, CU2)

WARNING
The converter output becomes live and voltage is applied to the motor
terminals in this step. It must be ensured that the drive converter output
terminals or motor terminals cannot be touched.
When powered-up, the drive converter injects current into the motor and measures the parameters which
are used to set the controller parameters. Set P115=2 (CUVC); P052=7 (CU2) and depress P. A078 is
displayed. The on key must now be depressed to acknowledge. The drive converter is powered-up, and
displays 018 during the measurement. After successful identification the converter shuts down and
displays 009.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.2.8 No-load measurement, (CUVC,CU2)

WARNING
The drive rotates in this step. It must be ensured that the drive is ready to
mechanically rotate.
It must be ensured that all of the rotating parts/components do not
present a danger to personnel.
When powered-up, the drive converter accelerates the motor and measures its no-load current. The
measured no-load current is entered into parameter P103. CUVC: P115=4; CU2: P052=9 to make the no-
load measurement. Finally, the drive converter must be powered-up.
A080 is displayed during the measurement (=rotating measurement). The drive converter shuts down
with display 009 after a successful no-load measurement.
6.2.9 Speed controller optimization (only CUVC, CU2)
WARNING
The drive rotates in this step. It must be ensured that the drive is ready to
mechanically rotate.
It must be ensured that all of the rotating parts/components do not
present a danger to personnel.
The speed controller is automatically optimized with the rotating measurement. The required dynamic
performance can be pre-selected using P536 (CUVC); P346 (CU2) (values between 10 and 20 are, from
experience, favorable). Set CUVC: P115=5; CU2: P052=10 and depress P. A080 is displayed. The ON
key must now be depressed to acknowledge. The drive converter is powered-up and displays 019 during
the measurement. The converter shuts down with display 009 after successful optimization.
Tip:
For high drive moments of inertia and without regenerative feedback, F006 will be output (DC link
overvoltage). The regenerative active power limit (CUVC: P259; CU2: P233) must then be reduced.
NOTE:
With the rotating measurement, parameters are changed which were already set.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (P462 and P464) as well as the speed controller pre-control
(CUVC: P471; CU2: P243) should be again set to 0.
NOTE:
The parameterization set by the drive converter must always be checked by making the appropriate
measurements. The automatic optimization cannot handle all of the possible situations (play, elasticity,
slip etc.).

Manual
6 Start-up
6.2.10 Data transfer, CU-T300

NOTE
The parameters, shown in table 6.2.x must be entered completely.
Before this parameter is entered, the basic drive should be operated in the speed-loop controlled mode,
with the speed controller optimized, without the T300. Only then should the subsequently described
parameterization be made.
These parameters and their recommended setting for operation with the multi-motor module are included
in Table 6.2.a; 6.2.d. Settings, deviating from the factory setting, have a dark background.
Only the basic setting is relevant for operation with T300 as already mentioned. Thus, the subsequent
parameters refer to index 001.
The parameterization of the T300 when using the CUVC and CUMC basic boards is described in Section
6.2.10.1, and the parameterization of the T300 when using the CU2 and CU3 basic modules, in Section
6.2.10.2.
6.2.10.1 Parameterization when using the CUVC and CUMC

Data from the T300 to the basic drive converter for CUVC, addition for MC see table 6.2.c.
Parameter Significance Designation Setting Factory

setting
P232 Source, controller adaption kadap 3008 (DPR w8) 0
P233, Controller adaption, kp 2) - 100.00% 100.00%
P234,
P235,
P236
P433 Source, supplementary setpoint 1 - 0 0
before the RFG
P434 Supplementary setpoint 1, kp - 100.00% 100.00%
before the RFG
P443 Source, main setpoint n* 3002 (DPR w2) 58
P444 Main setpoint, kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P486 Source, torque setpoint - 0 0
P487 Torque setpoint, kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P493 Source, positive torque limit Mb+ 3006 (DPR w6) 78
P494 Positive torque limit kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P499 Source, negative torque limit Mb- 3007 (DPR w7) 79
P500 Negative torque limit kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P506 Source, supplementary torque/current Madd 3005 (DPR w5) 87
setpoint
P507 Suppl. torque/current setpoint kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P554 Source, OFF1 STW1.0 3100 (DPR w1) 0
P555 Source, 1 OFF2 STW1.1 3101 (DPR w1) 1
P556 Source, 2 OFF2 STW1.1 1 1
P557 Source, 3 OFF2 STW1.1 5 (PMU) 1

Manual
6 Start-up

P561 Source, inverter enable STW1.3 3103 (DPR w1) 1
P562 Source, RFG enable STW1.4 3104 (DPR w1) 1
P563 Source, no RFG stop STW1.5 3105 (DPR w1) 1
P564 Source, setpoint enable STW1.6 3106 (DPR w1) 1
P565 Source 1, acknowledge STW1.7 3107 (DPR w1) 0
P566 Source 2, acknowledge STW1.7 0 0
P568 Source, inching 1 STW1.8 3108 (DPR w1) 0
P571 Source, clockwise phase sequence STW1.11 3111 (DPR w1) 1
P572 Source, counter-clockwise phase STW1.12 3112 (DPR w1) 1
sequence
P573 Source, raise motorized potentiometer STW1.13 3113 (DPR w1) 0
P574 Source, lower motorized potentiometer STW1.14 3114 (DPR w1) 0
P575 Source, no fault 1 external 1) STW1.15 3115 (DPR w1) 1
P576 Source, function data set, bit 0 STW2.0 (16) 3400 (DPR w4) 0
P577 Source, function data set, bit 1 STW2.1 (17) 3401 (DPR w4) 0
P578 Source, motor data set , bit 0 STW2.2 (18) 3402 (DPR w4) 0
P579 Source, motor data set, bit 1 STW2.3 (19) 3403 (DPR w4) 0
P580 Source, fixed setpoint bit 0 STW2.4 (20) 3404 (DPR w4) 0
P583 Source, restart-on-the-fly enable STW2.7 (23) 3407 (DPR w4) 0
P584 Source, droop enable STW2.8 (24) 3408 (DPR w4) 0
P585 Source, controller enable STW2.9 (25) 3409 (DPR w4) 1
P586 Source, no fault 2 external STW2.10 (26) 3410 (DPR w4) 1
P587 Source, master/slave changeover STW2.11 (27) 3411 (DPR w4) 0
P588 Source, no alarm 1 external STW2.12 (28) 3412 (DPR w4) 1
P590 Source, BICO data set 1/2 STW2.14 (30) 3414 (DPR w4) 0
Data from the basic drive converter to T300 converter for CUVC, CUMC
P734.001 Source, status word 1 basic drive 32 32

converter
P734.002 Source, speed actual value, basic drive 148 0
converter
P734.003 - 0 0
P734.004 Source, status word 2, basic drive 33 0
converter
P734.005 Source, torque setpoint, basic drive 155 0
converter
P734.006 Source, torque actual value basic drive 900 0
converter
Table 6.2.a Configuration parameter values

Manual
6 Start-up
Table 6.2.b includes additional parameters which must be checked to ensure that they are correctly set.
Parameter Description Setting

P100 Open-loop/closed-loop control type selection 4 (speed control with tachometer)
P259 Max. regenerative active power -100 % (-10 % without regenerative
feedback)
P471 Pre-control, closed-loop speed/frequency 0.0 % (no pre-control)
controller
P245 Droop selection 155 (dependent on the speed controller I
component)
P246 Droop factor 0.001 = 0.1% to 0.499 = 49.9%, (generally 2%)
P375 Selection, ground fault test 0 (no ground fault test)

P352 Rated frequency x.xx Hz (corresponds to 100% setpoint)
P455 Suppression frequency 0.00 Hz (no suppression)
P456 Suppression bandwidth 0%
P457 Minimum frequency 0.00 Hz (inactive)
P462 Ramp-up time 0.1 or minimum possible value
P463 Units, ramp-up time 0 (seconds)
P464 Ramp-down time 0.1 or minimum possible value
P465 Ramp-down time units 0 (seconds)
P466 OFF3 ramp-down time 0.0 sec
P469 Initial rounding-off 0 sec
P470 Final rounding-off 0 sec
P354 Rated torque xx Nm (corr. to 100% setpoint)
P492 Torque limit, positive 100.00 %
P498 Torque limit, negative -100.00 %
P505 Supplementary torque setpoint, fixed 0.0 %
P792 Setpoint-actual value difference for stalled motor 10 %
P794 Time, setpoint-actual value deviation 3 sec
P805 Time, motor stalled/rotor locked 2 sec
Table 6.2.b Values for additional configuration parameters
1) When setting this parameter, fault F035 (external fault 1) can be output. In this case, the T300
parameterization (fault word generation) should be checked. ( refer to Section 3.2.11)
2) The following values are set on the T300, if the KP adaption is required; also refer to function diagram
A8: H871, H872 = 0, H873 = 199,99% and H874 = 19,99%. The KP adaption is then realized in the
basic drive (P233, P234, P235, P236).
Refer also to CUMC, CUVC Compendium Function bloc 360.

Manual
6 Start-up
Additions to the parameterization when using CUMC.

Non listed parameters should be set as shown in table 6.2.a and 6.2.b or are ignored.
Additional parameterlist when using CUMC
Parameter description setting/ remarks
P353 Rated speed in RPM x.xx 1/min (corresponds to 100% setpoint)
P260 Source, torque setpoint 153
P262 Source, supplementary torque setpoint 3005
P265 Source, positive torque limit 3006
P266 Source, negative torque limit 3007
P734.002 Speed act. value 91
P734.006 Torque setpoint from base unit to T300 3) 184
Table 6.2.c Additions to the parameterization when using CUMC.
3) For CUMC, instead of the torque actual value, the actual value of the torque-generating current
Thus, this completes all of the required basic drive converter settings. The setting of the technological
functions is now defined in the next section.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.2.10.2 Parameterization when using the CU2 and CU3
Data from the T300 to the basic drive for VC (CU2), supplements to SC (CU3) refer to Table 6.2.f.

setting
P226 Source, controller adaption kadap 3008 (DPR w8) 1001
P227 Controller adaption, kp - 100.00% 100.00%
before the RFG
before the RFG
P443 Source, main setpoint n* 3002 (DPR w2) 1002
P444 Main setpoint, kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P445 Basic setpoint - 0.0% 0.0%
P486 Source, torque setpoint - 0 0
P487 Torque setpoint, kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P493 Source, positive torque limit Mb+ 3006 (DPR w6) 1001
P494 Positive torque limit kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P499 Source, negative torque limit Mb- 3007 (DPR w7) 1001
P500 Negative torque limit kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P506 Source, supplementary torque/current Madd 3005 (DPR w5) 0
setpoint
P507 Suppl. torque/current setpoint kp - 100.00% 100.00%
P554 Source, OFF1 STW1.0 3001 (DPR w1) 1010
P557 Source, 3 OFF2 STW1.1 1010 (PMU) 1
P561 Source, inverter enable STW1.3 3001 (DPR w1) 1
P562 Source, RFG enable STW1.4 3001 (DPR w1) 1
P563 Source, no RFG stop STW1.5 3001 (DPR w1) 1
P564 Source, setpoint enable STW1.6 3001 (DPR w1) 1
P565 Source 1, acknowledge STW1.7 3001 (DPR w1) 0
P571 Source, clockwise phase sequence STW1.11 3001 (DPR w1) 1
P572 Source, counter-clockwise phase STW1.12 3001 (DPR w1) 1
sequence
P573 Source, raise motorized potentiometer STW1.13 3001 (DPR w1) 1010

Manual
6 Start-up
P574 Source, lower motorized potentiometer STW1.14 3001 (DPR w1) 1010
P575 Source, no fault 1 external 1) STW1.15 3001 (DPR w1) 1
P576 Source, setpoint data set, bit 0 STW2.0 (16) 3004 (DPR w4) 0
P577 Source, setpoint data set, bit 1 STW2.1 (17) 3004 (DPR w4) 0
P578 Source, motor data set , bit 0 STW2.2 (18) 3004 (DPR w4) 0
P579 Source, motor data set, bit 1 STW2.3 (19) 3004 (DPR w4) 0
P582 Source, synchronizing enable STW2.6 (22) 3004 (DPR w4) 0
P583 Source, restart-on-the-fly enable STW2.7 (23) 3004 (DPR w4) 0
P584 Source, droop enable STW2.8 (24) 3004 (DPR w4) 0
P585 Source, controller enable STW2.9 (25) 3004 (DPR w4) 1
P586 Source, no fault 2 external STW2.10 (26) 3004 (DPR w4) 1
P587 Source, master/slave changeover STW2.11 (27) 3004 (DPR w4) 0
P590 Source, basic/reserve setting STW2.14 (30) 3004 (DPR w4) 1005
Data from the basic drive converter to T300 converter for VC, addition for SC see table 6.5a.
P694.001 Source, status word 1 basic drive 968 968

converter
P694.002 Source, speed actual value, basic drive 214 0
converter
P694.003 - 0 0
P694.004 Source, status word 2, basic drive 553 0
converter
P694.005 Source, torque setpoint, basic drive 237 0
converter
P694.006 Source, torque actual value basic drive 007 0
converter
Table 6.2.d Configuration parameter values
Table 6.2.e includes additional parameters which must be checked to ensure that they are correctly set.
Parameter Description Setting

P163 Open-loop/closed-loop control type selection 4 (speed control with tachometer)
P190 Soft start selection 0 (no soft start)
P233 Max. regenerative active power -100 % (-10 % without regenerative
feedback)
P243 Pre-control, closed-loop speed/frequency 0.0 % (no pre-control)
controller
P247 Droop selection 0 (dependent on the speed controller I
component)
P248 Droop factor 0.001 = 0.1% to 0.499 = 49.9%, (generally 2%)
P354 Selection, ground fault test 0 (no ground fault test)

P420 Rated frequency x.xx Hz (corresponds to 100% setpoint)
P455 Suppression frequency 0.00 Hz (no suppression)

Manual
6 Start-up
P456 Suppression bandwidth 0.00 Hz

P457 Minimum frequency 0.00 Hz (inactive)
P462 Ramp-up time 0.1 or minimum possible value
P463 Units, ramp-up time 0 (seconds)
P464 Ramp-down time 0.1 or minimum possible value
P465 Ramp-down time units 0 (seconds)
P466 OFF3 ramp-down time 0.0 sec
P469 Initial rounding-off 0%
P470 Final rounding-off 0%
P485 Rated torque 100.00 % (corr. to 100% setpoint)
P492 Torque limit, positive 100.00 %
P498 Torque limit, negative -100.00 %
P517 Setpoint-actual value difference for stalled motor 5 Hz
P518 Time, setpoint-actual value deviation 3 sec
P520 Time, motor stalled/rotor locked 2 sec
Table 6.2.e Values for additional configuration parameters
1) When setting this parameter, fault F035 (external fault 1) can be output. In this case, the T300
parameterization (fault word generation) should be checked. ( refer to Section 3.2.11)
Additions to the parameterization when using SIMOVERT SC.

Non listed parameters should be set as shown in table 6.2.d and 6.2.e or are ignored.
Additional parameterlist when using SIMOVERT SC (CU3)
Parameter description setting/ remarks
P226 Source, controller adaption Function and parameter not present
P227 Controller adaption KP Function and parameter not present
P420 Rated speed in 1/min Function and parameter not present
P466 OFF3 ramp-down time Function and parameter not present
P469 Initial rounding-off Function and parameter not present
P470 Final rounding-off Function and parameter not present
P517 Setpoint-actual value difference for stalled 1,1*nmax/ Bei Lastverteilung, Abschnitt 3.7 u.
motor. U. höhererer Wert erforderlich
P520 Time, motor stalled/rotor locked Funktion und Parameter nicht vorhanden
P694.002 Speed act. value 219
P694.005 Torque setpoint from base unit to T300 0/ not present, K044 without meaning
Table 6.2.f Additions to the parameterization when using CU3.
Thus, this completes all of the required basic drive converter settings. The setting of the technological
functions is now defined in the next section.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3 Commissioning the technology module
6.3.1 Technological parameters

The following parameter ranges are assigned to the technology module:
d001 to d099 are display parameters,
H101 to H999 are setting parameters.
The technological parameters lie above the parameters of the basic drive converter (P/r000 to P/r999).
6.3.1.1 Setting via the operator control panel and SIMOVIS

(normal case by commissioning)
All of the technological parameters can be read and changed via the basic drive converter operator control
panel. The parameters lie above the r- and p- parameter ranges. They can be reached by leaving the
basic drive converter parameter range using the raise/lower keys. In this case, it is insignificant as to
whether the overflow is towards the top (from r992 to d001) or below (from r001 to H999).
When changing over to the value mode (by depressing the P key), the operator control panel displays the
actual value of the selected parameter. This can now be increased or decreased. However, the change is
only effective after the parameter mode has been reselected (by depressing the P key again). Thus, the
new value is then saved in the EEPROM, and is available even after power failure.
NOTE
INIT parameters, see parameterlist, are only read in when the unit is switched off and on again.
See also chapter 4.1.2.
using SIMOVIS: please refere to Section 6.4
6.3.1.2 Setting via the symbolic monitor (not for normal applications)
The short parameter list, which can be used to determine the STRUC connectors associated with the
particular parameters, is provided in Section 11. In this case, for start-up, a PC with a service program for
the symbolic monitor can be used. This is advantageous due to the flexible access (on the control panel,
the parameter numbers can only be changed with the raise/lower keys).
Further, several values can be simultaneously displayed (only one on the operator control panel), which is
practical for adjustment and calibration procedures. Thus, values can be monitored, and in the meantime,
another adjusted. The new value becomes effective immediately after the input, however is only first
saved in the RAM. Saving is only realized when requested.
Refer to Section 7 for service program applications and for information on the STRUC G function
diagrams
6.3.2 Commissioning the open-loop control

The parameterization of the open-loop control signals is subsequently described. This is sub-divided into
open-loop control signals which must be parameterized (designated with ! in the short parameter list), and
signals, which can be parameterized.
Signals, which are not required for the application, can be supplied with a fixed value. The following
parameterization should generally be made:
Permanent 1 signal
A permanent 1 signal is generated by entering 0001h for the signal source, connector 002, and in the
mask.
Permanent 0 signal
A permanent 0 signal is generated by entering 0000h for the signal source, connector 000 and in the
mask.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3.2.1 Powering-up (!)

The power-up command is selected via H200/H201. In this case, direct power-up is possible or a power-
up sequence (power-up enable request, accoustic signal, delay, time, and then a time-limited power-up
enable during which time the drives can be powered-up).
The power-up sequence is selected via value 1 in parameter H251. If the on command is available, the
drive issues a start request. This is in the control status word, bit 0 (connector 145 mask 0001h) and can
be transferred to the higher-level open-loop control via one of the eight binary outputs or using the
communications. The start requests for all drives are connected there and an accoustic start alarm
initiated. The open-loop control issues a start enable signal to all drives in parallel. This can also be, for
example, read-in via a binary input (parameter H230/231) and allows the drive to be powered-up after the
on command has been issued again.
Tip:
If the drive is to be powered-up and down with only one command, then the on command and no standard
stop commands can be connected to the same source.
6.3.2.2 No standard stop (!)

The standard stop signal switches the main setpoint to 0 and the drive is controlled down to standstill
along the ramp of the triggerable ramp-function generator; the drive is then shutdown. The standard stop
source is specified in parameters H202 and H203. This can either be a pushbutton or a communications
interface.
6.3.2.3 No fast stop (!)

For a fast stop, the setpoint is immediately switched to zero, and the drive is decelerated along the torque
limit. The time, in which the braking torque is to be established, can be set in H729. The drive should
establish the braking current without causing gearbox stressing. If there is a significant amount of play, it
may be necessary to increase the ramp time in H729. The braking torque is controlled as a function of the
speed, and reduced around zero speed so that the drive doesn’t overshoot.
The signal is selected with H206/H207. Generally, the fast stop signal is combined with ÉMERGENCY-
OFF´ or ÉMERGENCY STOP´.
If fast stop is not required, a 1 signal can be permanently entered by setting H206 to 2 and H207 to 0001h.
6.3.2.4 No electrical off (!)

After the basic drive converter parameter P557 has been set to 1010, the 0 key (OFF) on the converter
operator control panel immediately results in a no-torque condition. Such an electrical shutdown can also
be selected via parameter H204/H205.
If electrical off is not required, a permanent 1 signal can be entered by setting H204 to 2 and H205 to
0001h.
6.3.2.5 Inverter enable

In addition to the inverter enable generated from the technology module, an external inverter enable can
be parameterized. Thus, it is possible to inhibit and enable the inverter pulses from an external source.
The inverter enable is parameterized in H208/H209. If no external inverter enable is used, set H208=2 and
H209=1.
6.3.2.6 Setpoint enable

In addition to the setpoint enable, generated from the technology module, an external setpoint enable can
be parameterized. The setpoint enable is set in parameters H214/H215. If no external setpoint enable is
used, set H214=2 and H215=1.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3.2.7 No local operation

The open-loop control automatically switches to local operation, if one of the local operating modes
(inching, fixed setpoints) is entered. This automatic changeover to local setpoints can be inhibited by
setting the control bit to enable local operation.
This enable is entered in parameter H218/H219.
6.3.2.8 Inching 1 / inching 2

The inching function is implemented via parameters
H220/H221 for inching 1 and
H222/H223 for inching 2.
The line speed setpoints are entered at H538 for inching 1 and H539 for inching 2. Using parameter H256
it can be specified as to whether the drive
brakes (H256=1) or
coasts down (H256=0)
when the inching button is released.
6.3.2.9 Checkback signal, group control

If the group control (H251) function was activated, a source for the group control checkback signal must
be specified in parameter H232/H233. The on status must be transferred to the group control via a binary
output.
6.3.2.10 Local operating modes

The local operating modes are binary coded with 3 bits, and have a value range from 0 to 7. The control
bits are selected using the following parameters:
H224/H225 bit 0
H226/H227 bit 1
H228/H229 bit 2
The associated setpoints are entered in parameters H531 to H539.
Tip:
If only a maximum of 3 local operating modes are required, binary coding can be eliminated.
However, all of the fixed setpoints in H531 to H539 must still be parameterized, so that when two control
bits are simultaneously set, a defined status is obtained.
6.3.2.11 External fault

An external fault can be activated via parameters H260/H261. If there is an external fault, then this causes
a drive, which is powered-up, to be shutdown after a time, set in parameter H262.
6.3.2.12 External alarm

The external alarm is set via parameters H246/H247.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3.3 Commissioning the setpoint conditioning
6.3.3.1 Selecting the speed actual value

The speed actual value source, which in most cases, is received from the basic drive converter, is
specified at parameter H156. Thus, 041 is pre-set here (main actual value from the CU). Otherwise, either
one of the T300 tachometer inputs (K067 or K068) or one of the faster analog inputs (K060 to K064) must
be selected.
6.3.3.2 Selecting the line speed setpoint

The drive setpoint can be selected via H500. Adaption is possible using H501(gain) and H502 (offset).
6.3.3.3 Setting the central ramp-function generator

For a multi-motor drive (sectional drive), the machine ramp-function generator is only used for the master
drive. The line speed setpoint and acceleration for the complete machine is generated here. The setpoint
is transferred to the individual drives via the peer-to-peer coupling.
Parameters H513 to H520 are available to implement a central ramp-function generator. The ramp-
function generator receives the setpoint, selected via H500, its ramp-up and ramp-down time from H515
or H516, the rounding-off times from H517 and H518, and the upper- and lower limits are set at H519 and
H520. The ramp-function generator output can be selected at connector K104 and at d040.
If the machine ramp-function generator is to be effective for the drive and the setpoint cascade, H513
must be changed-over to 1.
The ramp-function generator also provides an acceleration signal. This is available at K105 and can be
normalized via H521. The acceleration signal is 100% if the ramp-up time is entered there. The lower of
the two values should be entered for different times for ramp-up/ramp-down.
IMPORTANT:
This parameter may not be changed after the inertia compensation has been set, even if the ramp-up and
ramp-down times were subsequently modified.
6.3.3.4 Ratio
A ratio setpoint source is selected using parameter H506. It can also be adapted with a factor (H507) as
well as an offset (H508). The result is stored in connector K102 and can be monitored at d047.
If the ratio setpoint setting range is not sufficient (as, e.g., as stretch would require values greater than
200%), then instead of a factor, a quotient can be selected, by setting H522 to 1. By dividing by values
lower than 50%, factors greater than 2 can be implemented. The thus corrected main setpoint can be
displayed in d048.
6.3.3.5 Slack take-up/slack-off

The main setpoint can be temporarily increased or decreased using binary commands. This is required in
order to remove sag from the material web (slack take-up) or to reduce excessive tension (slack-off).
The source for slack take-up is defined with parameters H524/H525, the supplementary setpoint in H526.
Analog to this, slack-off is defined in parameters H527/H528 and H529.
Further, H523 can be used to define whether the slack take-up value is dependent on the line speed.
Supplementary setpoint looping is entered in H530.
Tip:
If two different slack take-up values are required, then the slack-off value can be entered as positive
value.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3.3.6 Supplementary setpoint

A supplementary setpoint can be enabled via parameter H503, adapted via H504, and provided with an
offset via H505.
6.3.3.7 Local setpoints

The local setpoints are entered in parameters H531 to H539. The local setpoint is selected according to
the operating mode coding.
An exception in this case, is local operating mode 4; it allows a variable local setpoint (analog,
communications etc.) to be entered via parameter H534.
The local setpoints are fed through a dedicated ramp-function generator, whose ramp-up time is set in
H540 and ramp-down time in H541.
6.3.3.8 Triggerable ramp-function generator

The triggerable ramp-function generator is used to bring the drive up to the machine line speed. The
ramp-up time (accelerating time) is set in H540 and the ramp-down time (decelerating time) in H541.
6.3.3.9 Droop
The droop value is specified in the basic drive converter, parameter CUVC, CUMC: P246; CU2: P248.
The droop is enabled via parameters H511/H512. The source for the droop compensation is selected via
parameter H509, which generally is the integral component of the main drive speed controller. The
compensation factor is entered in parameter H510, which, for similar drives should correspond to
approximately the set droop.
6.3.3.10 Diameter/gearbox correction

For changing roll diameters or different gearbox stages, it is necessary to apply a correction in the speed
setpoint / speed actual value channel. The correction factor is selected with H157. This factor is generally
1 (100%). The speed actual value, at rated line speed, and for a minimum roll diameter dmin should be
calibrated for 100%. The following convention is implemented for a gearbox changeover: For the low
gearbox stage (defined as the nominal ratio), the tachometer is calibrated for 100% at the rated machine
speed. The speed actual value must be divided by the ratio of the gearbox factors. The correction factor is
now 100%*iact/irated. If both occur, the correction factor is 100%*(dact/dmin)*(iact/irated). The speed
actual value is obtained if the speed is multiplied by the diameter/gearbox.
6.3.3.11 Load distribution

The load distribution function is activated using parameters H544/H545.
When load distribution is selected, the bias, stored in H546, is entered into the speed controller, and the
torque limit is ramped to the torque setpoint from the reference drive along the ramp, set in H728.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3.3.12 Friction
Friction compensation can be set for machine group drives. This characteristic is dependent on the line
speed and can be freely parameterized. The associated friction torque can be defined using parameters
H700-H711 using 6 line speed points.
The friction characteristic is determined by approaching various line speeds in the closed-loop speed
controlled mode, and after stabilization, the steady-state torque is determined using parameter r007 in the
basic drive converter. A characteristic can now be plotted. It is also possible to switch the friction torque
immediately as supplementary torque input (H892 to 154) and to adjust the speed controller output (r237)
to zero at the set line speed points by changing the particular friction value.
Note:
If the drive is reversed, the friction torques should also be determined for the negative line speeds. These
must be entered with the correct sign. The calculated friction torque is available as connector 154 and can
be monitored at d065.
6.3.3.13 Inertia compensation

In order to adjust the accelerating torque, the friction characteristic must already be plotted. Friction and
acceleration are switched-in as supplementary torque signal (H892 to 151). The acceleration value must
first be generated. This can be directly selected via H712. Normally, the acceleration value of the central
ramp-function generator is selected. If an acceleration value is not available, a line speed signal can be
selected using H712 which is then differentiated. H713 is entered as reference time (=shortest ramp-up
time) and the differentiated signal is selected with H714=1.
For fixed drive moments of inertia, a fixed value is entered (H717, e.g. to three positions and the
associated fixed value H166 to 10%). To determine adaption factor H718, the machine is accelerated via
the central ramp-function generator. The drive torque is read-out at parameter r007 and the machine
acceleration at d067.
The following is valid for adaption factor H718:
r007
H718 = x 100%
d067
After H718 has been set, it must again be checked as to whether the factor is correct by monitoring the
speed controller output ramp-up in r237(CU2); K155 (CUVC,CUMC) (I component). During the complete
ramp-up phase, this must have a value of about 0. If this is not the case, H718 must be re-adjusted.
6.3.3.14 Braking characteristic

If fast stop is activated, the control switches over to the braking characteristic. The braking torque can be
read-out at d072, which would be effective for braking at a specific drive line speed. The braking torque is
defined with H726. Starting at a line speed, defined using H726, the braking torque is linearly decreased to
zero (H725). The drive should come to a standstill without overshooting. If this is not the case, H724 can
be changed. Further, the window width for the line speed zero signal (H158) can be increased so that the
drive shuts down faster.
6.3.4 Start-up, technological control

The technological control can be used for many applications, e.g. web tension control with measuring
transducer or dancer roll, pressure and flow controls.
6.3.4.1 Enabling/disabling the technological control
The technological control can be enabled/disabled from two sources. It is enabled in parameters
H404/H405 and H406/H407. It is disabled in parameters H408/H409 and H410/H411.
Tip:
As second source to disable the technological controller, the checkback signal „drive powered-down“
should be used, so that the technological control can only operate with the drive powered-up.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3.4.2 Technological actual value selection

The technological actual value is selected in H402 and can be adapted via H403. If the actual value has
an offset, this can be compensated by a fixed value in H430. The fixed offset is enabled for H431=1.
The offset can possibly change over time, e.g. due to aging, so that an internal offset compensation can
also be used. In this case, a signal is parameterized in H428/H429, which activates an automatic offset
compensation. The actual offset is determined and stored as long as the signal is available. H431 must be
set to 0 for the automatic offset compensation.
Tip:
The automatic offset compensation should be controlled from a key-actuated switch, so that the
conditions to calibrate the offset can be checked (no material web in the machine etc.).
6.3.4.3 Technological setpoint selection

The technological setpoint is selected using parameter H400 and can be adapted with H401 and provided
with an offset via H422.
6.3.4.4 Closed-loop control parameters

The technological controller is a PID controller. Two parameter sets can be defined. The assignment is
shown in the following table:
Parameter set 1 Parameter set 2 Display in
Control signal 0 1 K136.1
Actual value smoothing H414 H415 d030
Proportional gain H416 H417 d031
Integral action time H418 H419 d032
Derivative action time H420 H421 d033
The source to changeover the parameter set is defined in parameters H412/H413.
6.3.4.5 Controller limits

The controller limits are entered in parameters H436/H437 for the positive limit and in H438/H439 for the
negative limit.
Tip:
If a material web has been thread, it is possible to keep the technological controller enabled and only to
control the controller limits. Thus, for example, for closed-loop tension control, the lower limit is always
enabled in order to prevent excessive tension when threading the material web. Under normal operating
conditions, the upper controller limit is also enabled.
NOTE
After commissioning/start-up has been completed, enter all of the modified/changed parameters into the
parameter list in Section 9. Always have access to this parameter list as well as the software version
code (d002) for questions at a later date.
6.3.4.6 Factory settings

See parameter H999.

Manual
6 Start-up

Preconditions:
settings.
procedure SIMOVIS also generates a file (by upreading), which is interpreted during offline mode to be the
factory setting of a technology type. This file is used for example:
be printed.
registered.

Manual
6 Start-up
Proceed as follows:
green colour.
5. Disconnect other drives (if available) to reduce the time required for the „learning
process“.


Manual
6 Start-up


tab.
Empirical values:
Note 2: Disconnect other drives (if available) to reduce the time required for the „learning process“.

Manual
6 Start-up

Manual
7.1 STRUC G graphics
The structure of a STRUC G function diagram is shown in Fig. 7.1.
8...FB-position 7...columns
columns 1- 17 A-F (unused)
5...Source info.
(border strip) 5...Destination information
(border strip)
4...Field for function
8...FB-position 7...lines
lines 1-51 A-F (unused)
3...Copyright 6...Comments
field
2...STRUC documentation zone 1...Text field
Fig.. 7.1 STRUC G function diagram
Explanation:
1 Text field
The text field is structured according to DIN 6771, Part 5.
2 STRUC documentation line
Information regarding the version, libraries and configuring levels are entered here.
3 Copyright and additional documentation information
4 Character field for function blocks
This is the actual function diagram. The function blocks are located in this field, arranged using position
numbers (refer to Point 8 below), and displayed with the connections and constants. The sheet
comments are also placed here.
5 Source- and destination information
Function package connections ($ signals) with source- and destination-function package names are
specified in this field where the system ID, page number and column number are specified. Further,
cross-references for communication- and hardware assignments are also provided here.
6 Comments field
Plain text comments, blocks, connectors or the signals on the border panel are entered here.
Connector attributes are also entered (,MIN=...,MAX=...,SCAL=..., etc.).
7 Sheet lines and columns
The sheet is sub-divided into 8 columns (1-8), which is taken into account when generating cross-
references. The lines (vertically, A-F) are not used.
8 FB position lines and columns
as character field, it has 17 columns and 51 lines. These allow function blocks to be positioned.

Manual
7.1.2 Block structure

There is a graphic function symbol for every function block (FB), which is used to document the FB and
the user-specific features. In addition to the input- and output signal connections, there are also signal
values specified and some of the connector attributes, which are significant for the sequence and
embedding the function block in the function package (FP).
A function block with STRUC G is illustrated in Fig. 7.2.
Function block Processing Sampling time
name sequence
Marking - for SW120 40T4
block comments Line number
in the listing
Ref. point for * NSW 127
FB positioning Connector
name
X1 N2 N2 Y
* X2 Connector
Marking - for type
connector commento
I B1
Marking - for
type changeover
Function
symbol
Fig. 7.2 STRUC G function block (example)
7.1.3 STRUC connectors

The STRUC connectors are used to supply the FB with input information and output the results to other
function blocks or peripheral boards.
The connectors are identified in the FB mask via the connector name and connector type.
A connector is supplied with a signal connection or constant, and optionally, also, with a signal ID,
attributes and comment. As not all of this information can be located in the graphics section, some
information is located in the comments field below the graphic field. A star at the connector indicates that
this information is available.
7.1.4 Cross-references
Generally, connections between FBs are shown as a line. If space is restricted, a letter (A-Z) is assigned
so that a connection can be identified. The line is continued at another position on the same sheet
(connection on the sheet).
For connections over several sheets (global connections), within the same FP, the block name, connector
name, sheet number and sheet column number are specified as source/destination information. If there is
insufficient space in the graphics field, or if there are several cross-references, then the entry is made in
the border panel (source/destination information field):
B420.QS / 3.1 ....FB name.connector name/sheet number.sheet column number
External connections (from one FP to another) are completely reference with their symbolic names ($
name) in the source/destination information field. Further, the following are also specified: The bus data
transport sampling time with bus access time, source/destination processor(s), source/destination function
package(s) with system IDs as well as sheet- and sheet column number(s):
$NREG PN T2C .... Signal name, processor-local access, bus access and data transport
time
=.W30/3.1 .... System ID/sheet number.sheet column number

Manual
7.2 Symbolic monitor

7.2.1 Prerequisites
The standard software package includes a monitor program which allows all of the technological
parameters, and each connector of all the function blocks to be accessed. It uses the technology board
serial interface.
A suitable connecting cable is illustrated in the following diagram. Plug-in screw terminals (mini modicon“
type) are used to establish the connection at the T300.
PC PG T300
COM1:/COM2: COM2: RS232 -X132
3 2 1
TxD 2 RxD
RxD 2 3 TxD
5 7 3
M 4
5
A conventional computer or a programming unit (PG) can be used as terminal. The connection is
established via the drive converter serial interface. The specified assignment can be used for a PC-AT,
otherwise it can be taken from the Manual.
The so-called IBS (start-up) program (PCP/M on the PG730/750 or with emulator under DOS),
Telemaster Service (DOS) or SIMOVIS SIMADYN Service (DOS) are suitable terminal programs.
7.2.2 Operator control

Every connector can be addressed via a so-called path name. This path name consists of the processor
number (in this case, always 1), the function package names, function block names and connector
names:
#FP-fpname.fbname.conname
As an example, the following path name belongs to connector QS of block BI230 in the INPUT function
package:
1FP-INPUT.BI230.QS
The pathname is also specified for every technological parameter, in the parameter list.

Manual
7.3 SIMADYN D value ranges and normalization

SIMADYN D connector types are only interesting, if the connector is accessed via the symbolic monitor.
If the parameter is accessed via a communications board, USS protocol or the drive converter operator
control panel, then the MASTER DRIVE parameter types are valid.
7.3.1 Proportional types

HEX format Standard format Integer format Ordinal format E format
V2 N2 I2 O2 E2
Significance 16-bit word % quantity Integer numbers Integer number, Extended signal
only positive
Value range 0000h...FFFFh -200%...199.99% -32768...32767 0...32767 -256.00...255.99
Resolution 0001h 0.0061% 1 1 0.0078125
V2 quantities are mainly masks to suppress or enable individual signals of a status word. The N2 format is
used for process quantities such as setpoints and actual valuess. I2 and O2 are integer quantities, such
as, for example, rated speeds and encoder pulse numbers, shifts by binary positions etc. The E2 quantity
is used exclusively for gains.
7.3.2 Time-dependent types

Time-dependent parameters are fractions or multiples of the sampling time. The 5 time levels T1, T2, T3,
T4 and T5 of the system define the ranges of the time-dependent parameters; they cannot be changed
and are permanently assigned the following values:

T1 5.0 [ms]
T2 20.0 [ms]
T3 40.0 [ms]
T4 160.0 [ms]
T5 320.0 [ms]
7.3.2.1 Time-proportional types

Time-proportional types implement times or time factors, which are proportional to the hexadecimal value
or the standardized quantity. However, negative values are not permissible here. A negative value entry is
rejected.
The assignment of the types is shown in the following table; the hex and standard quantity N2 types are
also included for a better understanding:
HEX format Standard format D format T format

V2 N2 D2 T2
0000h 0.0000% 0.000000xTA 0xTA
0001h 0.0061% 0.000061xTA 1xTA
0002h 0.0122% 0.000122xTA 2xTA
... ... ... ...
4000h 100.0000% 1.000000xTA 16384xTA
... ... ... ...
7FFFh 199.9939% 1.999939xTA 32767xTA

Manual
7.3.2.2 Time-reciprocal type

The reciprocal type is used when entering time constants for filters (PT1) or integration times, ramp-up
and ramp-down times etc. A special feature worth noting is that high values at the connector result in low
times and vice versa:
HEX format Standard format Reciprocal format
V2 N2 R2
0000h 0.0000% 1.000000xTA
0001h 0.0061% 16384xTA
0002h 0.0122% 8192xTA
... ... ...
3FFEh 99.9878% 1.000122xTA
3FFFh 99.9939% 1.000061xTA
4000h 100.0000% 1.000000xTA
... ... ...
7FFFh 199.9939% 1.999939xTA
When entered via the operator control panel, a time is always entered. This is also signaled back.
Knowledge regarding the internal notation is not necessary, but explains the different stages/levels for the
R2 type.

Manual

Manual
8 Program example
8 Program example
The use of the module in a practical software package is now illustrated.
8.1 System configuration

In the following example, the following configuration is assumed:
The drive is part of a multi-motor (sectional) drive. It has a closed-loop tension control. An automation
system is available for monitoring and visualization, which is connected to the drives via PROFIBUS.
The setpoint cascade is implemented using the peer-to-peer couplings of the technology board.
The control signals are directly wired from the control desk to the technology board.
The configuration is illustrated on page 1 of the program example. Thus, the task can be sub-divided into
three areas:
- Signal transfer with the automation system
- Peer-to-peer coupling to adjacent drives and
- Signals directly connected to the technology board
8.2 Parameterization
8.2.1 Signal transfer with the automation system
The stretch, web tension reference value and tension control enable/disable are to be input from the
automation system.
The actual line speed, torque actual value and web tension action value are signaled back from the drive
for visualization purposes.
The following signals are output from the automation system to the drive:
Ratio (stretch)
The stretch is entered in the range from -5% to +5% as word 4 in the PROFIBUS telegram.
Parameterization:
H506=023 Receive word 4 (select word 2) from the CB is the source for the ratio reference
value.
Web tension reference value

The web tension reference value is entered in the range from 0% to 100% (maximum tension) in word 5 of
the PROFIBUS telegram.
Parameterization:
H400=024 Receive word 5 (select word 3) from the CB is the source for the web tension
reference value.

Manual
8 Program example
Enabling/disabling the web tension control

The web tension control should be enabled via bit 0 in receive word 6 of the CB and disabled via bit 1.
Parameterization:
H404=025 Receive word 6 is the source for enabling the technological controller
(select word 4) from CB
H405=0001h Selecting bit 0
H408=025 Receive word 6 (select word 4) from CB is the source to disable the technological
controller
H409=0002h Selecting bit 1
The following signals are sent from the drive to the automation system:
Line speed actual value
The line speed actual value is signaled back in word 2 of the PROFIBUS telegram for visualization
Parameterization:
H905=076 K076 (=internal line speed actual value) is the source for send word 1 at CB
Torque actual value

The torque actual value is transferred via word 3 of the PROFIBUS telegram.
Parameterization:
H906=045 K045 (= torque actual value from CU) is the source for send word 3 at CB
Web tension actual value

The web tension actual value is transferred in word 4 of the PROFIBUS telegram.
H907=131 K131 (=technological actual value after offset compensation and actual value
smoothing) is the source for send word 4 at CB
Note:
Nothing changes regarding the telegram structure and thus the signal connections, if a SCB1 or SCB2
communications board with USS protocol is connected instead of a CB1 communications board with
PROFIBUS DP.
8.2.2 Peer-to-peer coupling to the adjacent drives

The setpoint cascade is established using the peer-to-peer coupling. The folllowing data transfer is to be
realized:
8.2.3 Receiving, peer-to-peer

The line speed setpoint is to be transferred from the previous drive via word 1 and the acceleration value
of the central acceleration ramp, via word 2.
Parameterization:
H500=030 Receive word 1 from the peer-to-peer is the source for the main setpoint
H712=031 Receive word 2 from the peer-to-peer is the source for the acceleration value
8.2.4 Sending, peer-to-peer

The line speed setpoint is to be transferred to the next drive in word 1 and the acceleration value
in word 2.
Parameterization:
H879=107 The line speed setpoint is the source for send word 1, peer-to-peer coupling
H881=031 The acceleration value, which was also received, is the source for send word 2,
peer-to-peer coupling

Manual
8 Program example
8.2.5 Signals directly connected to the technology board

The following signals are connected to the technology board via the SE300 interface board:
Input signals:
Actual web tension
The web tension actual value is to be read-in via the fast analog input 1
The voltage range of the tension measuring transducer : 0...+10V.
Parameterization:
H402=060 Analog input 1 is the source for the technological actual value (tension actual
value)
Powering-up the drive

The drive is to be powered-up via binary input 1.
Parameterization:
H200=069 A binary input is the source to power-up
H201=0001h Selecting binary input 1
Powering-down the drive

The drive is to be powered-down via binary input 2 using an NC contact. Power-down should be realized
via the stop command.
Parameterization:
H202=069 A binary input is the source to power-down
No fast stop
The fast stop is connected at binary input 3, and is implemented using an NC contact.
Parameterization:
H206=069 A binary input is the source for fast stop.
Inching 1
The inching button is connected to binary input 4.
Parameterization:
H220=069 A binary input is the source for inching 1
H538=2% Inching setpoint

Manual
8 Program example
Crawl and reverse crawl

The crawl and reverse crawl functions are implemented using an operating mode selector switch. It is a
switch with 3 positions.
Position 1: No crawl setpoint selected. The drive can run at the production speed.
Position 2: Crawl forwards
Position 3: Crawl backwards.
Parameterization: (refer to function diagram B4)
H224=069 A binary input is the source for operating mode, bit 0 (in this case, crawl forwards)
H531=5% Fixed setpoint when crawl is selected
H226=069 A binary input is the source for operating mode, bit 1 (in this case, crawl
backwards)
H532=-5% Fixed setpoint when crawl backwards is selected
Slack take-up
Parameterization:
H524=069 A binary input is the source for slack take-up
H520=2% Supplementary setpoint for slack take-up.
Output signals:
Two lamps for status display are mounted in the control desk, which are controlled from the technology
board.
Signaling lamp for operation

The signaling lamp should be lit when the drive is powered-up.
Parameterization:
H833=146 The control status word is the source for binary output 1
H834=0040h Selecting bit 6 (drive powered-up)
Signaling lamp for a fault condition

This signaling lamp should be lit if the drive is faulted.
Parameterization:
H835=146 The control status word is the source for binary output 2
H836=1000h Selecting bit 12 (drive faulted)
Torque actual value display

A load display instrument is to be controlled. In this case, 10 V should correspond to 100% of the rated
motor torque.
Parameterization:
H850=045 The torque actual value from the CU is the source for analog output 1
8.3 Function diagram

The function diagrams of the parameterization example include a block diagram, where the drive machine
is shown. This is followed by the hardware diagrams, which show the connection of the local operator
control elements. Parameterization is explained using the function diagrams from Section 3.2.

Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Automation system
PROFIBUS
A A
CB CB CB
Setpoints Setpoints
B Peer to peer Peer to peer B
T300 T300 T300

SE300 SE300 SE300
C C

Load
M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
D D
On Drive on
Off Drive
faulted
Inching Crawl
Crawl backwards
Slack take-up
E E
Web tension measurement
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Typical configuration =

+
Person Reh / Michaelis
Sectional drive Block diagram Sheet 1+
Chk. BSP_1_5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
230V~
A A
Operating mode
1=Standard operation
Fast 2=Crawl
- 24V + stop 3=Backwards crawl.
On Stop Inching Slack take-up
B -S1 -S2 -S3 -S4 -S5 B

1 2 3
601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 630
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 P24 M BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 P24 M
ext. ext. ext. ext.
C
# Binary inputs C
# Binary outputs
P24 M
BQ1 BQ2 BQ3 BQ4 BQ5 BQ6 BQ7 BQ8 ext. ext.
631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 SE300
D D
-H1 -H2
E E
Run Fault
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Typical configuring =

Sectional drive Binary inputs
Chk.
Binary outputs BSP_1_5 Sheet 2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Web tension measurement
A A
B B
501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 511 512 513 514 515 516
+ AI1 - + AI2 - + AI3 - + AI4 - + AI5 - + AI6 - + AI7 -
U Analog inputs
C C
#
# Analog outputs
U
+ AQ1 GND + AQ2 GND + AQ3 GND + AQ4 GND
509 510 519 520 521 522 523 524 SE300
D D
Load display
E E
F F

Sectional drive Analog inputs
Chk.
Analog outputs BSP_1_5 Sheet 3+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
C C
531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 540
1A+ GND 1B+ GND SYN GND CSYN GND GND P15 1A+ GND 1B+ GND SYN GND CSYN GND GND P15
ext. ext. ext. ext.
Track1A Track 1B Synchronizing Rough- Track 1A Track 1B Synchronizing Rough
D pulse pulse pulse pulse D
Pulse encoderr 1 Pulse encoder 2

# #
E E
F F

+
Person Reh / Michaelis
Chk. Sectional drive Pulse encoder Sheet 4+
BSP_1_5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIBUS-DP
A On Off Fast Inching Crawl Backwards Slack A
Ten. Techn. stop crawl take-up

Ratio set- cntrl.
pt. ON V-act M act Ten. act
601 602 603 604 606 607 611
CB [A3.4] [A3.5] [A4.1] SE300

[C1]
S Technological 621
Drive-related Run
501 E controller Local setpoint input
[A4.8]
control [B1] [B2] [B1] [B4]
B Tension 3 622 B
actual 502 0 Fault
value 0 [C2] 609
M act
[A5.8]
Load
K112 torque
+ + +
V-set x + 610
P [D1.8] [D2.3]
(from the [D1.2] Triggerable
E
previous ramp-function generator
[A4.3] E [D2.5]
drive) R K107
P V set (to the
C E next C
K150
dV/dt x E dV/dt drive)
Braking characteristic R
[E1.3]
[A3.5]
[A1.4] [A1.4] V-ist
[A1.6] M act n act
[A1.6] Suppl.
T300 n set M set B+ B- Torque limits [A1.6]
CUVC,CUMC
D Control words Torque D
CU2 +
1 and 2 control
MASTER DRIVE VC Speed

controller
E E
Tension transducer
Standard multi-motor drive software package, typical configuration, signal flow diagram
F F

Chk. Sectional drive Overview, signal paths BSP_1_5 Sheet 5-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 15 13 11 9 A
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
Send to CU 6 4 2 0
Receive from CU
CU -X137 Receive words d092 Send words
[A2.1]
DUAL 1 Status word 1 from CU K040 [A2.8] K143
1
-X137 CU
PORT
RAM Speed actual value from CU
CU -> TB
2 K041 [A8.1] DUAL
B PORT B
Select word 0 from CU H888 RAM
3 K042 TB -> CU
[A2.1] d093
4 K043 Speed setpoint to CU
[D2.8] K112 H889 2
Torque setpoint from CU
5 K044 <1>
[B5.1] [E2.7]
Torque actual value from CU
6 K045 M-act H890 3
7 Select word 1 from CU

K046 [A3.4] d094
H891 Control word 2 to CU
[A2.8] K144
8 Select word 2 from CU
K047 [A5.4] d095
4
C Select word 3 from CU H892 Supplementary torque setpoint to CU C

9 K048 [E1.8] K151 5
10 K049 Positive torque limit to CU
[E2.8] K152 H893 6
11 K050 d097
Select word 6 from CU H894 Negative torque limit to CU
12 K051 [E2.8] K153 7
13 K052 Factor, KP adaption to CU

[A8.3] K162 H895 8
D
14 K053 D
15 K054 H896 9
16 K055
H897 10
Status receive from CU [A8.5] H898 11

[B5.1]
H899 12
Torque direction
0=positive
E 1=negative E
[D2.6] H900 13
H101 [E2.3]
Hysteresis H901 14
CU3
<1> Note:
Not used with SIMOVERT SC H902 15
Note: H903 16
The receive- and send words must be connected to the basic
F drive converter corresponding to Section 6.2.10 [A8.5]
F
Status, send to CU [B5.1]
Date 19.8.96 Communications with the =
+
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package basic drive converter (CU)
Chk FP_A1_6 Sheet A1+
Status Änderung Sectional drive Receive/send telegram Function diagram A1
Date Name Std. Bl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status word 1 from CU Ready to power-up from CU Drive on Not OFF 1

[A1.3] 0 [B1.8] 0
Ready from CU Not OFF 2
1 1 Control word 1
A
Inverter enabled from CU Not OFF 3
K143 [A1.5] A
2 [B3.3] [B5.1] 1 2
Fault from CU Inverter enable D/#
3 [B1.4] [B6.1] [B3.4] 3
D/#
No electrical off (OFF2) from CU Ramp-function generator enable
4 4
No fast stop (OFF3) from CU Ramp-function generator start
5 5
Switch-on inhibit from CU Setpoint enable
6 [B3.8] 6
Alarm from CU Acknowledge fault
B
7 MSK 7
B
Setpoint-actual value deviation from CU Inching 1 on
8 0 8
0 9
PZD control requested from CU H216 H217 Control from PLC
9 1 10
Com. freq. reached fromCU Clockwise phase sequence
10 1 11
Undervoltage from CU Counter-clockwise phase seq.
11 1 12
Main contactor energized from CU Raise motorized potentiometer
12 0 13
Ramp-function generator active from CU Lower motorized potentiometer
13 0 14
C Clockwise phase sequence from CU No fault, external 1 C
14 [B5.8] 15
Kinetic buffering active from CU (only VC)
15
Funktion-/Setpoint channel, data set bit 0
MSK 0
Status word 2 from CU Restart-on-the-fly/magnetization active
[A1.3] 0 [B3.3]
D/# Control word 2
Synchronism reached (only VC)
K144 [A1.5]
1 H234 H235
No overspeed H236 H237 Funktion-/Setpoint channel, data set bit 1

2 1
D D/# External fault 1 H238 H239 Motor data set, bit 0 (only VC) D
3 [B5.6] 2
External fault 2 H240 H241 Motor data set, bit 1 (only VC)
4 3
Alarm, external H242 H243 Fixed setpoint selection, bit 0
5 4
Alarm, I2t converter H244 H245 Fixed setpoint selection bit 1
6 5
Fault, overtemperature, CONV Enable synchronization
7 0 6
Alarm, overtemperature, CONV Enable restart-on-the-flay
8 1 7
Alarm, overtemperature, motor Enable droop
E 9 [D2.5] 8 E
Fault, overtemperature motor Enable speed control
10 [B3.8] 9
No fault external 2
11 1 10
Motor stalled/rotor locked Slave drive
12 0 11
Bypass contactor on from CU Alarm 1, external
13 [B6.8] 12
Fault, synchronization from CU (only VC) No alarm 2 external
14 1 13
F Pre-charging active from CU Bico data set / Reserve setting F
15 0 14
0 15
Date 1.12.94 =
+
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Status words from the basic conv.
Chk.
Sectional drive Control words to the basic conv. FP_A1_6 Function diagram A2 Sheet A2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Receive from CB Send to CB

A Main control word from CB A
2 K021
Control word 2 from CB -X135
-X135
3 K022
H904
K023 Ratio [D1.1] CB
CB
K024 Ten. set [C1.4] V-act H905 076 Select word 2 to CB
2
Select word 4 from CB [A8.5]
6 K025 Contr. w. [C1.1]
Select word 5 from CB M act H906 045 Select word 3 to CB
3
B 7 K026 B
[A1.4]
K027 Ten. act H907 131 Selec word 4 to CB
4
K028 [C2.4]
Receive from CB 5
10 K029
Receive from CB ok 6
[A8.5]
[B5.1]
7
C C
8

9

10
Send to CB ok
D Receive from peer-to-peer Send to peer-to-peer [A8.5] D
[B5.1]
-X134 -X134
word 1 from PP
1 +Rx
1 K030 V-set [D1.1] d087 +Tx
3
TB -Rx
2 word 2 from PP
K031 Accel. [E1.1] V set Select word 1 to peer
1 -Tx
TB
2 4
3 word 3 from PP
K032 [D1.8]
4 word 4 from PP
K033 H879 107 H880
word 5 from PP d088

5 K034
E
H881 31 H882 Select word 2 to peer
2 E
6 K035 d089
H883 H884 Select word 3 to peer
7 K036 3
d090
8 K037 Slect word 4 to peer
H885 H886
4
9 K038 d091 Send to peer ok.
No. of receive LT
Note: H887 Select word 5 to peer
H198 10 K039 H197 to H199 are INIT 5 [A8.5]
words
Receive from peer ok [A8.5]
parameters, see 4.1.2 Number of send words H199 LT
F BDR BDR F
[B5.1]
Baud rate H197
Date 19.8.96 =
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Comm. with the COM-BOARD +
Chk.
Sectional drive Peer-to-peer coupling FP_A1_6 Function diagram A3
Sheet A3+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SE300 -X136
Binary inputs [B1.1] -X136 SE300
A Bit inversion [B2.1] A

On
1 Binary input 1 d010 Bit inversion
601 0
=1 [B4.1]
Stop D/#
K069 d085 Run
2 Binary input 2 Binary inputs [D1.3] =1 Binary output 1 21
602 1 MSK 0 0 621
Fast stop H102 #/D
3 Binary input 3 D/#
603 2
Inching
H833 146 H834 0040 H849
4 Binary input 4 Status word Fault

604 3
B control H835 146 H836 1000
622 B
605 5 Binary input 5
4
[A7.2] [B6.4]
Crawl 2 2 623
6 Binary input 6
H839 H840
Backwards crawl 3 3 624
7 Binary input 7
H841 H842 4 625
4
8 Binary input 8
608 7
C 5 5 626 C
609 9 P24 external
24V + 6 6 627
-
610 10 M24 external
7 7 628
11 Binary input 9
611 8 -
+
P24 external 29
627
12 Binary input 10 24V
612 9
D M24 external 30 D
628
Binary input 11
15 13 11 9
13 14 12 10 8
613 10
7 5 3 1
14 Binary input 12 6 4 2 0
614 11
15 Binary input 13
615 12
16 Binary input 14
616 13
E E
17 Binary input 15
617 14
18 Binary input 16
618 15
Note:
19 P24 external All P24 and all M24 are intern-
619
24V + ally connected with one another
- M24 external
630 20
F F
Date 1.12.94 =
+
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Binary inputs
Status. Change Date Name Std. Sectional drive Binary outputs Function diagram A4 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SE300 -X131 -X131 SE300
A
Tension actual value Load (M act) A
-10V...+10V
1 Input 1 d003 [A1.4] -10V...+10V
501 U
+
K060 Offset Load
502 # + Ten. act H853 509
H851 H852 U
H121
H122
H123
[C1.4] H850 045 Gain
H854
GND 510
3 Input 2 d004
503 U
+
B
4 Reference
K061 B
504 # +
H125
H124 H126 Offset
H858
# Output 2 17
519
H856 H857 U
5 Input 3 d005 Gain
505 U H855
+
6 Reference
K062 H859
506 # +
GND 520
H128
H127 H129
C C
7 Input 4 d006
507 U
+
K063 Offset
508 # +
H863 521
H861 H862 U
H131 H860 Gain
H130 H132 H564
GND 522
11 Input 5 d007
511 U
+
D
12 Reference
K064 D
512 # +
H134
H133 H135 Offset
H868
# Output 4 20 523
H866 H867 U
13 Input 6 d008 Gain
513 U H865
+
14 Reference
K065 H869
514 # +
GND 524
H137
E
H136 H138 E
15 Input 7 d009
515 U
+
16 Reference
K066
516 # +
H140
H139 H141
Note: Note:
All analog inputs are already smoothed per hardware with 0.5 ms. The diff. All ground connections
F inputs must be connected acc. to Sect. 3.1.1.6 are internally connected F
Date 1.12.94 =
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Analog inputs +
Chk.
Sectional drive Analog outputs FP_A1_6 Function diagram A5 Sheet A5+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal PIN T300

SE300 -X131 d013
21 Track 1A+ Pulse encoder input 1 Speed actual value 1 Speed actual valuet 1
531 K067
A A
532 22 GND
533 23 Track 1B+ H154
# d016
534 24 GND Rated speed H143
25 SYN 1+
K074
535 [F4.7]
Operating mode H690
26 GND pulse evaluation MODE
536
H160
B Synchronizing signal 1 Gearbox/ B
100%
correction
time
540 30 P15 H146 H147
H161
Hold length measurement Length 1 > limit value [A8.5]
Limit value Length 1 < limit value
MSK HOLD [A8.5]
Note:
H142 to H145 and H690 and H691
C are INIT parameters, see 4.1.2 H148 H149 H162 C
d014
541 31 Track 2A+ Pulse encoder input 2 Speed actual value 2 Speed actual value 2 K068
542 32 GND
543 33 Track 2B+ H155
D # d017
D
544 34 GND Nenndrehzahl H145
35 SYN 1+
K075
545 [F4.7]
Betriebsart H691
Impulsauswertung MODE
546 36 GND
H163
Synchronizing signal 2 Gearbox/
100%
correction

time
E 40 P15 E
540 H150 H151
H164
Hold length measurement Length 2 >limit value [A8.5]
Limit value Length 2 <limit value
Note: MSK HOLD [A8.5]
All GNDs are int-

ernally connected H165
H152 H153
Note:
A pulse encoder with an external power supply must be used if 2 pulse encoders are connected.
Date 19.8.96 =
Person Reh / Michaelis Standard software package Pulse encoder inputs +
Chk.
Sectional drive Length measurement FP_A1_6 Function diagram A6
Sheet A6+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Read-in decade switch Number of decades H107

d010 Setpoint from the decade switch
A K071 A
Normalization H108
Binary/BCD coding H109
Signed H110
Bit 0 from the decade switch

MSK
B B
H111 H112
Binary decade control

H113 H114 Bit 1 from the decade switch Control, decade 0
0 K077
Control, decade 1
1
H115 H116 Bit 2 from the decade switch
# Control, decade 2
2
H117 H118 Bit 3 from the decade switch COntrol, decade 3
3
C Data transfer from the COntrol, decade 4 C
decade switch 4
H119 H120
Note:
H107 is a INIT-parameter
see 4.1.2
D D
Byte-serial input
d013 Setpoint, byte-serial
[A4.3]
K070
Time where the bytes must be
present in the stable status H106

1 = high byte
MSK
E E
H104 H105
F F
Date 19.8.96 Standard software package Setpoint input via =

+
Person Reh / Michaelis decade switches
Chk. Sectional drive Sheet A7+
Byte-serial input FP_A7_10 Function diagram A7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A [B5.1] A
Internal d015
speed actual value
[A1.4] K041 internal actual line speed
[B5.1] V act to PROFIBUS [A3.5]
K076 [E1.1]
[E2.1]
[D1.2]
H156
Line speedt > 0
Gearbox/diameter Limit for line speed = 0 signal H158 Line speedt = 0

correction [B1.2],[B2.5],[B6.1],[B3.4]
100% [D2.6]
B Hysteresis H159 Line speed < 0 B
H157 <1> d018

Synchronizing signal 1 identified Status word INPUT
[A6.4] 0 K072
Note: Synchronizing singal 2 identified
D/#
[A6.4] 1
CUVC,CUMC:
Line speed t > 0
The following values are set on the T300, if the KP-Adaption is required: 2
H871=0, H872=0, H873=199,99%, H874=19,99% Line speed t = 0
15 13 11 9
3 14 12 10 8
The KP-Adaption is then realized in the basic unit
Line speed < 0 7 5 3 1
4 6 4 2 0
C C
CU3: [A6.7]
5
Gain adaption not used with speed
Length act. value pulse encoder l < limit
controller of SIMOVERT SC [A6.7] 6
[A6.7] 7
Length act. value pulse encoder 2l<limit
[A6.7] 8
System error T300
[System error wordt] MSK 9
D
K073 Send to CU ok D
[A1.8] 10
H103 Send to CB ok
[A3.8] 11
Enable Send to peer ok
system error bits [A3.8] 12
Receive from CU ok
[A1.2] 13
Receive from CB ok
[A3.3] 14
[A3.3] 15
E KP adaption, speed control E

d086
X Y K162 [A1.5]
Gain adaption at CU
H871 X1
H870 H872 Y1
<1> Note:
H873 X2 When v = 0 is not reached
the drive is not switched off
F
H874 Y2
F
Date 19.8.96 Standard software package Line speed actual value =

Sectional drive Status word input/output
Chk. Blatt A8+
KP adaption, speed control FP_A7_10 Function diagram A8 Bl.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A MSK Select bit 0

0 d080
Input value 1 X1 X1>X2 0 d098
A
K161 X1=X2 1 K160

D/#
H801 H802 Freely-definable status word H914 H915 Status word,
X1<X2 2 limit value monitor
1 Input value 2 3
X2
2
Large window H917 L
3 D/#
B H809 H810 Select bit 4 B
4
5
Input value 1 X1 X1>X2 4
6
X1=X2 5
7
H919 H920 X1<X2 6
8
Select bit 9 Input value 2 7
H819 H820 9 X2
H821 H822 Select bit 10 L

10 Large window H922
C C
H823 H824 Select bit 11 H921
11 Hysterisis H923 HY

12
H827 H828 Select bit 13 Input value 1
13 X1 X1>X2 8
14 X1=X2 9
H831 H832 Select bit 15 H924 H925
15 X1<X2 10
D D
Input value 2 11
X2
Large window H927 L
15 13 11 9 H926 Hysterisis H928 HY

14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0 Input value1 X1 X1>X2 12
X1=X2 13
E E
H929 H930 X1<X2 14
Input value 2 15
X2
Large window H932 L
F
Note: F
The switching characteristics is described in Sec. 3.1.1.5
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Freely-definable status word =

Sectional drive Freely-connectable lim. val. monit.
Status Change Date Name Std.
Status word, limit value monitor Function diagram A9 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
Motorized potentiometer 1 Motorized potentiometer 2 A
Setpoint MOP
d025 Setpoint t MOP
d026
X Y K120 X Y K121
Setpoint, MOP 1 Setpoint, MOP 2
H300 H324 H310 H329
Operating mode
MOP
MSK Op. mode MOP 0=MOP
1=RFG
MSK 0=MOP
1=RFG
B B
H308 H309 H318 H319
Setting value, MOP Setting value, t MOP

SET_VAL SET_VAL
H301 H311
C C
MSK Set MOP SET MSK Set MOP SET
H302 H303 H312 H313
D
MSK Raise setpoint + MSK Raise setpoint +
D
H304 H305 H314 H315
MSK Lower setpoint - MSK Lower setpoint -
H306 H307 H316 H317
Ramp, standard setting Ramp, standard setting

E E
H320 RMP_TM H325 RMP_TM
Ramp, fast setting Ramp, fast setting
H321 RMP_TM_FST H326 RMP_TM_FST
Upper limit, MOP Upper limit, MOP
H322 LU H327 LU
Lower limit, MOP Lower limit, MOP
H323 LL H328 LL
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Motorized potentiometers 1 and 2 =

Chk. Sectional drive Sheet A10-
Zustand. Änderung Name Std.
Date
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Binary inputs [A4.4] Start request
[B6.1]
1s
On command
MSK
>
=1 1
T
Drive
[B6.1] powered-up
S [B2.2]
H200 069 H201 0001 Drive ready to power-up
Start command
[B3.2]
R [B5.1]
B [A2.5] B
[B6.1]
1=no start. sequence H252
Start enable
[B6.1] >
=1
MSK
H230 H231
MSK No local operation [B4.3]

C Op. mode, inching C
H218
S [B3.5]
H219 [B4.3] [B4.4]
Inching R
Inching 1 Power-down,
MSK >
=1
ready signal
[B3.5]
9
H220 069 H221 0008 Time for inching
[B6.1]
D T 0 [B2.8] Drive not ready
D
MSK Inching 2
[B4.3] >
=1
Power-off from the
brake control [B3.5]
H254
H253 Drive faulted
[B5.8] 1 1=with brake control
H222 H223
Drive faulted from CU
[A2.3] 2 Display in d021 and d024
[B2.5]
Electrical off
3
V=0 signal 15 13 11 9
>
[A8.6]
=1 Off after fast stop

14 12 10 8
H250 11 7 5 3 1
E 1=no regenerative 6 4 2 0 E
feedback Internal fast stop
[B2.5]
d024
V=0
Off after stop [B2.1]
10 Shutdown word
[B2.5]
Internal stop
d021
Off for missing on checkback sig. from the converter
[B5.5] 12 K140
Diagnostics word
Off for missing checkback sig. from the group control (memory, reason for shutdown)
[B5.5] 13
F F
Datum 1.8.94 Standard software package Drive power-up, =

Sectional drive power-down
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A
MSK S Internal stop A
[D2.3]
R
H202 069 H203 0002
>
=1
Braking
[B3.1]
[B6.1]
[D2.2]
[E2.5]
No fast stop (OFF3) Internal fast stop

B
MSK S [B1.3]
B
[E2.6]
R
H206 069 H207 0004
Binary inputs
[A4.4]
No electrical off (OFF2) Electrical off

MSK S [B1.4]
C C
R
H204 H205
Drive powered-up Open brake

[B1.8] [B6.1]
Setpoint enable from

Ready for the brake control
D setpoint enable T 0 D
[B3.5] S [B3.5]
R
H271
Off, brake immediately closed
for H255=2, 3, 4
Selection Power-down from the
[B1.6]
Shutdown word and connection
>
=1
T 0
>
brake control
=1
of the shut-down
commands [B1.6]
Operating mode,
E brake control Off, brake closed at V=0 H272
E
H255 fori H255=1
Close brake for
1: V=0
2: El. off, immediately Brake closed at V=0
3: Fault, immediately H255 [B6.1]
4: For fault and elec.
off immediately S
V=0
R
>
[A8.6]
=1
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Stop, electrical off/fast stop =

Sectional drive Brake control
Chk. FP_B1_6 Function diagramB2 Sheet B2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Inverter enable
K002 MSK Internal inverter enable
[B6.1]
[A2.5]
[B5.1]
H208 H209
(0H0001)
B B
Magnetization/
restart on the fly active Ready for
[A2.3] setpoint enable
[B2.3] [B6.1]
Setpoint enable Internal setpoint enable
K002 MSK [B6.1]
Inverter
[D1.1]
enabled 1 [A2.6]
Setpoint enable
[A2.3] from the brake control
H214 H215 [B2.8]
(0H0001)
Checkback signal,
[B5.1]
group control [B1.6] with brake control
MSK
C
>
=1 S
C
H232 H233
R
1=enable H251
group control
Braking Group control active
[B5.1]
[B2.5]
D Speed control D
Inching enable
[B1.3] [A2.6]
Drive powered-up S [D2.3]
[B1.8]
Inching oper. mode
[B1.4] R
V=0 signal
[A8.6]
1=inching H256
>
=1
without braking
E E
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Inverter enable =

Sectional drive Setpoint enable
Chk.
Speed control enable FP_B1_6 Function diagram B3 Sheet B3+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Binary inputs
[A4.4]
A A
Select, op. mode, bit 0

MSK
Conversion,
H224
069 H225
0020 bit/word
0 0 Code for operating mode 0..70...7

D/#
Select, op. mode bit 1 0...7
MSK 1
B 2 B
H226 069 H227 0040

Select, op. mode bit 2
MSK
H228 H229 >

=1
C C
[B1.2]
No local operation
>
=1 Local operating modet
[B6.1]
[D2.2]
D D
Code for operating mode
0 0 ... 9 K142
0, 8, 9 [D2.1]
8
9
Inching 1 Coding, operating mode
[B1.2]
Inching 2
[B1.2] 0: No setpoint selected
1: Fixed setpoint 1
2: Fixed setpoint 2
3: Fixed setpoint 3
4: Local setpoint 4
5: Fixed setpoint 5
Operating mode, inching 6: Fixed setpoint 6
E [B1.4] E
7: Fixed setpoint 7
Note:
Local setpoint selection is coded in a word
from 0 to 9. The local setpoints are parameterized in
diagram D2.
F F
Datum 1.8.94 Standard software package Local setpoint selection =

Sectional drive
Status. Change Date Name Std. . Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Receive from CB ok
Display in d022
[A3.3] [B6.5] T 0 Communications error, receive with CB 0
Send to CB ok
15 13 11 9
A [A3.8] 14 12 10 8 A
H257 7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Receive from CU ok D/#
[A1.2] [B6.5] T 0 Communications with CU error 1
Error word
[A1.8]
Send to CU ok
d022
H258 K141
Inverter enable from the CU MSK Fault
[A2.3] [B6.5] T 0 Checkback signal error, converter
[B1.4] S [B1.4]
B 2 [B6.1] B
Internal inverter enable R [A2.6]

[B3.4] H270
H259
Fault, external 11
[A2.4]
Drive powered-up
[B1.8]
>
=1
[B6.5] T 0 Checkback signal error, group control
[B1.4]
3
Note:
[B3.3] Group control active The fault is reset, if the fault bit was
transferred to the basic drive converter
H264
[B3.2]
Checkback signal, group control
C C

[A3.3] [B6.5] T 0 Communications error, peer-to-peer
4
1
H263
MSK > 0
=1
[B6.5] T External fault 5
D D
H260 H261
H262
[A8.2]
int.speed actual value Error, positive overspeed
6
Limit H265 Error, negative overspeed
7
Int. line speed actual value

E [A8.5] E
V=0
Limit H266
[B6.5] T 0
8
[D2.6] Line speed setpoint

Line speed setpoint > limit H269
Limit H267
[A1.3] Torque actual value

Torque actual value > limit
F Limit H268 F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Error word generation =

Sectional drive
Status. Change Date Name Std. Sh..
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Start request Status word,

[B1.8 0
Start enable
d020
control [B5.3]
Alarm, communications with CB
0 d023 Alarm word
A [B1.2] 1 Status word control
K146 [A4.4] Alarm, communications with CU D/# K145 A
Start command
[B5.3] 1 MSK Alarm
[B1.6] 2 [A2.6]
Alarm, converter checkback signal
[B5.3] 2
[B2.5]
Brake
3
Display in d020 [B5.3]
Alarm from the group control
3 H248
4 Alarm, peer-to-peer communications
D/# [B5.3] 4
Line speed = 0
[A8.6] 5 15 13 11 9
Drive powered-up
14 12 10 8 [B5.3]
Alarm, external fault
5 Display in d023
[B1.8] 6 7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0 0 6
B 7 15 13 11 9 B
Drive not ready 0 7 14 12 10 8

[B1.7] 8 Alarm, anti-stall protection 7 5 3 1
[B5.5] 8
[B3.4] Inverter enable 6 4 2 0
9
Setpoint enable 0 9
[B3.8] 10
Local operation 0 10
[B4.6] 11
Drive faulted 0 11
[B5.8]
[A2.3]
Fault from CU
>
=1
Drive faulted
12 0 12
C C
Open brake 0 13
[B2.8] 13
0 14
14 No external alarm 2
[B3.5]
ready for setpoint enable MSK 15
15
H246 H247
D D
E
E
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Status word, control =

Sectional drive Alarm word
Chk. FP_B1_6 Function diagram B6 Sheet B6-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control word
(technology)
A
[A3.4] Upper limit
technological setpoint A
H423
Switch-in technology controller Ramp-function generator
at upper limit
[C3.2]
Technology control on Select technological setpoint
MSK >
=1
d034
S
>
[C2.4]
=1
+ Technological setpoint
[C3.2] [C2.1]
R Ramp-up time K130
+
H404
025 H405
0001 Tension setpoint H422
H425
at lower limit
H400
024 H401 [C3.2]
B
MSK [A3.4] H426 B
Ramp-down time
H424
Lower limit
H406 H407 techn. setpoint
in = output
[C3.2]
Switch-out technology controller
C C
MSK >
=1
Select technological actual value
+
Tension act. val. Technological actual value [C2.1]
H408
025 H409
0002 [A5.4] -
H402
060 H403
MSK
D D
H410 H411
0.5s
Offset,
technological actual value
[C3.1]
H430 K132
Switch-in/-out technology controller
Fixed offset
Compensate offset
MSK H431
MSK
H428 H429
E E
H452 H453
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Switching-in the techn.controller =

Sectional d rive Technological setpoint
Chk. Sheet C1+
Technological actual value FP_C1_3 Function diagram C1
Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
H448
Upper limit Torque pre-control
H436
Op. mode D comp. H434
0=D comp. in the setpoint/act. val. channel H437
1=D comp. only in the act. value channel Droop
d038
H451 MODE Controller at the

D-CONTRL upper limit
I comp. [C3.2]
B Supplementary setpoint K134 B
H433 + - Control deviation
K133
d036
+ Influence of the techn. contr.
[C1.8]
Technological setpoint + + on the torque
[E1.5]
K137
-
K135
H427 Controller at the H447 H449
D comp.
lower limit
d035 [C3.2]
Technological actual value
Controller enable ten. act [A3.5]
[C1.8]
C
DISABLE C
K131 EN EN_D TN TV KP I-CONTRL SET d039
d030 [D2.1]
H432 H435
> K138
H414 H440 H438
=1
Tgl 1
1=enable 1=inhibit Influence, techn. controller
H415 Tgl 2 D comp. I comp. H439 on the line speed
H450
Lower limit
d032
H418 TN 1
H419 TN 2
D D
Technological control ON
d033 [C1.4]
H420 TV 1
H421 TV 1 d031
Reset Tech-Controller
H416 KP 1
H417
MSK
KP 2
KP characteristic H454 H455

E Data set selection KP adaption E
MSK [C3.2] d037
H442 X1
H412 H413 H441
H443 Y1
H444 X2
F F
H445 Y2
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Technological controller =

Chk. Sectional drive Sheet C2+
Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Technology controller on A
[C1.4] 0
Status word, technological control
K136
Parameter set 2 D/#
[C2.2] 1
Ramp-function generator output = input

[C1.8] 2
[C1.8] Setpoint at the upper limit

3
B Setpoint at the lower limit

[C1.8] 4 B
Technology controller at upper limit

[C2.6] 5
Technology controller at lower limit

[C2.6] 6
Offset,
technological act. val.
Offset compensation > pos. limit
[C1.8] 7
H446
Offset compensation < neg. limit
C
8 C
(-1)
D D
E E
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Statusword, technological control =

Chk. Sectional drive Sheet C3-
Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ratio
Setpoint from the peer mult./div Op. setpoint
K106
A [A3.4] A
Central ramp-function generator d048 d049
+
Upper limit H519 [D2.1]
Main setpoint +
K107
d045 d046 H513
+ [E1.4] V-set to peer
+ K100 K104 H522 [A3.5]
H502 Ramp-up time
H500
030 H501 H515 TU H520
Lower limit
Acceleration
B Ramp-down time K105 B

H516 TD
Rounding-off, ramp-up
H517 TRU H521
Rounding-off, ramp-down Normalization, acceleration

H518 TRD
K002 MSK STRT
C H212 H213 C
Set RFG
[B3.8] Internal setpoint enable
H514 >
=1 SET
K002 MSK Ramp-function generator enable
D Internal D
line speed actual value
H210 H211 [A8.4] SET_VAL
Ratio setpoint
d047
+ [E1.3]
100%
+ K102
H508 0%
H506
023 H507
2% H526
E Ratio from PROFIBUS H529 E
[A3.4] Binary inputs MSK Slack take-up
[A4.4] H523 H530
H524 069 H525 0100

Slack-off
MSK
F F
H527 H528
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Central ramp-function generator =
Sectional drive Ratio/slack take-up/slack-off
Chk. FP_D1_2 Function diagram D1 Sheet D1+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 0% Load distribution bias A

d055
d050 H546 K110
+ Bias
K101 (-1)
+
Load distribution
H503 H504
H505
MSK [E2.3]
Torque direction
[A1.4]
H544 H545
B B
Triggerable Correction
+ d051 ramp-function generator Setpoint smoothing diameter/gearbox
+ d053 d056 + d057
Operating setpoint
[D1.8]
+
Influence, technology controller + K108 Speed setpoint K112
on the line speed Ramp-up time
+ + K111 [A1.5]
[C2.8]
H542
Setpoint to CU
0% Ramp-function generator, Ramp-down time
H547 [A8.2]
Correction, gearbox,
[xx.x]
0 local setpoints diameter
H543
5% H531 1
Local setpoint Activate ramp-
function generator
C
-5% H532 2 Ramp-up time
H540 d052 Line speed setpointt [B5.1]
C
H533 3
Ramp-down time
4 H541
H535 5 Reset
Note:
H534 Braking Triggerable ramp-function generator:
>
H536 6 [B2.5]
H537 7 [B4.6]
Local op. mode =1 The ramp-function generator is only operational
once
D D
->when the drive is powered-up
H538 8
Local operating mode ->changeover from/to local operation
H539 9 >
=1
->for standard stop
After ramp-up has been completed, the ramp-
2% Local operating mode function generator switches itself out
[B4.7]
Selection, local setpoint i.e. ramp-function generator output = input
Coding, operating mode word:
Stop (AUS1)
0: No setpoint selected [B2.5]
1: Fixed setpoint 1
2: Fixed setpoint 2
3: Fixed setpoint 3 Enable, speed control
E 4: Local setpoint 4 [B3.8] E
5: Fixed setpoint 5 d054
6: Fixed setpoint 6 Selection, droop compensation 0%
7: Fixed setpoint 7
8: Inching setpoint 1
9: Inching setpoint 2 K109
Enable, droop
Enable, droop
H509 H510
MSK [A2.6]
F H511 H512 F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Local fixed setpoints =

Sectional drive Triggerable ramp-function
Chk.
generator FP_D1_2 Function diagram D2 Sheet D2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Friction characteristic d065

A [E2.2] A
Line speed actual value Friction torque
[A8.4] X Y
K154
H700 X1
H701 Y1
H702 X2
H703 Y2
H704 X3
B B
H705 Y3
H706 X4
H707 Y4
H708 X5
H709 Y5
H710 X6
C C
H711 Y6
Influence, tech.
controller on the torque
[C2.8]
Acceleration
d067
d068 + + d069 Supplementary torque to CU
Accel. K156 Accelerating torque
+
K151 [A1.5]
[A3.4] K150
D H714 [E2.2] + D
H712 031 H713
H730
Ratio
Ratio mul./div
[D1.3] [D1.6]
Moment of inertia
H717 H718
E E
d066
H715 H716
F F
Date 1.8.94 Standard software package Friction characteristic =

Chk. Sectional drive Inertia compensation
FP_E1_2 Sheet E1+
Supplementary torque Function diagram E1 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Torque setpoint from the master drive

d070 d073
Ramp-up/ramp-down time for load distribution H728
K155 Ramp-up/ramp-down time for fast stop H729

+ d071
H719 Friction torque +
[E1.5]
H721
+
B Torque ratio for the slave B
Accelerating torque
[E1.6]
Triggerable
ramp-function gen.
Positive torque
limit
H720 H722 K152
[A1.5]
>
=1
C Braking characteristic d072
Torque C
actual value
Line speed actual value [A1.4]
[A8.5] X Y
H724 X1 Y
Y2
H723
H725 Negative torque
Y1 limit
Y1
X
K153
H726 X2 X1 X2
D [A1.5] D
H727 Y2
[D2.6]Load distribution
(-1) Set RFG to the torque actual
value and activate once
Torque direction
[A1.4] Braking
[B2.5]
[B2.5]
Fast stop
>
=1
E E
Load distribution
Load distribution
F F
Date 19.8.96 Standard software package Load distribution =

Sectional drive Braking characteristic
Chk. FP_E1_2 Sheet E2-
Function diagram E2 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 Changes
9 Changes
The version has an associated code, which can be read-out of display parameter d002.
Version Comment
1.0 Pilot version
d002=1.00
1.1 1) New peer to peer function blocks
2) Changed baudrates in H197
3) Connectors K035 to K039 not more existing
D002=1.00 4) d002 = 1.00 (Software-version)
1.2 1) Reset of Tec. Controller: H454, H455 new
09.95 2) FP-SETPRN.S3100.RQN=1 instead of =0 (rounding of RFG)
d002=1.2 3) H998 Drive number new)
1.3 1) Designed with STRUC 4.2.3
05.96 2) Small improvements in the use of parameters, also when using SIMOVIS
d002=1.3
1.4 Designed with STRUC 4.2.4
06.97 Sample time of speed actual value 1 (K067) and speed actual value 2 is calculated in T1.

Manual
9 Changes

Manual
10 Display parameter
10 Short parameter list, display parameters

Display Value/description Function
parameters diagram ref.
d000 Hardware identifier [F1.8]
d001 Software identifier [F1.8]
d002 Software release [F1.8]
d003 Signal from analog input 1 [A5.3]
d010 Status, binary inputs [A4.3]

to
d011 Setpoint from byte-serial input [A7.5]
d012 Setpoint from the decade switch [A7.5]
d013 Speed actual value from pulse encoder 1 [A6.6]
d014 Speed actual value from pulse encoder 2 [A6.6]
d015 Line speed actual value [A8.3]
d016 Length actual value from pulse encoder 1 [A6.6]
d017 Length actual value from pulse encoder 2 [A6.6]
d018 Status word, input functions [A8.8]

Bit 2: Line speed actual value, greater than zero
Bit 3: Line speed actual value equal to zero
Bit 4: Line speed actual value less than zero
Bit 5: Length actual value 1, less than the setpoint
Bit 10: Send to CU o.k.
Bit 11: Send to CB o.k.
Bit 12: Send to peer o.k.
Bit 15: Receive from the peer-to-peer o.k.
d019 (Unused)

Manual
d020 Status word, control [B6.3]

Bit 0: Start enable request
Bit 1: Start enable
Bit 3: Fast stop
Bit 4: No fast stop
Bit 5: Line speed is zero
Bit 6: Drive is powered up
Bit 8: Drive ready
Bit 12: Fault
Bit 13: Close holding brakes
Bit 14: Open holding brakes
Bit 15: Close holding brakes, stored for zero speed
d021 Diagnostics word, drive [B1.6]
Bit 0: Drive fault
Bit 11: No on checkback signal from the basic drive converter
Bits 12 to bit 15: Unused
d022 Fault word, drive [B5.7]
Bit 0: Communications error CB
Bit 1: Communications error CU
Bit 2: Fault checkback signal, converter
Bit 3: Fault from the group control
Bits 9 to 15: 0
d023 Alarm word, drive [B6.7]
Bit 0: Alarm from communications CB
Bit 1: Alarm from communications CU
Bit 4: Alarm from peer-to-peer communications
Bit 5: Alarm from an external fault
Bit 6, 7: 0
Bits 9 to 14: 0
Bit 15: External alarm
d024 Power-down conditions, drive
Bit 0: Drive fault
Bit 1: Fault from the CU
Bits 3 to Bit 7: Unused
Bit 9: Off after a stop command
Bit 11: No on checkback signal from the basic drive converter
Bits 12 to bit 15: Unused
d025 Output, motorized potentiometer 1 [A10.4]
d026 Output, motorized potentiometer 2 [A10.8]
d027 to (Unused)
d029

Manual
d030 Smoothing, technological actual value [C2.2]
d031 Effective gain, technological controller [C2.2]
d032 Integral action time, technological controller [C2.2]
d033 Derivative action time, technological controller [C2.2]
d034 Technological setpoint after the ramp-function generator [C1.7]
d035 Technological actual value after smoothing [C2.3]
d036 Output, technological controller [C2.6]
d037 Kp adaption factor [C2.4]
d038 Technological pre-control [C2.7]
d039 Technological line speed influence [C2.8]
d040 to (Unused)
d044
d045 Main setpoint [D1.2]
d046 Central ramp-function generator output [D1.4]
d047 Ratio setpoint [D1.2]
d048 Main setpoint with ratio [D1.6]
d049 Main setpoint with ratio and slack take-up/slack-off [D1.8]
d050 Supplementary setpoint [D2.2]
d051 Total setpoint with supplementary setpoint and technological controller [D2.3]
d052 Local setpoint [D2.4]
d053 Line speed setpoint after the triggerable ramp-function generator. [D2.5]
d054 Compensation setpoint [D2.5]
d055 Bias setpoint [D2.7]
d056 Total setpoint with compensation, smoothed [D2.6]
d057 Speed setpoint, smoothed with bias [D2.7]
d058 to (Unused)
d064
d065 Friction torque [E1.3]
d066 Supplementary torque [E1.5]
d067 Result of differentiation [E1.2]
d068 Accelerating torque [E1.5]
d069 Summed torque [E1.7]
d070 Torque setpoint, slave [E2.2]
d071 Torque setpoint, slave with friction and acceleration. [E2.3]
d072 Braking characteristic [E2.3]
d073 Effective changeover time for the torque ramp-function generator [E2.7]

Manual
d074 to (Unused)
d079
d080 Selectable status word [A9.3]
d081 Monitoring parameter 1 [F1.6]
d085 Status, binary outputs [A4.6]

to
Bits 8 to 15: 0
d086 Kp adaption factor, speed controller CU
d087 Word 1 to peer-to-peer [A3.7]
d092 Word 1 to CU [A1.6]

Bits 0 to 6: Drive on
Bit 7: Acknowledge fault
Bits 8 and 9: 0
Bits 10 to 12: 1
Bits 13 and 14: 0
Bit 15: 1

Bit 6: 0
Bit 7: 1
Bit 8: Droop on
Bit 10: 1
Bit 11: 0
Bit 12 and 13: 1
Bit 14 and 15: 0
d097 Word 7 an CU [A1.6]

Manual
d098 Status word, limit value monitor [A9.8]

Bit 0: Limit value monitor 1 higher than limit value
Bit 1: Limit value monitor 1 same as limit value
Bit 2: Limit value monitor 1 lower than limit value
Bit 3: Limit value monitor 1 not equal to limit value
d099 Unused

Manual

Manual
11 Short parameter list / logbook

The logbook must be completed after start-up has been completed.
Always keep the logbook handy for any questions which may arise.
Completed entries are important for maintenance/service, and could be relevant for warranty issues.
Location: ............................................................. Drive: .................................................................
............................................................. .................................................................
Date Name Department Signature
Start-up settings
Start-up setting
change
Software release, multi-motor module: ..............................
Parameter- Designation Factory Start-up Change after

setting value start-up
number
H101 Hysteresis, torque polarity change 2%
H102 Mask, binary input inversion 0000h
H103 Mask, system error bit enable 0429h
H104 Source bit hibyte enable byte serial 0
H105 Mask bit hibyte enable byte serial 0000h
H106 Acceptance time, byte serial 40[ms]
H107 Number of decades, decade switch 4
H108 Normalization factor, decade switch 100
H109 Coding, BCD decade switch 1
H110 Signed, decade switch 0

Manual
number
H119 Source bit, data transfer from the decade switch 0
H120 Mask bit, data transfer from the decade switch 0000h
H121 Gain, analog input 1 50%
H122 Offset, analog input 1 0%
H123 Smoothing, analog input 1 5[ms]
H142 Pulse number, pulse encoder 1 500
H143 Rated speed, pulse encoder 1 500
H144 Pulse number, pulse encoder 2 500
H146 Source bit, reset length counter 1 0
H147 Mask bit, reset length counter 1 0000h
H148 Source bit, reset length counter 2 0
H149 Mask bit, reset length counter 2 0000h
H150 Source bit, hold length counter 1 0
H151 Mask bit, hold length counter 1 0000h
H152 Source bit, hold length counter 2 0
H153 Mask bit, hold length counter 2 0000h
H154 Smoothing, tachometer actual value 1 40[ms]

Manual
number
H155 Smoothing, tachometer actual value 2 40[ms]
H156 ! Source, speed actual value for V-act., internal 41
H157 ! Source, diameter/gearbox correction 1
H158 Window width, zero line speed signal 0.5%
H159 Hysteresis, zero speed signal 0.1%
H160 Range selection, length measurement 1 0
H161 Source, correction factor, length measurement 1 1
H162 Source, length setpoint 1 0
H163 Range selection, length measurement 2 0
H164 Source, correction factor, length measurement 2 1
H165 Source, length setpoint 2 0
H166 Fixed setpoint 3 (connector 003) 0%

Manual
number
H197 Baud rate for a peer-to-peer coupling 0%
H198 Number of receive words, peer-to-peer 0%
H199 Number of transmit words, peer-to-peer 0%
H200 ! Source on 0
H201 ! Mask on 0000h
H202 ! Source, no standard stop 0
H203 ! Mask, no standard stop 0000h
H204 ! Source, no electrical off 0
H205 ! Mask, no electrical off 0000h
H206 ! Source, no fast stop 0
H207 ! Mask, no fast stop 0000h
H208 Source, inverter enable 2
H209 Mask, inverter enable 0001h
H210 Source, ramp-function generator enable 2
H211 Mask, ramp-function generator enable 0001h
H212 Source, ramp-function generator start 2
H213 Mask, ramp-function generator start 0001h
H214 Source, setpoint enable 2
H215 Mask, setpoint enable 0001h
H216 Source, fault acknowledgement 0
H217 Mask, fault acknowledgement 0000h
H218 Source, no local operation 0
H219 Mask, no local operation 0000h
H220 Source, inching 1 0
H221 Mask, inching 1 0000h
H222 Source, inching 2 0
H223 Mask, inching 2 0000h
H224 Source, operating mode bit 0 0
H225 Mask, operating mode bit 0 0000h

Manual
number
H230 Source, start enable 0
H231 Mask, start enable 0000h
H232 Source, checkback signal, group control 0
H233 Mask, checkback signal, group control 0000h
H234 Source, setpoint channel data set, bit 0 0
H235 Mask, setpoint channel data set, bit 0 0000h
H236 Source, setpoint channel data set, bit 1 0
H237 Mask, setpoint channel data set, bit 1 0000h
H238 Source, motor data set, bit 0 0
H239 Mask, motor data set, bit 0 0000h
H240 Source, motor data set, bit 1 0
H241 Mask, motor data set, bit 1 0000h
H242 Source, fixed setpoint selection, bit 0 0
H243 Mask, fixed setpoint selection, bit 0 0000h
H244 Source, fixed setpoint selection, bit 1 0
H245 Mask, fixed setpoint selection, bit 1 0000h
H246 Source, no external alarm 2 2
H247 Mask, no external alarm 2 0001h
H248 Mask, no external alarm 2 0000h
H249 (Unused)
H250 No regenerative feedback 0
H251 Enable group control 0
H252 No starting sequence 1
H253 Delay, shutdown after inching 30[s]
H254 Operation with holding brakes 0
H255 Operating mode for holding brakes 0
H256 Inching without braking 0
H257 Tolerance time, CB-communications error 100[ms]
H258 Tolerance time, CU-communications error 100[ms]
H259 Tolerance time, checkback signal error, converter 1[s]
H260 Source, no external fault 2
H261 Mask, no external fault 0001h
H262 Tolerance time, external fault 1[s]

Manual
number
H263 Tolerance time, peer-to-peer error, communications 100[ms]

H264 Tolerance time, group control fault 100[ms]
H265 ! Threshold, overspeed fault 120%
H266 Threshold, line speed actual value for anti-stall 0.5%

protection
H267 Threshold, line speed setpoint for anti-stall 1%
protection
H268 Threshold, torque actual value for anti-stall 80%
protection
H269 Tolerance time, anti-stall protection fault 1[s]
H270 Mask, fault enable FFFFh
H271 Holding brake opening time 0[s]
H272 Holding brake closing time 0[s]
H273-299 (Unused)
H300 Source, input motorized potentiometer 1 0
H301 Source, setting value motorized potentiometer 1 0
H302 Source bit, set motorized potentiometer 1 0
H303 Mask bit, set motorized potentiometer 1 0000h
H304 Source bit, raise motorized potentiometer 1 0
H305 Mask bit, raise motorized potentiometer 1 0000h
H306 Source bit, lower motorized potentiometer 1 0
H307 Mask bit, lower motorized potentiometer 1 0000h
H308 Source bit, track motorized potentiometer 1 0
H309 Mask bit, track motorized potentiometer 1 0000h
H310 Source, input motorized potentiometer 2 0
H311 Source, setting value motorized potentiometer 2 0
H312 Source bit, set motorized potentiometer 2 0
H313 Mask bit, set motorized potentiometer 2 0000h
H314 Source bit, raise motorized potentiometer 2 0
H315 Mask bit, raise motorized potentiometer 2 0000h
H316 Source bit, lower motorized potentiometer 2 0
H317 Mask bit, lower motorized potentiometer 2 0000h
H318 Source bit, track motorized potentiometer 2 0
H319 Mask bit, track motorized potentiometer 2 0000h
H320 Slow ramp time, motorized potentiometer 1 60[s]
H321 Fast ramp time, motorized potentiometer 1 25[s]
H322 Upper limit, motorized potentiometer 1 120%

Manual
number
H323 Lower limit, motorized potentiometer 1 -120%
H324 Influence factor, motorized potentiometer 1 0%
H325 Slow ramp time, motorized potentiometer 2 60[s]
H326 Fast ramp time, motorized potentiometer 2 25[s]
H327 Upper limit, motorized potentiometer 2 120%
H328 Lower limit, motorized potentiometer 2 -120%
H329 Influence factor, motorized potentiometer 2 0%
H330-399 (Unused)
H400 Source, technological setpoint 0
H401 Adaption factor, technological setpoint 100%
H402 Source, technological actual value 0
H403 Adaption factor, technological actual value 100%
H404 Source bit, enable 1 technological controller 0
H405 Mask bit, enable 1 technological controller 0000h
H406 Source bit, enable 2 technological controller 0
H407 Mask bit, enable 2 technological controller 0000h
H408 Source bit, disable 1 technological controller 0
H409 Mask bit, disable 1 technological controller 0000h
H410 Source bit, disable 2 technological controller 0
H411 Mask bit, disable 2 technological controller 0000h
H412 Source, parameter changeover, technological 0

controller
H413 Mask, parameter changeover, technological 0000h
controller
H414 Smoothing P1, technological actual value 100[ms]
H415 Smoothing P2, technological actual value 100[ms]
H416 Gain P1, technological controller 1
H417 Gain P2, technological controller 1
H418 Integral action time P1 technological controller 1000[ms]
H419 Integral action time P2 technological controller 1000[ms]
H420 Derivative action time P1 technological controller 10[ms]
H421 Derivative action time P2 technological controller 10[ms]
H422 Supplementary setpoint before the ramp-function 0%

generator, technological setpoint
H423 Setpoint upper limit, technological controller 100%
H424 Setpoint lower limit, technological controller 10%
H425 Setpoint ramp-up time, technological controller 10[s]

Manual
number
H426 Setpoint ramp-down time, technological controller 10[s]
H427 Setpoint smoothing, technological controller 0.1[s]
H428 Source, offset adjustment technological actual value 0

H429 Mask, offset adjustment technological actual value 0000h
H430 Fixed offset, technological controller 0%
H431 Manual offset adjustment, technological actual value 0

H432 Active derivative action time, technological controller 0
H433 Supplementary setpoint, technological controller 0%
H434 Droop factor, technological controller 0%
H435 Inhibit I component, technological controller 0
H436 Upper limit technological controller off 100%
H437 Upper limit, technological controller on 100%
H438 Lower limit, technological controller off -100%
H439 Lower limit, technological controller on -100%
H440 Technological controller continuously on 0
H441 Source, kp adaption quantity, technological 0

controller
H442 Start of kp adaption, technological controller 0%
H443 Factor, start of kp adaption, technological controller 100%
H444 End of kp adaption, technological controller 100%
H445 Factor, end of kp adaption, technological controller 100%
H446 Offset monitoring limit, technological controller 30%
H447 Smoothing, technological controller output 20[ms]
H448 Factor, technological controller pre-control 0%
H449 Torque influence, technological controller 0%
H450 Line speed influence, technological controller 0%
H451 Operating mode, D component technological 0%

controller
H452 Source, bit on/off, technological controller 0
H453 Mask, bit on/off, technological controller 0000h
H454 Source technological controller reset 1462
H455 Mask technological controller reset 0080h
H456-499 (Unused)
H500 Source, main setpoint 0
H501 Gain, main setpoint 100%
H502 Offset, main setpoint 0%
H503 Source, supplementary setpoint 0

Manual
number
H504 Gain, supplementary setpoint 100%
H505 Offset, supplementary setpoint 0%
H506 Source, ratio reference value 1
H507 Gain, ratio reference value 100%
H508 Offset, ratio reference value 100%
H509 Source, compensation setpoint 0
H510 Gain, compensation setpoint 0%
H511 Source, enable droop 0
H512 Mask, enable droop 0000h
H513 No bypass, central ramp-function generator 0
H514 Set central ramp-function generator for drive off 0
H515 Ramp-up time, central ramp-function generator 60[s]
H516 Ramp-down time, central ramp-function generator 60[s]
H517 Initial rounding-off, central ramp-function generator 6[s]
H518 Final rounding-off, central ramp-function generator 6[s]
H519 Upper limit, central ramp-function generator 150%
H520 Lower limit, central ramp-function generator -150%
H521 Normalization time, acceleration 60[s]
H522 Ratio as divisor 0
H523 Slack take-up/slack-off, relative 0
H524 Source bit, slack take-up 0
H525 Mask bit, slack take-up 0000h
H526 Setpoint, slack take-up 2%
H527 Source bit, slack-off 0
H528 Mask bit, slack-off 0000h
H529 Setpoint, slack-off -2%
H530 Smoothing, slack take-up/slack-off 40[ms]
H531 Local setpoint 1 0%
H534 Source, local setpoint 4 0
H538 Inching setpoint 1 0%
H539 Inching setpoint 2 0%

Manual
number
H540 Ramp-up time, local ramp-function generator 10[s]
H541 Ramp-down time, local ramp-function generator 10[s]
H542 Ramp-up time, triggerable ramp-function generator 60[s]
H543 Ramp-down time, triggerable ramp-function gen. 60[s]
H544 Source bit, bias on 0
H545 Mask bit, bias on 0000h
H546 Setpoint, bias 5%
H547 Smoothing, line speed setpoint 5[ms]
H548-599 (Unused)
H600 Source, input free inverter 1 0
H601 Source, summand 1 free adder 1 0
H603 Source, minuend free subtractor 1 0
H604 Source, subtrahend free subtractor 1 0
H605 Source, factor 1 free multiplier 1 0
H607 Source, dividend free divider 1 0
H608 Source, divisor free divider 1 0
H609 Source, input free limiter 1 0
H610 Source, upper limit free limiter 1 0
H611 Source, lower limit free limiter 1 0
H612 Source 1, free changeover switch 1 0
H614 Source, control bit free changeover switch 1 0
H615 Mask, control bit free changeover switch 1 0000h
H616 Source, input free filter 1 0
H617 Source, time constant free filter 1 0

Manual
number
H644 Source, control bit, free changeover switch 2 0
H645 Mask, control bit, free changeover switch 2 0000h
H648 Source, control bit free changeover switch 3 0
H649 Mask, control bit free changeover switch 3 0000h
H654 Source, input free absolute value generator 1 0
H655 Source, input free square root extractor 1 0
H656 Source, input 1 maximum evaluator 1 0
H657 Source, input 2 maximum evaluator 1 0
H658 Source, input 1 minimum evaluator 1 0
H659 Source, input 2 minimum evaluator 1 0
H660 Source, input sinusoidal function 0
H661-674 (Unused)
H675 Source, input 1 word EXOR gate 1 0

Manual
number
H683 Pulse duration flashing frequency 1[s]
H684 Source, flashing requency word 0
H685 Pulse duration, flashing requency word 1[s]
H686 Counter, position difference correction 1
H687 Denominator, position difference correction 1
H688 Source, reset position difference 0
H689 Mask, reset position difference 0000h
H690 Definition, pulse encoder evaluation 1 0000h
H691 Definition, pulse encoder evaluation 2 0000h
H692-699 (Unused)
H700 Friction characteristic, line speed 1 0%
H701 Friction characteristic, torque 1 0%
H712 Source, acceleration 0
H713 Reference time, acceleration 0.1[s]
H714 Acceleration from differentiation 0
H715 Source, supplementary torque 0
H716 Adaption factor, supplementary torque 100%
H717 Source, moment of inertia 0
H718 Adaption factor, moment of inertia 100%

Manual
number
H719 Source, torque setpoint from the master 0
H720 Source, torque ratio 0
H721 Torque setpoint with friction/acceleration 0
H722 Maximum torque, positive 100%
H723 Maximum torque, negative -100%
H724 Braking characteristic, line speed 1 0%
H725 Braking characteristic, torque 1 0%
H726 Braking characteristic, line speed 2 5%
H727 Braking characteristic, torque 2 100%
H728 Change time, load distribution torque ramp-function 3000[ms]

generator
H729 Change time, braking, torque ramp-function 1000[ms]
generator
H730 Smoothing, accelerating torque 5[ms]
H731-800 (Unused)
H801 Source, bit 0 free status word 0
H802 Mask, bit 0 free status word 0000h

Manual
number
H833 Source, bit 0 binary outputs 0
H834 Mask, bit 0 binary outputs 0000h
H849 Mask, inversion binary outputs 0000h
H850 Source, analog output 1 41
H851 Select, absolute value analog output 1 0
H852 Smoothing, analog output 1 5[ms]
H853 Offset, analog output 1 0%
H854 Gain, analog output 1 2
H856 Selection, absolute value analog output 2 0

Manual
number
H870 Source, kp adaption speed controller 0
H871 Start of kp adaption, speed controller 0%
H872 Factor, start of kp adaption, speed controller 1
H873 End of kp adaption speed controller 100%
H874 Factor, end of kp adaption speed controller 1
H875 Source, monitoring parameter 1 0
H878 Source, monitoring parameter 4 (hex) 0
H879 Source, word 1 to peer-to-peer 0
H880 Factor, free word 1 to peer-to-peer 0%
H888 Source, word 1 to CU 143

Manual
number
H904 Source, word 1 to CB 0
H914 Source, value 1, limit value monitor 1 0
H915 Smoothing, value 1, limit value monitor 1 40[ms]
H917 Window size, limit value monitor 1 0%
H918 Hysteresis, limit value monitor 1 0%

Manual
number
H934-997 (Unused)
H998 Drive number 0
H999 Establish factory setting 0

Manual
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H10_
H11_
H12_
H13_
H14_
H15_
H16_
H17_
H18_
H19_
H20_
H21_
H22_
H23_
H24_
H25_
H26_
H27_
H30_
H31_
H32_
H40_
H41_
H42_
H43_
H44_
H45_
H50_
H51_
H52_
H53_
H54_
H60_
H61_
H62_
H63_
H64_
H65_
H66_
H67_
H68_
H70_
H71_
H72_
H80_
H81_
H82_
H83_
H84_
H85_
H86_
H87_
H88_
H89_
H90_
H91_
H92_
H93_
H99_

Manual
Indexregister
—A—
Inverter enable 3-20; 6-17
Analog input 2-6
Analog output 2-7; 3-6 —K—
—B— KP-Adaption speed controler 3-13
Binary input 2-5 —L—

Binary output 2-5
Bracking control 3-20 LBA 6-3
Braking characteristic 3-33; 6-21 Limit value 3-15
Byte-serial input 3-10 Load distribution 3-37; 6-20
Bias 3-30
—C— Torque generation for slave 3-32
with same electrical torques 3-40
Communication with same output torques 3-41
Peer-to-Peer 2-10; 3-3 Local operation 3-18; 6-18
Service interface SS1 2-11 Inching 1 / inching 2 3-19; 6-18
to basic converter (CU) 2-9; 3-2; 6-9 Local setpoint 3-29; 6-20
to communication board (CB) 2-11; 3-3 Operating modes 6-18
Connectors 5-1 Selection 3-21
Bit quantities 5-2
Masking 5-3 —M—
Principle 5-1
Word quantities 5-1 Main setpoint 3-27; 6-19
Motorized potentiometer 3-16
—D—
—N—
Diagnostic LED 1-13
Diameter correction 6-20 Normal stop 3-19; 6-17
Droop 3-37; 6-20
Droop compensation 3-29 —P—
with same electrical torques 3-38
with same output torques 3-39 Parameter
Display parameter 4-1
Setting parameter 4-1
—E— PMU 6-19
Electrical off 3-19; 6-17 Powering-up 3-17; 6-17
Electronic-box 6-3 Pulse encoder 2-7
—F— —R—
Fast stop 3-19; 6-17 Ramp function generator
Fault messages 1-6 Central 6-19
External fault 6-18 Torque ramp function 3-34
Fault word 3-23 Triggerable ramp function 6-20
Fixed setpoint 3-35 Ramp-function generator
Freely available functions 3-35; 3-36 Central 3-27
Friction 6-21 Triggerable ramp-function 3-29
Friction characteristic 3-31 Ratios 3-28; 6-19
Regenerative feedback 3-19
—G—
—S—
Gearbox correction 6-20
Group control 3-21 Sampling times 1-14; 5-4
Setpoint enable 3-20; 6-17
—I— Setpoint smoothing 3-30
SIMADYN D 7-1
Inertia compensation 3-32; 6-21 Block structure 7-2
Installing the boards 6-2 Connectors 7-2
Siemens AG Sectional drive 1
Manual
Indexregister
Cross reference 7-2

Sheet structure 7-1
STRUC G 7-1
Symbolic monitor 7-3
SIMOLINK 1-3; 1-4; 3-16
SIMOVIS 6-23
Slack take-off 3-28; 6-19
Slack take-up 3-28; 6-19
Speed actual value 3-12; 6-19
Speed setpointt 3-30
Starting sequence 3-17
Status word
Freely available functions 3-36
Freely-definable 3-14
Generating 3-23
Technological control 3-26
Status word INPUT 3-12
Stretching 3-28; 6-19
Supplementary setpoint 3-28
Supplementary torque 3-32
Symbolic Monitor 6-16
—T—
Technological control 3-24
Actual values 3-24; 6-22
Controller 3-24; 6-22
Enabling 6-21
Setpoint 3-24; 6-22
Switching on 3-24
Technological parameters 6-16
Thumbwheel switch 3-9
—W—
Warning 3-23
External alarm 6-18
2 Siemens AG Sectional drive

Manual
Die STRUC G Pläne sind aus der Betriebsanleitung „Mehrmotorenantrieb MS360“
zu entnehmen.
STRUC G function diagrams - refere to the manual „Sectional Drive“.

08.96 477 407 4086 76
11.98 477 407 4186 76
04.99 477 407 4186 76

0 Warning information reviewed edition 2 04.99
2 T300 technology board Page: 1, 3, 10, 11, 12 12 04.99
3 Function description Page: 3, 9, 16, 36 42 04.99
Diagrams 36 11.98
4 Parameter list Page: 24 76 04.99
5 Connectors Page: 10, 11 14 04.99
6 Start-up reviewed edition 26 04.99
7 SIMADYN D functions Page: 3 6 04.99
8 Program example 4 11.98
Diagrams 30 11.98
9 Changes 2 11.98
10 Short parameter list, display parameter 6 11.98
11 Short parameter list / logbook 18 11.98
Indexregister reviewed edition 2 04.99
Appendix: STRUC G diagrams 136 11.98

MS380 POSITIONING
for T300 Technology Board
in SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES 6SE70/71
Manual
Edition 04.99 Order No. 6SE7087-6CX84-8AH1
This Manual is available in the following languages:
Language German
Order-No. 6SE7080-0CX84-8AH1
English
Contents
0 Definitions ................................................................................................................0-1
1 Overview...................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 General information ........................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Validity ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2.1 Hardware/Software requirement.................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.2 T300 technology module ............................................................................................................. 1-6
1.3 Ordering information ....................................................................................................... 1-8
1.4 Guidelines to use this Manual ......................................................................................... 1-9
1.5 Changes ....................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.6 Applications................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.6.1 Example of a linear axis ............................................................................................................ 1-12
1.6.2 Example of a rotary axis ............................................................................................................ 1-13
1.6.3 Example of a basic roll feed ...................................................................................................... 1-14
1.7 Functional scope ........................................................................................................... 1-15
1.8 Faults and fault messages/signals ................................................................................ 1-16
1.8.1 Diagnostic LEDs ........................................................................................................................ 1-16
1.8.2 Fault messages F116 to F131, alarm messages A097 to A112 ............................................... 1-17
1.9 Overview of the control signals ..................................................................................... 1-18
1.10 Overview of the status messages ............................................................................... 1-20
1.11 Configuring/engineering information ........................................................................... 1-23
1.11.1 Connecting-up control signals ................................................................................................. 1-23
1.11.2 Binary inputs ............................................................................................................................ 1-23
1.11.3 Pulse encoders, resolvers ....................................................................................................... 1-23
1.11.4 Maximum cable lengths........................................................................................................... 1-23
1.11.5 Commissioning ........................................................................................................................ 1-24
1.11.6 Limit switches .......................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.11.7 Mechanical brake .................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.12 Establishing the factory setting.................................................................................... 1-24
1.13 Parameterization with Simovis for Windows................................................................ 1-25
1.13.1 Creating the data base for a technology type. ......................................................................... 1-25
1.13.2 T300 parameterization............................................................................................................. 1-27
1.13.3 Important notes........................................................................................................................ 1-28
2 T300 technology board ...........................................................................................2-1

2.1 Hardware ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Parameterization ............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Interfaces and input/output terminals .............................................................................. 2-3
2.3.1 Binary input terminals .................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.2 Binary output terminals ................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.3.3 Analog input terminals ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.4 Analog output terminals............................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.5 Pulse encoder terminals .............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.6 Interface to the basic drive converter (CU).................................................................................. 2-6
2.3.7 Peer-to-peer interface (SS2) ....................................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.8 Serial interface for service (SS1)................................................................................................. 2-7
2.3.9 Interface to the CB communications board ................................................................................. 2-7
2.3.10 Replacing peer to peer using SIMOLINK .................................................................................. 2-8
Siemens AG MS380 Positioning I

Manual
Contents

3.1 Definitions........................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Mechanical initial position A and final position B ......................................................................... 3-3
3.1.2 Emergency limit switches A3 and B3........................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.3 Hardware limit switches A2 and B2 ............................................................................................. 3-4
3.1.4 Software limit switches A1 and B1............................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.5 Position values............................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.1.6 Velocity values ............................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.1.7 Hardware reference point ............................................................................................................ 3-5
3.1.8 Polarity ......................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.9 Software reference point.............................................................................................................. 3-8
3.1.10 Position reference values/actual values, normalized/scaled ..................................................... 3-8
3.2 Sampling times ................................................................................................................3-9
3.3 Inputs/outputs (diagrams A).............................................................................................3-9
3.3.1 Hardware-, software codes (diagram A1).................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.2 System error T300 ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.3 Communications with the CU (basic drive converter) (diagrams A1, A2) ................................. 3-10
3.3.4 Communications with CB (diagram A3)..................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.5 Communications via peer-to-peer (diagram A3) ....................................................................... 3-10
3.3.6 Binary inputs (diagram A4) ........................................................................................................ 3-10
3.3.7 Binary outputs (diagram A4) ...................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.8 Analog inputs (diagram A5) ....................................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.9 Analog outputs (diagram A5) ..................................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.10 Pulse encoder inputs (diagrams A6, A7) ................................................................................. 3-11
3.3.10.1 Normalization, pulse encoder inputs .................................................................................. 3-11
3.3.10.2 Hardware mode of the pulse encoder................................................................................ 3-13
3.3.10.3 Control word, pulse encoder .............................................................................................. 3-15
3.3.10.4 Switching versions, pulse encoder..................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.10.5 Positioning actual value from the NOVRAM ...................................................................... 3-17
3.3.10.6 Setting/resetting position actual values.............................................................................. 3-17
3.3.11 Generating the internal velocity actual value (diagram A8) ..................................................... 3-17
3.3.12 Generating the internal position actual value (diagram A8)..................................................... 3-18
3.3.13 Input from a thumbwheel switch (diagram A9) ........................................................................ 3-18
3.3.14 Byte-serial data input (diagram A9) ......................................................................................... 3-19
3.3.15 Generating the status word input/output (diagram A10).......................................................... 3-21
3.4 Open-loop control (diagrams B).....................................................................................3-22
3.4.1 Powering-up the drive (diagram B1) .......................................................................................... 3-22
3.4.2 Inching 1/2, speed controlled (diagram B1)............................................................................... 3-22
3.4.3 Inching 1/2, position-controlled (diagram B1) ............................................................................ 3-22
3.4.4 Power-down word / diagnostics word (diagram B1) .................................................................. 3-22
3.4.5 Standard stop / fast stop / electrical off (diagram B2) ............................................................... 3-23
3.4.6 Brake control (diagram B3)........................................................................................................ 3-23
3.4.7 Setpoint / inverter enable (diagram B3) ..................................................................................... 3-24
3.4.8 Generation of the fault word / alarm word (diagram B4)............................................................ 3-25
3.4.8.1 Fault suppression / alarm display......................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.8.2 Error, communications CB [F116]........................................................................................ 3-25
3.4.8.3 Error, communications CU [F117], [F080, F081, F082] ....................................................... 3-26
3.4.8.4 Error, peer-to-peer communications [F118] ......................................................................... 3-26
3.4.8.5 User error 1 [F119]............................................................................................................... 3-26
3.4.8.6 User error 2 [F120]............................................................................................................... 3-26
3.4.8.7 Tracking error outside the tolerance [F121] ......................................................................... 3-26
3.4.8.8 Overspeed fault, positive [F122] .......................................................................................... 3-26
3.4.8.9 Overspeed fault, negative [F123] ......................................................................................... 3-26
3.4.8.10 Fault, drive blocked [F124]................................................................................................. 3-26
3.4.8.11 Fault, pulse encoder [F125] ............................................................................................... 3-27
3.4.8.12 Fault, emergency limit switch A3 actuated [F126].............................................................. 3-27
3.4.8.13 Fault, emergency limit switch B3 actuated [F127].............................................................. 3-27
3.4.8.14 Referencing error [F128] .................................................................................................... 3-27
3.4.8.15 Incorrect reference point position [F129] ........................................................................... 3-27
3.4.8.16 Overflow, position actual value [F130] ............................................................................... 3-27
3.4.8.17 TR-Encoder transmission error [F131]............................................................................... 3-27
II Siemens AG MS380 Positioning

Manual
Contents
3.4.9 Fault acknowledgement (diagram B5)....................................................................................... 3-27

3.4.10 Generating the control status word (diagram B5).................................................................... 3-28
3.5 Referencing control (diagrams B6 to B9) ...................................................................... 3-29
3.5.1 Referencing with shutdown ....................................................................................................... 3-29
3.5.2 Flying referencing ...................................................................................................................... 3-29
3.5.3 Minimum approach path ............................................................................................................ 3-29
3.5.4 Various situations when referencing.......................................................................................... 3-30
3.5.5 Signal, drive has referenced (diagram B6) ................................................................................ 3-31
3.5.6 Referencing velocity / pre-contact to the reference point (diagram B7)) ................................... 3-31
3.5.7 Automatic post-referencing (diagram B7).................................................................................. 3-32
3.5.8 Referencing errors (diagram B7)............................................................................................... 3-32
3.5.9 Monitoring the reference point position (diagram B8)................................................................ 3-32
3.5.10 Status words, referencing control (diagram B10) .................................................................... 3-33
3.6 Setpoint generation, traversing data sets ...................................................................... 3-34
3.6.1 Selecting the traversing data sets ............................................................................................. 3-34
3.6.2 Correction factor (diagram C1).................................................................................................. 3-35
3.6.3 Fixed setpoints (reference values) (diagram C1) ...................................................................... 3-36
3.6.4 Generating position reference values (diagram C2).................................................................. 3-36
3.6.4.1 Relative positioning (diagram C2)........................................................................................ 3-36
3.6.4.2 Inching, position-controlled (diagram C2) ............................................................................ 3-37
3.6.5 Traversing data sets, position limit values X, Y, Z (diagram C4)............................................... 3-37
3.6.6 Traversing data set, software limit switches A1, B1 (diagram C5) ............................................ 3-37
3.6.7 Traversing data set, maximum velocity (diagram C5) ............................................................... 3-37
3.6.8 Traversing data set, drive play (diagram C5) ............................................................................ 3-38
3.6.9 Traversing data set, speed controller gain adaption (diagram C6) ........................................... 3-38
3.6.10 Traversing data sets, ramp-up/down time, position ramp-function generator (diagram C6)... 3-39
3.6.11 Traversing data set, rounding-off time constant, position ramp-function gener. (diagram C7) 3-39
3.6.12 Traversing data set, ramp-down ramp A2, B2 (diagram C7) ) ................................................ 3-39
3.6.13 Status word, reference value generation................................................................................. 3-39
3.7 Closed-loop position control (diagrams D)..................................................................... 3-40
3.7.1 Switching the position control in/out (diagram D1) .................................................................... 3-40
3.7.2 Position ramp-function generator (diagram D2) ........................................................................ 3-40
3.7.3 Integrating time, position control loop (diagram D2).................................................................. 3-42
3.7.4 Normalization, acceleration (diagram D2) ................................................................................. 3-43
3.7.5 Reference value generation for rotary axis (diagram D2) ......................................................... 3-43
3.7.6 Position controller, control structure (diagram D3) .................................................................... 3-44
3.7.7 Tracking error monitoring (diagram D5) .................................................................................... 3-46
3.7.8 Generating the torque reference value (diagram D3)................................................................ 3-47
3.7.8.1 Friction characteristic (diagram D3)..................................................................................... 3-47
3.7.8.2 Inertia compensation (diagram D3) ..................................................................................... 3-48
3.7.9 Setpoint generation, speed-controlled modes (diagram D4)..................................................... 3-48
3.7.10 Status word, position control (diagram D5) ............................................................................. 3-49
3.7.10.1 Status bit, drive has positioned .......................................................................................... 3-49
3.8 Special functions (diagrams E)...................................................................................... 3-49
3.8.1 Motorized potentiometer (diagram E1) ...................................................................................... 3-49
3.8.2 Visualization parameters (diagram E1) ..................................................................................... 3-50
3.8.3 Limit value monitors (diagram E2)............................................................................................. 3-50
3.8.4 Generating a freely-definable status word (diagram E3) ........................................................... 3-50
3.8.5 Free functions............................................................................................................................ 3-50
3.8.6 NOVRAM assignment ............................................................................................................... 3-51
3.9 Function diagrams ........................................................................................................ 3-51
4 Parameter list...........................................................................................................4-1
4.1 General information ........................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 List of the display parameters...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 List of the setting parameters ...................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Parameter normalization ................................................................................................. 4-2
Siemens AG MS380 Positioning III

Manual
Contents
5 Connectors.............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 The connector principle ...................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Single-word quantities ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Double-word quantities ................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.3 Bit quantities ................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.4 Selection table for the masking ................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2 Connector list...................................................................................................................5-5
6 Start-up .................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Start-up, basic drive converter .........................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Parameterizing the basic drive converter for positioning ............................................................. 6-3
6.1.1.1 Parameterization for basic drives with CUVC and CUMC ..................................................... 6-4
6.1.1.2 Parameterization for basic drives with CU2 and CU3 ............................................................ 6-7
6.1.1.2.1 Use of the technology controller as a speed controller together with SIMOVERT SC ... 6-10
6.2 Commissioning the positioning ......................................................................................6-12
6.2.1 Preparatory parameterization .................................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.2 Open-loop control commissioning ............................................................................................. 6-13
6.2.3 Commissioning the open-loop referencing control .................................................................... 6-14
6.3 Optimizing the closed-loop control.................................................................................6-15
6.3.1 Optimizing with CUVC, CUMC .................................................................................................. 6-15
6.3.2 Optimizing with CU2, CU3 ......................................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.3 Optimizing the closed-loop speed control.................................................................................. 6-15
6.3.4 Optimizing the closed-loop position control ............................................................................... 6-16
6.3.5 Adjusting inertia compensation.................................................................................................. 6-17
6.3.6 Adjusting the setpoint smoothing............................................................................................... 6-18
6.3.6.1 Setpoint smoothing for the speed controller ........................................................................ 6-18
6.3.6.2 Setpoint smoothing for the position controller ...................................................................... 6-18
6.4 Free function blocks CUVC, CUMC ...............................................................................6-20
7 SIMADYN D functions............................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 STRUC G graphics..........................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Sheet structure ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.2 Block structure............................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 STRUC connectors...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.4 Cross-references ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Symbolic monitor .............................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.2.2 Operator control........................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 SIMADYN D value ranges and normalization...................................................................7-4
7.3.1 Proportional types ........................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3.2 Time-dependent types ................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.2.1 Time-proportional types ......................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.2.2 Time-reciprocal type............................................................................................................... 7-5
IV Siemens AG MS380 Positioning

Manual
Contents
8 Application/self-study example ..............................................................................8-1

8.1 Linear axis....................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.1 Loop schematic ........................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Connecting-up example............................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Equipment used in this particular example.................................................................................. 8-5
8.1.4 Switching sequences................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.4.1 Referencing with subsequent shutdown ................................................................................ 8-5
8.1.4.2 Positioning operation, illustrated in Fig. 5. ............................................................................. 8-7
8.1.5 Parameterization and start-up ..................................................................................................... 8-9
8.2 Example of a basic roll feed .......................................................................................... 8-11
8.2.1 System schematic ..................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.2 Setpoints and actual values as well as control-and status signal, PROFIBUS telegr. structure 8-13
8.2.3 Drive converters used in this example....................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.4 Switching sequences................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.2.5 Complete parameterization ....................................................................................................... 8-17
8.2.6 Brief start-up instructions........................................................................................................... 8-20
8.2.7 Possible faults/errors and counter-measures............................................................................ 8-21
8.3 Software example with communications........................................................................ 8-22
8.3.1 System configuration ................................................................................................................. 8-22
8.3.2 Parameterization ....................................................................................................................... 8-23
8.4 Connecting a pulse-serial absolute value encoder to the pulse encoder input .............. 8-27
8.4.1 Reason for the application......................................................................................................... 8-27
8.4.2 Mode of operation when the reference motion is replaced ....................................................... 8-27
8.4.3 Location, additional measuring systems which can be connected, dimension drawing............ 8-27
8.4.4 Features of the incremental-serial absolute value encoder....................................................... 8-27
8.4.5 Ordering and engineering information ....................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.5.1 General ordering information ............................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.5.2 Ordering and configuring the encoder ................................................................................. 8-28
8.4.6 Connection example:................................................................................................................. 8-29
8.4.6.1 Connection diagram CE-65-M to SE300/ T300 ................................................................... 8-29
8.4.6.2 Parameterization of the connection example:...................................................................... 8-30
8.4.7 Additional configuring instructions ............................................................................................. 8-31
8.4.8 Setting the encoder zero point................................................................................................... 8-34
8.4.9 Entering a setpoint offset........................................................................................................... 8-35
8.4.10 Possibilities of mouting the encoder to the motor.................................................................... 8-36
8.4.11 Parameterizing the encoder via PC/PG, connection diagram ................................................. 8-37
9 Short parameter list / logbook................................................................................9-1
10 Index .....................................................................................................................10-1
11 Appendix ..............................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Appendix A: Dimension Drawing of the TR-Electronic Absolut Value Encoder........... 11-1
11.2 Appendix B: SIMADYN D STRUC-G Function plans ................................................... 11-2
Siemens AG MS380 Positioning V

Manual
Contents
VI Siemens AG MS380 Positioning

Manual
0 Definitions
0 Definitions
WARNING
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation .
or property damage.
and maintenance.
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, a „Qualified person“ is someone who is familiar with
the installation, mounting, start-up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she
must have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in
accordance with established safety procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
3. Trained in rendering first aid.
• DANGER
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, „Danger“ indicates death, severe personal injury
and/or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken..
• WARNING
For the purpose of this User Manual and product labels, „Warning“ indicates death, severe personal
injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
• CAUTION
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, „Caution“ indicates that minor personal injury or
material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
• NOTE
For the purpose of this Manual, „Note“ indicates information about the product or the respective part of
the Manual which is essential to highlight.
Siemens AG MS380 Positioning 0-1

Manual
0 Definitions
CAUTION
WARNING
or property damage.
and maintenance.
must be observed.
NOTE
This Instruction Manual does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, not to provide for
every possibly contingency to be met in connection with the installation, operation or maintenance.
commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens.
The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens.
Any statements contained here do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.
0-2
Siemens AG MS380 Positioning
Manual
0 Definitions
CAUTION
Electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD)
• Electronic modules contain electrostatically sensitive devices that can easily be destroyed if they are
improperly handled. However, if your work does involve the handling of such devices, please ob-
serve the following information:
• Electronic modules should not be touched unless work has to be carried out on them.
• If it is essential for you to touch an electronic module, make sure that your body is electrostatically
discharged beforehand (EGB- Armband).
• Modules must not be allowed to come into contact with electrically insulating materials such as plas-
tic foil, insulating table tops or clothing made of synthetic fibers.
• Modules may only be set down or stored on electrically conducting surfaces.
• The soldering tip of soldering devices must be earthed before they are used on modules.
• Modules and electronic components should generally be packed in electrically conducting containers
(such as metallized plastic boxes or metal canisters) before being stored or shipped.
• If the use of non-conducting packing containers cannot be avoided, modules must be wrapped in a
conducting material before being put into such containers. Examples of such materials include
electrically conducting foam rubber or household aluminium foil.
• For easy reference, the protective measures necessary when dealing with electrostatic sensitive
devices are illustrated in the sketches below:
a = Conductive floor surface d = ESD overall
b = ESD table e = ESD chain
c = ESD shoes f = Cabinet grounding connection
d d d
b b e
e
f f f f f
c c
a a a
Seated Standing Sta nding / s itting

Manual
0 Definitions
0-4
Manual
1 Overview
1 Overview
There are various supplementary boards for 6SE70/71 SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES drive converters.
Communication boards (CBP/CB1, SCB1, SCB2) allow the drive to be coupled to an automation system,
or the drives to be coupled with one another. The drive functionality can be expanded by using technology
boards (T100 and T300).
The T300 Technology Board is a freely-configurable processor board with periphery (analog and binary
I/O, pulse encoder inputs, serial interfaces, dual port RAM to the drive converter etc.). It is configured us-
ing a configuring language (STRUC-L) in a list form, or with a graphic MMI (STRUC-G).
Standard software packages (programmed EPROM memory modules) are available for frequently re-
quired applications. Thus, no additional costs are incurred for engineering/configuring, testing or docu-
mentation. The modules can either be parameterized via the drive converter operator control panel, or
using SIMOVIS via a PC. When required, the standard software can be adapted or expanded for special
applications (up to STRUC V4.2).
1.2 Validity
This User Manual is valid for the standard ”Positioning ” MS380 software package, Release 1.32. Differ-
ences to the previous versions are listed in Section 1.5 ”Changes”.
With the exception of the expanded functionality, described in the ”Changes” section, this software release
is compatible to the previous releases. This is the reason that this Manual can be used for the start-up of
previous versions.
MS380 ” Positioning ” software package and they do not represent a general statement for SIMADYN#D
or the technology module. For instance, ”fastest cycle time 5 ms” only means that no faster cycle time
may be used in the MS380 standard software package.

Manual
1 Overview


the converter must not be increased above the factory setting value of
P761 = 5kHz to avoid overloading the convertre processor.
1-2 Siemens AG MS380 Positioning

Manual
1 Overview
The standard software packages can run with and without communication board (CB1/CBP or SCB1/2). In
this case the parameter H280 and H281 ( Alarm-/ Fault mask ) has to be set.


SCB1 board

possible!
- Example for Binectors-/ Connectors softwiring, please refere to Section 2.3.10
thrue all the serial Interfaces ( with the exception of Peer-to-Peer interface and SIMO-
LINK interface board).

Manual
1 Overview
electronics box.
Mounting Positions
1 3 2
A F Electronics
Box
Data Flow

- CUMC on ADB Adap-
tion Board
- CB1
- SCB1
- SCB2

must additionally be mounted in Slot "G" of an ADB Adaption Bord before inserted in mounting location
3. The T300 can not communicate with a communication board mounted on the CU (in slot A or C).

Manual
1 Overview



Manual
1 Overview
1.2.2 T300 technology module
compatible to SIMADYN D, and it has been especially designed for use with SIMOVERT MASTER-
DRIVES drive converters. The function of the modules is defined using the function block-oriented
STRUC L / STRUC G configuring language. The configured software which is generated is programmed
in a program memory sub-module, which is inserted on the processor module. An EEPROM is provided
on the program memory sub-module to save parameter changes (EEPROM = electrically write- and delet-
able memory). Communications with the basic drive is realized through a parallel interface, which is im-
plemented as DUAL PORT RAM (DPR).


1* RS485 (2- or 4 wire)

Manual
1 Overview
+24V +24V
Fine
pulse
+15V
Rough Zero Zero
+15V
X133
6
X5 7
501
+ A RS485, 2-wire
±10V 502 - D
T/Rx+
503 with PC / PG
+ 9
±10V A
504 - T/Rx-
505 RS485 interface
+ X132
±10V A can be used
506 - RxD 1
D TTL
±10V 508 3
11 bits + sign - D
±10V / 10kΩ 4
511
±10V
+ A 5
512 - D X134
RS485, 4-wire
513 Microprocessor
+ A Tx+ 13
±10V 514 - CPU:
D Tx- 14
80C186
+ 20MHz Rx+ 11
516 - D Rx- 12
X6
15
+24V 610
11 bit + sign X5
+
601
D 509
602 A
510
603
24VDC D
520
8 mA typ )
D 521 11 Bit + sign
607 ±10V / 10mA
A
608 522
D 523
+24V 630
A
524
+
611 X6
612
memory 631
613 module, e.g.
632
8 binary inputs 614
MS300
24VDC 633
634 24VDC / max. 100mA.
8mA typ)
635
636
638
640
1/2 LBA 1/2 LBA MASTER DRIVES

Communication-
board, e.g. Dual- basic drive conv.
Dual-
or SCB2
X135 X137

Fig. 1.2.2

Manual
1 Overview
1.3 Ordering information

The following table provides an overview of the components required to operate an SIMOVERT MASTER-
DRIVES with the basic modules CUVC and CUMC as well as CU2 and CU3 with the standard MS380
positioning software package.
including SC58 and SC60 connecting cables,
SE300 terminal block
hardware Instruction Manual, German / English
LBA local bus adapter Is also used to install a com- 6SE7090-0XX84-4HA0
for MASTER DRIVES- electronics box munications board
ADB adaption board Is used to install a communi- 6SE7090-0XX84-0KA0
for mounting the CBP board cations board
MS380 Positioning Observe the information 6SE7098-8XX84-0AH0
Standard Software Package on a memory below
module without Manual
Positioning Manual German 6SE7080-0CX84-8AH1
English 6SE7087-6CX84-8AH1
The technology board components can also be individually ordered as spare parts:

Hardware Instruction Manual, T300 technology board 6SE7087-6CX84-0AH1
German / English
SC58 connecting cable 6DD3461-0AB0
SC60 connecting cable 6DD3461-0AE0
− STRUC G PT to implement your own functions in a graphic form. This can run on a PC under
SCO-UNIX.
Refer to next table or Catalog DA65.10 for more precise information.
Note:
The memory module can be identified as follows:
A label is glued to the rear of the device with the Order No. 6SE7098-8XX84-0AH0
On the front, on the EPROM device, there is a label with the following inscription:
MS380 Vx.y (e.g. V1.3)

Manual
1 Overview
Standard software package on floppy disk

(designation, MD380). When required, the angular synchronous control function can be adapted to speci-
fic requirements using conventional SIMADYN D resources.

1
disk
required
1.4 Guidelines to use this Manual

Section Subject Notes
1 Overview and application instructions for the
MS380 Positioning Software Package.
2 Installing the T300 Technology Board and Detailed information in the T300 Instruction
the MS300 EPROM module. Manual. Example to connect-up positioning, in
Section 8.
3 Function diagrams and The function diagram shows the complete
function description configuring of the MS380. Further, the con-
necting terminals and data transfer routes to
the basic drive converter are shown. This is
important information for configuring and
commissioning the system.
4 Parameter list Also important as supplementary information
to the function diagrams in Section 3.
5 Connector list (freely-connectable signals)
6 Commissioning When commissioning the basic drive convert-
ers, the Instruction Manuals of SIMOVERT
DC and VC should be used.
7 SIMADYN D functions Only for users, who wish to modify the Stan-
dard Software Package, or for detailed infor-
mation. Detailed information is provided in the
Manuals for the digital SIMADYN D control
system.
8 Engineering/configuring examples Entry into positioning using practical exam-
ples.
9 Short parameter list/log book Plant/system documentation log book.
A list of the selected/set parameters can also
be generated using SIMOVIS.
10 Index

Manual
1 Overview
1.5 Changes
The version has a code, which can be read-out in display parameter d002.
Version Comment
0.1 Pilot version
1.0 Series (standard) version
1.1 Improved characteristics for rotary-axis applications.

The drive is powered-down when the referencing command is withdrawn.
Simulation of the control bits from CB with H104
Positioning reference input, also as word-format quantity with H359
Minimum approach path can be entered, independently of the drive play using H312.
Factory setting for H164=60
New fault messages, incorrect position reference point and pulse encoder sensing over-
flow.
Settable PT1 elements for V set, P set, P act.
Factory setting for H702=90, H703=10h
Additional condition for drive has positioned: V act=0
Analog inputs from T1 to T2
Analog outputs from T1 to T2
Relative positioning improved
Parameterization, upread and download possible via SIMOVIS.
1.2 Support, TR encoder
H335 = Operation with TR encoder
H336, H337 = TR encoder, load output
H338, H339 = Referencing, TR encoder (manual)
H340 = Delay time for loading after zero speed and inverter inhibit
H341 = Maximum load time
The position actual value is saved when changing-over to relative positioning
Step input to optimize position controller H728
Error message F131: Loading error absolute encoder.

Manual
1 Overview
1.3 Pre-control, speed setpoint which can be disabled using H739.
The zero pulse enable for pulse encoder sensing 2 can be controlled via connector:
H141: Source, zero pulse evaluation enable
H142: Mask, zero pulse evaluation enable
Brake control:
At power-on, the speed controller is immediately enabled; the speed setpoint after the time
entered in H243. At power-off, the speed setpoint is inhibited; the speed controller is only
inhibited after the time entered in H244 has expired. Thus, there are no torque-free phases
when powering-up and powering-down.
Extremely long times (>≈2 000 000[ms]) can be entered using the range changeover with
H719.
The enable control for reference point with parameter H172 has been eliminated.
The position actual smoothing H729 has been eliminated. When required, the speed set-
point smoothing in the basic drive converter can be used.
Extending the rotary axis function for roll feed

The rotary axis can be endlessly operated without using a reference point. Using parame-
ter H474 it can be defined as to whether
a) in the "relative positioning" mode, the internal position reference value is reset to the
position actual value each time the system is powered-up
b) in the "relative positioning" mode, the internal position reference value is kept. This
means that errors are not summed at power-on and power-off.
Tracking error of the positioning controller, scaled in connector K208 and parameter D075.
Extended tracking error monitoring:

H741= Tolerance limit for tracking errors
H745= Delay time for tracking errors
Error message F121: tracking error outside the tolerance
The "drive has positioned" signal is only output if the software limit switch has not been
actuated (violated).
Load equalization for hoisting drives (i.e. cranes): The source can be selected in parame-
ter H746.
TR encoder control: The load operation is aborted, if loading is already active when the
unit is running-up.
1.31 Position reference value transfer (parameters H464, H465) has been shifted into T2.
1.32 Time delay after the magnetising is finished bevor the signal break open is given

Manual
1 Overview
1.6 Applications
Drive converters equipped with the technology module, have the required functionality to establish posi-
tioning functions for rotary- or linear axes. The module can also be used without any supplementary auto-
mation as the open-loop control is integrated on the module.
In the following examples, the encoder (encoder for SC, or pulse encoder for VC) are mounted on the
motor shaft. An additional pulse encoder can be mounted on the machine component which is to be posi-
tioned, so that the position actual value can be sensed without mechanical play, torsional effects etc.
1.6.1 Example of a linear axis
A traversing slide is positioned via toothed belts.
A possible system configuration is shown below:
Automation
system
PROFIBUS, USS
Coupling to
the automation
system (option) CB CB CB
SCB SCB SCB
Drive-related Peer-to-peer Peer-to-peer

open- and T300 T300 T300
closed-loop control setpoints setpoints
6SE70
power section
M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
Process
level
Linear axis
Slide
Data can be directly transferred between the drives via the peer-to-peer coupling. This data can include,
for example, control signals for slave drives or positioning values for multi-axis positioning systems.

Manual
1 Overview
1.6.2 Example of a rotary axis

Material is transported to a rotating platform via a conveyor belt. The material is then positioned for further
processing and transport.
A possible system configuration is shown below.
A uto m at io n syste m
T 300
M
3~
P ro ce s s
lev e l
Rota ry ax is
D isc ha rg e be lt E nt ry be lt
Mate ria l process ing/ ha nd ling

Manual
1 Overview
1.6.3 Example of a basic roll feed

From a winding device the preselected lenght is drawed off.
Automation system
T300
M
3~
Process
level
Roll feed e.g. Press

Manual
1 Overview
1.7 Functional scope

The functions included in the module are as follows:
• Signal input / output
- 7 freely-available analog inputs
- 4 freely-available analog outputs
- 16 freely-available binary inputs
- 8 freely-available binary outputs
- peer-to-peer coupling for fast master-slave applications

- serial interface for diagnostics using the SIMADYN D service / diagnostics program via PC/PG
- 2 pulse encoder sensing inputs, can be set / reset
- absolute encoder support (TR ELECTRONIC company)
for absolute positioning without referencing travel
- setpoint input via byte-serial input
- setpoint input via thumbwheel switch
• Open-loop drive control
- evaluation of hardware limit switches / emergency limit switches
- power-on / power-off control
- 2 x inching, closed-loop speed controlled, 2 x inching, position controlled
- 3 closed-loop speed controlled modes
- brake control
- fault monitoring (pulse encoder, communications, anti-stall protection)
• Referencing control
- referencing with shutdown
- flying referencing
- automatic post referencing
- reference direction selection
- taking into account the shortest approach path
- reference point monitoring
• Traversing data sets for:
- 100 fixed position reference values or variable reference value from the communications system
- 3 x 6 position limiting values for the limit value monitor
- 6 x software limits
- 6 x maximum speeds/velocities
- 6 x adaption factors, closed-loop speed control
- 6 x drive play
- 6 x ramp-up/ramp-down times for ramp-function generators
- 6 x rounding-off functions for ramp-function generators
- 6 x down ramps when a limit switch is activated
• Closed-loop position control
- linear- or rotary axis
- absolute or relative positioning
- position ramp-function generator with rounding-off function
- position controller with P- or PI characteristics
- friction compensation
- automatic load measurement
• Special functions
- motorized potentiometer function
- 4 x limit value monitor for position limit values
- 4 x limit value monitor, freely-connectable
- freely-definable status word

Manual
1 Overview
1.8 Faults and fault messages/signals

1.8.1 Diagnostic LEDs
Three diagnostic LEDs are provided on the technology board.
The red and yellow LEDs must always flash if the standard software package is to be used. The green
LED must additionally flash if a communications board is used.
Red LED
The red LED flashes if the technology board software is running.
If the red LED does not flash although the drive converter is powered-up, then one of the following faults
could be present:
Fault cause Remedy
Defective technology board / LED Replace board
Board incorrectly or not completely inserted Insert the board in the right slot and screw into place
Defective LBA Replace the LBA
Memory module failed or not programmed also refer to Replace the memory module
the information below. (also refer to Section 1.3)
Yellow LED
The yellow LED flashes if the technology board is communicating with the basic drive converter (CU).
If the red LED flashes, but not the yellow LED, then one of the following faults may be present:
Fault cause Remedy
Defective technology board (DPR) / LED Replace the board
CUVC, CUMC: Basic drive has not recognized the T300. CUVC, CUMC: Replace the CUVC, CUMC / T300.
CU2, CU3: T300 not logged-on in the basic drive or not CU2, CU3: Log-on T300, refer to Section 6 or replace
recognized. CU2, CU3 / T300
place
Green LED
The green LED flashes, when the technology board is communicating with the communications board .
If the red LED flashes but the green LED does not flash, then one of the following faults may be present:
Fault cause Remedy
Technology module/LED or communications module Replace the board
failed
CUVC, CUMC: T300 has not recognized the CBP. CUVC, CUMC: Replace T300 or CBP
CU2, CU3: T300 not logged-on in the basic drive or not CU2, CU3: Log-on T300, CB1, refer to Section 6 or
recognized. replace T300 or CB1
Board T300 incorrectly or not completely inserted Insert the board into the correct slot and screw into
place
Communications board incorrectly or not completely Insert the board into the correct slot and screw into
inserted place
Note:
The red LED must always flash if the technology board is O. K. CU2, CU3: The yellow and green LEDs
only start to flash if the hardware setting (P052=4) has been completed.
The MS380 memory module is identified by the Order No. on the PC board, refer to Section 1.3 and on
the "MS 380 V1.xy" label on one of the components.

Manual
1 Overview
1.8.2 Fault messages F116 to F131, alarm messages A097 to A112

Fault messages/signals are transferred to the basic drive converter from the technology board. They are
indicated as faults F116 to F131 on the basic drive converter. Alarms are also transferred, which are dis-
played as alarms A097 to A112.
The following table provides an overview
Fault Alarm Designation Cause

No. No.
F116 A097 Error, CB communications Communications board incorrectly in-
serted/not inserted or not provided *).
No valid telegrams are received.
Word 1 (main control word): all bits = 0 (at
least 1 bit ≠ 0).
F117 A098 Error, CU communications Communications to the basic drive con-

verter faulted
F118 A099 Error, peer-to-peer communications No valid telegram is received from the peer
to peer coupling or the coupling is not
used *).
F119 A100 User error/fault 1 Parameterized error signal from the user
F120 A101 User error/fault 2 Parameterized error signal from the user
F121 A102 Tracking error outside the tolerance The error is generated if the difference
between the position reference value and
the actual value exceeds the limit value in
H741 and the delay time in H745 has ex-
pired.
F122 A103 Overspeed, positive Speed actual value > pos. limit value
F123 A104 Overspeed, negative Speed actual value < neg. limit value
F124 A105 Drive stalled/blocked Drive does not rotate although setpoint and
torque available.
F125 A106 Pulse encoder fault Difference between the pulse encoder
sensing of the basic drive converter and
the technology board out of tolerance.
F126 A107 Emergency limit switch A3 actuated
F127 A108 Emergency limit switch B3 actuated
F128 A109 Referencing fault Reference point wasn’t found when refer-
encing
F129 A110 Reference point incorrect / not identi- Referencing point at the incorrect position
fied or not identified when positioning
The permissible numerical range of ±2
31
F130 A111 Position actual value overflow
pulses was exceeded.
F131 A112 Loading error, absolute encoder Only for operation with absolute encoder,
loading was neither able to started, exe-
cuted nor successfully completed.
Error messages which are not required, can be suppressed (H280) or displayed as alarm (H281).
*) No communications board inserted (e.g. CBP/CB1):
H280/H281: bit 0 = 0
Peer to peer not used: H280/H281: bit 2 = 0

Manual
1 Overview
1.9 Overview of the control signals

All of the control signals are subsequently tabulated. More detailed information is provided in the parame-
ter list in Section 4 as well as in the function description, Section 3.
Reset, position actual value 1 H131/H132

Set position actual value 1 H133/H134
Enable P act transfer from the NOVRAM H135
Reset position actual value 2 H136/H137
Set position actual value 2 H138/H139
Enable P act 2 transfer from the NOVRAM H140
Power-up H200/H201
Standard stop (OFF1) H202/H203
Electrical off (OFF2) H204/H205
Fast stop (OFF3) H206/H207
Inverter enable H208/H209
Setpoint enable to basic drive converter H210/H211
control word bit 1.6
Fault acknowledgement H212/H213
Inching 1, speed-controlled H214/H215
Inching 2, speed-controlled H216/H217
Closed-loop speed control 1 H218/H219
Inching 1, position-controlled H224/H225
Inching 2, position-controlled H226/H227
Hardware limit switch A2 H228/H229 For referencing and travel limit
Hardware limit switch B2 H230/H231 For referencing and travel limit
Emergency limit switch A3 H232/H233
Emergency limit switch B3 H234/H235
Enable holding brake control H240 Also operating brake possible
User error 1 H262/H263 Only enabled for drive on
User error 2 H264/H265 Only enabled for drive on
Referencing with power-down H300/H301

Flying referencing H302/H303
Automatic post referencing H304/H305
Pre-contact to the reference point H308/H309
Start direction when referencing H310/H311

Manual
1 Overview
Direction when passing the reference point Is defined by the polarity of the minimum
approach path
Operating mode, rotary axis H353

Operating mode, relative positioning H468/H469 Moves the drive through the specified posi-
tion reference value.
Relative positioning: H470/H471 Defines the traversing direction for relative
Forwards / reverse positioning.
Relative positioning: H472/H473 For a positive edge, the drive moves by the
Forwards inching specified position reference value.
Relative positioning: H474 Defines whether the internal reference value
memory for relative positioning is set to the
Reference value memory when
actual position at each power-on
synchronizing is enabled
External enable, position control 1 H700/H701
External enable, position control 2 H702/H703
Reverse traversing direction, rotary axis H704/H705 0=drive only rotates forwards
1=drive only rotates backwards
Traversing direction, direct rotary axis H706/H707 Drive determines the shortest path itself
Set motorized potentiometer H784/H785
Raise motorized potentiometer H786/H787
Lower motorized potentiometer H788/H789
MOP operating mode H790/H791 0=MOP, 1=ramp-function generator
Referencing, TR absolute encoder H338/H339 TR encoder loading is manually initiated

Positioning with the TR absolute encoder H335
TR encoder, load output H336/H337 TR encoder, load output

Manual
1 Overview
1.10 Overview of the status messages

The status messages which the positioning system can access are listed in the following tables. Espe-
cially important messages are highlighted in bold.
Status word, input/output (d031)

Zero pulse, pulse encoder 1 identified Bit 0 Or the reference point, when connected as zero
pulse.
Zero pulse, pulse encoder 2 identified Bit 1
Speed actual value > 0 (V>0) Bit 2
Speed actual value = 0 (V=0) Bit 3
Speed actual value < 0 (V<0) Bit 4
Traversing direction, pulse encoder 1 Bit 5 (0=pos., 1=neg.)
Traversing direction, pulse encoder 2 Bit 6 (0=pos., 1=neg.)
System error T300 Bit 9
Sending to CU O.K. Bit 10
Sending to CB O.K. Bit 11
Sending to peer-to-peer O.K. Bit 12
Receiving from CU O.K. Bit 13
Receiving from CB O.K. Bit 14
Receiving from peer-to-peer O.K. Bit 15
Status word, open-loop control (d041)

Braking Bit 3 Drive is braking after stop or fast stop
No braking Bit 4
Velocity actual value = 0 (V=0) Bit 5 V < Vmin
Drive powered-up Bit 6 Control bit on/stop for the basic drive converter
Drive not powered-up Bit 7
Drive not ready Bit 8
Internal inverter enable Bit 9
Internal setpoint enable Bit 10
Drive faulted Bit 12
Open holding/operating brake Bit 13
Close holding/operating brake Bit 14
Close brake at n=0 Bit 15

Manual
1 Overview
Status word 1, referencing control (d045)

Enable reference point Bit 0
(zero pulse) sensing
Referencing with power-down active Bit 1:
Flying referencing active Bit 2
Referencing mode active Bit 3:
Drive has referenced Bit 4
Drive has not referenced Bit 5
Crawl to the reference point Bit 6
Approach route, long approach path Bit 7
Approach route, short approach path Bit 8
Referencing direction B→A Bit 9
Referencing direction A→B Bit 10
Referencing direction O.K. Bit 11
Referencing direction not O.K. Bit 12
Hardware limit switch A2 reached Bit 13
Hardware limit switch B2 reached Bit 14
Referencing error Bit 15
Status word 2, referencing control (d046)

Error, reference point not/incorrectly identi- Bit 0
fied
Hardware limit switch A2 actuated Bit 1
Hardware limit switch B2 actuated Bit 2
Reference point range O.K. Bit 3
TR encoder: Loading requested Bit 7
TR encoder: Loading active Bit 8
TR encoder: Encoder has referenced Bit 9
TR encoder: Load input Bit 10 Is used to connect to the TR encoder, load input
via binary output
TR encoder: Error, start of loading Bit 12 No checkback signal at the TR encoder load out-
put for a high signal at the TR encoder, load input
TR encoder: Error, loading Bit 13 Speed not identified for TR encoder, load
TR encoder: Max. load time exceeded Bit 14 The maximum load time, set in H341, was ex-
ceeded
Status word, reference value conditioning (d069)

Software limit A1 violated Bit 0 Traversing task was rejected
Software limit B1 violated Bit 1 Traversing task was rejected

Manual
1 Overview
Status word, position control (d081)

Tracking error outside the tolerance Bit 0
Tracking error within the tolerance Bit 1
Velocity setpoint > actual value Bit 2
Velocity setpoint = actual value Bit 3
Velocity setpoint < actual value Bit 4
Position reference value > actual value Bit 5
Position reference value = actual value Bit 6
Position reference value < actual value Bit 7
Position control enabled Bit 8
Speed-controlled operation Bit 9
Position controller at the upper limit Bit 10
Position controller at the lower limit Bit 11
Drive has positioned Bit 12
Status word, special functions (d086)

EEPROM is empty Bit 5
MOP : output = input Bit 6
MOP at the upper limit Bit 7
MOP at the lower limit Bit 8
Further, there are 4 limit value monitors for position values and 4 limit value monitors for other control
quantities, whose output signals are collected in two status words.

Manual
1 Overview
1.11 Configuring/engineering information

The most important configuring/engineering information is summarized in the following.
1.11.1 Connecting-up control signals

When the MS380 positioning software package is used, the control signals are connected to the T300, i.
e., they are not connected to the basic drive converter. The exception are signals which fulfill safety func-
tions.
These are:
- emergency stop
- emergency limit switch
1.11.2 Binary inputs
All of the T300 binary inputs can be individually inverted. Thus, every input signal can be implemented as
either an NC- or an NO contact.
1.11.3 Pulse encoders, resolvers
Generally, the incremental track signals of the motor encoder are fed via the backplane bus to the T300.
Information regarding CUMC with resolvers, if the resolver is also to output the position actual value for
the closed-loop positioning control:
An SBR2 (resolver evaluation with pulse encoder simulation) must be used. In this case at T300 board
with product stand ≥ 8 is also required.
The encoder, connected at the basic drive converter, can transfer signals instantaneously to the technol-
ogy board, i. e., the encoder is only connected once and is used by the basic drive converter for the speed
control and by the T300 for positioning.
Only if a second pulse encoder is mounted on the machine part to be positioned, is this directly connected
to the T300 via the SE300 terminal block.
Zero pulse, resolvers / encoders
Encoder: For encoders, the zero mark is optically generated as for a pulse encoder, and therefore
reproducibly defines the motor position.
Resolvers: For resolvers, the zero mark is a calculated help parameter. Only a two-pole resolver pro-
vides a motor position which can be reproduced, and can therefore be used just like an en-
coder. For multi-pole resolvers, the zero pulse cannot be practically used for positioning.
1.11.4 Maximum cable lengths
The subsequently specified values are system-confirmed guide values. If values are required, which lie
above the limit values specified here, then the equipment documentation and configuring information must
be observed. EMC-correct design and cable routing must be carefully implemented.
Caution:
By connecting reactors and filters in the motor feeder cable, the drive dynamic performance is reduced.
For this reason, the specified cable lengths and speeds for high dynamic requirements should not be ex-
ceeded.
SIMOVERT VC
The specified values refer to the 1PX8001-1 pulse encoders and the pulse encoders integrated in the
1PA- and 1PH motors.
Distance between the converter and motor : Less than 100 m for fmax = 120 kHz
CUMC/CU3:
Resolver: Distance between the converter and motor : Less than 100 m for nmax = 3000 RPM
Encoder: Distance between the converter and motor : Less than 100 m for nmax = 3000 RPM
Information regarding the encoders / resolvers

- only use the original cable with the correct length.
- encoder signals may not be fed through terminals.

Manual
1 Overview
1.11.5 Commissioning
Parameterization
Parameterization is possible via the drive converter operator control panel (PMU), however this is not
particularly user-friendly. Thus, for faster and more reliable parameterization, the operator control panel
OP1S (software release ≥2.1) / OP1 (software release ≥1.1) should be used with plain text display or PC-
based SIMOVIS.
Basic/reserve setting
In practice, it has been proven, that the basic drive converter should be parameterized, so that after the
changeover from the basic to the reserve setting (or changeover the BICO data set), the drive can be
operated without positioning.
1.11.6 Limit switches

The limit switch signals should be implemented, so that they always supply a range signal up to the me-
chanical endstop. This can either be achieved by using an appropriately long actuator or by using
changeover switches, which, after being actuated, supply a steady-state one- or zero signal.
1.11.7 Mechanical brake

The drive coasts down when the drive converter fails either as result of an internal fault or power failure.
This means that if the drive is transversing, it can no longer be braked to a standstill. A mechanical brake
is mounted on the motor or on the machine part to be positioned thus preventing hazardous conditions
from developing.
1.12 Establishing the factory setting

All of the changed technology board parameters are stored on the EEPROM of the MS300 memory mod-
ule. This means, that when the board is replaced, the parameterized module can be transferred. It is not
necessary to re-enter the parameters.
The establish factory setting function deletes the data in the EEPROM. The next time the board runs-up,
the values in the EPROM are transferred. In this case, parameter H998 must have the value 165, and
then 0 must then be re-entered.
Note See also section 1.13
After the value has been entered to establish the factory setting, at first, the parameter settings are re-
tained. To transfer the factory setting, the unit must be powered-down and up again.

Manual
1 Overview

Preconditions:
settings.
procedure SIMOVIS also generates a file (by upreading), which is interpreted during offline mode to be the
factory setting of a technology type. This file is used for example:
be printed.
CU2 or CU3: parameters P90 or P91) the „learning“ process will only start if the technology board is regi-
stered.

Manual
1 Overview
Proceed as follows:
green colour.

The technology type T300 to be learned does not make use of parameters 3000 ...3999, deacti-
vate the checkbox „L/c parameters“. The „learning“ time will then be significantly reduced.
-The following „learn“ process will take several minutes. Progress can be monitored in the displayed dialo-
gue. Upon successful completion, the new technology type is available for all drives (which have a slot for
technology boards) in the Add drive or Change drive dialogue. The drive should now be disconnected, and
the new technology type selected in the „Change drive“ dialogue.
Note: Should errors be detected at the end of the learn procedure, then further information can be dis-
played by clicking on the „details“ button. The cause of the errors (e.g. restricted parameter access)

Manual
1 Overview



Manual
1 Overview
tab.
Empirical values:
Note 2: Disconnect other drives (if available) to reduce the time required for the „learning process“.
Note 4: When using the MS380 module only the parameters which have been changed should be
downloaded via a comparison file and not the complete parameter set. Trying to download
the complete parameter set will result in non-volatile memory overflow. SIMOVIS will
generate the following error message when the memory is full „Error when writing“.
- Overflow of the non-volatile memory

The non-volatile memory is full when no more parameters may be written to the memory.
How to proceed in this case:
Establish the factory setting (H998).
Create a comparison file.
Download this comparison file

Manual

The T300 technology board is a configurable microprocessor board to implement drive-related technologi-
cal open- and closed-loop control tasks. It has memory for programs and parameters as well as interfaces
to the process.
2.1 Hardware
The board is a microprocessor board with an 80C186 CPU, which is clocked with 20MHz. 128kbyte RAM
for the user program, 1kword dual port RAM for CU communications and various interfaces are also avail-
able. A special real time operating system, in conjunction with the CPU performance, permits extremely
fast closed-loop controls to be implemented with short response times, but with simultaneous stable and
reliable operation.
Handle (Component side)

LEDs
Boot jumper X130
(presently no function)
Acknowledge button S3
X137
X131

S1
X132 (5 pin Minicombicon) 64 pin plug connector

EPROM
memory
module X135
X136
X 13 1 : A na lo g inp uts , o ut p uts , s pe e d in p uts

X 132 : RS 2 32 (S IMA DY N D se rv ice - , sta rt-up p rog ra m )
X 134 : 4 -w ire R S 4 8 5 (pe e r-to -pe e r)
X 13 6 : B ina ry in p uts/o utp uts
X 13 5 : D ua l p o rt RA M inte rfa ce to t he C O M bo a rd (e . g . C B 1/C B P)
X 137 : D ua l po rt RA M inte rfa ce to the bas ic d riv e co nv e rte r (C U )
The drive converter must be equipped with a local bus adapter (LBA) so that the board can be used. This
local bus adapter (LBA) is inserted in the electronics box, and provides the mechanical guides for the sup-
plementary boards and also the electrical connection to the drive converter through a bus PC board. The
board is powered through this connection and also communications are established to the drive converter.
Further, the pulses of the encoder, connected at CUx, are available there, and can be evaluated on the
T300.
The connection to the periphery must be established using the SE300 terminal block, which is connected
via two coded, 2 m shielded round cables SC58 and SC60.
LEDs are provided on the terminal block, which indicate the statuses of the binary I/O. Binary signals,
analog signals and pulse encoder are connected through screw terminals. Additional terminals are not
required (e. g. terminals on a top-hat mounting rail in the cabinet).

Manual
2 T300 Technology board
The T300 has two serial communication interfaces SS1 and SS2. SS1 is configured for diagnostics and
commissioning; SS2 is used for the peer-to-peer coupling. The cables are connected directly at the T300
at the plug-in terminals.
Three LEDs are provided on the T300 for diagnostics. When they flash this indicates that the unit is oper-
ating correctly, and are assigned to the T300 itself (red LED), communications to the CU (yellow LED) and
communications to the CB (green LED). A system error message can be reset using the acknowledge
button.
Several watchdogs are provided to monitor the correct functioning. The hardware (ready signal delay
when hardware is accessed, double address coding errors, access to non-existent addresses) and the
software (cyclic operation, interrupt control of the interfaces, timer and inputs) are monitored.
If faults/errors are identified, then an NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt) is generated. The processor attempts
to remove the fault/error cause, and to return to cyclic operation. If this is not successful, the board is de-
activated. This means that the processor is stopped, and the drive is powered-down with a fault sig-
nal/message.
2.2 Parameterization
If the board is inserted in the electronics box (CUVC, CUMC) and also logged-on (CU2, CU3: basic drive
converter parameter P090=2), the technology board and the standard software package are parameter-
ized using the same resources, which are also available for the basic MASTER DRIVES drive converter.
These are:
♦ the drive converter operator control panel PMU (restricted for MS380, refer to the configuring
information)
♦ the OP1 or OP1S operator control panel
♦ the drive converter service program SIMOVIS on PC/PG
2-2 MS380 Positioning Siemens AG

Manual
2.3 Interfaces and input/output terminals

The following block diagram shows the internal T300 functions as well as the various connections:
..... .....
CBP/CB1 6SE70
Speed, Speed,
or 16 binary 7 a nalog 2 serial or
position position
S CB1 inputs inputs interfaces
or sensing sensing RS232/RS485 6 SE 71
1 2
SCB2 Position difference
green Base
CO M O K H2 electronics
red board
TECH OK H1 (CU)
yellow
BA SE O K H3 T300 NOVRAM
X305 non-volatile µ P 80C186 X137 X107
operating data 20MHz
memory
DPRAM DPRAM
X135
Interface 256 k b yte 2 k b yte *

board 15V, 100mA 128 k byte • 16 EEPROM
8 binary 4 analog RAM p r o g r a m can be
(optional) for pulse
outputs outputs m e m o r y changed
encoder for start-up
..... .....
* Plug-in memory module
The connector assignments and the technical data of the inputs and outputs are listed in the following
Sections. Only the data which are specified in the actual T300 Instruction Manual are binding.
2.3.1 Binary input terminals

Binary signals have a 24V DC signal level referred to M24 (terminals 610, 630 or 640 on SE300).
T300
SE300
Power
supply
Signal level converter
24V DC
M24 M24
An open-circuit input is a logical zero. The inputs can identify a low signal level, also below +6V. High sig-
nal levels are voltages between 13V and 33V. The input current at 24V is typically approx. 8mA, the delay
time, approx. 1ms.

Manual
2.3.2 Binary output terminals

The binary outputs are also 24V DC signals with reference to M24 (terminals 610, 630 or 640 on SE300).
They are supplied from the P24 terminals (609, 619 or 639).
T300 SE300
P24 P24
Power section
24V DC
Driver
Load
M24 M24
Each of the 8 outputs (terminals 631 to 638) can drive between 0.2mA and 100mA, which is sufficient to
control small signaling lamps or coupling relays. A free-wheeling diode is provided on the T300, whereby it
is recommended that a free-wheeling diode is directly connected to inductive loads. Further, the outputs
have electronic short-circuit protection to ground and P24. The total loading of all of the outputs may not
exceed 400mA; the operating voltage range is between +20V and +30V. The switching delay is approx.
300µs.
Note:
isolation! When the permissible signal level is exceeded, the input and output stages can be damaged, as
well as the complete board itself!
2.3.3 Analog input terminals

The analog input stages are differential inputs to suppress common-mode noise. Thus, the reference po-
tential is not connected to the internal ground, and must be individually connected. It should be ensured,
that the voltages at the terminals for the signal and reference potential are not greater than +/-20V!
SE300 T300
S ign al
referen c e 10k
D ifferen c e g ener ator
The inputs have a filter with a 1.5 kHz corner (transition) frequency, and a typical input resistance of 10kΩ.
The resolution is 12 bits (corresponding to 4.9mV) over the complete input voltage range of +/-10V for a
linearity of ≤1LSB. The absolute accuracy is +/-3LSB (3 least significant bits).
7 analog inputs are available.
Note:
It is recommended that an RC hardware filter is connected at the analog input terminals if there is noise on
the cables (also refer to the T300 Instruction Manual). In this case, the noise isn’t even digitized.
For problems involving the analog inputs, it should be checked as to whether each analog input is con-
nected to the reference terminal.

Manual
2.3.4 Analog output terminals

The analog outputs are drivers with a maximum current of +/-10mA and an internal resistance of 56Ω.
They can drive display instruments or couplers. They have a 12-bit resolution (corresponding to 4.9mV)
over the complete +/-10V range, with a linearity of ≤1LSB and are short-circuit proof to ground. They have
common reference potentials, which are connected with the electronics ground.
T300 SE 300
56 O hm
L o ad
D riv er
M 24 M2 4
The analog outputs have an undefined status when the system runs-up after the power is connected. The
output voltages are retained at reset or when the board develops a fault.
2.3.5 Pulse encoder terminals

The technology board includes evaluation electronic for two pulse encoders. Terminals are available for
each encoder for track A and track B as well as a zero track (synchronizing pulse). These are unipolar
inputs, which are not suitable for push-pull operation.
The offset between track A and track B must be 90°; a +/-20° deviation is tolerated. The maximum input
frequency is 400kHz. In this case, the pulses or intervals (t1 to t3) must be at least 1µs:
T ra c k A
T ra c k B
S y nc .
t2
t
t1 t3
The nominal signal level of the pulse encoder signals is 15V. 0V to 30V is permissible, whereby low sig-
nals are below 5V; signals over 8V are high high signals. When connected via SE300, the input current
per track is a maximum of 4mA. Pulse encoder types with supply voltages of between 15V and 24V can
be used. A 15V power supply voltage is available at terminals 540 (P15) and 539 (ground) of the SE300.
The maximum current is 100mA, which is generally only sufficient for one pulse encoder. When an exter-
nal power supply unit is used, it must be connected to the electronics ground.
T300 T 300
P 15 P 15
T rac k A T rac k A
T rac k B + T rac k B
S ync S ync
M 15 M 15
In tern al s up ply E xtern al s u pply

Manual
The speed actual value is positive if the rising edge of track B is realized when track A has a high signal,
and negative, for a low signal level.
P o s itiv e s p e e d : N e g a tiv e sp e e d :
T ra c k A T ra c k A
T ra c k B T ra c k B
t t
2.3.6 Interface to the basic drive converter (CU)

Communications to/from the drive converter is realized via a dual port RAM accommodated on the T300.
It permits the T300 and CU to simultaneously access data to be replaced.
16 words are transferred from the T300 to the CU, and the same number of words in the opposite direc-
tion. Physically, the connection is established via the rear plug connectors (-X137) when the T300 is in-
serted.
2.3.7 Peer-to-peer interface (SS2)

The serial interface (-X134) is hardware according to the RS 485 standard up to 115 kbit/s. For the peer-
to-peer coupling, the four-wire mode is used.
The bus terminating resistors can be activated using DIP switch S1, which must be activated at the last
receiving node. They are active, if switches S1.3 and S1.4 are set to ON.
The following rules should be observed when configuring a bus system:
Rule 1: Shielded cables (1 pair) should be used for the connections between T300’s without any inter-
mediate terminals. The shield should be connected at both ends to the SIMOVERT, at either the
housing or cabinet potential through the lowest possible impedance (using a shield clamp).
Rule 2: Only one conductor may be connected at the send terminals (+Tx/-Tx).
Rule 3: At the receiver terminals (+Rx/-Rx), either one conductor can be connected (in this case, the
terminating resistors must be switched-in), or two conductors (in this case, it is not permissible
that the terminating resistors are activated). In the first case, it involves a point-to-point connec-
tion; in the later case, a cascade (point-to-multi-point).
Rule 4: A cascade may include a maximum of 31 receivers.
The following diagram illustrates the connection assignment and the possible arrangements. Bus termina-
tion is required at the connectors designated with x.
X X X
-X 1 3 4 -X 1 3 4 -X 1 3 4 -X 1 3 4
R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M Point-to-point
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
-X 1 3 4
R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M
1 2 3 4 5 -X 1 3 4 -X 1 3 4 -X 1 3 4 X
R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M R x+ R x- T x+ T x- M Cascade
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Manual
2.3.8 Serial interface for service (SS1)

The serial interface is either RS 232 (-X132) or hardware, according to the RS 485 standard (two-wire) up
to 38400 baud (-X133). However, it is not possible that both connectors are simultaneously used. Bus
terminating resistors at -X133 can be activated using DIP switch S1, if switches S1.1 and S1.2 are set to
ON. For long cable lengths, they must available at the last receiver nodes.
Cable assignment, PC - X132
PC (9pin SU B -D ) T300 (M inicom bicon 5)

R xD 2 2 TxD
TxD 3 1 R xD
M 5 3 M
Cable assignment for PG7x0
PG (25pin SUB-D) T300 (Minicombicon 5)

RxD 3 2 TxD
TxD 2 1 RxD
M 7 3 M
2.3.9 Interface to the CB communications board

Communications to/from the communications board is realized via a dual port RAM on the communica-
tions board. It allows the T300 and communications board to simultaneously access the data to be trans-
ferred.
Presently the following can be used as communications board
• CBP/CB1 for PROFIBUS DP (SINEC L2 DP),

• SCB1 terminal expansion via SCI1 and SCI2
• SCB2 for the USS protocol via RS485,
A maximum of 10 words are transferred from the T300 to the communications board, and the same num-
ber in the opposite direction. Physically, the connection is established via the rear plug connector (-X135)
when the communications board is inserted.

Manual
2.3.10 Replacing peer to peer using SIMOLINK

In a multi-motor drive group with Compact Plus units, it is not possible to use peer to peer communica-
tions. However, it is possible to replace the peer to peer functionality using SIMOLINK on the CUVC and
CUMC modules.
Using the transfer of the maximum speed and the position limit value X via SIMOLINK as well as the op-
erating setpoint and output of the technology controller, we will briefly see how the basic drive and T300
should be parameterized. The SIMOLINK interface is inserted in slot A (upper slot). The example is the
same for CUVC and CUMC. It is assumed that the SIMOLINK was already commissioned in accordance
with the basic drive Instruction Manual (Compendium).
Setpoints from SIMOLINK to the T300 via the basic drive:

The maximum speed is available at connector K7001
The positive limit value X is available at connector K7002.
• Transfer to T300, refer to function diagram Sheet A1:
P734.6=7001: The maximum speed is available at receive word 6 from the CU.
P734.7=7002: The positive limit value X is available at receive word 7 from the CU.
• Connect the setpoints to the T300, refer to the function diagram, Sheets C5 and C4:
H550 = 15, select max. speed
H500 = 16, select pos. limit value X.
• Select the values on the T300, refer to the function diagram, Sheet A6, Sheet E1 as well as Sheet A1:
The position actual value (double word) [A6] is available at words 6 and 7 to CU [A1]: H956 = 62.;
H957 = 63
The motorized potentiometer output [E1] is available at word 3 to the CU [A1]: H953 = 249.
• Receive the values at the basic drive:
The position actual value is available as double word at KK3036.
The motorized potentiometer output is available at K3003.
• Connect to SIMOLINK:
P751.01=3036
P751.02=3036
P751.03=3003.
interface board. The correct hardware release code can be detected on the component side of the
T300 in the neighbourhood of the lower backplane connector.

Manual
The function description consists of a text part as well as the graphic documentation in the form of function
diagrams. The function diagrams allow configuring and commissioning (start-up) without using the text
description. The later is conceived as detailed information to the diagrams.
The function diagrams are structured as follows:
Function Contents
diagrams
A Signal input/output, signal conditioning
B Drive control
C Handling traversing data sets,

generating the position reference value
D Closed-loop position control
E Special functions
Note:
Knowledge regarding the connector principle is required in order to be able to understand the function
diagrams. This technique allows unified documentation to be generated with the highest level of flexibility.
It is described at the beginning of Section 5.

Manual
3.1 Definitions
The terminology, which is used in the function description, is now described.
Definition, linear axis:
A linear axis is characterized by the fact that the traversing path is limited in both directions. Positioning is
realized between points A and B. The traversing path is monitored using limit switches.
+V
A +P os B
V
A3 A2 A1 HW-RF P B1 B2 B3
SW-RF
H a rdw are referen c e poin t
A c tua l pos itio n
Definition, rotary axis

A rotary axis is characterized by the fact that there are no traversing path limits. The machine to be
positioned is at the initial point again after one revolution. The positioning task is always in the 0° to 360°
range. There are no hardware limit switches and emergency limit switch.
+V V
+P os
S W -R F
HW-RF H a rdw are referen c e poin t
A c tual position
A: Mechanical initial position of the linear axis

B: Mechanical end position of the linear axis
A3: Emergency limit switch A3

B3: Emergency limit switch B3
A2: Hardware limit switch A2

B2: Hardware limit switch B2
A1: Software limit switch A1

B1: Software limit switch B1
P: Actual position
HW-RF: Hardware reference point
SW-REF:Software reference point
V: Traversing velocity
Note:
A rotary axis with restricted traversing angle is treated just the same as a linear axis.

Manual
3.1.1 Mechanical initial position A and final position B

Initial position A is the mechanical endstop for the traversing direction between B and A, and the final
position B is the mechanical endstop for the traversing direction from A to B.
3.1.2 Emergency limit switches A3 and B3
Emergency limit switches A3 and B3 are used to bring the drive to a standstill, before the mechanical
endstop, when the closed-loop control fails (measuring error, incorrect parameterization). The emergency
limit switches should be implemented as range signal up to the mechanical endstop.
In order that the emergency limit switches act as quickly as possible, they must be directly connected to
the basic drive converter, where they initiate the fast stop (OFF3) function. Thus, the minimum response
time, and therefore the shortest deceleration distance is guaranteed. The signal must be available for at
least 4xT0 (CUVC, CUMC: T0 = 1/P340, for the factory setting, the following is valid for T0: CUVC = 400
µs or CUMC = 200 µs; CU2, CU3: T0 = P308, for the factory setting the following is valid for T0:
CU2 = 1,2 ms, for CU3 = 800 µs) so that it is recognized.
If the limit switches are connected in parallel to the technology board, then, in addition, fault /messages
F126 and F127 are generated. In this case, the signal must be available for longer than 10ms. When
switches A3, B3 respond, then power-on inhibit is realized, and must be acknowledged. As the signals
directly effect the basic drive converter, the fast stop (OFF3) is available until the drive is no longer located
in the emergency limit switch range. If the drive is to be moved, the limit switch signals for the basic drive
converter must be bypassed (key-actuated switch). However, the safety function is no longer effective, so
that only trained personal may move the drive. Alternatively, the basic drive converter can be
parameterized, so that the hardware limit switch can be ignored with a control signal. This is possible by
changing-over from the basic- to the reserve setting (or chnageover the BICO data set) with the
appropriate parameterization.
The limit switch position must be selected so that, for the maximum braking torque, the braking travel is
less than the distance to the mechanical endstop.
The emergency limit switches should be connected as follows:
CU2/CU3 T300
P560.001=1002
P560.001=0020
P559.001=1001
P559.001=0018
CUVC, CUMC
CUVC, CUMC
CUVC/CUMC
H235=800h
H233=400h
CU2, CU3
CU2, CU3
H234=45
H232=45
24V M BI1 / BI5 BI2 / BI6 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI1 BI2 BI3 M
-X101 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 613 614 615 630

CU2/
CU3
-X101 1 2 7 8 5 6 9
CUVC/
CUMC -A3 -K1
-A3 -B3
-B3 -S1
-A3 : Emergency limit switch A3

-B3 : Emergency limit switch B3
-K1 : Emergency stop
-S1 : Fast stop switch for commissioning
Warning
Fast stop is not possible when the T300 fails - the motor just coasts down. A mechanical brake must be
provided if this results in a hazardous situation/condition.

Manual
3.1.3 Hardware limit switches A2 and B2

Hardware limit switches A2 and B2 should be implemented so that they provide a signal over the complete
range from the limit switch up to the mechanical endstop. In this case, both NC as well as NO contacts
can be connected (refer to H102).
Depending on the particular mode, the hardware limit switches fulfill different functions:
a) Referencing mode
When referencing, the hardware limit switches are used to reverse the traversing direction. If the
reference point is not found in a traversing direction, when the hardware limit switch is reached, the
traversing direction is reversed. If a reference point is also not found in this direction, the drive shuts
down with a fault signal.
b) Position control mode
If the drive actuates the hardware limit switch in the closed-loop position controlled mode, a standard
stop is generated. In this case, the ramp-function generator is changed-over to the down ramp A2
(H640...H646) and B2 (H650...H656) from the traversing data set. The ramp times specified there must
be dimensioned so that the drive comes to a standstill before the emergency limit switch or mechanical
endstop. The drive is then again in the ready to power-up status, i. e. acknowledgement is not
required.
The ramp time is calculated as follows:
Hardware lim it switch A2 (B2)
V
M ax. trav ersing velocity
Down ram p t
2 ⋅ distance[limit_ switch ⇔ endstop]

Down_ ramp = ⋅ 0.8 (0.8= safety factor)
max_ traversing_ velocity
The drive can only be operated in the closed-loop speed controlled mode when the hardware limit switch
has been actuated. Thus, it is possible to re-reference, or to move out of the limit switch range with
inching, closed-loop speed controlled.
Note:
The limit switch signal must be available for at least 10ms so that it is identified.
Special case: Positioning beyond the hardware limit switch:
Sometimes, due to the mechanical design, the drive must be positioned after referencing, in the range
beyond the hardware limit switches. For this special case (possibly when the equipment is being
serviced), using H236=0, a stop can be prevented after the hardware limit switch has been actuated. In
order that the safety strategy remains intact, the maximum traversing velocity in the hardware limit switch
range must be limited up to the mechanical endstop. This is possible via H560/H561/H562, whereby the
maximum velocity must be selected, so that the drive comes to a standstill when the emergency limit
switch is reached, but still in front of the mechanical endstop.

Manual
3.1.4 Software limit switches A1 and B1

Software limit switches A1 and A2 prevent position reference values being input, which lie outside the
permissible traversing range; this means that the positioning range must always lie between software limit
switches A1 and B1. The software limit switches are only passed-over (actuated) when referencing. If a
reference value is entered, which lies outside the permissible traversing range, the reference value is not
accepted. In this case, the drive remains at the last specified position.
3.1.5 Position values

The position values always increase from A to B, i. e., the position actual value increases for a traversing
direction from A to B, and decreases from B to A.
3.1.6 Velocity values

A positive traversing direction always means that the drive moves from A to B; a negative traversing
direction means that the drive moves from B to A.
3.1.7 Hardware reference point

The hardware reference point is a contact, located in the traversing range, i. e. between limit switches A2
and B2. When this point is passed, the position actual value is set to the value specified in H531. The
value is the distance between the hardware reference point and the software reference point. If the
reference point was sensed at least once, then the drive absolute position is known. The reference point
search is executed for the referencing with shutdown and flying referencing functions.
Example for the reference point for a linear axis
P
A H W -R F B
Position reference/actual v alue
42 46
Hardware reference point for a rotary axis

For a rotary axis, the hardware reference point is specified positive in the range 0° to 180° , in the range
180° to 360° negative, i. e. -0° to -180°.

Manual
Example:
H ardw a re re fe re nc e p oin t at 90 ° H ard w a re re feren ce po in t a t 2 70 °
0° 0°
H W -R F 90° -90° H W -R F

Manual
3.1.8 Polarity
The following drawings provide an overview of the polarities which must be entered. In this case, it has
been assumed, that the software reference point is zero.
Case A
In case A, the drive moves, with a positive motor speed, in the direction A→B. The software reference
point should be at point A.
V P
A A1 H W -R F B1 B
200
4246
9800
10000
Case B
In case B, the drive moves, with a positive motor speed, in the direction A→B. The software reference
point should be at point B. However, this means, that the position actual value decreases when moving in
the direction B→A, i. e. is negative. Thus, the position reference- and actual values, as well as the limits,
must be entered as negative values.
V P
A A1 H W -R F B1 B
-200
-4246
-9800
-10000
Possibilities of not entering a negative position reference:
CUVC, CU2: Interchanging 2 motor phases and tracks A and B of the pulse encoder.
CUMC: Activate clockwise/counter clockwise in the control word.
CU3: This is practically not possible.

Manual
3.1.9 Software reference point

The software reference point defines the mechanical drive position when a position reference value of
zero is entered. It is practical to define the traversing distance, so that mechanical endstop A corresponds
to position zero.
3.1.10 Position reference values/actual values, normalized/scaled

There are two ways of representing the position reference- and actual values. The normalized notation is
for the closed-loop control; the scaled notation for setpoint input via parameter or communications
interface. The various notations are described in the following.
a) Normalized position values
The position controller operates exclusively with normalized values. Normalized values means that the
system does not calculate using absolute quantities (e. g. mm), but only with relative quantities (%)
referred to the maximum value. This has the advantage, that for the closed-loop control, it is irrelevant
as to whether positioning is in the µm- or km range. The maximum distance is defined via the pulse
encoder sensing parameterization.
b) Scaled position values
The scaled position values consist of a 16- or 32-bit fixed-point number. In this case, it is previously
agreed as to how this fixed-point number is to be interpretted. This is defined using parameter H350.
The integer number which corresponds to the maximum length is defined here.
For practical reasons, positioning is normalized to éven´ values. For example, if the maximum
mechanical traversing distance is 19.2m, then the pulse encoder sensing should be normalized to
20m.
For a positioning scaling, it is now important as to how accurate the position reference value should be
input. If the input must be accurate to 0.1mm, then 200000 (20000.0 mm) must be specified as scaling.
The reference value is entered as fixed-point number, without the decimal point.
If, for example, position reference value 9.2m (=9200.0mm) is to be entered, then the fixed-point
number 92000 must be entered. All positioning reference- and limit values are entered as scaled
quantities and all position actual values are displayed, scaled in the visualization parameters.
The following quantities are entered, scaled
Position reference values H361-H459

Setting values, pulse encoder H169 (H170)
evaluation
Software limit switches A1, B1 H530 to H536, H540 to H546
Inching reference values, position- H466, H467
controlled
Hardware reference point position H351
Enable window reference point H172
Position limit values, X, Y, Z H500 to H506, H510 to H516, H520 to H526
H820 to H829
Minimum approach path when H312
referencing
Drive play H590 to H596
For position actual values, in the function diagrams it is specified as to whether the quantity is normalized
or scaled.

Manual
3.2 Sampling times

The standard software package uses 5 different sampling times, which are designated by T1 to T5. Only
this code is used in the text. The assignment is as follows:
T1 5.0 [ms]
T2 10.0 [ms]
T3 40.0 [ms]
T4 160.0 [ms]
T5 640.0 [ms]
The sampling time defines in which time interval the particular function is "sampled" i. e. calculated. The
inputs and outputs of the function are updated at the start and end of the sampling interval (because the
sampling times are cyclically repeated, this is one and the same). However this can be put simply if you
consider that the complete sequence comprising of input, calculation and output are realized
simultaneously at an instant in time, and between these intervals, nothing happens. Thus, the term
sampling.
3.3 Inputs/outputs (diagrams A)

3.3.1 Hardware-, software codes (diagram A1)
In order to be able to identify the standard software packages, even with the equipment powered-up, there
are codes, which can be interrogated using display parameters.
a) Hardware code (d000)
indicates which technology board is inserted, T300=133
b) Software code (d001)
indicates the board standard software package, e. g. MS380=80.0
c) Version code (d002)
indicates the software release of the standard software package.
d) Drive code (d099)
indicates the drive for which the module was parameterized. The drive code must be entered into
parameter H997 at start-up. Thus, parameterized EPROM MS380 memory modules can be assigned
to a drive.
3.3.2 System error T300
The technology board operating system generates a system error word. The error word is displayed in
d003 and includes the following messages:
Bit Description Enable in H100 with
0 Fatal system error 0001
3 Task administrator error 0008
4 Monitor error 0010
5 Hardware monitoring responded 0020
6 Communications error 0040
For hardware faults, all of the T300 plug-in cables should be withdrawn. If the fault re-occurs after the unit
has been powered-down and up again, T300 should be replaced; this is also true if fatal system errors
occur.
A communications error occurs if a communications board is not inserted. In this case, it can be ignored.
When other system errors occur, the documentation of the digital SIMADYN D control system should be
referred to, as it involves a tested standard software package and these errors are of no significance to
the user.

Manual
3.3.3 Communications with the CU (basic drive converter) (diagrams A1, A2)
A maximum of 16 words can be received from the basic drive converter. The first 5 words are reserved for
the closed-loop control. All of the other words can be freely defined so that actual values can be evaluated
by the drive converter. The source of the actual values is defined by parameter P694 (CU2, CU3) and
P734 (CUVC, CUMC) in the basic drive converter. The index corresponds to the position in the telegram.
8 words are transferred from the technology board to the basic drive converter. Of these 8 words, 6 are
reserved for positioning and 2 can be freely-assigned by the user. The send words are available in the
basic unit as source CB/TB values 3001 to 3008.
Note:
If communications between the CU and the T300 are o.k., the yellow LED on the T300 flashes. If the
communications is faulted, fault messages F080/F081/F082 in the drive converter are activated. The data
interface is processed (dual port RAM) after the technology module and the CU have run-up, and for CU2,
CU3, the technology board is parameterized in P090.
The assignment of the control- and status words are listed on Page A2 of the function diagrams. In order
that individual bits of control words 1 and 2 (e. g. select motor data set) can still be entered from the
automation, there is a bypass function for control words 1 and 2. The control bits, generated by the
technology module, are OR’d with the bypass control words.
3.3.4 Communications with CB (diagram A3)

A maximum of 10 words can be received via a communications board (CB). The technology module has
access to these via connectors. For start-up and service, the communications board control word (word 1)
can be simulated using parameter H104. The control word from CB is inhibited for as long as a simulated
control word is entered.
The communications status is simulated in status word INPUT and can be determined via d031 and K079.
In addition, communications can also be checked via the diagnostics LEDs of the communications board.
3.3.5 Communications via peer-to-peer (diagram A3)

Peer-to-peer communications permits fast data transfer between two technology modules. In this case, 5
send- and receive words can be freely configured. The baud rate can be parameterized from 300 baud to
115200.
The communications status is specified in the status word INPUT, and can be determined via d031 and
K079.
3.3.6 Binary inputs (diagram A4)

The statuses of the binary inputs are read-in as word quantity. The individual binary signals from the
terminals can be inverted using H102 before these are deposited in K045. The status of the input signals
can be displayed using d009. Binary inputs 9 to 16 are additionally directly connected with the byte-serial
data input function. The bit inversion function is not effective for these. The connection and internal
structure of the binary inputs is described in Section 2.3.1. The binary inputs are processed in T2.
3.3.7 Binary outputs (diagram A4)

The 8 binary outputs are parameterized via parameters H900 to H916. Every internally generated control-
and status bit can be output at a binary output. Further, every binary output can be logically inverted. The
connection and internal structure of the binary outputs is described in Section 2.3.2. The binary outputs
are processed in T3. While the processor is being reset, the outputs are low.
Note:
isolation! If the permissible signal level is exceeded, the input or output stages can be destroyed as well
as the complete board itself!

Manual
3.3.8 Analog inputs (diagram A5)

7 analog inputs are available in various sampling times. The classification is as follows:
Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Sampling T2 T2 T3 T3 T4 T4 T5
time
Each analog input can be adapted with a smoothing as far as the range and offset are occurred. The
connection and internal structure of the analog inputs is described in Section 2.3.3.
3.3.9 Analog outputs (diagram A5)

Each control signal, defined as connector, can be output via one of the 4 analog outputs. In this case, it is
defined, via parameter, as to whether the relevant signal is to be output with sign or as absolute value,
and with which smoothing, offset and gain. The analog outputs are updated in the following sampling
times:
Sampling time T2 T2 T3 T3
Generally, for inputs and outputs the following assignment is true: ±100% corresponds to ±5V and ±200%
corresponds to ±10V. The connection and the internal structure of the analog outputs is described in
Section 2.3.4.
3.3.10 Pulse encoder inputs (diagrams A6, A7)

2 pulse encoders can be evaluated by the technology board. Each pulse encoder input supplies a speed-
and position actual value. The position measurement can be set and reset using a control bit. A control
input can instantaneously evaluate a reference point (zero pulse). The parameterization is separately
realized for both pulse encoder inputs. In this case the following information is required: The number of
pulses per revolution, rated speed, at which the measured speed actual value should be 100% as well as
the rated length at which the measured position actual value should be 100%. Further, there are 2 control
words which are used to define the pulse encoder input mode.
3.3.10.1 Normalization, pulse encoder inputs
Note
After the pulse encoder inputs have been parameterized, the unit must be powered-down and up again
so that the values are transferred (INIT values)
The number of encoder pulses per revolution (without quadrupling) are specified in parameter H151
(H156).
It is valid for the CUMC or CU3: Encoder: 2048 pulses / revolution. The following values are obtained for
resolvers: For CUMC (SBR2 required): Depending on the parameterization, 512 or 1024 pulses /
revolution. For CU3, 2048 pulses / revolution.
The rated speed H152 (H157) is the speed which the drive reaches at the rated traversing velocity.
For SIMOVERT SC (CU3), the value is entered as negative value.
The pulse encoder normalization H153 (H158) specifies how many quadrupled encoder pulses are
received when traversing the nominal length. For rotary axes, the number of pulses for one revolution of
the machine component to be positioned is entered.

Manual
Example: Linear axis

The following arrangement is to be normalized:
S lide
Pulse encoder: .......................... 1024 pulses per revolution

Gearbox: ................................... 1:10
Diameter of the drive roll:.......... 300 mm
Total traversing distance:.......... 20 m (= nominal length)
Note:
The pulse encoder sensing quadruples the pulses,
i. e. for one revolution, 4 x number of pulses per revolution are summed, and must therefore be taken into
account in the calculation.
The number of pulses received is calculated according to the following formula:
nominal_ length
Rated_ pulses = 4 ⋅ pulses_ per_ revolution ⋅ gearbox_ ratio ⋅
π ⋅ roll_ diameter
Using the values in the example, the following is obtained:

20 m
Rated _ pulses = 4 ⋅ 1024 ⋅ 10 ⋅
π ⋅ 0.3m
Rated _ pulses = 869198
869198 must be entered into parameter H153 (H158).

When scaling the position values, it is practical, if an éven´ value is used when normalizing the pulse
encoder. For example, if the actual traversing distance is 15.45m, then the nominal length should be
specified as 16m.
The pulse encoder evaluation operates internally with a 32-bit numerical value. This then results in a
maximum counting range (number range) of ±2 pulses.
31
Example: Rotary axis

The following arrangement is to be normalized:

Gearbox: ................................... 1:7
For rotary axes, the number of quadrupled encoder pulses is always entered, which are received for one
revolution of the part to be positioned.
The number of pulses received is calculated according to the following formula:
Rated _ pulses = 4 ⋅ pulses_ per _ revolution ⋅ gearbox _ ratio ⋅
The following is obtained with the values in the example:
Rated _ pulses = 4 ⋅ 1024 ⋅ 7

Rated _ pulses = 28672
28672 must be entered into parameter H153 (H158).

Manual
3.3.10.2 Hardware mode of the pulse encoder

The hardware mode of the pulse encoder evaluation is defined using parameter H150 (H155). The control
word is defined as follows:
Bits 0 to 3 Setting for the digital filter:

15 0
0: 500kHz 1: No filter 2: 2MHz

3: 500kHz 4: 126kHz 5: 62.5kHz
The digital filter allows noise signals to be suppressed. The filter is pre-set to 500kHz. If
this value is changed, the pulse encoder frequency at maximum speed must first be
determined. The filter setting must remain above this frequency. The maximum pulse
encoder frequency is calculated as follows:
H151( H156) ⋅ n max
f max =
60
Bits 4 to 7 Pulse encoder type:
15 0
0: Pulse encoder with two tracks displaced through 90° (standard)

1: Separate tracks for forward- and reverse pulses (special)
2: Zero pulse via LBA from the basic drive converter
4: Track A, track B via LBA from the basic drive converter
6: Tracks A, B and zero pulse via LBA from the basic drive converter
A pulse encoder, connected at the basic drive converter, must not be connected in parallel
to the technology board. The basic drive converter instantaneously provides the signals at
the backplane bus (LBA). When using CUMC or CU3, the encoder- or resolver signals,
converted into pulse encoder tracks, are transferred via the LBA.
Note:
The pulse encoder signals from LBA can only be used for pulse encoder sensing 1.
Bits 8 to 11 Rough pulse selection:
15 0
0: No rough pulse evaluation

1: Rough pulse type 1
If rough pulse evaluation is not parameterized, then only the reference point (zero pulse) is
sensed.
Bits 12 to 15 Zero pulse evaluation:
15 0
0: Not direction of rotation dependent

1: Direction of rotation dependent, i. e.
positive edge for a positive speed
negative edge for a negative speed
Example:
Bit 12 - 15 8 - 11 4-7 0-3

Example 1 0 6 4
Zero pulse evaluation, No rough pulse Pulse encoder, Dig. filter
direction of rotation evaluation tracks A, B, zero 126kHz
dependent pulse from the basic
drive converter

Manual
Explanations:
For rough pulse type 1, for a positive edge at the rough pulse input, the reference point (zero pulse) is
enabled once.
Ro ug h
pu lse
R efe re nc e
po int
(z e ro p u ls e )
S etting
s ig na l
Contrary to rough pulse type 1, for rough pulse type 2, it is only evaluated, if the rough pulse is present
before the reference point (zero pulse).
Ro ug h
pu lse
R efe re nc e
po int
(z e ro p u ls e )
S etting
s ig na l
He re , no
ev a luatio n
Evaluation is as follows for direction of rotation-dependent zero pulse evaluation:
P ositive speed N egative speed

Track A Track A
t t
Track B Track B
t t
Zero puls e Zero puls e
t t
E v aluation here E v aluation here

Manual
3.3.10.3 Control word, pulse encoder

The control word, pulse encoder allows the pulse encoder input to be adapted to specific applications. The
control word is defined using parameters H154 (H159). The control word is defined as follows:
Bits 0 to 7 Standstill limit
15 0
0: 4 sampling times
n: The speed actual value is set to zero after n sampling times
The measuring time can be extended to sense very low speeds if no encoder pulses have
been received. Thus, a new measured value is not output for the specified interval, but the
speed actual value resolution is improved at zero.
Bit 8 Evaluation of the setting signal
15 0
0: The position is set to the setting value

1: The setting value is subtracted from the current position
Bit 12 Evaluation, zero pulse
15 0
0: The position is set to the setting value

3.3.10.4 Switching versions, pulse encoder

a) Track A, track B, reference point (zero pulse) via LBA, no rough pulse
This circuit version can only be used, if the machine is coupled 1:1 with the motor, and the traversing
range is less than one motor revolution (rotary axis), or if the reference point is set using a position
setting value ( not the referencing mode ) .
Master Drive
Pulse encoder
encoder for SC/MC
531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540
1A+ GND 1B+ GND SYN GND Rough GND GND P15
pulse ext. ext.
Track 1A Track 1B Synchronizing
pulse
LBA
Pulse encoder 1
#
SE300
T300

Manual
b) Track A, track B, reference point (zero pulse) via LBA, with rough pulse
For this circuit version, the reference point is only evaluated,, if the rough pulse is present. In this case,
the complete accuracy of the reference point (zero pulse) is maintained; the rough pulse is received
from a limit switch.
Pulse encoder
encoder for SC/MC
Master Drive
Rough pulse from

the limit switch
531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540
pulse ext. ext.
pulse
LBA
Pulse encoder 1
#
SE300
T300
c) Track A, track B from the LBA, reference point from the SE300 (e. g. proximity switch)
This circuit version can be selected, if the pulse encoder does not have a zero pulse, and the accuracy
of the limit switch signal is sufficient as reference point (zero pulse).
Pulse encoder
encoder for SC/MC
Master Drive
Reference point,
limit switch
531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540
pulse ext. ext.
pulse
LBA
Pulse encoder 1
#
SE300
T300

Manual
d) Track A, track B, zero pulse from the SE300

This version is only practical, if a pulse encoder signal is available at the gearbox output side (or at the
part to be positioned). An arrangement using a double pulse encoder is also possible.
Motor pulse encoder
encoder for SC/MC
Master Drive
Reference point,
limit switch
531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540
pulse ext. ext.
pulse
Pulse encoder 1
#
SE300
T300
3.3.10.5 Positioning actual value from the NOVRAM

Using parameter H135 (H140), it can be defined as to whether the last position actual value is loaded from
the NOVRAM (factory setting), when the board restarts after a voltage failure, i. e., if the drive was not
moved after a power failure, then positioning is possible without having to re-reference.
3.3.10.6 Setting/resetting position actual values

The pulse encoder sensing inputs can be set and reset using control bits. Thus, a new software reference
point can be defined at any time. This function can also be used, for example, to transfer the position
actual value from an external absolute value encoder to the pulse encoder sensing after power-up.
3.3.11 Generating the internal velocity actual value (diagram A8)

The speed actual value for the closed-loop positioning control is selected using parameter H164. The
speed actual value from the basic drive converter is preset as default. The velocity actual value is
obtained by multiplying it by the correction factor. The following limit value monitor generates the signals
V=0, V<0, V>0. In this case, the tolerance limit is defined in parameter H165; the hysteresis in H166.
The mode of operation of the comparator is shown in the following diagram.
V e loc ity < 0

V
V e loc ity = 0
V
V e loc ity > 0
H 165 V
H 166
0

Manual
3.3.12 Generating the internal position actual value (diagram A8)

The position actual value for the closed-loop control can either be taken from pulse encoder sensing 1, or
alternatively via the DPR from the basic drive converter. The source is specified in H168. The position
actual value is multiplied by the correction factor. If the rotary axis mode has been selected, the measured
position actual value is also conditioned for the closed-loop control.
3.3.13 Input from a thumbwheel switch (diagram A9)

Using binary inputs and outputs, a circuit can be implemented, which can be used to read-in values from
thumbwheel switches. These can be used to enter a position reference value or to select a traversing data
set. 5 inputs are always required and, for each decade, an output. The module cyclically activates the
control lines for the individual decades, and reads-in the switch settings via diodes. This input is de-
coupled through the diodes.
Connecting example:
SE300
P 2 4 639
BQ1 631
BQ2 632
BQ3 633
BQ4 634
BQ5 635
1 2 3 4 5 D ec ade
24V +
-
<A>
B I1 601 W eighting 1
B I2 602 W e ight ing 2
D ata trans fer
B I5 605
M 2 4 640
< A > : W eig hting 8 from dec ade 5 c an be alte rnativ ely us ed as s ign b it.
The control bits for the maximum of 5 decades are located in K053, bits 0 to 4. From there, they must be
switched to binary outputs. Further, for the weighting (bit 0=1, bit 1=2, bit 2=4 and bit 3=8) an input is
reserved. Data is only entered, if the data transfer signal is present.
The following parameterization is required for the connecting example shown above:
Parameter Description Value

No.
H187 Source, bit 0 from the thumbwheel switch 45
H188 Mask, bit 0 from the thumbwheel switch 0001h
H195 Source, data transfer bit, thumbwheel switch 45
H196 Mask, data transfer bit, thumbwheel switch 0010h

Manual
H183 is used to specify how many decades are to be read-in. Data at H184 defines that switch setting in
the BCD format, which should result in 100%. The following table clearly indicates this:
H183 Switch settings H184 Value range / steps

1 0...9 5 0...180% / 20%
2 0...99 50 0...198% / 2%
3 0...999 500 0...199.8% / 0.2%
4 0...9999 5000 0...199.98% / 0.02%
5 0...65536 1) 32768 0...199.9939% / 0.0061%
1)
Note: Above 32767, the output value is limited to ±200% or ±32768.
Binary coding can be selected using H185 (value 0). The signal which is read-in is then interpreted as
hexadecimal number.
If negative values must also be input, the most significant bit of the highest decade represents the sign bit
(high, if negative). The value which was read-in, is displayed in d030, and can be used as connector K054
at any position. Processing is realized in T3. The periphery must be accessed for each decade, which
means, that for n decades, a new value is available, at the earliest, after n sampling cycles.
3.3.14 Byte-serial data input (diagram A9)

The byte-serial data input allows quasi-parallel coupling to an automation system, if it doesn’t make sense
to establish a serial link via bus for just one single value. The word to be transferred is broken-down into
two bytes. These are switched, alternating, to a group of 8 binary inputs. Using a control bit (HBE high
byte enable), the module is signaled, that the presently available byte is the most significant byte.
Connecting example:
-X 6 : SE300
609 P24
HBE 608
B I1
Bit 0 6 11
B I9
Bit 1 6 12
B I10
Bit 2 6 13
B I1 1
Bit 3 6 14
B I12
24V +- Bit 4 6 15
B I13
Bit 5 6 16
B I14
Bit 6 6 17
B I15
Bit 7 6 18
B I16
630 M
In order to keep the parameterizing costs within reasonable limits, binary inputs 9 to 16 are permanently
assigned this function. Control bit HBE can be freely-assigned one of the other binary inputs using H180
(source) and H181 (mask). The time, for which the byte to be read-in must remain unchanged in order that
it is accepted as being valid, is defined in parameter H182. The time is pre-set with 40ms, and can be
increased in 40ms steps.
The value which is read-in remains stored until it is overwritten by a new value. It can be read-out from
display parameter d029, and can be further used as K055.

Manual
The timing for byte-serial data input is shown in the following timing diagram.
It should be noted, that the high byte before low byte sequence must be maintained. The next data is only
transferred if this is the case.
H ig h/ low byte
at X 6 .6 11- .6 18
>4 0 m s + H 182 >4 0 m s + H 182
Low byte H ig h byte Low byte H ig h byte

n- 1 n n n+ 1
t
t>0
H ig h byte E n .
H 180 , H 18 1
H ig h byte
H ig h byte H ig h byte
n- 1 n
t
Low byte
Low byte Low byte

n- 1 n
t
E nte red refe re nce v a lue ,
ca n be v is ua lized at d 02 9
Refe re nce va lue n- 1 Refe re nce v a lue n

t
tn
Notes:
- the reference value is available from time instant tn.
- the high byte is valid, if it is available ≥40ms+H182 and the high byte enable goes to 0.
- the low byte is valid, if it remains unchanged for ≥40ms+H182.
- H182 can be entered in 40ms steps.

Manual
3.3.15 Generating the status word input/output (diagram A10)

The input/output status word includes the status messages/signals from the input and output functions.
They are shown in the table; the text describes the active status of the particular binary signal:
Bit Description
0 Reference point (zero pulse) identified, pulse encoder 1
1 Reference point (zero pulse) identified, pulse encoder 2
2 Velocity > 0
3 Velocity = 0
4 Velocity < 0
5 Traversing direction, pulse encoder 1
7 Not used
8 Not used
9 System error, T300
10 Communications, sending to CU o.k.
11 Communications, sending to CB o.k.
12 Communications, sending to peer-to-peer o.k.
13 Communications, receiving from CU o.k.
14 Communications, receiving from CB o.k.
15 Communications, receiving from peer-to-peer o.k.
The word is in K079 and d031. It is updated in T3.

Manual
3.4 Open-loop control (diagrams B)

This section of the functional scope includes binary signal handling. It powers-up and powers-down the
drive converter, controls the brakes and reference values, monitors the drive, signals faults and errors,
and processes, for multi-motor groups, the interlocking controls and feedback signals.
Note
When using the MS380 positioning software package, the control signals must be connected to the
T300 and not at the basic drive converter.
Exceptions:
- emergency stop
- fault acknowledgement can be connected at the basic drive converter or the T300.
3.4.1 Powering-up the drive (diagram B1)

The power-up command is selected using H200 (source) and H201 (mask). It causes the drive to be
immediately powered-up if there is no shutdown condition( fast stop, electric off, standard stop or drive
fault/error) (refer to d035).
3.4.2 Inching 1/2, speed controlled (diagram B1)

Two binary signals are provided for drive inching; each has its own setpoint. Inching 1, speed-controlled
(H214 source, H215 mask, H753 setpoint) and inching 2, speed-controlled (H216 source, H217 mask,
H754 setpoint) powers-up the drive and this receives its setpoint as long as the inching command is
active. In order to prevent multiple power-up and power-down commands (main contactor wear), when the
inching command is withdrawn, the drive is not immediately powered-down, but only after a time which
can be set in H245.
In order to be able to select the inching, speed-controlled mode, the drive must be powered-down. If the
drive is in the inching, speed-controlled mode, this can only be exited by powering-down the drive.
3.4.3 Inching 1/2, position-controlled (diagram B1)

Two binary signals are provided for drive inching, each has its own setpoint. Inching 1, position-controlled
(H224 source, H225 mask, H466 setpoint) and inching 2, position-controlled (H226 source, H227 mask,
H467 setpoint) powers-up the drive and traverses the drive at each positive edge of the inching command,
by the distance specified in the reference value. In order to prevent multiple power-up and power-down
commands (main contactor wear), when the inching command is withdrawn, the drive is not immediately
powered-down, but only after a time which can be set in H245.
In order to select the inching, position-controlled mode, the drive must be powered-down. If the drive is in
the inching, position-controlled mode, this can only be exited by powering-down the drive.
3.4.4 Power-down word / diagnostics word (diagram B1)

All of the power-down conditions are combined in a word. If the drive cannot be powered-up, it should first
be checked as to whether a power-down condition is present. The power-down word is stored at each
power-down, and is therefore available as diagnostics word, which contains the last power-down reason.

Manual
The diagnostics word / power-down word is assigned as follows:

Bit Description
0 Drive faulted
1 Drive faulted from CU
2 Electrical off
3 to Not used
7
8 Off after inching
9 Off after standard stop
10 Off after fast stop
11 Off, as there is no drive converter checkback signal
12 to Not used
15
3.4.5 Standard stop / fast stop / electrical off (diagram B2)

The standard stop function (H202 source and H203 mask) runs down the drive to standstill along the ramp
set in H760, and then shuts the drive down. In order to be able to power-up in the inching mode, standard
stop is not effective in the inching modes. If the drive is to be powered-down after inching, a delay must
either be inserted until the inching time has expired, or fast stop or electrical off output.
The drive is immediately powered-down for electrical off (H204 source and H205 mask). The drive then
coasts down. Thus, it is possible to immediately bring the drive into a no-torque condition.
Note:
Electrical off does not mean that the drive is also isolated from the line supply. If this is to be achieved, a
main contactor must be used. Drives which are connected to a common DC link, are still live (at a
hazardous potential), even after electrical off.
For fast stop (H206 source and H207 mask), the setpoint is immediately switched to zero, and the drive is
braked down to standstill along the torque limit.
3.4.6 Brake control (diagram B3)

The brake control can be used as holding brake as well as a brake which is supplied under fault
conditions. If the drive has a mechanical brake, H240 must be set to 1. Thus, an additional part of the
control becomes active, which coordinates the brake control and the internal control (drive on/off, setpoint
enable etc.).
The time, which expires between the output of the command open brake up to when the brake has
actually been released, and the drive can rotate, is defined as the opening time, and must be entered in
H243. It comprises of the delays between intermediate control elements, control solenoid valves and the
brake itself (Note: It is generally not practical to insert logic circuitry as only the drive itself can control the
brakes. From experience, any additional logicconditions result in problems).
After controller enable, the command to open the brake is output. The setpoint is enabled after the
opening time has expired.
The time between the close brake command and when the brake is actually applied is called the closing
time, and is entered in H244. Generally, it is longer than the opening time.
The command to close the brake is output at zero velocity, and the drive is shutdown after the closing time
has expired.

Manual
The following timing diagram is for the standard sequence with approach and stopping.
D riv e o n
S peed
co nt ro lle r
e na b le
O pe n
bra ke
Set po int Ton

e na b le
T off
Z e ro
s pee d s ig na l
A pp roac h S hutd ow n
t
The braking mode is defined using parameters H241 and H242. At each power-off signal, it can be
defined as to whether the brake is immediately closed (fault brake) or the brake is first closed at n=0.
The fault brake is practical, if the brake is used as a holding brake under normal conditions, however it is
used to shutdown the drive when a fault condition develops, as otherwise a dangerous status could occur
if the drive was to just coast down.
The power-down word is defined as follows:
Bit Description
0 Drive faulted
1 Drive faulted from the CU
2 Electrical off
3 to Not used
7
8 Off after inching
9 Off after standard stop
10 Off after fast stop
11 Off, as there is no drive converter checkback signal
12 to Not used
15
The brake control is pre-assigned so that the brake operates exclusively as holding brake. If the brake
control is parameterized, so that the brake is immediately closed when a fault develops, then proceed as
follows:
Bit 0 of the power-down word is selected in H241, i. e. 0001h. The procedure is the same if other bits are
to be selected.
3.4.7 Setpoint / inverter enable (diagram B3)

The inverter is only enabled if the drive is powered-up, and if the inverter enable signal (H208 source and
H209 mask) are available. If this is not required, it can be permanently set to one (pre-setting).
The same is true for the setpoint enable control signal (source H210 and mask 211). If this bit is low, the
setpoint in the drive converter is set to zero.

Manual
3.4.8 Generation of the fault word / alarm word (diagram B4)

All of the signals are combined in the error word which can cause the drive to be shutdown with a fault
message. All of the fault causes can be suppressed (H280) or parameterized as alarm (H281).
The error bits are transferred to the basic drive converter via the error/fault- and alarm channel. There,
they appear as faults F116 to F131 or as alarms A097 to A112.
An overview is provided in the following table
Bit Designation Mask Fault No. Alarm No.
0 Error, communications CB 0001h F116 A097
1 Error, communications CU 0002h F117 A098
2 Error, communications peer-to-peer 0004h F118 A099
3 User error 1 0008h F119 A100
4 User error 2 0010h F120 A101
5 Tracking error outside the tolerance 0020h F121 A102
6 Overspeed, positive 0040h F122 A103
7 Overspeed, negative 0080h F123 A104
8 Drive locked 0100h F124 A105
9 Pulse encoder fault 0200h F125 A106
10 Emergency limit switch A3 actuated 0400h F126 A107
11 Emergency limit switch B3 actuated 0800h F127 A108
12 Referencing error 1000h F128 A109
13 Refer. point incorrectly/not identified. 2000h F129 A110
14 Overflow, position actual value 4000h F130 A111
15 Transmission error TR-Encoder 8000h F131 A112
3.4.8.1 Fault suppression / alarm display

All of the faults can be suppressed. When faults are suppressed, this can result in potentially hazardous
situations.
Each error bit has its particular significance in the error word. If an error bit is to be suppressed, then the
corresponding significance in the suppression mask must be set to zero. The procedure remains the same
when suppressing several errors.
Example:
The communications with CB error message is to be suppressed and the communications with peer-to-
peer error message should only act as alarm.
1st step
Suppress bit 0 and bit 2 with H280: H280=1111 1111 1111 1010 = FFFAh
2nd step
Display bit 2 in the alarm word with H281=0000 0000 0000 0100 = 0004h
3.4.8.2 Error, communications CB [F116]

If communications with the communications board (CB) is faulted, the fault message is initiated after the
time parameterized in H260.
Note:
For communication errors, the actual setpoints/reference values and control bits are ´frozen´. Thus, the
drive remains in exactly the same condition as before the communications error. If the drive is exclusively
operated via the communications channel, the error message must remain parameterized to prevent
hazardous situations from developing.
The error message is also generated, if there is no CB. In this case, it must be suppressed.

Manual
3.4.8.3 Error, communications CU [F117], [F080, F081, F082]

Communications between the basic drive converter board (CU) and the technology board is monitored by
both boards. If the basic drive converter identifies an initializing error (F080), hardware monitoring error
(F081) or telegram failure (F082), this is displayed on the basic unit. The technology board monitoring
attempts to initiate the fault message after the time parameterized in H261, when a communications error
is identified. This can only succeed, if communications to the basic drive converter still function, which
means, that either only the CU→TB direction is faulted, or the telegram failure time on T300 is set less
than that for the basic unit.
If the fault/error cannot be acknowledged, and if it re-occurs after the unit is powered-down and on again,
the T300 and/or CU board must be replaced (observe the diagnostic LEDs).
3.4.8.4 Error, peer-to-peer communications [F118]

If no telegrams are received via the peer-to-peer coupling, then the fault message is initiated after the time
parameterized in H268.
3.4.8.5 User error 1 [F119]

Contrary to the external faults in the basic drive converter (F035, F036), user errors are only enabled
when the drive is powered-up. This allows functions to be monitored which are only relevant after the drive
has been powered-up. For example, this could include an external motor fan with monitoring element. The
fault is only initiated if it is present for a time longer than that parameterized in H264.
3.4.8.6 User error 2 [F120]

The function is identical with that of user error 1.
3.4.8.7 Tracking error outside the tolerance [F121]

The fault message "tracking error outside tolerance" is output if the difference between the position
reference value and actual value exceeds the tolerance limit in H741 for a time exceeding the delay time
set in H745.
3.4.8.8 Overspeed fault, positive [F122]

If the speed actual value exceeds the speed specified in H269 in the positive direction, the overspeed
fault, positive is initiated.
3.4.8.9 Overspeed fault, negative [F123]

If the speed actual value exceeds the speed specified in H269 in the negative direction, the overspeed
fault, negative is initiated.
3.4.8.10 Fault, drive blocked [F124]

Anti-stall protection can be set to protect the mechanical drive system and the motor. The anti-stall
protection responds if the drive is at zero speed (limit H272), a velocity setpoint has been entered (limit
H273) and the drive torque is greater than the limit value in H274.

Manual
3.4.8.11 Fault, pulse encoder [F125]

The pulse encoder monitoring continuously compares the speed actual value, sensed at the pulse
encoder monitoring 1, with the value, which is transferred from the drive converter via the dual port RAM.
If a fault message is output, either the speed sensing at the basic drive converter itself or the T300 is
defective.
A fault message can also be initiated, if the speed actual value in the basic drive converter (CUVC:P352;
CUMC:P353; CU2,CU3:P420) is normalized differently than in the positioning (H152), or if the pulse
encoder was incorrectly defined (CUVC,CUMC:P151; CU2:P209 / H151). The function of the pulse
encoder itself is not checked.
3.4.8.12 Fault, emergency limit switch A3 actuated [F126]

If the drive actuates emergency limit switch A3, fast stop is initiated (refer to Section 3.1.3). The fault is
generated when the drive comes to a standstill.
3.4.8.13 Fault, emergency limit switch B3 actuated [F127]

If the drive actuates emergency limit switch B3, fast stop is initiated (refer to Section 3.1.3). The fault is
generated when the drive comes to a standstill.
3.4.8.14 Referencing error [F128]

If the drive reaches hardware limit switch A2 as well as hardware limit switch B2 in the referencing mode,
it is assumed that the reference point was not found, and the drive is shutdown with a fault message.
3.4.8.15 Incorrect reference point position [F129]

If the automatic post-referencing function or the rotary axis mode is active, it is checked as to whether the
reference point lies within the specified tolerance range (H322). If a reference point is identified outside
this range or is not even identified, fault message F129 is initiated. Fault signals can be suppressed using
the fault pulse suppression at the reference point function.
3.4.8.16 Overflow, position actual value [F130]

If the permissible numerical range of the pulse encoder sensing 1 of ±2 pulses is exceeded, fault
31
message F130 is output.

3.4.8.17 TR-Encoder transmission error [F131]
The TR-Encoder does not transmit its absolute position for further information see function diagram B11
3.4.9 Fault acknowledgement (diagram B5)

The module provides 3 possibilities to acknowle a fault:
a) External fault acknowledgement
An external acknowledge signal can be selected using parameters H212/H213.
b) Acknowledge button on the technology board
c) P button on PMU/OP1
Technology board faults/errors can also be acknowledged via the basic drive converter.

Manual
3.4.10 Generating the control status word (diagram B5)

Important control signals are located in the status word. The assignment is as follows:
Bit Description
0 Not used
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Braking
4 No braking
5 Velocity actual value = 0 (V=0)
6 Drive powered-up
7 Drive not powered-up
8 Drive not ready
9 Internal inverter enable
10 Internal setpoint enable
11 Not used
12 Drive faulted
13 Open holding/operating brake
14 Close holding/operating brake
15 Close brake at n=0

Manual
3.5 Referencing control (diagrams B6 to B9)

The position actual value is sensed via a pulse encoder. As the pulse encoder can only sense relative
distances (number of pulses), the system must first sense the absolute position when the board is first
powered-up. This is realized using a reference point, whose geometrical position is known. When this
reference point is passed, the position sensing is set to a defined value. The absolute position is now
known.
The reference control knows various operating modes and parameterizations, which are subsequently
explained. The following table provides an overview of the various referencing types and
parameterizations.
Mode Explanation
Referencing with standstill The drive shuts down after the reference point has been identified
Flying referencing The drive moves directly to the specified position reference value after
identification
Parameter Effect
Minimum approach path The reference point is only passed in one direction
The reference point is only evaluated if the traversing path is greater than
the minimum approach path
Referencing start direction Determines in which direction the drive starts when referencing
Automatic The position reference value can be corrected each time the reference
post referencing point is passed.
Referencing velocity Defines the traversing velocity when referencing
3.5.1 Referencing with shutdown

If the referencing with shutdown mode is selected, when the reference point is identified, a standard stop
is initiated. The drive is shutdown. The mode is selected with a positive edge at the control input
(H300/H301). The mode is exited, if the referencing control bit is withdrawn at shutdown, a referencing
error has occurred, or the reference point was found.
3.5.2 Flying referencing

If flying referencing mode (H302/H303) is selected, after the reference point has been identified, the
specified position reference value is approached. To exit the operating mode, the same conditions are
valid as for referencing with shutdown.
3.5.3 Minimum approach path

Parameter H312 defines the minimum approach path, i. e. the drive must move through this distance
before the reference point is accepted. Thus, it is possible
- to exclude inaccuracy as a result of play.
- the reference point is passed under defined conditions, i. e. with constant
velocity, without acceleration- or deceleration phases.
The direction which the reference point is passed is defined by the sign of the minimum approach path.
For
- positive sign, the reference point must be passed in the direction A→B,
- negative sign, the reference point must be passed in the direction B→A.
Note:
If the rough/fine pulse evaluation function is used, and several fine pulses are present in the rough pulse
area, then the minimum approach path must be greater than the rough pulse range.

Manual
3.5.4 Various situations when referencing

The various motion sequences as a function of the selected parameters are subsequently shown.
Definitions:
S D IR R D IR
RF
P
A2 ∆ B2
P0
P0:..........actual position
RF: .........reference point
SDIR: .....start direction for referencing
RDIR: .....requested reference point approach direction
P:............traversing direction
A2:..........hardware limit switch A2
B2:..........hardware limit switch B2
∆:............minimum approach path
Case A) Referencing without secondary conditions

Start in the reference point direction
S D IR
RF
A2 P0 B2
Start opposite to the reference point direction

S D IR
RF
A2 B2
P0
Case B) Referencing, taking into account the minimum approach path

If the minimum approach path is greater than zero, the reference point must be passed in the direction A
to B. Thus, the reference point must be passed in the direction B to A, if the minimum approach path is
less than zero.
Start in the reference point direction
SDIR RDIR
RF
A2 ∆ B2
P0

Manual
Start in the opposite direction to the reference point

S D IR R D IR
RF
A2 B2
∆ P0
Start in the direction of the reference point

RDIR SDIR
RF
∆ ∆
A2 B2
P0
Explanation:
If the reference point is passed in the incorrect direction, after 2 x ∆, the traversing direction is reversed,
and the reference point is passed in the correct direction.
Start opposite to the reference point direction
RDIR SDIR
RF
A2 B2
∆ ∆
P0
3.5.5 Signal, drive has referenced (diagram B6)

The drive has referenced signal is generated if the reference point was found. The referencing mode is
simultaneously reset with the signal. If a minimum approach path is parameterized, in addition to the
reference point identification, the direction in which the reference point was passed must also coincide,
and the traversing distance after a direction change must be greater than the minimum approach path
(refer to various situations when referencing). The signal is reset, when a board runs-up, if a new
referencing command is output, or if H320 is parameterized each time the drive is powered-up.
3.5.6 Referencing velocity / pre-contact to the reference point (diagram B7))

The referencing start direction is defined using parameters H310/H311. The velocity reference value for
referencing direction A→B is in H330, and for direction B→A, in H332. If the drive reaches the hardware
limit switch, the referencing direction is reversed. In order to start referencing with a high velocity if large
distances are involved, the pre-contact to the reference point function can be used. In this case, a pre-
contact is installed close to the reference point, which then causes the drive to slow down to a lower

Manual
referencing velocity. The following diagram clearly indicates this.

V
H ig h refe re nc ing v e lo c ity
C raw l to t he
P re -c o nta ct to th e refe re nc e po int
refe re nc e po int id e ntif ie d
t
R efe re nc e po int
The pre-contact to reference point control bit is selected using parameters H308/309. If the signal is
available for less than 40ms as a result of the high referencing velocity, the identification of the reference
point (zero pulse) from pulse encoder sensing 2 can be used. The following circuit configuration is
required:
Pre-contact to the
reference point
541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 540
pulse ext. ext.
pulse
Pulse encoder 2
#
The pulse encoder (or pulse encoder simulation for CUMC,CU3) must be again connected to pulse
encoder sensing 2. The pre-contact to the reference point must be connected to the reference point (zero
pulse), and thus acts instantaneously. Bit 1 from the status word input/output (refer to Section 3.3.15)
must be used as source for the pre-contact.
3.5.7 Automatic post-referencing (diagram B7)
Parameter H304/H305 is used to determine as to whether the drive is automatically post-referenced each
time the reference point is passed. If there are no technological reasons against this, the function should
always be enabled. Thus, errors, which could occur as a result of slip or noise pulses, can be continuously
compensated. Also for automatic post-referencing, the secondary condition regarding the pass direction is
valid if a minimum approach path is parameterized.
3.5.8 Referencing errors (diagram B7)
If the drive reaches hardware limit switch A2 and hardware limit switch B2 in the referencing mode, it is
assumed that the reference point was not found, and the drive is shutdown with a referencing fault
message.
3.5.9 Monitoring the reference point position (diagram B8)
In order to monitor the drive unit for slip and fault/noise pulses, the difference between the parameterized
and actual position of the reference point is sensed. If this difference exceeds the tolerance limit in H320,
the reference point not/incorrectly identified fault message is initiated.
Note:
If the noise pulse suppression at the reference point function is used, the effects of an erroneously sensed
reference point can be limited. As the reference point is only enabled in the tolerance bandwidth
parameterized there, only this bandwidth can occur as maximum error. Although the drive doesn’t achieve
the required positioning accuracy, larger deviations can be essentially eliminated. The reference point
position monitoring can be used as a status signal to request a new reference movement.

Manual
3.5.10 Status words, referencing control (diagram B10)

2 status words are generated by the reference control which have the following assignment:
Status word 1, referencing control

Bit Description
0 Reference point (zero pulse) identification enabled
1 Referencing with shutdown active
2 Flying referencing active
3 Referencing mode active
4 Drive has referenced
5 Drive has not referenced
6 Pre-contact to the reference point identified
7 Approach path, high play
8 Approach path, low play
9 Referencing direction B→A active
10 Referencing direction A→B active
11 Referencing direction o.k.
12 Referencing direction not o.k.
13 Hardware limit switch A2 reached
14 Hardware limit switch B2 reached
15 Referencing error
Status word 2, referencing control

Bit Description
0 Erroneous reference point position
1 Hardware limit switch A2 passed
2 Hardware limit switch B2 passed
3 Range for reference point o.k.
4 to 6 Not used
7 TR-Encoder transmission requested
8 TR-Encoder transmission active
9 TR-Encoder referenced
10 TR-Encoder transmission input
11 Not used
12 TR-Encoder start transmission error
13 TR-Encoder transmission error
14 TR-Encoder transmission timeout
15 Not used

Manual
3.6 Setpoint generation, traversing data sets

In order to be able to flexibly use the positioning, traversing data sets have been introduced. The aim of
these traversing data sets is to implement essentially all drive-related functions using the technology
board. If limits are reached with these traversing data sets, then it is possible to couple-in the values via
an automation system.
The following table provides an overview of the various traversing data sets
Traversing data set No. of Explanation
for: values
Position reference 100
values
Position limit value X 6 Comparison value for position limit value monitor X
Position limit value Y 6 Comparison value for position limit value monitor Y
Position limit value Z 6 Comparison value for position limit value monitor Z
Software limit switch A1 6 Traversing path limiting in the direction of mechanical endstop A
Software limit switch B1 6 Traversing path limiting in the direction of mechanical endstop B
Maximum velocity 6 Maximum traversing velocity when positioning
KP speed controller 6 Adapting the dynamic performance of the speed control loop
Drive play 6 Adapting the play, e. g. if different slides are to be positioned
using one drive converter
Ramp-up time, position 6 Input, ramp-up time, velocity setpoint
ramp-function generator = maximum acceleration during approach
Rounding-off time 6 Input, rounding-off time constant to adapt the drive dynamic
constant performance or to dampen the mechanical system
ramp-up position-RFG
Ramp-down time, 6 Input, ramp-down time, velocity setpoint
position ramp-function = maximum acceleration when braking
generator
Rounding-off time 6 Input, rounding-off time constant to adapt the drive dynamic
constant performance or to dampen the mechanical system
ramp-down position-
RFG
Down ramp A2 6 Input, ramp-down time when passing the limit switch in the
direction, mechanical endstop A
Down ramp B2 6 Input, ramp-down time when passing the limit switch in the
direction, mechanical endstop B
3.6.1 Selecting the traversing data sets

The traversing data sets principally operate as multiplexer. A code is entered at a control input which
selects the appropriate traversing setpoint. The code is generated from a logic circuit, so that it can be
easily entered through binary inputs. Further, the control code for several traversing data sets can be
simultaneously transferred in a control word. Control code 0 always enables traversing setpoint 0, code 1,
setpoint 1, etc.. The logic function to select the control code consists of defining the source, suppressing
irrelevant bits, and establishing the significance (weighting). The procedure is illustrated using the
following example:

Manual
Example:
Selecting 20 position reference values via binary inputs 3,4,5,6,7
Travers ing data set
pos it io n reference values
( max . 100 values )
V aria ble H36 0 (0 )
position reference
v alue K P0 P0 K400
Po s itio n ref . v a lue 1 H36 1 P1 P1 K402
Po s itio n ref . v a lue 2 H362 P2 P2 K404

. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. to . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
Po s itio n ref . v a lue 99 H4 59 P9 9 P99 K598
Pos itio n ref . v a lue 10 0 H4 6 0 P 10 0 P 100 K600
Source , position S u p p re ss ing

refere nce v alue selection irre lev a nt b its
S hift to the rig ht S e le cte d po s itio n
H4 6 1 (5 ) H4 6 2 (0 h) refe re nc e v a lue
K & S hift d 022
H4 63
N um be r of
s h ift o pe ratio ns
Initially, the source for control code K045 is specified with parameter H461 as source. However, as other
binary inputs could be used, to start of with, all non-relevant bits are suppressed using H462. The correct
significance (weighting) of the control bits as code for the multiplexer is established by shifting to the right
(H463).
B it 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input q ua ntity
X = re lev a nt b its So urce
W e ig ht ing 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
M as k 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 S uppress io n
(H462= F8 h)
Hex 0 0 F 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S hift
(3x s hifting , H463= 3)
W e ig ht ing 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Several traversing data sets can be selected (e. g. software limit switches A1 and B1) using the same
control bits by specifying the same source (the same connector).
3.6.2 Correction factor (diagram C1)
If positioning is established using roller wheels (rubber wheels, plastic wheels), whose diameter decreases
with time, positioning must always be re-normalized to the actual diameter. However, in order to prevent
this having to be done, a correction factor has been introduced. The velocity setpoint and actual value as
well as the position actual value are multiplied or divided by this factor. After commissioning, the factor is
100%=neutral. However, if it is determined that the diameter has decreased, for example, from 100mm to
98mm, then 98/100 x 100% must be entered as correction factor. The direct diameter measurement can
also be eliminated, if the positioning travel is checked. If the drive no longer positions quite so accurately,
the mechanical position is measured, and is compared with the position actual value of the closed-loop
control. For example, if the mechanical position is 9990mm, however the position actual value is
10000mm, then the operating diameter has decreased. Thus, a correction factor of 9990/10000 x 100% =
99.9% must be entered.
Note:
Deviations can also occur, if a certain amount of slip involved. Before the diameter is corrected, all other
fault/error sources must first be investigated.

Manual
3.6.3 Fixed setpoints (reference values) (diagram C1)

Fixed setpoints (reference values) are required everywhere, where connectors are expected, but
constants are entered. The fixed setpoints (reference values) are directly combined with connectors, and
can supply all relevant data formats which are used.
3.6.4 Generating position reference values (diagram C2)

The automation interface can input up to max. 100 fixed position reference values or a variable reference
value. The reference value is selected as described in Section 3.6.1. In order to inhibit the intermediate
statuses of the binary inputs, the position reference value can be transferred from the traversing data set
via parameters H464/H465.
Before the position reference value is fed to the position ramp-function generator, it is checked that the
valid value range is involved. If the reference value lies outside the software limit, the traversing task is
rejected (not limited), and the software limit violated fault message is output.
3.6.4.1 Relative positioning (diagram C2)

The relative positioning mode is selected via parameters H468/469. The current position is saved when
changing-over to the operating. Then, the selected reference value from the traversing data set can be
applied using a positive edge at the control bit advance (H472/H473). Thus, the traversing data set fulfills
two functions. For absolute positioning, the absolute position is entered via the traversing data set and for
relative positioning, the reference value, which is to be moved. The reference value can also be inverted
via parameters H470/H471, i. e., the traversing direction can also be reversed. However, the same can be
achieved using a negative reference value in the traversing data. Positive reference values traverse in the
direction A→B, and negative reference values, in the direction B→A.
The following diagram should clearly indicate how the control signals interact:
Relative positioning mode
Forwards
Forwards / backwards
Position reference value
Save the ref.

value from Absolute reference value
the traversing Move through the position from the traversing data
data set set is again valid
reference value from
the traversing data set

Manual
Note:
If positioning is to involve several steps, but the drive is only to be moved once, then you can proceed as
follows:
Step 1: Select relative positioning.
Step 2: The control bit, transfer position reference value (H464/465) is returned to zero.
Step 3: At the advance control bit, the required number is generated at the positive edges.
Step 4: The control bit, transfer position reference value (H464/465) is also set to 1.
A simple grid positioning system can be configured in this way with a low amount of logic circuitry and
control bits.
3.6.4.2 Inching, position-controlled (diagram C2)

In the inching, position-controlled mode, just as for relative positioning, at each positive edge of the inching
control bit, the drive traverses a distance specified in parameters H466 and H467. The control functions of
inching, position-controlled, are in Section Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden..
3.6.5 Traversing data sets, position limit values X, Y, Z (diagram C4)
The traversing data sets for the position limit values provide the comparison values for the position limit
value monitors. The position limit value monitors are used to compare the position actual value with a
position limit value. There are 3 position limit value monitors, which are designated with X, Y, Z.
Each of the limit value monitors provide the following information:
- position actual value greater than the position limit value
- position actual value equal to the position limit value
- position actual value less than the position limit value
In this case, a tolerance bandwidth as well as hysteresis can be parameterized.
The switching characteristics of the limit value monitor is shown in the following diagram:
S ignal, position actual value

greater than the lim it value
S ignal, position act. value

equal to the lim it value
S ignal, position act. value D ifference, position actual

less than the lim it value value m inus the lim it value
To leranc e band w idth
H y s te res is
0
The position limit values are selected as described in Section 3.6.1
3.6.6 Traversing data set, software limit switches A1, B1 (diagram C5)
The traversing data sets, software limit switches A1 and B1 provide the limit values for the position
reference value input. The function is described in Section Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht
gefunden werden..
3.6.7 Traversing data set, maximum velocity (diagram C5)
The maximum velocity traversing data set supplies the limit value for the position ramp-function generator.
In addition to selecting the traversing data set, the maximum velocity can still be influenced via an
adaption factor. The adaption factor is selected via parameter H560 and is switched-through via
H561/H662.
Note:
The maximum drive traversing velocity consists of the sum of Vmax from the traversing data set and the
maximum possible position controller intervention (H732, H733).

Manual
3.6.8 Traversing data set, drive play (diagram C5)

The drive play traversing data set supplies the amount of play which is taken into account when
referencing and when generating the reference value. Drive play is not just limited to the gearbox, but
refers to the total of all the plays up to the object which is to be positioned.
The following table provides an overview regarding the effective direction of the play compensation.
Play Traversing direction Position reference

value
Is equal to zero A→B Unchanged
Is equal to zero B→A Unchanged
Greater than zero A→B Position ref. value + play
Greater than zero B→A Unchanged
Less than zero A→B Unchanged

Less than zero B→A Position ref. value - play
3.6.9 Traversing data set, speed controller gain adaption (diagram C6)
A characteristic with two points allows the proportional gain of the speed controller to be adapted in the
basic unit as a function of any quantity. This is useful, if no constant controller parameters can be found as
the loop is too complex. Frequently, the gain has a relationship to one of the loop parameters and the
problem can be reduced, by adaption, to one involving just a linear loop.
The adaption is supplied with a selectable value, which is defined using H580. This is the input quantity for
a characteristic, which, dependent on its absolute value, defines the factor with which the speed controller
proportional gain in the drive converter is multiplied.
Information regarding CUVC and CUMC:
The following parameterization should be made in the basic drive: P233 = 0, P234 = 200%, P235 = 0 and
P236 = 20. With this setting, the proportional gain, generated on the T300 is transferred 1 to 1 to the basic
drive.
The two points are defined using H581 and H582, or H583 and H584. The characteristic is linearly
interpolated between the points, and outside the points remains constant at the particular value.
H 584
H 582
X
-H 583 -H 581 H 581 H 583
0
The output value of the KP adaption is multiplied by the selected KP from the traversing data set, and
transferred to the basic drive converter.

Manual
3.6.10 Traversing data sets, ramp-up/down time, position ramp-function

generator (diagram C6)
The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the position ramp-function generator can be separately adjusted
and are defined as follows:
In the ramp-up time, the drive goes from zero- up to the rated velocity. The same is true for the ramp-
down time but in the opposite direction.
The ramp-up time represents the drive acceleration. If an absolute acceleration is to be converted into a
ramp-up time, then proceed as follows:
Rated _ velocity
Tu =
Acceleration
Example:
The rated drive velocity is 8m/s, and the maximum acceleration should be 2m/s : 2
m
8⋅
Rated _ velocity s = 4⋅s
Tu = =
Acceleration m
2⋅ 2
s
The mode of operation of the position ramp-function generator is described in more detail in Section 3.7.2.
3.6.11 Traversing data set, rounding-off time constant, position ramp-function

generator (diagram C7)
The rounding-off time constant is used to round-off the drive torque at the start of the ramp-up and at the
end of the ramp-up. The rounding-off time constant must be dimensioned, so that the mechanical system
isn’t excited resulting in oscillations.
Oscillations can also be propagated to the associated process, for example
- elasticities of the shaft and toothed belts.
- viscosity of fluids in packing machines.
- comfort level in elevators.
If there are no external boundary conditions, the rounding-off time constant should be between
approximately 10 and 50ms. If acceleration should be noticeably gentler, then the values should be
approximately 1/20 to 1/10 of the ramp-up time.
For especially critical applications, the natural system frequency should be analyzed. The rounding-off
time constant must be significantly greater than the period of the natural oscillation .
The mode of operation of the position ramp-function generator is described in more detail in Section 3.7.2.
3.6.12 Traversing data set, ramp-down ramp A2, B2 (diagram C7) )

The ramp times when passing over hardware limit switches A2 and B2 are defined using this traversing
data set. Section 3.7.2 describes how these ramp times can be calculated.
3.6.13 Status word, reference value generation

The status word, reference value conditioning is defined as follows:
Bit Description
0 Software limit A1 violated
1 Software limit B1 violated
2 to Not used
15

Manual
3.7 Closed-loop position control (diagrams D)

The function diagrams of the closed-loop position control include the on/off control of the position control,
position ramp-function generator, the position controller as well as the generation of the torque setpoint
from acceleration and friction.
3.7.1 Switching the position control in/out (diagram D1)

The control differentiates between closed-loop speed- and closed-loop position controlled operation. As
long as a closed-loop speed controlled mode is available, it is not possible to changeover to closed-loop
position control. Closed-loop position controlled operation can be externally enabled (H700/H701 and
H702/H703). If the position control is not enabled, and a closed-loop speed controlled mode is also not
selected, the drive is speed-controlled with reference value zero.
3.7.2 Position ramp-function generator (diagram D2)

The position ramp-function generator calculates, for a traversing task, the accelerating-, velocity- and
position characteristics. Secondary conditions such as the maximum velocity and the ramp-up- and ramp-
down times are taken into account. The ramp-function generator can handle all parameter changes at any
instant in time. Even when traversing, a new position reference value can be entered, or the ramp-up- and
ramp-down times changed.
The drive motion when positioning can be sub-divided into several phases:
a) Initial rounding-off
In this phase, acceleration is increased from zero up to the maximum value
b) Linear ramp-up phase
In this phase, the velocity is ramped-up with constant acceleration
c) Final rounding-off
In this phase, acceleration is reduced from the maximum value down to zero
d) Constant motion phase
In this phase, the drive moves
Acceleration
Velocity
Initial Linear Final Constant motion Initial Linear Final

rounding-off ramp-up phase rounding-off phase rounding-off ramp-down phase rounding-off
Position

Manual
The most important cases when traversing are now illustrated.

Case a) Traversing with constant ramp-up and traversing phase
A cce le rat io n
V e loc ity
Initia l Linea r F ina l C o nsta nt motio n Initia l Linea r Fina l

ro und ing-off ra m p- up phase ro und ing-off phase ro und ing-off ra m p-dow n phase ro und ing-off
Pos it io n
Case b) Traversing with constant ramp-up, but without a constant traversing phase
A cce le rat io n
V e loc ity
t
Pos it io n

Manual
Case c) Traversing without constant ramp-up- and traversing phase
A cce le ratio n
V e loc ity
t
Pos it io n
3.7.3 Integrating time, position control loop (diagram D2)

The integrating time of the position control loop is an elementary quantity of the position ramp-function
generator, and must be set at start-up.
Definition:
The integrating time of the position control loop is the time which the drive requires to move from zero to
the nominal position (100%) at rated velocity (100%).
V e loc ity
Rated v e loc ity ( 100 % )
Pos it io n act ua l v a lue
Nom ina l pos it io n

( 100% pos it io n
act ua l v a lue )
The integrating time is calculated using the following formula:

Nominal length
Ti =
Rated velocity
The rated velocity and nominal length must correspond with the parameterization of the pulse encoder
inputs.
Example with data from Section Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.:

Gear: ......................................... 1:10
Drive roll diameter:.................... 300 mm
Maximum velocity ..................... 2m/s (= rated velocity)

Manual
Thus, with these values:
Nominal length 20m

Ti = = = 10s
Rated velocity 2m / s
For this normalization, 10000ms time should be entered into parameter H720.
Extremly long times (≥ 2 000 000 [ms]) can be entered using the range changeover with H719.
The resulting time value will be:
Time value = H720 * 2H719
Example:
The time 10 000 000 [ms] has to be set. This time is 5 times higher as the maximum value adjustable in
n 3
H720. The range can be set in 2 steps, the value for H719 will be set to 3 (2 =8)
Time value 10 000 000 [ms]

H720 = = = 1250 000 [ms]
Range 8
3.7.4 Normalization, acceleration (diagram D2)

In order that the numerical range and the resolution can be optimally used, the acceleration value of the
ramp-function generator must be normalized. In this case, the lowest ramp-up and ramp-down time must
be entered into H722.
This normalization may no longer be changed after commissioning, even if the ramp-up- or ramp-down
time is changed.
Note:
If the lowest ramp-up time is entered when commissioning the system, then a 100% acceleration signal is
obtained with this time. However, as the arithmetic range extends up to 200%, the ramp-up- or ramp-down
time can be reduced to half the value after commissioning.
3.7.5 Reference value generation for rotary axis (diagram D2)

When positioning the rotary axis, there are three additional secondary conditions which must be taken into
account. These are:
a) Traversing direction only positive
When positioning, the drive only rotates in the positive direction, even if the new position reference
value is lower than the actual position. Example:
360° 0°
Pold
270°
180°
Pnew

Manual
b) Traversing direction only negative

When positioning, the drive only rotates in the negative direction, even if the new position reference
value is greater than the actual position. Example:
360° 0°
Pnew
270°
180°
Pold
c) Shortest traversing path

In this mode, at each positioning, it is checked which traversing direction results in a shorter positioning
travel. Examples:
P o ld P new
36 0 ° 0° 36 0 ° 0°
3 15 ° 45°
P o ld
2 70 °
180 °
P new
3.7.6 Position controller, control structure (diagram D3)

The position controller can be used as either P- or PI controller. The position ramp-function generator
generates the position-, velocity- and accelerating setpoints/reference values from the specified
parameters. These signals are fed to the controllers as pre-control quantities. The smoothing functions in
the actual value channel are used to dampen the control loop as far as drive play and elasticities are
concerned. The smoothing functions in the setpoint channel must correspond with these smoothing
functions.

Manual
The control structure is illustrated below:
Pos it io n ref . v a lue Pos . ra m p-funct io n ge ne rato r
Ra m p- up t im e Pos it io n
refe re nce V e loc ity A cce le ratio n
v a lue setpo int setpo int
Ra m p-d ow n t im e
Ro und .-off tim e co nst .
Integ rat ing t im e
S V a
Funct io ns o n t he T 300
C o nt ro l se ct io n
Pow e r se ctio n
T rav e l co ntro l S pe ed co nt ro l T o rq ue co nt ro l
+ + +
+ +
- - -
Funct io ns in t he bas ic d rive co nve rte r

α
#
M
V e loc ity 3~
Pos it io n
actua l v a lue act ua l v a lue
The position reference value smoothing (H730) must be as high as the equivalent time constant of the
speed controller loop plus a possibly existing smoothing time constant of the position actual value.
The speed reference value smoothing (H740) must be as high as the equivalent time constant of the
torque control loop plus a possibly existing smoothing time constant of the speed actual value.
KP1 of the position controller is used to increase the proportional gain in H734 (-256...256) in a restricted
range. In this case, the control difference can be increased to the power of two. Example:
A total Kp of 350 is to be implemented. In this case, for example, the control difference is first pre-
1
amplified with 2 (H731=1). The remaining gain of 350/2=175 can be adjusted in H734.
The influence range of the position controller is defined using parameters H732/H733. If all of the pre-
controls are correctly set, the position controller must only act to correct. Thus, normally a influence range
of approx. 10% is adequate.
The speed reference pre-control can be set using H739. Is H739 set to 100%, the pre-control is enabled.
By setting 0%, the pre-control is disabled. In this case the position controller output limiting has to be
increased (H732=100%, H733=-100%). Generally H739=100%. H739=0% (special case) means also
dynamic losses.
The position controller can be toggled between P- and PI controller characteristics using parameter H734.
The PI characteristics of the position controller is only practical, if the speed controller in the basic drive
converter is operated as P controller.

Manual
3.7.7 Tracking error monitoring (diagram D5)

The correct position control mode is monitoring using the tracking error monitoring function. The position
reference value is compared to the actual value. If the difference exceeds the limit value, entered in H741,
error message F121 is issued after the delay time in H745 has expired.
If the tracking error monitoring function responds, the reasons can be as follows:
Position controller
− Position controller gain too low (H731/H734)
− The position controller output limiting has been set too low (H732/H733), especially if the speed
setpoint pre-control has been disabled. (H739=0).
− For extremely high dynamic drive requirements (fast response speed), inertia compensation is not
selected (H738).
The drive cannot provide the torque
− The ramp-up- (H601), or ramp-down time (H621) of the position ramp-function generator has been set
too low.
− The torque limits have been set too low
− The load is demanding excessive torque, or the drive is locked
Basic drive converter
− The basic drive converter has been incorrectly parameterized/not set-up according to the Start-up
Instructions, Section 6.
− Speed control not optimized
Tracking error monitoring
− The limit is set too low, H741
− Delay time is set too low.

Manual
3.7.8 Generating the torque reference value (diagram D3)

3.7.8.1 Friction characteristic (diagram D3)
The friction compensation controls the velocity-dependent torque losses of the drive. The friction
compensation only has a slight influence on the drive dynamic performance. It is practical if the automatic
load measurement function is used. If the friction characteristic is parameterized, the frictional torque
when measuring the load is taken into account which results in more accurate measured values. Further,
for drives which have a large friction, inertia compensation is only practical, if the friction characteristic has
been determined.
Note:
The friction characteristic is significantly dependent on the temperature- and aging of the mechanical
system. Thus, when determining the characteristic, the conditions actually encountered in practice should
be used as far as possible.
The friction characteristic is very dependent on the drive design. There is no generally valid equation for
the frictional torque. Generally it has fixed components and a velocity-proportion component, but it can
also have a square-law (air resistance) or, for example, for oil-filled bearings, functions which are
extremely complicated to define.
For these reasons, a characteristic with 7 points is provided. The abscissa values are fixed at 5%, 10%,
20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, 100%, and the ordinate values must be determined by measurement.
The frictional torques are entered in parameters H764 to H770. The characteristic is symmetrical, so that
at negative velocities, the frictional torques are also negatively pre-controlled. The characteristic is linearly
interpolated between the points, and outside the range defined by the points, the characteristic is
horizontal.
Frict io na l to rq ue
H7 7 0
H76 9
H76 8
H76 7
H76 6
H76 5
H764
5 % 10 % 20% 40% 60% 80 % 100 %

V e lo c ity
The friction characteristic is determined as follows:

The velocities ( 5%, 10%, 20%, etc.) are approached in closed-loop speed controlled operation and after
stabilization, the static torque is determined.
It is also possible to switch the frictional torque immediately as supplementary torque, and to adjust the
speed controller output (CUVC,CUMC:r255; CU2,CU3:r245) to zero at the selected velocity points by
changing the particular friction coefficient.

Manual
3.7.8.2 Inertia compensation (diagram D3)

The pre-control of the accelerating torque relieves the controller when the velocity is changed. Otherwise,
the velocity controller would first have to establish the accelerating torque as result of the setpoint- actual
value difference, it is now calculated and pre-controlled. The controller must only generate low correction
torques, if the pre-controlled torque is not exactly correct. The accelerating torque is generated by
multiplying the accelerating setpoint from the position ramp-function generator and the moment of inertia
(H738).
As frequently the moment of inertia is not constant, a circuit to measure the actual loading is integrated.
When the velocity increases, the moment of inertia is measured, and is taken into account for the
positioning at braking. In this case, a fixed moment of inertia is first specified (empty trolley). The influence
of the automatic load measurement can be set using parameter H772.
3.7.9 Setpoint generation, speed-controlled modes (diagram D4)

All of the closed-loop speed controlled modes are illustrated in the following Table.
Mode Comments
Speed control 1 The drive rotates with the setpoint parameterized in H750
Referencing The drive rotates with the setpoint from the referencing control (H330, H332)
Inching 1 and 2 The drive powers-up and rotates with the setpoint parameterized in H753
(inching 1) and H754 (inching 2).
Standard stop The ramp-function generator input is switched to zero
A dedicated ramp-function generator is available for the speed-controlled modes. A closed-loop speed
controlled mode can be selected jolt-free. The ramp-up time is set in parameter H761, and the ramp-down
time in H760. If hardware limit switch A2 or B2 is actuated, the ramp-down time, set in H760 is changed
over to the down ramp in the traversing data set.

Manual
3.7.10 Status word, position control (diagram D5)

The position control status word is defined as follows:
Bit Description
0 Tracking error outside the tolerance
1 Tracking error within the tolerance
2 Velocity setpoint greater than the actual value
3 Velocity setpoint equal to the actual value
4 Velocity setpoint less than the actual value
5 Position ref. value greater than the position act. value
6 Position ref. value equal to the position actual value
7 Position ref. value less than the position actual value
8 Position control enabled
9 Speed-controlled operation
10 Position controller at the upper limit
11 Position controller at the lower limit
12 Drive has positioned
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 Not used
3.7.10.1 Status bit, drive has positioned

The drive has positioned signal is a checkback signal that the positioning task was executed. In this case,
in addition to checking that the position reference value and actual value are the same, it is also checked
as to whether the velocity setpoint and actual value are zero. If the signal is available for longer than the
time specified in H735, the positioning signal is output.
3.8 Special functions (diagrams E)

3.8.1 Motorized potentiometer (diagram E1)
The motorized potentiometer is essentially used to select a setpoint using the raise setpoint and lower
setpoint control signals. The motorized potentiometer can be set to a specific value.
The motorized potentiometer can also be used as ramp-function generator.

Manual
3.8.2 Visualization parameters (diagram E1)

In addition to permanently assigned display parameters, there are 6 free visualization parameters. Using
these parameters, any connector can be displayed.
An overview of the visualization parameters is provided in the subsequent table:
Visualization Selection Data type

parameters parameters
d089 H846 Normalized word quantities (% quantities)
e. g. velocities, torque
d090 H847 Normalized double-word quantities (% double word
quantities) e. g. positioning control loop signals
d091 H848 Hex quantities, e. g. status- and control words
d092 H849 Integer word quantities
d093 H850 Integer double word quantities, e. g. scaled position values
d094 H851 % double-word quantities, scaled.
3.8.3 Limit value monitors (diagram E2)

The limit value monitors are used to compare process quantities with one another or with fixed threshold
values. The limit value monitors are sub-divided into two groups. Group 1 consists of 4 limit value monitors
which compare the double-word quantities and are therefore used for position limit values. Group 2
consists of 4 limit value monitors for word quantities. A tolerance bandwidth and a hysteresis can be set
for each limit value monitor.
The following schematic clearly shows the switching characteristics.
X1<X2
X1-X2
X1=X2
X1-X2
X1>X2
Tolerance bandwidth X1-X2
0
Hysteresis
3.8.4 Generating a freely-definable status word (diagram E3)

Using the freely-definable status word, a user can create a 16-bit word from any status signal. Each bit
position can be assigned a binary status signal. Thus, a status word can be generated for an automation,
a partner drive or for internal control bits.
It can also occur, that several bits (OR logic operation) can be used for a control function. If these come
from the same source, so this can be simply realized by specifying a mask in which these bits are set.
However, if bits are used from various sources, then this can be implemented by first gathering the signals
of interest in a free status word, and then evaluating as described.
3.8.5 Free functions

A selection of functions is available for test purposes. The free functions are displayed in the STRUC
diagram FP-RANDOM, and can be used with the SIMADYN D service- and start-up program.

Manual
3.8.6 NOVRAM assignment

32 bytes can be stored on the board, which are then also available after a voltage failure. In addition to the
pre-programmed values, any word can be stored in the NOVRAM.
The NOVRAM is assigned as follows:
Connector Contents
K062 Position actual value, pulse encoder 1
K063
K064 Position actual value, pulse encoder 2
K065
K081 Diagnostics word, shutdown
K254 Freely-definable word
K249 Motorized potentiometer output
K250
3.9 Function diagrams

Function diagrams A-E now follow.

Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A
1 Function overview Diagrams C : Setpoint/reference value conditioning
2 Block diagram, closed-loop control
C1 Parameterization, setpoint conditioning / fixed setpoints
3 General information
C2 Selecting the position ref. value / inching, position controlled / play compensation
4 Handling connectors
C3 Monitoring software limits
5-6 Function symbols
C4 Position limit values X, Y, Z
B C5 Software limit switches A1, B1 / maximum velocity / drive play B
Diagrams A : Signal input/output / signal conditioning C6 KP adaption, speed controller / ramp-up - ramp-down time, position RFG
A1 Communications with the basic drive converter (CU) / IDs
C7 Rounding-off time constant. position RFG / down ramps A2 and B2
A2 Status words from the basic drive conv. / control words to the basic drive converter
C8 Status word, reference value conditioning
A3 Communications with the COM-BOARD / peer-to-peer coupling
A4 Binary inputs / binary outputs Diagrams D : Closed-loop position control
A5 Analog inputs / analog outputs
D1 Enabling the position control / speed-controlled modes
C A6 Pulse encoder evaluation 1 C
D2 Position ramp-function generator
A7 Pulse encoder evaluation 2
D3 Position controller / friction characteristic / automatic load measurement
A8 Velocity actual value / position actual value for the closed-loop control
D4 Setpoint generation, speed-controlled modes
A9 Setpoint input via thumbwheel switch / byte-serial data input
D5 Status word, closed-loop position control
A10 Status word, input/output / constant values
D
Diagrams B : Open-loop drive control / referencing control Diagrams E : Special functions D
B1 Powering-up / powering-down the drive

E1 Motorized potentiometer / visualization parameters
B2 Stop / electrical off / fast stop
E2 Position limit value monitor / free limit value monitor
B3 Inverter enable / setpoint enable / brake control
E3 Freely-definable status word / status word, special functions
B4 Generating the error word / alarm word
B5 Status word, control / fault acknowledgement
E
B6 Referencing mode / signal that the drive has referenced E
B7 Changeover, referencing direction / enable reference point
evaluation, referencing error
B8 Checking that the approach path is greater than the minimum approach path
B9 Monitoring the reference point position
B10 Status words, referencing control
F B11 TR-encoder load control F
Date 15.1.97 Standard MS380 =

+
C. pers. Reh
positioning software package Contents
Checked Bader FP_TOC Sheet 0
Status Change Date Name Standard Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Signal input/output / signal conditioning Technological functions Ref. value generation / traversing data sets A
100 x position reference values
3x6 x position limit values
Drive control Referencing control
CU 2x6 x software limit switch
On / stop On
S Drive has 6 x max. traversing velocity
Fast stop referenced
Diagram R 6 x speed controller KP
A1-A2 El. off Referencing
6 x drive play
Inching Drive play
6 x up time, pos.-RFG
HW limit switch Reference point
B
6 x down time, pos.-RFG B
Inverter enable Limit switch
6 x round.-off time const., pos.-RFG
COM Board Ref. val. enable
6 x down ramp A2
Ext. fault
6 x down ramp B2
Diagram B1 - B6 Diagram D1-D5
Diagram A3 Diagram C1 - C8
Thum.switch
Special functions
Closed-loop position control

C PEER Motor pot. C
Diagram A7
Position ramp-function generator
Position
Diagram A3 Byte-serial Diagram E1 reference Velocity Acceleration
value setpoint setpoint
Positioning
Diagram A7 grid
S V a
Binary
D D
Contr. section
Diagram A4
Power section
Diagram E3 Pos. control Speed control Torque control
+ + +
+ +
Limit value -
Analog - -
monitor
U
U
U #
U
Diagram A5 #
E E
Diagram E2 M
3~
Diagram D1-D5
Pulse encod.
#
Diagram E1 - E4
#
Diagram A6
F F
Date 15.1.97 Standard MS380 Function overview

=
+
C. pers. Reh
positioning software package
Checked OVERVIEW Sheet 1+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
T300 functions
A Position Velocity Acceleration A
reference value setpoint KP characteristic setpoint
Note:
<1> CUVC, CUMC = 1
S V a
H730 H740 H738

B B
CU2:P226=3008 P506=3005
CUVC,CUMC: P232=3008 Basic drive converter
functions
C CUVC,CUMC: P235
KP
Adaption P507 C
<1> CU2:P225 CU2:P229 r510

Kp CUV,CUMC:
H734 H735 r223 for CU2,CU3 CU2: r228 P240 Power section
Kp Tn r229 for CUVC,CUMC CUVC,CUMC: r237 Kp Tn
+ + +
+ + +
- P443=3002
D - - D
Position control Speed control Torque control
H729 P221: CU2,CU3
T1
P223: CUVC,CUMC
Torque
P208=1 CU2: P216 computer
T1=32ms 2
a r214 + r007
# + T1=16ms 1
r218
E 0 E
LBA P217=0
Position
actual value
M
3~
F
Speed F
actual value
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Block diagram +
Checked positioning software package closed-loop control OVERVIEW Sheet 2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Types of lines: Cross references to the hardware

A A
Depending on the particular signal type, various Cross references to the inputs/outputs of the Example:
line types can be assigned in the diagrams Example: board are realized by specifying the Binary input
terminal on terminal block SE300 as well as Terminal PIN T300
Signals, which represent a bit quantity, specifying the connector and pins on the SE300 -X136
are shown as a thin line. technology board 1
601
Signals, which represent a word quantity,

are shown as a thick line. Binary signals
B B
The description of the binary signals is Example

Signals, which represent a closed-loop control No fast stop
always realized for the 1 state
signal in a word format, are shown as a thick
line with arrow. Fast stop is not
present for signal
state=1
Signals, which represent a closed-loop control
signal in a double-word format, are shown as
double line with arrow.
C C
Cross references
Cross references are provided with page and Example:

D column data Cross reference on D
Page 10, column 8
[10.8]
E E
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 General information +
Checked Bader positioning software package FP_DEF Sheet 3+
Status Change Date NameStandard Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Many signals are defined to be freely connected- Example: Selecting several bits from a connector
up as connectors (also refer to Section 5) It is also possible to simultaneously select Selecting from bit No. 3 and
bits from a connector. bit No. 8 in connector K123
Example:
Connector Bit No. 3 and bit 8 of connector 123 are
The connector, in which the signal is deposited, K060
switched-through to the output. H132 (0h)
is located at the function block. The selection mask is obtained as follows: H131 (0)
K123 0108h
Selecting a connector
If the connector is to be further connected, H131 (0) H131=123 H132=0108
B the connector number is entered as source. Bit No. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B
K067
Example:
Connector K067 is to be further connected H131=67 0 1 0 8
to parameter H131. The connector is entered The masking block output is set to 1, if bit 3
in the function diagram or bit 8 is set in the connector.
Selecting bits from a connector

A connector always consists of 16 bits. Pre-assigning connectors and maskings
H131 (0) 0 The pre-assignment is specified after the param. H132 (0h)
If one or several bits are to be selected from 1
H131 (0)
C
a connector, a masking block is used. K
. No. of the connector selection in brackets. K123 0108h C
The circuit below has the function shown . Example:
in the adjacent diagram . 0 is pre-assigned in H131 as source
14
15 Masking blocks without any data are
pre-assigned FFFFh.
H132 (0h) 0
H131 (0)
1
K .
. MSK
H132 .
14 D
15
Also refer to Section 5
Selecting a bit from a connector Selecting from bit No. 3

If it involves a word-format quantity for the in connector K123
connector, from which a bit is to be selected,
in addition to the multiplexer at the masking
block, the bit to be selected is also specified. H132 (0h)
Example: H131 (0)
Bit No. 3 of connector 123 is to be switched- K123 0008h
E through to the output. Thus, 123 must be E
entered in H131 as source. The mask to H131=123 H132=0008
select bit 3 is thus obtained as follows:
Bit No. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 8
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Handling connectors +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Logic symbols Input/output signals Control blocks Arithmetic blocks
AND I1 I2 Q MONOFLOP Pulse encoder evaluation PT1 element Multiplier

A A
I Q
I1 0 0 0 T X1 X1 * X2
Q 0 1 0 I 1 Q 0 0 X Y Y X1 Y Y=
I1 1 0 0 0>1 T # X2
100%
1 1 1 or
X2
Integrator
OR I1 I2 Q Switch-off delay A/D Adder
I Q conversion Digital/Analog X2
I1
>
=1 Q
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
I
0 T
Q 1
1>0
1
T
U #
X Y
Y = X1 + X2
I1 X1 Y
#
B
U B
1 1 1
Differentiator
Sign reversal
Flip-flop Switch-on delay Binary Binary
reset dominant S input output X Y
R Q I Q
T 0 X (-1) Y Y = -X
S Q 0 0 Q I Q 0 0 #
0 1 0 0>1 T
R 1 0 1 # PI controller
1 1 0 Polygon characteristic
Y
XE Y Y = f(x)
Flip-flop Comparator Communications X Y
C C
set dominant receive send Can be defined
S R Q X
X1 QU (1 at X1>X2) using points
S Q 0 0 Q QE (1 at X1=X2) PID controller
0 1 0 X2 QL (1 at X1<X2) Multiplexer
R 1 0 1
1 1 1 XE Y X1
Limit value monitor Y Y(n) = Xn
with hysteresis Conversion Xn
bits->word word->bits
EXCLUSIVE OR I1 I2 Q Limiter n
D
D/# #/D D
=1
I1 0 0 0 Divider
Q 0 1 1 X Y
I1 1 0 1 X1
X1 x 100%
1 1 0 Bit selection Y X1 YY=
X2 X2
H132 (0h) With the parameter Ramp-function generator or
NOT a bit is filtered from X2
X 0108h word X and switched-
I Q through to output Q
1
X Y Change-over switch
I Q 0 1 I Y
1 0 X1
Y 0 X1
E X2 1 X2 E
Edge evaluation
I Q I
I Q 0 0
1>0 1 Absolute value generator
X Y Y = |X|
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Function symbols I +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Memory blocks
Memory
A A
SET Y
X Y 0 Y
1 X
SET
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Function symbols II +
Checked Bader positioning software package FP_DEF Sheet 6-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Hardware ID System error messages

d003
SYS K009
A
HW? d000 ERR MSK System error T300
A
? [A10.5] Set the factory setting

Software ID H100 EEPROM erased
H998 [E3.5]
Suppressing
SW? d001
system errors
Note:
The unit must be powered-down and up againafter the
Version ID software Drive ID value has been entered (165) for the factory setting
DRIVE
B V?? d002
#
d099 B
Send to CU
H997
Receiving from CU
CU H951 (82) Send words
-X137 Receive words
[A2.1] [A2.8] K
1 CU
DUAL 1 Status word 1 from CU K010
-X137
PORT [B4.1] H952 (220) DUAL
RAM 2 Speed actual value from CU PORT
K011 [A8.1] Speed setpoint to CU
CU -> TB [D3.8] K 2 RAM
Receive word 3 from CU TB -> CU
3 K012
C H953 (0) C
[A2.1] Word 3 to CU
4 K013 K 3
5 Torque actual value from CU

K014 H954 (83)
Receive word 6 from CU [A2.8] K 4
6 K015
7
Receive word 7 from CU
K016
H955 (204)
Supplementary torque to CU
[D3.8] K 5
8 K017
H956 (0)
D 9 K018 Word 6 to CU D
K 6
10 K019
H957 (0)
Receive word 11 from CU Word 7 to CU
11 K020 K 7
12 K021 H958 (141)
Kp factor to CU
Receive word 13 from CU [C6.7] K 8
13 K022
14 K023
[A10.5]
E 15 K024 Send to CU ok. [B4.1] E
16 Receive word 15 from CU

K025
Torque actual value

Receive from CU ok. (100%=4000h)
[A10.5] [B4.1]
[B4.1]
Note: 4
F The receive- and send words must be connected-through F
on the basic unit corresponding to Section 6.
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Communications with +
Checked Bader positioning software package the basic drive converter (CU), Sheet A1+
Status Change Date Name Standard receive/send telegram FP_A1_6 Function diagram A1 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[A1.3]
0
Ready to power-up from CU Generation, control word 1
Ready from CU H251 (0)
1 H250 (0)
Inverter enabled from CU Bypass control word 1 d037
A 2 [B1.3] [B3.2] [B11.4] K A
3
Fault from CU
[B1.5] [B5.1]
Drive powered-up On / no standard stop (OFF1)
≥1 K082 [A1.5]
No electrical off (OFF2) from CU [B1.8] 0
4
D/# No fast stop (OFF3) from CU [B2.6]
No electrical off (OFF2)
1
5
No fast stop (OFF3)
Power-up inhibit from CU [B2.6] 2
6
Inverter enable
Alarm from CU [B3.3] 3
7
Setpoint-actual value deviation from CU
Ramp-function generator enable
4 D/#
8
PZD control requested from CU 5
9
Enable setpoint
B Comparison frequency reached from CU [B3.7] 6
10 B
Acknowledge fault
Undervoltage from CU [B5.4] 7
11
Main contactor controlled from CU 0 Inching 1 on 8
12
Ramp-function generator active from CU 0 9
13
Clockwise rotating field from CU 1 Control from PLC 10
14
Kinetic buffering active from CU (CUVC,CU2) 1 Clockwise rotating field 11
15
1 Counter-clockwise rotating field 12
Motorized potentiometer, raise
0 13
0 Motorized potentiometer, lower 14
C
1 No fault external 1 15
C
Status word 2 from CU Restart on the fly / magnetization active

[A1.3] 0
Synchronism reached (CUVC,CU2)
[B3.2]
Generation, control word 2
1 Control word 2 to CU
No overspeed H253 (0) H254 (0)
2 d038
Bypass control word 2
Fault, external 1 K
D D/#
3
4
Fault, external 2
0
Setpoint channel, data set bit 0
≥1 K083 [A1.5]
D
External alarm 0
5 Setpoint channel, data set bit 1
0 1
6 i2t alarm, drive converter Motor, data set bit 0 (CUVC,CU2)
0 2 D/#
Fault, drive converter overtemperature Motor, data set bit 1 (CUVC,CU2)
7
0 3
Alarm, drive converter overtemperature Fixed setpoint selection, bit 0
8
0 4
Alarm, motor overtemperature Fixed setpoint selection, bit 1
9
0 5
Fault, motor overtemperature Enable synchronization
10
0 6
11 Enable restart on the fly
1 7
Motor rotor locked / motor stalled Enable droop
E 12 E
0 8
13 Bypass contactor in from CU Enable speed control
1 9
Error, synchronization from CU (CUVC,CU2) No fault, external 2
14
1 10
Pre-charging active from CU Slave drive
15
0 11
Alarm 1, external
1 12
No alarm 2, external
1 13
BICO data / Reserve setting
0 14
0 15
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Status words from the basic drive converter +
control words to the basic drive converter
Checked Bader positioning software package FP_A1_6 Function diagram A2 Sheet A2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Receiving from CB Sending to CB

Notes when sending data to CB:
Main control word from CB H961 (0)
A 1 For double-word connectors, an entry must Send word 1 to CB
A
Simulation
K026 be made in the 2 consecutive selection K 1
H104 parameters. The required connector number
control bits
is entered in the first parameter, and the H962 (0)
-X135
required connector number +1 in the following Send word 2 to CB
-X135 X1 X1>X2 K 2
parameter.
X1=X2 Example: H963 (0) CB
CB 0 X2 X1<X2 Position actual value, scaled (refer to function K
Send word 3 to CB
3
diagram A8): H962=74; H963=75
Receive word 2 from CB
2 K027 H964 (0)
Send word 4 to CB
Receive word 3 from CB K
B 3 K028 Note when transferring double words 4 B
Receive word 4 from CB from CB: H965 (0)

4 K029 For double words, only the first connector Send word 5 to CB
is "connected". K 5
5 K030 Example:
Receive word 6 from CB Position reference value as double word: H966 (0)
6 K031 Send word 6 to CB
H360=27 (refer to function diagram C2) K 6
7 K032
H967 (0)
Receive word 8 from CB Send word 7 to CB
8 K033 K 7
9 K034 H968 (0)
C C
Send word 8 to CB
Receive word 10 from CB K 8
10 K035
H969 (0)
Receive from CB ok. Send word 9 to CB
[A10.5] K 9
[B4.1]
H970 (0)
Send word 10 to CB Send to CB ok.
K 10
[A10.5] [B4.1]
Receiving from peer-to-peer
D D
d004
-X134 Receive word 1 from peer-to-peer
Sending to peer-to-peer
1 K040
1
+Rx d005 H941 (0)
T300 -Rx 2
Receive word 2 from peer-to-peer
K041
K
Select word 1 to peer
1 -X134
2 +Tx 3
d006 H942 (0)
Select word 2 to peer -Tx
T300
Receive word 3 from peer-to-peer K 2 4
3 K042
d007 H943 (0)

Select word 3 to peer
E Receive word 4 from peer-to-peer K 3 E
4 K043
d008 H944 (0)
No. of receive H101 LT Select word 4 to peer
words Receive word 5 from peer-to-peer K 4
5 K044
Receive from peer ok.

H945 (0)
[A10.5] Select word 5 to peer
BDR [B4.1]
Note: K 5 Send to peer ok.
H101, H946, H999 are INIT
[A10.5]
values, refer to Section 4.1.1
No. of send words H946 LT
F BDR F
Baud rate H999
Date 15.1.97
Standard MS380 Communications with the =
C. pers. Reh +
COM-BOARD, peer-to-peer
Checked Bader positioning software package coupling FP_A1_6 Function diagram A3 Sheet A3+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SE300 -X136 -X136 SE300
Inverting the
A binary inputs A
d009
1 Binary input 1 0 Bit inversion
=1
601
K045 H901 d096
D/# H900 (0)
=1
Binary inputs
2 Binary input 2 1 0 Binary output 1 21
602 K 0 631
H102
H903 D/# #/D
603
3 Binary input 3 2 H902 (0)
Mask for inversion
K H916 1 Binary output 2 22 632
1
604 4 Binary input 4 3

H904 (0) H905
B Binary inputs 9...16 B
[A9.2] K 2 Binary output 3 23 633
5 Binary input 5 2
605 4
H906 (0) H907
606 6 Binary input 6 5 K 3 Binary output 4 24

3 634
7 Binary input 7 H908 (0) H909

607 6
K 4 Binary output 5 25 635
4
8 Binary input 8 7
608 H911
H910 (0)
C
C
9 5
609 P24 external
24V + H913
H912 (0)
- 10 M24 external
610 K 6 Binary output 7 27 637
6
11 Binary input 9 H914 (0) H915

611 8
7

D - D
+
29
P24 external 639
24V
614 14 Binary input 12 11 M24 external 30

640
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
E
7 5 3 1 E
6 4 2 0
619 19 P24 external

24V +
- Note:
20 M24 external All P24 and all M24 of the T300 are
630
F F
internally connected with one another
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Binary inputs +
Checked Bader positioning software package binary outputs FP_A1_6 Function diagram A4 Sheet A4+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SE300 -X131 -X131 SE300
A A
-10V...+10V H920 (0)

1 Input 1 d011
501 K -10V...+10V
+
U
Offset
2 Reference K046 # Output 1 9
502 # +
H923 509
H921 H922 U
H111 Gain
H110 H112 H924
GND 510
Input 2 d012
503 3
+
U
B Reference K047 B
4
504 # + H925 (0)
H114 K
H113 H115 Offset
H928
# Output 2 17
519
Input 3 d013 H926 H927 U
505 5 Gain
+
U
Reference K048 H929
6
506 # +
GND 520
H117
H116 H118
C C
H930 (0)
7 Input 4 d014
507 K
+
U
Offset
8 Reference K049 # Output 3 19
508 # +
H933 521
H931 H932 U
H120 Gain
H119 H121 H934
GND 522
11 Input 5 d015
511
+
U
D K050 D
12 Reference
512 # + H935 (0)
H123 K
H122 H124 Offset
H938
# Output 4 20
523
Input 6 d016 H936 H937 U
513 13 Gain
+
U
K051 H939
14 Reference
514 # +
GND 524
H126
H125 H127
E E
Input 7 d017
15
515
+
U
K052
16 Reference
516 # +
H129
H128 H130
Note: Note:
All analog inputs are already smoothed per hardware with 0.5 ms. All GND connections of
F The differential inputs must be connected according to Section 2 T300 are intern. connected F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Analog inputs, +
Checked Bader positioning software package analog outputs Sheet A5+
Status Change Date Name Standard
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control word Position actual value

pulse encoder from NOVRAM
LBA Tracks A, B, zero pulse via LBA
H154 H135
A Terminal PIN T300 A
Digital filter d018
SE300 -X131
CTW EN_NVRM Speed actual value 1
531 21 Track 1A
Tracks A, B, zero pulse T 0 [B4.1]
532 22 GND
Hardware mode,
Pulse encoder K060 [A8.1]
533 23 Track 1B pulse evaluation Tracks A, B

Bit 5
Bit 0,1,2 evaluation 1 H162
H150
534 24 GND
Bit 8,9
25 SYN 1
Note:
B 535 Rough/ H150, H151, H152, H153 are B
fine pulse
26 GND evaluation INIT values, refer to Section 4.1.1
536
Zero pulse
Bit 6
27 Rough pulse 1
537
28 GND ext.
538
Position actual
C Hardware reference point d022 value 1 C
29 GND ext.
[C1.3] #
539 K062 [A8.1]
Setting value H169 (0) SET_VAL
540 30 P15
K Rotary axes Traversing direction, pulse encoder 1
The position actual value is 0=A->B / 1=B->A
Note: Scaling [A10.5]
All GND of the T300 Set position actual value 1 [C1.3] automatically reseted if the actual
[B6.2]
are intern. connected H134 (0h) value is higher 360°. [B7.1]
H133 (0) Active if zero pulse disabled. Zero pulse
K pulse encoder 1 identified
D Set position actual from

TR-encoder load control ≥1 SET [A10.5]
[B6.3] D
[B11.8] [B8.1]
[B9.4]
[B7.4] EN_SP
Enable zero pulse sensing Overflow, pulse encoder 1
from the referencing control [B4.4]
H132 (0h)
H131 (0)
E K RESET E
PPR RS RP <1>
H151 H152 H153 <1> Note to H153, also refer
to the function diagram, sheet C1
Pulses per Rated speed Normalization,
revolution position actual value 1
Note - If the limiting frequency of the filter is too low (H150),
this results in an erroneous and non-reproducible position actual value measurement.
F
Note - Only one pulse encoder can be supplied from the technology board. F
If 2 pulse encoders are to be connected, one pulse encoder must be supplied from an external power supply unit.
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Pulse encoder evaluation 1 +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Control word, Position actual value A

pulse encoder from the NOVRAM
H159 H140
Terminal PIN T300
Digital filter
SE300 -X131 Tracks A, B, d019 Speed actual value 2
31 Track 2A T 0 zero pulse CTW EN_NVRM
Speed actual value 2
541 K061
542
32 GND
Pulse encoder
Hardware mode,
Bit 0,1,2
evaluation 2 H163
543 33 Track 2B pulse evaluation
B d023 B
34 GND H155 Position actual value 2
544
Bit 8,9 #
K064
Rough/
35 SYN 2 fine
pulse [A10.5]
36 GND evaluation
546
Zero pulse, pulse encoder 2 identified
[A10.5]
Enable zero pulse sensing
37 Rough pulse 2 H142 (1h)
547 H141 (4)
38 GND ext. K EN_SP
548 Note:
C H155, H156, H157, H158 are C
40 GND ext. Reset position actual value INIT values, refer to Section 4.1.1
539
H136 (4) H137 (1h)
540 39 P15
K RESET
Set position actual value

H138 (0) H139 (0h)
K SET
D D
Setting value H170 (0)
K SET_VAL
Scaling PPR RS RP
[C1.3]
H156 H157 H158
Pulses per Rated speed Normalization,

revolution position actual value 2
E E
Note:
All GND are
internally connected
Note:
If 2 pulse encoders are to be connected, one pulse encoder must be supplied from an external power supply unit.
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Pulse encoder evaluation 2 +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H164(60) Internal speed d020 d021

actual value Internal velocity actual value
[A6.8] K K076
A [B4.1] [D2.1] A
[D2.4]
Correction factor
[D4.6]
[C1.5] DW WD [D5.1]
X1 Velocity actual value > 0 (V>0)

B X1>X2 [A10.5][B10.4] B
0% X2 Velocity actual value = 0 (V=0)
X1=X2 [A10.5][B2.6][B3.5][B5.2][D2.5][B11.4]
Limit signal H165 L Velocity actual value < 0 (V<0)
velocity=0 X1<X2 [A10.5][B10.4]
Hysteresis H166 HY HY HY
L L S
R >
=1
Direction change
[B8.2]
C C
Position actual value

d025 Position actual value-compensation
H168(62) for rotary axis mode d026 Position actual value for
[A6.8] K the closed-loop control
K070
D D
[D2.5]
[D3.1]
d027
Select position actual value from DPR Position actual value normalized
K072
H167 (0)
K K066 [B9.1]
Rotary axis mode
Note: [C1.5]
The absolute position of the motor is transferred,
E referred to a revolution, only for SIMOVERT SC. Position actual d028 E
- absolute motor position for ERN1387 and 2pole resolver value scaled
- Rotor position is depent on the position of the rotor at K074
switch-on with a multi-pole resolver
[B8.2] [E2.1]
Scaling [C2.5] [E3.3]
[C1.3] [C2.3] [D5.1] [B11.4]
Conversion, double word -> word
DW WD K077
F F
Date 15.1.97
Standard MS380 Select., velocity act. value source =
C. pers. +
Reh select., pos. actual value source
Checked Bader positioning software package act. value comp. for the rotary axis FP_A7_13 Function diagram A8 Sheet A8+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Read-in thumbwheel Number of decades H183

switch d030 Reference value from
the thumbwheel switch
A K054 A
Normalization H184
Note:
H183 is an INIT value,
refer to Section 4.1.1 Coding, binary/BCD H185
with sign H186

H187 (0) H188 (0h)
K Bit 0 from the thumbwheel switch
B H190 (0h) B
H189 (0)
H191 (0) H192 (0h) Binary decade control

Control, decade 0 K053
0
Control, decade 1
1
H193 (0) H194 (0h) # Control, decade 2
2
Control, decade 3
3
H195 (0) H196 (0h)
C Data transfer from the Control, decade 4 C
thumbwheel switch 4
K
D D
Byte-serial data read-in
Binary inputs 9...16 d029
[A4.3] Reference value, byte-serial
K055
Time where the byte
must remain stable H182
Note
The control bits must remain stable for
at least H182+40ms (=sampling time).
E E
H180 (0) H181 (0h)

1=high byte
K
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Thumbwheel switch, +
Checked Bader positioning software package byte-serial data read-in FP_A7_13 Function diagram A9 Sheet A9+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status word, input/output

A A
Constant value 0%, 0, 0h d031
Zero pulse pulse encoder 1 identified Status word input/output
0% K000 [A6.7] 0 K079
Zero pulse pulse encoder 2 identified
D/#
Constant value 100%
[A7.7] 1 Display in d031
Velocity actual value > 0 (V>0) 2
100% K002 [A8.5]
15 13 11 9
Velocity actual value = 0 (V=0) 3 14 12 10 8
[A8.5]
Constant value FFFFh
FFFFh K004 [A8.5]
Velocity actual value < 0 (V<0) 4
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
B Constant value 1 only for [A6.7]
Traversing direction, pulse encoder 1
5 B
pre-assigning traversing data sets
1d K005 [A7.7] 6
0 7
0 8
[A1.4] System error, T300 9
[A1.8] Sending to CU ok. 10
[A3.8] Sending to CB ok. 11

C C
Sending to peer ok. 12
[A3.8]
Receiving from CU ok.
[A1.2] 13
Receiving from CB ok.
[A3.3] 14
Receiving from peer ok.
[A3.3] 15
D D
E E
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Status word, input/output +
Checked Bader positioning software package constant values FP_A7_13 Function diagram A10 Sheet A10-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H201 (0h)
H200 (0)
A Power-on command Drive A
K powered-up
≥1 S [A2.5]
[B4.2]
R [B2.4]
[B3.1]
[B4.4]
[B5.2]
H215 (0h) [D4.2] [B6.1]
H214 (0) Inching 1, Inching, speed- [D1.1][D4.4]
speed-controlled controlled mode
K
B
≥1 S
≥1
Inching mode
[B2.4] B
R
H217 (0h)
H216 (0) Inching 2,
speed-controlled
K [D4.3]
Inching,
position-
H225 (0h) [C2.5] controlled
C H224 (0) Inching 1, C
position-controlled mode
K
≥1 S [C2.5]
Power-off
ready signal
R Drive faulted
(T300 identificat.) W
[B4.8] 0 W Drive not ready
H226 (0) H227 (0h)
Inching 2,
position-controlled
≥ [B5.2]
[C2.5] [A2.4]
Fault from CU
K 1 [B3.8]
Power-down from
[B2.6]
Electrical off the brake control
2 [B3.5]
D D
Off after inching Bit/ H240
word
1=with brake control

8
Time for inching
0 T 15 13 11 9
≥1 7
14
5
12
3
10
1
8
6 4 2 0
H245
E E
d035 [B3.2]
Off after standard stop
[B2.8] 9 Power-down word
K080
1s Off after fast stop
[B2.8] 10
[B3.3] Inverter enable 0 T d036
No checkback signal, drive converter
11
[A2.4] Inverter enabled from CU K081
Diagnostics word
(memory, reason for shutdown)
H246
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Drive power-up, +
Checked Bader positioning software package power-down FP_B1_6 Sheet B1+
Status Change Date Name Standard
Function diagram B1 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

H203 (0h) [D1.1][D4.5]
H202 (0)
Standard stop
K
Stop from the S Off after standard stop [B1.5]
A A
≥1
Referencing referencing control V=0
active mode [B6.8]
Stop after passing-over
R [A8.5]
[B6.5]
Position control the hardware limit switch
[D1.5]
enabled
Enable stop when

≥1 Braking
[B5.2]
Inching mode
Hardware limit switch A2 passing the H236 [B1.5]
H229 (0h) hardware limit switch
H228 (0)
K [B7.3] [B7.3]
[B10.1] [B10.4]
B B
Hardware limit switch B2

≥1
H231 (0h)
H230 (0)
K [B7.3][B7.3]
[B10.1][B10.4]
C
No fast stop (OFF3) C
H207 (0h)
H206 (0)
Fast stop
K S Off after fast stop
≥1
Fast stop, emergency [B1.5]
limit switch A3 V=0
R [D1.1]
Fast stop, emergency [D4.8]
limit switch B3
Emergency limit switch A3 No fast stop (OFF3)
H232 (0) H233 (0h) 1 [A2.6]
D
K S [B4.4]
D
R
Emergency limit switch B3
H235 (0h)
H234 (0)
K S [B4.4]
R
Acknowledge fault
[B5.4]
E No electrical off (OFF2) E

H205 (0h)
H204 (0) Electrical off
K S [B1.5]
0
≥1 R
No electrical off (OFF2)
[A2.6]
Drive powered-up
[B1.8]
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Stop / electrical OFF / fast stop +
A H236 19.2.96 Reh Checked Bader positioning software package FP_B1_6 Function diagram B2 Sheet B2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Open holding/operating
brake
[B5.2]
Setpoint enable
from the brake control
T 0
S
R
Selection mask, H243
B
operating brake control B
Brake
H241 (700h) Off,brake immediately closed opening time
Shutdown word (fault brake)
[B1.7] T 0 Power-down from
≥1 ≥1
the brake control
[B1.7]
Off, brake closed at V=0
H242 80Fh (holding brake) H244
Brake
closing time
Selection mask, Close brake at V=0
holding brake control [B5.2]
C C
S
V=0
≥1 R [A8.5]
D D
Inverter enable
H209 (1h)
H208 (4)
K Inverter enable
[A2.6]
Drive [B1.3]
powered-up
[B1.8] [B5.2]
TR-encoder
transmission active
[B11.7]
Restart on the fly /

E Setpoint enable magnetization active E
H211 (1h) [A2.4]
H210 (4) Ready for
setpoint enable Enable setpoint
K [A2.6]
Inverter
[B5.2]
enabled from the CU 1
[A2.4]
Enable
speed control
[A2.6]
[B1.7] With brake control 1 [D1.2]
F
[D4.4] F
Date 15.1.97
Standard MS380 Inverter enable, =
C. pers. Reh +
setpoint enable
Checked Bader positioning software package brake control FP_B1_6 Function diagram B3 Sheet B3+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Receiving from CB ok. Drive faulted

[A3.3] T 0 Communications error, receiving with CB (T300 identification)
0 [F116] [A097]
Sending to CB ok.
[A3.8]
Acknowledge S [B5.2]
A H260 fault A
D/# [B5.4] R
Receiving from CU ok.
[A1.2] T 0 Communications error with CU 1 [F117] [A098]
[A1.8] Sending to CU ok.
H261
Receiving from peer ok.
[A3.3] T 0 Communications error peer-to-peer
2 [F118] [A099] H280
d039 Error word
User error 1 1
H263 (1h) H268 K084
H262 (4)
K T 0
B
User error 2
≥1 User error 1
3 [F119] [A100]
Transfer faults to the
B
H266 (1h) H264 H266 (1h)

H265 (4)
K T 0
≥1 User error 2
4 [F120] [A101]
Transfer alarms to the
[B1.8] Drive powered-up Tracking error outside tolerance
H267 [D5.5] 5 [F121] [A102] H281 (0)
[A8.2] Int. speed actual value Error, positive overspeed 6 [F122] [A103] K085
Overspeed H269 Error, negative overspeed
C
limit 7 [F123] [A104]
d040 Alarm word C
Internal speed actual value Drive stalled
n=0
Limit H272
T 0
8 [F124] [A105]
[D3.8]
Velocity setpoint
X Velocity setpoint > limit value H275 Display in d039 and d040
Limit H273
15 13 11 9
D [A1.4]
Torque actual value
X Torque actual value > limit value
14 12 10 8 D
Limit H274 7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Speed act. value from CU + T 0

[A1.3] X X1 X1>X2
Pulse encoder fault
9 [F125] [A106]
- X1=X2 Fast stop, emergency
Speed actual value 1
[A6.8] H271 limit switch A3 Fault, emergency limit
H270 X2 X1<X2 [B2.4] switch A3 actuated
10 [F126] [A107]
E Fast stop, emergency E

limit switch B3 Fault, emergency limit
[B2.4] switch B3 actuated
11 [F127] [A108]
[B1.8] Drive powered-up
Referencing error
[B7.8] 12 [F128] [A109]
Error, reference point
not / incorrectly identified
[B1.8] 13 [F129] [A110]
Overflow, pulse encoder sensing 1
[A6.7]
Overflow, position act. value
14 [F130] [A111]
Drive has referenced
[B6.5]
F F
TR-encoder load error
[B11.8] 15 [F131] [A112]
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Error word / alarm word generation +
Checked Bader positioning software package FP_B1_6 Function diagram B4 Sheet B4+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Status word, open-loop control
0 0 d041
0 1 K089
0 2
B [B2.6] Braking B
3
Display in d041
4
D/#
Velocity actual value = 0 (V=0)
[A8.5] 5 15 13 11 9
Drive powered-up
14 12 10 8
[B1.8] 6 7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
7
Drive not ready
[B1.8] 8
[B3.3]
Enable inverter
C
9 C
Int. setpoint enable
[B3.8] 10
Drive faulted
(T300 identification) 0 11
[B4.8]
Fault from CU ≥1 Drive faulted
12
Open holding/operating brake

[B3.8] 13
14
D D
Close brake at n=0
[B3.5] 15
Acknowledge button on
PN the technology board
Fault acknowledgement
≥1
E H213 (0h) Acknowledge fault
H212 (0) [A2.6]
Ext. fault acknowledgement E
K [B2.2]
[B4.7]
[B7.7]
1s
[B9.6]
Fault from CU 0 T Acknowledgement from CU [B11.5]
[A2.4]
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Status word, open-loop control +
Checked Bader positioning software package fault acknowledgement FP_B1_6 Function diagram B5 Sheet B5+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Referencing with shutdown
H301 (0h) [B10.1]
H300 (0) Referencing
with shutdown active Stop from
K S
R
≥1 referencing control
[B2.3]
Drive powered-up Referencing

[B1.8] active mode
Flying referencing ≥1 [A6.3] [D1.1]
[B2.2] [D4.3]
H303 (0h) [B7.1] [B10.1]
B
H302 (0) Flying B
[B8.1]
referencing active
K S
[B10.1]
<1> R
≥1
C C
(0=A->B, 1=B->A)
=1
[A6.7]
Min. approach path < 0 Referencing
[B8.5]
≥1
direction ok
Drive has referenced
Min. approach path = 0
[B8.5]
S
Approach path > min. approach path [B4.4]
[B8.7] Zero pulse, pulse R [B9.4]
D
D [B10.1]
encoder 1 identified
[A6.7]
[B11.4]
Positioning with
[B11.4] TR-encoder
Flying referencing TR-encoder referenced
Referencing with shutdown
≥1
E E
1 for board run-up

INIT
<1>
Drive powered-up Note to flying referencing:
After referencing, the actual position can be reached,
H320 the drive need not be stopped.
F Referencing with F
everey on-command
[B11.2]
Date 15.1.96 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Referencing mode +
Checked Bader
positioning software package signal, drive has referenced FP_B7_12 Function diagram B6 Sheet B6+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V setpoint from the

V setpoint ref. A->B H330 referencing control
Changingover the traversing direction
when the limit switch is reached V setpoint ref. A->B H331 [D4.3]
A crawl A
Hardware limit switch B2
Mode, [B2.2]
referencing active Referencing direction
[B6.5]
≥1
0=A->B, 1=B->A
S
[B10.1]
Referencing
Start direction, direction ok R V setpoint ref. B->A H332
referencing [B6.4]
Pre-contact to the V setpoint ref. B->A H333
H311 (0h) crawl
H310 (0) reference point
K H309 (0h)
H308 (0)
K
B B
Referencing
mode S [B10.1]
Crawl to the
Referencing R reference point
Hardware limit switch A2 mode
[B2.2]
≥1
Reversal when the reference
point is passed-over in the
incorrect direction
[B8.7]
C C
Reference point enable

(zero pulse) from the referencing control
D Automatic D
post-referencing Enable, zero pulse sensing from
the referencing control
H305 (1h)
H304 (4) [A6.3]
K [B10.1] Referencing error
[B8.5]
Min. approach path= 0
≥1 Hardware limit switch A2 reached
[B10.1]
[B4.5]
Hardware limit switch A2 S Referencing error
[B10.1]
Min. approach path> 0 S
[B8.5] R Acknowledge fault
E Trav. direction, pulse encoder 1 Referencing R E
[A6.7] mode [B5.4]
Approach path >
minimum approach path
[B8.7]
Hardware limit switch B2 reached

Min. approach path < 0 Hardware limit switch B2 S [B10.1]
[B8.5]
R
Trav. direction, pulse encoder1
F F
Date 15.1.97 Referencing direction changeover =

C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 enable, reference point +
Checked Bader
positioning software package referencing error evaluation FP_B7_12 Function diagram B7 Sheet B7+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Checking whether the referencing path > minimum approach path

Approach path > minimum approach path
+
X X1 X1>X2 S
- X1=X2 R
≥1 [B6.3]
[B7.1]
Position actual value [B10.1]
scaled X2 X1<X2
[A8.7]
SET
B Referencing B
mode
[B6.5]
≥1
Direction change
[A8.6]
Min. approach path > 0

X1 X1>X2 [B7.1]
Min. approach path = 0 [B6.2][B7.1]
X1=X2
0 Min. approach path < 0
X2 X1<X2 [B6.2] C
C [B7.1]
2
Minimum approach
distance
H320 X
<1>
Reversal when the reference point
D Referencing is passed-over in the incorrect direction D
direction ok.
[B6.4] [B7.2]
S
Zero pulse, pulse
encoder identified
[A6.7] R
≥1
E E
<1> The polarity of H312 also defines

the travel direction through the
reference point, refer to Section 3.5.3.
F F
Date 15.1.97 Checking that the approach path =

C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 is greater than the minimum +
Checked Bader
positioning software package approach path FP_B7_12 Function diagram B8 Sheet B8+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Monitoring the reference point position

Position actual value normalized
[A8.6] X1 X1>X2
Hardware reference point normalized X1=X2
+
[C1.3] X2 X1<X2 Valid range for
[B10.5]
B B
≥1
+ the reference point
Error, reference point
not / incorrectly identified
Tolerance bandwidth H322 Drive has referenced
reference point [B6.6] S [B4.5]
Zero pulse,
position X1 X1>X2 pulse encoder 1 identified
(0=inactive) Acknowledge fault
[A6.7] [B5.5] R
+ - X1=X2
Scaling
[C1.3] X2 X1<X2
Incorrect reference point

C 360° position for rotary C
X1 X1>X2 axis mode
+ + X1=X2 ≥1
X2 X1<X2
+
X1 X1>X2
- X1=X2 Rotary axis mode
+ [C1.5]
X2 X1<X2
D D
+
-360°
Monitoring enabled
X1 X1>X2
X1=X2
0 X2 X1<X2
E E
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
+
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Monitoring, reference point
Checked Bader
positioning software package position FP_B7_12 Function diagram B9 Sheet B9+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Status word 1 Status word 2

referencing control referencing control
Enable reference point Error, reference point
(zero pulse) sensing not / incorrectly identified
[B7.3] 0 d045 [B8.7] 0 d046
Referencing with shutdown active Hardware limit switch A2 Hardware limit switch A2 actuated
[B6.4] 1 K091 [B2.2] S 1 K092
[D4.3]
Flying referencing active Velocity > 0
[B6.4] 2 [A8.5] R
B 15 13 11 9 15 13 11 9 B
[B6.5] Referencing mode active 14 12 10 8 14 12 10 8
3 Hardware limit switch B2 Hardware limit switch B2 actuated
Drive has referenced 7 5 3 1 [B2.2] S 2 7 5 3 1
[B6.6] 4 6 4 2 0 [D4.4] 6 4 2 0
D/# Velocity < 0 D/#
Drive has not referenced
[A8.5] R
5 Valid reference point range
[B9.5] 3
Crawl to the reference point
[B7.8] 6
Approach path > min. approach path 0 4
[B8.7] 7
Approach path < min. approach path 0 5
8
C Referencing direction B->A 0 6 C
[B7.5] 9
[B11.7 ] transmission requested
7
10
[B11.7] transmission active
Referencing direction ok 8
[B6.4] 11
[B11.4] TR-Encoder referenced
TR-Encoder
9
12 transmission input
[B11.8] 10
Hardware limit switch A2 reached
[B7.7] 13
Hardware limit switch B2 reached 0 11
[B7.7] 14
D [B11.7]TR-Encoder start transmission error 12 D
[B7.8] Referencing error
15
[B11.7] TR-Encoder transmission error
13
[B11.7] TR-Encoder transmission timeout

14
0 15
E E
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Status words, +
Status Change Date

Checked Bader
Name Standard positioning software package referencing control FP_B7_12 Function diagram B10 Sheet B10+
Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Timing diagram TR-encoder loading No feedback from TR-encoder load output

after high signal at TR-encoder load input
TR-encoder load output
TR-encoder load input 0
TR-encoder
A T start loading error A
S
[B10.5]
R
t
1[s]
TR-encoder load output No speed detected after the falling
edge at TR-encoder load input
TR-encoder
T 0
TR-encoder transmission error
≥1
speed zero Loading error
[A8.5] S [B4.5]
T t [B10.5]
R
B 1[s] B
Track K1
Loading timeout
t T 0 [B10.5]
TR-encoder loading procedure S TR-encoder
Loading timeout
R
Track K2 H341
Maximum
t loading time
Störung quittieren
[B5.5]
C C
TR-encoder
T 0 loading active
S [B10.5]
[B3.1]
R
120[ms]
TR-encoder referenced TR-encoder
TR-encoder load output load input
[B6.6 [B10.5]
H337 (0h) [B10.5]
D H336 (0) D
K S T 0 Loading requested
Inverter enabled S [B10.5]
TR-encoder R from CU
loading active [A2.4] R
H340
Speed zero Delay time after

[A8.5] inv.-disable and speed zero
Set position actual from
TR-encoder loading control
Referencing TR-encoder [A6.4]
≥1
E H338 (0) H339 (0h) E
[B6.5]
Referencing with
everey on command ≥1 H335 [B6.5]
1 for board run up
INIT Positioning with TR-encoder
F F
Date 15.1.97 Referencing with TR-encoder =

C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 +
Checked Bader
TR-encoder loading control
Status Change Date Name Standard positioning software package TR-encoder load monitoring FP_B7_12 Function diagram B11 Sheet B11-
Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Parameterization, setpoint conditioning

A A
Hardware reference point position K102 Correction factor K106
H351 Hardware reference point, scaled H352

[A6.1] [A8.1]
[D3.7] <1> If H350 is selected the sam e as H153, then the number of received encoder increments
appears at d022, refer to [A6].
Example: H153 = 1 000 000, H350 = 1 000 000
K104 Rotary axis mode d022 = 40
Hardware reference point,
normalized 40 encoder increments or 10 pulses
[B8.1] H353 [A8.4] have been received.
[B9.1] [B9.5]
[D2.3]
B B
Scaling K100
H350 [A6.4] [A7.3]

[A8.5] [E1.6]
<1> [C3.3] [D5.1]
C Fixed setpoints C
Integer, word quantity 1 % word quantity 1 HEX word quantity 1 Integer, double word quantity 1 % double word quantity 1
H660 K330 H668 K338 H676 K346 H684 K354 H692 K370
H661 K331 H669 K339 H677 K347 H685 K356 H693 K372
D D
H662 K332 H670 K340 H678 K348 H686 K358 H694 K374
H663 K333 H671 K341 H679 K349 H687 K360 H695 K376
H664 K334 H672 K342 H680 K350 H688 K362 H696 K378
E Integer, word quantity 6 % word quantity 6 HEX word quantity 6 Integer, double word quantity 6 % double word quantity 6 E
H665 K335 H673 K343 H681 K351 H689 K364 H697 K380
H666 K336 H674 K344 H682 K352 H690 K366 H698 K382
H667 K337 H675 K345 H683 K353 H691 K368 H699 K384
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Setpoint conditioning parameters, +
Checked Bader
positioning software package fixed setpoints FP_C1_6 Function diagram C1 Sheet C1+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Variable
position ref. value
H359 (0) Traversing data set
word quantity K WD DW position reference values
A ( max. 100 values ) A
Variable H360 (0) + Relative positioning

position ref. value +
K P0 P0 K400
Position ref. value 1 H361 P1 P1 K402

d049
Position ref. value 2 H362 P2 P2 K404 Memory for position reference value
by relative positioning [C3.1]
. . . . . Position
. . . . . ref. value from
Position d051
ref. value A
. . . . the traversing
. data set
to X Y
B . . . . . B
. . . . . Relative positioning mode
. . . . . H468 (0) H469 (0h)
K positive edge:
Position ref. value 99 H459 P99 P99 K598 Transfer position actual value Relative positioning or
inching position-loop
Position ref. value 100 H460 P100 P100 K600 Forwards / backwards
H471 (0h) controlled
H470 (0)
K X=-X
Suppression, The input value X is inverted
Source, position
ref. value selection irrelevant bits Shift to the right Selected position Advance
H461 (5) H462 reference value H473 (0h)
C
H472 (0) Y=Y+X C
K Shift d050
K pos. edge: the input value X is added to
the last output value Y
H463
H474 (1) at power-on: 0= the internal position reference
No. of value memory is synchronized with the act.
shift operations value 1= the contents of the position reference
value memory are not changed
Position actual scaled
[A8.7] Set value
Mode position-
D controlled inching positive edge: D
[B1.4] Transfer position actual value
Ref. value, inching 1

H466 position-loop controlled
Note:
For the factory setting Inching 1, position-controlled pos. edge: the value in H466 is added to the
of parameters H468 - H472, [B1.2] last output value Y
the following is valid: d49 = d51
Ref. value, inching 2
H467 position-loop controlled
Inching 2, position-controlled
E pos. edge: the value in H467 is added to the E
[B1.2] last output value Y
F F
Date 15.1.97 Selection, position ref. value =

C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 inching, position-controlled +
Checked Bader
positioning software package play compensation FP_C1_6 Function diagram C2 Sheet C2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Play compensation
Transfer, position d052 Position reference value,
scaled
[D5.1] reference value + K120
H465 (1h)
SET
0% + HOLD
[D5.1]
H464 (4)
Drive play [C8.1]
K [C5.8]
X1 X1>X2
≥1
B [C5.4] SW limit switch B1 B
X2
Influence and direction, Position reference value,
play compensation normalized
X1
S
=1
X1 X1>X2 Scaling K122
[C1.3]
SW limit switch A1
Old value
R [C5.8] X2 X1<X2 [C8.1] [D2.1]
memory X2 X1<X2
Play < 0
[C5.8] [C2.8]
C C
D D
E E
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Software limit monitoring +
Checked Bader
positioning software package FP_C1_6 Function diagram C3 Sheet C3+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Traversing data set, Traversing data set,

A position limit value X position limit value Y A
Variable H500 (0) Variable H510 (0)
position limit value X position limit value Y
K PX0 PX0 K700 K PY0 PY0 K720
Position limit value X1 H501 PX1 PX1 K702 Position limit value Y1 H511 PY1 PY1 K722
B Position limit value X5 H505 PX5 PX5 K710 Position limit value Y5 H515 PY5 PY5 K730 B
d053 d054
Source, position Suppression, Shift to
Position limit value X Source, position Suppression, Shift to Position limit value Y
limit value X selection irrelevant bits [E2.1] limit value Y selection irrelevant bits [E2.1]
the right the right
H507 (5) H508 H517 (5) H518
K130 K132
K Shift K Shift
H509 H519
C No. of No. of C
shift operations shift operations
Traversing data set,

position limit value Z
Variable H520 (0)
position limit value Z
K PZ0 PZ0 K740
Position limit value Z1 H521 PZ1 PZ1 K742

D D

d055
Source, position Suppression, Shift to Position limit value Z
limit value Z selection irrelevant bits the right [E2.1]
H527 (5) H528
E K134 E
K Shift
H529
No. of
shift operations
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Position limit values X, Y, Z +
Checked Bader
positioning software package FP_C1_6 Function diagram C4 Sheet C4+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Traversing data set, Traversing data set, A

SW limit switch A1 SW limit switch B1
SW limit switch A1 SW limit switch B1
K A1_0 A1_0 K760 K B1_0 B1_0 K780
SW limit switch A1_1 H531 A1_1 A1_1 K762 SW limit switch B1_1 H541 B1_1 B1_1 K782
B B
d056 d057
Source, SW limit Suppression, Shift to SW limit switch A1 Source, SW limit Suppression, Shift to
the right SW limit switch B1
the right
switch A1 selection irrelevant bits [C3.4] switch B1 selection irrelevant bits [C3.4]
H537 (5) H538 H539 H547 (5) H548 H549
K136 K138
K Shift K Shift
C C

max. velocity drive play
Variable H550 (0) Variable play H590 (0)
max. velocity
K VMX0 VMX0 K800 K PL0 PL0 K820
Max. velocity 1 H551 VMX1 VMX1 K801 Play 1 H591 PL1 PL1 K821
D D
Max.
d058 velocity d062
Source, max. Suppression, Shift to Source, drive Suppression, Shift to Drive play
E velocity selection irrelevant bits
the right [D2.4] play selection irrelevant bits the right WD DW [C2.4] E
H557 (5) H558 H559 H597 (5) H598 H599
K140 K142
K Shift K Shift
Play > 0
X1 X1>X2
100%
H560 (0) Play = 0
X1=X2
K
Play < 0 [C2.6]
0% X2 X1<X2
H561 (0) H562
F F
K
Date 15.1.97 SW limit switches A1, B1 =

C. pers. Reh +
Standard MS380 max. velocity,
Checked Bader
positioning software package drive play FP_C1_6 Function diagram C5 Sheet C5+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Traversing data set,

A KP speed controller KP adaption, closed-loop speed control A
Variable KP, H570 (0)
speed controller H580 (0) d060
K KP0 KP0 K810
K X Y
KP speed controller 1 H571 KP1 KP1 K811 Y
B2 <1>: CUVC, CUMC:
KP speed controller 2 H572 KP2 KP2 K812 H581 A1 Observe Section 3.6.9
KP speed controller 3 H573 KP3 KP3 K813 H582 B1 B1
KP speed controller 4 H574 KP4 KP4 K814 H583 A2

-A2 -A1 A1 A2 X
B KP speed controller 5 H575 KP5 KP5 K815 H584 B2 B
KP speed controller 6 H576 KP6 KP6 K816

d059 d061
KP factor to CU
Source, KP speed Suppression,
controller selection irrelevant bits K141 [A1.5]
H577 (5) H578 H579
Factory setting,
K
factor=1
Shift <1>
C C
Traversing data set, ramp-up time Traversing data set, ramp-down time
position ramp-function generator position ramp-function generator
D D
ramp-up time ramp-down time
K TU0 TU0 K830 K TD0 TD0 K890
Ramp-up time 1 H601 TU1 TU1 K832 Ramp-down time 1 H621 TD1 TD1 K892
E Ramp-up time 5 H605 TU5 TU5 K840 Ramp-down time 5 H625 TD5 TD5 K900 E
d063 d065
Ramp-up time, pos. RFG Ramp-down time, pos. RFG
[D2.4] [D2.4]
Source, ramp-up Suppression, Shift to the right Source, ramp-down Suppression, Shift to the right
time selection irrelevant bits K144 time selection irrelevant bits K148
H607 (5) H608 H609 H627 (5) H628 H629
K Shift K Shift
F F
Date 15.1.97 KP adaption, speed controller =

+
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 ramp-up, ramp-down time,
Checked Bader
positioning software package position RFG FP_C1_6 Function diagram C6 Sheet C6+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Traversing data set, rounding-off time constant

position ramp-function generator
A A
Variable, rounding-off H610 (0)

time constant, ramp-up
K TUR0 TUR0 K850
Rounding-off time constant 1 H611 TUR1 TUR1 K851

B B

Rounding-off time d064
constant, position RFG
[D2.4]
Shift to
Source, rounding-off Suppression, the right
time constant selection irrelevant bits K146
H617 (5) H618 H619
K Shift
C C

down ramp A2 down ramp B2
down ramp A2 down ramp B2
K TDA2_0 TDA2_0 K920 K TDB2_0 TDB2_0 K930
D D
Down ramp A2_1 H641 TDA2_1 TDA2_1 K921 Down ramp B2_1 H651 TDB2_1 TDB2_1 K931
E d067 d068 E
Shift to Shift to
Source, down Suppression, the right Down ramp A2 Source, down Suppression, the right Down ramp B2
ramp A2 selection irrelevant bits [D4.4] ramp B2 selection irrelevant bits [D4.2]
H647 (5) H648 H649 H657 (5) H658 H659
K152 K153
K Shift K Shift
F F
Date 15.1.97 Rounding-off time constant, =

+
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 pos. RFG
Checked Bader
positioning software package down ramps A2 and B2 FP_C7_12 Function diagram C7 Sheet C7+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Status word, reference value conditioning
Software limit A1 violated
[C3.6] 0 d069
Software limit B1 violated
[C3.6] 1 K129
0 2
Display in d069
0 3
0 4 15 13 11 9
B D/# 14 12 10 8 B
0 5 7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
0 6
0 7
0 8
0 9
0 10
C C
0 11
0 12
0 13
0 14
0 15
D D
E E
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Status word, +
Checked Bader
positioning software package reference value conditioning FP_C7_12 Function diagram C8 Sheet C8-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Enable, A
speed control
[B3.8]
External enable, position control 1 Position control enabled

H701 (1h) [B2.2]
H700 (4) [D2.3]
[D3.1]
K [D5.5]
[D5.3]
External enable, position control 2

H702 (91) H703 10h
B K B
<1>
Mode, speed control 1
≥1
H218 (0) H219 (0h) Speed-controlled Speed-controlled operation
[D4.1] mode [D3.6]
K [D4.4]
[D5.5]
C
H221 (0h)
≥1 C
H220 (0)
[D4.2]
K

H222 (0) H223 (0h)
[D4.2]
K
D Referencing mode D
[B6.5]
Mode, inching, speed-controlled
[B1.4]
Standard stop
[B2.6]
Fast stop
[B2.6]
<1> Note:
For the factory setting of H702/H703, the
following is valid:
E Positioning is only possible after E
referencing has been successfully
completed.
<2> Note:
When the drive converter is powered-up
and the position control is inhibited, for
SIMOVERT SC the motor might manifest
drift effects (rotate through angle).
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Enable, position-controlled +
Checked Bader positioning software package speed-controlled modes FP_D1_6 Function diagram D1 Sheet D1+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Position ramp-function generator
Acceleration setpoint
from the pos. RFG
X d072
a
K200
Position ref. value compensation [C5.4]
Max. velocity
V_MAX
for rotary axis mode [C1.5] t [D3.5]
Position ref. value, Rotary axis
normalized mode H722
Internal
[C3.8] velocity actual value Normalization,
B [A8.4] SETV_V acceleration B
Traversing direction only negative
Pos. control Set velocity
H705 (0h) enabled setpoint
H704 (0)
[D1.5] SET_V V
K d073
Velocity setpoint
Position actual value from pos. RFG
for the control K201
Shortest traversing path H720 [A8.6] SETV_P
H707 (0h) t [D3.1]
H706 (0) Set position ref. value
SET_P
K
Range expansion H719 n
Y TI
Integration time, d074
C position control loop H720 X s Position ref. value C
n from pos. RFG
Y=X*2 K202
Time constant, [D3.1]

deadtime compensation H721 Tx [D5.1]
t
Rounding-off time constant
[C7.4] TR
Positioning
from pos. RFG
X1 X1=X2 completed
D [C6.4]
Ramp-up time, pos. RFG
TU >
=1 [D5.2] D
0% X2 X1<X2
Ramp-down time, pos. RFG

[C6.8]
TD
Position ramp-function generator tracking
E 100% E
H710
100% d071
(10%)
Velocity +
setpoint MIN
[D3.8]
+ X +
RESET
-
Velocity
actual value Position control
[A8.4] H711
enabled
Gain, ramp-function 10%
generator tracking controller
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Position ramp-function generator +
Checked Bader positioning software package FP_D1_6 Function diagram D2 Sheet D2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint smoothing
Velocity setpoint from the
position ramp-function
A generator A
+ d077
[D2.8] Velocity setpoint
[B4.1]
+ [D4.8] [D2.1]
[D5.1]
H740 Position controller V setpoint, speed-
controlled modes
Upper limit,
pos. controller [D1.5]
Position setpoint increment K205 TN pos. controller
for position controller tuning H728 Speed-controlled
H735 H732 operation
Reference value smoothing KP1 pos. controller Pos. controller at
Position ref. value the upper limit d076 Speed setpoint to the CU
B + X [D5.5] B
from pos. RFG + n Y
[D2.8] Y=X 2 K220 [A1.5]
[D5.5] K206
- n Pos. controller at d078
the lower limit
H730 H731 (0) H734 H733
KP pos. controller [C1.5]
Actual value smoothing Lower limit,
Position actual value pos. controller Correction factor
for the control
[A8.6] Control deviation
greater than pos. limit value
X1 X1>X2 [D5.5]
C H729 Control deviation C
less than neg. limit value
H741 X2 X1<-X2 [D5.5]
Position control enabled EN
[D1.5]
MODE_I MODE_PI Tolerance limit,
control deviation
H736 H737
Mode, Mode,
I controller P / PI controller
1=I controller 0=PI controller
Load equalization
for hoisting units
H746 (0)
D D
Supplementary
Friction characteristic K + torque to the basic
Frictional torque for drive converter
M Frictional torque
[%] MR K204 [A1.5]
V=100% H770 +
+
H769 Acceleration from the pos. RFG
V=80% [D2.8]
0%
V=60% H768
Fixed inertia H738
compensation
V=40% H767 +
+ Pos. control
enabled
E Automatic - E
V=20% H766 load measurement
+
V=10% H765 Kg = ?
V=5% H764 H772

Influence of the automatic
load measurement
V
V
0 5 10 20 40 60 80 100 [%] H771 Acceleration limit to
F
enable load measurement F
Date 15.1.97
Standard MS380 Position controller =
+
C. pers. Reh friction characteristic
Checked Bader positioning software package automatic load measurement FP_D1_6 Function diagram D3 Sheet D3+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
0%
H750
H751
B
Mode, B
speed control 1
[D1.2]
Mode,
speed control 2
Ramp-function
[D1.2] generator for
H752 (0) Ramp-up time
speed-controlled
V setpoint from the operation V setpoint speed-
K referencing control H761 TU controlled modes
[B7.8]
Mode,
speed control 3 0% Int. velocity [D3.6]
Referencing Inching, speed
[D1.2] mode controlled mode actual value 0%
[B6.5] [B1.4]
Standard stop
[A8.4] Set_Val
[B2.6]
C
Set [B2.6]
C
0%
Fast stop
TD
H753
H754 Ramp-down time
Inching 1, speed-controlled
[B1.2]
Inching 2, speed-controlled
[B1.2]
Speed-controlled operation
[D1.5]
D
≥1 D
Enable speed control

[B3.8]
H760
Down ramp B2
[C7.8]
Down ramp A2
[C7.4]
E Hardware limit switch B2 passed-over E
[B10.5] Hardware limit switch A2 passed-over

[B10.5]
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Setpoint generation, +
Checked Bader positioning software package speed-controlled modes FP_D1_6 Function diagram D4 Sheet D4+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Status word, position control A
Tracking error outside tolerance

0 d081
Tracking error within tolerance K221
Velocity 1
setpoint
[D3.8] X1 Velocity setpoint > actual value
Int. velocity X1>X2 2
actual value
[A8.4] X2
X1=X2
Velocity setpoint = actual value
3 Display, d081
Tolerance bandwidth H762 L Velocity setpoint < actual value
X1<X2 4
B
Hysteresis H763 HY HY
15 13 11 9 B
HY 14 12 10 8
L L D/#
7 5 3 1
Position ref. value, scaled 6 4 2 0
[C3.8] X1 Pos. reference value > pos. act. value
X1>X2 5
Position actual value, scaled
[A8.6] X2 Pos. reference value = pos. act. value
X1=X2 6
Tolerance bandwidth H742 L Pos. reference value < pos. act. value
X1<X2 7
Hysteresis H743 HY HY HY Position control enabled
[D1.5] 8
L L
C Speed-controlled operation C
[D1.6] 9
Position controller at the upper limit
Signal, drive has positioned [D3.5] 10
Position controller at the lower limit
[D3.5] 11
Positioning from T 0 Drive has positioned
pos. RFG completed 12
[D2.8]
Velocity actual value = 0 13
[A8.5]
Software limit switch H744 0 14
D actuated D
Delay,
[C3.7] positioned signal 0 15
Position reference value -

actual value difference, scaled
Position control
d075 enabled
E Position controller, [D1.5] T 0 E
reference value - [B 4.5]
actual value difference Tracking error outside
[D3.3] X X1 X1>X2 tolerance
H745
Scaling H741 X2 Delay time,
[C1.3] K208 following error
Tolerance limit for
following errors
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Status word, position control +
Checked Bader positioning software package FP_D1_6 Function diagram D5 Sheet D5-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display, word % quantities

A A
H846 (0)
K d089
Motorized potentiometer
Upper limit
H794
Display, double-word % quantities
H781 (0)
MOP setpoint, word quantity + H847 (0)
K X
MOP at K d090
+ upper limit d082
[E3.5]
H780 (0)
B
MOP setpoint, double-word quantity K249 B
K [E3.5]
MOP at MOP setpoint
lower limit Display, hex words
H790 (0) H791 (0h)
H796
MOP mode H795 H848 (0)
K 0=MOP MOP influence range
1=HLG Lower limit K d091
H783 (0)
Setting value, MOP word quantity +
K SET_VAL
+ Display, integer words
H782 (0) Setting value,
C MOP double-word quantity H849 (0) C
K MOP input=output
MOP Y=X [E3.5] K d092
H784 (0) H785 (0h)
K Set MOP SET
H787 (0h) Display, integer double-words

H786 (0)
H850 (0)
K Raise setpoint
+ d093
K
H788 (0) H789 (0h)
D D
K Lower setpoint
-
Display, normalized position values, scaled
Ramp, standard setting H851 (0)
H792 RMP_TM
K d094
Ramp, fast setting H793 RMP_TM_FST Scaling

[C1.3]
E E
NOVRAM value memory
H892 (0)
K K254
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
+
C. pers. Reh Standard MS380 Motorized potentiometer
Checked Bader
positioning software package visualization parameters FP_E1_6 Function diagram E1 Sheet E1+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display d088
Display d087
A 15 13 11 9 A
15 13 11 9 14 12 10 8
14 12 10 8 7 5 3 1
7 5 3 1 Limit value monitor A 6 4 2 0
6 4 2 0 H830 (0)
Input value 1
K X1
Limit value monitor for X1>X2 0 d088
position limit value X d087 H831 (0) X1=X2
Position actual value scaled 1 K257
Input value 2
[A8.7] X1 K256 K X2
X1>X2 Pos. act. value > pos. limit value X X1<X2 Status word 2
Position limit value X from 0 Status word 1 2 limit value monitor
B the traversing data set limit value monitor Tolerance limit H832 L HY HY B
[C4.4] X2 X1=X2 Pos. act. value = pos. limit value X
1
Hysteresis H833 HY L L
Tolerance H820 L X1<X2 Pos. act. value < pos. limit value X
bandwidth 2
HY HY
Hysteresis H821 HY D/#
L L D/#
Limit value monitor B
Limit value monitor for H834 (0)
Input value 1
position limit value Y K X1
X1>X2 3
Position actual value, scaled
X1
X1>X2 Pos. act. value > pos. limit value Y H835 (0) X1=X2
C Position limit value Y from 3 Input value 2 4 C
the traversing data set K X2
[C4.8] X2 X1=X2 Pos. act. value = pos. limit value Y X1<X2
4 5
Tolerance limit H836 L HY HY
Tolerance H822 L X1<X2 Pos. act. value < pos. limit value Y
bandwidth 5
HY HY Hysteresis H837 HY L L
Hysteresis H823 HY
L L
Limit value monitor for

position limit value Z Limit value monitor C
H838 (0)
Position actual value scaled Input value 1
D K D
X1 X1
X1>X2 Pos. act. value > pos. limit value Z X1>X2 6
Position limit value Z from 6
the traversing data set H839 (0)
[C4.4] X2 X1=X2 Pos. act. value = pos. limit value Z X1=X2
7 Input value 2 7
K X2
Tolerance bandwidth H824 L X1<X2 Pos. act. value < pos. limit value Z X1<X2
8 8
HY HY Tolerance limit H840 L HY HY
Hysteresis H825 HY
L L Hysteresis H841 HY L L
Free limit value monitor

position limit value
E E
H826 (0)
Input value 1
Limit value monitor D
H842 (0)
K X1
X1>X2 Pos. act. value > Pos. limit value Input value 1
9 K X1
X1>X2
H827 (0) 9
X1=X2 Pos. act. value = Pos. limit value
Input value 2 10 H843 (0) X1=X2
K X2 10
X1<X2 Pos. act. value < Pos. limit value Input value 2
11 K X2
Tolerance bandwidth H828 L X1<X2
HY HY 11
Tolerance limit H844 L HY HY
Hysteresis H829 L L
HY
Hysteresis H845 HY L L
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh +
Standard MS380 Position limit value monitor
Checked Bader
positioning software package free limit value monitor FP_E1_6 Function diagram E2
Sheet E2+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H861 (0h) Freely-definable status word

H860 (0)
K
Select bit 0
0 Status word, special functions
A A
d095
H863 (0h) d086
H862 (0) D/# K258
Select bit 1 0 K255
K 1 0
Bit inversion
0
H864 (0)
K
H865 (0h)
Select bit 2
2
1 K259
0
1
2
D/#
H867 (0h) 0 3
H866 (0)
Select bit 3 0
K 3 4
B B
EEPROM is empty
H869 (0h) [A1.7] 5
H868 (0) Display in d095 and d086 MOP : output=input
Select bit 4 [E1.4]
K 4 6
MOP at the upper limit
H870 (0) H871 (0h) 15 13 11 9 [E1.4] 7
Select bit 5
14 12 10 8 MOP at the lower limit
K 5 7 5 3 1 [E1.4] 8
6 4 2 0 0
H873 (0h) 9
H872 (0)
Select bit 6 0
K 6 10
C 0 C
H875 (0h) 11
H874 (0)
Select bit 7 0
K 7 12
H877 (0h) 0 13
H876 (0)
Select bit 8 0
K 8 14
H879 (0h) 0 15
H878 (0)
Select bit 9
K 9
D D
H881 (0h)
H880 (0)
Select bit 10
K 10
H883 (0h)
H882 (0)
Select bit 11
K 11
H885 (0h)
H884 (0)
Select bit 12
K 12
E E
H887 (0h)
H886 (0)
Select bit 13
K 13
H889 (0h)
H888 (0)
Select bit 14
K 14
H891 (0h)
H890 (0)
Select bit 15
K 15
F F
Date 15.1.97 =
C. pers. Reh +
Standard MS380 Freely-definable status word,
Checked Bader
positioning software package status word, special functions FP_E1_6 Function diagram E3
Sheet E3-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Manual
4 Parameter list
4 Parameter list
The technological functions are set using parameters. These can be displaying parameters, and are des-
ignated with d..., or changeable parameters, which are designated H....
4.1.1 List of the display parameters

All of the process quantities, which are suitable to visualize the module characteristics, are provided in the
display parameter list. These are exclusively used for visualization, and cannot be connected back into the
process. The more detailed list of connectors is provided for tasks such as these.
The display parameter list is structured as follows:
Display Value/description Value range Function dia-
parameter steps gram refer-
ences
d000 (1) HARDWARE_ID (4) 0 ... 32767 (9) [A1.2]
1000d (2) Hardware Identifier (5) 1 (10)
03E8 (3)
Identifier for the technology board used (6)
e. g. T300 = 133
INPUT.HWID.X_T5 (7)
SIMADYN:O2 PKW-TYP:O2 (8) (INIT)(11)
Explanations:
Display parameters
The parameter number is specified in the display parameter column (1). If the parameter is to be ad-
dressed via dual port RAM, 1000 must be added to the parameter number. This value is specified in the
decimal (2) and hexadecimal notation (3).
Value/description
The parameter display text is specified in (4) when using the OP1 or SIMOVIS. This text consists of a
maximum of 16 characters. The significance of the parameter is briefly described in line (5) and described
in detail in (6).
The SIMADYN connector is specified in line (7), which supplies this parameter, as well as the sampling
time of the function block.
The SIMADYN D connector format and the parameter type via PROFIBUS is in line (8). Parameter han-
dling via a communications interface is described in Section 4.2.
Value range/steps
The minimum and maximum values which can be set are specified in the column, value range/step, line
(9). The range within which the value can be changed is specified in line (10).
Caution INIT values
The drive converter must be powered-down and up again after the initialization values (11) have been
entered. The changed value only becomes effective after this.
INFORMATION regarding PMU operator control

When the parameter numbers are counted-up/counted-down in the parameterizing unit display, at first, a
differentiation is not made between ´d´- and ´H´ parameters. The correct letter ´d´ or ´H´ only appears
with the parameter number after the raise- or lower key has been released.
INFORMATION regarding OP1 operator control

In order to select a technology parameter, 1000 must be added to the parameter number.
Example: To select parameter d025, parameter number 1025 must be entered.

Manual
4 Parameter list
4.1.2 List of the setting parameters

The parameter list describes the H parameters as well as their functions.
The setting parameter list is structured as follows:
Par. Value/description Value Factory Section
number steps setting [diagram]
H151 (1) PULSES_PG1 (4) 0...32767 (9) 1024 (11) (12)
1151d (2) Pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 1 (5) 1 (10)
047Fh (3)
Number of pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 1 (6)
INPUT.PG1000.PR1_T1 (7)
SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2 (INIT) (8)
The parameter list, lines (1) to (10) have the same structure as the parameter list of the display parame-
ters. The following columns are additionally provided:
Factory setting (11)
The factory setting is the parameter value which is stored in the EPROM. The value is in the status as
shipped, and is active after the establish factory setting function.
Section (12)
In the Section line, there is cross-reference to the function description Section, in which the function of the
parameter or the partial circuit is described in more detail.
4.2 Parameter normalization

Generally, the parameters are normalized via the interfaces, just as they appear in the unit operator con-
trol panel (PMU) display. However, the decimal point is eliminated.
The value range as well as the position of the decimal point can be determined from the value range col-
umn of the parameter list.
The smallest possible increment can be read from the „Steps“ column. In this case, it should be observed,
that the value can be entered via the interface for specific parameter types, with a smaller step range.
However, from the system, only the specified step range can be realized, i. e., it is rounded-off.
The parameters can be either 1-bit, 16-bit or 32-bit quantities. Various parameter types are available de-
pending on the definition.
The available parameter types are listed as overview in the following table
O2 Unsigned 16-bit value
Example:
21.9% is to be entered for parameter H531. The parameter type is I4.
Required value Value range for Value to be entered via interface
for H531 parameter
21.9% -200.000 ... 199.993 21900 as decimal number
The parameter has 3 decimal points, specified by the data in the value range, i. e. 2 zeros must be at-
tached.
Leading zeros need not be specified.

Manual
4 Parameter list
Display Value/description Value range Funct. diagr.
par. steps reference
d000 HARDWARE_ID 0 ... 32767 [A1.2]

1000d Hardware identifier 1
03e8
Identifier for the technology board used
e. g. T300 = 133
INPUT.HWID.X_T5
SIMADYN:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
d001 SOFTWARE_ID 0 ... 32767 [A1.2]
1001d Software identifier 1
03E9h
Identifier for the software used
e. g. positioning = 380
INPUT.SWID.X_T5
d002 SOFTWARE_VERSION 0.0 ... 10199.9 [A1.2]
1002d Software version 0.1
03EAh
INPUT.SWVER.X_T5
SIMADYN D:N2, SCAL=5100 PKW-TYP:I4
d003 SIMD_SYS_ERR 0000h ... FFFFh [A1.3]
1003d System error analysis 0001h
03EBh
Status word, generated by the operating system
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 3: Task administrator error
Bit 10: User error
INPUT.I5010.QS_T5
d004 PEER_RECWD_1 -200.000% ... 199.993% [A3.3]
1004d Receive word 1, peer-to-peer coupling 0.006%
03ECh
INPUT.R2500.Y1_T2
d005 PEER_RECWD_2 -200.000% ... 199.993% [A3.3]
03EDh
INPUT.R2500.Y2_T2
d006 PEER_RECWD_3 -200.000% ... 199.993% [A3.3]
03EEh
INPUT.R2500.Y3_T2
d007 PEER_RECWD_4 -200.000% ... 199.993% [A3.3]
03EFh
INPUT.R2500.Y4_T2
d008 PEER_RECWD_5 -200.000% ... 199.993% [A3.3]
03F0h
INPUT.R2500.Y5_T2

Manual
4 Parameter list
d009 BINARY_INPUTS 0000h...FFFFh [A4.3]

1009d Status, binary inputs 0001h
03F1h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
to
INPUT.BI2030.QS_T2 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2

d011 ANALOG_INPUT_1 -200.000%...199.993% [A5.3]
1011d Signal from analog input 1 0.006%
03F3h

d012 ANALOG_INPUT_2 -200.000%...199.993% [A5.3]
03F4h
INPUT.AI2130.Y_T2
d013 ANALOG_INPUT_3 -200.000%...199.993% [A5.3]
03F5h
INPUT.AI3030.Y_T3
d014 ANALOG_INPUT_4 -200.000%...199.993% [A5.3]
03F6h
INPUT.AI3140.Y_T3
d015 ANALOG_INPUT_5 -200.000%...199.993% [A5.3]
03F7h
INPUT.AI4030.Y_T4
d016 ANALOG_INPUT_6 -200.000%...199.993% [A5.3]
03F8h
INPUT.AI4130.Y_T4
d017 ANALOG_INPUT_7 -200.000%...199.993% [A5.3]
03F9h
INPUT.AI5030.Y_T5
d018 NACT_PG1 -200.000%...199.993% [A6.8]
1018d Speed actual value from pulse encoder 1 0.006%
03FA
Smoothed speed actual value from pulse encoder 1
INPUT.PG2100.Y_T2
d019 NACT_PG2 -200.000%...199.993% [A7.6]
1019d Speed actual value from pulse encoder 2 0.006%
03FB
Smoothed speed actual value from pulse encoder 2
INPUT.PG2200.Y_T2

Manual
4 Parameter list
d020 NACT_INT -200.000%...199.993% [A8.2]

1020d Internal speed actual value 0.006%
03FCh
Speed actual value which is used for the closed-loop control
INPUT.PG2250.Y_T2
d021 VACT_INT -200.000%...199.993% [A8.3]
1021d Internal velocity actual value 0.006%
03FDh
Velocity actual value which is used for the control
INPUT.PG2260.Y2_T2
d022 PACT_PG1 -200.000%...199.993% [A6.7]
1022d Position actual value from pulse encoder 1 0.006%
03FEh
INPUT.PG1000.YP1_T1
d023 PACT_PG2 -200.000%...199.993% [A7.5]
1023d Position actual value from pulse encoder 2 0.006%
03FFh
INPUT.PG1000.YP2_T1
d025 PACT_POSREG -200.000%...199.993% [A8.3]
1025d Position actual value for the position control 0.006%
0401h
Display of the position actual value selected using H168.
INPUT.PG1330.Y_T1
d026 PACT_REG -200.000%...199.993% [A8.5]
1026d Position actual value for the closed-loop control 0.006%
0402h
Position actual value which is used for the closed-loop control.
Compensation circuit output for rotary axes.
INPUT.PG1490.Y_T1
d027 PACT_DSP -200.000%...199.993% [A8.5]
1027d Position actual value, normalized 0.006%
0403h
Position actual value which is used for checkback signals.
Compensation circuit output for rotary axes.
INPUT.PG1525.Y_T1
d028 PACT_SCAL -2 147 483 648... [A8.6]
... 2 147 483 647
1028d Position actual value for display, scaled
0404h 1
Position actual value which is used for checkback signals. The
value refers to the defined scaling. Compensation circuit output
for rotary axes.
INPUT.PG2420.Y_T1
SIMADYN D:I4 PKW-TYP:I4
d029 BYTESER_INP -200.000%...199.993% [A9.5]
1029d Reference value from byte-serial data input 0.006%
0405h
The value read-in remains stored until a new value is trans-
ferred.
INPUT.BS3020.Y_T3
d030 THUMBWHEEL_INP -200.000%...199.993% [A10.5]
1030d Reference value from the thumbwheel switch 0.006%
0406h
A new reference value is only read-in, if this is requested with
the data transfer binary command.
INPUT.TW3150.Y_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
d031 STW_IO_FUNCT 0000h...FFFFh [A10.8]

1031d Status word, input/output functions 0001h
0407h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Zero pulse, pulse encoder 1 identified
Bit 2: Velocity actual value > 0 (V>0)
Bit 3: Velocity actual value = 0 (V=0)
Bit 4: Velocity actual value < 0 (V<0)
Bit 5: Traversing direction, pulse encoder 1 (0=pos., 1=neg.)
Bit 6: Traversing direction, pulse encoder 2 (0=pos., 1=neg.)
Bit 7: Not used
Bit 8: Not used
Bit 9: System error, T300
Bit 10: Send to CU ok.
Bit 11: Send to CB ok.
Bit 12: Send to peer-to-peer ok.
Bit 13: Receive from CU ok.
Bit 14: Receive from CB ok.
Bit 15: Receive from peer-to-peer ok.
INPUT.STAT10.QS_T3
d035 OFF_CONDITIONS 0000h...FFFFh [B1.6]
1035d Power-off conditions 0001h
040Bh
If the drive cannot be powered-up even if there is an on com-
mand, then there is a power-on inhibit. The reasons are as
follows:
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Drive is faulted (T300 identification)
Bit 1: Drive is faulted (status word from the CU)
Bit 2: Electrical OFF (OFF2)
Bits 3 to bits 7: Not used
Bit 9: Off for standard stop (OFF1)
Bit 10: Off for fast stop (OFF3)
Bit 11: No checkback signal, drive converter
Bits 12 to 15: Not used
CONTRL.CC3600.QS_T3
d036 DIAGNOSTIC_WORD 0000h ... FFFFh [B1.7]
1036d Diagnostics word 1h
040Ch
The last power-down cause is stored in the diagnostics word.
The assignment is the same as the power-down conditions in
d035.
CONTRL.CD3520.Y_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
d037 CNTRL_WD_1_CU 0000h ... FFFFh [A2.8]

1037d Control word 1 at CU 0001h
040Dh
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: On/no stop (OFF1)
Bit 5: No ramp-function generator stop
Bit 7: Fault acknowledgement
Bit 8: Inching 1
Bit 9: Inching 2
Bit 11: Clockwise rotating field
Bit 12: Counter-clockwise rotating field
CONTRL.CE3210.QS_T3
d038 CNTRL_WD_2_CU 0000h ... FFFFh [A2.8]
1038d Control word 2 at CU 0001h
040Eh
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Setpoint data set, bit 0
Bit 1: Setpoint data set, bit 1
Bit 4: Fixed setpoint bit 0
Bit 5: Fixed setpoint bit 1
Bit 8: Droop enable
Bit 11: Slave drive
Bit 14: Select reserve setting
CONTRL.CC3510.QS_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
d039 FAULT_WORD 0000h ... FFFFh [B4.7]

1039d Fault word 0001h
040Fh
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Communications error with CB [F116]
Bit 1: Communications error with CU [F117]
Bit 2: Communications error, peer-to-peer [F118]
Bit 3: User error 1 [F119]
Bit 5: Tracking error outside tolerance [F121]
Bit 6: Overspeed, positive [F122]
Bit 7: Overspeed, negative [F123]
Bit 8: Drive stalled [F124]
Bit 9: Pulse encoder error [F125]
Bit 10: Emergency limit switch A3 actuated [F126]
Bit 11: Emergency limit switch B3 actuated [F127]
Bit 12: Referencing error [F128]
Bit 13: Reference point incorrect / not recognized [F129]
Bit 14: Overflow, position actual value [F130]
Bit 15: Loading error, absolute encoder [F131]
CONTRL.F4960.Y_T4 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d040 WARN_WORD 0000h ... FFFFh [B4.7]

1040d Alarm word 0001h
0410h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Communications error with CB [A097]
Bit 1: Communications error with CU [A098]
Bit 2: Communications error, peer-to-peer [A099]
Bit 3: User error 1 [A100]
Bit 5: Tracking error outside tolerance [A102]
Bit 6: Overspeed, positive [A103]
Bit 7: Overspeed, negative [A104]
Bit 8: Drive stalled [A105]
Bit 9: Pulse encoder fault [A106]
Bit 10: Emergency limit switch A3 actuated [A107]
Bit 11: Emergency limit switch B3 actuated [A108]
Bit 12: Referencing error [A109]
Bit 13: Reference point incorrect / not recognized [A110]
Bit 14: Overflow, position actual value [A111]
Bit 15: Loading error, absolute encoder [A112]
CONTRL.F4985.QS_T4 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
d041 STW_CONTROL 0000h ... FFFFh [B5.4]

1041d Status word, open-loop control 0001h
0411h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0 to bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Braking
Bit 4: No braking
Bit 6: Drive powered-up
Bit 7: Drive not powered-up
Bit 8: Drive not ready
Bit 9: Internal inverter enable
Bit 10: Internal reference value enable
Bit 11: Not used
Bit 12: Drive faulted
Bit 13: Open holding/operating brake
Bit 14: Close holding/operating brake
Bit 15: Close brake at n=0

Manual
4 Parameter list
d045 STW_1_REFCTRL 0000h ... FFFFh [B10.3]

1045d Status word 1, referencing control 0001h
0415h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Enable reference point (zero pulse) sensing
Bit 1: Referencing with shutdown active
Bit 2: Flying referencing active
Bit 3: Referencing mode active
Bit 4: Drive has referenced
Bit 5: Drive has not referenced
Bit 6: Crawl to the reference point
Bit 7: Approach path greater than the minimum approach path
Bit 8: Approach path less than the minimum approach path
Bit 9: Referencing direction B→A
Bit 10: Referencing direction A→B
Bit 11: Referencing direction o.k.
Bit 12: Referencing direction not o.k.
Bit 13: Hardware limit switch A2 reached
Bit 14: Hardware limit switch B2 reached
Bit 15: Referencing error
REFCTL.PS3900.QS_T3
d046 STW_2_REFCTRL 0000h ... FFFFh [B10.7]
1046d Status word 2, referencing control 0001h
0416h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Error, reference point not/incorrectly identified
Bit 1: Hardware limit switch A2 actuated
Bit 2: Hardware limit switch B2 actuated
Bit 3: Reference point range ok.
Bit 7: TR-Encoder transmission requested
Bit 8: TR-Encoder transmission active
Bit 9: TR-Encoder referenced
Bit 10: TR-Encoder transmission input
Bit 11: not used
Bit 12: TR-Encoder start transmission error
Bit 13: TR-Encoder transmission error
Bit 14: TR-Encoder transmission timeout
Bit 15: not used
REFCTL.PS3950.QS_T3
d049 POSREF_REL.POS -2 147 483 648... [C2.8]
... 2 147 483 647
1049d Position reference value from the relative position-
0419h ing 1
SETPNT.PR2137.Y._T2
d050 POSREF_SEL_DB 0 ... 100 [C2.3]
1050d Number of the selected position reference value
041Ah
SETPNT.PR3112.QS_T3
d051 POSREF_DB -2 147 483 648... [C2.4]
... 2 147 483 647
1051d Position reference value from the traversing data
041Bh set 1
Position reference value, which is transferred from the travers-
ing data set to the reference value conditioning.
SETPNT.PR2100.Y_T2

Manual
4 Parameter list
d052 POSREF_POSREG -2 147 483 648... [C3.3]

... 2 147 483 647
1052d Position reference value to the position control
041Ch 1
Position reference value, which is transferred from the refer-
ence value conditioning to the position controller.
SETPNT.PR2430.Y_T2
d053 P_LIM_X_DB -2 147 483 648... [C4.4]
... 2 147 483 647
1053d Position limit value X from the traversing data set
041Dh
Selected position limit value, which is transferred to the position 1
limit value monitor X.
SETPNT.PLX330.Y_T3
d054 P_LIM_Y_DB -2 147 483 648... [C4.8]
... 2 147 483 647
1054d Position limit value Y from the traversing data set
041Eh
limit value monitor Y.
SETPNT.PLY330.Y_T3
d055 P_LIM_Z_DB -2 147 483 648... [C4.4]
... 2 147 483 647
1055d Position limit value Z from the traversing data set
041Fh
limit value monitor Z.
SETPNT.PLZ330.Y_T3
d056 SW_LIMA1_DB -2 147 483 648... [C5.4]
... 2 147 483 647
1056d Software limit switch A1 from the traversing data
0420h set 1
Selected software limit switch, which is transferred as setpoint
limiting in the traversing direction B→A.
SETPNT.SWA330.Y_T3
d057 SW_LIMB1_DB -2 147 483 648... [C5.8]
... 2 147 483 647
1057d Software limit switch B1 from the traversing data
0421h set 1
Selected software limit switch, which is transferred as setpoint
limiting in the traversing direction A→B.
SETPNT.SWB330.Y_T3
d058 VMAX_DB 0.000%...199.993% [C5.4]
1058d Maximum velocity from the traversing data set 0.006%
0422h
Maximum velocity from the traversing data set multiplied by the
velocity adaption (H560/H561/H562).
SETPNT.VMX370.Y2_T3
d059 KP_DB 0.000 ... 10.000 [C6.4]
1059d KP factor speed controller from the traversing data 0.001
0423h set
The speed controller KP can be influenced using
this value.
SETPNT.KPV330.Y_T3
SIMADYN D:N2,SCAL=10 PKW-TYP:I4
d060 KP_ADAP 0.000%...199.993% [C6.6]
1060d Output of the signal-dependent KP adaption 0.006%
0424h
Factor, which is generated by the KP characteristic.
SETPNT.KPV340.Y_T3
Manual
4 Parameter list
d061 KP_ADAP_CU 0.000 ... 10.000 [C6.6]

1061d KP adaption factor at the CU 0.001
0425h
The speed controller KP can be influenced using this value.
SETPNT.KPV345.Y2_T3
d062 PLAY_DB -32768 ... 32767 [C6.6]
1062d Drive play from the traversing data set 1
0426h
Selected drive play, which is transferred to the setpoint genera-
tion.
SETPNT.PY330.Y_T3
d063 TU_DB 5.000[ms] ... [C5.8]
... 5 368 709 120[ms]
1063d Ramp-up time, pos. RFG from the traversing data
0427h set
Selected ramp-up time, which is transferred to the position
SETPNT.TU330.Y_T3
SIMADYN D:R4:T1 PKW-TYP:O4
d064 TR_DB 5.000[ms] ... [C7.4]
... 81 920[ms]
1064d Rounding-off time constant, pos. RFG from DB
0428h
Selected rounding-off time constant, which is transferred to the
position ramp-function generator.
SETPNT.TR340.Y_T3
d065 TD_DB 5.000[ms] ... [C6.8]
... 5 368 709 120[ms]
1065d Ramp-down time, pos. RFG from the traversing
0429h data set
Selected ramp-down time, which is transferred to the position
SETPNT.TD330.Y_T3
d067 TD_A2_DB 40.000[ms] ... [C7.4]
... 655 360[ms]
1067d Down ramp A2 from the traversing data set
042Bh
Selected down ramp, which is transferred to the ramp-function
generator for closed-loop speed controlled modes. This ramp
time is selected when hardware limit switch A2 is actuated.
SETPNT.TDA330.Y_T3
d068 TD_B2_DB 40.000[ms] ... [C7.8]
... 655 360[ms]
1068d Down ramp B2 from the traversing data set
042Ch
Selected down ramp, which is transferred to the ramp-function
generator for closed-loop speed controlled modes. This ramp
time is selected when hardware limit switch B2 is actuated.
SETPNT.TDB330.Y_T3
d069 STW_SETPNT 0000h ... FFFFh [C8.3]
1069d Status word, reference value conditioning 0001h
042Dh
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Software limit A1 violated
Bit 1: Software limit B1 violated
SETPNT.ST3100.QS_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
d071 KP_DEV_LIM_CTL 10.000%...100.000% [D2.4]

1071d Output, pos. RFG tracking 0.006%
042Fh
The ramp-up/ramp-down time of the velocity setpoint is multi-
plied by this factor.
POSREG.PR3220.Y_T3
d072 ACC_POSRAMP -200.000%...199.993% [D2.8]
1072d Acceleration value from pos. RFG 0.006%
0430h
Acceleration value of the position ramp-function generator after
normalization in H722.
POSREG.RB1330.Y_T1
d073 VSP_POSRAMP -200.000%...199.993% [D2.8]
1073d Velocity setpoint from pos. RFG 0.006%
0431h
Velocity reference value generated from the position ramp-
function generator.
POSREG.RB1410.Y_T1
d074 POS_POSRAMP -200.000%...199.993% [D2.8]
1074d Position reference value from the pos. RFG 0.006%
0432h
Normalized position ramp-function generator output.
POSREG.RB1510.Y_T1
d075 POSREG_YE -2 147 483 648 ... [D5.3]
1075d Setpoint-actual value difference, position controller ... 2 147 483 647
0433h
Control error of the position controller
POSREG.P3150.Y_T3
d076 POSREG_Y -200.000%...199.993% [D3.5]
1076d Output, position controller 0.006%
0434h
Position controller output signal.
POSREG.P1500.Y2_T1
d077 VSP_DRIVE -200.000%...199.993% [D3.7]
1077d Velocity setpoint for the drive 0.006%
0435h
The direct velocity setpoint for the drive.
POSREG.P1750.Y_T1
d078 NSP_CU -200.000%...199.993% [D3.8]
1078d Speed setpoint at CU 0.006%
0436h
This speed setpoint is sent to the basic drive converter via the
DPR.
POSREG.P1760.Y_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
d081 STW_POSREG 0000h...FFFFh [D5.7]

1081d Status word, position control 0001h
0439h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: tracking error outside tolerance
Bit 1: tracking error within tolerance
Bit 2: Velocity setpoint > actual value
Bit 3: Velocity setpoint = actual value
Bit 4: Velocity setpoint < actual value
Bit 5: Position reference value > actual value
Bit 6: Position reference value = actual value
Bit 7: Position reference value < actual value
Bit 8: Closed-loop position control enabled
Bit 9: Closed-loop speed controlled mode
Bit 10: Position controller at the upper limit
Bit 11: Position controller at the lower limit
Bit 12 : Drive has positioned
POSREG.PS3100.QS_T3
d082 MOP_OUTPUT -200.000%...199.993% [E1.5]
1082d Output, motorized potentiometer 0.006%
043Ah
Motorized potentiometer output signal.
AUXIL.M4590.Y_T4
d086 STW_AUX_FUNC 0000h...FFFFh [E4.7]
1086d Status word, special functions 0001h
043Eh
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 5: EEPROM is empty
Bit 6: MOP : Output = input
Bit 7: MOP at the upper limit
Bit 8: MOP at the lower limit
AUXIL.SC4470.QS_T4
d087 STW_COMP_1 0000h...FFFFh [E2.4]
1087d Status word, limit value monitor 1 0001h
043Fh
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Position actual value > position limit value X
Bit 1: Position actual value = position limit value X
Bit 2: Position actual value < position limit value X
Bit 3: Position actual value > position limit value Y
Bit 4: Position actual value = position limit value Y
Bit 6: Position actual value < position limit value Y
Bit 7: Position actual value > position limit value Z
Bit 8: Position actual value = position limit value Z
Bit 9: Position actual value < position limit value Z
Bit 10: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM 1
Bit 11: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM 1
Bit 12: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM 1
AUXIL.LM3900.QS_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
d088 STW_COMP_2 0000h...FFFFh [E2.4]

1088d Status word, limit value monitor 2 0001h
0440h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM A
Bit 1: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM A
Bit 2: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM A
Bit 3: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM B
Bit 4: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM B
Bit 6: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM B
Bit 7: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM C
Bit 8: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM C
Bit 9: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM C
Bit 10: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM D
Bit 11: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM D
Bit 12: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM D
AUXIL.LM3950.QS_T3
d089 DSP_PAR_%_WD -200.000%...199.993% [E1.7]
1089d Display, normalized word quantities 0.006%
0441h
Connectors can be displayed at this display parameter. This
parameter is provided for normalized word quantities, i. e.
4000h = 100%.
The connector is selected via parameter H846
AUXIL.DP4000.Y_T4
d090 DSP_PAR_%_DW -200.000%...199.993% [E1.7]
1090d Display, normalized double-word quantities 0.006%
0442h
parameter is provided for normalized double-word quantities, i.
e. 4000 0000h = 100%.
The connector is selected using parameter H847.
AUXIL.DP4010.Y_T4
d091 DSP_PAR_HEX_WD 0000h...FFFFh [E1.7]
1091d Displaying hexadecimal word quantities 0001h
0443h
parameter is provided for hexadecimal word quantities, i. e. 16
status/control bits.
The connector is selected via parameter H848.
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Status / control bit 0
to
Bit 15: Status / control bit 15
AUXIL.DP4020.Y_T4
d092 DSP_PAR_INT_WD -32768 ... 32667 [E1.7]
1092d Displaying integer word quantities 1
0444h
parameter is provided for integer word quantities, i. e. integer
numbers.
AUXIL.DP4040.Y_T4

Manual
4 Parameter list
d093 DSP_PAR_INT_DW -2 147 483 648... [E1.7]

... 2 147 483 647
1093d Displaying integer double-word quantities
0445h 1
parameter is provided for integer double-word quantities, i. e.
integer numbers, e. g. all position actual/reference values,
scaled.
AUXIL.DP4050.Y_T4
d094 DSP_PAR_P_SCAL -2 147 483 648... [E1.7]
... 2 147 483 647
1094d Displaying position actual values, scaled
0446h 1
parameter is provided for integer double-word quantities, i. e.
integer numbers, e. g. all position actual/reference values,
scaled.
The connector is selected via parameter H851.
AUXIL.DP4070.Y_T4
d095 STW_SEL 0000h...FFFFh [E3.3]
1095d Freely-definable status word 0001h
0447h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Bit 0: Status bit 0
to
Bit 15: Status bit 15
AUXIL.ST3180.QS_T3
d096 BINARY_OUTPUTS 0000h...FFFFh [A4.6]
1096d Status, binary outputs 0001h
0448h
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
to
OUTPUT.BQ3100.QS_T3
d099 DRIVE_ID 0 ... 32767 [A1.4]
1099d Drive identification 1
044Bh
Displays the drive identification entered in H997
INPUT.DRID.X_T5

Manual
4 Parameter list
Par. Value/description Value range Factory Sect.
No. steps setting [diagr.]
H100 MSK_EN_SYS_ERR 0000h...FFFFh 0429h [A1.3]

1100d Mask, system error bits enable 0001h 3.3.2
044Ch
Bit 1,2: (Not used)
Bit 3: Task administrator error
Bits 7 to 9: (Not used)
Bit 10: User error
Bits 11 to 14: (Not used)
INPUT.I5020.IS2_T5 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H101 TEL_LEN_P2P 0...5 5 [A3.1]
1101d Length, receive telegram, peer-to-peer 1 3.3.5
044Dh
Number of receive words of the peer-to-peer coupling
INPUT.R2500.LTW_T2
H102 MSK_INV_BIN 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.3]
1102d Mask, inverting binary inputs 0001h 3.3.6
044Eh
Permits bitwise inversion of the 16 binary inputs.
to
INPUT.BI2030.IS2_T2 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H104 SIM_CTW_CB 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A3.2]
1104d Mask, simulation, control word from the CB 0001h 3.3.4
0450h
For commissioning and service, the control word received
from the communications board can be simulated.
Note:
As long as a control word is entered via parameter H104,
all control bits from CB are inhibited.
INPUT.R5200.IS1_T5 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H110 MUL_ANALOG_IN1 -200.000%...199.993% 50% [A5.2]
1110d Gain, analog input 1 0.006% 3.3.8
0456h
Value, with which the analog signal is multiplied.
H111 OFF_ANALOG_IN1 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.2]
1111d Offset, analog input 1 0.006% 3.3.8
0457h
Constant value, which is added to the signal.

H112 FLT_ANALOG_IN1 10.000[ms]... 10[ms] [A5.3]
...163 840.000[ms]
1112d Smoothing, analog input 1 3.3.8
0458h
H113 MUL_ANALOG_IN2 -200.000%...199.993% 50% [A5.2]
0459h

H114 OFF_ANALOG_IN2 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.2]
045Ah

Manual
4 Parameter list

...163 840.000[ms]
045Bh

H116 MUL_ANALOG_IN3 -200.000%...199.993% 50% [A5.2]
045Ch

H117 OFF_ANALOG_IN3 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.2]
045Dh

655 360.000[ms]
045Eh

H119 MUL_ANALOG_IN4 -200.000%...199.993% 50% [A5.2]
045Fh
H120 OFF_ANALOG_IN4 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.2]
0460h
655 360.000[ms]
0461h
H122 MUL_ANALOG_IN5 -200.000%...199.993% 50% [A5.2]
0462h

H123 OFF_ANALOG_IN5 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.2]
0463h
...2 621 440.000[ms]
0464h

H125 MUL_ANALOG_IN6 -200.000%...199.993% 50% [A5.2]
0465h
Siemens AG Positioning 4-17

Manual
4 Parameter list
H126 OFF_ANALOG_IN6 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.2]

0466h
INPUT.AI4120.X2_T4
...2 621 440.000[ms]
0467h
INPUT.AI4130.T_T4
H128 MUL_ANALOG_IN7 -200.000%...199.993% 50% [A5.2]
0468h
INPUT.AI5010.X2_T5
H129 OFF_ANALOG_IN7 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.2]
0469h
INPUT.AI5020.X2_T5
...5 242 880.000[ms]
046Ah
INPUT.AI5030.T_T5
H131 SRC_RESET_PG1 0...1024 0 [A6.4]
1131 Source, resetting position actual value 1 1 3.3.10.6
046Bh
INPUT.PG3100.NC_T3
H132 MSK_RESET_PG1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A6.4]
1132 Mask, resetting position actual value 1 0001h 3.3.10.6
046Ch
Mask to select the bit to be controlled.
Sets the position actual value from pulse encoder 1 to zero.
INPUT.PG3100.MSK_T3
H133 SRC_SET_PG1 0...1024 0 [A6.3]
1133d Source, setting position actual value 1 1 3.3.10.6
046Dh
Connector number, description, refer to H134.
INPUT.PG3120.NC_T3
H134 MSK_SET_PG1 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [A6.3]
1134d Mask, setting position actual value 1 0001h 3.3.10.6
046Eh
Mask to select the bit to be controlled.
Sets the position actual value from pulse encoder 1 to the
setting value selected with H169.
INPUT.PG3120.MSK_T3
H135 EN_SAV_PG1 0 ... 1 1 [A6.6]
1135d Enable, transfer P act 1 from NOVRAM 1 3.3.10.6
046Fh
If the enable bit is set, when the voltage returns, position
actual value 1 is set to the value stored in the NOVRAM.
INPUT.PG3020.I2_T3
SIMADYN D:B1 PKW-TYP:Boolean

Manual
4 Parameter list
H136 SRC_RESET_PG2 0...1024 4 [A7.3]

1136 Source, resetting position actual value 2 1 3.3.10.6
0470h
Connector number, description refer to H137.
INPUT.PG3150.NC_T3
H137 MSK_RESET_PG2 0000h...FFFFh 0001h [A7.3]
1137d Mask, resetting position actual value 2 0001h 3.3.10.6
0471h
Mask to select the controlling bit.
Sets the position actual value from pulse encoder 2 to zero.
INPUT.PG3150.MSK_T3
H138 SRC_SET_PG2 0...1024 0 [A7.3]
1138d Source, setting position actual value 2 1 3.3.10.6
0472h
INPUT.PG3170.NC_T3
H139 MSK_SET_PG2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A7.3]
1139d Mask, setting position actual value 2 0001h 3.3.10.6
0473h
Mask to select the controlling bit.
Sets the position actual value from pulse encoder 2 to the
setting value selected with H170.
INPUT.PG3170.MSK_T3
H140 EN_SAV_PG2 0 ... 1 1 [A7.4]
1140d Enable, transfer P act 2 from the NOVRAM 1 3.3.10.5
0474h
If the enable bit is set, when the voltage returns, position
actual value 1 is set to the value stored in the NOVRAM.
INPUT.PG3030.I2_T3
H141 SRC_EN_SYNC_PG2 0 ... 1024 4 [A7.4]
1141d Source, zero pulse evaluation 2 enable 1
0475h
Connector number, description, refer to H142
INPUT.PG3190.NC_T3
H142 MSK_EN_SYNC_PG2 0000h ... FFFFh 0001h [A7.4]
1142d Mask, zero pulse evaluation 2 enable 0001h
0476h
Mask to select the controlling bit for the zero pulse evalua-
tion enable. Is the contolling bit = 1, the zero pulse evalua-
tion 2 is enabled. Is the controlling bit 0, there is no zero
pulse evaluation.
INPUT.PG3190.MSK_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H150 HW_MODE_PG1 0000h ... FFFFh 1064h [A6.5]

1150d Hardware mode, pulse encoder 1 0001h 3.3.10.2
047Eh
Defines the pulse encoder source, filter, rough pulse and
zero pulse evaluation. Coding:
Bit 0 to bit 3 : Digital filter setting

0: 500kHz 1: no filter 2: 2MHz
3: 500kHz 4: 126kHz 5: 62.5kHz
Bits 4 to 7 : Pulse encoder type

0: Pulse encoder with two tracks displaced through 90°
1: Separate tracks for up- and down pulses
2: Zero pulse via LBA from the basic drive converter
4: Track A, track B via LBA from the basic drive converter
6: Tracks A, B and zero pulse via LBA from the basic drive
converter
Bits 8 to 11 : Rough pulse selection

Bits 12 to 15 : Zero pulse evaluation

1: direction of rotation dependent, i. e.
rising edge for positive speed
falling edge for negative speed
INPUT.PG1000.IT1_T1
H151 PULSES_PG1 0...32767 1024 [A6.5]
1151d Pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 1 1 3.3.10.1
047Fh
Number of pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 1
INPUT.PG1000.PR1_T1
H152 NOM_RPM_PG1 -32768...32767 3000 [A6.6]
1152d Rated speed, pulse encoder 1 1 3.3.10.1
0480h
Speed of the motor shaft in [RPM], at which the pulse
evaluation should provide 100% actual value.
INPUT.PG1000.RS1_T1
H153 NOM_LEGTH_PG1 0 ... 1 073 741 824 4096000 [A6.6]
1153d Normalization, position actual value 1 1 3.3.10.1
0481h
Number of pulses, at which the pulse encoder evaluation
should provide 100% actual value, i. e., for the defined
nominal length or for rotary axes, 1 revolution of the driven
machine.
Note:
The quadrupled pulses are counted.
INPUT.PG1000.RP1_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H154 CTW_MOD_PG1 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [A6.6]

1154d Control word, pulse encoder 1 0001h 3.3.10.3
0482h
The control word defines the standstill limit and the setting
characteristics: Coding:
Bits 0 to 7 : Standstill limit

0: 4 sampling times
n: Speed actual value is set to zero after
n sampling times
Bit 8 : Setting signal evaluation

0: Position is set to the setting value
Bit 12 : Zero pulse evaluation

1: The setting value is subtracted from the actual position
INPUT.PG1000.CW1_T1
H155 HW_MODE_PG2 0000h ... FFFFh 1004h [A7.4]
1155d Hardware mode, pulse encoder 2 0001h 3.3.10.2
0483h
Defines the pulse encoder, filter, rough pulse and zero
pulse evaluation. Coding:
Bits 0 to 3 : Digital filter setting

0: 500kHz 1: no filter 2: 2MHz
3: 500kHz 4: 126kHz 5: 62.5kHz
Bits 4 to 7 : Pulse encoder type

0: Pulse encoder with two tracks displaced through 90°
1: Separate tracks for up- and down pulses
Bits 8 to 11 : Rough pulse selection

Bits 12 to 15 : Zero pulse evaluation

1: Direction of rotation dependent, i. e.
rising edge for positive speed
falling edge for negative speed
Note:
It is not possible to inject the pulse encoder signals via the
LBA from the basic drive converter for sensing 2.
INPUT.PG1000.IT2_T1
H156 PULSES_PG2 0...32767 1024 [A7.4]
1156d Pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 2 1 3.3.10.1
0484h
Number of pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 2
INPUT.PG1000.PR2_T1
H157 NOM_RPM_PG2 -32768...32767 3000 [A7.4]
1156d Rated speed, pulse encoder 2 1 3.3.10.1
0485h
Speed of the motor shaft in [RPM] at which the pulse
evaluation must provide 100% actual value.
INPUT.PG1000.RS2_T1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H158 NOM_LENGTH_PG2 0 ... 1 073 741 824 1073741824 [A7.4]

1158d Normalization, position actual value 2 1 3.3.10.1
0486h
Number of pulses, for which the pulse encoder evaluation
should provide 100% actual value, i. e. for the defined
nominal length or for rotary axes, 1 revolution of the driven
machine.
Note:
The quadrupled pulses are counted.
INPUT.PG1000.RP2_T1
H159 CTW_MOD_PG2 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [A7.4]
1159d Control word, pulse encoder 2 0001h 3.3.10.3
0487h
The control word defines the standstill limit and the setting
characteristics: Coding:
Bits 0 to 7 : Standstill limit

0: 4 sampling times
n: Speed actual value is set to zero after
n sampling times
Bit 8 : Evaluation of the setting signal

1: Setting value is subtracted from the actual position
Bit 12 : Zero pulse evaluation

1: Setting value is subtracted from the actual position
INPUT.PG1000.CW2_T1
H162 FLT_NACT_PG1 10.000[ms]... 10[ms] [A6.7]
...163 840.000[ms]
1162d Smoothing, speed actual value 1 3.3.10
048Ah
Smoothing time constant, speed actual value from pulse
encoder evaluation 1.
INPUT.PG2100.T_T2
H163 FLT_NACT_PG2 10.000[ms]... 10[ms] [A7.6]
...163 840.000[ms]
1163d Smoothing, speed actual value 2 3.3.10
048Bh
Smoothing time constant, speed actual value from pulse
encoder evaluation 2.
INPUT.PG2200.T_T2 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4
H164 SRC_NACT_INT 0 ... 1024 60 [A8.1]
1164d Source, internal speed actual value 1 3.3.11
048Ch
Defines the speed actual value source for the closed-loop
control. The speed actual value from the basic drive con-
verter is pre-assigned.
INPUT.PG2250.NC_T2 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H165 LIM_VACMP_ZERO -200.000%...199.993% 0.5% [A8.3]
1165d Tolerance limit, zero velocity signal 0.006% 3.3.11
048Dh
If the absolute velocity actual value exceeds this limit, the
v=0 signal is withdrawn.
INPUT.PG3300.L_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4

H166 HY_VACMP_ZERO -200.000%...199.993% 0.1% [A8.3]
1166d Hysteresis, zero velocity signal 0.006% 3.3.11
048Eh
The tolerance limit H165 minus the hysteresis is the limit,
which if fallen below, for the first time, results in the v=0
signal.
INPUT.PG3300.HY_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4

Manual
4 Parameter list
H167 SRC_PACT_DPR 0 ... 1024 0 [A8.1]

1167d Source, position actual value from dual port 1 3.3.12
048Fh RAM
Connector number of the receive word from the CU, in
which the position actual value is transferred.
INPUT.R1300.NC_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H168 SRC_PACT_INT 0 ... 1024 62 [A8.1]
1168d Source, position actual value for the closed-loop 1 3.3.12
0490h control
Connector number of the position actual value which is to
be used for the closed-loop control.
INPUT.PG1320.NC_T1 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H169 SRC_SVPOS_PG1 0 ... 1024 0 [A6.3]
1169d Source, position setting value, pulse encoder 1 1 3.3.10.6
0491h
Connector number of the value, to which the position actual
value is set with the setting signal (H133/H134).
H170 SRC_SVPOS_PG2 0 ... 1024 0 [A7.3]
1170d Source, position setting value, pulse encoder 2 1 3.3.10.6
0492h
Connector number of the value, to which the position actual
value is set with the setting signal (H138/H139).
H180 SRC_HBE_BYTESER 0 ... 1024 0 [A9.3]
1180d Source, hibyte bit enable, byte-serial 1 3.3.14
049Ch
INPUT.BS3000.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H181 MSK_HBE_BYTESER 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A9.3]
1181d Mask, hibyte bit enable, byte-serial 0001h 3.3.14
049Dh
Mask to select the controlling bit. Indicates the block read-
ing-in the data, that the most significant byte of the word is
available for transfer.
INPUT.BS3000.MSK_T3
H182 ACC_TIM_BYTESER 0[ms]...1 310 680[ms] 40[ms] [A9.4]
1182d Setting time, byte-serial 40[ms] 3.3.14
049Eh
Minimum time for which the particular byte must be present
unchanged in order to be accepted.
Note:
The control bits must be present for H182+40ms
(=sampling time).
INPUT.BS3010.TC_T3
H183 NUM_DEC_TWS 2...5 4 [A9.4]
1183d Decade number, thumbwheel switch 1 3.3.13
049Fh
Number of decades of the reference value thumbwheel
switch.
INPUT.TW3150.STZ_T3
H184 REF_FAC_TWS 0...65536 100 [A9.4]
1184d Normalization factor, thumbwheel switch 1 3.3.13
04A0h
Number, read-in from the thumbwheel switch, which should
correspond to 100% reference value.
INPUT.TW3150.NF_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H185 BCD_TPE_TWS 0...1 1 [A9.4]

1185d BCD coding, thumbwheel switch 1 3.3.13
04A1h
Selection, binary- coded, decimal.
Setting range of the individual positions:
0...9 : BCD coding: H109=1
0...F : HEX coding: H109=0
INPUT.TW3150.BCD_T3
H186 NEG_SGN_TWS 0...1 0 [A9.4]
1186d Thumbwheel switch, with sign 1 3.3.13
04A2h
When entering positive and negative values, the most
significant position only in a range -7...+7. The sign is
attached instead of the most significant bit of this decade.
INPUT.TW3150.VZ_T3
H187 SRC_BIT0_TWS 0...1024 0 [A9.3]
1187d Source, bit 0 from the thumbwheel switch 1 3.3.13
04A3h
INPUT.TW3100.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H188 MSK_BIT0_TWS 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A9.3]
1188d Mask, bit 0 from the thumbwheel switch 0001h 3.3.13
04A4h
Mask, which selects the bit with weighting 1 of the decade.
INPUT.TW3100.MSK_T3
H189 SRC_BIT1_TWS 0...1024 0 [A9.3]
04A5h
INPUT.TW3110.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
04A6h
INPUT.TW3110.MSK_T3 SI-
MADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H191 SRC_BIT2_TWS 0...1024 0 [A9.3]
04A7h
INPUT.TW3120.NC_T3
04A8h
INPUT.TW3120.MSK_T3
H193 SRC_BIT3_TWS 0...1024 0 [A9.3]
04A9h
INPUT.TW3130.NC_T3
04AAh
Mask, which selects the bit with weighting 8 of the decade
INPUT.TW3130.MSK_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H195 SRC_DAK_TWS 0...1024 0 [A9.3]

1195d Source, data transfer bit, thumbwheel switch 1 3.3.13
04ABh
INPUT.TW3140.NC_T3
H196 MSK_DAK_TWS 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A9.3]
1196d Mask, data transfer bit, thumbwheel switch 0001h 3.3.13
04ACh
Mask, which selects the bit to ransfer data from the
thumbwheel switch.
INPUT.TW3140.MSK_T3
H200 SRC_DRIVE_ON 0 ... 1024 0 [B1.1]
1200d Source on 1 3.4.1
04B0h
CONTRL.P3000.NC_T3
H201 MSK_DRIVE_ON 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [B1.1]
1201d Mask on 0001h 3.4.1
04B1h
Mask, which selects the control bit to power-up the drive.
The drive is powered-up for a positive edge.
CONTRL.P3000.MSK_T3
H202 SRC_DRIVE_STOP 0 ... 1024 0 [B2.1]
1202d Source, no standard stop 1 3.4.5
04B2h
CONTRL.P3010.NC_T3
H203 MSK_DRIVE_STOP 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [B2.1]
1203d Mask, no standard stop 0001h 3.4.5
04B3h
Mask, which selects the control bit for the standard stop.
A zero signal causes the drive to decelerate along the
internal ramp down to standstill, and then electrical shut-
down.
CONTRL.P3010.MSK_T3
H204 SRC_DRV_EL-OFF 0 ... 1024 0 [B2.1]
1204d Source, no electrical off 1 3.4.5
04B4h
CONTRL.P3020.NC_T3
H205 MSK_DRV_EL-OFF 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [B2.1]
1205d Mask, no electrical off 0001h 3.4.5
04B5h
Mask, which is used to select the control bit for electrical
off.
A zero signal inhibits the controller and immediately electri-
cally powers-down the system.
CONTRL.P3020.MSK_T3
H206 SRC_DRV_FSTSTP 0...1024 0 [B2.1]
1206d Source, no fast stop 1 3.4.5
04B6h
CONTRL.P3030.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H207 MSK_DRV_FSTSTP 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [B2.1]

1207d Mask, no fast stop 0001h 3.4.5
04B7h
Mask, which is used to select the control bit for fast stop.
A zero signal brakes the drive down to zero speed along
the torque limit. The drive is then shutdown.
CONTRL.P3030.MSK_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2

H208 SRC_INVERTER_EN 0 ... 1024 4 [B3.1]
1208d Source, inverter enable 1 3.4.7
04B8h

H209 MSK_INVERTER_EN 0000h...FFFFh 0001h [B3.1]
1209d Mask, inverter enable 0001h 3.4.7
04B9h
Mask which is used to select the controlling bit. It allows the
inverter to be enabled after the drive has been powered-up.
H210 SRC_SETPOINT_EN 0 ... 1024 4 [B3.1]
1210d Source, setpoint enable 1 3.4.7
04BAh

H211 MSK_SETPOINT_EN 0000h...FFFFh 0001h [B3.1]
1211d Mask, setpoint enable 0001h 3.4.7
04BBh
Mask, which is used to select the control bit to enable the
speed setpoint.
H212 SRC_FAULT_ACK 0...1024 0 [B5.2]
1212d Source, fault acknowledgement 1 3.4.9
04BCh
H213 MSK_FAULT_ACK 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [B5.2]
1213d Mask, fault acknowledgement 0001h 3.4.9
04BDh
Mask, which is used to select the control bit to acknowl-
edge faults.
H214 SRC_JOG1V 0 ... 1024 0 [B1.1]
1214d Source, inching 1, speed-controlled 1 3.4.2
04BEh
CONTRL.P3100.NC_T3
H215 MSK_JOG1V 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B1.1]
1215d Mask, inching 1, speed-controlled 0001h 3.4.2
04BFh
Mask, which is used to select the control bit, inching 1,
speed-controlled. If the signal is 1, the drive is powered-up,
and rotates with the velocity set in H753.
CONTRL.P3100.MSK_T3
H216 SRC_JOG2V 0 ... 1024 0 [B1.1]
1216d Source, inching 2, speed-controlled 1 3.4.2
04C0h
CONTRL.P3110.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H217 MSK_JOG2V 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B1.1]

1217d Mask, inching 2, speed-controlled 0001h 3.4.2
04C1h
Mask, which is used to select the control bit, inching 2,
speed-controlled. If the signal is 1, the drive is powered-up,
and rotates with the velocity set in H754.
CONTRL.P3110.MSK_T3
H218 SRC_CONST_V1 0...1024 0 [D1.1]
1218d Source, speed control 1 1 3.7.9
04C2h
Connector number, description refer to H219
CONTRL.P3120.NC_T3
H219 MSK_CONST_V1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [D1.2]
1219d Mask, speed control 1 0001h 3.7.9
04C3h
Mask, which is used to select the control bit for speed-
controlled operation with constant velocity setpoint 1. Ve-
locity setpoint 1 is parameterized in H750.
CONTRL.P3120.MSK_T3
H220 SRC_CONST_V2 0 ... 1024 0 [D1.1]
04C4h
CONTRL.P3130.NC_T3
H221 MSK_CONST_V2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [D1.2]
04C5h
controlled operation with constant velocity setpoint 2. Ve-
locity setpoint 2 is parameterized in H751.
CONTRL.P3130.MSK_T3
H222 SRC_VAR_V3 0 ... 1024 0 [D1.1]
04C6h
CONTRL.P3140.NC_T3
H223 MSK_VAR_V3 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [D1.2]
04C7h
controlled operation with a variable velocity setpoint. The
source of the variable velocity setpoint is parameterized in
H752.
CONTRL.P3140.MSK_T3
H224 SRC_JOG1P 0 ... 1024 0 [B1.1]
1224d Source, inching 1, position-controlled 1 3.4.3
04C8h
CONTRL.P3150.NC_T3
H225 MSK_JOG1P 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B1.1]
1225d Mask, inching 1, position-controlled 0001h 3.4.3
04C9h
Mask, which is used to select the control bit inching 1,
position-controlled. If the signal is 1, the drive is powered-
up, and moves through the distance parameterized in
H466. (relative)
CONTRL.P3150.MSK_T3
Manual
4 Parameter list
H226 SRC_JOG2P 0 ... 1024 0 [B1.1]

1226d Source, inching 2, position-controlled 1 3.4.3
04CAh
CONTRL.P3160.NC_T3
H227 MSK_JOG2P 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B1.1]
1227d Mask, inching 2, position-controlled 0001h 3.4.3
04CBh
Mask, which is used to select the control bit inching 2,
position-controlled. If the signal is 1, the drive is powered-
up, and moves through the distance parameterized in
H228. (relative)
CONTRL.P3160.MSK_T3
H228 SRC_SWITCH_A2 0 ... 1024 0 [B2.1]
1228d Source, hardware limit switch A2 1 3.1.3
04CCh
CONTRL.P2170.NC_T2
H229 MSK_SWITCH_A2 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B2.1]
1229d Mask, hardware limit switch A2 0001h 3.1.3
04CDh
Mask which is used to selects the control bit, hardware
limit switch A2
CONTRL.P2170.MSK_T2
H230 SRC_SWITCH_B2 0 ... 1024 0 [B2.1]
1230d Source, hardware limit switch B2 1 3.1.3
04CEh
CONTRL.P2180.NC_T2
H231 MSK_SWITCH_B2 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B2.1]
1231d Mask, hardware limit switch B2 0001h 3.1.3
04CFh
Mask which is used to select control bit ,hardware limit
switch A2
CONTRL.P2180.MSK_T2
H232 SRC_SWITCH_A3 0 ... 1024 0 [B2.2]
1232d Source, emergency limit switch A3 1 3.1.2
04D0h
CONTRL.P2190.NC_T2
H233 MSK_SWITCH_A3 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B2.2]
1233d Mask, emergency limit switch A3 0001h 3.1.2
04D1h
Mask which is used to select control bit, emergency limit
switch A3
Note:
If the signal is to act as fast as possible, it must be con-
nected to the basic drive converter in parallel as fast stop
(OFF3).
CONTRL.P2190.MSK_T2
H234 SRC_SWITCH_B3 0 ... 1024 0 [B2.2]
1234d Source, emergency limit switch B3 1 3.1.2
04D2h
CONTRL.P2200.NC_T2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H235 MSK_SWITCH_B3 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B2.2]

1235d Mask, emergency limit switch B3 0001h 3.1.2
04D3h
Mask which is used to select control bit, emergency limit
switch B3
Note:
If the signal is to act as fast as possible, it must be con-
nected to the basic drive converter in parallel as fast stop
(OFF3).

H236 EN_LIMSW_STP 0 ... 1 1 [B2.2]
1236d Enable stop after passing hardware limit switch 1 3.1.3
04D4h
If the control bit is 1, after the hardware limit switch is
passed, a stop is initiated, with down ramp A2 (B2). If the
bit is 0, it is possible to position the drive beyond the limit
switch after referencing without shutdown.
Note:
This measure bypasses a basic safety function of the
positioning software package.
H240 EN_MEC_BRK 0...1 0 [B1.7]
1240d Enable control, holding/fault brake 1 3.4.6
04D8h
The brake control is enabled using the control bit. The
brake control mode is defined using parameters H241 and
H242.
CONTRL.P5030.I_T5
H241 MSK_DIRECT_BRK 0000h...FFFFh 0700h [B3.2]
1241d Mask, control bits to directly close the brake 0001h 3.4.6
04D9h
Masking the control bits, which would cause the brake to be
directly closed when the drive is shutdown. Thus, a fault
brake can be implemented. Coding:
Bit 0: Drive faulted from TB
Bit 1: Drive faulted from CU
Bit 8: Inching time expired
Bit 9: Standard stop:
Bit 10: Fast stop
Bit 11: No on checkback signal from CU
CONTRL.CD3310.IS2_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H242 MSK_VZERO_BRK 0000h...FFFFh 080Fh [B3.2]
1242d Mask, control bits, close brake at V=0 0001h 3.4.6
04DAh
Masking the control bits which should cause the brake to
be closed at zero velocity. This allows a holding brake to be
implemented. Coding:
Bit 0: Drive faulted from TB
Bit 1: Drive faulted from CU
Bit 8: Inching time expired
Bit 9: Standard stop:
Bit 10: Fast stop
Bit 11: No on checkback signal from CU
CONTRL.CD3320.IS2_T3 SIMADYN D:V2

PKW-TYP:V2
H243 TIME_MECBRK_OPN 0[ms]...1 310 680[ms] 0[ms] [B3.7]
1243d Time, open holding brake 40[ms] 3.4.6
04dbh
Time between controller enable (command to open brake)
and setpoint enable (holding brake is open).
CONTRL.CD3380.T_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H244 TIME_MECBRK_CLS 0[ms]...1 310 680[ms] 0[ms] [B3.7]

1244d Time, close holding brake 40[ms] 3.4.6
04DCh
Time between standstill (command, close brake) and drive
shutdown (brake is closed).
CONTRL.CD3390.T_T3 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4
H245 JOG_TIMEOUT 0[ms]...1 310 680[ms] 3 000[ms] [B1.5]
1245d Time for inching 40[ms] 3.4.3
04DDh
After this time has expired, the drive automatically shuts
down if no inching command was issued.
CONTRL.CC3520.T_T3 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4
H246 FEEDBACK_TIMEOUT 0[ms]...1 310 680[ms] 1 000[ms] [B1.4]
1246d Tolerance time, checkback signal error, drive 40[ms] 3.4.4
04DEh converter
Time, where the drive converter ready signal need not be
present after power-up or during operation. The drive is
shutdown if this time is exceeded.
CONTRL.CC3570.T_T3 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4

H250 SRC_BYPASS_CTW1 0 ... 1024 0 [A2.7]
1250d Source, bypass control word 1 at CU 1 3.3.3
04E2h
Connector number of the control word, which is to be OR’d
with the internally generated control word.
CONTRL.CE3100.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H251 MSK_BYPASS_CTW1 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [A2.7]
1251d Mask, bypass control word 1 at CU 0001h 3.3.3
04E3h
Mask which is used to select the control bits, which are to
be OR’d with the internally generated control word.
CONTRL.CE3110.IS2_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H253 SRC_BYPASS_CTW2 0 ... 1024 0 [A2.7]
1253d Source, bypass control word 2 at CU 1 3.3.3
04E5h
Connector number of the control word, which is to be OR’d
with the internally generated control word.
CONTRL.CE3400.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H254 MSK_BYPASS_CTW2 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [A2.7]
1254d Mask, bypass control word 2 at CU 0001h 3.3.3
04E6h
Mask which is used to select the control bits which are to
be ORd with the internally generated control word.
CONTRL.CE3410.IS2_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2

H260 CB_TIMEOUT 0[ms]...5 242 720[ms] 160[ms] [B4.4]
1260d Tolerance time, communications with CB 160[ms] 3.4.8.2
04ECh
A communications error with CB must be present for at
least this time before an error signal is output.
CONTRL.F4110.T_T4 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4

H261 CU_TIMEOUT 0[ms]...5 242 720[ms] 160[ms] [B4.4]
1261d Tolerance time, communications with CU 160[ms] 3.4.8.3
04EDh
A communications error with CU must be present for at
least of this time before an error signal is output.
CONTRL.F4160.T_T4 SIMADYN D:T2 PKW-TYP:O4

Manual
4 Parameter list
H262 SRC_USER_FLT1 0 ... 1024 4 [B4.2]

1262d Source, no user error 1 1 3.4.8.5
04EEh
CONTRL.F4215.NC_T4
H263 MSK_USER_FLT1 0000h ... FFFFh 0001h [B4.2]
1263d Mask, no user error 1 0001h 3.4.8.5
04EFh
Mask which is used to select the control bit for user error 1.
The error is only enabled, if the drive is powered-up,and the
time in H264 has expired.
CONTRL.F4215.MSK_T4
H264 TIME_USER_FLT1 0[ms]...5 242 720[ms] 960[ms] [B4.4]
1264d Tolerance time, user error 1 160[ms] 3.4.8.5
04F0h
User error 1 must be present for at least this time before an
error signal is output.
CONTRL.F4217.T_T4
H265 SRC_USER_FLT2 0 ... 1024 4 [B4.2]
1265d Source, no user error 2 1 3.4.8.6
04F1h
CONTRL.FX4215.NC_T4
H266 MSK_USER_FLT2 0000h ... FFFFh 0001h [B4.2]
1266d Mask, no user error 2 0001h 3.4.8.6
04F2h
Mask which is used to select the control bit for user error 2.
The error is only enabled if the drive is powered-up and the
time in H267 has expired.
CONTRL.FX4215.MSK_T4
H267 TIME_USER_FLT2 0[ms]...5 242 720[ms] 960[ms] [B4.4]
1267d Tolerance time, user error 2 160[ms] 3.4.8.6
04F3h
User error 2 must be present for at least this time before an
error signal is output.
CONTRL.FX4217.T_T4
SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:O4
H268 P2P_TIMEOUT 0[ms]...5 242 720[ms] 160[ms] [B4.4]
1268d Tolerance time, peer-to-peer communications 160[ms] 3.4.8.4
04F4h
A peer-to-peer communications error must be present for at
least this time before an error signal is output.
CONTRL.F4310.T_T4
H269 LIMIT_OVERSPEED 0.000% ... 199.993% 120% [B4.2]
1269d Threshold, overspeed error 0.006% 3.4.8.8
04F5h
If the absolute speed actual value exceeds this limit, the
overspeed signal is output.
CONTRL.F4220.L_T4
H270 LIM_DELTA_CU-PG1 -200.000%...199.993% 10% [B4.2]
1270d Threshold, pulse encoder error 0.006% 3.4.8.11
04F6h
If the absolute value of the difference between the speed
actual value from pulse encoder sensing 1 and the speed
actual value via the dual port RAM exceeds this limit, then
the pulse encoder fault signal is output after the time en-
tered in H271.
CONTRL.F4420.X2_T4
Manual
4 Parameter list
H271 TIME_DELTA_CU-PG1 0[ms]...5 242 720[ms] 960[ms] [B4.3]

1271d Tolerance time, pulse encoder fault 160[ms] 3.4.8.11
04F7h
The difference of the pulse encoder signals must exceed
the limit must for this time before an error signal is output.
CONTRL.F4430.T_T4
H272 LIM_NACT_FLTBLK -200.000% ... 0.5% [B4.3]
199.993%
1272d Threshold, speed actual value for anti-stall pro- 3.4.8.10
04F8h tection 0.006%
If the absolute speed actual value exceeds this threshold,
anti-stall protection is enabled.
CONTRL.F4225.L_T4
H273 LIM_NREF_FLTBLK 0.000% ... 199.000% 1% [B4.3]
1273d Threshold, speed setpoint for anti-stall protec- 0.006% 3.4.8.10
04F9h tion
If the absolute speed setpoint exceeds this threshold, anti-
stall protection is enabled.
CONTRL.F4230.M_T4
H274 LIM_MACT_FLTBLK 0.000% ... 199.000% 80% [B4.3]
1274d Threshold, torque actual value for anti-stall 0.006% 3.4.8.10
04FAh protection
If the torque actual value lies above this threshold, and if
the conditions for speed setpoint and actual value are
fulfilled, the drive stalled signal is output after the time
entered in H275.
CONTRL.F4235.M_T4
H275 TIME_FLTBLK 0[ms]...5 242 720[ms] 960[ms] [B4.5]
1275d Tolerance time for anti-stall protection 160[ms] 3.4.8.10
04FBh
The drive stalled signal must be present for at least this
time before an error signal is output.
CONTRL.F4245.T_T4
H280 MSK_EN_FAULTS 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [B4.7]
1280d Masking, fault/error messages/signals 0001h 3.4.8.1
0500h
Mask to suppress fault/error messages/signals
Coding:
Bit 5: Tracking error outside tolerance [F121]
Bit 9: Pulse encoder fault [F125]
Bit 13: Reference point incorrectly / not identified [F129]
Bit 15: Load error, absolute encoder [F131]
CONTRL.F4920.X1_T4

Manual
4 Parameter list
H281 MSK_EN_WARNINGS 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B4.7]

1281d Masking, alarms 0001h 3.4.8.1
0501h
All fault messages/signals can be alternatively output as
alarms. Mask to suppress alarms. Coding:
Bit 5: Tracking error outside tolerance [A102]
Bit 13: Reference point incorrectly / not identified [A110]
Bit 15: Load error, absolute encoder [A112]
CONTRL.F4980.X1_T4
H300 SRC_MODE_REF_STP 0 ... 1024 0 [B6.1]
1300d Source, referencing with shutdown 1 3.5.1
0514h
REFCTL.PC3000.NC_T3
H301 MSK_MODE_REF_STP 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B6.1]
1301d Mask, referencing with shutdown 0001h 3.5.1
0515h
Mask which is used to select the control bit, referencing,
with subsequent shutdown. The mode is pre-selected for an
edge from 0 to 1, and is reset againafter successful refer-
encing or termination.
REFCTL.PC3000.MSK_T3
H302 SRC_MODE_REF_FLY 0 ... 1024 0 [B6.1]
1302d Source, flying referencing 1 3.5.2
0516h
REFCTL.PC3010.NC_T3
H303 MSK_MODE_REF_FLY 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B6.1]
1303d Mask, flying referencing 0001h 3.5.2
0517h
Mask which is used to select the control bit, flying refer-
encing. The mode is pre-selected for an edge change from
0 to 1, and is again reset after referencing or termination.
H304 SRC_REF_ALWAYS 0 ... 1024 4 [B7.1]
1304d Source, automatic post-referencing 1 3.5.7
0518h
REFCTL.PC3020.NC_T3
H305 MSK_REF_ALWAYS 0000h ... FFFFh 0001h [B7.1]
1305d Mask, automatic post-referencing 0001h 3.5.7
0519h
Mask which is used to select the control bit, automatic post-
referencing. If the bit is 1, the position actual value is cor-
rected each time the reference point is passed.

Manual
4 Parameter list
H308 SRC_REFP_PRECON 0 ... 1024 0 [B7.5]

1308d Source, pre-contact to the reference point 1 3.5.6
051Ch
REFCTL.PC3050.NC_T3
H309 MSK_REFP_PRECON 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B7.6]
1309d Mask, pre-contact to the reference point 0001h 3.5.6
051Dh
Mask which is used to select the control bit, pre-contact to
the reference point. If the bit is 1, then the slow referencing
velocity is selected.
H310 SRC_STRT_DIR_REF 0 ... 1024 0 [B7.1]
1310d Source, start direction when referencing 1 3.5
051Eh
REFCTL.PC3060.NC_T3
H311 MSK_STRT_DIR_REF 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B7.2]
1311d Mask, start direction when referencing 0001h 3.5
051Fh
Mask, which is used to select the control bit for the start
direction when referencing. If the control bit is 0, then the
→B, for a 1 signal, in the
drive starts in the direction A→
direction B→→A.
H312 MIN_REF_LEN -2 147 483 648... 0 [B8.3]
... 2 147 483 647
1312d Minimum approach path when referencing 3.5.3
0520h 1
If referencing is started, at least the set minimum approach
path must be traversed before the reference point is ac-
cepted.
Note:
If the rough/fine pulse function is used, at least the width of
the rough pulse signal must be entered. Otherwise, the
value should be greater than the play of the drive unit.
REFCTL.PC3070.X_T3
H320 RESET_REF_DRON 0...1 0 [B6.3]
1320d Resetting the referencing signal at each power- 1 3.5.5
0528h up
If the control bit is 1, then each time the drive is powered-
up, the drive has referenced signal is reset.
REFCTL.PC3320.I2_T3
H322 LIM_ERROR_REFPNT -2 147 483 648... 0 [B9.2]
... 2 147 483 647
1322d Tolerance range, reference point 3.5.5
052Ah 1
If, for the function automatic post-referencing or rotary axis,
the reference point lies outside the tolerance range, an
error signal is generated. The function is disabled with
value 0.
REFCTL.PF5100.X_T5
H330 VREF_REF_A->B -200.000% ... 10% [B7.7]
199.993%
1330d V setpoint, referencing direction A->B 3.5.6
0532h 0.006%
REFCTL.PC3950.X1_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H331 VREF_SLW_REF_A->B -200.000% ... 5% [B7.7]

199.993%
1331d V setpoint, referencing direction A->B slow 3.5.6
0533h 0.006%
Velocity setpoint for the slower reference motion after the
pre-contact has been identified.
REFCTL.PC3950.X1_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H332 VREF_REF_B->A -200.000%...199.993% -10% [B7.7]
1332d V setpoint, referencing direction B->A 0.006% 3.5.6
0534h
H333 VREF_SLW_REF_B->A -200.000% ... -5% [B7.7]
199.993%
1333d V setpoint, referencing direction B->A slow 3.5.6
0534h 0.006%
Velocity setpoint for the slower reference motion after the
pre-contact has been identified.
H335 EN_TR_CTRL 0/1 0 [B11.4]
1335d Tr-Encoder enable
0537h
If the control bit is set to 1, then the download control and
monitoring for the TR encoder are enabled.
REFCTL..TR5000.I_T5
H336 SRC_TR_LOAD_OUT 0 ... 1024 0 [B11.1]
1336d Source Tr-encoder output 1
0538h
Connector number, for description see H337.
REFCTL.TR3100.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H337 MSK_TR_LOAD_OUT 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B11.2]
1337d Tr-encoder download complete mask 0001h
0539h
Mask to select the download output of the TR-encoder.
REFCTL.TR3100.MSK_T3
H338 SRC_REF_TR 0 ... 1024 0 [B11.1]
1338d TR-encoder reference source 1
053Ah
Connector number, for description see H339.
REFCTL.TR3150.NC_T3
H339 MSK_REF_TR 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [B11.2]
1339d Tr-encoder reference mask 0001h
053Bh
Mask which selects the control bit to manually initiate the
downloading process. Following the initialization of the
board, i.e. with the loss of the impulse encoder counter
status, the downloading process will be automatically
started. The downloading process may be manually retrig-
gered using this control bit.
Note:
The downloading process will first commence following
zero speed, inverter inhibit status and the waiting time
definded in H340. During the donloading process the in-
verter is inhibited by the TR-encoder download controller.
REFCTL.TR3150.MSK_T3
H340 DEL_TM_LDTR 0[ms] ... 1 310 680 [ms] 1 000 [ms] [B11.5]
1340d Waiting time download process TR-encoder 40[ms]
053Ch
The downloading process will first commence following
zero speed, inverter inhibit status and the entered waiting
time.
REFCTL.TR3220.T_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H341 MAX_LOAD_TIME 0[ms] ... 1 310 680 [ms] 600 000 [ms] [B11.6]
1341d Maximum downloading time Tr-encoder 40[ms]
053Dh
If the downloading time exceeds the entered value, then
the TR-encoder downloading process will be discontinued
and the error code F131 will be generated. The maximum
downloading time of the TR-encoder may be calculated
using the following formula:
No. of revolutions × pulses per revolution
Downloading time = .
downloading frequency
with the values
no. of revolutions = 4096
pulses per revolution = 1024
(÷4096 steps TR-encoder)
downloading frequency = 12 ⋅ 5 kHz
4096 × 1024
the Downloading time = ≈ 335sec.
12 ⋅ 5 kHz
REFCTL.TR3150.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H350 SCAL_POSREG -2 147 483 648... 100000 [C1.1]
... 2 147 483 647
1350d Scaling, closed-loop position control 3.1.10
0546h 1
Scaling quantity, which defines which value represents
100% for the control in the fixed point notation.
SETPNT.SCAL.X_T5 SIMADYN D:I4 PKW-TYP:I4
H351 POSITION_REFPNT -2 147 483 648... 0 [C1.1]
... 2 147 483 647
1351d Position of the hardware reference point 3.1.7
0547h 1
The pulse encoder sensing 1 is set to this value when the
reference point is passed-over.
SETPNT.REFP.X_T5 SIMADYN D:I4 PKW-TYP:I4
H352 CORR_FACTOR -200.000% ... 100% [C1.4]
199.993%
1352d Correction factor 3.6.2
0548h 0.006%
Velocity and position are multiplied by this factor in order to
eliminate re-normalization, for example, for wear.
SETPNT.DM.X_T5
H353 MODE_RNDX 0...1 0 [C1.4]
1353d Operating mode, rotary axis 1
0549h
The rotary axis mode is selected if the control bit is 1.
SETPNT.X_MODE.I_T5
H359 SRC_PREF_VAR_WD 0 ... 1024 0 [C2.1]
1359d Source, position reference value, variable word 1 3.6.4
054Fh quantity
Source for the variable position reference value from the
traversing data set position reference values in the single-
word format If it is adequate to enter position reference
values as integer- single-word quantities (-32768 to 32767)
for simple applications this reference value branch can be
used.
SETPNT.PR2002.NC_T2
H360 SRC_PREF_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C2.1]
1360d Source, variable position reference value 1 3.6.4
0550h
Source for the variable position reference value from the
traversing data set, position reference values.
SETPNT.PR2000.NC_T2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H361 PREF_1 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C2.2]

... 2 147 483 647
1361d Position reference value 1 3.6.4
0551h 1
SETPNT.PR510.X1_T5
to H459 Assignment, refer to the short parameter list / logbook
H460 PREF_100 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C2.2]

... 2 147 483 647
1460d Position reference value 100 3.6.4
05B4h 1
SETPNT.PR570.X4_T5 SIMADYN D:I4 PKW-TYP:I4
H461 SRC_SEL_PREF 0 ... 1024 5 [C2.1]
1461d Source, data set selection, position reference 1 3.6.1
05B5h value
Connector number of the word, which selects the position
reference value from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.PR3100.NC_T3
H462 MSK_SEL_PREF 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C2.2]
1462d Mask, data set selection, position reference 0001h 3.6.1
05B6h value
Suppresses irrelevant bits.
SETPNT.PR3110.IS2_T3
H463 SHIFT_SEL_PREF 0 ... 32767 0 [C2.3]
1463d Shifts position reference value selection bits to 1 3.6.1
05B7h the right
If the control bits are in the middle of the word, the correct
weighting can be established by shifting to the right. The
value specifies the number of shift operations.
SETPNT.PR3112.XD_T3
H464 SRC_EN_PREF 0 ... 1024 4 [C3.1]
1464d Source, position reference value enable 1 3.6.1
05B8h
SETPNT.PR2136.NC_T2 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H465 MSK_EN_PREF 0000h ... FFFFh 0001h [C3.1]
1465d Mask, enable position reference value 0001h 3.6.1
05B9h
Mask, which selects the control bit to transfer the position
reference values from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.PR2136.MSK_T2
H466 PREF_JOG1P -2 147 483 648... 0 [C2.5]
... 2 147 483 647
1466d Setpoint, inching 1, position-controlled 3.6.4.2
05BAh 1
Value, through which the drive should be moved for inching
1, position-controlled.
H467 PREF_JOG2P -2 147 483 648... 0 [C2.5]
... 2 147 483 647
1467d Setpoint, inching 2, position-controlled 3.6.4.2
05BBh 1
Value, through which the drive should be moved for inching
2, position-controlled.
H468 SRC_MOD_RELPOS 0 .... 1024 0 [C2.5]
1468d Source, relative positioning mode 1 3.6.4.1
05BCh

Manual
4 Parameter list
H469 MSK_MOD_RELPOS 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [C2.5]

1469d Mask, relative positioning mode 0001h 3.6.4.1
05BDh
Mask, which is used to select the control bit for relative
positioning. If the control bit is 1, all of the reference value
changes are interpreted as traversing distance referred to
the current position.
SETPNT.PR3210.MSK_T3 SI-
MADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H470 SRC_DIR_REL.POS 0 .... 1024 0 [C2.5]
1470d Source, traversing direction, relative positioning 1
05BEh
SETPNT.PR3220.NC_T3
H471 MSK_DIR_REL.POS 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [C2.6]
1471d Mask, traversing direction, relative positioning 0001h
05BFh
Mask, which is used to select the control bits for the refer-
ence value polarity. If the bit is 1, the position reference
value from the traversing data set, is inverted. The travers-
ing direction can also be directly entered via the polarity of
the position reference value.
SETPNT.PR3220.MSK_T3
H472 SRC_MOVE_REL.POS 0 .... 1024 0 [C2.5]
1472d Source, advance for relative positioning 1
05C0h
H473 MSK_MOVE_REL.POS 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [C2.6]
1473d Mask, advance for relative positioning 0001h
05C1h
Mask, which is used to select the control bits for advance in
the relative positioning mode. For a positive edge, the
reference value from the traversing data set is added to the
last position reference value.
SETPNT.PR2120.MSK_T2 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2

H474 H474 KEEP_MEM_RELPOS 0/1 1 [C2.5]
1474d Behavior of the position reference value mem-
05C2h ory at power-on
The position reference value memory is set to the actual
value each time the "relative positioning" operating mode is
selected. Further, using H574, the reference value memory
can be set at power-on.
Value 0:
If the position control is enabled in the "relative positioning"
mode, the internal position reference value memory is
synchronized with the actual value.
Value 1: If the position control is enabled in the "relative
positioning" mode, the contents of the position reference
value memory are not changed.
SETPNT.PR3211.I1_T3
SIMADYN D:B1 PKW-TYPE: Boolean
H475 to Not used
H499
H500 PLIMX_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C4.2]
1500d Source, variable position limit value X 1 3.6.5
05DCh
Source for the variable position limit value X for the trav-
ersing data set
SETPNT.PLX300.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H501 PLIM_X_1 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C4.2]

... 2 147 483 647
1501d Position limit value X 1 3.6.5
05DDh 1
SETPNT.PLX510.X1_T5
to Assignment, refer to the short parameter list / logbook
H506 PLIM_X_6 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C4.2]

... 2 147 483 647
1506d Position limit value X 6 3.6.5
05E2h 1
SETPNT.PLX510.X6_T5
H507 SRC_SEL_PLIM_X 0 ... 1024 5 [C4.1]
1507d Source, position limit value X selection 1 3.6.1
05E3h
Connector number of the word which is used to select the
position limit value X from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.PLX310.NC_T3
H508 MSK_SEL_PLIM_X 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C4.1]
1508d Mask, position limit value X selection 0001h 3.6.1
05E4h
SETPNT.PLX315.IS2_T3
H509 SHIFT_SEL_PLIM_X 0 ... 326767 0 [C4.2]
1509d Shifts position limit value X selection bits to the 1 3.6.1
05E5h right
If the control bits are located in the center of the word, the
correct weighting can be established by shifting to the right.
The value specifies the number of shift operations.
SETPNT.PLX317.XD_T3
H510 PLIM_Y_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C4.6]
1510d Source, variable position limit value Y 1 3.6.5
05E6h
Source for the variable position limit value Y for the trav-
ersing data set
SETPNT.PLY300.NC_T3
H511 PLIM_Y_1 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C4.6]
... 2 147 483 647
1511d Position limit value Y 1 3.6.5
05E7h 1
SETPNT.PLY510.X1_T5
H516 PLIM_Y_6 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C4.6]

... 2 147 483 647
1516d Position limit value Y 6 3.6.5
05ECh 1
SETPNT.PLY510.X6_T5
H517 SRC_SEL_PLIM_Y 0 ... 1024 5 [C4.5]
1517d Source, position limit value Y selection 1 3.6.1
05EDh
position limit value Y from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.PLY310.NC_T3
H518 MSK_SEL_PLIM_Y 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C4.5]
1518d Mask, position limit value Y selection 0001h 3.6.1
05EEh
SETPNT.PLY315.IS2_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H519 SHIFT_SEL_PLIM_Y 0 ... 32767 0 [C4.6]

1519d Shifts position limit value Y selection bits to the 1 3.6.1
05EFh right
SETPNT.PLY317.XD_T3
H520 PLIM_Z_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C4.2]
1520d Source, variable position limit value Z 1 3.6.5
05F0h
Source for the variable position limit value Z for the trav-
ersing data set.
SETPNT.PLZ300.NC_T3
H521 PLIM_Z_1 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C4.2]
... 2 147 483 647
1521d Position limit value Z 1 3.6.5
05F1h 1
SETPNT.PLZ510.X1_T5
H526 PLIM_Z_6 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C4.2]

... 2 147 483 647
1526d Position limit value Z 6 3.6.5
05F6h 1
SETPNT.PLZ510.X6_T5
H527 SRC_SEL_PLIM_Z 0 ... 1024 5 [C4.1]
1527d Source, position limit value Z selection 1 3.6.1
05F7h
Connector number of the word which selects the position
limit value Z from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.PLZ310.NC_T3
H528 MSK_SEL_PLIM_Z 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C4.1]
1528d Mask, position limit value Z selection 0001h 3.6.1
05F8h
SETPNT.PLZ315.IS2_T3
H529 SHIFT_SEL_PLIM_Z 0 ... 32767 0 [C4.2]
1529d Shifts position limit value Z selection bits to the 1 3.6.1
05F9h right
SETPNT.PLZ317.XD_T3
H530 SW_SWITCH_A1_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C5.2]
1530d Source, variable software limit switch A1 1 3.6.6
05FAh
Source, variable software limit switch A1, traversing data
set.
SETPNT.SWA300.NC_T3
H531 SW_SWITCH_A1_1 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C5.2]
... 2 147 483 647
1531d Software limit switch A1 3.6.6
05FBh 1
Limit value for reference value input in the traversing direc-
tion B→A.
SETPNT.SWA510.X1_T5

Manual
4 Parameter list
H536 SW_SWITCH_A1_6 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C5.2]

... 2 147 483 647
1536d Software limit switch A6 3.6.6
0600h 1
Limit value for the setpoint input in the traversing direction
B→A.
SETPNT.SWA510.X6_T5
H537 SRC_SEL_SW_A1 0 ... 1024 5 [C5.1]
1537d Source, software limit switch A1 selection 1 3.6.1
0601h
Connector number of the word, which selects the software
limit switch A1 from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.SWA310.NC_T3
H538 MSK_SEL_SW_A1 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C5.1]
1538d Mask, software limit switch A1 selection 0001h 3.6.1
0602h
The irrelevant bits can be suppressed using the mask
SETPNT.SWA315.IS2_T3
H539 SHIFT_SEL_SW_A1 0 ... 32767 0 [C5.2]
1539d Shifts software limit switch A1 selection bits to 1 3.6.1
0603h the right
SETPNT.SWA317.XD_T3
H540 SW_SWITCH_B1_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C5.6]
1540d Source, variable software limit switch B1 1 3.6.6
0604h
Source, variable software limit switch B1, traversing data
set
SETPNT.SWB300.NC_T3
H541 SW_SWITCH_B1_1 -2 147 483 648... 100000 [C5.6]
... 2 147 483 647
1541d Software limit switch B1 3.6.6
0605h 1
tion A→B.
SETPNT.SWB510.X1_T5
H546 SW_SWITCH_B1_6 -2 147 483 648... 0 [C5.6]

... 2 147 483 647
1546d Software limit switch B6 3.6.6
060Ah 1
tion A→B.
SETPNT.SWB510.X6_T5
H547 SRC_SEL_SW_B1 0 ... 1024 5 [C5.5]
1547d Source, software limit switch B1 selection 1 3.6.1
060Bh
Connector number of the word, which selects software limit
switch B1 from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.SWB310.NC_T3
H548 MSK_SEL_SW_B1 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C5.5]
1548d Mask, software limit switch B1 selection 0001h 3.6.1
060Ch
SETPNT.SWB315.IS2_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H549 SHIFT_SEL_SW_B1 0 ... 32767 0 [C5.6]

1549d Shifts software limit switch B1 selection bits to 1 3.6.1
060Dh the right
SETPNT.SWB317.XD_T3
H550 VMAX_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C5.2]
1550d Source, variable maximum velocity 1 3.6.7
060Eh
Source, variable maximum velocity, traversing data set
SETPNT.VMX300.NC_T3
H551 VMAX_1 0.000% ... 199.993% 100% [C5.2]
1551d Maximum velocity 1 0.006% 3.6.5
060Fh
Maximum traversing velocity when positioning.
SETPNT.VMX510.X1_T5
H556 VMAX_6 0.000% ... 199.993% 0% [C5.2]

1556d Maximum velocity 6 0.006% 3.6.7
0614h
Maximum traversing velocity when positioning.
SETPNT.VMX510.X6_T5
H557 SRC_SEL_VMAX 0 ... 1024 5 [C5.1]
1557d Source, maximum velocity selection 1 3.6.1
0615h
Connector number of the word, which selects the maximum
velocity from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.VMX310.NC_T3
H558 MSK_SEL_VMAX 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C5.1]
1558d Mask, maximum velocity selection 0001h 3.6.1
0616h
SETPNT.VMX315.IS2_T3
H559 SHIFT_SEL_VMAX 0 ... 32767 0 [C5.2]
1559d Shifting maximum velocity selection bits to the 1 3.6.1
0617h right
SETPNT.VMX317.XD_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H560 SRC_ADAP_VMAX 0 ... 1024 0 [C5.2]
1560d Source, maximum velocity adaption factor 1 3.6.7
0618h
The maximum velocity from the traversing data set can be
multiplied by this factor. In this case, the factor must be
activated via H561 and H562.
SETPNT.VMX340.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H561 SRC_EN_ADP_VMX 0 ... 1024 0 [C5.2]
1561d Source, enable maximum velocity adaption 1 3.6.7
0619h factor
SETPNT.VMX350.NC SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H562 MSK_EN_ADP_VMX 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [C5.2]

1562d Mask, enable maximum velocity adaption factor 0001h 3.6.7
061Ah
Mask, which is used to select the control bit,enable maxi-
mum velocity adaption factor
SETPNT.VMX350.MSK_T3
H563 to Not used
H569
H570 KP_FAC_VC_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C6.2]
1570d Source, variable speed controller KP factor 1 3.6.9
0622h
Source of the factor with which the speed controller pro-
portional gain is set in the basic drive.
SETPNT.KPV300.NC_T3
H571 KP_FAC_VC_1 0 ... 10 1 [C6.2]
1571d KP factor 1, speed controller 0.001 3.6.9
0623h
The proportional gain in the basic drive is set using this
factor.
SETPNT.KPV510.X1_T5
H576 KP_FAC_VC_6 0 ... 10 1 [C6.2]

1576d KP factor 6, speed controller 0.001 3.6.9
0628h
The proportional gain in the basic drive is set using this
factor.
SETPNT.KPV510.X6_T5
H577 SRC_SEL_KP_FAC 0 ... 1024 5 [C6.1]
1576d Source, speed controller KP factor selection 1 3.6.1
0629h
Connector number of the word which selects the KP factor
for the speed controller from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.KPV310.NC_T3
H578 MSK_SEL_KP_FAC 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C6.1]
1578d Mask, speed controller KP factor selection 0001h 3.6.1
062Ah
SETPNT.KPV315.IS2_T3
H579 SHIFT_SEL_KP_FAC 0 ... 32767 0 [C6.2]
1579d Shifts KP factor selection bits to the right 1 3.6.1
062Bh
SETPNT.KPV317.XD_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H580 SRC_KP-ADAP_VC 0 ... 1024 0 [C6.4]

1580d Source, speed controller KP adaption 1 3.6.9
062Ch
Connector number of the value which should be made
dependent on the speed controller proportional gain.
H583 H5 8 1 H58 1 H583

Y
H 5 82 B2
O rd ina te Y
H 5 84 B1
X
A2 A1 A1 A2
H 58 0 A bs c is sa X
K
SETPNT.KPV335.NC_T3
H581 KP-ADAP_VC_A1 0.000% ... 199.993% 0% [C6.4]
1581d Starting point, speed controller KP adaption 0.006% 3.6.9
062Dh
Defines the abscissa point A1.
SETPNT.KPV340.A1_T3
H582 KP-ADAP_VC_B1 0.000% ... 199.993% 100% [C6.4]
1582d KP factor, starting point of the speed controller 0.006% 3.6.9
062Eh KP adaption
Defines the ordinate point B1.
SETPNT.KPV340.B1_T3
H583 KP-ADAP_VC_A2 0.000% ... 199.993% 100% [C6.4]
1583d Final point, speed controller KP adaption 0.006% 3.6.9
062Fh
Defines the abscissa point A2.
SETPNT.KPV340.A2_T3
H584 KP-ADAP_VC_B2 0.000% ... 199.993% 100% [C6.4]
1584d KP factor end point speed controller KP adap- 0.006% 3.6.9
0630h tion
Defines the ordinate point B2.
SETPNT.KPV340.B2_T3
H590 PLAY_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C5.6]
1590d Source, variable drive play 1 3.6.8
0636h
Source, variable traversing data set drive play
SETPNT.PY300.NC_T3
H591 PLAY_1 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C5.6]
1591d Drive play 1 1 3.6.8
0637h
SETPNT.PY510.X1_T5
H596 PLAY_6 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C5.6]

1596d Drive play 6 1 3.6.8
063Ch
SETPNT.PY510.X6_T5

Manual
4 Parameter list
H597 SRC_SEL_PLAY 0 ... 1024 5 [C5.5]

1597d Source, drive play selection 1 3.6.1
063Dh
Connector number of the word which selects the drive play
from the traversing data set.
SETPNT.PY310.NC_T3
H598 MSK_SEL_PLAY 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C5.5]
1598d Mask, drive play selection 0001h 3.6.1
063Eh
SETPNT.PY315.IS2_T3
H599 SHIFT_SEL_PLAY 0 ... 32767 0 [C5.6]
1599d Shifting drive play selection bits to the right 1 3.6.1
063Fh
SETPNT.PY317.XD_T3
H600 TU_PRAMP_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C6.2]
1600d Source, variable ramp-up time, position RFG 1 3.6.10
0640h
Source, variable ramp-up time, position RFG, traversing
data set
SETPNT.TU300.NC_T3
H601 TU_PRAMP_1 5.000[ms] ... 10000[ms] [C6.2]
5 368 709 120.000[ms]
1601d Ramp-up time, position RFG 1 3.6.10
0641h
SETPNT.TU510.X1_T5
H606 TU_PRAMP_6 5.000[ms] ... 10000[ms] [C6.2]

5 368 709 120.000[ms]
1606d Ramp-up time, position RFG 6 3.6.10
0646h
SETPNT.TU510.X6_T5
SIMADYN D:R4,T1 PKW-TYP:O4
H607 SRC_SEL_TU_PRMP 0 ... 1024 5 [C6.1]
1607d Source, position RFG ramp-up time selection 1 3.6.1v
0647h
ramp-up time for the position RFG from the traversing data
set.
SETPNT.TU310.NC_T3
H608 MSK_SEL_TU_PRMP 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C6.1]
1608d Mask, position RFG ramp-up time selection 0001h 3.6.1
0648h
SETPNT.TU315.IS2_T3
H609 SHFT_SEL_ TU_PRMP 0 ... 32767 0 [C6.2]
1609d Shifts ramp-up time selection bits to the right 1 3.6.1
0649h
SETPNT.TU317.XD_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H610 TR_PRAMP_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C7.2]

1610d Source, rounding-off time constant, variable 1 3.6.11
064Ah position RFG
Source, variable rounding-off time constant of the position
ramp-function generator, traversing data set
SETPNT.TR300.NC_T3
H611 TR_PRAMP_1 5.000[ms] ... 100[ms] [C7.2]
5 368 709 120.000[ms]
1611d Rounding-off time constant, position RFG 1 3.6.11
064Bh
SETPNT.TR510.X1_T5
H616 TR_PRAMP_6 5.000[ms] ... 100[ms] [C7.2]

5 368 709 120.000[ms]
1616d Rounding-off time constant, pos. RFG 6 3.6.11
0650h
SETPNT.TR510.X6_T5
H617 SRC_SEL_TR_PRMP 0 ... 1024 5 [C7.1]
1617d Source, select round.-off time const. pos. RFG 1 3.6.1
0651h
Connector number of the word, which is used to select the
rounding-off time constant for the position ramp-function
generator from the traversing data set
SETPNT.TR310.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H618 MSK_SEL_TR_PRMP 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C7.1]
1618d Mask, select rounding-off time const. pos. RFG 0001h 3.6.1
0652h
SETPNT.TR315.IS2_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H619 SHFT_SEL_ TR_PRMP 0 ... 32767 0 [C7.2]
1619d Shifts rounding-off time constant selection bits 1 3.6.1
0653h to the right
SETPNT.TR317.XD_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H620 TD_PRAMP_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C6.6]
1620d Source, variable ramp-down time position RFG 1 3.6.10
0654h
Source, variable ramp-down time position RFG traversing
data set
SETPNT.TD510.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H621 TD_PRAMP_1 5.000[ms] ... 10000[ms] [C6.6]
5 368 709 120.000[ms]
1621d Ramp-down time, position RFG 1 3.6.10
0655h
SETPNT.TD510.X1_T5
H626 TD_PRAMP_6 5.000[ms] ... 10000[ms] [C6.6]

5 368 709 120.000[ms]
1626d Ramp-down time, position RFG 6 3.6.10
065Ah
SETPNT.TD510.X6_T5
H627 SRC_SEL_TD_PRMP 0 ... 1024 0 [C6.5]
1627d Source, select ramp-down time, pos. RFG 1 3.6.1
065Bh
ramp-down time for the position RFG from the traversing
data set.
SETPNT.TD310.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H628 MSK_SEL_TD_PRMP 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C6.5]

1628d Mask, select ramp-down time pos. RFG 0001h 3.6.1
065Ch
SETPNT.TD315.IS2_T3
H629 SHFT_SEL_ TD_PRMP 0 ... 32767 0 [C6.6]
1629d Shifts ramp-down time selection bits to the right 1 3.6.1
065Dh
SETPNT.TD317.XD_T3
H630 to Not used
H639
H640 TD_RAMP_A2_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C7.2]
1640d Variable down ramp, HW limit switch A2 1 3.6.12
0668h
Source, variable down ramp A2 traversing data set. If the
drive passes hardware limit switch A2, then this down ramp
is selected.
SETPNT.TDA300.NC_T3
H641 TD_RAMP_A2_1 40.000[ms]... 1000[ms] [C7.2]
...655 360.000[ms]
1641d Down ramp, HW limit switch A2 1 3.6.12
0669h
SETPNT.TDA510.X1_T5
H646 TD_RAMP_A2_6 40.000[ms]... 1000[ms] [C7.2]

...655 360.000[ms]
1646d Down ramp, HW limit switch A2 6 3.6.12
066Eh
SETPNT.TDA510.X6_T5
H647 SRC_SEL_TD_A2 0 ... 1024 5 [C7.1]
1647d Source, select down ramp A2 1 3.6.1
066Fh
down ramp for the velocity setpoint from the traversing data
set after hardware limit switch A2 is passed,.
SETPNT.TDA310.NC_T3
H648 MSK_SEL_TD_A2 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C7.1]
1648d Mask, select down ramp A2 0001h 3.6.1
0670h
SETPNT.TDA315.IS2_T3
H649 SHIFT_SEL_TD_A2 0 ... 32767 0 [C7.2]
1649d Shifts down ramp A2 selection bits to the right 1 3.6.1
0671h
SETPNT.TDA317.XD_T3
H650 TD_RAMP_B2_VAR 0 ... 1024 0 [C7.6]
1650d Variable down ramp HW limit switch B2 1 3.6.12
0672h
Source, variable down ramp B2 traversing data set. If the
drive passes hardware limit switch B2, this down ramp is
selected.
SETPNT.TDB300.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H651 TD_RAMP_B2_1 40.000[ms]... 1000[ms] [C7.6]

...655 360.000[ms]
1651d Down ramp, HW limit switch B2 1 3.6.12
0673h
SETPNT.TDB510.X1_T5
H656 TD_RAMP_B2_6 40.000[ms]... 1000[ms] [C7.6]

...655 360.000[ms]
1656d Down ramp, HW limit switch B2 6 3.6.12
0678h
SETPNT.TDB510.X6_T5
H657 SRC_SEL_TD_B2 0 ... 1024 5 [C7.5]
1657d Source, down ramp B2 selection 1 3.6.1
0679h
Connector number of the word, which is used to select the
down ramp for the velocity setpoint from the traversing data
set after hardware limit switch B2 is passed.
SETPNT.TDB310.NC_T3
H658 MSK_SEL_TD_B2 0000h ... FFFFh FFFFh [C7.5]
1658d Mask, select down ramp B2 0001h 3.6.1
067Ah
SETPNT.TDB315.IS2_T3
H659 SHIFT_SEL_TD_B2 0 ... 32767 0 [C7.6]
1659d Shifts down ramp B2 selection bits to the right 1 3.6.1
067Bh
SETPNT.TDB317.XD_T3
H660 REF_FIX_INTWD_1 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C1.1]
1660d Fixed setpoint 1, integer word quantity 1 3.6.3
067Ch
Value available via connector K330.
SETPNT.FSP500.X1_T5
H661 REF_FIX_INTWD_2 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C1.1]
067Dh
SETPNT.FSP500.X2_T
H662 REF_FIX_INTWD_3 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C1.1]
067Eh
SETPNT.FSP500.X3_T5
H663 REF_FIX_INTWD_4 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C1.1]
067Fh
SETPNT.FSP500.X4_T5
H664 REF_FIX_INTWD_5 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C1.1]
0680h
SETPNT.FSP500.X5_T5

Manual
4 Parameter list
H665 REF_FIX_INTWD_6 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C1.1]

0681h
SETPNT.FSP500.X6_T5
H666 REF_FIX_INTWD_7 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C1.1]
0682h
SETPNT.FSP500.X7_T5
H667 REF_FIX_INTWD_8 -32768 ... 32767 0 [C1.1]
0683h
SETPNT.FSP500.X8_T5
H668 REF_FIX_%-WD_1 -200.000% ...199.993% 0 [C1.3]
1668d Fixed setpoint 1 % quantity word 0.006% 3.6.3
0684h
SETPNT.FSP500.X9_T5
H669 REF_FIX_%-WD_2 -200.000% ...199.993% 0 [C1.3]
0685h
SETPNT.FSP500.X10_T5
H670 REF_FIX_%-WD_3 -200.000% ...199.993% 0 [C1.3]
0686h
SETPNT.FSP500.X11_T5 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H671 REF_FIX_%-WD_4 -200.000% ...199.993% 0 [C1.3]
0687h

H672 REF_FIX_%-WD_5 -200.000% ...199.993% 0 [C1.3]
0688h
H673 REF_FIX_%-WD_6 -200.000% ...199.993% 0 [C1.3]
0689h

H674 REF_FIX_%-WD_7 -200.000% ...199.993% 0 [C1.3]
068Ah
H675 REF_FIX_%-WD_8 -200.000% ...199.993% 0 [C1.3]
068Bh

Manual
4 Parameter list
H676 REF_FIX_WD_1 0000h...FFFFh 0 [C1.4]

1676d Fixed setpoint 1 hex quantity word 0001h 3.6.3
068Ch
SETPNT.FSP510.X1_T5
068Dh
SETPNT.FSP510.X2_T5
068Eh
SETPNT.FSP510.X3_T5
068Fh
SETPNT.FSP510.X4_T5
0690h
SETPNT.FSP510.X5_T5
0691h
SETPNT.FSP510.X6_T5 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
0692h

0693h
H684 REF_FIX_INTDW_1 -2147483648 ... 0 [C1.5]
... 2147483647
1684d Fixed setpoint 1, integer quantity double word 3.6.3
0694h 1
SETPNT.FSP520.X1_T5 SIMADYN D:I4 PKW-TYP:I4

H685 REF_FIX_INTDW_2 -2147483648 ... 0 [C1.5]
... 2147483647
0695h 1
H686 REF_FIX_INTDW_3 -2147483648 ... 0 [C1.5]
... 2147483647
0696h 1

Manual
4 Parameter list
H687 REF_FIX_INTDW_4 -2147483648 ... 0 [C1.5]

... 2147483647
0697h 1
SETPNT.FSP520.X4_T5
H688 REF_FIX_INTDW_5 -2147483648 ... 0 [C1.5]
... 2147483647
0698h 1
SETPNT.FSP520.X5_T5
H689 REF_FIX_INTDW_6 -2147483648 ... 0 [C1.5]
... 2147483647
0699h 1
SETPNT.FSP520.X6_T5
H690 REF_FIX_INTDW_7 -2147483648 ... 0 [C1.5]
... 2147483647
069Ah 1
SETPNT.FSP520.X7_T5
H691 REF_FIX_INTDW_8 -2147483648 ... 0 [C1.5]
... 2147483647
069Bh 1
SETPNT.FSP520.X8_T5
H692 REF_FIX_%-DW_1 -200.000% ... 0% [C1.7]
199.993%
1692d Fixed setpoint 1 % quantity double word 3.6.3
069Ch 0.006%
SETPNT.FSP520.X9_T5
H693 REF_FIX_%-DW_2 -200.000% ... 0% [C1.7]
199.993%
069Dh 0.006%
H694 REF_FIX_%-DW_3 -200.000% ... 0% [C1.7]
199.993%
069Eh 0.006%

H695 REF_FIX_%-DW_4 -200.000% ... 0% [C1.7]
199.993%
069Fh 0.006%
H696 REF_FIX_%-DW_5 -200.000% ... 0% [C1.7]
199.993%
06A0h 0.006%

H697 REF_FIX_%-DW_6 -200.000% ... 0% [C1.7]
199.993%
06A1h 0.006%

Manual
4 Parameter list
H698 REF_FIX_%-DW_7 -200.000% ... 0% [C1.7]

199.993%
06A2h 0.006%
H699 REF_FIX_%-DW_8 -200.000% ... 0% [C1.7]
199.993%
06A3h 0.006%
H700 SRC_EN_PC_X1 0 ... 1024 4 [D1.2]
1700d Source, external enable position control 1 1 3.7.1
06A4h
POSREG.CA3100.NC_T3
H701 MSK_EN_PC_X1 0000h ... FFFFh 0001h [D1.3]
1701d Mask, external enable position control 1 0001h 3.7.1
06A5h
Mask, which is used to select the control bit for the external
enable 1 of the position control.
POSREG.CA3100.MSK_T3
H702 SRC_EN_PC_X2 0 ... 1024 91 [D1.2]
1702d Source, external enable position control 2 1 3.7.1
06A6h
POSREG.CA3110.NC_T3
H703 MSK_EN_PC_X2 0000h ... FFFFh 0010h [D1.3]
1703d Mask, external enable position control 2 0001h 3.7.1
06A7h
Mask which is used to select the control bit for external
enable 2 of the position control. Presetting:
Enable only if the drive has referenced.
H704 SRC_REVERSE_RNDX 0 ... 1024 0 [D2.1]
1704d Source, reverse traversing direction, rotary axis 1 3.7.5
06A8h
POSREG.CA3500.NC_T3
H705 MSK_REVERSE_RNDX 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [D2.2]
1705d Mask, reverse traversing direction, rotary axis 0001h 3.7.5
06A9h
Mask, which selects the control bit for the traversing direc-
tion in the rotary axis mode.
If the control bit is 0, then the drive only rotates in the posi-
tive direction of rotation.
If the control bit is 1, the drive only rotates in the negative
direction of rotation.
H706 SRC_DIRECT_RNDX 0 ... 1024 0 [D2.1]
1706d Source, traversing direction, direct rotary axis 1 3.7.5
06AAh
POSREG.CA3550.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H707 MSK_DIRECT_RNDX 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [D2.2]

1707d Mask, traversing direction direct rotary axis 0001h 3.7.5
06ABh
Mask which selects the control bit for positioning with the
shortest traversing path.
If the control bit is 1, the drive, in the rotary axis mode,
always moves through the shortest traversing path.
If the reference value change is in the following intervals:
0<∆P<180° drive moves in the pos. direction of rota-
tion.
180<∆P<360°: drive moves in the neg. direction of rotation
0>∆P>-180°: drive moves in the neg. direction of rota-
tion.
-180>∆P>-360°: drive moves in the pos. direction of rota-
tion.
POSREG.CA3550._T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2

H710 V_DIF_MAX_LIM -200.000%...199.993% 10% [D2.1]
1710d Ramp-function generator tracking initiation point 0.006%
06AEh
If the absolute difference between the velocity setpoint and
actual value exceeds this limit, the ramp-up time is in-
creased.
Note:
The determined ramp time is reset, each time the position
control is enabled.
POSREG.PR3120.W1_T3 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4

H711 V_DIV_MAX_KP -256.000 ... 255.990 0 [D2.2]
1711d Controller gain, RFG tracking 0.0078
06AFh
KP factor for the intervention of the ramp-function generator
tracking.
POSREG.PR3120.KP_T3 SIMADYN D:E2 PKW-TYP:I4
H719 EXP_FACTOR_TI 0...32 0 [D2.5]
1719d Range changeover Integration time, pos. control 3.7.3
06B7h
Extremly long time value in H720 (≥ 2 000 000 [ms]) can be
entered using the range changeover with H719.
The resulting time value will be:
Time value = H720•2H719

Example:
The time 10 000 000 [ms] has to be set. This time value is
5 time higher as the maximum value adjustable in H720.
n
The range can be set in 2 steps, the value for H719 will be
3
set to 3 (2 =8).
Time value 10 000 000 [ms]

H720 = = = 1250 000 [ms]
Range 8
POSREG.PR3605.XD_T3
H720 INT_TIME_PRAMP 5.000[ms]... 20 000[ms] [D2.5]
...5368709120.000[ms]
1720d Integration time, position control 3.7.3
06B8h
The integration time is obtained from the normalization of
the position and velocity, and is defined as follows:
The integration time is the time which the drive requires in
order to move 100% of the distance at 100% velocity.
Note:
This time must be entered as precisely as possible.
The maximum range ≈ 2 000 000 [ms].Higher time values
in H720 (≥ 2 000 000 [ms]) can be entered using the range
changeover with H719.
POSREG.PR3600.X_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H721 DEAD_TIME_COMP 5.000[ms]... 10[ms] [D2.5]

5 368 709 120.000[ms]
1721d Deadtime compensation, position ramp-function 3.7.2
06B9h generator
In order to prevent the position ramp-function generator
overshooting, the control deadtimes can be compensated.
POSREG.PR3700.X_T3
H722 SCL_ACCELERATION 5.000[ms]... 10[ms] [D2.7]
5 368 709 120.000[ms]
1722d Normalization, acceleration 3.7.4
06BAh
If the position ramp-function generator ramp-up time corre-
sponds to the time set here, an acceleration signal of 100%
is output. The lowest ramp-up time of the position ramp-
function generator should be entered as normalization time.
POSREG.RB1300.X2_T1
H728 PROSREG_INCREMENT -200.000 ... 199.993% 0% [D3.2]
1728d Step change input for position controller optimi- 0.006% 3.7.6
06C0h zation
Using this parameter an additional position reference value
for position controller optimization may be switched-in.
POSREG.P1415.X2_T1 SIMADYN D:N4 PKW-TYP:I4
H729 FLT_ACTUAL.POS 5.000[ms]... 5[ms] [D3.2]
...81 920.000[ms]
1729d Smoothing, position actual value 3.7.6
06C1h
The position actual value can be smoothed to dampen the
position control loop.
From V1.3: Parameter has been eliminated
POSREG.P1405.T_T1 SIMADYN D:R2 PKW-TYP:O4

H730 FLT_POS.SETPOINT 5.000[ms]... 5[ms] [D3.2]
...81 920.000[ms]
1730d Smoothing, position reference value 3.7.6
06C2h
The position reference value must be smoothed for the
position control with the following time constant:
The smoothing time constant for the position reference
value is the sum of the equivalent time constants of the
speed control loop plus the time constant of the position
actual value smoothing.
H731 KP1_POSREG 0 ... 32767 0 [D3.3]
1731d Pre-amplification gain, controller error, pos. 1 3.7.6
06C3h Controller
The proportional gain of the position controller (H734) is
limited to 259. If this range is not sufficient, the control error
can be pre-amplified in stages of 2n.
For example.
Value 2 amplifies the controller error by a factor of 4
POSREG.P1420.XD_T1 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H732 POSREG_LU -200.000...199.993% 10% [D3.4]
1732d Upper limit, position controller output 0.006% 3.7.6
06C4h
The influence of the position controller is limited to this
value in the positive direction.
POSREG.P1500.LU_T1 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4
H733 POSREG_LL -200.000...199.993% -10% [D3.4]
1733d Lower limit, position controller output 0.006% 3.7.6
06C5h
The influence of the position controller is limited to this
value in the negative direction.
POSREG.P1500.LL_T1 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H734 POSREG_KP -256 ... 255.990 1 [D3.3]

1734d Proportional gain, position controller 1 3.7.6
06C6h
KP of the position controller. If the value range is not ade-
quate, the controller error in H731 can be pre-amplified.
POSREG.P1500.KP_T1
H735 POSREG_TN 5.000[ms]... 1000[ms] [D3.3]
...81 920.000[ms]
1735d Integral action time, position controller 3.7.6
06C7h
The integral action time is only active, if the position con-
troller is operated as PI controller (H737=0)
POSREG.P1500.TN_T1
H736 MODE_POSREG_IC 0 ... 1 0 [D3.3]
1736d Mode, I control position controller 1 3.7.6
06C8h
If the control bit is 1, the position controller operates as
pure I controller (current controller)
POSREG.P1500.IC_T1
H737 MODE_POSREG_PI 0 ... 1 1 [D3.4]
1737d Mode, P /PI position controller 1 3.7.6
06C9h
If the control bit is 1, the position controller operates as
pure P controller. If the bit is 0, it operates as PI controller.
POSREG.P1500.HI_T1
H738 ACCEL_COMP -200.000%...199.993% 0% [D3.5]
1738d Inertia compensation, position control 0.006% 3.7.8.2
06CAh
The acceleration value of the position ramp-function gen-
erator is multiplied by this factor, and is used as supple-
mentary torque input for the drive.
If the automatic load measurement function is used, the
inertia compensation for the non-loaded status is entered in
H738.
POSREG.P5950.X_T5 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4

H739 FACTOR N-PRECONTRL 0.000%...199.993% 100% [D3.5]
1739d Smoothing, velocity setpoint 0.006% 3.7.6
06CBh
The velocity setpoint of the position ramp-function genera-
tor is multiplied by this value, and is used as supplementary
velocity setpoint input for the drive.
This factor is always 100%. Only in exceptional cases, by

setting 0%, the pre-control can be disabled.
( disadvantage: dynamic losses )
H740 FLT_V.SETPOINT 5.000[ms]... 5[ms] [D3.2]
...81 920.000[ms]
1740d Smoothing, velocity setpoint 3.7.6
06CCh
The velocity setpoint should be smoothed for the speed
control with the equivalent time constant of the torque
control loop plus the time constant of the speed actual
value smoothing.

H741 LIM_DEV_POSREG -2147483648... 1 000 [D5.3]
... 2147483647
1741d Tolerance limit for tracking errors 3.7.7
06CDh 1
If the absolute value of the tracking error lies above this
limit, then the error message, tracking error outside toler-
ance F121 is generated.
POSREG.P5100.X_T5 SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:I4

Manual
4 Parameter list
H742 LIM_POSITION_OK -32768 ... 32767 100 [D5.1]

1742d Tolerance limit, drive has positioned signal 1 3.7.10.1
06CEh
If the absolute difference between the position reference
value and actual value exceeds this limit, then the status
signal drive has positioned is withdrawn.
POSREG.P3720.L_T3
H743 HY_POSITION_OK -32768 ... 32767 10 [D5.1]
1743d Hysteresis for signal, drive has positioned 1 3.7.10.1
06CFh
POSREG.P3720.HY_T3
H744 DELAY_POS_OK 0.000[ms]... 120[ms] [D5.3]
...1 310 720.0[ms]
1744d Delay time, drive has positioned signal 3.7.10.1
06D0h
The drive has positioned signal is only output, if the position
actual value remains within the tolerance bandwidth longer
than the set time.
POSREG.P3730.T_T3
H745 DELAY_DEV_FAULT 0.000[ms]... 120[ms] [D5.3]
...1 310 720.0[ms]
1745d
Delay time, tracking error
06D1h
If the position reference value-actual value difference ex-
ceeds the tolerance limit for longer than this time, the error
message "tracking error F121" is generated.
POSREG.P3190.T_T3
H746 M_ADD_LOAD 0 ... 1024 1 [D4.1]

1746d 1
Source, load equalization for hoisting units
06D2h
The load torque can be pre-controlled so that when the
mechanical brake of hoisting units/cranes are opened, the
load doesn't sag.
POSREG.P2310.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H747 to Not used
H749
H750 V_REF_MOD_V1 -200.000%...199.993% 5% [D4.1]
1750d V set for velocity control 1 mode 0.006% 3.7.9
06D6h
Velocity setpoint for the velocity-controlled operation 1
mode
H751 V_REF_MOD_V2 -200.000%...199.993% 5% [D4.2]
1751d V set for velocity control 2 operation 0.006% 3.7.9
06D7h
Velocity setpoint for the velocity-controlled operation 2
mode
H752 SRC_V_REF_MOD_V2 0 ... 1024 0 [D4.2]
1752d Source, V set for velocity control 3 operation 1 3.7.9
06D8h
Connector number of the velocity setpoint for the velocity-
controlled operation 3 mode
POSREG.P3220.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H753 V_REF_JOG1V -200.000%...199.993% 1% [D4.3]
1753d V set for inching 1, speed-controlled 0.006% 3.7.9
06D9h
Velocity setpoint for the mode inching 1 speed-controlled

Manual
4 Parameter list
H754 V_REF_JOG2V -200.000%...199.993% -1% [D4.3]

1754d V set for inching 2, speed-controlled 0.006% 3.7.9
06DAh
Velocity setpoint for the mode inching 2 speed-controlled
POSREG.P3260.X2_T3
H760 TD_VRAMP 40.000[ms]... 10000[ms] [D4.3]
...655 360.000[ms]
1760d Ramp-down time, speed-controlled operating 3.7.9
06E0h modes
POSREG.P3350.X1_T3
H761 TU_VRAMP 40.000[ms]... 10000[ms] [D4.6]
...655 360.000[ms]
1761d Ramp-up time, speed-controlled operating 3.7.9
06E1h modes
POSREG.P3410.TU_T3
H762 TOL_CMP_VA/VR -200.000%...199.993% 1% [D5.1]
1762d Tolerance limit limit value monitor, velocity set- 0.006%
06E2h point=actual value
If the absolute difference between the velocity setpoint and
actual value is greater than this tolerance limit, then the
signal V set=V act is withdrawn
POSREG.P3600.L_T3
H763 HY_CMP_VA/VR -200.000%...199.993% 0.5% [D5.1]
1763d Hysteresis, limit value monitor, velocity set- 0.006%
06E3h point=actual value
POSREG.P3600.HY_T3
H764 FRICTION_V=5% -200.000%...199.993% 0% [D3.2]
1764d Frictional torque at 5 % velocity 0.006% 3.7.8.1
06E4h
POSREG.P5800.X_T5
H765 FRICTION_V=10% -200.000%...199.993% 0% [D3.2]
06E5h
POSREG.P5820.X_T5
H766 FRICTION_V=20% -200.000%...199.993% 0% [D3.2]
06E6h
POSREG.P5840.X_T5
H767 FRICTION_V=40% -200.000%...199.993% 0% [D3.2]
06E7h
POSREG.P5860.X_T5
H768 FRICTION_V=60% -200.000%...199.993% 0% [D3.2]
06E8h
POSREG.P5880.X_T5
H769 FRICTION_V=80% -200.000%...199.993% 0% [D3.2]
06E9h
POSREG.P5900.X_T5
H770 FRICTION_V=100% -200.000%...199.993% 0% [D3.2]
06EAh
POSREG.P5920.X_T5

Manual
4 Parameter list
H771 ACC_LIM_LOADADJ -200.000%...199.993% 5%

1771d Limit, enable automatic inertia compensation 0.006%
06EAh
If the accelerating value of the position ramp-function gen-
erator exceeds this limit value, then the moment of inertia
measurement is enabled. The measurement is stopped if
the limit is again fallen below.
POSREG.P2110.M_T2
H772 RANGE_LOADADJ -200.000%...199.993% 0% [D3.6]
1772d Influence range, automatic inertia compensation 0.006%
06EBh
The measured value of the automatic inertia compensation
is multiplied by this factor, before it is input into the inertia
compensation function.
POSREG.P2290.X_T2
H780 SRC_INP_MOP_DW 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.1]
1780d Source, motorized potentiometer input, double 1 3.8.1
030Ch word
The motorized potentiometer goes to this value, if the
tracking mode (H790/H791) is selected.
Note:
The input value consists of the sum of the word- and dou-
ble-word input.
AUXIL.M4100.NC_T4
H781 SRC_INP_MOP_WD 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.1]
1781d Source, motorized potentiometer input, word 1 3.8.1
030Dh
The motorized potentiometer goes to this value, if the
tracking mode (H790/H791) is selected.
Note:
The input value consists of the sum of the word- and dou-
ble-word input.
AUXIL.M4110.NC_T4 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H782 SRC_SV_MOP_DW 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.1]
1782d Source, motorized potentiometer setting value, 1 3.8.1
030Eh double-word
The motorized potentiometer is set to this value, if the MOP
set control bit (H784/H785) is active.
Note:
The setting value is obtained by summing the word- and
double-word input.

H783 SRC_SV_MOP_WD 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.1]
1783d Source, motorized potentiometer setting value, 1 3.8.1
030Fh double-word
The motorized potentiometer is set to this value, if the MOP
set control bit (H784/H785) is active.
Note:
The setting value is obtained by summing the word- and
double-word input.

H784 SRC_SET_MOP 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.1]
1784d Source, set motorized potentiometer 1 3.8.1
0310h

Manual
4 Parameter list
H785 MSK_SET_MOP 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [E1.1]

1785d Mask, set motorized potentiometer 0001h 3.8.1
0311h
Mask which is used to select the control bit to set the mo-
torized potentiometer. If the control bit is 1, the MOP is set
to the value selected in H782/H783.
AUXIL.M4180.MSK_T4
H786 SRC_INC_MOP 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.1]
1786d Source, raise motorized potentiometer 1 3.8.1
0312h
AUXIL.M4190.NC_T4
H787 MSK_INC_MOP 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [E1.1]
1787d Mask, raise motorized potentiometer 0001h 3.8.1
0313h
Mask, which is used to select the control bit to move the
motorized potentiometer in the positive direction. If the
signal is available for longer than 3s, a changeover is made
from the standard rate of change time H792 to the fast rate
of change H793.
AUXIL.M4190.MSK_T4
H788 SRC_DEC_MOP 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.1]
1788d Source, lower motorized potentiometer 1 3.8.1
0314h
AUXIL.M4200.NC_T4
H789 MSK_DEC_MOP 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [E1.1]
1789d Mask, lower motorized potentiometer 0001h 3.8.1
0315h
Mask, which is used to select the control bit to move the
motorized potentiometer in the negative direction. If the
signal is available for longer than 3s, a changeover is made
from the standard rate of change time H792 to the fast rate
of change H793.
AUXIL.M4200.MSK_T4
H790 SRC_RAMP_MOP 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.1]
1790d Source, MOP mode, ramp-function generator 1 3.8.1
0316h
AUXIL.M4210.NC_T4
H791 MSK_RAMP_MOP 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [E1.1]
1791d Mask, MOP mode, ramp-function generator 0001h 3.8.1
0317h
Mask, which is used to select the control bit to changeover
the motorized potentiometer. to RG operation. If the control
bit is 1, the motorized potentiometer tracks the input value
according to the selected ramp time.
AUXIL.M4210.MSK_T4
H792 RAMP_TIME_MOP 160.000[ms]... 60000[ms] [E1.2]
17 179 869
1792d Ramp time, normal rate of change MOP 3.8.1
118.000[ms]
0318h
The motorized potentiometer changes with this ramp time if
the control bit MOP raise or MOP lower is active.
Note:
A changeover is automatically made to the fast ramp time
H793 after 3s.
AUXIL.M4320.X1_T4

Manual
4 Parameter list
H793 RAMP_TMFST_MOP 160.000[ms]... 25000[ms] [E1.2]

17 179 869
1793d Ramp time, fast rate of change MOP 3.8.1
118.000[ms]
0319h
If the control bit MOP raise or MOP lower is available for
longer than 3s, a changeover is made to the fast rate of
change
AUXIL.M4320.X2_T4
H794 MOP_LU -200.000%...199.993% 120% [E1.3]
1794d Upper limit, motorized potentiometer 0.006% 3.8.1
031Ah
The MOP output is limited, in the positive direction, to this
value.
AUXIL.M4450.LU_T4
H795 MOP_LL -200.000%...199.993% -120% [E1.3]
1795d Lower limit, motorized potentiometer 0.006% 3.8.1
031Bh
The MOP output is limited, in the negative direction, to this
value.
AUXIL.M4450.LL_T4
H796 MOP_RANGE -200.000%...199.993% 0% [E1.5]
1796d Influence range, motorized potentiometer 0.006% 3.8.1
031Ch
The motorized potentiometer output is multiplied by this
factor.
AUXIL.M4590.X2_T4
H820 LIM_COMP_PX -32768 ... 32767 100 [E2.1]
1820d Tolerance limit, limit value monitor X 1 3.8.3
071Ch
If the absolute difference between the position limit value X
and the actual position is greater than this tolerance limit,
then the position limit value X reached signal is withdrawn.
AUXIL.LM3150.L_T3
H821 HY_COMP_PX -32768 ... 32767 10 [E2.1]
1821d Hysteresis, limit value monitor X 1 3.8.3
071Dh
AUXIL.LM3150.HY_T3 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW-TYP:I2
H822 LIM_COMP_PY -32768 ... 32767 100 [E2.1]
1822d Tolerance limit, limit value monitor Y 1 3.8.3
071Eh
If the absolute difference between the position limit value Y
then the position limit value Y reached signal is withdrawn.
AUXIL.LM3250.L_T3 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW-TYP:I2

H823 HY_COMP_PY -32768 ... 32767 10 [E2.1]
1823d Hysteresis, limit value monitor Y 1 3.8.3

071Fh AUXIL.LM3250.HY_T3 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW-TYP:I2
H824 LIM_COMP_PZ -32768 ... 32767 100 [E2.1]
1824d Tolerance limit, limit value monitor Z 1 3.8.3
0720h
If the absolute difference between the position limit value Z
then the position limit value Z reached signal is withdrawn.
AUXIL.LM3350.L_T3 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW-TYP:I2

H825 HY_COMP_PZ -32768 ... 32767 10 [E2.1]
1825d Hysteresis, limit value monitor Z 1 3.8.3
0721h
AUXIL.LM3350.HY_T3 SIMADYN D:I2 PKW-TYP:I2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H826 SRC_INP1_COMPDW 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.1]

1826d Source, input free limit value monitor double 1 3.8.3
0722h word
Connector number of the quantity which is to be compared.
AUXIL.LM3400.NC_T3
H827 SRC_INP2_COMPDW 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.1]
1827d Source, comparison value, free limit value 1 3.8.3
0723h monitor double word
Connector number of the comparison quantity
AUXIL.LM3410.NC_T3
H828 LIM_COMPDW -32768 ... 32767 100 [E2.1]
1828d Tolerance limit, free limit value monitor double 1 3.8.3
0724h word
If the absolute difference between the input value and the
comparison value is greater than this tolerance limit, then
the input value is equal to the comparison value signal is
withdrawn.
AUXIL.LM3450.L_T3
H829 HY_COMPDW -32768 ... 32767 10 [E2.1]
1829d Hysteresis, free limit value monitor double word 1 3.8.3
0725h
AUXIL.LM3450.HY_T3
H830 SRC_INP1_COMPA 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.5]
1830d Source, input free limit value monitor A 1 3.8.3
0726h
AUXIL.LM3500.NC_T3
H831 SRC_INP2_COMPA 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.5]
1831d Source, comparison value free limit value 1 3.8.3
0727h monitor A
AUXIL.LM3510.NC_T3
SIMADYN D:N2 PKW-TYP:O2
H832 LIM_COMPA -200.000%...199.993% 0% [E2.6]
1832d Tolerance limit, free limit value monitor A 0.006% 3.8.3
0728h
withdrawn.
AUXIL.LM3550.L_T3
H833 HY_COMPA -200.000%...199.993% 0% [E2.6]
1833d Hysteresis, free limit value monitor A 0.006% 3.8.3
0729h
AUXIL.LM3550.HY_T3
H834 SRC_INP1_COMPB 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.5]
1834d Source, input free limit value monitor B 1 3.8.3
072Ah
AUXIL.LM3600.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H835 SRC_INP2_COMPB 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.5]

072Bh monitor B
AUXIL.LM3610.NC_T3
H836 LIM_COMPB -200.000%...199.993% 0% [E2.6]
1836d Tolerance limit, free limit value monitor B 0.006% 3.8.3
072Ch
withdrawn.
AUXIL.LM3650.L_T3
H837 HY_COMPB -200.000%...199.993% 0% [E2.6]
1837d Hysteresis, free limit value monitor B 0.006% 3.8.3

072Dh AUXIL.LM3650.HY_T3
H838 SRC_INP1_COMPC 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.5]
1838d Source, input free limit value monitor C 1 3.8.3
072Eh
AUXIL.LM3700.NC_T3
H839 SRC_INP2_COMPC 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.5]
072Fh monitor C
AUXIL.LM3710.NC_T3
H840 LIM_COMPC -200.000%...199.993% 0% [E2.6]
1840d Tolerance limit, free limit value monitor C 0.006% 3.8.3
0730h
withdrawn.
AUXIL.LM3750.L_T3
H841 HY_COMPC -200.000%...199.993% 0% [E2.6]
1841d Hysteresis, free limit value monitor C 0.006% 3.8.3
0731h
AUXIL.LM3750.HY_T3
H842 SRC_INP1_COMPD 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.5]
1842d Source, input free limit value monitor D 1 3.8.3
0732h
AUXIL.LM3800.NC_T3
H843 SRC_INP2_COMPD 0 ... 1024 0 [E2.5]
0733h monitor D
AUXIL.LM3810.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H844 LIM_COMPD -200.000%...199.993% 0% [E2.6]

1844d Tolerance limit, free limit value monitor D 0.006% 3.8.3
0734h
withdrawn.
AUXIL.LM3850.L_T3
H845 HY_COMPD -200.000%...199.993% 0% [E2.6]
1845d Hysteresis, free limit value monitor D 0.006% 3.8.3
0735h
AUXIL.LM3850.HY_T3
H846 SRC_DSP_N2 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.6]
1846d Source, display parameter % quantity word 1 3.8.2
0736h
Number of the connector which is to be displayed, inter-
preted as word % quantity.
AUXIL.DP4000.NC_T4
H847 SRC_DSP_N4 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.6]
1847d Source, display parameter % quantity double 1 3.8.2
0737h word
preted as double word % quantity.
AUXIL.DP4010.NC_T4
H848 SRC_DSP_V2 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.6]
1848d Source, display parameter word HEX quantity Number of 1 3.8.2
0738h the connector which is to be displayed, interpreted as word
HEX quantity.
AUXIL.DP4020.NC_T4
H849 SRC_DSP_I2 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.6]
1849d Source, display parameter word integer quantity 1 3.8.2
0739h
Number of the connector, which is to be displayed, inter-
preted as word integer quantity.
AUXIL.DP4040.NC_T4
H850 SRC_DSP_I4 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.6]
1850d Source, display parameter double word integer 1 3.8.2
073Ah quantity
preted as double word integer quantity.
AUXIL.DP4050.NC_T4
H851 SRC_DSP_PSCAL 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.6]
1851d Source, display parameter position values 1 3.8.2
073Bh scaled
Number of the connector which is to be displayed scaled.
The % quantities of the control (e. g. control error) are
displayed, not normalized (=%), but scaled (mm).
AUXIL.DP4070.NC_T4
H860 SRC_STW_BIT0 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
1860d Source, bit 0 free status word 1 3.8.4
0744h
AUXIL.ST3000.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H861 MSK_STW_BIT0 0000h ... FFFFh 0000h [E3.2]

1861d Mask, bit 0 free status word 0001h 3.8.4
0745h
Mask which is used to select status bit 0 of the freely-
definable status word.
AUXIL.ST3000.MSK_T3
H862 SRC_STW_BIT1 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
1862d Source, bit 1, free status word 1 3.8.4
0746h
AUXIL.ST3010.NC_T3
1863d Mask, bit 1, free status word 0001h 3.8.4
0747h
Mask, which is used to select status bit 1 of the freely-
AUXIL.ST3010.MSK_T3
H864 SRC_STW_BIT2 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
0748h
AUXIL.ST3020.NC_T3
0749h
AUXIL.ST3020.MSK_T3
H866 SRC_STW_BIT3 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
074Ah
AUXIL.ST3030.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
074Bh
AUXIL.ST3030.MSK_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2
H868 SRC_STW_BIT4 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
074Ch

074Dh
H870 SRC_STW_BIT5 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
074Eh
Connector number description refer to H871.

Manual
4 Parameter list

074Fh
AUXIL.ST3050.MSK_T3
H872 SRC_STW_BIT6 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
0750h
AUXIL.ST3060.NC_T3
0751h
AUXIL.ST3060.MSK_T3
H874 SRC_STW_BIT7 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
0752h
AUXIL.ST3070.NC_T3
0753h
AUXIL.ST3070.MSK_T3
H876 SRC_STW_BIT8 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
0754h
AUXIL.ST3080.NC_T3
0755h
Mask which is used to select status bit 8 of the freely-
AUXIL.ST3080.MSK_T3
H878 SRC_STW_BIT9 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
0756h
AUXIL.ST3090.NC_T3
0757h
AUXIL.ST3090.MSK_T3
H880 SRC_STW_BIT10 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
0758h
AUXIL.ST3100.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list

0759h
AUXIL.ST3100.MSK_T3
H882 SRC_STW_BIT11 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
075Ah
AUXIL.ST3110.NC_T3
075Bh
AUXIL.ST3110.MSK_T3
H884 SRC_STW_BIT12 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
075Ch
AUXIL.ST3120.NC_T3
075Dh
AUXIL.ST3120.MSK_T3
H886 SRC_STW_BIT13 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
075Eh
AUXIL.ST3130.NC_T3
075Fh
H888 SRC_STW_BIT14 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
0760h

0761h
H890 SRC_STW_BIT15 0 ... 1024 0 [E3.1]
0762h

Manual
4 Parameter list

0763h
AUXIL.ST3150.MSK_T3
H892 SRC_SAV_VAL_1 0 ... 1024 0 [E1.6]
1892d Source, NOVRAM memory word 1 1
0764h
Connector number of the value, which is stored in the
NOVRAM, when the power fails. The stored value is avail-
able in connector K256 when the power returns
AUXIL.SV3000.NC_T3
H893 to Not used
H899
H900 SRC_BQ1 0 ... 1024 0 [A4.5]
1900d Source, binary output 1 1 3.3.7
076Ch
Connector number, description refer to HXXX.
OUTPUT.BQ3000.NC_T3
H901 MSK_BQ1 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.5]
1901d Mask, binary output 1 0001h 3.3.7
076Dh
Mask, which is used to select the control bit for binary
output 1. The signal is output at terminal 621.
H902 SRC_BQ2 0 ... 1024 0 [A4.5]
076Eh
OUTPUT.BQ3020.NC_T3
H903 MSK_BQ2 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.5]
076Fh
H904 SRC_BQ3 0 ... 1024 0 [A4.5]
0770h
OUTPUT.BQ3020.NC_T3
H905 MSK_BQ3 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.5]
0771h
H906 SRC_BQ4 0 ... 1024 0 [A4.5]
0772h
OUTPUT.BQ3030.NC_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H907 MSK_BQ4 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.5]

0773h
H908 SRC_BQ5 0 ... 1024 0 [A4.5]
0774h
OUTPUT.BQ3040.NC_T3 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2

H909 MSK_BQ5 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.5]
0775h
OUTPUT.BQ3040.MSK_T3 SIMADYN D:V PKW-TYP:V2
H910 SRC_BQ6 0 ... 1024 0 [A4.5]
0776h

H911 MSK_BQ6 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.5]
0777h
H912 SRC_BQ7 0 ... 1024 0 [A4.5]
0778h
OUTPUT.BQ3060.NC_T3
H913 MSK_BQ7 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.5]
0779h
OUTPUT.BQ3060.MSK_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2

H914 SRC_BQ8 0 ... 1024 0 [A4.5]
077Ah
H915 MSK_BQ8 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.5]
077Bh
H916 MSK_INV_BQ 0000h...FFFFh 0000h [A4.6]
1916d Mask, invert binary outputs 0001h 3.3.7
077Ch
This allows bitwise inversion of 8 binary outputs.
to
OUTPUT.BQ3110.IS2_T3 SIMADYN D:V2 PKW-TYP:V2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H920 SRC_AQ1 0 ... 1024 0 [A5.5]

1920d Source, analog output 1 1 3.3.9
0780h
OUTPUT.AQ2000.NC_T2
H921 ABSOLUTE_AQ1 0 ... 1 0 [A5.6]
1921d Selection, absolute value analog output 1 1 3.3.9
0781h
Selects the absolute signal value for output.
OUTPUT.AQ2020.I_T2
H922 FILTER_AQ1 10.000[ms]... 10[ms] [A5.6]
...163840.000[ms]
1922d Smoothing, analog output 1 3.3.9
0782h
Smoothing time constant for analog output 1
OUTPUT.AQ2050.T_T2
H923 OFFSET_AQ1 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.7]
1923d Offset, analog output 1 0.006% 3.3.9
0783h
This is subtracted from the signal to be output.
H924 GAIN_AQ1 -256...255.9921875 2 [A5.7]
1924d Gain, analog output 1 0.0078125 3.3.9
0784h
100%=5V.
OUTPUT.AQ2060.K_T2
H925 SRC_AQ2 0 ... 1024 0 [A5.5]
0785h
OUTPUT.AQ2100.NC_T2
H926 ABSOLUTE_AQ2 0 ... 1 0 [A5.6]
0786h
OUTPUT.AQ2120.I_T2
H927 FILTER_AQ2 10.000[ms]... 10[ms] [A5.6]
...163840.000[ms]
0787h
OUTPUT.AQ2150.T_T2
H928 OFFSET_AQ2 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.7]
0788h
H929 GAIN_AQ2 -256...255.9921875 2 [A5.7]
0789h
100%=5V.
OUTPUT.AQ2160.K_T2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H930 SRC_AQ3 0 ... 1024 0 [A5.5]

078Ah
OUTPUT.AQ3000.NC_T3
H931 ABSOLUTE_AQ3 0 ... 1 0 [A5.6]
078Bh
OUTPUT.AQ3020.I_T3
H932 FILTER_AQ3 40.000[ms]... 40[ms] [A5.6]
...81920.000[ms]
078Ch
OUTPUT.AQ3050.T_T3
H933 OFFSET_AQ3 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.7]
078Dh
H934 GAIN_AQ3 -256...255.9921875 2 [A5.7]
078Eh
100%=5V.
OUTPUT.AQ3060.K_T3
H935 SRC_AQ4 0 ... 1024 0 [A5.5]
078Fh
OUTPUT.AQ3100.NC_T3
H936 ABSOLUTE_AQ4 0 ... 1 0 [A5.6]
0790h
OUTPUT.AQ3120.I_T3
H937 FILTER_AQ4 40.000[ms]... 40[ms] [A5.6]
...655360.000[ms]
0791h
OUTPUT.AQ3150.T_T3
H938 OFFSET_AQ4 -200.000%...199.993% 0% [A5.7]
0792h
H939 GAIN_AQ4 -256...255.9921875 2 [A5.7]
0793h
100%=5V.
OUTPUT.AQ3160.K_T3

Manual
4 Parameter list
H941 SRC_P2P_WORD_1 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]

1941d Source, word 1 to peer-to-peer 1 3.3.5
0795h
OUTPUT.PP2000.NC_T2
H942 SRC_P2P_WORD_2 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
0796h
OUTPUT.PP2100.NC_T2
H943 SRC_P2P_WORD_3 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
0797h
OUTPUT.PP2200.NC_T2
H944 SRC_P2P_WORD_4 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
0798h
OUTPUT.PP2300.NC_T2
H945 SRC_P2P_WORD_5 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
0799h
OUTPUT.PP2400.NC_T2
H946 TEL_LEN_PPT 0 ... 5 5 [A3.7]
1946d Length, send telegram, peer-to-peer 1 3.3.5
079Ah
Number of send words which are to be transferred via the
peer-to-peer coupling.
OUTPUT.PP2500.LTW_T2
H951 SRC_CU_WORD_1 0 ... 1024 82 [A1.5]
1951d Source, send word 1 to CU 1 3.3.3
079Fh
OUTPUT.SD1000.NC_T1
H952 SRC_CU_WORD_2 0 ... 1024 220 [A1.5]
07A0h
OUTPUT.SD1010.NC_T1 SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-TYP:O2
H953 SRC_CU_WORD_3 0 ... 1024 0 [A1.5]
07A1h

H954 SRC_CU_WORD_4 0 ... 1024 83 [A1.5]
07A2h

H955 SRC_CU_WORD_5 0 ... 1024 204 [A1.5]
07A3h

Manual
4 Parameter list
H956 SRC_CU_WORD_6 0 ... 1024 0 [A1.5]

07A4h

H957 SRC_CU_WORD_7 0 ... 1024 0 [A1.5]
07A5h

H958 SRC_CU_WORD_8 0 ... 1024 141 [A1.5]
07A6h

H961 SRC_CB_WORD_1 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
1961d Source, send word 1 to CB 1 3.3.4
07A9h

H962 SRC_CB_WORD_2 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
07AAh
OUTPUT.SD2010.NC_T2
H963 SRC_CB_WORD_3 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
07ABh
OUTPUT.SD2020.NC_T2
H964 SRC_CB_WORD_4 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
07ACh
OUTPUT.SD2030.NC_T2
H965 SRC_CB_WORD_5 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
07ADh
OUTPUT.SD2040.NC_T2
H966 SRC_CB_WORD_6 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
07AEh
OUTPUT.SD2050.NC_T2
H967 SRC_CB_WORD_7 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
07AFh
OUTPUT.SD2060.NC_T2
H968 SRC_CB_WORD_8 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
07B0h
OUTPUT.SD2070.NC_T2

Manual
4 Parameter list
H969 SRC_CB_WORD_9 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]

07B1h
OUTPUT.SD2080.NC_T2
H970 SRC_CB_WORD_10 0 ... 1024 0 [A3.6]
07B2h
OUTPUT.SD2090.NC_T2
H997 DRIVE_ID 0 ... 32767 0
1997d Drive identification 1
07CDh
If the system consists of several drives, a drive ID can be
entered here. This allows a parameterized positioning to be
assigned to the drive.
INPUT.DRID.X_T5
SIMADYN D:O2 PKW-Typ:O2
H998 DEFAULTING 0...32767 0 [A1.6]
1998d Establish factory setting 1 1.12
07CE
This allows the EEPROM to be erased so that the factory
setting can be re-established. 165 must be entered.
Note:
When the EEPROM is erased, the modified values are
retained in the RAM. Thus, to establish the factory setting,
the unit must be powered-down and up again.
OUTPUT.ER10.X1_T5
H999 BAUDRATE_P2P 0...12 8 [A3.1]
1999d Baud rate for peer-to-peer coupling 1 3.3.5
07CFh
The following baud rates can be set:
0: 150 Bd 5: 4800 Bd 10: 76800 Bd
1: 300 Bd 6: 9600 Bd 11: Not permitted
2: 600 Bd 7: 19200 Bd 12: 115200 Bd
3: 1200 Bd 8: 38400 Bd
4: 2400 Bd 9: 57600 Bd
@CMT1.PEER.BDR_T4

Manual
4 Parameter list

Manual
5 Connectors
5 Connectors
5.1 The connector principle
In order to achieve the highest flexibility of the module, the control signals are not permanently connected
with one another, but can be configured for the various applications.
For this reason, these signals are listed in the so-called Connector list, where they can be „connected“ into
the actual control functionality.
The connector list includes the following signals:
- fixed setpoints and reference values
- receive words from the basic drive converter, COM-BOARD, peer-to-peer
- binary inputs, analog inputs, pulse encoder
- status words from the open- and closed-loop control and setpoint conditioning
- signals from the open- and closed-loop control and setpoint conditioning
- signals from the freely-connectable functions
5.1.1 Single-word quantities

The mode of operation of the connectors is now outlined.
C o nnector list
0
1 W o rd q uant ity
W o rd q uant ity
H 78 1 (0 )
2
K004 K0 04
3
4 16-bit w o rd
5
6
7
8
9
10
1024
A connector is shown as follows in the function diagrams:
K067
T he output signal of the P T 1 elem ent is de posited in connector K 067
If this connector is to be connected up, then the connector number must be entered when selecting the
signal. Example:
H 781 (0)
K067 K067
+
67 (K 067) is entered in param eter H 781
For setpoints and actual values, the normalization 4000h = 100% is used if not otherwise specified.

Manual
5 Connectors
5.1.2 Double-word quantities

As the connector list can only accept a 16-bit word per memory location, the double-word quantity is split
up into two 16-bit words. The high word in the specified connector, and the low word in the connector
number plus 1.
C o nnector list
0
Do uble-w o rd
1 Do uble-w o rd quantity
q ua ntity H 7 8 1 (0 )
2
K004 K0 04
3
4 H ig h w o rd
5 Low w o rd
6
7
8
9
10
1024
Double-word quantities are used for all position reference and actual values and limit values.
Connections between single-word- and double-word quantities
Single-word- and double-word quantities can only be partially connected. Scaled double-word quantities
can only be connected to a single-word quantity if they are positive, as the sign is in bit 15 of the high
word. There is no problem for normalized double-word quantities, if the high word is specified as connec-
tor number. Thus, for example, it is possible to output every control quantity, irrelevant as to whether it is a
single-word or double-word quantity, at an analog output.
Normally, the word-double-word connection is not required.
5.1.3 Bit quantities

In order to keep the connector list as short as possible, the status bits to status words are combined, and
deposited as 16-bit word in the connector list. A bit mask is used to filter out an individual bit from the
status word.
C o nnector list 15 0
C o nte nts , K0 04
0 15 0
B it m a s k
15 16 -bit w o rd 0
1
H 7 8 1 (0 ) H7 85 (0 h) 15 0
2
K004 K004 &
3 Bit q ua ntity
15 16-bit w o rd 0
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1024

Manual
5 Connectors
For bit quantities, in addition to specifying the connector, a bit is selected.

For this purpose, there is an additional parameter, the ´masked´ bit.
Example:
W o rd q ua nt ity B it q ua nt ity
H 78 4 (0 ) H7 85 (0 h)
K &
Se lect pa ram ete r M asking pa ra m ete r
The bit masking function can be illustrated as follows:
H 13 1 (0 ) 0 &
>1
1 &
=
K
.
.
.
14 &
15 &
0
1
.
.
H 132 .
14
15
This means, that each bit of the connector is AND’ed with the corresponding bit of the masking, and the
result of all AND logic operations, are then OR’ed.
Thus, in the mask, that bit which is to be selected as bit quantity, must be a logical one. The simplest way
to understand this is if one considers the word in the binary notation. A one is entered below the bit, which
is to control the binary function, and under all others, a logical zero is entered. The required mask is ob-
tained if it is now converted into the hexadecimal notation.
Example:
Masking bit 7 from a control word:
B it 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Inp ut q ua nt ity
S ig nif ica nce 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
M as k 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
H ex
0 0 8 0
Note:
By masking several bits, several bits can be simultaneously switched-through to the output. This corre-
sponds to an OR function for these bits.

Manual
5 Connectors
5.1.4 Selection table for the masking

The subsequent Table is used to help determine the masks to switch-through the bit.
Mask Bit switched-through to the output
0000h No bit is switched-through
Example 1:
Example 2:
0402h Bit 10 and 1 of the input value

Manual
5 Connectors
5.2 Connector list

The connector list is structured as follows:
Connector Value/description Source Cross-reference_ Diagr.
number parameter sampling time ref.
K010 (1) 1st receive word from the CU (2) (4) INPUT.K1100.X1_T1 (6)
(5)
Word received from the dual port interface (3)
Connector number (1)

The signal in the connector list is deposited under the connector number. If the signal is to be used, the
value must be entered as source (without K).
Value / description
The significance of the connector is in line (2); a possibly more detailed description in line (3).
Source parameter (4)
If a parameter directly corresponds with the connector, then it must be entered in the source parameter
column. This is, for example, the case for fixed setpoints and the traversing data sets.
Cross-reference_sampling time (5)
The function block in SIMADYN D, which generates the signal as well as its sampling time is specified in
this line.
Diagram reference (6)
The cross-reference in the function diagram page, on which this connector is shown, is located in line 6.
Double-word quantities
number parameter sampling time ref.
K592 (a) Position reference value 95 H455 SETPNT.PR560.X15_T5 [C2.3]
K593 (b)
A double-word quantity requires two connectors, (a) and (b). The most significant word is deposited in
connector (a) and the least significant word in connector (b).
If double-word quantities are ćonnected-up´, only the connector number (a) is specified as source.

Manual
5 Connectors
number parameter sampling time Ref.
K000 Fixed value 0% or 0000h INPUT.FP3000.X1_T5 [A10.2]

K001
K002 Fixed value 100% INPUT.FP3000.X3_T5 [A10.2]
K003
K004 Fixed value FFFFh INPUT.FP3000.X5_T5 [A10.2]
K005 Fixed value 1 as presetting for data sets INPUT.FP3000.X6_T5 [A10.2]
K009 System error word, SIMADYN D INPUT.I5040.X_T5 [A1.4]
K010 1st receive word from the CU INPUT.K1100.X1_T1 [A1.4]
K011 2nd receive word from the CU INPUT.K1100.X2_T1 [A1.4]
K012 3rd receive word from the CU INPUT.K1100.X3_T1 [A1.4]
K013 4th receive word from the CU INPUT.K1100.X4_T1 [A1.4]
K026 1st receive word from the CB INPUT.K2100.X1_T2 [A3.3]
K027 2nd receive word from the CB INPUT.K2100.X2_T2 [A3.3]
K028 3rd receive word from the CB INPUT.K2100.X3_T2 [A3.3]
K029 4th receive word from the CB INPUT.K2100.X4_T2 [A3.3]
K040 1st receive word from peer-to-peer INPUT.K2110.X1_T2 [A3.3]
K041 2nd receive word from peer-to-peer INPUT.K2110.X2_T2 [A3.3]
K042 3rd receive word from peer-to-peer INPUT.K2110.X3_T2 [A3.3]
K043 4th receive word from peer-to-peer INPUT.K2110.X4_T2 [A3.3]
K044 5th receive word from peer-to-peer INPUT.K2110.X5_T2 [A3.3]

Manual
5 Connectors
K045 Status word, binary inputs INPUT.BI2040.X_T2 [A4.4]
K046 Analog input 1 INPUT.AI2040.X_T2 [A5.4]
K053 Control lines, thumbwheel switch INPUT.TW3170.X_T3 [A9.7]
K054 Refer. value from the thumbwheel switch INPUT.TW3180.X_T3 [A9.7]
K055 Reference value from byte-serial data input INPUT.BS3030.X_T3 [A9.7]
K060 Speed actual value, pulse encoder 1 INPUT.PG2110.X_T2 [A6.8]
K061 Speed actual value, pulse encoder 2 INPUT.PG2210.X_T2 [A7.7]
K062 Position actual value, pulse encoder 1 INPUT.PG1010.X_T1 [A6.8]

K063
K064 Position actual value, pulse encoder 2 INPUT.PG1050.X_T1 [A7.7]
K065
K066 Position act. value from the dual port RAM INPUT.R1310.X_T1 [A8.2]
K067
K070 Position actual value for the control INPUT.PG1495.X_T1 [A8.7]
K071
K072 Position actual value, normalized INPUT.PG2410.X_T2 [A8.7]
K073
K074 Position actual value, scaled INPUT.PG2430.X_T2 [A8.7]
K075
K077 Position actual value, scaled (Word) INPUT.PG2460.X_T2 [A8.7]
K079 Status word, input/output INPUT.STAT20.X_T3 [A10.8]

Bit 2: Velocity actual value > 0 (V>0)
Bit 4: Velocity actual value < 0 (V<0)
Bit 5: Traver. direction, pulse encoder 1 (0=pos.,
1=neg.)
Bit 6: Traver. direction, pulse encoder 2 (0=pos.,
1=neg.)
Bit 7: Not used
Bit 8: Not used
Bit 9: System error, T300
Bit 10: Send to CU ok.
Bit 11: Send to CB ok.
Bit 12: Send to peer-to-peer ok.
Bit 13: Receive from CU ok.
Bit 14: Receive from CB ok.
Bit 15: Receive from peer-to-peer ok.

Manual
5 Connectors
K080 Power-down conditions CONTRL.CC3605.X_T3 [B1.7]

Bit 2: Electrical OFF (OFF2) present
K081 Diagnostics word, power-down CONTRL.CD3530.X_T3 [B1.7]

Bit 2: Electrical OFF (OFF2) present
K082 Control word 1 at CU CONTRL.CE3220.X_T3 [A2.8]
Bit 0: On/ no stop (OFF1)

Bit 5: No ramp-function generator stop
Bit 6: Setpoint enable (reference value enable)
Bit 7: Fault acknowledgement
Bit 8: Inching 1
Bit 9: Inching 2
Bit 11: Clockwise rotating field
Bit 12: Counter-clockwise rotating field
K083 Control word 2 at CU CONTRL.CE3520.X_T3 [A2.8]

Bit 0: Reference value data set, bit 0
Bit 1: Reference value data set, bit 1
Bit 4: Fixed setpoint, bit 0
Bit 5: Fixed setpoint, bit 1
Bit 8: Droop enable
Bit 11: Slave drive
Bit 14: Select reserve setting

Manual
5 Connectors
K084 Fault word CONTRL.F4940.X_T4 [B4.7]

Bit 5: Tracking error outside the tolerance [F121]
Bit 9: Pulse encoder fault [F125]
Bit 13: Reference point incorrectly/not identified [F129]
Bit 15: Loading error, absolute encoder [F131]
K085 Alarm word CONTRL.F4990.X_T4 [B4.7]

Bit 5: Tracking error outside the tolerance [A102]
Bit 13: Reference point incorrectly/not identified [A110]
Bit 15: Loading error, absolute encoder [A112]
K089 Status word, control CONTRL.ST3910.X_T3 [B5.5]

Bit 3: Braking
Bit 4: No braking
Bit 6: Drive powered-up
Bit 7: Drive not powered-up
Bit 8: Drive not ready
Bit 9: Internal inverter enable
Bit 10: Internal setpoint enable
Bit 11: Not used
Bit 12: Drive faulted
Bit 13: Open holding/operating brake
Bit 14: Close holding/operating brake
Bit 15: Close brake at n=0

Manual
5 Connectors
K091 Status word 1, referencing control REFCTL.PS3910.X_T3 [B9.3]

Bit 0: Enable reference point (zero pulse) sensing
Bit 1: Referencing with shutdown active
Bit 2: Flying referencing active
Bit 3: Referencing mode active
Bit 4: Drive has referenced
Bit 5: Drive has not referenced
Bit 6: Crawl to the reference point
Bit 7: Approach path greater than the min. approach
path
Bit 8: Approach path less than the min. approach path
Bit 9: Referencing direction B→A
Bit 10: Referencing direction A→B
Bit 11: Referencing direction o.k.
Bit 12: Referencing direction not o.k.
Bit 13: Hardware limit switch A2 reached
Bit 14: Hardware limit switch B2 reached
Bit 15: Referencing error
K092 Status word 2, referencing control REFCTL.PS3960.X_T3 [B10.8]

Bit 0: Error, reference point not/ incorrectly identified
Bit 1: Hardware limit switch A2 actuated
Bit 2: Hardware limit switch B2 actuated
Bit 3: Reference point range ok.
Bit 7: TR absolute encoder load required
Bit 8: TR absolute encoder load active
Bit 9: TR absolute encoder has referenced
Bit 10: TR absolute encoder load input
Bit 11: not used
Bit 12: TR absolute encoder, start load error
Bit 13: TR absolute encoder, load error
Bit 14: TR absolute encoder, max. load time exceeded
Bit 15: not used
K100 Scaling, closed-loop position control H350 SETPNT.SCALK.X_T5 [C1.3]

K101 Integer number, which corresponds to 100% position
value
K102 Position, reference point scaled H351 SETPNT.REFPK.X_T5 [C1.3]

K103
K104 Position, reference point normalized H351 SETPNT.REFP2K.X_T5 [C1.3]
K105 Position of the reference point as a percent of the total
distance
K106 Diameter correction factor H352 SETPNT.DMK.X_T5 [C1.5]

K107 Factor with which the speed- and position values are
multiplied.
K120 Position reference value, scaled SETPNT.PR2440.X_T2 [C3.4]

K121
K122 Position reference value, normalized SETPNT.PR2510.X_T2 [C3.4]
K123
K129 Status word, setpoint conditioning SETPNT.ST3110.X_T3
Bit 0: Software limit A1 violated
Bit 1: Software limit B1 violated
K130 Position limit value X SETPNT.PLX340.X_T3 [C4.4]

K131
K132 Position limit value Y SETPNT.PLY340.X_T3 [C4.8]
K133

Manual
5 Connectors
K134 Position limit value Z SETPNT.PLZ340.X_T3 [C4.4]

K135
K136 Software limit switch A1 SETPNT.SWA340.X_T3 [C5.4]
K137
K138 Software limit switch B1 SETPNT.SWB340.X_T3 [C5.8]
K139
K140 Maximum velocity SETPNT.VMX380.X_T3 [C5.4]
K141 KP factor, speed controller SETPNT.KPV350.X_T3 [C6.7]
K142 Drive play, scaled SETPNT.PY370.X_T3 [C5.8]

K143
K144 Ramp-up time, pos. ramp-function generator SETPNT.TU340.X_T3 [C6.4]
K145
K146 Rounding-off time constant, position RFG SETPNT.TR340.X_T3 [C7.4]
K147
K148 Ramp-down time, position RFG SETPNT.TD340.X_T3 [C6.4]
K149
K152 Down ramp A2 SETPNT.TDA340.X_T3 [C7.4]
K153 Down ramp B2 SETPNT.TDB340.X_T3 [C7.8]
K200 Acceleration setpoint from the POSREG.RB1340.X_T1 [D2.8]

K201 Velocity setpoint from the POSREG.RB1430.X_T1 [D2.8]
K202 Position reference value from the POSREG.RB1550.X_T1 [D2.8]
K203 position ramp-function generator
K204 Supplementary torque at CU POSREG.P1320.X_T1 [D3.8]
K205 Control error, position controller POSREG.P1510.X_T1 [D3.3]
K206 Position controller output POSREG.P1520.X_T1 [D3.5]
K208 Position reference value - actual value POSREG.P3155.X_T3 [D5.2]

difference
K220 Speed setpoint at CU POSREG.P1770.X_T1 [D3.8]
K221 Status word, position control POSREG.PS3110.X_T3 [D5.8]

Bit 0: tracking error outside tolerance
Bit 1: tracking error within tolerance
Bit 2: Velocity setpoint > actual value
Bit 3: Velocity setpoint = actual value
Bit 4: Velocity setpoint < actual value
Bit 5: Position reference value > actual value
Bit 6: Position reference value = actual value
Bit 7: Position reference value < actual value
Bit 8: Enable position control
Bit 9: Speed-controlled operation
Bit 10: Position controller at the upper limit
Bit 11: Position controller at the lower limit
Bit 12 : Drive has positioned
K249 Motorized potentiometer output AUXIL.M4600.X_T4 [E1.5]

K250

Manual
5 Connectors
K255 Status word, special functions AUXIL.SC4480.X_T4 [E3.8]

Bit 5: EEPROM is empty
Bit 6: MOP : Output = input
Bit 7: MOP at the upper limit
Bit 8: MOP at the lower limit
K256 Status word, limit value monitor 1 AUXIL.LM3910.X_T3 [E2.4]

Bit 0: Position actual value > position limit value X
Bit 1: Position actual value = position limit value X
Bit 2: Position actual value < position limit value X
Bit 3: Position actual value > position limit value Y
Bit 4: Position actual value = position limit value Y
Bit 6: Position actual value < position limit value Y
Bit 7: Position actual value > position limit value Z
Bit 8: Position actual value = position limit value Z
Bit 9: Position actual value < position limit value Z
Bit 10: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM 1
Bit 11: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM 1
Bit 12: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM 1
K257 Status word, limit value monitor 2 AUXIL.LM3960.X_T3 [E2.8]

Bit 0: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM A
Bit 1: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM A
Bit 2: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM A
Bit 3: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM B
Bit 4: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM B
Bit 6: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM B
Bit 7: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM C
Bit 8: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM C
Bit 9: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM C
Bit 10: Input value 1 > input value 2 GWM D
Bit 11: Input value 1 = input value 2 GWM D
Bit 12: Input value 1 < input value 2 GWM D
K258 Freely-definable status word AUXIL.ST3190.X_T3 [E3.4]

Bit 0: Status bit 0
to
bit 15: Status bit 15
K259 Freely-definable status word, inverted AUXIL.ST3194.X_T3 [E3.4]

Bit 0: Status bit 0
to
bit 15: Status bit 15
K260 Output, free adder, single-word quantity RANDOM.FB3015.X_T3

K261
K262 Output, free adder, double-word quantity RANDOM.FB3035.X_T3
K263
K264 Output, free subtractor, single-word quantity RANDOM.FB3055.X_T3
K265
K266 Output, free subtractor, double-word quantity RANDOM.FB3075.X_T3
K267
K268 Output, free divider, single-word quantity RANDOM.FB3095.X_T3
K269
K270 Output, free divider, double-word quantity RANDOM.FB3115.X_T3
K271

Manual
5 Connectors
K272 Output, free multiplier, single-word quantity RANDOM.FB3135.X_T3

K273
K274 Output, free multiplier, double-word quantity RANDOM.FB3155.X_T3
K275
K276 Output, free inverter, single-word quantity RANDOM.FB3170.X_T3
K277
K278 Output, free inverter, double-word quantity RANDOM.FB3185.X_T3
K279
K280 Out., free changeover switch, word quantity RANDOM.FB3220.X_T3
K281
K282 Out., free changeover sw., double-w. quant. RANDOM.FB3245.X_T3
K283
K284 Output, free limiter, single-word quantity RANDOM.FB3270.X_T3
K285
K286 Output, free limiter, double-word quantity RANDOM.FB3295.X_T3
K287
K288 Output, free double-word-> word converter RANDOM.FB3340.X_T3
K289
K290 Output, free double word→word converter RANDOM.FB3355.X_T3
K291
K292 Output, free word→double-word converter RANDOM.FB3370.X_T3
K293
K294 Output, free word→double-word converter RANDOM.FB3385.X_T3
K295
K296 Output, free filter, single-word quantity RANDOM.FB3405.X_T3
K297
K298 Output, free filter, double-word quantity RANDOM.FB3425.X_T3
K299
K300 Output, free maximum evaluation, word RANDOM.FB3445.X_T3
K301
K302 Output, free max. evaluation, double-word RANDOM.FB3465.X_T3
K303
K304 Output, free minimum evaluation, word RANDOM.FB3485.X_T3
K305
K306 Output, free min. evaluation, double-word RANDOM.FB3505.X_T3
K307
K308 Output, free absolute value generation, word RANDOM.FB3520.X_T3
K309
K310 Output, free abs. val. generat., double-word RANDOM.FB3535.X_T3
K311
K312 Output, free XOR logic gate RANDOM.FB3555.X_T3
K313
K314 Output, free AND logic gate RANDOM.FB3575.X_T3
K315

Manual
5 Connectors
K316 Output, free OR logic gate RANDOM.FB3595.X_T3

K317
K318 Output, free flash function RANDOM.FB3625.X_T3
K319
K320 Status word, free functions RANDOM.FB3905.X_T3
K321
K330 Fixed setpoint 1, integer word quantity H660 SETPNT.FSP500.X1_T5 [C1.2]
K338 Fixed setpoint 1, word % quantity H668 SETPNT.FSP500.X9_T5 [C1.3]
K346 Fixed setpoint 1, hex word quantity H676 SETPNT.FSP510.X1_T5 [C1.5]
K354 Fixed setpoint 1, double-word integer quant. H684 SETPNT.FSP520.X1_T5 [C1.6]

K355
K357
K359
K361
K363

Manual
5 Connectors

K365
K366 Fixed setpoint. 7, double-word integer quant. H690 SETPNT.FSP510.X7_T5 [C1.6]
K367
K369
K370 Fixed setpoint 1, double-word % quantity H692 SETPNT.FSP510.X9_T5 [C1.7]
K371
K373
K375
K377
K379
K381
K383
K385
K400 Variable position reference value H360 SETPNT.PR2010.X_T2 [C2.3]
K401
K402 Position reference value 1 H361 SETPNT.PR510.X1_T5 [C2.3]
K403
K405
K407
K409
K411
K413
K415
K417
K419
K421

Manual
5 Connectors

K423
K425
K427
K429
K431
K433
K435
K437
K439
K441
K443
K445
K447
K449
K451
K453
K455
K457
K459
K461
K463
K465

Manual
5 Connectors

K467
K469
K471
K473
K475
K477
K479
K481
K483
K485
K487
K489
K491
K493
K495
K497
K499
K501
K503
K505
K507
K509

Manual
5 Connectors

K511
K513
K515
K517
K519
K521
K523
K525
K527
K529
K531
K533
K535
K537
K539
K541
K543
K545
K547
K549
K553
K555

Manual
5 Connectors

K557
K559
K561
K563
K565
K567
K569
K571
K573
K575
K577
K579
K581
K583
K585
K587
K589
K591
K593
K595
K597
K599

Manual
5 Connectors

K601
K603
K604 to Not used
K699
K700 Position limit value X, variable H500 SETPNT.PLX305.X_T3 [C4.3]
K701
K702 Position limit value X 1 H501 SETPNT.PLX510.X1_T5 [C4.3]
K703
K705
K707
K709
K711
K713
K720 Position limit value Y, variable H510 SETPNT.PLY305.X_T3 [C4.8]
K721
K722 Position limit value Y 1 H511 SETPNT.PLY510.X1_T5 [C4.8]
K723
K725
K727
K729
K731
K732 Position limit value Y 6 H516 SETPNT.PLX510.X6_T5 [C4.8]
K733
K734 to Not used
K739
K740 Position limit value Z, variable H520 SETPNT.PLZ305.X_T5 [C4.4]
K741
K742 Position limit value Z 1 H521 SETPNT.PLZ510.X1_T5 [C4.4]
K743
K745
K747

Manual
5 Connectors

K749
K751
K753
K760 Software limit switch A1, variable H530 SETPNT.SWA305.X_T3 [C5.3]
K761
K762 Software limit switch A1 1 H531 SETPNT.SWA510.X1_T5 [C5.3]
K763
K765
K767
K769
K771
K773
K780 Software limit switch B1, variable H540 SETPNT.SWB305.X_T3 [C5.7]
K781
K782 Software limit switch B1 1 H541 SETPNT.SWB510.X1_T5 [C5.7]
K783
K785
K787
K789
K791
K793
K800 Maximum velocity, variable H550 SETPNT.VMX305.X_T3 [C5.4]
K801 Maximum velocity 1 H551 SETPNT.VMX510.X1_T5 [C5.4]
K807 to Not used

K809

Manual
5 Connectors
K810 KP speed controller, variable H570 SETPNT.KPV305.X_T3 [C6.7]
K811 KP speed controller 1 H571 SETPNT.KPV510.X1_T5 [C6.7]
K820 Play, variable H590 SETPNT.PY305.X_T3 [C5.8]
K821 Play 1 H591 SETPNT.PY510.X1_T5 [C5.8]
K830 Ramp-up time, pos. RFG, var. H600 SETPNT.TU305.X_T3 [C6.4]

K831
K832 Ramp-up time, pos. ramp-function gen. 1 H601 SETPNT.TU510.X1_T5 [C6.4]
K833
K835
K837
K839
K841
K843
K850 Rounding-off time constant, pos. RFG, var. H610 SETPNT.TR305.X_T3 [C7.4]
K851 Rounding-off time constant, pos. RFG 1 H611 SETPNT.TR510.X1_T5 [C7.4]
K890 Ramp-down time, position RFG, var. H620 SETPNT.TD305.X_T3 [C6.8]

K891
K892 Ramp-down time, position RFG 1 H621 SETPNT.TD510.X1_T5 [C6.8]
K893
K895

Manual
5 Connectors

K897
K899
K901
K903
K920 Down ramp A2, variable H640 SETPNT.TDA305.X_T3 [C7.4]
K921 Down ramp A2 1 H641 SETPNT.TDA510.X1_T5 [C7.4]
K930 Down ramp B2, variable H650 SETPNT.TDB305.X_T3 [C7.8]
K931 Down ramp B2 1 H651 SETPNT.TDB510.X1_T5 [C7.8]

Manual
5 Connectors

Manual
6 Start-up
6 Start-up
The start-up procedure is as follows:
S tart-up,
6S E 70 basic drive converter
P aram eterization basic drive

converte r for op eration w ith T30 0
S tart-up
control / safety func tions
P aram eterization
reference v alue in put
S tart-up
position control
NOTE
− These Start-up Instructions assume that the basic drive converter is commissioned, starting from the
factory setting - (CU2: With pulse encoder, P163=4; CUVC: With pulse encoder P100=4) without
T300 (and, if available, without CB1/CBP).
− All of the parameters in Section 6.1.1 (and if required, in 6.1.1.2.1) must be entered.
− Further, Section 6.2 and onwards must be observed. Among other things, the setting and optimi-
zation of the control is described. The closed-loop positioning control will not work satisfactorily if this
section is not carefully observed.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.1 Start-up, basic drive converter

The basic drive converter must be commissioned in accordance with the start-up instructions. If in doubt,
the factory setting of the basic drive converter should be established.
Warning
The motor can rotate during the following commissioning phases of the basic drive converter:
Motor identification for CUVC
For motor identification at standstill (P115=2), the motor aligns itself ( max ± ¼ motor revolution). The
motor rotor can be locked to stop it rotating.
No-load measurement for CUVC
The no-load measurement (P115=4) for the linear axis cannot be made when the drive is coupled to a
load.
n/f controller optimization for SIMOVERT VC

The n/f controller optimization (P115=5), for a linear axis cannot be made when the drive is coupled to
the load.
The complete motor identification cannot be executed.

Motor identification for CU2
For motor identification at standstill (P052=7), the motor aligns itself ( max ± ¼ motor revolution). The
motor rotor can be locked to stop it rotating.
No-load measurement for CU2

The no-load measurement (P052=9) for the linear axis cannot be made when the drive is coupled to a
load.
n/f controller optimization for CU2

The n/f controller optimization (P052=10), for a linear axis cannot be made when the drive is coupled to
the load.
The complete motor identification cannot be executed.
Motor identification for CU3

For motor identification (power-up after a new motor has been selected or P330=1) the motor aligns
itself. The motor rotor can be locked to stop it rotating.
The following points should be observed, which deviate or are supplementary to the basic drive converter
Instruction Manual:
Hardware configuration
In practice, it has been shown that it is practical to first commission the basic drive converter without op-
tion boards (T300, CB). Only after the basic drive has been completely parameterized and optimized, and
before parameters are input, in Section 6.1.1 onwards, the option modules are enabled and inserted.
CU2,CU3: To realize this, the hardware setting function (P052=4) is re-selected, and parameters P090
and P091 and the bus address (P918), if required, set.
CUVC,CUMC: The bus address (P918), if required, has to be set.
Acknowledge or suppress faults/error messages which occur after the T300 logs-on (e.g. F116, F118);
refer to Section 1.8.
Controller optimization
The speed controller in the basic drive converter should be optimized according to the absolute optimum.
More detailed information is provided in the Section optimizing the control.
Safety functions
Before a drive with a linear axis is powered up, the following safety functions should be parameterized:

Manual
6 Start-up
The emergency limit switches must be directly connected to the basic drive converter, and parameter-
ized as fast stop.
An emergency pushbutton must be located close to the work place, so that the drive can be quickly
shutdown if incorrect entries are made during the start-up phase.
Warning
Before commissioning the positioning, all of the safety functions must be parameterized and tested.
Safety functions are:
- emergency stop (emergency off) switch
- mechanical brake
- and, if available, hardware limit switch.
6.1.1 Parameterizing the basic drive converter for positioning

The following parameters set the setpoint/reference value conditioning, open-loop control and communi-
cations for positioning. It is important that the basic drive converter optimization runs have been com-
pleted, as specific parameters in the following list would otherwise be changed.
For operation with T300, only the Bico data set 1 or the basic setting is relevant. Thus, the following pa-
rameters refer to index 001.
The following parameters define the signals, which are sent from the T300 to the basic drive converter.
The parameterization of the drive converters with CUVC and CUMC is handled in Section 6.1.1.1, and the
drive converters with CU2 and CU3 in Section 6.1.1.2.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.1.1.1 Parameterization for basic drives with CUVC and CUMC
Note:
The parameters, designated with X, are of no significance for CUMC.

setting
P232 Source, controller adaption kadap 3008 0 (4)
P443 Source, main setpoint n* 3002 58
P506 X Source, supplementary torque setpoint Madd 3005 0
P507 X Supplementary torque setpoint Kp 100% 100%
P554 Source, OFF1 STW1.0 3100 0
P555 Source 1, OFF2 STW1.1 3101 1
P557 Source 3, OFF2 STW1.1 5 1
P558 Source 1, OFF3 STW1.2 3102 1
P561 Source, inverter enable STW1.3 3103 1
P562 Source, RFG enable STW1.4 3104 1
P563 Source, no RFG stop STW1.5 3105 1
P564 Source, setpoint enable STW1.6 3106 1
P568 Source, inching 1 STW1.8 3108 0
P571 Source, clockwise rotating field STW1.11 3111 1
P572 Source, counter-clockwise rotat. field STW1.12 3112 1
P573 Source, raise motorized potentiometer STW1.13 3113 0
P574 Source, lower motorized potentiometer STW1.14 3114 0
P575 Source, no fault 1 external STW1.15 3115 1
P576 Source, setpoint data set, bit 0 STW2.0 3004 0
P578 X Source, motor data set, bit 0 STW2.2 3402 0
P580 Source, fixed setpoint, bit 0 STW2.4 3404 0
P582 X Source, synchronizing enable STW2.6 3406 0
P583 Source, restart-on-the-fly enable STW2.7 3407 0
P584 Source, droop enable STW2.8 3408 0
P585 Source, controller enable STW2.9 3409 1
P587 Source, master/slave changeover STW2.11 3411 0
P588 Source, no alarm 1 external STW2.12 3412 1
P590 Source, BICO data setting STW2.14 3414 0

Manual
6 Start-up
Data from the basic drive converter to T300

P734.001 Source, stat. word 1, basic dr. conv. 32 32
P734.002 Sour., speed act. val., basic dr. conv. 148 for VC 0
91 for MC
P734.003 - 0 0
P734.004 Source, status word 2, basic dr. conv. 33 0
P734.005 Source, torque setp., basic dr. conv. 165 0
P734.006 Source, torque act. val., bas. dr. conv. 900 for CUVC 0
(3) 184 for CUMC
Only for CUMC, if the position actual value from the dual port RAM is to be used
P734.007 Source, position actual value 90 0
The following parameters should be checked for the following settings.

Par. Description Setting
P100 1) Select open-loop/closed-loop contr. type 4 (closed-loop speed control with pulse
encoder)
P259 X Max. regenerative active power -100 % (-10 % if no regener. feedback)
P471 Pre-control, n/f controller 0.0 % (no pre-control)
P375 Select ground-fault test 0 (not ground-fault test)
P352 2) Rated frequency (= frequency or speed x.xx Hz for VC (P352)
P353 for setpoint input 100%) xxxx RPM for MC (P353)
P452 Max. frequency (speed), 110%
clockwise rotating field
P453 Maximum frequency (speed), -110%
counter-clockwise rotating field
P455 X Suppression frequency 0.00 % (no suppression frequency)
P456 X Suppression bandwidth 0.00 %
P457 X Minimum frequency 0.00 % (inactive)
P462 Ramp-up time 0
P463 X Ramp-up time units 0
P464 Ramp-down time 0
P465 X Ramp-down time units 0
P466 X OFF3 ramp-down time Set to the required time.
P469 Initial rounding-off 0 sec
P470 X Final rounding-off 0 sec
P354 Rated torque x.xx Nm (corresp. to 100% setpoint)
P492 X Torque limit, positive xxx.xx %
P498 X Torque limit, negative -xxx.xx %
P505 X Supplementary torque setpoint, fixed 0.0 %
P792 Setp.- act. value differ. for stalled motor 10 %
P794 Time, setpoint- actual value deviation 3 sec
P805 X Time, motor stalled/blocked 2 sec

Manual
6 Start-up
These parameters should only be set for the CUMC:

Parameter Significance Designation Setting
P262 Source, supplementary torque setpoint Madd 3005
P263 Torque limit, positive xxx.xx %
P264 Torque limit, negative -xxx.xx%
1) If the base unit as an exception (only valid for VC unit) is to be operated in the frequency control mo-
de, parameter P100 = 3 must be entered.
2) Example for P352, CUVC:

Motor rated speed (shaft speed at 100% speed setpoint value, corresponding to 100% of r447 or r229):
2759 revolutions/min
Motor data: 4 pole machine: 50Hz corresponding to 1500r/min, without slip
Parameter value to be entered: P352 = 2759r/min x 50Hz / 1500r /min = 91.97Hz.
Example for P353, CUMC:
Motor rated speed: 1778r/min (corresponding to 100% of r461 or r229)
Parameter value to be entered: P353 = 1778r/min.
3) For CUMC, instead of the torque actual value, the actual value of the torque-generating current ISQ
(act) = K184 should be used.
Therefore the following is valid: P734.06 = 184
4) Refere to section 3.6.9
This then completes the necessary basic drive converter settings.

Note:
The error channel is also enabled when the technology board is enabled. Thus, from now on, technology
board errors will result in an error/fault message (F116 to F131). The existing technology faults/errors can
be read in d039, and suppressed using H280.
Example: Suppressing errors, communications CB (bit 0), peer-to-peer (bit 2) with H280=FFFAh
Caution:
As long as the faults/errors are not suppressed, operating status 004 cannot be exited.
The technology board function settings are described in the section 6.2.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.1.1.2 Parameterization for basic drives with CU2 and CU3

Note:
The parameters, designated with X, are of no significance for CU3.
For further information about CU3 units please refer to section 6.1.1.2.1.

setting
P226 X Source, controller adaption kadap 3008 1001
P443 Source, main setpoint n* 3002 1002
P506 Source, supplementary torque setpoint Madd 3005 0
P507 Supplementary torque setpoint Kp 25% 100%
P554 Source, OFF1 STW1.0 3001 1010
P555 Source 1, OFF2 STW1.1 3001 1
P557 Source 3, OFF2 STW1.1 1010 1
P558 Source 1, OFF3 STW1.2 3001 1
P561 Source, inverter enable STW1.3 3001 1
P562 Source, RFG enable STW1.4 3001 1
P563 Source, no RFG stop STW1.5 3001 1
P564 Source, setpoint enable STW1.6 3001 1
P571 Source, clockwise rotating field STW1.11 3001 1
P572 Source, counter-clockwise rotat. field STW1.12 3001 1
P573 Source, raise motorized potentiometer STW1.13 3001 1010
P574 Source, lower motorized potentiometer STW1.14 3001 1010
P578 Source, motor data set, bit 0 STW2.2 3004 0
P582 X Source, synchronizing enable STW2.6 3004 0
P583 Source, restart-on-the-fly enable STW2.7 3004 0
P584 Source, droop enable STW2.8 3004 0
P585 Source, controller enable STW2.9 3004 1
P587 Source, master/slave changeover STW2.11 3004 0
P590 Source, basic/reserve setting STW2.14 3004 1005

Manual
6 Start-up
Data from the basic drive converter to T300

P694.001 Source, stat. word 1, basic dr. conv. 968 968
P694.002 Sour., speed act. val., basic dr. conv. 214 for VC 0
219 for SC
P694.003 - 0 0
P694.004 Source, status word 2, basic dr. conv. 553 0
P694.005 Source, torque setp., basic dr. conv. 237 for VC 0
007 for SC
P694.006 Source, torque act. val., bas. dr. conv. 007 0
Only for SIMOVERT SC, if the position actual value from the dual port RAM is to be used
P694.007 Source, position actual value 214 0
The following parameters should be checked for the following settings.

Par. Description Setting
P163 1) Select open-loop/closed-loop contr. type 4 (closed-loop speed control with pulse
encoder)
P190 X Select smooth starting 0 (no smooth starting)
P233 X Max. regenerative active power -100 % (-10 % if no regener. feedback)
P243 X Pre-control, n/f controller 0.0 % (no pre-control)
P308 2) Sampling time with SC only, sw-verion ≥ 1.2: 1.2
P354 Select ground-fault test 0 (not ground-fault test)
P420 3) Rated frequency (= frequency or speed x.xx Hz for VC
for setpoint input 100%) xxxx RPM for SC
P452 Max. frequency (speed), 1.1 x P420
clockwise rotating field x.xx Hz for VC ; xxxx RPM for SC
P453 Maximum frequency (speed), -(1.1 x P420)
counter-clockwise rotating field x.xx Hz for VC ; xxxx RPM for SC
P455 X Suppression frequency 0.00 Hz (no suppression frequency)
P456 X Suppression bandwidth 0.00 Hz
P457 X Minimum frequency 0.00 Hz (inactive)
P462 Ramp-up time 0
P463 X Ramp-up time units 0
P464 Ramp-down time 0
P465 X Ramp-down time units 0
P466 X OFF3 ramp-down time Set to the required time.
P469 X Initial rounding-off 0%
P470 X Final rounding-off 0%
P485 Rated torque 100.00 % (corresp. to 100% setpoint)
P492 Torque limit, positive xxx.xx %
P498 Torque limit, negative -xxx.xx %
P517 Setp.- act. value differ. for stalled motor 5 Hz
P518 Time, setpoint- actual value deviation 3 sec
P520 X Time, motor stalled/blocked 2 sec

Manual
6 Start-up
1) If the base unit as an exception (only valid for VC unit) is to be operated in the frequency control mo-
de, parameter P163 = 3 must be entered.
2) The parameter may only be entered when P52 = 5, drive system settings, see Converter Operating
Instructions.
3) Example for P420, VC:
Motor rated speed (shaft speed at 100% speed setpoint value, corresponding to 100% of r447 or r223):
2759 revolutions/min
Motor data: 4 pole machine: 50Hz corresponding to 1500r/min, without slip
Parameter value to be entered: P420 = 2759r/min x 50Hz / 1500r /min = 91.97Hz.
Example for P420, SC:
Motor rated speed: 1778r/min (corresponding to 100% of r447 or r223)
Parameter value to be entered: P420 = 1778r/min.
This then completes the necessary basic drive converter settings.

Now, the technology board, and if available, the communications board must be logged-on. In this case,
the hardware setting (P052=4) is selected in the basic drive converter, and the appropriate boards entered
in parameter P090 and P091.
Note:
The error channel is also enabled when the technology board is enabled. Thus, from now on, technology
board errors will result in an error/fault message (F116 to F131). The existing technology faults/errors can
be read in d039, and suppressed using H280.
Example: Suppressing errors, communications CB (bit 0), peer-to-peer (bit 2) with H280=FFFAh
Caution:
As long as the faults/errors are not suppressed, operating status 004 cannot be exited.
The technology board function settings are now described in the following section.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.1.1.2.1 Use of the technology controller as a speed controller together with SIMOVERT
SC
Note:
- It is only advisable to follow this section when no satisfactory results can be achieved by following the
standard parameterization given in section 6.1.1.
- When using a technology controller as a speed controller for positioning applications, software version
≥1.2 for the base unit is required.
Examples of attainable improvemnets
- Approach to the set point position:
the approach to the set point position is fast, continuous and without (mentionable) overshoot.
- High frequency oscillations:
oscillations/noises in the several 100Hz range can be avoided
Examples of what the following parameterization could require
- Actual value smoothing is required, e.g. in the case of high frequency oscillations/noises
Applications where the drive is coupled to the load a toothed belt, elastic coupling or similar methods.
- KP adaption is required, e.g. in the case of unsmooth running of the drive:
a very low speed (<0.5 to 2% of the rated speed) has been selected and the drive speed controller loop
cannot be satisfactorily optimized.
- The driven load has a large moment of inertia, which leads to a unexact/non-continuous approach to the
required position
load moment of inertia > (5 to 30) x moment of inertia of the motor shaft
The following parameters are to be entered in addition to the parameters given in section 6.1.1.
The parameters marked with a ! deviate from those given in section 6.1.1.
Par. ∆ Description Einstellung/ Bemerkung

P226 ! Source, controller adaption 0
P546 tech. controller adaption, kp 3008
P443 ! Source, main setpoint 0
P308 Sampling time 1.2/ nur bei SW-Stand ≥ 1.2
P486 output tech. controller is torque setpoint 1020
P526 Source, speed setpoint 3002
P530 speed actual value 219
P531 source, speed actual value 1100
P541 technology controller output limitation 1 P541 = P492
P542 technology controller output limitation 2 P542 = P498
P584 ! source, enable technology controller 1
P587 slave drive 1/ setting causes P163=5

Manual
6 Start-up
Use of the technology controller as a speed controller together with SIMOVERT SC, overview.
Only the elements, required in this application are shown.
P546=3008
P537
KP-adaption
from T300
factory setting=1 r547
slave drive
P538 (torque control)
P526=3002 P528 P587.1=1
P542 P541
r529 KP TN r540 r545 r490
r491
n set from + 1
P486.1 +
T300 - =1020
0 + M se t
Soll w ert- technology limiter
Glättung r534 controller
P533
P443=0
r219
P531.1=1100 n set +
n act. from 0
motor encoder P530.1=219
-
actual value "normal" speed controller
smoothingg (disabled!)
m oto r n act. from
en ab le tech- m agn eti z ation motor encoder
no log y co ntroller 1
P5 84 =1 pu ls-
en ab le
P506=3005 M set additional
r510
M set
additional
fro m T300

Manual
6 Start-up
6.2 Commissioning the positioning

For the subsequent parameterization, it is assumed, that the MS380 factory settings have been made and
exist.
6.2.1 Preparatory parameterization
The following parameters must be set before the position control can be switched-in:
Parameterization, pulse encoder sensing
H150 Hardware mode, pulse encoder 1 Standard case:
H150 = 0060 (all pulse encoder signals from the LBA).

The limit frequency filter is set to 126 kHz. Leave suffi-
cient margin to the max. pulse encoder frequency (20-
50%),
Note: If the limiting filter frequency is too low, this
results in an erroneous and non-reproducible
position actual value measurement.
H151 Pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 1 Input according to the pulse encoder type plate
For CUMC, CU3: Refer to 3.3.10.1
H152 Rated motor speed, pulse encoder 1 Motor speed for the rated syst. frequency (CUVC,
CUMC:P353; CU2,CU3:P420)
For CU3, a negative value must be entered.
H153 Normalization, position actual value 1 Linear axis:
Number of quadrupled pulses for the nominal length.
For better transparency, it should always be normalized
to éven´ values, e. g. 20m
Rotary axis:
Number of quadrupled pulses for one revolution of the
rotary axis
Note:
After the pulse encoder data has been entered, the unit must be powered-down and up again.
Parameterization, setpoint/reference value generation
H720 Integration time of the position control Nominal_ length

Ti =
Rated_ velocity
Caution:
The value must be entered in [ms].
Or also
[ H153]
Ti = ⋅ 60000 ms
4 ⋅ [ H151] ⋅ [ H152]
H350 Scaling, position-control The value defines which integer value corresponds to
the normalized position in H153. The value should be as
high as the required accuracy of the data input, with the
decimal point excluded.
Example:
The path is normalized so that the pulse number in
H153 corresponds to 20m. If the reference value input is
to be accurate to 1mm, the following scaling must be
entered: H350=20000
H351 Reference point position The reference point position is the distance between the
mechanical endstop A and the reference point.
H531 Software limit switch A1 Traverse limit in the direction B→A. The value in H531
to is switched-through as pre-setting.
H534

Manual
6 Start-up
H541 Software limit switch B1 Traverse limit in the direction A→B. The value in H541
to is switched-through as pre-setting.
H536
H601 Ramp-up time, position ramp-function The time in H601 is switched-through as pre-setting.
to generator
H606
H611 Rounding-off time constant, pos. RFG The time in H611 is switched-through as pre-setting.
to The rounding-off time constant is the same for ramp-up
H616 and ramp-down.
H621 Ramp-down time, position ramp- The time in H621 is switched-through as pre-setting.
to function generator
H626
H641 Down ramp A2 The time must be set, so that the drive still stops in front
to of the mechanical endstop when hardware limit switch
H646 A2 is passed. The time in H641 is switched-through as
pre-setting.
H651 Down ramp B2 Setting instructions as for H641.
to The time in H651 is switched-through as pre-setting.
H656
H760 Ramp-up time, speed-controlled mode
H761 Ramp-down time, speed-controlled
mode
H722 Normalization, acceleration The lowest occurring ramp-up or ramp-down time of the
position ramp-function generator is entered.
6.2.2 Open-loop control commissioning

The parameterization of the control signals is now described. This is sub-divided into control signals which
must be parameterized (designated with a ! in the short parameter list) and signals which can be
parameterized if required.
Signals, which are not required for the application, can be supplied with a fixed value. In this case,
parameterization should be realized as follows:
Fixed 1 signal
A fixed 1 signal is generated, by entering connector K004 for the signal source, and 0001h in the mask.
Fixed 0 signal
A fixed 0 signal is generated, by entering connector K000 for the signal source, and 0000h in the mask.
The following functions must be parameterized
H200/ Power-on The power-on command can be coupled with the stan-
H201 dard stop, if the same source is specified for both
commands.
H202/ Standard stop (OFF1) The standard stop signal switches the main setpoint to
H203 zero, and the drive decelerates along the ramp-
function generator ramp to standstill; the drive is then
powered-down.
H204/ Electrical off (OFF2) Electrical off (OFF2) causes the drive to be immedi-
H205 ately switched into a torque-free condition.
H206/ Fast stop (OFF3) The setpoint is instantaneously switched to zero for a
H207 fast stop, and the drive is decelerated along the torque
limit.

Manual
6 Start-up
For the following functions, it should be checked as to whether they are required.
H214/ Inching 1, speed-controlled

H215
H216/ Inching 2, speed-controlled
H217
H224/ Inching 1, position-controlled
H225
H224/ Inching 2, position-controlled
H226
H212/ Fault/error acknowledgement Faults/errors can always be acknowledged via the P
H213 key of the PMU
H218/ Operating mode, speed control 1 To rotate the drive with constant velocity
H219
H220/ Operating mode, speed control 2 To rotate the drive with constant velocity
H221
H222/ Operating mode, speed control 3 To rotate the drive with constant velocity which can be
H223 entered via connector
H280 Masking, error/fault messages Suppressing irrelevant fault/error messages
(e. g. peer-to-peer)
H700/ External enable, position control 1
H701
Note:
After the control has been parameterized, all control functions should be tested.
6.2.3 Commissioning the open-loop referencing control
For the open-loop referencing control, the limit switches, traversing velocities as well as the operating
modes must be defined.
H228/ Hardware limit switch A2

H229
H230/ Hardware limit switch B2
H231
H300/ Referencing with shutdown
H301
H302/ Flying referencing
H303
H304/ Automatic post referencing
H305
H330 V set for referencing direction A→B
H332 V set for referencing direction B→A
Further, the hardware reference point position must be entered. The position of the hardware reference
point is the distance between the software reference point and the geometrical position of the hardware
reference point. All setpoint inputs refer to the software reference point. In practice, it is recommended that
the mechanical endstop in traversing direction A is defined as the software reference point (zero). The
reference point position is then the distance between the mechanical endstop A and the reference point.
This distance can be measured.
H351 Reference point position Distance between the mechanical endstop and the
reference point.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3 Optimizing the closed-loop control

Closed-loop control optimization is subsequently briefly described.
The following parameters must be determined when optimizing the closed-loop control:
6.3.1 Optimizing with CUVC, CUMC

CUVC / CUMC
Speed controller P223 speed act. value smoothing
P235 KP proportional gain
P240 integral action time Tn
Position controller H729 position actual value smoothing (only in exceptional cases)
H734 proportional gain KP
H735 integral action time Tn (only in exceptional cases)
Pre-control H722 normalization, acceleration
H738 torque pre-control
H740 speed setpoint smoothing
H730 pos. reference value smoothing
6.3.2 Optimizing with CU2, CU3

SIMOVERT CU2 CU3, section 6.1.1.2, CU3, sect. 6.1.1.2.1,
standard special case
Speed controller P221 speed act. value P230 speed controller gain P533 speed act. smoothing
smoothing P231 dynamic perform. P537 KP proportional gain
P225 KP proportional gain factor P538 integral action time Tn
P229 integral action time Tn P242 starting time
Position controller H729 position actual value smoothing (only in exceptional cases)
H735 integral action time Tn (only in exceptional cases)
Pre-control H722 normalization, Only required in exceptional cases, then the same setting
acceleration as for VC.
H738 torque pre-control
H740 speed setpoint
smoothing
H730 pos. reference value
smoothing
6.3.3 Optimizing the closed-loop speed control

The optimization of a real drive unit is subsequently described. In this case, the motor is connected to the
load through a gearbox which manifests play and elasticity.
The following parameters were determined:
CUVC: P223, CU2: P221 speed actual value smoothing Tgl
CUVC: P235, CU2: P225 proportional gain KP
CUVC: P240, CU2: P229 integral action time Tn
In the following diagram, the speed controller control error (CUVC: K152, CU2: r224) is output at analog
output 1. A setpoint step of 1% is connected at the speed controller input to optimize the control loop.
The speed controller must be set according to the absolute optimum.
The result should be as follows:

Manual
6 Start-up
Datei:nregopt.bin, window 12/12, trace: 50mV/div 100ms/div title: KP=70, TN=0.5s, Tgl=24ms [opt]
6.3.4 Optimizing the closed-loop position control

The position controller is optimized after the speed controller has been optimized. A step is entered at the
position controller input (H728). The position controller (K205) error signal is output at analog output 1.
The position controller should be optimized, so that the drive does not overshoot.
The following parameters were determined
The position controller optimization result should be as follows:
Datei:pregopt.bin, window 5/5, trace: 200mV/div 100ms/div, title: KP=13
In some cases, it may be practical to smooth the position actual value (H729), e. g. for a high moment of
inertia ratio between the load and the motor with a high drive play on the motor side, and position actual
value measurement via the motor pulse encoder.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3.5 Adjusting inertia compensation

The importance of the inertia compensation can be clearly seen using the following diagrams. The error
signal of the speed controller during traversing is illustrated.
Speed controller error signal without inertia compensation
Datei:posregop.bin, window 1/5, trace: 50mV/div 1s/div title: YE n-controller
Speed controller control error with inertia compensation
Datei:posregop.bin, window 2/5, trace: 50mV/div 1s/div title: M-COMP, YE n-controller
It can be clearly seen, that significantly lower error signals occur in the speed control loop.
Inertia compensation should be set as follows:
Acceleration must be normalized before inertia compensation is adjusted. To realized this, the shortest
ramp-up and ramp-down time should be entered in parameter H722.
Method A CUVC,CU2:
The basic drive converter parameter r007 (torque actual value) is monitored during acceleration and de-
celeration. In this case, the time in H722 should be set as the ramp-up and ramp-down time of the position
ramp-function generator. The average value of the accelerating torque during ramp-up and ramp-down
provides the factor for inertia compensation, i. e. the value for parameter H738.
Method B:
The speed controller (CUVC, CUMC: K152; CU2,CU3: r224) error signal is displayed on an oscilloscope.
The inertia compensation H738 is increased until the error signal when traversing, is a minimum.
Setting the inertia compensation for variable moments of inertia.
For applications with variable moments of inertia, the automatic load measurement function can be used.
In this case, the moment of inertia is automatically determined at each traversing sequence. H738 is set
with the lowest moment of inertia according to method A or B. Then, 100% is entered in H772. If load
changes are only to be partially taken into account, a value less than 100% can be entered in H772.

Manual
6 Start-up
6.3.6 Adjusting the setpoint smoothing

As the feedback loop signals are always delayed at the controller, then the corresponding set-
points/reference values must also be entered with delay. If all of the pre-controls and setpoint/reference
value smoothing factors are correctly set, the controllers must only equalize the fault quantities.
Note:
Precise setting for the setpoint smoothing functions is only necessary for extremely fast applications. Es-
sentially, the approach characteristics at the destination are influenced. The full positioning accuracy is
available, even when the smoothing factors are not set.
6.3.6.1 Setpoint smoothing for the speed controller

The influence of the setpoint smoothing for the speed controller is now shown:
Datei:posregop.bin, window 3/5, trace: 50mV/div 1s/div title: M-COMP, setpoint comparison, YE n-controller
Speed control errors can still be further improved over the setting with inertia compensation.
Setting the speed controller setpoint smoothing
The speed controller setpoint smoothing must be as high as the equivalent time constant of the torque
control loop plus the selected actual value smoothing in P223 (CUVC, CUMC) and P221+P216 (CU2).
6.3.6.2 Setpoint smoothing for the position controller

The control error of a position controller is illustrated for a traversing sequence without reference value
smoothing:
Datei:posregop.bin, window 4/5, trace: 10mV/div 1s/div title: YE pos-controller

Manual
6 Start-up
The same traversing sequence with a correctly set setpoint smoothing:
Datei:posregop.bin, window 5/5, trace: 10mV/div 1s/div title: Sollwertgl. 15ms, YE pos-controller
Setting the setpoint smoothing for the position controller

The setpoint smoothing value to be set for the position controller can only be calculated theoretically with
difficulty, as it corresponds to the equivalent time constant of the speed control loop. The time constant
can only be theoretically calculated.
In practice, the position controller control error is output on an oscilloscope via an analog output. The set-
point smoothing value is increased until the error signal is a minimum.
NOTE
After start-up has been completed, enter all of the changed parameters into the parameter list,Section 9.
Always have this parameter list as well as the software- version identification (d002) on hand if you have
any questions at a later date

Manual
6 Start-up
Free blocks can be used in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES CUVC and CUMC, to realise additional function
( logic functions with logic blocks, calculation with numeric function blocs... ).
function block. Depending on the number and frequency of the blocks to be processed, the microproces-
sor system of the units has a varying degree of utilization.
than 5 - 10%.

Manual
7.1 STRUC G graphics
The structure of a STRUC G function diagram is shown in Fig. 7.1
8...FB-position 7...columns
columns 1- 17 A-F (unused)
5...Source info.
(border strip) 5...Destination information
(border strip)
4...Field for function
8...FB-position 7...lines
lines 1-51 A-F (unused)
3...Copyright 6...Comments
field
2...STRUC documentation zone 1...Text field
Fig. 7.1 STRUC G function diagram
Explanation:
1 Text field
The text field is structured according to DIN 6771, Part 5.
2 STRUC documentation line
Information regarding the version, libraries and configuring levels are entered here.
3 Copyright and additional documentation information
4 Character field for function blocks
This is the actual function diagram. The function blocks are located in this field, arranged using position
numbers (refer to Point 8 below), and displayed with the connections and constants. The sheet
comments are also placed here.
5 Source- and destination information
Function package connections ($ signals) with source- and destination-function package names are
specified in this field where the system ID, page number and column number are specified. Further,
cross-references for communication- and hardware assignments are also provided here.
6 Comments field
Plain text comments, blocks, connectors or the signals on the border panel are entered here.
Connector attributes are also entered (,MIN=...,MAX=...,SCAL=..., etc.).
7 Sheet lines and columns
The sheet is sub-divided into 8 columns (1-8), which is taken into account when generating cross-
references. The lines (vertically, A-F) are not used.
8 FB position lines and columns
as character field, it has 17 columns and 51 lines. These allow function blocks to be positioned.

Manual
7.1.2 Block structure

There is a graphic function symbol for every function block (FB), which is used to document the FB and
the user-specific features. In addition to the input- and output signal connections, there are also signal
values specified and some of the connector attributes, which are significant for the sequence and
embedding the function block in the function package (FP).
A function block with STRUC G is illustrated in Fig. 7.2.
Function block Processing Sampling time

name sequence
Marking - for SW120 40T4
block comments Line number
in the listing
Ref. point for * NSW 127
FB positioning Connector
name
X1 N2 N2 Y
* X2 Connector
Marking - for type
connector commento
I B1
Marking - for
type changeover
Function
symbol
Fig. 7.2 STRUC G function block (example)
7.1.3 STRUC connectors

The STRUC connectors are used to supply the FB with input information and output the results to other
function blocks or peripheral boards. The connectors are identified in the FB mask via the connector name
and connector type.
A connector is supplied with a signal connection or constant, and optionally, also, with a signal ID,
attributes and comment. As not all of this information can be located in the graphics section, some
information is located in the comments field below the graphic field. A star at the connector indicates that
this information is available.
7.1.4 Cross-references
Generally, connections between FBs are shown as a line. If space is restricted, a letter (A-Z) is assigned
so that a connection can be identified. The line is continued at another position on the same sheet
(connection on the sheet).
For connections over several sheets (global connections), within the same FP, the block name, connector
name, sheet number and sheet column number are specified as source/destination information. If there is
insufficient space in the graphics field, or if there are several cross-references, then the entry is made in
the border panel (source/destination information field):
B420.QS / 3.1 ....FB name.connector name/sheet number.sheet column number
External connections (from one FP to another) are completely referenced with their symbolic names
($name) in the source/destination information field. Further, the following are also specified: The bus data
transport sampling time with bus access time, source/destination processor(s), source/destination function
package(s) with system IDs as well as sheet- and sheet column number(s):
$NREG PN T2C .... Signal name, processor-local access, bus access and data transport time
=.W30/3.1 ....System ID/sheet number.sheet column number

Manual
7.2 Symbolic monitor
7.2.1 Prerequisites
The standard software package includes a monitor program which allows all of the technological
parameters, and each connector of all the function blocks to be accessed. It uses the technology board
serial interface.
A suitable connecting cable is illustrated in the following diagram. Plug-in screw terminals („Minicombicon“
type) are used to establish the connection at the T300.
PC PG T300
COM1:/COM2: COM2: RS232 -X132
3 2 1
TxD 2 RxD
RxD 2 3 TxD
5 7 3
M 4
5
A conventional computer (PC) or a programming unit (PG) can be used as terminal. The connection is
established via the drive converter serial interface. The specified assignment can be used for a PC-AT,
otherwise it can be taken from the Manual.
The so-called IBS (start-up) program (PCP/M on the PG730/750 or with emulator under DOS), Telemaster
Service (DOS) or SIMOVIS SIMADYN Service (DOS) are suitable terminal programs.
7.2.2 Operator control

Every connector can be addressed via a so-called path name. This path name consists of the processor
number (in this case, always 1), the function package names, function block names and connector names:
#FP-fpname.fbname.conname
As an example, the following path name belongs to connector QS of block BI230 in the INPUT function
package:
1FP-INPUT.BI230.QS
The path name is also specified for every technological parameter, in the parameter list.

Manual
7.3 SIMADYN D value ranges and normalization

SIMADYN D connector types are only interesting, if the connector is accessed via the symbolic monitor.
If the parameter is accessed via a communications board, USS protocol or the drive converter operator
control panel, then the MASTER DRIVE parameter types are valid.
7.3.1 Proportional types

HEX format Standard format Integer format Ordinal format E format
V2 N2 I2 O2 E2
Significance 16-bit word % quantity Integer numbers Integer number, Extended signal
only positive
Value range 0000h...FFFFh -200%...199.99% -32768...32767 0...32767 -256.00...255.99
Resolution 0001h 0.0061% 1 1 0.0078125
V2 quantities are mainly masks to suppress or enable individual signals of a status word. The N2 format is
used for process quantities such as setpoints and actual values. I2 and O2 are integer quantities, such as,
for example, rated speeds and encoder pulse numbers, shifts by binary positions etc. The E2 quantity is
used exclusively for gains.
7.3.2 Time-dependent types

Time-dependent parameters are fractions or multiples of the sampling time. The 5 time levels T1, T2, T3,
T4 and T5 of the system define the ranges of the time-dependent parameters; they cannot be changed
and are permanently assigned the following values:

T1 5.0 [ms]
T2 20.0 [ms]
T3 40.0 [ms]
T4 160.0 [ms]
T5 320.0 [ms]
7.3.2.1 Time-proportional types

Time-proportional types implement times or time factors, which are proportional to the hexadecimal value
or the standardized quantity. However, negative values are not permissible here. A negative value entry is
rejected.
The assignment of the types is shown in the following table; the hex and standard quantity N2 types are
also included for a better understanding:
HEX format Standard format D format T format
V2 N2 D2 T2
0000h 0.0000% 0.000000xTA 0xTA
0001h 0.0061% 0.000061xTA 1xTA
0002h 0.0122% 0.000122xTA 2xTA
... ... ... ...
4000h 100.0000% 1.000000xTA 16384xTA
... ... ... ...
7FFFh 199.9939% 1.999939xTA 32767xTA

Manual
7.3.2.2 Time-reciprocal type

The reciprocal type is used when entering time constants for filters (PT1) or integration times, ramp-up
and ramp-down times etc. A special feature worth noting is that high values at the connector result in low
times and vice versa.
HEX format Standard format Reciprocal format
V2 N2 R2
0000h 0.0000% 1.000000xTA
0001h 0.0061% 16384xTA
0002h 0.0122% 8192xTA
... ... ...
3FFEh 99.9878% 1.000122xTA
3FFFh 99.9939% 1.000061xTA
4000h 100.0000% 1.000000xTA
... ... ...
7FFFh 199.9939% 1.999939xTA
When entered via the operator control panel, a time is always entered. This is also signaled back.
Knowledge regarding the internal notation is not necessary, but explains the different stages/levels for the
R2 type.

Manual

Manual
8 Application/self-study example
Introduction
This example should provide the user of the MS380 positioning control software package
- support when configuring and commissioning his drive and
- to help him understand the positioning functionality using an experimental set-up.
A linear axis as well as a rotary axis with parameterization, the necessary control signals and required
control sequence are fully described in two examples.
The examples have been selected so that they can be easily understood using a simple experimental set-
up.
It is recommended that the examples are worked through, and at the same time, the function diagrams
(refer to Section 3.9) are studied and the signal routing is entered there for the particular application.
We would like to point out, that the examples here do not represent a brief overview of this Manual, but
are only intended to help the user acquaint himself with this standard software package.
Note:
Information in square brackets refers to the function diagrams.
Example: [C2]: Reference is made to Sheet C2.
Explanations to the parameters, refer to the parameter list and relevant text part.
The examples are structured as follows:
- loop schematic
- connection diagram
- information on the equipment used
- switching sequence for all of the connected control signals
- parameterization and start-up

Manual
8.1 Linear axis

8.1.1 Loop schematic
A B
A1 R B1
A3 A2 H531=1000 H351=10 000 H541=19000 B2 B3

[C5] [C1] [C5]
Fig. 1: Loop schematic, example of a linear axis

Explanation to Fig. 1:
A3, B3: Emergency limit switch

A2, B2: Hardware limit switch
A1, B1: Software limit switch
R: Hardware reference point
A, B: Mechanical end of the traversing path
A: Zero point
- the numerical values are scaled position data, refer to H350. The loop from A to B is 20 000 units long.
- loop A2 - B2 is traversed when referencing. In addition, there is the braking distance between A2, A3
and B2, B3 when the drive brakes after passing A2 or B2. It is not permissible that A3 and B3 are
reached.
- actual positioning operation is only possible between A1 and B1. Reference values which extend
beyond this range, are rejected, and an appropriate status message is output (visualization parameter
d069, bits 0 and 1). The drive stays at the old position until a reference value, located within the range
A1 - B1 is entered.

Manual
8.1.2 Connecting-up example

P24
S IMOV E RT
X6.
X 5.535 Pulse
e ncode r
T300 M
6 10
Reference point se nsing [A 6] 630
via contact or M
proxim ity sw itch M 640
Pulse encoder signals 639
from C U P24
External P24
Drive has
refe renced
K45 d050
Ref. val. selection X6.
[A4]
20 608 H900=9 1[A4 ,B9] 63 1
H46 1=45
1 H462= 180H [C2] H90 1= 10H[A4]
2 6 11
H463=7
Drive has
positioned
Se lect trave rsing d05 1

data set, posi- H902=22 1[A4 ,D5] 632
tion ref. values H903= 1000H[A4]
Ref. value enable O pe n

607 brake
H464=45
H465=40H [C2] H904=89[A4 ,B5] 633
Referencing
606 H905=2000H[A4]
H300=45
HW lim it sw itch B2 H30 1=20H [B6] v=0
603
H230=45
[B2]
HW lim it sw itch A2 H23 1=4 H H906=79[A4 ,A 10] 634
602 H907=8H[A4]
H228=45
H229=2H [B2]
Control on T300
H202=45 Speed setpoint

H203= 1H [B2] S uppl. torq ue
On/off
setpoint *
60 1
H200=45 factor
[B1]
H20 1= 1H Kp adaption *
Z SW 1
Emerg. lim it sw itch A 3 604 Speed
H232=45 Z SW 2 actual value
H233=8H [B2]
STW 1 Torque
Emerg. lim it sw itch B3 605 actual value
H234=45 STW 2
H235= 10H [B2] [A 1]
1 [A 2]
X 10 1:C U2 ,C U3 X 10 1:C UV C ,C UM C
16 7 P24
P559 .1= 100 1 P559 .1= 18 +24V
A cknow ledge 8 (<0,15A )
17
fault P560 .1= 1002 P560 .1=20
M M 24
18 P556 .1= 1003 6 P556 .1= 16
C U2 X 103 35 36 37 38 40 X 104
CU
C UV C X 103 23 24 25 26 28 X4 14
M K1 K2 K0 P 15
1 :
Refe r to Fig . 3
1
* :
Refer to information
to C U3 ERN M
O nly C UV C/
138 7 O nly C U MC/ 3~
C U3
C U2
Fig . 2
Co nnect ing-up d iag ram fo r a n ex am ple of a linea r ax is U V W

Manual
Connecting-up example, emergency limit switch, emergency off and fast stop
P24 X6.
-A3 604
Ex pla natio ns :
-A 3 : E m e rg e ncy lim it sw itc h A 3
-B3 605
- B3 : E m e rg e ncy lim it sw itc h B3
- K 1: E m e rg e ncy off co nta cto r
-B3 -A3 -S 1: Fast sto p fo r sta rt- up
C U2 , C U3 C UV C , C MC
-K1 -S1 X101. X 101.
16 7
17 8
Fig . 3 a
Connecting-up example, brake control

P24 O pen
bra ke -B3 -A3 -K1 -S1
Explanations:
-A3: Emergency limit switch A3
-B3: Emergency limit switch B3 M
-K1: Emergency off contactor 3~
-S1: Fast stop for start-up
Fig. 3b U V W
- functions which are not required, can be omitted by using the appropriate parameterization.
Example: Emergency limit switches A3, B3 are not required: H232=0; H233=0; H234=0, H235=0. Use
Fast stop (off3) terminal X101.16, and X101.7 (P559=1).
- Fig. 2 is also valid for CU3, CUMC as well as for CU2, CUVC.
- for outputs which are not connected to loads (without contactor coils etc.), the supply voltage to control
the inputs can be taken from the basic drive converter.
- please refer to the relevant Instruction Manual when connecting-up the power section and motor.
- *
: Information to CU3:
Kp adaption function factor: See section 6.1.2.
Supplementary torque setpoint: Generally not required for CU3.
- for the linear axis the reference signal is taken from a switch. When the encoder zero pulse is used,
H150 should be appropriately parameterized. In conjunction with a resolver on the motor, it is practical
that the reference signal is only taken from a switch.

Manual
8.1.3 Equipment used in this particular example

This example can be tried out with any type VC and MC/SC drive converter/inverter as well as any
suitable motor.
- drive converter: 6SE7021 8EB10, input voltage 380 to 460V, In=17,5A.
- motor: 1LA5106-4AA60; 400V; 5,2A; 1420RPM; cosϕ=0.82, pulse encoder: 1XP8001-1/1024.
8.1.4 Switching sequences
Note:
- fault/error messages must be acknowledged and the on/off command must be withdrawn. Only then is
the unit ready to be powered-up again.
- when using OFF2/ OFF3, these signals must be available again before OFF1/ ON (on/ off, X6.601) are
input. In the example, OFF 3 is used via terminals X101.16, 17 (CU2,CU3) and X101.7,8
(CUVC,CUMC).
- not all of the possible signal combinations have been shown. Additional signal combinations can be
taken from the function diagram.
The switching sequences for the signals used in the example are subsequently listed.
8.1.4.1 Referencing with subsequent shutdown
The control signal characteristics when referencing are shown, as an example, in Fig. 4.
Prerequisites, which are not shown:

- the motion sequence when referencing can be taken from Section 3.5.
- by withdrawing the on/ off command, the referencing motion can be terminated at any time, also by
withdrawing referencing.
Potential fault/error causes:

- the reference point was not found when passing A2 and B2. The drive shuts down, fault F128 is
displayed. Bit 15 of d045 is set.

Manual
Control signal characteristics when referencing in the example.

O n/ off
com m and
R eferencing
com m and
S ignal,
drive converter
operational
S ignal,
drive has
referenced
D rive
spe ed
R eference point
identified
D rive is ready
to be positioned
t
F ig. 4: C ontrol signal characteristics w hen referencing in th e exam ple

Manual
8.1.4.2 Positioning operation, illustrated in Fig. 5.

The control signal characteristics when positioning is illustrated, as example, in Fig. 5.
Prerequisites, which are not shown:

- terminals X101.16, 17 (CU2,CU3) and X101.7, 8 (CUVC,CUMC): H signal present.
terminals X6.604, 605: Low signal present.
- no fault condition.
- the control is ready for positioning.
Potential fault/error causes:

- position reference value input is greater than the limits specified by A1, B1; refer to d069, bits 0 and 1.
- drive has not referenced, and is not ready for positioning; refer to Fig. 4
Information:
- immediately after the on/ off command, the drive moves to the position displayed in d052, if referencing
was previously carried-out.
- if the position reference value was not enabled directly after referencing when the on/ off command is
entered, the drive moves to the position which corresponds to the software limit A1.
- when the on/ off command is withdrawn, the drive is shutdown, speed-controlled (ramp-down time
H760), function diagram [D4]. When on/ off is again given, the interrupted positioning travel is
continued if the drive is otherwise unchanged.

Manual
Signal characteristics when positioning, example.

O n/ off
com m and
R eference value
enable
S ignal,
drive converter
operational
R eference value
selection
R e f. 1 R ef. 2 R ef. 3
t
D rive has
positioned
O pen
brake
D rive
speed
t
P osition A ct. 2
actual value,
drive
A ct. 1 A ct. 3
S W lim .
A1
t
F ig. 5: S ignal characteristics w hen positioning

Manual
8.1.5 Parameterization and start-up

- the procedure at start-up is the same as in Section 6.
After T300 logs-on, H280 should be set to FFFA, and only then can operating status 4, hardware
setting, be exited.
- parameterization, basic drive converter:

Parameterization and start-up, basic drive converter, refer to Section 6.1.
Supplementary information for this example:
General parameters: P352 (CUVC) / P420 (CU2)=50Hz; P452=60Hz; P453=-60Hz; P466=1s;
P492=100%; P498=-100%.
Note: P352 (CUVC) / P420 (CU2), P452, P453 refer to the machine used here.
Open-loop control: P566.1=1003 (CU2, CU3) and P566.1=16 (CUVC, CUMC).
Controller optimization, deviates from the motor identification at standstill P235 (CUVC) and P225
(CU2)=4.83.
Entries regarding the motor and pulse encoder corresponding to the basic drive converter Instruction
Manual.
- parameterizing T300 with MS380:

The subsequently described parameterization refers to the example.
Refer to Section 6.3 when commissioning T300.
Comment: The list was generated using SIMOVIS, and was transferred into text file with just a
minimum of layout changes. We recommend that the print-out is made with a non-proportional font.
Procedure:
Generate a comparison file from the file with the factory settings and file with modified parameters.
Generate a file which can be printed.
Refer to the SIMOVIS Instruction Manual for additional information.

Manual
List of the modified parameters for the example:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------
SIEMENS List of download parameters Date: 15.04.1996
file: LA1504V.T1D
Note: This list can include parameters
which are not provided in the parameter list
Par No. Ind Value Dimension Parameter name
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
01150 000 1044H HW_MODE_PG1 ____
01152 000 1500 NOM_RPM_PG1 ____
01153 000 32768 NOM_LENGTH_PG1 ____
01200 000 45 SRC_DRIVE_ON ____
01201 000 0001H MSK_DRIVE_ON ____
01202 000 45 SRC_DRIVE_STOP ____
01203 000 0001H MSK_DRIVE_STOP ____
01204 000 4 SRC_DRV_EL-OFF ____
01205 000 0001H MSK_DRV_EL-OFF ____
01206 000 4 SRC_DRV_FSTSTP ____
01207 000 0001H MSK_DRV_FSTSTP ____
01228 000 45 SRC_SWITCH_A2 ____
01229 000 0002H MSK_SWITCH_A2 ____
01230 000 45 SRC_SWITCH_B2 ____
01231 000 0004H MSK_SWITCH_B2 ____
01232 000 45 SRC_SWITCH_A3 ____
01233 000 0008H MSK_SWITCH_A3 ____
01234 000 45 SRC_SWITCH_B3 ____
01235 000 0010H MSK_SWITCH_B3 ____
01240 000 1 EN_MEC_BRK ____
01280 000 FFFAH MSK_EN_FAULTS ____
01300 000 45 SRC_MODE_REF_STP____
01301 000 0020H MSK_MODE_REF_STP____
01304 000 0 SRC_REF_ALWAYS ____
01350 000 20000 SCAL_POSREG ____
01351 000 10000 POSITION_REFPNT ____
01360 000 354 SRC_PREF_VAR ____
01361 000 2500 PREF_1 ____
01362 000 10000 PREF_2 ____
01363 000 15000 PREF_3 ____
01461 000 45 SRC_SEL_PREF ____
01462 000 0180H MSK_SEL_PREF ____
01463 000 7 SHIFT_SEL_PREF ____
01464 000 45 SRC_EN_PREF ____
01465 000 0040H MSK_EN_PREF ____
01531 000 1000 SW_SWITCH_A1_1 ____
01541 000 19000 SW_SWITCH_B1_1 ____
01601 000 199.999 ms TU_PRAMP_1 ____
01611 000 20.000 ms TR_PRAMP_1 ____
01621 000 199.999 ms TD_PRAMP_1 ____
01641 000 99.993 ms TD_RAMP_A2_1 ____
01651 000 99.993 ms TD_RAMP_B2_1 ____
01684 000 1000 REF_FIX_INTDW_1 ____
01720 000 315.000 ms INT_TIME_PRAMP ____
01722 000 199.999 ms SCL_ACCELERATION____
01732 000 20.001 % POSREG_LU ____
01733 000 -20.001 % POSREG_LL ____
01734 000 8.000 POSREG_KP ____
01738 000 100.000 % ACCEL_COMP ____
01742 000 2 LIM_POSITION_OK ____
01743 000 0 HY_POSITION_OK ____
01744 000 0.0 ms DELAY_POS_OK ____
01760 000 199.987 ms TD_VRAMP ____
01761 000 199.987 ms TU_VRAMP ____
===========================================================================
Page: 1
===========================================================================

Manual
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
SIEMENS List of download parameters Date: 15.04.1996
file: LA1504V.T1D
Note: This list can include parameters
which are not provided in the parameter list
Par No. Ind Value Dimension Parameter name
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
01851 000 70 SRC_DSP_PSCAL ____
01900 000 91 SRC_BQ1 ____
01901 000 0010H MSK_BQ1 ____
01902 000 221 SRC_BQ2 ____
01903 000 1000H MSK_BQ2 ____
01904 000 89 SRC_BQ3 ____
01905 000 2000H MSK_BQ3 ____
01906 000 79 SRC_BQ4 ____
01907 000 0008H MSK_BQ4 ____
===========================================================================
Page: 2
===========================================================================
Note:
The drive converter must be powered-down after parameters have been entered, so that the initialization
parameters can be accepted.
8.2 Example of a basic roll feed

A roll feed involves an endlessly rotating rotary axis, which continues to rotate through a specific angle,
which can be set, when a control signal edge is received. This means that material is still transported (e.g.
sheet steel, cardboard, wire). An example of such a mechanical layout is provided in Section 1.6.3 and in
the following diagram.
The roll feed function requires an edge-controlled control signal for "inching" to move this feed length (in
addition to the usual on commands). The software identifies counter overflows down to accuracy of an
increment, and they are therefore unimportant for the user. The feed length can be permanently
parameterized or, for example changed via PROFIBUS-DP. The feed length can be changed at any time
with the roll stationary.

Manual
8.2.1 System schematic
Automation system
CB1
PROFIBUS-DP
T300
M
3~
Process
level
Gearbox 1:4
Basic roll feed e.g. Press
Feed length
Roll diameter, 0.2 m
Fig. 1
Note
- This example can only be quickly and smoothly commissioned if Section 6, Start-up is carefully
observed and followed.
- Square brackets in the text refer to the block diagram, Section 3.9.
Comments:
- The example includes the complete parameterization of the basic roll feed with instructions for
configuring and start-up.
- In this example, signals are also received via PROFIBUS. The user can connect, for example, binary
signals to the T300 instead of transmitting them via the bus. The OFF3 command (fast stop) can also
be directly connected at the basic drive converter.
- After this example has been worked-through, the user can configure a basic roll feed and commission
it.

Manual
8.2.2 Setpoints and actual values as well as control- and status signal,
PROFIBUS telegram structure
PROFIBUS telegram structure:
Automation system → Drive Drive → Automation system
Word Description Parameter- Word Description Parameter-
ization ization
1 Control word refer below 1 Status word 1 from the H961=10
CU
2 Feed length, high word H360=27 2 Position actual value, H962=74
high word
3 Feed length, low word 3 Position actual value, H963=75
low word
4 Not used 4 Positioning status word, H964=258
refer below
5 Not used 5 Not used
6 Not used 6 Not used
Assignment, control word:

Bit Control word Parameterization
0 On/no stop (OFF1) H200=26, H201=1; H202=26,, H203=1
1 No elec. off (OFF2) H204=26, H205=2
2 No fast stop (OFF3) H206=26, H207=4
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 Enable feed length H464=26, H465=40
(position reference value)
7 Error acknowledgment H212=26, H213=80
8 Inching 1 H214=26, H215=100
9 Inching 2 H216=26, H217=200
10 Control from the automation
system, always = 1!
11 Not used
12 Inching H472=26, H473=1000
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 Not used
Assignment of the positioning status word with bit 0 to 6.

The positioning status word is generated using the freely-definable status word [E3].
Bit Positioning status word [source] Parameterization, Binary outputs
freely-definable
status word Terminal Parameterization
0 Drive has positioned [D5] H860=221, H861=1000 X6.631 H900=221, H901=1000
1 Speed-controlled operation H862=221, H863=200 X6.632 H902=221, H903=200
(Inching 1 or 2) [D5]
2 Position control (roll feed) enabled H864=221, H865=100 X6.633 H904=221, H905=100
[D5]
3 Following error > tolerance [D5] H866=221, H867=1 X6.634 H906=221, H907=1
4 Speed actual value = 0 [A10] H868=79, H869=8 X6.635 H908=79, H909=8
5 Drive converter operational [A1] H870=10, H871=4 X6.636 H910=10, H911=4
6 Drive converter ready to power-up H872=10, H873=1 X6.637 H912=10, H913=1
The status bits of the positioning status word are connected in parallel to the binary outputs.
24 V may only be connected to terminals X6:639 (P24) and X6.640 (M) when the binary outputs of the
T300 are used. In this case, the current drain is approximately 80 mA. This voltage can also be taken from
the basic drive converter.
Manual
8.2.3 Drive converters used in this example

- drive converter 6SE7016-1EA20, line supply voltage 380 to 460V, rated output current 6,1A.
- motor: 1LA5106-4AA60; 400V; 5,2A; 1420 RPM; cosϕ=0.82 with
pulse encoder 1XP8001-1, 1024 pulses/revolution.
Comments:
- in the example, the rated system speed is 1500 RPM with P352/P420 = 50 Hz and H152 = 1500 RPM.
- we would like to point out, that this example can be tried with any type VC, MC and SC drive
converter/inverter and any suitable motor.
8.2.4 Switching sequences

Notes:
- fault/error messages must be acknowledged and the on/no stop command (inching 1 and inching 2)
must be removed. Only then can the drive converter be powered-up again.
- when using OFF2/ OFF3, these signals must be present before OFF1/ ON is issued.
- not all of the possible signal combinations are shown. Please refer to the function diagram, Section 3.3
for additional signal combinations.
- the switching sequences are based on the parameterization, described in Section 8.2.5.
- the rounding-off for speed-up and -down ramps are not shown in the diagrams.
The switching sequences for the signals used in the example of the roll feed, are subsequently specified.

Manual
Switching sequence, speed-control inching 1 and 2
Commands
Off2, Off3
t
Command
Inching 1
t
Command
Inching 2
t
Signal,
drive is ready
to be powered-up H24 5 H 24 5 H 24 5
t
D r iv e
sp e e d
H 753
H 76 1 H 760
t
H 7 54
Fig. 4
Fig. 8.2.4.1, Inching

Manual
Switching sequence, basic roll feed
Commands: Fast stop (Off3), no elec. OFF (OFF2),

setpoint enable, control from the automation unit
t
Command
On/no stop
t
Command,
inch forwards
t
Signal, drive
converter operational
t
Signal,
speed-controlled operation
t
Signal,
position control enabled
t
Signal,
drive has positioned
t
Drive
speed H 55 1
H 60 1 H 62 1 H 760
H 6 11
Sp e ed len gth t
Fig. 5
Fig. 8.2.4.2, Basic roll feed
Note
The edge for the inch forwards command should only be issued when the position reached signal is
present.

Manual
8.2.5 Complete parameterization

It is assumed that you are completely knowledgeable about Section 6.
Here is an explanation of the most important parameters:

- H153:
We recommend that the maximum count range of the pulse encoder sensing is fully utilized:
H153 = 1 073 741 824 (= 2 to the power of 30).
- H719/ H720, integration time:
Integration time =(1000 ms / s) x H153 / [(4 x H151) x (H152 / 60s)] = 10 485 760 ms
H714
The integration time is: 2 x H720
No values > 1 500 000 can be entered in H720. ⇒H720 = 10 485 760 / 8 = 1 310 720.
H720 = 1 310 720
H719 = 3 ( 2³ = 8).
- H350
If the feed setpoint is entered in increments, the same value should be entered into H350 as in H153.
- H541, software limit switch B1
H541 = H153.
- H731, H734, controller optimization
Due to the large count range, a high kp of the position controller must be set. In this example,
12
kp = H731 x H734 = 2 x 100 = 409 600.
The complete list of changed parameters for the example "basic roll feed" is subsequently provided,
starting from the factory setting. A brief description of how this list can be generated from SIMOVIS is
briefly explained in Section 8.1.5.

Manual
---------------------------------------------------------------------
SIEMENS List of download parameters Datum: 27.08.1997
File: WVS.T3D
Note: This list can include parameters,
which are not in the parameter list
Par-No Ind Value Dimension parameter designation
---------------------------------------------------------------------
01135 000 0 EN_SAV_PG1 ____
01152 000 1500 NOM_RPM_PG1 ____
01153 000 1073741824 NOM_LENGTH_PG1 ____
01200 000 26 SRC_DRIVE_ON ____
01201 000 0001H MSK_DRIVE_ON ____
01202 000 26 SRC_DRIVE_STOP ____
01203 000 0001H MSK_DRIVE_STOP ____
01204 000 26 SRC_DRV_EL-OFF ____
01205 000 0002H MSK_DRV_EL-OFF ____
01206 000 26 SRC_DRV_FSTSTP ____
01207 000 0004H MSK_DRV_FSTSTP ____
01212 000 26 SRC_FAULT_ACK ____
01213 000 0080H MSK_FAULT_ACK ____
01214 000 26 SRC_JOG1V ____
01215 000 0100H MSK_JOG1V ____
01216 000 26 SRC_JOG2V ____
01217 000 0200H MSK_JOG2V ____
01280 000 FFFBH MSK_EN_FAULTS ____
01304 000 0 SRC_REF_ALWAYS ____
01350 000 1073741824 SCAL_POSREG ____
01353 000 1 MODE_RNDX ____
01360 000 27 SRC_PREF_VAR ____
01461 000 0 SRC_SEL_PREF ____
01464 000 26 SRC_EN_PREF ____
01465 000 0040H MSK_EN_PREF ____
01468 000 4 SRC_MOD_RELPOS ____
01469 000 0001H MSK_MOD_RELPOS ____
01471 000 0001H MSK_DIR_RELPOS ____
01472 000 26 SRC_MOVE_RELPOS ____
01473 000 1000H MSK_MOVE_RELPOS ____
01474 000 0 KEEP_MEM_RELPOS ____
01541 000 1073741824 SW_SWITCH_B1_1 ____
01601 000 100.000 ms TU_PRAMP_1 ____
01621 000 100.000 ms TD_PRAMP_1 ____
01702 000 4 SRC_EN_PC_X2 ____
01703 000 0001H MSK_EN_PC_X2 ____
01706 000 4 SRC_DIRECT_RNDX ____
01707 000 0001H MSK_DIRECT_RNDX ____
01719 000 3 EXP_FACTOR_TI ____
01720 000 1310720.000 ms INT_TIME_PRAMP ____
01731 000 12 KP1_POSREG ____
01734 000 100.000 POSREG_KP ____
01742 000 4 LIM_POSITION_OK ____
01743 000 1 HY_POSITION_OK ____
01753 000 4.999 % V_REF_JOG1V ____
01760 000 1000.549 ms TD_VRAMP ____
01761 000 1000.549 ms TU_VRAMP ____
01848 000 258 SRC_DSP_V2 ____
01860 000 221 SRC_STW_BIT0 ____
01861 000 1000H MSK_STW_BIT0 ____
01862 000 221 SRC_STW_BIT1 ____
01863 000 0200H MSK_STW_BIT1 ____
01864 000 221 SRC_STW_BIT2 ____
01865 000 0100H MSK_STW_BIT2 ____
=====================================================================
Page: 1

Manual
---------------------------------------------------------------------
SIEMENS List of download parameters Datum: 27.08.1997
File: WVS.T3D
Note: This list can include parameters,
which are not in the parameter list
Par-No Ind Value Dimension parameter designation
---------------------------------------------------------------------
01866 000 221 SRC_STW_BIT3 ____
01867 000 0001H MSK_STW_BIT3 ____
01868 000 79 SRC_STW_BIT4 ____
01869 000 0008H MSK_STW_BIT4 ____
01870 000 10 SRC_STW_BIT5 ____
01871 000 0004H MSK_STW_BIT5 ____
01872 000 10 SRC_STW_BIT6 ____
01873 000 0001H MSK_STW_BIT6 ____
01900 000 221 SRC_BQ1 ____
01901 000 1000H MSK_BQ1 ____
01902 000 221 SRC_BQ2 ____
01903 000 0200H MSK_BQ2 ____
01904 000 221 SRC_BQ3 ____
01905 000 0100H MSK_BQ3 ____
01906 000 221 SRC_BQ4 ____
01907 000 0001H MSK_BQ4 ____
01908 000 79 SRC_BQ5 ____
01909 000 0008H MSK_BQ5 ____
01910 000 10 SRC_BQ6 ____
01911 000 0004H MSK_BQ6 ____
01912 000 10 SRC_BQ7 ____
01913 000 0001H MSK_BQ7 ____
01961 000 10 SRC_CB_WORD_1 ____
01962 000 74 SRC_CB_WORD_2 ____
01963 000 75 SRC_CB_WORD_3 ____
01964 000 258 SRC_CB_WORD_4 ____
=====================================================================
Page: 2
=====================================================================

Manual
8.2.6 Brief start-up instructions
Warning
The relevant safety regulations of the Machinery Directive (DIN EN 954/1) and Safety of Machines (DIN
EN 1037) against unexpected starting must be observed. For example, it should be noted that the drive,
under fault conditions, can rotate in the opposite direction to the required material web direction, or
excessive feed lengths can occur.
The safety devices used must conform to the safety regulations and include, for example, limit switches
or opto-barriers, which can act on the following equipment:
- Mechanical brake
- Electrical equipment to disconnect the line- or motor-side supply voltage
- Safety off, if available
Further, the following should be observed:
- The switch for the stop function must be able to be reached, and for example, act on the above
mentioned equipment. The effectiveness of this switch must be guaranteed and checked before
start-up (commissioning)!
- All warning information of Section 6 must be followed as long as they involve the roll feed.
- Start-up should be executed as described in Section 6.

- Especially all parameters, which are in the parameter lists of Section 6.1.1, must be completely
entered, depending on the drive converter type!
- Further, Section 6.2 is valid, as long as it involves this application. As it involves in this case a rotary
axis, generally there are no limit switches which directly involve the closed-loop position control.
- Finally, enter parameters of Section 8.2.5, complete parameterization.
- After the T300 has been parameterized, power-down the drive converter and power-up again. This is
also true, if an initialization parameter was changed; refer to the parameter list and function diagrams.

Manual
8.2.7 Possible faults/errors and counter-measures

- Faults from F116 to F131 involve the T300, the remaining faults, the basic drive.
- General fault messages:
Refer to Section 1.8.
Check whether the parameterization is complete and correct.
- Tracking error F121, possible causes:
Incorrect controller optimization (H719, H720; H731, H734) or
a new feed length is entered and transferred during operation, or the drive cannot follow the setpoint.
For example, this can be due to accelerating times which are too short (H601, H621) or
the drive is blocked, or cannot freely move.
During inching forwards, re-enter the "inch forwards" command.
- Drive incorrectly positioned:
Error in the actual value sensing, e.g. noise due to poorly routed encoder cables or
feed length > 0.5 x (4 x H153)
- The drive cannot be commissioned or behaves erratically:
Check the parameterization of the basic drive converter and T300 with positioning control.
If required, establish the factory setting for the basic drive converter and T300 and re-parameterize.
- Drive moves briefly at power-on ("on/no stop" command):
Enter the setpoint enable (bit 6, control word)
- The operating mode cannot be selected:
Only change the operating mode (inching, on/no stop for positioning) in the status "drive converter
ready to be powered-up).

Manual
8.3 Software example with communications

The use of the positioning software package for an actual example will now follow.
8.3.1 System configuration

The following configuration is assumed in the example:
A slide is moved using toothed belts. The complete traversing distance is 20m. The motor is coupled to
the drive roll through a 1:10 gearbox. The reference value is entered from the automation system via
PROFIBUS. Reference values should be entered with a 0.1mm resolution. Power-on, standard stop, fast
stop, inching as well as fault acknowledgement should be realized via PROFIBUS. The assignment of
these control signals in the control word should be oriented to the control word assignment of the basic
drive converter.
M ax. m echanical traversing distance
20m
2m
50cm 50cm
20cm 20cm
10cm S lide 10cm
E m ergency lim it sw itch B 3

E m ergency lim it sw itch A 3
H W lim it sw itch A 2
H W lim it sw itch B 2
S W lim it sw itch A 1
S W lim it sw itch B 1
M ech. endstop B
M ech. endstop A
R eference point
Technical data:
Gearbox: ................................... 1:10
Drive roll diameter:.................... 300 mm
Max. traversing velocity ............ 4 m/s
2
Max. acceleration...................... 2 m/s

Manual
8.3.2 Parameterization
The unit parameterization is now listed. The procedure is oriented to the Start-up Guide.
Step 1: Defining the binary inputs

In the first step, it is defined as to which signals are directly connected to the technology board via the
SE300 interface board. These are all fast signals, and signals which are irrelevant for the automation
system.
In the software example, the limit switches are directly connected to binary inputs 1 to 4. The reference
signal is directly connected to the pulse encoder input (instantaneous input). The binary input assignment
is shown in the overview on Sheet 2.
Step 2: Defining the telegram data transfer

The PROFIBUS profile should be PPO type 4. With this PPO type, 6 process data can be transferred in
both directions. The PROFIBUS telegram should be structured as follows:
Automation → drive Drive → automation
Word Description Word Description
1 Control word 1 Status word
2 Position ref. value, high word 2 Position act. value, high word
3 Position ref. value, low word 3 Position act. value, low word
4 4
5 5
6 6
The control word from the automation system to the drive should be assigned as follows.
Bit Description
0 On/ no stop (OFF1)
1 No electrical off (OFF2)
2 No fast stop (OFF3)
3
4
5
6 Reference value enable
7 Fault/error acknowledgement
8 Inching 1
9 Request flying referencing
10 Control from PLC
11
12
13
14
15

Manual
The status word from the drive to the automation system should be assigned as follows
Bit Description
0
1
2 Operation
3 Fault/error
4 Drive has positioned
5 Drive has referenced
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Step 3: Parameterization of the safety functions

The emergency limit switches must be directly connected to the basic drive converter.
P559 EMERGENCY limit switch A3 CUVC, CUMC: Value 0018 = Binary input 5
CU2, CU3: Value 1001 = Binary input 1 to
Value 1005 = Binary input 5
P560 EMERGENCY limit switch B3 CUVC, CUMC: Value 0020 = Binary input 6
CU2, CU3: Value 1001 = Binary input 1 to
Value 1005 = Binary input 5
Step 4: Parameterization, pulse encoder sensing
H150 HW mode, pulse encoder 1 H150=0040 (tracks A, B from the CU via LBA)
H151 Pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 1 H151=1024
H152 Rated speed, pulse encoder 1 m
4⋅
n= s ⋅ 10 ⋅ 60 ⋅ s = 2546.47 ⋅ 1
π ⋅ 0.3 ⋅ m min min
H152=2546
H153 Normalization, position actual value 1 20 ⋅ m
Pulse = ⋅ 1024 ⋅ 4 ⋅ 10 = 869198.19
π ⋅ 0.3 ⋅ m
H152=869198

Manual
Step 5: Parameterization, reference value generation
H720 Integration time of the position control Nominal_ length 20 ⋅ m

Ti = = = 5⋅s
Rated_ velocity m
4⋅
s
H720=5000ms
H350 Scaling, position control H350=200000

H351 Reference point position H351=20000
H360 Source, variable position reference value H360=27 (CB receive word 2)
Position ref. value, high word in K027
Position ref. value, low word in K028
H531 Software limit switch A1 H531=5000
H541 Software limit switch B1 H541=195000
H601 Ramp-up time, position ramp-function m
4⋅
generator s = 2⋅s
Tu =
m
2⋅ 2
s
H601=2000[ms]
H611 Rounding-off time constant, pos. RFG H611=100[ms]
H621 Ramp-down time, position ramp-function Same setting as for H601
generator H621=2000[ms]
H641 Down ramp A2 2 ⋅ 0.2 ⋅ m
TA = = 0.1 ⋅ s
m
4⋅
s
H641=100[ms]
H651 Down ramp B2 H651=100[ms]
H760 Ramp-up time, speed-controlled mode H760=5000[ms]
H761 Ramp-down time, speed-controlled mode H761=5000[ms]
H722 Normalization, acceleration H722=2000[ms] (=lowest ramp-up/ramp-down time)
Step 6: Parameterization, open-loop control
H200/ Power-up H200=26 (CB receive word 1)

H201 H201=0001h (bit 0)
H202/ Standard stop (OFF1) H202=26 (CB receive word 1)
H203 H203=0001h (bit 0)
H204/ Electrical off (OFF2) H204=26 (CB receive word 1)
H205 H205=0002h (bit 1)
H206/ Fast stop (OFF3) H206=26 (CB receive word 1)
H207 H207=0004h (bit 2)
H212/ Fault acknowledgement H214=26 (CB receive word 1)
H213 H215=0080h (bit 7)
H214/ Inching 1, speed-controlled H214=26 (CB receive word 1)
H215 H215=0100h (bit 8)

Manual
Step 7: Parameterization, referencing control
H228/ Hardware limit switch A2 H228=45 (binary inputs)

H229 H229=0002h (input 2)
H230/ Hardware limit switch B2 H228=45 (binary inputs)
H231 H229=0008h (input 4)
H302/ Flying referencing H302=26 (CB receive word 1)
H303 H303=0200h (bit 9)
H330 V set for the referencing direction A→B H330=2%
H332 V set for the referencing direction B→A H332=-2%
Step 8: Parameterization, checkback signals
H864/ Freely-definable status word, bit 2 H864=10 (status word 1 from CU)
H865 H865=0004h (operating checkback signal)
H866/ Freely-definable status word, bit 3 H866=10 (status word 1 from CU)
H867 H867=0008h (drive faulted)
H868/ Freely-definable status word, bit 4 H868=221 (status word, position control)
H869 H869=1000h (drive has positioned)
H870/ Freely-definable status word, bit 5 H870=91 (status word, referencing control)
H871 H871=0010h (drive has referenced)
H961 Send word 1 to CB H961=258 (freely-definable status word)
H962 Send word 2 to CB H962=074 (position actual value, high word)
H963 Send word 3 to CB H963=074 (position actual value, low word)

Manual
8.4 Connecting a pulse-serial absolute value encoder to the pulse encoder input
8.4.1 Reason for the application
When using pulse-serial absolute value encoders, the reference motion required for conventional pulse
encoders is no longer required. The encoder can be connected to the T300, and is supported by the
standard positioning software package positioning.
8.4.2 Mode of operation when the reference motion is replaced

- The pulse-serial absolute encoder sends, when requested by a control command, a number of pulses
corresponding to its actual position. The pulses have the so-called data load frequency and are
hooked-up to the position actual value counter of the T300. After the pulses have been transmitted, the
actual position is available for the closed-loop position control.
- Controlling the send/receive process:
T300 generates the required control sequence.This normally occurs when the power supply is
switched on (Standard case, H320 = 0). The pulse transmit process may also be started at any time by
the use of an external command, providing that the inverter inhibit command is valid and v =0 (zero
speed).
- Characteristics as for „standard“ positioning operation:
The positioning command operates the same as for a standard pulse encoder.
8.4.3 Location, additional measuring systems which can be connected,

dimension drawing
Can be used as
- mounted encoder on the machine (preferred operating mode) or
- encoder mounted on the motor
- pulse-serial linear encoders are also supported by the T300/ MS380.
- Dimension drawing, refer to Section 11, Appendix A.
Note:
Refer to Section 8.4.10 for the possibilities of mounting the encoders onto Siemens motors
8.4.4 Features of the incremental-serial absolute value encoder

Data according to TR-Electronic, Status 1/97. If in doubt, the data of TR-Electronic are valid.
- Encoder type: CE-65-M with push-pull output, 11 to 27V, Item No.: 110-01336. The number ma change
if customer parameterization via TR-Electronic is carried out.
Refer to the order data for information about the manufacturer.
- Max. 1024 pulses/revolution (÷4096 steps/revolution.), max. 4096 revolutions can be stored, which
corresponds to a max. 24 bit resolution
Factory setting: 1024 pulses/revolution (corresponds to 4096 steps), 4096 revolutions
- Counting direction is the clockwise direction/counter-clockwise direction (clockwise-/counter-clockwise
rotation); this can be set
Factory setting: Increasing in the clockwise direction.
- Preset 1 and preset 2:
Factory setting: Preset value 1 = 0. Preset value 2: 2 .
When actuating the binary signal from preset 1 or 2, the encoder has the absolute position of the
preset value.
Binary signals, preset 1, 2: The polarity of the edge and response delay can be set.
Factory setting: The preset value is transferred with the rising edge after a delay time has expired.
Delay time: Factory setting: 50ms, this can be set from 10 to 255ms.
- Operating voltage 11 to 27V, power consumption 2W (approximately corresponds to 140mA at 15V
and 90mA at 24V) plus the current corresponding to the current requirements of the outputs (max.
approx. 200mA corresponding to the cable length and maximum frequency).
Manual
- Output voltage at K1, K2 is approximately the same as the operating voltage; output current per
channel, 100mA.
- Current requirements of the control inputs <5mA at 24V.
- Data load output, max. output current ≤100mA
- Operating speed <3000 RPM
- Max. output frequency = data load frequency
- The data load frequency can be set between 2kHz and 115kHz.
Factory setting: 14.9kHz
4 2
- Max. angular acceleration: 10 rad/s
8.4.5 Ordering and engineering information

8.4.5.1 General ordering information
- The encoders should be ordered from TR-Electronic GmbH, Eglishalde 6, D-78647 Trossingen, Tel:
++49-7425/228-0, Fax: -33.
- Additional technical data and options for the encoder types and linear encoder, should also be inquired
from TR-Electronic.
- Encoder parameterization
Refer to Section 8.4.5.2 for the quantities which must be parameterized
* When appropriately ordered, TR-Electronic will parameterize the encoder.
* A handheld device (PT-100) as well as a PC program (EPROG) to parameterize the encoder is

available for the user. An interface adapter is required when using EPROG with a PC/ PG.
- A clamp for CE-65-M, may be required when mounting
- Encoder power supply 15V, ±5%, 1A. A 24V power supply may also be used if the cable length does
not exceed 50m and a low output frequency (<25kHz) is used. The power for the encoder should not
be taken from the general 24V cabinet power supply.
8.4.5.2 Ordering and configuring the encoder

- Encoder type: As specified.
- Parameterization:
The following encoder parameters must be adapted to the particular application and specified when
ordering if you do not intend to parameterize the encoder yourself (refer to 8.4.5.1).
Parameter Linear axis Rotary axis
Data load frequency 1) > (max. encoder speed [RPM]) x > (max. encoder speed [RPM]) x
(pulses/revolution) (pulses/revolution)
Pulses/revolution Generally adaption is not required Generally adaption is not required
Number of encoder Adaption is not required Observe Section 8.4.7!
revolutions
Counting direction Observe Section 8.4.7! Adaption is not required
Preset values 1 and 2 Generally adaption is not required Generally adaptions not required
1)
Caution
Data load frequency (factory setting 14.9 kHz) must always be greater than the product of
(max. encoder speed [RPM]) x (pulses/revolution).
(when used as encoder at the motor shaft: 870 revolutions/min correspond to 14.9kHz!)

Manual
8.4.6 Connection example:

8.4.6.1 Connection diagram CE-65-M to SE300/ T300
15V power
supply
+ -
Us 11
1
5 S er. 0V 12
prog.+
K1 1 X 5.531 T rack 1A
6 S er.
prog.- K1 2
M K2 3 X 5.533 T rack 1B
K2 4
3
X 5.539 G N D ext.
D ata load 7 X 6.638 B inary output 8

2 input
9
P reset 1 E nd of data 8 X 6.618 B inary input 16
10 load output
P reset 2 X 6.620 M 24 ext.
T R encoder
S E 300
C E -65-M M
C ircled num bers: R efer to the text

Fig. 8.4.6.1: Connecting TR encoders at the SE300 terminal block
Explanation of the numbers in circles:

1 The connection is only required if the encoder is to be parameterized/programmed. The connections
must afterwards be connected to ground or not connected in the encoder connector.
2 Inputs to set the encoder zero point, refer to Section 8.4.9. If the inputs are not used, do not connect
them to the encoder connector, connect them to ground in the cabinet, or inhibit them using the
EPROG programming software. This is also valid if the preset inputs are used for start-up.
3 The inverted tracks are not evaluated.

Manual
8.4.6.2 Parameterization of the connection example:

Assumptions:
The connection example is based on the following assumptions:
- The pulse-serial encoder is used as mounted encoder. This means that the motor-related encoder only
supplies the drive converter (VC or SC).
- Pulse encoder evaluation 1, function diagram [A6] is used
Parameter list to Fig. 8.4.6.1

H150 X0XX Pulse encoder signals come from X5.531, 533 [A6]
H335 1 Positioning using the TR encoder
H336 45 End of data load output, TR encoder read-in via binary input X6.618 (H336/
H337) [A4, B11]
H337 8000h Masking, binary input 16
H351 0 Refer to Section 8.4.9
H914 92 Data load input of the TR encoder is supplied via X6.638 (H914/ H915) [ A4,
B11]:
Status word 2, referencing control, connector K092 is the source for binary
output 8.
H915 0400h Masking, status bit TR encoder, data load input
Note:
With the connection example and parameterization described in this section, the absolute value present in
the TR encoder is automatically transferred to the T300 after the board powers-up. The process is
implemented using a control unit provided on the T300.
The data load sequence can be initiated at any time using the command „referencing with the TR
encoder“ function diagram [B11], parameter H338/ H339 when the inverter is inhibited and the drive is at a
standstill.
Comment:
This connection example can be seamlessly integrated into the example under Section 8.1. The following
parameters should be set differently from those in the example:
H300 = 0, H301 = 0h (no referencing with shutdown).
Only if the following is required:
H338 = 45, H339 = 1000h, this means that the TR encoder can be initiated at any time via terminal
X6.612. Refer to the information and function diagram [A4] and [B11].
Note:
It goes without saying that the hardware/emergency limit switches can be/must be connected.

Manual
8.4.7 Additional configuring instructions

Instructions regarding the following are provided in this section:
- Direction of rotation / count direction
- Number of encoder revolutions
- Maximum travel length.
To define the direction of rotation / count direction:
Direction of rotation / count direction, encoder shaft:

This is valid when viewing the encoder shaft end.
Illustrated: Clockwise direction of rotation.

Manual
Linear axis
Pos ition actual value, encoder
Changeover position Changeover position
Zero point Max. travel which can be repres ented Num ber of pulse
Perm issible range encoder revolutions
Start Travel range us ed End
Fig. 8.4.7.1: Traversing travel
Conditions for use:
- The longest possible travel must be able to be represented by the encoder. This is in practice generally
the case.
- The positioning drive must move within the represented travel range and must not reach the limits.
- Locate the encoder zero point, so that under no circumstances the „changeover position“ (of the zero
transition) is reached between the position actual value of the encoder = 0 and = max. This is also valid
for the zero points set with preset, refer to Section 8.4.8.
- If the encoder rotates from the start of travel with the lowest position actual value to the traversing
travel end with the highest position actual value with a clockwise direction or rotation, then the
count direction is in the clockwise sense (factory setting, clockwise direction of rotation) (refer to
the note below).
- If the encoder rotates from the start of travel with the lowest position actual value to the end of travel
with highest position actual value with a counter-clockwise direction of rotation, the count
direction must be ordered for the counter-clockwise sense (counter-clockwise direction of
rotation) (refer to the note below).
Note
The direction of rotation/count direction must be adapted to the system requirements. There are 2
possibilities:
- Encoder, if required, is parameterized for counter-clockwise.
- Mechanically mount the encoder, so that the position actual value increases when rotating
clockwise.

Manual
Rotary axis
Note
The number of encoder revolutions must be adapted to the system requirements.
The pulse-serial encoder can either be used

as mounting encoder or as motor-related
Proximity encoder
Reference point cams switch 1 Encoder mounted on the motor
2 Encoder mounted on the shaft system
Gearbox
1 CE-65-M
Rotary
axis M 2
CE-65-M Motor-related
n2 n1 encoder
Front view Side view
Fig. 8.4.7.2: Rotary axis
Precautions:
- The proximity switch is required in spite of the fact that an incremental absolute value encoder is used,
independent of whether the encoder is directly mounted on the motor or directly on the rotary axis.
- Encoder mounted on the motor:

The n2 / n1 ratio must be an integer number which assumes that there is an appropriate gearbox.
The following is valid: Number of encoder revolutions = n2 / n1.
- Encoder directly (1:1) mounted on the rotary axis:

Number of encoder revolutions = 1.
Information regarding reference cam with proximity switch:

The reference cam with proximity switch is not required if the motor-related encoder and TR encoder are
directly coupled (1:1 speed ratio), and the motor-related encoder outputs a zero pulse every revolution.

Manual
8.4.8 Setting the encoder zero point
Control signal
Preset 1
Preset value= 0
t
50 m s
Travel actual value, encoder
Fig. 8.4.9: Influence of the preset signal
Using the preset signal, the encoder can be set to a specific absolute value, in this case zero.
It is therefore no longer necessary to search for and set the absolute encoder zero point.
Procedure when adjusting the encoder, examples:
Note for commissioning:

Following the Preset 1 command, it is recommended to turn the encoder in a clockwise direction (if
ordered so, otherwise counter-clockwise) approximatly one revolution and then start the pulse
transmission process / data output process using either a binary signal (see parameter H338 / H339,
Function plan [B11]) or removing the unit power supply and reconnecting. This method allows the
functionality of the transmission process / data output process to be easily tested.
The data load / transmission process may be more easily understood if the position actual value is set to
zero via Parameters H131 / H132 (Reset) Function plan [A6] before the transmission process is started.
Setting the position actual value to zero externally before starting the transmission process in order to
understand the process is only a suggestion and is not absolutely necessary.
Case 1: The encoder, connected with the part to be positioned, can be moved to the zero point of the
travel range.
Step 1 Move the positioning drive to the zero point of the travel range.
Step 2 Actuate preset 1, whereby the preset value corresponds to factory setting 0.
Step 3 Move the encoder away from the zero point, observe the count direction (direction of
rotation), refer to Section 8.4.7
Step 4 For mechanical reversals, ensure that the zero point for the linear axis is never reached
during positioning, refer to Section 8.4.7.
Step 5 Output the „reference TR encoder“ command, function diagram [B11]. With the drive
inhibited, check whether the loaded position coincides with the drive position. Read-out the
information at visualization parameter d22 when using pulse encoder evaluation 1 [function
diagram A6].

Manual
Case 2: The encoder can, when connected with the part to be positioned, not be moved to the zero
point of the traversing travel.
Step 1 Move the positioning drive as close as possible to the zero point.
Step 2 De-couple the encoder and rotate it (count), until the zero point is approximately reached.
Step 3 Depress preset 1, whereby the preset value corresponds to factory setting 0.
Step 4 Rotate the encoder back through the counted rotations and couple it back to the system.
inhibited, check as to whether the loaded position approximately coincides with the drive
position. Read this data at visualization parameter d22 when using pulse encoder evaluation
1 [function diagram A6], also refer to 8.4.9, Reference value offset input.
Case 3: The EPROG program is available. The encoder is coupled.
Step 1 Determine the drive position.
Step 2 Enter the appropriate position, using EPROG as preset value 1, referred to the travel zero
point.
Step 3 Actuate preset 1
inhibited, check as to whether the loaded position coincides with the drive position. Read-
out the data at visualization parameter d22 when using pulse encoder evaluation 1
[function diagram A6].
Caution
After the preset value has been entered, as shown in Fig. 8.4.6.1, preset 1 and 2 should be left open,
connected to ground in the cabinet, or inhibited using the EPROG programming software.
Never connect to T300 outputs or a PLC.
8.4.9 Entering a setpoint offset

Using parameter H351=position hardware reference point, the reference input can be precisely adjusted,
even if the pulse serial absolute value encoder is not precisely adjusted when referred to the travel zero
point. The position actual value is set to this value when data load is started. This value is then added to
the pulse encoder count status, and may also have negative values.
Caution
After the encoder has been set, move the drive to the minimum and maximum travel limits and check
whether the position actual values measured there (visualization parameter d22), coincide with the
mechanical measured travel, after the „reference TR encoder“ command has been output, function
diagram [B11].

Manual
8.4.10 Possibilities of mouting the encoder to the motor

Note
The possibility of mounting a CE-65-M encoder to the motor must be clarified as quickly as possible, as
a CE 65-M encoder can neither be mounted on every motor nor on every speed encoder, especially for
SIMOVERT SC!
Note
The encoder must be mounted so that it doesn’t exert a torque at the encoder shaft.
The department indicated below can mount the TR encoders to the Siemens motors listed in the table.
Also inquire with that department if motors and third-party motors are not specified.
Motor Encoder mounted as standard Used for
1LA5, 1LA6, with Motor is shipped without an encoder. VC
cast iron cowl CE-65-M can be directly mounted. The encoder is only
connected to the CU2 board.
1PH6 Resolver or ROD 323 VC
1FK6, 1FT6 Resolver SC
Note
TR encoders cannot be mounted onto motors with ERN 1387 encoders.
The following department can mount the encoders:
Siemens AG
Maschineninstandhaltung ANL/ VREG/ MTW/ TD1
Im Schiffelland 10
D-66386 St. Ingbert
For information contact:

Herr Dörr and Herr Hansicker
Tel: ++49/6894-891-207, Fax: ++49/6894-891-212

Manual
8.4.11 Parameterizing the encoder via PC/PG, connection diagram
D IP sw itch in the housing:

O F F w hen C E -65-M connected
(factory setting)
7/14 15 Us 11
Us 0V/ G N D PT+ 2 5 S er. 0V 12
prog.+
K1 1 + -
P C a dapter P T- 1 6 S er.
to th e P C prog.- K1 2 24V p ow.
R S 23 2 interfac e 3 su p. unit
P C ada pter V 3 .4 K2
Ite m N o. 49 0-0 0 30 1 K2 4
D ata lo ad 7
in pu t
9
P rese t 1 E nd of 8
10 da ta load
P rese t 2
T R enc oder
C E -6 5 -IS I
Fig. 8.4.13: Connecting an encoder to the PC/ PG to parameterize it using EPROG
Instructions for parameterization using EPROG :
- EPROG can only run under MS-DOS, Version ≥ 3.0,

It cannot run under Windows 3.1 and Windows 95
- Free main memory > 450kB.

Manual

Manual

The logbook must be completed after commissioning has ended. Always keep the logbook ready for any
inquiries/questions. Complete entries are important for maintenance/service, and could be important for
warranty cases.
Installation location: ..................................... Drive: ................................................................
..................................... ................................................................
Date Name Department Signature
Start-up setting
Start-up setting
change
Software release, positioning software package: ..............................
Parameter Designation Factory Start-up Change after

No. setting value start-up
H100 Mask, enable system error bits 0429h
H101 Length, receive telegram, peer-to-peer 5
H102 Mask, invert binary inputs 0000h
H104 Mask, simulation, control word from CB 0000h
H110 Gain, analog output 1 50%

Manual
H131 Source, reset position actual value 1 0
H132 Mask, reset position actual value 1 0000h
H133 Source, set position actual value 1 0
H134 Mask, set position actual value 1 0000h
H135 Enable transfer, P act 1 from NOVRAM 1
H136 Source, reset position actual value 2 4
H137 Mask, reset position actual value 2 0001h
H138 Source, set position actual value 2 0
H139 Mask, set position actual value 2 0000h
H140 Enable transfer, P act 2 from NOVRAM 1
H141 Source, zero pulse evaluation 2 enable 4
H142 Mask, zero pulse evaluation 2 enable 0001h
H150 Hardware mode, pulse encoder 1 1064h
H151 Pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 1 1024
H153 Normalization, position actual value 1 4096000
H154 Control word, pulse encoder 1 0000h
H155 Hardware mode, pulse encoder 2 1004h
H156 Pulses per revolution, pulse encoder 2 1024
H158 Normalization, position actual value 2 1073741824
H159 Control word, pulse encoder 2 0000h
H162 Smoothing, speed actual value 1 10[ms]
H163 Smoothing, speed actual value 2 10[ms]
H164 Source, internal speed actual value 60
H165 Tolerance limit, zero velocity signal 0.5%
H166 Hysteresis, zero velocity signal 0.1%
H167 Source, position actual value from dual port RAM 0
H168 Source, pos. actual value for the closed-loop control 62

H169 Source, position setting value, pulse encoder 1 0
H170 Source, position setting value, pulse encoder 2 0
H180 Source, hibyte bit enable, byte-serial 0
H181 Mask, hibyte bit enable, byte-serial 0000h
H182 Setting time, byte-serial 40[ms]
H183 Number of positions, thumbwheel switch 4

Manual
H184 Normalization factor, thumbwheel switch 100
H185 BCD coding, thumbwheel switch 1
H186 With sign, thumbwheel switch 0
H195 Source, data transfer bit, thumbwheel switch 0
H196 Mask, data transfer bit, thumbwheel switch 0000h
H200 Source, on 0
H201 Mask, on 0000h
H202 Source, no standard stop 0
H203 Mask, no standard stop 0000h
H204 Source, no electrical off 0
H205 Mask, no electrical off 0000h
H206 Source, no fast stop 0
H207 Mask, no fast stop 0000h
H208 Source, inverter enable 4
H209 Mask, inverter enable 0001h
H210 Source, setpoint enable 4
H211 Mask, setpoint enable 0001h
H212 Source, fault/error acknowledgement 0
H213 Mask, fault/error acknowledgement 0000h
H214 Source, inching 1, speed-controlled 0
H215 Mask, inching 1, speed-controlled 0000h
H216 Source, inching 2, speed-controlled 0
H217 Mask, inching 2, speed-controlled 0000h
H218 Source, speed control 1 0
H219 Mask, speed control 1 0000h
H224 Source, inching 1, position-controlled 0

Manual
H225 Mask, inching 1, position-controlled 0000h
H226 Source, inching 2, position-controlled 0
H227 Mask, inching 2, position-controlled 0000h
H228 Source, hardware limit switch A2 0
H229 Mask, hardware limit switch A2 0000h
H230 Source, hardware limit switch B2 0
H231 Mask, hardware limit switch B2 0000h
H232 Source, hardware limit switch A3 0
H233 Mask, hardware limit switch A3 0000h
H234 Source, emergency limit switch B3 0
H235 Mask, emergency limit switch B3 0000h
H236 Enable stop after passing hardware limit switch 1
H240 Enable control, holding/operating brake 0
H241 Mask, control bits, immediately close brake 0700h
H242 Mask, control bits, close brake at v=0 080Fh
H243 Time, open holding brake 0[ms]
H244 Time, close holding brake 0[ms]
H245 Time for inching 3 000[ms]
H246 Toler. time, checkback signal error, drive converter 1000[ms]
H250 Source, bypass control word 1 at CU 0
H251 Mask, bypass control word 1 at CU 0000h
H253 Source, bypass control word 2 at CU 0
H254 Mask, bypass control word 2 at CU 0000h
H260 Tolerance time, communications with CB 160[ms]
H261 Tolerance time, communications with CU 160[ms]
H262 Source, user error 1 4
H263 Mask, user error 1 0001h
H264 Tolerance time, user error 1 1000[ms]
H265 Source, user error 2 4
H266 Mask, user error 2 0001h
H267 Tolerance time, user error 2 960[ms]
H268 Tolerance time, peer-to-peer communications 160[ms]
H269 Overspeed error threshold 120%
H270 Threshold pulse encoder fault 10%
H271 Tolerance time, pulse encoder fault 960[ms]
H272 Threshold, speed act. value for anti-stall protection 0.5%
H273 Threshold, speed setpoint for anti-stall protection 1%
H274 Threshold, torque act. value for anti-stall protection 80%

Manual
H275 Tolerance time for anti-stall protection 960[ms]
H280 Masking, fault/error signals FFFFh
H281 Masking, alarms 0000h
H300 Source, referencing with shutdown 0
H301 Mask, referencing with shutdown 0000h
H302 Source, flying referencing 0
H303 Mask, flying referencing 0000h
H304 Source, automatic post-referencing 4
H305 Mask, automatic post-referencing 0001h
H308 Source, pre-contact to the reference point 0
H309 Mask, pre-contact to the reference point 0000h
H310 Source, start direction when referencing 0
H311 Mask, start direction when referencing 0000h
H312 Minimum approach path when referencing 0
H320 Reset referencing signal at each power-up 0
H322 Tolerance range, reference point 0
H330 V set, referencing direction A->B 10%
H331 V set, referencing direction A->B slow 5%
H332 V set, referencing direction B->A -10%
H333 V set, referencing direction B->A slow -5%
H335 TR-encoder enable 0
H336 Source TR-encoder download complete output 0
H337 TR-encoder download complete mask 0000h
H338 TR-encoder reference source 0
H339 TR-encoder reference mask 0000h
H340 Waiting time download process TR-encoder 1 000 ms
H341 Maximum downloading time TR-encoder 600 000 ms
H350 Scaling, closed-loop position control 100 000
H351 Position of the hardware reference point 0
H352 Correction factor 100%
H353 Rotary axis mode 0
H359 Source, position setpoint, variable word quantity 0
H360 Source, position setpoint, variable 0
H361 Position reference value 1 0

Manual

Manual

Manual
H461 Source, select data set, position reference value 5
H462 Mask, select data set, position reference value FFFFh
H463 Shift position reference value selection bits to right 0
H464 Source, enable position reference value from DB 4
H465 Mask, enable position reference value from DB 0001h
H466 Reference value, inching 1, position-controlled 0
H467 Reference value, inching 2, position-controlled 0
H468 Source, relative positioning mode 0
H469 Mask, relative positioning mode 0000h
H470 Source, relative positioning traverse direction 0
H471 Mask, relative positioning traverse direction 0000h
H472 Source, advance for relative positioning 0
H473 Mask, advance for relative positioning 0000h
H474 Behavior of the position reference value memory at 1

power-on
H500 Source, variable position limit value X 0
H501 Position limit value X 1 0

Manual
H507 Source, position limit value X selection 5
H508 Mask, position limit value selection FFFFh
H509 Shift position limit value X selection bits to right 0
H510 Source, position limit value Y, variable 0
H511 Position limit value Y 1 0
H517 Source, select position limit value Y 5
H518 Mask, select position limit value Y FFFFh
H519 Shift position limit value Y selection bits to right 0
H520 Source, position limit value Z, variable 0
H521 Position limit value Z 1 0
H527 Source, select position limit value Z 5
H528 Mask, select position limit value Z FFFFh
H529 Shift position limit value Z select bits to the right 0
H530 Source, software limit switch A1 variable 0
H531 Software limit switch A1 0
H537 Source, select software limit switch A1 5
H538 Mask, select software limit switch A1 FFFFh
H539 Shift software limit switch A1 selection bit to the 0

right
H540 Source, software limit switch B1 variable 0

Manual
H541 Software limit switch B1 100 000
H542 Software limit switch B1 0
H547 Source, select software limit switch B1 5
H548 Mask, select software limit switch B1 FFFFh
H549 Shift SW limit switch B1 selection bits to the right 0
H550 Source, maximum velocity, variable 0
H551 Maximum velocity 1 100%
H557 Source, select maximum velocity 5
H558 Mask, select maximum velocity FFFFh
H559 Shift maximum velocity selection bits to the right. 0
H560 Source, adaption factor, maximum velocity 0
H561 Source, enable adaption factor, maximum velocity 0
H562 Mask, enable adaption factor, maximum velocity 0000h
H570 Source, speed controller KP factor, variable 0
H571 KP factor 1, speed controller 1
H577 Source, select speed controller KP factor 5
H578 Mask, select speed controller KP factor FFFFh
H579 Shift KP factor selection bits to the right 0
H580 Source, speed controller KP adaption 0
H581 Starting point, speed controller KP adaption 0%
H582 KP factor, starting point speed controller KP 100%

adaption.
H583 End point, speed controller KP adaption 100%
H584 KP factor, end point speed controller KP adaption 100%

Manual
H590 Source, drive play, variable 0
H591 Drive play 1 0
H592 Drive play 2 0
H593 Drive play 3 0
H594 Drive play 4 0
H595 Drive play 5 0
H596 Drive play 6 0
H597 Source, drive play selection 5
H598 Mask, drive play selection FFFFh
H599 Shift drive play selection bits to the right 0
H600 Source, position RFG ramp-up time, variable 0
H601 Ramp-up time, position RFG 1 10 000[ms]
H607 Source, select ramp-up time, pos. RFG 5
H608 Mask, select ramp-up time, pos. RFG FFFFh
H609 Shift ramp-up time selection bits to the right 0
H610 Source, ramp-up rounding-off time, variable 0
H611 Rounding-up time constant, pos.RFG 1 100[ms]
H612 Rounding-up time constant, pos. RFG 2 100[ms]
H617 to No used
H619
H620 Source, ramp-down, position RFG, variable 0
H621 Ramp-down, position RFG 1 10 000[ms]
H627 Source, ramp-down selection, pos. RFG 0
H628 Mask, ramp-down selection, pos. RFG FFFFh

Manual
H629 Shift ramp-down time selection bits to the right 0
H640 Down ramp, hardware limit switch A, variable 0
H641 Down ramp, hardware limit switch A2 1 1000[ms]
H647 Source, select down ramp A2 5
H648 Mask, select down ramp A2 FFFFh
H649 Shift down ramp A2 selection bits to the right 0
H650 Down ramp, hardware limit switch B2, variable 0
H651 Down ramp, hardware limit switch B2 1 1000[ms]
H657 Source, select down ramp B2 5
H658 Mask, select down ramp B2 FFFFh
H659 Shift down ramp B2 selection bits to the right 0
H660 Fixed setpoint 1 integer word quantity 0
H668 Fixed setpoint 1 % quantity word 0
H676 Fixed setpoint 1, hex quantity word 0

Manual
H684 Fixed setpoint 1, integer quantity, double word 0
H692 Fixed setpoint 1 %, quantity, double word 0%
H700 Source, external enable, position control 1 4
H701 Mask, external enable, position control 1 0001h
H702 Source, external enable, position control 2 91
H703 Mask, external enable, position control 2 10h
H704 Source, reverse traversing direction, rotary axis 0
H705 Mask, reverse traversing direction, rotary axis 0000h
H706 Source, direct traversing direction, rotary axis 0
H707 Mask, direct traversing direction, rotary axis 0000h
H710 Starting point, for ramp-function generator tracking 10%
H711 Amplifier, RFG tracking controller 0
H719 Range changeover integration time position control 0
H720 Integration time, position control 20000[ms]
H721 Deadtime compensation, position ramp-function 10[ms]

generator
H722 Normalization, acceleration 10[ms]

Manual
H728 Step change for position controller optimization 0%
H729 Smoothing, position actual value (only up to V1.3) 5[ms]
H730 Smoothing, position reference value 5[ms]
H731 Pre-amplification, control error signal, position 0

controller
H732 Upper limit, position controller outputs 10%
H733 Lower limit, position controller outputs -10%
H734 Proportional gain, position controller 1
H735 Integral action time, position controller 1000[ms]
H736 Mode, closed-loop current control, position 0

controller
H737 Mode, position controller, P- /PI controller 1
H738 Inertia compensation, position control 0%
H740 Smoothing, velocity setpoint 5[ms]
H741 Tolerance limit for control error 5%
H742 Tolerance limit signal, drive has positioned 100
H743 Hysteresis, drive has positioned signal 10
H744 Delay time, drive has positioned signal 120[ms]
H745 Delay time, tracking error 120[ms]
H746 Source, load equalization for hoisting units 0
H750 V set for velocity control 1 mode 5%
H751 V set for velocity control 2 mode 5%
H752 Source, V set for velocity control 3 mode 0
H753 V set for inching 1, speed-controlled 1%
H754 V set for inching 2, speed-controlled -1%
H760 Ramp-down, speed-controlled modes 10 000[ms]
H761 Ramp-up time, speed controlled modes 10 000[ms]
H762 Tolerance limit, limit value monitor (LVM) velocity 1%

setpoint = actual value
H763 Hysteresis, LVM velocity setpoint = actual value 0.5%
H764 Frictional torque at 5% velocity 0%
H771 Limit, automatic inertia compensation enable 0%
H772 Influence range, automatic inertia compensation 0%

Manual
H780 Source, motorized potentiometer input, double word 0

H781 Source, motorized potentiometer input, word 0
H782 Source, motorized potentiometer setting value, 0

double word
H783 Source, motorized potentiometer setting value, word 0
H784 Source, set motorized potentiometer 0
H785 Mask, set motorized potentiometer 0000h
H786 Source, raise motorized potentiometer 0
H787 Mask, raise motorized potentiometer 0000h
H788 Source, lower motorized potentiometer 0
H789 Mask, lower motorized potentiometer 0000h
H790 Source, MOP mode, ramp-function generator 0
H791 Mask, MOP mode, ramp-function generator 0000h
H792 Ramp time, MOP standard setting 60 000[ms]
H793 Ramp time, MOP fixed setting 25 000[ms]
H794 Upper limit, motorized potentiometer 120%
H795 Lower limit, motorized potentiometer 120%
H796 Influence range, motorized potentiometer 0%
H820 Tolerance limit, limit value monitor X 100
H821 Hystereis, limit value monitor X 10
H822 Tolerance limit, limit value monitor Y 100
H823 Hystereis, limit value monitor Y 10
H824 Tolerance limit, limit value monitor Z 100
H825 Hysteresis, limit value monitor Z 10
H826 Source, input free limit value monitor, double word 0
H827 Source, comparison value, free limit value monitor 0

double word
H828 Tolerance limit, free LVM double word 100
H829 Hystereis, free LVM A 10
H830 Source, input free LVM A 0
H831 Source, comparison value, free LVM A 0
H832 Tolerance limit, free LVM A 0%
H833 Hysteresis, free LVM A 0%
H834 Source, input free LVM B 0
H835 Source, comparison value, free LVM B 0
H836 Tolerance limit, free LVM B 0%
H837 Hysteresis, free LVM B 0%
H838 Source, input free LVM C 0
H839 Source, comparison value, free LVM C 0

Manual
H840 Tolerance limit, free LVM C 0%
H841 Hysteresis, free LVM C 0%
H842 Source, input free LVM D 0
H843 Source, comparison value, free LVM D 0
H844 Tolerance limit, free LVM D 0%
H845 Hysteresis, free LVM D 0%
H846 Source, display parameter % quantity, word 0
H847 Source, display parameter % quantity, double word 0
H848 Source, display parameter, word HEX quantity 0
H849 Source, display parameter, word integer quantity 0
H850 Source, display parameter, double word integer 0

quantity
H851 Source, display par. position ref. values, scaled 0
H860 Source, bit 0, free status word 0

Manual
H892 Source, NOVRAM memory word 1 0
H900 Source, binary output 1 0
H901 Mask, binary output 1 0000h
H916 Mask, invert binary outputs 0000h
H921 Select absolute value, analog output 1 0

Manual
H933 Offset analog output 3 0%
H938 Offset analog output 4 0%
H946 Length, send telegram to peer-to-peer 5
H951 Source, send word 1 to CU 82
H961 Source, send word 1 to CB 0
H997 Drive identification 0
H998 Establish factory setting 0
H999 Baud rate for peer-to-peer coupling 8

Manual
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H10_
H11_
H12_
H13_
H14_
H15_
H16_
H17_
H18_
H19_
H20_
H21_
H22_
H23_
H24_
H25_
H26_
H27_
H30_
H31_
H32_
H40_
H41_
H42_
H43_
H44_
H45_
H50_
H51_
H52_
H53_
H54_
H60_
H61_
H62_
H63_
H64_
H65_
H66_
H67_
H68_
H70_
H71_
H72_
H80_
H81_
H82_
H83_
H84_
H85_
H86_
H87_
H88_
H89_
H90_
H91_
H92_
H93_
H99_

Manual

Manual
10 Index
10 Index
Error, user error 1 3-26
—A—
Acceleration —F—
Normalization of~ 3-43 Factory setting 1-24
Analog inputs Fast stop 3-23
Parameterization 3-11 Fault acknowledgement 3-27
Analog outputs Fault messages 1-17
Parameterization 3-11 Fault suppression 3-25
Fault, drive blocked 3-26
Fault, hardware limit switch A3, B3 3-27
—B— Fault, incorrect reference point position 3-27
Fault, overflow position actual value 3-27
Binary inputs
Fault, overspeed 3-26
Connecting-up instructions 1-23
Fault, pulse encoder 3-27
Inversion 3-10
Fault, referencing error 3-27
Parameterization 3-10
Faults 1-16
Binary outputs
Fixed setpoints 3-36
Parameterization 3-10
Friction characteristic 3-47
Brake control 3-23
Functional scope 1-15
Byte-serial input 3-19
—C— —H—
Hardware limit switch A2, B2
Cable lengths 1-23
Shutdown monitoring 3-4
Commissioning
Hardware limit switches A2, B2 3-4
Instructions 1-24
HW-limit switch A3, B3 3-27
Communications
To the basic drive converter (CU) 3-10
to the basic drive converter (CU) 6-3 —I—
To the communications board (CB) 3-10 Inertia compensation 3-48
Via peer-to-peer 3-10 Setting 6-17
Connectors 5-1 Inverter enable 3-24
Bit quantities 5-2
Double-word quantities 5-2 —L—
Masking 5-4
LEDs 1-16
Principle 5-1
LEDs, green ~ 1-16
Word quantities 5-1
LEDs, red ~ 1-16
Control signals
LEDs, yellow ~ 1-16
Limit switches
List of all control signals 1-18
Correction factor 3-35
Limit value monitor 3-50
Linear axis
—D— Definition 3-2
Definitions 0-1 Example 1-12
Caution 0-1 Normalization pulse encoder 3-12
Danger 0-1 Local modes
Note 0-1 Inching 1 / inching 2 3-22
Qualified personnel 0-1
Warning 0-1 —M—
Diagnostics word 3-22
Mechanical brake
Application information 1-24
—E— Mechanical initial-, final position 3-3
Electrical off 3-23 Minimum approach path 3-29
Emergency limit switches A3, B3 3-3 Mode
Encoder Inching position controlled 3-37
Connecting-up instructions 1-23 Speed control 1 to 3 3-48
Error word 3-25 Module codes 3-9
Error, com with CB 3-25 Drive code 3-9
Error, com. peer 3-26 Hardware code 3-9
Error, com. with CU 3-26 Software code 3-9

Manual
10 Index
Version code 3-9 —R—

Motorized potentiometer 3-49
Ramp-down time, pos. RFG 3-39
Motorpotentiometer 3-49
Ramp-up time, pos. RFG 3-39
Reference point
—N— Hardware reference point 3-5
NOVRAM Linear axis 3-5
Assignment 3-51 Rotary axis 3-5
Position actual value storage 3-17 Software reference point 3-8
Referencing
Monitoring the reference point position 3-32
—O— Various configurations 3-31
Operating mode
Referencing with shutdown 3-29
Inching 1 / inching 2 3-22
Referencing, automatic post-- 3-32
Optimization 6-15
Referencing, flying~ 3-29
Position control 6-16
Referencing, min. approach path 3-29
Setpoint smoothing 6-18
Referencing, pre-contact to the reference
Speed control 6-15
point 3-31
Ordering information 1-8
Referencing, referencing error 3-32
Referencing, referencing velocity 3-29
—P— Referencing, signal drive has~ 3-31
Parameters Referencing, start direction 3-29
Display parameters 4-1 Relative positioning 3-36
Normalization 4-2 Resolver
Setting parameters 4-2 Connecting-up instructions 1-23
Polarity 3-7 Rotary axis
Posion controller Definition 3-2
Smoothing Pos. ref. value 3-45 Example 1-13
Position actual value Normalization pulse encoder 3-12
Selection for the closed-loop control 3-18 Reference value generation 3-43
Position control 3-40 Traversing direction direct 3-44
Enable/disable 3-40 Traversing direction only neg. 3-44
Position controller Traversing direction only pos. 3-43
Control structure 3-44 Rounding-off time constant 3-39
Controller charactersitics 3-45
Gain 3-45 —S—
Influence range 3-45 Sampling times 3-9
Smoothing Speed setpoint 3-45 Setpoint enable 3-24
Position ramp-function generator 3-40 Setpoint smoothing 6-18
Acceleration 3-43 Position controller 6-18
Position reference value 3-36 Speed controller 6-18
Position values SIMADYN D 7-1
Normalized 3-8 Connectors 7-2
Scaled 3-8 Cross references 7-2
Position values, definition 3-5 Function block 7-2
Powering-up 3-22 Function diagram 7-1
Pre-contact to the reference point 3-31 STRUC G 7-1
Pulse encoder Symbolic monitor 7-3
Circuit variations 3-15 Value ranges and normalizations 7-4
Connecting-up instructions 1-23 SIMOVIS 1-25
Control word 3-15 Software limit switches A1, B1 3-5
Evaluation, setting signal 3-15 Speed controller KP adaption 3-38
Evaluation, zero pulse 3-15 Standard stop 3-23
Hardware mode 3-13 Status messages
Input filter 3-13 List of all status messages 1-20
Normalization 3-11 Status signal drive has positioned 3-49
Parameterization 3-11 Status word
Pulse encoder type 3-13 Freely-definable~ 3-50
Rough pulse 3-13 Input/output 3-21
Setting/resetting 3-17 Position control 3-49
Standstill limit 3-15 Ref. value generation 3-39
Zero pulse evaluation 3-13 Referencing control 3-33
Status word, control 3-28

Manual
10 Index
—T— SW limit switch A1, B1 3-37

T300 system error 3-9
Thumbwheel switch 3-18 —V—
Traversing data sets 3-34 Velocity actual value
Down ramp A2, B2 3-39 Selection for the closed-loop control 3-17
Drive play 3-38 Velocity actual values, definition 3-5
Max. velocity 3-37 Visualization parameter 3-50
Position limit values 3-37
Ramp-up -down time pos. RFG 3-39
Rounding off time constant, pos. RFG 3-39
—W—
Warning word 3-25
Selection 3-34
Warnings 1-17
Speed controller KP adaption 3-38

Manual
10 Index

Manual
11 Appendix
11 Appendix
11.1 Appendix A: Dimension Drawing of the TR-Electronic Absolut
Value Encoder

Manual
11 Appendix
11.2 Appendix B: SIMADYN D STRUC-G Function plans
11-2
Manual
Die STRUC G Pläne sind aus der Betriebsanleitung „Positionierung MS380“
zu entnehmen.
STRUC G function diagrams - refere to the manual „Positioning MS380“.

To From Received
SIEMENS AG
A&D MC
Frauenauracherstr. 80
91056 Erlangen
Code word: Contact person
"Standard software
Copy to:
ZN/LG ..................................
Mrs./Mr. .................................. Telephone
Your reference and your letter from Our reference City and date
Problem / Fault profil: Standard Positioning software package
Standard Positioning software package:

Software version:
Configuring (software?)
Technological module:
Type:
Release:
Interface module:
Type:
Release:
Software version:
Protocol used:
Basic drive:
Type:
Release:
Software version:
Problem / fault profile:

The problem / fault occured under the following conditions:
Urgently required for a precise fault / error diagnostics:

- completed parameter list of the technological module, attached
- completed parameter list of the basic drive, attached
Continuation Problem / fault profile:
09.97 477 407.4088.76
08.98 477 407.4188.76
04.99 477 407.4188.76

0 Definitions 4 08.98
2 T300 technology board Page: 7, 8 8 04.99
3 Function description Page: 3, 4 52 04.99
Function diagrams Sheet: A2, D2, D5 48 04.99
4 Parameters list Page: 54, 73 74 04.99
5 Connectors reviewed edition 24 04.99
6 Start-up Page: 20 20 04.99
7 SIMADYN D functions Page: 3 6 04.99
8 Application/self-study example Page: 3, 9 38 04.99
9 Short parameter list / logbook Page: 2, 14 20 04.99
10 Index reviewed edition 4 04.99
11 Appendix 2 08.98
STRUC G function plans 180 08.98


Manual T300 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual T300 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual T300 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SIMOVERT Master Drives Betriebsanleitung

Ausgabe / Edition: 12.99 Bestell-Nr. / Order-No.: 6SE7087-6CX84-0AH1

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage,

Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf Übereinstimmung mit

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that

 Siemens AG 1994 All rights reserved

1 Produktbeschreibung ......................................................................................... 1-1

2 Montieren, Anschließen...................................................................................... 2-1

3 Technische Daten ............................................................................................... 3-1

Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board I

6 Literatur ................................................................................................................ 6-1

7 Bestellnummern .................................................................................................. 7-1

II Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board

Englischer Teil / English part

9 Product description ............................................................................................ 9-1

10 Installation, connecting-up .............................................................................. 10-1

11 Technical data ................................................................................................... 11-1

12 Application software......................................................................................... 12-1

Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board III

14 Literature ............................................................................................................ 14-1

15 Order numbers................................................................................................... 15-1

IV Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board

3. Trained in rendering first aid.

Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board 8-1

Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)

8-2 Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board

Applications are, for example, higher-level closed-loop controls for:

9.2 Function description

Data save via NVRAM (Non-Volatile-RAM):

Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board 9-1

6S E 70 S peed, S peed, 2 serial

15V , 100m A P rogram 2 K byte

S lot 1 S lot 3 S lot 2

Fig. 1.2 Hardware and function block diagram of the T300

9-2 Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board

9.3 Hardware/Software requirement

9.3.1 MASTERDRIVES basic units

 SIMOVERT VC with electronic board CUVC: Software release ≥ 3.11

MASTERDRIVES basic units (older series, introduced from 1995)

 SIMOVERT VC with electronic board CU2: Software release ≥ 1.2

SIMOREG basic units

 SIMOREG DC_MASTER 6RA70: Software release ≥ 1.7

Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board 9-3

9.3.2 Communication boards

The T300 can be combined with the following communications boards

 PROFIBUS interface module CB1, software release ≥ 1.3

 SLB SIMOLINK interface board for CUVC or CUMC.

 CAN-BUS interface CBC , Software release ≥ 2.0

9.3.3 T300 parameter settings

 Standard parameterizing unit (PMU) for basic converters

9-4 Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board

10.1 Inserting the memory module

Fig 10.1 Inserting a memory module

Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board 10-1

10.2 Installing the board

TB (technology boards, e.g. T300) must always be inserted at slot 2.

Examples of possible arrangements: Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 2

10-2 Siemens AG T300 Technologiebaugruppe / technology board

SIMOVERT VC with electronic board CUVC: Software release ≥ 3.11

SIMOVERT VC with electronic board CU2: Software release ≥ 1.2

SIMOREG DC_MASTER 6RA70: Software release ≥ 1.7

PROFIBUS interface module CB1, software release ≥ 1.3

SLB SIMOLINK interface board for CUVC or CUMC.

CAN-BUS interface CBC , Software release ≥ 2.0

Standard parameterizing unit (PMU) for basic converters